OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R009C10 Hardware Description 02(pdf).pdf

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10

Hardware Description Issue

02

Date

2015-03-20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions Product Name

Version

OptiX OSN 8800

V100R009C10

OptiX OSN 6800

V100R009C10

OptiX OSN 3800

V100R009C10

iManager U2000

V200R014C60

iManager U2000 Web LCT

V200R014C60

Intended Audience This document describes the hardware feature of a cabinet and each subrack, in addition to application, working principle, front panel, and specifications of each board. This document is intended for: l

Network Planning Engineer

l

Hardware Installation Engineer

l

Installation and Commissioning Engineer

l

Field Maintenance Engineer

l

Network Monitoring Engineer

l

Data Configuration Engineer

l

System Maintenance Engineer

Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


ii


About This Document

Symbol

Description

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.

NOTE

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

Diagram Conventions The diagram conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description Indicates the flow of optical signals. Indicates the flow of electrical signals. Indicates an optical module.

Indicates an electrical module.

All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


iii


About This Document

Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2015-03-20) Based on Product Version V100R009C10 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10. Compared with "Product Version (V100R009C10) Version 01 (2014-12-01)", updates of V100R009C10SPC100 and V100R009C10SPC200 are added. Update

Description

TN58NS4

Compared with the other NS4 board, only the TN58NS4 board is single-slot 1 x 100G coherent line board and the TN58NS4 board has lower power consumption.

TN12ST2/TN13ST2

Compared with the TN11ST2 board, the TN12ST2 and TN13ST2 boards are manufactured using an optimized engineering process, and the TN12ST2 board newly supports line fiber quality monitoring.

TN13FIU03/TN16FIU

TN13FIU03: Function enhancement. TN16FIU: The manufacturing process is optimized.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

TN13TM20

The manufacturing process is optimized.

TN17WSD9


TN17WSM9

The manufacturing process is optimized, and the functions remain the same.

TN17WSMD4


TN54STG

The TN54STG board is manufactured using an optimized engineering process. The functions of the TN54STG and TN52STG boards are the same.


iv


About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-12-01) Based on Product Version V100R009C10 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10. Update

Description

TN54NPS4

The 100G PID boards are newly supported by V100R009C10. You can click a board to view details about it.

TN54NPS4E TN13OBU1P3 TN13OBU2P3 TN14OBU2P3 TN96NS4

The OA boards that match 100G PID boards are newly supported by V100R009C10. You can click a board to view details about it. The submarine cable boards are newly supported by V100R009C10. You can click a board to view details about it.

TN96OBU1 TN96WSD9 TN96WSM9 TN54HUNQ2 TN54HUNS3

The physical-layer frequency synchronization and IEEE 1588v2 functions are newly supported by the TN54HUNQ2 and TN54HUNS3 boards. You can click a board to view details about it.

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-11-10) Based on Product Version V100R009C00SPC200 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00. Update

Description

TN15LTX

Functions of these boards are changed in V100R009C00. You can click a board to view details about it.

TN17LSCM TN56TOX TN55TTX TN54NS4M

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-08-30) Based on Product Version V100R009C00SPC100 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


v


About This Document

Update

Description

TN17LSCM

These boards are newly supported by V100R009C00. You can click a board to view details about it.

TN15LTX TN56TOX TN55TTX TN54GS4 TN15FIU TN12MR8V TN12RDU9 TN13OBU1 TN12RAU1 TN12RAU2 TN13OLP TN13DCP TN13VA1 TN13VA4 TN55EG16


TN54EX8

Updates in Issue 03 (2014-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R008C10SPC210/SPC300 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10. Compared with the manual for the issue 02, the manual of this issue contains the SPC300 related information.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Update

Description

13.26 LTX

Added the TN15LTX board.

10.2 8800 AC Power Supply

The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack can be AC powered.


vi


About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-07-31) Based on Product Version V100R008C10SPC200 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10. Compared with the manual for the issue 01, the manual of this issue contains the SPC200 related information. Update

Description

Whole manual

Changed the required U2000 version from V200R001C00 to V200R014C50.

TN15LSCT61


TN57NS4T61 TN55EG16 TN54EX8 TN11QCP TN54EG16

Added the IEEE 1588v2 function for the TN54EG16 board.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Based on Product Version V100R008C10 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10. Update

Description

TN12AUX


TN12HSC1 TN15LSC TN57NS4 TN54NS4M TN12STG TN16WSD9 TN16WSM9 TN13WSMD4 TN12WSMD9/TN15WSMD9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


vii


About This Document

Update

Description

TN54HUNQ2


TN11ITL06 TN12LDX TN14LSC TN12LSX/TN14LSX TN54NS4 TN54THA TN52TOM TN55TQX TN54TSC

Updates in Issue 03 (2014-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R008C00 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00. Compared with the manual for the issue 02, the manual of this issue contains the SPC211 and SPC230 related information. Update

Description

4.5 OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack

Added the TN18EFIB variant for the TN18EFI board series.

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R008C00 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00. Compared with the manual for the issue 01, the manual of this issue contains the SPC200 related information.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


viii


About This Document

Update

Description

Whole manual

Added the E2000-ODF box. Added the TN12LTX and TN13OAU107 boards. Deleted the TN21SCC board. Optimized the description of cross-connections by deleting boardspecific cross-connection description for the boards that support only cross-connections between the tributary and line boards and between line boards and adding 12.4 General Principles for Configuring Electrical Cross-Connections to introduce the applications and common rules of cross-connections in a centralized manner. The Configuring Cross-Connections topic is reserved for the board with intra-board cross-connections.

4.4 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack

Added the TN12LSX board for the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

13.22 LSX

Added a note explaining that the TN12LSX board does not support the PRBS test function when the board is provisioned with a client STM-64 service.

8 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis

Added the TN12LSC, TN13LSC, TN11LTX, and TN12LTX boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 that uses the DC power supply.

13.19 LSC

Changed the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3800 that uses the DC power supply to 420 W.

13.26 LTX 13.19 LSC

Added the T01 type for the TN13LSC board to support HFEC, and added the BIP8 monitoring function that supports 100GE services for the TN13LSC board.

21.6 DFIU

Added optical-layer ASON for the DFIU. When functioning as an OLA site, the OptiX OSN 3800 supports optical-layer ASON.

25.14 SCC

Added a note explaining the feature limitations of the TN22SCC board.

13.16 LQM

Deleted PRBS test function on the WDM side for the TN13LQM board.

TN12LDM

Deleted the SDI and HD-SDI services.

TN11LDMD TN11LDMS TN13LQM TN12LQMD TN12LQMS TN12TQM TN11TOM TN11LOM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Deleted the support for the IU9 and IU10 slots of the OptiX OSN 6800.


ix


About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2013-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R008C00 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

l Added the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack. l Added the following boards: TN18EFI, TN54HUNQ2, TN54HUNS3, TN56NS3, TN56NS4, TN13LSC, and TN18PIU boards. l Divided previous section "Subrack and Power Requirement" into sections "Subrack" and "Power Supply", and changed "Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces" in previous section "Subrack and Power Requirement" into "Management Interfaces" for the optimization purpose. l Added the maintenance blinking mode for the STAT indicator on the OptiX OSN 3800.

OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Cross-Connect Capacities

Added the TN52UXCH and TN52UXCM boards for the general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. The use of the two new boards increases the OTN cross-connect capacity of the subrack from 1.28 Tbit/s to 2.56 Tbit/s and supports grooming of 640 Gbit/s packet services.

NO2

Added information showing that the general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack supports the TN55NO2 board in line mode and the TN55TOX board.

TOX RDU9 WSMD4 WSMD9 MCA4 MCA8

Added descriptions indicating that the RDU9, WSMD4, and WSMD9 boards can be directly connected to coherent OTU or line boards for local dropping of services. Modified the conditions for the MCA4, MCA8, and OPM8 boards to monitor OSNRs of 40 Gbit/s and higher-rate signals.

OPM8 L4G LEM24

Added information explaining that the boards support client 1+1 protection only when they are provisioned with EPL services.

LEX4 TEM28 TBE TBE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Added information explaining that the RX/TX port on the board does not support client 1+1 protection.


x


About This Document

Update

Description

OLP

Added a note explaining the restriction on the TN11OLP01 and TN12OLP01 boards in application 1 and removed the two boards from application 2.

SCC

Deleted BIOS state D for the SCC, TN16XCH, and TN16UXCM boards.

TN16XCH TN16UXCM SLH41 Specifications

Added colored CWDM and DWDM modules in the specifications of the N3SLH41, N4SLO16, and N4SLQ16 boards.

SLO16 Specifications SLQ16 Specifications

Updates in Issue 06 (2014-03-10) Based on Product Version V100R007C02 This issue is the sixth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02. Compared with the manual for the issue 05, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Update

Description

Whole manual

Deleted the TN21SCC board.

TTX

Deleted the OTU2 service.

M40

Added the following note. The TN12M40 board can substitute for the TN11M40 board only after the software upgrade to Optix OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01 SPC300 or later. When the TN11M40 board resides on the Optix OSN 6800, the software version of the Optix OSN 6800 must be V100R003C02 or later. When the TN11M40 board resides on the Optix OSN 8800, there is no requirement for the software version of the Optix OSN 8800.

LOM

Deleted the support for installing the TN11LOM board in slots IU9 and IU10 of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.


xi


About This Document

Update

Description

DFIU

Changed the default value of Channel Number Mode to "/".

FIU SFIU DAS1 HBA OAU1 OBU1 OBU2 RAU1 RAU2 DAS1

Note: The board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it affects the gain flatness.

OAU1 OBU1 OBU2

Updates in Issue 05 (2013-09-19) Based on Product Version V100R007C02 This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02. Compared with the manual for the issue 04, the manual of this issue contains the SPC300 related information. Update

Description

Whole manual

Divided previous section "Subrack and Power Requirement" into sections "Subrack" and "Power Supply", and changed "Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces" in previous section "Subrack and Power Requirement" into "Management Interfaces" for the optimization purpose.

14.14 TSC

Added the (100GBASE-4×25G)/(OTU4-4×28G)-10km-CFP optical module for the TN54TSC and TN12LSC boards to support client OTU4 services.

13.19 LSC

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

14.6 THA

Added the multi-mode 2.125Gbit/s Multirate-0.5km-eSFP module for the THA board

13.22 LSX



xii


About This Document

Update

Description

13.16 LQM


TN12LDM


TN11LDMD TN11LDMS TN13LQM TN12LQMD TN12LQMS TN12TQM TN11TOM SCC TN16XCH

Deleted BIOS state D for the SCC, TN16XCH, and TN16UXCM boards.

TN16UXCM L4G LEM24


LEX4 TEM28 TBE TBE


OLP


Updates in Issue 04 (2013-07-05) Based on Product Version V100R007C02 This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

4 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack

l OptiX OSN 8800 T32: Changed the maximum subrack power consumptiona from 3500 W to 4800 W. l OptiX OSN 8800 T16: Changed the maximum subrack power consumptiona from 1600 W to 2400 W.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xiii


About This Document

Update

Description

14.4 TDX

Changed the FC800 service module of the TDX and TQX boards from 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP to 800SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP.

14.13 TQX 14.9 TOM

Revised the number of client services supported in application scenarios 6 and 10 of the TN52TOM board.

14.16 TTX

Deleted the OTU2 and OTU2e services.

Updates in Issue 03 (2013-05-16) Based on Product Version V100R007C02 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

FIU Panel

Changed the description of the MON/OUT port power split ratio for the TN13FIU02 board into the following sentence: The MON port is a 0.1/99.9 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99.9/0.1) = 30 dB).

TOA Functions and Features

Deleted the FE electrical port feature for the TOA board.

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-04-20) Based on Product Version V100R007C02 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02. Compared with the manual for the issue 01, the manual of this issue contains the SPC100 and SPC200 related information. Update

Description

Whole manual

Changed the required U2000 version from V100R008C01 to V100R008C00.

2 Cabinet

l Optimized the cabinet descriptions. The N63B and N66B cabinets are described through comparison. l Added requirements on subrack configurations inside a cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xiv


About This Document

Update

Description

LTX Application

Revised the description of relay mode of line boards as follows: When optical-layer ASON and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available.

ND2 Application NO2 Application NQ2 Application NS3 Application NS4 Application 14.16 TTX

Added information about latency measurement.

13.12 LOA

Added information about InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G, FC1200, FICON10G, and 10GE LAN services.

NPO2E Functions and Features

Added information about electrical-layer ASON.

NPO2 Functions and Features ENQ2 Functions and Features


Description

Whole manual

Added information about the TN52NS2T04, TN52NS2T05, TN52NS2T06, TN52NS201M01, TN52NS201M02, TN52ND2T04, TN14LSX, TN54TTX, and TN54TSC boards. Added information showing that the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack supports the TN12LDM, TN12LOM, TN13LQM, TN12LSX, TN14LSX, TN12LSXL, TN52TOM, TN12LWXS, and TN11LWX2 boards.

25.12 TN16UXCM

Added information explaining that the TN16UXCM board supports centralized grooming of ODU4 signals.

15.7 NS4

Added information explaining that the NS4 and NO2 boards can be used as line boards on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

15.3 NO2 14.5 TEM28

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Added information explaining that the TEM28 board newly supports the 10GE WAN service.


xv


About This Document

Updates in Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C00 This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R007C00. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

Deleted the TN21SCC board for OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.

25.14 SCC

Added a note explaining the feature limitations of the TN22SCC board.

13.22 LSX


13.16 LQM


TN12LDM


TN11LDMD TN11LDMS TN13LQM TN12LQMD TN12LQMS TN12TQM TN11TOM TN11LOM

Deleted the support for the IU9 and IU10 slots of the OptiX OSN 6800.

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-08-19) Based on Product Version V100R007C00 This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R007C00. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Update

Description

Whole manual



xvi


About This Document

Update

Description

FIU


TOA

Deleted the FE electrical port feature for the TOA board.

14.4 TDX

Changed the FC800 service module of the TDX and TQX boards from 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP to 800-SM-LC-L-10 kmXFP.

14.13 TQX 14.9 TOM


L4G


LEM24 LEX4 TEM28 TBE TBE


OLP


SCC

Changed BIOS state D for the SCC, TN16XCH, and TN16UXCM boards.

TN16XCH TN16UXCM

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R007C00 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R007C00. Compared with the manual for the issue 02, the manual of this issue contains the SPC200 related information. Update

Description

Whole manual

l Optimized the subrack ventilation system diagram. l Changed the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration. l Added descriptions of the mounting ear.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xvii


About This Document

Update

Description

13.11 LEX4

Added the number of virtual bridges (VBs) supported by the board.

13.10 LEM24

Revised the descriptions of the TBE board cross-connect capacity.

14.2 TBE 14.5 TEM28 13.19 LSC

Changed the board power consumption.

13.26 LTX 15.7 NS4

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-09-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C00 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R007C00. Only the issue number is updated. Update

Description

Whole manual

Added information about the TN23SCC board. Added information showing that the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack supports the TN11LSQ, TN13LSX, TN11LOA, TN12LSC, TN12LOG, TN12TMX, TN11LTX, and TN12LDX boards.

13.19 LSC

Deleted the OTU4 service type for the LSC board.

13.10 LEM24

Added information showing that the LEM24 board supports the OptiX OSN 3800.

13.19 LSC

Added the SDFEC error correction mode and C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)-PIN optical modules for these boards.

13.26 LTX 15.7 NS4 15.7 NS4 15.3 NO2

Deleted the information that shows the NS4 board supports OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks, OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks, and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks. Deleted the information that shows the NO2 board supports OptiX OSN 8800 platform subracks and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xviii


About This Document


Description

Whole manual

Added descriptions of the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. Added the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack. Added descriptions of PDU (DPD63-8-8). Added descriptions of the TN52AUX, TN15AUX, TN15EFI, TN54EG16, TN54EX2, TN54PND2, TN55NO2, TN54NS4, TN12TD20, TN11TM20, TN55TOX, TN12OPM8, TN15PIU, TN11RAU2, TNK2USXH, TN52UXCH, TN52UXCM, TN16UXCM and TNK2UXCT boards. Moved the loopback descriptions to the "Product Description".

13.19 LSC

Added the OTU4 service type for the LSC board.

13.10 LEM24

Added service-based LPT for the LEM24 and LEX4 boards.

13.11 LEX4 24.9 RAU1

Added the following fiber types for the RAU1 board: TWPLUS, SMFLS, G.656, G.654A, TERA_LIGHT, and G.654B.

14.5 TEM28

Added the ERPS function for the TEM28 board.

26.5 ST2

Added the 80-km OSC modules for the ST2 board.

27.3 OLP

Added the TN12OLP04 board to the TN12OLP board series.

28.2 MCA4 28.3 MCA8

Added the function to detect OSNR of 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signals for the TN11MCA402 and TN11MCA802 boards when the boards work with the Optical Doctor Management System Function Software.

14 OTN Tributary Board

Added the standard mode for the TN54NS3, TN54THA, TN54TOA, TN53TDX, and TN55TQX boards.

Updates in Issue 05 (2013-05-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C03 This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xix


About This Document

Update

Description

Whole manual

For the transport equipment, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) are similar and can be taken as the same. 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.

13 Optical Transponder Unit

Limitations of the LDM, LDMS, LDMD, LQM, LQMS, and LQMD boards are added, indicating that each of the boards can receive and transmit only one 1.25 Gbit/s higher service and must use the RX1/TX1 port pair to receive/transmit the service.

27 Optical Protection Board

A description is added, explaining that the OLP and DCP boards support optical-layer ASON only when they are used to provide client 1+1 protection.

26 Optical Supervisory Channel Board

The maximum span loss supported by the SC1 and SC2 boards is changed to 42 dB. The maximum span loss supported by the ST2 boards is changed to 40.5 dB.

SCC Switch and Jumper

The diagrams of the DIP switches and jumpers on the SCC board are revised and optimized.

TBE Functions and Features

The cross-connect capability of the TBE board is changed.

Updates in Issue 04 (2012-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C03 This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description


Adjusted the loopback descriptions to the "Product Description" part.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Added information about the TN15LSXL board.

TOM

Revised the TN11TOM board application 5 diagram.

15.6.7 Valid Slots

Revised the slot limitations for the TN55NS3 board when it is used as a regeneration board.


xx


About This Document

Update

Description

11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame

Updated fiber management tray information.


Description

Whole manual

Added descriptions of the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks.

14.7 TOA

Added the HD-SDIRBR service for the TOA board.

13.22 LSX

Modified the function description for the LSX and LDX boards, specifying that they do not support test frames.

13.9 LDX 13.10 LEM24 13.11 LEX4

Modified the function description for the LEM24 and LEX4 boards, specifying that they do not support optical-layer ASON.

25.15 AUX

Modified the jumper descriptions for the TN11AUX01 board.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-04-05) Based on Product Version V100R006C03 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

Deleted the TN15LSXL board.

13.12 LOA

Added the following optical modules for the TN11LOA, TN12LOG, TN12LOM, TN54TOA, TN52TOM, and TN54THA boards: 1000BASE-BX10-U, 1000BASE-BX10-D, 1000BASE-BX-U, and 1000BASE-BX-D.

13.13 LOG 13.14 LOM 14.7 TOA 14.9 TOM 14.6 THA Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxi


About This Document

Update

Description

21.7 FIU

Added the application in OptiX OSN 3800 systems for the TN14FIU and TN11RAU1 boards.

24.9 RAU1 A.4 Board Indicators

Added the maintenance blinking mode for the STAT indicator.


Description

Whole manual

Added descriptions of the TN12LSC, TN11LTX, TN15LSXL, TN54TEM28, TN55NS3, TN54TSXL, TN11RAU1, TN14FIU, and TN13OAU106.

14.4 TDX

Deleted the following client-side colored optical module from the specifications for the TN53TDX, TN53TQX, and TN55TQX boards: 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP.

14.13 TQX

14.7 TOA 14.6 THA 13.12 LOA

Modified the descriptions of the service timeslots for the TOA, THA, and LOA boards in the "Application" and "Physical and Logical Ports" sections.

Updates in Issue 06 (2013-09-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C01 This issue is the sixth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxii


About This Document

Update

Description

L4G

Described the following limitations on ALS, LPT, and client 1 +1 protection for the TBE, L4G, LEM24, and LEX4 boards:

LEM24

l ALS function is supported only when EPL services (port<>VCTRUNK) are provisioned.

LEX4 TBE

l LPT function is supported only when EPL services (port<>VCTRUNK) are provisioned. l Client 1+1 protection is supported only when EPL services (port <->VCTRUNK) are configured on the board.

OLP

Added notes explaining the restriction on the TN11OLP01 and TN12OLP01 boards in applications and removed the two boards from application 2. For details, see 27.3.1 Version Description and 27.3.3 Application.

TN12LDM

Deleted the SDI, 3G-SDI, and HD-SDI services for the boards.

TN11LDMD TN11LDMS TN13LQM TN12LQMD TN12LQMS TN12TQM TN11TOM

Updates in Issue 05 (2013-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C01 This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

Moved the loopback descriptions to the "Product Description".

4.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack

Provided the subrack cross-connect capacity.

4.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack 4.4 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack 6 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxiii


About This Document

Update

Description

14.4 TDX

Changed the FC800 service module of the TDX and TQX boards from 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP to 800-SM-LCL-10km-XFP.

14.13 TQX 14.9 TOM


Updates in Issue 04 (2013-05-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C01 This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Update

Description

Whole manual

For the transport equipment, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) are similar and can be taken as the same. 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.


Limitations of the LDM, LDMS, LDMD, LQM, LQMS, and LQMD boards are added, indicating that each of the boards can receive and transmit only one 1.25 Gbit/s higher service and must use the RX1/TX1 port pair to receive/transmit the service.


A description is added, explaining that the OLP and DCP boards support optical-layer ASON only when they are used to provide client 1+1 protection.


The maximum span loss supported by the SC1 and SC2 boards is changed to 42 dB. The maximum span loss supported by the ST2 boards is changed to 40.5 dB.

SCC Switch and Jumper

The diagrams of the DIP switches and jumpers on the SCC board are revised and optimized.

XCS Functions and Features

For the TN11XCS board, the cross-connect capacity description is modified. For ODU1 and ODU2 signals, the board supports a maximum cross-connect capacity of 280 Gbit/s. For GE services, the board supports a maximum cross-connect capability of 140 Gbit/s.

TBE Functions and Features

The cross-connect capability of the TBE board is changed.

SFIU Valid Slots

The slots for the SFIU board inside an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis are changed to IU2-IU5 and IU11.


xxiv


About This Document


Description


Updated the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800. Updated the power consumption specification of the FAN board for the OptiX OSN 8800.

15.2 ND2

Explicitly specified that the TN12ND2 board does not support the 8800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP module.

13.12 LOA

Updated the specifications of client-side FC400 and FC800 optical modules.

24.5 HBA

Revised the application diagram of the HBA board by deleting the HBA board at the receiving site.

14.4 TDX

Deleted the following client-side colored optical module from the specifications for the TN53TDX, TN53TQX, and TN55TQX boards: 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP.

14.13 TQX

14.7 TOA

Modified the descriptions of the service timeslots for the TOA, THA, and LOA boards in the "Application" and "Physical and Logical Ports" sections.

14.6 THA 13.12 LOA

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

l Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2S0A, TN55NPO2S0B, TN55NPO2ES02, and TN55NPO2ES04 boards. l Deleted descriptions of the TN55NPO2S05 and TN55NPO2S07 boards. l Deleted slot IU22 from the valid slots for the TN16AUX board in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxv


About This Document


Description

Whole manual

l Added descriptions of the TN11LOA, TN55TQX, TN53TDX, TN13OAU1, TN53NS2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2, TN55NPO2E, TN12M40, TN12M40V, TN12D40, TN16SCC, TNK4SXH, TNK4SXM, TNK4XCT, N3EAS2, TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX boards. l Updated the descriptions of cabinets. Cabinets are described by the cabinet model instead of device model. In addition, descriptions of typical cabinet configurations and fiber management frames are added. l Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the "Version Description" section. l Described service configuration in two separate sections: "Physical and Logical Ports" and "Configuration of Cross-Connection".

13 Optical Transponder Unit 14 OTN Tributary Board

l Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the ND2".

19 PID Board 14.7 TOA

l Added service mapping paths from FC400 and 3G-SDI to ODUflex. l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages. l Added the IEEE 1588v2 function to the "Functions and Features" table.

14.9 TOM

Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-09-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxvi


About This Document

Update

Description

Whole manual

l Added descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX boards. l Updated the descriptions of cabinets. Cabinets are described by the cabinet model instead of device model. In addition, descriptions of typical cabinet configurations and fiber management frames are added. l Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the "Version Description" section. l Described service configuration in two separate sections: "Physical and Logical Ports" and "Configuration of Cross-Connection".

13 Optical Transponder Unit 14 OTN Tributary Board

l Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the ND2".

19 PID Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxvii


About This Document

Update

Description

14.9 TOM

Revised the port working modes for the TN52TOM board. The details are as follows: l In cascading mode: – Changed "ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])" to "ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])". – Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1)" to "ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1)" to "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)". l In non-cascading mode: – Changed "ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])" to "ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])". – Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)" to "ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1)" to "ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)" to "ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1>OTU1)" to "ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1>OTU1)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)" to "ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)". – Changed "ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0)" to "ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)".

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxviii


About This Document

Update

Description

Whole manual

l Added descriptions of the TN54TOA, TN54THA, TN53TQX, TN12OBU1P1, and TNK2SXH boards. l Deleted descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX boards.


Description

Whole manual

l Added descriptions of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. l Added descriptions of the TN11DAS1, TN11LSQ, and TN11WSMD9 boards l Added the "Optical-layer ASON" and "Electrical-layer ASON" rows to the "Functions and Features" table.

13.14 LOM

Added a description of the TN12LOM board's capability to support 3GSDI services.

19.7 NPO2

Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2 board.

25.8 XCM

Added descriptions of the TN52XCM02.

Updates in Issue 04 (2011-08-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. Compared with the third official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

Whole manual

Changed optical module names to ensure that the name of each optical module is unique. Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the "Version Description" section. Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the ND2".

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxix


About This Document

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-05-25) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. Compared with the second official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

19 PID Board

Deleted descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX board (specific only to OptiX OSN 8800).

25.8 XCM

Added information about the TN52XCM02.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. Compared with the first official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update

Description

13.23 LSXL

Deleted information about the TN13LSXL.


Added information about the LPT function and protocol or standard compliance in Functions and Features.

14 OTN Tributary Board 19 PID Board 25.10 XCH

Added information about the TN52XCH02.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00 This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04, and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxx


About This Document

Update

Description

Whole manual

l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any difference between the products is described in the manual. l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64. l The descriptions of the following boards are added: – TN11LEM24, TN11LEX4, TN13LSXL, TN54NS3, TN53TSXL, TN54ENQ2, TN54NPO2, TN11SFIU, TN11RMU902, TN12WSMD4, TN11ST2, TN11OPM8, TNL1STI, N4BPA

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

34 Optical Attenuator34.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator

Introduction to fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical attenuators is added.

37 Filler Panels

Introduction to filler panels is added.


xxxi


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Update Description.......................................................................................................................1 2 Cabinet.............................................................................................................................................3 2.1 Cabinet Introduction.......................................................................................................................................................4 2.2 Space Requirements for Cabinets...................................................................................................................................5 2.3 Typical N63B Cabinet Configurations...........................................................................................................................7 2.4 Typical Configurations of an N63B-2m Cabinet.........................................................................................................17 2.5 Typical N66B Cabinet Configurations.........................................................................................................................20 2.6 Cabinet Cables..............................................................................................................................................................22 2.6.1 Cabinet Alarm Indicator Cable..................................................................................................................................22 2.6.2 Cabinet Ground Power Cables..................................................................................................................................27 2.6.3 Cabinet Door Ground Cables....................................................................................................................................28

3 Fiber Management Cabinet.......................................................................................................29 4 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack...........................................................................................................34 4.1 Update Description.......................................................................................................................................................35 4.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack.....................................................................................................................................37 4.2.1 Structure.....................................................................................................................................................................37 4.2.2 Slot Description.........................................................................................................................................................39 4.2.3 Management Interfaces..............................................................................................................................................40 4.2.4 Cross-Connect Capacities..........................................................................................................................................53 4.2.5 Fan and Heat Dissipation...........................................................................................................................................54 4.2.6 Power Consumption..................................................................................................................................................61 4.2.7 Mechanical Specifications.........................................................................................................................................63 4.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack.....................................................................................................................................64 4.3.1 Structure.....................................................................................................................................................................64 4.3.2 Slot Description.........................................................................................................................................................66 4.3.3 Management Interfaces..............................................................................................................................................68 4.3.4 Cross-Connect Capacities..........................................................................................................................................68 4.3.5 Fan and Heat Dissipation...........................................................................................................................................69 4.3.6 Power Consumption..................................................................................................................................................75 4.3.7 Mechanical Specifications.........................................................................................................................................78 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxxii


Contents

4.4 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack.....................................................................................................................................78 4.4.1 Structure.....................................................................................................................................................................78 4.4.2 Slot Description.........................................................................................................................................................79 4.4.3 Management Interfaces..............................................................................................................................................81 4.4.4 Cross-Connect Capacities..........................................................................................................................................94 4.4.5 Fan and Heat Dissipation...........................................................................................................................................94 4.4.6 Power Consumption..................................................................................................................................................99 4.4.7 Mechanical Specifications.......................................................................................................................................101 4.5 OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack...........................................................................................................102 4.5.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................................102 4.5.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................................104 4.5.3 Management Interfaces............................................................................................................................................107 4.5.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation.........................................................................................................................................119 4.5.5 DC Power Consumption..........................................................................................................................................125 4.5.6 AC Power Consumption..........................................................................................................................................126 4.5.7 Mechanical Specifications.......................................................................................................................................128

5 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category............................................................................................129 6 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack.........................................................................................................154 6.1 Update Description.....................................................................................................................................................155 6.2 Structure......................................................................................................................................................................155 6.3 Slot Description..........................................................................................................................................................157 6.4 Management Interfaces...............................................................................................................................................158 6.5 Cross-Connect Capacities...........................................................................................................................................170 6.6 Fan and Heat Dissipation............................................................................................................................................171 6.7 Power Consumption...................................................................................................................................................176 6.8 Mechanical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................178

7 OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category............................................................................................179 8 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis..........................................................................................................187 8.1 Update Description.....................................................................................................................................................188 8.2 Chassis Structure........................................................................................................................................................189 8.3 Slot Description..........................................................................................................................................................189 8.4 Management Interfaces...............................................................................................................................................190 8.5 Fan and Heat Dissipation............................................................................................................................................196 8.6 AC Power Consumption.............................................................................................................................................199 8.7 DC Power Consumption.............................................................................................................................................200 8.8 Mechanical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................202

9 OptiX OSN 3800 Board Category............................................................................................203 10 Power Supply...........................................................................................................................208 10.1 8800/6800 DC Power Supply...................................................................................................................................209 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxxiii


Contents

10.1.1 DC Power Requirement.........................................................................................................................................209 10.1.2 Power Supply Description.....................................................................................................................................210 10.1.3 External Power (from the PDF to the Cabinet).....................................................................................................210 10.1.4 Internal Power (from the Cabinet to Subracks).....................................................................................................231 10.2 8800 AC Power Supply............................................................................................................................................240 10.2.1 AC Power Requirement.........................................................................................................................................240 10.2.2 APIU......................................................................................................................................................................241 10.2.3 Power Connection Scheme....................................................................................................................................242 10.3 3800 DC Power Supply............................................................................................................................................243 10.3.1 DC Power Requirement.........................................................................................................................................243 10.3.2 PIU.........................................................................................................................................................................243 10.3.3 Power Connection Scheme....................................................................................................................................245 10.4 3800 AC Power Supply............................................................................................................................................245 10.4.1 AC Power Requirement.........................................................................................................................................245 10.4.2 APIU......................................................................................................................................................................245 10.4.3 Power Connection Scheme....................................................................................................................................247 10.5 Power Redundancy...................................................................................................................................................248

11 Frames........................................................................................................................................254 11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module................................................................................................................................255 11.2 CRPC Frame.............................................................................................................................................................258 11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame...............................................................................................................................................260 11.4 E2000-ODF..............................................................................................................................................................260

12 Overview of Boards.................................................................................................................263 12.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions.........................................................................................................................264 12.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions.................................................................................................................................264 12.1.2 Symbols on Boards................................................................................................................................................266 12.2 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards.......................................................268 12.2.1 Convergence and Non-convergence Applications of Tributary Boards................................................................268 12.2.2 Convergent and Non-convergent OTUs................................................................................................................269 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode..................................................................................................................271 12.3 Interconnection Requirements for Tributary Boards and Line Boards....................................................................279 12.3.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................................279 12.3.2 Point-to-Point Interconnection of Line Boards.....................................................................................................281 12.3.3 End-to-End Interconnection of Tributary Boards..................................................................................................290 12.3.4 Interconnection Between Regeneration Boards and Line Boards.........................................................................295 12.3.5 Interconnection of Client-Side Optical Modules...................................................................................................297 12.3.6 Interconnection of WDM-Side Grey Optical Modules.........................................................................................300 12.4 General Principles for Configuring Electrical Cross-Connections...........................................................................303 12.4.1 Inter-board Electrical Cross-Connections..............................................................................................................303 12.4.2 Intra-board Electrical Cross-Connections..............................................................................................................307 12.5 Board Bar Code Overview.......................................................................................................................................308 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxxiv


Contents

12.5.1 One-dimensional Bar Code of a Board..................................................................................................................308 12.5.2 Two-dimensional Bar Code Label of a Board.......................................................................................................312

13 Optical Transponder Unit......................................................................................................319 13.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................322 13.2 ECOM.......................................................................................................................................................................328 13.2.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................328 13.2.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................329 13.2.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................330 13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................331 13.2.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................335 13.2.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................336 13.2.7 Physical and Logical Ports....................................................................................................................................336 13.2.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.......................................................................................................................338 13.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..........................................................................................................339 13.2.10 ECOM Specifications..........................................................................................................................................341 13.3 L4G...........................................................................................................................................................................345 13.3.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................345 13.3.2 Update Description................................................................................................................................................345 13.3.3 Application............................................................................................................................................................346 13.3.4 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................347 13.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................349 13.3.6 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................352 13.3.7 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................354 13.3.8 Characteristic Code for the L4G............................................................................................................................354 13.3.9 Physical and Logical Ports....................................................................................................................................354 13.3.10 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................................356 13.3.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................357 13.3.12 L4G Specifications..............................................................................................................................................360 13.4 LDGD.......................................................................................................................................................................364 13.4.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................364 13.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................364 13.4.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................365 13.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................367 13.4.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................370 13.4.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................372 13.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD........................................................................................................................372 13.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports....................................................................................................................................373 13.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.......................................................................................................................374 13.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................375 13.4.11 LDGD Specifications..........................................................................................................................................378 13.5 LDGS........................................................................................................................................................................385 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxxv


Contents

13.5.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................385 13.5.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................385 13.5.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................386 13.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................388 13.5.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................391 13.5.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................393 13.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS.........................................................................................................................393 13.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports....................................................................................................................................393 13.5.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.......................................................................................................................395 13.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................396 13.5.11 LDGS Specifications...........................................................................................................................................399 13.6 LDM.........................................................................................................................................................................406 13.6.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................406 13.6.2 Update Description................................................................................................................................................407 13.6.3 Application............................................................................................................................................................407 13.6.4 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................408 13.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................412 13.6.6 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................415 13.6.7 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................416 13.6.8 Characteristic Code for the LDM..........................................................................................................................417 13.6.9 Physical and Logical Ports....................................................................................................................................417 13.6.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................417 13.6.11 LDM Specifications.............................................................................................................................................421 13.7 LDMD......................................................................................................................................................................430 13.7.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................430 13.7.2 Update Description................................................................................................................................................430 13.7.3 Application............................................................................................................................................................431 13.7.4 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................431 13.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................435 13.7.6 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................438 13.7.7 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................439 13.7.8 Characteristic Code for the LDMD.......................................................................................................................440 13.7.9 Physical and Logical Ports....................................................................................................................................440 13.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................441 13.7.11 LDMD Specifications..........................................................................................................................................444 13.8 LDMS.......................................................................................................................................................................452 13.8.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................452 13.8.2 Update Description................................................................................................................................................452 13.8.3 Application............................................................................................................................................................453 13.8.4 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................453 13.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................457 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxxvi


Contents

13.8.6 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................460 13.8.7 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................461 13.8.8 Characteristic Code for the LDMS........................................................................................................................462 13.8.9 Physical and Logical Ports....................................................................................................................................462 13.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................462 13.8.11 LDMS Specifications..........................................................................................................................................466 13.9 LDX..........................................................................................................................................................................474 13.9.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................474 13.9.2 Update Description................................................................................................................................................474 13.9.3 Application............................................................................................................................................................475 13.9.4 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................476 13.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................478 13.9.6 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................481 13.9.7 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................483 13.9.8 Characteristic Code for the LDX...........................................................................................................................483 13.9.9 Physical and Logical Ports....................................................................................................................................484 13.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................484 13.9.11 LDX Specifications.............................................................................................................................................488 13.10 LEM24....................................................................................................................................................................497 13.10.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................497 13.10.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................497 13.10.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................499 13.10.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................499 13.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................504 13.10.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................507 13.10.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................509 13.10.8 Characteristic Code for the LEM24 ....................................................................................................................510 13.10.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................510 13.10.10 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................................512 13.10.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................513 13.10.12 LEM24 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................524 13.11 LEX4......................................................................................................................................................................530 13.11.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................530 13.11.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................530 13.11.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................531 13.11.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................532 13.11.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................536 13.11.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................539 13.11.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................541 13.11.8 Characteristic Code for the LEX4 ......................................................................................................................541 13.11.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................542 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxxvii


Contents

13.11.10 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................................543 13.11.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................544 13.11.12 LEX4 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................555 13.12 LOA........................................................................................................................................................................561 13.12.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................561 13.12.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................562 13.12.3 Application Overview..........................................................................................................................................563 13.12.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................564 13.12.5 Characteristic Code for the LOA.........................................................................................................................571 13.12.6 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS.......................................................................................................................571 13.12.7 LOA Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)..........................572 13.12.8 LOA Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)................................577 13.12.9 LOA Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)........................580 13.12.10 LOA Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).................................584 13.12.11 LOA Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).......................................................587 13.12.12 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................590 13.12.13 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................592 13.12.14 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................594 13.12.15 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................594 13.12.16 LOA Specifications...........................................................................................................................................602 13.13 LOG........................................................................................................................................................................619 13.13.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................619 13.13.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................621 13.13.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................621 13.13.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................621 13.13.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................624 13.13.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................628 13.13.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................630 13.13.8 Characteristic Code for the LOG.........................................................................................................................631 13.13.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................631 13.13.10 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................................632 13.13.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................634 13.13.12 LOG Specifications...........................................................................................................................................638 13.14 LOM.......................................................................................................................................................................651 13.14.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................651 13.14.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................653 13.14.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................653 13.14.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................654 13.14.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................658 13.14.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................662 13.14.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................665 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxxviii


Contents

13.14.8 Characteristic Code for the LOM........................................................................................................................666 13.14.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................666 13.14.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................668 13.14.11 LOM Specifications...........................................................................................................................................674 13.15 LQG........................................................................................................................................................................688 13.15.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................688 13.15.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................689 13.15.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................689 13.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................692 13.15.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................694 13.15.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................696 13.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG.........................................................................................................................696 13.15.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................696 13.15.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................................698 13.15.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................699 13.15.11 LQG Specifications...........................................................................................................................................702 13.16 LQM.......................................................................................................................................................................708 13.16.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................708 13.16.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................709 13.16.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................710 13.16.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................711 13.16.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................716 13.16.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................720 13.16.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................722 13.16.8 Characteristic Code for the LQM........................................................................................................................722 13.16.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................723 13.16.10 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................................725 13.16.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................726 13.16.12 LQM Specifications...........................................................................................................................................730 13.17 LQMD....................................................................................................................................................................739 13.17.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................739 13.17.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................740 13.17.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................740 13.17.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................741 13.17.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................746 13.17.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................750 13.17.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................752 13.17.8 Characteristic Code for the LQMD.....................................................................................................................753 13.17.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................753 13.17.10 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................................755 13.17.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................757 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xxxix


Contents

13.17.12 LQMD Specifications........................................................................................................................................761 13.18 LQMS.....................................................................................................................................................................771 13.18.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................771 13.18.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................773 13.18.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................773 13.18.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................775 13.18.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................780 13.18.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................785 13.18.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................787 13.18.8 Characteristic Code for the LQMS......................................................................................................................788 13.18.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................788 13.18.10 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................................790 13.18.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................793 13.18.12 LQMS Specifications........................................................................................................................................798 13.19 LSC.........................................................................................................................................................................808 13.19.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................808 13.19.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................812 13.19.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................813 13.19.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................813 13.19.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................817 13.19.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................819 13.19.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................821 13.19.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................823 13.19.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................823 13.19.10 LSC Specifications............................................................................................................................................828 13.20 LSCM.....................................................................................................................................................................845 13.20.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................845 13.20.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................847 13.20.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................848 13.20.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................849 13.20.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................851 13.20.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................854 13.20.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................855 13.20.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................856 13.20.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................856 13.20.10 LSCM Specifications.........................................................................................................................................861 13.21 LSQ.........................................................................................................................................................................870 13.21.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................870 13.21.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................871 13.21.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................872 13.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................874 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xl


Contents

13.21.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................877 13.21.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................878 13.21.7 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................879 13.21.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................879 13.21.9 LSQ Specifications..............................................................................................................................................884 13.22 LSX.........................................................................................................................................................................886 13.22.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................887 13.22.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................891 13.22.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................892 13.22.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................893 13.22.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................897 13.22.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................899 13.22.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................902 13.22.8 Characteristic Code for the LSX.........................................................................................................................903 13.22.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................903 13.22.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................904 13.22.11 LSX Specifications............................................................................................................................................909 13.23 LSXL......................................................................................................................................................................922 13.23.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................922 13.23.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................923 13.23.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................924 13.23.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................924 13.23.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................927 13.23.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................931 13.23.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................934 13.23.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................936 13.23.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................936 13.23.10 LSXL Specifications..........................................................................................................................................942 13.24 LSXLR....................................................................................................................................................................946 13.24.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................946 13.24.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................948 13.24.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................948 13.24.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................950 13.24.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................952 13.24.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................955 13.24.7 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................956 13.24.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................957 13.24.9 LSXLR Specifications.........................................................................................................................................960 13.25 LSXR......................................................................................................................................................................963 13.25.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................963 13.25.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................964 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xli


Contents

13.25.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................964 13.25.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................966 13.25.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................968 13.25.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................970 13.25.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR.......................................................................................................................971 13.25.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................971 13.25.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................971 13.25.10 LSXR Specifications.........................................................................................................................................974 13.26 LTX........................................................................................................................................................................978 13.26.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................978 13.26.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................980 13.26.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................982 13.26.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................983 13.26.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................989 13.26.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................993 13.26.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................996 13.26.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................998 13.26.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................999 13.26.10 LTX Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1008 13.27 LWX2...................................................................................................................................................................1021 13.27.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1022 13.27.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................1022 13.27.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1022 13.27.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1026 13.27.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1028 13.27.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1029 13.27.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2....................................................................................................................1030 13.27.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1030 13.27.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1031 13.27.10 LWX2 Specifications......................................................................................................................................1033 13.28 LWXD..................................................................................................................................................................1041 13.28.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1041 13.28.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................1042 13.28.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1042 13.28.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1046 13.28.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1048 13.28.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1049 13.28.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD...................................................................................................................1050 13.28.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1050 13.28.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1051 13.28.10 LWXD Specifications......................................................................................................................................1053 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xlii


Contents

13.29 LWXS...................................................................................................................................................................1060 13.29.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1060 13.29.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................1061 13.29.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1062 13.29.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1065 13.29.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1067 13.29.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1068 13.29.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS....................................................................................................................1069 13.29.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1069 13.29.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1070 13.29.10 LWXS Specifications......................................................................................................................................1072 13.30 TMX.....................................................................................................................................................................1081 13.30.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1081 13.30.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................1082 13.30.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1082 13.30.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1085 13.30.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1088 13.30.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1089 13.30.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX......................................................................................................................1090 13.30.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1090 13.30.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1091 13.30.10 TMX Specifications.........................................................................................................................................1094

14 OTN Tributary Board...........................................................................................................1107 14.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................1109 14.2 TBE.........................................................................................................................................................................1114 14.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1114 14.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1115 14.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1116 14.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1117 14.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1120 14.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1123 14.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1125 14.2.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1125 14.2.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................................1127 14.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1128 14.2.11 TBE Specifications............................................................................................................................................1129 14.3 TDG........................................................................................................................................................................1136 14.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1136 14.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1136 14.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1137 14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1139 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xliii


Contents

14.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1141 14.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1143 14.3.7 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1143 14.3.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................................1144 14.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1146 14.3.10 TDG Specifications...........................................................................................................................................1148 14.4 TDX........................................................................................................................................................................1151 14.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1151 14.4.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1154 14.4.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1155 14.4.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1156 14.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1161 14.4.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1164 14.4.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1167 14.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1168 14.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1171 14.4.10 TDX Specifications...........................................................................................................................................1179 14.5 TEM28....................................................................................................................................................................1183 14.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1184 14.5.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1184 14.5.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1185 14.5.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1185 14.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1190 14.5.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1192 14.5.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1194 14.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1194 14.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1196 14.5.10 TEM28 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................1206 14.6 THA........................................................................................................................................................................1209 14.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1210 14.6.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1210 14.6.3 Application Overview..........................................................................................................................................1212 14.6.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1213 14.6.5 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS.......................................................................................................................1218 14.6.6 THA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)........................................................................1219 14.6.7 THA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)........................................................................1224 14.6.8 THA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1)........................................................................1229 14.6.9 THA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)......................................................................1235 14.6.10 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1240 14.6.11 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1242 14.6.12 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1245 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xliv


Contents

14.6.13 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1246 14.6.14 THA Specifications...........................................................................................................................................1251 14.7 TOA........................................................................................................................................................................1257 14.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1257 14.7.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1258 14.7.3 Application Overview..........................................................................................................................................1259 14.7.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1261 14.7.5 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS.......................................................................................................................1266 14.7.6 TOA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)........................................................................1267 14.7.7 TOA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)........................................................................1271 14.7.8 TOA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1).........................................................................1276 14.7.9 TOA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)......................................................................1281 14.7.10 TOA scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex).............................................................1286 14.7.11 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1291 14.7.12 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1294 14.7.13 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1295 14.7.14 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1295 14.7.15 TOA Specifications...........................................................................................................................................1302 14.8 TOG........................................................................................................................................................................1311 14.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1311 14.8.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1312 14.8.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1313 14.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1316 14.8.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1318 14.8.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1320 14.8.7 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1320 14.8.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................................1322 14.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1323 14.8.10 TOG Specifications...........................................................................................................................................1326 14.9 TOM.......................................................................................................................................................................1330 14.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1330 14.9.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1332 14.9.3 Application Overview..........................................................................................................................................1333 14.9.4 Function and Feature...........................................................................................................................................1343 14.9.5 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS.......................................................................................................................1350 14.9.6 TN52TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (Cascading).............................................................................1351 14.9.7 TN52TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading).................................................................1355 14.9.8 TN52TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Cascading).............................................................................................1359 14.9.9 TN52TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading)................................................................................1361 14.9.10 TN52TOM Scenario 5: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (Non-Cascading)..................................................................1364 14.9.11 TN52TOM Scenario 6: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1(Non-Cascading)........................................................1370 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xlv


Contents

14.9.12 TN52TOM Scenario 7: OTU1/Any->ODU1 (Non-Cascading)........................................................................1374 14.9.13 TN52TOM Scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1 (Non-Cascading).........................................1377 14.9.14 TN52TOM Scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1 (Non-Cascading)...........................1380 14.9.15 TN52TOM scenario 10: OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 (non-cascading)...........................................................1382 14.9.16 TN52TOM scenario 11: OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 (non-cascading)..................................................................1386 14.9.17 TN52TOM Scenario 12: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0 (Non-Cascading).....................................................1389 14.9.18 TN11TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU1 (Cascading)...........................................................................................1391 14.9.19 TN11TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading)..............................................................................1393 14.9.20 TN11TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Non-Cascading)...................................................................................1396 14.9.21 TN11TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1(Non-Cascading)......................................................................1399 14.9.22 TN11TOM Scenario 5: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 (electrical regeneration board).............................................1401 14.9.23 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1403 14.9.24 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1408 14.9.25 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1410 14.9.26 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1410 14.9.27 TOM Specifications...........................................................................................................................................1418 14.10 TOX......................................................................................................................................................................1433 14.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1433 14.10.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................1435 14.10.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................1436 14.10.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1436 14.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1440 14.10.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1443 14.10.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1445 14.10.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1445 14.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1447 14.10.10 TOX Specifications.........................................................................................................................................1453 14.11 TQM.....................................................................................................................................................................1459 14.11.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1459 14.11.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................1460 14.11.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................1460 14.11.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1461 14.11.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1466 14.11.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1469 14.11.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1470 14.11.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1470 14.11.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................................1473 14.11.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................................1475 14.11.11 TQM Specifications.........................................................................................................................................1478 14.12 TQS.......................................................................................................................................................................1485 14.12.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1485 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xlvi


Contents

14.12.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................1486 14.12.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1486 14.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1488 14.12.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1491 14.12.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1492 14.12.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1492 14.12.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1494 14.12.9 TQS Specifications............................................................................................................................................1496 14.13 TQX......................................................................................................................................................................1501 14.13.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1501 14.13.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................1503 14.13.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................1504 14.13.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1505 14.13.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1509 14.13.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1512 14.13.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1514 14.13.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1515 14.13.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1517 14.13.10 TQX Specifications.........................................................................................................................................1525 14.14 TSC.......................................................................................................................................................................1530 14.14.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1530 14.14.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................1531 14.14.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................1531 14.14.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1531 14.14.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1534 14.14.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1535 14.14.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1537 14.14.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1537 14.14.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1539 14.14.10 TSC Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1542 14.15 TSXL....................................................................................................................................................................1551 14.15.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1551 14.15.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................1552 14.15.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................1552 14.15.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1554 14.15.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1556 14.15.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1560 14.15.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1564 14.15.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1565 14.15.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1567 14.15.10 TSXL Specifications........................................................................................................................................1570 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xlvii


Contents

14.16 TTX......................................................................................................................................................................1574 14.16.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................1574 14.16.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................1576 14.16.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................1577 14.16.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................1578 14.16.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................1582 14.16.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................1585 14.16.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................1587 14.16.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................1587 14.16.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1589 14.16.10 TTX Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1596

15 OTN Line Board.....................................................................................................................1602 15.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................1603 15.2 ND2........................................................................................................................................................................1606 15.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1606 15.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1610 15.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1611 15.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1615 15.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1622 15.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1626 15.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1629 15.2.8 Characteristic Code for the ND2.........................................................................................................................1630 15.2.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1630 15.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1636 15.2.11 ND2 Specifications............................................................................................................................................1642 15.3 NO2........................................................................................................................................................................1650 15.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1650 15.3.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1650 15.3.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1651 15.3.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1655 15.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1661 15.3.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1664 15.3.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1666 15.3.8 Characteristic Code for the NO2.........................................................................................................................1666 15.3.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1667 15.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1669 15.3.11 NO2 Specifications............................................................................................................................................1673 15.4 NQ2........................................................................................................................................................................1677 15.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1677 15.4.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1679 15.4.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1680 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xlviii


Contents

15.4.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1686 15.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1693 15.4.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1697 15.4.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1699 15.4.8 Characteristic Code for the NQ2.........................................................................................................................1701 15.4.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1701 15.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1707 15.4.11 NQ2 Specifications............................................................................................................................................1713 15.5 NS2.........................................................................................................................................................................1718 15.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1718 15.5.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1724 15.5.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1725 15.5.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1728 15.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1734 15.5.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1737 15.5.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1740 15.5.8 Characteristic Code for the NS2..........................................................................................................................1741 15.5.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1741 15.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................1747 15.5.11 NS2 Specifications............................................................................................................................................1753 15.6 NS3.........................................................................................................................................................................1762 15.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1762 15.6.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1767 15.6.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1768 15.6.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1773 15.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1782 15.6.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1787 15.6.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1792 15.6.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1796 15.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1804 15.6.10 NS3 Specifications............................................................................................................................................1813 15.7 NS4.........................................................................................................................................................................1819 15.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1819 15.7.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1823 15.7.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1825 15.7.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1831 15.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1837 15.7.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1840 15.7.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1844 15.7.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1846 15.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1848 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


xlix


Contents

15.7.10 NS4 Specifications............................................................................................................................................1852 15.8 NS4M......................................................................................................................................................................1863 15.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1863 15.8.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1866 15.8.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1866 15.8.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1870 15.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1874 15.8.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1876 15.8.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1878 15.8.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1879 15.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1881 15.8.10 NS4M Specifications.........................................................................................................................................1884

16 General Service Processing Board......................................................................................1887 16.1 GS4.........................................................................................................................................................................1888 16.1.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1888 16.1.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1888 16.1.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1889 16.1.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1891 16.1.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1895 16.1.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1897 16.1.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1899 16.1.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1899 16.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1902 16.1.10 GS4 Specifications............................................................................................................................................1904

17 Universal Line Board............................................................................................................1909 17.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................1910 17.2 HUNQ2...................................................................................................................................................................1912 17.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1912 17.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1913 17.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1914 17.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1915 17.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1921 17.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1922 17.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1924 17.2.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1924 17.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1929 17.2.10 HUNQ2 Specifications......................................................................................................................................1939 17.3 HUNS3...................................................................................................................................................................1943 17.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1943 17.3.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1945 17.3.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1945 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


l


Contents

17.3.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1947 17.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1953 17.3.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1954 17.3.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1956 17.3.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1956 17.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1960 17.3.10 HUNS3 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................1971

18 Packet Service Unit................................................................................................................1973 18.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................1974 18.2 EG16.......................................................................................................................................................................1975 18.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................1975 18.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................1976 18.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................1977 18.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................1978 18.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................1981 18.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................1983 18.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................1986 18.2.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................1987 18.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................1988 18.2.10 EG16 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1996 18.3 EX2.........................................................................................................................................................................2002 18.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2002 18.3.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2003 18.3.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2004 18.3.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2004 18.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2007 18.3.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2009 18.3.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2011 18.3.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................2011 18.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2012 18.3.10 EX2 Specifications............................................................................................................................................2019 18.4 EX8.........................................................................................................................................................................2021 18.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2021 18.4.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2022 18.4.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2023 18.4.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2023 18.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2027 18.4.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2029 18.4.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2031 18.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................2031 18.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2033 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


li


Contents

18.4.10 EX8 Specifications............................................................................................................................................2040 18.5 PND2......................................................................................................................................................................2051 18.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2051 18.5.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2052 18.5.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2053 18.5.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2053 18.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2056 18.5.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2059 18.5.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2060 18.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................2060 18.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2062 18.5.10 PND2 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2070

19 PID Board................................................................................................................................2075 19.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................2076 19.2 BMD4.....................................................................................................................................................................2077 19.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2078 19.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2078 19.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2079 19.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2080 19.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2081 19.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2083 19.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4.......................................................................................................................2083 19.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4..........................................................................................................................2084 19.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2086 19.2.10 BMD4 Specifications........................................................................................................................................2087 19.3 BMD8.....................................................................................................................................................................2088 19.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2088 19.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2089 19.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2090 19.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2090 19.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2092 19.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2093 19.3.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8.......................................................................................................................2094 19.3.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8..........................................................................................................................2094 19.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2097 19.3.10 BMD8 Specifications........................................................................................................................................2098 19.4 ELQX......................................................................................................................................................................2100 19.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2101 19.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2101 19.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2101 19.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2104 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lii


Contents

19.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2107 19.4.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2108 19.4.7 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................2108 19.4.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................................2110 19.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2113 19.4.10 ELQX Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2117 19.5 PTQX......................................................................................................................................................................2121 19.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2121 19.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2124 19.5.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2124 19.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2127 19.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2130 19.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2131 19.5.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX........................................................................................................................2132 19.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................2132 19.5.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................................2135 19.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2138 19.5.11 PTQX Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2142 19.6 ENQ2......................................................................................................................................................................2147 19.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2147 19.6.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2148 19.6.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2150 19.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2153 19.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2155 19.6.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2156 19.6.7 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................2156 19.6.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................................2160 19.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2166 19.6.10 ENQ2 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2168 19.7 NPO2......................................................................................................................................................................2168 19.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2168 19.7.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2173 19.7.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2174 19.7.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2176 19.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2181 19.7.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2185 19.7.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2186 19.7.8 Characteristic Code of the NPO2........................................................................................................................2187 19.7.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................2187 19.7.10 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................................2191 19.7.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2200 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


liii


Contents

19.7.12 NPO2 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2203 19.8 NPO2E....................................................................................................................................................................2206 19.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2206 19.8.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2209 19.8.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2210 19.8.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2212 19.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2215 19.8.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2218 19.8.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2220 19.8.8 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E......................................................................................................................2221 19.8.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................2221 19.8.10 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................................2224 19.8.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2228 19.8.12 NPO2E Specifications.......................................................................................................................................2231 19.9 NPS4.......................................................................................................................................................................2233 19.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2234 19.9.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2235 19.9.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2235 19.9.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2236 19.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2240 19.9.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2243 19.9.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2244 19.9.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................2244 19.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2246 19.9.10 NPS4 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2249 19.10 NPS4E..................................................................................................................................................................2251 19.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2251 19.10.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................2252 19.10.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................2252 19.10.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2255 19.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2258 19.10.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2261 19.10.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2262 19.10.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................................2263 19.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2265 19.10.10 NPS4E Specifications......................................................................................................................................2269

20 Submarine Board...................................................................................................................2272 20.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................2273 20.2 NS4.........................................................................................................................................................................2273 20.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2273 20.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2274 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


liv


Contents

20.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2275 20.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2280 20.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2286 20.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2289 20.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2291 20.2.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................................2292 20.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2295 20.2.10 NS4 Specifications............................................................................................................................................2300 20.3 OBU1......................................................................................................................................................................2302 20.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2302 20.3.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2303 20.3.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2303 20.3.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2304 20.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2305 20.3.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2306 20.3.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2308 20.3.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2308 20.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2309 20.3.10 OBU1 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2316 20.4 WSD9.....................................................................................................................................................................2317 20.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2317 20.4.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2318 20.4.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2318 20.4.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2319 20.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2320 20.4.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2321 20.4.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2324 20.4.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2325 20.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2325 20.4.10 WSD9 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2328 20.5 WSM9.....................................................................................................................................................................2329 20.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2329 20.5.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2330 20.5.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2330 20.5.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2331 20.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2332 20.5.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2333 20.5.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2336 20.5.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2337 20.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2337 20.5.10 WSM9 Specifications........................................................................................................................................2340 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lv


Contents

21 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Board.............................................................2342 21.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................2343 21.2 M40.........................................................................................................................................................................2344 21.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2344 21.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2346 21.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2347 21.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2347 21.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2348 21.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2349 21.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2353 21.2.8 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................................................2354 21.2.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2354 21.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2355 21.2.11 M40 Specifications............................................................................................................................................2355 21.3 M40V......................................................................................................................................................................2356 21.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2357 21.3.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2358 21.3.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2358 21.3.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2359 21.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2359 21.3.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2361 21.3.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2365 21.3.8 Characteristic Code for the M40V.......................................................................................................................2366 21.3.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2366 21.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2367 21.3.11 M40V Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2369 21.4 D40.........................................................................................................................................................................2370 21.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2370 21.4.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2371 21.4.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2372 21.4.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2372 21.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2373 21.4.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2374 21.4.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2378 21.4.8 Characteristic Code for the D40..........................................................................................................................2379 21.4.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2380 21.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2380 21.4.11 D40 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................2381 21.5 D40V......................................................................................................................................................................2382 21.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2382 21.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2383 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lvi


Contents

21.5.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2384 21.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2384 21.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2386 21.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2389 21.5.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................................................2390 21.5.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2390 21.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2391 21.5.10 D40V Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2392 21.6 DFIU.......................................................................................................................................................................2393 21.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2393 21.6.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2394 21.6.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2394 21.6.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2395 21.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2395 21.6.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2397 21.6.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2398 21.6.8 Characteristic Code for the DFIU........................................................................................................................2398 21.6.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2399 21.6.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2399 21.6.11 DFIU Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2400 21.7 FIU..........................................................................................................................................................................2402 21.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2402 21.7.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2406 21.7.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2407 21.7.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2408 21.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2408 21.7.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2411 21.7.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2413 21.7.8 Characteristic Code for the FIU...........................................................................................................................2415 21.7.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2416 21.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2416 21.7.11 FIU Specifications.............................................................................................................................................2420 21.8 ITL..........................................................................................................................................................................2421 21.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2421 21.8.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2423 21.8.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2424 21.8.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2424 21.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2425 21.8.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2427 21.8.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2429 21.8.8 Characteristic Code for the ITL...........................................................................................................................2429 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lvii


Contents

21.8.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2430 21.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2430 21.8.11 ITL Specifications.............................................................................................................................................2431 21.9 SFIU........................................................................................................................................................................2434 21.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2434 21.9.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2434 21.9.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2435 21.9.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2435 21.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2436 21.9.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2438 21.9.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2439 21.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SFIU........................................................................................................................2439 21.9.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2440 21.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2440 21.9.11 SFIU Specifications...........................................................................................................................................2444

22 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board..........................................................2446 22.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................2447 22.2 CMR1.....................................................................................................................................................................2448 22.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2448 22.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2449 22.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2449 22.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2450 22.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2451 22.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2452 22.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1......................................................................................................................2452 22.2.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2453 22.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2453 22.2.10 CMR1 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2454 22.3 CMR2.....................................................................................................................................................................2455 22.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2455 22.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2456 22.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2457 22.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2457 22.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2459 22.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2460 22.3.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2......................................................................................................................2461 22.3.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2461 22.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2462 22.3.10 CMR2 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2462 22.4 CMR4.....................................................................................................................................................................2464 22.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2464 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lviii


Contents

22.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2465 22.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2465 22.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2466 22.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2467 22.4.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2468 22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4......................................................................................................................2469 22.4.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2470 22.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2470 22.4.10 CMR4 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2471 22.5 DMR1.....................................................................................................................................................................2473 22.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2473 22.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2474 22.5.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2475 22.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2475 22.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2477 22.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2478 22.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1......................................................................................................................2479 22.5.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2479 22.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2480 22.5.10 DMR1 Specifications........................................................................................................................................2480 22.6 MR2........................................................................................................................................................................2482 22.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2482 22.6.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2483 22.6.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2483 22.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2484 22.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2485 22.6.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2486 22.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2.........................................................................................................................2487 22.6.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2487 22.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2488 22.6.10 MR2 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................2489 22.7 MR4........................................................................................................................................................................2490 22.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2490 22.7.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2491 22.7.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2492 22.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2492 22.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2494 22.7.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2495 22.7.7 Characteristic Code for the MR4.........................................................................................................................2496 22.7.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2496 22.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2497 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lix


Contents

22.7.10 MR4 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................2498 22.8 MR8........................................................................................................................................................................2500 22.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2501 22.8.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2501 22.8.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2502 22.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2502 22.8.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2504 22.8.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2505 22.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8.........................................................................................................................2506 22.8.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2506 22.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2507 22.8.10 MR8 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................2508 22.9 MR8V.....................................................................................................................................................................2511 22.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2511 22.9.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2512 22.9.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2512 22.9.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2513 22.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2513 22.9.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2515 22.9.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2517 22.9.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V......................................................................................................................2517 22.9.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2518 22.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2519 22.9.11 MR8V Specifications........................................................................................................................................2520 22.10 SBM2....................................................................................................................................................................2523 22.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2523 22.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................2524 22.10.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2524 22.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2525 22.10.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2526 22.10.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2527 22.10.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................................2528 22.10.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2528 22.10.9 SBM2 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2529

23 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board........................................2531 23.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................2533 23.2 RDU9......................................................................................................................................................................2536 23.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2536 23.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2537 23.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2537 23.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2538 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lx


Contents

23.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2539 23.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2540 23.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2542 23.2.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2542 23.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2543 23.2.10 RDU9 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2543 23.3 RMU9.....................................................................................................................................................................2544 23.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2544 23.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2545 23.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2546 23.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2547 23.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2549 23.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2551 23.3.7 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2551 23.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2552 23.3.9 RMU9 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2553 23.4 ROAM....................................................................................................................................................................2554 23.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2554 23.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2555 23.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2556 23.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2557 23.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2558 23.4.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2561 23.4.7 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2562 23.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2562 23.4.9 ROAM Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2563 23.5 TD20.......................................................................................................................................................................2564 23.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2565 23.5.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2565 23.5.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2565 23.5.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2566 23.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2567 23.5.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2569 23.5.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2570 23.5.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2571 23.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2571 23.5.10 TD20 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2573 23.6 TM20......................................................................................................................................................................2575 23.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2575 23.6.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2576 23.6.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2576 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxi


Contents

23.6.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2577 23.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2578 23.6.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2580 23.6.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2581 23.6.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2582 23.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2582 23.6.10 TM20 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2583 23.7 WSD9.....................................................................................................................................................................2584 23.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2584 23.7.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2586 23.7.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2587 23.7.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2588 23.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2589 23.7.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2591 23.7.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2593 23.7.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2595 23.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2595 23.7.10 WSD9 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2597 23.8 WSM9.....................................................................................................................................................................2599 23.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2600 23.8.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2602 23.8.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2602 23.8.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2603 23.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2604 23.8.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2606 23.8.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2608 23.8.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2610 23.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2610 23.8.10 WSM9 Specifications........................................................................................................................................2612 23.9 WSMD2..................................................................................................................................................................2614 23.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2615 23.9.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2615 23.9.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2616 23.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2617 23.9.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2618 23.9.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2620 23.9.7 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2621 23.9.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2621 23.9.9 WSMD2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................2623 23.10 WSMD4................................................................................................................................................................2625 23.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2625 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxii


Contents

23.10.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................2627 23.10.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................2627 23.10.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2628 23.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2629 23.10.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2631 23.10.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2633 23.10.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................................2634 23.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2635 23.10.10 WSMD4 Specifications...................................................................................................................................2637 23.11 WSMD9................................................................................................................................................................2639 23.11.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2639 23.11.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................2641 23.11.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................2641 23.11.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2642 23.11.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2643 23.11.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2645 23.11.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2647 23.11.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................................2648 23.11.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2649 23.11.10 WSMD9 Specifications...................................................................................................................................2653

24 Optical Amplifier Board......................................................................................................2657 24.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................2658 24.2 BPA........................................................................................................................................................................2661 24.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2661 24.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2661 24.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2662 24.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2662 24.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2663 24.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2665 24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA.........................................................................................................................2665 24.2.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2665 24.2.9 BPA Specifications..............................................................................................................................................2666 24.3 CRPC......................................................................................................................................................................2667 24.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2667 24.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2668 24.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2669 24.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2669 24.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2672 24.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2675 24.3.7 Dip Switch and Jumper........................................................................................................................................2675 24.3.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC.......................................................................................................................2677 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxiii


Contents

24.3.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2677 24.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2678 24.3.11 CRPC Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2679 24.4 DAS1......................................................................................................................................................................2681 24.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2681 24.4.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2681 24.4.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2682 24.4.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2683 24.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2684 24.4.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2687 24.4.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2689 24.4.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2690 24.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2691 24.4.10 DAS1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2698 24.5 HBA........................................................................................................................................................................2701 24.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2701 24.5.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2701 24.5.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2702 24.5.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2702 24.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2703 24.5.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2705 24.5.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2706 24.5.8 Characteristic Code for the HBA.........................................................................................................................2707 24.5.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2707 24.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2708 24.5.11 HBA Specifications...........................................................................................................................................2711 24.6 OAU1......................................................................................................................................................................2712 24.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2712 24.6.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2715 24.6.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2716 24.6.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2716 24.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2718 24.6.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2720 24.6.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2722 24.6.8 Characteristic Code for the OAU1......................................................................................................................2724 24.6.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2725 24.6.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2725 24.6.11 OAU1 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2731 24.7 OBU1......................................................................................................................................................................2744 24.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2744 24.7.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2747 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxiv


Contents

24.7.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2748 24.7.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2749 24.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2750 24.7.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2752 24.7.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2754 24.7.8 Characteristic Code for the OBU1.......................................................................................................................2755 24.7.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2756 24.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2756 24.7.11 OBU1 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2763 24.8 OBU2......................................................................................................................................................................2767 24.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2767 24.8.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2770 24.8.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2770 24.8.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2771 24.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2772 24.8.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2774 24.8.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2777 24.8.8 Characteristic Code for the OBU2.......................................................................................................................2779 24.8.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2779 24.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2780 24.8.11 OBU2 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2785 24.9 RAU1......................................................................................................................................................................2788 24.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2788 24.9.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2790 24.9.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2790 24.9.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2791 24.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2794 24.9.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2797 24.9.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2800 24.9.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2801 24.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................2802 24.9.10 RAU1 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................2809 24.10 RAU2....................................................................................................................................................................2814 24.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2814 24.10.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................2816 24.10.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................2817 24.10.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2818 24.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2820 24.10.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2823 24.10.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2826 24.10.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................................2827 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxv


Contents

24.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2828 24.10.10 RAU2 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................2834

25 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board....................................2840 25.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................2842 25.2 USXH.....................................................................................................................................................................2844 25.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2844 25.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2844 25.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2845 25.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2845 25.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2846 25.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2847 25.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2849 25.2.8 USXH Specifications...........................................................................................................................................2849 25.3 UXCT.....................................................................................................................................................................2850 25.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2850 25.3.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2850 25.3.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2851 25.3.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2851 25.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2852 25.3.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2853 25.3.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2855 25.3.8 UXCT Specifications...........................................................................................................................................2855 25.4 SXM........................................................................................................................................................................2856 25.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2856 25.4.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2857 25.4.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2857 25.4.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2858 25.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2859 25.4.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2860 25.4.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2862 25.4.8 SXM Specifications.............................................................................................................................................2863 25.5 SXH........................................................................................................................................................................2863 25.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2864 25.5.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2865 25.5.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2865 25.5.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2866 25.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2866 25.5.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2867 25.5.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2869 25.5.8 SXH Specifications..............................................................................................................................................2869 25.6 XCT........................................................................................................................................................................2870 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxvi


Contents

25.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2870 25.6.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2871 25.6.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2872 25.6.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2872 25.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2873 25.6.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2874 25.6.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2876 25.6.8 XCT Specifications..............................................................................................................................................2877 25.7 TN52UXCM...........................................................................................................................................................2878 25.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2878 25.7.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2878 25.7.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2879 25.7.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2880 25.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2881 25.7.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2883 25.7.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2885 25.7.8 TN52UXCM Specifications................................................................................................................................2885 25.8 XCM.......................................................................................................................................................................2886 25.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2886 25.8.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2887 25.8.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2887 25.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2888 25.8.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2889 25.8.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2891 25.8.7 XCM Board Specifications..................................................................................................................................2891 25.9 UXCH.....................................................................................................................................................................2892 25.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2892 25.9.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2893 25.9.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2893 25.9.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2894 25.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2895 25.9.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2897 25.9.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2899 25.9.8 UXCH Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2899 25.10 XCH......................................................................................................................................................................2900 25.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2900 25.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................2901 25.10.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2901 25.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2902 25.10.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2903 25.10.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2905 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxvii


Contents

25.10.7 TN52XCH Specifications..................................................................................................................................2905 25.11 TN16XCH............................................................................................................................................................2906 25.11.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2906 25.11.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................2907 25.11.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................2907 25.11.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2908 25.11.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2909 25.11.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2911 25.11.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2912 25.11.8 Switch and Jumper.............................................................................................................................................2912 25.11.9 TN16XCH Specifications..................................................................................................................................2913 25.12 TN16UXCM.........................................................................................................................................................2914 25.12.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2914 25.12.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................2914 25.12.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................2915 25.12.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2916 25.12.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2918 25.12.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2919 25.12.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2921 25.12.8 Switch and Jumper.............................................................................................................................................2921 25.12.9 TN16UXCM Specifications..............................................................................................................................2922 25.13 XCS......................................................................................................................................................................2923 25.13.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2923 25.13.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................2924 25.13.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................2924 25.13.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2925 25.13.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2926 25.13.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2927 25.13.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2928 25.13.8 XCS Specifications............................................................................................................................................2928 25.14 SCC.......................................................................................................................................................................2929 25.14.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2929 25.14.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................2931 25.14.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................2932 25.14.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2932 25.14.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2935 25.14.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2937 25.14.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2943 25.14.8 Switch and Jumper.............................................................................................................................................2944 25.14.9 SCC Specifications............................................................................................................................................2949 25.15 AUX......................................................................................................................................................................2950 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxviii


Contents

25.15.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................2950 25.15.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................2953 25.15.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................2954 25.15.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................2954 25.15.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................2956 25.15.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................2957 25.15.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................2963 25.15.8 Switch and Jumper.............................................................................................................................................2964 25.15.9 AUX Specifications...........................................................................................................................................2973

26 Optical Supervisory Channel Board..................................................................................2975 26.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................2976 26.2 HSC1......................................................................................................................................................................2977 26.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2977 26.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2978 26.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2978 26.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2979 26.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2980 26.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2984 26.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2986 26.2.8 Characteristic Code for the HSC1.......................................................................................................................2986 26.2.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2987 26.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2987 26.2.11 HSC1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................2989 26.3 SC1.........................................................................................................................................................................2991 26.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................2991 26.3.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................2992 26.3.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................2992 26.3.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................2993 26.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................2993 26.3.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2996 26.3.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................2997 26.3.8 Characteristic Code for the SC1..........................................................................................................................2998 26.3.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................2998 26.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................2999 26.3.11 SC1 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................3000 26.4 SC2.........................................................................................................................................................................3001 26.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3001 26.4.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3002 26.4.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3003 26.4.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3004 26.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3004 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxix


Contents

26.4.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3007 26.4.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3008 26.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SC2..........................................................................................................................3009 26.4.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3009 26.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3010 26.4.11 SC2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................3011 26.5 ST2..........................................................................................................................................................................3012 26.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3012 26.5.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3014 26.5.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3015 26.5.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3017 26.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3018 26.5.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3023 26.5.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3025 26.5.8 Characteristic Code for the ST2..........................................................................................................................3026 26.5.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3026 26.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3027 26.5.11 ST2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................3030

27 Optical Protection Board......................................................................................................3033 27.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................3034 27.2 DCP........................................................................................................................................................................3035 27.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3035 27.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3037 27.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3038 27.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3039 27.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3040 27.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3042 27.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3045 27.2.8 Characteristic Code for the DCP.........................................................................................................................3045 27.2.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3046 27.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3046 27.2.11 DCP Specifications............................................................................................................................................3047 27.3 OLP.........................................................................................................................................................................3049 27.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3049 27.3.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3052 27.3.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3054 27.3.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3056 27.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3056 27.3.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3058 27.3.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3060 27.3.8 Characteristic Code for the OLP.........................................................................................................................3060 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxx


Contents

27.3.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3061 27.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3061 27.3.11 OLP Specifications............................................................................................................................................3063 27.4 QCP........................................................................................................................................................................3066 27.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3066 27.4.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3066 27.4.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3067 27.4.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3068 27.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3069 27.4.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3070 27.4.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3072 27.4.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3072 27.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3073 27.4.10 QCP Specifications............................................................................................................................................3074 27.5 SCS.........................................................................................................................................................................3075 27.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3075 27.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3076 27.5.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3077 27.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3077 27.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3079 27.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3080 27.5.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS..........................................................................................................................3080 27.5.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3081 27.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3081 27.5.10 SCS Specifications............................................................................................................................................3082

28 Spectrum Analyzer Board....................................................................................................3084 28.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................3085 28.2 MCA4.....................................................................................................................................................................3086 28.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3086 28.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3088 28.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3088 28.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3088 28.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3089 28.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3091 28.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3092 28.2.8 Characteristic Code for the MCA4......................................................................................................................3093 28.2.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3093 28.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3093 28.2.11 MCA4 Specifications........................................................................................................................................3095 28.3 MCA8.....................................................................................................................................................................3096 28.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3096 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxxi


Contents

28.3.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3098 28.3.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3098 28.3.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3098 28.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3099 28.3.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3101 28.3.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3102 28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the MCA8......................................................................................................................3103 28.3.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3103 28.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3104 28.3.11 MCA8 Specifications........................................................................................................................................3105 28.4 OPM8......................................................................................................................................................................3106 28.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3106 28.4.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3107 28.4.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3108 28.4.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3108 28.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3109 28.4.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3111 28.4.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3113 28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the OPM8......................................................................................................................3113 28.4.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3114 28.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3114 28.4.11 OPM8 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................3115 28.5 WMU......................................................................................................................................................................3116 28.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3116 28.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3117 28.5.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3118 28.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3118 28.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3120 28.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3121 28.5.7 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3121 28.5.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3122 28.5.9 WMU Specifications...........................................................................................................................................3122

29 Variable Optical Attenuator Board....................................................................................3124 29.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................3125 29.2 VA1........................................................................................................................................................................3126 29.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3126 29.2.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3128 29.2.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3128 29.2.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3129 29.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3129 29.2.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3131 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxxii


Contents

29.2.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3133 29.2.8 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................................................3134 29.2.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3134 29.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3135 29.2.11 VA1 Specifications............................................................................................................................................3136 29.3 VA4........................................................................................................................................................................3137 29.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3137 29.3.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3139 29.3.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3139 29.3.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3140 29.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3140 29.3.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3142 29.3.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3144 29.3.8 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................................................3145 29.3.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3145 29.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3146 29.3.11 VA4 Specifications............................................................................................................................................3147

30 Dispersion Compensation Board.......................................................................................3149 30.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................3150 30.2 DCU........................................................................................................................................................................3151 30.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3151 30.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3152 30.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3152 30.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3153 30.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3154 30.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3156 30.2.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU.........................................................................................................................3156 30.2.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3157 30.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3157 30.2.10 DCU Specifications...........................................................................................................................................3157 30.3 TDC........................................................................................................................................................................3159 30.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3159 30.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3160 30.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3161 30.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3161 30.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3163 30.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3164 30.3.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC.........................................................................................................................3165 30.3.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3165 30.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3165 30.3.10 TDC Specifications............................................................................................................................................3166 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxxiii


Contents

31 Clock Board.............................................................................................................................3168 31.1 STG.........................................................................................................................................................................3169 31.1.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3169 31.1.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3171 31.1.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3171 31.1.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3173 31.1.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3173 31.1.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3175 31.1.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3177 31.1.8 Characteristic Code for the STG.........................................................................................................................3178 31.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3178 31.1.10 STG Specifications............................................................................................................................................3179

32 TDM Unit................................................................................................................................3180 32.1 EAS2.......................................................................................................................................................................3181 32.1.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3181 32.1.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3181 32.1.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3182 32.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3187 32.1.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3188 32.1.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3190 32.1.7 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3190 32.1.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3191 32.1.9 EAS2 Specifications............................................................................................................................................3200 32.2 EGSH......................................................................................................................................................................3203 32.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3203 32.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3204 32.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3205 32.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3209 32.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3211 32.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3214 32.2.7 Characteristic Code for the EGSH.......................................................................................................................3214 32.2.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3215 32.2.9 Board Protection..................................................................................................................................................3216 32.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3218 32.2.11 EGSH Specifications.........................................................................................................................................3228 32.3 SF64........................................................................................................................................................................3229 32.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3229 32.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3230 32.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3230 32.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3232 32.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3234 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxxiv


Contents

32.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3236 32.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SF64.........................................................................................................................3236 32.3.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3237 32.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3237 32.3.10 SF64 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................3238 32.4 SF64A.....................................................................................................................................................................3241 32.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3241 32.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3242 32.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3243 32.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3245 32.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3247 32.4.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3249 32.4.7 Characteristic Code for the SF64A......................................................................................................................3249 32.4.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3250 32.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3250 32.4.10 SF64A Specifications........................................................................................................................................3251 32.5 SFD64.....................................................................................................................................................................3253 32.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3253 32.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3254 32.5.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3254 32.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3257 32.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3259 32.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3261 32.5.7 Characteristic Code for the SFD64......................................................................................................................3261 32.5.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3262 32.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3262 32.5.10 SFD64 Specifications........................................................................................................................................3263 32.6 SL64........................................................................................................................................................................3266 32.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3266 32.6.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3267 32.6.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3268 32.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3270 32.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3272 32.6.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3274 32.6.7 Characteristic Code for the SL64........................................................................................................................3274 32.6.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3275 32.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3275 32.6.10 SL64 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................3276 32.7 SLD64.....................................................................................................................................................................3278 32.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3278 32.7.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3279 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxxv


Contents

32.7.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3280 32.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3282 32.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3284 32.7.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3286 32.7.7 Characteristic Code for the SLD64.....................................................................................................................3286 32.7.8 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3287 32.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................................3287 32.7.10 SLD64 Specifications........................................................................................................................................3288 32.8 SLH41.....................................................................................................................................................................3289 32.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3290 32.8.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3290 32.8.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3290 32.8.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3291 32.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3294 32.8.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3296 32.8.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3298 32.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41.....................................................................................................................3298 32.8.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3298 32.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3299 32.8.11 SLH41 Specifications........................................................................................................................................3300 32.9 SLO16.....................................................................................................................................................................3304 32.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................................3304 32.9.2 Update Description..............................................................................................................................................3304 32.9.3 Application..........................................................................................................................................................3305 32.9.4 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................3305 32.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................................3307 32.9.6 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................3309 32.9.7 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................................3311 32.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16.....................................................................................................................3311 32.9.9 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................3312 32.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3312 32.9.11 SLO16 Specifications........................................................................................................................................3313 32.10 SLQ16...................................................................................................................................................................3317 32.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................3317 32.10.2 Update Description............................................................................................................................................3317 32.10.3 Application........................................................................................................................................................3318 32.10.4 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................3318 32.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................3320 32.10.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................3322 32.10.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................3324 32.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16...................................................................................................................3324 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxxvi


Contents

32.10.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................................3325 32.10.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................................3325 32.10.11 SLQ16 Specifications......................................................................................................................................3326 32.11 SLQ64...................................................................................................................................................................3329 32.11.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................................3330 32.11.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................3330 32.11.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................................3331 32.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................3333 32.11.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................................3335 32.11.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................3337 32.11.7 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64...................................................................................................................3337 32.11.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................................3338 32.11.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................................3338 32.11.10 SLQ64 Specifications......................................................................................................................................3339

33 Cables.......................................................................................................................................3341 33.1 Optical Fibers.........................................................................................................................................................3342 33.1.1 Classification.......................................................................................................................................................3342 33.1.2 Connectors...........................................................................................................................................................3343 33.2 Alarm Cables..........................................................................................................................................................3347 33.2.1 Alarm Output Interface Cable.............................................................................................................................3347 33.2.2 Alarm Input Interface Cable................................................................................................................................3348 33.3 Management Cables...............................................................................................................................................3350 33.3.1 OAM Serial Port Cable........................................................................................................................................3350 33.3.2 AUX Signal Cable...............................................................................................................................................3351 33.3.3 Network Cable.....................................................................................................................................................3356 33.4 Clock/Time Cable...................................................................................................................................................3358 33.4.1 Cables for other equipment Connections.............................................................................................................3358 33.4.2 Cables for Internal Connections..........................................................................................................................3364 33.4.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections.........................................................................................................3366

34 Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................................3370 34.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator .......................................................................................................................................3371 34.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator................................................................................................................3371

35 Pluggable Optical Modules.................................................................................................3372 36 Mounting Ears........................................................................................................................3377 37 Filler Panels............................................................................................................................3387 37.1 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................................3388 37.2 Front Panel..............................................................................................................................................................3388 37.3 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................3389 37.4 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................................................3390 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxxvii


Contents

A Indicators..................................................................................................................................3391 A.1 Cabinet Indicators....................................................................................................................................................3392 A.2 Subrack Indicator.....................................................................................................................................................3392 A.3 Chassis Indicators....................................................................................................................................................3393 A.4 Board Indicators.......................................................................................................................................................3394 A.5 Fan Indicator............................................................................................................................................................3398 A.6 PIU Indicator...........................................................................................................................................................3399

B Bar Code for Boards................................................................................................................3400 B.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................3402 B.2 Bar Code Overview .................................................................................................................................................3405 B.2.1 One-dimensional Bar Code of a Board.................................................................................................................3405 B.2.2 Two-dimensional Bar Code of a Board................................................................................................................3410 B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.................................................................................................................................3415 B.3.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs................................................................................................................3415 B.3.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs..............................................................................3417 B.3.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs.................................................................................................................3418 B.4 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit..........................................................................................................................3419 B.5 Characteristic Code of an FOADM.........................................................................................................................3419 B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1.......................................................................................................................3419 B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR2.......................................................................................................................3419 B.5.3 Characteristic Code for the CMR4.......................................................................................................................3420 B.5.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1.......................................................................................................................3421 B.5.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2..........................................................................................................................3421 B.5.6 Characteristic Code for of MR4............................................................................................................................3421 B.5.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8..........................................................................................................................3422 B.5.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V.......................................................................................................................3423 B.6 Characteristic Code of an MCA...............................................................................................................................3424 B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.......................................................................................................................3424 B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8.......................................................................................................................3424 B.7 Characteristic Code of an OAU...............................................................................................................................3424 B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA..........................................................................................................................3425 B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1........................................................................................................................3425 B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1........................................................................................................................3426 B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2........................................................................................................................3426 B.7.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC..........................................................................................................................3427 B.8 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit............................................................................................3427 B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the D40...........................................................................................................................3427 B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V.........................................................................................................................3428 B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU.........................................................................................................................3429 B.8.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU............................................................................................................................3429 B.8.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL............................................................................................................................3429 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxxviii


Contents

B.8.6 Characteristic Code for the M40...........................................................................................................................3430 B.8.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V........................................................................................................................3430 B.9 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit.................................................................................................................3431 B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP...........................................................................................................................3431 B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP...........................................................................................................................3432 B.9.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS...........................................................................................................................3432 B.10 Characteristic Code of a VOA...............................................................................................................................3432 B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................................................3432 B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................................................3433 B.11 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit........................................................................................................................3433 B.11.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU........................................................................................................................3433 B.11.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU........................................................................................................................3434 B.11.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC........................................................................................................................3434

C Quick Reference Table of Unit functions..........................................................................3436 C.1 Basic Functions of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards, Packet Service Boards and Universal Line Boards.............................................................................................................................................................................3437 C.2 Loopback Function of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards, Packet Service Boards and Universal Line Boards.............................................................................................................................................................................3445 C.3 Protection mode of OTUs, OTN Tributary and Line Boards, and Universal Line Boards.....................................3450 C.4 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards................................................................................3453 C.5 Quick Reference of Data Board Functions..............................................................................................................3459 C.6 Packet Service Support............................................................................................................................................3460 C.7 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of TDM Boards..................................................................3461 C.8 Quick Reference of TDM Board Functions.............................................................................................................3465 C.9 Loopback Capabilities of TDM Boards...................................................................................................................3467

D Quick Reference Table of Unit Specifications.................................................................3469 D.1 Specification of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards and Packet Service Boards............................3470 D.1.1 OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards and Packet Service Boards Specification on the Client Side..............................3470 D.1.2 OTUs, OTN Line Boards, Universal Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards Specification on the WDM Side ........................................................................................................................................................................................3523 D.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit...............................................................................................................3546 D.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards..................................................................................................................3549 D.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio..........................................................................................................................3553 D.5 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards.......................................................................................3554 D.5.1 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 8800.............................................3554 D.5.2 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 6800.............................................3648 D.5.3 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 3800.............................................3680

E Parameter Reference...............................................................................................................3705 E.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ......................................................................................................................3706 E.2 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold................................................................................................................3707 E.3 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression .................................................................................................................3708 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxxix


Contents

E.4 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes)..........................................................................................................3709 E.5 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)...............................3710 E.6 Laser Status (WDM Interface).................................................................................................................................3711 E.7 Line Rate..................................................................................................................................................................3712 E.8 Maximum Frame Length .........................................................................................................................................3714 E.9 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)......................................................................................................................3715 E.10 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode.........................................................................................................3717 E.11 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface).................................................................................................................3718 E.12 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)...........................................3718 E.13 Port Mapping (WDM Interface).............................................................................................................................3720 E.14 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................3721 E.15 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface).................................3722

F Glossary.....................................................................................................................................3724

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


lxxx


1 Update Description

1

Update Description

This section describes hardware updates of cabinets and PDUs in V100R007C00 or later versions and the reasons for the updates and the corresponding information updates. Any product versions that are not listed in the document mean that they have no hardware update. For details about hardware updates of subracks and boards, see change descriptions in the sections of these subracks and boards.

Hardware Updates in V100R009C00SPC200 Hardware Update

Reason for the Update

Information Update

Added the typical configuration of two T32 electrical subracks in an N63B cabinet.

The configuration of two T32 electrical subracks in an N63B cabinet is newly supported.

2.3 Typical N63B Cabinet Configurations

Hardware Updates in V100R009C00SPC100

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Information Update

Adjusted the specifications of TN21PIU boards.

The boards are manufactured using an optimized engineering process, and the board specifications are adjusted.

10.3.2 PIU


1


1 Update Description

Hardware Updates in V100R008C10 Hardware Update


Information Update

Added the N63B-2m cabinet.

The N63B-2m cabinet is newly supported.

2.1 Cabinet Introduction

The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack can be AC powered.

10.2.2 APIU

Hardware Update


Information Update

Optimized the description of the N63B and N66B cabinets by comparing them. Supplemented requirements on subrack configurations in a cabinet.

Information is optimized.

2.1 Cabinet Introduction

Added the TN18APIU board.

2.4 Typical Configurations of an N63B-2m Cabinet

Hardware Updates in V100R007C02

2.3 Typical N63B Cabinet Configurations 2.5 Typical N66B Cabinet Configurations

Optimized description of cabinets by changing the description by device model to the description by cabinet model, and added typical cabinet configurations and fiber management cabinets.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Information Update

Added the E2000-ODF.

E2000-ODF is a functional box that enables fiber splicing and fiber management between highpower optical amplifier boards and an ODF.

11.4 E2000-ODF

Added the PDU (DPD63-8-8).

A new PDU type is added.

PDU (DPD63-8-8)


2


2 Cabinet

2

Cabinet

About This Chapter

2.1 Cabinet Introduction Huawei provides three types of ETS 300-119-compliant cabinets: N66B, N63B, and N63B-2m. 2.2 Space Requirements for Cabinets To ensure that cabinets are efficiently ventilated and can be easily maintained, observe the requirements described in this topic when installing a cabinet. 2.3 Typical N63B Cabinet Configurations The N63B cabinet can be used to hold different types of subracks or frames. The N63B cabinet is called cabinet assembly after it is equipped with appropriate PDU and cables. Equipment configuration is completed after appropriate subracks or frames are installed in a cabinet assembly. Each combination of subracks and frames corresponds to a cabinet assembly. There are several combinations, which correspond to different equipment configurations. This section describes typical N63B cabinet configurations and the requirements on subrack installation. 2.4 Typical Configurations of an N63B-2m Cabinet An N63B-2m cabinet is a universal cabinet and can be used to house different types of subracks or frames. After being equipped with the required PDUs and cables, the N63B-2m cabinet is called the N63B-2m cabinet assembly. Equipment configuration is completed after appropriate subracks or frames are installed in the cabinet assembly. Each combination of subracks and frames corresponds to a type of cabinet assembly. There are several combinations, which correspond to different equipment configurations. This section describes the typical configurations and installation position requirements of the N63B-2m cabinet assembly. 2.5 Typical N66B Cabinet Configurations The N66B cabinet can be used to hold different types of subracks or frames. The N66B cabinet is called cabinet assembly after it is equipped with appropriate PDU and cables. Equipment configuration is completed after appropriate subracks or frames are installed in a cabinet assembly. Each combination of subracks and frames corresponds to a cabinet assembly. There are several combinations, which correspond to different equipment configurations. This section describes typical N66B cabinet configurations and the requirements on subrack installation. 2.6 Cabinet Cables Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3


2 Cabinet

2.1 Cabinet Introduction Huawei provides three types of ETS 300-119-compliant cabinets: N66B, N63B, and N63B-2m. Parame ter

N66B (ETSI 600 mm Cabinet)


N63B-2m (ETSI 300 mm Cabinet)

Appeara nce

Height extensio n frame (optiona l)a Doors/ Panels

None

Front and rear doors: They can be disassembled. A key is provided for unlocking each of the doors. Side panels: They are secured with screws and can be disassembled.

Door keys

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Front door: The door can be disassembled. A key is provided for unlocking the door.

Front door: The door can be disassembled. A key is provided for unlocking the door.

Rear and side panels: They are secured with screws. Only the side panels can be disassembled.

Rear and side panels: They are secured with screws. Only the side panels can be disassembled.

The door keys for all cabinets are the same.


4


Parame ter

2 Cabinet


Height

Dimensi l Not equipped with a ons (H x height extension W x D) frame: 2200 mm (86.6 in.) x 600 mm De h (23.6 in.) x 600 mm pth Widt (23.6 in.)

Weight


N63B-2m (ETSI 300 mm Cabinet)

l Not equipped with a height extension frame: 2200 mm (86.6 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 300 mm (11.8 in.)

2000 mm (78.74 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 300 mm (11.8 in.)

l Equipped with a height extension frame: 2600 mm (102.4 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.)

l Equipped with a height extension frame: 2600 mm (102.4 in.) x 600 mm (23.6 in.) x 300 mm (11.8 in.)

l Not equipped with a height extension frame: 120 kg (264.6 lb.)

l Not equipped with a height extension frame: 60 kg (132.3 lb.)

l Equipped with a height extension frame: 130 kg (286.6 lb.)

l Equipped with a height extension frame: 66 kg (145.5 lb.)

Standar d working voltage

-48 V DC or -60 V DC

Workin g voltage range

-48 V DC power source: -40 V to -57.6 V

54.5 kg (120.2 lb.)

-60 V DC power source: -48 V to -72 V

a: A 400-mm-high extension frame can be placed at the top of the N66B or N63B cabinet, increasing the height of the cabinet to 2600 mm.

2.2 Space Requirements for Cabinets To ensure that cabinets are efficiently ventilated and can be easily maintained, observe the requirements described in this topic when installing a cabinet. The N63B cabinet is used as an example to describe the requirements for installing a cabinet in equipment room. The requirements for installing an N66B cabinet and an N63B-2m cabinet are the same as those for installing two N63B cabinets in back-to-back mode. (Two back-to-back N63B cabinets can be regarded as one N66B cabinet.) Cabinets are usually installed in a row inside equipment room. They are arranged in a face-toface or a back-to-back mode. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


5


2 Cabinet

Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 illustrate the positions of cabinets. To facilitate heat dissipation and maintenance of the cabinet, reserve sufficient space around the cabinet according to the following requirements: l

The space in front of the cabinet must be greater than or equal to 1000 mm (39.4 in.).

l

The space beside both sides of the cabinet must be greater than or equal to 800 mm (31.5 in.).

l

The space behind the cabinet must be greater than or equal to 50 mm. (Ignore this requirement when installing two N63B cabinets in back-to-back mode.)

Figure 2-1 Top view of cabinets in face-to-face mode Unit: mm Fiber management frame

Cabinet

50 300

800

150

150

600

Wall or any other equivalent

Front

1000

600

800 300

50

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


6


2 Cabinet

Figure 2-2 Top view of cabinets in back-to-back mode Unit: mm

Front Fiber management frame

1000

Cabinet 300 300

800

150

600

150

Front

1000

600 300 300

800 Front

1000

Wall or any other equivalent

NOTE

l If it is designed to ventilate the equipment from bottom to top, there must be vents on the ESD floor in front of the cabinet so that the fan tray assemblies can draw air from the air conditioner into the equipment. l A fiber management cabinet is installed on each side of the cabinet if excessive fibers are connected to the cabinet. For details about the fiber management cabinet, see 3 Fiber Management Cabinet.

2.3 Typical N63B Cabinet Configurations The N63B cabinet can be used to hold different types of subracks or frames. The N63B cabinet is called cabinet assembly after it is equipped with appropriate PDU and cables. Equipment configuration is completed after appropriate subracks or frames are installed in a cabinet assembly. Each combination of subracks and frames corresponds to a cabinet assembly. There are several combinations, which correspond to different equipment configurations. This section describes typical N63B cabinet configurations and the requirements on subrack installation. NOTE

In the cabinet BOM, TNxxxRACKxx indicates the type of a cabinet assembly. For example, TN1B6RACK06 indicates an N63B cabinet assembly that can be used to house one T16 subrack and three 6800 subracks. For more information about the cabinet BOM, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


7


2 Cabinet

An N63B cabinet is divided into four areas. An T16 subrack/universal platform subrack/6800 subrack occupies one area and an T32 subrack occupies two areas. A subrack is configured as an optical or electrical subrack as required. To ensure efficient heat dissipation for equipment, the type (optical or electrical) and position of subracks deployed in an N63B cabinet must meet anticipated system requirements. The following describes how an optical and electrical subrack is defined. l

An electrical subrack is used to hold only cross-connect boards, OTU boards, tributary boards, line boards, or protection boards.

l

An optical subrack is used to hold OADM, multiplexer/demultiplexer, optical amplifier, OSC, optical spectrum analyzer, OLP (for optical line protection only), regeneration board, or OTU boards.

l

Universal platform subracks serve as optical subracks. Other types of subracks can serve as either electrical or optical subracks.

l

When an optical subrack has a board that consumes more than 40 W power on a per slot basis or the average board power of the subrack is greater than 30 W, the subrack is calculated as an electrical subrack.

Table 2-1 Typical configurations of the N63B cabinet assembly N Typical o Configur . ation

PDF Circu it Break er

Ma xi mu m Po we r Co ns um pti on of Int egr ate d Eq uip me nt

Subrack Position in the Cabinet

Configuration Principle

1 1 x T32 (electrical subrack) + 1 x T32 (optical subrack) + 1 x DCM + DPD63-88

Eight 63 A circuit breake rs

540 0 W

N63B cabinet

l By default, one T32 electrical subrack is configured in area 1 and 2 in the cabinet. Areas 3 and 4 are reserved

Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Optical subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

T32 electrical subrack


8


2 Cabinet

N Typical o Configur . ation



1 x T32 (electrical subrack) + 1 x T32 (optical subrack) + TN51PD U


540 0 W

2 1 x T32 (electrical subrack) + 2 x T16 + 1 x DCM + TN16PD U or DPD63-88


500 0 W

3 1 x T32 (electrical subrack) + 2x universal platform subrack + 2 x DCM + DPD63-88


500 0 W

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



only for optical subracks. l Areas 3 and 4 are reserved for optical subracks. Optical subracks must be configured from area 3 to area 4.


9


2 Cabinet




4 1 x T32 (electrical subrack) + 2 x 6800 + 2 x DCM + TN51PD U or DPD63-88

Four 63 A and four 32 A circuit breake rs

540 0 W

5 2 x T32 (electrical subrack) + DPD63-88


960 0 W


N63B cabinet Area 1 Area 2


Subracks must be configured from bottom to top.

Area 3 Area 4 T32 electrical subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


10


2 Cabinet






6 4 x T16 + 1 x DCM + TN16PD U or DPD63-88


500 0 W

Electrical subracks pre-installed in the cabinet

l At most two electrical subracks can be configured in the cabinet.

N63B cabinet Area 1 Area 2 Area 3

7 3 x T16 + 1 x universal platform subrack+ 1 x DCM + DPD63-88




500 0 W

Area 4 No electrical subrack pre-installed in the cabinet N63B cabinet Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

500 0 W

Optical subrack

Electrical subrack

l When one or two electrical subracks are pre-installed in the N63B cabinet, they must be located in the top-most areas. During capacity expansion, new subracks must be configured from top to bottom. l When no electrical subrack is preinstalled in the cabinet, subracks must be configured


11


2 Cabinet






500 0 W

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



from bottom to top. l It is not allowed to configure an optical subrack above two electrical subracks regardless of whether the two electrical subracks are located in neighboring areas or not.


12


2 Cabinet






1 3 x T16 + 1 0 x 6800 + 2 x DCM + TN16PD U or DPD63-88

Six 63 A and two 32 A circuit breake rs

500 0 W

N63B cabinet

l By default, one 6800 optical subrack is configured in area 4 in the cabinet.


Electrical subrack

l At most two T16 electrical subracks can be configured in the cabinet. l It is not allowed to configure an optical subrack above two electrical subracks. l Subracks must be configured from bottom to top.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


13


2 Cabinet







Four 63 A and four 32 A circuit breake rs

500 0 W

N63B cabinet

l By default, two 6800 optical subracks are configured in areas 3 and 4 in the cabinet.

Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 T16 6800 optical subrack


Two 63 A and six 32 A circuit breake rs

500 0 W

subrack

l Subracks must be configured from bottom to top. l By default, three 6800 optical subracks are configured in areas 2, 3 and 4 in the cabinet.

N63B cabinet Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 6800 optical subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

electrical

l At most two T16 electrical subracks can be configured in the cabinet.

T16

electrical subrack


l Subracks must be configured from bottom to top.

14


2 Cabinet






1 4x 3 universal platform subrack+ 2 x DCM + DPD63-88


740 0 W

N63B cabinet

Subracks must be configured from bottom to top.

Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 8800 universal platform subrack

1 4 x 6800 + 4 1 x DCM + TN11PD U or DPD63-88

Four 63 A circuit breake rs

480 0 W

N63B cabinet Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 6800 optical subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


l Subracks must be configured from bottom to top. l The power consumption of each subrack must not exceed 1200 W.

15


2 Cabinet






1 3 x 6800 + 5 3 x DCM + 2 x CRPC + TN11PD U or DPD63-88

Four 63 A circuit breake rs

480 0 W

N63B cabinet

l Subracks must be configured from bottom to top.

Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 6800 optical subrack

CRPC frame

l The power consumption of each subrack must not exceed 1200 W.

T32 subrack is classified into enhanced and general subracks. The requirements on configuring enhanced and general subracks are the same. The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment cannot exceed the maximum power consumption.

NOTE

In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the formula: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W. Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the device under extreme conditions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


16


2 Cabinet

2.4 Typical Configurations of an N63B-2m Cabinet An N63B-2m cabinet is a universal cabinet and can be used to house different types of subracks or frames. After being equipped with the required PDUs and cables, the N63B-2m cabinet is called the N63B-2m cabinet assembly. Equipment configuration is completed after appropriate subracks or frames are installed in the cabinet assembly. Each combination of subracks and frames corresponds to a type of cabinet assembly. There are several combinations, which correspond to different equipment configurations. This section describes the typical configurations and installation position requirements of the N63B-2m cabinet assembly. NOTE

In the cabinet BOM, TNxxxRACKxx indicates the type of a cabinet assembly. For example, TN1B8RACK05 indicates an N63B-2m cabinet assembly that supports the following: 3 x T16 subracks, 2 x T16 subracks + 1 x UPS, 1 x T16 subrack + 2 x UPSs, or 3 x UPSs For more cabinet BOM information, contact Huawei's product managers in representative offices.

An N63B-2m cabinet is divided into four areas from top to bottom. The upper three areas are used to hold subracks, and the bottom area is relatively small and can be used to hold the CRPC or DCM frame. A T16 subrack or UPS occupies one area, and a T32 subrack occupies two areas. Subracks can be divided into optical subracks and electrical subracks by application scenario. The subracks comply with the following principles. To ensure efficient heat dissipation, the types and installation positions of optical and electrical subracks must meet configuration rules of the N63B-2m cabinet. l


l

An optical subrack is used to hold only OADM boards, multiplexer boards, demultiplexer boards, optical amplifier boards, OSC boards, optical spectrum analyzing boards, OLP boards (used in optical line protection), regeneration boards, or OTU boards.

l

A UPS is configured as an optical subrack, and other types of devices can be configured as electrical or optical subracks.

l

When an optical subrack is equipped with a board whose single-slot power consumption exceeds 40 W or its average single-slot power consumption exceeds 30 W, the optical subrack is considered as an electrical subrack in calculating the number of subracks.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


17


2 Cabinet

Table 2-2 Typical configurations of an N63B-2m cabinet N Typical o Configuration . Inside Cabinet

Reco mme nded Circ uit Brea ker Conf igura tion

Ma xi mu m Po we r Co nsu mp tio n

Subrack Position

1

1 × T32 + 1 × T16 + DPD63-8-8

6 × 63 A

540 0W

N63B-2m cabinet

2

1 × T32 + 1 × UPS + DPD63-8-8

6 × 63 A

540 0W

Configuration Rule


3 4 5

3 × T16 + DPD63-8-8

6 × 63 A

540 0W

2 × T16 + 1 × UPS + DPD63-8-8

6 × 63 A

540 0W

1 × T16 + 2 × UPS + DPD63-8-8

6 × 63 A

540 0W

Electrical subrack

Electrical subracks pre-installed in the cabinet N63B-2m cabinet Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 No electrical subrack pre-installed in the cabinet N63B-2m cabinet Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Optical subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Electrical subrack


By default, only one T32 electrical subrack is configured in an N63B-2m cabinet, and it occupies areas 1 and 2 of the cabinet. Only an optical subrack can be configured in area 3. l At most two electrical subracks can be configured in an N63B-2m cabinet. l If an electrical subrack is preinstalled, install the new subracks below the electrical subrack from top to bottom during capacity expansion. l If no electrical subrack is preinstalled, install subracks from bottom to top in sequence. Do not install any

18


2 Cabinet

N Typical o Configuration . Inside Cabinet

Reco mme nded Circ uit Brea ker Conf igura tion

Ma xi mu m Po we r Co nsu mp tio n

6

6 × 63 A

540 0W

3 × UPS + DPD63-8-8

Subrack Position

Configuration Rule

subrack in the area that has a vacant area below. l Do not install any optical subrack above two electrical subracks, no matter whether the subracks are adjacent or not.

The configuration rules of the standard and enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are the same. The maximum power consumption indicates the maximum heat dissipation capability of the entire cabinet. Ensure that the total power consumption of an N63B-2m cabinet does not exceed the maximum power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


19


2 Cabinet

NOTE

For transport equipment, the heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered the same. Heat consumption is expressed in BTU/h and power consumption is expressed in W. The conversion between the two units is as follows: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W. Typical power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment when it uses typical configurations and runs at room temperature. Maximum power consumption indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in extreme conditions.

2.5 Typical N66B Cabinet Configurations The N66B cabinet can be used to hold different types of subracks or frames. The N66B cabinet is called cabinet assembly after it is equipped with appropriate PDU and cables. Equipment configuration is completed after appropriate subracks or frames are installed in a cabinet assembly. Each combination of subracks and frames corresponds to a cabinet assembly. There are several combinations, which correspond to different equipment configurations. This section describes typical N66B cabinet configurations and the requirements on subrack installation. NOTE

In the cabinet BOM, TNxxxRACKxx indicates the type of a cabinet assembly. For example, TN1B8RACK01 indicates an N66B cabinet assembly that can be used to house one T64 enhanced subrack and two T32 subracks, one T64 enhanced subrack and four T16 subracks, or one T64 enhanced subrack and four universal platform subracks. For more information about the cabinet BOM, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office.

An N66B cabinet has the front and rear sides. Each side consists of four areas. T64 subracks are installed in areas 1 and 2 on the front and rear sides. Each of the T16 subrack, universal platform subrack, and 6800 subrack occupies one area, and the T32 subrack occupies two areas. A subrack is configured as optical or electrical subrack as required. To ensure efficient heat dissipation for equipment, the type (optical or electrical) and position of subracks deployed in an N66B cabinet must meet anticipated system requirements. The following describes how an optical and electrical subrack is defined. l


l

An optical subrack is used to hold OADM, multiplexer/demultiplexer, optical amplifier, OSC, optical spectrum analyzer, OLP (for optical line protection only), regeneration board, or OTU boards.

l

Universal platform subracks serve as optical subracks. Other types of subracks can serve as either electrical or optical subracks.

l

When an optical subrack has a board that consumes more than 40 W power on a per slot basis or the average board power of the subrack is greater than 30 W, the subrack is calculated as an electrical subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


20


2 Cabinet

Table 2-3 Typical configurations of the N66B cabinet assembly N Typica o l . Config uratio n

PDF Circuit Breaker

Maxi mum Power Consu mptio n of Integr ated Equip ment



1 1 x T64 +2x T32 + TN51P DU or DPD63 -8-8

Sixteen 63 A circuit breakers

10800 W

N66B cabinet Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear

2 1 x T64 +4x 6800 + 4x DCM + TN51P DU or DPD63 -8-8

Eight 63 A and eight 32 A circuit breakers

10800 W

l By default, one T64 electrical subrack is preinstalled in the N66B cabinet. In other areas of the cabinet, only optical subracks can be installed.

3 1 x T64 +4x T16 + 2 x DCM + TN16P DU or DPD63 -8-8


10000 W

4 1 x T64 +4x univers al platfor m subrack s+4x DCM + DPD63 -8-8


10800 W

Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4

Optical subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

T64 electrical subrack

Idle area

l Optical subracks must be installed below the electrical subrack with no vacant area left between the electrical subrack and adjacent optical subrack. In addition, the optical subracks must be configured from top to bottom and from front to rear.


21


N Typica o l . Config uratio n

PDF Circuit Breaker

2 Cabinet

Maxi mum Power Consu mptio n of Integr ated Equip ment



T64 and T32 subracks are classified into enhanced and general subracks. The requirements on configuring enhanced and general subracks are the same. A typically configured N66B cabinet assembly must have one OpitX OSN 8800 T64 subrack installed in the topmost subrack position. The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment cannot exceed the maximum power consumption.

NOTE

In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the formula: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W. Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the device under extreme conditions.

2.6 Cabinet Cables 2.6.1 Cabinet Alarm Indicator Cable One end of a cabinet alarm indicator cable is connected to the LAMP interface on an EFI board, and the other end of the cable has four connectors, each of which is connected to the alarm indicator interface at the top of a cabinet. Multiple subracks can be cascaded using straightthrough network cables to monitor the alarms of their subracks in a centralized manner.

Cabinet Alarm Indicator Cable Figure 2-3 shows a cabinet alarm indicator cable together with the appearance of the EFI front panel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


22


2 Cabinet

Figure 2-3 Cabinet alarm indicator cable Cabinet alarm indicator cable

PIN1 PIN2

PIN8 PIN1

2

RJ-45

Subrack indicator

1

Power indicator X2

Critical alarm indicator X3

LAMP on subrack

Major alarm indicator

X1 X4

Minor alarm indicator X5

1. Heat-shrink tubing

2. Common plug

Table 2-4 describes the pin connections of the cabinet alarm indicator cable connectors and their appropriate signals. Table 2-4 Pin connections and signals of the cabinet alarm indicator cable connectors Connector X1

Connectors X2, X3, X4 and X5

Color

Signal

X1.4

X2.2

White

Power indication

X1.5

X2.1

Green

X1.1

X3.2

White

X1.2

X3.1

Blue

X1.3

X4.2

White

X1.6

X4.1

Brown

X1.7

X5.2

White

X1.8

X5.1

Orange

Critical alarm

Major alarm

Minor alarm

Note: The letter m in Xm.n is used to distinguish connectors and the letter n is used to distinguish pins on a connector. For example, X1.2 indicates the second pin on connector X1.

Table 2-5 provides the technical parameters of the cabinet alarm indicator cable. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


23


2 Cabinet

Table 2-5 Technical parameters of the cabinet alarm indicator cable Parameter

Description

Connector X1

Network interface connector-8PIN-single row-single port-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector

Connector X2/X3/X4/X5

Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm (0.1 in.)

Cable model

Twisted pair cable -100Ω-SEYPVPV-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairs-black

Number of cores

8

Core diameter

0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

Multiple subracks can be cascaded using straight-through network cables to monitor the alarms of their subracks in a centralized manner. Figure 2-4 shows multiple subracks connected through straight-through network cables.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


24


2 Cabinet

Figure 2-4 Cable connections for centralized alarm monitoring of multiple subracks

Subrack indicator

Power indicator Critical alarm indicator Major alarm indicator Minor alarm indicator

LAMP2 Subrack 4 LAMP1 LAMP2 Subrack 3 LAMP1

Straight-through network cable LAMP2

Subrack 2 X2

LAMP1

X1

LAMP2

Subrack 1 LAMP1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


25


2 Cabinet

Table 2-6 describes the connector pin connections and colors of the straight-through network cable. Table 2-6 Connector pin connections and colors of the straight-through network cable Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

X1.1

X2.1

White/Orange

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.3

X2.3

White/Green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White/Blue

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

X1.7

X2.7

White/Brown

Note: The letter m in Xm.n is used to distinguish connectors and the letter n is used to distinguish pins on a connector. For example, X1.2 indicates the second pin on connector X1.

Table 2-7 provides the technical parameters of the straight-through network cable. Table 2-7 Technical parameters of the straight-through network cable

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Parameter

Description

Connector X1/X2

Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bitCrystal model connector

Cable model

Communication cable-8-core category-5 twisted pair-24AWG

Number of cores

8

Core diameter

0.5 mm (0.02 in.)


26


2 Cabinet

2.6.2 Cabinet Ground Power Cables One end of the cabinet ground power cables is connected to ground bar in the equipment room. The other end is connected to the ground bolts at the top of the cabinet.

Structure Figure 2-5 shows the structure of the cabinet ground cable. Figure 2-5 Structure of the cabinet ground cable 4

3

2

1

Connected to the cabinet X1

1. OT one-hole naked crimping connector

X2

Connected to the ground bar in the equipment room

2. Cable 3. Heat-shrink tubing 4. JG two-hole naked crimping connector

Technical Parameters Table 2-8 Technical parameters of the cabinet ground cable

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Parameter

Description

Connector X1

Naked Crimping Terminal, JG2, 16mm2, M6, 95A, Tin Plated

Connector X2

Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 16mm2, M8, Tin Plating, Naked Ring Terminal

Cable model

Wire, 450/750V, 60227 IEC 02(RV)16mm2, yellow green, 85A, With a package exempted from fumigating


27


2 Cabinet

2.6.3 Cabinet Door Ground Cables A cabinet door ground cable uses one OT one-hole naked crimping connector at each end. It connects the front door, rear door, or a side panel of the cabinet to the ground.

Structure Figure 2-6 shows the structure of the cabinet door ground cable. Figure 2-6 Structure of the cabinet door ground cable

1

X1

X2


Technical Parameters Table 2-9 Technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cable

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Parameter

Description

Connector X1/X2

Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2 (0.01 in. 2)-M6-Tin plating-Insulated ring terminal-12-10AWG

Cable model

Single Cable, PGND Feeder Cable, 0.35m, OT6-6, 10UL3386G, OT6-6, LSZH


28


3 Fiber Management Cabinet

3

Fiber Management Cabinet

Used with an N63B or N66B cabinet, a fiber management cabinet can enhance the fiber capacity of the N63B or N66B cabinet and make fiber installation and routing more flexible.

Appearance There are two types of fiber management cabinets: left-side fiber management cabinet and rightside fiber management cabinet. There are two types of fiber management cabinets: left-side fiber management cabinet and right-side fiber management cabinet. Fiber management cabinets can be used with an N63B or N66B cabinet, but cannot be used with an N63B-2m cabinet because the heights of the fiber management cabinet and N63B-2m cabinet are different. Fiber management cabinets are used together with N63B and N66B cabinets, as shown in Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


29



Figure 3-1 Fiber management cabinets used with the N63B cabinet

3 1 2

1. Left-side fiber management cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

2. Right-side fiber management cabinet


3. Fiber spool unit

30



Figure 3-2 Fiber management cabinets used with the N66B cabinet

2 1

3

4

1,3. Left-side fiber management cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

2,4. Right-side fiber management cabinet


31



Functions and features Table 3-1 lists the functions and features of a fiber management cabinet. Table 3-1 Functions and features Item

Description

Structure feature

l Fiber spool units in a fiber management cabinet can be adjusted based on device position in the cabinet. l A fiber management cabinet can protect fibers and meet the requirement for a minimum of 30 mm bending radius. l A fiber management cabinet makes fiber spooling more flexible.

Fiber capacity

Internal fiber capacity a

Without a fiber management cabinet b: 320 PCS With a fiber management cabinet c: 640 PCS

External fiber capacity a

Without a fiber management cabinet b: 720 PCS With a fiber management cabinet c: 1408 PCS

a: A fiber with a diameter of 2 mm is used as an example to calculate how many internal and external fibers that can be configured at most. An internal fiber is a fiber used inside a subrack or between subracks, and an external fiber is a fiber connecting one equipment cabinet to other equipment. b: Fibers in Overhead Cabling Mode can be configured at most. c: An N63B cabinet configured with left-side and right-side fiber management cabinets is used as an example to calculate how many internal and external fibers can be configured at most. Two fiber management cabinets can be installed on the left and right sides of one N66B cabinet. In this configuration, a maximum of 1280 internal and 2816 external fibers can configured.

Configuration Principle Left-side and right-side fiber management cabinets are installed to the left and right of a cabinet respectively. Fiber management cabinets can be used with N63B or N66B cabinet only. You can determine whether to configure a fiber management cabinet based on the required fiber capacity. Observe the following rules when configuring an 80-channel system (fibers with 2 mm diameters are used as an example): l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

When N63B cabinets are used, fiber management cabinets must be used for overhead cabling if more than 320 internal fibers and 720 external fibers are required.


32


l


When N66B cabinets are used, fiber management cabinets must be used for overhead cabling if more than 640 internal fibers and 1440 external fibers are required.

In addition, observe the following rules when configuring fiber management cabinets: l

For new network deployment or network expansion, or during network maintenance, fiber management cabinets can be configured if the free space on the two sides of a cabinet is large enough for users to flexibly and freely install and route fibers.

l

For underfloor cabling, fiber management cabinets must be used to manage external fibers because there is not much space left inside the cabinet after the external power cables are arranged in the cabinet. NOTE

l Left-side and right-side fiber management cabinets must be configured at the same time. l During cabinet expansion, spool internal fibers and external fibers in the fiber management cabinets.

Mechanical Specifications l

Outline dimensions: 150 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H) (5.9 in. (W) x 11.8 in. (D) x 86.6 in. (H))

l

Weight: 23 kg (50.7 lb)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


33



4

OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack

About This Chapter 4.1 Update Description This section describes the hardware updates in V100R006C01 and later versions as well as the reasons for the updates. Any product versions that are not listed in the document means that they have no hardware updates. 4.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack There are two types of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks: enhanced and general. Enhanced and general subracks are the same in appearance except for the bandwidth of the backplane and electrical cross-connect capacities. 4.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack There are two types of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks: enhanced and general. Enhanced and general subracks are the same in appearance except for the bandwidth of the backplane and electrical cross-connect capacities. 4.4 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack 4.5 OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack can be installed in an N63B, N66B, or 19-inch cabinet. The subrack has 16 service slots.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


34



4.1 Update Description This section describes the hardware updates in V100R006C01 and later versions as well as the reasons for the updates. Any product versions that are not listed in the document means that they have no hardware updates.



Added the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack.

The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack can be installed in an N63B, N66B, or 19-inch cabinet. The subrack has 16 service slots and its rated current is 60 A.

Added the application of the TN12LSX board in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

Function enhancement: The board function is enhanced according to market requirements.

Added the support for the TN52UXCH and TN52UXCM boards in the general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. The use of the two new boards increases the OTN crossconnect capacity of the subrack from 1.28 Tbit/s to 2.56 Tbit/s and supports grooming of 640 Gbit/s packet services.

Function enhancement: The general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has been improved to support the use of largecapacity service boards.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the support for the TN11LSQ, TN13LSX, TN11LOA, TN12LSC, TN12LOG, TN12TMX, TN11LTX, and TN12LDX boards in the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack.

Function enhancement: The OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack newly supports some OTU boards.


35



Hardware Update


Added the support for the centralized grooming of ODU4 signals on the TN16UXCM board and the application of 100G tributary and line boards, and improved the single-slot cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 to 100G.

Function enhancement: The subrack capacity is improved.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the N4BPA, N3EAS2, N1EGSH, N4SF64, N1SF64A, N4SFD64, N4SL64, N4SLD64, N3SLH41, N4SLO16, N4SLQ16, and N4SLQ64 boards in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

Function enhancement: The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 newly supports the TDM board.

Added the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 enhanced subrack.

The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has been enhanced to support the use of large-capacity service boards.

Added the OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack.

The OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack can be installed in an N63B or N66B cabinet. The subrack has 18 service slots and its rated current is 25 A.




36





Added the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 enhanced subrack.

The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has been enhanced to support the use of large-capacity service boards.



Changed information about the relationship between heat consumption and power consumption to the following: For the transport equipment, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) are similar and can be taken as the same. 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.

Information error correction.

4.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack There are two types of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks: enhanced and general. Enhanced and general subracks are the same in appearance except for the bandwidth of the backplane and electrical cross-connect capacities. In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T64" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks unless otherwise specified.

4.2.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Each subrack has independent power supply. Figure 4-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


37



Figure 4-1 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

1. Board area

2. Fiber cabling area

3. Fan tray assembly

4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


38



NOTE

Both the front and rear sides of a subrack have mounting ears and fiber spools. Install mounting ears and fiber spools on the rear side of a subrack only after the subrack has been installed into a cabinet. The figure illustrates only the front side. A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, and the one that is not identified by "Enhanced" is a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. These two types of subracks are displayed as OSN8800 T64 Enhanced and OSN8800 T64 Standard respectively on the U2000.

l

Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 93 slots are available.

l

Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack.

l

Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack. Each fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information.

l

Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.

l

Fiber spool: Rotable fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack.

l

Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.

4.2.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provide 93 slots. Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack are shown in Figure 4-2. Figure 4-2 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

PIU IU69

IU 4

IU 23

IU 5

IU 24

IU 6

IU 72

IU 73

IU 25

IU 26

IU 7

STG

SCC

IU75

IU74

IU 9

IU 10

IU 8

IU 27

IU 11

IU 28

IU 12

EF I1 IU 76

IU 77

IU 29

IU 30

IU 13

IU 14

PIU IU78

IU 31

IU 15

IU 32

IU 16

PIU IU79

IU 33

IU 17

IU 34

IU 18

PIU IU80

IU 53

IU 35

IU 54

IU 36

PIU IU81

IU 55

IU 37

IU 56

IU 38

IU90 FAN

STI IU82

IU 57

IU 39

IU 58

IU 40

A U X

A U X

IU 83

IU 84

IU 59

IU 60

IU 41

SCC

STG

IU85

IU86

Cross-connect board

IU 3

IU 22

A U X

Cross-connect board

IU 2

IU 21

A U X

Cross-connect board

IU 1

IU 20

EFI2 IU71

Back IU93 FAN

Cross-connect board

IU 19

PIU IU70

Front IU91 FAN

IU 43

IU 44

IU 42

ATE IU87

PIU IU88

PIU IU89

IU 61

IU 62

IU 63

IU 64

IU 65

IU 66

IU 67

IU 68

IU 45

IU 46

IU 47

IU 48

IU 49

IU 50

IU 51

IU 52

IU92 FAN

Paired slots For one-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 and IU2, slots IU3 and IU4, and so on. For two-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU2 and slots IU3 to IU4, slots IU5 to IU6 and slots IU7 to IU8, and so on. For four-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU4 and slots IU5 to IU8, slots IU11 to IU14 and slots IU15 to IU18, and so on.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


39


l


: houses service boards and supports service cross-connections.

l

Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes.

l

In a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, IU73 and IU84 are reserved for future use, and IU72 and IU83 are used to house AUX boards. In an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, IU72 and IU83 are used to house the active AUX boards, and IU73 and IU84 are used to house the standby AUX boards. NOTE

Only the TN52AUX board supports 1+1 backup in an enhanced subrack.

l

IU77 is reserved for future use.

l

IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the cross-connect board. – Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK2UXCT or TNK4XCT. – General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK4XCT or TNK2XCT.

l

IU10 and IU44 are reserved for the cross-connect board. – Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK2USXH, TNK4SXH or TNK4SXM. – General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: TNK4SXH, TNK2SXH, TNK4SXM or TNK2SXM.

l

The following table provides the slots for housing active and standby boards of the subrack. Board

Slots for Active and Standby Boards

PIU

l General OptiX 8800 T64: IU69 & IU78, IU70 & IU79, IU80 & IU88, and IU81 & IU89 l Enhanced OptiX 8800 T64: IU69 & IU89, IU70 & IU88, IU78 & IU81, and IU79 & IU80

SCC

IU74 & IU85

STG

IU75 & IU86

SXM/SXH/ USXH

IU10 & IU44

XCT/UXCT

IU9 & IU43

TN52AUX

Enhanced OptiX 8800 T64: IU72 & IU73, IU83 & IU84

4.2.3 Management Interfaces The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provides various communication and maintenance interfaces for the management and maintenance purposes, as shown in Table 4-1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


40



Table 4-1 Management interfaces Boar d

Interface

EFI2

ETH1

LAMP1

ETH2

LAMP2

TN5 1EFI 2

Front Panel

Specification

NM_ETH1

ETH3

Name

Conne ctor Type

Pino ut

Description

NM_E TH1/ ETH1/ ETH2/ ETH3: networ k manag ement interfac es

RJ45

Tabl e 4-2

NM_ETH1:

Tabl e 4-3

l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM server so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. ETH1-ETH3: l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 80 mm (3.1 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) l Weight: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb.) l Power consumption: Typical power consumption (W): 13 W Maximum power consumption (W)b: 15 W

NOTE When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication between the master and slave subracks.

l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


41


Boar d

Front Panel


Interface

Specification

Name

Conne ctor Type

Pino ut

Description

LAMP 1LAMP 2: subrac k alarm output/ cascadi ng interfac es

RJ45

Tabl e 4-5

Outputs single-subrack or multi-subrack alarms to the cabinet indicator interface to light the corresponding alarm indicators on the cabinet. NOTICE The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.

For information about the interface cables, see 2.6.1 Cabinet Alarm Indicator Cable. EFI1

NM_ETH2

TN5 1EFI 1a

SERIAL

NM_E TH2: networ k manag ement interfac e

RJ45

SERIA L: manag ement serial interfac e

DB9

Tabl e 4-2

Tabl e 4-4

NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.

The serial interface provides functions of serial NM and supports X.25 protocol.

l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 80 mm (3.1 in.) x 25.4 (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) l Weight: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb.) l Power consumption: Typical power consumption (W): 5 W Maximum power consumption (W)b: 7 W

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


42


Boar d

Interface

ATE

ALMI1

ALMI2

ALMO1

ALMO3

TN5 1AT E

Front Panel


Specification

ALMO4

ALMO2

Name

Conne ctor Type

Pino ut

Description

ALMO 1ALMO 4: housek eeping alarm output interfac es

RJ45

Tabl e 4-6

l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. The alarm outputs are controlled by the internal relay contact. When the relay contact is closed, the resistance of each ALMO interface is less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the resistance of each ALMO interface is an infinite number.

Tabl e 4-7

l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 80 mm (3.1 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) l Weight: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb.) l Power consumption: Typical power consumption (W): 0.3 W Maximum power consumption (W)b: 0.3 W

l The ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces have the same pin usage and are a pair of housekeeping alarm output/cascading interfaces. Similarly, the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces also have the same pin usage and are another pair of housekeeping output/ cascading interfaces. For example, when ALMO1 and ALMO3 are used to output housekeeping alarm signals, ALMO2 and ALMO4 can be cascaded to ALMO2 and ALM04 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 8800 provides for eight alarm outputs. By default, the first three alarm outputs

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


43


Boar d

Front Panel


Interface Name

Specification Conne ctor Type

Pino ut

Description

are defined as critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded. For information about the interface cables, see 33.2.1 Alarm Output Interface Cable.

TN5 2STI

STI

CLK2

CLK1

TOD2

TOD1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ALMI1 ALMI2 : housek eeping alarm input interfac es

RJ45

CLK1CLK2: clock signal input and output interfac es

RJ45

TOD1TOD2: time signal input and output interfac e

RJ45

Tabl e 4-8 Tabl e 4-9

Tabl e 4-10

Tabl e 4-10

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides for eight housekeeping alarm inputs. The user can manually configure the severity of the eight alarms for remote monitoring of external device alarms. For information about the interface cables, see 33.2.2 Alarm Input Interface Cable. CLK1/CLK2 interface can l Dimensions input or output clock signals. of front panel CLK1/CLK2 interface is (H x W x D): bidirectional. That is, they 80 mm (3.1 input and output signals at the in.) x 50.8 mm same time. (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or output time signals. For information about the interface cables, see 33.4 Clock/Time Cable.


l Weight: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb.) l Power consumption: Typical power consumption (W): 1.5 W Maximum power consumption (W)b: 1.5 W

44


Boar d

TNL 1STI

Front Panel


Interface

STI

Specification

CLK2

CLK1

TOD2

TOD1

PHONE

F1

Name

Conne ctor Type

Pino ut

Description

CLK1CLK2: clock signal input and output interfac es

RJ45

Tabl e 4-10

The two interfaces have the same functions as the CLK1 and CLK2 interfaces on the TN52STI board.

TOD1TOD2: time signal input and output interfac e

RJ45

Phone: orderw ire phone interfac e

RJ11

Tabl e 4-12

-

F1 interfac e

RJ45

Tabl e 4-13

-

l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 80 mm (3.1 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) l Weight: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb.)

Tabl e 4-10

The two interfaces have the same functions as the TOD1 and TOD2 interfaces on the TN52STI board.

l Power consumption: Typical power consumption (W): 3 W Maximum power consumption (W)b: 3 W

a: Two DIP switches are present on the TN51EFI1 board for setting the subrack ID. For details, see DIP Switches on the TN51EFI1 Board. b: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

DIP Switches on the TN51EFI1 Board The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


45



the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 4-3 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board. l

The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the CPLD.

l

When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

l

As shown in Figure 4-3, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.

Figure 4-3 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board

NM_ETH2

CPLD SERIAL

(ID5)

ON

(ID1)

ON

(ID6)

ON

(ID2)

ON

(ID7)

ON

(ID3)

ON

(ID8)

ON

(ID4)

ON

SW2

SW1 NOTE

Ensure that the ID6 to ID8 switches are turned on as shown in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-4 Mapping between DIP switch binary values and subrack IDs Subrack ID:1-15 SW1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Subrack ID

SW2

SW1

SW2

ON (ID5) ON (ID6) ON (ID7) ON (ID8)

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

1



ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

4

ON ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON ON ON ON


ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

7

ON ON ON ON


ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

10

ON ON ON ON


ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

13

Subrack ID

SW1

SW2

Subrack ID


2



3

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

5

ON(ID5) ON (ID6) ON (ID7) ON (ID8)

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

6

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)


8


ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

9

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)


11


ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

12



14


ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

15


46



Subrack ID:16-31 SW1

SW1

SW2

SW2

Subrack ID

SW1

SW2

Subrack ID



16



17



18



19

ON(ID5) ON(ID6) ON(ID7) ON(ID8)


20



21



22



23



24



25



26



27



28



29

ON(ID5) ON(ID6) ON (ID7) ON (ID8)


30



31

"EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or the subrack ID fails to be obtained.

Err or

Pin Assignment Figure 4-5 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Figure 4-6 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


47



Table 4-2 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP

NM communications, transmits the data positive

2

NM_ETNTXN

NM communications, transmits the data negative

3

NM_ETNRXP

NM communications, receives the data positive

4

NC

Not connected.

5

NC

Not connected.

6

NM_ETNRXN

NM communications, receives the data negative

7

NC

Not connected.

8

NC

Not connected.

Table 4-3 Pin assignment of the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH_TXP

Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications

2

ETH_TXN

Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications

3

ETH_RXP

Receives the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications

4

ETH_CRIT_TXP

Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications

5

ETH_CRIT_TXN

Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications

6

ETH_RXN

Receives the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications


48



Pin

Signal

Function

7

ETH_CRIT_RXP

Receives the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications

8

ETH_CRIT_RXN

Receives the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications

Table 4-4 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined

2

RXD

Receive end of data

3

TXD

Transmit end of data

4

DTR

Data terminal equipment ready

5

GND

Ground

6

-

Reserved

7

-

Reserved

8

GND

GND

9

N.C

Not defined

Table 4-5 Pin assignment of the LAMP1/LAMP2 interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP

Critical alarm signal positive

2

CRIT_ALMN

Critical alarm signal negative

3

MAJ_ALMP

Major alarm signal positive

4

RUNP

Power indicating signal positive

5

RUNN

Power indicating signal negative

6

MAJ_ALMN


7

MIN_ALMP

Minor alarm signal positive


49



Pin

Signal

Function

8

MIN_ALMN

Minor alarm signal negative

Table 4-6 Pin assignment of the ALMO1/ALMO2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP

Outputs the critical alarm signal positive

2

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN

Outputs the critical alarm signal negative

3

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP

Outputs the major alarm signal positive

4

MIN_SWITCH_OUTP

Outputs the minor alarm signal positive

5

MIN_SWITCH_OUTN

Outputs the minor alarm signal negative

6

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN

Outputs the major alarm signal negative

7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P

Alarm signal output 1 positive

8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N

Alarm signal output 1 negative

Table 4-7 Pin assignment of the ALMO3/ALMO4 interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P


2

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N


3

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P


4

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P


5

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N



50



Pin

Signal

Function

6

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N


7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N


Table 4-8 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN1

Alarm input 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN2

Alarm input 2

4

SWITCHI_IN3

Alarm input 3

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN4

Alarm input 4

8

GND

Ground

Table 4-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN5

Alarm input 5

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN6

Alarm input 6

4

SWITCHI_IN7

Alarm input 7

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN8

Alarm input 8

8

GND

Ground


51



Table 4-10 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

RJ0_E1_RX_N

2MHz/2Mbit input negative

2

RJ0_E1_RX_P

2MHz/2Mbit input positive

3

NC

Not connected

4

RJ0_E1_TX_N

2MHz/2Mbit output negative

5

RJ0_E1_TX_P

2MHz/2Mbit output positive

6

NC

Not connected

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Table 4-11 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

GND

Ground

2

GND

Ground

3

DCLS_IN0_N

1PPS negative

4

GND

Ground

5

GND

Ground

6

DCLS_IN0_P

1PPS positive

7

DCLS_OUT0_N

TOD negative

8

DCLS_OUT0_P

TOD positive

Table 4-12 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

NC

Not connected

2

NC

Not connected

3

NC

Not connected

4

RING

Signal 1

5

TIP

Signal 2

6

NC

Not connected


52



Pin

Signal

Function

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Table 4-13 Pin assignment of the F1 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

TX_P

Transmitting (+)

2

TX_N

Transmitting (-)

3

RX_P

Receiving (+)

4

NC

Not connected

5

NC

Not connected

6

RX_N

Receiving (-)

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

4.2.4 Cross-Connect Capacities The cross-connect capacity of a slot in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack vary according to the type of cross-connect board installed in the slot. OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 granularities at the same time. Slots IU1-IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45-IU68 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 4-14. Table 4-14 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack Subrack Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

CrossConnect Board

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slota ODUkb

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12e

ODUkb

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

Enhance d

USXH

N/A

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

Enhance d

USXH +UXCTc

100 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

6.4 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

Enhance d

SXH

N/A

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A


Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Subrack

53


Subrack Type


CrossConnect Board

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slota


ODUkb

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12e

ODUkb

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

Enhance d

SXM

N/A

20 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

1.28 Tbit/ s

80 Gbit/s

Enhance d

SXH +XCTc

40 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

2.56 Tbit/ s

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

Enhance d

SXM +XCTc

40 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

2.56 Tbit/ s

1.28 Tbit/ s

80 Gbit/s

General

SXH

N/A

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

General

SXM

N/A

20 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

1.28 Tbit/ s

80 Gbit/s

General

SXH +XCTd

40 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

N/A

2.56 Tbit/ s

1.28 Tbit/ s

N/A

General

SXM +XCTd

40 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

20 Gbit/ s

2.56 Tbit/ s

1.28 Tbit/ s

80 Gbit/s

a: In OptiX OSN 8800 T64 enhanced subrack, the maximum OTN service cross-connect capacity of a single slot can be smoothly increased from 40 Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s by replacing the cross-connect board. b: k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex. Only the USXH+UXCT supports ODU4 granularities. c: Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks must be configured with both the USXH and UXCT boards, the SXH and XCT boards or the SXM and XCT boards to cross-connect ODUk granularities. d: General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks must be configured with both the SXH and XCT boards or the SXM and XCT boards to cross-connect ODUk granularities. e: All service slots share a bandwidth of 80 Gbit/s. Two functional versions are available for SXH, SXM, and XCT boards: TNK2 and TNK4. The boards can be used in OptiX OSN 8800 T64 enhanced subrack only when they are of the TNK4 version.

4.2.5 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has four fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper fan tray assembly does not. The user can withdraw, clean, and replace each air filter.

Version Description Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


54



Functions and Features Table 4-15 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 4-15 Functions Function

Description

Basic function

Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range.

Commissioning control

l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed.

Section-dependent heat dissipation

Each subrack is divided into six sections to provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each section is independently regulated.

Hot swapping

Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.

Alarming

Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information.

Status checking

Checks and reports on the fan status.

Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack ventilates the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at an appropriate temperature. The fan tray assembly is located in the lower portion of a subrack. It draws in air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 4-7 shows how ventilation is performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


55



Figure 4-7 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Side view

Front

Air outlet

Air inlet

Back

Air outlet Fan

Fan

Fan

Fan

Air filter

Air filter

Air inlet

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 4-16. The sectiondependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode is recommended.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


56



Table 4-16 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each section is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal. If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at full speed. When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the query result.

Adjustable Speed Mode

Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode, the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a specific section.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack is divided into six partitions in terms of heat dissipation. See Figure 4-8.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


57



Figure 4-8 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack IU91

Front FAN2

FAN1

IU69

IU19 IU20

IU70

IU21

IU71

IU22 IU23

IU24

IU72

IU74

IU73

IU25 IU26

IU9

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

FAN3

IU75

IU79

IU76

IU77

IU27

IU28 IU29

IU30

IU31

IU32 IU33

IU34

IU11

IU12

IU13 IU14

IU15

IU16 IU17

IU18

IU78

IU10

IU8

IU50 FAN4

Partition 1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

FAN5

FAN6

Partition 2

Partition 3


IU90

58


4 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack IU93

Back FAN8

FAN7

IU80

IU81

IU53 IU54

IU55

IU82

IU56 IU57

IU58

IU83

IU84

IU85

IU59 IU60

FAN9

IU86

IU87

IU61

IU62 IU63

IU45

IU46

IU88

IU89

IU64

IU65

IU66 IU67

IU68

IU47 IU48

IU49

IU50 IU51

IU52

IU43 IU44

IU35 IU36

IU37 IU38

IU39 IU40

IU41 IU42

IU50 FAN10

Partition 4

FAN11

Partition 5

FAN12

Partition 6

IU92

NOTE

l If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days. l Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations: l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies. l One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies. l In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same section (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at the same speed.

The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control board. Figure 4-9 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


59



Figure 4-9 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly

l

FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly.

l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control board reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed. – Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.

Appearance Figure 4-10 shows a fan tray assembly. Figure 4-10 Fan tray assembly

3 SYSTEM

2

1

1. Air filter

2. Operating status indicators

3. Fans (three in total)

NOTE

An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


60



Valid Slots The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU90, IU91, IU92 and IU93 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.

Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 4-17 lists the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly. NOTE

For transport equipment, the heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered the same. Heat consumption is expressed in BTU/h and power consumption is expressed in W. The conversion between the two units is as follows: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.

Table 4-17 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item

Specification

Dimensions (H x W x D)

64.0 mm (2.5 in.) x 493.7 mm (19.4 in.) x 280.5 mm (11.0 in.)

Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 70 W l Medium-Low Speed: 95 W l Medium Speed: 150 W l Medium-High Speed: 225W l High Speed: 270W

a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 270 W.

4.2.6 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. Table 4-18 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. NOTE

For transport equipment, the heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered the same. Heat consumption is expressed in BTU/h and power consumption is expressed in W. The conversion between the two units is as follows: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W. Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the room temperature. Maximum power consumption indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in an environment with extreme conditions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


61



Table 4-18 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Item

Enhanced 8800 T64

General 8800 T64

Maximum subrack power consumptiona

9600 W

9600 W

Typical configuration power consumption (OTN)

6000 W

3700 W

Typical configuration power consumption (OCS)

2135 W

1748 W

a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the subrack. NOTE The NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value specified on the U2000 must match the actual power distribution capability.

Table 4-19 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Table 4-19 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit Name

Typical Power Consumption (W)a

Maximum Power Consumption (W)a

Remarks

OTU subrack 1

1804.6

2827.9

32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OTU subrack 2

1120

2011

4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, 4 x fan tray assembly

OTU electrical crossconnect subrack 1 (general subrack)

2172.7

2822.9

2 x XCT, 2 x SXH, 8 x NS3, 2 x SCC, 2 x STG, 8 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly


62



Unit Name



Remarks


1839.1

2776.7

2 x XCT, 2 x SXM, 20 x NQ2, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 5 x TOA, 5 x TQX, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OTU electrical crossconnect subrack (enhanced subrack)

4739

5681

2 x UXCT, 2 x USXH, 20 x TN58NS4(SDFEC2), 10 x TSC, 6 x TN55TTX, 5 x TN56TOX, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 1

964

1860

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 1 x SC2, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 2

1169

2077

1 x M40V, 1 x D40+1 x OAU1+1 x OBU1, 4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, 4 x fan tray assembly

OCS subrack (general subrack)

1748

2636

2 x SXM, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16, 4 x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

OCS subrack (enhanced subrack)

2135

3076

2 x USXH, 20 x SLD64, 8 x SLO16, 4 x SLQ16, 4 x SLH41, 4 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module. The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

4.2.7 Mechanical Specifications Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


63



Table 4-20 lists the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. Table 4-20 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Item

Specification

Dimensions

498 mm (W) × 580 mm (D) × 900 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) × 22.8 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))

Weight (empty subracka)

65 kg (143 lb.)

a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed.

4.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Subrack There are two types of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks: enhanced and general. Enhanced and general subracks are the same in appearance except for the bandwidth of the backplane and electrical cross-connect capacities. In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T32" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks unless otherwise specified.

4.3.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Each subrack has independent power supply. Figure 4-11 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


64



Figure 4-11 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack

OSN 8800 T32

Or OSN 8800 T32

3

6

5 1

2

3 4

1. Board area



4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

NOTE

A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, and the one that is not identified by "Enhanced" is an general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. These two types of subracks are displayed as OSN8800 T32 Enhanced and OSN8800 T32 Standard

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 50 slots are available. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65



l


l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate subrack status.

l


l


l


4.3.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack provide 50 slots. Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack are shown in Figure 4-12.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


66



Figure 4-12 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack IU51

AUX EFI2

EFI1

PIU

PIU

IU37

IU38

IU39

IU40

FAN

STG AUX

STG

IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44

PIU

PIU

IU45

IU46

STI IU47

ATE IU48

SCC

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU25

IU6

IU26 IU27

IU7

IU9

IU10

IU8

IU28 IU29

IU11 IU12

IU50

IU30 IU31

IU32

IU33

IU34 IU35

IU36

IU14 IU15

IU16

IU17 IU18

IU19

SCC or service board

IU2

IU23 IU24

Cross-connect board

IU1

IU22

Cross-connect board

IU20 IU21

IU13

FAN

Paired slots For one-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 and IU2, slots IU3 and IU4, and so on. For two-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU2 and slots IU3 to IU4, slots IU5 to IU6 and slots IU7 to IU8, and so on. For four-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU4 and slots IU5 to IU8, slots IU12 to IU15 and slots IU16 to IU19, and so on.

l


l


l

Slot IU43 in a general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is reserved for future use. Slot IU41 and slot IU43 in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack are used to house the active and standby AUX boards, respectively. NOTE

Only the TN52AUX board supports 1+1 backup in an enhanced subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


67



l

IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the cross-connect board: UXCH, UXCM, XCH or XCM

l



PIU

IU39 & IU45 and IU40 & IU46

SCC

IU28 & IU11

STG

IU42 & IU44

XCH/XCM/ UXCH/UXCM

IU9 & IU10

TN52AUX

Enhanced OptiX 8800 T32: IU41 & IU43

4.3.3 Management Interfaces The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 has the same management interfaces as the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. For details of these interfaces, see OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Management Interfaces.

4.3.4 Cross-Connect Capacities The cross-connect capacity of a slot in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack vary the type of crossconnect board installed in the slot. OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, VC-12 granularities and packet services at the same time. Slots IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 4-21. Table 4-21 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack Subr ack Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Cros sCon nect Boar d


Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Subrackc

ODU kb

VC-4

Packe tc

ODU kb

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

Packe tc

Enha nced

UXC H

100 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

50 Gbit/s

3.2 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

N/A

1.6 Tbit/s

Enha nced

UXC M

100 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

50 Gbit/s

3.2 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

80 Gbit/s

1.6 Tbit/s

Enha nced

XCH

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

N/A

N/A

Enha nced

XCM

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

80 Gbit/s

N/A

VC-3/ VC-12 d


68


Subr ack Type


Cros sCon nect Boar d


Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Subrackc

ODU kb

VC-4

Packe tc

ODU kb

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

Packe tc

Gene ral

UXC H

80 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

20 Gbit/s

2.56 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

N/A

640 Gbit/s

Gene ral

UXC M

80 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

2.56 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

80 Gbit/s

640 Gbit/s

Gene ral

XCH

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

N/A

N/A

Gene ral

XCM

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s

N/A

1.28 Tbit/s

1.28 Tbit/s

80 Gbit/s

N/A

VC-3/ VC-12 d

a: In enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the maximum OTN service cross-connect capacity of a single slot can be smoothly increased from 40 Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s by replacing the cross-connect board. In general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the maximum OTN service cross-connect capacity of a single slot can be smoothly increased from 40 Gbit/s to 80 Gbit/ s by replacing the cross-connect board. b: k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex. Only the UXCH or UXCM supports ODU4 granularities. c: Theoretically, the enhanced subrack supports grooming of a maximum of 1.6 Tbit/s packet services. In practice, however, the packet service grooming capability of the enhanced subrack is determined by packet boards. The current version provides a packet service grooming capability up to 1.28 Tbit/s. d: All service slots share a bandwidth of 80 Gbit/s.

4.3.5 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has two fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper fan tray assembly does not have an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.

Version Description Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.

Functions and Features Table 4-22 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


69



Table 4-22 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function

Description

Basic function




Partitioned heat dissipation

Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.

Hot swapping


Alarming


Status checking


Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 4-13 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


70



Figure 4-13 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Side view

Front

Air outlet Fan

Fan

Air inlet

Air filter

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 4-23. The sectiondependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode is recommended.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


71



Table 4-23 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each section is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal. If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at full speed. When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the query result.


Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode, the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a specific section.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is divided into three partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 4-14.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


72



Figure 4-14 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack FAN2

FAN1

IU37

IU20 IU21

IU38

IU39

IU22

IU23 IU24

IU40

IU25

IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44

IU26 IU27

IU9

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

FAN3

IU45

IU46

IU28 IU29

IU30 IU31

IU11 IU12

IU13

IU47

IU51

IU48

IU32

IU33

IU34 IU35

IU36

IU14 IU15

IU16

IU17 IU18

IU19

IU10

IU8

IU50 FAN4

Partition 1

FAN5

Partition 2

FAN6

IU50

Partition 3

NOTE

l If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days. l Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations: l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies. l One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies. l In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at the same speed.

The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control board. Figure 4-15 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


73




l


l



3 SYSTEM

2

1

1. Air filter


3. Fans (three in total)

NOTE

An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


74



Valid Slots The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU50 and IU51 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.




Specification


64.0 mm (2.5 in.) x 493.7 mm (19.4 in.) x 280.5 mm (11.0 in.)

Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 70 W l Medium-Low Speed: 95 W l Medium Speed: 150 W l Medium-High Speed: 225W l High Speed: 270W




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


75




Enhanced 8800 T32

General 8800 T32


4800 W

4800 W

Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OTN)

3300 W

2000 W

Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OCS)

1791 W

1282 W

a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the subrack. NOTE The NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value specified on the U2000 must match the actual power distribution capability. On the U2000, the default power consumption threshold of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is 4800 W. If a 30 A power supply is used, change the NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value to 2400 W.

Table 4-26 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Table 4-26 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit Name



Remarks

OTU subrack 1

1633.4

2254.6

32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTU subrack 2

928

1413

4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly


1641.6

2166.5

2 x XCH, 20 x NQ2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly


76


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Unit Name



Remarks


1670.3

2182.5

2 x XCH, 8 x NS3, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 2 x TQX, 5 x TOA, 2 x STG, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTU electrical crossconnect subrack (enhanced subrack)

2371

2820

2 x UXCH, 10 x TN58NS4 (SDFEC2), 2 x TSC, 8 x TN55TTX, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 1

792.5

1287.1

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 2

977

1479

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 4 x LSC (SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

290.3

706

4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OADM subrack

974

1497.2

2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 16 x LDX, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

378.2

811

2 x M40V, 2 x D40, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x RMU9, 2 x WSM9, 2 x OAU1, 2 x OBU1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

373.1

306.6

2 x M40, 2 x D40, 2 x WSMD9, 2 x DAS1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly


77


Unit Name




Remarks

OCS subrack 1282 (general subrack)

1755

2 x XCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16, 2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly

OCS subrack 1791 (enhanced subrack)

2321

2 x UXCM, 10 x SLQ64, 8 x SLO16, 2 x SLH41, 2 x EGSH, 2 x STG, 1 x STI, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray assembly


4.3.7 Mechanical Specifications Table 4-27 lists the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 equipment. Table 4-27 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Item

Specification

Dimensions

498 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 900 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))


35 kg (77.1 lb.)


4.4 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack 4.4.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. Each subrack has independent power supply. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


78



Figure 4-17 Structure of OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack (subrack door excluded)

6 1

2 3 4

1. Board area



4. Air filter

5. Fiber spool

6. Mounting ear

l

Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 24 slots are available.

l


l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information.

l


l


l


4.4.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack provide 25 slots. Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack are shown in Figure 4-18.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


79



Figure 4-18 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU20 PIU

IU19 EFI

IU21 AUX

IU22 AUX

IU 9

IU 1

IU 2

IU 3

IU 4

IU 5

IU 6

IU 7

IU24 ATE

IU 10

IU 8

IU 11

IU25

IU23 PIU

IU 12

IU 13

IU 14

IU 15

IU 16

IU 17

IU 18

FAN

Paired slots For one-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 and IU2, slots IU3 and IU4, and so on. For two-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU2 and slots IU3 to IU4, slots IU5 to IU6 and slots IU7 to IU8, and so on. For four-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU4 and slots IU5 to IU8, slots IU11 to IU14 and slots IU15 to IU18.

l


l


l

IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the TN16UXCM/TN16XCH/TN16SCC or for the other service boards. NOTE

Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions as a slave subrack. If slots IU9 and IU10 are used to house service boards, install a special filler panel in each slot first

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



AUX

IU21 & IU22

PIU

IU20 & IU23

TN16UXCM/ TN16XCH/ TN16SCC

IU9 & IU10


80



4.4.3 Management Interfaces The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack provides various communication and maintenance interfaces for the management and maintenance purposes, as shown in Table 4-28.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


81



Table 4-28 Management interfaces Bo ard

Interface

EFI ETH1

LAMP1

ETH2

LAMP2

SERIAL

TN 16E FIa

Front Panel

Specification

NM_ETH1

ETH3

NM_ETH2

Name

Con nect or Typ e

Pinou t

Description

NM_ETH 1/ NM_ETH 2/ETH1/ ETH2/ ETH3: network manageme nt interfaces

RJ4 5

Table 4-29

NM_ETH1-NM_ETH2:

Table 4-30

l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM server so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. ETH1-ETH3: l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 80 mm (3.1 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) l Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) l Power consumptio n: Typical power consumptio n: 2 W Maximum power consumptio nb: 2.5 W


l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


82


Bo ard

Front Panel


Interface

Specification

Name

Con nect or Typ e

Pinou t

Description

SERIAL: manageme nt serial interface

DB9

Table 4-31

The serial interface provides functions of serial NM and supports X.25 protocol.

LAMP1/ LAMP2: subrack alarm output/ cascading interfaces

RJ4 5

Table 4-32

Outputs single-subrack or multi-subrack alarms to the cabinet indicator interface to light the corresponding alarm indicators on the cabinet. NOTICE The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.

For information about the interface cables, see 2.6.1 Cabinet Alarm Indicator Cable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


83


Bo ard

Front Panel

Interface

ATE ALMI2

ALMI1

ALMO3

TOD2

ALMO4

ALMO1 ALMO2 CLK1 TOD1

CLK2

TN 16 AT E


Specification

Name

Con nect or Typ e

Pinou t

Description

ALMO1ALMO4: housekeep ing alarm output interfaces

RJ4 5

Table 4-33 Table 4-34

l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. The alarm outputs are controlled by the internal relay contact. When the relay contact is closed, the resistance of each ALMO interface is less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the resistance of each ALMO interface is an infinite number. l The ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces have the same pin usage and are a pair of housekeeping alarm output/cascading interfaces. Similarly, the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces also have the same pin usage and are another pair of housekeeping output/ cascading interfaces. For example, when ALMO1 and ALMO3 are used to output housekeeping alarm signals, ALMO2 and ALMO4 can be cascaded to ALMO2 and ALM04 on another subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 80 mm (3.1 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) l Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) l Power consumptio n: Typical power consumptio n: 0.2 W Maximum power consumptio nb: 0.3 W

84


Bo ard

Front Panel


Interface Name

Specification Con nect or Typ e

Pinou t

Description

l The OptiX OSN 8800 provides for eight alarm outputs. By default, the first three alarm outputs are defined as critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded. For information about the interface cables, see 33.2.1 Alarm Output Interface Cable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ALMI1ALMI2: housekeep ing alarm input interfaces

RJ4 5

Table 4-35 Table 4-36

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides for eight housekeeping alarm inputs. The user can manually configure the severity of the eight alarms for remote monitoring of external device alarms. For information about the interface cables, see 33.2.2 Alarm Input Interface Cable.

CLK1CLK2: clock signal input and output interfaces

RJ4 5

Table 4-37

CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output clock signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they input and output signals at the same time.

TOD1TOD2: time signal input and output interface

RJ4 5

Table 4-38

TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or output time signals. For information about the interface cables, see 33.4 Clock/Time Cable.


85


Bo ard

Front Panel


Interface Name

Specification Con nect or Typ e

Pinou t

Description

a: Two DIP switches are present on the TN16EFI board for setting the subrack ID. For details, see DIP Switches on the TN16EFI Board. b: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

DIP Switches on the TN16EFI Board The master and slave subracks are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the EFI. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-ID1, by which a maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 4-19 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI board. l

The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the T1.

l

When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

l

As shown in Figure 4-19, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.

Figure 4-19 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board

U8 SERIAL

SW2

NM_ETH2

SW1

T1

ON

ON

ON

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON

ON

ON

ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

SW1

SW2


86

ON (ID1) ON (ID2) ON (ID3) ON (ID4) ON (ID5) ON (ID6) ON (ID7) ON (ID8)


(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

ON (ID1) ON (ID2) ON (ID3) ON (ID4) ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON ON ON (ID5) ON (ID6) ON (ID7) ON (ID8)

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)



ON ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)


ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)


ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON


(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)



(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)

ON ON ON ON


(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


12 ON (ID5) ON (ID6) ON (ID7) ON (ID8)

87


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

15 14 13

9 8 7

11 10

6 5 4

3 2 1

Subrack ID SW2 SW1

Subrack ID SW2 SW1

Subrack ID SW2 SW1

4 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

NOTE

Ensure that the ID6 to ID8 switches are turned on as shown in Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-20 Mapping between DIP switch binary values and subrack IDs

Subrack ID:1-15


ON (ID1) ON (ID2) ON (ID3) ON (ID4) ON(ID5) ON (ID6) ON (ID7) ON (ID8)





ON (ID1) ON (ID2) ON (ID3) ON (ID4) ON(ID5) ON(ID6) ON(ID7) ON(ID8)






27 ON (ID1) ON (ID2) ON (ID3) ON (ID4) ON(ID5) ON (ID6) ON (ID7) ON (ID8)





Err or ON (ID5) ON (ID6) ON (ID7) ON (ID8)


31


30 29 28

88


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

22

26 25

24 23

21 20 19

18 17 16

Subrack ID SW2 SW1

Subrack ID SW1 SW2

Subrack ID SW2 SW1

4 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

Subrack ID:16-31

Pin Assignment

Figure 4-21 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

.




1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Table 4-29 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP


2

NM_ETNTXN


3

NM_ETNRXP


4

NC

Not connected.

5

NC

Not connected.

6

NM_ETNRXN


7

NC

Not connected.

8

NC

Not connected.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH_TXP


2

ETH_TXN



89



Pin

Signal

Function

3

ETH_RXP


4

ETH_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH_RXN


7

ETH_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH_CRIT_RXN


Table 4-31 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined

2

RXD

Receive end of data

3

TXD


4

DTR


5

GND

Ground

6

-

Reserved

7

-

Reserved

8

GND

GND

9

N.C

Not defined


90



Table 4-32 Pin assignment of the LAMP1/LAMP2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP


2

CRIT_ALMN


3

MAJ_ALMP


4

RUNP


5

RUNN


6

MAJ_ALMN


7

MIN_ALMP


8

MIN_ALMN



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP


2

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN


3

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP


4

MIN_SWITCH_OUTP


5

MIN_SWITCH_OUTN


6

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN


7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N



91




Signal

Function

1

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P


2

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N


3

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P


4

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P


5

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N


6

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N


7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N



Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN1

Alarm input 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN2

Alarm input 2

4

SWITCHI_IN3

Alarm input 3

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN4

Alarm input 4

8

GND

Ground

Table 4-36 Pin assignment of the ALMI2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN5

Alarm input 5


92



Pin

Signal

Function

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN6

Alarm input 6

4

SWITCHI_IN7

Alarm input 7

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN8

Alarm input 8

8

GND

Ground

Table 4-37 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

RJ0_E1_RX_N


2

RJ0_E1_RX_P


3

NC

Not connected

4

RJ0_E1_TX_N


5

RJ0_E1_TX_P


6

NC

Not connected

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Table 4-38 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

GND

Ground

2

GND

Ground

3

DCLS_IN0_N

1PPS negative

4

GND

Ground

5

GND

Ground

6

DCLS_IN0_P

1PPS positive

7

DCLS_OUT0_N

TOD negative


93



Pin

Signal

Function

8

DCLS_OUT0_P

TOD positive

4.4.4 Cross-Connect Capacities OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, ODU4, ODUflex, VC-4, VC-3, VC-12 granularities and packet services at the same time. Slots IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU18 provide the same cross-connect capacity. As shown in Table 4-39. Table 4-39 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack Cross Conn ect Boar d

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slot ODU ka

VC-4

TN16 XCH

40 Gbit/s

TN16 UXC M

100 Gbit/s


VC-3/ VC-12b

Pack etc

ODUka

VC-4

VC-3/ VC-12

Packet

N/A

N/A

N/A

640 Gbit/ s

N/A

N/A

N/A

40 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/ s

50 Gbit/s

1.6 T Gbit/s

640 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/ s

800 Gbit/s

c

a: k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex. Only the TN16UXCM supports ODU4 granularities. b: All service slots share a bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s. c: Theoretically, the subrack supports grooming of a maximum of 800 Gbit/s packet services. In practice, however, the packet service grooming capability of the subrack is determined by packet boards. The current version provides a packet service grooming capability up to 640 Gbit/s. The maximum OTN service cross-connect capacity of each slot can be expanded from 40 Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s by replacing the cross-connect boards in the subrack.

4.4.5 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.


Functions and Features Table 4-40 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


94




Description

Basic function





Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.

Hot swapping


Alarming


Status checking


Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 4-23 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


95



Figure 4-23 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system Side view Front Air outlet

Fan Air inlet

Air filter

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 4-41. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default. Table 4-41 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans in each partition fails, the other fan runs at full speed.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


96



FAN Speed Mode

Description


Five fan speed modes are available: Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 4-24. Figure 4-24 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack IU20 PIU

IU19 EFI

IU21 AUX

IU9 IU 1

IU 2

A

IU 3

IU 4

IU 5

IU 6

B

IU 7

IU23 PIU

IU22

IU24 ATE

IU10

IU 8

C

IU

IU

IU

IU

11

12

13

14

D

IU 15

IU 16

E

IU 17

IU 18

Fan tray assembly

In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. NOTE

l If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure longterm operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days. l Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.

The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control board. Figure 4-25 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


97




l


l


Appearance Figure 4-26 shows a fan tray assembly. Figure 4-26 Fan tray assembly 3

2

SYSTEM

1 1. Air filter


3. Fans (ten in total)

NOTE

An air filter is installed on the fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


98



Valid Slots The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.




Specification

Dimensions

493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))

Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 42.7 W l Medium-Low Speed: 74.8 W l Medium Speed: 106.8 W l Medium-High Speed: 165.5 W l High Speed: 215 W




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


99




Specification


2400 W

Typical configuration power consumption (OTN)

700 W

Typical configuration power consumption (OCS)

821 W

a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the subrack. NOTE The NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value specified on the U2000 must match the actual power distribution capability.

Table 4-44 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an 8800 T16. Table 4-44 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit Name

Typical Power Consumptio n (W)a

Maximum Power Consumptio n (W)a

Remarks

OTU subrack 1

509.2

615.6

8 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OTU subrack 2

846

1104

4 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OTU electrical cross-connect subrack 1

501

808

5 x NQ2, 2 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly


779.9

1021

2 x XCH, 4 x NS3, 2 x PIU, 1 x TTX, 1 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly


941

1145

2 x UXCM, 4 x TN58NS4(SDFEC2), 2 x TSC, 2 x TN55TTX, 2 x AUX, 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly


100



Unit Name



Remarks

OTM subrack 1

468.7

569.7

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 6 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OTM subrack 2

546

785

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 2 x LSC(SDFEC2), 2 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

228.1

294.3

4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 2 x FIU, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OADM subrack

449.5

561.5

2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 2 x FIU, 8 x LSX, 1 x SC2, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

221

269.2

1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x WSMD9, 1 x DAS1, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

821

1109

2 x UXCM, 4 x NS3, 2×PIU, 5 x SLQ64, 4 x SLO16, 1 x SLH41, 1 x EGSH, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OCS subrack


4.4.7 Mechanical Specifications Table 4-45 lists the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack. Table 4-45 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Specification

Dimensions

498 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 450 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 17.7 in. (H)) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101



Item

Specification


18 kg (39.6 lb.)


4.5 OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack can be installed in an N63B, N66B, or 19-inch cabinet. The subrack has 16 service slots.

4.5.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack. The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack can operate with an independent DC or AC power supply. A universal platform subrack supports two mounting options: ETSI cabinet mounting and 19-inch rack mounting. Figure 4-27 shows the structure of the subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


102



Figure 4-27 OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack structure diagram

1. LAMP TEST Button

2. Indicator/Interface area

3. RESET Button

4. SubRACK_ID LED indicator

5. Board area



8. Air filter

9. Mounting ear

10. Fiber spool

NOTE

The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.

l

LAMP TEST button: tests whether the indicators on the subrack are normal. After you press the button, all the indicators should be lit. It has the same function as the LAMP TEST button on the SCC board.

l

Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack and EFI board software.

l

RESET button: warm resets the EFI board.

l

SubRack_ID LED indicator: displays the master/slave relationships between subracks when multiple subracks are cascaded. It has the same function as the subrack ID LED on

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


103



the front panel of the SCC board. "0" indicates that the subrack housing the SCC board is the master subrack, "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or the subrack ID fails to be obtained, and other values indicate slave subracks. For the meanings of other values displayed on the LED, see DIP Switches on the TN18EFI Board. l

Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 18 slots are available.

l


l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains eight fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack.

l


l


l


l

The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management interface, intersubrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, network management interface, alarm input and output interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.

4.5.2 Slot Description The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack provides 20 slots. Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 4-28.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


104



Figure 4-28 Slots of the subrack (DC power)

IU21 EFI



IU1

IU2

PWR CRI MAJ MIN STAT PROG

IU17 PIU

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

IU8

IU18 IU9 IU10 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 PIU

Fiber cabling area IU19 Fan Paired slots

Mutual backup

For one-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 and IU2, slots IU3 and IU4, and so on. For two-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU2 and slots IU3 to IU4, slots IU5 to IU6 and slots IU7 to IU8, and so on. For four-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU4 and slots IU5 to IU8, slots IU9 to IU12 and slots IU13 to IU16.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


105



Figure 4-29 Slots of the subrack (AC power)

IU21 EFI



IU1

IU2

PWR CRI MAJ MIN STAT PROG

APIU

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

IU8

IU9 IU10 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15

APIU

Fiber cabling area IU19 Fan Paired slots

Mutual backup

For one-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 and IU2, slots IU3 and IU4, …, slots IU13 and IU14. For two-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU2 and slots IU3 to IU4, slots IU5 to IU6 and slots IU7 to IU8, slots IU9 to IU10 and slots IU11 to IU12. For four-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU4 and slots IU5 to IU8.

: houses service boards. Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. l

When a universal platform subrack serves as a master subrack, the subrack can be provisioned with two or one SCC board. – When two SCC boards are provisioned, they are in mutual backup and are inserted in slots IU1 and IU2. – When only one SCC board is provisioned, it can be inserted in either slot IU1 or IU2. When the SCC board is inserted in slot IU1, slot IU2 can be used to hold a service board. When the SCC board is inserted in slot IU2, slot IU1 cannot be used to hold a service board.

l

When the universal platform subrack serves as a slave subrack, the SCC board cannot be configured. In this case, slots IU1 and IU2 are used to hold service boards. NOTE

The IEEE 1588v2 function is not supported by all services boards or ST2 boards in slots 3 and 4 in an OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


106



4.5.3 Management Interfaces The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack uses the TN18EFI boards to provide various communication and maintenance interfaces for the management and maintenance purposes. There are two types of the TN18EFI boards, which have the same functions but different network interface quantities and DIP switches. l

Type A – Panel schematic diagram:

– Network management interface: NM_ETH/ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 – DIP switches: eight DIP switches within the board l

Type B – Panel schematic diagram:

– Network management interface: NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2/ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 – DIP switches: five DIP switches on the board panel Table 4-46 shows the communication and maintenance interfacesmaintenance purposes.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


107



Table 4-46 Management interfaces Boar d

Front Panel

Interface/Button/LED Name

Conn ector Type

Pino ut

Description

TN18 EFIa

See the previous figures.

NM_ETH/ NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2/ ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3: network management interfaces

RJ45

Table 4-47

NM_ETH/NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2:

Table 4-48

l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM server so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.

Specificatio n

l Dimension s of front panel: (H x W x D): 28 mm (1.10 in.) x 428 mm (16.85 in.) x 287 mm (11.30 in.)

ETH1-ETH3:

l Weight: 1.17 kg (2.58 lb.)

l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

l Power consumpti on: Typical power consumpti on: 12 W


Maximum power consumpti onb: 13 W

l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board. See Network Management for more information.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


108


Boar d

Front Panel



Conn ector Type

Pino ut

Description

LAMP1LAMP2: subrack alarm output/ cascading interfaces

RJ45

Table 4-49

Outputs single-subrack or multisubrack alarms to the cabinet indicator interface to light the corresponding alarm indicators on the cabinet.

Specificatio n

NOTICE The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


109


Boar d

Front Panel



Conn ector Type

Pino ut

Description

ALMO1ALMO2: housekeeping alarm output interfaces

RJ45

Table 4-50


Specificatio n

l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. For example, if ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2 can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack provides four alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other one are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded. For information about interface cables, see 33.2.1 Alarm Output Interface Cable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


110


Boar d

Front Panel



Conn ector Type

Pino ut

Description

ALMI1: housekeeping alarm input interface

RJ45

Table 4-51

External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring. The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack provides four alarm inputs. The severity of the four alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms.

Specificatio n

For information about the interface cable, see 33.2.2 Alarm Input Interface Cable. SubRACK_ID : subrack ID indicator

-

-

The LED displays the master/slave relationships between subracks. This subrack ID LED has the same function as that on front panel of the SCC board. l "0" indicates that the subrack housing the EFI board is the master subrack, l "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or the subrack ID fails to be obtained. l Other values indicate slave subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 4-32.

LAMP TEST button

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

-

Tests whether the indicators on the subrack are normal. After you press the button, all the indicators should be lit. It has the same function as the LAMP TEST button on the SCC board.


111


Boar d

TN12 STG

Front Panel

STG STAT ACT PROG SRV

TOD

CLK



Conn ector Type

Pino ut

Description

RESET button

-

-

Used to perform a warm reset on the EFI board. After a warm reset of the board, FPGA of the board is not updated, and the configuration data in the memory of the board remains the same.

IN: clock signal input interface

SMB

-

OUT: clock signal output interface

SMB

-

CLK: clock signal input and output interface

RJ45

Table 4-52

The CLK port and the IN/OUT port cannot be used as the input or output port at the same time. If the CLK port is used to input or output clock signals, the IN/OUT port cannot be used to input/output clock signals. If the IN/OUT port is used to input/ output clock signals, the CLK port cannot be used to input or output clock signals.

TOD: time signal input and output interface

RJ45

Table 4-53

For information about the interface cables, see 33.4 Clock/Time Cable.

IN

Specificatio n

l Dimension s of front panel: 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) l Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) l Power consumpti on: Typical power consumpti on: 8.7W Maximum power consumpti onb: 9.6W

OUT

STG

a: Two DIP switches are present on the TN16EFI board for setting the subrack ID. For details, see DIP Switches on the TN18EFI Board. b: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


112



DIP Switches on the TN18EFI Board The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack supports the master/slave subrack management mode. When this mode is used, the ID of each subrack must be set by using two DIP switches on the EFI board. DIP switches within the board (type A): Figure 4-30 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI board. l

The TN18EFI board has a set of eight DIP switches. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID5-ID1. Each DIP switch can be used to set a binary digit, 0 or 1. When the DIP switch is toggled to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

l

A maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. As shown in Figure 4-30, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.

Figure 4-30 Position of the DIP switches within the board (type A)

ON ON ON ON

(ID8) (ID7) (ID6) (ID5)

ON

SW1

SW2

ON ON ON

(ID4) (ID3) (ID2) (ID1)

DIP switches on the board panel (type B): Figure 4-31 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI board. l

The TN18EFI board has a set of five DIP switches whose IDs are ID1-ID5 from the lower bit to the higher bit. Each DIP switch can be used to set a binary digit, 0 or 1. When the DIP switch is toggled to 0, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. DIP switches must be toggled to the topmost or the bottommost. Otherwise, the subrack ID cannot be intuitively identified.

l

A maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. As shown in Figure 4-31, the value

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


113



represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1. Figure 4-31 Position of the DIP switches on the board panel (type B)

NM_ETH1 ALMI1

ALMO1

ALMO2

NM_ETH2 ID5 ID4

1

ID3ID2ID1

0

ID5 ID4

ID3 ID2 ID1 1 0

Figure 4-32 shows the mapping between the DIP switch binary values and subrack IDs.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


114



Figure 4-32 Mapping between DIP switch binary values and subrack IDs DIP ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

Subrack ID

1

DIP ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

Subrack ID

2

0

0

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

5

0

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1

9

0

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

6

1

13

0

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

10

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

14


17

0


18

0 ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1

1

21

0

1

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

22

25

26

1 0

29

1 0

11

30

4

8

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

12

0

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

15

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

16

0

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

19

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

20

0 ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1

1

23

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

24

0


27

1 0


ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1


0



0

1

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

Subrack ID

0

1


0

7

0

0


ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

0

1

DIP

0

0

0

1

3

0

0


ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1

Subrack ID

0

0

1

DIP

1

28

0

ID ID ID ID ID 5 4 3 2 1 1 0

31

"EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or Err the subrack ID or fails to be obtained.

NOTE

When DIP switches are within the board, ON indicates bit 0. ID6-ID8 are reserved. You must keep the default setting, as shown in Figure 4-30.

When it is the first time that the EFI board is installed in an OSN 8800 universal platform subrack or when the changed subrack ID is the same as the previous subrack ID, the subrack_ID LED on the SCC and EFI boards will display the newly specified subrack ID. If the newly specified subrack differs from the previous subrack ID, the subrack_ID LED on the SCC and EFI boards will alternately display the previous subrack ID and the EE value. When this occurs, determine whether the newly specified subrack ID is correct. If it is correct, powercycle all the PIU/APIU boards inside the subrack to make it take effect. If it is incorrect, configure the DIP switches again to recover the previous subrack ID.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


115




8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .

Table 4-47 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH/NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP


2

NM_ETNTXN


3

NM_ETNRXP


4

NC

Not connected.

5

NC

Not connected.

6

NM_ETNRXN


7

NC

Not connected.

8

NC

Not connected.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH_TXP


2

ETH_TXN



116



Pin

Signal

Function

3

ETH_RXP


4

ETH_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH_RXN


7

ETH_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH_CRIT_RXN



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP


2

CRIT_ALMN


3

MAJ_ALMP


4

RUNP


5

RUNN


6

MAJ_ALMN


7

MIN_ALMP


8

MIN_ALMN



117




Signal

Function

1

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP


2

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN


3

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP


4

MIN_SWITCH_OUTP


5

MIN_SWITCH_OUTN


6

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN


7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N



Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN1

Alarm input 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN2

Alarm input 2

4

SWITCHI_IN3

Alarm input 3

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN4

Alarm input 4

8

GND

Ground

Table 4-52 Pin assignment of the CLK interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

RJ0_E1_RX_N



118



Pin

Signal

Function

2

RJ0_E1_RX_P


3

NC

Not connected

4

RJ0_E1_TX_N


5

RJ0_E1_TX_P


6

NC

Not connected

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Table 4-53 Pin assignment of the TOD interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

GND

Ground

2

GND

Ground

3

DCLS_IN0_N

1PPS negative

4

GND

Ground

5

GND

Ground

6

DCLS_IN0_P

1PPS positive

7

DCLS_OUT0_N

TOD negative

8

DCLS_OUT0_P

TOD positive

4.5.4 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes eight independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and replaced.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


119



Functions and Features Table 4-54 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function

Description

Basic function

Dissipates the heat generated by an subrack so that the subrack can operate normally within the designated temperature range.




Each subrack is divided into four partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.

Hot swapping

Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.

Alarming


Status checking


Working Principle A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Figure 4-34 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


120



Figure 4-34 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system Side view Front Air outlet

Fan Air inlet

Air filter

The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 4-55. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode. Table 4-55 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

There are four areas (A, B, C, and D) in each subrack. The boards in the areas overlap and the heat generated by the overlapped boards is dissipated to the two areas where they are located. Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. When one fan becomes faulty, the other fan in the same area adjusts the fan speed based on the temperature reported by the board. When two fans become faulty, all the remaining fans run at full speed.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


121



FAN Speed Mode

Description


Six fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack is divided into four partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 4-35. Figure 4-35 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack PWR CRIT MAJ MIN STAT PROG

I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U U 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

A

B IU22

I U 1 1

I U 1 2

I U 1 3

I U 1 4

C

I U 1 5

P I U

I U 1 6 P I U

D

Fan Tray Assembly

There are four areas (A, B, C, and D) in each subrack. The boards in the areas overlap and the heat generated by the overlapped boards is dissipated to the two areas where they are located so that the heat of the two areas is automatically regulated. Two fans in each area dissipate heat generated by the boards in the area where the fans are located.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


122



NOTE

l Area A: houses service boards in slots IU1 to IU5. l Area B: houses service boards in slots IU5 to IU9. l Area C: houses service boards in slots IU9 to IU13. l Area D: houses service boards in slots IU13 to IU16 and PIU (DC power) / IU13 to IU15 and APIU (AC power). NOTE

l

If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days.

l

Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.

The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control board. Figure 4-36 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Figure 4-36 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly

l


l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control board reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same area to adjust the fan speed based on the temperature reported by the board. – Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


123




3

CAUTION Hazardous moving parts,keep fingers and other body parts away.

严禁在风扇旋转时接触扇叶！ PULL FAN PULL

2

1

1. Air filter


3. Fans (eight in total)

NOTE


Valid Slots One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU19.

Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 4-56 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack fan tray assembly. NOTE



Specification

Dimensions

442 mm (W) x 279 mm (D) x 47 mm (H) (17.40 in. (W) x 10.98 in. (D) x 1.85 in. (H))

Weight

3.4 kg (7.5 lb)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 35 W l Medium-Low Speed: 43 W l Medium Speed: 68 W l Medium-High Speed: 134 W l High Speed: 190 W

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


124



Item

Specification


4.5.5 DC Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications Table 4-57 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack. NOTE


Table 4-57 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack. Item

Value

Maximum subrack power consumption

2400 W

NOTE The NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value specified on the U2000 must match the actual power distribution capability. The default power consumption threshold of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack is 1200 W and maps to a 30 A power supply. If a 60 A power supply is used, change the NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value on the U2000 to 2400 W.

Table 4-58 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack. Table 4-58 DC Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit Namea

Typical Power Consumpt iona

Maximu m Power Consump tiona

Remarks

Electr ical relay

809.8

965.2

8 x NO2, 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly

Subrack 1


125



Unit Namea

Typical Power Consumpt iona

Maximu m Power Consump tiona

Remarks

subra ck

Subrack 2

893

1077

8 x TN58NS4 (SDFEC2), 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly

OTM subra ck

Subrack 1

845

1029

4 x TN15LTX (SDFEC), 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly

Subrack 2

1363.2

1617.4

7 x LSC (SDFEC2), 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly

Subrack 3

169.8

353.9

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU101, 1 x OBU103, 1 x FIU, 1 x SC1, 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

144.9

314.7

2 x OAU101, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, fan tray assembly

ROA DM subra ck (4 x dime nsion s)b

175

351.3

1 x WSMD4, 1 x DAS1, 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 2 x PIU, 1 x EFI, and fan tray assembly

2378

3000.5

OTM subrack1, OTM subrack2, and OTM subrack3

Subrack

OTM cabinet

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module. The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. b: At the ROADM site, it is recommended to deploy one subrack per direction. This table assumes that the four directions are configured identically and provides only the reference configurations for one direction.

4.5.6 AC Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack AC power consumption specifications. Table 4-59 describes the AC power consumption of a universal platform subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


126



NOTE


Table 4-59 Maximum AC power consumption of the universal platform subrack Item

Value


220 V (Input voltage) : 1800 W 110 V (Input voltage) : 1400 W

a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the subrack.

Table 4-60 describes the power consumption of the universal platform subrack with typical configurations. Table 4-60 Power consumption of the universal platform subrack with typical configurations

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit Name

Typical Power Consumpt ion (W)a

Maximum Power Consump tion (W)a

Remarks

Elect rical relay subra ck

Subra ck 1

942

1109

8 x NO2, 2 x APIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly

Subra ck 2

1025

1221

8 x TN58NS4 (SDFEC2), 2 x APIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly

OTM subra ck

Subra ck 1

977

1173

4 x LTX (SDFEC), 2 x APIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly

Subra ck 2

971

1184

4 x LSC (SDFEC2), 2 x APIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly

Subra ck 3

319

510

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU101, 1 x OBU103, 1 x FIU, 1 x SC1, 2 x APIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, and fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

285

459

2 x OAU101, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x APIU, 1 x EFI, 2 x SCC, fan tray assembly


127



Unit Name

Typical Power Consumpt ion (W)a

Maximum Power Consump tion (W)a

Remarks

ROADM subrack (4 x dimensions)b

313

491

1 x WSMD4, 1 x DAS1, 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 2 x APIU, 1 x EFI, and fan tray assembly

OTM cabinet

2267

2867

OTM subrack1, OTM subrack2, and OTM subrack3

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module. The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. b: Subrack 1 and subrack 2 are used as subracks in the line dimensions at a four-dimension RADOM station; subrack 3 and subrack 4 are used as subracks for adding/dropping local services. Service boards can be configured in another subrack.

4.5.7 Mechanical Specifications Table 4-61 lists the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack. Table 4-61 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack Dimensions

Specification

Dimensions

442 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 397mm (H) (17.4 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 15.6 in. (H))

Weight (empty subrack)

8 kg (41.89 lb.)

a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly is installed.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


128


5

5 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category

OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category

The following types of boards are available for the system. Optical transponder unit, see Table 5-1. OTN Tributary unit, see Table 5-2. OTN Line unit, see Table 5-3. General Service Processing Board, see Table 5-4. Universal Line Board, see Table 5-5. Packet Service Unit, see Table 5-6. PID unit, see Table 5-7. Submarine board, see Table 5-8. Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit, see Table 5-9. Fixed optical add and drop multiplexing unit, see Table 5-10. Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, see Table 5-11. Optical amplifier unit, see Table 5-12. Cross-connect unit and system and communication unit, see Table 5-13. Optical supervisory channel unit, see Table 5-14. Optical protection unit, see Table 5-15. Spectrum analyzer unit, see Table 5-16. Variable optical attenuator unit, see Table 5-17. Dispersion compensation unit, see Table 5-18. Clock unit, see Table 5-19. TDM unit, see Table 5-20. Interface area unit, see Table 5-21. Fan, see Table 5-22. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


129



ROPA subsystem unit, see Table 5-23. Table 5-1 Boards for optical transponder unit Board Name

Board Description

General 8800 T64 Subrack

Enhanc ed 8800 T64 Subrack



8800 Univers al Platform Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack

TN12L DM

2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11L DMD

2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN11L DMS

2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12L DX

2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11L EM24

22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet switch board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN11L EX4

4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet switch board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN11L OA

8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11L OG

8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12L OG TN11L OM TN12L OM

8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


130



Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN13L QM

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN12L QMD

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12L QMS

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12L SC

100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13L SC

100 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN15L SC


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN17L SCM


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11L SQ


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12L SX

10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN14L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN12L SXL


TN15L SXL TN12L SXLR

40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


131



Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11L SXR


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11L TX

10-Port 10 Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN15L TX

10-Port 10G bit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11L WX2

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/ s-2.7Gbit/s) dualwavelength conversion board

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN11L WXS

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/ s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN12L WXS

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/ s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11T MX

4 channels STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12L TX

TN12T MX

Table 5-2 Boards for OTN tributary unit Board Name

Board Description


Enhanced 8800 T64 Subrack



8800 Universal Platform Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack

TN52TD X

2 x 10G tributary service

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


132



Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN53TD X

processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54TE M28

24xGE +4x10GE Ethernet tributary unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54TH A

16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54TO A

8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN52TO G

8 x GE tributary service processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN52TO M

8 x multi-rate ports service processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN55TO X

8 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

N

Y

Y

Y

N

Y


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN56TO X TN52TQ X TN53TQ X TN55TQ X TN54TS C

100 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

TN53TS XL

40 Gbit/s tributary service

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


133



Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN54TS XL

processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54TT X


N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

TN55TT X


N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

Table 5-3 Boards for OTN line unit Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN12ND 2

2 x 10G line service processing board

N

N

N

N

only supports relay mode

N

Y

Y

Y

Y


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y


Y

Y

Y


Y

TN52ND 2 TN53ND 2 TN52NQ 2 TN53NQ 2

4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

TN54NQ 2 TN55NO 2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


134



Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN52NS 2

10G Line Service Processing Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Y

TN55NS 3

Y

Y

Y

Y


Y

TN56NS 3

Y

Y

Y

Y


Y

TN53NS 2 TN52NS 3 TN54NS 3

TN54NS 4



Y


Y


Y

TN56NS 4



Y

Y

Y


Y

TN57NS 4



Y


Y


Y

TN58NS 4



Y


Y


Y

TN54NS 4M


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


135



Table 5-4 General Service Processing Board Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN54GS 4

100G General Service Processing Board

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

Table 5-5 Boards for universal Line Board Boar d Nam e

Board Description





8800 Universa l Platform Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack

TN54 HUN Q2

4 x 10G Universal Line Service Processing Board

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54 HUN S3

40G Universal Line Service Processing Board

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

Table 5-6 Boards for packet service unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN54 EG16

16-port gigabit ethernet packet switch board

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

TN55 EG16

16-port gigabit ethernet packet switch board

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54 EX2

2 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


136



Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN54 EX8

2 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54 PND 2

2 x 10G bit/s packet switch line board

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

Table 5-7 Boards for PID unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN54 ENQ 2


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54 NPO 2

12 x OTU2 PID board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN55 NPO 2

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN55 NPO 2E

10G PID line Y service processing board, 20– channel extended

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN54 NPS4

1x100G PID Line Service Processing Board

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

TN54 NPS4 E

1x100G PID Line Service Processing Board, Extended

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


137



Table 5-8 Boards for Submarine unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN96 NS4

100G line service processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN96 OBU 1

C-band Optical Booster Unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN96 WSD 9

9-port flexible wavelength selective demultiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN96 WSM 9

9-port wavelength selective multiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Table 5-9 Boards for optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11 D40

40-channel demultiplexing unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 D40 V

40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN11 M40

40-channel multiplexing unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12 D40

TN12 M40 TN11 M40 V

40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA

TN12 M40 V Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


138



Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN12 FIU

fiber interface unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

interleaver board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13 FIU TN14 FIU TN15 FIU TN16 FIU TN11 ITL TN12 ITL TN11 SFIU

fiber interface unit for sync timing

Table 5-10 Board for fixed optical add and drop multiplexing unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11 CMR 2

CWDM 2channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 CMR 4

CWDM 4channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 DMR 1

CWDM 1channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


139



Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11 MR2

2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 MR4


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 MR8


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11 MR8 V

8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

2-channel CWDM singlefiber bidirectional add/ drop board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN12 MR8 V TN11 SBM 2

Table 5-11 Boards for reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11 RDU 9

9-port ROADM demultiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

9-port ROADM multiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12 RDU 9 TN11 RMU 9a

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


140



Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11 ROA M

reconfigurable optical adding board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12 TD20

20-ports Tunable Demultiplexing Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 TM2 0 TN13 TM2 0

20-ports Wavelength Tunable Multiplexing Board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12 WSD 9

9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13 WSD 9


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN16 WSD 9


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN17 WSD 9


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


141



Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN12 WSM 9

9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13 WSM 9


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN16 WSM 9


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN17 WSM 9


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 WSM D2

2-port wavelength selective multiplexer and demultiplexer board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11 WSM D4


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN12 WSM D4


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


142



Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN13 WSM D4


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN17 WSM D4


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 WSM D9

9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12 WSM D9


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN15 WSM D9


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

a: For TN11RMU9: OptiX OSN 8800 T16 only supports the TN11RMU902.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


143



Table 5-12 Boards for optical amplifier unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description

SSN4 BPA





8800 T16 Subrack

optical booster Y and pre-amplifier board

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN11 CRP C

case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 DAS 1

optical amplifier unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 HBA

high-power booster amplifier board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 OAU 1


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12 OAU 1


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13 OAU 1


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 OBU 1

optical booster unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12 OBU 1


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13 OBU 1


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 OBU 2


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN12 OBU 2


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



144



Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN13 OBU 2


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN14 OBU 2


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 RAU 1

backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical amplifier unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12 RAU 1


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 RAU 2


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12 RAU 2


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Table 5-13 Boards for cross-connect unit and system and communication unit Board Name

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN16XC H

High Crossconnection, System Control and Clock Processing Board

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


145


Board Name

Board Description

TNK2SX M






8800 T16 Subrack

OptiX OSN Y 8800 T64 centralized cross Y connect board

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

TN52UX CH

3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

TN52XC H

OptiX OSN N 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board

N

Y

Y

N

N

TN52UX CM


N

N

Y

Y

N

N

TN52XC M

Cross & connect process board (Support highcross and lowcross)

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

TNK2U XCT


N

Y

N

N

N

N

TNK2X CT


N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

TN16UX CM

1.6T Universal Cross Connect, System Control and Clock Processing Board

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TN16SC C

system control and communication unit

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

TNK4SX M

TNK4X CT

TN51SC C TN52SC C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



146


Board Name


Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TN51AU X

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN52AU X

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TNK2SC C TN16AU X

system auxiliary interface board

TNK2US XH


N

Y

N

N

N

N

TNK2SX H


N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

TNK4SX H

Table 5-14 Boards for optical supervisory channel unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11 HSC1

high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12 HSC1


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12 SC1

unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


147



Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN12 SC2

bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 ST2 TN12 ST2

bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13 ST2

Table 5-15 Boards for optical protection unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11 DCP

Optical protection unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN12 DCP

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13 DCP

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN12 OLP

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13 OLP

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 OLP

optical line protection unit

TN11 QCP

Optical protection unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 SCS

sync optical channel separator unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


148



Table 5-16 Boards for spectrum analyzer unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11 MCA 4

4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 MCA 8


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 OPM 8

8-channel optical power monitoring board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN12 OPM 8 TN11 WM U

wavelength monitoring unit

Table 5-17 Boards for variable optical attenuator unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN12 VA1

1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN13 VA1 TN12 VA4 TN13 VA4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


149



Table 5-18 Boards for dispersion compensation unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11 DCU

dispersion compensation board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 TDC

singlewavelength tunabledispersion compensation board

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Table 5-19 Boards for clock unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN12 STG

centralized clock board

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN52 STG


N

N

Y

Y

N

N

TN54 STG


N

N

Y

Y

N

N

TNK 2STG


Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Table 5-20 Boards for TDM unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

SSN3 EAS2

2-port 10xGE switching and processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


150



Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

SSN1 EGS H

16 x GE Ethernet switching and processing board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4 SF64

1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN1 SF64 A


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4 SFD6 4


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4 SL64

1 x STM-64 optical interface board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4 SLD6 4


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN3 SLH4 1

16 x STM-4/ STM-1 optical interface board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4 SLO1 6


Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4 SLQ1 6

4xSTM-16 optical interface board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

SSN4 SLQ6 4

4 x STM-64 line interface board

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


151



Table 5-21 Boards for the interface area unit Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN16 ATE

interface board of alarm & timing & expanding

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

EMI filter interface board

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TN51 EFI1

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN51 EFI2

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN18 EFI

N

N

N

N

Y

N

synchronous timing interface board

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

power interface unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN16 PIU

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN18 PIU/ TN18 APIU

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN51 ATE TN16 EFI

TNL1 STI TN52 STI TN51 PIU

Table 5-22 Boards for Fan Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN51 FAN

Fan

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


152



Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN16 FAN

Fan

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TN18 FAN

Fan

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Table 5-23 Boards for ROPA subsystem unita Boar d Nam e

Board Description






8800 T16 Subrack

TN11 GFU

gain flatness unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 RGU

ROPA gain unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 ROP

ROPA pumping unit

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

a: For details of the ROPA subsystem unit refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


153



6


About This Chapter 6.1 Update Description This section describes the hardware updates in V100R007C00 and later versions as well as the reasons for the updates. Any product versions that are not listed in the document means that they have no hardware updates. 6.2 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has an independent power supply. 6.3 Slot Description The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right. 6.4 Management Interfaces 6.5 Cross-Connect Capacities 6.6 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced. 6.7 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. 6.8 Mechanical Specifications

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


154








6.2 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has an independent power supply. Figure 6-1 shows the structure of the subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


155



Figure 6-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram

1 7 2 6 3 4 5

1. Indicator and interface area

2. Board area



5. Air filter

6. Fiber spool

7. Mounting ear

NOTE

The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.

l

Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.

l

Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 21 slots are available.

l

Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. The mechanical VOA is also installed in this area.

l

Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack.

l

Air filter: The air filter protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.

l


l


l

Interface area: The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


156



6.3 Slot Description The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right. Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 6-2. Figure 6-2 Slots of the subrack IU23 SCC or service board

XCS XCS

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

IU8

IU9

IU19 PIU SCC

IU10 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17 IU18

IU20 PIU

IU21 AUX

VOA area IU22

FAN

Paired slots

Mutual backup

For one-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 and IU2, slots IU3 and IU4, and so on. For two-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU2 and slots IU3 to IU4, slots IU5 to IU6 and slots IU7 to IU8, and so on. For four-slot boards, the paired slots must be configured as follows: slots IU1 to IU4 and slots IU5 to IU8, slots IU9 to IU12 and slots IU13 to IU16.

l


l

IU15 and IU16 are also available for the STG.

l

Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. OptiX OSN 6800 supports pair slots. – At a site where OSC signals pass through, two OSC boards must be configured in paired slots. – When line boards or OTU boards function as regeneration boards, ESC signals need to pass through the boards. In this scenario, the two line boards or OTU boards must be configured in paired slots. – Paired slots among slots IU1 to IU8 and IU11 toIU16 support distributed service grooming. NOTE

The IEEE 1588v2 function is not supported by all services boards or ST2 boards in slots 15 and 16 in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


157



6.4 Management Interfaces The OptiX OSN 6800 subrack provides various communication and maintenance interfaces for the management and maintenance purposes, as shown in Table 6-1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


158




Front Panel

NM_ETH1

TN 11 AU X TN 12 AU X

NM_ETH2 ETH1 ETH2

a

STAT PROG

AUX

Interface Name

Conn ector

Pin Assign ment

Description

NM_ETH1 / NM_ETH2 /ETH1/ ETH2: network manageme nt interfaces

RJ45

Table 6-2

NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2:

Table 6-3

l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 through a network cable to that on the U2000 server to achieve the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. l Connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. ETH1/ETH2: l Connects the ETH1/ ETH2 interface on one subrack through a network cable to such interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Specificatio n

TN11AUX: l Dimension s of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) l Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) l Power consumpti on: Typical power consumpti on: 12 W Maximum power consumpti onb: 17 W TN12AUX: l Dimension s of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) l Weight: 0.46 kg (1.01 lb.)

159


Bo ard

Front Panel


Interface Name

Conn ector

Pin Assign ment

Description

Specificatio n

l Power consumpti on: Typical power consumpti on: 11.5 W Maximum power consumpti onb: 12.4 W

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


160


Bo ard

Front Panel

TN 11E FI


Interface Name

Conn ector

Pin Assign ment

Description

ETH3: network manageme nt interfaces

RJ45

Table 6-3

The ETH3 interface has the same functions as the ETH1 and ETH2 interfaces.

SERIAL: manageme nt serial interface

DB9

LAMP1LAMP2: subrack alarm output/ cascading interfaces

RJ45


Table 6-4

Table 6-5

The serial interface provides functions of serial NM and supports X.25 protocol. Outputs single-subrack or multi-subrack alarms to the cabinet indicator interface to light the corresponding alarm indicators on the cabinet. NOTICE The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.

Specificatio n

l Dimension s of front panel: 320 mm (W) x 70.3 mm (D) x 20 mm (H) (12.6 in. (W) x 2.8 in. (D) x 0.8 in. (H)) l Weight: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb.) l Power consumpti on: Typical power consumpti on: 8 W Maximum power consumpti onb: 8.8 W


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


161


Bo ard

Front Panel


Interface Name

Conn ector

Pin Assign ment

Description

ALMO1ALMO4: housekeepi ng alarm output interfaces

RJ45

Table 6-6


Table 6-7

Specificatio n

l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/ cascading, respectively. The definitions for the pins of the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/ cascading, respectively. For

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


162


Bo ard

Front Panel


Interface Name

Conn ector

Pin Assign ment

Description

Specificatio n

example, if ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2 can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded. For information about interface cables, see 33.2.1 Alarm Output Interface Cable. ALMI1ALMI2: housekeepi ng alarm input interfaces

RJ45

Table 6-8 Table 6-9

External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm inputs. The severity of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms. For information about the interface cables, see 33.2.2 Alarm Input Interface Cable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


163


Bo ard

TN 11S TG TN 12S TG

Front Panel

STG STAT ACT PROG SRV


Interface Name

Conn ector

Pin Assign ment

Description

COM: debug interface

RJ45

-

This interface is intended only for Huawei engineers to commission the equipment at the factory.

IN: clock signal input interface

SMB

-

OUT: clock signal output interface

SMB

-

CLK: clock signal input and output interface

RJ45

Table 6-10

TOD: time signal input and output interface

RJ45

The CLK port and the IN/OUT port cannot be used as the input or output port at the same time. If the CLK port is used to input or output clock signals, the IN/ OUT port cannot be used to input/output clock signals. If the IN/ OUT port is used to input/output clock signals, the CLK port cannot be used to input or output clock signals.

TOD

CLK

IN

Table 6-11

For information about the interface cables, see 33.4 Clock/Time Cable.

Specificatio n

l Dimension s of front panel: 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) l Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) l Power consumpti on: Typical power consumpti on: 8.7W Maximum power consumpti onb: 9.6W

OUT

STG

a: Two DIP switches are present on the TN11AUX/TN12AUX board for setting the subrack ID. For details, see 25.15.8 Switch and Jumper. b: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


164




8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .


1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Table 6-2 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

NM_ETNTXP


2

NM_ETNTXN


3

NM_ETNRXP


4

NC

Not connected.

5

NC

Not connected.

6

NM_ETNRXN



165



Pin

Signal

Function

7

NC

Not connected.

8

NC

Not connected.

Table 6-3 Pin assignment of the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETH_TXP


2

ETH_TXN


3

ETH_RXP


4

ETH_CRIT_TXP


5

ETH_CRIT_TXN


6

ETH_RXN


7

ETH_CRIT_RXP


8

ETH_CRIT_RXN


Table 6-4 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

N.C

Not defined

2

RXD

Receive end of data

3

TXD



166



Pin

Signal

Function

4

DTR


5

GND

Ground

6

-

Reserved

7

-

Reserved

8

GND

GND

9

N.C

Not defined

Table 6-5 Pin assignment of the LAMP1/LAMP2 interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_ALMP


2

CRIT_ALMN


3

MAJ_ALMP


4

RUNP


5

RUNN


6

MAJ_ALMN


7

MIN_ALMP


8

MIN_ALMN



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP


2

CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN


3

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP


4

MIN_SWITCH_OUTP



167



Pin

Signal

Function

5

MIN_SWITCH_OUTN


6

MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN


7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N



Signal

Function

1

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P


2

ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N


3

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P


4

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P


5

ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N


6

ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N


7

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P


8

ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N


Table 6-8 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN1

Alarm input 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN2

Alarm input 2


168



Pin

Signal

Function

4

SWITCHI_IN3

Alarm input 3

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN4

Alarm input 4

8

GND

Ground

Table 6-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWITCHI_IN5

Alarm input 5

2

GND

Ground

3

SWITCHI_IN6

Alarm input 6

4

SWITCHI_IN7

Alarm input 7

5

GND

Ground

6

GND

Ground

7

SWITCHI_IN8

Alarm input 8

8

GND

Ground

Table 6-10 Pin assignment of the CLK interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

RJ0_E1_RX_N


2

RJ0_E1_RX_P


3

NC

Not connected

4

RJ0_E1_TX_N


5

RJ0_E1_TX_P


6

NC

Not connected

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected


169



Table 6-11 Pin assignment of the TOD interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

GND

Ground

2

GND

Ground

3

DCLS_IN0_N

1PPS negative

4

GND

Ground

5

GND

Ground

6

DCLS_IN0_P

1PPS positive

7

DCLS_OUT0_N

TOD negative

8

DCLS_OUT0_P

TOD positive

6.5 Cross-Connect Capacities Integrated Grooming When using the XCS board, an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack can cross-connect ODU1, ODU2,ODU2e, 10GE, and GE services between any two slots among slots IU1-IU8 and slots IU11-IU16. Figure 6-5 provides the cross-connect capacity for each slot. Figure 6-5 Cross-connect capacities of slots

IU1

IU2

IU3

IU4

IU5

IU6

IU7

IU8

IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16

IU9 IU10


XCS XCS

IU19 PIU SCC

IU17 IU18

IU20 PIU

IU21 AUX

VOA area Fan

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


170



Table 6-12 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 6800 subrack Cro ssCon nect Boa rd

Slot

TN1 2XC S

TN1 1XC S

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Each Slot


ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/10GE

GE

40 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

180 Gbit/s GE

20 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

360 Gbit/s ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/10GE

Not supported

Not supported

Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 360 Gbit/s.

20 Gbit/s

10 Gbit/s

140 Gbit/s GE 280 Gbit/s ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/10GE

Not supported

Not supported

Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 280 Gbit/s.

Distributed Grooming An OptiX OSN 6800 subrack provides pairs of slots. GE/Any/ODU1/OTU1 services can be cross-connected between paired slots. No XCS board is required when paired slots are used to cross-connect electrical services. The paired slots IU9 and IU10 do not support distributed service grooming.

6.6 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.


Functions and Features Table 6-13 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


171




Description

Basic function

Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range.




Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.

Hot swapping

Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.

Alarming


Status checking


Working Principle Air flow from the subrack is bottom intake top exhaust. Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7 show the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 6-6 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system Side view Front Air outlet

Fan Air inlet

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Air filter


172



Figure 6-7 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Side view

Front

Air outlet

Fan

Air inlet

Air filter

NOTE

If multiple subracks are used, an air duct deflector is required to help in heat dissipation.

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 6-14. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode. Table 6-14 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed. l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans in each partition fails, the other fan runs at full speed.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


173



FAN Speed Mode

Description


Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.

Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 6-8. Figure 6-8 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack

I U 1 9 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I U 2 1 1

2

A

3

4

B

5

C

6

7

D

VOA

8

E

Fan Tray Assembly

There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. NOTE

l

If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days.

l

If two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies, replace the fan tray assembly immediately.

The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control board. Figure 6-9 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


174




l


l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control board reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at full speed. – Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.


3

2

1

1. Air filter

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



3. Fans (ten in total)

175



NOTE



Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 6-15 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 fan tray assembly. NOTE


Table 6-15 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly (OptiX OSN 6800) Item

Specification

Dimensions


Weight

3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 40 W l Medium Speed: 60 W l High Speed: 120 W


6.7 Power Consumption This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications. Table 6-16 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


176



NOTE


Table 6-16 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 6800 Item

Value

Maximum subrack power consumption

1350 W

NOTE The NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value specified on the U2000 must match the actual power distribution capability.

Table 6-17 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 6800

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit Name



Remarks

OTM subra ck

Subrack 1

566

722.2

17 x 10G OTU (LSX), 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

Subrack 2

168.7

281.6

1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU101, 1 x OBU103, 1 x FIU, 1 x SC1, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

Subrack 3

691.6

850

10 x ND2, 2 x TQX, 2 x TOG, 2 x XCS, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

OLA subrack

144.9

253.9

2 x OAU101s, 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

FOADM subrack

292.3

418.3

2 x OAU101, 2 x VA4, 2 x OBU103, 2 x MR4, 4 x 10G OTU (LSX), 2 x FIU, 1 x SC2, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

ROA DM subra ck (2

87.4

96.4

1 x M40, 1 x D40, 2 x WSMD2, 2 x DAS1, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

Subrack 1


177



Unit Name



Remarks

x dime nsion s)

Subrack 2

566

722.2

17 x 10G OTU (LSX), 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

ROA DM subra ck (4 x dime nsion s)b

Subrack

160

268.8

1 x WSMD4, 1 x DAS1, 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x SCC, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly

1422.2

1951.1

2 x OTU subrack and 1 x OTM subrack 2

OTM cabinet (40x10 Gbit/s)

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module. The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. b: At the ROADM site, it is recommended to deploy one subrack per direction. This table assumes that the four directions are configured identically and provides only the reference configurations for one direction.

6.8 Mechanical Specifications Table 6-18 lists the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack. Table 6-18 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 Item

Specification

Dimensions

497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 400 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 15.7 in. (H))


13 kg (28.6 lb.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


178


7



The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 7-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 6800. Table 7-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

Optical transponder unit

TN11ECOM

Enhanced communication interface unit

TN11L4G

Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity

TN11LDGS

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving

TN11LDGD

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

TN12LDM


TN11LDMD


TN11LDMS


TN12LDX


TN11LEM24

22×GE + 2×10GE and 2×OTU2 ethernet switch board

TN11LEX4

4×10GE and 2×OTU2 ethernet switch board

TN11LOA


TN11LOG


TN12LOG TN11LOM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



179


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

TN12LOM TN11LQG

4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board

TN13LQM


TN11LQMD


TN12LQMD TN11LQMS TN12LQMS

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving

TN12LSC


TN17LSCM


TN11LSQ


TN11LSX


TN12LSX TN13LSX TN14LSX TN11LSXL


TN12LSXL TN15LSXL TN11LSXLR


TN12LSXLR TN11LSXR


TN11LTX

10-Port 10Gbit/s Service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board

TN12LTX TN11LWX2

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

TN11LWXD

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

TN11LWXS

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

TN12LWXS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


180



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

TN11TMX

4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board

TN12TMX OTN Tributary unit

TN11TBE

10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board

TN11TDG


TN11TDX

2 x 10G tributary service processing board

TN12TDX TN52TDX TN53TDX TN52TOG


TN11TOM


TN52TOM TN11TQM

4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board

TN12TQM TN11TQS

4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board

TN11TQX


TN52TQX TN55TQX

OTN Line unit

TN11TSXL

40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

TN11ND2


TN12ND2 TN52ND2 TN53ND2 TN51NQ2


TN52NQ2 TN53NQ2 TN11NS2


TN12NS2 TN52NS2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


181


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

TN53NS2 TN11NS3

40G line service processing board

TN52NS3

NOTE The TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports relay mode.

TN54NS3 TN55NS3 PID unit

Submarine Board

Cross-connect unit and system and communicatio n unit

TN11BMD4

PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz

TN11BMD8

PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz

TN12ELQX

4×Electrical OTU2 with 4×10G Tributary Board

TN12PTQX

12× OTU2 PID board with 4×10G Tributary

TN96OBU1

C-band Optical Booster Unit

TN96WSD9

9-port flexible wavelength selective demultiplexing board

TN96WSM9

9-port wavelength selective multiplexing board

TN11XCS

centralized cross connect board

TN12XCS TN11SCC


TN51SCC TN52SCC TN11AUX


TN12AUX Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit

TN11M40

40-channel multiplexing unit

TN12M40 TN11D40

40-channel demultiplexing unit

TN12D40 TN11M40V

40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA

TN12M40V TN11D40V

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA


182


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

TN11FIU


TN12FIU TN13FIU TN14FIU TN15FIU TN16FIU TN11ITL

interleaver board

TN12ITL

Fixed optical add and drop multiplexing unit

TN11SFIU


TN11CMR2

CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

TN11CMR4


TN11DMR1

CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board

TN11MR2


TN11MR4


TN11MR8


TN11MR8V

8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

TN12MR8V

Reconfigurabl e optical add and drop multiplexing unit

TN11SBM2

2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board

TN11RDU9 TN12RDU9

9-port ROADM demultiplexing board

TN11RMU9

9-port ROADM multiplexing board

TN11ROAM

reconfigurable optical adding board

TN12TD20

20-ports Tunable Demultiplexing Board

TN11TM20 TN13TM20

20-ports Wavelength Tunable Multiplexing Board

TN11WSD9


TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9 TN16WSD9 TN17WSD9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


183


Board Category


Board Name

Board Description

TN11WSM9


TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9 TN16WSM9 TN17WSM9 TN11WSMD2


TN11WSMD4


TN12WSMD4 TN13WSMD4 TN17WSMD4 TN11WSMD9 TN12WSMD9


TN15WSMD9 Optical amplifier unit

TN11CRPC

case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band

TN11DAS1


TN11HBA

high-power booster amplifier board

TN11OAU1


TN12OAU1 TN13OAU1 TN11OBU1


TN12OBU1 TN13OBU1 TN11OBU2 TN12OBU2


TN13OBU2 TN14OBU2 TN11RAU1 TN12RAU1


TN11RAU2 TN12RAU2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


184



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

Optical supervisory channel unit

TN11HSC1


TN12HSC1 TN11SC1

unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

TN12SC1 TN11SC2


TN12SC2 TN11ST2 TN12ST2


TN13ST2 Optical protection unit

TN11DCP

2-channel optical path protection unit

TN12DCP TN13DCP TN11OLP


TN12OLP TN13OLP

Spectrum analyzer unit

TN11QCP


TN11SCS


TN11MCA4


TN11MCA8


TN11OPM8


TN12OPM8

Variable optical attenuator unit

TN11WMU

wavelength monitoring unit

TN11VA1


TN12VA1 TN13VA1 TN11VA4


TN12VA4 TN13VA4 Dispersion equalizing unit

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

TN11DCU


TN11TDC

single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board


185



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

Clock unit

TN11STG


TN12STG ROPA subsystem unita

TN11GFU

gain flatness unit

TN11RGU

ROPA gain unit

TN11ROP

ROPA pumping unit

Interface area unit

TN11EFI

EMI filter interface board

TN11PIU


Fan

TN11FAN

Fan

a: For the details of the ROPA subsystem unit, refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


186



8

OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis

About This Chapter 8.1 Update Description This section describes the hardware updates in V100R007C00 and later versions as well as the reasons for the updates. Any product versions that are not listed in the document means that they have no hardware updates. 8.2 Chassis Structure The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short). 8.3 Slot Description The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right. 8.4 Management Interfaces 8.5 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis has one fan tray assembly, which includes six independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced. 8.6 AC Power Consumption This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on AC power. 8.7 DC Power Consumption This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on DC power. 8.8 Mechanical Specifications

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


187






Added the TN12LSC, TN13LSC, TN11LTX, and TN12LTX boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 that uses the DC power supply.

Function enhancement: The OptiX OSN 3800 supports 100G coherent boards.

Changed the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3800 that uses the DC power supply to 420 W.

Function enhancement: The maximum power can be increased to meet the power requirement of 100G boards.

Added the maintenance blinking function for the OptiX OSN 3800.

Function enhancement: The maintenance blinking function identifies the physical position of the board to be maintained, facilitating board maintenance.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update




Added the support for the LEM24 board on the OptiX OSN 3800.

Function enhancement: The OptiX OSN 3800 supports the EoW board LEM24.


188



8.2 Chassis Structure The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short). The chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with an independent DC or AC power supply and can be installed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet, a standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet, or a 19 and 23-inch open rack. Figure 8-1 shows appearance of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Figure 8-1 OptiX OSN 3800 chassis

5 1 4 2

3

1. Grounding connector

2. Fiber frame

3. Board area

4. Antistatic jack

5. Fan indicator

l

Ground connector: Access the ground cables.

l

Fiber frame: Fiber jumpers in the service board area are routed through the fiber frame.

l

Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. In total, 11 slots are available.

l

Antistatic jack: The ESD strap is in this area.

l

Fan indicator: The fan indicator indicates the status of the fans.

8.3 Slot Description The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right. Slots of the chassis are shown in Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


189



Figure 8-2 Slots of the chassis (DC power)

IU1 IU12 FAN

Paired slots

IU11

IU6/PIU

IU2

IU7/PIU

IU3

IU8/SCC

IU4

IU9/SCC

IU5

IU10/AUX

Mesh group

Mutual backup

Figure 8-3 Slots of the chassis (AC power)

IU1

IU11

IU6/APIU

IU2

IU12 FAN

Paired slots

IU3

IU7/APIU

IU4

IU9/SCC

IU5

IU10/AUX

Mesh group

Mutual backup

NOTE

l

: service boards.

l Slots IU1 and IU11 can be used as two independent slots, each for housing an FOADM board with a height of 118.9 mm (4.7 in.). They can be also used as one slot for housing a service board with a height of 264.6 mm (10.4 in.). When the two slots are used as one slot, the slot ID is represented as IU11. l Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. l A mesh group refers to a group of slots housing the boards whose overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplane.

8.4 Management Interfaces The chassis provides various communication and maintenance interfaces for the management and maintenance purposes, as shown in Table 8-1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


190




STAT PROG

Interface

Specification

Name

Conn ector Type

Pin out

Description

NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2: network management interfaces

RJ45

Tab le 8-2

l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 3800 through a network cable to that on the U2000 server so that the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 3800.

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2

TN 21 AU X TN 22 AU X

Front Panel

EXT

l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.

AUX

EXT: extended auxiliary interfaces NOTE EXT interfaces include ALMO, LAMP1, LAMP2, ETH, SERIAL, ALMI1, and ALMI2. For information about the interface cables, see Extended Auxiliary Interface Cables.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ALMO: housekeep ing alarm output interface

RJ45

Tab le 8-3

Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. The alarm outputs are controlled by the internal relay contact. When the relay contact is closed, the resistance of each ALMO interface is less than 1 ohm. When the relay contact is open, the resistance of each ALMO interface is an infinite number.

l Dimensions of front panel: (H x W x D): 102.8 mm (4.0 in.) x 56.9 mm (2.2 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) l Weight: TN21AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.) TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) l Typical power consumption: TN21AUX: 11.7W TN22AUX: 15W l Maximum power consumption a: TN21AUX: 13W TN22AUX: 17W

Provides two alarm outputs and cascading.


191


Bo ard

Front Panel


Interface

Specification

Name

ALMI1ALMI2: housekeep ing alarm input interfaces

Conn ector Type

Pin out

Description

RJ45

Tab le 8-4

External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring.

Tab le 8-5

Provides six alarm inputs. The severity of the six alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms. LAMP1LAMP2: subrack alarm output/ cascading interfaces

RJ45

Tab le 8-6

Outputs single-subrack or multi-subrack alarms to the cabinet indicator interface to light the corresponding alarm indicators on the cabinet.

SERIAL: reserved interface

DB9

-

-

ETH: reserved interface

RJ45

-

-

NOTICE The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


192




8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .


1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

Table 8-2 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

ETNTX12P

Positive pole for transmitting the data for communication with an NM

2

ETNTX12N

Negative pole for transmitting the data for communication with an NM

3

ETNRX12P

Positive pole for receiving the data for communication with an NM

4

NC

Not defined

5

NC

Not defined


193



Pin

Signal

Function

6

ETNRX12N

Negative pole for receiving the data for communication with an NM

7

NC

Not defined

8

NC

Not defined

Table 8-3 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

SWCRIT_OUT1+

Alarm output signal 1 positive

2

SWCRIT_OUT1-

Alarm output signal 1 negative

3

SWCRIT_OUT2+

Alarm output signal 2 positive

4

SWCRIT_OUT1+

Cascaded alarm output signal 1 positive

5

SWCRIT_OUT1-

Cascaded alarm output signal 1 negative

6

SWCRIT_OUT2-

Alarm output signal 2 negative

7

SWCRIT_OUT2+

Cascaded alarm output signal 2 positive

8

SWCRIT_OUT2-

Cascaded alarm output signal 2 negative

Table 8-4 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

SW_IN1P

Alarm input signal 1

2

GND

Ground

3

SW_IN2P


4

SW_IN3P


5

GND

Ground


194



Pin

Signal

Function

6

GND

Ground

7

SW_IN4P


8

GND

Ground


Signal

Function

1

SW_IN5P


2

GND

Ground

3

SW_IN6P


4

NC

Not defined

5

NC

Not defined

6

GND

Ground

7

NC

Not defined

8

NC

Not defined


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

RED+

Positive pole for critical alarm signals

2

RED-

Negative pole for critical alarm signals

3

YELLOW+

Positive pole for major alarm signals

4

GREEN+

Positive pole for power indicating signals

5

GND

Negative pole for power indicating signals

6

YELLOW-

Negative pole for major alarm signals

7

ORG+

Positive pole for minor alarm signals


195



Pin

Signal

Function

8

ORG-

Negative pole for minor alarm signals

8.5 Fan and Heat Dissipation Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis has one fan tray assembly, which includes six independent fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.


Functions and Features Table 8-7 shows the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 8-7 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function

Description

Basic function

Dissipates heat generated by the equipment so that the equipment can operate normally within the designated temperature range.


l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the chassis temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed. NOTE Only when the chassis accesses DC power, Fan speed control is available.

Hot swapping


Alarming

Reports alarms of the fans and reports the inservice information.

Status checking

Checks the fan status.

Working Principle Air flow from the subrack is left intake right exhaust.Figure 8-6 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 3800. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


196



Figure 8-6 Front view of the heat dissipation and ventilation system

Planform

Air inlet Fan

Air outlet

Front

The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 8-8. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode. Table 8-8 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode

Description

Auto Speed Mode

The fan speed depends on the temperature. l Lower than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at low speed. l Higher than 65°C (149°F): the fans run at high speed. l 45°C (113°F) to 65°C (149°F): the fans run at medium speed. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.


Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually.

NOTE

l

If any one of the six fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can remain operational for a short term in environments where temperatures range between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). To ensure long-term operation of the system, replace the fan tray assembly in a timely manner. Short-term operation means that the continuous operating time does not exceed 96 hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days.

l

If two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly, replace the fan tray assembly immediately.

The fan tray assembly consists of six fans and one fan control board. Figure 8-7 shows the functional block of the fan tray assembly.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


197




l

FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the chassis. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly.

l

Fan control board: – Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. – Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control board reports an alarm. – Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. – Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.

Appearance Figure 8-8 shows a fan tray assembly. Figure 8-8 Fan tray assembly 1

2

1. Fans (6 in total)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

2. Operating status indicator


198




Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly Table 8-9 list the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly for the OptiX OSN 3800 system. NOTE


Table 8-9 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly (OptiX OSN 3800) Item

Specification

Dimensions


Weight

0.81 kg (1.79 lb)

Power Consumptiona

l Low Speed: 9 W l Medium Speed: 17 W l High Speed: 32.7 W

a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 32.7 W.

8.6 AC Power Consumption This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on AC power. Table 8-10 describes the AC power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


199



Table 8-10 AC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Value

Maximum power consumption

350 W

Table 8-11 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 3800. Table 8-11 AC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 3800 Unit Name

Typical Power Consump tion (W)a

Maximum Power Consumpti on (W)a

Remarks

Chassis 1

162.2

207.5

2 x TN21MR2, 4 x 2.5 Gbit/s OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

Chassis 2

117.7

154.5

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OAU101, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OTU chassis

266.2

317.8

1 x 15LSC (HFEC), 1 x DAS1, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OLA chassis (Using the APIU)

119.7

156.7

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OBU103, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OADM chassis (Using the APIU)

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated based on the power consumption of each module. The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

8.7 DC Power Consumption This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX OSN 3800 when the equipment runs on DC power. Table 8-12 describes the DC power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


200



NOTE


Table 8-12 DC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Value

Maximum power consumption

420 W

Table 8-13 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 3800. Table 8-13 DC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN 3800 Unit Name

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Remarks

OADM chassis (Using the PIU)

Chassis 1

99.4

135.3

2 x TN21MR2, 4 x 2.5 Gbit/s OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x 21PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

Chassis 2

77.7

111.5

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OAU101, 1 x SCC, 2 x 21PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OTU chassis

Chassis 1

221.2

274.8

1 x 15LSC (HFEC), 2 x SCC, 2 x 21PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x DAS1, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

Chassis 2

346

416

1 x 11LTX (SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 1 x DAS1, 2 x 21PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

Chassis 3

236

286.6

1 x 13LSC (SDFEC), 2 x SCC, 1 x DAS1, 2 x 21PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.

OLA chassis (Using the PIU)

79.7

113.7

1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OBU103, 1 x SCC, 2 x 21PIU, 1 x AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.


201


Unit Name




Remarks

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated based on the power consumption of each module. The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

8.8 Mechanical Specifications Table 8-14 lists the mechanical specifications of the 3800 chassis. Table 8-14 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Specification

Dimensions

436 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 134 mm (H) or 17.17 in. (W) x 11.61 in. (D) x 5.28 in. (H)

Weight of an empty chassis (with backplane)

6 kg (13.23 lb.)


202


9



The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 9-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 3800. Table 9-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

Optical transponder unit

TN11ECOM

Enhanced communication interface unit

TN11L4G

Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity

TN11LDGS

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving

TN11LDGD

2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

TN12LDM


TN11LDMD


TN11LDMS


TN12LDX


TN11LEM24

22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board

TN11LOA


TN11LOG


TN12LOG TN11LOM TN12LOM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



203



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

TN11LQG

4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board

TN13LQM


TN11LQMD


TN12LQMD TN11LQMS TN12LQMS TN12LSC

4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

TN13LSC TN15LSCb TN17LSCM


TN11LSX


TN12LSX TN13LSX TN14LSX TN11LSXR


TN11LTX

10-Port 10Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board

TN12LTX TN11LWX2

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

TN11LWXD

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

TN11LWXS

arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

TN12LWXS TN11TMX TN12TMX OTN Tributary unit

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board

TN11TBE

10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board

TN11TDG


TN11TDX

2 x 10G tributary service processing board

TN52TOG



204



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

TN11TOM


TN52TOM TN11TQM

4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board

TN12TQM

OTN Line unit

TN11TQS

4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board

TN11NS2


TN12NS2 TN52NS2 TN53NS2 Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit

TN21DFIU

bidirectional fiber interface board

TN13FIUa


TN14FIU TN15FIU TN16FIU TN21FIU

Optical add and drop multiplexing unit

TN11SFIU


TN21CMR1


TN11CMR2


TN21CMR2 TN11CMR4


TN21CMR4 TN11DMR1 TN21DMR1 TN11MR2

CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

TN21MR2 TN11MR4


TN21MR4 TN11SBM2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board


205



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

Optical amplifier unit

TN11DAS1


TN11OAU1


TN12OAU1 TN13OAU1 TN11OBU1


TN12OBU1 TN13OBU1 TN11OBU2


TN12OBU2 TN11RAU1 TN12RAU1


TN11RAU2 TN12RAU2 System and communicatio n unit

TN22SCC


TN23SCC TN21AUX


TN22AUX Optical supervisory channel unit

TN11HSC1 TN12HSC1 TN11SC1

high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel board unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

TN12SC1 TN11SC2


TN12SC2 TN11ST2 TN12ST2


TN13ST2 Optical protection unit

TN11DCP


TN12DCP TN13DCP TN11OLP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



206



Board Category

Board Name

Board Description

TN12OLP TN13OLP

Spectrum analyzer unit

TN11QCP


TN11SCS


TN11MCA4


TN11MCA8


TN11OPM8


TN12OPM8 Variable optical attenuator unit

TN11VA1


TN12VA1 TN13VA1 TN11VA4


TN12VA4 TN13VA4 Dispersion equalizing unit

TN11DCU


Interface area unitb

TN21PIU


TN21APIU

AC Power Interface Unit

Fan

TN21FAN

Fan

a: For TN13FIU: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01/TN13FIU03. b: For TN15LSC: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN15LSCT01.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


207


10 Power Supply

10

Power Supply

About This Chapter 10.1 8800/6800 DC Power Supply 10.2 8800 AC Power Supply The universal platform subrack can be AC powered. 10.3 3800 DC Power Supply 10.4 3800 AC Power Supply 10.5 Power Redundancy Two PIU boards or two APIU boards in hot backup mode supply power to one subrack at the same time. When one of the boards becomes faulty, the other board continues to supply power to the subrack to ensure that the subrack can still function properly.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


208


10 Power Supply

10.1 8800/6800 DC Power Supply 10.1.1 DC Power Requirement Table 10-1 provides the requirements on voltage and current of a PDU. Table 10-2 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800/6800 subrack. Table 10-1 Requirements on voltage and current of a PDU Item

Requirement

Nominal working voltage

-48 V DC/-60 V DC

Working voltage range

-48 V DC: -40 V to -57.6 V

Rated working current (-48 V)

This parameter is determined by the PDU type and terminal connections on the PDU. For details, see 10.1.3 External Power (from the PDF to the Cabinet).

-60 V DC: -48 V to -72 V

Table 10-2 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800/6800 subrack Item

Requirement


-48 V DC/-60 V DC


-48 V DC: -40 V to -57.6 V

Rated working current (-48 V)

8800 T64: 200 A (Independent power supplies to four sections of each subrack, with 50 A for each section)

-60 V DC: -48 V to -72 V

8800 T32: 100 A (Independent power supplies to two sections of each subrack, with 50A for each section) 8800 T16: 50 A 8800 universal platform subrack: 50 A 6800: 25 A

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


209


10 Power Supply

10.1.2 Power Supply Description The power distribution unit (PDU) accepts DC power from the power distribution frame (PDF) in the equipment room and distributes the power to the PIU boards in the subrack. Then the PIU boards supply power to other boards inside the subrack. Figure 10-1shows how power is distributed to the boards inside the OptiX OSN 8800/6800.

Power distribute cabinet

Cabinet PDU

Subrack 1 Backup PIU

Board

Main PIU

Board

Internal Power

Main PIU

External Power

Figure 10-1 Power distribution to the OptiX OSN 8800/6800 boards

Subrack n Backup PIU

Board

Board

Air switch

10.1.3 External Power (from the PDF to the Cabinet)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


210


10 Power Supply

TN16PDU/TN51PDU The TN16PDU/TN51PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet. NOTE

The TN51PDU and TN16PDU have the same functions but differ in height. The TN51PDU is 133.4 mm high. When two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are installed on a cabinet, one more DCM frame can be configured if the TN16PDU is used, compared with the TN51PDU. TN51PDU can be substituted by the TN16PDU.This topic describes the TN16PDU.

The TN16PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive four -48V/-60V power supplies and output four power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. Whether short-circuiting copper bars are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room: l

When eight 63 A power supplies are provided, no short-circuiting copper bar is required.

l

When four 125 A power supplies are provided, short-circuiting copper bars are required for dividing one 125 A power supply into two 63 A power supplies. For more information about short-circuiting copper bars, see Short-Circuiting Copper Bar.

Figure 10-2 shows the front panel of the TN16PDU. Figure 10-2 Front panel of the TN16PDU Power supply input area

Power supply Power supply output area switch area

+ 1

1

+ 2

+ 3

Power supply Power supply switch area output area

+

+

1

4

A

1. Output cable terminal block

2

3 2. Input cable terminal block

+ 2

+ 3

+ 4

B 3. Power switch

l

Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) x 3.9 in. (H))

l

Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output cable terminal blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.

l

Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four input cable terminal blocks and receive four -48V/-60V DC power supplies, eight -48V/-60V DC power supplies in total.

l

Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output power switches to control power supplies for subracks inside the cabinet and provide overcurrent protection for each other.

Figure 10-3 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN16PDU. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


211


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-3 TN16PDU internal pin assignments

OUTPUT B

OUTPUT A -

-

-

-

1

2

3

4 ON

ON ON

1

2

3

4

+

+

+

+

ON

1 +

INPUT A

2

3

4

+

+

+ ON

INPUT B

ON ON

+

+

+

1

2

3

4

-

-

-

1

2

3

4

ON

OUTPUT A +

-

OUTPUT B OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF

1 -

2

3

4

1

-

-

-

-

INPUT A

2

3

4

-

-

-

+

+

+

+

1

2

3

4

INPUT B

Short-Circuit Copper Bar If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies in total. In this case, short-circuit copper bars are required for both A and B. Figure 10-4 shows the appearance of the short-circuiting copper bar. Figure 10-4 Appearance

Copper Plate

TN11PDU The TN11PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet.

DC PDU The TN11PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive two -48V/-60V power supplies and output six power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. Whether junction boxes are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room: Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


212


10 Power Supply

l

If a power supply is 63 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies in total. In this case, no junction box is required.

l

If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for dividing one 125 A current into four 32 A currents. For more information about junction boxes, see Junction Box.

Figure 10-5 shows the front panel of the TN11PDU. Figure 10-5 Front panel of the TN11PDU 1

2

3

3

2

A

B

4 1. Output cable terminal block

1

4 2. Ground screw

3. Input cable terminal block

4. Power switch

l

Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 131 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) x 5.2 in. (H))

l

Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six output cable terminal blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.

l

Ground screw: used to connect (protection ground) PGND cables.

l

Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have two input cable terminal blocks and receive two -48V/-60V DC power supplies, four -48V/-60V DC power supplies in total.

l

Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six power output switches (corresponding to the six output cable terminal blocks) to control power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 6800, both A and B only use power switches SW2, SW3, SW4, and SW5 to control power supplies for four subracks from bottom to top.

Figure 10-6 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN11PDU.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


213


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-6 TN11PDU internal pin assignments OUTPUT

+- +- +

-

+

-

A +

-

+

B

-

-

OUTPUT

+- +- +

-

ON

-

-

-

+

-

+

-

+

ON

OFF

+

+ INPUT

-

-

+

+

-

-

OFF

INPUT

Junction Box If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for both A and B. Figure 10-7 shows the junction box structure and Figure 10-8 shows the installation position of the junction box. Figure 10-7 Structure

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


214


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-8 Installation position

PDU (DPD63-8-8) The DPD63-8-8 PDU is installed at the top of a cabinet to power subracks inside the cabinet. NOTE

The TN11PDU/TN16PDU/TN51PDU can be substituted by the DPD63-8-8 PDU.

DC PDU The DPD63-8-8 PDU consists of two sections: A and B, which provide backup for each other. Both A and B accept four -48V/-60V power inputs and produce four power outputs for subracks in the cabinet. According to the currents provided by the power source inside the equipment room, the DPD63-8-8 PDU can have different configurations. Table 10-3 lists the typical configurations of the PDU. Table 10-3 Typical configurations of the DPD63-8-8 PDU N o.

Input Current

Output Current

Circuit Breaker Requirement

Copper Fitting Configuration

1

8 x 63A

8 x 63A

8 x 63A

None

2

4 x 125A

8 x 63A

8 x 63A

Two-in-one copper fittings in the left, right, and middle of the PDU

3

4 x 63A

8 x 32A

8 x 32A


4

2 x 125A

8 x 32A

8 x 32A

l Four-in-one copper fittings in the left, right, and middle of the PDU l Two-in-one copper fittings in the middle of the PDU

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


215


10 Power Supply

N o.

Input Current

Output Current

Circuit Breaker Requirement

Copper Fitting Configuration

5

2 x 125A + 2 x 63A

4 x 63A + 4 x 32A

4 x 63A + 4 x 32A


When working at the ambient temperature of 65°C (149°F) of the air exhaust vent, the PDU output current decreases from 63 A to 53.7 A or from 32 A to 29.1 A.

For more information about copper fitting configuration, see Copper Fittings. Figure 10-9 shows the front panel of the PDU (DPD63-8-8). Figure 10-9 Front panel of the DPD63-8-8 PDU CAUTION This device has more than one power input. Disconnect all the power inputs to power off this device. !

此设备有多路电源输入。设备断电时必须断开所有电源输入。

CAUTION Disconnect power before servicing. Also all metal jewelry, such as watchs, rings, etc, should be removed from hands and wrists. !

维护前先断电。同时将金属饰物手表、戒指等取下。

PER INPUT

A1 A2 A3 A4 NEG(-)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-48V—-60V; 63A MAX

A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 RTN(+) RTN(+) OUTPUT

B1 B2 B3 B4 NEG(-)


216


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-10 shows the terminals on the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Note that there are two types of RTN (+) terminal blocks for the DPD63-8-8 PDU and they just look differently. Figure 10-10 Terminals on the DPD63-8-8 PDU

1. NEG(-) power input interface

2. RTN(+) power input interface

4. NEG(-) power output interface

5. Power switch

3. RTN(+) power output interface

l

Panel dimensions (H x W x D): 110 mm (4.3 in.) x 442 mm (17.4 in.) x 89.2 mm (3.5 in.)

l

Power output interfaces: Four power output interfaces are located in each of sections A and B of the PDU. These interfaces connect to subrack power cables and distribute power to the subracks inside a cabinet.

l

Power input interfaces: Four power input interfaces are located in each of sections A and B of the PDU. The four interfaces in each section accept four -48 or -60 V DC power inputs, providing a total of eight -48 or -60 V DC power inputs in both sections.

l

Power switches: Four power switches are located in each of sections A and B of the PDU. They are in a one-to-one mapping relationship with power output interfaces and control the power inputs to the subracks inside the cabinet.

Figure 10-11 shows the internal pin assignments of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


217


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-11 DPD63-8-8 PDU internal pin assignments

INPUT A

INPUT B INPUT A

-

-

-

ON

ON ON

-

INPUT B

+

+

+

+

1

2

3

4

+ 1

+

+

+

2

3

4

ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF

-

-

-

-

-

-

ON

ON ON

ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF

-

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

-

-

-

OUTPUT B

Copper Fittings When sections A and B each require two power inputs (four power inputs in total), two-in-one copper fittings must be installed in both sections. Figure 10-12 shows the appearance of twoin-one copper fittings and how they are installed on the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Figure 10-12 Appearance of the two-in-one copper fittings (four power inputs and eight power outputs) 3

1

2

2 1 Two-in-one copper fitting (left)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

3

Two-in-one copper fitting

Two-in-one copper fitting (right)


218


10 Power Supply

When sections A and B require one power input each (two power inputs in total), four-in-one copper fittings must be installed on the left and right terminals and two-in-one copper fittings must be installed on the middle terminals of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Figure 10-13 shows the appearance of four-in-one copper fittings and how they are installed on the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Figure 10-13 Appearance of the four-in-one copper fittings (two power inputs and eight power outputs) 3

1

3

2

1

2

Four-in-one copper fitting

Two-in-one copper fitting

3

Four-in-one copper fitting

NOTE

Eight holes are located on the terminal block in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. Four two-in-one copper fittings designated for the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU are installed to cover the first to eighth holes, as shown in Figure 10-12 and Figure 10-13. In total, four two-in-one copper fittings are required to combine the RTN (+) power inputs in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU. As shown in Figure 10-13, one four-in-one copper fittings are vertically installed on the RTN(+) power input terminals in the middle of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.

There are also two types of two-in-one copper fittings to match the two types of RTN(+) terminal blocks on the DPD63-8-8 PDU, as shown in Figure 10-14. Install corresponding copper fittings in the middle area of the DPD63-8-8 PDU based on the type of the RTN(+) block.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


219


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-14 Two-in-one copper fittings for the middle area of the DPD63-8-8 PDU

UPM The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/ 220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires batteries.

Application Figure 10-15 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800. Figure 10-15 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800 OptiX OSN equipment 110V/220V

UPM

Backplane

-48V PIU

Board A

-48V PIU

Board B -48V

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


220


10 Power Supply

Appearance The UPM is a special power supply system and EPS75-4815AF is one type of the UPM. The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 2000 W. The EPS75-4815AF power system is 3U high. Figure 10-16 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system. Figure 10-16 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Functions and Features UPM can work with storage batteries . When the external AC power system supplies power normally, the batteries store power. When the 110 V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To supply power to the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/ 6800 equipment, only one power system is required to be connected to the batteries. The standard maximum configuration of each EPS75-4815AF power system includes five rectifier modules and one monitoring module. NOTE

The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Therefore, the batteries need to be configured separately. If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment cabinet is reserved for the batteries.

Table 10-4 provides the functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system. Table 10-4 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Function and Feature

EPS75-4815AF

Hot-swappable function

The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is improved.


221


10 Power Supply


EPS75-4815AF

Storage battery protection function

The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.

Loading capacity

The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.

Lightning-proof function

The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector. The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier module along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from damaging the rectifier module.

Working Principle and Signal Flow The UPM is fed by one 110 V/220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts the input power into –48 V DC voltage to provide four DC branches and one battery branch. When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop, and load loop. In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the poweroff protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment. As a result, the batteries are automatically protected. When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.

Interfaces and Indicators Figure 10-17 shows the rear view of the EPS75-4815AF power system (subject to the UPM on site).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


222


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-17 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system

1. Control circuit breaker of the AC input (30 A)

2. Control circuit breaker of the 3. Control circuit breaker of load 1 (10 battery branch (80 A) A)

4. Control circuit breaker of load 2 (30 5. Control circuit breaker of A) load 3 (40 A)

6. Control circuit breaker of load 4 (40 A)

7. AC phase line terminal

9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery branch

8. AC zero line terminal

10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load 11. Positive 48 V terminal of branch the battery branch

12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load branch

13. Connecting terminal of the PGND 14. DB44 signal interface cable

15. Communication interface (COM)

16. Communication test interface (TEST)

Interfaces The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has seven interfaces. Table 10-5 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF. Table 10-5 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type of Interface

Usage

Power input interface

Power interface

"7" and "8" indicate the AC mains input terminals, which access 110 V/220 V AC power.

Power output interface

Power interface

The power output interfaces are in the lower left corner on the front panel of the UPM. The terminals indicated by "9" and "11" constitute a battery interface, through which the power system is connected to the battery input socket at the back of the storage battery box through a battery cable. "10" and "12" indicate the output interfaces of four loads. The output interfaces can supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment by using power cables.


223


10 Power Supply

Interface

Type of Interface

Usage

Connectin g terminal of the PGND cable

Power interface

The UPM is grounded through the cabinet.

DB44 signal interface

DB44

The backplane of the subrack can be connected to the sensor transfer box (an optional device) through the DB44 signal interface and to the monitoring module through the 96-pin DIN connector. In addition, the sensor transfer box can be connected to multiple sensors. As a result, the monitoring function is extended.

Communi cation interface (COM)

RJ45

Reserved

Communi cation test interface (TEST)

RJ45

It is used for internal test.

Switch button

Button

The switch buttons are on the left of the UPM, as shown in Figure 10-17. "1" indicates the control circuit breaker of the AC input (30 A), which enables and disables the input of the AC mains supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate the load control switches, which enable and disable the load output.

Definition of DB44 signal pins Table 10-6 provides the definition of DB44 signal pins.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


224


10 Power Supply

Table 10-6 Definition of DB44 signal pins Pin Diagram

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Definiti on

Function

Pin

Definit ion

Function

1

24 V

Auxiliary power output

23

SMOK E

Smoke sensor

2

12 V


24

WATE R

Water damage detection

3

12 V


25

DOOR

Door status switch (DSS) signal detection

4

GND

Signal ground

26

WIRE

Distribution frame connection

5

GND

Signal ground

27

JK1+

Positive terminal of dry contact 1

6

SIM1

Voltage detection of the first battery pack

28

JK1-

Negative terminal of dry contact 1

7

SIM2

Voltage detection of the second battery pack

29

JK2+

Positive terminal of dry contact 2

8

-

-

30

JK2-

Negative terminal of dry contact 2

9

-

-

31

CONT1 O+

Positive terminal for output control of optical coupler 1

10

GND

Signal ground

32

CONT1 O-

Negative terminal for output control of optical coupler 1

11

VHUM

Ambient humidity measurement

33

CONT2 O+

Positive terminal for output control of optical coupler 2

12

VBTEM 1

Battery temperature measurement 1

34

CONT2 O-

Negative terminal for output control of optical coupler 2

13

VBTEM 2

Battery temperature measurement 2

35

FANCT R1+

Positive terminal for fan rotation control

14

VTEM1

Ambient temperature measurement 1

36

FANCT R1-

Negative terminal for fan rotation control


225


Pin Diagram

10 Power Supply

Pin

Definiti on

Function

Pin

Definit ion

Function

15

VTEM2

Ambient temperature measurement 2

37

JKM1+

Positive terminal for a surge protector failure alarm

16

JTD1

Backup 1

38

JKM1-

Negative terminal for a surge protector failure alarm

17

JTD2

Backup 2

39

JKM2+

Positive terminal for an AC power-off alarm

18

JTD3

Backup 3

40

JKM2-

Negative terminal for an AC power-off alarm

19

JTD4

Backup 4

41

JKM3+

Positive terminal for a battery undervoltage alarm

20

JTD5

Backup 5

42

JKM3-

Negative terminal for a battery undervoltage alarm

21

JTD6

Backup 6

43

JKM4+

Positive terminal for power supply system failure

22

JTD7

Backup 7

44

JKM4-

Negative terminal for power supply system failure

Indicators The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators: l

Running status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

l

Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) – one color (yellow)

l

Faulty state indicator (FAULT) – one color (red)

The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators: l

Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) – one color (red)

l

Power supply system status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

Valid Slots The UPM is case shaped. Therefore, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.

Technical Specifications A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W. Table 10-7 lists the power parameters of the UPM. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


226


10 Power Supply

Table 10-7 Power parameters of the UPM Parameter

Value

Voltage range of the AC input

90-290 V AC

AC input

One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz

Rated input current

≤ 28 A

Output nominal voltage

53.5±0.5 V

Rated output current

DC output branches

Load circuit breaker 1: 10 A Load circuit breaker 2: 30 A Load circuit breaker 3: 40 A Load circuit breaker 4: 40 A Battery circuit breaker: 80 A

Total output DC current

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

37.5±3 A to 75±3 A

Regulated voltage precision

≤ ±1%

Non-balance of load sharing

≤ ±5% (50%-100% load)

Rated efficiency of the integrated equipment

≥ 89%

Power factor

≥ 0.99 (nominal input or output)

Peak-to-peak noise voltage

≤ 200 mV (within the range of 20 MHz)

Electrical network adjustment rate

≤ ±0.1%

Lightning protection performance

When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated lightning surge current whose waveform is 8/20μs and amplitude is 5 kA for five times in both directions. The interval between two surges must be at least one minute. If the lightning surge current is higher than the preceding indexes, the UPM may be damaged and cannot work normally.

Cooling method

The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.


227


10 Power Supply

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the UPM are as follows: l

Dimensions of the UPM: 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 133 mm (H) (17.2 in. (W) x 10.0 in. (D) x 5.2 in. (H))

l

Weight: 15 kg (33.1 lb.)

PDU Power Cables A PDU power cable connects to a power distribution frame (PDF) at one end and to a PDU at the other end. Figure 10-18 shows the structure of the PDU power cables. Figure 10-18 PDU power cables 1

1 X1

X2 3

To PDU

To power distribute cabinet

2

4

2 X3

X4

NEG(-)

1. JG two-hole naked crimping connector

RTN(+)


3. Cord end terminal

4. Cable

NOTE

1

2

and can be used as -48 V or BGND cables. Select appropriate power cables depending on the power terminals on the PDU.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


228


10 Power Supply

Table 10-8 Technical parameters of power cables Cable

Usage

Description

Connector

-48 V power cable

Accepts -48 V DC to the equipment.

-48 V DC power cable (blue)

X1: JG two-hole naked crimping connector. It is connected to a PIU board.

For 63 A power supply: l If the required cable length is less than 20 m, the cross-sectional area of the cable must be 16 mm2.

X2: OT one-hole naked crimping connector. It is connected to the PDF.

l If the required cable length ranges from 20 m to 35, the crosssectional area of the cable must be 25 mm2. l If the required cable length ranges from 35 m to 50 m, the crosssectional area of the cable must be 35 mm2. For 125 A power supply: The cross-sectional area of the cable must be 35 mm2, and the cable length cannot exceed 25 m.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


229


10 Power Supply

Cable

Usage

Description

Connector

BGND cable

Connects the battery ground (BGND) to the equipment.

BGND cable (black)

X3: JG two-hole naked crimping connector. It is connected to a PIU board.

For 63 A power supply: l If the required cable length is less than 20 m, the cross-sectional area of the cable must be 16 mm2.

X4: OT one-hole naked crimping connector. It is connected to the PDF.

l If the required cable length ranges from 20 m to 35, the crosssectional area of the cable must be 25 mm2. l If the required cable length ranges from 35 m to 50 m, the crosssectional area of the cable must be 35 mm2. For 125A power supply: The cross-sectional area of the cable must be 35 mm2, and the cable length cannot exceed 25 m.

PDU PGND Cables One end of the PDU PGND Cables is connected to a protection ground screw of the power distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection ground screw on the top of the cabinet. The PDU PGND Cables is correctly connected before delivery.

Structure Figure 10-19 shows the structure of the PDU PGND Cables. Figure 10-19 Structure of the PDU PGND Cables 1

2

X1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

X2


230


10 Power Supply

1. OT naked crimping connector

2. Heat-shrink tube

Pin Assignment None

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the PDU PGND Cables are listed in Table 10-9. Table 10-9 Technical parameters of the PDU PGND Cables Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6

Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02 (RV)-10 mm2 (0.02 in.2)-Yellow/Green-62 A

10.1.4 Internal Power (from the Cabinet to Subracks) PIU A PIU board is used to power boards inside a subrack.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Boar d

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

TN11 PIU

N

N

N

N

Y


231


10 Power Supply

Boar d

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

TN16 PIU

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN18 PIU

N

N

N

Y

N

TN51 PIU

Y

Y

N

N

N

Function Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V and provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and report the power consumption to the system control unit. TN18PIU provides 3.3 V power supply in centralized manner, with the maximum power of 40 W. NOTE

The overcurrent protection function for the access power supplies of each subrack is realized by the magnetic circuit breaker of the PDU.

Front Panel l

Appearance Figure 10-20 Front panel of the TN11PIU

PIU RUN

NEG(-) RTN(+)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


232


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-21 Front panel of the TN16PIU

PIU RTN(+)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

PWR

NEG(-)


233


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-22 Front panel of the TN18PIU

RTN(+)

NEG(-)

Figure 10-23 Front panel of the TN51PIU NOTE

As shown in the following figures, two types of front panel are available for The TN51PIU board. The difference between the two types of front panel lies in the silkscreen.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


234


10 Power Supply

PIU RTN(+)

PWR

NEG(-)

PIU RTN

l

PWR

-48V

Indicator: Running status indicator (PWR/RUN) - green

Valid Slots Table 10-10 Valid slots for the TN11PIU

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 6800 subrack

IU19 and IU20


235


10 Power Supply

Table 10-11 Valid slots for the TN16PIU Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81, IU88, and IU89


IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46


IU20 and IU23


Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack

IU17 and IU18


Valid Slots


IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81, IU88, and IU89


IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46

Specifications l

Performance Specifications Table 10-14 Performance specifications of the PIU board Item

Specifications

Number of DC input power supplies

1

Input DC power voltage range

-48 V DC: -40 V to -57.6 V -60 V DC: -48 V to -72 V

Input DC power current

TN11PIU: ≤ 30A TN16PIU/TN18PIU/TN51PIU: ≤ 60A

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


236


l

10 Power Supply

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: – TN11PIU: 28 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 65 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 2.6 in. (H)) – TN16PIU/TN51PIU: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) – TN18PIU: 25 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 120 mm (H) (0.98 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.72 in. (H)) Weight: – TN11PIU: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) – TN16PIU: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.) – TN18PIU: 0.45 kg (0.99 lb.) – TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.)

l

Power Consumption Board

Typical Power Consumption (W)

Maximum Power Consumptiona (W)

TN11PIU

24

38

TN16PIU

3

3.6

TN18PIU

7.5

8

TN51PIU

5

5


Subrack Power Cables One end of a power cable is connected to the power distribution frame (PDF), and the other end is connected to a PIU board. Figure 10-24 shows the subrack power cables. The main difference between them is the terminals equipped on both ends. Select proper subrack power cables depending on the power terminals on the PIU boards and PDU. It is recommended that Huawei-supplied power cables be used. If power cables need to be customized at the site, the power currents and cable lengths must be considered to ensure proper power supplied to the subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


237


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-24 Structure of the subrack power cables 1

3

1

1 1

3

4

2 1

2

3

3 4

3

4

4 4

2

3

5

To PIU

To PDU 3

5 A A3 A2 A1

A

3

A

W2

X2 4

6

W1

X3

W2

X2

7

5

3

1

6

X1

A

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

X3

X1

A

A3 A2 A1

W1

6

5

A3 A2 A1

2

6

X1

A

W1

X3

W2

X2

8


238


10 Power Supply

NEG(-)

RTN(+)

1. JG two-hole naked crimping connector

2. Cord end terminal

3. Cable


5. Cable connector

6. Cable clip

For the pin assignment of subrack power cables

6 , 7 , and 8 , refer to Table 10-15.

Table 10-15 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables Cable

Cable Connector

Cord End Terminal

Mapping

Core Color

W2

X1 connects to A1

X2

A1 corresponds to X2.

Blue (-48 V power)

W1

X1 connects to A3

X3

A3 corresponds to X3.

Black (power ground)

Subrack PGND Cables One end of subrack PGND cables to the ground screw on the side column near the subrack. The other end is connected to the ground screw on the subrack

Structure Figure 10-25 shows the structure of the subrack PGND cable. Figure 10-25 Structure of the subrack PGND cables 1

2

X1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

X2


239


10 Power Supply

1. OT naked crimping connector

2. Heat-shrink tube

Pin Assignment None

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of subrack PGND cables are listed in Table 10-16. Table 10-16 Technical parameters of the subrack PGND cables Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6

Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02 (RV)-10 mm2 (0.02 in.2)-Yellow/Green-62 A

10.2 8800 AC Power Supply The universal platform subrack can be AC powered.

10.2.1 AC Power Requirement Table 10-17 provides the requirements on AC voltage and current of a universal platform subrack. Table 10-17 Requirements on AC voltage and current of a universal platform subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Requirement

Rated working current

220 V (Input voltage): 29.9 A


220 V AC/110V AC

110 V (Input voltage): 22.4 A


240


10 Power Supply

Item

Requirement


90 V AC to 290 V AC

10.2.2 APIU In an AC power configuration, the universal platform subrack must be equipped with TN18APIU boards to power the boards inside the subrack.

Function The TN18APIU board accepts AC power ranging from 90 V to 290 V. It offers surge protection and power filtering functions.

Front Panel l

Appearance Figure 10-26 Front panel of the TN18APIU

l

Indicator: dual-colored (red, green)

Valid Slots U16, IU17 and IU18 together house two TN18APIU boards. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


241


10 Power Supply

Specifications l

Performance Specifications Table 10-18 Performance specifications of the APIU Item

Unit

Value

Input power voltage range

V (AC)

90 to 290

Input frequency

Hz

50/60

Input power current

A (AC)

≤ 16.5

Output rated voltage

V (DC)

-53.5

Output rated current

A (DC)

220 V (Input voltage) : 29.9

W

220 V (Input voltage) : 1600

Output power

110 V (Input voltage) : 22.4

110 V (Input voltage) : 1200

l

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 119.6 mm (H) x 50.3 mm (W) x 261.2 mm (D) or 4.7 in. (H) x 2.0 in. (W) x 10.3 in. (D) Weight: 1.82 kg (4.01 lb.)

l


Input Voltage (V)



TN18APIU

220

142.6

157.6

110

169.1

184.1


10.2.3 Power Connection Scheme In an AC power configuration, APIU boards must be used to provide AC power for the chassis. Figure 10-27 shows an AC power cable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


242


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-27 Appearance of an AC power cable

10.3 3800 DC Power Supply The DC power supply of OptiX OSN 3800 is the same as that of OptiX OSN 8800/6800. For details, see 10.1.2 Power Supply Description.

10.3.1 DC Power Requirement OptiX OSN 3800 have the same PDU requirements as the OptiX OSN 8800/6800. For details of the requirements, see OptiX OSN 8800/6800 Power Requirements. Table 10-19 provides the requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Table 10-19 Requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis Item

Requirement


8.75A


-48 V DC/-60 V DC


-48 V DC: -40 V to -57.6 V -60 V DC: -48 V to -72 V

10.3.2 PIU In a DC power configuration, the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis must be equipped with TN21APIU boards to power the boards inside the chassis.

Function The PIU board accepts DC power ranging from -40 V to -72 V. It offers surge protection and power filtering functions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


243


10 Power Supply

Front Panel l

Appearance: Figure 10-28 Front panel of the TN21PIU

RUN

DO not hot plug this unit！ S1 S4

S2

AUX

SCC

SCC

PIU

PIU

S5

S11

S6

NEG(-) RTN(+)

PIU

l

Indicator: Running status indicator (RUN) - green

Valid Slots IU6 and IU7

Specifications l

Performance Specifications Table 10-20 Performance specifications of the PIU Item

Specifications

Number of DC input power supplies

1

Input DC power voltage range

-48 V DC: -40 V to -57.6 V -60 V DC: -48 V to -72 V

Input DC power current

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

≤ 10.5 A

Mechanical Specifications Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244


10 Power Supply

Dimensions of front panel: 218.50 mm (H) x 107.76 mm (W) or 8.6 in. (H) x 4.2 in. (W) Weight: 0.45 kg (1.0 lb.) l




TN21PIU

10

12


10.3.3 Power Connection Scheme In a DC power configuration, the OptiX OSN 3800 accepts external power in the same way as the OptiX OSN 6800. For more information, see 10.1.3 External Power (from the PDF to the Cabinet). The OptiX OSN 3800 distributes power to its boards in a similar way to the OptiX OSN 6800 does. The PIU and PDU are connected in the same way for OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 6800. For more information, see 10.1.4 Internal Power (from the Cabinet to Subracks).

10.4 3800 AC Power Supply 10.4.1 AC Power Requirement Table 10-21 provides the requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Table 10-21 Requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800 Item

Requirement


1.7 A


220 V AC


90 V AC to 285 V AC

10.4.2 APIU In an AC power configuration, the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis must be equipped with TN21APIU boards to power the boards inside the chassis.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


245


10 Power Supply

Function The APIU board accepts AC power ranging from 90 V to 285 V. It offers surge protection and power filtering functions.

Front Panel l

Appearance Figure 10-29 Front panel of the APIU

APIU RUN

ON

OFF ~100-240V

S1 S11 APIU S2 S3 APIU S4 SCC S5 AUX

l

Indicator: Running status indicator (RUN) - green

Valid Slots IU6, IU7 and IU8 together house two APIU boards. That is, each APIU requires 1.5 slots.

Specifications l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Performance Specifications


246


10 Power Supply

Table 10-22 Performance specifications of the APIU

l

Item

Unit

Value

Input power voltage range

V (AC)

90~285

Input frequency

Hz

50

Input power current

A (AC)

≤4

Output rated voltage

V (DC)

-48

Output rated current

A (DC)

6.3

Output power

W

300

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 37.5 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) or 1.5 in. (H) x 3.9 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8lb.)

l




TN21APIU

50

55


10.4.3 Power Connection Scheme In an AC power configuration, APIU boards must be used to provide AC power for the chassis. Figure 10-30 shows an AC power cable. Figure 10-30 Appearance of an AC power cable

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


247


10 Power Supply

10.5 Power Redundancy Two PIU boards or two APIU boards in hot backup mode supply power to one subrack at the same time. When one of the boards becomes faulty, the other board continues to supply power to the subrack to ensure that the subrack can still function properly.

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Power Redundancy The power distribution and redundancy for the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 are shown in Figure 10-31 and Figure 10-32, respectively. Each area is configured with a pair of power supplies in mutual backup. The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in the case of failure of any external input -48 V/-60V power supply of each area. Figure 10-31 Power distribution and redundancy for the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack Mutual backup DC input for area 1 Mutual backup DC input for area 2 Mutual backup DC input for area 3 Mutual backup DC input for area 4 IU91

PIU IU69

IU 19

IU 5

IU 24

IU 6

IU 25

IU 7

STG

IU74

IU75

IU 26

IU 27

IU 9

IU 10

IU 8

IU 28

EF I1 IU 76

IU 77

IU 29

IU 30

PIU IU78

IU 31

IU 32

PIU IU79

IU 33

IU 34

PIU IU80

IU 53

IU 54

PIU IU81

IU 55

IU 56

STI IU82

IU 57

IU 58

IU 83

IU 59

SCC

STG

IU85

IU86

IU 60

IU 43 IU 11

IU 12

IU 13

IU 14

IU 15

IU 16

IU 17

IU 18

IU 35

IU 36

IU 37

IU 38

IU 39

IU 40

IU 41

IU90

ATE IU87

PIU IU88

PIU IU89

IU 61

IU 62

IU 63

IU 64

IU 65

IU 66

IU 67

IU 68

IU 45

IU 46

IU 47

IU 48

IU 49

IU 50

IU 51

IU 52

IU 44

IU 42

IU92

Front

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

IU 84

Cross-connect board

IU 4

IU 23

SCC

A U X

Cross-connect board

IU 3

IU 22

IU 72

IU 73

Cross-connect board

IU 2

IU 21

EFI2 IU71

IU93

Cross-connect board

IU 1

IU 20

PIU IU70

A U X

Rear


248


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-32 Power distribution and redundancy for the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack Mutual backup DC input for area 2 Mutual backup DC input for area 1

Mutual backup DC input for area 4 Mutual backup DC input for area 3

IU 19

IU 1

IU 20

IU 2

IU 21

IU 3

IU 22

IU 4

IU 23

IU 5

IU 24

IU 6

IU 72

IU 25

IU 7

IU 73

IU 26

SCC

STG

IU74

IU75

IU 9

IU 10

IU 8

IU 27

IU 28

EF I1 IU 76

IU 77

IU 29

IU 30

PIU

PIU

PIU

PIU

STI

IU78

IU79

IU80

IU81

IU82

IU 31

IU 32

IU 33

IU 34

IU 53

IU 54

IU 55

IU 56

IU 57

IU 58

IU 83

IU 59

IU 84

IU 60

Cross-connet board

EFI2 IU71

Cross-connet board

PIU IU70

Cross-connet board

PIU IU69

IU93 A U X

IU 43

IU 11

IU 12

IU 13

IU 14

IU 15

IU 16

IU 17

IU 18

IU 35

IU 36

IU 37

IU 38

IU 39

IU 40

IU 41

SCC

STG

IU85

IU86

Cross-connet board

IU91 A U X

ATE IU87

PIU

PIU

IU88

IU89

IU 61

IU 62

IU 63

IU 64

IU 65

IU 66

IU 67

IU 68

IU 45

IU 46

IU 47

IU 48

IU 49

IU 50

IU 51

IU 52

IU 44

IU 42

IU92

IU90

Front

Rear

OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Power Redundancy As shown in Figure 10-33. Each area is configured with a pair of power supplies in mutual backup. The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in the case of failure of any external input -48 V/-60V power supply of each area.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


249


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-33 Power distribution and redundancy for the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack Mutual backup DC input for area 2 Mutual backup DC input for area 1 IU51

EFI2 IU37

EFI1 IU38

PIU IU39

PIU IU40

AUX STG

IU43

IU41 IU42

STG IU44

PIU IU45

PIU IU46

STI IU47

ATE IU48

SCC

Cross-connect board

Cross-connect board

IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27

IU 9

IU 10


SCC IU1 IU2


IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU11

IU50

NOTE

The power distribution and redundancy for the enhanced subrack and general subrack is the same.

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Power Redundancy As shown in Figure 10-34. OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is configured with a pair of power supplies of mutual backup. The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in the case of failure of any external input -48 V/-60V power supply.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


250


10 Power Supply

Figure 10-34 Power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack Mutual backup DC input

IU20 PIU

IU19 EFI

IU21 AUX

IU9 IU 1

IU 2

IU 3

IU 4

IU 5

IU 6

IU 7

IU23 PIU

IU22

IU10

IU 8

IU 11

IU25

IU24 ATE

IU 12

IU 13

IU 14

IU 15

IU 16

IU 17

IU 18

FAN

OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack Power Redundancy As shown in Figure 10-35. OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack is configured with a pair of DC power supplies of mutual backup. The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in the case of failure of any external input -48 V/-60V power supply. Figure 10-35 DC Power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


251


10 Power Supply

As shown in Figure 10-36. OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack is configured with a pair of AC power supplies of mutual backup. The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in the case of failure of any external input 220 V or 110 V AC power supply. Figure 10-36 AC Power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack PWR CRI MAJ MIN STAT PROG


IU2

Mutual backup AC input


IU1

APIU IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU9 IU10 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15

APIU

Fiber cabling area IU19

Fan

OptiX OSN 6800 Power Redundancy As shown in Figure 10-37. OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with a pair of power supplies of mutual backup. The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in the case of failure of any external input -48 V/-60V power supply. Figure 10-37 Power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack

SCC

IU17 IU18

IU20 PIU

Mutual backup DC input


IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU9 IU10 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16

IU19 PIU

IU21 AUX

VOA area Fan

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


252


10 Power Supply

OptiX OSN 3800 Power Redundancy l

DC power redundancy As shown in Figure 10-38. OptiX OSN 3800 is configured with a pair of power supplies of mutual backup. The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in the case of failure of any external input -48 V/-60V DC power supply.

IU1 FAN

l

IU11

IU6/PIU

IU2

IU7/PIU

IU3

IU8/SCC

IU4

IU9/SCC

IU5

IU10/AUX

Mutual backup DC input

Figure 10-38 DC Power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis

AC power redundancy As shown in Figure 10-39. OptiX OSN 3800 is configured with a pair of AC power supplies of mutual backup. The normal operation of the equipment is not affected in the case of failure of any external input 110 V AC power supply.

IU1

IU11

IU6/APIU

IU2 FAN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

IU3

IU7/APIU

IU4

IU9/SCC

IU5

IU10/AUX


Mutual backup AC input

Figure 10-39 AC Power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis

253


11 Frames

11

Frames

About This Chapter 11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module DCM modules are installed in DCM frames and are used to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmission fibers to help maintain the shape of a propagated signal. 11.2 CRPC Frame The CRPC frame holds a CRPC board, a fan tray assembly, and a power distribution unit. The frame is installed in an open rack. 11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil. 11.4 E2000-ODF E2000-ODF is a functional box that enables fiber splicing and fiber distribution between highpower optical amplifier boards and an ODF. E2000-ODF can house a maximum of six pairs of LSH/APC-LSH/APC (E2000-E2000) connectors. It decreases the number of common fiber connectors and helps ensure the cleanness of fiber end faces to effectively reduce link loss.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


254


11 Frames

11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module DCM modules are installed in DCM frames and are used to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmission fibers to help maintain the shape of a propagated signal. After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the optical signal pulse expands because of the accumulation of positive dispersion. This pulse expansion has a negative impact on system transmission performance. Therefore, dispersion compensation modules (DCMs), which are passive devices, are required to compensate for the positive dispersion. DCMs use the inherent negative dispersion of a dispersion compensating fiber to offset the positive dispersion of transmission fibers to prevent pulse expansion. Depending on the technology that DCMs use, two types of DCMs are available: dispersion compensating fiber (DCF)-DCMs and fiber Bragg grating (FBG)-DCMs. These DCMs can compensate for the following transmission distances: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km (62.1 mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1 mi.). Each DCM frame can hold up to two DCM modules. The left- and right-side mounting ears attach the DCM frame to the columns of a cabinet. For the appearance of the DCM, see Figure 11-1. Figure 11-1 Appearance of the DCM frame

1

1. DCM frame

2

2. DCMs

Table 11-1, Table 11-2, Table 11-3 and Table 11-4 describes the performance requirements for C-band dispersion compensation in different fibers. Each DCM supports a dispersion slope compensation rate (DSCR) within the range of 90% to 110% and an operating wavelength within the range of 1528 nm to 1568 nm.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


255


11 Frames

Table 11-1 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.652 fibers) DCM Module

Transmission Distance (mi./ km)

Max. Insertion Loss (dB)

PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)

Max. Allowable Powera (dBm)

DCM(S)

3.1/5

2.3

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(T)

6.2/10

2.8

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(A)

12.4/20

3.3

0.4

0.1

20

DCM(B)

24.8/40

4.7

0.5

0.1

20

DCM(C)

37.3/60

6.4

0.6

0.1

20

DCM(D)

49.7/80

8

0.7

0.1

20

DCM(E)

62.1/100

9

0.8

0.1

20

DCM(F)

74.5/120

9.8

0.8

0.1

20

FBG-DCM(D)

49.7/80

4

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(E)

62.1/100

4

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(F)

74.5/120

4

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(H)

99.4/160

8

1.6

0.4

23

FBG-DCM(J)

124.2/200

8

1.6

0.4

23

FBG-DCM(L)

149.1/240

8

1.6

0.4

23

a: The Max. Allowable Power refers to the maximum input optical power allowed into the optical module without causing damage.

Table 11-2 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.655 LEAF fibers)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

DCM Module



PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)


DCM(A)

12.4/20

4

0.4

0.3

20

DCM(B)

24.8/40

5

0.5

0.3

20

DCM(C)

37.3/60

5.9

0.7

0.3

20

DCM(D)

49.7/80

6.9

0.8

0.3

20

DCM(E)

62.1/100

7.8

0.9

0.3

20

DCM(F)

74.5/120

8.8

1.0

0.3

20


256


11 Frames

DCM Module



PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)


FBG-DCM(F)

74.5/120

3.7

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(H)

99.4/160

3.7

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(J)

124.2/200

3.7

1.0

0.2

23

FBG-DCM(L)

149.1/240

3.7

1.0

0.2

23


Table 11-3 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (G.653 fibers) DCM Module



PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)


DCM(S)

3.1/5

2

0.2

0.1

20

DCM(T)

6.2/10

3

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(A)

12.4/20

5

0.5

0.1

20


Table 11-4 Performance requirements for C-band DCMs (TW-RS fibers)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

DCM Module



PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)


DCM(A)

12.4/20

2.3

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(B)

24.8/40

2.8

0.3

0.1

20

DCM(C)

37.3/60

3.3

0.4

0.1

20

DCM(D)

49.7/80

3.8

0.4

0.1

20

DCM(E)

62.1/100

4.2

0.5

0.1

20

DCM(F)

74.5/120

4.7

0.5

0.1

20


257


11 Frames

DCM Module



PMD (ps)

PDL (dB)



Table 11-5 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame Parameter

Specifications


48 mm (1.9 in.) x 484 mm (19.1 in.) x 270.5 mm (10.6 in.)

Weight

1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)

11.2 CRPC Frame The CRPC frame holds a CRPC board, a fan tray assembly, and a power distribution unit. The frame is installed in an open rack. Figure 11-2 shows the appearance of the CRPC frame. Situated in the middle of the frame is a CRPC board. On the left of the frame is a fan tray assembly, and on the right is a power source with two power inputs in mutual backup.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


258


11 Frames

Figure 11-2 CRPC frame appearance

3

2 1

1: Fan tray assembly

2: CRPC board

3: Power distribution box

Table 11-6 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame Parameter

Value


86 mm (3.4 in.) x 535 mm (21.1 in.) x 257 mm (10.1 in.)

Weight

3 kg (6.6 lb)

Table 11-7 Voltage and current requirements for the CRPC frame Parameter

Specifications


5A


-48V DC/-60V DC


-48V DC: -40V DC to -57.6V DC -60V DC: -48V DC to -72V DC

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


259


11 Frames

11.3 Fiber Spooling Frame The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil.

Appearance The fiber spool box is installed at the bottom of the cabinet, more than 50 mm away from the chassis. Figure 11-3 shows a fiber spooling frame. Figure 11-3 Fiber spooling frame

1

2 3

4

5 6 1. VOA area

2. Mechanical VOA pen

5. Mounting ear

6. Fiber spool

3. Fiber holder

4. Captive screw

Specifications of the Fiber Spooling Frame l

Dimensions: 442 mm (W) x 283 mm (D) x 44 mm (H) (17.4 in. (W) x 11.1 in. (D) x 1.7 in. (H))

l

Maximum Capacity: A maximum of 40 fibers can be threaded into an fiber spooling frame from each side, and the maximum total fiber length is 50 m.

l

Weight: 2.8 kg (6.2 lb.)

11.4 E2000-ODF E2000-ODF is a functional box that enables fiber splicing and fiber distribution between highpower optical amplifier boards and an ODF. E2000-ODF can house a maximum of six pairs of Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


260


11 Frames

LSH/APC-LSH/APC (E2000-E2000) connectors. It decreases the number of common fiber connectors and helps ensure the cleanness of fiber end faces to effectively reduce link loss. E2000-ODF can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or ETSI cabinet. The following figures show its appearance and structure. Figure 11-4 E2000-ODF appearance

E2000-ODF

Figure 11-5 E2000-ODF structure

1. Fiber spool: coils redundant fiber patch cords. 2. LSH/APC-LSH/APC (E2000-E2000) connectors: connect to LSH/APC fiber patch cords and provide protection. 3. Dustproof cap: protects a connector port.

4. Splicing tray: protects fusion splicing points and coils redundant fiber patch cords.

The following figure shows the appearance of an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (E2000-E2000) connector.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


261


11 Frames

Figure 11-6 LSH/APC optical connector

The following table lists the mechanical specifications of E2000-ODF. Table 11-8 E2000-ODF mechanical specifications

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Specifications


43.6 mm (H) x 482.6 mm (W) x 265 mm (D)

Weight

5 kg

Connector type

LSH/APC-LSH/APC (E2000-E2000)

Fiber quantity

6 fibers


262


12 Overview of Boards

12

Overview of Boards

About This Chapter 12.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser hazard level label. 12.2 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards 12.3 Interconnection Requirements for Tributary Boards and Line Boards 12.4 General Principles for Configuring Electrical Cross-Connections Electrical cross-connections include inter-board cross-connections (namely, cross-connections between boards) and intra-board cross-connections (namely, cross-connections inside a board). This topic describes the concepts, port types, configuration principles, and applications of the two types of electrical cross-connections. 12.5 Board Bar Code Overview A board bar code is a scanner-readable representation of data (such as the name, version, and model) relating to the board to which it is attached. There are one-dimensional bar codes and two-dimensional bar codes.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


263



12.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser hazard level label.

12.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.

NOTICE Always wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap when holding a board to prevent static from damaging the board. Table 12-1 shows the appearance and dimensions of the different board types. Table 12-1 Board appearance and dimensions Board Appearance

Width

Board Name

Numbe r of Slots Per Board

Heig ht (mm /in.)

Wi dt h (m m/ in. )

Dep th (m m/ in.)

TN11L4G

1

264.6 /10.4

25. 4/1 .0

220. 0/8. 7

Height

Depth

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


264


Board Appearance

Width


Board Name


Heig ht (mm /in.)

Wi dt h (m m/ in. )

Dep th (m m/ in.)

TN11OAU1

2

264.6 /10.4

50. 8

220. 0/8. 7

TN11M40

3

264.6 /10.4

76. 2

220. 0/8. 7

TN11AUX

1

107.6 /4.2

25. 4/1 .0

220. 0/8. 7

Height

Depth

Width

Height

Depth

Width

Height Depth

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


265



Board Appearance

Width

Board Name


Heig ht (mm /in.)

Wi dt h (m m/ in. )

Dep th (m m/ in.)

TN11LSXL

4

264.6 /10.4

10 1.6 / 4.0

220. 0/8. 7

TN21MR4

1

118.9 /4.7

25. 4/1 .0

220. 0/8. 7

Height

Depth

Width

Height Depth

12.1.2 Symbols on Boards This section describes the symbols on boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


266



Table 12-2 Symbols on Boards Label

Type

Description

Laser safety class label

Indicates that the laser safety class of boards is HAZARD LEVEL 1M and there may be laser radiation. It warns users not to directly look into fiber connectors without taking any protection measures; instead an optical instrument that can attenuate optical power must be used.

Fiber type label

It specifies the fiber type for the boards.

CAUTION

HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 只能使用G.657A2 光纤

NOTE To prevent the cabinet door from squeezing fibers, the board can use G.657A2 fibers.

警告:开启电源前，务必连好光纤 WARNING:FIBERS MUST ! BE CONNECTED BEFORE POWER UP

Warning label

Applies to CRPC boards. It provides precautions for the boards.

Heat hazard label

Indicates that the board surface temperature is high and it may cause body injury.

Warning label

Applies to PIU boards. It warns the user to shut down the PDU power inputs corresponding to a PIU board before the user replaces the PIU board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


267



Label

Type

Description

Suggestion label

Applies to PIU boards. It advises the user to consult related documents for operations specific to PIU boards.

12.2 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards 12.2.1 Convergence and Non-convergence Applications of Tributary Boards This section introduces the concepts of convergence and non-convergence applications of tributary boards.

Convergence Application Convergence application means multiple client services are aggregated into one ODUk signal to improve the bandwidth utilization. Figure 12-1 uses the TOM board as an example to illustrate the convergence application. Figure 12-1 Convergence application Client-side

WDM-side

ESCON

ESCON

GE

GE

TOM board

ODU1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

FC100

FC100

STM-1

STM-1

Line board

OTUk

ODU1 Aggregation


268



Non-convergence Application Non-convergence application means that each client service is directly mapped into an ODUk signal that matches the client service. In this application, flexible service grooming is achieved. Figure 12-2 uses the TQX board as an example to illustrate the non-convergence application. Figure 12-2 Non-convergence application Client-side

WDM-side TQX board

FC800

FC800

ODU2

STM-64

STM-64

ODU2

10GE-WAN

10GE-WAN

ODU2

10GE-LAN

10GE-LAN

ODU2

Line board

Line board

OTUk

OTUk

Directly-Mapped 10Gbit/s Service

12.2.2 Convergent and Non-convergent OTUs This section introduces the concepts of convergent and non-convergent OTUs.

Convergent OTUs a convergent OTU board aggregates multiple client services into one ODUk signals, or aggregates multiplex multiple lower order ODUk signals into one higher order ODUk signals. Figure 12-3 uses the LQM board as an example to illustrate mapping client services into an ODU1 signals. Figure 12-4 uses the LOA board as an example to illustrate multiplexing lower order ODUk into higher order ODUk.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


269



Figure 12-3 Convergent OTU (mapping client services into an ODU1 signals)

WDM-side

Client-side LQM board ESCON

ESCON

GE

GE

OTU1 ODU1

FC100

FC100

STM-1

STM-1

OTU1

ODU1 Aggregation

Figure 12-4 Convergent OTU (multiplexing lower order ODUk into higher order ODUk) WDM-side

Client-side

LOA board

STM-16/OC-48

STM-16/OC-48

ODU1

FC200

FC200

ODU1 ODU2

OTU1

OTU1

ODU1

HD-SDI

HD-SDI

ODU1

OTU2

OTU2

Four channels of ODU1 multiplex to one channel of ODU2.

Non-convergent OTUs A non-convergent OTU board maps one client services directly into an ODUk signals with a rate matching the client service, and maps one ODUk signals directly into one OTUk signals. Figure 12-5 uses the LDX board as an example to illustrate non-convergent OTUs.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


270



Figure 12-5 Non-convergence application (mapping one client services directly into an ODUk signals)

Client-side

WDM-side

LDX board

STM-64

STM-64

ODU2

OTU2

OTU2

10GE-LAN

10GE-LAN

ODU2

OTU2

OTU2

Directly-Mapped ODU2

12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode Starting from V100R006C01, some boards support new board models. To distinguish new models from existing models, the new board models are marked as standard mode and the existing board models are marked as compatible mode. For boards in standard mode, only channels or physical ports are presented in the models and NMS, with service mapping paths displayed for the channels or physical ports. All ODU layers are allocated to the physical ports. When configuring cross-connections, users do not need to know the internal ports on the boards. Compared with the compatible mode, the standard mode makes operations easier and has fewer end-to-end trail layers, reducing maintenance costs.

Boards Supporting the Standard Mode Table 12-3 lists the boards that support standard mode, the names of the boards on the NMS. Table 12-3 Board names displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Name of Board in Standard Mode (Displayed Only When the Logical Board Is Added)

Name of Board in Compatible Mode (Displayed Only When the Logical Board Is Added)

Board Name (Displayed in the NE Panel)

53TDX(STND)

53TDX

53TDX

54THA(STND)

54THA

54THA

54TOA(STND)

54TOA

54TOA

55TOX

-

55TOX

56TOX

-

56TOX

55TQX(STND)

55TQX

55TQX

54TSC

-

54TSC


271



Name of Board in Standard Mode (Displayed Only When the Logical Board Is Added)

Name of Board in Compatible Mode (Displayed Only When the Logical Board Is Added)

Board Name (Displayed in the NE Panel)

54TSXL

-

54TSXL

54TTX

-

54TTX

55TTX

-

55TTX

52ND2(STND)

52ND2

52ND2

53ND2

53ND2(COMP)

53ND2

55NO2

-

55NO2

53NQ2

53NQ2(COMP)

53NQ2

52NS2(STND)

52NS2

52NS2

53NS2

53NS2(COMP)

53NS2

54NS3(STND)

54NS3

54NS3

55NS3

-

55NS3

56NS3

-

56NS3

54NS4

-

54NS4

56NS4

-

56NS4

57NS4

-

57NS4

54NS4M

-

54NS4M

54HUNQ2

-

54HUNQ2

54HUNS3

-

54HUNS3

54ENQ2(STND)

54ENQ2

54ENQ2

55NPO2(STND)

55NPO2

55NPO2

55NPO2E

-

55NPO2E

The hyphen (-) indicates that the compatible mode is not supported.

When electrical-layer ASON is deployed, there are the following restrictions: l

Boards in standard mode cannot connect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. They can be interconnect only on the backplane side.

l

If electrical-layer ASON services need to traverse boards in standard mode, the version of the source NE must be V100R006C01 or later.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


272



The following uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to introduces the standard and compatible modes of a line board.

Standard Mode Figure 12-6 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode. Figure 12-6 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2) ODUflex:1 2XODUflex

OCh:1

ODU2:1

ODUflex:2

IN/OUT-OCh:1

OCh :1

Other tributary/line/PID board

1 xODU2/ 1xODU 2e

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) ODU1:1 OCh : 1

ODU2:1

4 xODU1

IN/OUT

ODU1:4

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)

ODU0:1

ODU0:2 8 xODU0

ODU1:1 ODU2:1

ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2

OCh :1

ODU 1:4

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8) ODU0:1 8 xODU0

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU0: 8

Backplane

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Cross-connect module

ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path

Service processing module

ODUflex mapping path

ODU0 mapping path (ODU0–>ODU1– >ODU2)

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards


273


12 Overview of Boards ODU0 mapping path (ODU0–>ODU2)

Table 12-4 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board Port Name

Meaning

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODU0:(1-8)

Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU2)

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODU1:(1-4)

Mapping path for ODU1 signals received from the backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1

Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e signals received from the backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODUflex:(1-2)

Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the backplane

IN/OUT

WDM-side optical ports

Compatible Mode Figure 12-7 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode. Figure 12-7 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode Other tributary/ line/PID board

Other tributary/ line/PID board

8 x ODU0


1 x ODU2/ODU2e

4 x ODU1

161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2

Backplane

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1


51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2

ODU1 mapping path


274



Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a crossconnection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.

ODU0 mapping path


Table 12-5 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board Port Name

Description

Automatic Cross-Connection

ODU0LP1ODU0LP4

Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channels 1 and 2.

Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU1LP port.

ODU1LP1

Internal logical ports. Each of the port provides optical channels 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU2LP port

ODU2LP1

Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channel 1.

Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the IN/OUT port

IN/OUT

WDM-side optical ports.

-

Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections.

Comparison of NMS GUIs for Different Modes Service creation operations on the NMS vary according to board models. Table 12-6 uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to illustrate the differences in the board operation GUIs.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


275



Table 12-6 GUIs on the NMS GUI on the NMS

Navigation Path

Compatible Mode

Standard Mode

Path View

In the NE panel, select a board, double-click the board icon or right-click and choose Path View from the shortcut menu.

See Figure 12-8.

See Figure 12-9.

WDM Interface

In the NE Explorer, select the required board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. tab.

See Figure 12-10.

See Figure 12-11.

Create CrossConnection Service

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

See Figure 12-12.

See Figure 12-13.

Figure 12-8 Path View (compatible mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


276



Figure 12-9 Path View (standard mode)

Figure 12-10 WDM Interface (compatible mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


277



Figure 12-11 WDM Interface (standard mode)

Figure 12-12 Create Cross-Connection Service (compatible mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


278



Figure 12-13 Create Cross-Connection Service (standard mode)

12.3 Interconnection Requirements for Tributary Boards and Line Boards 12.3.1 Overview Services can be normal only when the related boards meet all anticipated interconnection requirements. This topic describes board interconnection requirements for various scenarios, including requirements for board hardware and parameter settings on the NMS. This topic takes tributary boards as examples to describe the interconnection requirements. The interconnection requirements for the client side and WDM side of OTU boards are similar.

Interconnection Scenarios This topic describes the interconnection requirements of tributary boards and line boards in the following scenarios when the boards are targeted for use only in the OpitX OSN 8800/6800/3800. When the OpitX OSN 8800/6800/3800 is used with other product types in a network, for example, OptiX OSN 9800, contact Huawei engineers for the specific board interconnection requirements.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


279



Interconnection between regeneration boards and line boards

T

Point-to-point interconnection of line boards End-to-end interconnection of tributary boards

N

Regene ration board Site C

Site A Site D

T

N

Site B

N

T

Interconnection of client-side optical modules

Site E (third-party WDM)

Interconnection of WDM-side grey optical modules

Signal flow

T: Tributary board

N: Line board

Interconnection Requirements The following table lists the interconnection requirements for each scenario. If services are abnormal on two interconnected boards that meet anticipated requirements, check information about the insertion loss, OSNR, allowable wavelength offset of filters, and dispersion against the board specifications. Table 12-7 Board interconnection requirements Scenario

Interconnection Requirements

Point-to-point interconnection of line boards

l The same line code format is used. l The same service mapping path is used. l The same ODU timeslot configuration mode is used. l The same FEC code is used. l The line rate is the same. l To replace one of two interconnected boards, ensure that the dispersion tolerance range of the new board includes the dispersion tolerance range of the board to be replaced. l The same optical channel sequence is used.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


280



Scenario

Interconnection Requirements

End-to-end interconnection of tributary boards

l The same service type is used. l The same service mapping path is used. l The same optical channel is used. l The FEC working state is the same (only for OTN services).

Interconnection between regeneration boards and line boards

l The same line code format is used. l The same FEC code is used. l The line rate is the same.

Interconnection of client-side optical modulesa

l The same line code format is used. l The same optical source type is used. l The actual transmission distance is not greater than the shorter target transmission distance between the two optical modules. l The outgoing wavelength range of the remote optical module is within the ingoing wavelength range of the local optical module. l The same number of wavelengths must be used.

Interconnection of WDM-side grey optical modulesa

l The same line code format is used. l The same optical source type is used. l The actual transmission distance is not greater than the shorter target transmission distance between the two optical modules. l The outgoing wavelength range of the remote optical module is within the ingoing wavelength range of the local optical module.

a: For client-side optical module interconnection and interconnection with third-party OTU boards with grey optical modules, only requirements for optical modules are listed since details of the remote end are unknown.

12.3.2 Point-to-Point Interconnection of Line Boards Successful point-to-point interconnection of line boards requires that the interconnected boards use the same line code format, FEC mode, mapping path, ODU timeslot configuration mode, line rate, and optical channel sequence.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


281



Interconnection Scenarios Scenario 1

Site B

Tributary board

Line board

Line board

Tributary board

Client equipment

Site A

Client equipment

Interconnect

Scenario 2 Site A

Site B

Interconnect

Tributary board

Line board

Line board

Line board

Line board

Tributary board

Client equipment

Site C

Client equipment

Interconnect Interconnect

Interconnection Requirements Line boards can be interconnected to provide normal services only when they meet the hardware requirements and have been configured with the required parameters on the NMS. Item

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Requirements

Parameter Configurations on the NMS Description

Example

Line code format

The optical modules use the same line code format. For the specific line code format supported by a board, see the topic that provides the specifications of the board. Figure 12-14 provides an example.

-

-

FEC working state

-

Set FEC Working State to the same value.

-


282


Item

FEC mode

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




Example

The interconnected boards use the same FEC mode. For example, the For example, the TN54NS4T01 board supports only HFEC and the TN54NS4T11 board supports only SDFEC. Hence, they cannot be interconnected.

If both the interconnected boards support multiple FEC modes, set FEC Mode to the same value for them.

If two TN54NS3 boards need to be interconnected, set FEC Mode to FEC or AFEC for both of them.

NOTE The AFEC and AFEC-2 modes are displayed as AFEC on the NMS. However, they are actually different. A board in AFEC mode cannot be interconnected with a board in AFEC-2 mode.


283



Item

Service mapping path



Example

l The interconnected boards support various ODUk services from the backplane. For example, if ODUflex crossconnections are received from the backplane, the TN55NS3 board cannot be interconnected with the TN56NS3 board because the TN55NS3 board does not support ODUflex crossconnections.

-

-

l The same service mapping path is used. For example, if ODU0 crossconnections are required, the TN52NS3 board uses the following service mapping path: ODU0–>ODU1– >ODU2– >ODU3–>OTU3 while the TN54NS3 board uses the following service mapping path: ODU0–>ODU1– >ODU3– >OTU3. Hence, the TN52NS3 board cannot be interconnected

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


284



Item



Example

l If both the interconnected boards support ODU timeslots, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to the same value.

l If two TN56NS3 boards need to be interconnected, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random or Assign consecutive for both of them.

with the TN54NS3 board. For the specific service mapping paths supported by a board, see the Physical and Logical Ports topic for the board. ODU timeslot configuration mode

-

l If one of the interconnected boards does not support ODU timeslots, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive (the default value is Assign random) for the board that supports ODU timeslots.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


l If a TN56NS3 board needs to be interconnected with a TN55NS3 board, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN56NS3 board.

285


Item

Line rate




Example

The interconnected boards use the same line rate.

Set Line Rate to the same value.

Two TN55NS3 boards are interconnected. Set the Line Rate of the ODU2 channel to the same value. That is, set it to Speedup Mode or Standard Mode for both of the interconnected boards. Set the Line Rate of the ODU3 channel to the same value too.

l The (OTU2e) line rates of most 10G boards in speedup mode are 11.1 Gbit/s. When FC1200 services are received on the client side of the TN12LSX, TN13LSXT01, TN13LSXT02, TN14LSX01M0 1, TN14LSX01M0 2, or TN14LSXT02 board, the line rate is 11.3 Gbit/s. The board cannot be interconnected with another line board that has a 11.1 Gbit/s line rate. l The (OTU3e) line rates of most 40G boards in speedup mode are 44.58 Gbit/s. The TN52NS3 or TN12LSXL board has a 44.57 Gbit/s line rate and cannot be interconnected with any other 40G line boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


l For ODU2LP channel: This parameter needs to be set to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are crossconnected. This parameter needs to be set to Standard Mode when ODU2 signals are crossconnected. l For ODU3LP channel: This parameter needs to be set to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are crossconnected. This parameter could be set to Standard Mode or Speedup Mode when ODU2/ODU3 signals are crossconnected.

286



Item

Dispersion tolerance



Example

To replace one of two interconnected boards, ensure that the dispersion tolerance range of the new board includes the dispersion tolerance range of the board to be replaced.

-

-

In the new network planning scenario, factors such as line dispersion compensation are considered to ensure successful interconnection. This chapter does not describe requirements on the dispersion tolerance of interconnected boards in the new network planning scenario.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


287



Item

Optical channel



Example

-

l Without passthrough services (scenario 1): Sites A and B must use the WDM-side optical channel with the same sequence for one ODUk signal.

A TN53ND2 board in standard mode is interconnected with a TN53ND2 board in compatible mode, and ODU0 signals are received on the backplane side. If the board in standard mode uses optical channel OCh:1ODU2:1-ODU0:1 (that is, ODU0 signals are mapped into the first channel of ODU2), the board in compatible mode must use optical channel 161 (ODUOLP1/ ODU0LP1)-1 (that is, ODU0 signals are mapped into the first channel of ODU2). See Figure 12-15.

l With passthrough services (scenario 2): Sites A and C and sites B and C each must use the WDM-side optical channel with the same sequence. Sites A and B may use optical channels with different sequences.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


288



Figure 12-14 Line code format and optical source type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


289



Figure 12-15 Using the same optical channel

Service cross-connections are configured for tributary and line boards at sites A and B each. The sink optical channel ID of the two sites must be the same.

12.3.3 End-to-End Interconnection of Tributary Boards Successful end-to-end interconnection of tributary boards requires that the interconnected boards use the same service type, service mapping path, and optical channel.

Interconnection Scenarios Site A

Tributary board

Line board

Line board

Tributary board

Client equipment

Site B

Client equipment

Interconnect Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


290



Interconnection Requirements Tributary boards can be interconnected to provide normal services only when they meet the hardware requirements and have been configured with the required parameters on the NMS. Item

Service type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Example

The interconnected boards support services of the same type. For the service types supported by a board, see 14.1 Overview.

Set Service Type to the same value.

Two TOM boards are interconnected. To receive GE services, set Service Type to GE or GE(GFP-T) for both of them.

NOTE When Service Type is set to Any for the interconnected boards, set Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) to the same value.


291



Item

Service mapping path



Example

The interconnected boards support the same service mapping path. For example, the TN11TDX board maps client services into an ODU1 signal, while the TN12TDX board maps client services into an ODU2/ODU2e signal. Hence, they cannot be interconnected. For the specific service mapping paths supported by a board, see the Physical and Logical Ports topic for the board.

l If the interconnected boards support multiple port working modes, set Port Working Mode to ensure that they use the same service mapping path.

l The TN54TOA and TN52TOM boards are interconnected to provide FC100 services. If the service mapping path of the TN52TOM board is set to ODU1 mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1), the service mapping path of the TN54TOA board must be set to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1) and cannot be set to ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any>ODU1).

l If the interconnected boards support multiple Ethernet service encapsulation modes, set Port Mapping to the same value.

l The TN52TDX and TN52TDX boards are interconnected. To receive 10GE LAN services, set Port Mapping to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G) for both of them.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


292



Item



Example

Optical channel

-

Tributary boards at sites A and B use the same optical channel for the same service, including the optical channel of a higherrate signal into which lower-rate signals on a tributary board are multiplexed. See Figure 12-16.

In ODU1 convergence mode, two TN54TOA boards are interconnected, and intra-board crossconnections must be configured. If the TOA board at site A uses optical channel 1 as the sink optical channel of its intraboard crossconnection, then the TOA board at site B must also use optical channel 1 as the sink optical channel of its intra-board crossconnection. See Figure 12-17.

FEC working state

-

When the interconnected boards are deployed to receive OTN services, set FEC Working State to the same value. You are advised to disable the FEC function at both interconnected ends.

Two TOM boards are interconnected. To receive OTU1 services, set FEC Working State to Disabled or Enabled for both of them.

NOTE If the interconnected boards support only OTN services, their FEC working states must be set to the same value to receive OTN services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


293



Figure 12-16 Configurations of the same optical channel Sites A and B use the optical channel with the same ID.

(1 to 8) X ODU1

201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-1

Sites A and B can use optical ports with different IDs.

3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-1 202(ConvGroup2/ConvGroup2)-1




7(RX5/TX5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1



10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8)-8

Figure 12-17 Using the same optical channel

Intra-board cross-connections are configured for tributary boards at sites A and B. The sink optical channel ID of the two sites must be the same.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


294



12.3.4 Interconnection Between Regeneration Boards and Line Boards When being interconnected with a line board, a regeneration board regenerates the WDM-side signal of the line board. Successful interconnection between regeneration boards and line boards requires that the interconnected boards use the same line code format, FEC mode, and line rate.

Interconnection Scenarios Regeneration boards in the following figure refer to line or OTU boards with the regeneration function. Site A

Site B

Interconnect

Tributary board

Line board

Regeneration Board

Line board

Tributary board

Client equipment

Site C

Client equipment

Interconnect

Interconnection Requirements Regeneration boards can be interconnected to provide normal services only when they meet the hardware requirements and have been configured with the required parameters on the NMS. Item

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Example

Line code format

The optical modules use the same line code format. For the specific line code format supported by a board, see the topic that provides the specifications of the board. Figure 12-18 provides an example.

-

-

FEC working state

-

Set FEC Working State to the same value.

-


295


Item

FEC mode

Line rate




Example

The interconnected boards use the same FEC mode. For example, the For example, the TN54NS4T01 board supports only HFEC, and the TN54NS4T11 board supports only SDFEC. Hence, the TN54NS4T11 board cannot work as a regeneration board for the TN54NS4T01 board, and vice versa.

If both the interconnected boards support multiple FEC modes, set FEC Mode to the same value for them.

If a TN54NS3 board works as the regeneration board for another TN54NS3 board, set FEC Mode to FEC or AFEC for both of them.

The interconnected boards use the same line rate.

Set Line Rate to the same value. That is, set it to Speedup Mode or Standard Mode for both of the interconnected boards.

NOTE The (OTU3e) line rates of most 40G boards in speedup mode are 44.58 Gbit/ s. The TN52NS3 or TN12LSXL board has a 44.57 Gbit/s line rate and cannot be interconnected with any other 40G line boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

NOTE The AFEC and AFEC-2 modes are displayed as AFEC on the NMS. However, they are actually different. A board in AFEC mode cannot be interconnected with a board in AFEC-2 mode.


-

296



Figure 12-18 Line code format and optical source type

12.3.5 Interconnection of Client-Side Optical Modules Successful interconnection of client-side optical modules poses requirements on line code format, optical source type, transmission distance, and wavelength range.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


297



Interconnection Scenarios

Line board

Tributary board

Client equipment

Interconnect Requirements for Optical Modules

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Requirements

Remarks

Line code format

The same line code format must be used.

Optical source type

The same optical source type must be used.

For the specific line code format, optical source type, target transmission distance, and wavelength range supported by a board, see the topic that provides the specifications of the board. See .

Transmission distance

The actual transmission distance is not greater than the shorter target transmission distance between the two optical modules.

Wavelength range

The outgoing wavelength range of the remote optical module is within the ingoing wavelength range of the local optical module.


298



Item

Requirements

Remarks

Number of wavelengths

The same number of wavelengths must be used. Otherwise, the interconnection will fail.

You can query the number of wavelengths for an optical module based on the wavelength range. A single-wavelength optical module has only one wavelength range, and a multi-wavelength optical module has multiple wavelength ranges.

For example, 100GBASELR4-10km-CFP has 4 wavelengths, and 100GBASE-10×10 G-10km-CFP has 10 wavelengths. The two optical modules cannot be interconnected. NOTE All optical modules mentioned in this manual, except 40GBASELR4-10km-CFP, 100GBASELR4-10km-CFP, 100GBASE-10×10G -10km-CFP, and (100GBASE-4×25G )/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10k m-CFP, are singlewavelength optical modules.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


299



Figure 12-19 Specifications of optical modules

12.3.6 Interconnection of WDM-Side Grey Optical Modules Successful WDM-side interconnection between a grey optical module on a Huawei OTU and a grey optical module on a third-party OTU poses requirements for line code format, optical source type, transmission distance, and wavelength range.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


300



Interconnection Scenarios Scenario 1

Huawei subnet

Line board

Line board

Thirdparty OTU

Thirdparty OTU

Interconnect

Interconnect

Scenario 2

Line board

Line board

Thirdparty OTU

Local add/drop wavelengths

Interconnect

Requirements for Optical Modules

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Requirements

Example

Line code format


Optical source type


For the specific line code format, optical source type, target transmission distance, and wavelength range supported by a board, see the topic that provides the specifications of the board. See Figure 12-20.


301



Item

Requirements

Transmission distance

The actual transmission distance is not greater than the shorter target transmission distance between the two optical modules.

Wavelength range

The outgoing wavelength range of the remote optical module is within the ingoing wavelength range of the local optical module.

Example

Figure 12-20 Specifications of optical modules

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


302



12.4 General Principles for Configuring Electrical CrossConnections Electrical cross-connections include inter-board cross-connections (namely, cross-connections between boards) and intra-board cross-connections (namely, cross-connections inside a board). This topic describes the concepts, port types, configuration principles, and applications of the two types of electrical cross-connections.

12.4.1 Inter-board Electrical Cross-Connections This topic describes the concept, port types, configuration principles, and two applications of inter-board electrical cross-connections. In addition, this topic provides an example of configuring inter-board electrical cross-connections using the U2000.

Basic Concept Inter-board electrical cross-connections are configured between boards to groom ODUk and GE services inside a subrack. They are configured on the U2000. Specifically, inter-board electrical cross-connections can be configured either between OTN tributary and line boards (include PID boards) or between line boards (include PID boards). The line boards include OTN line boards, universal line boards. Some OTU boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support inter-board 10GE and GE cross-connections. For details, see section "Physical and Logical Ports".

Port Type The source and sink ports must be specified when you configure inter-board cross-connections. On the U2000, the following ports can be configured as the source or sink ports of crossconnections: l

ClientLP-n: the logical client-side port of a board in compatible mode, for example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, where 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) indicates the port number and -1 indicates the channel number.

l

ODUkLP-n: the logical ODUk port of a board in compatible mode, for example, 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2, where 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) indicates the port number and -2 indicates the channel number.

l

RX/TX-n: the logical client-side port of a board in standard mode, for example, RX2/ TX2-2, where RX2/TX2 indicates the port number and -2 indicates the channel number.

l

n(INn/OUTn)-OCH:1-ODUk:m-ODUp:q: the ODUk-level logical port of a board in standard mode, from which you can learn the service mapping path. The service mapping paths are different in the following ODU timeslot configuration modes: Assign consecutive and Assign random. – In the Assign consecutive mode, level-by-level service mapping is performed from lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0->ODU1->ODU2. In this example, the

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


303



logical port is represented as 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2-ODU0:1, which means the first ODU0 in the second ODU1 of the first ODU2 on optical port 1. – In the Assign random mode, cross-level service mapping is performed from a low rate to a high rate, for example, ODU0->ODU2. In this example, the logical port is represented as 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1, which means the first ODU0 in the second ODU2 on optical port 1.

Configuration Principles The source and sink ports of a cross-connection must have the same ODUk service granularity and line rate (standard mode/speedup mode ), but they do not require the same board working mode (standard/compatible) or ODUk timeslot configuration mode (assign random/assign consecutive). The following figure shows ODU0-level cross-connections. In the figure, each of the boards can work in either standard or compatible mode. l

As for the same ODUk service granularity, tributary boards (standard/compatible) can interconnect with line boards (standard/compatible), and the cross-connections between the boards are indicated by 1 2 3 4 in the figure.

l

As for the same ODUk service granularity and line rate, line boards (standard/compatible) can interconnect with each other, and the cross-connection between the boards is indicated by 5 in the figure. OTN tributary board (compatible mode) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

OTN line board(standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

1 2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

3

208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

OTN tributary board (standard mode)

OTN line board(compatible mode) 5

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1

4 10(TX8/RX8)-1

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2

NOTE

l On the U2000, the subrack layout diagram displays different names of the board in different modes (standard and compatible). For example, the name of the TN52ND2 board in standard mode is displayed as TN52ND2(STND), and the name of the TN52ND2 board in compatible mode is displayed as TN52ND2. For the board names in different modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. l Line Rate is a parameter available only to line boards and can be set using the U2000. For the parameter setting of boards, see the "Parameters Can Be Set and Queried on the NMS" topic for the boards.

Applications l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Adding/Dropping of Client-Side Services on the WDM Side Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

304



The cross-connect board cross-connects the ODUk services between OTN tributary boards and line boards/PID boards/universal line boards. Figure 12-21 illustrates how adding/dropping client-side services is achieved on the WDM side using the ODU0 cross-connections between the TOA board (standard mode) and the ND2 board (standard mode). Figure 12-21 Adding/dropping of client-side services on the WDM side at sites A and C Client side

Adding/dropping of client services on the WDM side

A

GE

WDM side

OTN tributary board

OTN network

Client service -> ODU0

ODU0

Cross-connect board

GE

B Local service pass-through on the WDM side

Adding/dropping of client services on the WDM side

Signal flow

ODU0 -> OTU2

ND2 standard mode

TOA standard mode

C

OTN line board

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

10(TX8/RX8)-1




Cross-connections, which must be configured on the NMS

l

Local service pass-through on the WDM side The cross-connect board cross-connects the ODUk services between OTN line boards or universal line boards. When a PID network interconnects with a non-PID network, only centralized electrical cross-connections are supported. For the tangent node between the two networks, crossconnections must be configured between the PID and OTN/universal line boards so that the ODUk services can be sent from the PID network to the non-PID network. Figure 12-22 illustrates how pass-through of a local service is achieved on the WDM side in a non-PID network using the ODU0 cross-connections between the ND2 (standard) and ND2 (compatible) boards. Figure 12-23 illustrates how pass-through of a local service is achieved on the WDM side from the PID network to the non-PID network. Figure 12-22 Local service pass-through on the WDM side at site B (non-PID network) Adding/dropping of client services on the WDM side GE

WDM side

WDM side OTN line board

A

OTN network

OTU2 ->ODU0

ODU0

Cross-connect board

OTN line board

ODU0 ->OTU2

GE

B Local service pass-through on the WDM side

C Adding/dropping of client services on the WDM side

Signal flow

ND2 compatible mode 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2

ND2 standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:3

168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2



Cross-connections, which must be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


305



Figure 12-23 Local service pass-through on the WDM side (interconnection of PID network and non-PID network) Non-PID network - WDM side

PID network - WDM side

Tangent NE: The PID and OTN/universal line boards reside in the same subrack.

PID board

Non-PID network

OTU2 ->ODU1

Cross-connect board

NPO2 standard mode PID network

OTN line board

ODU1

ODU1 ->OTU2

ND2 standard mode





Signal flow between a PID network and a non-PID network Note: A PID network is a network that has PID boards deployed, while a non-PID network has no PID boards deployed.

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Cross-connections, which must be configured on the U2000

Configuring Cross-Connections on the U2000 Figure 12-24 shows the U2000 GUI for configuring cross-connections on the U2000. In the figure, ports enclosed in

are the source and sink ports of the cross-connection.

1.

In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the navigation tree.

2.

Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab and click Create. Then the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

Figure 12-24 GUI for configuring cross-connections (using the ODU0 cross-connection between TOA and ND2 boards as an example) TOA Compatible mode 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Cross-connection level: ODU0 ND2 Standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:3



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


306



NOTE

Direction shown in the figure can be set to Unidirectional or Bidirectional. l Unidirectional creates unidirectional cross-connections from the source optical port to the sink optical port. Signals can be transmitted only in one direction at the same time, such as only sending or receiving signals. l Bidirectional creates bidirectional cross-connections from the source optical port to the sink optical port and from the sink optical port to the source optical port. Signals can be transmitted in both directions at the same time.

12.4.2 Intra-board Electrical Cross-Connections This topic describes the concept and port types of intra-board electrical cross-connections. This topic provides a schematic diagram of intra-board cross-connections.

Basic Concept Intra-board electrical cross-connections are used to flexibly groom services inside a board and they can be configured using the U2000. For example, to converge multiple services into one ODU1 signal, intra-board cross-connections must be created to groom the services into an ODU1 signal.

Port Type The source and sink ports must be specified when you configure intra-board cross-connections. On the NMS, the following ports can be configured as the source or sink ports of crossconnections: l

ClientLP-n: the logical client-side port of a board in compatible mode, for example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, where 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) indicates the port number and -1 indicates the channel number.

l

ODUkLP-n: the logical ODUk port of a board in compatible mode, for example, 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2, where 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) indicates the port number and -2 indicates the channel number.

l

RX/TX-n: the logical client-side port of a board in standard mode, for example, RX2/ TX2-2, where RX2/TX2 indicates the port number and -2 indicates the channel number.

l

n(INn/OUTn)-OCH:1-ODUk:m-ODUp:q: the ODUk-level logical port of a board in standard mode, from which you can learn the service mapping path. For example, 1(IN1/ OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 indicates the first ODU1 signal in the first ODU2 signal on optical port 1.

Schematic Diagram Figure 12-25 illustrates intra-board cross-connections using the TOA board as an example. Services from client-side ports 3(TX1/RX1)-1 to 5(TX3/RX3)-1 are cross-connected to port 201ClientLP. In this way, the three client-side Any-rate services are converged into one ODU1 signal. The TOA board can converge a maximum of eight client-side Any-rate services into one ODU1 signal.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


307



Figure 12-25 Schematic diagram of intra-board cross-connection (multiple Any-rate services into one ODU1 signal) Multiple Any-rate crossconnections in a board are groomed to the multiple channels of one ODU1 port.

ODU1 convergence

Any Any

ODU1

Any

Backplane side

Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

6(TX4/RX4)-1


7(TX5/RX5)-1


8(TX6/RX6)-1

208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2

9(TX7/RX7)-1


10(TX8/RX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-8 Cross-connect module

Multiplex module

Cross-connections inside a board, which must be configured on the NMS Virtual channels, which do not need to be configured on the NMS

Intra-board cross-connections are configured on the U2000 in the same way as inter-board crossconnections. For details, see 12.4.1 Inter-board Electrical Cross-Connections.

12.5 Board Bar Code Overview A board bar code is a scanner-readable representation of data (such as the name, version, and model) relating to the board to which it is attached. There are one-dimensional bar codes and two-dimensional bar codes. Compared with a one-dimensional bar code, a two-dimensional bar code has a different form and adds the country of origin and item revision information.

12.5.1 One-dimensional Bar Code of a Board One-dimensional bar code of a board represents basic information about the board, including the BOM code, factory information, version, and model. For some boards, the bar codes also include the board characteristic codes. Each board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. NOTE

Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from that on the bar code.

Appearance of a One-dimensional Bar Code Figure 12-26 shows the appearance of a one-dimensional bar code.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


308



Figure 12-26 Appearance of the one-dimensional bar code

Description of a One-dimensional Bar Code Figure 12-27 and Figure 12-28 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules. Figure 12-29 and Figure 12-30 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules. Figure 12-27 Description of the bar code (example 1) Delivery information

Board version (TN12)

Board model number

2102314840107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 19210AG Serial number

Manufacture month Manufacture year Vendor

BOM

Environmental Board friendliness flag name (Y: Environmentally friendly)

Characteristic code

Figure 12-28 Description of the bar code (example 2) Delivery information


Board model number

2102315653108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01 TPT Serial number

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


BOM

Environmental friendliness flag

Board Tunable name

Characteristic code

(Y: Environmentally friendly)


309



Figure 12-29 Description of the bar code (example 3)

Delivery information


Board name

2103070768107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 Serial number


BOM

Environmental Board model number friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly)

Figure 12-30 Description of the bar code (example 4) Third and fourth numbers of the BOM



Board name

030HFY 108A000199 Y TN12 LSX T01 Serial number


The complete BOM code is 03030HFY. The first and second digits (03) are omitted in the code above.

Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly)

Board model number

The first four digits in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical module. Table 12-8 provides the meanings of the first four digits in the board BOM.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


310



Table 12-8 Meanings of the first four digits in the BOM codes for OTN boards First Four Digits in BOM

Description

First Four Digits in BOM of the Optional Optical Module

0231

The board with a pluggable optical module is delivered. For example, the TN11LEM24 or TN53NQ2 board includes a board and a pluggable optical module.

3406 or 0303 (client-side and WDMside)

0307

The board with a fixed optical module that has the untunable wavelength is delivered. For example, a fixed optical module that has the untunable wavelength must be configured for the TN11NS2 board on the WDM side.


0302 or 0303

The board consists of components such as the PCB and front panel but not the optical module is delivered. For example, the cross-connect or OA board does not include any optical module.

N/A

Table 12-9 provides the description of the delivery information. Table 12-9 Description of the delivery information of a board Item

Description

Vendor

Indicates the vendor of a board. "10" indicates Huawei.

Manufacture Year

Indicates the last digit of the year when a board is manufactured. For example, "4" indicates 2004. From 2010 onwards, a letter is used to indicate the manufacture year. For example, the letter A indicates 2010, the letter B indicates 2011, and so on.

Manufacture Month

Indicates the month when a board is manufactured. The value is expressed in hexadecimal format. For example, the letter B indicates November.

Serial Number

Indicates the production serial number of a board. The value ranges from 000001 to 999999.

Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows:

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


311



l

For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four digits in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the board is delivered with optical modules installed.

l

For the SSN3SLH41 board, – The first four digits are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not installed. The first four digits in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the board are 3406. – When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four digits in the BOM are 0305.

Table 12-10 provides the meanings of the first four digits in the BOMs for of other OCS boards. Table 12-10 Meanings of the first four digits in the BOM code for an OCS board (excluding SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41) Board Configuration

First Four Digits in BOM

Description

First Four Digits in BOM of the Required Optical Module

Board not installed with optical modules

0302

The board is not installed with any optical module. Optical modules need to be selected for the board as required.

3406

Board installed with optical modules

0305

The board is installed optical modules.

N/A

12.5.2 Two-dimensional Bar Code Label of a Board Two-dimensional barcode label of a board represents board information, including the serial number, one-dimensional code, item number (BOM), item revision, board model, RoHS, country of origin, and two-dimensional code. There are two types of two-dimensional barcode labels that have different field layouts, as shown in Figure 12-31 and Figure 12-32. Figure 12-31 Description of the two-dimensional barcode label (example 1) 1.One-dimensional code

4.Serial number

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

2.Item number (BOM)

6.Country of origin 5.Model

3.Item revision

7.RoHS


8.Two-dimensional code

312



Figure 12-32 Description of the two-dimensional barcode label (example 2) 1.One-dimensional code

5.Model

2.Item number (BOM)

4.Serial number 3.Item revision

6.Country of origin 7.RoHS


Table 12-11 provides the description of board information represented by a two-dimensional barcode label. Table 12-11 Description of the represented board information

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

N o.

Item

Description

1

Onedimensional code

A one-dimensional code contains the serial number of an item, compliant with ISO/IEC 15417 Code 128, and provided for barcode scanning. One-dimensional codes are retained for business continuity.


313



N o.

Item

Description

2

Item number (BOM)

An item number indicates the ID of an item. Huawei's item number is a string of 8 to 17 characters, including letters, digits, and special characters such as "-" and "=". An item number is also known as a part number (PN). The item number of a board is a string of 8 or 12 characters. The codes use the format of the "category code + serial code + connector + suffix code + special character", with 17 characters at most: Category Suffix Special Serial Code Connector Code Code Character A B C D1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = 1 2 3

l Category code(compulsory): It consists of four digits or uppercase letters (excluding I, O, and Z). The last two characters indicate the subcategory. Product items can be directly identified based on the category codes. For details about category codes of boards, see Table 12-12. l Serial code(compulsory): It consists of four to eight digits or upper-case letters (excluding I, O, Z). The serial code is automatically generated by the system. The sequence for generating serial codes: using digits first, and using letters only after the digits are used up. l Connector(optional): The fixed Decimal to Binary Converter (DBC) case "-" is used. It is only used when the code contains suffixes. l Suffix code(optional): It consists of three digits to represent the code variant, indicating correlations among product items. l Special character(optional): "=" is only used for spare part codes in special circumstances. "=" is used with an item code to form the spare part code for the item. "=" appears only in spare part codes.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


314



N o.

Item

Description

3

Item revision

An item revision refers to the edition of product items which record changes in the technical status of product items. The item revision consists of one letter and two digits. There are substitution relationships between the revisions of the same board item number. A substitution relationship can be bidirectional interchangeability or unidirectional interchangeability. l Bidirectional interchangeability indicates that the new and old revisions can be interchanged. If the digit part in an item revision is upgraded and the letter part remains unchanged, for example, from A01 to A02, item functions are not changed, and generally the design is optimized or manufacturer information is changed. The item revision is an identifier for internal management. l Unidirectional interchangeability indicates that the new revision can substitute the old revision, but the old revision cannot substitute the new revision. When item functions are changed, only the letter part in an item revision is upgraded, for example, from A02 to B01. Revision B01 can be used to replace revision A02, but the reverse is not true. A slash (/) is used to separate a component code (BOM) and a component version.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


315



N o.

Item

Description

4

Serial number

Serial number (SN) is the exclusive identifier of an item. The SN can help after-sales personnel identify the maintenance period. The value is a string of 12, 16, or 20 characters containing digits and letters. l Each 12-character serial number consists of a 2-character manufacturer code, a 3-character date code, and a 7-character sequence number. The 3-character date code consists of the last two digits of the year (for example, "12" from 2012) and a character ranging from 1 to 9 and A to C which indicate the months from January to December respectively. Example: SN：10 13 6 0005802 Sequence number

Vendor

Manufacture year

Manufacture month

Leading characters

l Each 16-character serial number consists of the last 6 characters of an item number, a 2-character manufacturer code, a 2-character date code, and a 6-code sequence number. In a 2-character date code, the first character is the last digit of the year ranging from 2000 to 2009 (for example, "4" represents 2004) or a character ranging from A to Z that indicates the year from 2010 to 2035 (for example, "B" represents 2011), and the second character is ranging from 1 to 9 and A to C which indicate the months from January to December respectively. Example: Third and fourth numbers of the BOM

SN:030HFY 108A000199 Sequence number


The complete BOM should be 03030HFY. "03" are taken out in the BOM above.

l Each 20-character serial number consists of the character string "21", an 8-character item number, a 2-character manufacturer code, a 2-character date code, and a 6-character sequence number. The 2-character date code in a 20-character serial number is the same as that in a 16-character serial number. Example: SN:2102314840107A000090 Sequence number

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


BOM


316



N o.

Item

Description

5

Model

The value consists of digits and letters. For a board, this field contains information about the version, name, type, and correlation of the board. "-xxx" are extended codes, representing different types of optical modules board configuration of 0231. Example: TN12 NS2 01M02 Board type

Board name

Board functional version

TN11 LEX4 -001 Extended code

Board name


6

Country of origin

Indicates the country where the item is manufactured.

7

RoHS

An environmental friendliness flag code identifies the environmental protection information. Possible values are as follows: l Y: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5 requirements and its lead status is not identified. l Y1 and Y3: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5 requirements and contains lead. l Y2: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5 requirements and is lead-free. l N: indicates that the product is not environmentally friendly.

8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Twodimensional code

A two-dimensional code normally contains the serial number, item number, item revision, and manufacturer identifier. Some twodimensional codes do not contain manufacturer identifier due to length limitations. Two-dimensional codes comply with the ISO16022 - Data Matrix standard and are provided for barcode scanning as an upgrade of the one-dimensional code. Manufacturer identifier: Manufacturer information that Huawei applies for from the Electronic Data Interchange Forum for Companies with Interests in Computing and Electronics (EDIFICE). The manufacturer identifier of Huawei is LEHWT.


317



Table 12-12 Meanings of the category code of a board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Category Code

Description

Category Code of an Optional Optical Module

0231



0307



0302 or 0303


N/A


318



13

Optical Transponder Unit

About This Chapter 13.1 Overview An OTU (Optical Transponder Unit) board converts client-side services into standard optical signals after performing mapping, convergence, and other procedures. The board also performs the reverse process. 13.2 ECOM ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit 13.3 L4G L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity 13.4 LDGD LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 13.5 LDGS LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 13.6 LDM LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 13.7 LDMD LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 13.8 LDMS LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 13.9 LDX LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 13.10 LEM24 LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board 13.11 LEX4 LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


319



13.12 LOA LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board. 13.13 LOG LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit 13.14 LOM LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board 13.15 LQG LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board 13.16 LQM LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board 13.17 LQMD LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 13.18 LQMS LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 13.19 LSC LSC: 100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 13.20 LSCM LSCM: 100Gbit/s Wavelength Conversion Board 13.21 LSQ LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 13.22 LSX LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 13.23 LSXL LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 13.24 LSXLR LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board 13.25 LSXR LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board 13.26 LTX LTX: 10-Port 10Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board 13.27 LWX2 LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board 13.28 LWXD LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) 13.29 LWXS LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 13.30 TMX

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


320



TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


321



13.1 Overview An OTU (Optical Transponder Unit) board converts client-side services into standard optical signals after performing mapping, convergence, and other procedures. The board also performs the reverse process.

Positions of OTU Boards in a WDM System Figure 13-1 shows the positions of OTU boards in a WDM system. Figure 13-1 Positions of OTU boards in a WDM system Client-side services

WDM-side services

OTU OA

OM

FIU

SC1

OTU

WDM-side ODF

Client-side equipment

OTU

OA

OD

OTU

Types of OTU Boards OTU boards are classified into the following types according to the WDM-side rates and functions: l

2.5G OTU boards: For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-1.

l

10G OTU boards: For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-2.

l


l


l

Ethernet over WDM (EoW) boards: These OTU boards support Layer 2 processing of Ethernet services. For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-5.

l

Transparent transmission OTU boards: These OTU boards do not support OTN processing. They only convert client services into ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals. For the main functions of these OTU boards, see Table 13-6.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


322



Table 13-1 Main functions of 2.5G OTU boards Boar d

Type

Client-Side Service

Pluggable Optical Module

WDM Specificatio ns

Type

Max. Num ber

Client Side

WDM Side

DW DM

CW DM

TN11 LDG D

Conver gence

GE

2

Y

N

Y

Y

TN11 LDG S

Conver gence

GE

2

Y

N

Y

Y

TN12 LDM

Conver gence

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FICON, FC100, GE, FE, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI

2

Y

Y

Y

Y

OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express

1


2

Y

N

Y

N


1


2

Y

N

Y

N


1

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FDDI

4

Y

Y

Y

Y

GE, FC100, FICON

2

FC200, FICON Express, STM-16, OC-48, OTU1

1

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI

4

Y

N

Y

Y

GE, FC100, FICON

2

FC200, FICON Express, STM-16, OC-48

1

TN11 LDM D

TN11 LDM S

TN13 LQM

TN11 LQM D

Conver gence

Conver gence

Conver gence

Conver gence

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


323


Boar d

TN12 LQM D

TN11 LQM S

TN12 LQM S

Type

Conver gence

Conver gence

Conver gence


Client-Side Service


WDM Specificatio ns

Type

Max. Num ber

Client Side

WDM Side

DW DM

CW DM


4

Y

N

Y

N

GE, FC100, FICON

2


1

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI

4

Y

N

Y

Y

GE, FC100, FICON

2


1


4

Y

N

Y

N

GE, FC100, FICON

2


1

TN11 ECO M

Conver gence

FE

8

Y

Y

N

Y

TN11 LQG

Conver gence

GE

4

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11 L4G

Conver gence

GE

6

Y

N

Y

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


324



Table 13-2 Main functions of 10G OTU boards Boar d

Type

Client-Side Service


WDM Specificatio ns

Type

Max. Num ber

Client Side

WDM Side

DW DM

CW DM

TN1 1LS X

Nonconverg ence

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2

1

Y

N

Y

N

TN1 2LS X

Nonconverg ence

STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2

1

Y

N

Y

N

TN1 3LS X

Nonconverg ence

STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e

1

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 4LS X

Nonconverg ence

STM-64, OC-192, FC1200, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e

1

Y

N

Y

N

TN1 2LD X

Nonconverg ence

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e

2

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 1LO A

Converg ence

FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, SDI

8

Y

Y

Y

N

HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, STM–16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1

4

3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR, FC400, FICON4G

2

FC800, FICON8G

1

TN1 1LO G

Converg ence

GE

8

Y

N

Y

N

TN1 2LO G

Converg ence

GE

8

Y

Y

Y

N

TN1 1LO M

Converg ence

GE, FC100, FICON, ISC 1G

8

Y

N

Y

N

FC200, FICON EXPRESS, ISC 2G

4

FC400, FICON4G

2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


325


Boar d

TN1 2LO M

Type

Converg ence


Client-Side Service


WDM Specificatio ns

Type

Max. Num ber

Client Side

WDM Side

DW DM

CW DM

GE, FC100, FICON, ISC 1G

8

Y

Y

Y

N

FC200, FICON EXPRESS, ISC 2G

4

FC400, FICON4G, 3G-SDI

2

TN1 1LS XR

Relay

N/A

1

N

N

Y

N

TN1 1TM X

Converg ence

STM-16, OC-48, OTU1

4

Y

N

Y

N

TN1 2TM X

Converg ence

STM-16, OC-48, OTU1

4

Y

Y

Y

N

Table 13-3 Main functions of 40G OTU boards Board

Type

Client-Side Service


WDM Specificati ons

Type

Max. Number

Client Side

WDM Side

DW DM

CW DM

TN11LSQ

Nonconvergence

STM-256, OC-768, OTU3

1

N

N

Y

N

TN11LSXL

Nonconvergence

STM-256, OC-768

1

N

N

Y

N

TN12LSXL

Nonconvergence

STM-256, OC-768, OTU3

1

N

N

Y

N

TN15LSXL

Nonconvergence

STM-256, OC-768, OTU3

1

N

N

Y

N

TN11LSXLR

Relay

N/A

N/A

N

N

Y

N

TN12LSXLRa a: Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


326



Table 13-4 Main functions of 100G OTU boards Board

Type

Client-Side Service


WDM Specifications

Type

Max. Number

Client Side

WDM Side

DWDM

CWDM

TN12 LSC

Nonconvergence

100GE

1

Y

N

Y

N

TN13 LSC

Nonconvergence

100GE, OTU4

1

Y

N

Y

N

TN15 LSC

Nonconvergence

100GE, OTU4

1

Y

N

Y

N

TN17 LSCM

Nonconvergence

100GE, OTU4

1

Y

N

Y

N

TN11 LTX

Convergenc e

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192

10

Y

N

Y

N

TN12 LTX

Convergenc e

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2/OTU2e

10

Y

N

Y

N

TN15 LTX

Convergenc e

10GE LAN, 10GE 10 WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2/OTU2e, FC1200, FC800

Y

N

Y

N

Table 13-5 Main functions of EoW boards Board

Type

Client-Side Service

WDM Specifications

Type

Max. Number

Client Side

WDM Side

DWDM

CWDM

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11 LEM2 4

Convergenc e, L2 service processing

FE, GE

22

10GE-LAN, 10GEWAN

2

TN11 LEX4

Convergenc e, L2 service processing

10GE-LAN, 10GEWAN

4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



327



Table 13-6 Main functions of transparent transmission OTU boards Board

Type

Client-Side Service


WDM Specifications

Type

Max. Number

Client Side

WDM Side

DWDM

CWDM

TN11 LWX2

Transparent transmissio n

STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI, SDI, FICON, FICON Express, HDSDI

2

N

N

Y

Y

TN11 LWX D



1

N

N

Y

Y

TN11 LWXS



1

N

N

Y

Y

TN12 LWXS


STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI, SDI, FICON, FICON Express, HDSDI, ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO

1

N

N

Y

Y

13.2 ECOM ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit

13.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the ECOM board is TN11.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


328



Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Boa rd


Enhance d 8800 T64 Subrack



8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11E CO M

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.2.2 Application The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.

Application Scenario 1: Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A The management signal and service signal of the OptiX OSN 900A are together transmitted to the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 over the line. The FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 separates the signal received into management signal and service signal. The service signal is processed by the OTU board. The management signal is accessed by the ECOM board through the FE port and then is transmitted to the SCC board through the backplane. For the position of the ECOM in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and OptiX OSN 900A, see Figure 13-2. Figure 13-2 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and OptiX OSN 900A Service signal

OptiX OSN 900A

×8

OptiX OSN 900A

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

F I Management signal U

×8

Management signal F I Service signal U

OTU

ECOM

ETH

OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 SCC

OTU


329



NOTE

Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.

Application Scenario 2: Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service When used for convergence or deconvergence, the ECOM board can be used only in the CWDM system. For the position of the ECOM in the WDM system, see Figure 13-3. Figure 13-3 Position of the ECOM board in the WDM system GE

GE MUX

1

FE

DMUX

1

ECOM

FE

ECOM

8

DMUX

MUX

GE

8 GE

Client side

Client side

NOTE

The MUX and DMUX boards shown in the figure are the OADM boards used in the CWDM system.

13.2.3 Functions and Features The ECOM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and loopback on the client side. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-7. Table 13-7 Functions and features of the ECOM board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Achieves the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A. l Converges/deconverges 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Client-side service type

FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

WDM specification

Supports the CWDM specifications.


330




Description

Cross-connect capabilities

OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the transmission of one GE signal each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of one GE signal to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one GE signal from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

Tunable wavelength function

Not Supported

PRBS function

Not Supported

Protection scheme

Not Supported

Alarms and performance events monitoring

l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function

Not Supported

Test frame

Not Supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not Supported

Electrical-layer ASON

Not Supported

eSFP

Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side.

l Detects the optical power and reports the alarms and performance events for the board.

Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM side. Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-4 and Figure 13-5 show the functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


331



Figure 13-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board Backplane(management signal transmission)

FE Client side RX1 RX2

WDM side O/E

E/O

RX8

L2 switching module

TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8

Client-side optical module


O/E

OUT

IN

WDM-side optical module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse

Required voltage

DC power supply from a backplane

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow (Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A) The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals. In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the SCC board, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one FE optical signal (management signal) from client equipment through one of the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the FE electrical signal is sent to the L2 switching module, and groomed by the backplane to the SCC board through the ETH interface.

l

Receive direction The L2 switching module receives one FE electrical signal from the SCC board, and then sends the signal to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the FE electrical signal, and then outputs one FE optical signal through one of the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


332



Figure 13-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM Backplane(service cross-connection)

GE Client side RX1 RX2

WDM side O/E

E/O

RX8

L2 switching module

TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8



O/E

OUT

IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow (Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service) The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals. In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the WDM side of the ECOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as multiplexing the eight FE signals into one GE signal. Then, the module outputs the GE signal to the cross-connect module. The cross-connect module performs operations such as service cross-connection of the GE signal. The GE signal is sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out an GE optical signal carried over an ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM wavelengths through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives an GE optical signal carried over an ITU-T G. 694.2-compliant CWDM wavelength from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


333



After the O/E conversion, the GE signal is sent to the cross-connect module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs one GE signal. The L2 switching module demultiplexes the GE signal into a maximum of eight FE signals and send them to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight FE electrical signals, and then outputs eight FE optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight FE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion of eight FE electrical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion of GE electrical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

L2 switching module – Forwards service signals. – Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.

l

Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the ECOM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.

l

Control and communication module – Controls operations on the board. – Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the system control and communication board.

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Power supply module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

334



– Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.

13.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-6 shows the front panel of the ECOM board. Figure 13-6 Front panel of the ECOM board

ECOM STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 OUT IN

ECOM

Indicators Four indicators are present on the front panel: Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


335



l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

l

Service active status indicator (ACT) - green

l

Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)

l

Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

For details about these indicators, see A.4 Board Indicators.

Interfaces Table 13-8 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-8 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ECOM board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receive single-wavelength signals from the associated optical demultiplexer board or optical add/drop multiplexer board.

OUT

LC

Transmit single-wavelength signals to the associated optical multiplexer board or optical add/drop multiplexer board.

TX1-TX8

LC

Transmit service signals to client equipment.

RX1-RX8

LC

Receive service signals from client equipment.

Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum power launched by the board is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).

13.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one ECOM board. Table 13-9 shows the valid slots for the ECOM board. Table 13-9 Valid slots for ECOM board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

OptiX OSN 3800 chassis

IU2-IU5

13.2.7 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes the logical ports displayed on the NMS and the physical ports of the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


336



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-10lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-10 Mapping between the physical ports on the ECOM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port

Port Number on the NMS

IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE

The port number displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical ports. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, AP1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-7 shows the application model of the ECOM board. Table 13-11 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-7 Port diagram of the ECOM board Client side PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8 PORT9 PORT10

WDM side

VCTRUNK1

101( AP1/AP1)-1

L2 switching module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1(IN/OUT)-1

Cross-connect WDM-side optical module module


337



Table 13-11 Description of NM port of the ECOM board Port Name

Description

PORT3-PORT10

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1RX8/TX8.

VCTRUNK1

Internal virtual port.

AP1

Internal convergence port.

IN/OUT

Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

13.2.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the ECOM board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Service Mode and HUB Mode. NOTE

If the HUB mode need be configured, there must be one-to-one connection between ports, which need not be set on the U2000.

If the service mode need be configured, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the eight channels of FE optical signals and one channel of GE electrical signals accessed from the client-side ports is implemented through the L2 switching module.

l

Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000.

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and AP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client in Figure side of other boards for the inter-board services deconvergence), as shown 13-8.

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for the inter-board services convergence), as shown 13-8.

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

in Figure

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of GE level between the AP port and the IN/OUT port of the ECOM, realizing the cross-connect grooming of GE services.


338



Figure 13-8 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM Client side

Other board 101(AP1/AP1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

102(AP2/AP2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

103(AP3/AP3)-1

201(LP/LP)-3

104(AP4/AP4)-1

201(LP/LP)-4

WDM side

WDM side

Client side 1

ECOM

101(AP1/AP1)-1 2

The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to theWDM side of other boards

1 2

13.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of ECOM, refer to Table 13-12. Table 13-12 ECOM parameters Field

Value

Description

Optical Interface/ Channel

-

Displays the position of the optical interface.

Optical Interface Name

-

Sets and queries the Optical Interface Name. An Optical Interface Name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


339



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused

The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board.

Default: Used

When this parameter is set to Unused for a port, service alarms reported for this port will be masked and the function for automatically disabling service-affecting settings is invalid for the port. This parameter is set to Used by default. Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment. Optical Interface Loopback

Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop

Specifies the loopback mode for the optical interface on a board.

Default: NonLoopback Laser Status

Off, On Default: On

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

-

Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.

Band Type

-

Queries the band type.

Tunable Wavelength Range

-

Displays the tunable wavelength range supported by the WDM-side optical interface on the board.

Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0

Sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0

See Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: / Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C

Sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


340



Field

Value

Description

Board Mode

HUB Mode, Service Mode

Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario.

Default: HUB Mode

Service Mode: In this mode, the ECOM board can aggregate eight FE services into one GE service. HUB Mode: In this mode, the ECOM board can aggregate eight FE services into one FE service.

13.2.10 ECOM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard

Client-Side Fixed Optical Module

Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module

TN 11E CO M

N/A

100 BASE-FX-10 km-eSFP

N/A

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP

100 BASE-FX-40 km-eSFP 100 BASE-FX-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP



NOTE

Margins exist between the default input power low threshold and the receiver sensitivity and between the default input power high threshold and the overload point. These margins ensure that the system can report an input power low or high alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or overload point.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


341



Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-13 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100 BASEFX-10 kmeSFP

100 BASEFX-40 kmeSFP


Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

Target transmission distance

-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power

dBm

-3

0

5

Minimum mean launched power

dBm

-11.5

-4.5

-2

Minimum extinction ratio

dB

9

9

9

Operating wavelength range

nm

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3z-compliant

Receiver parameter specifications at point R

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580

Receiver sensitivity (EOL)

dBm

-19

-20

-22

Minimum receiver overload

dBm

-3

-3

-3


342



Table 13-14 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP


Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611

Central wavelength deviation

nm

±6.5

±6.5

Maximum -20 dB spectral width

nm

1.0

1.0

Minimum side mode suppression ratio

dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620

Receiver sensitivity

dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


343



WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-15 CWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range

nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611

Maximum mean launched power

dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1

1


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


344




Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l





TN11ECOM

19.6

21.6


13.3 L4G L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity

13.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the L4G board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L 4G

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.3.2 Update Description This section describes the hardware updates in V100R006C01 and later versions as well as the reasons for the updates. Any product versions that are not listed in the document means that they have no hardware updates. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


345





Supplemented limitations on ALS, LPT, and client 1+1 protection for boards. ALS: The boards support the ALS function only when the EPL service (between Port and VCTRUNK) is configured.

The usage limitation information is supplemented.

LPT: The boards support the LPT function only when the EPL service (between Port and VCTRUNK) is configured. Client 1+1 protection: The boards support client 1+1 protection only when the EPL service (between Port and VCTRUNK) is configured.

13.3.3 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the L4G board implements the conversion between six channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the L4G board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-9. Figure 13-9 Position of the L4G board in the WDM system

RX1

RX1

4xGE

M U X IN / D OUT M U X

1×ODU5G

TX6

M U OUT X / IN D M U X

1×OTU5G/FEC5G

1×ODU5G

RX6

4×GE

GE

1×OTU5G/FEC5G

TX1

TX1

L4G

L4G

L2

GE TX6 RX6

L2 GE

GE

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot or cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


346



NOTE

The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

13.3.4 Functions and Features The L4G is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-16. Table 13-16 Functions and features of the L4G board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Converges up to six non-full bandwidth GE service signals into four GE service signals and multiplexes these four signals into an OTU 5G/FEC 5G signal. Converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.


GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s

Crossconnect capabilities

l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU5G/FEC5G interface on WDM-side. l Supports TCM and PM functions for ODU5G. l Supports SM function for OTU5G.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Layer 2 switching

Supports the MAC address learning and aging.

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM specifications.


Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

Supports one VB.


347




Description

Port-based flow control

Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination. NOTE Transparent transmission of Pause frames is not supported. When a site receives a Pause frame, it terminates the frame.

LPT function

Supported NOTE The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional EPL services (port <->VCTRUNK). When the LPT function is enabled, Source CVLAN and Sink C-VLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.

FEC coding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ALS function

Supports the ALS function on the client side.

Test frame

Supported

Latency measuremen t

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

Electricallayer ASON

Not supported

NOTE ALS function is supported only when EPL services (port <->VCTRUNK) are provisioned.


348




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports VLAN SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/ QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. NOTE Client 1+1 protection is supported only when EPL services (port <->VCTRUNK) are configured on the board.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Protocols or standards compliance

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

MAC Inloop

Supported

PHY Outloop

Supported

Protocols or standards for transparent transmission (nonperformance monitoring)

IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, and PPP MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, and IGRP

Protocols or standards for service processing (performance monitoring)

IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN

13.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


349



Figure 13-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board Backplane(service cross-connection)

GE

WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

6×GE

RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6

4×GE

L2 switching module

E/O

Client-side optical 6×GE module

E/O GE CrossOTN encapsulation connect processing and mapping module module module

4×GE

OUT

O/E IN WDM-side optical module

Signal processing module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow In the signal flow of the L4G board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the L4G to the WDM side of the L4G, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives a maximum of six channels of flat-rate GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of four channels of GE signals to the signal processing module. The signal processing module performs operations such as the service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals. The OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


350



After O/E conversion, the OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU 5G/FEC 5G framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of GE signals. The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends six channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of six channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from six channels of internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

L2 switching module – Forwards service signals. – Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the L4G and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


351



Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU 5G/ FEC 5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, processes overheads in OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l

Power supply module – Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.

13.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-11 shows the front panel of the L4G board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


352



Figure 13-11 Front panel of the L4G board

L4G STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 OUT IN

L4G

Indicators Four indicators are present on the front panel: l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-17 lists the type and function of each interface. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


353



Table 13-17 Types and functions of the interfaces on the L4G board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX6

LC


RX1-RX6

LC



13.3.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one L4G board. Table 13-18 shows the valid slots for the L4G board. Table 13-18 Valid slots for the L4G board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.3.8 Characteristic Code for the L4G The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

13.3.9 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS and the logical ports of the board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


354



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-19 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-19 Mapping between the physical ports on the L4G board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-12 describes the application model of the L4G board. Table 13-20 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-12 Port diagram of the L4G board Client side PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8

WDM side VCTRUNK1 101( AP1/AP1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

VCTRUNK2 102( AP2/AP2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2


201(LP/LP)-3


201(LP/LP)-4

L2 swithing module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


201(LP/LP)-1



1(IN/OUT)-1


355



Table 13-20 Description of NM port of the L4G board Port Name

Description

PORT3-PORT8

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX6/TX6 respectively.

VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4

Internal virtual ports.

AP1-AP4

Internal convergence ports.

LP

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.

IN/OUT


13.3.10 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the L4G board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the six channels of GE optical signals and the four channels of GE electrical signals accessed from the clientside ports is realized through the L2 switching module. NOTE

One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 1.25 Gbit/s.

l

There are one-to-one port connections between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module. These connections do not need to be set on the U2000.

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created: – Create the cross-connection between the internal AP and LP ports of the L4G board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and

in Figure 13-13.

– Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 13-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the AP port or RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the L4G board, as shown by 4 in Figure 13-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board for protection and inter-board service convergence.) Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


356


l


Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other board, as shown by 5 in Figure 13-13. (This cross-connection enables the passing-through of the broadcast services.)

l

Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the AP port of other boards, as shown by 6 in Figure 13-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence.)

l

The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. This connection does not need to be configured on the U2000.

Figure 13-13 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G board Client side

Other board 4

3

6

5

201(LP/LP)-2

102(AP2/AP2)-1/4(RX2/TX2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1/5(RX3/TX3)-1

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1

101(AP1/AP1)-1/3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-3

104(AP4/AP4)-1/6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP/LP)-4

101(AP1/AP1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

Client side 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-2 2 1

201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

L4G The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board The WDM side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards

Other board

1 2 3 4 5 6

TN11L4G / TN11LDGD / TN11LDGS / TN11LOG / TN12LOG / TN11LQG / TN13LQM / TN11LQMD / TN12LQMD / TN11LQMS / TN12LQMS / TN11TBE / TN11TDG / TN11TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM

13.3.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of L4G, refer to Table 13-21.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


357



Table 13-21 L4G parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-

Sets and queries the Optical Interface Name.

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused

An Optical Interface Name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.

Default: Used

The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. When this parameter is set to Unused for a port, service alarms reported for this port will be masked and the function for automatically disabling serviceaffecting settings is invalid for the port. This parameter is set to Used by default. Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment.

Optical Interface Loopback


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: NonLoopback

Default:

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board.

l WDM side: On

See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

l Client side: Off Automatic Laser Shutdown

Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost.

Service Mode

OTN, SDH

Specifies the service mode for a board.

Default: OTN

Set the line-side service modes of the local and remote boards to the same value. When the local board is connected to an SDH service board on nonWDM equipment, set the line-side service mode to SDH.

Disabled, Enabled

Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function.

LPT Enabled

Default: Disabled

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


358



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled

Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance.

Default: Enabled

The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid. Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196 .050 to 80/1560.61/19 2.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/20 8.170 to 18/1611.00/18 8.780

See Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.


C, CWDM

Sets the band type of the current working wavelength.

Default: C

See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

SD Trigger Condition

None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DE G

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides.

Default: None

See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


359



13.3.12 L4G Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L 4G

N/A

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP

3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP

3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

1000 BASE-ZX-80 kmeSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

NOTE


Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-22 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (GE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0. 5 km-eSFP

1000 BASELX-10 kmeSFP


1000 BASEZX-80 kmeSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


360


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-


Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

Table 13-23 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (CWDM colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



NRZ

NRZ


361



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-


G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


362



WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-24 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2


dBm

-2

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00

Center frequency deviation

GHz

±10


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

3400

3400


-

APD

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-25

-25


dBm

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

363


l




WDM-Side Optical Module



TN11L4 G

3400 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD

50.0

55.0


53.0

58.0


13.4 LDGD LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

13.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LDGD board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L DG D

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.4.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGD board implements the conversion between two channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendation, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


364



For the position of the LDGD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-14. Figure 13-14 Position of the LDGD board in the WDM system

RX1

LDGD

OUT1

MUX/ IN1 DMUX

TX1

IN2 MUX/ DMUX OUT2

RX1 1×ODU1

MUX/ IN2 DMUX

TX1

MUX/ DMUX OUT1

OUT2

TX2

LDGD

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

GE RX2

IN1

GE

GE TX2 RX2

GE

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board or paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

13.4.3 Functions and Features The LDGD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-25. Table 13-25 Functions and features of the LDGD board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LDGD converts signals: 2 x GE <-> 1 x OTU1/STM-16 Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.




l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


365




Description

OTN function

l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1.

WDM specification

l Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.



ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported.

LPT function

Supported

FEC coding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures.

l Supports ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications.

l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors B2 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ALS function


Test frame

Supported

Latency measurement

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Port MTU

The value ranges from 1518 to 9600, in bytes. That is, the maximum size of the supported Jumbo frame is 9600 bytes.


366




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3z


ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2

13.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-15 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


367



Figure 13-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board Backplane (service cross-connection) GE Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2

O/E

TX1 TX2

E/O Client side Optical module

E/O

GE OTN Cross- encapsulation connect and mapping Processing module module module

Splitter

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2

O/E WDM side Optical module


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LDGD board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LDGD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGD to the WDM side of the LDGD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1OUT2 optical interfaces.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


368


l


Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the LDGD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


369



Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-16 shows the front panel of the LDGD board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


370



Figure 13-16 Front panel of the LDGD board

LDGD STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LDGD



l


l


l





371



Table 13-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGD board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.4.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDGD board. Table 13-27 shows the valid slots for the LDGD board. Table 13-27 Valid slots for LDGD board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD The characteristic code for the LDGD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-28. Table 13-28 Characteristic code for the LDGD board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Code

Description

Description

First four digits

The frequency of forth optical signal

The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side.


372



Code

Description

Description

Last four digits


The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGD board is 92109210. l

"92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side both are 192.10 THz.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-29 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-29 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDGD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-17 shows the application model of the LDGD board. Table 13-30 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


373



Figure 13-17 Port diagram of the LDGD board

3 (RX1/T X1)-1 4 (RX2/T X2)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

201(LP/LP)-2

Cross-connect mo dule

Servi ce p rocessing module

1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2 /OUT2)-1

WDM-si de opti cal modu le

Table 13-30 Description of NM port of the LDGD board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces.

LP

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2.

IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2

These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

13.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LDGD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGD board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and

in Figure 13-18.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGD board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

3

in Figure 13-18.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LDGD board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

4

in Figure 13-18.


374


13 Optical Transponder Unit NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.

l

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGD board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGD board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown

l

5

in Figure 13-18.

The two paths of the LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

Figure 13-18 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD board Client side

Other board 3(RX1/TX1)-1

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1 4

4(RX2/TX2)-1

3 5

201(LP/LP)-2

WDM side

Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1 2

4(RX2/TX2)-1

1

201(LP/LP)-2

LDGD The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board The WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board

1 2 3 4 5


13.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LDGD, refer to Table 13-31. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


375



Table 13-31 LDGD parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used

The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. When this parameter is set to Unused for a port, service alarms reported for this port will be masked and the function for automatically disabling service-affecting settings is invalid for the port. This parameter is set to Used by default. Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment.





Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off


Automatic Laser Shutdown



Service Mode

OTN, SDH


Default: OTN

Set the line-side service modes of the local and remote boards to the same value. When the local board is connected to an SDH service board on non-WDM equipment, set the line-side service mode to SDH.

Disabled, Enabled

Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function.

LPT Enabled

Default: Disabled

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



376



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled

The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid. Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

-

Queries the operating wavelength at the WDMside optical interface of a board.

Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196. 050 to 80/1560.61/192 .100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208 .170 to 18/1611.00/188 .780



C, CWDM Default: C


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600

Sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. This parameter can be specified when the mapping path of a GE service is GFP-F. After the parameter is specified, data packets whose lengths exceed Max. Packet Length are discarded.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


377



Field

Value

Description

Ethernet Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation, 1000M FullDuplex

Sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.

Default: AutoNegotiation

Auto-negotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain. This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to Ethernet service. The Ethernet working mode must be consistent with the mode set for the upstream services of the customer. If two ports are mutually protected, the Ethernet working mode must be consistent on the active and standby ports.


None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.

13.4.11 LDGD Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


378



Bo ard





TN 11L DG D

N/A

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 kmeSFP

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP


1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km





12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZAPD

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type Line code format

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-





NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


379


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type





Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


380




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


381




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD

6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN


12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD

6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels Tunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-4

-4

0

0

0

0


dBm

-8

-8

-5

-5

-5

-5


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

APD


1300 to 1575

382


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type









dBm

-18

-28

-18

-28

-28

-28


dBm

0

-9

0

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

Table 13-35 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

-

NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2


dBm

–0.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

≤ ±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


383



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Power Consumption Bo ard




TN 11L DG D

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

34.0

37.4

38.0

41.8

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


384


Bo ard






13.5 LDGS LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving

13.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LDGS board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L DG S

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.5.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGS implements the conversion between two channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDGS board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-19.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


385



Figure 13-19 Position of the LDGS board in the WDM system

RX1

LDGS

LDGS

TX1

TX1 RX1

GE

1×ODU1

M IN U X / D M OUT U X

1×OTU1

TX2

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

GE RX2

M OUT U X / D M IN U X

GE TX2 RX2

GE

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board or paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

13.5.3 Functions and Features The LDGS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-36. Table 13-36 Functions and features of the LDGS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LDGS converts signals: 2 x GE <-> 1 x OTU1/STM-16




l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


386




Description

OTN function


WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

FEC coding


PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Supported




l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors B2 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ALS function


Test frame

Supported


Not supported

Opticallayer ASON

Not supported


Not supported


387




Description

Port MTU


Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3z



13.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


388



Figure 13-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board. Figure 13-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board Backplane(service cross-connection) GE Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2

O/E

TX1 TX2

E/O Client-side optical module

GE CrossOTN connect encapsulation processing module and mapping module module

E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LDGS board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LDGS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGS to the WDM side of the LDGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


389



wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the LDGS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


390



Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-21 shows the front panel of the LDGS board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


391



Figure 13-21 Front panel of the LDGS board

LDGS STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT IN

LDGS



l


l


l





392



Table 13-37 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGS board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.5.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDGS board. Table 13-38 shows the valid slots for the LDGS board. Table 13-38 Valid slots for LDGS board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


393



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-39 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-39 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDGS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-22 shows the application model of the LDGS board. Table 13-40 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-22 Port diagram of the LDGS board Client side

WDM side 201(LP/LP)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2

4(RX2/TX2)-1



1(IN/OUT)-1


Table 13-40 Description of NM port of the LDGS board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2


LP

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

394



Port Name

Description

IN/OUT


13.5.9 Configuration of Cross-connection his section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LDGS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGS board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and

in Figure 13-23.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGS board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

3

in Figure 13-23.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LDGS board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

4

in Figure 13-23.

NOTE


l

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGS board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGS board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

5

in Figure 13-23.

The two paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/ OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000


395



Figure 13-23 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS board

Client side


WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1 4

3

4(RX2/TX2)-1

5

201(LP/LP)-2

WDM side

Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1 2 1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

LDGS 1

The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board The WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Other board

2 3 4 5


13.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LDGS, refer to Table 13-41. Table 13-41 LDGS parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



396



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used

When this parameter is set to Unused for a port, service alarms reported for this port will be masked and the function for automatically disabling serviceaffecting settings is invalid for the port. This parameter is set to Used by default. Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment. Optical Interface Loopback


Laser Status

Off, On



Default:


l WDM side: On





Service Mode

OTN, SDH


Default: OTN


Disabled, Enabled


LPT Enabled

Default: Disabled FEC Working State


Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


397



Field

Value

Description


-


Band Type

-



-


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600

Sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services.

Default: 9600

This parameter can be specified when the mapping path of a GE service is GFP-F. After the parameter is specified, data packets whose lengths exceed Max. Packet Length are discarded. l C: 1/1529.16/196 .050 to 80/1560.61/19 2.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/20 8.170 to 18/1611.00/18 8.780

Sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

C, CWDM


Default: C

See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.


398



Field

Value

Description


AutoNegotiation, 1000M FullDuplex



This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to Ethernet service.

Auto-negotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain.

The Ethernet working mode must be consistent with the mode set for the upstream services of the customer. If two ports are mutually protected, the Ethernet working mode must be consistent on the active and standby ports. SD Trigger Condition



13.5.11 LDGS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


399



Bo ard





TN 11L DG S

N/A


12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZPIN

N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10 12800 ps/nm-C Bandkm-eSFP Fixed Wavelength-NRZ1000 BASE-LX-40 APD km-eSFP

6500 ps/nm-C Band1000 BASE-ZX-80 Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN km-eSFP 3200 ps/nm-C Band1.25 Gbit/s Fixed Wavelength-NRZMultirate APD (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 kmeSFP

12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

NOTE



Unit


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-





NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


400


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type





Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


401




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


402




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD

6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN


12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD

6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-1

-1

3

3

3

3


dBm

-5

-5

-2

-2

-2

-2


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

PIN

APD


403


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type









nm

1200 to 1650

1300 to 1575


dBm

-18

-28

-18

-28

-28

-28


dBm

0

-9

0

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27


Unit


Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD

-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

5


dBm

2.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

<=±6.5


nm

1


404



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Power Consumption Bo ard




TN 11L DG S

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

32.0

35.2

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


405


Bo ard





12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD

36.0

39.6

6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable) a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

13.6 LDM LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board

13.6.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is, TN12.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 12L DM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Type The system provides two types of the LDM board: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 13-46 lists the types of the LDM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


406



Table 13-46 Type description of the LDM board Board

Type

Description

LDM

One type is the single transmitting and single receiving board.

The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/OUT1.

Other type is the dual-fed selectively receiving board.

The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

NOTE

The WDM-side interfaces of LDM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.

13.6.2 Update Description This section describes the hardware updates in V100R006C01 and later versions as well as the reasons for the updates. Any product versions that are not listed in the document means that they have no hardware updates.



Deleted the support for the SDI and HD-SDI services on the TN12LDM board.


Added the following limitations on board usage: Only one service with a data rate exceeding 1.25 Gbit/s can be received.


The RX1/TX1 must be used to receive the service.

13.6.3 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDM board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDM board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-24 and Figure 13-25.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


407



Figure 13-24 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving) LDM

RX1 TX1

M U IN1 X / D OUT1 M U X

TX1 RX1

1×ODU1

TX2

M U OUT1 X / IN1 D M U X

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s RX2

LDM

100Mbit/s~2.5Gbit/s TX2 RX2

Figure 13-25 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving) LDM

RX1

OUT1 MUX/ IN1 DMUX

TX1

OUT2 MUX/ IN2 DMUX

MUX/ DMUXOUT1

IN2 MUX/ DMUXOUT2

TX1 RX1

1×ODU1

TX2

LDM

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1


IN1


NOTE

The total rate of two channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LDM board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

13.6.4 Functions and Features The LDM board is mainly used to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-47. Table 13-47 Functions and features of the LDM board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

LDM converts signals: 2 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals) <-> 1 x OTU1 Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application scenario.


408




Description


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

OTN function


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification



Not supported

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the client and WDM sides.

LPT function

The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE.

FEC coding



NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC–3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.


409




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function

Supports the ALS function on the client side when client services are nonOTN services.

Test frame

The board supports the test frame function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE.


Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Port MTU


Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.

Ethernet service mapping mode

Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-F) (displayed as GE on the NMS) and GE(GFP-T) modes.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


410




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


411




Description Protocols or standards for service processing (performance monitoring)


13.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-26 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


412



Figure 13-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

TX1 TX2

E/O

E/O Service encapsulation and mapping module


OTN processing module


O/E

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2


Control Memory

CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module

Fuse

Required voltage


SCC

Backplane ( controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow The client side of the LDM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LDM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDM to the WDM side of the LDM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receive direction Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

413



The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces. NOTE

Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l

Control and communication module – Controls operations on the board. – Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


414



– Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the system control and communication board. l


13.6.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-27 shows the front panel of the LDM board. Figure 13-27 Front panel of the LDM board

LDM STAT ACT PROG SRV


LDM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


415





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-48 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-48 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN12LDM board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.6.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDM board. Table 13-49 shows the valid slots for the LDM board. Table 13-49 Valid slots for the LDM board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68




416



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.6.8 Characteristic Code for the LDM The board characteristic code indicates information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-50 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-50 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


13.6.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LDM, refer to Table 13-51. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


417



Table 13-51 LDM parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused Default: Used





Default: Non-Loopback Service Type

None, Any, FE, GE, GE (GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


418



Field

Value

Description

Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)

100 to 2200

Sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.

Default: 0

A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services. Off, On

Laser Status

Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off Automatic Laser Shutdown

Disabled, Enabled

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled



The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

-


Band Type

-



-



419



Field

Value

Description

Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C

See Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600





OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission

Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


420



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled

The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board.

Default: Disabled

The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted. Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test. NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.

13.6.11 LDM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


421



Bo ard



WDM-Side WDM-Side Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Module

TN 12L DM

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP

N/A

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 kmeSFP

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 kmeSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

NOTE


Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module NOTE

I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10eSFP optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


422



Table 13-52 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDH services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant

APD

APD

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


423


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.

Table 13-53 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (GE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355


424


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


425




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


426



NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Table 13-55 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 kmeSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant (a 5% margin is required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (a 5% margin is required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


427




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


dBm

5


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1471 to 1611


nm

±6.5


nm

1


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


428



Table 13-57 DWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


nm

±12.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)


-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


429






TN12LDM

22.6

24.8


13.7 LDMD LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving

13.7.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is, TN11.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Bo ar d

Genera l 8800 T64 Subrac k

Enhanc ed 8800 T64 Subrac k



8800 T16 Subrac k

8800 Univer sal Platfor m Subrac k

6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1L D M D

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


430





Deleted the support for the SDI and HD-SDI services on the TN11LDMD board.





13.7.3 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMD converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LDMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-28. Figure 13-28 Position of the LDMD board in the WDM system LDMD

RX1

OUT1 MUX/ IN1 DMUX

TX1

MUX/ IN2 DMUX

MUX/ DMUXOUT1

IN2 MUX/ DMUXOUT2

TX1 RX1

1×OTU1

TX2

OUT2

LDMD

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1


IN1


NOTE

The total rate of two channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LDMD board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

13.7.4 Functions and Features The LDMD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-58. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


431



Table 13-58 Functions and features of the LDMD board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LDMD converts signals: 2 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) <-> 1 x OTU1



Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

OTN function


WDM specification

Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.



ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC coding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1.


Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


432




Description



ALS function


Test frame



Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.



Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


433




Description




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


434





ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1

13.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


435



Figure 13-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

TX1 TX2

E/O




Splitter

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2

O/E WDM-side optical module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication

Control and communication module

Power supply module Fuse

Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LDMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LDMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMD to the WDM side of the LDMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receive direction


436



The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l


l


l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


437


l



13.7.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-30 shows the front panel of the LDMD board. Figure 13-30 Front panel of the LDMD board

LDMD STAT ACT PROG SRV


LDMD



438



l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-59 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-59 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMD board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.7.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDMD board. Table 13-60 shows the valid slots for the LDMD board. Table 13-60 Valid slots for the LDMD board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


439



13.7.8 Characteristic Code for the LDMD The characteristic code for the LDMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-61. Table 13-61 Characteristic code for the LDMD board Code

Description

Description

First four digits



Last four digits



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDMD board is 92109210. l



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-62 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-62 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4


440



NOTE


13.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LDMD, refer to Table 13-63. Table 13-63 LDMD Parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status









Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


441



Field

Value

Description

Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/ s)

100 to 2200


Default: 0


Laser Status


Disabled, Enabled

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled



The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Band Type

-



-



442



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600








Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


443



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled




13.7.11 LDMD Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


444



Bo ard





TN 11L DM D

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP


N/A

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP

12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)

1000 BASE-ZX-80 kmeSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

NOTE



I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


445




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant

APD

APD

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


446


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355


447


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


448




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


449



NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


450




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/nmC Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-4

0

0


dBm

-8

-5

-5


dB

10

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD

APD

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28

-28

-28


dBm

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

1300 to 1575


451





l





TN11LDMD

26.9

29.6


13.8 LDMS LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving

13.8.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is, TN11.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Boar d





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN11 LDM S

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y



452





Deleted the support for the SDI and HD-SDI services on the TN11LDMS board.


Added the following limitations on board usage: 1. Only one service with a data rate exceeding 1.25 Gbit/s can be received. 2. The RX1/TX1 must be used to receive the service.


13.8.3 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMS board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDMS board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-31. Figure 13-31 Position of the LDMS board in the WDM system RX1

LDMS

TX1

TX1 RX1

1×ODU1

TX2

M U IN X / D OUT M U X

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1


LDMS M U OUT X / IN D M U X


NOTE

The total rate of two channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LDMS board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

13.8.4 Functions and Features The LDMS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-69.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


453



Table 13-69 Functions and features of the LDMS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LDMS converts signals: 2 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) <-> 1 x OTU1



OTN function

l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM, and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function




454




Description

FEC coding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1. Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709.



ALS function


Test frame



Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection.



Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

l Supports OWSP protection.

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


455




Description




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


456






13.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


457



Figure 13-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2

O/E

TX1 TX2

E/O



OUT


O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LDMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LDMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMS to the WDM side of the LDMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


458



After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l


l


l


l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


459



13.8.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-33 shows the front panel of the LDMS board. Figure 13-33 Front panel of the LDMS board

LDMS STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT IN

LDMS



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


460



l


l



Interfaces Table 13-70 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-70 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMS board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.8.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDMS board. Table 13-71 shows the valid slots for the LDMS board. Table 13-71 Valid slots for the LDMS board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


461



13.8.8 Characteristic Code for the LDMS The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-72 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-72 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


13.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LDMS, refer to Table 13-73. Table 13-73 LDMS Parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


462



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used








100 to 2200 Default: 0

Sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services.

Laser Status


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



463



Field

Value

Description


Disabled, Enabled


LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled



Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


464



Field

Value

Description

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600


Default: 9600

This parameter can be specified when the mapping path of a GE service is GFP-F. After the parameter is specified, data packets whose lengths exceed Max. Packet Length are discarded. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission






PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled

The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted. Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


465



Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

13.8.11 LDMS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L DM S

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP


N/A

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP



NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


466




I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10eSFP optical module.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


467


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

30

30

30


dB

N/A

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


468


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type Target transmission distance

-





0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


469



NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


470



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400


471



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 kmeSFP

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/nmC Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD



NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

-1

3

3


dBm

-5

-2

-2


dB

10

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


472



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

12800 ps/nmC Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD




GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant


-

APD

APD

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28

-28

-28


dBm

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

1300 to 1575



l





TN11LDMS

26.9

29.6

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


473



13.9 LDX LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

13.9.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LDX board is available, that is, TN12.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 12L DX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Variants The TN12LDX board have two variants: TN12LDX01 and TN12LDX02.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the TN12LDX02 board.

The TN12LDX01 board can be replaced with the TN12LDX02 board.


474





Added the support for the 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/ RX1270nm-10km-XFP and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/ RX1330nm-10km-XFP single-fiber bidirectional optical modules on the TN12LDX board.

Function enhancement: The board supports single-fiber bidirectional transmission.



Added the support for the 800 ps/nm-C band-tunable-NRZPIN-XFP optical module on the TN12LDX board.

Function enhancement: The board supports wavelength tunable optical modules.



Changed the description to that the TN12LDX board does not support the test frame function.


13.9.3 Application The LDX board is an optical transponder unit that converts two channels of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and performs conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-34. Figure 13-34 Position of the LDX board in the WDM system RX1

OUT1

M U OUT1 X / D M IN2 U X OUT2


LDX

2×ODU2/ODU2e

M IN1 U X / D OUT2 M U IN2 X

IN1

2×OTU2/OTU2e

2×OTU2/OTU2e

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

2×ODU2/ODU2e

10GE LAN/ TX1 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ RX2 OTU2/ OTU2e TX2

LDX

TX1 RX1 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ TX2 OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e RX2

475



13.9.4 Functions and Features The LDX board provides OTN interfaces and electrical supervisory channels (ESCs). For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-79. Table 13-79 Functions and features of the LDX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LDX converts signals as follows: l 2 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2 <-> 2 x OTU2 l 2 x 10GE LAN/OTU2e <-> 2 x OTU2e


10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s

OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification



Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN.

NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.


476




Description

FEC coding

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU2/OTU2e. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN).

Regeneratio n board

The WDM-side signals from one LDX board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board.

ALS function


Test frame

Not supported


Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.

Opticallayer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/ QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


477




Description


Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)

Port MTU

9600 bytes. That is, the maximum size of the supported Jumbo frame is 9600 bytes.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3ae


ITU-T G.805

ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic

ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1

13.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LDX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


478



Figure 13-35 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board. Figure 13-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board Client side RX1

TX1

O/E

E/O

WDM side

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

Client-side OTN 1 processing module 0


E/O

OUT1

O/E

IN1

E/O

OUT2

O/E

IN2

10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module


RX2

TX2

O/E Client-side OTN processing module






Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LDX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDX to the WDM side of the LDX. The receive direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the LDX to the client side of the LDX. The RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 ports independently process signals. The RX1/TX1 port corresponds to the OUT1/IN1 port, and the RX2/TX2 port corresponds to the OUT2/IN2 port. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


479


l


Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1/RX2 optical interface and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2/ OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC encoding are performed. Finally, the module outputs two channels of OTU2 /OTU2e electrical signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1 and IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, FEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, or OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, or OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1 and TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


480



– SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.9.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-36 shows the front panel of the LDX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


481



Figure 13-36 Front panel of the LDX board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-80 describes the type and function of each interface. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


482



Table 13-80 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDX board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC

Receives a wavelength from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT1-OUT2

LC

Transmits a wavelength to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

TX1-TX2

LC

Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment.

RX1-RX2

LC

Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.


13.9.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one LDX board. Table 13-81 shows the valid slots for the LDX board. Table 13-81 Valid slots for the LDX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.9.8 Characteristic Code for the LDX The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


483




Display of Physical Ports Table 13-82 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-82 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

3

RX1/TX1

5

RX2/TX2

6

NOTE


13.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of the LDX, refer to Table 13-83. Table 13-83 LDX Parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


484



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used




Default: NonLoopback Service Type

None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2e, STM-64

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board.

Default: 10GE LAN Port Mapping


Specifies the service mapping mode on a port. See Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) Laser Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost.


485



Field

Value

Description

Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown

0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s

Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers.

Default: 0s Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Turn-On


Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers.

Default: 0s LPT Enabled


Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT

REMOTE_FAULT, None Default: REMOTE_FAULT

Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function. Determines whether to set REMOTE_FAULT as a laser shutdown condition. NOTE l This parameter takes effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. l For the TN12LDX boards, when routers support REMOTE_FAULT as a switching condition and the LDX boards are cascaded on the client side, perform the following operations: l If the bit transparent transmission mode is configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None, no matter whether a protection scheme is configured or not. l If the MAC transparent transmission mode and client-side 1+1 protection are configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None. The nonprotection scenario of MAC transparent transmission is not supported.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


486



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled

The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid. FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC Default: FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. This parameter is automatically set to AFEC when you set Service Type to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping to Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G).

1, 2, 3

AFEC Grade

Default: 3

A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0

See Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only support C band.

Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


487



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM


Default: C

See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only support C band.







PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status



13.9.11 LDX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


488



Bo ard





TN 12L DX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP

10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km-XFP

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s MultirateTX1330/ RX1270nm-10km-XFP 10 Gbit/s MultirateTX1270/ RX1330nm-10km-XFP

NOTE



The 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP, 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP, and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, and OTU2/OTU2e signals. The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


489



Table 13-84 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10 Gbit/s services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP



10 Gbit/s SingleRate-0.3 kmXFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM

Target transmissio n distance

-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


490


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type





Receiver sensitivity (multirate)a

dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5

Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN)

dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5

Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN)

dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1

Minimum receiver overload (STM-64)a

dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12

a: The sensitivity and overload in the table complies with ITU-T G.691. The actual sensitivity of 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP modules is -14.4 dBm, and the actual overload is 0.5 dBm, which can be used as the reference during deployment commissioning.

Table 13-85 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths, fixed wavelength) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP

-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm


2

491



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-3


dB

9

Operating frequency range

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

Receiver sensitivity, EOL (FEC on)

dBm

-16

Minimum receiver overload (FEC on)

dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 13-86 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths, tunable wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm


2

492



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

The 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/RX1270nm-10km-XFP and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/ RX1330nm-10km-XFP optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, and OTU2e signals. Table 13-87 Client-side pluggable 10G optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional transmissions) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Value 10 Gbit/s MultirateTX1330/ RX1270nm-10kmXFP

10 Gbit/s MultirateTX1270/ RX1330nm-10kmXFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


493



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


km



10

10


nm

1320 to 1340

1260 to 1280


dBm

0

0


dBm

-5

-5


dB

3.5

3.5


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1280

1320 to 1340


dBm

-14

-14


dBm

0.5

0.5

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-88 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm


2

494



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 13-89 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm


2

495



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ard




LD X

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

44.5

51.2


496


Bo ard





800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP

45.5

52.2


13.10 LEM24 LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board

13.10.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LEM24 board is TN11.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. B oa rd

Gener al 8800 T64 Subrac k

Enhan ced 8800 T64 Subrac k



8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subr ack

3800 Chas sis

T N 11 L E M 24

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

When the TN11LEM24 board is used in the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis, the TN23SCC board must be used.



497





Added description of the number of virtual bridges (VBs) supported by the board.


Added the support for servicebased LPT and optical-layer ASON on the LEM24 board.

The features are enhanced.

Added the support for the LEM24 board on the OptiX OSN 3800.

Function enhancement: The OptiX OSN 3800 supports the EoW board LEM24.



Changed the description to that optical-layer ASON is not supported.







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


498



13.10.3 Application The LEM24 board is an optical transponder unit. As an OTU, the LEM24 board converges and converts 22 channels of GE or FE services and two channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEM24 board also performs the reverse process. The LEM24 board supports convergence of multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE WAN/10GE LAN services into one channel of 10GE service. If being used by the OptiX OSN 6800, the LEM24 board can also converge and convert a maximum of two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into OTU2 signals. Figure 13-37 shows the application of the LEM24 board in a WDM system. Figure 13-37 Application of the TN11LEM24 board in a WDM system RX5

LEM24

OUT3

TX5

FE GE 10GE LAN TX28 10GE WAN

2X10GE

L2 10GE

TX5 RX5

2×ODU2

TX28


2×OTU2

2×OTU2

2×ODU2

2X10GE

FE GE 10GE LAN 10GE WANRX28

M U X / D OUT4 M U IN4 X IN3

LEM24

IN3

RX28 L2 10GE

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800: N/A

NOTE

The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are capable of processing 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are capable of processing GE and FE services.

13.10.4 Functions and Features The LEM24 board supports electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function. Table 13-90 and Table 13-91 list the functions and features of the LEM24 board. NOTE

The 10GE cross-connections are supported only by OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


499



Table 13-90 OTN Functions and features of the LEM24 board Function and Feature Basic function

Description l Converts 22 channels of GE/FE services and two channels of 10GE WAN/10GE LAN services received directly on the client side into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process. If being used by the OptiX OSN 6800, this board can also converge and convert a maximum of two channels of 10GE services crossconnected from the backplane into OTU2 signals. l Converges multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s. Supports FE optical signals and FE electrical signals. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals. 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s NOTE l The LEM24 board supports both FE/GE electrical signals and FE/GE optical signal. l When the LEM24 board transmits GE or FE electrical signals, to facilitate fiber routing, you are advised to install electrical modules at the RX21/TX21 and RX22/TX22 ports.


OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE electrical signals between the LEM24 board and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 3800: N/A.

OTN function

l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side. l Supports SM function for OTU2. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.

WDM specification


ESC function

Supported

LPT

l Supports port-based LPT. l Supports service-based LPT. NOTE The board supports port-based LPT only when EPL services (port <-> VCTRUNK) are provisioned and supports service-based LPT only when EVPL or QinQ services (port <-> VCTRUNK) are provisioned.

FEC encoding

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



500




Description l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures.


l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.

Regeneration board

The WDM-side signals from one TN11LEM24 board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN11LSXR board.

ALS function

Supports the ALS function on the client side. NOTE ALS function is supported only when EPL services (port <-> VCTRUNK) are provisioned.

IEEE 1588v2

Supported in the WDM side.

Physical clock

Supported in the Client side and WDM side. Supports synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission on the client side. NOTE The board does not support the physical clock when it is provisioned with 10G WAN services.

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side

Test frame

Supported

Latency measurement

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. NOTE Client 1+1 protection is supported only when EPL services (port <-> VCTRUNK) are provisioned.

Loopback

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

10GE optical interface

MAC

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


501




Description PHY

GE optical interface

MAC

PHY

GE electric interface

MAC

PHY

FE optical interface

MAC

PHY

FE electric interface

MAC

PHY

WDM side optical interface

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Table 13-91 Data features of the LEM24 board Function and Feature

Description

Interface characteristi cs

Port working mode

10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN GE optical port: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation GE electrical port: auto-negotiation FE optical port: 100MFULL FE electrical port: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL, auto-negotiation

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


502



Multicast

Layer 2 switching


Description MFL

1518 bytes to 9600 bytes

VLAN multicast

Supported

IGMP snooping V2

Supported

Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D. Supports one VB. Supports MAC address learning and aging. Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP. Supports 32k MAC addresses.

Ethernet service

EPL EVPL(VLAN) EVPL(QinQ) EPLAN(IEEE 802.1D) EVPLAN(IEEE 802.1Q) EVPLAN(IEEE 802.1ad) NOTE "EVPL (VLAN)" is displayed as "EPL" on the NMS.

Protection schemes

VLAN SNCP

Supported

DBPS

Supported

ERPS

Supported NOTE The ERPS cannot be used in either of the following bridges: IEEE 802.1d bridge IEEE 802.1ad bridge in SVL/Ingress Filter Disable mode.

LAG

l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and trunk ports. l Supports manual and static LAGs. l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.

Maintenance features

QoS

ETH-OAM

Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.

RMON

Supported

Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS). Supports IEEE802.1p. Supports DSCP.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


503




Description

Port-based flow control

Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination.



IEEE 802.1q VLAN

Protocols or standards for service processing (performanc e monitoring)

IEEE 802.3x pause frame

All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, IGRP etc.

IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS

13.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LEM24 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, OTN processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-38 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board in the OptiX OSN 8800.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


504



Figure 13-38 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board Backplane(service cross-connection)

10GE Client side

WDM side

RX5 RX6

10GE

O/E

RX28 TX5 TX6

L2 switching module

E/O

TX28

10GE


E/O

OUT3

O/E

IN3 IN4

OUT4



1588v2 module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE


Signal Flow The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEM24 board. The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LEM24 board. The transmit direction is the direction from the client side of the LEM24 to the WDM side of the LEM24. The receive direction is from the WDM side of the LEM24 to the client side of the LEM24. l

Transmit direction The RX5 to RX28 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client equipment and perform O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations, such as convergence. After convergence, the module outputs a maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


505



The OTN processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT3 and OUT4 optical ports. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN3-IN4 optical interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. After performing the operation, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service cross-connection. The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends 24 channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the 24 channels of electrical signals, and then outputs 24 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX5-TX28 optical interfaces. NOTE

The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board can process GE and FE services.

The LEM24 board processes clock signals in two directions. l

Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module.

l

Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board. NOTE

10GE WAN and 10GE LAN signals are processed differently. Each 10GE WAN signal contains an SDH header, which is stripped off before the signal enters the Layer 2 module.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


506



– Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l

L2 switching module – Learns, forwards or deletes MAC addresses. – Maps and demaps Ethernet packets.

l

OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l


13.10.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-39 shows the front panel of the LEM24 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


507



Figure 13-39 Front panel of the LEM24 board



l


l


l


For details about these indicators, see A.4 Board Indicators. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


508



Interfaces Table 13-92 describes the type and function of each interface. Table 13-92 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEM24 board Interface

Type

Function

RX5-RX28a

LC


TX5-TX28a

LC


IN3-IN4

LC


OUT3-OUT4

LC


a: The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that can process GE and FE services.


13.10.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11LEM24 board. Table 13-93 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEM24 board. Table 13-93 Valid slots for the LEM24 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67


IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35


IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU7, IU11-IU15

OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800: The rear connector of the LEM24 board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. The slot number of the Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


509



LEM24 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if you install the LEM24 board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 3800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two occupied slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the LEM24 board, the slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM is IU2.

13.10.8 Characteristic Code for the LEM24 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For detailed descriptions of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

13.10.9 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes how the physical interfaces of the board are displayed on the NMS and the logical ports of the board.

Display of Physical Ports Table 13-94 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-94 Mapping between the physical ports on the LEM24 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4

TX5/RX5

5

TX6/RX6

6

TX7/RX7

7

TX8/RX8

8

TX9/RX9

9

TX10/RX10

10

TX11/RX11

11

TX12/RX12

12

TX13/RX13

13

TX14/RX14

14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

510



Physical Port


TX15/RX15

15

TX16/RX16

16

TX17/RX17

17

TX18/RX18

18

TX19/RX19

19

TX20/RX20

20

TX21/RX21

21

TX22/RX22

22

TX23/RX23

23

TX24/RX24

24

TX25/RX25

25

TX26/RX26

26

TX27/RX27

27

TX28/RX28

28

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-40 shows the application model of the LEM24 board. Table 13-95 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-40 Port diagram of the LEM24 board Client side PORT5 PORT6

VCTRUNK1

Service processing module 101(AP1/AP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1



102(AP2/AP2)-1

WDM side

VCTRUNK2

3(IN3/OUT3)-1 4(IN4/OUT4)-1

VCTRUNK3 103(AP3/AP3)-1

PORT28


L2 switching module



WDM side optical module

Backplane

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


511



Table 13-95 Definition of NM port of the LEM24 board Port Name

Definition

PORT5 - PORT28

Respectively corresponds to the client-side optical interfaces: RX5/TX5 - RX28/TX28.

VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4


AP1 - AP4


ClientLP1 - ClientLP2

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1

ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2

Internal logical ports.

IN3/OUT3 - IN4/OUT4

Corresponds to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

13.10.10 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LEM24 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports, or converge optical signals received by the clientside optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals. NOTE

l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.

l

One-to-one port connections are between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module. You are not required to set one-to-one port connections on the U2000.

l

Create a cross-connection between the AP port of the LEM24 board and the AP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 13-41. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The AP port connects to the ClientLP ports, the ClientLP port connects to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port connects to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration of these connections on the U2000.


512



Figure 13-41 Cross-connection diagram of the LEM24 board Client side

WDM side

103(AP3/AP3)-1


Client side

WDM side 103(AP3/AP3)-1

LEM24

104(AP4/AP4)-1

Other board

TN11LEM24 / TN11LEX4

13.10.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the LEM24 board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.

Parameters for WDM Interfaces Table 13-96 Parameters for WDM Interfaces Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


513



Field

Value

Description







Enabled, Disabled

ALS Auxiliary Condition

FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LO S, BW_WDM_Defect , FW_OPUk_CSF

Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.

LPT Enabled


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



514



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Enabled


FEC Default: FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled.

Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

-


Actual Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208. 170 to 18/1611.00/188. 780



C, CWDM Default: C



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.


515



Field

Value

Description


None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG


Default: None

See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status



Parameters for Ethernet interfaces Table 13-97 TAG Attributes(Internal Port/External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

OptiX OSN 8800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK2. OptiX OSN 6800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK4. External ports are PORT5 to PORT28.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


516



Field

Value

Description

TAG

Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid

Indicates the type of packets that can be processed by a port.

Default: Tag Aware

Tag Aware: The port transparently transmits the packets with VLAN IDs (Tag) and discards packets without VLAN IDs (Untag). If TAG is set to Tag Aware, VLAN priority and Default VLAN ID are invalid. Access: The port labels the default VLAN IDs to packets without VLAN IDs (Untag) and discards the packets that already have VLAN IDs (Tag). Hybrid: The port labels the default VLAN IDs to packets without VLAN IDs (Untag) and transparently transmits the packets that already have VLAN IDs (Tag). This parameter is valid only for UNI ports. NOTE This parameter is invalid for CAware and S-Aware ports.

Default VLAN ID


The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the value of TAG is Access or Hybrid.

VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the value of TAG is Access or Hybrid.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


517



Field

Value

Description

Entry Detection

Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled

The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

Table 13-98 Network Attributes (Internal Port/External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Port Attributes

UNI, NNI, C-Aware, SAware Default: UNI

A UNI port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port attributes include Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. An S-Aware port does not process the tag attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. In this case, the port determines that the packets do not carry C-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have S-VLAN tags. A C-Aware port does not process the tag attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. In this case, the port determines that the packets do not carry S-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have C-VLAN tags. NNI is a reserved port type and is not supported at present.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


518



Table 13-99 Advanced attributes (Internal ports) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

OptiX OSN 8800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK2. OptiX OSN 6800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK4.

Broadcast Packet Suppression


Indicates whether to enable broadcast packet suppression. Click E.3 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details.

Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

10% to 100%, with a step of 10% Default: 30%

If broadcast packet suppression is enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast packets exceeds specified times (suppression threshold) the total bandwidth. Click E.2 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold to view the details.

Loop Detection


Specifies whether to enable port self-looped detection. When the parameter is set to Enabled for a port, a loopback on the port can be automatically detected. When Loop Port Shutdown is set to Enabled, the self-looped port is automatically shutdown, preventing the port from forwarding data packets that are looped back.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


519



Field

Value

Description

Loop Port Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

Specifies whether to block a self-looped port.

Default: Enabled

When the parameter is set to Enabled for a port, the system will block the port if the port is self-looped. When the parameter is set to Disabled, the system will not take any action on the selflooped port. NOTE The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is available only when Loop Detection is set to Enabled.

Table 13-100 Advanced Attributes (External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

External ports are PORT5 to PORT28.


Enabled, Disabled

Indicates whether to enable broadcast packet suppression.

Default: Disabled

Click E.3 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details. Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


520



Field

Value

Description

Loop Detection

Disabled, Enabled

Specifies whether to enable port self-looped detection.

Default: Disabled

When the parameter is set to Enabled for a port, a loopback on the port can be automatically detected. When Loop Port Shutdown is set to Enabled, the self-looped port is automatically shutdown, preventing the port from forwarding data packets that are looped back. Loop Port Shutdown


Specifies whether to block a self-looped port. When the parameter is set to Enabled for a port, the system will block the port if the port is self-looped. When the parameter is set to Disabled, the system will not take any action on the selflooped port. NOTE The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is available only when Loop Detection is set to Enabled.

Threshold of Port Receiving Rates (Mbps)

PORT5 to PORT6: l 0 to 10000 l Default: 10000

Indicates the rate threshold for an external port to receive traffic.

PORT7 to PORT28: l 0 to 1000 l Default: 1000 Port Rates Time Slice (m)

0 to 30 Default: 0

Indicates the traffic rate time window of an external port.

Table 13-101 Basic Attributes (External Port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



521



Field

Value

Description

QinQ Type Area

0x0600 to 0xFFFF

Display the QinQ type area.

Default:0x8100

This parameter indicates the VLAN protocol used by the packet that is transmitted by QinQ. NOTE The QinQ Type Area parameter must be set to the same value for interconnected boards; otherwise, traffic will be interrupted.

Enabled/Disabled


Working Mode

PORT5 to PORT6: l 10G FULL_Duplex LAN, 10G FULL_Duplex WAN l Default: 10G FULL_Duplex LAN PORT7 to PORT28: l 1000M FULL_Duplex, Auto-Negotiation l Default: AutoNegotiation

Maximum Frame Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 1522

When the parameter value is set to Enabled for a port, the port is enabled and services are provisioned. When the parameter value is set to Disabled for a port, the services on the port are not processed. Therefore, you must enable a port when you configure services on the port. Indicates the working modes of an Ethernet port. Autonegotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended. NOTE In the configuration process, ensure that working modes of the connected ports are consistent; otherwise, services are unavailable.

Specifies the maximum frame length supported by an Ethernet port. Click E.8 Maximum Frame Length to view the details.

Port Physical Parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-


Indicates the physical parameters of a port.

522



Field

Value

Description

MAC LoopBack

Inloop, Outloop, NonLoopback

TheMAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

Default: Non-Loopback

PHY LoopBack

Inloop, Outloop, NonLoopback Default: Non-Loopback

The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

Table 13-102 Flow Control (External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only

Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port does not work in auto-negotiation mode.

Default: Disable

Click E.10 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to view the details. Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Default: Disable

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode. Click E.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to view the details.

523



13.10.12 LEM24 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L EM 24

N/A

1000 BASE-SX-0.5 kmeSFP (I-850-LC)

N/A


1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP (I-1310-LC) 10G BASE-SR-0.3 kmSFP+ 10G BASE-LR-10 kmSFP+

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km-eSFP (I-850LC)

1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP (I-1310LC)

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


524



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

830 to 860

1270 to 1355


dBm

-2.5

-3


dBm

-9.5

-9.5


dB

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3z –compliant


-

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1260 to 1620


dBm

-17

-20


dBm

0

-3

NOTE

The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.

Table 13-104 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10GE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+

10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+

Optical interface service rate

Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


525



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+



nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-1

0.5


dBm

-7.3

-8.2


dB

3

3.5

Output optical power in case of laser shutdown

dBm

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3z–compliant


-

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)


dBm

-1

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


526



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


527



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 13-107 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (gray light) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmXFP

10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 kmXFP


Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


528



Parameter

Unit


-




10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


529


l






TN11LEM24

81

83


13.11 LEX4 LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board

13.11.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LEX4 board is TN11.





Enhan ced 8800 T32 Subra ck

8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassis

T N1 1L E X4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N



530





Added description of the number of virtual bridges (VBs) supported by the board.


Added the support for servicebased LPT and optical-layer ASON on the LEX4 board.




Changed the description to that optical-layer ASON is not supported.







13.11.3 Application The LEX4 board is an optical transponder unit. The LEX4 board converges and converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side into standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEX4 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


531



board also performs the reverse process. The LEX4 board supports convergence of multiple flatrate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. If being used by the OptiX OSN 6800, the LEX4 board can also converge and convert a maximum of two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into OTU2 signals. Figure 13-42 shows the application of the LEX4 board in a WDM system. Figure 13-42 Application of the TN11LEX4 board in a WDM system LEX4

RX1

OUT1

TX1

IN1

TX1 RX1

2X10GE

IN2

TX4


2×ODU2

OUT2

M U X / D M U X

2×OTU2

2×OTU2

2×ODU2

2X10GE

10GE LAN 10GE WAN RX4

LEX4

IN1

RX4

L2 10GE

10GE LAN 10GE WAN TX4

L2 10GE

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To cross-connect board

13.11.4 Functions and Features The LEX4 board provides electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function. Table 13-108 and Table 13-109 list the functions and features of the LEX4 board. NOTE

The 10GE cross-connections are only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800.

Table 13-108 OTN Functions and features of the LEX4 board Function and Feature Basic function

Description l Converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process. If being used by the OptiX OSN 6800, the board can also converge and convert a maximum of two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into OTU2 signals. l Converges multiple flat-rate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

532




Description


OptiX OSN 8800: N/A.

OTN function

l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side.

OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE electrical signals between the LEX4 board and the cross-connect board.

l Supports TCM and PM functions for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2. WDM specification


ESC function

Supported

LPT

l Supports port-based LPT. l Supports service-based LPT. NOTE The board supports port-based LPT only when EPL services (port <-> VCTRUNK) are provisioned and supports service-based LPT only when EVPL or QinQ services (port <-> VCTRUNK) are provisioned.

FEC encoding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.

Regeneration board

The WDM-side signals from one TN11LEX4 board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN11LSXR board.

ALS function


IEEE 1588v2

Supported in the WDM side.

Physical clock

Supported in the Client side and WDM side. Supports synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission on the client side. NOTE The board does not support the physical clock when it is provisioned with 10G WAN services.

PRBS test function Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side


533




Description

Test frame

Supported

Latency measurement

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. NOTE Client 1+1 protection is supported only when EPL services (port <-> VCTRUNK) are configured on the board.

Loopback


MAC

PHY


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Table 13-109 Data features of the LEX4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description


Port working mode

10GE optical port: 10GE LAN full duplex , 10GE WAN full duplex

MFL


Multicast

VLAN multicast

Supported

IGMP snooping V2

Supported


534




Description

Layer 2 switching

Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D. Supports one VB. Supports MAC address learning and aging. Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP. Supports 32k MAC addresses.

Ethernet service


Protection schemes

VLAN SNCP

Supported

DBPS

Supported

ERPS

Supported NOTE The ERPS cannot be used in either of the following bridges: IEEE 802.1d bridge IEEE 802.1ad bridge in SVL/Ingress Filter Disable mode.

LAG

l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and trunk ports. l Supports manual and static LAGs. l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.


QoS

ETH-OAM

Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.

RMON

Supported

Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS). Supports IEEE802.1p. Supports DSCP.

Flow control

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



535




Description



IEEE 802.1q VLAN


IEEE 802.3x pause frame

All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, IGRP etc.

IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS

13.11.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LEX4 board consists of client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, OTN processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and a power supply module. Figure 13-43 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


536



Figure 13-43 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board Backplane(service cross-connection)

10GE Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2

10GE

O/E

RX4 TX1 TX2

L2 switching module

E/O

TX4

10GE


E/O

OUT1 OUT2

O/E

IN1 IN2



1588v2 module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE


Signal Flow The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEX4 board. In the signal flow of the LEX4 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LEX4 to the WDM side of the LEX4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The RX1 to RX4 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client equipment and perform O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module. The OTN processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical ports.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


537


l


Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service crossconnection. The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends four channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

The LEX4 board processes clock signals in two directions. l


l

Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board. NOTE


Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l


l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

OTN processing module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

538



Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


l


13.11.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-44 shows the front panel of the LEX4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


539



Figure 13-44 Front panel of the LEX4 board



l


l


l





540



Table 13-110 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEX4 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX4

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC



13.11.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one TN11LEX4 board. Table 13-111 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEX4 board. Table 13-111 Valid slots for the LEX4 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

13.11.8 Characteristic Code for the LEX4 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


541




Display of Physical Ports Table 13-112 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-112 Mapping between the physical ports on the LEX4 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

3

IN2/OUT2

4

TX1/RX1

5

TX2/RX2

6

TX3/RX3

7

TX4/RX4

8

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-45 shows the application model of the LEX4 board. Table 13-113 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-45 Port diagram of the LEX4 board Client side

Service processing module 101(AP1/AP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1




PORT5 PORT6

VCTRUNK1

PORT7


PORT8


102(AP2/AP2)-1

WDM side

VCTRUNK2

L2 switching module



3(IN1/OUT1)-1 4(IN2/OUT2)-1

WDM side optical module

Backplane

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


542



Table 13-113 Description of NM port of the LEX4 board Port Name

Description

PORT5 - PORT8

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces: RX1/TX1 - RX4/TX4.

VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4


AP1 - AP4


ClientLP1 - ClientLP2

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1

ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2

Internal logical ports.

IN1/OUT1 - IN2/OUT2


13.11.10 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LEX4 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports or converge the optical signals received by the client-side optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals. NOTE

l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.

l

Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000.

l

Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the LEX4 board and the AP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 13-46. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The AP port connects to the ClientLP ports, the ClientLP port is connected to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.


543



Figure 13-46 Cross-connection diagram of the LEX4 board Client side

WDM side

103(AP3/AP3)-1


Client side

WDM side 103(AP3/AP3)-1

LEX4 104(AP4/AP4)-1

Other board

TN11LEM24 / TN11LEX4

13.11.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the LEX4 board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.


Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


544



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used




Default: Non-Loopback Laser Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




545



Field

Value

Description


FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS, BW_WDM_Defect, FW_OPUk_CSF

Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS.

Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.

Enabled, Disabled

LPT Enabled



Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


546



Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.

Default: FEC

FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

-


Band Type

-



-


Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780

See Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.


C, CWDM Default: C



Enabled, Disabled



Default: Disabled

Default: None

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


547



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled




Parameters for Ethernet interfaces Table 13-115 TAG Attributes (Internal Port/External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


548



Field

Value

Description

TAG



Default: Tag Aware


Default VLAN ID



VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


549



Field

Value

Description

Entry Detection




Value

Description

Port

-


Port Attributes

UNI, NNI, C-Aware, SAware Default: UNI

A UNI port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port attributes include Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. An S-Aware port does not process the tag attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. In this case, the port determines that the packets do not carry C-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have S-VLAN tags. A C-Aware port does not process the tag attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. In this case, the port determines that the packets do not carry S-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have C-VLAN tags. NNI is a reserved port type and is not supported at present.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


550



Table 13-117 Advanced Attributes (Internal Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

OptiX OSN 8800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK2. OptiX OSN 6800: Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK4.



Indicates whether to enable broadcast packet suppression. Click E.3 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details.




Loop Detection


Specifies whether to enable port self-looped detection. When the parameter is set to Enabled for a port, a loopback on the port can be automatically detected. When Loop Port Shutdown is set to Enabled, the self-looped port is automatically shutdown, preventing the port from forwarding data packets that are looped back.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


551



Field

Value

Description

Loop Port Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

Specifies whether to block a self-looped port.

Default: Enabled

When the parameter is set to Enabled for a port, the system will block the port if the port is self-looped. When the parameter is set to Disabled, the system will not take any action on the selflooped port. NOTE The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is available only when Loop Detection is set to Enabled.


Value

Description

Port

-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Click E.3 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details. Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


552



Field

Value

Description

Loop Detection

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled

When the parameter is set to Enabled for a port, a loopback on the port can be automatically detected. When Loop Port Shutdown is set to Enabled, the self-looped port is automatically shutdown, preventing the port from forwarding data packets that are looped back. Loop Port Shutdown




PORT5 to PORT8: l 0 to 10000 l Default: 10000

Port Rates Time Slice (m)

0 to 30 Default: 0

Indicates the rate threshold for an external port to receive traffic. Indicates the traffic rate time window of an external port.

Table 13-119 Basic Attributes (External Port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



553



Field

Value

Description

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled, Disabled

When the parameter value is set to Enabled for a port, the port is enabled and services are provisioned. When the parameter value is set to Disabled for a port, the services on the port are not processed. Therefore, you must enable a port when you configure services on the port.

Default: Disabled

Click E.3 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details. Working Mode

PORT5 to PORT8: l 10G FULL_Duplex LAN, 10G FULL_Duplex WAN l Default: 10G FULL_Duplex LAN

Indicates the working modes of an Ethernet port. Autonegotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended. NOTE In the configuration process, ensure that working modes of the connected ports are consistent; otherwise, services are unavailable.


1518 to 9600 Default: 1522

Specifies the maximum frame length supported by an Ethernet port. Click E.8 Maximum Frame Length to view the details.


-


MAC LoopBack




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


554



Field

Value

Description

PHY LoopBack





Value

Description

Port

-





Default: Disable


-

This parameter is unavailable for this board.

13.11.12 LEX4 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


555



Bo ard





TN 11L EX 4

N/A

10G BASE-SR-0.3 kmSFP+

N/A


10G BASE-LR-10 kmSFP+

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP

NOTE


Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-121 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10GE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+



Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

nm


556



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+



dBm

-1

0.5


dBm

-7.3

-8.2


dB

3

3.5


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)


dBm

-1

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm


2

557



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm


2

558



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


559



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


560






TN11LEX4

64

67


13.12 LOA LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board.

13.12.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LOA board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L OA

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

When the TN11LOA02 board is used in the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis, the TN23SCC board must be used.

Variants Table 13-125 Available variants of the TN11LOA board Variants


01

FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, SDI, HDSDI, HD-SDIRBR, STM–16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, 3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR, FC400, FICON4G, FC800, FICON8G

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


561



Variants


02

FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, SDI, HDSDI, HD-SDIRBR, STM–16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, 3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR, FC400, FICON4G, FC800, FICON8G, FC1200, FICON10G, 10GE LAN, Infiniband 2.5G, Infiniband 5G




Added the support for the InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G, FC1200, FICON10G, and 10GE LAN services on the TN11LOA02 board.

Function enhancement: New client-side service types are supported.



Added the support for optical modules 1000BASE-BX10-U, 1000BASE-BX10-D, 1000BASE-BX-U, and 1000BASE-BX-D.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the TN11LOA board.

The TN11LOA board, a 1 x 10G OTU board, is added to receive a maximum of eight client-side services.


562



13.12.3 Application Overview The LOA board converges multiple service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Table 13-126 provides the application scenarios for the LOA board. Table 13-126 Application scenarios for the LOA board Applica tion Scenari o

Maximum Input Capacity (Client Side)

Mapping Path

Maxi mum Outp ut Capac ity (WD M Side)

Port Working Mode

Remarks

Scenario 1

l 8 x FE/FDDI/GE/ STM-1/STM-4/ OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/ DVB-ASI/ ESCON/SDI

Anya>ODU0>ODU1>ODU2>OTU2 or Any->ODU0>ODU2>OTU2

1x OTU2

ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1]>ODU2>OTU2)

-

l Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE (TTT-GMP) or GE(GFP-T). Scenario 2

4 x HD-SDI/HDSDIRBR/STM–16/ OC-48/FC200/ FICON Express/ OTU1

OTU1/Anya>ODU1>ODU2>OTU2

1x OTU2

ODU1 nonconvergence mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1>ODU2>OTU2)

-

Scenario 3

4 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>ODU0>ODU1>ODU2>OTU2 or OTU1>ODU1>ODU0>ODU2>OTU2

1x OTU2

ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1>ODU0[>ODU1]>ODU2>OTU2)

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


563



Applica tion Scenari o


Mapping Path

Maxi mum Outp ut Capac ity (WD M Side)

Port Working Mode

Remarks

Scenario 4

l 2 x 3G-SDI/3GSDIRBR/FC400/ FICON4G/ Infiniband 2.5G

Anya>ODUflex>ODU2>OTU2

1x OTU2

ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any>ODUflex>ODU2>OTU2)

l Any two of the RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8 ports receive and transmit 3G-SDI/FC400/ FICON4G services.

l 1 x FC800/ FICON8G/ Infiniband 5G

l Only the RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 ports receive and transmit Infiniband 2.5G services. l Only the RX1/TX1 port receives and transmits FC800/FICON8G/ Infiniband 5G services

Scenario 5

1 x FC800/FICON8G

Anya>ODU2>OTU2

1 x FC1200/ FICON10G/10GE LAN

Anya>ODU2e>OTU2e

1x OTU2/ OTU2 e

ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any>ODU2>OTU2)

Only the RX1/TX1 port receives and transmits FC800/ FICON8G/FC1200/ FICON10G/10GE LAN services.

a: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario. l Two service mapping paths are supported in scenarios 1 and 3. The service mapping path is ODU0->ODU2 mapping path when the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter is set to Assign random for the IN/ OUT port while it is ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 when the parameter is set to Assign consecutive for the IN/OUT port. l In application scenario 4, the board supports only the Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2 service path and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random for the IN/OUT port on the board. l When the LOA board receives an FC800/FICON8G/Infiniband 5G service from client equipment, the board cannot receive other types of services, because the board does not support hybrid transmission of FC800/ FICON8G/Infiniband 5G services and other types of services. l In all the preceding scenarios, the LOA board supports hybrid transmission of any services except FC800/ FICON8G/Infiniband 5G services. The LOA board provides a maximum of 10 Gbit/s total bandwidth.

13.12.4 Functions and Features The LOA board supports functions and features such as wavelength tunable, OTN functions, and ESC. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


564



For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-127. Table 13-127 Functions and features of the LOA board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LOA converts signals as follows: l 8 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s signals) <-> 1 x OTU2 l 4 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s signals)<-> 1 x OTU2 l 4 x OTU1 <-> 1 x OTU2 l 2 x 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/FC400/FICON4G/Infiniband 2.5G <-> 1 x OTU2 l 1 x FC800/FICON8G/Infiniband 5G <-> 1 x OTU2 l 1 x FC1200/FICON10G/10GE LAN<-> 1 x OTU2e Supports hybrid transmission of signals at a rate of 4.25 Gibt/s or lower, but does not support hybrid transmission of FC800/FICON8G/Infiniband 5G signals. The total rate of signals received at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


565




Description


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals. 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FICON8G: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FICON10G: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s Infiniband 2.5G: SAN service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s Infiniband 5G: SAN service at a rate of 5 Gbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s HD-SDIRBR: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49/1.001 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s 3G-SDIRBR: Video service at a rate of 2.97/1.001 Gbit/s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


566




Description NOTE The LOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. For GE electrical signal transmission, it is recommended that the board be equipped with at most two GE electrical modules to facilitate fiber routing. The LOA board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR, and DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical signals, a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the optical module of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications. The digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a digital video O/E converter by themselves. The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed identically. For the FICON4G service, you can configure it as the FC400 service on the U2000.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l ODU0 layer: supports the PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring. l ODUk(k=1, 2) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring. l ODUflex layer: supports the PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l OTUk (k=1, 2) layer: supports the SM function.

WDM specification



Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for 80 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 50 GHz channel spacing.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is GE/FE/10GE LAN.

FEC coding

l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the client side that complies with ITU-T G.709, only when the client side service type is OTU1.

NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is only supported when the client-side service type is STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OTU1.

l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC-2) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


567




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Regeneratio n board

The WDM-side signals from one LOA board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board.

ALS function


Test frame

The board supports the test frame function only when the client-side service type is GE or FE.


Supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/ QCP board). l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-T) and GE(TTT-GMP) modes. Supports encapsulation of 10GE LAN services in Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G).

Ethernet port working mode

l FE: 100M Full-Duplex

IEEE 1588v2

Not Supported

l GE(TTT-GMP): 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation


568




Description

Physical clock

l When the board receives GE services and the port mapping is TTTGMP on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. l When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.

Loopback

Channel Loopback

Inloop

WDM side

Inloop

Not supported

Outloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported NOTE For FC800/FICON8G/Infiniband 5G services, Inloop is not supported only in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).

NOTE It is supported only in FC800/ FICON8G/FC1200/FICON10G/10GE LAN services in ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2).

Client side

Inloop Outloop

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supported NOTE Inloop is not supported in FC800/ FICON8G /FC1200/FICON10G/10GE LAN services.


569




Description




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


570






13.12.5 Characteristic Code for the LOA The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

13.12.6 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS This section describes the physical ports displayed on the NMS. Table 13-128 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-128 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOA board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4


571



Physical Port


TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE


13.12.7 LOA Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) Application The LOA board converges a maximum of eight channels of service at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-47 shows the details. Figure 13-47 Application of the LOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) 1xOTU2 LOA

LOA

8×ODU0

4×ODU1

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

OUT

8×ODU0

IN

RX1 TX1

IN

8×ODU0

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

8×ODU0

RX8

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

RX1

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

TX1

FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBASI/ESCON/SDI TX8

1xOTU2

FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBRX8 ASI/ESCON/SDI TX8

NOTE

In the figure, the ODU1 procedure is optional in the service mapping path, When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2. When the parameter is set to Assign consecutive, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2. The board supports GE service mapping using the TTT-GMP or GFP-T procedure.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


572



When the LOA board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port models vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 13-48 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure 13-49 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Figure 13-48 Port diagram 1 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2) Client Side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

WDM Side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/ 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1 to 8) ODU0:1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 4(RX2/TX2)-1

. . . 10(RX8/TX8)-1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


ODU0:2


. . .

. . . 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

ODU2:1

OCH:1

IN/OUT

ODU0:8



573



Figure 13-49 Port diagram 2 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2) Client Side

WDM Side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/ 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2

4(RX2/TX2)-1


IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4)-ODU0:(1 to 2) ODU0:1 ODU1:1 ODU0:2

ODU2:1 207(ClientLP7/ ClientLP7)-1

9(RX7/TX7)-1

208(ClientLP8/ ClientLP8)-1

IN/OUT

ODU0:1


10(RX8/TX8)-1

OCH:1

ODU1:4 ODU0:2



Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS.


NOTE

When the LOA board connects to a TOM board that uses 20x(ClientLPx/ClientLPx)-2, a client-side optical port on the LOA board must be cross-connected to 20x(ClientLPx/ClientLPx)-2 of the LOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from 20x(ClientLPx/ClientLPx)-1 port of the TOM board to the clientside ports on the LOA board.

Table 13-129 Description of NM port of the LOA board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/2

Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1 to 2.

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:(1–8)

Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2)


574



Port Name

Description

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:(1– 4)–ODU0:(1–2)

Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)

Configuring Cross-Connections l

On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).

l

For the IN/OUT port, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random or Assign consecutive. When the parameter is set to Assign random, the board supports the Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2 service mapping path, as shown in Figure 13-50. When the parameter is set to Assign consecutive, the board supports the Any->ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2 service mapping path, as shown in Figure 13-51.

l

Specify required services types for the board.

l

On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and in Figure 13-50, Figure 13-51. The electrical crossClientLP ports. For details, see connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports are fixed. The RX1/TX1 port is crossconnected to the ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port is cross-connected to the ClientLP2 port, and so on. NOTE

Electrical cross-connections must be configured. Otherwise, the ALS, LPT, and protection functions may become abnormal.

l

On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODU0 in Figure 13-50, Figure 13-51. The electrical cross-connections ports. For details, see between the ClientLP and ODU0 ports are random but channel 1 on each ClientLP port is used in the cross-connections. NOTE

If all client-side ports on the LOA board always work in ODU0 non-convergence mode with mapping path Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, and GE(TTT-GMP) services are supported on the client side of the LOA board accordingly. users can apply the 8*GE->8*ODU0 service package to the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2) and the Service Type to GE(TTT-GMP) for the 8 ports. When the LOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a clientside optical port on the LOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the LOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the LOA board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


575



Figure 13-50 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)

Client side

WDM side 1

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 7(RX5/TX5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2


IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:2 2

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:3 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:4 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:5 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:6 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:7 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:8


The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


576



Figure 13-51 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) WDM side

Client side 1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

1

5(RX3/TX3)-1

1

6(RX4/TX4)-1

1

7(RX5/TX5)-1

1

8(RX6/TX6)-1

1

9(RX7/TX7)-1

1

10(RX8/TX8)-1



IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:1–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:1–ODU0:2 2

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:2–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:2–ODU0:2 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:3–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:3–ODU0:2 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:4–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:4–ODU0:2



13.12.8 LOA Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) Application The LOA board converges a maximum of four channels of service signals at a rate ranging from 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-52 shows the details. Figure 13-52 Application of the LOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) 1xOTU2 LOA

LOA

4×ODU1

8×ODU0


8×ODU0

8×ODU0

RX1 TX1

8×ODU0

1×OTU2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1×ODU2

RX8

4×ODU1

TX8

M U X IN / OUT D M U X

1×ODU2

RX1


1×OTU2

TX1 HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR/ STM–16/OC-48/ 4 FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

1xOTU2

4 RX8

HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR/ STM–16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

TX8

577



NOTE

In this scenario, any four of the RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8 ports can receive and transmit services.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-53 shows the port diagrams for the LOA. Figure 13-53 Port diagram of the LOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2>OTU2)) WDM Side

Client Side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1~ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)


ODU1:1


ODU1:2

ODU2:1

9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1


ODU1:3


ODU1:4

OCH:1

IN/OUT




NOTE


Table 13-130 Description of the LOA board's ports on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Internal logical port. The paths are numbered 1.


578



Port Name

Description

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1: (1–4)

Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).


On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).

l


l

On the U2000 create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODU1 ports. For details, see in Figure 13-54. The cross-connections between the ClientLP and ODU1 ports are random and at most four cross-connections between them can be used.

Figure 13-54 Cross-connections of the LOA board (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)

WDM side

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


7(RX5/TX5)-1


8(RX6/TX6)-1


9(RX7/TX7)-1


10(RX8/TX8)-1


IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:1

1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:2





The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


579



13.12.9 LOA Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) Application The LOA board converges a maximum of 4 x OTU1 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-55 shows the details. Figure 13-55 Application of the LOA board in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 [->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) 1xOTU2 LOA

LOA

4×ODU1

8×ODU0

4×ODU1

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

IN

RX1 TX1

8×ODU0

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

RX8

8×ODU0

TX8

4×ODU1

4

OUT


1×ODU2

RX1

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

TX1

OTU1

1xOTU2

4 OTU1 RX8 TX8

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. When the LOA board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port models vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 13-56 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure 13-57 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


580



Figure 13-56 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU2->OTU2) Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1

WDM side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~ IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0(1~8) 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 ODU0:1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2

ODU0:2


ODU0:3


ODU0:4

ODU2:1

208(ClientLP8 /ClientLP8)-1

ODU0:7


ODU0:8

IN/OUT

OCH:1

Figure 13-57 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~ IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1(1~4)-ODU0(1~2) 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 ODU0:1 ODU1:1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 ODU0:2 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1


ODU0:1 ODU1:2

OCH:1

IN/OUT

ODU0:2


ODU0:1


ODU0:2


ODU2:1

WDM side

ODU1:4



NOTE

In this mode, any four of the RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8 ports can receive services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


581



Table 13-131 Description of NM port of the LOA board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/2


IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:(1–8)

Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2).

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:(1– 4)–ODU0:(1–2)

Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).


On the U2000, set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 [->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).

l

For the IN/OUT port, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign random or Assign consecutive. When the parameter is set to Assign random, the service mapping path is OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2. For details, see Figure 13-58. When the parameter is set to Assign consecutive, the service mapping path is OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2. For details, see Figure 13-59.

l


l

On the U2000 create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODU0 in Figure 13-58, Figure 13-59. The cross-connections between ports. For details, see the ClientLP and ODU0 ports are random and at most 8 cross-connections between the ports can be used. NOTE

A maximum of four cross-connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports can be used. The 3(RX1/TX1)-1 port are cross-connected to the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1/)-1 and 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1/)-2 ports, the 4 (RX2/TX2)-1 port are cross-connected to the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2/)-1 and 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2/)-2 ports, and so on.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


582



Figure 13-58 Cross-connections of the LOA board (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)

WDM side

Client side




IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:2 1

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:3 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:4 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:5 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:6 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:7 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU0:8



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


583



Figure 13-59 Cross-connections of the LOA board (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) WDM side

Client side




IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:1–ODU0:1 1

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:1–ODU0:2 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:2–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:2–ODU0:2 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:3–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:3–ODU0:2 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:4–ODU0:1 IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODU1:4–ODU0:2



13.12.10 LOA Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) Application The LOA board converges a maximum of 2 x 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR, 2 x FC400/FICON4G/ Infiniband 2.5G, or 1 x FC800/FICON8G/Infiniband 5G service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-60 shows the details.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


584



Figure 13-60 Application of the LOA board in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) 1xOTU2

1xOTU2

LOA

LOA

2×ODUflex

1×OTU2

8×ODU0

8×ODU0

1

8×ODU0

2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

2×ODUflex

3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/ FC400/ FICON4G/FC800/ FICON8G/Infiniband 2.5G/Infiniband 5G

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

1

3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/ FC400/ FICON4G/FC800/ FICON8G/Infiniband 2.5G/Infiniband 5G

2

NOTE

In this scenario, any two of the RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8 ports receive and transmit 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBRI/ FC400/FICON4G services,Only the RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 ports receive and transmit Infiniband 2.5G and only the RX1/TX1 port receives and transmits FC800/FICON8G/Infiniband 5G services.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-61 shows the port diagrams for the LOA. Figure 13-61 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) Client Side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP2/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1

WDM Side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1 to 2)

ODUflex:1 ODU2:1

10(RX8/TX8)-1



OCH:1

IN/OUT

ODUflex:2



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


585



NOTE

l Any two of the RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8 ports can receive 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G services as shown in the figure (the RX1/TX1 ports are used as an example). l Only the RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 ports can receive Infiniband 2.5G services. l Only the RX1/TX1 port can receive FC800/FICON8G/Infiniband 5G services.


Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Internal logical port. The paths is numbered 1.

IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1–ODUflex:(1– 2)

Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).


On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2). NOTE

The board supports only the Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2 service path and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random for the IN/OUT port on the board.

l


l

U2000 Create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODUflex in Figure 13-62. The cross-connections between the ClientLP ports. For details, see and ODUflex ports are random. NOTE

When configuring cross-connections, specify the number of ODUflex timeslots. Table 13-133 provides the number of ODUflex timeslots required by a client service. The cross-connections between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports are fixed. For example, the 3(RX1/TX1)-1 port is cross-connected to the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1/)-1, the 4(RX2/TX2)-1 port is cross-connected to the 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP)-1 port, and son on. For the FC400/FICON4G/Infiniband 2.5G service, only two crossconnections are allowed between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For the FC800/FICON8G/Infiniband 5G service, only one cross-connection is allowed between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports.

Table 13-133 ODUflex timeslot

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Client service type

ODUflex Timeslot

3G-SDI

3

3G-SDIRBR

3

Infiniband 2.5G

3


586



Client service type

ODUflex Timeslot

FC400/FICON4G

4

Infiniband 5G

5

FC800/FICON8G

7

Figure 13-62 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)

WDM side

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


7(RX5/TX5)-1


8(RX6/TX6)-1


9(RX7/TX7)-1


10(RX8/TX8)-1



1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2



13.12.11 LOA Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2) Application The LOA board converges 1 x FC800/FICON8G service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, or converges 1 x FC1200/FICON10G/10GE LAN service signals into 1 x OTU2e optical Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


587



signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 13-63 shows the details. Figure 13-63 Application of the LOA board in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2) 1xOTU2/OTU2e 1xOTU2/OTU2e LOA

1×ODU2/ODU2e

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/OTU2e

8×ODU0

M U X / D M U X

FC800/ FC1200/FICON 8G/FICON10G/ 10GE LAN

8×ODU0

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×ODU2/ODU2e

FC800/ FC1200/FICON 8G/FICON10G/ 10GE LAN

LOA

NOTE

In this scenario, only the RX1/TX1 can receive and transmit FC800/FC1200/FICON8G/FICON10G/10GE LAN services. When the LOA board receives an FC800/FICON8G service from client equipment, the board cannot receive other types of services, because the board does not support hybrid transmission of FC800/FICON8G services and other types of services.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-64 shows the port diagrams for the LOA. Figure 13-64 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2) WDM Side

Client Side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1



ODU2:1

OCH:1

IN/OUT



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


588



NOTE

In this scenario, Olny RX1/TX1 ports can receive and transmit services.


Description

RX1/TX1




IN/OUT–OCH:1–ODU2:1

Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2).


On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2).

l


l

On the U2000 create electrical cross-connections between the internal ClientLP and ODU1 ports. For details, see in Figure 13-65 NOTE

In this scenario, Olny RX1/TX1 ports can receive and transmit services.

Figure 13-65 Cross-connections of the LOA board (Any->ODU2->OTU2) WDM side

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1



1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


589



13.12.12 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LOA board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-66 shows the block diagram of the functions of the LOA board. Figure 13-66 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOA board Client side RX1 RX2

WDM side

O/E

RX8 TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8


Service encapsulation and mapping module

E/O OTN processing module

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



NOTE

When used to receive GE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform power level conversion, and then sends the signals to the service encapsulation and mapping module for processing.

Signal flow In the signal flow of the LOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOA to the WDM side of the LOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 ports, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


590



encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical port. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical port. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels of any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of service encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing module. – Service encapsulation and mapping module The module encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps them into OTU2 payload. It also performs the reversion operations. The module also monitors performance of Any signals. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Control and communication module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

591



– Controls operations on the board. – Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the system control and communication board. l


13.12.13 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOA board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-67 shows the front panel of the LOA board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


592



Figure 13-67 Front panel of the LOA board

NOTE

If the equipment is installed in a Huawei cabinet, the board can only use G.657A2 fibers; otherwise, the fibers will be pressed by the cabinet door. If the cabinet door is not required or if the equipment is installed in a third-party cabinet whose door does not press the fibers, there is no restriction on the fiber type.



l


l


l




593



Interfaces Table 13-135 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-135 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOA board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX8

LC


RX1-RX8

LC



13.12.14 Valid Slots One slot houses one LOA board. Table 13-136 shows the valid slots for the LOA board. Table 13-136 Valid slots for the LOA board Product

Valid slots


IU1–IU8, IU11–IU42, IU45–IU68


IU1–IU8, IU12–IU27, IU29–IU36


IU1–IU8, IU11–IU18


IU3–IU16




IU2–IU5

13.12.15 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LOA, refer to Table 13-137. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


594



Table 13-137 LOA parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status






Default: NonLoopback Channel Loopback


Query or set the path Loopback.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


595



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

None, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FICON8G, FC1200, FICON10G, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, SDI, GE (TTT-GMP), GE(GFPT), HDSDI, 10GE LAN, HDSDIRBR, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, 3GSDI, 3GSDIRBR


Default: None

Off, On

Laser Status


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE (TTT-GMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format. NOTE The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed identically. For the FICON4G service, you can configure it as the FC400 service on the U2000. NOTE The service type varies according to the port working mode. For details, see 13.12.3 Application Overview.



596



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect








Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


597



Field

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT


Determines whether to set REMOTE_FAULT as a laser shutdown condition. NOTE l This parameter takes effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. l For the TN11LOA boards, when routers support REMOTE_FAULT as a switching condition and the LOA boards are cascaded on the client side, perform the following operations: l If the bit transparent transmission mode is configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None, no matter whether a protection scheme is configured or not.

Client Mode, OTN Mode

Service Mode

Default: Client Mode

FEC Working State


Specifies the service mode for a board. When the board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

FEC Mode



AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



598



Field

Value

Description


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0



C, CWDM Default: C

Sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only support C band.


Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex


Default: 1000M FullDuplex

Auto-negotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain. This parameter is valid only when the service type is set to GE (TTT-GMP). The Ethernet working mode must be consistent with the mode set for the upstream services of the customer. If two ports are mutually protected, the Ethernet working mode must be consistent on the active and standby ports.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


599



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.




PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled

ODUflex Tolerance (ppm)

0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the LOA board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the LOA board receives other services, set it to 100.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


600



Field

Value

Description

ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode

Assign random, Assign consecutive

Specifies the ODUk timeslot allocation mode of the board.

Default: Assign random

Assign random indicates that cross-layer mapping of services is performed. The service mappings are ODU0->ODU2, ODU1->ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. l Cross-layer mapping reduces the number of mapping layers and simplifies the relationship between client and server trails, which are easy to manage. l Cross-layer mapping enables flexible bandwidth usage. For example, when seven 1.25G timeslots of an ODU2 channel are occupied by ODUflex services, the remaining 1.25G bandwidth can be configured for ODU0 services, implementing ODU0->ODU2 cross-layer mapping. Assign consecutive indicates that layerby-layer mapping of services is performed from lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0->ODU1>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2. The Assign random mode is recommended. The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode values of two LOA boards must be the same when they are interconnected on the WDM side.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


601



Field

Value

Description

Port Working Mode

ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2)

Specifies the working mode of the interface on the board depending the actual application scenario and service mapping path.

ODU1 nonconvergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2) ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2) ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2) ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2) Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2)

13.12.16 LOA Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


602



Bo ard





TN 11L OA

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP

N/A


S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 kmXFP

1000 BASE-ZX-80 kmeSFP 0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate-10 km-Video eSFP 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km-eSFP 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP 800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 kmSFP+ 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-SFP + 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP Infiniband 5G-0.3km-SFP+ Infiniband 5G-10km-SFP+ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmSFP+ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 kmSFP+ Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


603



NOTE



I-16-2 km-eSFP module, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP module, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP module and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10eSFP optical module.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


604


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP module, and 1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP module can be used to access GE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


605



Table 13-139 Client-side pluggable GE optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional transmissions) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1000 BASEBX10-UeSFP

1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3ah-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12


606



NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate-eSFP module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and FE signals. 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals. When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.


Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


607


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type





Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

SDI module can be used to access DVB-ASI, SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, and 3G-SDIRBR signals.

Table 13-141 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDI services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate 10 km-Video eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Service rate

Gbit/s

0.1 to 3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1290 to 1330


dBm

0


dBm

-7


dB

5


nm

3.0


608



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate 10 km-Video eSFP


-

PIN


nm

1260 to 1620


dBm

-22


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km-eSFP, 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP module can be used to access Infiniband 2.5G, FC400, and FICON4G signals.

Table 13-142 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FC services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 kmeSFP

4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmeSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

nm

830 to 860

1270 to 1355


dBm

-1.1

-1


dBm

-9

-8.4

Eye pattern mask

-

Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface (FC-PI-2) parameter template


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN


PIN

609



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

770 to 860

1260 to 1600


dBm

-15

-18


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

NOTE

Infiniband 5G-0.3km-SFP+, Infiniband 5G-10km-SFP+ module can be used to access Infiniband 5G signals.

Table 13-143 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (Infiniband 5G services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value Infiniband 5G-0.3km-SFP+

Infiniband 5G-10km-SFP+


Gbit/s

6.144

6.144

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM


km

0.3

10


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-1

0.5


dBm

-9

-8.4


dB

N/A

3.5


dBm

≤-30

≤-30


610



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Eye pattern mask

Value Infiniband 5G-0.3km-SFP+

-

Infiniband 5G-10km-SFP+



-

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-11.5

-13.8


dBm

-1

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

NOTE

800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 km-SFP+ and 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-SFP+ module can be used to access FC800 and FICON8G signals.

Table 13-144 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FC800/FICON8G services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 km-SFP+

800-SM-LC-L-10 km-SFP+


Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-1

0.5


611



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 km-SFP+

800-SM-LC-L-10 km-SFP+


dBm

-7.3

-8.2


dB

3

3.5


-

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)


dBm

-1

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

NOTE

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals. 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

nm

1471 to 1611


1471 to 1611

612



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


613




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


614



NOTE

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+ and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ module can be used to access 10GE LAN, FC1200, and FICON10G signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+

10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+


Gbit/s

8.5 to 11.1

9.956 to 11.1

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


nm

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2


dBm

-6

-1


dB

6

8.2

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1355

1260 to 1605


dBm

-14.4

-14 (11.1G) -15.8 (10.3125G)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

0.5

-1

reflectance

dB

-12

-27


615




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


616




Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

Line code format

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP -

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


617



Parameter

Unit


-



10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2


dBm

-6

-1


dB

6

8.2


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605


dBm

-11

-14


dBm

-1

-1



l

Weight: 1.19 kg (2.64b.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


618







TN11LOA


31.8

36

32.8

37

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 kmXFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP


13.13 LOG LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit

13.13.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LOG board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


619



Boa rd





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L OG

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN 12L OG

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Differences Between Versions l

Function: – The TN11LOG supports AFEC, and the TN12LOG supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. – The TN12LOG supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal, while the TN11LOG supports only the GE optical signal. – The TN12LOG board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side, whereas the TN11LOG does not. For details, see 13.13.4 Functions and Features.

l

Specification: – For the power consumption and specification of each version, see 13.13.12 LOG Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LOG

TN12LOG

The TN12LOG can be created as LOG on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOG functions as the TN11LOG. NOTE l When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when both the receive and transmit boards employ AFEC, the substitution does not apply. l A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.

TN12LOG

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

None

-


620






Added the support for optical modules 1000BASE-BX10-U, 1000BASE-BX10-D, 1000BASE-BX-U, and 1000BASE-BX-D.


13.13.3 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOG board implements conversion between eight channels of GE optical signals and OTU2 optical signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-68. Figure 13-68 Position of the LOG board in the WDM system LOG

LOG 1

GE

1

1×OTU2

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

8

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

GE

M U X / D M U X

GE

8

GE

OptiX OSN 6800 subrack: from paired slot or cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800 subrack: from mesh group slot

13.13.4 Functions and Features The LOG board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelengths, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-151.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


621



Table 13-151 Functions and features of the LOG board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LOG converts signals: 8 x GE <->1 x OTU2




OptiX OSN 8800 subrack: N/A.

NOTE The TN12LOG board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. For GE electrical signal transmission, it is recommended that the board be equipped with at most two GE electrical modules to facilitate fiber routing.

OptiX OSN 6800 subrack: Supports grooming of eight channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connect boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800 subrack: Supports grooming of eight GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification



Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for:

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.

LPT function

Supported

l 40 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing l 80 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 50 GHz channel spacing


622




Description

FEC coding

TN11LOG: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN12LOG: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures.


l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. l The WDM-side signals from one TN11LOG board can be regenerated by another TN11LSXR board.

Regeneration board

l The WDM-side signals from one TN12LOG board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2 board. ALS function


Test frame

Supported

Latency measurement

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN12LOG


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 only supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


623




Description




GE(GFP-F): 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation

Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3z



13.13.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-69 and Figure 13-70 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


624



Figure 13-69 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) Backplane(service cross-connection)

8

GE WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8

E/O

E/O GE OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module



O/E

OUT

IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


625



Figure 13-70 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 8800) WDM side

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

RX8 TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8


E/O GE encapsulation and mapping module



O/E

OUT

IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow NOTE

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals on the TN12LOG. When used to receive GE electrical signals, the board must use a clientside electrical module to perform power level conversion, and then sends the signals to the signal processing module for processing. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.

The client side of the LOG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOG to the WDM side of the LOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


626



The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LOG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


627



– GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.13.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-71 shows the front panel of the LOG board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


628



Figure 13-71 Font panel of the LOG board

LOG STAT ACT PROG SRV


LOG



l


l


l





629



Table 13-152 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOG board Interface

Type

Function

INa

LC


OUTa

LC


TX1-TX8

LC


RX1-RX8

LC


a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOG.


13.13.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one LOG board. Table 13-153 shows the valid slots for the TN11LOG board. Table 13-153 Valid slots for TN11LOG board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 13-154 shows the valid slots for the TN12LOG board. Table 13-154 Valid slots for TN12LOG board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


630



Product

Valid Slots


IU3-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.13.8 Characteristic Code for the LOG The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-155 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-155 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


631



Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-72 shows the application model of the LOG board. Table 13-156 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-72 Port diagram of the LOG board Client side

WDM side 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8

3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)

201(LP/LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1



WDM-side opticalmodule

Table 13-156 Description of NM port of the LOG board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


LP

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.

IN/OUT


13.13.10 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections between LOG boards and other boards on the NMS. If the LOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LOG board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and

in Figure 13-73.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LOG board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

3

in Figure 13-73. (The GE services accessed from the


632



client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LOG board, as shown by 4 in Figure 13-73. (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence.) NOTE

One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port. There should be no more than eight cross-connections between the RX/TX ports of the local board or other boards and the LP port of the local board.

l

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LOG board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 13-73. (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)

l

The eight paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000. NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by

in Figure 13-73.

and

Figure 13-73 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG board Client side

Other board 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8

5 3

4 2 1

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8

LOG The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board The WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

1 2 3 4 5

Other board TN11L4G / TN11LDGD / TN11LDGS / TN11LOG / TN12LOG / TN11LQG / TN13LQM / TN11LQMD / TN12LQMD / TN11LQMS / TN12LQMS / TN11TBE / TN11TDG / TN11TOM / TN11TQM / TN12TQM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


633



13.13.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LOG, refer to Table 13-157. Table 13-157 LOG Parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







GE, GE(GFP-T) Default: GE

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


634



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On



Disabled, Enabled



Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN12LOG supports this parameter.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12LOG supports this parameter.

Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


635



Field

Value

Description

Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Turn-On


Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12LOG supports this parameter.



FEC Working State


Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

FEC Mode



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Band Type

-



-



636



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0



C, CWDM Default: C


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


637



Field

Value

Description




Default: None




NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only TN12LOG supports this parameter.

13.13.12 LOG Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


638



Bo ard





TN 11L OG

N/A


800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN

N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 kmeSFP

800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


639



Bo ard





TN 12L OG

N/A


800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN


800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10U-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10D-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX-UeSFP 1000 BASE-BX-DeSFP

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 kmXFP

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 kmeSFP

NOTE

(D)RZ means DRZ or RZ. These two types of optical modules have the same optical performance and can be interconnected. The availability of the two type of optical module is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, consult with the product manager at the local representative office. NOTE



When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


640




Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


641



NOTE

1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP, 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP, 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP, and 1000 BASE-BX-DeSFP optical module can be used to access GE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


642



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30


643



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Eye pattern mask

-






-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-161 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN


NRZ

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


644



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

Table 13-162 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN

1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD

4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-(D)RZPIN

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN

NRZ

NRZ

ODB

(D)RZ

NRZ

2

2

2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm

2

2


645



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type







dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35

35


ps/ nm

1200

1200

4800

800

800

APD

APD

PIN

PIN


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27


646



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type






a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-


PIN

647



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


648



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


dB

30

30

30


649



Parameter

Unit



-



G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7



l

Weight: TN11LOG: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN12LOG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)

Power Consumption Boar d




TN1 1LO G


40

45

43

48

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


650


Boar d

TN1 2LO G





800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN

43.5

48.5

4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD

55.0

60.5


37.0

41.44


38.0

42.44

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

41.61

46.6


43.04

48.0

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP


13.14 LOM LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board

13.14.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LOM board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


651



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1L O M

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

T N1 2L O M

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Function: – The TN11LOM supports AFEC, and the TN12LOM supports AFEC-2. Boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other. For details, see 13.14.4 Functions and Features.

l

Appearance: – The TN11LOM and TN12LOM versions use different front panels. For details, see 13.14.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.14.11 LOM Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LOM

TN12LOM

The TN12LOM can be created as LOM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOM functions as the TN11LOM. NOTE l When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when both the receive and transmit boards employ AFEC, the substitution does not apply. l A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


652



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12LOM

None

-




The TN11LOM board deleted the support for the IU9 and IU10 slots on the OptiX OSN 6800.




The TN12LOM board added the support for optical modules 1000BASE-BX10-U, 1000BASE-BX10-D, 1000BASE-BX-U, and 1000BASE-BX-D.


13.14.3 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOM board multiplexes a maximum of eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G, or two channels of FC400/FICON4G signals into one channel of OTU2 signals. It also implements conversion between these signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal width does not decrease during longhaul transmission of FC services. The LOM board also supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. For the position of the LOM board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-74.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


653



Figure 13-74 Position of the LOM board in the WDM system LOM

LOM M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

GE ISC 1G 1 ISC 2G FC100 FC200 FC400 FICON 8 FICON4G FICON Express

GE ISC 1G 1 ISC 2G FC100 FC200 FC400 FICON 8 FICON4G FICON Express

NOTE

For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express, ISC 2G, and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available. For FC400, and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available. The total rate of eight channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

13.14.4 Functions and Features The LOM board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-166. Table 13-166 Functions and features of the LOM board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LOM converts signals as follows: l 8 x GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G <->1 x OTU2 l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G <->1 x OTU2 l 2 x FC400/FICON4G <->1 x OTU2 Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The overall bandwidth of the first and last four optical interfaces should be equal to or less than 5 Gbit/s, respectively. Supports FC extension and ensures that the data width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. For FC100/FC200/FC400 services, the maximum transmission distance of the WDM side is 3000 km.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


654




Description


GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals. FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s ISC 1G: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s ISC 2G: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s NOTE The LOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. For GE electrical signal transmission, it is recommended that the board be equipped with at most two GE electrical modules to facilitate fiber routing.

OTN function


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is GE.



655




Description

FEC coding

TN11LOM: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN12LOM: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.



l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. l The WDM-side signals from one TN11LOM board can be regenerated by another TN11LSXR board.

Regeneration board

l The WDM-side signals from one TN12LOM board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/ TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board. ALS function


Test frame

The board supports the test frame function only when the client-side service type is GE.

Latency measurement

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN12LOM


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






656




Description

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

Client side



Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3z NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


657






13.14.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-75 and Figure 13-76 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


658



Figure 13-75 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LOM board

Client side

GE encapsulation and mapping module

O/E

RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8


FC encapsulation and mapping module FICON encapsulation and mapping module

WDM side


OUT

O/E IN

ISC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


659



Figure 13-76 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LOM board GE encapsulation and mapping module

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E

RX8 TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8


FC encapsulation and mapping module FICON encapsulation and mapping module

WDM side OTN processing module

E/O

O/E

ISC encapsulation and mapping module

OUT

IN


Any encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow NOTE

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.

In the signal flow of the LOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOM to the WDM side of the LOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels or four channels or two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


660



After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs eight channels or four channels or two channels of the electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels or four channels or two channels of the electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels or four channels or two channels of the optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight or four or two channels of the internal electrical signals to the corresponding optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the GE encapsulation and mapping module, ISC encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, FICON encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – ISC encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


661



Encapsulates multiple channels of ISC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors ISC performance. – FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FC performance. – FICON encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FICON signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FICON performance. – Any encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors Any performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.14.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-77 and Figure 13-78 show the front panel of the LOM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


662



Figure 13-77 Front panel of the TN11LOM board

LOM STAT ACT PROG SRV

LINK/ACT1 LINK/ACT2 LINK/ACT3 LINK/ACT4 LINK/ACT5 LINK/ACT6 LINK/ACT7 LINK/ACT8

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 RX5

OUT IN

TX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8

LOM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


663



Figure 13-78 Front panel of the TN12LOM board LOM STAT ACT PROG SRV


LOM

Indicators Twelve indicators are present on the front panel: l


l


l


l


l

Data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn) - green



664



NOTE

Only the TN11LOM board has the data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn).

Interfaces Table 13-167 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-167 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOM board Interface

Type

Function

INa

LC


OUTa

LC


TX1-TX8

LC

Transmit service signals to client equipment. Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used.

RX1-RX8

LC

Receive service signals from client equipment. Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.

a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOM.


13.14.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11LOM board. One slot houses one TN12LOM board. Table 13-168 and Table 13-169 show the valid slots for the LOM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


665



Table 13-168 Valid slots for the TN11LOM board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67


IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU3-IU5

NOTE OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11LOM board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 3800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two occupied slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the TN11LOM board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU3.

Table 13-169 Valid slots for TN12LOM board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.14.8 Characteristic Code for the LOM The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

13.14.9 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS and the logical ports of the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


666



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-170 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-170 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE


l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The LOM board maps a client service into an STM-64 signal and then multiplexes the STM-64 signal into an OTU2. The STM-64 signal contains eight timeslots, each having a bandwidth of 1.24 Gbit/s. Different client service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of client service is listed below. Service Type

Number of Timeslots

GE

1

FC100

1

FC200

2

FC400

4

FICON

1

FICON4G

4

FICON Express

2

ISC 1G

1

ISC 2G


667



13.14.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LOM, refer to Table 13-171. Table 13-171 LOM Parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


668



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

l TN11LOM: None, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FICON, FICON Express, FICON4G, GE, GE (GFP-T), ISC 1G, ISC 2G


l TN12LOM: None, Any, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FICON, FICON Express, FICON4G, GE, GE (GFP-T), ISC 1G, ISC 2G

NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.

Default: None Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)

270 to 5000 Default: 270

Sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN12LOM.

Laser Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




669



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN12LOM supports this parameter.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12LOM supports this parameter.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12LOM supports this parameter.

Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


670



Field

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled FC Internal Working Mode

Normal Mode, Special Mode Default: Normal Mode

In different internal working mode, the board can work with the FC storage equipment of different vendors. l Normal mode: In this mode, the board can work with the mainstream FC switch storage equipment (such as the Brocade switch). Such equipment inserts the 10B_ERR alarm after detecting a link failure. l Special mode: In this mode, the board can work with the switch storage equipment (such as the McData switch) that uses special processing standard. Such equipment inserts the NOS alarm after detecting a link failure.

OFC Enabled


The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury. NOTE l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled after the OFC function is enabled. l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection. l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.

FEC Working State



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


671



Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC


Default: FEC

FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0



C, CWDM Default: C


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


672



Field

Value

Description






FC Distance Extension


A flow control mechanism is applied between FC service client-side equipment and between two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching function of FC services, which ensures that the bandwidth does not decrease during long haul transmission of FC services. If the distance between the transmit and receive ends of FC services exceeds the maximum transmission distance that the FC switch supports, the value of the parameter must be set to Enabled. This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to FC services.




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


673



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled

The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted. Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test. NOTE Only TN11LOM supports this parameter.

NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only TN12LOM supports this parameter.

13.14.11 LOM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


674



Bo ard





TN 11L OM

N/A



N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP FC400/FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multimode)-eSFP FC400/FICON4G Module-10 km (Single mode)-eSFP FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode)eSFP


FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 kmeSFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


675



Bo ard





TN 12L OM

N/A






1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP

1000 BASE-BX10U-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10D-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX-UeSFP 1000 BASE-BX-DeSFP FC400/FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multimode)-eSFP FC400/FICON4G Module-10 km (Single mode)-eSFP FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode)eSFP FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 kmeSFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


676



NOTE






Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9


677



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Eye pattern mask

-






-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


678



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12


679




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multi mode)-eSFP

FC400/ FICON4G Module-10 km (Single mode)-eSFP

FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multi mode)-eSFP

FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

MLM

SLM


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

2 km (1.2 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

nm

830 to 860

1270 to 1355

830 to 860

1266 to 1360


dBm

-1.1

-1

-2.5

-3


dBm

-9

-8.4

-9.5

-10

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1260 to 1600

770 to 860

1270 to 1580


dBm

-15

-18

-17

-18


680



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multi mode)-eSFP

FC400/ FICON4G Module-10 km (Single mode)-eSFP

FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multi mode)-eSFP

FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)-eSFP


dBm

0

0

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


681



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-



NRZ

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


682



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-






NRZ

NRZ

ODB

(D)RZ

NRZ

2

2

2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm

2

2


683



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type







dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35

35


ps/ nm

1200

1200

4800

800

800

APD

APD

PIN

PIN


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27


684



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type








Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-


PIN

685



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


686



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Mechanical Specifications TN11LOM: l


l


TN12LOM: l


l






TN1 1LO M

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

92.7

101.7

92.9

101.9


93.4

102.7


98.2

108.0

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


687



Boar d




TN1 2LO M


61.8

69.2


62.8

70.2


64.8

72.6


66.7

75.0

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases by another 2 W.

13.15 LQG LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board

13.15.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LQG board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L QG

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


688



13.15.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQG board implements the conversion between four channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LQG board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-79. Figure 13-79 Position of the LQG board in the WDM system LQG

LQG

1

1×ODU5G

4

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU5G/FEC5G

1×ODU5G

GE

1×OTU5G/FEC5G

1

M U X / D M U X

GE

4 GE

GE

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot or cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

13.15.3 Functions and Features The LQG board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connect at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-180. Table 13-180 Functions and features of the LQG board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LQG converts signals: 4 x GE <-> 1 x OTU5G/FEC5G




l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane, and supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


689




Description

OTN function

l Provides the OTU5G/FEC5G interface on WDM-side. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU5G. l Supports SM functions for OTU5G.

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

Supported

FEC coding





l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


Test frame

Supported

Latency measurement

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/ QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


690




Description





Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3z



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


691



13.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-80 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board. Figure 13-80 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board Backplane (service corss-connection)

GE

Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

E/O GE OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module

Client-side

optical module

O/E

OUT

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LQG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LQG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQG to the WDM side of the LQG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU5G/FEC5G signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


692



The OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU5G/FEC5G framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


693



Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU5G/ FEC5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU5G/FEC5G signals, processes overheads in OTU5G/FEC5G signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.15.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-81 shows the front panel of the LQG board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


694



Figure 13-81 Front panel of the LQG board

LQG STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT IN

LQG



l


l


l





695



Table 13-181 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQG board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



13.15.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LQG board. Table 13-182 shows the valid slots for the LQG board. Table 13-182 Valid slots for the LQG board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


696



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-183 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-183 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-82 shows the application model of the LQG board. Table 13-184 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-82 Port diagram of the LQG board WDM side

Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 Cross-connect module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

201(LP/LP)-1


1(IN/OUT)-1



697



Table 13-184 Description of NM port of the LQG board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


LP


IN/OUT


13.15.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LQG board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and

in Figure 13-83.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

3

in Figure 13-83.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LQG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown

4

in Figure 13-83.

NOTE

One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.

l

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LQG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LQG board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

5

in Figure 13-83.

The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.


698



Figure 13-83 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG board Client side

Other board

Client side

3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

5(RX3/TX3)-1

201(LP/LP)-3

6(RX4/TX4)-1

201(LP/LP)-4

5

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

3

5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

4 2 1

201(LP/LP)-1

WDM side

WDM side

201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4

LQG The straight-through of the board

1

The internal cross-connection of the board

2

The client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board The WDM side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

3 4 5


13.15.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LQG, refer to Table 13-185. Table 13-185 LQG Parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



699



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





GE, GE(GFP-T) Default: GE

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFPF; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFPT) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.

Laser Status

Off, On Default:


l WDM side: On




Service Mode

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


OTN, SDH


Default: OTN



700



Field

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled






-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/19 6.050 to 80/1560.61/1 92.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/2 08.170 to 18/1611.00/1 88.780



C, CWDM Default: C


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


701



Field

Value

Description


AutoNegotiation, 1000M FullDuplex


Default: 1000M Full-Duplex


None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DE G


Default: None


PRBS Test Status


The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted. Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test.

NULL Mapping Status



13.15.11 LQG Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


702



Bo ard





TN 11L QG

N/A



5 Gbit/s Multirate ( CWDM)-50 kmeSFP



5 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-70 kmeSFP

1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 kmeSFP

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


703


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



NRZ

NRZ


704



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


705




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD


NRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2


dBm

-2

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

3400

3400


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-25

-25


dBm

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


APD

706




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 5 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-50 kmeSFP


Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


-

50 km (31.1 mi.)

70 km (43.5 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

2

2


dB

5

5


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30


ps/nm

1000

1400


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1450 to 1620

1450 to 1620


dBm

-18

-28


dBm

0

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


707





l






TN11LQG


28.4

32


31.0

34.4


23.18

26

5 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-70 kmeSFP a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

13.16 LQM LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board

13.16.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LQM board is TN13.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


708



Boa rd





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 13L QM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Type The system provides two types of the LQM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 13-190 lists the types of the LQM. Table 13-190 LQM type description Board

Type

Description

LQM

Single transmitting and single receiving board

The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/ OUT1.

Dual-fed selective receiving board

The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/ OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

NOTE

The WDM-side interfaces of the LQM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Deleted the support for WDMside PRBS on the TN13LQM board.



709





Deleted the support for the SDI and HD-SDI services on the TN13LQM board.


Added the following limitations on board usage: 1. Only one service with a data rate exceeding 1.25 Gbit/s can be received. 2. The RX1/TX1 must be used to receive the service.


13.16.3 Application The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM converts between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the LQM in the WDM system, see Figure 13-84 and Figure 13-85. Figure 13-84 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving) RX1

LQM

LQM

TX1

100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s

TX1 RX1

1×ODU1

TX4

M U X IN1 / D OUT1 M U X

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s RX4

M U OUT1 X / D IN1 M U X

100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s TX4 RX4 100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: l GE: From/To cross-connect board l 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


710



Figure 13-85 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving) LQM

RX1

OUT1

MUX/ IN1 DMUX

TX1

MUX/ IN2 DMUX

TX4

TX1

MUX/ DMUX OUT1

IN2 MUX/ DMUX OUT2

RX1

1×ODU1

OUT2

LQM

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1


IN1




NOTE

The total rate of four channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LQM board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

13.16.4 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the LQM are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-191. Table 13-191 Functions and features of the LQM Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LQM converts signals: l 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) signals<-> 1 x OTU1. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application scenario.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


711




Description




OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with GDPS, ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification


ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the client side.




712




Description

LPT function


FEC coding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


Test frame


Latency measurement

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






713




Description

Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


714




Description




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


715






13.16.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-86 and Figure 13-87 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQM.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


716



Figure 13-86 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 8800) Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O





O/E

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2


Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


717



Figure 13-87 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) Backplane(service cross-connection) 100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

Crossconnect module


Service OTN encapsulation processing and mapping module module

E/O

O/E

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2



Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM to the WDM side of the LQM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


718


l


Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. NOTE

Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQM and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The signaling module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


719



four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.16.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-88 shows the front panel of the LQM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


720



Figure 13-88 Front panel of the LQM board

LQM STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LQM



l


l


l





721



Table 13-192 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



13.16.7 Valid Slots The LQM occupies one slot. Table 13-193 shows the valid slots for the LQM board. Table 13-193 Valid slots for the LQM board Product

Valid Slots






IU3-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

13.16.8 Characteristic Code for the LQM The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


722




Display of Physical Ports Table 13-194 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-194 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-89 shows the application model of the LQM board. Table 13-195 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-89 Port diagram of the LQM Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

WDM side 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2



1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1


723



Table 13-195 Description of NM port of the LQM Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP


IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2


Configuration Principle of Timeslots : l

The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.

l

In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end.

l

For each LQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16.

l

For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, and OTU1 services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQM board.

l

Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Service Type

Number of Timeslots

GE

7

FE

1

OTU1

16

STM-1

1

STM-4

4

STM-16

16

OC-3

1

OC-12

4

OC-48

16

FC100

6

FC200

12

FICON

6

FICON Express

12

DVB-ASI

2


724



Service Type

Number of Timeslots

ESCON

2

FDDI

1

13.16.10 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQM board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by

and

in Figure 13-90.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 13-90. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQM board, as shown by 4 in Figure 13-90. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.) NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.

l

Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 13-90. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)

l

The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

l

According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 13.16.9 Physical and Logical Ports.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


725



Figure 13-90 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM Client side

Client side



4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


5

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

3

5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

4 2 1


WDM side

WDM side

201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4

LQM 1

The straight-through of the board

2

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQM board The WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

3 4 5


NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by

and

in Figure 13-90.

13.16.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of the LQM, refer to Table 13-196. Table 13-196 LQM Parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



726



Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status







None, Any, FE, GE, GE(GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None



Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


727



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On



Disabled, Enabled

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled

Default: Disabled Service Mode

Client Mode, OTN Mode Default: Client Mode

FEC Working State


See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. When the board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Band Type

-



-



728



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0



C, CWDM Default: C


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600










Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


729



Field

Value

Description




Default: None




NULL Mapping Status



13.16.12 LQM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


730



Bo ard



WDM-Side WDM-Side Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Module

TN 13L QM

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP

N/A


2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 kmeSFP

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 kmeSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

NOTE



The I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


731




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant

APD

APD

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


732


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355


733


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


734




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


735



NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


736




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


dBm

5


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1471 to 1611


nm

±6.5


nm

1


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


737




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


nm

±12.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


738






TN13LQM

32.6

35.9


13.17 LQMD LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving

13.17.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LQMD board are TN11 and TN12.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L QM D

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN 12L QM D

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Differences Between Versions l Board

Function: OTU1/FDDI services

WDM Specification

PRBS function Client side

WDM side

TN11LQMD

N

CWDM/DWDM

N

Y

TN12LQMD

Y

DWDM

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


739



For details, see 13.17.4 Functions and Features. l

Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.17.12 LQMD Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LQMD

TN12LQMD

The TN12LQMD can be created as LQMD on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMD functions as the TN11LQMD. NOTE A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.

TN12LQMD

None

-




Deleted the support for the SDI and HD-SDI services on the TN12LQMD board.





13.17.3 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMD board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


740



For the position of the LQMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-91. Figure 13-91 Position of the LQMD board in the WDM system LQMD

RX1

IN1

TX1

MUX/ DMUX

IN2

TX4

MUX/ DMUX

LQMD

IN2 MUX/ DMUX OUT2

TX1 RX1

OUT1

1×ODU1

OUT2

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1


IN1

OUT1




NOTE

The total rate of four channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LQMD board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

13.17.4 Functions and Features The LQMD board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-203. Table 13-203 Functions and features of the LQMD board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LQMD converts signals as follows: l 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<-> 1 x OTU1. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


741




Description


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports OTU1 and FDDI services.


OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800 l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1.

WDM specification

TN11LQMD: l Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications. l Supports ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications. TN12LQMD: Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


742




Description



ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

TN11LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. TN12LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC–3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

LPT function


FEC coding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE TN11LQMD only supports Poisson mode.

ALS function


Test frame

TN11LQMD: not supported TN12LQMD: The board supports the test frame only when the client-side service type is FE or GE.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported


743




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.




FE: 100M Full-Duplex

Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side


Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


744




Description


Protocols or standards for transparent transmission (non-performance monitoring)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


745






13.17.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-92 and Figure 13-93 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


746



Figure 13-92 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 8800) Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

E/O




Splitter

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


747



Figure 13-93 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800) Backplane(service cross-connection)

100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

Crossconnect module



E/O


Splitter



OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2

Control Memory


Fuse


Required voltage

SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LQMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LQMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMD to the WDM side of the LQMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


748



The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, cross-connection and service decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l


l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 8800: not applicable. – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


749



Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.17.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-94 shows the front panel of the LQMD board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


750



Figure 13-94 Front panel of the LQMD board

LQMD STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LQMD



l


l


l





751



Table 13-204 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMD board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



13.17.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one LQMD board. Table 13-205 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMD board. Table 13-205 Valid slots for TN11LQMD board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 13-206 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMD board. Table 13-206 Valid slots for TN12LQMD board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5


752



13.17.8 Characteristic Code for the LQMD The characteristic code for the LQMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-207. Table 13-207 Characteristic code for the LQMD board Code

Description

Description

First four digits

Frequency of the forth optical signal


Last four digits

Frequency of the forth optical signal


For example, the characteristic code for the LQMD board is 92109210. "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-208 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-208 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQMD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6


753



NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-95 shows the application model of the LQMD board. Table 13-209 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-95 Port diagram of the LQMD board Client side

WDM side 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1






1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1


NOTE

TN11LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ ClientLP)-4.

Table 13-209 Description of NM port of the LQMD board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP


IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2




l


l

For each LQMD board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


754



l

For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, and OTU1 services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMD board.

l

Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type

Number of Timeslots

GE

7

FE

1

OTU1

16

STM-1

1

STM-4

4

STM-16

16

OC-3

1

OC-12

4

OC-48

16

FC100

6

FC200

12

FICON

6

FICON Express

12

DVB-ASI

2

ESCON

2

FDDI

1

13.17.10 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQMD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQMD board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by

and

in Figure 13-96.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMD board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

3

in Figure 13-96. (The GE/Any/OTU1


755



services accessed from the client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQMD board, as shown by 4 in Figure 13-96. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board for protection and inter-board service convergence.) NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.

l

Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMD board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown by

5

in Figure 13-96.

l

The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

l

According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 13.17.9 Physical and Logical Ports. NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


and

in Figure 13-96.

756



Figure 13-96 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD board Client side

Client side



4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


5

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

3

5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1


4

WDM side

WDM side


2


1


LQMD 1


2

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board The WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

3 4 5


13.17.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LQMD, refer to Table 13-210. Table 13-210 LQMD parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


757



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





None, Any, DVBASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFP-T), OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. NOTE Only the TN12LQMD supports Any, FDDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.



Sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services. NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.

Laser Status


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



758



Field

Value

Description


Disabled, Enabled


LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled



Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. When the board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode. NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.

FEC Working State




-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.05 0 to 80/1560.61/192.1 00


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.1 70 to 18/1611.00/188.7 80


Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


759



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM


Default: C

See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600









Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


760



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled



Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.

13.17.12 LQMD Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


761



Bo ard





TN 11L QM D

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP


N/A

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 kmeSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD

TN 12L QM D

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP


N/A



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


762



NOTE



The I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


763


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


764




Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


765



NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN


APD

766



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


767



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-







NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-4

-4

0

0

0

0


dBm

-8

-8

-5

-5

-5

-5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


768


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type








10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2


dB

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-18

-28

-18

-28

-28

-28


dBm

0

-9

0

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

APD

1300 to 1575


769




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

–0.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

≤ ±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


770







TN11 LQM D

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

57.1

65.7

61.1

67.2

31.1

34.3

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)

TN12 LQM D

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)


13.18 LQMS LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving

13.18.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LQMS board are TN11 and TN12.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


771








8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L QM S

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN 12L QM S

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y


Function:

Board

OTU1/FDDI services on client-side

WDM Specification

Grooming of ODU1 signal

TN11LQMS

N

CWDM/DWDM

N

TN12LQMS

Y

DWDM

Y


Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.18.12 LQMS Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LQMS

TN12LQMS

The TN12LQMS can be created as LQMS on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMS functions as the TN11LQMS. NOTE A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


772



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12LQMS

None

-




Deleted the support for the SDI and HD-SDI services on the TN12LQMS board.





13.18.3 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMS board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations or between ODU1 signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


773



Application Scenario 1 for the TN11LQMS and TN12LQMS: Conversion Between Signals at the Rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T RecommendationCompliant WDM Signals Figure 13-97 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (LQM Mode) RX1

LQMS

LQMS

TX1

TX4

RX1 100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s TX4

1×ODU1

IN


1×OTU1

OUT

1×OTU1

1×ODU1


M U X / D M U X

TX1

RX4 100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: l GE: From/To cross-connect board l 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To mesh group slot

NOTE

The total rate of four channels of services at the client side cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. The LQMS board can receive and transmit only one client service at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1) using its RX1/TX1 port pair.

Application Scenario 2 for the TN12LQMS: Conversion Between ODU1 Electrical Signals and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals Figure 13-98 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (NS1 Mode) 1xODU1

1xODU1

LQMS 1



1 1×ODU1


1×OTU1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1×OTU1

8

1×ODU1

TOM

LQMS

TOM 8

774



NOTE

Scenario 2 is supported on the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800.

13.18.4 Functions and Features The LQMS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-217. Table 13-217 Functions and features of the LQMS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LQMS converts signals as follows: l 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<-> 1 x OTU1. l Maps ODU1 signal into OTU1 optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports OTU1 and FDDI services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


775




Description


OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11LQMS: – Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. – Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. l TN12LQMS: – Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. – Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800 l TN11LQMS: – Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. – Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN12LQMS: – Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. – Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1.

WDM specification

TN11LQMS: l Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications. l Supports ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications. TN12LQMS: Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


776




Description



ESC function

Supported.

PRBS test function

TN11LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. TN12LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC–3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

LPT function


FEC coding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE TN11LQMS only supports Poisson mode.

ALS function


Test frame

TN11LQMS: not supported TN12LQMS: the board supports the test frame function only when the clientside service type is FE or GE.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Not supported

Opticallayer ASON

Not supported


Not supported


777




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. l Supports the tributary SNCP protection (NS1 Mode). l Supports the ODUk SNCP (NS1 Mode). NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.




FE: 100M Full-Duplex

Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side


Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


778




Description




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


779




Description


ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2

13.18.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-99, Figure 13-100 and Figure 13-101 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


780



Figure 13-99 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (OptiX OSN 8800) Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4




E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


781



Figure 13-100 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LQMS and TN12LQMS board (LQM mode) (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800) Backplane(service cross-connection) 100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

Service CrossOTN connect encapsulation processing module and mapping module module


E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow (Conversion Between Signals at the Rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals) The client side of the LQMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the WDM side of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


782



with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Figure 13-101 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 mode)(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800) ODU1

Backplane(service cross-connection) WDM side E/O

Crossconnect module


OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


783



Signal Flow (Conversion Between ODU1 Electrical Signals and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals) In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the backplane of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

Module Function l


l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 8800: N/A. – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


784



module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors Any performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.18.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-102 shows the front panel of the LQMS board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


785



Figure 13-102 Front panel of the LQMS board

LQMS STAT ACT PROG SRV


LQMS



l


l


l





786



Table 13-218 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMS board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



13.18.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one LQMS board. Table 13-219 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMS board. Table 13-219 Valid slots for TN11LQMS board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 13-220 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMS board. Table 13-220 Valid slots for TN12LQMS board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5


787



13.18.8 Characteristic Code for the LQMS The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-221 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-221 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQMS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 13-103 and Figure 13-104 show the application model of the LQMS board. Table 13-222 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 13-103 Port diagram of the TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS board (LQM Mode) Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

WDM side 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Service processing module


1(IN/OUT)-1


788



NOTE

TN11LQMS: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12LQMS (LQM Mode): The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-4.

Figure 13-104 Port diagram of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 Mode) WDM side 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1


51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1


1(IN/OUT)-1


Table 13-222 Description of NM port of the LQMS board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP


ODU1LP

Internal logical port.

IN/OUT




l


l

For each LQMS board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16.

l

For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, and OTU1services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMS board.

l

Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


789



Service Type

Number of Timeslots

GE

7

FE

1

OTU1

16

STM-1

1

STM-4

4

STM-16

16

OC-3

1

OC-12

4

OC-48

16

FC100

6

FC200

12

FICON

6

FICON Express

12

DVB-ASI

2

ESCON

2

FDDI

1

13.18.10 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQMS board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are LQM Mode and NS1 Mode. NOTE

The TN11LQMS board does not require the configuration of the board mode. The electrical cross-connect services of the TN11LQMS are created in the same way as the electrical cross-connect services of the TN12LQMS in the LQM mode.

LQM Mode: l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created.


790



– Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQMS board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by

and

in Figure 13-105.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 13-105. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQMS board, as shown by 4 in Figure 13-105. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board for protection and inter-board service convergence.) NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.

l

Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 13-105. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)

l

The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

l

According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 13.18.9 Physical and Logical Ports.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


791



Figure 13-105 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board Client side


3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1

Client side

WDM side

Other board

5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


5

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

3

5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

4 2 1


WDM side


LQMS 1


2

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

3 4 5


NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by

and

in Figure 13-105.

NS1 Mode (Supported only by the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800): l

Create the cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards shown in Figure 13-106.

l

The four paths of the ODU1LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


792



Figure 13-106 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board Client side



4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


WDM side

WDM side

51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

LQMS The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

13.18.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LQMS, refer to Table 13-223. Table 13-223 LQMS parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


793



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFPT), OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. NOTE Only the TN12LQMS supports Any, FDDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.



Sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services. NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


794



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On



Disabled, Enabled

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled



See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. When the board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode. NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.

FEC Working State



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Band Type

-



-



795



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780



C, CWDM Default: C


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


796



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN12LQMS supports this parameter.




PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




797



Field

Value

Description

Board Mode

LQM Mode, NS1 Mode


Default: LQM Mode

NS1 Mode: In this mode, the TN12LQMS board serves as a line board and adds/drops OTU1 signals in conjunction with a tributary board. LQM Mode: In this mode, the TN12LQMS board serves as an OTU board and can aggregate four Any-rate signals into one OTU1 signal. NOTE This parameter is only available for TN12LQMS.

13.18.12 LQMS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


798



Bo ard





TN 11L QM S

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP


N/A

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 kmeSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP


TN 12L QM S

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP


N/A



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


799



NOTE



TheI-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


800


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


801




Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


802



NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN


APD

803



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


804



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-







NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-1

-1

3

3

3

3


dBm

-5

-5

-2

-2

-2

-2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


805


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type








10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2


dB

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-18

-28

-18

-28

-28

-28


dBm

0

-9

0

-9

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

APD

1300 to 1575


806




Unit



-

NRZ


dBm

5


dBm

2.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

<=±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


807







TN1 1LQ MS


56.3

64.5

60.4

66.4

29

32.3

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)

TN1 2LQ MS

12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)


13.19 LSC LSC: 100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

13.19.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LSC board are TN12, TN13, and TN15.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


808



Bo ard

Ini tial Ve rsi on





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 12 LS C

V1 00 R0 06 C0 3

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN 13 LS C

V1 00 R0 08 C0 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

TN 15 LS C

V1 00 R0 08 C1 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T01: Y T31/T51/ T52/T53: N

To use a TN12LSC/TN13LSC/TN15LSCT01 board in the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis, meet the following requirements: l TN12LSC: The OptiX OSN 3800 chassis can be DC powered. The air intake vent temperature of the chassis is within the range of 5°C (41 °F) to 45°C (113 °F) during long-term operation and is within the range of –5° C (23 °F) to 50°C (122 °F) during short-term operation. l TN13LSC: The OptiX OSN 3800 chassis can be AC or DC powered, and the operating temperature requirements of the chassis using TN13LSC are the same as those of the chassis using TN12LSC. The OptiX OSN 3800 chassis can be equipped with at most one TN13LSCT11 board or two TN13LSCT01 boards. l TN15LSCT01: The OptiX OSN 3800 chassis can be AC or DC powered and has no special requirements on the operating temperature. It can be equipped with at most one TN15LSCT01 board. l TN12LSC/TN13LSC/TN15LSCT01: The system control board TN23SCC must be configured.

Variants Table 13-230 Available variants of the TN12LSC board Variant


FEC Encoding

T01

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC)-PIN

HFEC

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


809



Variant


FEC Encoding

T11

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)-PIN

SDFEC

Table 13-231 Available variants of the TN13LSC board Variant


FEC Encoding

T01


HFEC

T11


SDFEC

Table 13-232 Available variants of the TN15LSC board Variant


FEC Encoding

T01


HFEC

T31

150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)-PIN

SDFEC2

T51

150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)-PIN

SDFEC2

T52

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)-PIN

SDFEC2

T53

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)-PIN

SDFEC2

T61

150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM)-PIN

SDFEC2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Function: Board

Latency Measurement

FEC Encoding

TN12LSC

N

HFEC/SDFEC

TN13LSC

Y

HFEC/SDFEC


810



Board

Latency Measurement

FEC Encoding

TN15LSC

Y

HFEC/SDFEC2


Appearance: – The LSC boards of TN12 and TN13 versions use different front panels, but the LSC boards of TN13 and TN15 versions use the same front panel. The TN12LSC board occupies four slots, the TN13LSC/TN15LSCboard occupies two slots. For details, see Front Panel.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see LSC Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12LSC

TN13LSC

The TN13LSC can be created as 12LSC on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN13LSC board functions as the TN12LSC board. The TN13LSC board occupies two physical slots and four logical slots while the TN12LSC board occupies four physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining two physical slots cannot be used to house any other board.

TN15LSC

The TN15LSC can be created as 12LSC on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN15LSC board functions as the TN12LSC board. The TN15LSC board occupies two physical slots and four logical slots while the TN12LSC board occupies four physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining two physical slots cannot be used to house any other board. NOTE When both the receive and transmit boards employ HFEC, the TN12LSC board can be replaced with the TN15LSC board. In an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, the TN12LSC board cannot be replaced with the TN13LSC board. In an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, the TN12LSC board cannot be replaced with the TN15LSC board.

TN13LSC

TN15LSC

The TN15LSC can be created as 13LSC on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN15LSC board functions as the TN13LSC board. NOTE When both the receive and transmit boards employ HFEC, the substitution applies.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


811



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN15LSC

None

-

13.19.2 Update Description This section describes the hardware updates in V100R006C03 and later versions as well as the reasons for the updates. Any product versions that are not listed in the document means that they have no hardware updates. Table 13-233 Hardware Updates in V100R008C10SPC200 Hardware Update


Added the TN15LSCT61 board.

TN15LSCT61: The board supports SDFEC2 and ePDMQPSK.

Table 13-234 Hardware Updates in V100R008C10 Hardware Update


Added the TN15LSC board.

The board supports 100GE BIP8 monitoring and SDFEC2 to further improve the net coding gain of FEC and system transmission capabilities.




Compared with the TN12LSC board that occupies four slots, the TN13LSC board occupies two slots and supports 100GE BIP8 monitoring.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the support for the (100GBASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10km-CFP optical module on the TN12LSC board to receive client-side OTU4 services.

Function enhancement: The client-side 100G dual-rate optical module is added to support OTU4 and 100GE services.


812





Added the SDFEC error correction mode and C BandTunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(SDFEC)-PIN optical modules for boards.

Function enhancement: The SDFEC is supported to further improve the net coding gain of FEC and system transmission capabilities.




The TN12LSC board, a 100G coherent OTU board, is added to map 1 x 100GE signal to one OTU4 signal.

13.19.3 Application The LSC board is a wavelength conversion board and applies to coherent systems. In the receive direction, the board receives one 100GE/OTU4 optical signal from the client equipment, maps the optical signal into an OTU4 signal, and converts the OTU4 signal into a standard WDM wavelength. For the position of the LSC board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-107. Figure 13-107 Position of the LSC board in the WDM system

LSC

IN

M U X / D M U X

TX

IN OUT

1×OTU4

1×OTU4

1×ODU4

100GE/ OTU4 TX

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU4

RX

LSC

RX

100GE/ OTU4

13.19.4 Functions and Features The LSC board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, see Table 13-235. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


813



Table 13-235 Functions and features of the LSC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LSC converts signal as follows: 100GE/OTU4<->1x OTU4


100GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 103.125 Gbit/s.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU4 interface on WDM-side.

OTU4: OTN service at a rate of 111.81 Gbit/s

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. l ODU4 layer: – When the client-side service type is 100GE, the board supports the PM function. – When the client-side service type is OTU4, the board supports the PM and TCM functions, PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function. WDM specification



The board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz.

ESC function

Supported NOTE When being provisioned with the OTU4 service on the client side, the TN12LSC board supports ESC transparent transmission, but not ESC processing.

PRBS test function

When the client-side service type is OTU4, the PRBS function is supported on the client side. When the client-side service type is 100GE or OTU4, the PRBS function is also supported on the WDM side.

LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

On the client side: Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU4. On the WDM side: The TN12LSC/TN13LSC board supports HFEC and SDFEC . The TN15LSC board supports HFEC and SDFEC2. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


814




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (BIP8 bytes of OTU4 are in Bursty mode) for the 100GE and OTU4 services on the client side to help locate service failures. l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) for the OTN service on the WDM side to help locate line failures. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. l Supports the monitoring of CD and PMD performance. NOTE Only the TN12LSC board does not support the monitoring of BIP8 bytes on the client side.

Regeneration board

The WDM-side signals from one TN12LSCT01/TN13LSCT01/ TN15LSCT01 board can be regenerated by another TN11LTXT01/ TN54NS4T01/TN57NS4T01/TN12LTXT01/TN15LTXT01 board. The WDM-side signals from one TN12LSCT11/TN13LSCT11 board can be regenerated by another TN11LTXT11/TN54NS4T11/TN56NS4T11/ TN12LTXT11/TN15LTXT11 board. The WDM-side signals from one TN15LSCT31 board can be regenerated by another TN57NS4T31 board. The WDM-side signals from one TN15LSCT51 board can be regenerated by another TN57NS4T51/TN58NS4T51 board. The WDM-side signals from one TN15LSCT52 board can be regenerated by another TN57NS4T52/TN58NS4T52 board. The WDM-side signals from one TN15LSCT53 board can be regenerated by another TN57NS4T53/TN58NS4T53 board. The WDM-side signals from one TN15LSCT61 board can be regenerated by another TN57NS4T61/TN58NS4T61 board.

ALS function


Test frame

Supported only when the client-side service type is 100GE.

Latency measurement

The TN13LSC/TN15LSCboard supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODU4 layer between two OTU boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU4.

IEEE 1588v2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Not supported


815




Description

Physical clock

When receiving 100GE/OTU4 services on the client side, the board supports synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). NOTE When the client-side service is OTU4, the TN12LSC board does not support clientside 1+1 protection.

Loopback

Client side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop WDM side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop Protocols or standards compliance


IEEE 802.3ba



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


816



13.19.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSC board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-108 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSC. Figure 13-108 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSC board Client side

WDM side

RX

O/E

TX

E/O

100GE Service encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN processing module

Clientside optical module


E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control Memory

Communication

CPU


Fuse

Power supply module

Required voltage

DC power supply from the backplane

SCC

Backplane (controlled by the SCC)

Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LSC board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSC to the WDM side of the LSC, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signal from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After performing the O/E conversion, the client-side optical module sends the electrical signal to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


817



encapsulation, OTN framing, and FEC encoding and outputs one channel of OTU4 signal to the WDM-side optical module. After receiving the OTU4 signal, the WDM-side optical module performs E/O conversion, generates OTU4 signal at DWDM wavelength that complies with ITU-T G.694.1, and then outputs the OTU4 signal through the OUT optical interfaces. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of standard DWDM optical signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. The WDM-side optical module then converts the OTU4 optical signal into electrical signal. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signal is sent to the signal processing module, which performs OTU4 framing, FEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signal and then outputs one channel of the client-side electrical signal. The channel of the client-side electrical signal is sent to the client-side optical module, which converts the electrical signal into optical signal and then outputs the optical signal through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion for one channel of 100GE/OTU4 optical signal. – Client-side transmitter: converts one channel of electrical signal into one channel of 100GE/OTU4 optical signal. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the OTU4 optical signal. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signal to OTU4 optical signal. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of a service encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 100GE signal, maps the signal into the payload of an OTU4 frame, and performs the reverse process. The service encapsulation and mapping module supports monitoring of 100GE signal performance. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


818



Frames OTU4 signal, processes overheads in OTU4 signal, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.19.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSC board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-109 shows the front panel of the TN12LSC board. Figure 13-110 shows the front panel of the TN13LSC board. Figure 13-111 shows the front panel of the TN15LSC board. Figure 13-109 Front panel of the TN12LSC board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


819



Figure 13-110 Front panel of the TN13LSC board

Figure 13-111 Front panel of the TN15LSC board

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


820





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-236 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-236 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSC board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.19.7 Valid Slots Four slots house one TN12LSC board, two slots house one TN13LSC/TN15LSC board. Table 13-237 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSC board. Table 13-238 shows the valid slots for the TN13LSC board. Table 13-239 shows the valid slots for the TN15LSC board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


821



Table 13-237 Valid slots for the TN12LSC board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU5, IU11-IU15


IU1-IU13


IU1-IU14


IU4, IU5

NOTE

The TN12LSC board occupies four slots. The rear connector for connecting the TN12LSC board to the backplane is located in the left slot of the four slots. Therefore, the slot number for the TN12LSC board is displayed as the left slot of the four slots on the NMS. For example, if the TN12LSC board is housed in the slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4, then the slot number for the TN12LSC board is displayed as IU1 on the NMS.


Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU2-IU5

NOTE

The TN13LSC board occupies two slots. The rear connector for connecting the TN13LSC board to the backplane is located in the left slot of the two slots. Therefore, the slot number for the TN13LSC board is displayed as the left slot of the two slots on the NMS. For example, if the TN13LSC board is housed in the slots IU1, and IU2, then the slot number for the TN13LSC board is displayed as IU1 on the NMS.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


822




Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU2-IU5

NOTE

The TN15LSC board occupies two slots. The rear connector for connecting the TN15LSC board to the backplane is located in the left slot of the two slots. Therefore, the slot number for the TN15LSC board is displayed as the left slot of the two slots on the NMS. For example, if the TN15LSC board is housed in the slots IU1, and IU2, then the slot number for the TN15LSC board is displayed as IU1 on the NMS.

13.19.8 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS.

Display of Physical Ports Table 13-240 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-240 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSC board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX/RX

3

NOTE


13.19.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSC, refer to Table 13-241. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


823



Table 13-241 LSC parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







100GE, OTU4 Default: 100GE

Laser Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost.


824



Field

Value

Description


FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS , BW_WDM_Defect, FW_OPUk_CSF


Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.







Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


825



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled

Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. After the FEC function is disabled on the WDM side, services become abnormal. After the FEC function is disabled on the client side, the transmission distance is affected.

Default: Enabled


TN12LSC: SDFEC, HFEC

Queries the FEC mode of the current optical interface.

TN13LSC: SDFEC, HFEC, FEC

FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same.

TN15LSC: SDFEC2, HFEC, FEC l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100

Receive Wavelength

Default: /

Specifies the receive wavelength for the board. Observe the following requirements when setting this parameter: l When the receive wavelength is the same as the transmit wavelength of the board, use the default value so that the receive wavelength automatically keeps the same as the transmit wavelength. l When the receive wavelength differs from the transmit wavelength of the board, set this parameter to a value that is same as the transmit wavelength of the remote board; otherwise, services carried by the wavelength will be interrupted. NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value.

Receive Band Type

C Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Specifies the band type of the received signals for the board.


-


Band Type

-



826



Field

Value

Description


-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100



C Default: C

See Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.


l Disabled, GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GCC2 Enabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads.

l Default: Disabled

l When the parameter is set to GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 or GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead.

l When the parameter is set to Disabled, the system will process the GCC1 and GCC2 bytes in the OTN overhead.

l When the parameter is set to Only GCC1 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 byte but only the GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to Only GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC2 byte but only the GCC1 byte in the OTN overhead. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTU4 services.




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


827



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled


Enabled, Disabled

Ethernet Service BIP8 Error Threshold

1.0E–9

Default: Disabled

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Sets the threshold for the 100GE BIP8 error detection alarm.

1.0E–8

NOTE Only the TN13LSC/TN15LSC board supports this parameter when the Service Type is 100GE.

1.0E–7 1.0E–6 5.0E–6 Default: 1.0E–7

13.19.10 LSC Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Boar d





TN1 2LS C

N/A

100G BASE-10×10G-10 km-CFP

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK (HFEC)-PIN

N/A

100G BASE-LR4-10 kmCFP (100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10 kmCFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK (SDFEC)-PIN


828



Boar d





TN1 3LS C

N/A

100G BASE-LR4-10 kmCFP


N/A

100G BASE-10×10G-10 km-CFP (100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10kmCFP

TN1 5LS C

N/A

100G BASE-LR4-10 kmCFP 100G BASE-10×10G-10 km-CFP (100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10kmCFP



N/A

150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)PIN 150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2)-PIN 55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2)-PIN 40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2)-PIN 150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2, wDCM)-PIN

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


829



Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-242 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (100G BASE LR4) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100G BASE-LR4-10 kmCFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Signaling Speed per Lane

Gbit/s

25.78125

Signaling Speed Accuracy

ppm

-100 to 100

Minimum Lane Center Wavelength

nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09

Maximum Lane Center Wavelength

nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Total Average Launch Power (Min)

dBm

1.7

Total Average Launch Power (Max)

dBm

10.5

Transmit OMA per Lane (Min)

dBm

-1.3

Transmit OMA per Lane (Max)

dBm

4.5

Average Launch Power per Lane (Min)

dBm

-4.3

Average Launch Power per Lane (Max)

dBm

4.5

Optical Extinction Ratio (Min)

dB

4


830



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Side Mode Suppression Ratio (Min)


dB

30


-

PIN

Signaling Speed per Lane

Gbit/s

25.78125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Average Receiver Power per Lane (Min)

dBm

-10.6

Average Receiver Power per Lane (Max)

dBm

4.5

Minimum receiver overload (OMA) per Lane

dBm

4.5

Receiver Sensitivity (OMA) per Lane

dBm

-8.6

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

NOTE

The OMA values are designed to ensure normal equipment operation. They are not provided for equipment commissioning. In practical, equipment commissioning is performed based on the average receiver power per lane and total average launched power. It is recommended that the total average launched power be used as the reference for equipment commissioning. For details, see Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board in the Commissioning.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


831



Table 13-243 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (100G BASE 10x10G) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100G BASE-10×10G-10 km-CFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1521 1529 1537 1545 1553 1561 1569 1577 1585 1593


nm

1525 1533 1541 1549 1557 1565 1573 1581 1589 1597

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


832



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

4.2


dBm

13.5


dBm

-5.8


dBm

3.5


dBm

-2.8

Transmit OMA per Lane (Typ)

dBm

-0.8


dBm

3.5


dB

2.5

Side Mode Suppression Ratio (Min)

dB

30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1521 1529 1537 1545 1553 1561 1569 1577 1585

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


833



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100G BASE-10×10G-10 km-CFP 1593


nm

1525 1533 1541 1549 1557 1565 1573 1581 1589 1597

Receiver Power per Lane (Min)

dBm

-10.8

Receiver Power per Lane (Max)

dBm

3.5


dBm

3.5


dBm

-8.8

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


834



Table 13-244 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (100GE/OTU4 services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value (100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10 kmCFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Gbit/s

100GE: 25.78125 OTU4: 27.952493


ppm

100GE: -100 to 100 OTU4: -20 to 20


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

100GE: 1.7


dBm


dBm


dBm


dBm

-1.3 (Only for 100GE)


dBm

4.5 (Only for 100GE)

OTU4: 3.5 100GE: 10.5 OTU4: 8.9 100GE: -4.3 OTU4: -2.5 100GE: 4.5 OTU4: 2.9


835



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Eye pattern mask


-

100GE: IEEE 802.3ba compliant OTU4: ITU-T G.959 compliant


dB


dB

100GE: 4 OTU4: 7 30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

100GE: 25.78125 OTU4: 27.952493


ppm

100GE: -100 to 100 OTU4: -20 to 20


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

100GE: -10.6


dBm


dBm


Receiver sensitivity (OMA) per Lane

dBm


OTU4: -8.8 100GE: 4.5 OTU4: 2.9


836



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Receiver equivalent sensitivity per Lane

dBm

-10.3 (Only for OTU4)

Minimum receiver overload per Lane

dBm

2.9 (Only for OTU4)

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

NOTE


WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-245 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC)PIN

-

ePDM-QPSK(HFEC)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35

Dispersion tolerance (backto-back)

ps/nm

40000

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


837



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 13-246 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 55000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)PIN

-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.4


ps/nm

55000


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0


838



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Maximum reflectance


dB

-27

Table 13-247 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)-PIN

-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.48


ps/nm

150000


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


839



Table 13-248 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC2, 150000 ps/nm) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)PIN

-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

150000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


840



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

55000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


841



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

40000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 13-251 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC2, wDCM) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM)-PIN

-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


842



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

0.3


ps/nm

150000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

This module requires the use of the same wavelength at the transmit and receive ends and does not support wavelength change by configuring regeneration boards or single-fiber bidirectional transmission.

Mechanical Specifications TN12LSC l


l


TN13LSC l


l


TN15LSC l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


843




WDM-Side Module



TN12LSC

40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC)PIN

240

265

55000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)PIN

255

285


150

160

55000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)PIN

160

170


145.2

158.5

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)-PIN

174.6

192.6

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)PIN

174.6

192.6


174.6

192.6


174.6

192.6

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM)-PIN

174.6

192.6

TN13LSC

TN15LSC

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


844


Board


WDM-Side Module




13.20 LSCM LSCM: 100Gbit/s Wavelength Conversion Board

13.20.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LSCM board is TN17.


Initial Version





8800 T16 Subrac k

8800 Univers al Platfor m Subrack

6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 17 LS C M

V100R0 09C00SP C100

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

The OptiX OSN 3800 supports the TN17LSCM board. In this case, the air intake vent temperature of the fan tray assembly is within the range of 5°C (41 °F) to 45°C (113 °F) during long-term running and is within the range of -5°C (23 °F) to 50°C (122 °F) during short-term running. At this time, the TN23SCC board must be used in the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.

Variants The TN17LSCM board has ten variants.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


845



NOTE

l The wavelengths of optical ports "IN1/OUT1", "IN2/OUT2", "IN3/OUT3", and "IN4/OUT4" are consecutive with a 100 GHz spacing. l Optical ports "IN1/OUT1", "IN2/OUT2", "IN3/OUT3", and "IN4/OUT4" are in descending order of frequency. l Each board (with a unique variant) supports only odd wavelengths or even wavelengths, which can be specified on the U2000. The following table lists information about the wavelengths supported by different boards.

Table 13-252 Available variants of the TN17LSCM board Va ria nt

Odd Wavelengths of Optical Ports IN1/OUT1 to IN4/OUT4

Even Wavelengths of Optical Ports IN1/OUT1 to IN4/OUT4

Wavelength Number

Central Frequency (THz)

Center Wavelength (nm)

Wavelength Number



01

73

192.45

1557.77

74

192.40

1558.17

75

192.35

1558.58

76

192.30

1558.98

77

192.25

1559.39

78

192.20

1559.79

79

192.15

1560.20

80

192.10

1560.61

65

192.85

1554.54

66

192.80

1554.94

67

192.75

1555.34

68

192.70

1555.75

69

192.65

1556.15

70

192.60

1556.55

71

192.55

1556.96

72

192.50

1557.36

57

193.25

1551.32

58

193.20

1551.72

59

193.15

1552.12

60

193.10

1552.52

61

193.05

1552.93

62

193.00

1553.33

63

192.95

1553.73

64

192.90

1554.13

49

193.65

1548.11

50

193.60

1548.51

51

193.55

1548.91

52

193.50

1549.32

53

193.45

1549.72

54

193.40

1550.12

55

193.35

1550.52

56

193.30

1550.92

41

194.05

1544.92

42

194.00

1545.32

43

193.95

1545.72

44

193.90

1546.12

45

193.85

1546.52

46

193.80

1546.92

47

193.75

1547.32

48

193.70

1547.72

02

03

04

05

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


846



Va ria nt



Wavelength Number



Wavelength Number



06

33

194.45

1541.75

34

194.40

1542.14

35

194.35

1542.54

36

194.30

1542.94

37

194.25

1543.33

38

194.20

1543.73

39

194.15

1544.13

40

194.10

1544.53

25

194.85

1538.58

26

194.80

1538.98

27

194.75

1539.37

28

194.70

1539.77

29

194.65

1540.16

30

194.60

1540.56

31

194.55

1540.95

32

194.50

1541.35

17

195.25

1535.43

18

195.20

1535.82

19

195.15

1536.22

20

195.10

1536.61

21

195.05

1537.00

22

195.00

1537.40

23

194.95

1537.79

24

194.90

1538.19

9

195.65

1532.29

10

195.60

1532.68

11

195.55

1533.07

12

195.50

1533.47

13

195.45

1533.86

14

195.40

1534.25

15

195.35

1534.64

16

195.30

1535.04

1

196.05

1537.00

2

196.00

1529.55

3

195.95

1537.79

4

195.90

1530.33

5

195.85

1538.58

6

195.80

1531.12

7

195.75

1539.37

8

195.70

1531.90

07

08

09

10


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


847





Added the 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, and 10 types of TN17LSCM boards.

The new TN17LSCM boards provide enhanced functions and can support 80 wavelengths.



Added the TN17LSCM board.

The TN17LSCM board, a 100G OTU board. The board is generally used for short-distance transmission of mass data in data centers.

13.20.3 Application The LSCM board is a wavelength conversion board. In the receive direction, the board receives one 100GE/OTU4 optical signal from the client equipment, maps the optical signal into an OTU4 signal. The LSCM board uses four DWDM wavelengths to transmit one channel of OTU4 signals in the short-haul IDC interconnection scenario. For the position of the LSCM board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-112. Figure 13-112 Position of the LSCM board in the WDM system

LSCM


LSCM

TX

1×OTU4

1×OTU4

1×ODU4

100GE/ OTU4 TX

IN1

1×ODU4

RX

OUT1 M IN1 U X / D M OUT4 U IN4 X

RX

100GE/ OTU4

NOTE

In any direction of signal transmitting and receiving, four optical signals on the WDM side of the LSCM board must pass through fiber cores of the same cable. In addition, the end-to-end fiber lengths should be the same. If the lengths are different, the accumulated difference in the fiber lengths of all optical signals must be less than 2m.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


848



13.20.4 Functions and Features The LSCM board is mainly used to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, see Table 13-253. Table 13-253 Functions and features of the LSCM board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LSCM converts signal as follows: 100GE/OTU4<->1x OTU4


100GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 103.125 Gbit/s.

OTN function



l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. l ODU4 layer: – When the client-side service type is 100GE, the board supports the PM function. – When the client-side service type is OTU4, the board supports the PM and TCM functions, PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function. WDM specification



Not supported

ESC function

Supported NOTE When being provisioned with the OTU4 service on the client side, the LSCM board supports ESC transparent transmission, but not ESC processing.

PRBS test function

When the client-side service type is OTU4, the PRBS function is supported on the client side. When the client-side service type is 100GE or OTU4, the PRBS function is also supported on the WDM side.

LPT function

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Not supported


849




Description

FEC coding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU4. Supports HFEC on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (BIP8 bytes of OTU4 are in Bursty mode) for the 100GE and OTU4 services on the client side to help locate service failures. l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) for the OTN service on the WDM side to help locate line failures. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


Test frame


Latency measurement

The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODU4 layer between two OTU boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU4.

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

Client side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop WDM side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


850




Description



IEEE 802.3ba



13.20.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSCM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-113 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSCM.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


851



Figure 13-113 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSCM board Client side

WDM side

RX

O/E

TX

E/O


Clientside optical module


E/O

OUT1 OUT4

O/E

IN1 IN4



Control Memory

Communication

CPU


Fuse

Power supply module

Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LSCM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSCM to the WDM side of the LSCM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signal from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After performing the O/E conversion, the client-side optical module sends the electrical signal to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs encapsulation, OTN framing, and FEC encoding and outputs one channel of OTU4 signal. The OTU4 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out four OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN4 optical

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


852



interfaces. The module then performs O/E conversion to convert the received signals into one channel of OTU4 signals. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signal is sent to the signal processing module, which performs OTU4 framing, FEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signal and then outputs one channel of the client-side electrical signal. The channel of the client-side electrical signal is sent to the client-side optical module, which converts the electrical signal into optical signal and then outputs the optical signal through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion for one channel of 100GE/OTU4 optical signal. – Client-side transmitter: converts one channel of electrical signal into one channel of 100GE/OTU4 optical signal. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: performs O/E conversion to convert four channels of received OTN optical signals into four channels of OTN electrical signals and converts the OTN electrical signals into one channel of OTU4 electrical signals.. – WDM-side transmitter: converts one channel of OTU4 electrical signals into four channels of OTN electrical signals and performs E/O conversion to convert the OTN electrical signals into four channels of OTN optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of a service encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 100GE signal, maps the signal into the payload of an OTU4 frame, and performs the reverse process. The service encapsulation and mapping module supports monitoring of 100GE signal performance. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4 signal, processes overheads in OTU4 signal, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


853





13.20.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSCM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-114 shows the front panel of the LSCM board. Figure 13-114 Front panel of the LSCM board



l


l


l




854



Interfaces Table 13-254 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-254 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSCM board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN4

LC


OUT1-OUT4

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.20.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one LSCM board. Table 13-255 shows the valid slots for the LSCM board. Table 13-255 Valid slots for the LSCM board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16


IU2-IU5


855



NOTE

The LSCM board occupies two slots. The rear connector for connecting the LSCM board to the backplane is located in the left slot of the two slots. Therefore, the slot number for the LSCM board is displayed as the left slot of the two slots on the NMS. For example, if the LSCM board is housed in the slots IU1, and IU2, then the slot number for the LSCM board is displayed as IU1 on the NMS.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-256 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-256 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSCM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4

TX/RX

5

NOTE


13.20.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSCM, refer to Table 13-257. Table 13-257 LSCM parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



856



Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status







100GE, OTU4 Default: 100GE

Laser Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost.


857



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.




Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


858



Field

Value

Description




Default: 0s FEC Working State


Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. After the FEC function is disabled on the WDM side, services become abnormal. After the FEC function is disabled on the client side, the transmission distance is affected. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

-

FEC Mode

Queries the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same.


1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0 Default: /

Planned Band Type

C Default: C

Sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Band Type

-



859



Field

Value

Description

Wavelength parity

Odd, Even

Set the Wavelength parity parameter of the current board

Default: Even

The value must be the same with the real value of the boards. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission

l Disabled, GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GCC2 Enabled l Default: Disabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. l When the parameter is set to Disabled, the system will process the GCC1 and GCC2 bytes in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 or GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to Only GCC1 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 byte but only the GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to Only GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC2 byte but only the GCC1 byte in the OTN overhead. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTU4 services.




PRBS Test Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


860



Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Ethernet Service BIP8 Error Threshold

1.0E–9

Default: Disabled

Sets the threshold for the 100GE BIP8 error detection alarm.

1.0E–8

NOTE The board supports this parameter only when the Service Type is 100GE.

1.0E–7 1.0E–6 5.0E–6 Default: 1.0E–7

13.20.10 LSCM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Boar d





TN1 7LS CM

N/A

100G BASE-LR4-10 kmCFP

350ps/nm-C Band-4 Wavelengths NRZ-PIN

N/A

100G BASE-10×10G-10 km-CFP (100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10kmCFP

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


861




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Gbit/s

25.78125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

1.7


dBm

10.5


dBm

-1.3


dBm

4.5


dBm

-4.3


dBm

4.5


dB

4


862



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Side Mode Suppression Ratio (Min)


dB

30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

25.78125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19


dBm

-10.6


dBm

4.5


dBm

4.5


dBm

-8.6

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


863




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1521 1529 1537 1545 1553 1561 1569 1577 1585 1593


nm

1525 1533 1541 1549 1557 1565 1573 1581 1589 1597

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


864



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

4.2


dBm

13.5


dBm

-5.8


dBm

3.5


dBm

-2.8


dBm

-0.8


dBm

3.5


dB

2.5


dB

30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1521 1529 1537 1545 1553 1561 1569 1577 1585

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


865



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100G BASE-10×10G-10 km-CFP 1593


nm

1525 1533 1541 1549 1557 1565 1573 1581 1589 1597


dBm

-10.8


dBm

3.5


dBm

3.5


dBm

-8.8

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


866




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Gbit/s

100GE: 25.78125 OTU4: 27.952493


ppm

100GE: -100 to 100 OTU4: -20 to 20


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

100GE: 1.7


dBm


dBm


dBm


dBm



dBm




867



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Eye pattern mask


-

100GE: IEEE 802.3ba compliant OTU4: ITU-T G.959 compliant


dB


dB

100GE: 4 OTU4: 7 30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

100GE: 25.78125 OTU4: 27.952493


ppm

100GE: -100 to 100 OTU4: -20 to 20


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

100GE: -10.6


dBm


dBm



dBm


OTU4: -8.8 100GE: 4.5 OTU4: 2.9


868



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm



dBm

2.9 (Only for OTU4)

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

NOTE



Unit


Value 350ps/nm-C Band-4 Wavelengths NRZ-PIN

-

NRZ, HFEC


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

3


dBm

-2


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

350


869



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled)

dBm

-14

Minimum receiver overload (FEC enabled)

dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

The specifications of optical ports "IN1/OUT1" to "IN4/OUT4" are the same. This table lists the specifications of only one optical port. The wavelengths of optical ports "IN1/OUT1", "IN2/OUT2", "IN3/OUT3", and "IN4/OUT4" are consecutive with a 100 GHz spacing. Each board (with a unique variant) supports only odd wavelengths or even wavelengths, which can be specified on the U2000.



l





TN17LSCM

93

102


13.21 LSQ LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

13.21.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LSQ board is available, that is, TN11. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


870








8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L SQ

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Variants Table 13-262 Available variants of the TN11LSQ board Variant


T01

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN

T02

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN

13.21.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSQ board converts between one channel of STM-256/ OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations. For the position of the LSQ board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-115. Figure 13-115 Position of the LSQ board in the WDM system LSQ

IN

IN OUT


TX

1×ODU3

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU3

1×OTU3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1×ODU3

RX STM-256/ OC-768/ TX OTU3

LSQ M U X / D M U X

STM-256/ RX OC-768/ OTU3

871



13.21.3 Functions and Features The LSQ board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-263. Table 13-263 Functions and features of the LSQ board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LSQ converts signals as follows: l 1x STM-256/OC-768/OTU3<->1x OTU3


STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s

OTN function



l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU3 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU3 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU3.


NOTE The PRBS function of LSQ on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


872




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser.

Regeneration board

The WDM-side signals of the LSQ board can be regenerated by a TN54NS3 board.

ALS function


Test frame

Not supported

Latency measurement

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

Client side

l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). Inloop

Supported

Outloop WDM side

Inloop

Supported


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




873






13.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSQ board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-116 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


874



Figure 13-116 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ board Client side RX

TX

O/E

E/O


WDM side E/O OTN processing module

O/E

Client-side OTN processing module


OUT

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LSQ board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSQ to the WDM side of the LSQ, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC encoding are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3 electrical signals. The OTU3 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


875



After O/E conversion, the OTU3 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU3 framing, FEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of an SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU3 signals, processes overheads in OTU3 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


876


l



13.21.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-117 shows the front panel of the LSQ board. Figure 13-117 Front panel of the LSQ board



877



l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-264 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-264 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSQ board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.21.6 Valid Slots Two slots houses one LSQ board. Table 13-265 shows the valid slots for the LSQ board. Table 13-265 Valid slots for the LSQ board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


878



Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU16


IU2-IU17

The rear connector of the LSQ is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the LSQ board, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is IU2.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-266 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-266 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSQ board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX/RX

3

NOTE


13.21.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSQ, refer to Table 13-267. Table 13-267 LSQ parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



879



Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status







None, OC-768, OTU-3, STM-256


Default: STM-256 Laser Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




880



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect


FEC Working State



FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC Default: AFEC


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


881



Field

Value

Description

AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3


Default: 3 Receive Wavelength

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Specifies the receive wavelength for the board. Observe the following requirements when setting this parameter: l When the receive wavelength is the same as the transmit wavelength of the board, use the default value so that the receive wavelength automatically keeps the same as the transmit wavelength. l When the receive wavelength differs from the transmit wavelength of the board, set this parameter to a value that is same as the transmit wavelength of the remote board; otherwise, services carried by the wavelength will be interrupted. NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.

Receive Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C

Specifies the band type of the received signals for the board. NOTE Only support C band.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Band Type

-



-



882



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780



C, CWDM Default: C



Enabled, Disabled



Default: Disabled

Default: None

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.

PRBS Test Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


883



Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

13.21.9 LSQ Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L SQ

40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km

N/A

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN

N/A

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN

NOTE


Client-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-268 Client-side fixed optical module specifications Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.)

nm

1530 to 1565



884



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

3


dBm

0


dB

8.2


ps/nm

40

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1290 to 1570


dBm

-6


dBm

3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-269 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths) Parameter

Unit


-

Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN


ODB

DQPSK


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


dBm

0

0


dBm

-5

-5


dB

8.2

N/A


GHz

±2.5

±2.5


nm

0.6

N/A


885



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

N/A

0.3


ps/nm

-800 to 800

-800 to 800


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27



l






TN11LS Q


75.0

82.0


82.0

89.0


13.22 LSX LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


886



13.22.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LSX board are TN11, TN12, TN13, and TN14.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L SX

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN 12L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN 13L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN 14L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

When the TN14LSX board is used in the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis, the TN23SCC board must be used.

Variants The difference between the LSX board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module. Table 13-270 Available variants of the TN11LSX board Variants


01M02

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN (01M02 for even wavelengths and 01M03 for odd wavelengths)

01M03 01M04


T02


T03


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


887



Variants


T04


T05


Table 13-271 Available variants of the TN12LSX board Variants


01M02


01M03 01M04


T02


T03


T04


T05




T01

Fixed Optical Module: 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

T02

Fixed Optical Module: 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN

B

The variant is equipped with pluggable optical modules. For details 13.22.11 LSX Specifications.



01M01


01M02 T02


T05


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


888



Differences Between Versions l Board

TN11LSX

Function:

FEC Encoding

FEC/AFEC

Client-side services OTU2e

FC1200

N

N

Ethernet Service Mapping Mode


l Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

N

l MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G) l Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) TN12LSX

FEC/AFEC

N

Y


N

l Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) TN13LSX

FEC/AFEC-2

Y

Y


Y

l MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G) TN14LSX

FEC/AFEC-2

Y

Y


N

l MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G) When TN14LSX is created as 14LSX on the U2000, FEC/AFEC-2 is supported. When TN14LSX is created as 11LSX/12LSX on the U2000, FEC/AFEC is supported.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


889




Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.22.11 LSX Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11LSX

TN12LSX

The TN12LSX can be created as LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LSX functions as the TN11LSX. NOTE After the substitution, the TN12LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) for 10GE LAN services. A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of received optical power are different.

TN13LSX

The TN13LSX can be created as LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the TN11LSX. NOTE After the substitution, the TN13LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) for 10GE LAN services. When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN14LSX

The TN14LSX can be created as LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN14LSX functions as the TN11LSX. NOTE After the substitution, the TN14LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) for 10GE LAN services. FEC coding is FEC/AFEC. A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


890



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12LSX

TN13LSX

The TN13LSX can be created as 12LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the TN12LSX. NOTE After the substitution, the TN13LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) for 10GE LAN services. When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN14LSX

The TN14LSX can be created as 12LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN14LSX functions as the TN12LSX. NOTE After the substitution, the TN14LSX board supports only Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) for 10GE LAN services. FEC coding is FEC/AFEC. A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.

TN13LSX/ TN14LSX

None

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


The TN12LSX and TN14LSX boards added the support for optical modules 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/ RX1270nm-10km-XFP and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/ RX1330nm-10km-XFP.

Function enhancement: Boards support single-fiber bidirectional transmission.


891





Added the application of the TN12LSX board in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

The function is enhanced.



Added a description explaining that the TN12LSX board does not support the client-side PRBS function when the board is provisioned with STM-64 services.


Added the TN14LSX board.

The TN14LSX board is added to replace the TN11LSX or TN12LSX board.



Changed the description to that the LSX board does not support the test frame function.


13.22.3 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSX board maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and performs conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LSX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-118. Figure 13-118 Position of the LSX board in the WDM system LSX M U X IN / D OUT M U X


1×ODU2/ODU2e


1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1×ODU2/ODU2e

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ RX STM-64/ OC-192/ TX OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200

LSX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ TX STM-64/ RX OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200

892



NOTE

The FC1200 service is only supported by the TN12LSX /TN13LSX/TN14LSX. When an XFP module is used as a WDM-side module on the TN13LSX board, the TN13LSX board does not support FC1200. The OTU2e service is only supported by the TN13LSX/TN14LSX.

13.22.4 Functions and Features The LSX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-274. Table 13-274 Functions and features of the LSX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LSX converts signals as follows: l 1 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2 <-> 1 x OTU2 l 1 x FC1200/10GE LAN/OTU2e <-> 1 x OTU2e


10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s NOTE The FC1200 service is only supported by the TN12LSX /TN13LSX/TN14LSX. When an XFP module is used as a WDM-side module on the TN13LSX board, the TN13LSX board does not support FC1200. The OTU2e service is only supported by the TN13LSX/TN14LSX.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2.

WDM specification

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



893




Description



ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC coding

TN11LSX/TN12LSX:


NOTE The TN12LSX board supports the PRBS test function only when it is provisioned with a client OTU2 service. The LSX boards of other versions support the PRBS the function only when the boards are provisioned with client STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e services.

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU2. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN13LSX/TN14LSX: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU2/OTU2e. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC-2) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


894




Description

Regeneratio n board

l The WDM-side signals from one TN11LSX/TN12LSX board can be regenerated by another TN11LSXR board. l The WDM-side signals from one TN13LSX/TN14LSX board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN55NO2/ TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board.

ALS function


Test frame

Not supported


The TN14LSX board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

When the TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) or is Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. NOTE Only the TN12LSX supports Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

Opticallayer ASON

Supported by the TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/ QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection.


l TN11LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l TN12LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) l TN13LSX/TN14LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


895




Description

Port MTU

9600 bytes. That is, the maximum size of the supported Jumbo frame is 9600 bytes.

Loopback

WDM side

Client side



Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH)



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


896



13.22.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-119 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSX. Figure 13-119 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSX board Client side RX

TX

WDM side


O/E


Client-side OTN processing module 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module


FC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module

E/O

OUT

O/E

IN


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

Only the TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX board supports FC encapsulation and mapping module.

Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LSX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSX to the WDM side of the LSX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX optical interface, and performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


897



After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2/ OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC encoding are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/ O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, FEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


898



Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding. l


l


13.22.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the LSX front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-120 and Figure 13-121 show the LSX front panel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


899



Figure 13-120 Front panel of the TN11LSX/TN12LSX/TN13LSXT01/TN13LSXT02/ TN14LSX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


900



Figure 13-121 Front panel of the TN13LSXB board



l


l


l





901



Table 13-275 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSX board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.22.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one LSX board.

Valid Slots Table 13-276 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSX board. Table 13-276 Valid slots for the TN11LSX board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 13-277 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSX board. Table 13-277 Valid slots for the TN12LSX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


902



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 13-278 shows the valid slots for the TN13LSX/TN14LSX board. Table 13-278 Valid slots for the TN13LSX/TN14LSX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.22.8 Characteristic Code for the LSX The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-279 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-279 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX/RX

3


903



NOTE


13.22.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSX, refer to Table 13-280. Table 13-280 LSX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN,FC-1200, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. NOTE Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX support the FC-1200 service. Only TN 13LSX/TN14LSX support the OTU-2E service.


904



Field

Value

Description

Port Mapping

l TN11LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G)


l TN12LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l TN13LSX/ TN14LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) Laser Status



Disabled, Enabled



Default: Enabled

Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this parameter.


905



Field

Value

Description



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers.

Default: 0s ALS Auxiliary Condition

FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS, BW_WDM_Defect, FW_ODUk_CSF Default: FW_Defect

With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this parameter.

Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN14LSX supports this parameter.

LPT Enabled


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



906



Field

Value

Description


REMOTE_FAULT, None

Determines whether to set REMOTE_FAULT as a laser shutdown condition.

Default: REMOTE_FAULT

NOTE l Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this parameter. l This parameter takes effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. l For the TN12LSX/TN13LSX/TN14LSX boards, when routers support REMOTE_FAULT as a switching condition and the LSX boards are cascaded on the client side, perform the following operations: l If the bit transparent transmission mode is configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None, no matter whether a protection scheme is configured or not. l If the MAC transparent transmission mode and client-side 1+1 protection are configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None. The nonprotection scenario of MAC transparent transmission is not supported. NOTE The TN12LSX board supports only the bit transparent transmission mode.

FEC Working State



FEC Mode


The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. This parameter is automatically set to AFEC when you set Service Type to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping to Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


907



Field

Value

Description

AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3


Default: 3

NOTE Only the TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this parameter.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0



C, CWDM Default: C





Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


908



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only TN13LSX/TN14LSX supports this parameter.

13.22.11 LSX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


909



Bo ard

ClientSide Fixed Optical Module




TN 11L SX

N/A


800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km-XFP


TN 12L SX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s MultirateTX1330/ RX1270nm-10kmXFP 10 Gbit/s MultirateTX1270/ RX1330nm-10kmXFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


N/A



910



Bo ard

ClientSide Fixed Optical Module




TN 13L SX

N/A







800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP

10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP TN 14L SX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km-XFP


N/A

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

10 Gbit/s MultirateTX1330/ RX1270nm-10kmXFP 10 Gbit/s MultirateTX1270/ RX1330nm-10kmXFP

NOTE

(D)RZ means DRZ or RZ. These two types of optical modules have the same optical performance and can be interconnected. The availability of the two type of optical module is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, consult with the product manager at the local representative office.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


911



NOTE



The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km-XFP module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km-XFP module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km-XFP module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/ OTU2e signals. The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km-XFP module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


912


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type





30

30

30


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


913




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

The 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/RX1270nm-10km-XFP and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/ RX1330nm-10km-XFP optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e, and FC1200 signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


914



Table 13-283 Client-side pluggable 10G optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional transmissions) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


km

10

10


nm

1320 to 1340

1260 to 1280


dBm

0

0


dBm

-5

-5


dB

3.5

3.5


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1280

1320 to 1340


dBm

-14

-14


dBm

0.5

0.5


915




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-



NRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


PIN

916




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-






NRZ

NRZ

ODB

(D)RZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2

2

2

2


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35

35


ps/ nm

1200

1200

4800

800

800

APD

PIN

PIN


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

APD


917



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type







dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


918



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


919



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l

Weight: TN11LSX: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.) TN12LSX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN13LSX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) TN14LSX: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)





TN1 1LS X


47.7

50.1


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


920


Boar d






47.9

50.9


49.7

52.7


52.7

55.7


30.5

36.6

30.7

36.8


32.5

39


35.5

42.6


29.4

32.8


29.5

33.9


27

30.4


28

31.4


27

30


TN1 2LS X


TN1 3LS X

TN1 4LS X

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


921


Boar d






13.23 LSXL LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

13.23.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LSXL board are TN11, TN12, and TN15.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L SX L

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN 12L SX L

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

TN 15L SX L

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Variants The difference between the LSXL board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


922



Table 13-288 Available variants of the TN12LSXL board Variant


T01


T03


Table 13-289 Available variants of the TN15LSXL board Variant


T01

60000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN


Function:

Board

Coherent System

FEC Encoding

OTU3 services on client-side

TN11LSXL

N

FEC/AFEC

N

TN12LSXL

N

FEC/AFEC

Y

TN15LSXL

Y

HFEC

Y


Appearance: – The LSXL boards of TN11, TN12, and TN15 versions use different front panels. For details, see 13.23.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.23.10 LSXL Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The LSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


923





Added the TN15LSXL board.

The 40G coherent OTU board is added.

13.23.3 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations. The TN15LSXL board uses coherent receive technology. Therefore, the board is intended for coherent systems. For the position of the LSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-122. Figure 13-122 Position of the LSXL board in the WDM system LSXL

IN

M U X / D M U X

IN OUT

TX

1×ODU3

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU3

1×OTU3

1×ODU3

RX STM-256/ OC-768/ TX OTU3

LSXL

RX

STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3

NOTE

l Client-side service types of the TN11LSXL board are STM-256 and OC-768. l Client-side service types of the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL board are STM-256, OC-768, and OTU3.

13.23.4 Functions and Features The LSXL board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-290. Table 13-290 Functions and features of the LSXL board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LSXL converts signals as follows: l 1x STM-256/OC-768/OTU3<->1x OTU3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


924




Description


STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s NOTE Only TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL support OTU3 services.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU3 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU3 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

WDM specification



l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

l TN11LSXL: Not supported.

l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz

l TN12LSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client side. l TN15LSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client and WDM sides. NOTE The PRBS function of TN12LSXL on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.

LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.709. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN15LSXL: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU3. l Supports HFEC on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


925




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser.

Regeneration board

The WDM-side signals of the TN11LSXL board can be regenerated by a TN11LSXLR board. The WDM-side signals of the TN12LSXL board can be regenerated by a TN12LSXLR board. The WDM-side signals of the TN15LSXL board can be regenerated by a TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board.

ALS function

Supports the ALS function on the client side when client services are non-OTN services.

Test frame

Not supported

Latency measurement

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL.


Not supported

Protection scheme

TN11LSXL: l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. TN12LSXL: l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. TN15LSXL: l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board).

Loopback

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Client side

Inloop

l Not supported by the TN11LSXL

Outloop

l Supported by the TN12LSXL/ TN15LSXL

WDM side

Inloop

Supported


926




Description Outloop


Protoc ols or standar ds for transpa rent transmi ssion (nonperfor mance monito ring)

ITU-T G.707

Protoc ols or standar ds for service process ing (perfor mance monito ring)

ITU-T G.805

Supported

ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic

ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1

13.23.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-123 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL. Figure 13-124 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL and TN15LSXL.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


927



Figure 13-123 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL board WDM side

Client side RX

TX

O/E

E/O



E/O


OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



928



Figure 13-124 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL board Client side RX

TX

O/E

E/O


WDM side E/O OTN processing module

O/E



OUT

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSXL to the WDM side of the LSXL, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC encoding are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3 electrical signals. The OTU3 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


929



After O/E conversion, the OTU3 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU3 framing, FEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of an SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU3 signals, processes overheads in OTU3 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


930


l



13.23.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-125, Figure 13-126 and Figure 13-127 show the front panel of the LSXL board. Figure 13-125 Front panel of the TN11LSXL board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


931



Figure 13-126 Front panel of the TN12LSXL board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


932



Figure 13-127 Front panel of the TN15LSXL board

NOTE

If the equipment is installed in a Huawei cabinet, the board can only use G.657A2 fibers; otherwise, the fibers will be pressed by the cabinet door. If the cabinet door is not required or if the equipment is installed in a thirdparty cabinet whose door does not press the fibers, there is no restriction on the fiber type.



l


l


l




933



Interfaces Table 13-291 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-291 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXL board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.23.7 Valid Slots Four slots house one TN11LSXL board. Three slots house one TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL board. Table 13-292 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXL board. Table 13-292 Valid slots for the TN11LSXL board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU14

NOTE

The rear connector of the TN11LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NMS is the number of the left one of the four slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXL board, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NMS is IU1.

Table 13-293 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXL board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


934



Table 13-293 Valid slots for the TN12LSXL board Product

Valid Slots






IU3-IU16


IU3-IU17

NOTE

The rear connector of the TN12LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXL board displayed on the NMS is the number of the right one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN12LSXL board, the slot number of the TN12LSXL board displayed on the NMS is IU3.

Table 13-294 shows the valid slots for the TN15LSXL board. Table 13-294 Valid slots for the TN15LSXL board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU7, IU12-IU17


IU2-IU15


IU2-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the TN15LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN15LSXL board displayed on the NMS is the number of the middle one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN15LSXL board, the slot number of the TN15LSXL board displayed on the NMS is IU2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


935




Display of Physical Ports Table 13-295 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-295 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXL board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX/RX

3

NOTE


13.23.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSXL, refer to Table 13-296. Table 13-296 LSXL parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


936



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





Laser Status



Default: STM-256

NOTE Only the TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL supports the OTU-3 services.

Off, On



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost.


937



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL supports this parameter.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only TN15LSXL supports this parameter.

Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


938



Field

Value

Description



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only TN15LSXL supports this parameter.




FEC Mode

TN11LSXL/ TN12LSXL:


l FEC, AFEC


l Default: AFEC TN15LSXL: l HFEC

This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled.

l Default: HFEC Receive Wavelength

l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208. 170 to 18/1611.00/188. 780 Default: /


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


939



Field

Value

Description

Receive Band Type

C, CWDM


Default: C

NOTE Only support C band.


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208. 170 to 18/1611.00/188. 780

See Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only support C band.


C, CWDM Default: C


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


940



Field

Value

Description


l TN12LSXL:


– Enabled, Disabled – Default: Disabled l TN15LSXL:

NOTE Only TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL supports this parameter.

– Disabled, GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GCC2 Enabled – Default: Disabled SD Trigger Condition

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None

The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL supports this parameter.

PRBS Test Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


941



Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE Only TN12LSXL/TN15LSXL supports this parameter.

13.23.10 LSXL Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L SX L


N/A


N/A

TN 12L SX L


TN 15L SX L


400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-(D) RZ-PIN N/A


N/A

500 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN N/A

60000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN

N/A

NOTE

(D)RZ means DRZ or RZ. These two types of optical modules have the same optical performance and can be interconnected. The availability of the two type of optical module is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, consult with the product manager at the local representative office.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


942



NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.)


nm

1530 to 1565


dBm

3


dBm

0


dB

8.2


ps/nm

40

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1290 to 1570


dBm

-6


dBm

3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


943



WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-298 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, 500 ps/nm, 400 ps/nm) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-PIN

400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN

DQPSK

ODB

(D)RZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.00


dBm

0

0

0


dBm

-5

-5

-5


dB

N/A

8.2

8.2


GHz

±2.5

±2.5

±5


nm

N/A

0.6

1


nm

0.3

N/A

N/A


ps/nm

±500

±500

±400


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27


944



Table 13-299 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, 60000 ps/ nm) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 60000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN

-

ePDM-BPSK


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35


ps/nm

60000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Mechanical Specifications TN11LSXL l


l


TN12LSXL l


l

Weight: 3.75 kg (8.27 lb.)

TN15LSXL Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


945



l


l






TN11LS XL


103.0

110.0


98.0

101.0


74.0

81.0


84.0

94.0


140.0

155.0

TN12LS XL

TN15LS XL


13.24 LSXLR LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board

13.24.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LSXLR board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


946



Boar d





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN1 1LS XLR

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN1 2LS XLR

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Variants Table 13-300 Available variants of the TN12LSXLR board Variant


T01


T03



Function:

Board

OTU3e services

TN11LSXLR

N

TN12LSXLR

Y


Appearance: – The TN11LSXLR and TN12LSXLR versions use different front panels. For details, see 13.24.5 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 13.24.9 LSXLR Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The LSXLR boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


947



13.24.2 Application The LSXLR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals. For the position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-128. Figure 13-128 Position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system

LSXLR 1×OTU3/OTU3e 1×OTU3/OTU3e

DMUX

IN

OUT

MUX

LSXLR OUT

1×OTU3/OTU3e 1×OTU3/OTU3e

MUX

IN

DMUX

13.24.3 Functions and Features The LSXLR board is used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-301. Table 13-301 Functions and features of the LSXLR board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals.

Regenerati ng rate

OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s OTU3e: OTN service at a rate of 44.57 Gbit/s NOTE Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e service.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


948




Description

OTN function

l Provides the OTU3/OTU3e interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by complying with the ITU-T G.709. l ODU3 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring functions. l OTU3 layer: supports the SM function.

WDM specificati on


Tunable wavelengt h function


ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side.


l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Alarms and performan ce events monitorin g


ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

Latency measurem ent

Not supported

l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser.


949




Description

Opticallayer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Protocols or standards complianc e


-



13.24.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-129 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


950



Figure 13-129 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board

WDM side IN

Decoding module

O/E Optical receiving module

Overhead module

WDM side

Encoding module

E/O

OUT

Optical transmitting module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The LSXLR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to an optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

Optical receiving module – Performs O/E conversion of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


951




Optical transmitting module – Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

The signal processing module The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module. – Decoding module Performs the FEC decoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services. – Encoding module Performs the FEC encoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals. – Overhead module Performs overhead processing of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.

l


l


13.24.5 Front Panel There are indicators, and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-130 and Figure 13-131 show the front panel of the LSXLR board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


952



Figure 13-130 Front panel of the TN11LSXLR board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


953



Figure 13-131 Front panel of the TN12LSXLR board



l


l


l





954



Table 13-302 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXLR board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



13.24.6 Valid Slots Four slots house one TN11LSXLR board. Two slots house one TN12LSXLR board. Table 13-303 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board. Table 13-303 Valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU14

The rear connector of the TN11LSXLR is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the four slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXLR board, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU1. When the TN11LSXLR boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. The TN11LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU5, IU9 and IU13. Table 13-304 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


955



Table 13-304 Valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU16


IU2-IU17

The rear connector of the TN12LSXLR board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12LSXLR board, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU2. When the TN12LSXLR boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, or IU66 and IU68.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, or IU34 and IU36.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, or IU14 and IU16.

l

OptiX OSN 6800: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, or IU14 and IU16.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-305 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


956



Table 13-305 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXLR board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

NOTE


13.24.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the LSXLR, refer to Table 13-306. Table 13-306 LSXLR parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status



Laser Status


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



957



Field

Value

Description

Enable AutoSensing

Disabled, Enabled

Enables or disables rate auto sensing for the board.

Default: Enabled

l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board can auto adapt to the rate of received signals, which means users do not need to manually set the line rate for the board. l When it is set to Disabled, users have to manually set the line rate for the board based on the rate of the actual signal rate. If the specified line rate mismatches the actual signal rate, services will be unavailable. NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

FEC Working State



FEC Mode



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


958



Field

Value

Description

Receive Wavelength

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100

Specifies the receive wavelength for the board. Observe the following requirements when setting this parameter:

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780

l When the receive wavelength is the same as the transmit wavelength of the board, use the default value so that the receive wavelength automatically keeps the same as the transmit wavelength.

Default: /

l When the receive wavelength differs from the transmit wavelength of the board, set this parameter to a value that is same as the transmit wavelength of the remote board; otherwise, services carried by the wavelength will be interrupted. NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.

Receive Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C



-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780


Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



959



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM


Default: C

See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only support C band.



Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE Only TN12LSXLR supports this parameter.

PMD Threshold (ps)

-

Displays the PMD threshold of the board.

Board Mode

Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode


Default: Electrical Relay Mode

NOTE When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available.

13.24.9 LSXLR Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11LS XLR

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODBPIN

N/A

400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZPIN TN12LS XLR

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN

N/A

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODBPIN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


960



NOTE



WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 13-307 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, 500 ps/nm, 400 ps/nm) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-




DQPSK

ODB

(D)RZ


THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.00


dBm

0

0

0


dBm

-5

-5

-5


dB

N/A

8.2

8.2


GHz

±2.5

±2.5

±5


nm

N/A

0.6

1


nm

0.3

N/A

N/A


ps/nm

±500

±500

±400


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561


961



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





dBm

-16

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

Mechanical Specifications TN11LSXLR l


l


TN12LSXLR l


l






TN11 LSXL R


87.0

90.0


82.0

85.0

TN12 LSXL R


75.0

79.0


67.0

70.0


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


962



13.25 LSXR LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board

13.25.1 Version Description The available functional version of the LSXR board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L SX R

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Variants Table 13-308 Available variants of the TN11LSXR board Variant


01M02


01M03 01M04


T02


T03


T04


T05


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


963



13.25.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. For the position of the LSXR board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-132. Figure 13-132 Position of the LSXR board in the WDM system

LSXR 1×OTU2/OTU2e 1×OTU2/OTU2e

DMUX

IN

OUT

MUX

LSXR OUT


MUX

IN

DMUX

13.25.3 Functions and Features The LSXR is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-309. Table 13-309 Functions and features of the LSXR board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function


Regenerati ng rate

OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s


964




Description

OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2.

WDM specificati on




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding



l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

Latency measurem ent

Not supported



965




Description

Opticallayer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Protocols or standards complianc e


-



13.25.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-133 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


966



Figure 13-133 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board

WDM side IN

Decoding module


Overhead module

WDM side

Encoding module

E/O

OUT



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The LSXR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The signals at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

Optical receiving module – Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


967




Optical transmitting module – Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

The signal processing module The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module. – Decoding module Performs the FEC decoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services. – Encoding module Performs the FEC encoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals. – Overhead module Performs overhead processing of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.

l


l


13.25.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-134 shows the front panel of the LSXR.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


968



Figure 13-134 Front panel of the LSXR



l


l


l





969



Table 13-310 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXR board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



13.25.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LSXR board. Table 13-311 shows the valid slots for the LSXR board. Table 13-311 Valid slots for LSXR board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

When the LSXR boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21 and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and IU38, IU39 and IU40, IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52, IU53 and IU54, IU55 and IU56, IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67 and IU68.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13, IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


970



and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26 and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36. l

OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.

l

OptiX OSN 6800: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.

13.25.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-312 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-312 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXR board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

NOTE


13.25.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the LSXR, refer to Table 13-313.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


971



Table 13-313 LSXR parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status



Laser Status

Off, On Default: On


Enable AutoSensing


Enables or disables rate auto sensing for the board. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board automatically determines its FEC Mode and Line Rate for the received signals, which means users do not need to manually set them. l When it is set to Disabled, users have to manually set FEC Mode and Line Rate for the board and the specified line rate must be consistent with the received service. Otherwise, the service will be unavailable. NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


972



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled



The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780



C, CWDM Default: C



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


973



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Line Rate

Standard Mode, Speedup Mode

Specifies the line rate of OTN signals.

Default: Standard Mode

NOTE This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled




NOTE When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available.

Board Mode

Default: Disabled

See Line Rate for more information.

13.25.10 LSXR Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11L SXR


N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


974



NOTE




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-



NRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0


PIN

975



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Maximum reflectance

dB



-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZPIN

1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZAPD

4800 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelengt h-ODBAPD


NRZ

NRZ

ODB

(D)RZ


dBm

2

2

2

2


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35


ps/nm

1200

1200

4800

800

APD

APD

PIN


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN


976



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZPIN

1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZAPD

4800 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelengt h-ODBAPD



nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27




l

Weight: 1.2 kg. (2.6 lb)





TN1 1LS XR


34.8

37.8

35.0

38.0

36.8

39.8

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


977


Boar d






39.8

42.8


13.26 LTX LTX: 10-Port 10Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Optical Wavelength Conversion Board

13.26.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LTX board are TN11, TN12 and TN15.


Initial Versiona

General 8800 T64 Subrac k




8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subra ck

3800 Chassis

TN 11 LT X

8800/6800 :V100R00 6C03

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN 12 LT X

V100R008 C00

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN 15 LT X

V100R008 C10SPC2 10

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

3800:V10 0R008C00

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


978



The OSN 3800 chassis supports the TN11LTX and TN12LTX boards only when it is DC-powered. In this case, the air intake vent temperature of the fan tray assembly is within the range of 5°C (41 °F) to 45°C (113 °F) during long-term running and is within the range of -5°C (23 °F) to 50°C (122 °F) during short-term running. At this time, the TN23SCC board must be used in the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. a: If there is a substitution relationship between two boards and one of the boards is used to replace the other board, the device initial version supported by the replaced board takes effect. For example, when you use TN12LTX to replace TN11LTX in 8800, TN12LTX can be supported by V100R006C03.

Variants Table 13-316 Available variants of the TN11LTX board Variant


FEC Encoding

T01


HFEC

T11


SDFEC

Table 13-317 Available variants of the TN12LTX board Variant


FEC Encoding

T01


HFEC

T11


SDFEC

Table 13-318 Available variants of the TN15LTX board Variant


FEC Encoding

T51


SDFEC2

T52


SDFEC2

T53


SDFEC2

T61

150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,wDCM)PIN

SDFEC2

Differences Between Versions l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Function: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

979


Board


Client-side services

Latency measurement

Test frame

OTU2/OTU2e

FC800/FC1200

TN11LTX

N

N

N

N

TN12LTX

Y

N

Y

N

TN15LTX

Y

Y

Y

Y

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see LTX Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rulesa

TN11LTX

TN12LTX

The TN12LTX can be created as 11LTX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LTX functions as the TN11LTX.

TN12LTX

None

-

TN15LTX

None

-

a. Board substitution can be performed only when the original and substitutive boards are of the same type (that is the same T version, such as T01).



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


The TN15LTX board added the support for optical module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-SFP +.



980






Compared with the TN12LTX board, the TN15LTX supports FC1200/FC800 services. TN15LTX supports SDFEC2, occupies two slots.




Compared with the TN11LTX board, the TN12LTX supports OTU2/OTU2e services.




The principles for configuring the relay mode are modified to meet the application requirements.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Updated the board power consumption.


Added the SDFEC error correction mode and C BandTunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(SDFEC)-PIN optical modules for boards.

Function enhancement: The SDFEC is supported to further improve the net coding gain of FEC and system transmission capabilities.


981






The TN11LTX board, a 100G coherent OTU board, is added to map 10 x 10GE client-side signals to one OTU4 signal.

13.26.3 Application The LTX board is a wavelength conversion board and applies to coherent systems. In the receive direction, the board can receive ten 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OTU2/OTU2e, FC1200, FC800, or OC-192 signals from client equipment, maps the optical signals into an OTU4 signal, and converts the OTU4 signal into a standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G. 694.1. In the transmit direction, the process is reverse. The LTX board can also apply to electrical regeneration sites to perform electrical regeneration of OTU4 optical signals. The WDM-side service rate for the LTX board is 100 Gbit/s. Therefore, the board is intended for 100G transmission systems. For the position of the LTX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-135 and Figure 13-136. Figure 13-135 Position of the LTX board in the WDM system (OTU mode) LTX

RX1

OUT

TX1 10×ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex

IN

1×OTU4

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU4

1×OTU4

1×ODU4

TX10

10×ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex

TX1 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/ OTU2/OTU2e/ FC1200/FC800 RX10

LTX M U OUT X / IN D M U X

RX1

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/ TX10 OTU2/OTU2e/ FC1200/FC800

RX10

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the LTX board must be set to Line Mode.

Table 13-319 Client-side service mapping granularity supported by the board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Client-Side Service

Target ODUk

TN11LT X/ TN12LT X

10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192

ODU2

10GE LAN

ODU2e

TN12LT X

OTU2

ODU2

OTU2e

ODU2e

TN15LT X

10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2

ODU2


982


Board


Client-Side Service

Target ODUk

OTU2e/FC1200

ODU2e

10GE LAN

ODU2/ODU2e

FC800

ODU2/ODUflex

Figure 13-136 Position of the LTX board in the WDM system (regeneration mode)

LTX IN

1×OTU4 1×OTU4

DMUX

OUT

MUX

LTX OUT

1×OTU4 1×OTU4

MUX

IN

DMUX

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the LTX board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. The input and output wavelengths can be different. The LTX board does not support the relay mode when it is deployed in an OSN 3800 chassis.

13.26.4 Functions and Features The LTX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, see Table 13-320 and Table 13-321.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


983



Table 13-320 Functions and features of the LTX board (OTU mode) Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LTX converts signal as follows: l TN11LTX: 10x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<>1xOTU4 l TN12LTX: 10x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ OTU2e<->1x OTU4 l TN15LTX: 10x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ OTU2e/FC1200/FC800<->1x OTU4


10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s

OTN function

l Provides the OTU4 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. l ODUk (k=2, 4, ODUflex) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l Supports SM function for OTU2. l Supports SM function for OTU4. NOTE The functions on ODUflex layer are only supported by TN15LTX, the TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring function on ODU2 layer are only supported by TN15LTX.

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported on the WDM-side, supported by the TN12LTX/TN15LTX when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e. NOTE When being provisioned with the OTU2/OTU2e service on the client side, the board supports ESC transparent transmission, but not ESC processing. When the ESC function is required, the TN15LTX board receives one to six signals on the client side.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


984




Description

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC coding

l Client side: TN12LTX: When OTU2/OTU2e services are provisioned, the clientside TX port supports FEC coding that is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and the client-side RX port does not support FEC decoding.

NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e.

TN15LTX: When OTU2/OTU2e services are provisioned, the board supports FEC coding that is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l WDM side: TN11LTX supports HFEC and SDFEC. TN12LTX supports HFEC and SDFEC. TN15LTX supports SDFEC2. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN). l Supports the monitoring of CD and PMD performance.

Regeneration board

The WDM-side signals of an LTX board can be regenerated using the LTX, NS4 board of the same type.For example, l The type of the TN11LTXT01 board is T01,and the WDM-side signals of the TN11LTXT01 board can be regenerated using the LTX, NS4 board of the T01 type, such as TN54NS4T01, TN57NS4T01,TN11LTXT01,TN12LTXT01.

ALS function


Test frame

TN11LTX/TN12LTX: Not supported TN15LTX: Supports the test frame function when the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) on its client side.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


985




Description

Latency measurement

The TN12LTX/TN15LTX board support latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two OTU boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. NOTE When the client service is OTU2/OTU2e, the board does not support latency measurement. The latency measurement function can be configured only on one port at a time.

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme



TN11LTX/TN12LTX: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) (displayed as OTU2E on the NMS)

l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board).

TN15LTX: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) (displayed as OTU2E on the NMS) and MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)(displayed as GFP on the NMS) Loopback

Client side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop WDM side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


986




Description



IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3)



Table 13-321 Functions and features of the LTX board (regeneration mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function



987




Description

Regenerating rate


OTN function

l Provides the OTU4 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU4. l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU4. l Supports SM functions for OTU4.

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

TN11LTX/TN12LTX supports HFEC and SDFEC on the WDM side. TN15LTX supports SDFEC2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Loopback

Not supported



988




Description



-



13.26.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LTX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (OTU mode) Figure 13-137 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LTX.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


989



Figure 13-137 Functional modules and signal flow of the LTX board (OTU mode) Client side RX1

O/E


RX10 TX1

WDM side



E/O

TX10


FC encapsulation and mapping module



E/O

OUT

O/E

IN


Control Memory

Communication

CPU


Fuse

Power supply module

Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

The TN11LTX board does not have the client-side OTN processing module and FC encapsulation and mapping module, the TN12LTX board does not have the FC encapsulation and mapping module.

In the signal flow of the LTX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LTX to the WDM side of the LTX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 10 channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX10 interfaces interface, and performs O/E conversion. After performing the O/E conversion, the client-side optical module sends the electrical signals to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs encapsulation, OTN framing, and FEC encoding and outputs one channel of OTU4 signals to the WDM-side optical module. After receiving the OTU4 signals, the WDM-side optical module performs E/O conversion, generates OTU4 signals over a DWDM wavelength that complies with ITU-T G.694.1, and then outputs the OTU4 signals through the OUT optical interfaces.

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receive direction


990



The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of standard DWDM optical signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interfaces. The WDM-side optical module then converts the optical signals into electrical signals. After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module, which performs OTU4 framing, FEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals and then outputs 10 channels of client electrical signals. The 10 channels of client electrical signals are sent to the client-side optical module, which converts the electrical signals into optical signals and then outputs the optical signals through the TX1-TX10 optical interfaces.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (regeneration mode) Figure 13-138 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LTX. Figure 13-138 Functional modules and signal flow of the LTX board (regeneration mode)

WDM side IN



WDM side OUT

E/O Optical transmitting module

Control Memory

Communication CPU Control and communication module Power supply module

Required voltage

Fuse


SCC


The LTX board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU4 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


991



After encoding, the signals are sent to an optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU4 signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion for 10 channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200/FC800 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion for 10 channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200/FC800 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the OTU4 optical signal. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU4 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, Client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module: Encapsulates ten channels of SDH/SONET and 10GE WAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU4 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module: Encapsulates ten channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU4 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates ten channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU4 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module: Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4 signals, processes overheads in OTU4 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


992


l



l


13.26.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LTX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-139 and Figure 13-140 show the front panel of the LTX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


993



Figure 13-139 Font panel of the TN11LTX/TN12LTX board


LTX STAT ACT PROG SRV


OUT IN

TX2 RX2

RX1 TX1

TX4 RX4

RX3 TX3

TX6 RX6

RX5 TX5

TX8 RX8

RX7 TX7

TX10 RX10

RX9 TX9

LTX

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


994



Figure 13-140 Font panel of the TN15LTX board



l


l


l




995



Interfaces Table 13-322 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-322 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LTX board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX10

LC


RX1-RX10

LC



13.26.7 Valid Slots Four slots house one TN11LTX/TN12LTX board. Two slots house one TN15LTX board. Table 13-323, Table 13-324 show the valid slots for the LTX board. Table 13-323 Valid slots for the TN11LTX/TN12LTX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU6, IU12-IU16


IU2-IU14


IU2-IU15


IU3, IU4


996



NOTE

The rear connector of the TN11LTX/TN12LTX is mounted to the backplane along the second slot from the left in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the LTX board displayed on the NMS is the number of the second one of the four slots from left. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3 and IU4 house the TN11LTX board, the slot number of the TN11LTX board displayed on the NMS is IU2.

When the TN11LTX/TN12LTX boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU12 and IU16, IU20 and IU24, IU28 and IU32, IU36 and IU40, IU46 and IU50, IU54 and IU58, IU62 and IU66.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU12 and IU17, IU21 and IU25, IU30 and IU34.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU12 and IU16.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU10 and IU14.

l

OptiX OSN 6800: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU6, IU10 and IU14.

Table 13-324 Valid slots for the TN15LTX board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU16

NOTE

A TN15LTX board requires two slots in a subrack. The board's rear connectors in the second slot (the rightside one) engage with the backplane. Hence, the slot number for the board displayed on the NMS is the number of the second slot. For example, if a TN15LTX board is installed in slots IU1 and IU2, its slot number displayed on the NMS is IU2.

When the TN15LTX boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, IU40 and IU42, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

997



IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, IU66 and IU68. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, IU34 and IU36.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The LTX boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, IU14 and IU16.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-325 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-325 Mapping between the physical ports on the LTX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

TX9/RX9

11

TX10/RX10

12

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


998



13.26.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LTX, refer to Table 13-326. Table 13-326 LTX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


999



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

TN11LTX: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, STM-64


TN12LTX: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, STM-64, OTU-2, OTU-2E TN15LTX: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, STM-64, OTU-2, OTU-2E, FC-1200, FC-800 Default for TN11LTX/ TN12LTX: 10GE LAN Default for TN15LTX: None Port Mapping

Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G)

Laser Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Specifies the service mapping mode on a port. See Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only the TN15LTX supports this parameter.


1000



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the clientside receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the clientside receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDMside receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.


0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1001



Field

Value

Description








With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Determines whether to set REMOTE_FAULT as a laser shutdown condition. NOTE l Only the TN12LTX/TN15LTX supports this parameter. l This parameter takes effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. l For the LTX boards, when routers support REMOTE_FAULT as a switching condition and the LTX boards are cascaded on the client side, perform the following operations: l If the bit transparent transmission mode is configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None, no matter whether a protection scheme is configured or not. l If the MAC transparent transmission mode and client-side 1+1 protection are configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None. The non-protection scenario of MAC transparent transmission is not supported.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1002



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled

Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. After the FEC function is disabled on the WDM side, services become abnormal. After the FEC function is disabled on the client side, the transmission distance is affected.

Default: Enabled


TN11LTX: HFEC, SDFEC TN12LTX: HFEC, SDFEC TN15LTX: SDFEC2

Queries the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled.

AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay. NOTE Only the TN15LTX board supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1003



Field

Value

Description

Receive Wavelength

C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Default: /

l When the receive wavelength is the same as the transmit wavelength of the board, use the default value so that the receive wavelength automatically keeps the same as the transmit wavelength. l When the receive wavelength differs from the transmit wavelength of the board, set this parameter to a value that is same as the transmit wavelength of the remote board; otherwise, services carried by the wavelength will be interrupted. NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value.

Receive Band Type

C Default: /



-


Band Type

-



-

Displays the tunable wavelength range supported by the WDMside optical interface on the board.

Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Default: /


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1004



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C


Default: C

See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. PRBS Test Status



Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600

Sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. For a 10GE LAN service, when the port mapping mode is Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G), data packets will be transparently transmitted if their lengths exceed Max. Packet Length. When the port mapping mode is MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), data packets will be discarded if their lengths exceed Max. Packet Length. NOTE Only the TN15LTX supports this parameter. For the TN15LTX when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1005



Field

Value

Description




Default: None

See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only the TN15LTX supports this parameter.

NULL Mapping Status

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1006



Field

Value

Description


l Disabled, GCC1+GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GCC2 Enabled


l Default value for the line mode: Disabled l Default value for the relay mode: Only GCC1 Enabled

l When the parameter is set to Disabled, the system will process the GCC1 and GCC2 bytes in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to GCC1+GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 or GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to Only GCC1 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 byte but only the GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to Only GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC2 byte but only the GCC1 byte in the OTN overhead. NOTE The TN11LTX board supports this parameter only when Board Mode is set to Optical Relay mode or Electrical Relay Mode.

Insert Code Type

PN11, MS_AIS Default: PN11

Applies to fault detection and location scenarios when the service type is STM-64. When the tributary or line board at the upstream site is faulty or when the line board at the downstream site is faulty, users can specify the output code type for the tributary board at the downstream site using this parameter. NOTE Only the TN15LTX board supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1007



Field

Value

Description

Board Mode

Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode


Default: Line Mode

Line Mode: The board functions as a line board. Electrical Relay Mode/Optical Relay Mode: The board functions as a regeneration board. NOTE When optical-layer and electricallayer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, endto-end management of services is not available. NOTE When the board functions as an OTU, Board Mode must be set to Line Mode.

Port Working Mode

ODU2 non-convergence mode (OTU2/Any->ODU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/ Any->ODU2)

This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail. NOTE Only the TN15LTX board supports this parameter.

13.26.10 LTX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11LTX/TN12LTX



10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 kmXFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1008



Board



TN15LTX

10GBASE-ZR-80km-SFP+

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(SDFEC2)-PIN

10GBASE-ER/EW-40km-SFP + 10GBASE-SR-0.3km-SFP+ 10GBASE-LR-10km-SFP+ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP + 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP + 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-SFP +

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2)-PIN 40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2)-PIN 150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(SDFEC2,wDCM)-PIN

11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/ RX1330nm-10km-SFP+ 11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/ RX1270nm-10km-SFP+

NOTE


Specifications of optical modules on the client side NOTE

The 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP, 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP, and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, OTU2/OTU2e and 10GE WAN signals. The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


1009


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type Target transmissio n distance

-





10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


1010


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12


NOTE

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+, 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2/ OTU2e, FC1200 and FC800 signals.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




Optical Gbit/s interface service rate

8.5 to 11.1

9.956 to 11.1

8.5 to 11.3

Line code format

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

Optical source type

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


1011



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




10

40

80

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

Maximum mean dBm launched power

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9

Eye pattern mask

-



km


nm


-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1355

1260 to 1605

1260 to 1565


dBm

-14.4

-14(11.1G)

-24


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

reflectance

dB

-12

-27

-27

-15.8 (10.3125G)

NOTE

10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+, 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+ and 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, FC1200, FC800 signals. 10G BASE-ZR-80 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1012




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10G BASESR-0.3 kmSFP+

10G BASELR-10 kmSFP+

10G BASEER/EW-40 km-SFP+

10G BASEZR-80 kmSFP+


Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.8 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

0.5

4

4


dBm

-7.3

-8.2

-4.7

0


dB

3

3.5

3

9


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-


PIN

PIN


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


1013


Parameter


Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

10G BASESR-0.3 kmSFP+





nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)

-14.1 (OMA)

-24


dBm

-1

0.5

-1

-7

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-26

-27

NOTE

The following two modules can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, FC1200, FC800 signals.

Table 13-330 Client-side pluggable 10GE optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional transmissions) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/ RX1330nm-10kmSFP+

11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/ RX1270nm-10kmSFP+

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


km

10

10


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1260 to 1280

1320 to 1340


dBm

0.5

0.5


dBm

-8.2

-8.2


dB

3.5

3.5


1014



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

Eye pattern mask

11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/ RX1330nm-10kmSFP+ -




-

PIN

PIN


nm

1320 to 1340

1260 to 1280


dBm

-14.4

-14.4


dBm

0.5

0.5

Specifications of optical modules on the DWDM side Table 13-331 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(HFEC)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35


ps/nm

40000


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1015



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.4


ps/nm

55000


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0


1016



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Maximum reflectance


dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

150000


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1017




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

55000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1018



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

40000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


1019



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

150000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): TN11LTX/TN12LTX: 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) TN15LTX: 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: TN11LTX/TN12LTX: 5.8 kg (12.8 lb.) TN15LTX: 3 kg (6.6 lb.)


WDM-Side Module



TN11LTX (OTU mode)

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(HFEC)-PIN

248

273

235

247

TN11LTX (regeneration mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1020



Board

WDM-Side Module



TN11LTX (OTU mode)

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(SDFEC)-PIN

270

300

250

275

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(HFEC)-PIN

248

273

235

247

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(SDFEC)-PIN

270

300

250

275

150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(SDFEC2)PIN

176

190

160

173

TN11LTX (regeneration mode) TN12LTX (OTU mode) TN12LTX (regeneration mode) TN12LTX (OTU mode) TN12LTX (regeneration mode) TN15LTX (OTU mode) TN15LTX (regeneration mode)

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(SDFEC2)PIN 40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK(SDFEC2)PIN 150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDMQPSK (SDFEC2,wDCM)PIN a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

13.27 LWX2 LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1021



13.27.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is, TN11.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L WX 2

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

13.27.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWX2 board implements the conversion between two channels of optical signals at the rate in the range of 16 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-141. Figure 13-141 Position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system LWX2 MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

Transparent transmission



LWX2


13.27.3 Functions and Features The LWX2 is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and provide ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-337.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1022



Table 13-337 Functions and features of the LWX2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LWX2 converts signals as follows: l 2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals)<->2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals)


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification



Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. In the case of configuring four-wavelength tunable optical module, configure every four continuous wavelengths (first group started with the 1st wavelength) in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing as one group. In this way, the optical signal output on the WDM side are tunable within the four wavelengths of every group.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported


Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.

ALS function

Supports the ALS function on the client and WDM sides.

Test frame

Not supported

Latency measurement

Not supported



1023




Description

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

WDM side


Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1024




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-


1025



13.27.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-142 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board. Figure 13-142 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board Client side RX1

WDM side O/E

OUT1

E/O

RX2

OUT2

TX1

E/O

TX2



IN1


IN2

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LWX2 board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 13.27.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LWX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWX2 to the WDM side of the LWX2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1026



After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the OUT1-OTU2 optical interfaces. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l


l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Service processing module – Regenerates Any signals in two directions. – Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1027





13.27.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-143 shows the front panel of the LWX2 board. Figure 13-143 Front panel of the LWX2 board

LWX2 STAT ACT PROG SRV


LWX2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1028



NOTE

The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-338 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-338 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWX2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



13.27.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LWX2 board. Table 13-339 shows the valid slots for the LWX2 board. Table 13-339 Valid slots for the LWX2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 platform subrack

IU1-IU18


1029



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.27.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2 The characteristic code for the LWX2 board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-340. Table 13-340 Characteristic code for the LWX2 board Code

Description

Description

First four digits



Last four digits



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 board is 92109220. l

"9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz.

l

"9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.20 THz.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1030



Table 13-341 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWX2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

3

TX1/RX1

5

TX2/RX2

6

NOTE


13.27.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LWX2, refer to Table 13-342 Table 13-342 LWX2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1031



Field

Value

Description





None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16


Default: Any Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)

16 to 2500 Default: 2500

Sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the clientside services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services.

Off, On

Laser Status


Disabled, Enabled Default: l WDM side: Disabled


l Client side: Enabled

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Current Bearer Rate (M)

-

This parameter provides an option to query the rate of services accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate.


-


Band Type

-



1032



Field

Value

Description


-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780



C, CWDM Default: C





13.27.10 LWX2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1033



Bo ard





TN 11L WX 2

N/A



N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD

NOTE



The I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module. The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1034



Table 13-343 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

2 km (1.2 mi.)

15 km (9.3 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

830 to 860

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

3


dBm

-9.5

-10

-5

-2


dB

9

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

N/A

1

1


dB

N/A

N/A

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3zcompliant

G.957-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


PIN

APD

1035


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-18

-18

-28


dBm

0

-3

0

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

N/A

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


1036



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

THz

192.10 to 196.00


1037



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1038




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-APDa

6500 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PIN

3200 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-APD

6400 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelength -NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-1

-1

3

3

3


dBm

-5

-5

-2

-2

-2


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant

PIN

APD

APD


-

PIN

Operating nm wavelength range

1200 to 1650


-18

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm

APD

1300 to 1575 -28

-18


-26

-28

1039


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-APDa

6500 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PIN

3200 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-APD

6400 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelength -NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)


dBm

0

-9

0

-10

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.


Unit



-

NRZ


dBm

5


dBm

2.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

<=±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1040



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Receiver type

-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

l When SDH or OTN services are provisioned on the WDM side, the line code on the WDM side must be NRZ. l When SDH or OTN services are provisioned on the WDM side, the eye pattern on the WDM side complies with the template defined in ITU-T G.957.



l





LWX2

38.5

42.4


13.28 LWXD LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

13.28.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is, TN11.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1041








8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L WX D

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

13.28.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXD board implements the conversion between the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LWXD board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-144. Figure 13-144 Position of the LWXD board in the WDM system LWXD MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX




LWXD


13.28.3 Functions and Features The LWXD board is used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-348.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1042



Table 13-348 Functions and features of the LWXD board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LWXD converts signals as follows: l 2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals)<->2 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals) l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported



ALS function


Test frame

Not supported

Latency measurement

Not supported



1043




Description

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

WDM side

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1044




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-


1045



13.28.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-145 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board. Figure 13-145 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board WDM side

Client side RX

O/E

TX

E/O

Splitter

E/O Service processing module

IN1 IN2

O/E


OUT1 OUT2


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The client side of the LWXD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). NOTE

For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 13.28.3 Functions and Features.

In the signal flow of the LWXD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXD to the WDM side of the LWXD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1046



After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Service processing module – Regenerates Any signals in two directions. – Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1047





13.28.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-146 shows the front panel of the LWXD board. Figure 13-146 Front panel of the LWXD board

LWXD STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LWXD

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1048





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-349 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-349 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXD board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.28.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LWXD board. Table 13-350 shows the valid slots for the LWXD board. Table 13-350 Valid slots for the LWXD board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


1049



13.28.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD The characteristic code for the LWXD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 13-351. Table 13-351 Characteristic code for the LWXD board Code

Description

Description

First four digits



Last four digits



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWXD is 92109210. l



Display of Physical Ports Table 13-352 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-352 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWXD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

TX/RX

3

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1050



13.28.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LWXD, refer to Table 13-353 Table 13-353 LWXD parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16


Default: Any

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1051



Field

Value

Description


16 to 2500


Default: 2500


Laser Status




l Client side: Enabled Current Bearer Rate (M)

-



-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1052



Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM


Default: C

See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition



13.28.10 LWXD Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard





TN 11L WX D

N/A



N/A



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1053



NOTE



The I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the I-16-2 km-eSFP module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10-eSFP optical module. The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

2 km (1.2 mi.)

15 km (9.3 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

830 to 860

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

3


dBm

-9.5

-10

-5

-2


dB

9

8.2

8.2

8.2


1054


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

N/A

N/A

1

1


dB

N/A

N/A

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3zcompliant

G.957-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-18

-18

-28


dBm

0

-3

0

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

N/A

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1055




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


1056




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1057




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPDa



12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZAPD

6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-4

-4

0

0

0

0


dBm

-8

-8

-5

-5

-5

-5


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant

PIN

APD

APD

APD


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-18

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

APD

1300 to 1575 -28

-18

-26


-28

-28

1058


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPDa



12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZAPD

6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable)


dBm

0

-9

0

-10

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2


dBm

–0.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


nm

≤ ±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


1059



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE




l





LWXD

35.8

39.4


13.29 LWXS LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

13.29.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the LWXS board are TN11 and TN12. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1060








8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11L WX S

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

TN 12L WX S

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Functions: – The TN11LWXS board does not support access ETR/CLO services, whereas the TN12LWXS board supports, see 13.29.3 Functions and Features.

Substitution Relationship The LWXS boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

13.29.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXS board implements the conversion between the optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LWXS board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-147. Figure 13-147 Position of the LWXS board rate in the WDM system

LWXS M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


16 Mbit/s – 2.5 Gbit/s

LWXS

16 Mbit/s – 2.5 Gbit/s

1061



13.29.3 Functions and Features The LWXS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-359. Table 13-359 Functions and features of the LWXS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

LWXS converts signals as follows:



l 1 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals)<->1 x (16 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals)

GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s ETR: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s CLO: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports ETR and CLO services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported



1062




Description



ALS function


Test frame

Not supported


Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

WDM side


Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1063




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM) IBM GDPS (Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports IBM GDPS (Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1064





-

13.29.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-148 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board. Figure 13-148 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board Client side

WDM side

RX

O/E

TX

E/O



E/O

OUT

O/E

IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow In the signal flow of the LWXS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXS to the WDM side of the LWXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1065


l


Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out Any optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of Any optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of Any electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Service processing module – Regenerates Any signals in two directions. – Monitors the performance of SDH/SONET and GE signals in two directions.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1066





13.29.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-149 shows the front panel of the LWXS board. Figure 13-149 Front panel of the LWXS board

LWXS STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 OUT IN

LWXS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1067





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-360 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-360 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXS board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX

LC


RX

LC



13.29.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one LWXS board. Table 13-361 shows the valid slots for the TN11LWXS board. Table 13-361 Valid slots for theTN11LWXS board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


IU1-IU16


1068



Table 13-362 shows the valid slots for the TN12LWXS board. Table 13-362 Valid slots for theTN12LWXS board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.29.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-363 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-363 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWXS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX/RX

3

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1069



13.29.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the LWXS, refer to Table 13-364 Table 13-364 LWXS parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, ETR, CLO

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports ETR, and CLO services.

Default: Any

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1070



Field

Value

Description


16 to 2500


Default: 2500


Laser Status




l Client side: Enabled Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s)

-


OFC Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.

Default: Disabled

NOTE l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled after the OFC function is enabled. l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection. l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G. l Only the TN12LWXS supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1071



Field

Value

Description


-


Band Type

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0



C, CWDM Default: C





13.29.10 LWXS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1072



Bo ard





TN 11L WX S

N/A



N/A

TN 12L WX S



NOTE



The I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module. The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1073




Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

2 km (1.2 mi.)

15 km (9.3 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

830 to 860

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

3


dBm

-9.5

-10

-5

-2


dB

9

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

N/A

1

1


dB

N/A

N/A

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3zcompliant

G.957-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


PIN

APD

1074


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type


I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-18

-18

-28


dBm

0

-3

0

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

N/A

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access ETR, CLO, GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


1075



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

THz

192.10 to 196.00


1076



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1077




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPDa




6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four ChannelsTunable)

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


dBm

-1

-1

3

3

3

3


dBm

-5

-5

-2

-2

-2

-2


dB

10

10

8.2

8.2

10

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±10


nm

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.5


dB

35

35

30

30

35

35


ps/nm

12800

12800

6500

3200

12800

6400

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant



1078


Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPINa

12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPDa




6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four ChannelsTunable)

APD

PIN

APD

APD

APD

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-18

-28

-18

-26

-28

-28


dBm

0

-9

0

-10

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27

1300 to 1575



Unit



-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

5


dBm

2.5


dB

8.2

Central wavelength

nm

1271 to 1611


1079



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

≤±6.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

1600

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE




l





LWXS

33.9

37.3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1080



13.30 TMX TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board.

13.30.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TMX board are TN11 and TN12.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11T MX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN 12T MX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Function: – TN11TMX supports AFEC, and the TN12TMX supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 13.30.3 Functions and Features.

l

Specification: – The TN11TMX board supports fixed optical module and tunable optical module on the WDM side. The TN12TMX board supports fixed optical module, tunable optical module, XFP module and gray optical module on the WDM side. For specifications of each version, see 13.30.10 TMX Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1081




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TMX

TN12TMX

The TN12TMX can be created as 11TMX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TMX functions as the TN11TMX. NOTE l When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when both the receive and transmit boards employ AFEC, the substitution does not apply. l A board equipped with a PIN receiver cannot substitute for a board equipped with an APD receiver, because the two types of receives support different input power ranges. NOTE When a TN11TMX board receives OTU1 services on the client side and FEC is enabled, the TN12TMX board cannot substitute for the TN11TMX board.

TN12TMX

None

-

13.30.2 Application As a type of optical transponder unit, the TMX board multiplexes four channels of STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 service signals into one channel of OTU2 signals, and implements conversion between these service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the TMX board in the WDM system, see Figure 13-150. Figure 13-150 Position of the TMX board in the WDM system TMX

TMX

1

1 STM-16 OC-48 OTU1

4×ODU1

1×ODU2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

4

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

STM-16 OC-48 OTU1

M U X / D M U X

4

13.30.3 Functions and Features The TMX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 13-370.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1082



Table 13-370 Functions and features of the TMX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TMX converts signals as follows: l 4x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1<->1x OTU2



OTN function



l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports SM function for OTU1. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2. WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC encoding

TN11TMX:


l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1. l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN12TMX: l Does not support FEC on the client side, when the client side service type is OTU1. l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1083




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l The WDM-side signals from one TN11TMX board can be regenerated by another TN11LSXR board.

Regeneration board

l The WDM-side signals from one TN12TMX board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/ TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board. ALS function


Test frame

Not supported

Latency measurement

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

WDM side

Client side


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported



1084






13.30.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 13-151 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1085



Figure 13-151 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board Client side

WDM side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O





E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow In the signal flow of the TMX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX to the WDM side of the TMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU1 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 electrical signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1086



After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiples channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1087


l



13.30.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 13-152 shows the front panel of the TMX board. Figure 13-152 Front panel of the TMX board

TMX STAT ACT PROG SRV


TMX



1088



l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 13-371 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 13-371 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TMX board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



13.30.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TMX board. Table 13-372 shows the valid slots for the TN11TMX board. Table 13-372 Valid slots for TN11TMX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 13-373 shows the valid slots for the TN12TMX board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1089



Table 13-373 Valid slots for TN12TMX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

13.30.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Display of Physical Ports Table 13-374 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 13-374 Mapping between the physical ports on the TMX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1090



13.30.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TMX, refer to Table 13-375. Table 13-375 TMX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







None, OTU-1, OC-48, STM-16


Default: OTU-1 Laser Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1091



Field

Value

Description



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers.



FEC Working State


With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12TMX supports this parameter.

Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN12TMX supports this parameter.


FEC Mode



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Band Type

-



1092



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780



C, CWDM Default: C





The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only TN11TMX supports this parameter.



Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only TN12TMX supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1093



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled



Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only TN12TMX supports the parameter.

13.30.10 TMX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1094



Bo ard





TN 11T MX

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP

N/A

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP






S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN TN 12T MX

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 kmeSFP



800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 kmXFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1095



NOTE



Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 13-376 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDH services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


1096


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

30

30

30


dB

N/A

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1471 to 1611


dBm

5


dBm

0


1097



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP


dB

8.2


nm

±6.5


nm

1.0


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


1098



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-



NRZ

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10


1099



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-






NRZ

NRZ

ODB

(D)RZ

NRZ

2

2

2

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm

2

2


1100



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type







dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35

35

35

35


ps/ nm

1200

1200

4800

800

800

APD

APD

PIN

PIN


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27


1101



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type








Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-


PIN

1102



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


1103



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


dB

30

30

30


1104



Parameter

Unit



-



G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7



l

Weight: TN11TMX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN12TMX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)





TN1 1TM X


40.3

44.3

42.1

46.4


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1105


Boar d

TN1 2TM X






44.5

51.2


48.4

55.7


31.4

36.1


32.4

37.1


41

45.5


39

43.7

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1106



14

OTN Tributary Board

About This Chapter 14.1 Overview Huawei OTN product series support the use of separate tributary and line boards. Tributary and line boards work with cross-connect boards. A tributary board plus a line board together performs the functions of an OTU board. Different from an OTU board, the tributary and line boards achieve more flexible and fine-grained grooming of electrical services and offers a higher bandwidth utilization by working with a cross-connect board. 14.2 TBE TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board 14.3 TDG TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board 14.4 TDX TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board 14.5 TEM28 TEM28: 24xGE+4x10GE Ethernet tributary unit 14.6 THA THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 14.7 TOA TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 14.8 TOG TOG: 8 x GE tributary service processing board 14.9 TOM TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board 14.10 TOX TOX: 8 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 14.11 TQM TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1107



14.12 TQS TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board 14.13 TQX TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 14.14 TSC TSC: 100G tributary service processing board 14.15 TSXL TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 14.16 TTX TTX: 10 x 10G tributary service processing board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1108



14.1 Overview Huawei OTN product series support the use of separate tributary and line boards. Tributary and line boards work with cross-connect boards. A tributary board plus a line board together performs the functions of an OTU board. Different from an OTU board, the tributary and line boards achieve more flexible and fine-grained grooming of electrical services and offers a higher bandwidth utilization by working with a cross-connect board.

Positions of OTN Tributary in a WDM System A OTN tributary board receives client-side services, performs O-E conversion, maps the services into ODUk containers, and lastly sends the ODUk electrical signals to cross-connect board for centralized cross-connection. Figure 14-1 shows the positions of OTN tributary boards in a WDM system. Figure 14-1 Positions of OTN tributary boards in a WDM system Client-side services

ODUk

WDM-side services

ODUk

OTN Tributary board

Line Board

OTN Tributary board

Line Board

SC1

WDM-side ODF

Line Board

FIU

OTN Tributary board

OA

Line Board OM

OA

OD


OTN Tributary board

Types of OTN Tributary Boards The differences between different types of OTN tributary boards lie in the type and number of client-side signals, and the type and number of electrical signals sent to the cross-connect board. Table 14-1 provides the main functions of the OTN tributary boards. The THA, TOA, and TOM tributary boards can apply to multiple scenarios. For details on these scenarios, see 14.6 THA, 14.7 TOA, and 14.9 TOM. The TEM28 tributary board supports Layer 2 processing of Ethernet services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1109



Table 14-1 Main functions of OTN tributary boards Board

Client-Side Service

Backplane-Side Signal


Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number

TN11TBE

FE, GE, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN

See 14.2.3 Applicati on.

GE

16

Y

TN11TDG

GE

2

GE

2

Y

ODU1

1

TN11TDX


2

ODU1

8

Y

TN12TDX


2

ODU2, ODU2e

2

Y

TN52TDX

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e

2

ODU2, ODU2e

2

Y

TN53TDX

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e, FC800, FC1200

2

ODU2, ODU2e

2

Y

FC800

2

ODUflex

2

Y

FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, OTU1

See 14.6.3 Applicati on Overview .

ODU0

See 14.6.3 Application Overview.

Y

TN54THA

FE, GE, OTU1, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, STM-16, OC-48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, DVBASI, ESCON, FDDI

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ODU1


1110


Board

TN54TOA

TN52TOG


Client-Side Service


Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number

FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, SDI, OTU1

See 14.7.3 Applicati on Overview .

ODU0

See 14.7.3 Application Overview.

Y

ODU0

8

Y

ODU1

4

FE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, STM-4, OC-12, GE, FC100, FICON, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI, HDSDIRBR, OTU1

ODU1

3G-SDI, 3GSDIRBR, FC400, FICON4G

ODUflex

GE

8


TN11TOM

FC100, FICON, GE, STM-4, OC-12, DVBASI, ESCON, FDDI, FE, STM-1, OC-3, FC200, FICON Express, STM-16, OC-48, OTU1

See Applicati on Scenario Overview of TN11TO M.

ODU1

See Application Scenario Overview of TN11TOM.

Y

TN52TOM

FE, FDDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, GE, FC100, FICON, OTU1

See Applicati on Scenario Overview of TN52TO M.

ODU0

See Application Scenario Overview of TN52TOM.

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1111


Board


Client-Side Service


Type

Type

Max. Number

FE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, STM-4, OC-12, GE, FC100, FICON, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, HDSDI, OTU1

Max. Number


ODU1

TN55TOX

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e

8

ODU2, ODU2e

8

Y

TN56TOX

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e, FC800, FC1200

8

ODU2, ODU2e, ODUflex

8

Y

TN11TQM

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, ESCON

4

ODU1

1

Y

GE, FC100, FICON

2


1

STM-4, STM-1, OC-12, OC-3, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI

4

ODU1

1

Y

GE, FC100, FICON

2

TN12TQM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1112


Board


Client-Side Service


Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number


1

TN11TQS

STM-16, OC-48, OTU1

4

ODU1

4

Y

TN11TQX

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN

4

ODU2

4

Y

TN52TQX

STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e

4

ODU2, ODU2e

4

Y

TN53TQX


4

ODU2, ODU2e

4

Y

TN55TQX


4

ODU2, ODU2e

4

Y

FC800

4

ODUflex

4

TN54TSC

100GE, OTU4

1

ODU4

1

Y

TN11TSX L

STM-256, OC-768

1

ODU2

4

N

TN53TSX L

STM-256, OC-768, OTU3

1

ODU3

1

N

TN54TSX L

40GE

1

ODU3

1

Y

TN54TTX


10

ODU2, ODU2e

10

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1113


Board

TN55TTX

TN54TEM 28


Client-Side Service


Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e, FC800, FC1200

10

ODU2, ODU2e

10

FC800

10

ODUflex

FE, GE

24

10GE LAN, 10GE WAN

4

16 x ODU0, 8 x ODU1, 2 x ODU2, 8 x ODUflex. The total bandwidth is 20G bit/s.


Y

Y

14.2 TBE TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board

14.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TBE board is TN11.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Bo ard

Ini tial Ve rsi on





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11 TB E

V1 00 R0 03

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Variants The TN11TBE board has only one variant: TN11TBE01. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1114






Added a description explaining that the TBE board supports client 1+1 protection only when the EPL service is configured, and the RX/TX port of the board does not support client 1+1 protection. Added description of the number of virtual bridges (VBs) supported by the board.






LPT: The boards support the LPT function only when the EPL service (between Port and VCTRUNK) is configured. Client 1+1 protection: The boards support client 1+1 protection only when the EPL service (between Port and VCTRUNK) is configured. Updated description of the cross-connect capacity of the TBE board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1115



14.2.3 Application As a type of tributary board, the TBE board converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services, converges multiple flatrate GE services into one full-rate GE service, and implements transparent transmission of GEGE services.

Application Scenario 1: Converging/Deconverging 8xGE Services and a Maximum of 16 Cross-Connect GE Services to/from One 10GE Service For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-2. Figure 14-2 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system TBE

TBE 1

1 Local Client Side: GE

Local Client Side: GE

8

8 10GE

10GE

4

L4G

GE 4

4 L4G

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

L4G 4 4

GE

L4G 4

L2

L2

Application Scenario 2: Transparent Transmission of GE-GE Services For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-3. Figure 14-3 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system

TBE

TBE 1

4

L4G

GE 4

4 L4G

8

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

1

L4G 4 4

L4G 4

L2 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

GE 8 L2


1116



14.2.4 Functions and Features The TBE board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and ALS. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-2. Table 14-2 Functions and features of the TBE board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services. l Converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service. l Implements transparent transmission of GE-GE services. The reverse process is similar.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s. Supports FE optical signals and FE electrical signals. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals. 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s NOTE The TBE board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical signal. For FE/GE electrical signal transmission, it is recommended that the board be equipped with at most two GE electrical modules to facilitate fiber routing.


OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports backplane cross-connections of 16 GE services from/to the active/standby cross-connect board when the TBE board is installed in slot IU1/IU4/IU11/IU14. l Supports backplane cross-connections of 8 GE services from/to the active/standby cross-connect board when the TBE board is installed in any of slots IU2/IU3, IU5-IU8, IU12/IU13, and IU15/IU16. Each of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the board supports a maximum of 4 GE services. OptiX OSN 3800: l Supports backplane cross-connections of 16 GE services from/to another service board when the TBE board and the other service board are installed in non-paired slots. l Supports backplane cross-connections of 8 GE services from/to another service board when the TBE board and the other service board are installed in paired slots. Each of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the board supports a maximum of 4 GE services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1117




Description


l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the FE, GE, 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN.

NOTE ALS function is supported only when EPL services (port <-> VCTRUNK) are provisioned.

QinQ

supported

QoS (Quality of Service)

Supports CAR (Committed Access Rate) and CoS (Class of Service).

ETH OAM

Supports IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah-compliant ETH OAM protocol.

LAG (Link Aggregation Group)

l Supports the aggregation group protocol to aggregate services from IP port to Trunk port. l Supports manual and static link aggregation. l Supports payload equalization and non-payload equalization

VLAN broadcast

Supports VLAN-based service group broadcast.

CVLAN group port

Supports a group of CVLAN to be used as one VLAN.

Layer 2 switching

Supports the MAC address learning and aging. Supports one VB.

Flow control


EPL (Ethernet Private Line)

Provides point-to-point EPL dedicated line.

EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line)

Provides point-to-multipoint EVPL dedicated line and supports VLANbased switching.

Port working mode

10GE optical interface: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN GE optical interface: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation GE electric interface: auto-negotiation FE optical interface: 100MFULL FE electric interface: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL, auto-negotiation

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1118




Description

Protection schemes

Supports VLAN SNCP. Supports DBPS protection. Supports LAG protection. Supports DLAG protection. Supports ERPS protection. Supports client 1+1 protection. NOTE RX/TX ports do not support client 1+1 protection. Client 1+1 protection is supported only when EPL services (port <-> VCTRUNK) are configured on the board.

Test frame

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Supported NOTE The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional EPL services (port <-> VCTRUNK). When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-VLAN and Sink C-VLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.


Not supported

Loopback


MAC

PHY


MAC

PHY


MAC

PHY

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

1119




Description FE optical interface

MAC

PHY


MAC

PHY



Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, IGRP etc.


IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS

14.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module, L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1120



Figure 14-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board Backplane(service cross-connection)

GE

16

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E 8

RX8 TX1 TX2

16

E/O

TX8

Client-side GE optical module

RX

O/E

TX

E/O

8

L2 switching module

Cross-connect module 16

Client-side 10GE optical module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.

Convergence of Multiple GE Services into 10GE Services l

Positive process: – The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. – After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The eight channels of GE electrical signals are converged with a maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals groomed from the cross-connect module into one channel of 10GE electrical signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1121



– The 10GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side 10GE optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out 10GE optical signals through the TX optical interface. l

Negative process: – The client-side 10GE optical module receives 10GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. – After O/E conversion, 10GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. This module deconverges the one channel of 10GE electrical signals into multiple channels of GE electrical signals. – A maximum of eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side GE optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out GE optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces. – A maximum of 16 channels of GE electrical signals are sent to other boards by the crossconnect module through the backplane.

Convergence or Transparent Transmission of GE-to-GE Services l

Positive process: – The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. – After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. Based on the service requirement, the L2 switching module either transparently transmits the received GE signals or converges the received multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals into one channel of GE signals. – The GE signals are sent to other boards by the cross-connect module through the backplane.

l

Negative process: – The cross-connect module receives the GE electrical signals groomed from other boards through the backplane. – GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module either transparently transmits the received GE signals or deconverges the received GE signals into multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals. – The client-side GE optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE/10GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to GE/10GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

L2 switching module – Forwards service signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1122



– Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. l

Cross-connect module – Implements cross-connecting 16 GE signals to the other boards through the backplane. – The grooming service signals are GE signals. – OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals to the central working/protection cross-connect board. – OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

l


l


14.2.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-5 shows the front panel of the TBE board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1123



Figure 14-5 Front panel of the TBE board

TBE STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 TX RX

TBE



l


l


l





1124



Table 14-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TBE board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8

LC

Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used.

TX

LC

Transmits the 10 GE service signal to the client-side equipment.

RX1-RX8

LC

Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.

RX

LC

Receives the 10 GE service signal from the client-side equipment.

NOTE

It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.


14.2.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one TBE board. Table 14-4 shows the valid slots for the TBE board. Table 14-4 Valid slots for the TBE board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1125



Display of Physical Ports Table 14-5 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-5 Mapping between the physical ports on the TBE board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX/RX

3

TX1/RX1

4

TX2/RX2

5

TX3/RX3

6

TX4/RX4

7

TX5/RX5

8

TX6/RX6

9

TX7/RX7

10

TX8/RX8

11

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-6 describes the application model of the TBE board. Table 14-6 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1126



Figure 14-6 Port diagram of the TBE board Backplane

8 x GE 8 x GE

VCTRUNK1

PORT3 PORT4

101(AP1/AP1)-1

108(AP8/AP8)-1 VCTRUNK8 VCTRUNK9 109(AP9/AP9)-1

PORT11


Client side

L2 switching model

Cross-connect model


NOTE

l When the TBE board is installed in any of slots IU2/IU3, IU5-IU8, IU12/IU13, and IU15/IU16 in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, it supports backplane cross-connections of up to 8 GE services from/to the active/standby cross-connect board. Each of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the board supports a maximum of 4 GE services. l When the TBE and another service board are installed in paired slots in an OptiX OSN 3800 subrack, it supports backplane cross-connections of 8 GE services from/to the other three boards. Each of the VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK8 and VCTRUNK9-VCTRUNK16 ports on the board supports a maximum of 4 GE services.

Table 14-6 Description of NM port of the TBE board Port Name

Description

PORT3

The port corresponds to the client side optical interface RX/ TX.

PORT4-PORT11

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8.

VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16


AP1-AP16


14.2.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TBE board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The deconvergence of the 10GE services that are accessed from the client-side PORT3 port is implemented through the L2 switching module. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1127



l

Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which do not need to be set on the U2000.

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the AP port of other boards, as shown by in Figure 14-7. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence.)

l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by in Figure 14-7. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.)

Figure 14-7 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE board Client side

Client side

WDM side


201(LP/LP)-1

102(AP2/AP2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

103(AP3/AP3)-1

201(LP/LP)-3

104(AP4/AP4)-1

201(LP/LP)-4

101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 116(AP16/AP16)-1

1

TBE

2

The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards

1

The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

2


14.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TBE, refer to Table 14-7.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1128



Table 14-7 TBE parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Laser Status

Off, On Default: Off



Disabled, Enabled

LPT Enabled

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled

Default: Disabled

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function.

14.2.11 TBE Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1129



Board



TN11TB E

N/A

100 BASE-FX-10 km-eSFP 100 BASE-FX-80 km-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 kmeSFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km-XFP

NOTE


Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 14-8 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100 BASE-FX-10 km-eSFP


Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

-3

5


dBm

-11.5

-2


1130



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100 BASE-FX-10 km-eSFP



dB

9

9

Center frequency

nm

1310

1550

Eye pattern mask

-

IEEE802.3zcompliant

IEEE802.3zcompliant


-

PIN

PIN

Receiver sensitivity (EOL)

dBm

-19

-22


dBm

-3

-3


Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


1131


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


1132



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


1133




Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


1134


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12




l





TN11TBE

40.7

44.8


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1135



14.3 TDG TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board

14.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is, TN11.


Ini tial Ve rsi on





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11 TD G

V1 00 R0 01

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Variants The TN11TDG board has only one variant: TN11TDG01.

14.3.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TDG board implements conversion between two channels of GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TDG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-8.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1136



Figure 14-8 Position of the TDG board in the WDM system 1xODU1

1xODU1

TDG M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

N S 2

1xODU1

N S 2

1xODU1

GE

TDG

GE/ODU1

GE

GE/ODU1

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot or cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800: From/To slot of the mesh group

14.3.3 Functions and Features The TDG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-12. Table 14-12 Functions and features of the TDG board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Converts between two channels of GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical signals through the crossconnect board or with the board in the paired slot.




l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of an ODU1 signal and two GE signals between the TDG and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one ODU1 signal and two GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1137




Description

ALS function


PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Supported

Test frame

Supported


Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.

Loopback

WDM side Client side


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3z


1138






14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1139



Figure 14-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board Backplane (service corss-connection)

2 X GE/ 1 X ODU1

Client side RX1

O/E

RX2

TX1 TX2

E/O

GE Encapsulation and mapping module



Crossconnect module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


The client side of the TDG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the TDG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDG to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two channels of GE signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then, – If the signals are GE signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. – If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1140



The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TDG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals. – Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals. – GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals.

l


l


14.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-10 shows the front panel of the TDG board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1141



Figure 14-10 Front panel of the TDG board

TDG STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

TDG



l


l


l





1142



Table 14-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDG board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



14.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TDG board. Table 14-14 shows the valid slots for the TDG board. Table 14-14 Valid slots for the TDG board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.


IU2-IU5


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-15 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-15 Mapping between the physical ports on the TDG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1143



Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-11 describes the application model of the TDG board. Table 14-16 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-11 Port diagram of the TDG board Other line/ OTU board

Other line/ PID board Backplane

Client Side 2 x GE

201 (LP/LP)-1

3 (RX1/TX1)-1

201 (LP/LP)-2

4 (RX2/TX2)-1

ODU1

201 (LP/LP)-1

Crossconnect module


Multiplexin g module

Table 14-16 Description of NM port of the TDG board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2


LP

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1and 2.

14.3.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TDG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1144


l


During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports to implement the cross-connect grooming of GE services. The following three cross-connections can be created. – Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the TDG board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and

in Figure 14-12.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TDG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board 3

service convergence), as shown

in Figure 14-12.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the TDG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TDG board for protection and the inter-board 4

service convergence), as shown

in Figure 14-12.

NOTE


Figure 14-12 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board Client side


201(LP/LP)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

201(LP/LP)-2

Client side

WDM side

4 3(RX1/TX1)-1

201(LP/LP)-1 3

4(RX2/TX2)-1

2 1

201(LP/LP)-2

TDG The straight-through of the TDGboard

1

The internal cross-connection of the TDG board

2

The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TDG board

3 4


l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the LP port and ODU1LP port of other boards (or IN/OUT port Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1145



of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 14-13. Figure 14-13 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Line/PID board in compatible mode Line/PID board in standard mode

201(LP/LP)-1

TDG

201(LP/LP)-2

Client side The client side of the TDG board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards

14.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TDG, refer to Table 14-17. Table 14-17 TDG parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1146



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used








Enabled, Disabled

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Enabled

Default: Disabled Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. This parameter can be specified when the mapping path of a GE service is GFP-F. After the parameter is specified, data packets whose lengths exceed Max. Packet Length are discarded.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1147



Field

Value

Description









14.3.10 TDG Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11TD G

N/A

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 kmeSFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1148



NOTE


Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side Table 14-18 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (GE services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-


PIN

PIN


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


1149


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30


1150



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Eye pattern mask

-






-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27



l





TN11TDG

30

33


14.4 TDX TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board

14.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TDX board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1151




Ini tial Ve rsi ona





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11 TD X

V1 00 R0 03

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN 12 TD X

V1 00 R0 04

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN 52 TD X

880 0: V1 00 R0 02 C0 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

680 0: V1 00 R0 04 C0 4 TN 53 TD X

V1 00 R0 06 C0 1

a: If there is a substitution relationship between two boards and one of the boards is used to replace the other board, the device initial version supported by the replaced board takes effect. For example, when you use TN53TDX to replace TN52TDX in 8800, TN53TDX can be supported by V100R002C00.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1152



Variants Each of the TN11TDX, TN12TDX, TN52TDX, and TN53TDX boards has only one variant identified by the suffix 01 in the board name, for example, TN11TDX01.

Differences Between Versions Function: Boar d

CrossConnet Granularity

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock

Client-side Services OTU2/ OTU2e

FC800/ FC1200

TN11 TDX

ODU1

N

N

N

N

TN12 TDX

ODU2/ ODU2e

N

N

N

N

TN52 TDX

ODU2/ ODU2e

N

N

Y

N

TN53 TDX

ODU2/ ODU2e/ ODUflex

Y

Y

Y

Y

Specification: l

The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 14.4.10 TDX Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Table 14-20 Substitution rules of the TDX board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TDX

None

-

TN12TDX

TN53TDX

The TN53TDX can be created as 12TDX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the TN12TDX. NOTE The TN53TDX board can substitute for the TN12TDX board only after the software upgrade to Optix OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01 SPC300 or later.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1153



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN52TDX

TN53TDX

The TN53TDX can be created as 52TDX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the TN52TDX.

TN53TDX

None

-




Added the support for latency measurement on the TN53TDX board.

Function enhancement: E2E ODUk latency measurement is provided to facilitate querying latency data without using a tester.

Added the support for the board model in standard mode.

Function enhancement: Compared with the board model in compatible mode, the board model in standard mode has fewer trail levels and is easy to operate, reducing the maintenance costs.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added dynamic presentation of logical ports on the board.


Deleted the support for the colored 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd/even)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP module on the client side.



1154





Changed the FC800 service module of the TDX board from 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmXFP to 800-SM-LC-L-10 kmXFP.


Added the TN53TDX board.

The TN53TDX board, a 2 x 10G tributary service processing board, is added to support the ODUflex, IEEE 1588v2, and physical-layer clock functions.

14.4.3 Application As a type of tributary board, the TDX board implements conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and eight channels of ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals or two ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex electrical signals using cross-connections. For the position of the TDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-14 and Figure 14-15. Figure 14-14 Position of the TN11TDX board in the WDM system 8xODU1

RX1

8xODU1

TDX

TDX

TX1

N D 2

TX2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU1

8×ODU1

10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 RX2 OC-192

M U X / D M U X

N D 2

TX1 RX110GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 TX2 OC-192

RX2

Figure 14-15 Position of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX board in the WDM system 2xODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex

TDX

N D 2

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

N D 2


2xODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

TDX 2xODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex

10GE LAN RX1 10GE WAN STM-64 TX1 OC-192 OTU2 RX2 OTU2e FC800 TX2 FC1200


TX1 10GE LAN RX1 10GE WAN TX2 RX2

STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e FC800 FC1200

1155



Table 14-21 Client-side service mapping path supported by the board Board

Client-Side Service

Backplane-Side Service

TN11TD X

10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192

ODU1

TN12TD X


ODU2

10GE LAN

ODU2e

10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2

ODU2

10GE LAN/OTU2e

ODU2e

10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/FC800

ODU2

10GE LAN/OTU2e/FC1200

ODU2e

FC800

ODUflex

TN52TD X

TN53TD X

14.4.4 Functions and Features The TDX board is mainly used to achieve cross-connections at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, see Table 14-22.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1156



Table 14-22 Functions and features of the TDX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TDX converts signals as follows: l TN11TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<>8xODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals l TN12TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<->2xODU2 2x10GE LAN<->2xODU2e l TN52TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2<->2xODU2 2x10GE LAN/OTU2e<->2xODU2e l TN53TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/FC800<>2xODU2 2x10GE LAN/OTU2e/FC1200<->2xODU2e 2xFC800<->2xODUflex


STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s NOTE The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same. Therefore, For TN11TDX/TN12TDX/TN52TDX board, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1157




Description


OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. l TN53TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TDX board and the crossconnect board using the backplane. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11TDX: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU1 signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot using the backplane. l TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11TDX: Supports the grooming of eight channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43. l Supports PM functions for ODU2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ESC function

Supported by the TN52TDX/TN53TDX when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e.

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC coding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the service type is OTU2/OTU2e.



1158




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN). NOTE TN11TDX only supports Poisson mode. TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX only supports Bursty mode.

ALS function


Test frame

Supports the test frame function when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

Latency measurement

The TN53TDX board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.

IEEE 1588v2

The TN53TDX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

Physical clock

TN53TDX: l When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. l When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission. TN52TDX: When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supported by the TN52TDX/TN53TDX.


1159




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection (TN12TDX/TN52TDX/ TN53TDX). NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services, and 10GE WAN services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.


l TN11TDX: doesn't support this parameter

Port MTU


l TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G)

NOTE when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

Loopback



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic


1160






14.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-16 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1161



Figure 14-16 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDX board Backplane(service cross-connection)

n X ODUk

Client side RX1 RX2


O/E

10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module

TX1 TX2


E/O




1588v2 module



Control CPU

Memory

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module Required voltage

Fuse



SCC

NOTE

Only the TN53TDX board supports FC encapsulation and mapping module. Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board supports the client-side OTN processing module. Only the TN53TDX board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module. In Figure 14-16, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TDX board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 14-23 shows the service cross-connections from the TDX board to the backplane. Table 14-23 Service cross-connections from the TDX board to the backplane

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Service Cross-connection

TN11T DX

A maximum of 8xODU1


1162



Board


TN12T DX/ TN52T DX

A maximum of 2xODU2/ODU2e

TN53T DX

A maximum of 2xODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 ports, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODUk signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/ OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, OTN processing module and cross-connect module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1163



Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/ SONET performance. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors 10GE LAN performance. – FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function. NOTE

FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped into ODU2e payload area.

– Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames signals and processes overheads in ODUk signals. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the TDX and the cross-connect board through the backplane. l

1588v2 module According to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, the module transmits the clock information of the clock board to the next NE or extracts the clock information from the service board and then transmits the clock information to the clock board.

l


l


14.4.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-17 and Figure 14-18 show the front panel of the TDX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1164



Figure 14-17 Front panel of the TN11TDX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1165



Figure 14-18 Front panel of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX board



l


l


l





1166



Table 14-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDX board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX2

LC


RX1-RX2

LC



14.4.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one TDX board. Table 14-25 shows the valid slots for the TN11TDX board. Table 14-25 Valid slots for the TN11TDX board Product

Valid slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 14-26 shows the valid slots for the TN12TDX board. Table 14-26 Valid slots for the TN12TDX board Product

Valid slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Table 14-27 shows the valid slots for the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board. Table 14-27 Valid slots for the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


1167




Display of Physical Ports Table 14-28 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-28 Mapping between the physical ports on the TDX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP/ 151(imp1/imp1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The TDX board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-29 Port diagram and port description

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description

Board Name Displayed on the NMS

TN11T DX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-19

Table 14-30

TDX

TN12T DX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-20

Table 14-30

12TDX

TN52T DX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-20

Table 14-30

52TDX


1168



Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


TN53T DX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-21

Table 14-30

53TDX

Standar d mode

Figure 14-22

Table 14-30

53TDX(STND)

Figure 14-19 Port diagram of the TN11TDX(compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 8 x ODU1

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

151(imp1/imp1)-1 151(imp1/imp1)-2 151(imp1/imp1)-3 151(imp1/imp1)-4 152(imp2/imp2)-1 152(imp2/imp2)-2 152(imp2/imp2)-3 152(imp2/imp2)-4

Figure 14-20 Port diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX(compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 2 x ODU2/ODU2e

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1169



Figure 14-21 Port diagram of the TN53TDX (compatible mode) Other line/ PID board

Backplane 2 x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1



Figure 14-22 Port diagram of the TN53TDX (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 2x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

3(RX1/TX1)-1

4(RX2/TX2)-1


Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS. NOTE The TN53TDX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring cross-connections for the board, ODUflex Timeslot is 7.


Table 14-30 Description of NMS port of the TDX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2


imp1-imp2

Inverse multiplexing ports. The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1170



Port Name

Description

ClientLP1-ClientLP2

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.

14.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TDX, refer to Table 14-31. Table 14-31 TDX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1171



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

l TN11TDX: 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64


Default: 10GE LAN l TN12TDX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64 Default: None l TN52TDX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: None l TN53TDX: None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64, CBR_10G, FC800, FC1200 Default: None Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)

9953.28 to 10312.50 Default: /

Sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to CBR_10G. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1172



Field

Value

Description

Port Mapping

l TN11TDX: doesn't support this parameter

Specifies the service mapping mode on a port.

l TN12TDX/TN52TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G)

See Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.

l TN53TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) NOTE For the TN12TDX: only the ClientLP1 port supports MAC transparent mapping (10.7G).

Laser Status




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1173



Field

Value

Description


FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS, BW_WDM_Defect, FW_ODUk_CSF


Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDMside receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.



Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1174



Field

Value

Description




Default: 0s

NOTE Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.

Enabled, Disabled


LPT Enabled

Default: Disabled Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT


With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers.

Determines whether to set REMOTE_FAULT as a laser shutdown condition. NOTE l Only the TN53TDX supports this parameter. l This parameter takes effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. l For the TN53TDX boards, when routers support REMOTE_FAULT as a switching condition and the TDX boards are cascaded on the client side, perform the following operations: l If the bit transparent transmission mode is configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None, no matter whether a protection scheme is configured or not. l If the MAC transparent transmission mode and clientside 1+1 protection are configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None. The non-protection scenario of MAC transparent transmission is not supported.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1175



Field

Value

Description

Service Mode




When the board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode. NOTE Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.

PAUSE Frame Flow Control


Determines whether to enable the switch of the flow control. NOTE Only TN11TDX supports this parameter.

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600

Sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. For a 10GE LAN service, when the port mapping mode is Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G), data packets will be transparently transmitted if their lengths exceed Max. Packet Length. When the port mapping mode is MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), data packets will be discarded if their lengths exceed Max. Packet Length. NOTE For the TN52TDX and TN53TDXboard, when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1176



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.

FEC Working State


Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.

FEC Mode

FEC Default: FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1177



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled



Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TDX.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1178



Field

Value

Description

Insert Code Type

l When Service Type is STM-64:

Applies to fault detection and location scenarios when the service type is STM-64. When the tributary or line board at the upstream site is faulty or when the line board at the downstream site is faulty, users can specify the output code type for the tributary board at the downstream site using this parameter.

– PN11, MS_AIS – Default: PN11 l When Service Type is 10GE LAN and port mapping mode is MAC transparent mapping (10.7G): – Quick insert, Delayed insert – Default: Quick insert

When the service type is 10GE LAN, the value Quick insert applies to a scenario in which no protection is configured on the WDM equipment while protection is configured for the router that connects to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, quick protection switching can be achieved on the router. The value Delayed insert applies to a scenario in which protection is configured for the WDM equipment and the router connected to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, the WDM equipment preferentially performs protection switching in case of a fault. If the fault is rectified, the router does not perform protection switching. If the fault persists, then the router performs protection switching. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TDX.

Port Working Mode

ODU2 non-convergence mode (OTU2/Any>ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port) Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/ Any->ODU2->OTU2)

Specifies the working mode of the interface on the board depending the actual application scenario and service mapping path. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TDX.

14.4.10 TDX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1179



Board



TN11TDX/ TN12TDX/ TN52TDX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km-XFP

TN53TDX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km-XFP 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP

NOTE

Margins exist between the default input power low threshold and the receiver sensitivity and between the default input power high threshold and the overload point. These margins ensure that the system can report an input power low or high alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or overload point. NOTE

The 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP, 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP, and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals. The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.

Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 14-32 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10 Gbit/s services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1180


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


1181


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12


NOTE

The 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP optical module can be used to access FC800 signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP


Gbit/s

8.5

Optical source type

-

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1290 to 1330


dBm

-1


dBm

-6


dB

6


1182



Parameter

Unit



-



-

PIN


nm

1260 to 1355


dBm

-14.4


dBm

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l

Weight: – TN11TDX: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.) – TN12TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) – TN52TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) – TN53TDX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)




TN11TDX

78.0

80.0

TN12TDX

37.4

40.7

TN52TDX

57.3

63.0

TN53TDX

25.0

27.5


14.5 TEM28 TEM28: 24xGE+4x10GE Ethernet tributary unit

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1183



14.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TEM28 board is TN54.


Ini tial Ve rsi on





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 54 TE M2 8

V1 00 R0 06 C0 3

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Variants The TN54TEM28 board has only one variant: TN54TEM28. The TN54TEM28 board variant is the board itself.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added a description explaining that the TEM28 board supports client 1+1 protection only when the EPL service is configured. Added description of the number of virtual bridges (VBs) supported by the board.


Added the support for the ERPS function on the TEM28 board.



1184





Added the TN54TEM28 board.

The EoO feature is supported, and the TN54TEM28 board, serving as a 24 x GE + 4 x 10GE tributary board, is added.

14.5.3 Application The TEM28 board is a tributary board. It implements conversion between 24 channels of GE optical signals, GE electrical signals, or FE electrical signals, with four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN optical signals and ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex electrical signals with bandwidth not greater than 20 Gbit/s. For the position of the TEM28 board in the WDM system, seeFigure 14-23. Figure 14-23 Position of the TN54TEM28 board in the WDM system 2xOTU2 RX1

TEM28

RX5 TX5

GE/FE RX28 TX28

L2

TEM28

N D 2

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

N D 2

16×ODU0/8×ODUflex/ 8×ODU1/2×ODU2

RX4 TX4

16×ODU0/8×ODUflex /8×ODU1/2×ODU2

10 GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

TX1

2xOTU2 RX1 TX1 RX4

10 GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

TX4

L2

RX5 TX5

GE/FE RX28 TX28

NOTE

The RX1/TX1 - RX4/TX4 optical ports are 10GE optical ports and are capable of processing 10GE LAN/10GE WAN services. The other ports on the board are GE optical ports or GE/FE electrical ports, that are capable of processing GE and FE services.

14.5.4 Functions and Features The TEM28 board supports electrical cross-connections, L2 layer switching and the QinQ function. Table 14-34 and Table 14-35 list the functions and features of the TEM28 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1185



Table 14-34 OTN Functions and features of the TEM28 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Coverts 24 channels of GE optical signals, GE electrical signals, or FE electrical signals, and four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN optical signals to ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex electrical signals with bandwidth not greater than 20 Gbit/s. l The reverse process is similar.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s. Supports FE optical signals and FE electrical signals. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals. 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s NOTE The TEM28 board transmits FE or GE electrical signals, GE optical signals, or 10GE optical signals on the client side. When the TEM28 board transmits GE or FE electrical signals, to facilitate fiber routing, you are advised to install electrical modules at the RX27/TX27 and RX28/ TX28 ports.


Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals, or 8 channels of ODUflex signals, or 8 channels of ODU1 signals, or 2 channels of ODU2 signals between the TEM28 board and a crossconnect board by using the backplane.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G. 709 and ITU-T G.7041. l Supports PM function for ODU0. l Supports PM function for ODU1. l Supports PM function for ODU2. l Supports PM function for ODUflex.

LPT function

Supported NOTE The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional EPL services (port <-> VCTRUNK). When the LPT function is enabled, Source CVLAN andSink C-VLAN of an EPL service must be left empty. FE/GE electrical ports of the TEM28 board do not support the LPT function.

FEC encoding

Not supported.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1186




Description

ALS function


PRBS

Not supported

Physical clock

Supports synchronous Ethernet. NOTE FE/GE electrical ports of the TEM28 board do not support the physical clock function. The board does not support the physical clock when it is provisioned with 10G WAN services.

Test frame

Supported


Supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. NOTE Client 1+1 protection is supported only when EPL services (port <-> VCTRUNK) are configured on the board.

Loopback


MAC

PHY


MAC

PHY

GE electrical port

MAC

PHY

FE electrical port

MAC

PHY

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Not supported

Inloop

Supported


1187




Description Outloop



IEEE 802.3


ITU-T G.703

Supported

IEEE 802.3z

ITU-T G.652 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.873.1 G.709 ITU-T ITU-T G.655(1996) ITU-T G.671 ITU-T G.7041 IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.692

Table 14-35 Data features of the TEM28 board Function and Feature

Description


Port working mode

10GE optical port: 10G FULL LAN, 10G FULL WAN (SONET) GE optical port: 1000M FUL, auto-negotiation GE electrical port: auto-negotiation FE electrical port: auto-negotiation

Multicast

Layer 2 switching

MFL


VLAN multicast

Supported

IGMP snooping V2

Supported

l Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D. l Supports one VB. l Supports MAC address learning and aging. l Supports STP/RSTP. l Supports 128k MAC addresses.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1188




Description

Ethernet service


Protection schemes

ERPS

Supported

LAG

l Supports the IEEE 802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP ports. l Supports manual and static LAGs. l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.


QoS

DLAG

Supported

MC-LAG

Supported

ETH-OAM

Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE 802.3ah and IEEE 802.1ag.

RMON

Supported

l Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS). l Supports IEEE802.1p. l Supports DSCP.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Flow control




IEEE 802.1q VLAN All Layer 2 protocols such as xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, and PPP etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, IGRP etc.


1189




Description Protocols or standards for service processing (performanc e monitoring)

ITU-T Recommendation G.8032/Y.1344 IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM RFC 4541 IGMP Snooping IEEE 802.1ad IEEE 802.1d IEEE 802.1s IEEE 802.1w IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3ab IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.8261/Y.1361 ITU-T G.8262

14.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TEM28 board consists of the client-side optical module, L2 switching module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TEM28 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1190



Figure 14-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the TEM28 board

Client side RX1 RX2

Backplane(service cross-connection)

16×ODU0/8×ODU1/ 2×ODU2/8×ODUflex

O/E

RX28 TX1 TX2

E/O

TX28



L2 switching module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage

Backplane DC power supply

SCC (controlled by SCC)

NOTE

When used to receive GE or FE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform power level conversion, and then sends the signals to L2 switching for processing.

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TEM28 board. The transmit direction is the direction from the client side of the TEM28 to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The RX1 to RX28 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client equipment and perform O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations, such as convergence. After convergence, the module outputs a maximum of 16 channels of electrical signals to the OTN processing module. The OTN processing module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, and then outputs a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex signals or two channels of ODU2 signals to the backplane.

l

Receive direction The OTN processing module receives a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex signals or two channels of ODU2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1191



signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2/ODU2e/ODU1/ODU0/ODUflex framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends the electrical signal to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module deconverges the electrical signals and sends 28 channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the 28 channels of electrical signals, and then outputs 28 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX28 optical interfaces. NOTE

The RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN/10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports, GE electrical ports and FE electrical ports, that can process GE and FE services. NOTE


Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of 28 channels of FE/GE/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from 28 channels of the internal electrical signals to FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l

OTN processing module Frames ODUk signals, processes overheads in ODUk signals.

l


l


14.5.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TEM28 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1192



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-25 shows the front panel of the TEM28 board. Figure 14-25 Front panel of the TEM28 board TEM28 STAT ACT PROG SRV

5~28: GE 1~4: 10GE TX RX TX RX TX RX RX TX TX RX

5

21

6

22

7

23

8

24

9

25

10

26

11

27

12

28 3 4

13 20 1 2

TEM28



l


l


l





1193



Table 14-36 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TEM28 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX28a

LC


TX1-TX28a

LC


a: The RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 optical ports are 10GE optical interfaces. The other optical interfaces on the board are GE optical interfaces, GE electrical interfaces and FE electrical interfaces.


14.5.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TEM28 board. Table 14-37 shows the valid slots for the TEM28 board. Table 14-37 Valid slots for the TN54TEM28 board Product

Valid slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

The online signal bus on the TEM28 board connects to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. The slot number of the TEM28 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the TEM28 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1194



Display of Physical Ports Table 14-38 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-38 Mapping between the physical ports on the TEM28 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1 to TX28/RX28

3 to 30

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-26 shows the application model of the TEM28 board. Table 14-39 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-26 Port diagram of the TEM28 board Other line/ PID board

Other line/ PID board

Backplane 8xODU0

3(RX1/TX1)-1

101(AP1/AP1)-1

6(RX4/TX4)-1

PORT6 TRUNK8 108(AP8/AP8)-1

7(RX5/TX5)-1

PORT7

30(RX28/TX28)-1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

PORT3 TRUNK1

TRUNK9 109(AP9/AP9)-1

TRUNK16 116(AP16/AP16)-1 PORT30

8xODU0/8xODU1/ 2xODU2/8xODUflex





L2 swiching module




1195



Table 14-39 Descriptions of the ports on the TEM28 board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1RX28/TX28

Client-side ports. The RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 ports are used as 10GE optical ports to process 10GE LAN/10GE WAN services. The remaining ports are used as GE optical ports, GE electrical ports, or FE electrical ports to process GE or FE services.

PORT3PORT30


VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16

Internal virtual ports. One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 : The maximum bandwidth for the TRUNK1-TRUNK8 ports is 10 Gbit/s, with each port allocated a maximum of 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. VCTRUNK9 to VCTRUNK16: The maximum bandwidth for the TRUNK9-TRUNK16 ports is 20 Gbit/s, with each port allocated a maximum of 10 Gbit/s bandwidth. VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16: The total bandwidth for these ports is 20 Gbit/s.

AP1-AP16


ClientLP1ClientLP16

Internal logical ports. Ports 201(ClienLP1/ClienLP1)-1 to 208(ClienLP8/ClienLP8)-1 support a maximum of eight ODU0 cross-connections with the maximum bandwidth of 10 Gbit/s. Ports 209(ClienLP9/ClienLP9)-1 to 216(ClienLP16/ClienLP16)-1 support a maximum of eight ODU0, eight ODU1, two ODU2, or eight ODUflex cross-connections with the maximum bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s. The TEM28 board supports simultaneous transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODUflex signals with the maximum bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s. When creating ODUflex cross-connections, specify the number of ODUflex timeslots based on the service rate. The number of ODUflex timeslots ranges from 1 to 8 and the rate of each timeslot is 1.25 Gbit/s.

14.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1196




Value

Description


-



-


Laser Status




Disabled, Enabled


FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS , BW_WDM_Defect, FW_ODUk_CSF

Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1197



Field

Value

Description










Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 14-41 TAG Attributes (Internal Port/External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16. External ports are PORT3 to PORT30.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1198



Field

Value

Description

TAG



Default: Tag Aware


Default VLAN ID



VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1199



Field

Value

Description

Entry Detection




Value

Description

Port

-

Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16. External ports are PORT3 to PORT30.

Port Attributes

UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware Default: UNI

A UNI port supports Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. An S-Aware port determines that the packets do not carry C-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have SVLAN tags. A C-Aware port determines that the packets do not carry S-VLAN tags and processes only the packets that have CVLAN tags.

Table 14-43 Basic Attributes (External Port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Enabled/Disabled

Enabled, Disabled

When the parameter value is set to Enabled for a port, the port is enabled and services are provisioned. When the parameter value is set to Disabled for a port, the services on the port are not processed. Therefore, you must enable a port when you configure services on the port.

Default: Disabled

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1200



Field

Value

Description

Working Mode

PORT3 to PORT6:

Indicates the working modes of an Ethernet port. Autonegotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended.

l 10G FULL_Duplex LAN, 10G FULL_Duplex LAN, 10G FULL_Duplex LAN (SONET) l Default: 10G FULL_Duplex LAN PORT7 to PORT30: l 1000M FULL_Duplex, AutoNegotiation

NOTE In the configuration process, ensure that working modes of the connected ports are consistent; otherwise, services are unavailable.

l Default: AutoNegotiation Maximum Frame Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 1522

Specifies the maximum frame length supported by an Ethernet port. Unit: Byte. Click E.8 Maximum Frame Length to view the details.


-


MAC LoopBack


The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.


PHY LoopBack

Inloop, Outloop, NonLoopback Default: Non-Loopback

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1201




Value

Description

Port

-





Default: Disable


Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Default: Disable

Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode. Click E.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to view the details.


Value

Description

Port

-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Click E.3 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression to view the details.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1202



Field

Value

Description


10% to 100%, with a step of 10%

If broadcast packet suppression is enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast packets exceeds specified times (suppression threshold) the total bandwidth.

Default: 30%

Click E.2 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold to view the details. Loop Detection


Specifies whether to enable port self-looped detection. When the parameter is set to Enabled for an external port, a loopback on the port can be automatically detected. When Loop Port Shutdown is set to Enabled, the self-looped port is automatically shutdown, preventing the port from forwarding data packets that are looped back.

Loop Port Shutdown


Specifies whether to block a self-looped port. When the parameter is set to Enabled for an external port, the system will block the port if the port is self-looped. When the parameter is set to Disabled, the system will not take any action on the selflooped port. NOTE The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is available only when Loop Detection is set to Enabled.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1203



Field

Value

Description


PORT3 to PORT6:

Indicates the rate threshold for an external port to receive traffic.

l 0–10000 l Default: 10000 PORT7 to PORT30: l 0–1000 l Default: 1000

Port Rates Time Slice (m)

0 to 30 Default: 0

Flow Monitor


Flow Monitor Interval (min)

1 to 30 Default: 15

Indicates the traffic rate time window of an external port. Indicates whether to monitor zero traffic. Click E.4 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes) to view the details. Indicates the interval for monitoring zero traffic.

Table 14-46 Encapsulation/Mapping (Internal Port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16.


1204



Field

Value

Description

Encapsulation/Mapping

GFP-F, GFP-T

Indicates the mapping protocol for encapsulation of VCTRUNK port data.

Default: GFP-F

NOTE GFP-F: indicates that the upperlayer PDUs of Ethernet MAC frames and the GFP PDUs are mapped in one-to-one manner. GFP-T: indicates that 8B/10B payloads are mapped to GFP in transparent mapping mode to achieve low-delay transmission. When services are encapsulated into ODU0, GFP-T and GFP-F are supported. When services are encapsulated into ODU1, ODU2, and ODUflex, only GFP-F is supported. The mapping protocols for GE services on the transmit end and receive end must be the same.

Scrambling Mode[X43+1]

Scramble

Default: Scrambling Mode [X43+1] ExtensionHeader Option

No Default: No

Check Field Length

FCS32, No Default: FCS32

FCS Calculated Bit Sequence

Big endian Default: Big endian

Indicates whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation protocol. Displays the extension header option. Indicates the length of the CRC field of the mapping protocol. Indicates the sequence of storing the bits in the CRC field in the FCS frame of the mapping protocol.

Table 14-47 Advanced attributes (Internal Port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Internal ports are VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16.


1205



Field

Value

Description

Loop Detection

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled

When the parameter is set to Enabled for port, a loopback on the port can be automatically detected. When Loop Port Shutdown is set to Enabled, the self-looped port is automatically shutdown, preventing the port from forwarding data packets that are looped back. Loop Port Shutdown



Flow Monitor


Flow Monitor Interval (min)

1 to 30 Default: 15

Indicates whether to monitor zero traffic. Click E.4 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes) to view the details. Indicates the interval for monitoring zero traffic.

14.5.10 TEM28 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1206



Board



TN54TE M28

N/A

1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km-eSFP (I-850-LC) 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP (I-1310-LC) 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-ZR-80 km-SFP+

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


nm

830 to 860

1270 to 1355


dBm

-2.5

-3


dBm

-9.5

-9.5


dB

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-


Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN


PIN 1207



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km-eSFP (I-850LC)



nm

770 to 860

1260 to 1620


dBm

-17

-20


dBm

0

-3

NOTE

The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.


Unit

Optical Module Type


10G BASELR-10 km-SFP +

10G BASEZR-80 km-SFP +


Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

0.5

4


dBm

-7.3

-8.2

0


dB

3

3.5

9


1208



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




≤-30

≤-30


dBm

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)

-24


dBm

-1

0.5

-7

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-27



l





TN54TEM28

105

113


14.6 THA THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1209



14.6.1 Version Description The available functional version of the THA board is TN54.


Ini tial Ve rsi on





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 54 TH A

V1 00 R0 06 C0 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Variants The TN54THA board has only one variant: TN54THA01.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1310/RX1490 nm-15 km-eSFP and 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1490/ RX1310 nm-15 km-eSFP single-fiber bidirectional optical modules.



1210





Added the multi-mode 2.125Gbit/s Multirate-0.5kmeSFP optical module.




Added the support for latency measurement.






Added the support for optical modules 1000BASE-BX10-U, 1000BASE-BX10-D, 1000BASE-BX-U, and 1000BASE-BX-D on boards.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added service package configuration methods. Added the support for IEEE 1588v2.





1211



14.6.3 Application Overview As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the THA at the client side is 40 Gbit/s. Table 14-50 provides the application scenarios for the THA board. Table 14-50 Application scenarios for the THA board Scenario


Mapping Path

Maximum Output Capacity (Backplane Side)

Port Working Mode

Scenario 1

l 16 x FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVB-ASI/ ESCON

Anya>ODU0

16 x ODU0

ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any>ODU0)

l Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(TTTGMP) or GE(GFP-T). Scenario 2

16 x STM–16/OC-48/FC200/ FICON Express/OTU1

Anya>ODU1

16 x ODU1


Scenario 3

l 16 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/ESCON/ STM-4/OC-12/GE/FC100/ FICON/STM-16/FC200/ FICON Express

n x Anya>ODU1

(2 to 16) x ODU1

ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1)

l Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-T). NOTE Each of the RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8 and RX9/TX9–RX16/TX16 port groups supports mutual conversion between a maximum of 8 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/ s to 2.2 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals. Each port in each group either converges multiple clientside services into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals or maps one client-side service into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1212



Scenario


Mapping Path


Port Working Mode

Scenario 4

16 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>ODU0

32x ODU0

ODU1_ODU 0 mode (OTU1>ODU1>ODU0)

a: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.

14.6.4 Functions and Features The THA board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-51. Table 14-51 Functions and features of the THA board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

THA converts signals as follows: l 16 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s) <-> 16 x ODU0. l 16 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) <-> 16 x ODU1. l 16 x (125Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<->2 to 16 x ODU1. l 16 x OTU1<->32 x ODU0.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1213




Description


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE The THA board supports access of DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical signals, a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the optical module of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications. The digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a digital video O/E converter by themselves.


Cross-connects a maximum of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board.

OTN function

l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l Supports TCM and PM functions for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions for OTU1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

This function is supported only when the THA board receives FE or GE services on its client side.

NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1


1214




Description

FEC coding

Supports forward error correction (FEC) on the client side that complies with ITU-T G.709, only when the service type is OTU1.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


Test frame

Supported NOTE The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFPT).


The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU1.

IEEE 1588v2

Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client service is GE multiplexed using the GFP-T procedure (the service type is displayed as GE (GFP-T) on the U2000). NOTE The TX8/RX8 and TX16/RX16 optical ports cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.

Physical clock

When receiving GE(GFP-T) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission. When receiving GE(TTT-GMP) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.


Supported.

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection. ODU0 tributary SNCP protection is supported only in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1215




Description


Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(TTT-GMP) or GE(GFP-T).


Auto-Negotiation

Loopback

Channel Loopback

1000M Full-Duplex

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop Outloop

Supported NOTE The ODU0 channel loopback is supported only when port working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1216




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1217




Description Protocols or standards for service processing (performanc e monitoring)


14.6.5 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS.

Display of Physical Ports Table 14-52 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-52 Mapping between the physical ports on the THA board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7


1218



Physical Port


TX8/RX8

10

TX9/RX9

11

TX10/RX10

12

TX11/RX11

13

TX12/RX12

14

TX13/RX13

15

TX14/RX14

16

TX15/RX15

17

TX16/RX16

18

NOTE


14.6.6 THA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0) Application The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at a rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 14-27. Figure 14-27 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 1) 16xODU0 2xOTU2

8×ODU0

N D 2 16

16

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N D 2 16

16

TX1 RX1

8×ODU0

16×Any

16×ODU0

RX16

1

16×Any

1

RX1 FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBASI/ESCON TX16

THA

THA

16×ODU0

TX1

2xOTU2 16xODU0

FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBASI/ESCON TX16 RX16

NOTE

When the TN54THA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the TN52TOM board in ODU0 non-cascading mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) are interconnected, transmitting FE, FDDI, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, and ESCON services is not supported.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1219



Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The THA board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-53 Port diagram and port description Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-28

Table 14-54

THA

Standard mode

Figure 14-29

Table 14-55

THA (STND)

Figure 14-28 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 16xODU0 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

18(RX16/TX16)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2


NOTE

When creating electrical cross-connections between the ClientLP port of the THA board and other boards's ODU0LP ports, the source optical channel must be set to 1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1220






Table 14-54 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0)) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1 to RX16/TX16


ClientLP1 to ClientLP16

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.

Figure 14-29 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 16xODU0 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

18(RX16/TX16)-1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS.




1221




Description

RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16


Configuration of Cross-connection l

On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0).

l

Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. NOTE

If all the 16 client–side ports are used to receive and transmit GE(TTT-GMP) services, users can configure the 16*GE for 16*ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the Service Type to GE(TTTGMP) for the 16 ports.

l

When the THA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-30.

NOTE


– On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see l

2

in Figure 14-30.

When the THA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1


in Figure 14-31.

1222



Figure 14-30 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (compatible mode) WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

Line/PID board in standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

Other board 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2


Line/PID board in compatible mode


Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1

1


2


THA 16(TX14/RX14)-1

17(TX15/RX15)-1


18(TX16/RX16)-1




The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1223



Figure 14-31 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (standard mode) WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

Line/PID board in standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2




Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1

1

4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1

THA

17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1 Cross-connect module The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

When the THA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical port on the THA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the THA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the THA board. When creating electrical cross-connections between the ClientLP port of the THA board and other boards's ODU0LP ports, the source optical channel must be set to 1.

14.6.7 THA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1) Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1224



Application The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at a rate in the range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 14-32. Figure 14-32 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 2) 16xODU1 4xOTU2 TX1

THA

8×ODU0

16

16

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N Q 2 16

TX1 RX1

16

16×Any

N Q 2

M U X / D M U X

16×ODU1 8×ODU0

16×Any

RX16

1

16×ODU1

TX16

THA 1

RX1 STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

4xOTU2 16xODU1

TX16

STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

RX16

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The THA board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-56 Port diagram and port description

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-33

Table 14-57

THA

Standard mode

Figure 14-34

Table 14-58

THA (STND)


1225



Figure 14-33 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 16xODU1 3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1

16(RX14/TX14)-1 17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1


214(ClientLP14/ClientLP14)-1 215(ClientLP15/ClientLP15)-1 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1





Table 14-57 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16


ClientLP1–ClientLP16

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.


1226



Figure 14-34 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (standard mode)

Other line/PID board Backplane 16xODU1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

18(RX16/TX16)-1






Description

RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16




l

Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1227


14 OTN Tributary Board NOTE

If all the 16 client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16 services, users can configure the 16 * STM-16/OC-48–>ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and Service Type to STM-16 for the 16 ports.

l

When the THA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see

l

1

in Figure 14-35.

When the THA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-36.

Figure 14-35 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

Line/PID board in standard mode





4(TX2/RX2)-1


5(TX3/RX3)-1


1

THA 16(TX14/RX14)-1


17(TX15/RX15)-1


18(TX16/RX16)-1




The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1228



Figure 14-36 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) WDM side


Line/PID board in standard mode Line/PID board in compatible mode


Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

1

5(TX3/RX3)-1

THA

17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1 Cross-connect module

The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

14.6.8 THA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1) Application Each of the RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8 and RX9/TX9–RX16/TX16 port groups supports mutual conversion between a maximum of 8 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.2 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, as shown in Figure 14-37. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1229



Figure 14-37 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 3) 4xOTU2 (2~16)xODU1

(2~16)xODU1 4xOTU2

N Q 2

8×Any

M U X / D M U X

8×Any

N Q 2

M U X / D M U X

(1~8)×ODU1 (1~8)×ODU1

RX1 FE/FDDI/GE /FC100/ FC200/DVBASI/ESCON/STM1/STM-4/STM-16/OC3/OC-12/FICON/FICON TX16 Express RX16

THA

THA

(1~8)×ODU1 (1~8)×ODU1 8×Any 8×Any

TX1

TX1 RX1

FE/FDDI/GE /FC100/ FC200/DVBASI/ESCON/STM1/STM-4/STM-16/OCTX16 3/OC-12/FICON/FICON Express RX16

NOTE

The client signals received by the RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8 ports cannot be encapsulated together with the client signals received by the RX9/TX9–RX16/TX16 ports.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The THA board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-59 Port diagram and port description

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-38

Table 14-60

54THA

Standard mode

Figure 14-39

Table 14-61

54THA (STND)


1230



Figure 14-38 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane （2-16）xODU1

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8

17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1




Multiplexing module

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS

Table 14-60 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any>ODU1))

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16





1231



Figure 14-39 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane （2~16）xODU1 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1







216(ConvGroup16/ ConvGroup16)-1

17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1





Multiplexing module

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS

Table 14-61 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any>ODU1)) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16


ConvGroup1–ConvGroup8



On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any>ODU1).

l


l

When the THA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ClientLP port. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-40.

– Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP ports. For details, see Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

2

in Figure 14-40.


1232


l


When the THA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ConvGroup port. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-41.

– Create cross-connections between the local ConvGroup port and other boards' ODU1LP ports. For details, see

2

in Figure 14-41.

NOTE

When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured on the first optical channel of each ClientLP. When STM-16 services are received on the client side, these services must be provisioned on the first optical channel of each ClientLP port, and the client-side ports must map to intra-board logical ports. For example, services from 3(RX1/TX1)-1 must be cross-connected to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, services from 4(TX2/ RX2)-1 must be cross-connected to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1, and so on. The first eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the first eight LP ports; the last eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the last eight LP ports.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1233



Figure 14-40 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Line/PID board in 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4





4(TX2/RX2)-1


5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

1


2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1



17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1


THA 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1



Multiplexing module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1234



Figure 14-41 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4




Client side 201(ConvGroup1/Conv Group1)-1

201(ConvGroup1/Conv Group1)-1

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

1

5(TX3/RX3)-1


6(TX4/RX4)-1

202(ConvGroup2/Conv Group2)-1 202(ConvGroup2/Conv Group2)-8 216(ConvGroup16/Conv Group16)-1

2 202(ConvGroup2/Conv Group2)-1

THA 216(ConvGroup16/Conv Group16)-1

18(TX16/RX16)-1

216(ConvGroup16/Conv Group16)-8 Cross-connect module Multiplexing module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

14.6.9 THA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0) Application The THA board performs conversion between 16 OTU1 optical signals and 32 ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 14-42.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1235



Figure 14-42 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 4) 32xODU0 4xOTU2 THA

RX1

1

1

8×ODU0

32

1

1

RX1

N Q 2 32

16×OTU1

32

M U X / D M U X

16×ODU1

N Q 2

M U X / D M U X

32×ODU0 8×ODU0

32×ODU0

TX16

16×ODU1

16×OTU1

RX16

TX1

THA

TX1

OTU1

4xOTU2 32xODU0

32

OTU1 TX16 RX16

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The THA board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-62 Port diagram and port description Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-43

Table 14-63

54THA

Standard mode

Figure 14-44

Table 14-64

54THA(STND)

Figure 14-43 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 32xODU0




161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1236





Multiplexing module



Table 14-63 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)) Port Name

Description



ClientLP1 to ClientLP16


ODU0LP1 to ODU0LP16


Figure 14-44 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 32xODU0


3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1237



Multiplexing module

Table 14-64 Description of NM port of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)) Port Name

Description


These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. The paths are numbered 1 to 2.


On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0).

l


l

When the THA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ODU0LP port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see

l

1

in Figure 14-45.

When the THA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX-1, RX/ TX-2 port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1

in Figure 14-46.

1238



Figure 14-45 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (compatible mode) WDM side


Line/PID board in standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2


164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 Cross-connect module



4(TX2/RX2)-1



17(TX15/RX15)-1


18(TX16/RX16)-1


THA


1


Multiplexing module


The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1239



Figure 14-46 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (standard mode) WDM side


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2





Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-2 4(TX2/RX2)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-2

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

17(TX15/RX15)-1

17(TX15/RX15)-1 17(TX15/RX15)-2 18(TX16/RX16)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-2

18(TX16/RX16)-1

THA

1

Multiplexing module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

14.6.10 Working Principle and Signal Flow The THA board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, 1588v2 module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-47 shows the block diagram of the functions of the THA board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1240



Figure 14-47 Functional modules and signal flow of the THA board Backplane (service cross-connection)

RX1 RX2

O/E


RX8 TX1 TX2

16X ODU0/8X ODU1

16X ODU0/8X ODU1

Client side

E/O


Crossconnect module

TX8

Signal processing module RX9 RX10

O/E

1588v2 module


RX16 TX9 TX10

E/O

TX16



Crossconnect module


Control Memory

Communication

CPU



Required voltage

SCC


In the signal flow of the THA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the THA to the backplane of the THA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 16 channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX16 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the 16 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 16 channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1241



The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs 16 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX16 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the THA and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 or ODU0 signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/ ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l

1588v2 module – The 1588v2 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l


14.6.11 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the THA board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1242



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-48 shows the front panel of the THA board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1243



Figure 14-48 Front panel of the THA board SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657A2 光纤

THA STAT ACT PROG SRV RX 1

2 TX

TX 15

16 RX

SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657A2 光纤

RX 1

TX 15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2 TX

16 RX

1244



NOTE




l


l


l



Interfaces Table 14-65 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 14-65 Types and functions of the interfaces on the THA board Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX16

LC

Receives optical signals.

TX1-TX16

LC

Transmits optical signals.


14.6.12 Valid Slots One slot houses one THA board. Table 14-66 shows the valid slots for the THA board. NOTE

To facilitate maintenance of optical modules and fibers, do not install a THA board in a slot at the edge of the subrack or next to the slot housing the THA/SLH41/EGSH/TN55EG16 board.

Table 14-66 Valid slots for the THA board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid slots


IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU33, IU36IU42, IU45-IU51, IU54-IU67


1245



Product

Valid slots




IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17

14.6.13 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. Table 14-67 describes the parameters of the THA board. Table 14-67 THA parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Query or set the path Loopback. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)


1246



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE(TTTGMP), GE(GFP-T), OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16


Default: None

NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-GMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format. NOTE The service type varies according to the port working mode. For details, see 14.6.3 Application Overview.


l Channel 1 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 216 (ClientLP16/ ClientLP16): 125 to 2200 l Channels 2 to 8 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 216 (ClientLP16/ ClientLP16): 125 to 1250


Default: / Off, On

Laser Status

Default: Off



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1247



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect








Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1248



Field

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled




FEC Working State











Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1249



Field

Value

Description




Default: None




NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU-1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1250



Field

Value

Description

Insert Code Type

Idle Code, None Idle Code

To broadcast FE/GE services, set the parameter to Idle Code, as shown in the following figure. In other scenarios, set the parameter to None Idle Code. In the following figure, unidirectional GE/FE broadcast services are broadcasted from site A to sites B and C. When the tributary board at site A receives FE and GE services and the GE services adopt TTT-GMP or GFP-T encapsulation, set Insert Code Type to Idle Code to keep the port of the peer switch in Up state.

Default: None Idle Code

Site B

GE/FE

Switch

Tributary board

Line board

Site A GE/FE

Site C

GE/FE

Switch

Port Working Mode

ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0), NONE Mode (Not for port)

Line board

Tributary board

Tributary Idle code Switch board

Line board


Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0)

14.6.14 THA Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1251



Board



TN54TH A

N/A

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1310/RX1490 nm-15 kmeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1490/RX1310 nm-15 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP (I-1310-LC) 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP

NOTE



S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FDDI and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value S-16.1 -15 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

15 km (9.3 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1260 to 1360


dBm

0


dBm

-5


1252



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

S-16.1 -15 km-eSFP


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1–compliant


-

PIN


nm

1270 to 1580


dBm

-18


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1253



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12

NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1310/RX1490 nm-15 km-eSFP and 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1490/RX1310 nm-15 kmeSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM–1, OC–4, STM–4, OC–12, STM–16, OC–48, FC200, FC100, GE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FE, FDDI, FICON, and FICON Express signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1254



Table 14-70 Client-side pluggable 2.5G optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional transmissions) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1310/ RX1490 nm-15 kmeSFP

2.67 Gbit/s MultirateTX1490/RX1310 nm-15 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


km

15

15


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

0

0


dBm

-5

-5


dB

8.2

8.2


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-18

-18


dBm

0

0

NOTE

1000 BASE-LX-10 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, FICON, FDDI, STM-4, OC-48, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1255




Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP (I-1310-LC)

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


nm

1270 to 1355


dBm

-3


dBm

-9.5


dB

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN


nm

1260 to 1620


dBm

-20


dBm

-3

NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP module can be used to access GE, FC100, FC200, FE signals.

Table 14-72 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (2.125 Gbit/s services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)


nm


770 to 860 1256



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-2.5


dBm

-9.5


dB

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN


nm

770 to 860


dBm

-17


dBm

0



l





TN54THA

35

40


14.7 TOA TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

14.7.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TOA board is TN54.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1257




Ini tial Ve rsi on





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 54 TO A

V1 00 R0 06 C0 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Variants The TN54TOA board has only one variant: TN54TOA01.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the support for latency measurement on the TOA board.




Deleted the support for FE electrical ports on the TOA board.



1258





Added the support for the HDSDIRBR service on the TOA board.

Function enhancement: A new client-side service type is supported.

Added the support for optical modules 1000BASE-BX10-U, 1000BASE-BX10-D, 1000BASE-BX-U, and 1000BASE-BX-D on the TOA board.




Added the support for mapping FC400 and 3G-SDI services to ODUflex services. Added service package configuration methods.


Added the support for IEEE 1588v2. Added dynamic presentation of logical ports on the board.


14.7.3 Application Overview As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the TOA at the client side is 20 Gbit/s. Table 14-73 provides the application scenarios for the TOA board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1259



Table 14-73 Application scenarios for the TOA board Applicat ion Scenario


Mapping Path


Port Working Mode

Scenario 1

l 8 x FE/FDDI/ GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/ OC-12/ FC100/ FICON/DVBASI/ESCON/ SDI

Anya<->ODU0

8 x ODU0


l Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(TTTGMP) or GE (GFP-T). Scenario 2

8 x HD-SDI/ STM–16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

Anya<->ODU1

8 x ODU1


Scenario 3

l 8 x FE/FDDI/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/ SDI/ESCON/ STM-4/ OC-12/GE/ FC100/ FICON/ STM-16/GE/ FC100/ FC200/ FICON Express/HDSDI/HDSDIRBR

Anya<->ODU1

(1 to 8) x ODU1

ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1)

l Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFPT).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1260



Applicat ion Scenario


Mapping Path


Port Working Mode

Scenario 4

8 x OTU1

OTU1<>ODU1<>ODU0

16 x ODU0

ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1>ODU0)

Scenario 5

5 x 3G-SDI/3GSDIRBR

3G-SDI/3GSDIRBR<>ODUflex

5 x ODUflex

4 x FC400/ FICON4G

FC400/ FICON4G<>ODUflex

4 x ODUflex

ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any>ODUflex)

a:"Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.

14.7.4 Functions and Features The TOA board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-74. Table 14-74 Functions and features of the TOA board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TOA converts signals as follows: l 8 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s signals) <-> 8 x ODU0. l 8 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s signals) <-> 8 x ODU1. l 8 x (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals) <-> 1 to 8 x ODU1. l 8 x OTU1 <-> 16 x ODU0. l 5 x 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR <-> 5 x ODUflex. l 4 x FC400/FICON4G <-> 4 x ODUflex.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1261




Description


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals. OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s HD-SDIRBR: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49/1.001 Gbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s 3G-SDIRBR: Video service at a rate of 2.97/1.001 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE The TOA board supports GE optical signals and electrical signals. For GE electrical signal transmission, it is recommended that the board be equipped with at most two GE electrical modules to facilitate fiber routing. The TOA board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, 3G-SDIRBR, and DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical signals, a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the optical module of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications. The digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a digital video O/E converter by themselves. NOTE The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed identically. For the FICON4G service, you can configure it as the FC400 service on the U2000.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Cross-connects a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or 8 channels of ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board. Cross-connects a maximum of five channels of ODUflex signals by using buses on the backplane and the cross-connect board.


1262




Description

OTN function

l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l Supports TCM and PM functions for ODU1. l Supports TCM and PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports PM function for ODUflex. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex. l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions for OTU1.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

This function is supported only when the TOA board receives FE or GE services on its client side.

FEC coding


Alarms and performanc e events monitoring


NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC–3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1.

l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


Test frame

Supported NOTE The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFPT).

Latency measureme nt

The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1263




Description

IEEE 1588v2

Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client service is GE multiplexed using the GFP-T procedure (the service type is displayed as GE (GFP-T) on the U2000). Supports the BC and OC modes when the client-side service type is OTU1. NOTE When receiving GE (GFP-T) services, the TX8/RX8 optical port cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals. When receiving OTU1 services, the board only supports frequency synchronization using the receiving and transmitting timestamps in Sync messages of the IEEE 1588v2 protocol. It does not support frequency synchronization using the physical clock.

Physical clock

When receiving GE(GFP-T) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission. When receiving GE(TTT-GMP) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. In ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0), when the client-side service type is OTU1, synchronous Ethernet processing is supported but synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission is not supported.


Supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection. When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection. ODU0 tributary SNCP protection is supported only in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(TTT-GMP) or GE(GFP-T).


GE(TTT-GMP):

Loopback

Channel Loopback

Auto-Negotiation 1000M Full-Duplex Inloop

Supported


1264




Description

Client side

Outloop

NOTE The ODU0 channel loopback is supported only when port working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

Inloop

Supported



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1265




Description



14.7.5 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS This section describes the physical ports displayed on the NMS. Table 14-75 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-75 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOA board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10


1266



NOTE


14.7.6 TOA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0) Application The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at a rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 14-49. Figure 14-49 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 1) 8xODU0 1xOTU2 TX1

TOA 1

8×ODU0

8

8

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N S 2 8

8

TX1 RX1

8×Any

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0 8×ODU0

8×Any

8×ODU0

RX8

TOA 1

RX1 FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBASI/ESCON/SDI TX8

1xOTU2 8xODU0

FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ FC100/FICON/DVBTX8 ASI/ESCON/SDI RX8

NOTE

When the TN54TOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the TN52TOM board in ODU0 non-cascading mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) are interconnected, transmitting FE, FDDI, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, and SDI services is not supported.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The TOA board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-76 Port diagram and port description

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-50

Table 14-77

54TOA


1267



Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Standard mode

Figure 14-51

Table 14-78

54TOA (STND)

Figure 14-50 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 8xODU0 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1




Cross-connect module Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS.

Table 14-77 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0))

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8





1268



Figure 14-51 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 8xODU0 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1




Table 14-78 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0)) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8




l


If all the eight client–side ports are used to receive and transmit GE(TTT-GMP) services, users can configure the 8 * GE->8 * ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the Service Type to GE (TTT-GMP) for the eight ports.

l

When the TOA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For details, see

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1

in Figure 14-52.


1269


14 OTN Tributary Board NOTE


– On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see l

2

in Figure 14-52.

When the TOA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the RX/TX port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-53.

Figure 14-52 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (compatible mode) WDM side


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2






1


5(TX3/RX3)-1


6(TX4/RX4)-1


2

7(TX5/RX5)-1

TOA

8(TX6/RX6)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1


10(TX8/RX8)-1




The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1270



Figure 14-53 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)) (standard mode) WDM side


Line/PID board in 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2





1

5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

TOA

7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1 Cross-connect module The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

When the TOA board connects to a TOM board that uses channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical port on the TOA board must be cross-connected to channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the TOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the TOA board. When creating electrical cross-connections between the ClientLP port of the TOA board and other boards's ODU0LP ports, the source optical channel must be set to 1.

14.7.7 TOA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1) Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1271



Application The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at a rate in the range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 14-54. Figure 14-54 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 2) 8xODU1 2xOTU2 TX1

TOA

8×ODU0

8

8

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N D 2 8

8

TX1 RX1

8×Any

N D 2

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU1 8×ODU0

8×Any RX8

1

8×ODU1

TX8

TOA 1

RX1 HD-SDI/STM–16/ OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

2xOTU2 8xODU1

TX8

HD-SDI/STM–16/ OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/OTU1

RX8

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The TOA board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-79 Port diagram and port description

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-55

Table 14-80

TOA

Standard mode

Figure 14-56

Table 14-81

TOA(STND)


1272



Figure 14-55 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode)

Other line/PID board

Backplane 8xODU1 3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1






Table 14-80 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8





1273



Figure 14-56 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 8xODU1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1




Table 14-81 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1)) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8




l


If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16 services, users can configure the 8 * STM-16/OC-48->8 * ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and Service Type to STM-16 for the eight ports.

l

When the TOA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1


in Figure 14-57. 1274


l


When the TOA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-58.

Figure 14-57 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4






4(TX2/RX2)-1


5(TX3/RX3)-1


6(TX4/RX4)-1


7(TX5/RX5)-1


8(TX6/RX6)-1


9(TX7/RX7)-1


10(TX8/RX8)-1



1

TOA


The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1275



Figure 14-58 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) WDM side





1

5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

TOA

7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1


The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

14.7.8 TOA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1) Application The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at a rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, as shown in Figure 14-59.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1276



Figure 14-59 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 3) (1~8)xODU1 2xOTU2

TX1

TOA

TOA

RX1 8×ODU0

RX8

M U X / D M U X

N D 2

TX1 FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC3/STM-16/ DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/ STM-4/OC12/GE/FC100/ FICON/FC200/ TX8 FICON Express/SDI/ RX8 HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR

RX1

8×Any

N D 2

M U X / D M U X

(1~8)×ODU1 8×ODU0

8×Any

TX8

(1~8)×ODU1

FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC3/STM-16/ DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/ STM-4/OC12/GE/FC100/ FICON/FC200/ FICON Express/SDI/ HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR

2xOTU2 (1~8)xODU1

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The TOA board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-82 Port diagram and port description Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-60

Table 14-83

54TOA

Standard mode

Figure 14-61

Table 14-84

54TOA (STND)

Figure 14-60 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane （1-8）xODU1




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1277





Multiplexing module


Table 14-83 Description of NM port of the TOA board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8




Figure 14-61 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane （1~8）xODU1 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-1








7(RX5/TX5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1



10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8)-8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Multiplexing module



1278



Table 14-84 Description of NM port of the TOA board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8


ConvGroup1–ConvGroup8



On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1).

l


l

When the TOA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ClientLP port. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-62.

– Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP 2

ports. For details, see l

in Figure 14-62.

When the TOA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ConvGroup port. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-62.

– Create cross-connections between the local ConvGroup port and other boards' ODU1LP ports. For details, see

2

in Figure 14-62.

NOTE

When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured on the first optical channel of each ClientLP. When STM-16 services are received on the client side, these services must be provisioned on the first optical channel of each ClientLP port, and the client-side ports must map to intra-board logical ports. For example, services from 3(RX1/TX1)-1 must be cross-connected to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, services from 4(TX2/ RX2)-1 must be cross-connected to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1, and so on.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1279



Figure 14-62 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (compatible mode) WDM side


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Line/PID board in compatibl e mode





4(TX2/RX2)-1


5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1

1


2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1



TOA

8(TX6/RX6)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1





Multiplexing module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1280



Figure 14-63 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (standard mode) WDM side






Client side 201(ConvGroup1/Conv Group1)-1

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 1

5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1

201(ConvGroup1/Conv Group1)-8 202(ConvGroup2/Conv Group2)-1

201(ConvGroup1/Conv Group1)-1 2


TOA


8(TX6/RX6)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1



10(TX8/RX8)-1 208(ConvGroup8/Conv Group8)-8 Multiplexing module Cross-connect module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

14.7.9 TOA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0) Application The TOA board performs conversion between eight OTU1 optical signals and 16 ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 14-64.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1281



Figure 14-64 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 4) 16xODU0 2xOTU2 TOA

RX1

TOA 1

TX1

1

8×ODU0

16

1

1

N D 2 16

RX1 TX1

16

8×OTU1

16

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU1

N D 2

M U X / D M U X

16×ODU0 8×ODU0

16×ODU0

TX8

8×ODU1

RX8

8×OTU1

OTU1

2xOTU2 16xODU0

OTU1 RX8 TX8

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The TOA board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 14-85 Port diagram and port description Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-65

Table 14-86

54TOA

Standard mode

Figure 14-66

Table 14-87

54TOA (STND)

Figure 14-65 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 16xODU0





3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1282





Multiplexing module


Service processing module Table 14-86 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8




ODU0LP1–ODU0LP8


Figure 14-66 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (standard mode)

Other line/PID board Backplane 16xODU0

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1283




Multiplexing module

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS. Table 14-87 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. The paths are numbered 1 to 2.


On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0).

l


l

When the TOA board works in compatible mode: – U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ODU0LP port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see

l

1

in Figure 14-67.

When the TOA board works in standard mode: – U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX-1, RX/TX-2 port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1

in Figure 14-68.

1284



Figure 14-67 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (compatible mode) WDM side


Line/PID board in standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2


164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 Cross-connect module



4(TX2/RX2)-1


9(TX9/RX9)-1


10(TX10/RX10)-1


TOA



1

167(ODU0LP7/ODU0LP7)-1 167(ODU0LP7/ODU0LP7)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2 Multiplexing module


The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1285



Figure 14-68 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (standard mode) WDM side






Cross-connect module Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-2 4(TX2/RX2)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-2

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1

1

TOA 9(TX7/RX7)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-2 10(TX8/RX8)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-2

9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

Multiplexing module


The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

14.7.10 TOA scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex) Application The TOA board performs conversion between five 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR optical signals and five ODUflex electrical signals, see Figure 14-69.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1286



Figure 14-69 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR<->ODUflex) 5xODUflex 4xOTU2 TOA

TX1

RX8

1 N Q 2

5

5

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N Q 2 5

5

TX1

5x3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR

TX8

1

5xODUflex

5

TOA

5xODUflex

3G-SDI 3G-SDIRBR

5x3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR

RX1

4xOTU2 5xODUflex

RX1 3G-SDI 3G-SDIRBR

5

TX8 RX8

NOTE

Each 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR service uses three timeslots of an ODUflex, requiring the total bandwidth of 3.75 Gbit/s.

The TOA board performs conversion between four FC400/FICON4G optical signals and four ODUflex electrical signals, see Figure 14-70. Figure 14-70 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (FC400<->ODUflex) 4xODUflex 4xOTU2

TX1

1 N Q 2

4

4

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

1

1

N Q 2 4

4

4xFC400/FICON4G

RX8

1

4xODUflex

TX8

TOA

4xODUflex

4xFC400/ 4 FICON4G

TOA 4xFC400/FICON4G

RX1

4xOTU2 4xODUflex

TX1 RX1 4

4xFC400/ FICON4G

TX8 RX8

NOTE

Each FC400/FICON4G service uses four timeslots of an ODUflex, requiring the total bandwidth of 5 Gbit/s.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is a logical port of the board. The TOA board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1287



Table 14-88 Port diagram and port description Mode

Port Diagram

Port Description


Compatible mode

Figure 14-71

Table 14-89

54TOA

Standard mode

Figure 14-72

Table 14-90

54TOA (STND)

Figure 14-71 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex)) (compatible mode) Other line board

Backplane 5xODUflex 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1

8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1







Table 14-89 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex))

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8



1288



Port Name

Description



Figure 14-72 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex)) (standard mode)

Other line board Backplane 5xODUflex 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1




Table 14-90 Description of NM port of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex))

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1–RX8/TX8



1289




On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex).

l


l

When the TOA board works in compatible mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODUflex ports. For details, see

l

2

in Figure 14-73.

When the TOA board works in standard mode: – On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and other boards' ODUflex ports. For details, see

1

in Figure 14-74.

NOTE

When configuring a cross-connection, ODUflex Timeslot is 3 if the client service type is 3G-SDI/3GSDIRBR, and ODUflex Timeslot is 4 if the client service type is FC400/FICON4G.

Figure 14-73 ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) (compatible mode) WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1

Line board

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2


1


2


5(TX3/RX3)-1


6(TX4/RX4)-1


7(TX5/RX5)-1


8(TX6/RX6)-1


9(TX7/RX7)-1


10(TX8/RX8)-1


TOA

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1290



Figure 14-74 ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) (standard mode) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

Line board

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 Cross-connect module


1

5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1

TOA

8(TX6/RX6)-1


The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

14.7.11 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TOA board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, 1588v2 module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-75 shows the block diagram of the functions of the TOA board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1291



Figure 14-75 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOA board Backplane (service crossconnection)

16xODU0/8xODU1/5xODUflex

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E


RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8



Crossconnect module

1588 v2 module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Backplane SCC

NOTE


In the signal flow of the TOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOA to the backplane of the TOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the 8 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals, or 8 channels of ODU1 or 5 channels of ODUflex signals to the backplane.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0, or ODU1, or ODUflex framing, demapping

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1292



and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs 8 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOA and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1, or ODU0, or ODUflex signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/ ODU1/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board

l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1293



14.7.12 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOA board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-76 shows the front panel of the TOA board. Figure 14-76 Front panel of the TOA board



l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1294


l




Interfaces Table 14-91 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-91 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOA board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8

LC

Transmits the service signal.

RX1-RX8

LC

Receives the service signal.


14.7.13 Valid Slots One slot houses one TOA board. Table 14-92 shows the valid slots for the TOA board. Table 14-92 Valid slots for the TOA board Product

Valid slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

14.7.14 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. Table 14-93 describes the parameters of the TOA board. Table 14-93 TOA parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Parameter

Value

Description


-



1295



Parameter

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status








Service Type

None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE (TTT-GMP), GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, HDSDIRBR, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, 3G-SDI, 3GSDIRBR Default: None

Query or set the path Loopback. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-GMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format. NOTE The service type varies according to the port working mode. For details, see 14.7.3 Application Overview. The FICON4G service and the FC400 service are processed identically. For the FICON4G service, you can configure it as the FC400 service on the U2000.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1296



Parameter

Value

Description


l Channel 1 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 208 (ClientLP8/ ClientLP8): 125 to 2200


l Channels 2 to 8 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 208 (ClientLP8/ ClientLP8): 125 to 1250

A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services.

Default: / Off, On

Laser Status

Default: Off



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1297



Parameter

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect








Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1298



Parameter

Value

Description

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled




FEC Working State




-


Band Type

-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780



C, CWDM Default: C


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1299



Parameter

Value

Description












PRBS Test Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1300



Parameter

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU-1.

Insert Code Type

Idle Code, None Idle Code Default: None Idle Code

To broadcast FE/GE services, set the parameter to Idle Code, as shown in the following figure. In other scenarios, set the parameter to None Idle Code. In the following figure, unidirectional GE/FE broadcast services are broadcasted from site A to sites B and C. When the tributary board at site A receives FE and GE services and the GE services adopt TTT-GMP or GFP-T encapsulation, set Insert Code Type to Idle Code to keep the port of the peer switch in Up state. Site B

GE/FE

Switch

Tributary board

Line board

Site A GE/FE

GE/FE

Switch

Port Working Mode

ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port)

Line board

Site C

Tributary board

Tributary Idle code Switch board

Line board


Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1301



14.7.15 TOA Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54TO A

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP 0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate 10 km-Video eSFP 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km-eSFP 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP

NOTE



I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1302




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant

APD

APD

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


1303



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


1304



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12

NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and FE signals. 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE and DVB-ASI signals. NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1305




Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3


1306



NOTE

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals. 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN


APD

1307



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


1308



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

SDI module can be used to access DVB-ASI, SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, and 3G-SDIRBR signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Service rate

Gbit/s

0.1 to 3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1290 to 1330


dBm

0


dBm

-7


dB

5


1309



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



nm

3.0


-

PIN


nm

1260 to 1620


dBm

-22


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km-eSFP and 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access FC400, and FICON4G signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

830 to 860

1270 to 1355


dBm

-1.1

-1


dBm

-9

-8.4

Eye pattern mask

-



1310



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




-

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1260 to 1600


dBm

-15

-18


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12



l





TN54TOA

23

25


14.8 TOG TOG: 8 x GE tributary service processing board

14.8.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TOG board is TN52.



1311



Bo ard

Ini tial Ve rsi on





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 52 TO G

880 0: V1 00 R0 02 C0 2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

680 0/3 800 : V1 00 R0 04 C0 4

Variants The TN52TOG board has only one variant: TN52TOG01.

14.8.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TOG board implements conversion between 8 channels of GE optical signals or GE electrical signals and 4 channels of ODU1 electrical signals or 8 channels of ODU0 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-77 and Figure 14-78. Figure 14-77 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 8800) 8xODU0 RX1

TOG

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

N S 2 8

8

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X


TX1 1

1

N S 2

RX1

8xODU0

TX8

1

8xODU0

RX8

TOG 1

TX1 GE

8xODU0

8

8

GE RX1 TX1

1312



Figure 14-78 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) 4xODU1

4xODU1

TOG

TOG

RX1 1

TX1

TX8

8

1

N S 2 8

TX1 RX1

8xODU0

8

1

4xODU1

N S 2

4xODU1

RX8

8xODU0

GE

1

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

8

GE TX8 RX8

14.8.3 Functions and Features The TOG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-101. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0.

Table 14-101 Functions and features of the TOG board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TOG converts signals as follows: l 8 x GE<->8 x ODU0 l 8 x GE<->4 x ODU1


GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals. NOTE The TOG board supports GE optical signals and electrical signals. For GE electrical signal transmission, it is recommended that the board be equipped with at most two GE electrical modules to facilitate fiber routing.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1313




Description


OptiX OSN 8800: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0 signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the backplane. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing defined in the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G. 709. l Supports PM functions for ODU1/ODU0.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE The TOG board supports remote monitoring (RMON) only at the receive end .

ALS function


PRBS test function

Not supported.

LPT function

Supported

Test frame

Not supported.

Latency measurement

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client service is GE multiplexed using the GFP-T procedure (the service type is displayed as GE(GFP-T) on the U2000). NOTE The TOG board supports only two channels IEEE 1588v2 signals.

Physical clock

When receiving GE(GFP-T) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission. When receiving GE(TTT-GMP) services on the client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1314




Description


Supported

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP.


Supports encapsulation of GE services in GE(GFP-T) or GE(TTT-GMP).


1000M Full-Duplex

Loopback

WDM side


Client side


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


IEEE 802.3z



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1315



14.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TOG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-79 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board. Figure 14-79 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board n X ODUk

Backplane (service cross-connection)

Client side RX1 RX2

O/E 8

RX8 TX1 TX2

E/O

TX8


8

GE Service OTN encapsulation processing and mapping module module

Crossconnect module

1588v2

module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


( Backplane controlled by SCC ) SCC

NOTE

When used to receive GE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform power level conversion, and then sends the signals to the service encapsulation and mapping module for processing. In Figure 14-79, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TOG board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 14-102 shows the service cross-connections from the TOG board to the backplane. Table 14-102 Service cross-connections from the TOG board to the backplane

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board


TN52T OG

A maximum of 8xODU0/4xODU1


1316



Signal Flow In the signal flow of the TOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOG to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs 8 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of 8 channels of GE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from 8 channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of a GE service encapsulation and mapping module, an OTN processing module and a cross-connect module. – GE service encapsulation and mapping module It encapsulates multiple GE signals and maps the GE signals to the ODUk payload area and performs the reverse of the preceding process. It supports the function of GE performance monitoring. – OTN processing module Frames ODUk signals and processes overheads in ODUk signals. – Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOG and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1317



from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. NOTE

Two channels IEEE 1588v2 signals are supported by the TOG.

l


l


14.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-80 shows the TOG front panel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1318



Figure 14-80 Front panel of the TOG board

TOG STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8

TOG



l


l


l





1319



Table 14-103 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOG board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8

LC


RX1-RX8

LC



14.8.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TOG board. Table 14-104 shows the valid slots for the TOG board. Table 14-104 Valid slots for TOG board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-105 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-105 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


TX1/RX1


1320



Physical Port


TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-81 and Figure 14-82 show the application model of the TOG board.Table 14-106 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-81 Port diagram of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 8800) Other line/ PID board Backplane 8xODU0


3(RX1/TX1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)-1


10(RX8/TX8)-1 Client Side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1321



Figure 14-82 Port diagram of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 6800) Other line/ PID board

Backplane 4xODU1

201(ClientLP1 /ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/Cl ientLP2)-1

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-1

207(ClientLP7/C lientLP7)-1

9(RX7/TX7)-1


208(ClientLP8/C lientLP8)-1

10(RX8/TX8)-1 Client Side

Crossconnect module


Service processi ng module

Multiplexing module

Table 14-106 Description of NM port of the TOG board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


ClientLP1-ClientLP8


ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4


14.8.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU0 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU0LP port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-83. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1322


l


During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU1LP port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 14-84.

Figure 14-83 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU0 level) WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2


164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2


IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

TOG 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

Figure 14-84 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU1 level) WDM side



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 IN/OUT-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3

Line board in compatible mode

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Client side


TOG 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1

The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

14.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1323



For parameters of the TOG, refer to Table 14-107. Table 14-107 TOG parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







GE(GFP-T), GE(TTTGMP)


Default: GE(GFP-T)

NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTT-GMP), the encapsulation format is TTT-GMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-GMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.

Laser Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1324



Field

Value

Description


Disabled, Enabled




Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.




Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1325



Field

Value

Description







1000M Full-Duplex Default: 1000M FullDuplex

Determines whether to enable the link passthrough (LPT) function. Sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. Auto-negotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain. This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to Ethernet service. The Ethernet working mode must be consistent with the mode set for the upstream services of the customer. If two ports are mutually protected, the Ethernet working mode must be consistent on the active and standby ports.




14.8.10 TOG Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1326



Board



TN52TO G

N/A

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


1327


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


1328



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


-



40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27



l

Weight: 0.85 kg (1.87 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1329






TN52TOG

41.8

46.0


14.9 TOM TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board

14.9.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TOM board are TN11 and TN52.


Ini tial Ve rsi on





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11 TO M

V1 00 R0 04 C0 1

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1330



Bo ard

Ini tial Ve rsi on





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 52 TO M

680 0/3 800 : V1 00 R0 04 C0 4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

880 0: V1 00 R0 02 C0 0

Variants The TN11TOM/TN52TOM board has only one variant: TN11TOM01/TN52TOM01.

Differences Between Versions Function: Board

Cross-Connet Granularity

Application Scenario

TN11TOM

ODU1

TN52TOM

ODU0/ODU1

The TN52TOM and TN11TOM support different application scenario. For details, see 14.9.3 Application Overview.

Specification: l

The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 14.9.27 TOM Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The TOM boards of different versions cannot replace each other. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1331






The TN52TOM board added the support for optical modules 2.67 Gbit/s MultirateTX1310/RX1490 nm-15 kmeSFP and 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1490/RX1310 nm-15 km-eSFP.




The TN52TOM board added the support for optical modules 1000BASE-BX10-U, 1000BASE-BX10-D, 1000BASE-BX-U, and 1000BASE-BX-D.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


The TN52TOM board added service package configuration methods.

Function enhancement: Applying the same service type to multiple ports improves the service configuration efficiency.

Deleted the support for the SDI and HD-SDI services on the TN11TOM board.





1332



14.9.3 Application Overview Concept: Tributary Mode and Tributary-Line Mode A TOM board can be used as a tributary board or a tributary-line board. In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces. Figure 14-85 shows the signal flow of the tributary TOM board and Figure 14-86 shows the signal flow of the tributary-line TOM board. Figure 14-85 Signal flow of the tributary TOM board Client-side crossconnection

AnyLP crossconnection Output (ODU0/ODU1 electrical signals)

Input (Client services) Encapsulation and mapping

Figure 14-86 Signal flow of the tributary-line TOM board Client-side crossconnection

AnyLP crossconnection

WDM-side crossconnection Output (OTU1 optical signals)

Input (Client services) Encapsulation and mapping

NOTE

AnyLP cross-connections are supported only in application scenarios 8, 9, and 12 of TN52TOM.

Concept: Cascading Mode and Non-cascading Mode TOM boards can work either in cascading or non-cascading mode. In cascading mode, the total client service rate for each TOM board must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s. In non-cascading mode, the total client service rate for each TOM board must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s. When working in cascading mode, each TOM board can map a maximum of eight client services into one ODU0/ODU1 signal. When working in non-cascading mode, it can map a maximum of four client services into one ODU0/ODU1 signal. l

The cascading mode is recommended if more than four client services have to be mapped into one ODU1 or ODU0 signal.

l

The non-cascading mode is recommended if four or less client services have to be mapped into one ODU1 or ODU0 signal.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1333



Application Scenario Overview of TN52TOM The TN52TOM board can be used in different application scenarios. The total service access rate of the eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack supports TN52TOM scenario 2, TN52TOM scenario 4, TN52TOM scenario 6, and TN52TOM scenario 10.

Table 14-110 TN52TOM board in cascading mode App licat ion Sce nari o

Tribu tary or Tribu taryLine Board


Mapping Path

Maxi mum Outp ut Capa city

Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks

TN5 2TO M scen ario 1

Tribut ary board

l 8 x FE/FDDI/DVBASI/SDI/ESCON

Anyc>ODU0

2x ODU0

ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1])

Supported only by the OptiX OSN 8800.

NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Anyc>ODU0>ODU1

1x ODU1

ODU0 tributary mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1])


Tribut aryline board


Anyc>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1

1x OTU1

ODU0 tributaryline mode (Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1)

The board uses only one transmitter and one receiver on the WDM side.

l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON

l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Supported only by the OptiX OSN 6800 and 3800.

Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

1334


App licat ion Sce nari o




Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b


The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side.

l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.


Tribut ary board

l 8 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/ SDI/ESCON l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON

Remarks

Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. Anyc>ODU1

1x ODU1

ODU1 mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1)

ODU1 tributary mode (Any>ODU1)

-

l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1335






Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks


Tribut aryline board

l 7 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/ SDI/ESCON

Anyc>ODU1>OTU1

1x OTU1

ODU1 tributaryline mode (Any>ODU1>OTU1)

ODU1 tributaryline mode (Any>ODU1>OTU1)


l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

l 6 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/ SDI/ESCON l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/ FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side. Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

a: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to V100R006C00 and later versions. b: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to versions earlier than V100R006C00. c: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1336



Table 14-111 TN52TOM board in non-cascading mode App licat ion Sce nari o

Tribut ary or Tribut aryLine Board


Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks


Tributa ry board

l 8 x FE/FDDI/DVBASI/SDI/ESCON/ GE/FC100/FICON

Anyc>ODU0

8x ODU0

ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1])


Anyc>ODU0>ODU1

4x ODU1

ODU0 tributary mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1])


Tributa ry-line board

Anyc>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1

2x OTU1



NOTE The board can receive the services in the preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.

l 6 x FE/FDDI/DVBASI/SDI/ESCON l 4 x GE/FC100/ FICON NOTE The board can receive the services in the preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 5 Gbit/s.


l 4 x FE/FDDI/DVBASI/SDI/ESCON/ GE/FC100/FICON NOTE The board can receive the services in the preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 5 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side. All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

1337






Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks


Tributa ry board

l 8 x FC100/FICON/ GE/STM-4/OC-12/ DVB-ASI/ESCON/ FDDI/FE/SDI/ STM-1/OC-3

OTU1/Anyc>ODU1

4x ODU1

ODU1 mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1)

ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1)

-

l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/ OTU1/STM-16/ OC-48 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.


Tributa ry board

l 4 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1

4x ODU1

ODU1_AN Y_ODU0_ ODU1 reencapsulati on mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1)

ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1)




l 2 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1

2x OTU1

ODU1_AN Y_ODU0_ ODU1 reencapsulati on tributaryline mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1)

ODU1 tributaryline mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1)

The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

1338






Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks



4 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>OTU1

4x OTU1

Anyc>ODU1>OTU1

4x OTU1

ODU1 tributaryline mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1>OTU1)

The board performs electrical regeneratio n for OTU1 signals.

l 4 x FC100/FICON/ GE/STM-4/OC-12/ DVB-ASI/ESCON/ FDDI/FE/SDI/ STM-1/OC-3/ FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/ STM-16/OC-48

ODU1 tributaryline mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1>OTU1)

NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.

l 4 x FC100/FICON/ GE/STM-4/OC-12/ DVB-ASI/ESCON/ FDDI/FE/SDI/ STM-1/OC-3

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. OTU1/Anyc>ODU1>OTU1

2x OTU1

l 2 x FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/ STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 5 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side. All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

1339






Mapping Path


Port Working Mode a

Port Working Mode b

Remarks


Tributa ry board

l 4 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>ODU0

8x ODU0

ODU1_OD U0 mode (OTU1>ODU1>ODU0)

ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1>ODU1>ODU0)



Tributa ry board

l 4 x OTU1

OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0

8x ODU0

ODU1_AN Y_ODU0 reencapsulati on mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0)

ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0)


a: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to V100R006C00 and later versions. b: This parameter must be set on the NMS and the parameter values apply to versions earlier than V100R006C00. c: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding application scenario.

Application Scenario Overview of TN11TOM The TN11TOM can be used in different application scenarios. The total service access rate of the eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1340



Table 14-112 TN11TOM board in cascading mode Appl icatio n Scen ario

Tributa ry or Tributa ry-Line Board


Mapping Path

Maxim um Outpu t Capaci ty

Port Working Mode (Must Be Set on the NMS)

Remarks

TN11 TOM Scena rio 1

Tributar y board

l 8 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/ESCON

OTU1/Anya>ODU1

1x ODU1

N/A

-

OTU1/Anya>ODU1>OTU1

1x OTU1

N/A


l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/ OTU1 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

TN11 TOM scena rio 2

Tributar y-line board

l 7 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/ESCON l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/ OTU1 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

l 6 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/ OC-3/DVB-ASI/ESCON l 4 x STM-4/OC-12 l 2 x GE/FC100/FICON l 1 x STM-16/OC-48/ FC200/FICON Express/ OTU1 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Only the RX7/ TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board uses two transmitters and one receiver on the WDM side. Only the RX7/ TX7 and RX8/ TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

1341


Appl icatio n Scen ario




Mapping Path

Maxim um Outpu t Capaci ty


Remarks


Table 14-113 TN11TOM board in non-cascading mode Appl icatio n Scen ario



Mapping Path

Maxi mum Outpu t Capaci ty


Remarks


Tributar y board

l 8 x FC100/FICON/GE/ STM-4/OC-12/DVBASI/ESCON/FDDI/FE/ STM-1/OC-3

OTU1/Anya>ODU1

4x ODU1

N/A

-

l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/OTU1/STM-16/ OC-48 NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1342



Appl icatio n Scen ario



Mapping Path

Maxi mum Outpu t Capaci ty


Remarks



l 4 x FC200/FICON Express/STM-16/OC-48/ FC100/FICON/GE/ STM-4/OC-12/DVBASI/ESCON/FDDI/FE/ STM-1/OC-3

Anya->ODU1>OTU1

4x OTU1

N/A

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. When the board is used to implement dual feed and selective receiving on the WDM side, the board can output a maximum of two OTU2 signals and the overall maximum client signal rate must not exceed 5 Gbit/ s.

NOTE The board can receive the services in each preceding row at the same time but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.


l 4 x OTU1


OTU1>ODU1>OTU1

4x OTU1

N/A

The board performs electrical regeneration for OTU1 signals.


14.9.4 Function and Feature The TOM board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-114. NOTE

ODU0 is only supported by the TN52TOM in the OptiX OSN 8800.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1343



Table 14-114 Functions and features of the TOM board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Performs conversion between client services at rates within the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and ODU0 or ODU1 signals when functioning as a tributary board. l Performs conversion between client services at rates within the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and OTU1 signals when functioning as a tributary-line board. l Supports convergence of multiple services into one ODU0 or ODU1 signal. The TOM board supports multiple application scenarios. For details, see 14.9.3 Application Overview.


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals. OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE When the TOM board transmits GE electrical signals, it is recommended that the board be equipped with at most two GE electrical modules to facilitate fiber routing. you are advised to install electrical modules at the RX1/TX1 and RX2/ TX2 ports. The TOM board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the board is used to accept these electrical signals, a digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion and the optical module of the converter must agree with the board optical module specifications. The digital video O/E converter is a third-party device. Customers can purchase a digital video O/E converter by themselves. Only the TN52TOM board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1344




Description


OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52TOM – Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals or eight ODU0 signals through the cross-connect bus on the backplane and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11TOM – Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the crossconnection of four ODU1 signals to the paired slots through the backplane. – Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. – Supports the transmission of maximum of eight signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. l TN52TOM – Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. – Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. – Supports the transmission of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11TOM – Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. – Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. – Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN52TOM – Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1345




Description boards) and any two boards in the non-paired slots of the fourslot mesh group, that is, supports the ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5. – Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired slot of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the GE cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5. – Supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired slot of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5. l The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709.

OTN function

l Supports the SM and TCM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers on the WDM side. l Supports the PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions at the ODU1 layer. l Supports the PM functions at the ODU1 layers. l TN52TOM supports the PM function at the ODU0 layer. WDM specification

Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications. Supports ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM specifications.

ESC function

Supported.

FEC coding


Alarm and performance event monitoring

l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE Only the TN11TOM supports Poisson mode.

ALS function

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1346




Description

PRBS test function

Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

LPT function


Test frame


Latency measurement

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Supported by the TN52TOM.

Protection scheme

OptiX OSN 3800/OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. OptiX OSN 8800: l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection. For the TN52TOM board, ODU0 tributary SNCP protection is supported only in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1347




Description




l Auto-Negotiation

Port MTU


Loopback

WDM side

l 1000M Full-Duplex

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported NOTE When being used as tributary & line board, the TOM board only supports the loopback between ClientLP1-ClientLP4.

Client side

Channel

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1348




Description


Protocols or standards for transparent transmissio n (nonperformanc e monitoring )

IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1349




Description Protocols or standards for service processing (performan ce monitoring )

ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2

14.9.5 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS. Table 14-115 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-115 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10


1350



NOTE


14.9.6 TN52TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (Cascading) Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/ s and two ODU0 signals or one ODU1 signal. Figure 14-87 shows the position of a TOM board in a WDM system when it is used on an OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 14-88 shows the position of the TOM board in a WDM system when it is used on an OptiX OSN 6800/3800. Figure 14-87 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0) (OptiX OSN 8800) 2xODU0 1xOTU2

1xOTU2 2xODU0 TOM

TOM

RX1

1

2

1 N S 2 2

TX1

1

RX1

8×Any

2

TX8

M U X / D M U X

2×ODU0

N S 2

2×ODU0

8×Any

TX1 FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI RX8

M U X / D M U X

1

TX8

2

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI

RX8

Figure 14-88 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0->ODU1) (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) 1xODU1 1xOTU2 RX1

TOM

TX1 N S 2

ODU1

8×Any

M U X / D M U X

2×ODU0

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU1

1×ODU1

2×ODU0

8×Any

N S 2

TX8 Any

RX1

TOM

TX1 FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI RX8

1xOTU2 1xODU1

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, RX8 ESCON, FDDI TX8

ODU1

Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1351


14 OTN Tributary Board OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

NOTE

On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-89 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 1: in cascading mode) OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1 52TOM

52NS2

3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 1(IN/OUT)

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)



9(RX7/TX7)




10(RX8/TX8)

: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0 52TOM

52NS2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1

3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)





162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 1(IN/OUT) 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)



NOTE

When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1352



Table 14-116 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Cascading mode) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


ClientLP1/ClientLP2


ODU0LP1


Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following crossconnections: l

Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN 8800, as shown

l

in Figure 14-90.

Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU1 services in OptiX OSN 6800/3800, as shown

in Figure 14-90.

NOTE

When creating the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected. For Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Two channels with the same type of services at the ClientLP1 and ClientLP2 ports respectively must not be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type must not be configured.

Figure 14-90 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 1) OptiX OSN 8800

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1353


14 OTN Tributary Board WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 Line/PID

board in standard 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode

Other board

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2




Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

1



2

TOM


OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1354


14 OTN Tributary Board WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode





1



161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1 2 3 161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-2


TOM Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

14.9.7 TN52TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading) Application Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-91. Figure 14-91 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1) The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1355


14 OTN Tributary Board 1xOTU1

1xOTU1 RX1

TX1

TOM

TOM

RX1

TX1

TX8

7×Any

MUX/ DMUX

2×ODU0

RX8

MUX/ RX8 DMUX

1×OTU1

TX8

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

2×ODU0

7×Any

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI RX7

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, TX7ESCON, FDDI RX7

TX7 Any

Any

The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1

1xOTU1 RX1

TOM

TX7

TX1

RX7

6×Any

RX8

2×ODU0

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

TX6

MUX/ DMUX

TX8 RX8

TX1

TX7

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

2×ODU0

6×Any


MUX/ DMUX

RX1

TOM

RX7 MUX/ DMUX


TX8

Any

TX6 Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group NOTE

On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-92 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode) The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1356


14 OTN Tributary Board 52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)


4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3)



9(RX7/TX7) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1

6(RX4/TX4)

10(RX8/TX8)


7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)


202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2



The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3)




6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)



8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2



NOTE

When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


ClientLP1/ClientLP2


ODU1LP1


ODU0LP1


a: In different application scenarios, RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as clientside interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1357



During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: l

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown in Figure 14-93.

l

Create OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and 9(RX7/TX7) or 10 (RX8/TX8) of the TOM board, as shown

in Figure 14-93.

NOTE

If only seven FE services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary line 7*FE->ODU0. This service package automatically completes the following settings: l

Board Working mode is set to Cascading.

l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 tributary-line (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1 port.

l

Service Type is to FE for channels 1-4 on the ClientLP1 port and channels 5-7 on the ClientLP2 port.

l

Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the RX8/TX8 port.

l

Bidirectional Any-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1-RX7/TX7 ports and channels 1-4 on the ClientLP1 port and channels 5-7 on the ClientLP2 port.

l

Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX8/TX8 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP1 port.

Figure 14-93 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 2) The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

1



161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1

WDM side


9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1

3

3

2


TOM


Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

1





10(TX8/RX8)-1

WDM side

2

3

3 161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-2


TOM Cross-connect module


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1358



14.9.8 TN52TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Cascading) Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-94. Figure 14-94 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 3: Any->ODU1) 1xODU1 1xOTU2 RX1

TOM

TX1

TOM

TX1

M U X / D M U X

RX1 N S 2

ODU1

8×Any

Any

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU1

1×ODU1

8×Any

FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC12, OC-48, FC100, GE, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, RX8 SDI, ESCON, FDDI TX8

1xOTU2 1xODU1

TX8 RX8

ODU1

FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC12, OC-48, FC100, GE, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI

Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1359



Figure 14-95 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 3: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) in cascading mode) 52TOM

52NS2

3(RX1/TX1)


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)

1(IN/OUT) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

7(RX5/TX5)


8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


ClientLP1


Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). Then, create the following crossconnections: l

Set the type of the client service. For a client service with the data rate exceeding 1.25 Gbit/ s, configure the service on channel 1 of the ClientLP port.

l

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM in Figure 14-96. board, as shown

l

Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

in Figure 14-96.


1360



Figure 14-96 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 3) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line board 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 in standard 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4




201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8

1


2

TOM


The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

14.9.9 TN52TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading) Application Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals at any rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-97. Figure 14-97 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1) The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1

1xOTU1 RX1

RX1

MUX/ DMUX

TX8

TX7 RX7

Any

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

7×Any

RX8 MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

TX8 RX8

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

7×Any

TX1 FE, GE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, RX7 DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI TX7

TX1

TOM

TOM


FE, GE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI

Any

1361



The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1

1xOTU1 RX1

RX1

TOM TX7

RX7

TX8 MUX/ RX8 DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

TX7

RX8

6×Any

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

MUX/ RX7 DMUX

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

6×Any

FE, GE, STM-1, TX1 STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, RX6 DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI TX6

TOM

TX8

Any

TX1 FE, GE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC48, FC100, FC200, FICON, FICON RX6 Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI TX6

Any


On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. In this scenario, mapping of ODU0 services is not supported. This is different than the TN52TOM scenario 2.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-98 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any>ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode) The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)

9(RX7/TX7) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 10(RX8/TX8)


8(RX6/TX6)


The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1362



3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

10(RX8/TX8)

7(RX5/TX5) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 8(RX6/TX6)


9(RX7/TX7)


NOTE

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


ClientLP1


ODU1LP1


a: RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1). l


l


l

Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM board, as shown

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

in Figure 14-99.


1363



NOTE

If only seven STM-1 services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary line 7*STM-1/OC3->ODU1. This service package automatically completes the following settings: l

Board Working mode is set to Cascading.

l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributary-line (Any->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1 port.

l

Service Type is set to STM-1 for channels 1-7 on the ClientLP1 port.

l

Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the RX8/TX8 port.

l

Bidirectional Any-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1-RX7/TX7 ports and channels 1-7 on the ClientLP1 port.

l

Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX8/TX8 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP1 port.


WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

1




9(TX7/RX7)-1

3

10(TX8/RX8)-1 2 TOM





WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

1



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3


2

10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM



14.9.10 TN52TOM Scenario 5: Any->ODU0[->ODU1] (NonCascading) Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/ s and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1 signals. Figure 14-100 shows the position of a TOM board in a WDM system when it is used on an OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 14-101 shows the position of the TOM board in a WDM system when it is used on an OptiX OSN 6800/3800. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1364



Figure 14-100 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0) (OptiX OSN 8800) 8xODU0 1xOTU2 RX1

1xOTU2 8xODU0

TX1

1

1

RX1

1

N S 2 8

8×Any

8

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

N S 2 8

TX8

M U X / D M U X

1

8×ODU0

8×Any


TX1

TOM

TOM

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, TX8 ESCON, FDDI

8

RX8

NOTE

On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. When the TN54TOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the TN52TOM board in ODU0 non-cascading mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) are interconnected, transmitting FE, FDDI, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON, and SDI services is not supported. When the TN54THA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the TN52TOM board in ODU0 non-cascading mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) are interconnected, transmitting FE, FDDI, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, and ESCON services is not supported.

Figure 14-101 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0->ODU1) (OptiX OSN 6800/3800) 4xODU1 1xOTU2 RX1

TOM

TX1

1

1

RX1

1

N S 2 4

8×Any

4

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

4

M U X / D M U X

4×ODU1

4×ODU1

8×ODU0

N S 2

TX8 Any

TX1

TOM 1

8×Any


1xOTU2 4xODU1

4

ODU1

FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, TX8 ESCON, FDDI RX8

ODU1

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group NOTE

On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1365



Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-102 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 5: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]) in non-cascading mode) OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)

52NS2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1


4(RX2/TX2)



5(RX3/TX3)

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)





203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1


1(IN/OUT ) 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3

205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 8(RX6/TX6)



9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)








OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)

52NS2




















5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)

7(RX5/TX5)





1(IN/OUT)


8(RX6/TX6)








9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)



NOTE

When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule applies.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1366



Table 14-120 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode) Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


l ClientLP1


l ClientLP2 l ClientLP5 l ClientLP6 l ClientLP3


l ClientLP4 l ClientLP7 l ClientLP8 ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4


Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). l

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM in Figure 14-103. board. Then, create the following cross-connections, as shown

l

Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN 8800, as shown

l

in Figure 14-103.

Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU1 services in OptiX OSN 6800/3800, as shown

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

in Figure 14-103.


1367



NOTE

The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-4, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s. Only one GE service can be input at each group of ClientLP ports. The client-side eight pairs of optical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 channel. Service configurations at the ClentLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and ClientLP6, and ClientLP7 and ClientLP8 ports must also comply with this restriction. If only eight GE (GFP-T) services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary 8*GE->8*ODU0. This service package automatically completes the following settings: l

Board Working mode is set to Non-cascading.

l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 Mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) for the ClientLP1 port.

l

Service Type is set to GE(GFP-T) for channel 1 on the ClientLP1-ClientLP8 ports.

l

Bidirectional GE-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP1 port, the RX3/TX3 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX5/TX5 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX7/TX7 port and channel 1on the ClientLP7 port.

l

Bidirectional GE-level cross-connections are created between the RX2/TX2 port and channel 2 on the ClientLP2 port, the RX4/TX4 port and channel 2 on the ClientLP4 port, the RX6/TX6 port and channel 2 on the ClientLP6 port, and the RX8/TX8 port and channel 2 on the ClientLP8 port.

Figure 14-103 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 5) OptiX OSN 8800

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1368





Other board






1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2


2

TOM



OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1369









TOM

1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2


3


2







14.9.11 TN52TOM Scenario 6: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1(NonCascading) Application Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-104 or Figure 14-105. The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1370



Figure 14-104 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: A) 2xOTU1

RX1

TOM

TX1

TX7

RX7

RX7

TX7 RX8

6×Any

RX8

4×ODU0

MUX/ DMUX

RX1

2×OTU1

TX8

MUX/ DMUX

TX1

TOM

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

4×ODU0

RX6

6×Any


2xOTU1

TX8

TX6


RX6

TX6

Any

Any

The conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals. OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: Figure 14-105 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: B) 2xOTU1

RX1

TOM

TX1

TX5

RX5

RX5

TX5

TX7

4×Any

RX7

RX7

4×ODU0

TX6

MUX/ DMUX

TX1

RX6

TX7 MUX/ TX8 DMUX RX8

TX4

MUX/ DMUX

2×OTU1

MUX/ TX6 DMUX RX6

RX1

TOM

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

4×ODU0

4×Any


2xOTU1


RX8 TX4

TX8

Any

Any

Implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group NOTE

On the client side, four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1371



Logical Ports Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-106 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode) The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


7(RX5/TX5)



5(RX3/TX3)

6(RX4/TX4)










51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 8(RX6/TX6)

202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 9(RX7/TX7) 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1



The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3)






6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)




8(RX6/TX6)






9(RX7/TX7)



10(RX8/TX8)


NOTE

When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule applies. The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as required.

Table 14-121 Description of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a



1372



Port Name

Description

l ClientLP1


l ClientLP2 l ClientLP3


l ClientLP4 ODU0LP1-ODU0LP2


a: Eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDMside interfaces.

Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: l


l

Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, as shown

in Figure 14-107.

NOTE

In this scenario, all the eight pairs of the optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the client-side or the WDM-side interfaces. If six Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output. If four Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output for dual transmitting and selective receiving.



1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2


3


3

51(ODU1LP1/ ODU1LP1)-1 2


WDM side



TOM







3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

1



3


3



9(TX7/RX7)-1 2

161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-1

WDM side


10(TX8/RX8)-1


TOM



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1373



14.9.12 TN52TOM Scenario 7: OTU1/Any->ODU1 (Non-Cascading) Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four ODU1 signals, or implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-108 or Figure 14-109. The conversion between eight signals and four ODU1 signals. Figure 14-108 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: A) 4xODU1 RX1

4xODU1

TOM

TX1

TOM

TX1

RX1

1

1 MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

4

NS2

8×Any

NS2

4×ODU1

RX8

4×ODU1

8×Any


1xOTU2

1xOTU2

TX8

4 RX8

TX8 Any

ODU1

ODU1


Any

The conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals. OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1374



Figure 14-109 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: B) 4xODU1 RX1

RX1

TOM 1

1 MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

4

TX8

NS2

4

4×OTU1

NS2

TX1

4×ODU1

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

RX8

4xODU1

TOM

TX1 OTU1 4

1xOTU2

1xOTU2

4

OTU1

RX8 TX8

ODU1

ODU1

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group NOTE

In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 8.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-110 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 7: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1) in non-cascading mode) OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800: A 52NS2

A 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)










1(IN/OUT)


8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)


: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Working service direction : Virtual channel

OptiX OSN 3800:

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1375



3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)

52NS2










1(IN/OUT)


8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)



NOTE

Particularly, in the OptiX OSN 3800, inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and 52NS2 boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3-1 port on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-3 port on the 52NS2 board, the ClientLP5-1 port on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2 port on the 52NS2 board.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


l ClientLP1




l ClientLP7

Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). l


l


l

Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port on the TOM board and the ODU1LP port on the other boards to implement grooming of ODU1 services, defined as in Figure 14-111.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1376



NOTE

When the internal cross-connection of ODU1 signal is configured, only the first route can be selected. For example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Only ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7 can be used. Each ClientLP logical port can access a maximum of 2.5 Gbit/s signals. If only four STM-16 services are received from client equipment, specify the service package as Tributary 4*STM-16/OC48->4*ODU1. This service package automatically completes the following settings: l

Board Working mode is set to Non-Cascading.

l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports.

l

Service Type is set to STM-16 for channel 1 on the ClientLP1-ClientLP8 ports.

l

Bidirectional Any-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX3TX3 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX4/TX4 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP7 port.

Figure 14-111 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 7) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4





1



2

TOM



14.9.13 TN52TOM Scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1 (Non-Cascading) Application Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1377



Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals through Any reencapsulation. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-112. Figure 14-112 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1) 4xODU1 1xOTU2

8×Any

4

4

OTU1

RX8 TX8

ODU1

ODU1

4×OTU1

Any

4

32×Any

TX8

N S 2

4×ODU1

4

TX1

1

64×Any

4

1

8×ODU0

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

4×ODU1

M U X / D M U X

1

4×ODU1

64×Any 8×Any

8×ODU0 8×Any

32×Any

RX8

4×OTU1

4

1

4×ODU1

OTU1

RX1

TOM

TOM

TX1

8×Any

RX1

1xOTU2 4xODU1

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group NOTE

When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-113 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) in non-cascading mode) 52TOM

52NS2

237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1

233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1)


















237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1






238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 4(RX2/TX2) 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1

5(RX3/TX3)

234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ ClientLP3)-1



240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 1(IN/OUT)

241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ ClientLP5)-1



8(RX6/TX6)






9(RX7/TX7)






Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1378



NOTE

Any four of the client-side optical interfaces can be used for service transmission.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


l ClientLP1

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1

l ClientLP3 l ClientLP5 l ClientLP7 AnyLP1-AnyLP12


ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4


Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1). l


l

Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board, as shown 3

l

in Figure 14-114.

create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown

4

in Figure 14-114.

NOTE

You can also set the service package to Tributary 4*OTU1->ODU1 (re-encapsulated into ODU0) on the U2000. This service package automatically completes the following settings: l


l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports.

l

Service Type is set to OTU1 for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7 ports.

l

Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX3TX3 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX4/TX4 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP7 port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1379



Figure 14-114 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 8) WDM side


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4




Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 1

4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1

201(ClientLP1 /ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3 /ClientLP3)-1




7(TX5/RX5)-1

10(TX8/RX8)-1










TOM


4



8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1





6(TX4/RX4)-1

2

3

2







14.9.14 TN52TOM Scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1 (Non-Cascading) Application Implements conversion between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any reencapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-115. Figure 14-115 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 9) 2xOTU1

TOM

RX1 TX1

2×OTU1


16×Any

RX5 TX5 MUX/ DMUX RX6 TX6

TX1

2×ODU1

TX5 RX5 MUX/ TX6 DMUX RX6

RX1

TOM

32×Any 4×ODU0

RX3 TX3 MUX/ DMUX RX4 TX4

2×OTU1

TX3 RX3 MUX/ TX4 DMUX RX4

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

4×ODU0 32×Any

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

16×Any

TX2

2×OTU1

RX2

2×ODU1

OTU1

2xOTU1

OTU1 RX2 TX2

1380



NOTE

When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-116 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in noncascading mode) 52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1









7(RX5/TX5)






4(RX2/TX2)

239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 6(RX4/TX4)


9(RX7/TX7)







10(RX8/TX8)



NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. Any two of the client-side optical interfaces can be used for service transmission.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


l ClientLP1


l ClientLP3 AnyLP1-AnyLP8


ODU0LP1-ODU0LP2


ODU1LP1-ODU1LP2



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1381



Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). l

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown

in Figure 14-117. 3

l

Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown in Figure 14-117.

l

Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, as shown

4

in Figure 14-117.

NOTE

In this scenario, all the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the clientside or the WDM-side interfaces.

Figure 14-117 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 9) Client side

WDM side


1



233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 2


3 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8

205(ClientLP5 /ClientLP5)-1 207(ClientLP7 /ClientLP7)-1


237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8





2



7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

2

4 52(ODU1LP2 /ODU1LP2)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1


TOM








14.9.15 TN52TOM scenario 10: OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 (noncascading) Application Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals, or implements conversion between four signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-118. Figure 14-118 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 10) A: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1382



Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.

4xOTU1

4xOTU1 TOM

TX5

4×OTU1 4×ODU1 4×OTU1

RX1 D RX2 M U RX3 X RX4 TX1

RX5

4×OTU1 4×ODU1 4×OTU1

M TX2 U X TX3 TX4

TX6 M U TX7 X TX8

D RX6 M RX7 U X RX8

B: Any->ODU1->OTU1. Implements conversion between four signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: 4xOTU1

RX1

TOM

TX5

RX5

RX5

TX5

RX8

RX8

4×Any

MUX/ DMUX

4×ODU1

TX8

MUX/ DMUX

RX1

TOM

4×OTU1

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

4×Any

FC100, FICON, FE, TX1 GE, STM-1, OC-3 , STM-4, OC-12, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, FC200, FICON Express, RX4 SDI, HD-SDI, STM16, OC-48 TX4

4xOTU1

TX8

Any

TX1 FC100, FICON, FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3 , STM-4, OC-12, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, FC200, RX4 FICON Express, SDI, HD-SDI, STM16, OC-48 TX4

Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1383


14 OTN Tributary Board 2xOTU1

RX1

RX5 MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

RX6 TX6

TX7

2×OTU1

RX6

RX7

RX7

MUX/ TX8 DMUX RX8

RX1

TOM

TX5

MUX/ DMUX

TX7

2×ODU1

2×OTU1

2×ODU1

2 x FC200/FICON Express/ HD-SDI/STM-16/OC-48/ RX4 OTU1 TX4

RX5 TX6

4×Any

4 x FC100/FICON/GE/STM-4/ TX1 OC-12/DVB-ASI/ESCON/ FDDI/FE/SDI/STM-1/OC-3

TX5

TOM

4×Any

2xOTU1

RX8

TX1 4 x FC100/FICON/GE/STM-4/ OC-12/DVB-ASI/ESCON/ FDDI/FE/SDI/STM-1/OC-3

RX4

2 x FC200/FICON Express/ HD-SDI/STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1

TX4

TX8

Any

Any


The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-119 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode) OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

7(RX5/TX5)



5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)



52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

8(RX6/TX6)


53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(RX7/TX7)


54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(RX8/TX8)


OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1384


14 OTN Tributary Board TOM

3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2)







7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)

5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)


9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)


NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. When the data rate of the client-side service exceeds 1.25 Gbit/s, the service must be provisioned on channel 1 of a ClientLP port. When channel 1 on the ClientLP port is provisioned with an OTU1, STM-16, or OC-48 service, the other channels on the ClientLP port cannot be provisioned with any other services.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


l ClientLP1







Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1). l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Set the type of the client service. For a client service with the data rate exceeding 1.25 Gbit/ s, configure the service on channel 1 of the ClientLP port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1385



l


l

Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, in Figure 14-120.

as shown NOTE

If only four OTU1 services are received from client equipment, you can also specify the service package as 4*OTU1 REG to automatically complete the following settings: l


l

Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributary-line (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7 ports.

l

Service Type is set to OTU1 for the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7 ports.

l

Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for the RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8 ports.

l

Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX1/TX1 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP1 port, the RX2/TX2 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP3 port, the RX3TX3 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP5 port, and the RX4/TX4 port and channel 1 on the ClientLP7 port.

l

Bidirectional OTU1-level cross-connections are created between the RX5/TX5 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP1 port, the RX6/TX6 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP2 port, the RX7/TX7 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP3 port, and the RX8/TX8 port and channel 1 on the ODU1LP4 port.

Figure 14-120 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 10) OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. Single transmitting and single receiving WDM side



1

5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1


7(TX5/RX5)-1

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

3

52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

2

8(TX6/RX6)-1

53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(TX7/RX7)-1

54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(TX8/RX8)-1



TOM


OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side. Client side

WDM side


1



3

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 2 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1




TOM


14.9.16 TN52TOM scenario 11: OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 (noncascading) Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1386



Application Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-121. Figure 14-121 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 11) 8xODU0 1xOTU2 RX1

TX8

TX1

1

N S 2 8

4×OTU1

8

1

4×ODU1

8

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

4×ODU1

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

8×Any

1

8×ODU0 8×Any

RX8

1

4×OTU1

4

RX1

TOM

TOM

TX1 OTU1

1xOTU2 8xODU0

8

4

OTU1

RX8 TX8

NOTE

In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 12.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-122 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode) 52NS2

52TOM

3(RX1/TX1)












4(RX2/TX2)

5(RX3/TX3) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1





6(RX4/TX4)

1(IN/OUT) 7(RX5/TX5) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1


8(RX6/TX6)







9(RX7/TX7)

10(RX8/TX8)





NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. Any four of the client-side optical interfaces can be used for service transmission.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1387




Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


l ClientLP1


l ClientLP3 l ClientLP5 l ClientLP7 ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4


Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). l


l

Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU0 services, as shown

in Figure 14-123.

Figure 14-123 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 11) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2







TOM

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 1



3

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2


2



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1388



14.9.17 TN52TOM Scenario 12: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0 (NonCascading) Application Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals through Any reencapsulation. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-124. Figure 14-124 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 12) 8xODU0 1xOTU2 RX1

TOM

TX1

1

8

4×OTU1

8

32×Any

N S 2

4×ODU1

8

1

64×Any

8

M U X / D M U X

8×ODU0

64×Any

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

8×Any

1

8×ODU0 8×Any

32×Any

TX8

4×OTU1

RX8

1

4×ODU1

4

RX1

TOM

TX1

OTU1

1xOTU2 8xODU0

4 OTU1 RX8 TX8

NOTE

In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 11. When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services. Any service is FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, or FDDI.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1389



Figure 14-125 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode) 52NS2

52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1

















3(RX1/TX1)




4(RX2/TX2) 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1

5(RX3/TX3)



6(RX4/TX4)



1(IN/OUT)

241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-8

235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ ClientLP5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)


242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-8 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-8 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-1

9(RX7/TX7)







NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. Any four of the client-side optical interfaces can be used for service transmission.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


l ClientLP1


l ClientLP3 l ClientLP5 l ClientLP7 AnyLP1-AnyLP12


Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to non-cascading mode. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0). l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM in Figure 14-126. board, as shown Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1390



l

Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown in Figure 14-126.

l

Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the AnyLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU0 services, as shown

4

3

in Figure 14-126.

Figure 14-126 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 12) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2






3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1


5(TX3/RX3)-1


6(TX4/RX4)-1


3 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8

7(TX5/RX5)-1





236(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 9(TX7/RX7)-1

4



8(TX6/RX6)-1


10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM


233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 2

1







14.9.18 TN11TOM Scenario 1: Any->ODU1 (Cascading) Application Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-127.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1391



Figure 14-127 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1) 1xODU1 1xOTU2 RX1

TOM

TX8 Any

M U X / D M U X

N S 2

ODU1

ODU1

8×Any

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU1

1×ODU1

RX8

RX1

TOM

TX1

8×Any

FE, GE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, STM-16, OC48, ESCON, STM-4, OC-12, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1

1xOTU2 1xODU1

TX1 FE, GE, FDDI, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, STM-16, OC48, ESCON, RX8 STM-4, OC-12, FC100, FICON, TX8 FC200, FICON Express, OTU1

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-128 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in cascading mode) 11TOM

52NS2

3(RX1/TX1) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)

1(IN/OUT)

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)



10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1392




Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


ClientLP1


Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Cascading mode. Set the type of the client service. For a client service with the data rate exceeding 1.25 Gbit/s, configure the service on channel 1 of the ClientLP port. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1 and service is implemented through the cross-connect module in cascading mode, as shown in Figure 14-129 Figure 14-129 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 1) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line board 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 in standard 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4




1



2

TOM



14.9.19 TN11TOM Scenario 2: Any->ODU1->OTU1 (Cascading) Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1393



Application Implements conversion between six signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-130. Figure 14-130 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1 RX1

1xOTU1

TOM

MUX/ DMUX

TX8

7×Any

MUX/ DMUX

1×OTU1

RX8

TX8 RX8

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

7×Any

FE, GE, FDDI, STM- TX1 1, OC-3, STM-4, OC12, STM-16, OC48,ESCON, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON RX7 Express, DVB-ASI, OTU1 TX7

RX1

TOM

TX1 FE, GE, FDDI, STM1, OC-3, STM-4, OC12, STM-16, OC48,ESCON, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON RX7 Express, DVB-ASI, OTU1 TX7

Any

Any

The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: 1xOTU1 RX1

TOM

RX1

TOM TX7 MUX/ DMUX

MUX/ RX8 DMUX

MUX/ DMUX

6×Any

RX8

TX8

TX1

TX7

1×OTU1

MUX/ RX7 DMUX

RX7

1×ODU1

1×OTU1

1×ODU1

6×Any

FE, GE, FDDI, STM- TX1 1, OC-3, STM-4, OC12, STM-16, OC48,ESCON, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON RX6 Express, DVB-ASI, OTU1 TX6

1xOTU1

TX8

FE, GE, FDDI, STM1, OC-3, STM-4, OC12, STM-16, OC48,ESCON, FC100, FICON, FC200, FICON RX6 Express, DVB-ASI, OTU1 TX6

Any

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots NOTE

On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1394



Figure 14-131 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any>ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode) Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)


9(RX7/TX7) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)


10(RX8/TX8)

8(RX6/TX6) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 : Client-side services : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Converts between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal. 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


4(RX2/TX2)


5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)


7(RX5/TX5)


8(RX6/TX6)


9(RX7/TX7)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

10(RX8/TX8)

: Client-side services : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1395




Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


ClientLP1


ODU1LP1


a: RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.

Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading mode. Set the type of the client service. For a client service with the data rate exceeding 1.25 Gbit/s, configure the service on channel 1 of the ClientLP port. Creating electrical cross-connections for the TOM board on the U2000 is a process of establishing cross-connections inside the board. For details, see Figure 14-132. Figure 14-132 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 2) The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: Client side

WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1

1




9(TX7/RX7)-1

3

10(TX8/RX8)-1 2 TOM





WDM side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1

1



51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3


2

10(TX8/RX8)-1

TOM



14.9.20 TN11TOM Scenario 3: Any->ODU1 (Non-Cascading) Application Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1396



Implements conversion between eight signals at a rate in the range of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four ODU1 signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-133. Figure 14-133 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 3) 4xODU1 RX1

4xODU1

TOM

1 MUX/ DMUX

8×Any

MUX/ DMUX

4×ODU1

4×ODU1

NS2 4

Any

TX1

TOM

1 8×Any

FC100, FICON, FE, TX1 GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, STM-16, OC-48 , FC200, FICON Express, DVB-ASI, RX8 ESCON, FDDI, OTU1 TX8

1xOTU2

1xOTU2

ODU1

Any

NS2 4

ODU1

RX1 FC100, FICON, FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, STM-16, OC-48 , FC200, FICON TX8 Express, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, OTU1 RX8

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots OptiX OSN 6800: N/A OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-134 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode) 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5)

52NS2






1(IN/OUT)


8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7)


10(RX8/TX8)







NOTE

In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/ ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a maximum of two services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1397




Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


l ClientLP1




l ClientLP4

Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to Non-cascading mode. Set the type of the client service. For a client service with the data rate exceeding 1.25 Gbit/s, configure the service on channel 1 of the ClientLP port. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1 service is implemented through the cross-connect module in non-cascading mode, as shown and

in Figure 14-135.

Figure 14-135 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 3) WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Line board 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 in standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4




1



2

TOM



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1398



14.9.21 TN11TOM Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1(NonCascading) Application Implements conversion between four optical signals at a rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-136. Figure 14-136 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 4) 4xOTU1

4xOTU1

RX1

TOM

TX1

RX5

RX5

TX5

RX8

4×Any

RX8

MUX/ DMUX

4×ODU1

TX8

MUX/ DMUX

RX1

TOM

4×OTU1

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

4×Any

FC100, FICON, FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3 , STM-4, OC-12, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, FC200, FICON Express, STM-16, RX4 OC-48 TX4

TX5

TX8

TX1 FC100, FICON, FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3 , STM-4, OC-12, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, FC200, RX4 FICON Express, STM-16, OC-48 TX4

Any

Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots NOTE

The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as described in the system plan.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1399



Figure 14-137 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any>ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode) 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

7(RX5/TX5)



5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)



52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

8(RX6/TX6)


53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(RX7/TX7)


54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(RX8/TX8)



Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a


l ClientLP1







Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to non-cascading mode. Set the type of the client service. For a client service with the data rate exceeding 1.25 Gbit/s, configure the service on channel 1 of the ClientLP port. Creating electrical cross-connections for the TOM board on the U2000 is a process of establishing cross-connections inside the board. For details, see Figure 14-138.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1400




WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1

1

4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1



7(TX5/RX5)-1

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

3

2

8(TX6/RX6)-1

53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(TX7/RX7)-1

54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(TX8/RX8)-1



TOM


14.9.22 TN11TOM Scenario 5: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 (electrical regeneration board) Application Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 14-139. Figure 14-139 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5)

4xOTU1

RX1

4×OTU1

4×ODU1

RX4

TX1

TOM

4×OTU1

DMUX

4xOTU1

4xOTU1

RX1

4×OTU1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

4×ODU1

TX4

4×OTU1

MUX

TX4 4xOTU1

TOM

TX1

MUX

DMUX RX4


1401



NOTE

In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-140 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board)) 11TOM 3(RX1/TX1)


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)

7(RX5/TX5)



5(RX3/TX3)


6(RX4/TX4)



52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

8(RX6/TX6)


53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(RX7/TX7)


54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(RX8/TX8)


NOTE

In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.


Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a




ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4



Configuration of Cross-connection On the U2000, set the Board working Mode to non-cascading mode. Creating electrical cross-connections for the TOM board on the U2000 is a process of establishing cross-connections inside the board. For details, see Figure 14-141. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1402




WDM side


1



7(TX5/RX5)-1

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)

3

2

8(TX6/RX6)-1

53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)

9(TX7/RX7)-1

54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)

10(TX8/RX8)-1



TOM


14.9.23 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (When Used as a Tributary Board) Figure 14-142 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1403



Figure 14-142 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board (when used as a tributary board) 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s Any services/ n x ODUk

Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side RX 1 RX 2

O/E 8

RX 8 TX 1 TX 2

E/O

TX 8


8



Crossconnect module


Control Memory

Communication

CPU


Fuse


SCC

Backplane (controlled by SCC )

NOTE


In Figure 14-142, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TOM board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity. Table 14-133 shows the service cross-connections from the TOM board to the backplane. Table 14-133 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM Boar d

Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode



TN5 2TO M

cascading

ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1])

TN52TOM scenario 1

A maximum of 2 x ODU0/1 x ODU1/6 x (100Mbit/s to 1.25Gbit/ s) Any services

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1404


Boar d

Board Working Mode

Port Working Mode



ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1)

TN52TOM scenario 3

A maximum of 1 x ODU1/6 x (100Mbit/s to 2.5Gbit/s) Any services

ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1])

TN52TOM scenario 5

A maximum of 8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1/6 x (100Mbit/s to 1.25Gbit/ s) Any services

ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1)

TN52TOM scenario 7


ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1)

TN52TOM scenario 8


ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0)

TN52TOM scenario 11

A maximum of 8 x ODU0

ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0)

TN52TOM scenario 12

A maximum of 8 x ODU0

cascading

N/A

TN11TOM Scenario 1


noncascading

N/A

TN11TOM scenario 3


noncascading

TN1 1TO M


NOTE

The TN52TOM board supports cross-connections of Any services only when it is used in the OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800. The TN52TOM board supports ODU0 cross-connections only when it is used in the OptiX OSN 8800.

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1405



encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ODUk signals or Any signals to the backplane. l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. – For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module. – For ODUk signals, the module performs operations such as ODUk framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out client-side electrical signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of client-side electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (When Used as a Tributary-Line Board) Figure 14-143 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board. Figure 14-143 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOM board (when used as a tributaryline board) Client side RX1 RX2

WDM side Service encapsulation and mapping module

O/E

RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6


Service regeneration module

OTN Crossprocessing connect module module

E/O

TX7 TX8

O/E

RX7



RX8

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Backplane SCC (controlled by SCC)

NOTE

In cascading mode, only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 ports on the board can be used as WDM-side ports. Figure 14-143 shows an example in which the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 ports are used as the WDM-side ports to implement dual-fed and selective receiving. When a service is to be transmitted and received singly, one of the RX/TX7 and RX8/TX8 ports can be used as a WDM-side and the other port can be used as a client-side port. In non-cascading mode, any four of the RX/TX ports can be used as WDM-side ports.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1406



The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the WDM side of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives optical signals from client equipment through the RX interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs the client signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the client-side electrical signals, and then outputs the client-side optical signals through the TX optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Signal processing module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1407



The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module, service processing module, and service regeneration module. – Cross-connect module Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Service processing module Regenerates Any signals and monitors SDH and Any signals in two directions. – Service regeneration module Implements the FEC decoding/encoding and overhead processing of OTU1 signals. Monitors the performance of WDM-side services. l


l


14.9.24 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-144 shows the front panel of the TOM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1408



Figure 14-144 Front panel of the TOM board



l


l


l





1409



Table 14-134 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOM board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8

LC

Transmits the service signal.

RX1-RX8

LC

Receives the service signal.


14.9.25 Valid Slots One slot houses one TOM board. Table 14-135 shows the valid slots for the TN11TOM board. Table 14-136 shows the valid slots for the TN52TOM board. Table 14-135 Valid slots for the TN11TOM board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 14-136 Valid slots for the TN52TOM board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU3-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

14.9.26 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TOM, refer to Table 14-137. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1410



Table 14-137 TOM parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status








Service Type

None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3, 0C-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Query or set the path Loopback. NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.



1411



Field

Value

Description


125 to 2200


Default: /

A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services. Laser Status


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1412



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect

l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.


1413



Field

Value

Description




Default: 0s Automatic Laser Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Enabled



FEC Working State


With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. When the board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode. Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Band Type

-



-



1414



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0



C, CWDM Default: C


Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1415



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled





PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1416



Field

Value

Description

Board Mode

Cascading Mode, Noncascading Mode


Default: Noncascading Mode

Cascading Mode: In this mode, only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 port pairs on the board can be used as WDM side optical port pairs. The board can multiplex up to six Any-rate signals into one OTU1 signal. Non-cascading Mode: In this mode, the RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 port pairs on the board can be used as WDM-side optical port pairs. The board can multiplex up to four Any-rate signals into two OTU1 signals. NOTE Only the TN11TOM supports this parameter.

Board Working mode

Port Working Mode

Cascading, NonCascading


Default: NonCascading

NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.

In Non-Cascading mode, nine working modes are supported.a


In Cascading mode, five working modes are supported.b

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.


1417



Field

Value

Description

a: Working modes supported in Non-Cascading mode are as follows: l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) l ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) l ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1) l ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) l ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) l NONE Mode (Not for Port) b: Working modes supported in Cascading mode are as follows: l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) l ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) l NONE Mode (Not for Port)

14.9.27 TOM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1418



Bo ard





TN 11T OM

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP

N/A





I-16-2 km-eSFP

1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1419



Bo ard





TN 52T OM

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP

N/A




1000 BASE-BX10-UeSFP

I-16-2 km-eSFP

1000 BASE-BX10-DeSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

1000 BASE-BX-UeSFP


1000 BASE-BX-DeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s MultirateTX1310/RX1490 nm-15 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s MultirateTX1490/RX1310 nm-15 km-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 kmeSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 kmeSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP 0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate 10 km-Video eSFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1420



NOTE



I-16-2 km-eSFP module, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP module, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP module and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


1421


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1422




Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12


1423



NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1310/RX1490 nm-15 km-eSFP and 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1490/RX1310 nm-15 kmeSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM–1, OC–4, STM–4, OC–12, STM–16, OC–48, FC200, FC100, GE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FE, FDDI, FICON, and FICON Express signals.

Table 14-140 Client-side pluggable 2.5G optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional transmissions) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1310/ RX1490 nm-15 kmeSFP

2.67 Gbit/s MultirateTX1490/RX1310 nm-15 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


km

15

15


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

0

0


dBm

-5

-5


dB

8.2

8.2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-18

-18


dBm

0

0


1424



NOTE

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate-eSFP module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.


Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-


PIN

PIN


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


1425


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals. 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


1426



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)



1427



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate 10 km-Video eSFP module can be used to access DVB-ASI, SDI, and HD-SDI signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1428




Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Service rate

Gbit/s

0.1 to 3


nm

1290 to 1330


dBm

0


dBm

-7


dB

5


nm

3.0


-

PIN


nm

1260 to 1620


dBm

-22


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


1429



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

5


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1471 to 1611


nm

±6.5


nm

1


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1 - compliant


-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm


4

1430



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP


dBm

0


dB

8.2

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


nm

±12.5


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 14-147 WDM-side pluggable optical specifications (SDH services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


1431


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9


1432



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Maximum reflectance

dB

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

-27

-27

-27

-27



l

Weight: TN11TOM: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN52TOM: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)




TN11TOM

55

60

TN52TOM

81

89.1


14.10 TOX TOX: 8 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

14.10.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TOX board are TN55 and TN56.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1433


Bo ard

Initi al Ver sion






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

a

TN 55 TO X

V10 0R7 C00

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN 56 TO X

V10 0R9 C00 SPC 100

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

a: If there is a substitution relationship between two boards and one of the boards is used to replace the other board, the device initial version supported by the replaced board takes effect. For example, when you use TN56TOX to replace TN55TOX, TN56TOX can be supported by V100R007C00.

NOTE

When the TOX board is used in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TNK2USXH and TNK2UXCT cross-connect boards must be configured. When it is used in an enhanced or general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM cross-connect board must be configured. When it is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM cross-connect board must be configured.

Variants The TN55TOX/TN56TOX board has only one variant: TN55TOX01/TN56TOX01.


Client-side Services

Client-side Optical Module

FC800/FC1200

Single-Fiber Bidirectional Optical Module

10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 kmSFP+

TN55TOX

N

N

N

TN56TOX

Y

Y

Y

Specification: Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1434


l


The boards have different weights and power consumption specifications. For details, see 14.10.10 TOX Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN55TOX

TN56TOX

The TN56TOX can be created as 55TOX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN56TOX functions as the TN55TOX.

TN56TOX

None

-




The TN56TOX board added the support for optical module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-SFP +.




Added the TN56TOX board.

Compared with the TN55TOX board, the TN56TOX board newly supports: l FC800 and FC1200 services on the client side l Single-fiber bidirectional transmission


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the TN55TOX board.

The TN55TOX board is added to process 8 x 10G tributary services.


1435



14.10.3 Application As a type of tributary board, the TOX board converts between eight 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and eight ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TOX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-145. Figure 14-145 Position of the TOX board in the WDM system 8xODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex


TOX

RX1 TOX 1

1

1 N O 2

8

8

8

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

1

1

1

8

8

N O 2

8

8xODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

8xODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

10GE LAN TX1 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e FC800 RX8 FC1200 TX8

TX1

10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e TX8 FC800 RX8 FC1200 RX1


Client-Side Service


TN55TO X/ TN56TO X

STM-64/OC-192/10GE WAN/OTU2

ODU2

OTU2e

ODU2e

10GE LAN

ODU2/ODU2e

TN56TO X

FC1200

ODU2e

FC800

ODU2/ODUflex

14.10.4 Functions and Features The TOX board enables cross-connections at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-149.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1436



Table 14-149 Functions and features of the TOX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TOX converts signals as follows: l 8 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/FC800<->8 x ODU2 l 8 x 10GE LAN/OTU2e/FC1200<->8 x ODU2e l 8 x FC800<->8 x ODUflex


STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s NOTE Only the TN56TOX supports FC800 and FC1200 services.


Supports the cross-connection of eight ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TOX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

OTN function

l Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2/ODU2e signals at the ODU2/ODU2e interface of the backplane.

NOTE The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN56TOX board.

l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43. l Supports PM function for ODU2. l Supports SM and TCM function when the TOX receives OTN services. ESC function

Supported by the TOX when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e.

FEC coding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN).

ALS function

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1437




Description

PRBS function


LPT function


Test frame



The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000.

NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.

NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.

IEEE 1588v2

The TOX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the clientside service type is 10GE LAN and the Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). NOTE l TN55TOX: Only the RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical port can process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals. l TN56TOX: All the optical ports can process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.

Physical clock

l When the TOX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. l When the TOX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission.


Supported



Port MTU

The value ranges from 1518 to 9600, in bytes. That is, the maximum size of the supported Jumbo frame is 9600 bytes. NOTE when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1438




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services, and 10GE WAN services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.

Loopback




Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1439






14.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TOX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, 1588v2 module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-146 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOX.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1440



Figure 14-146 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOX Backplane(service cross-connection)

8 X ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

RX1

...

Client side

RX8

TX8

O/E

10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module FC encapsulation and mapping module

...

TX1



Crossconnect module

1588v2 module

E/O




Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage


Backplane

(controlled by SCC) SCC

NOTE

l Only the TN56TOX board supports FC encapsulation and mapping module. l The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN56TOX board.

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1441



such as ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET/10GE WAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function. NOTE


– Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames ODU2/ODU2e signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e signals. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the TOX and the cross-connect board through the backplane. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1442


l



l


l


14.10.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-147 shows the front panel of the TOX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1443



Figure 14-147 Front panel of the TOX board



l


l


l





1444



Table 14-150 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOX board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8

LC


RX1-RX8

LC



14.10.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one TOX board. Table 14-151 shows the valid slots for the TOX board. Table 14-151 Valid slots for the TOX board Product

Valid Slots

Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack




General OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack



IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-152 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-152 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2


1445



Physical Port


TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

NOTE


Logical Ports Figure 14-148 shows the port diagrams of the TOX board. Table 14-153 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-148 Port diagram of the TOX

Other line/PID board Backplane 8 x ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex


NOTE

The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN56TOX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1446


14 OTN Tributary Board Cross-connect module



Table 14-153 Description of NMS port of the TOX board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8


14.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TOX, refer to Table 14-154. Table 14-154 TOX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1447



Field

Value

Description




Default: NonLoopback l TN55TOX: None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64

Service Type


Default: None l TN56TOX: None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64, FC-800, FC-1200 Default: None Port Mapping

Laser Status



Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

NOTE The TOX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

Off, On


Default: Off


See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Automatic Laser Shutdown

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1448



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect








Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1449



Field

Value

Description

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600


Default: 9600

For a 10GE LAN service, when the port mapping mode is Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G), data packets will be transparently transmitted if their lengths exceed Max. Packet Length. When the port mapping mode is MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), data packets will be discarded if their lengths exceed Max. Packet Length. NOTE when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.




FEC Working State



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1450



Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC


Default: FEC

FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.




LPT Enabled




Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Determines whether to set REMOTE_FAULT as a laser shutdown condition. NOTE l This parameter takes effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. l For the TN55TOX/TN56TOX boards, when routers support REMOTE_FAULT as a switching condition and the TOX boards are cascaded on the client side, perform the following operations: l If the bit transparent transmission mode is configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None, no matter whether a protection scheme is configured or not. l If the MAC transparent transmission mode and client-side 1+1 protection are configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None. The non-protection scenario of MAC transparent transmission is not supported.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1451



Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Disabled


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1452



Field

Value

Description

Insert Code Type

l When Service Type is STM-64:

Applies to fault detection and location scenarios when the service type is STM-64. When the tributary or line board at the upstream site is faulty or when the line board at the downstream site is faulty, users can specify the output code type for the tributary board at the downstream site using this parameter.

– PN11, MS_AIS – Default: PN11 l When Service Type is 10GE LAN and port mapping mode is MAC transparent mapping (10.7G): – Quick insert, Delayed insert – Default: Quick insert

Port Working Mode

ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/Any->ODU2), ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex), None(not for ports)

When the service type is 10GE LAN, the value Quick insert applies to a scenario in which no protection is configured on the WDM equipment while protection is configured for the router that connects to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, quick protection switching can be achieved on the router. The value Delayed insert applies to a scenario in which protection is configured for the WDM equipment and the router connected to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, the WDM equipment preferentially performs protection switching in case of a fault. If the fault is rectified, the router does not perform protection switching. If the fault persists, then the router performs protection switching. Specifies the working mode of the interface on the board depending the actual application scenario and service mapping path. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN56TOX.

Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/Any->ODU2)

14.10.10 TOX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1453



Board



TN55TO X

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-ZR-80 km-SFP+

TN56TO X

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-SFP+ 10GBASE-ZR-80km-SFP+ 10GBASE-ER/EW-40km-SFP+ 10GBASE-SR-0.3km-SFP+ 10GBASE-LR-10km-SFP+ 11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/RX1330nm-10kmSFP+ 11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/RX1270nm-10kmSFP+

NOTE

A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution. NOTE

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+ and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ optical module, 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, OTU2, and OTU2e, FC800, and FC1200 signals.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type





8.5 to 11.1

9.956 to 11.1

8.5 to 11.3


1454



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




Line code format

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

Optical source type

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


km

10

40

80

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9

Eye pattern mask

-



nm


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1355

1260 to 1605

1260 to 1565


dBm

-14.4

-14(11.1G)

-24


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

reflectance

dB

-12

-27

-27

-15.8 (10.3125G)


1455



NOTE

l 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+, 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+, 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN,FC800 and FC1200 signals. l 10G BASE-ZR-80 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type






Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.8 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

0.5

4

4


dBm

-7.3

-8.2

-4.7

0


dB

3

3.5

3

9


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30


1456


Parameter


Unit

Value


10G BASESR-0.3 kmSFP+ -






-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)

-14.1 (OMA)

-24


dBm

-1

0.5

-1

-7

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-26

-27

NOTE

11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/RX1330nm-10km-SFP+ and 11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/RX1270nm-10kmSFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, FC800 and FC1200 signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type



Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


km

10

10

1260 to 1280

1320 to 1340


nm


1457



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




dBm

0.5

0.5


dBm

-8.2

-8.2


dB

3.5

3.5

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN


nm

1320 to 1340

1260 to 1280


dBm

-14.4

-14.4


dBm

0.5

0.5



l

Weight: TN55TOX: 1.42 kg (3.13 lb.) TN56TOX: 1.1 kg (2.43 lb.)




TN55TOX

75.3

80.6

TN56TOX

46

51


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1458



14.11 TQM TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board

14.11.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TQM board are TN11 and TN12.


Ini tial Ve rsi ona





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11 TQ M

V1 00 R0 01

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN 12 TQ M

V1 00 R0 04 C0 1

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

a: In OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003C02 or a later version, TN12TQM can be used to replace TN11TQM. When you use TN12TQM to replace TN11TQM, TN12TQM can be supported by V100R003C02.

Variants The TN11TQM/TN12TQM board has only one variant: TN11TQM01/TN12TQM01.


Function: – Only the TN12TQM supports the OTU1/FDDI services, PRBS function, Test frame and Tributary SNCP protection. For details, see 14.11.4 Functions and Features.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 14.11.11 TQM Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1459




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TQM

TN12TQM

In Optix OSN 6800 V100R003C02 or later, the TN12TQM can be created as TQM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TQM functions as the TN11TQM.

TN12TQM

None

-




Deleted the support for the SDI and HD-SDI services on the TN12TQM board.


14.11.3 Application As a type of tributary board, the TQM board converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection. For the position of the TQM board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-149.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1460



Figure 14-149 Position of the TQM board in the WDM system 1xODU1

1xODU1

TQM

TQM

1

4

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

1 N S 2



1×ODU1

1×ODU1


M U X / D M U X

4 100Mbit/s – 2.5Gbit/s

OptiX OSN 6800: from paired slot or cross-connect board OptiX OSN 3800: from mesh group slot

NOTE

The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

14.11.4 Functions and Features The TQM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-158. Table 14-158 Functions and features of the TQM board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

TQM converts signals as follows: 4 x (100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s)<-> 1 x ODU1.


1461




Description


FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals. OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports OTU1 and FDDI services. The TQM supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. For GE electrical signal transmission, it is recommended that the board be equipped with at most two GE electrical modules to facilitate fiber routing.


OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots. l Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal or two GE signals between the TQM and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. OptiX OSN 3800: l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s or one ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports TCM function for ODU1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1462




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports Bursty mode.

ALS function


PRBS test function

TN11TQM: not supported. TN12TQM: supports the PRBS function on the client side. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

FEC coding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

LPT function


Test frame

TN11TQM: not supported TN12TQM: The board supports test frame function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE.


Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. l Supports the Tributary SNCP protection (TN12TQM). NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1463




Description




FE: 100M Full-Duplex GE(GFP-F): l Auto-Negotiation l 1000M Full-Duplex

Port MTU


Loopback


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1464




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports the following standards and protocols.

SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1465




Description



14.11.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-150 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1466



Figure 14-150 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM Backplane (service cross-connection) 4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1X ODU1

Client side RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

O/E

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

E/O

Service OTN encapsulation and Processing Cross-connect module mapping module module



Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage



NOTE


The client side of the TQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and GE electrical signals. NOTE

The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.

In the signal flow of the TQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQM to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1467



and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then, – If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. – If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1468


l



14.11.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-151 shows the front panel of the TQM board. Figure 14-151 Front panel of the TQM board

TQM STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4

TQM



1469



l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 14-159 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-159 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQM board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX4

LC

Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used.

RX1-RX4

LC

Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.


14.11.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one TQM board. Table 14-160 shows the valid slots for the TQM board. Table 14-160 Valid slots for the TQM board Product

Valid Slots




IU2-IU5

14.11.8 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS and the logical ports of the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1470



Display of Physical Ports Table 14-161 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-161 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-152 shows the application model of the TQM board. Table 14-162 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1471



Figure 14-152 Port diagram of the TQM board Other OTU board

Other line board

Backplane ODU1

4 x GE/Any/OTU1

201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4


201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

Client Side Crossconnect module

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive GE/Any/OTU1/ODU1 signals from other boards


NOTE

TN11TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ ClientLP)-4.

Table 14-162 Description of NM port of the TQM board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP


Configuration Principle l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1472



l

For each TQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16.

l

For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, and OTU1 services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the TQM board.

l

Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type

Number of Timeslots

GE

7

FE

1

OTU1

16

STM-1

1

STM-4

4

STM-16

16

OC-3

1

OC-12

4

OC-48

16

FC100

6

FC200

12

FICON

6

FICON Express

12

DVB-ASI

2

ESCON

2

FDDI

1

14.11.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created.


1473



– Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TQM board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by

and

in Figure 14-153.

– Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-153. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) – Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the TQM board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-153. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.) NOTE

One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.

Figure 14-153 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board Client side

Client side



4(RX2/TX2)-1


5(RX3/TX3)-1


6(RX4/TX4)-1


3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

3

5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1

4 2 1

WDM side


TQM The straight-through of the board

1

The internal cross-connection of the board

2

The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board

3 4


l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the board and ODU1LP port of other boards (or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 14-154. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1474



Figure 14-154 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3


51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 IN/OUT-OCh:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3

Line board in standard mode

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3

TQM


The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards

l

According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots.

14.11.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TQM, refer to Table 14-163. Table 14-163 TQM parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1475



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFPT), OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OTU-1 Default: None

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports Any, FDDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.



Sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services. NOTE Only TN12TQM supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1476



Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On


Default: Off

See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Automatic Laser Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

LPT Enabled

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Enabled



Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. When the board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode. Sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. This parameter can be specified when the mapping path of a GE service is GFP-F. After the parameter is specified, data packets whose lengths exceed Max. Packet Length are discarded.






Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1477



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only available for TN12TQM.




PRBS Test Status


The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted. Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test. NOTE Only available for the TN12TQM.

14.11.11 TQM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1478



Board



TN11TQ M

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

TN12TQ M

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

NOTE



The I-16-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals. Only the S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-LX10 optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1479




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


dB

N/A

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.957-compliant

APD

APD

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


1480


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1481


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1482




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


1483



NOTE

The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1484





Weight l

TN11TQM: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb.)

l

TN12TQM: 1.1 kg (2.43 lb.)




TN11TQM

50.3

57.6

TN12TQM

25

27.5

The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

14.12 TQS TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board

14.12.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is, TN11.


Ini tial Ve rsi on





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11 TQ S

V1 00 R0 01

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1485



Variants The TN11TQS board has only one variant: TN11TQS01.

14.12.2 Application As a type of tributary board, the TQS board implements conversion between four STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals. For the position of the TQS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-155. Figure 14-155 Position of the TQS board in the WDM system 4xODU1

4xODU1 TQS

TQS 1

1

4

4

4

N S 2

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

1 N S 2

4

1

1

4

4×ODU1

4×ODU1

STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1

1

STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1

4

14.12.3 Functions and Features The TQS board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-168. Table 14-168 Functions and features of the TQS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TQS converts signals as follows:




OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TQS and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.

4 x (STM-16/OC-48/OTU1)<->4 x ODU1


OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.

l Supports PM functions for ODU1. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1486




Description

ESC function

Supported

FEC encoding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU1. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

ALS function


PRBS test function

Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported


Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.

Loopback


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1487




Description



ITU-T G.707


ITU-T G.805


ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1

14.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-156 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQS.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1488



Figure 14-156 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU1

Client side RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4

O/E

E/O

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN procssing module

Client-side Optical module

OTN Processing module



Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage



SCC

The client side of the TQS board can access the following optical signals: l

STM-16 optical signals

l

OC-48 optical signals

l

OTU1 optical signals

In the signal flow of the TQS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQS to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and FEC decoding with OTU1 signals, and performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing with STM-16/OC-48 signals. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane for grooming.

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1489



The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, framing of OTU1 signals, encoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module – OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals. – OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames ODU1/OTU1 signals, processes overheads in ODU1/OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding of the OTU1 signals.

l

Control and communication module – Controls operations on the board. – Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1490



– Communicates with the system control and communication board. l


14.12.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-157 shows the front panel of the TQS board. Figure 14-157 Front panel of the TQS board

TQS STAT ACT PROG SRV


TQS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1491





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 14-169 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-169 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQS board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



14.12.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TQS board. Table 14-170 shows the valid slots for the TQS board. Table 14-170 Valid slots for the TQS board Product

Valid Slots




IU2-IU5


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1492



Display of Physical Ports Table 14-171 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-171 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-158 shows the application model of the TQS board. Table 14-172 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1493



Figure 14-158 Port diagram of the TQS board

Other line/ PID board Backplane 4 x ODU1

201 (LP1/LP1)-1 202 (LP2/LP2)-1 203 (LP3/LP3)-1 204 (LP4/LP4)-1

3 (RX1/TX1)-1 4 (RX2/TX2)-1 5 (RX3/TX3)-1 6 (RX4/TX4)-1

Client Side Crossconnect module



Table 14-172 Description of NM port of the TQS board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


LP1-LP4

Internal logical ports. All optical paths are numbered 1.

14.12.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TQS, refer to Table 14-173.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1494



Table 14-173 TQS parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status









Default: OTU-1 Laser Status




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1495



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Enabled

The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission






14.12.9 TQS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11TQ S

N/A

I-16-2 km-eSFP S-16.1-15 km-eSFP L-16.1-40 km-eSFP L-16.2-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1496



NOTE



This module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-3

0

3

3


dBm

-10

-5

-2

-2


dB

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2


nm

N/A

1

1

1


1497


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value I-16-2 kmeSFP

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

L-16.1-40 km-eSFP

L-16.2-80 km-eSFP

30

30

30


dB

N/A

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

APD

APD


nm

1270 to 1580

1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm

-18

-18

-27

-28


dBm

-3

0

-9

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

NOTE

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1498



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



nm

1471 to 1611


dBm

5


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

±6.5


nm

1.0


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


1499



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l

Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)




TN11TQS

43

47.3

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1500



14.13 TQX TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

14.13.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TQX board are TN11, TN52, TN53, and TN55.


Ini tial Ve rsi ona





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11 TQ X

V1 00 R0 04 C0 1

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN 52 TQ X

880 0: V1 00 R0 02 C0 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

680 0: V1 00 R0 04 C0 4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1501



Bo ard

Ini tial Ve rsi ona





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 53 TQ X

V1 00 R0 06 C0 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN 55 TQ X

V1 00 R0 06 C0 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

a: If there is a substitution relationship between two boards and one of the boards is used to replace the other board, the device initial version supported by the replaced board takes effect. For example, when you use TN55TQX to replace TN53TQX, TN55TQX can be supported by V100R006C00.

Variants Each of the TN11TQX, TN52TQX, TN53TQX, and TN55TQX boards has only one variant identified by the suffix 01 in the board name, for example, TN11TQX01.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

CrossConnet Granularit y

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock

Client-side Services OTU2/ OTU2e

FC800/ FC1200

TN11TQX

ODU2/ ODU2e

N

N

N

N

TN52TQX

ODU2/ ODU2e

N

N

Y

N

TN53TQX

ODU2/ ODU2e

N

N

Y

Y

TN55TQX

ODU2/ ODU2e/ ODUflex

Y

Y

Y

Y


1502



For details, see 14.13.4 Functions and Features. Specification: l

The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 14.13.10 TQX Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Table 14-177 Substitution rules of the TQX board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TQX

TN55TQX

The TN55TQX can be created as TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX functions as the TN11TQX. NOTE The TN55TQX board can substitute for the TN11TQX board only after the software upgrade to Optix OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01 SPC300 or later.

TN52TQX

TN55TQX

The TN55TQX can be created as 52TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX functions as the TN52TQX.

TN53TQX

TN55TQX

The TN55TQX can be created as 53TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX functions as the TN53TQX.

TN55TQX

None

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


The TN55TQX board added the support for optical modules 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/ RX1270nm-10km-XFP and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/ RX1330nm-10km-XFP.



1503





Added the support for latency measurement on the TN53TQX and TN55TQX (in standard mode) boards.


Added the board model in standard mode for the TN55TQX board.




Deleted the support for the colored 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd/even)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP module on the client side.




Added the TN55TQX board.

The TN55TQX board, a 4 x 10G tributary service processing board, is added to support the ODUflex, IEEE 1588v2, and physical-layer clock functions.

Changed the FC800 service module of the TQX board from 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 kmXFP to 800-SM-LC-L-10 kmXFP.




14.13.3 Application As a type of tributary board, the TQX board converts between four FC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and four ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TQX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-159. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1504



Figure 14-159 Position of the TQX board in the WDM system 4xODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex


TQX TX1 1

1 N Q 2

4

4

M 1 U X / D M 4 U X

M U 1 X N / Q D 2 M U 4 X

1

1

4

4



RX1 TQX 10GE LAN 10GE WANTX1 STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e RX4 FC800 FC1200 TX4

10GE LAN RX110GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 TX4 OTU2e FC800 RX4 FC1200


Client-Side Service


TN11TQ X


ODU2

10GE LAN

ODU2e

10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2

ODU2

10GE LAN/OTU2e

ODU2e


ODU2


ODU2e


ODU2


ODU2e

FC800

ODUflex

TN52TQ X

TN53TQ X

TN55TQ X

14.13.4 Functions and Features The TQX board enables cross-connections at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-179.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1505



Table 14-179 Functions and features of the TQX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TQX converts signals as follows: l 4xFC800/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2<->4xODU2 l 4xFC1200/10GE LAN/OTU2e<->4xODU2e. l 4xFC800<->4xODUflex


STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s NOTE Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports FC800 and FC1200 services. Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services. The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same. Therefore, For the TN11TQX/ TN52TQX, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.


Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TQX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

OTN function

l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43.

NOTE The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TQX board.

l Supports PM function for ODU2. l Supports SM and TCM function when the TN52TQX, TN53TQX and TN55TQX receives OTN services. ESC function

Supported by the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e.

FEC coding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1506




Description

ALS function


PRBS test function


LPT function


Test frame



The TN53TQX/TN55TQX (standard mode) board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000.


NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU2/OTU2e.

IEEE 1588v2

The TN55TQX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

Physical clock

TN55TQX: l When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. l When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission. TN52TQX/TN53TQX: When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supported by the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX


1507




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services, and 10GE WAN services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.


l TN11TQX/TN12TQX/TN53TQX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)

Port MTU


l TN55TQX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)

NOTE when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

Loopback



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic


1508






14.13.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-160 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQX.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1509



Figure 14-160 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQX Backplane(service cross-connection)

n X ODUk

Client side

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4


O/E

10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module FC encapsulation and mapping module


Crossconnect module

1588v2 module

E/O




Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage



NOTE

Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX board supports FC encapsulation and mapping module. Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX board supports client-side OTN processing module. Only the TN55TQX board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module. In Figure 14-160, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the TQX board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 14-180 shows the service cross-connections from the TQX board to the backplane. Table 14-180 Service cross-connections from the TQX board to the backplane

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board


TN11TQX/ TN52TQX/ TN53TQX

A maximum of 4xODU2/ODU2e

TN55TQX

A maximum of 4xODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex


1510



The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TQX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, OTN processing module, and cross-connect module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – FC encapsulation and mapping module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1511



Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function. NOTE


– Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex signals. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the TQX and the cross-connect board through the backplane. l


l


l


14.13.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-161 shows the front panel of the TQX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1512



Figure 14-161 Front panel of the TQX board



l


l


l





1513



Table 14-181 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQX board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX4

LC


RX1-RX4

LC



14.13.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one TQX board. For the OptiX OSN 6800: l

If the TN12XCS board is used, the TQX board supports a service capacity of 40 Gbit/s when it is installed in slot 1, 4, 11, or 14; only optical ports RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 of the TQX board are available and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s when it is installed in any of the other slots.

l

If the TN11XCS board is used, only optical ports RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 of the TQX board are available and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s regardless of which slot the board is installed.

For the OptiX OSN 8800: The TQX board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s in any slot. Table 14-182 shows the valid slots for the TN11TQX board. Table 14-182 Valid slots for the TN11TQX board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Table 14-183 shows the valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board. Table 14-183 Valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


1514



Table 14-184 shows the valid slots for the TN53TQX board. Table 14-184 Valid slots for the TN53TQX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-185 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-185 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. The TQX board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1515



Table 14-186 Port diagram and port description Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descriptio n


TN11T QX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-162

Table 14-187

TQX

TN52T QX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-162

Table 14-187

52TQX

TN53T QX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-162

Table 14-187

53TQX

TN55T QX

Compat ible mode

Figure 14-162

Table 14-187

55TQX

Standar d mode

Figure 14-163

Table 14-187

55TQX(STND)

Figure 14-162 Port diagram of the TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX (compatible mode) Other line/PID board

Backplane 4x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex



NOTE

Only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex. Cross-connect module



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1516



Figure 14-163 Port diagram of the TN55TQX (standard mode) Other line/PID board Backplane 4x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex





NOTE

The TN55TQX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring crossconnections for the board, ODUflex Timeslot is 7.

Table 14-187 Description of NMS port of the TQX board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP1-ClientLP4


14.13.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TQX, refer to Table 14-188. Table 14-188 TQX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1517



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





l TN11TQX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64


Default: None l TN52TQX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: None l TN53TQX/ TN55TQX: None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64, CBR_10G, FC800, FC1200 Default: None

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1518



Field

Value

Description


9953.28 to 10312.50


Default: /

A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value. The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to CBR_10G. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services. Port Mapping

TN11TQX/TN52TQX/ TN53TQX:


l Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)


l Default: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) TN55TQX: l Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l Default: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) NOTE For the TN11TQX: only the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 ports support MAC transparent mapping (10.7G).

Laser Status




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1519



Field

Value

Description

Service Mode




When the board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode. NOTE Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter.


FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS, BW_WDM_Defect, FW_ODUk_CSF Default: FW_Defect

Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQXTN55TQX supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1520



Field

Value

Description






Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600 Default: 9600

With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQXTN55TQX supports this parameter.

Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQXTN55TQX supports this parameter.

Sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. For a 10GE LAN service, when the port mapping mode is Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G), data packets will be transparently transmitted if their lengths exceed Max. Packet Length. When the port mapping mode is MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), data packets will be discarded if their lengths exceed Max. Packet Length. NOTE For the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX, when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1521



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter.

FEC Working State



FEC

FEC Mode

Default: FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.




LPT Enabled


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1522



Field

Value

Description


REMOTE_FAULT, None



NOTE l Only the TN52TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter. l This parameter takes effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. l For the TN52TQX/TN55TQX boards, when routers support REMOTE_FAULT as a switching condition and the TQX boards are cascaded on the client side, perform the following operations: l If the bit transparent transmission mode is configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None, no matter whether a protection scheme is configured or not. l If the MAC transparent transmission mode and client-side 1+1 protection are configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None. The non-protection scenario of MAC transparent transmission is not supported.

PRBS Test Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1523



Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TQX/TN55TQX.

Insert Code Type

l When Service Type is STM-64: – PN11, MS_AIS – Default: PN11 l When Service Type is 10GE LAN and port mapping mode is MAC transparent mapping (10.7G): – Quick insert, Delayed insert – Default: Quick insert

Applies to fault detection and location scenarios when the service type is STM-64. When the tributary or line board at the upstream site is faulty or when the line board at the downstream site is faulty, users can specify the output code type for the tributary board at the downstream site using this parameter. When the service type is 10GE LAN, the value Quick insert applies to a scenario in which no protection is configured on the WDM equipment while protection is configured for the router that connects to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, quick protection switching can be achieved on the router. The value Delayed insert applies to a scenario in which protection is configured for the WDM equipment and the router connected to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, the WDM equipment preferentially performs protection switching in case of a fault. If the fault is rectified, the router does not perform protection switching. If the fault persists, then the router performs protection switching. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN55TQX.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1524



Field

Value

Description

Port Working Mode

ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/Any->ODU2>OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port)

Specifies the working mode of the interface on the board depending the actual application scenario and service mapping path. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN55TQX

Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/Any->ODU2>OTU2)

14.13.10 TQX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11TQX/ TN52TQX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km-XFP

TN53TQX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km-XFP 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP

TN55TQX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km-XFP 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/RX1270nm-10kmXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/RX1330nm-10kmXFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1525



NOTE

Margins exist between the default input power low threshold and the receiver sensitivity and between the default input power high threshold and the overload point. These margins ensure that the system can report an input power low or high alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or overload point. NOTE

The 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP, 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP, and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals. The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


1526


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type





30

30

30


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12


NOTE

The 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-XFP module can be used to access FC800 signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1527




Unit

Optical Module Type



Gbit/s

8.5

Optical source type

-

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330


dBm

-1


dBm

-6


dB

6

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN


nm

1260 to 1355


dBm

-14.4


dBm

0.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE

The 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/RX1270nm-10km-XFP and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/RX1330nm-10kmXFP optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, OTU2e, and FC1200 signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1528



Table 14-191 Client-side pluggable 10G optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional transmissions) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


km

10

10


nm

1320 to 1340

1260 to 1280


dBm

0

0


dBm

-5

-5


dB

3.5

3.5


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1280

1320 to 1340


dBm

-14

-14


dBm

0.5

0.5



l

Weight: TN11TQX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.) TN52TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN53TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN55TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1529






TN11TQX

65.0

71.2

TN52TQX

91.5

100

TN53TQX

45

50

TN55TQX

45

50


14.14 TSC TSC: 100G tributary service processing board

14.14.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TSC board is TN54.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Board

Initial Version





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

TN54TS C

V100R00 7C02

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TSC board must work with TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT boards. l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TSC board must work with the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM board. l For an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TSC board must work with the TN16UXCM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1530



Variants The TN54TSC board has only one variant: TN54TSC. The TN54TSC board variant is the board itself.




Added the TN54TSC board.

The TN54TSC board, a 100G tributary service processing board, is added.

14.14.3 Application As a type of tributary board, the TSC board converts between one channel of 100GE/OTU4 optical signals and one channel of ODU4 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TSC board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-164. Figure 14-164 Position of the TSC board in the WDM system 1xODU4 1xOTU4

1xOTU4 1xODU4

8×ODU0

100GE/OTU4 TX

1×ODU4

RX

TSC

N S 4

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

N S 4

1×ODU4

TSC

TX RX 100GE/OTU4

14.14.4 Functions and Features The TSC board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-192.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1531



Table 14-192 Functions and features of the TSC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TSC converts signals as follows: 1 x 100GE/OTU4<->1 x ODU4


100GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 103.125 Gbit/s


Supports the cross-connection of one channel of ODU4 signals between the TSC and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709.


l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU4 layer: – When the client-side service type is 100GE, the board supports the PM function. – When the client-side service type is OTU4, the board supports the PM and TCM functions, PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. ESC function

Supported when the client side service type is OTU4.

PRBS function

Supports the PRBS function on the client side, only when the client side service type is OTU4.

LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding



l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) for the OTN service to help locate line failures. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ALS function


Test frame


Latency measurement

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported


1532




Description

Physical clock



Supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE Supports the tributary SNCP protection, only when the client side service type is OTU4.

Loopback


Client side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Channel Loopback

Not supported


IEEE 802.3ba


ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1533



14.14.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TSC consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-165 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TSC. Figure 14-165 Functional modules and signal flow of the TSC Backplane(service cross-connection) 1 x ODU4 Client side RX TX

O/E

E/O






Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TSC board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSC to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of 100GE/OTU4 service signals through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing,

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1534



and encoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU4 electrical signals to the backplane for grooming. l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives one channel of ODU4 electrical signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU4 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out one channel of 100GE/OTU4 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one channel of 100GE/ OTU4 signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of one channel of 100GE/OTU4 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of 100GE/OTU4 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of a 100GE service encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. – Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 100GE signals, maps the signals into the payload of an ODU4 frame, and performs the reverse process. The service encapsulation and mapping module supports monitoring of 100GE signal performance. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames ODU4 signals and processes overheads in ODU4 signals.

l


l


14.14.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TSC board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1535



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-166 shows the front panel of the TSC board. Figure 14-166 Front panel of the TSC board

NOTE




l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1536


l




Interfaces Table 14-193 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-193 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSC board Interface

Type

Function

RX

LC


TX

LC



14.14.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one TSC board. Table 14-194 shows the valid slots for the TSC board. Table 14-194 Valid slots for TSC board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-195 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1537



Table 14-195 Mapping between the physical ports on the TSC board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX/RX

3

NOTE


Logical Ports Figure 14-167 shows the port diagrams of the TSC board. Table 14-196 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-167 Port diagram of the TSC

Other line board

Backplane 1 x ODU4

3(RX1/TX1)-1




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1538



Table 14-196 Description of NMS port of the TSC board Port Name

Description

RX/TX


14.14.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TSC, refer to Table 14-197. Table 14-197 TSC parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status









Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1539



Field

Value

Description


Disabled, Enabled


Service Type

100GE, OTU4

Default: Enabled

Default: 100GE ALS Auxiliary Condition

FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS , BW_WDM_Defect, FW_OPUk_CSF Default: FW_Defect

Specifies the type of the client service to be received by the board. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the clientside transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF.




Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1540



Field

Value

Description






Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.

FEC Mode

FEC Default: FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1541



Field

Value

Description




l Default: Disabled

l When the parameter is set to GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 or GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead.

l When the parameter is set to Disabled, the system will process the GCC1 and GCC2 bytes in the OTN overhead.

l When the parameter is set to Only GCC1 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 byte but only the GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to Only GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC2 byte but only the GCC1 byte in the OTN overhead. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTU4 services.

PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status



14.14.10 TSC Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1542



Board



TN54TS C

N/A

100G BASE-LR4-10 km-CFP 100G BASE-10×10G-10 km-CFP (100G BASE-4×25G)/(OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-CFP

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Gbit/s

25.78125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm


1.7

1543



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

10.5


dBm

-1.3


dBm

4.5


dBm

-4.3


dBm

4.5


dB

4


dB

30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

25.78125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

-10.6


dBm

4.5


dBm

4.5


1544



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-8.6

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

NOTE

The OMA values are designed to ensure normal equipment operation. They are not provided for equipment commissioning. In practical, equipment commissioning is performed based on the average receiver power per lane and total average launched power. It is recommended that the total average launched power be used as the reference for equipment commissioning. For details, see Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board in the Commissioning.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1521 1529 1537 1545 1553 1561 1569 1577 1585 1593

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1545



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Maximum Lane Center Wavelength


nm

1525 1533 1541 1549 1557 1565 1573 1581 1589 1597


dBm

4.2


dBm

13.5


dBm

-5.8


dBm

3.5


dBm

-2.8


dBm

-0.8


dBm

3.5


dB

2.5


dB

30


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


Gbit/s

10.3125


1546



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1521 1529 1537 1545 1553 1561 1569 1577 1585 1593


nm

1525 1533 1541 1549 1557 1565 1573 1581 1589 1597

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

-10.8


dBm

3.5


dBm

3.5


dBm

-8.8


1547



Parameter

Unit



dB

-26

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Gbit/s

100GE: 25.78125 OTU4: 27.952493


ppm

100GE: -100 to 100 OTU4: -20 to 20


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dBm


100GE: 1.7 OTU4: 3.5 1548



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

100GE: 10.5


dBm


dBm


dBm



dBm


Eye pattern mask

-

100GE: IEEE 802.3ba compliant

OTU4: 8.9 100GE: -4.3 OTU4: -2.5 100GE: 4.5 OTU4: 2.9

OTU4: ITU-T G.959 compliant Optical Extinction Ratio (Min)

dB


dB

100GE: 4 OTU4: 7 30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

100GE: 25.78125 OTU4: 27.952493


ppm

100GE: -100 to 100 OTU4: -20 to 20


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1549



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value (100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10 kmCFP 1310.19


dBm

100GE: -10.6


dBm


dBm



dBm



dBm



dBm

2.9 (Only for OTU4)

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

OTU4: -8.8 100GE: 4.5 OTU4: 2.9

NOTE




l





TN54TSC

65.0

80.0


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1550



14.15 TSXL TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

14.15.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TSXL board are TN11, TN53, and TN54.


Init ial Ver sio n





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11 TS XL

V10 0R0 04C 01

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN 53 TS XL

V10 0R0 05

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN 54 TS XL

V10 0R0 06C 03

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Variants The TN11TSXL, TN53TSXL, and TN54TSXL board has only one variant: TN11TSXL01, TN53TSXL01, and TN54TSXL01.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Function: Board



TN11TSXL

ODU2

STM-256/OC-768

TN53TSXL

ODU3

STM-256/OC-768/OTU3


1551



Board



TN54TSXL

ODU3

40GE

For details, see 14.15.3 Application and 14.15.4 Functions and Features. l

Appearance: The TN11TSXL, TN53TSXL, and TN54TSXL use different front panels with different dimensions. For details, see 14.15.6 Front Panel and 14.15.10 TSXL Specifications.

l

Specification: The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 14.15.10 TSXL Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The TSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.




Added the TN54TSXL board.

The TN54TSXL board, a 40G tributary board, is added to map 40GE services to ODU3 services.

14.15.3 Application As a type of tributary board, the TN11TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/ OC-768 optical signals and four channels of ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection. The TN53TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical signals through cross-connection. The TN54TSXL board converts between one channel of 40GE optical signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-168, Figure 14-169 and Figure 14-170.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1552



Figure 14-168 Position of the TN11TSXL board in the WDM system 4xODU2

4xODU2

TSXL 1

RX

1

4

4

M 1 U X / D M 4 U X

M U 1 X N / Q D 2 M U 4 X

1

1

TX 4xODU2

N Q 2

4xODU2

STM-256 OC-768 TX

TSXL

4

STM-256

RX OC-768

4


1xODU3

TSXL

TSXL

RX

M U X / D M U X

TX N S 3

1xODU3

N S 3

1xODU3

STM-256 OC-768 TX OTU3

M U X / D M U X

STM-256 OC-768 RX OTU3

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 /TN56NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.


1xODU3

TSXL

TSXL

RX

TX N S 3

1xODU3

TX

1xODU3

40GE

N S 3

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

RX

40GE

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1553



14.15.4 Functions and Features The TSXL board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-201. Table 14-201 Functions and features of the TSXL board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TSXL converts signals as follows: l TN11TSXL: – 1 x (STM-256/OC-768)<-> 4 x ODU2 – Implements the transparent transmission of 40 Gbit/s services in a 10 Gbit/s WDM network. l TN53TSXL: – 1 x (STM-256/OC-768/OTU3) <-> 1 x ODU3 l TN54TSXL: – 1 x 40GE<->1 x ODU3


l STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s l OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s l 40GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 41.25 Gbit/s


Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU2 signals between the TN11TSXL and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of one channel of ODU3 signals between the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM, TCM functions for ODU3.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

FEC coding

Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side only when the service on the client side is OTU3.

PRBS test function

TN11TSXL/TN54TSXL: Not supported

LPT function

Not supported

TN53TSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client side.


1554




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. NOTE Only TN54TSXL provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports Poisson Mode. Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL board supports laser temperature monitoring. Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL board supports B1 bytes monitoring.

ALS function


Test frame

Supported by the TN54TSXL

Latency measurement

Not Supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not Supported

Physical clock

The TN54TSXL supports synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing


Supported by the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL.

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE The TN54TSXL board does not support tributary SNCP. NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.

Loopback


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported


1555




Description



ITU-T G.707


ITU-T G.805


ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1

14.15.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 14-171 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL. Figure 14-172 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL. Figure 14-173 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN54TSXL.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1556



Figure 14-171 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL Backplane(service cross-connection)

4XODU2 Client side O/E

RX TX

E/O






Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


1557



Figure 14-172 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU3 Client side O/E

RX TX

E/O


SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN processing module




Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


1558



Figure 14-173 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54TSXL Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU3 Client side O/E

RX TX

E/O

40GE encapsulation and mapping module





Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TSXL board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSXL to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one 40 Gbit/s service signal through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one channel of ODU3 electrical signals to the backplane for grooming.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one channel of ODU3 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk virtual concatenation. Then, the module sends out one channel of 40 Gbit/s service signal to the client-side optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1559



The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one 40 Gbit/s service signal, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3/40GE optical signal. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of STM-256/ OC-768/OTU3/40GE optical signal. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, Client-side OTN processing module, 40GE encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – 40GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 40GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors 40GE performance. – OTN processing module Frames ODU2, ODU3 signals. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the TSXL and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l


l


14.15.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1560



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-174 shows the front panel of the TN11TSXL board. Figure 14-175 shows the front panel of the TN53TSXL board. Figure 14-176 shows the front panel of the TN54TSXL board. Figure 14-174 Front panel of the TN11TSXL board

TSXL STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX RX

TSXL

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1561



Figure 14-175 Front panel of the TN53TSXL board

TSXL STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX RX

TSXL

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1562



Figure 14-176 Front panel of the TN54TSXL board G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 只能使用G.657A2 光纤 TSXL STAT ACT PROG SRV G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 只能使用 G.657A2 光纤

TX RX TSXL

NOTE




l


l


l





1563



Table 14-202 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSXL board Interface

Type

Function

RX

LC


TX

LC



14.15.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11TSXL board. One slot houses one TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL. Table 14-203 shows the valid slots for the TN11TSXL board. Table 14-203 Valid slots for the TN11TSXL board Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the TN11TSXL board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11TSXL board, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is IU2.

Table 14-204 shows the valid slots for the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL board. Table 14-204 Valid slots for the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


1564




Display of Physical Ports Table 14-205 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-205 Mapping between the physical ports on the TSXL board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


RX/TX

3

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 14-177 shows the application model of the TN11TSXL board. Figure 14-178 shows the application model of the TN53TSXL board. Figure 14-179 shows the application model of the TN54TSXL board. Table 14-206 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-177 Port diagram of the TN11TSXL board

Other line/ PID board Backplane 4 x ODU2

151 (imp/imp)-1 151 (imp/imp)-2 151 (imp/imp)-3 151 (imp/imp)-4

3 (RX1/TX1)-1

Client Side Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1565



Figure 14-178 Port diagram of the TN53TSXL board Other line board

Backplane ODU3

201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

3 (RX1/TX1)-1

Client Side Cross-connect module



Figure 14-179 Port diagram of the TN54TSXL board Other line board Backplane ODU3

3(RX1/TX1)-1

Client Side Cross-connect module



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1566



Table 14-206 Description of NM port of the TSXL board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1

Corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces.

imp (inverse multiplexing port)

The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.

ClientLP1


14.15.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TSXL, refer to Table 14-207. Table 14-207 TSXL parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1567



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

None, OC-768, STM-256, OTU-3


Default: STM-256

NOTE Only the TN53TSXL supports OTU-3 services. Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports this parameter.

Laser Status




Enabled, Disabled



Default: Enabled

Default: FW_Defect

The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_Defect. l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS. l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the upstream board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to BW_WDM_Defect. l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is detected on the client-side port of the local board, the laser on the client-side transmitter of the local board must be shut down. For this situation, set this parameter to FW_OPUk_CSF. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1568



Field

Value

Description






FEC Working State


With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL supports this parameter.

Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL supports this parameter.

Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL supports this parameter. This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU3.

FEC Mode

FEC Default: FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL supports this parameter. This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU3.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1569



Field

Value

SD Trigger Condition None, B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None

Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only the TN11TSXL/TN53TSXL supports this parameter.

PRBS Test Status


The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted. Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL supports this parameter.

NULL Mapping Status


Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. NOTE Only the TN53TSXL supports this parameter.

14.15.10 TSXL Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1570



Board



TN11TS XL/ TN53TS XL


N/A

TN54TS XL

N/A

40G BASE-LR4-10km-CFP

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.)


nm

1530 to 1565


dBm

3


dBm

0


dB

8.2


ps/nm

40

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1290 to 1570


dBm

-6


dBm

3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1571



Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 14-209 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 40G BASE-LR4-10kmCFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Signaling speed per Lane

Gbit/s

10.3125

Signaling speed accuracy

ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1264.5 1284.5 1304.5 1324.5


nm

1277.5 1297.5 1317.5 1337.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

8.3


dBm

-1


dBm

-4


dBm

3.5


dBm

-7


dBm

2.3


dB

3.5


1572



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 40G BASE-LR4-10kmCFP


-

PIN


Gbit/s

10.3125


ppm

-100 to 100


nm

1264.5 1284.5 1304.5 1324.5


nm

1277.5 1297.5 1317.5 1337.5


dBm

-13.7


dBm

2.3


dBm

3.5


dBm

-11.5

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

NOTE


Mechanical Specifications TN11TSXL: l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1573


l



TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL: l


l





TN11TSXL

90.2

96

TN53TSXL

75

83

TN54TSXL

58

64


14.16 TTX TTX: 10 x 10G tributary service processing board

14.16.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the TTX board are TN54 and TN55.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Board

Init ial Ver sio na





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

TN54TTX

V10 0R0 07C 02

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1574



Board

Init ial Ver sio na





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

TN55TTX

V10 0R0 09C 00S PC1 00

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

a: If there is a substitution relationship between two boards and one of the boards is used to replace the other board, the device initial version supported by the replaced board takes effect. For example, when you use TN55TTX to replace TN54TTX, TN55TTX can be supported by V100R007C02.

NOTE

l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TTX board must work with TNK2USXH +TNK2UXCT boards. l For an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TTX board must work with the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM board. l For an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TTX board must work with the TN16UXCM board.

Variants The TN54TTX/TN55TTX board has only one variant: TN54TTX01/TN55TTX01.


Clientside Services OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC800/ FC1200

10GE LAN, MAC Transpar ent Mapping (10.7 G)

Client-side Optical Module SingleFiber Bidirecti onal Optical Module

10 Gbit/s Multirat e-80 kmSFP+

ODUflex CrossConnet Granular ity

IEEE 1588v2

TN54TTX

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN55TTX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

For details, see 14.16.4 Functions and Features. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1575



Specification: l

The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 14.16.10 TTX Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Table 14-210 Substitution rules of the TTX board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN54TTX

TN55TTX

The TN55TTX can be created as 54TTX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TTX functions as the TN54TTX.

TN55TTX

None

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


The TN55TTX board added the support for optical module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-SFP +.



1576





Added the TN55TTX board.

Compared with the TN54TTX board, the TN55TTX board newly supports: l OTU2, OTU2e, FC800, and FC1200 services on the client side. l MAC transparent mapping (10.7G) of 10GE LAN services. l Test frame and IEEE 1588v2. l Single-fiber bidirectional transmission.



Added the TN54TTX board.

The TN54TTX board is added to process 10 x 10G tributary services.

14.16.3 Application As a type of tributary board, the TTX board converts between ten channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TTX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-180. Figure 14-180 Position of the TTX board in the WDM system 10xODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

10xODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex TTX

TTX

N S 4

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

N S 4

10xDU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

10xDU2/ODU2e/ODUflex

10GE LAN RX1 10GE WAN TX1 STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e RX10 FC800 TX10 FC1200

TX1

10GE LAN 10GE WAN RX1 STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 TX10 OTU2e FC800 RX10 FC1200

NOTE

l Only the TN55TTX supports FC800, FC1200, OTU2 and OTU2e services. l The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TTX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1577




Client-Side Service


TN54TT X

10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192

ODU2

10GE LAN

ODU2e

TN55TT X

10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2

ODU2

OTU2e/FC1200

ODU2e

10GE LAN

ODU2/ODU2e

FC800

ODU2/ODUflex

14.16.4 Functions and Features The TTX board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-212. Table 14-212 Functions and features of the TTX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

TTX converts signals as follows: l TN54TTX: – 10 x 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<->10 x ODU2 – 10 x 10GE LAN<->10 x ODU2e l TN55TTX: – 10 x 10GE WAN/10GE LAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/FC800<>10 x ODU2 – 10 x FC1200/10GE LAN/OTU2e<->10 x ODU2e – 10 x FC800<->10 x ODUflex NOTE l Only the TN55TTX supports FC800, FC1200, OTU2 and OTU2e services. l The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TTX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1578




Description


10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s NOTE Only the TN55TTX supports FC800, FC1200, OTU2 and OTU2e services.

Supports the cross-connection of ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex signals between the TTX board and the cross-connect board through the backplane.


NOTE The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TTX board.

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G. 709.

OTN function

l ODU2/ODUflex layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. ESC function

Supported when the client-side service type is OTU2 or OTU2e. NOTE A maximum of eight ports support the ESC function.

PRBS function

Supports the PRBS function on the client side. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e. The PRBS function can be configured only on one port at a time for TN54TTX. The TN55TTX board has no limitation.

LPT function


FEC coding

l TN54TTX: Not supported. l TN55TTX: Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the client side, only when the service type is OTU2/OTU2e.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1579




Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services (10GE LAN).

ALS function


Test frame

l TN54TTX: Not supported. l TN55TTX: Supports the test frame function when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).

Latency measurement

The board supports latency measurement. The bidirectional latency at the ODUk layer between two tributary boards supporting the latency measurement function can be measured, and the latency data is displayed on the U2000. NOTE This function is not supported when the client-side service type is OTU2/OTU2e. The latency measurement function can be configured only on one port at a time.

l TN54TTX: Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

l TN55TTX: The TN55TTX board supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN and the Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). Physical clock

TN54TTX: When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. TN55TTX: When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission instead of synchronous Ethernet processing. When the board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, the board can support synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supported


1580




Description

Protection scheme

l Supports client 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary ODUk SNCP protection NOTE When the board receives OTN services, SDH/SONET services, and 10GE WAN services the board supports tributary SNCP protection.


l TN54TTX: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

Port MTU


l TN55TTX: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)

NOTE l Only the TN55TTX supports port MTU. l when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

Loopback


Client side

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Channel Loopback

Not supported


IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1581






14.16.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TTX consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-181 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TTX.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1582



Figure 14-181 Functional modules and signal flow of the TTX Backplane(service cross-connection)

Client side RX1


O/E


RX10

TX1

10 x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex


E/O

TX10



1588v2 module




Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

l Only the TN55TTX board supports FC encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module and the IEEE 1588v2 module. l The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TTX board.

Signal Flow The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TTX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TTX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives ten channels of the optical signals through the RX1RX10 interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1583



processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out ten channels of ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex signals to the backplane for grooming. l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex electrical signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out ten channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of ten channels of 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs ten channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX10 ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of ten channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of ten channels of 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, OTN processing module, and cross-connect module. – SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET/10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function. NOTE


– Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames ODU2/ODU2e signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e signals. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1584



– Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the TTX and the cross-connect board through the backplane. l


l


l


14.16.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TTX board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 14-182 shows the front panel of the TTX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1585



Figure 14-182 Front panel of the TTX board



l


l


l





1586



Table 14-213 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TTX board Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX10

LC


RX1-RX10

LC



14.16.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one TTX board. Table 14-214 shows the valid slots for the TTX board. Table 14-214 Valid slots for TTX board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 14-215 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-215 Mapping between the physical ports on the TTX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4


1587



Physical Port


TX5/RX5

7

TX6/RX6

8

TX7/RX7

9

TX8/RX8

10

TX9/RX9

11

TX10/RX10

12

NOTE


Logical Ports Figure 14-183 shows the port diagrams of the TTX board. Table 14-216 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-183 Port diagram of the TTX Other line/PID board

Backplane 10 x ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex

3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 7(RX5/TX5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1 11(RX9/TX9)-1 12(RX10/TX10)-1 NOTE

The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TTX board. Cross-connect module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1588


14 OTN Tributary Board Service processing module

Table 14-216 Description of NMS port of the TTX board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX10/TX10


14.16.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TTX, refer to Table 14-217. Table 14-217 TTX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status






Default: NonLoopback Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1589



Field

Value

Description

Service Type

l TN54TTX: None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, STM-64


l TN55TTX: None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, STM-64, OTU2, OTU2e, FC800, FC1200 Default: None Port Mapping

l TN54TTX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) l TN55TTX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G)

Specifies the service mapping mode on a port. See Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only the TN55TTX ports support MAC transparent mapping (10.7G).

Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) Laser Status




Enabled, Disabled

Service Mode


Default: Enabled


The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. When the board is enabled to receive an OTN service on the client side, set this parameter to OTN Mode. For any other client service types, set this parameter to Client Mode. NOTE Only the TN54TTX supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1590



Field

Value

Description




Default: FW_Defect








Default: 0s

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1591



Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled

The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid. NOTE l Only the TN55TTX supports this parameter. l This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.

FEC Mode

FEC Default: FEC

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. NOTE l Only the TN55TTX supports this parameter. l This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1592



Field

Value

Description

Max. Packet Length

1518 to 9600


Default: 9600

For a 10GE LAN service, when the port mapping mode is Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G), data packets will be transparently transmitted if their lengths exceed Max. Packet Length. When the port mapping mode is MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), data packets will be discarded if their lengths exceed Max. Packet Length. NOTE Only the TN55TTX supports this parameter. For the TN55TTX, when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.



Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. NOTE Only the TN55TTX supports this parameter. This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.




LPT Enabled


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1593



Field

Value

Description


REMOTE_FAULT, None



NOTE l This parameter takes effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. l When routers support REMOTE_FAULT as a switching condition and the TTX boards are cascaded on the client side, perform the following operations: l If the bit transparent transmission mode is configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None, no matter whether a protection scheme is configured or not. l If the MAC transparent transmission mode and client-side 1+1 protection are configured, set LPT Enabled to Enabled and Condition of Laser Shutdown by LPT to None. The non-protection scenario of MAC transparent transmission is not supported. NOTE The TN54TTX board supports only the bit transparent transmission mode.

PRBS Test Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1594



Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


Insert Code Type

l When Service Type is STM-64: – PN11, MS_AIS – Default: PN11 l When Service Type is 10GE LAN and port mapping mode is MAC transparent mapping (10.7G): – Quick insert, Delayed insert – Default: Quick insert

Applies to fault detection and location scenarios when the service type is STM-64. When the tributary or line board at the upstream site is faulty or when the line board at the downstream site is faulty, users can specify the output code type for the tributary board at the downstream site using this parameter. When the service type is 10GE LAN, the value Quick insert applies to a scenario in which no protection is configured on the WDM equipment while protection is configured for the router that connects to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, quick protection switching can be achieved on the router. The value Delayed insert applies to a scenario in which protection is configured for the WDM equipment and the router connected to the WDM equipment. In this scenario, the WDM equipment preferentially performs protection switching in case of a fault. If the fault is rectified, the router does not perform protection switching. If the fault persists, then the router performs protection switching. NOTE Only the TN55TTX supports MAC transparent mapping (10.7G).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1595



Field

Value

Description

Port Working Mode

ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/Any->ODU2), ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex), None(not for ports)

Specifies the working mode of the interface on the board depending the actual application scenario and service mapping path. NOTE Only the TN55TTX supports this parameter.

Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (OTU2/Any->ODU2)

14.16.10 TTX Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54TT X

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-ZR-80 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+

TN55TT X

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-SFP+ 10GBASE-ZR-80km-SFP+ 10GBASE-ER/EW-40km-SFP+ 10GBASE-SR-0.3km-SFP+ 10GBASE-LR-10km-SFP+ 11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/RX1330nm-10kmSFP+ 11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/RX1270nm-10kmSFP+

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1596



NOTE

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-SFP+, 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-SFP+ and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, or 10GE LAN, OTU2, OTU2e, FC800 and FC1200signals.


Unit

Value

Optical Module Type





8.5 to 11.1

9.956 to 11.1

8.5 to 11.3

Line code format

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

Optical source type

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


km

10

40

80

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9

Eye pattern mask

-



nm


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1355

1260 to 1605

1260 to 1565


1597



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




-14.4

-14(11.1G)

-24


dBm


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

reflectance

dB

-12

-27

-27

-15.8 (10.3125G)

NOTE

l 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+, 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+, 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, FC800 and FC1200 signals. l 10G BASE-ZR-80 km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN and10GE WAN signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type






Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.8 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

nm

840 to 860


1598


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-1

0.5

4

4


dBm

-7.3

-8.2

-4.7

0


dB

3

3.5

3

9


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)

-14.1 (OMA)

-24


dBm

-1

0.5

-1

-7

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-26

-27

11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/RX1330nm-10km-SFP+ and 11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/ RX1270nm-10km-SFP+ optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, FC800 and FC1200 signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1599




Unit

Optical Module Type



Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


km

10

10


nm

1260 to 1280

1320 to 1340


dBm

0.5

0.5


dBm

-8.2

-8.2


dB

3.5

3.5

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN


nm

1320 to 1340

1260 to 1280


dBm

-14.4

-14.4


dBm

0.5

0.5



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1600






TN54TTX

63.0

68.0

TN55TTX

48.0

53.0


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1601


15 OTN Line Board

15

OTN Line Board

About This Chapter 15.1 Overview A tributary board receives client-side services, performs O-E conversion, maps the services into ODUk containers, and lastly sends the ODUk electrical signals to cross-connect board for centralized cross-connection. A line board multiplexes and maps ODUk electrical signals crossconnected from cross-connect board and performs conversion between OTUk optical signals and standard wavelengths. 15.2 ND2 ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board 15.3 NO2 NO2: 8 x 10G Line Service Processing Board 15.4 NQ2 NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board 15.5 NS2 NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board 15.6 NS3 NS3: 40G line service processing board 15.7 NS4 NS4: 100G line service processing board 15.8 NS4M NS4M: 100G line service processing board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1602


15 OTN Line Board

15.1 Overview A tributary board receives client-side services, performs O-E conversion, maps the services into ODUk containers, and lastly sends the ODUk electrical signals to cross-connect board for centralized cross-connection. A line board multiplexes and maps ODUk electrical signals crossconnected from cross-connect board and performs conversion between OTUk optical signals and standard wavelengths.

Positions of Line Boards in a WDM System A line board multiplexes and maps ODUk electrical signals cross-connected from cross-connect board and performs conversion between OTUk optical signals and standard wavelengths. Figure 15-1 shows the positions of line boards in a WDM system. Figure 15-1 Positions of line boards in a WDM system Client-side services

ODUk

WDM-side services

ODUk

Line Board

FIU

SC1

Tributary board

Line Board

OA

Line Board OD

Tributary board

WDM-side ODF

Tributary board

OA

Line Board OM


Tributary board

Line Boards The differences between different types of line boards lie in the rate and number of line-side signals and the type and number of electrical signals from the cross-connect board. Table 15-1 provides the main functions of line boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1603


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-1 Main functions of line boards Board

TN11ND2

TN12ND2

TN52ND2

TN53ND2

TN55NO2

TN51NQ2

TN52NQ2 TN54NQ2

TN53NQ2


WDM-Side Signal

Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number

ODU1

8

OTU2

ODU2, ODU2e

2

OTU2, OTU2e

ODU1

8

OTU2

ODU2, ODU2e

2

OTU2, OTU2e

ODU0

16

OTU2

ODU1

8

OTU2

ODU2, ODU2e

2

OTU2, OTU2e

ODUflex

4

OTU2

ODU0

16

OTU2

ODU1

8

OTU2

ODU2, ODU2e

2

OTU2, OTU2e

ODUflex

4

OTU2

ODU0

64

OTU2

ODU1

32

OTU2

ODU2, ODU2e

8

OTU2, OTU2e

ODU1

16

OTU2

ODU2, ODU2e

4

OTU2, OTU2e

ODU0

32

OTU2

ODU1

16

OTU2

ODU2, ODU2e

4

OTU2, OTU2e

ODU0

32

OTU2

ODU1

16

OTU2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pluggabl e Optical Module

DWDM

CWDM

2

N

Y

N

2

Y

Y

N

2

N

Y

N

2

Y

Y

N

8

Y

Y

N

4

Y

Y

N

4

Y

Y

N

4

Y

Y

N


WDM Specifications

1604


Board

15 OTN Line Board


WDM-Side Signal

Type

Max. Number

Type

ODU2, ODU2e

4

OTU2, OTU2e

ODUflex

8

OTU2

TN11NS2

ODU1

4

OTU2

TN12NS2

ODU1

4

OTU2

ODU2, ODU2e

1

OTU2, OTU2e

ODU0

8

OTU2

ODU1

4

OTU2

ODU2, ODU2e

1

OTU2, OTU2e

ODUflex

2

OTU2

ODU0

8

OTU2

ODU1

4

OTU2

ODU2, ODU2e

1

OTU2, OTU2e

ODUflex

2

OTU2

ODU2

4

OTU3, OTU3e

ODU2e

4

OTU3e

ODU0

32

ODU1

16

OTU3, OTU3e

ODU2

4

ODU2e

4

OTU3e

ODU0

32

ODU1

16

OTU3, OTU3e

ODU2

4

ODU2e

4

OTU3e

ODU3

1

OTU3, OTU3e

TN52NS2

TN53NS2

TN11NS3

TN52NS3

TN54NS3 TN55NS3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


DWDM

CWDM

1

N

Y

N

1

Y

Y

N

1

N

Y

N

1

Y

Y

N

1

N

Y

N

1

N

Y

N

1

N

Y

N

Max. Number


WDM Specifications

1605


Board

TN56NS3

TN54NS4 TN56NS4 TN57NS4 TN58NS4

TN54NS4 M

15 OTN Line Board


WDM-Side Signal


Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Number

ODU0

32

ODUflex

32

OTU3, OTU3e

ODU1

16

ODU2

4

ODU2e

4

OTU3e

ODU3

1

OTU3

VC-4

256

OTU3, OTU3e

ODU0

80

ODUflex

80

ODU1

40

ODU2, ODU2e

10

ODU3

2

ODU4

1

ODU0

80

ODUflex

80

ODU1

40

ODU2, ODU2e

10

ODU3

2

ODU4

1

WDM Specifications DWDM

CWDM

1

N

Y

N

OTU4

1

N

Y

N

OTU4

1

N

Y

N

15.2 ND2 ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board

15.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the ND2 board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1606


15 OTN Line Board


Initial Version





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11 ND 2

V100R0 04

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN 12 ND 2

8800:V1 00R007 C00

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

TN 52 ND 2

V100R0 02C00

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN 53 ND 2

V100R0 06C01

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

a

6800:V1 00R004 C03

a: If there is a substitution relationship between two boards and one of the boards is used to replace the other board, the device initial version supported by the replaced board takes effect. For example, when you use TN53ND2 to replace TN52ND2 in 8800, TN53ND2 can be supported by V100R002C00.

NOTE

The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack only supports relay mode.

Variants The difference between the ND2 board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1607


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-2 Available variants of the TN11ND2 board Variant


01M01

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

T01


T02




T01


T02


B

The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 15.2.11 ND2 Specifications.



ODUflex

Direct Mapping of ODU0 to ODU2

IEEE 1588v2

Physic alLayer Clock

T01


N

N

Y

Y

T02


N

N

Y

Y

T04


Y

Y

N

N


Description

01

The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 15.2.11 ND2 Specifications.

Differences Between Versions Function: Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1608


Board

15 OTN Line Board

CrossConnet Granulari ty

FEC Encodin g

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock

TN11N D2

ODU1 and ODU2

FEC/ AFEC

N

N

TN12N D2

ODU1 and ODU2

FEC/ AFEC-2

Y

TN52N D2T01 TN52N D2T02

ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2

FEC/ AFEC-2

TN52N D2T04

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODUflex

TN53N D2


Relay Mode

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module Fixed Wave lengt h

Tuna bleWavel ength

Gray Light

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

FEC/ AFEC-2

N

N

Y

N

N

N

FEC/ AFEC-2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 15.2.11 ND2 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11ND2

TN12ND2/ TN52ND2

The TN12ND2/TN52ND2 can be created as ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 functions as the TN11ND2. NOTE When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. The TN52ND2T04 board can substitute for the TN11ND2T02.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1609


15 OTN Line Board

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12ND2

TN52ND2/ TN53ND2

The TN52ND2/TN53ND2 can be created as 12ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 functions as the TN12ND2. NOTE The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN12ND2 at rate 11.3 Gbit/s. The TN52ND2T04 board can substitute for the TN12ND2T02 board.

TN52ND2

TN53ND2

The TN53ND2 can be created as 52ND2 or 52ND2(STND) on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53ND2 functions as the TN52ND2. NOTE The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN52ND2 at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.

TN53ND2

None

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update




Added the TN52ND2T04 board.

The TN52ND2T04 board is added to replace the TN12ND2 or TN52ND2 board.


1610


15 OTN Line Board



Changed the description to that the TN12ND2 board does not support the 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP module.


Added the TN53ND2 board.

Compared with the ND2 board of the old version, the new TN53ND2 board supports the ODUflex, IEEE 1588v2, and physical-layer clock functions.



15.2.3 Application As a type of line board, the ND2 board converts 16 ODU0, eight ODU1, four ODUflex, or two ODU2 into two ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signals or converts two ODU2e signals into two ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODUflex service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.

Application scenario 1 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between eight channels of ODU1 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals Figure 15-2 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 8xODU1

8xODU1

1

1

1

1

1 TOM

4

4

8

1

1

1

ND2

OUT2

4


4×ODU1

IN2

1×ODU2

IN2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

4

1×OTU2

8

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

TOM

OUT2

M U X / D M U X

1

4×ODU1

4

OUT1

1×ODU2

IN1

ND2

1

IN1

OUT1

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

4

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

TOM 8

1

1

TOM 4

4

8

1611


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode.

Application scenario 2 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals Figure 15-3 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 2xODU2/ODU2e

2xODU2/ODU2e

IN1

OUT1

ND2

ND2

IN2 OUT2

TDX

1×ODU2/ODU2e

IN2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/ODU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×ODU2/ODU2e

OUT2

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2/ODU2e

IN1

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×ODU2/ODU2e

TDX

OUT1

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1612


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 3 of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals Figure 15-4 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

IN1

DMUX

OUT1

MUX

ND2 1×OTU2/OTU2e

OUT2

1×OTU2/OTU2e

MUX

IN2

DMUX

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a nonASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. The input and output wavelengths can be different. Only the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board equipped with an "800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZPIN" optical module supports regeneration of 11.3 Gbit/s OTU2e.

Application scenario 4 of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between 16 channels of ODU0 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 15-5 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)

1

16xODU0

16xODU0

1

1

1

8 ND2

OUT2

8


8xODU0

IN2

4xODU1

IN2

TOM 8

8

8

1

1

1

ND2

1×ODU2

OUT2

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

8

1×OTU2

8

4xODU1

TOM

1×ODU2

1

8xODU0

1

1

M U X / D M U X

8xODU0

IN1

4xODU1

IN1 OUT1

1×ODU2

OUT1

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

8

8

4xODU1

8xODU0

TOM

1

1

TOM 8

8

8

1613


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode. For the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board: l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive, the board supports the ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU2 service mapping path. l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the board supports the ODU0–>ODU2 service mapping path. l When the board works in compatible mode, the board does not support the configuration of the timeslot allocation mode, and it only supports the ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU2 service mapping path.

Application scenario 5 of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between four channels of ODUflex signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 15-6 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 4xODUflex

1×ODU2

1

1

1 TQX

ND2 1×ODU2

2xODUflex

IN2

M U OUT1 X / D IN2 M U OUT2 X

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

2xODUflex

4

OUT2

IN1

M U X / D M U X

2xODUflex

ND2 4

4

IN1

1×OTU2

TQX

OUT1

1×OTU2

1

1

1×ODU2

2xODUflex

1

4xODUflex

4

4

4

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode. The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.

Application scenario 6: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 15-7 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 6) 2xOTU2/OTU2e TOM

ODU1

ODU1 ODU1

ODUflex

ODUflex

OUT1 IN1

ODUflex ND2

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU2/ ODU2e

OUT2 IN2

M U X / D M U X

M OUT1 U X / D M U IN2 X OUT2

ODU0

ODU0

ODU1

ODU1

ODUflex

ODUflex

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU0 ODU1 ODUflex

TOM TOM TOA

ND2

1×OTU2/OTU2e

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ODU2/ ODU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

TDX/ ND2

IN1

1×ODU2 1×OTU2

ODU0

1×OTU2

TOA

ODU0

1×ODU2

TOM

ODU0

ODU2/ ODU2e


TDX/ ND2

1614


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. The same board can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e and ODUflex signals. Different IN/OUT ports can work in different service modes. For the TN11ND2 board, changing the service mode for one IN/OUT port will cause the board to reset, which in return leads to service interruption. Therefore, before changing the service mode for one IN/OUT port, delete all service cross-connections for the other IN/ OUT port. Only TN52ND2/TN53ND2 supports ODU0. TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.

The line boards at the two add/drop sites must have the same ODU timeslot allocation mode. When a TN53ND2 board is connected to a board that does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53ND2 board. For example, when a TN53ND2 board is connected to a TN52NQ2 board, which does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53ND2 board. Only the TN53ND2/52ND2T04/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/ TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN54HUNQ2 board supports the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter.

15.2.4 Functions and Features The ND2 board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-6 and Table 15-7. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0/ODUflex.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1615


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-6 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Line Mode) Functio n and feature

Description

Basic function

The ND2 board converts signals as follows: l TN11ND2/TN12ND2: – 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2<->2 x OTU2 – 2 x ODU2e<->2 x OTU2e l TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02: – 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2<->2 x OTU2 – 2 x ODU2e<->2 x OTU2e l TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2: – 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/4 x ODUflex<->2 x OTU2 – 2 x ODU2e<->2 x OTU2e Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals , ODUflex signals and the ODU2/ ODU2e signals.

Crossconnect capabilit ies

Supports cross-connections with cross-connect boards. l TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e l TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02: 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e l TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2: 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e

OTN function

l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODUflex layer: supports the PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions. NOTE Only the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.

WDM specific ation


Tunable wavelen gth function


ESC function

Supported


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1616


15 OTN Line Board

Functio n and feature

Description

PRBS function

Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. NOTE If the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board and the connected line board. In addition, the PRBS function can take effect on the boards only when the following condition is met: The TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board works in standard mode and ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured for the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board, or the TN52ND2T04/TN53ND2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.

LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

TN11ND2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Alarm and perform ance event monitori ng


Regener ation board

l The WDM-side signals from one TN11ND2 board can be regenerated by another TN11LSXR board.

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

The TN12ND2/TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02/TN53ND2 board supports the BC and OC modes; it does not support the TC or TC+OC mode.

l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events.

l The WDM-side signals from one TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1617


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Physical clock

The TN12ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane. The TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane. The TN53ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex signals are crossconnected from the backplane.

Opticallayer ASON

Supported

Electric al-layer ASON

Supported by the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2

Protecti on scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection and ODUk SPRing protection.

Loopbac k

Board

WDM Side

ODU0 Channel Loopback


ODUflex Channel Loopback

TN11ND2

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

TN12ND2

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

TN52ND2T01

Supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported

Supported only when ODU2/ ODU2e signals are received from the backplane.

Supported

Supported only when ODU1 signals are received from the backplane.

Supported

TN52ND2T02 TN52ND2T04 TN53ND2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1618



Description

Protocol s or standard s complia nce


15 OTN Line Board

IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FCPH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1619



15 OTN Line Board

Description



NOTE

The relay mode is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.

Table 15-7 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function


Regenerating rate

OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3Gbit/s NOTE Only the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board equipped with "800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D) RZ-PIN" optical module supports regeneration of 11.3 Gbit/s OTU2e.

OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

WDM specification


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1620


15 OTN Line Board

Function and feature

Description


Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for: l 40 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing l 80 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 50 GHz channel spacing

ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

FEC coding

TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events.

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Loopback

Not supported



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-


1621



15 OTN Line Board



15.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1622


15 OTN Line Board

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 15-8 Functional modules and signal flow (Line Mode) Backplane (service cross-connection)

n X ODUk

WDM side Crossconnect module

1588v2 module


O/E

OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2


Signal processing Signal processing module module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



NOTE

Only the TN12ND2/TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02/TN53ND2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module.

In Figure 15-8. n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the ND2 board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity. Table 15-8 Service cross-connections from the ND2 board to the backplane

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board


TN11N D2/ TN12N D2

A maximum of 8xODU1/2xODU2/2xODU2e

TN52N D2T01/ TN52N D2T02

A maximum of 16xODU0/8xODU1/2xODU2/2xODU2e


1623


15 OTN Line Board

Board


TN52N D2T04/ TN53N D2

A maximum of 16xODU0/8xODU1/4xODUflex/2xODU2/2xODU2e

The signal processing module of the ND2 board can access the following optical signals: The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the ND2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the ND2 to the WDM side of the ND2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The cross-connect module can receive ODUk signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTN framing, and FEC encoding. After processing, the signal processing module outputs two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The OTN processing module module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and FEC decoding. Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board processes clock signals in two directions. l


l

Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 15-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ND2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1624


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the ND2 (Relay Mode) WDM side

WDM side

IN1

O/E

OUT2

E/O



E/O

OUT1

O/E

IN2


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

The relay mode is only supported by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board.

The ND2 board regenerates two channels of optical signals. The signals at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing, and signal encoding. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1625


15 OTN Line Board

– WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. NOTE

The IEEE 1588v2 function is not supported if the working mode of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/ TN53ND2 board is Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode.

l


l


15.2.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 15-10 and Figure 15-11 show the front panel of the ND2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1626


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-10 Front panel of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2T01/TN12ND2T02/TN52ND2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1627


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-11 Front panel of the TN12ND2B/TN53ND2 board

NOTE

You are advised to insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.



l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1628


15 OTN Line Board

Interfaces Table 15-9 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ND2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC



15.2.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one ND2 board. Table 15-10 shows the valid slots for the TN11ND2 board. Table 15-10 Valid slots for the TN11ND2 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Table 15-11 shows the valid slots for the TN12ND2 board. Table 15-11 Valid slots for the TN12ND2 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU3-IU16

Table 15-12 shows the valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1629


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-12 Valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU3-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

15.2.8 Characteristic Code for the ND2 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.4 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit.


Display of Physical Ports Table 15-13 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-13 Mapping between the physical ports on the ND2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1630


15 OTN Line Board

The ND2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 15-14 Port diagram and port description Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descripti on


TN53N D2

Standard mode

Figure 15-12

Table 15-15

53ND2

Compatible mode

Figure 15-13

Table 15-16

53ND2(COMP)

Standard mode

Figure 15-12

Table 15-15

52ND2(STND)

Compatible mode

Figure 15-13

Table 15-16

52ND2

TN12N D2

Compatible mode

Figure 15-14

Table 15-16

12ND2

TN11N D2

Compatible mode

Figure 15-14

Table 15-16

ND2

TN52N D2a

a: The TN52ND2T01/TN52ND2T02 board can work only in compatible mode.

NOTE

For the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are only supported when Board Mode is set to Line Mode. For the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: The OptiX OSN 6800 only supports signal grooming at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 25 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board. NOTE

When the ND2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1631


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-12 TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board model (standard mode) Baclplane

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2) ODUflex:1 ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODUflex:2 4XODUflex

ODUflex:1 ODUflex:2

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1 2 xODU2/ 2xODU 2e

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh :1

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)


ODU1:1

8xODU1

ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU1:4 ODU1:1 ODU1:4

1(N1/OUT1)

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

2(N2/OUT2)

ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 16 xODU0

ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU0:1

ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1

OCh :1

ODU 1:4

ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1

OCh :1

ODU1:4

ODU 0:2

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) ODU0:1

16 xODU0

ODU0: 8 ODU0:1

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU0: 8


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)


ODU0 mapping path (ODU0->ODU2)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1632


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping paths are ODU0->ODU2, ODU1->ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping paths are ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2.

Figure 15-13 Port diagram for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (compatible mode) Other tributary/ line/PID board



Backplane 16 x ODU0

2 x ODU2/ODU2e

8 x ODU1







52 ODU1 (ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 72 ODU2 (ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

2 (IN2/OUT2)-1



ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.

ODU0 mapping path



1633


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-14 Port diagram for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board (compatible mode) Other tributary/line/PID board



8 x ODU1 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

ODU2

71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1

1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2


2 (IN2/OUT2)-1





ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1 signals are required, users only need to configure a cross-connection from another board to the ODU1LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1634


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-15 Descriptions of the ports on the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (standard mode) Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0: (1-8)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0: (1-8) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODUflex:(1-2)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODUflex:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)


2(IN2/OUT2)

Table 15-16 Descriptions of the ports on the ND2 board (compatible mode) Port Name

Description


ODU0LP1ODU0LP8


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU1LP ports.

ODU1LP1ODU1LP2


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU2LP ports.

ODU2LP1ODU2LP2


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the IN/OUT ports.

1(IN1/ OUT1)


-

2(IN2/ OUT2)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1635


15 OTN Line Board

15.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the ND2, refer to Table 15-17. Table 15-17 ND2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status










Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1636


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Service Mode

l TN11ND2: ODU1, ODU2


Default: ODU1 l TN12ND2: Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN52ND2/ TN53ND2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

This parameter is available only when Board Mode is set to Line Mode. l Automatic indicates that channel resources can be managed flexibly. For example, when the parameter is set to Automatic for an ODU2 channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel can be provisioned with ODU0/ ODU1 signals if there is no ODU2 signal from the backplane, but they cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal if there is an ODU2 signal from the backplane. l ODU0 indicates that the channel must be provisioned with an ODU0 signal. (This is the similar case for the ODU1, and ODU2 values.) If the parameter is set to ODU2 for a channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal. NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 only in the compatible mode.

Laser Status

Off, On Default: On


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1637


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Enable Auto-Sensing

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled

l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Mode, AFEC Grade and Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Mode, AFEC Grade and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. This parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2 /TN52ND2/TN53ND2. In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

FEC Working State



FEC Mode



AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay. NOTE Only the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1638


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Band Type

-



-



-

Displays the tunable wavelength range supported by the WDM-side optical interface on the board. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0

Sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.


C, CWDM Default: C

Sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.


Enabled, Disabled

Enable Line Rate

Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled

Default: Enabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. Determines whether to automatically switch between the Standard Mode and Speedup Mode for the line rate upon a rerouting event in ASON scenarios. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 in the standard mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1639


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Line Rate

Standard Mode, Speedup Mode, Speedup Mode 11.3G

Specifies the line rate of OTN signals. See Line Rate for more information.

Default: Standard Mode NOTE Only the TN12ND2/ TN52ND2 board supports regeneration of Speedup Mode 11.3G.

PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the ND2 board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 in the standard mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1640


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description





Assign random indicates that crosslayer mapping of services is performed. The service mappings are ODU0>ODU2, ODU1->ODU2, and ODUflex>ODU2. l Cross-layer mapping reduces the number of mapping layers and simplifies the relationship between client and server trails, which are easy to manage. l Cross-layer mapping enables flexible bandwidth usage. For example, when seven 1.25G timeslots of an ODU2 channel are occupied by ODUflex services, the remaining 1.25G bandwidth can be configured for ODU0 services, implementing ODU0->ODU2 crosslayer mapping. Assign consecutive indicates that layerby-layer mapping of services is performed from lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0->ODU1>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2. The Assign random mode is recommended. The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode values of two line boards must be the same when they are interconnected on the WDM side. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 in the standard mode. For the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board in an OptiX OSN 6800 NE, this parameter must be set to Assign consecutive.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1641


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Board Mode



Default: l 8800 universal platform subrack: Electrical Relay Mode l Other subracks: Line Mode

Line Mode: The board functions as a line board. Electrical Relay Mode/Optical Relay Mode: The board functions as a regeneration board. NOTE When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a nonASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.

15.2.11 ND2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN11ND 2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN12ND 2

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP

TN52ND 2


N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1642


15 OTN Line Board

Board



TN53ND 2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP

NOTE




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN

-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


1643


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-

Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN


NRZ

(D)RZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


1644


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


ps/nm

Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN


800

800


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


1645


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


1646


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


1647


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type





dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7



l

Weight: TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb. ) TN52ND2: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN53ND2: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1648


15 OTN Line Board





TN1 1ND 2


61.1

68.4

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

62.7

70.2


68.4

76.6


57.2

64


62

69


46

52


70.5

77.5


TN52ND2T01: 67.8

TN52ND2T01: 74.6

TN52ND2T04: 35

TN52ND2T04: 37

25

28

27

30

TN1 2ND 2

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP TN5 2ND 2

TN5 3ND 2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1649


15 OTN Line Board

15.3 NO2 NO2: 8 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

15.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the NO2 board is TN55.


Initial Version





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 55 NO 2

V100R0 07C00

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

NOTE

In the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, enhanced or general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, and OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the board can work either in line mode or relay mode. When the board works in line mode, the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must use the TNK2USXH +TNK2UXCT boards and the enhanced or general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack must use the TN52UXCH/ TN52UXCM board and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack must use the TN16UXCM board. In the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack and OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack, the board can work only in relay mode.

Variants The TN55NO2 board has only one variant: TN55NO201.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1650


15 OTN Line Board



Allowed the TN55NO2 board to work in line mode inside the general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.






Added the support for using the TN55NO2 board as a line board in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.




Added the TN55NO2 board.

The TN55NO2 board is added to process 8 x 10G services.

15.3.3 Application As a type of line board, the NO2 board converts 64 ODU0, 32 ODU1, or eight ODU2 into eight ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signals or converts eight ODU2e signals into eight ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1651


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 1 of the NO2: conversion between 64 channels of ODU0 and eight channels of OTU2 signals Figure 15-15 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 64xODU0

1

1

64xODU0

1

TOA 8

NO2

8

1

8xODU0

OUT8

4xODU1

IN8

1×OTU2

IN8

8

8

8

1×ODU2

OUT8

1

1

8xODU0

M U X / D M U X

4xODU1

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

OUT1

1 1×ODU2

IN1

NO2

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

8

4xODU1

8xODU0

1

TOA 8

1×OTU2

8

1

IN1

8

8

1

1×ODU2

8

8

4xODU1

8xODU0

TOA

OUT1

1

1 TOA

8

8

8

8

NOTE

This application scenario is supported only when the 55NO2 board is added on the NMS.

Application scenario 2 of the NO2: conversion between 32 channels of ODU1 and eight channels of OTU2 signals Figure 15-16 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 32xODU1

1

1

1

1

IN8

1

4×ODU1


8

4

1 1×ODU2

8

8

8

NO2

1 TOA

8

OUT8

1

4×ODU1

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

8

IN8

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

OUT1

1×OTU2

IN1

OUT8 1×OTU2

1

1×ODU2

1

4×ODU1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

IN1

8 NO2

TOA 8

OUT1

8

4

1

1×OTU2

8

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

TOA 8

32xODU1

1 TOA

8

8

8

1652


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE


Application scenario 3 of the NO2: conversion between eight channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals and eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals Figure 15-17 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 8xODU2/ODU2e

8xODU2/ODU2e

4

4

IN1

OUT1

8 NO2

4

4

8

NO2

OUT8

IN8

IN8

OUT8

1

1

1 TQX

4

4

1

1

8

1×ODU2/ODU2e

TQX

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1

1×ODU2/ODU2e

1

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/ODU2e

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2/ODU2e

TQX

IN1 1×OTU2/OTU2e

1

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1

1×ODU2/ODU2e

1

OUT1

TQX 8

4

4

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1653


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 4 of the NO2: implements the electrical regeneration of OTU2/ OTU2e optical signals Figure 15-18 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)

M OUT2 U X


IN1


D M U X

OUT1 M U X

IN2

D M U X

NO2

M OUT8 U X


IN7


D M U X

OUT7 M U X

D

IN8 M U X

NOTE

This application scenario is supported only when the 55NO2(REG) board is added on the NMS. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. The IN and OUT ports for the same regenerated signal must be configured as follows; otherwise, the ESC communication is not available. l

"IN1->OUT1" and "IN2->OUT2"

l


l


l


The input and output wavelengths can be different.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1654


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 5 of the NO2: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 15-19 Position of the NO2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 8xOTU2/OTU2e

ODU1

ODU1

OUT1 IN1

NO2

ODU0

ODU1

ODU0

ODU0

ODU1

ODU1

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU2/ ODU2e

TOM

TOA

NO2 IN8 OUT8

ODU2/ODU2e

OUT8 IN8

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU2/ODU2e

TQX/ ODU2/ NQ2 ODU2e

M U X / D M U X

IN1 OUT1

1×ODU2 1×OTU2

ODU1

ODU0

1×OTU2

TOA

ODU0

1×ODU2

TOM

ODU0

TQX/ NQ2

NOTE

The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0 and ODU1 signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. The same board can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e signals.

15.3.4 Functions and Features The NO2 board carries out cross-connection at the electrical layer, and provides the OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-23 and Table 15-24. Table 15-23 Functions and features of the NO2 board (Line Mode) Functi on and feature

Description

Basic function

NO2 converts signals as follows: l 64xODU0/32xODU1/8xODU2<->8xOTU2 l 8xODU2e<->8xOTU2e Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above.

Crossconnect capabili ties

Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 signals or 32 channels of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NO2 board and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=1, 2) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODU0 layer: supports the PM function, and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1655


15 OTN Line Board

Functi on and feature

Description

WDM specific ation


ESC function

Supported

PRBS function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Alarms and perform ance events monitor ing


Regener ation board

The WDM-side signals from one NO2 board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board.

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported


Supported



1656


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Protecti on scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.

Loopba ck

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM Side Loopback



Supported

Supported

Supported


1657


15 OTN Line Board


Description


Protocol s or standard s for transpar ent transmis sion (nonperform ance monitor ing)

IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FCFS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1658



15 OTN Line Board

Description

Protocol s or standard s for service processi ng (perfor mance monitor ing)


Table 15-24 Functions and features of the NO2 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function


Regeneratin g rate


WDM specification


OTN function

l Provides the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.

OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supports tunable wavelength optical modules that provide for: l 40 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing l 80 wavelengths tunable in the C band with 50 GHz channel spacing


1659


15 OTN Line Board


Description

ESC function

Supported

PRBS function

Not supported

FEC coding


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

PTP clock (1588 V2)

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Loopback

Not supported




-


1660



15 OTN Line Board



15.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NO2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 15-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1661


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 (Line Mode) 64XODU0/32XODU1/ 8XODU2/8XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O

OUT7 OUT8



OUT1 OUT2

O/E WDM-side Optical module

IN1 IN2 IN7 IN8

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NO2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NO2 to the WDM side of the NO2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The signal processing module can receive ODUk signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and FEC encoding. After processing, the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT8 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives eight channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN8 optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1662


15 OTN Line Board

After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and FEC decoding. Then, the module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 15-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 board. Figure 15-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the NO2 (Relay Mode) WDM side

WDM side IN1

O/E

E/O

OUT1

OUT2

E/O

O/E

IN2

IN7

O/E

E/O

OUT7

OUT8

E/O

O/E

IN8


WDM-side Optical module


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



The NO2 board regenerates eight channels of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN8 optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they are decoded. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT8 optical interfaces. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1663


15 OTN Line Board

Module Function l


l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NO2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l


l


15.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NO2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 15-22 shows the front panel of the NO2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1664


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-22 Front panel of the NO2 board

NOTE

You are advised to insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 to IN8/OUT8 interfaces in descending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.



l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1665


15 OTN Line Board

Interfaces Table 15-25 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-25 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NO2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN8

LC


OUT1-OUT8

LC



15.3.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one NO2 board. Table 15-26 shows the valid slots for the NO2 board. Table 15-26 Valid slots for the NO2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU2-IU16

15.3.8 Characteristic Code for the NO2 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.4 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1666


15 OTN Line Board


Display of Physical Ports Table 15-27 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-27 Mapping between the physical ports on the NO2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4

IN5/OUT5

5

IN6/OUT6

6

IN7/OUT7

7

IN8/OUT8

8

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, IN1/OUT1OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-23 shows the port diagrams of the TN55NO2 board. Table 15-28 lists the port descriptions

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1667


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when the 55NO2 board is selected on the NMS. l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.

Figure 15-23 Port diagram of the NO2 Backplane

IN(1~8)/OUT(1~8)-OCh:1 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh :1

IN(1~8)/OUT(1~8)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)


ODU1:1 ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU1:4 32xODU1 ODU1:1

1(N1/OUT1)

ODU1:4

8(IN8/OUT8)

IN(1~8)/OUT(1~8)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2) ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU 0:2

64xODU0

ODU0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU0:1

ODU1:1 ODU 2:1

OCh :1

ODU 1:4

ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1

OCh :1

ODU1:4

ODU 0:2


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1668


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-28 Description of ports on the NO2 Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane.

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ...... 7(IN7/OUT7)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ...... 7(IN7/OUT7)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1 ...... 7(IN7/OUT7)-OCh:1 8(IN8/OUT8)-OCh:1 1(IN1/OUT1)

Indicates the WDM-side port.

2(IN2/OUT2) ...... 7(IN7/OUT7) 8(IN8/OUT8)

15.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NO2, refer to Table 15-29. Table 15-29 NO2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1669


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used








Off, On Default: On


Enable Auto-Sensing


Enables or disables rate auto sensing for the board. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Mode, AFEC Grade and Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Mode, AFEC Grade and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. NOTE This parameter is only valid when the board work in relay mode. For ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1670


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Enabled




AFEC Grade

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1, 2, 3 Default: 3


Band Type

-



-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780


Default: /

NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.


1671


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C, CWDM


Default: C

See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.

Line Rate



Default: Standard Mode Enable Line Rate



Enabled, Disabled



Default: Disabled

Default: None

Determines whether to automatically switch between the Standard Mode and Speedup Mode for the line rate upon a rerouting event in ASON scenarios. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.

PRBS Test Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1672


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Board Mode




NOTE If the TN55NO2 board needs to work in relay mode, select the board as 55NO2 (REG) when creating it on the NMS. The parameter is available only in this scenario.

Default: Disabled

15.3.11 NO2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN55NO 2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1673


15 OTN Line Board


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1674


15 OTN Line Board


Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

Line code format

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP -

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


1675


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit


-



10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2


dBm

-6

-1


dB

6

8.2


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605


dBm

-11

-14


dBm

-1

-1



l

Weight: 1.66 kg (3.66 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1676


15 OTN Line Board





TN55 NO2


83.6

87

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

15.4 NQ2 NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

15.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NQ2 board are TN51, TN52, TN53, and TN54.


Initial Version

TN 51 NQ 2

V100R0 04C02

a





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1677


Bo ar d

Initial Version

TN 52 NQ 2

8800: V100R0 02C00

TN 53 NQ 2 TN 54 NQ 2

15 OTN Line Board





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

V100R0 06C01

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

V100R0 02C02

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

a

6800: V100R0 04C03

a: If there is a substitution relationship between two boards and one of the boards is used to replace the other board, the device initial version supported by the replaced board takes effect. For example, when you use TN53NQ2 to replace TN54NQ2, TN53NQ2 can be supported by V100R002C02.

NOTE

The TN53NQ2 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack only supports relay mode.

Variants Each NQ2 board version except the TN54NQ2 board has only one variant identified by 01 (for example, TN51NQ201). The TN54NQ2 board variant is the board itself.


Function:

Board


FEC Encoding

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock

Relay Mode

TN51NQ2

ODU1 and ODU2

FEC

N

N

N

TN52NQ2

ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2

FEC/AFEC-2

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1678


15 OTN Line Board

Board


FEC Encoding

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock

Relay Mode

TN53NQ2


FEC/AFEC-2

Y

Y

Y

TN54NQ2

ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2

FEC/AFEC-2

Y

Y

Y

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 15.4.11 NQ2 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN51NQ2

TN52NQ2/ TN53NQ2

The TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can be created as 51NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN51NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 only provides the functions of the TN51NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded. NOTE When both the receive and transmit boards employ FEC, the substitution applies; when both the receive and transmit boards employ AFEC, the substitution does not apply.

TN52NQ2

TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2

The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 can be created as 52NQ2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 functions as the TN52NQ2. NOTE Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports the TN54NQ2.

TN54NQ2

TN53NQ2

The TN53NQ2 board can be created as 54NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN54NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN53NQ2 board only provides the functions of the TN54NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded.

TN53NQ2

None

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1679


15 OTN Line Board







Added the TN53NQ2 board.

Compared with the NQ2 board of the old version, the new TN53NQ2 board supports the ODUflex, IEEE 1588v2, and physical-layer clock functions.



15.4.3 Application As a type of line board, the NQ2 board converts 32 ODU0, 16 ODU1, eight ODUflex, or four ODU2 into four ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signals or converts four ODU2e signals into four ITUT G.694.1 OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODUflex service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1680


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 1 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between 16 channels of ODU1 and four channels of OTU2 signals Figure 15-24 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 16xODU1

16xODU1

1

1

1

4×ODU1

IN4

8

4

1

1

4×ODU1

4

1

4

4

NQ2

OUT4

1 TOM

4

1×OTU2

IN4

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

1×OTU2

4

1×ODU2

TOM

OUT4 4×ODU1

1

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

OUT1

1 1×ODU2

IN1

4 NQ2

1

8

IN1

4

4

1

1×OTU2

4

8

1×ODU2

4×ODU1

TOM

OUT1

1 TOM

4

4

8

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1681


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 2 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e and four channels of OTU2/ OTU2e signals Figure 15-25 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 4xODU2/ODU2e

IN1

OUT1

NQ2

OUT4

IN4

IN4

OUT4

1

1

1

4

1×ODU2/ODU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

4

1×ODU2/ODU2e

4

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/ODU2e

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2/ODU2e

IN1

4 NQ2

TQX

4

OUT1

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1

1×ODU2/ODU2e

1

4xODU2/ODU2e

TQX

4

4

4

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1682


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 3 of the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between 32 channels of ODU0 signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 15-26 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 32xODU0

1

1

1

M U X / D M U X

TOM 8

NQ2

8

4

8xODU0

OUT4

4xODU1

IN4

1×OTU2

IN4

8

8

4

1×ODU2

OUT4

1

1

8xODU0

M U X / D M U X

4xODU1

OUT1

1 1×OTU2

IN1

NQ2

1×OTU2

4xODU1

1×ODU2

8

8xODU0

1

TOM 8

IN1

1×ODU2

4

1

OUT1

8

4

1

1×OTU2

4xODU1

8

1×ODU2

8xODU0

TOM 8

32xODU0

1

1

1 TOM

8

8

8

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode. For the TN53NQ2 board: l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive, the board supports the ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 service mapping path. l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the board supports the ODU0->ODU2 service mapping path. l When the board works in compatible mode, the board does not support the configuration of the timeslot allocation mode, and it only supports the ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 service mapping path.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1683


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 4 of the TN53NQ2 board: conversion between eight channels of ODUflex signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 15-27 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)

1

1

OUT1

IN1

IN1

OUT1

1

4

4

4 IN4 OUT4

1

1 TQX

4

4

4

1

1

1

NQ2

2xODUflex

4

1×OTU2

4

1×ODU2

TQX

IN4

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

1

NQ2

M U X / D M U OUT4 X

1

1×OTU2

1

2xODUflex

1

1×OTU2

4

1×ODU2

4

4

2xODUflex

TQX

8xODUflex

2xODUflex

4xOTU2

1×OTU2

4xOTU2

1×ODU2

8xODUflex

TQX 4

4

4

NOTE

The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode. TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1684


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 5 of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: implements the electrical regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals Figure 15-28 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5)

M U X

OUT2


IN1


D M U X

OUT1 M U X

IN2

D M U X

NQ2

M U X

OUT4


IN3


D M U X

OUT3 M U X

IN4

D M U X

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. The IN and OUT ports for the same regenerated signal must be configured as follows; otherwise, the ESC communication is not available. l


l


The input and output wavelengths can be different.

Application scenario 6: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 15-29 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 6) 4xOTU2/OTU2e TOM

ODU1

ODUflex

ODUflex

ODU0 ODU1 ODUflex

OUT1 IN1

NQ2

ODU0 ODU1 ODUflex

ODU0

ODU0

ODU1

ODU1

ODUflex

ODUflex

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU2/ ODU2e

TOM TOA TDX

NQ2 IN4 OUT4

ODU2/ODU2e

OUT4 IN4

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/OTU2e

ODU2/ ODU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU2/ODU2e

TQX/ NQ2

M U X / D M U X

IN1 OUT1

1×ODU2 1×OTU2

ODU1

1×OTU2

TDX

ODU0

1×ODU2

TOA

ODU0


TQX/ NQ2

1685


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. The same board can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e and ODUflex signals. Only TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports ODU0. TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.

The line boards at the two add/drop sites must have the same ODU timeslot allocation mode. When a TN53NQ2 board is connected to a board that does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NQ2 board. For example, when a TN53NQ2 board is connected to a TN52NQ2 board, which does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NQ2 board. Only the TN53ND2/52ND2T04/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/ TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN54HUNQ2 board supports the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter.

15.4.4 Functions and Features The NQ2 board carries out cross-connection at the electrical layer, and provides the OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-33 and Table 15-34. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0/ODUflex.

Table 15-33 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Line Mode) Functi on and featur e

Description

Basic functio n

NQ2 converts signals as follows: l TN51NQ2: – 16xODU1/4xODU2<->4xOTU2 – 4xODU2e<->4xOTU2e l TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2: – 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2<->4xOTU2 – 4xODU2e<->4xOTU2e l TN53NQ2: – 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/8xODUflex<->4xOTU2 – 4xODU2e<->4xOTU2e Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1686


15 OTN Line Board

Functi on and featur e

Description

Crossconnect capabil ities

Supports cross-connections with cross-connect boards. l TN51NQ2: 16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e l TN53NQ2: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/8xODUflex l TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e

OTN functio n

l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODUflex layer: supports the PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions. NOTE l Only the TN53NQ2 boards support TCM function and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0 signals. l Only the TN53NQ2 boards support PM function and PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex signals.

WDM specific ation


ESC functio n

Supported

PRBS test functio n

Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. NOTE If the TN53NQ2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the TN53NQ2 board and the connected line board. In addition, the PRBS function can take effect on the boards only when the following condition is met: The TN53NQ2 board works in standard mode and ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured for the TN53NQ2 board, or the TN53NQ2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.

LPT functio n

Not supported

FEC coding

TN51NQ2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1687


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Alarms and perfor mance events monito ring


Regene ration board

l The WDM-side signals from one TN51NQ2 board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/ TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN11LSXR board.

ALS functio n

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports BC and OC mode, do not support TC and TC+OC mode.

Physica l clock

Supported only when the TN53NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex signals cross-connected from the backplane


l The WDM-side signals from one TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board.

Supported only when the TN54NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1 signals cross-connected from the backplane Optical -layer ASON

Supported


Supported by the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2

Protecti on scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE The ODU0 SPRing protection is not supported by the TN54NQ2. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection and ODUk SPRing protection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1688


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Loopba ck

Board

WDM Side




TN51N Q2

When ODU2/ ODU2e signals are received from the backplane, inloop and outloop are supported. When ODU1 signals are received from the backplane, only outloop are supported.

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

TN52N Q2

Supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported

TN53N Q2

Supported only when ODU2/ ODU2e signals are received from the backplane.

Supported


Supported

TN54N Q2

Supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1689



Description

Protoco ls or standar ds compli ance


15 OTN Line Board

IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1690



15 OTN Line Board

Description



NOTE

The relay mode is supported only by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.

Table 15-34 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function


Regenerating rate


WDM specification


OTN function

l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.


l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU2 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1691


15 OTN Line Board


Description



ESC function

Supported

PRBS function

Not supported

FEC coding

TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:





ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

PTP clock (1588 V2)

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Loopback

Not supported




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-


1692



15 OTN Line Board



15.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NQ2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 15-30 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1693


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 (Line Mode) Backplane (service cross-connection)

n X ODUk

WDM side Crossconnect module

1588v2 module


E/O

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

O/E

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4



Control CPU

Memory

Communication



Required voltage


NOTE

Only the TN53NQ2 /TN54NQ2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module. In Figure 15-30, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the NQ2 board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 15-35 shows the service cross-connections from the NQ2 board to the backplane. Table 15-35 Service cross-connections from the NQ2 board to the backplane

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board


TN51N Q2


TN52N Q2/ TN54N Q2



1694


15 OTN Line Board

Board


TN53N Q2

A maximum of 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/8xODUflex/4xODU2e

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NQ2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NQ2 to the WDM side of the NQ2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The cross-connect module can receive ODUk signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTN framing, and FEC encoding. After processing, the signal processing module outputs 4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN4 optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The OTN processing module module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and FEC decoding. Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

The board processes clock signals in two directions. l


l


Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 15-31 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1695


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the NQ2 (Relay Mode) WDM side IN1 IN3 OUT2 OUT4

WDM side O/E


E/O

O/E


OUT1 OUT3 IN2 IN4


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

The relay mode is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.

The NQ2 board regenerates four channels of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN4 optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they are decoded. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1696


15 OTN Line Board

– WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module . – OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NQ2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l


15.4.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 15-32 shows the front panel of the NQ2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1697


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-32 Front panel of the NQ2 board

NOTE

You are advised to insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 to IN4/OUT4 interfaces in ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.



l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1698


15 OTN Line Board

Interfaces Table 15-36 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-36 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NQ2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN4

LC


OUT1-OUT4

LC



15.4.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one NQ2 board. NOTE

The NQ2 board has the following restrictions on the line mode: For the OptiX OSN 6800: l

If the TN12XCS board is used, the NQ2 board supports a service capacity of 40 Gbit/s when it is installed in slot 1, 4, 11, or 14; only optical ports IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 of the NQ2 board are available and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s when it is installed in any of the other slots.

l

If the TN11XCS board is used, only optical ports IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 of the NQ2 board are available and therefore the board supports a service capacity of 20 Gbit/s regardless of which slot the board is installed.

For the OptiX OSN 8800: The NQ2 board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s in any slot.

Table 15-37 shows the valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board. Table 15-37 Valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Table 15-38 shows the valid slots for the TN52NQ2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1699


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-38 Valid slots for the TN52NQ2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Table 15-39 shows the valid slots for the TN53NQ2 board. Table 15-39 Valid slots for the TN53NQ2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU3-IU16


IU1-IU8, U11-IU16

Table 15-40 shows the valid slots for the TN54NQ2 board. Table 15-40 Valid slots for the TN54NQ2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


1700


15 OTN Line Board

15.4.8 Characteristic Code for the NQ2 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.4 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit.


Display of Physical Ports Table 15-41 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-41 Mapping between the physical ports on the NQ2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The NQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1701


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-42 Port diagram and port description Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descriptio n


TN54N Q2

Compati ble mode

Figure 15-33

Table 15-44

54NQ2

TN53N Q2

Compati ble mode

Figure 15-33

Table 15-44

53NQ2(COMP)

Standard mode

Figure 15-34

Table 15-43

53NQ2

TN52N Q2

Compati ble mode

Figure 15-33

Table 15-44

52NQ2

TN51N Q2

Compati ble mode

Figure 15-35

Table 15-44

51NQ2

NOTE

For the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when Board Mode is set to Line Mode. For the TN52NQ2: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals only at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 25 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board. NOTE

When the NQ2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1702


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-33 Port diagram of the TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (compatible mode) Other tributary/ line/PID board



Backplane 32 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

4 x ODU2/ODU2e

16x ODU1

ODU2

71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1) -1

1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2

74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4) -1

4 (IN4/OUT4)-1



ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path



1703


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-34 Port diagram of the TN53NQ2 (standard mode) Backplane

IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) ODUflex:1 ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODUflex:2 8xODUflex

ODUflex:1 ODUflex:2

IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh :1

IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)


ODU1:1 ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU1:4 16xODU1 ODU1:1 ODU1:4

1(N1/OUT1)

IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

4(IN4/OUT4)

ODU0:1 ODU1:1

ODU0:2

ODU 2:1

ODU0:1 ODU 0:2

32xODU0

OCh :1

ODU 1:4

ODU0:1

ODU 1:1

ODU 0:2

ODU 2:1

ODU0:1

OCh :1

ODU1:4

ODU 0:2

IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) ODU0:1 ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU0: 8 32xODU0

ODU0:1 ODU0: 8


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path (ODU0->ODU1>ODU2)



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1704


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE


Figure 15-35 Port diagram of the TN51NQ2 Other tributary/ line/PID board



16 x ODU1 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

ODU2


ODU2


1 (IN1/OUT1)-1



4 (IN4/OUT4)-1



ODU2 mapping path

Multiplexing module

Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1 signals are required, users only need to configure a cross-connection from another board to the ODU1LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.



ODU1 mapping path

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1705


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-43 Description of ports on the TN53NQ2 (standard mode) Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)ODU0:(1-2)

Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. (ODU0->ODU1>ODU2)

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)ODU0:(1-2) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)ODU0:(1-2) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)ODU0:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)

Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. (ODU0->ODU2)

4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)


4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1


4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)

Indicates the mapping path for the ODUflex signals that are received through the backplane.

4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)


2(IN2/OUT2) 3(IN3/OUT3) 4(IN4/OUT4)

Table 15-44 Description of NM port of the NQ2 board (compatible mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description


ODU0LP1ODU0LP16

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2.

Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU1LP port


1706


15 OTN Line Board

Port Name

Description


ODU1LP1ODU1LP4



ODU2LP1ODU2LP4


Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/OUT port

IN1/OUT1IN4/OUT4


-

15.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NQ2, refer to Table 15-45. Table 15-45 NQ2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1707


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Channel Loopback



Default: NonLoopback Service Mode

l TN51NQ2: ODU1, ODU2 Default: ODU1 l TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN53NQ2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

Specifies the service mode for a board. This parameter is available only when Board Mode is set to Line Mode. l Automatic indicates that channel resources can be managed flexibly. For example, when the parameter is set to Automatic for an ODU2 channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel can be provisioned with ODU0/ ODU1 signals if there is no ODU2 signal from the backplane, but they cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal if there is an ODU2 signal from the backplane. l ODU0 indicates that the channel must be provisioned with an ODU0 signal. (This is the similar case for the ODU1, and ODU2 values.) If the parameter is set to ODU2 for a channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal. NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN53NQ2 only in the compatible mode.

Laser Status

Off, On Default: On


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1708


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Enable Auto-Sensing

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled

l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Mode, AFEC Grade and Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Mode, AFEC Grade and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable. NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. This parameter is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2. For ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

FEC Working State



FEC Mode


The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. NOTE Only TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports AFEC.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1709


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3


Default: 3

NOTE Only the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 support this parameter.

Band Type

-



-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780


Default: /


C, CWDM


Planned Band Type

Default: C


Enable Line Rate


Determines whether to automatically switch between the Standard Mode and Speedup Mode for the line rate upon a rerouting event in ASON scenarios. NOTE This parameter is supported by the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2 only in standard mode.

Line Rate




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1710


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is supported only by TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.

PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the NQ2 board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100. The parameter is supported only by the TN53NQ2 in the standard mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1711


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description





Assign random indicates that crosslayer mapping of services is performed. The service mappings are ODU0>ODU2, ODU1->ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. l Cross-layer mapping reduces the number of mapping layers and simplifies the relationship between client and server trails, which are easy to manage. l Cross-layer mapping enables flexible bandwidth usage. For example, when seven 1.25G timeslots of an ODU2 channel are occupied by ODUflex services, the remaining 1.25G bandwidth can be configured for ODU0 services, implementing ODU0->ODU2 crosslayer mapping. Assign consecutive indicates that layerby-layer mapping of services is performed from lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0->ODU1>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2. The Assign random mode is recommended. The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode values of two line boards must be the same when they are interconnected on the WDM side. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN53NQ2 in the standard mode. For the TN53NQ2 board in an OptiX OSN 6800 NE, this parameter must be set to Assign consecutive.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1712


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Board Mode



Default: l 8800 universal platform subrack: Electrical Relay Mode l Other subracks: Line Mode

Line Mode: The board functions as a line board. Electrical Relay Mode/Optical Relay Mode: The board functions as a regeneration board. NOTE When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a nonASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. NOTE This parameter is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.

15.4.11 NQ2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN51NQ2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP

TN52NQ2/ TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1713


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1714


15 OTN Line Board


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1715


15 OTN Line Board


Unit

Optical Module Type




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


1716


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload

dBm




-1

-1

-7



l

Weight: – TN51NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) – TN52NQ2: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.) – TN53NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) – TN54NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)





TN51 NQ2


88

95

88

97

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP TN52 NQ2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1717


15 OTN Line Board

Boar d




TN53 NQ2


45

50

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP TN53 NQ2

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

49

54

TN54 NQ2


53

58.3

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

15.5 NS2 NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board

15.5.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NS2 board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1718


Bo ar d

Initial Version

TN 11 NS 2

15 OTN Line Board





8800 T16 Subrack

8800 Univers al Platfor m Subrac k

6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

V100R0 01

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN 12 NS 2

V100R0 04C01

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN 52 NS 2

TN52NS 2T02/ TN52NS 2T03: V100R0 02C00

Y

Y

Y

Y

T02/T03: N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

a

01M01/0 1M02/ T04/T05/ T06: Y

TN52NS 2T04/ TN52NS 2T05/ TN52NS 2T06/ TN52NS 201M01/ TN52NS 201M02: V100R0 07C02 TN 53 NS 2

V100R0 06C01

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

When the TN52NS2T04, TN52NS2T05, TN52NS2T06, TN52NS201M01, or TN52NS201M02 board is used in the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis, the TN23SCC board must be used. a: If there is a substitution relationship between two boards and one of the boards is used to replace the other board, the device initial version supported by the replaced board takes effect. For example, when you use TN53NS2 to replace TN52NS2T02 in 8800, TN53NS2 can be supported by V100R002C00.

Variants The difference between the NS2 board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1719


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-49 Available variants of the TN11NS2 board Variant


01M02

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN (01M02 for even wavelengths and 01M03 for odd wavelengths)

01M03 01M04


T02


T03


T04


T05




FEC Encoding

01M02

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN (01M02 for even wavelengths and 01M03 for odd wavelengths)

FEC/AFEC

01M03

T02

1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

T03


T04

4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-APD

T05

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D) RZ-PIN

A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D) RZ-PIN

B

The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 15.5.11 NS2 Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

FEC/AFEC-2


1720


15 OTN Line Board



ODUflex

Direct Mapping of ODU0 to ODU2

01M01

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN (01M01 for even wavelengths and 01M02 for odd wavelengths)

Y

Y

T02


N

N

T03


N

N

T04


Y

Y

T05


Y

Y

T06


Y

Y

01M02


Description

01

The WDM-side optical modules are pluggable. For details, see 15.5.11 NS2 Specifications.

Differences Between Versions Function: Boar d

CrossConnect Granularit y

FEC Encoding

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module FixedWavelengt h

TunableWavelengt h

Gray Light

TN11 NS2

ODU1

FEC/AFEC

N

N

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1721


15 OTN Line Board

Boar d


FEC Encoding

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock


TunableWavelengt h

Gray Light

TN12 NS20 1M02

ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/AFEC

N

N

N

N

N

TN12 NS2A


FEC/ AFEC-2

N

N

N

N

N

TN12 NS2B


FEC/ AFEC-2

N

N

Y

N

N

TN52 NS2T 02

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/ AFEC-2

N

N

N

N

N

TN12 NS20 1M03 TN12 NS2T 02 TN12 NS2T 03 TN12 NS2T 04 TN12 NS2T 05

TN52 NS2T 03

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1722


15 OTN Line Board

Boar d


FEC Encoding

IEEE 1588v2

Physical Clock


TunableWavelengt h

Gray Light

TN52 NS2T 04

ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/ AFEC-2

N

N

N

N

N

ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/ AFEC-2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN52 NS2T 05 TN52 NS2T 06 TN52 NS20 1M01 TN52 NS20 1M02 TN53 NS2

NOTE l OptiX OSN 6800: The TN11NS2 supports cross-connection of paired slots while the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 does not. l OptiX OSN 3800: The TN11NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any slots of the four-slot mesh group. The TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group. l When TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02 is created as 52NS2(STND) on the U2000, FEC/ AFEC-2 is supported. When TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02 is created as 12NS2 on the U2000, FEC/AFEC is supported. l In a version earlier than V100R007C02, TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02 can be created only as 12NS2 on the U2000.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.5.11 NS2 Specifications.


1723


15 OTN Line Board

Substitution Relationship NOTE

The TN52NS2T04, TN52NS2T05, TN52NS2T06, TN52NS201M01, and TN52NS201M02 boards become available in V100R007C02. Only the TN52NS2T04 board can be used to substitute for the TN52NS2T03 board. In case of substitution, the board created on the U2000 is 52NS2 and the board has only the functions of TN52NS2T03 after the substitution. Other types of boards cannot substitute for the TN52NS2T02 or TN52NS2T03 board.

Table 15-53 Substitution rules of the NS2 board Original Board

Substit ute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11NS2

None

-

TN12NS2

TN52NS 2

On an OptiX OSN 6800 NE of V100R004C02 or a later version, the TN52NS2 board can substitute for the TN12NS2 board without requiring any software upgrades. After physically replacing the TN12NS2 board with the TN52NS2 board, the user must create the TN52NS2 board as 12NS2 on the U2000 to complete the substitution. NOTE The TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02 board can substitute for the TN12NS2 board only when the latter uses FEC/AFEC and has the same line codes as the former.

TN53NS 2

On an OptiX OSN 6800 NE of V100R004C02 or a later version, the TN53NS2 board can substitute for the TN12NS2 board without requiring any software upgrades. After physically replacing the TN12NS2 board with the TN53NS2 board, the user must create the TN53NS2 board as 12NS2 on the U2000 to complete the substitution. NOTE The substitution can take place only when the TN12NS2 board uses FEC/AFEC-2.

TN52NS2

TN53NS 2

On an OptiX OSN 6800 NE of V100R004C02 or a later version or on an OptiX OSN 8800 NE, the TN53NS2 board can substitute for the TN52NS2 board without requiring any software upgrades. After physically replacing the TN52NS2 board with the TN53NS2 board, the user must create the TN53NS2 board as 52NS2 or 52NS2 (STND) on the U2000 to complete the substitution.

TN53NS2

None

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1724


15 OTN Line Board



Added the TN52NS2T04, TN52NS2T05, TN52NS2T06, TN52NS201M01, and TN52NS201M02 boards.

The TN52NS2 board is added to replace the TN12NS2 board. The TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/ TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02 board can substitute for the TN12NS2 board only when the latter uses FEC/ AFEC.



Added the TN53NS2 board.

Compared with the NS2 board of the old version, the new TN53NS2 board supports the ODUflex, IEEE 1588v2, and physical-layer clock functions.



15.5.3 Application As a type of line board, the NS2 board converts 8 ODU0, 4 ODU1, 2 ODUflex, or one ODU2 into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2 signal or converts one ODU2e signal into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU2e signal. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODUflex service and ODU1 service.

Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between four channels of ODU1 and one channel of OTU2 signals Figure 15-36 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 4xODU1

4

IN OUT

NS2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


4xODU1

4

IN

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2

4

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2

4xODU1

TOM

1×OTU2

1

1×ODU2

1

1

4xODU1

1

1

1 TOM

4

4

4

NS2

1725


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 2 of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between one channel of ODU2/ODU2e and one channel of OTU2/OTU2e signals Figure 15-37 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 2xODU2/ODU2e

2xODU2/ODU2e

IN

OUT

NS2

TDX

NS2

IN OUT

NS2

TDX

1×ODU2/ODU2e

IN

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×ODU2/ODU2e

OUT

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU2/ODU2e

IN

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×OTU2/OTU2e

1×ODU2/ODU2e

OUT

NS2

Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between eight channels of ODU0 and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 15-38 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 8xODU0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


8xODU0

NS2

4xODU1

8


1×ODU2

8


1×OTU2

8

4xODU1

8xODU0

TOM

1×OTU2

1

1×ODU2

1

1

8xODU0

1

1

1 TOM

8

8

8

NS2

1726


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

For the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 board: l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive, the board supports the ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 service mapping path. l When the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the board supports the ODU0->ODU2 service mapping path. l When the board works in compatible mode, the board does not support the configuration of the timeslot allocation mode, and it only supports the ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 service mapping path.

Application scenario 4 of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between two channels of ODUflex and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OptiX OSN 8800) Figure 15-39 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4) 2xODUflex

M U X / IN D OUT M U X

IN

1×ODU2

M U X / D M U X

OUT

2xODUflex

NS2

2xODUflex

1xOTU2

1×OTU2

1×OTU2

1×ODU2

2xODUflex

TDX

1xOTU2

TDX

NS2

NOTE

The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.

Application scenario 5: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 15-40 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 1xOTU2

ODU0

TOM

ND2/ TOA

ODU1

ODUflex

ODU1

ODUflex ODU1

NS2

OUT IN

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

ODU0 IN OUT

1×ODU2 1×OTU2

ODUflex

ODU0

1×OTU2 1×ODU2

TOA

ODU0

ODUflex ODU1

ODU0

ODU0

ODUflex

ODUflex

TOA

ODU1

ODU1

ND2/ TOA

TOM

NS2

NOTE

The IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports ODUflex only when it works in standard mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1727


15 OTN Line Board

The line boards at the two add/drop sites must have the same ODU timeslot allocation mode. When a TN53NS2 board is connected to a board that does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NS2 board. For example, when a TN53NS2 board is connected to a TN52NQ2 board, which does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN53NS2 board. Only the TN53ND2/52ND2T04/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/ TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN54HUNQ2 board supports the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter.

15.5.4 Functions and Features The NS2 board is used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-54. NOTE

Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0/ODUflex. Only the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support ODU2/ODU2e.

Table 15-54 Functions and features of the NS2 board Funct ion and featur e

Description

Basic functi on

NS2 converts signals as follows: l TN11NS2: – 4xODU1<->1xOTU2 l TN12NS2: – 4xODU1/1xODU2<->1xOTU2 – 1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e l TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03: – 8xODU0/4xODU1/1xODU2<->1xOTU2 – 1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e l TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02: – 8xODU0/4xODU1/1xODU2/2xODUflex<->1xOTU2 – 1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e l TN53NS2: – 8xODU0/4xODU1/1xODU2/2xODUflex<->1xOTU2 – 1xODU2e<->1xOTU2e Supports mixed transmission of ODU0, ODU1 and ODUflex signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1728


15 OTN Line Board

Funct ion and featur e

Description

Crossconne ct capabi lities

OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0 signals, four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board. l TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0 signals, four channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODUflex signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11NS2: Supports the grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals to any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports an ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.

OTN functi on

l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITUT G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. l ODUflex layer: supports the PM and PM non-intrusive monitoring functions. NOTE l Only the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l Only the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 supports PM and PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex.

WDM specifi cation

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1729


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Tunab le wavel ength functi on


ESC functi on

Supported

PRBS test functi on



NOTE If the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/ TN53NS2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the board and the connected line board. In addition, the PRBS function can take effect on the boards only when the following condition is met: The TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/ TN53NS2 board works in standard mode and ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured for the board, or the board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.

LPT functi on

Not supported

FEC coding

TN11NS2/TN12NS201M02/TN12NS201M03/TN12NS2T02/TN12NS2T03/ TN12NS2T04/TN12NS2T05: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN12NS2A/TN12NS2B/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1730


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

15 OTN Line Board


Description

Alarm s and perfor mance events monit oring


Regen eratio n board

l The WDM-side signals from one TN11NS2/TN12NS201M02/ TN12NS201M03/TN12NS2T02/TN12NS2T03/TN12NS2T04/TN12NS2T05 board can be regenerated by another TN11LSXR board.

ALS functi on

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v 2

The TN53NS2 board supports BC and OC mode, do not support TC and TC+OC mode.

Physic al clock

Supported only when the TN53NS2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex signals cross-connected from the backplane

Optica l-layer ASON

Supported

Electri callayer ASON

Supported by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2.


l The WDM-side signals from one TN12NS2A/TN12NS2B/TN52NS2/ TN53NS2 board can be regenerated by another TN12ND2/TN52ND2/ TN53ND2/TN55NO2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board.


1731


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Protec tion schem e

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/QCP board). l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection and ODUk SPRing protection.

Loopb ack

Board

WDM Side




TN11N S2

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

TN12N S2

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Not supported

TN52N S2T02

Supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported

Supported only when the signals is ODU2/ ODU2e from the backplane.

Supported


Supported

TN52N S2T03 TN52N S2T04 TN52N S2T05 TN52N S2T06 TN52N S201M 01 TN52N S201M 02 TN53N S2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1732


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Protoc ols or standa rds compl iance


IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1733



15 OTN Line Board

Description



15.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 15-41 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1734


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-41 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS2 board Backplane (service corss-connection)

n X ODUk

WDM side E/O 1588v2 module


OUT

OTN processing

O/E

module

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

Only the TN53NS2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module. In Figure 15-41, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the NS2 board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 15-55 shows the service cross-connections from the NS2 board to the backplane. Table 15-55 Service cross-connections from the NS2 board to the backplane

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board


TN11N S2

A maximum of 4xODU1

TN12N S2



1735


15 OTN Line Board

Board


TN52N S2T02/ TN52N S2T03


TN52N S2T04/ TN52N S2T05/ TN52N S2T06/ TN52N S201M0 1/ TN52N S201M0 2/ TN53N S2

A maximum of 8xODU0/4xODU1/1xODU2/2xODUflex/1xODU2e

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the NS2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The cross-connect module receives ODUk signals sent from the backplane. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTN framing, and FEC encoding. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDMside optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the signal processing module sends out the OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G. 694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The OTN processing module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, FEC decoding. Then, the cross-connect module sends out ODUk signals to the backplane for service crossconnection.

Module Function l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1736


15 OTN Line Board

– WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing module and a cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NS2 and the other board through the backplane.

l


l


l


15.5.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NS2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 15-42 and Figure 15-43 show the front panel of the NS2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1737


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-42 Front panel of the TN11NS2/TN12NS201M02/TN12NS201M03/TN12NS2T02/ TN12NS2T03/TN12NS2T04/TN12NS2T05/TN12NS2A/TN52NS2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1738


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-43 Front panel of the TN12NS2B/TN53NS2



l


l


l





1739


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-56 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



15.5.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one NS2 board. Table 15-57 shows the valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board. Table 15-57 Valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board Product

Valid slots


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

Table 15-58 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS2 board. Table 15-58 Valid slots for the TN52NS2 board Product

Valid slots





OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracka

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

a: Only the TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02/TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06 supports the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1740


15 OTN Line Board


Valid slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

15.5.8 Characteristic Code for the NS2 The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.4 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit.


Display of Physical Ports Table 15-60 lists the mapping between the logical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-60 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1741


15 OTN Line Board

The NS2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 15-61 Port diagram and port description Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descriptio n


TN53N S2

Standard mode

Figure 15-44

Table 15-62

53NS2

Compati ble mode

Figure 15-45

Table 15-63

53NS2(COMP)

Standard mode

Figure 15-44

Table 15-62

52NS2(STND)

Compati ble mode

Figure 15-45

Table 15-63

52NS2

TN12N S2

Compati ble mode

Figure 15-46

Table 15-63

12NS2

TN11N S2

Compati ble mode

Figure 15-47

Table 15-63

NS2

TN52N S2

TN52NS2T02/TN52NS2T03 board can work only in compatible mode. TN52NS2T04 board can work in compatible mode or standard mode. TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/TN52NS201M02 board can work only in standard mode.

NOTE

When used in OptiX OSN 6800, the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 and ODU2 signals from the backplane. When used in OptiX OSN 3800, the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 signals from the backplane. The cross-connect granularity supported by the board is determined by that supported by the cross-connect board in the same subrack. For information about cross-connect boards, see 25 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board. NOTE

When the NS2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1742


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-44 Port diagram of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 (standard mode) IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2) ODUflex:1 2XODUflex

ODU2:1

ODUflex:2

IN/OUT-OCh:1

OCh:1

OCh :1


1 xODU2/ 1xODU 2e


ODU2:1

OCh : 1 IN/OUT

ODU1:4

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)

ODU0:1

ODU0:2 8 xODU0

ODU1:1 ODU2:1

ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2

OCh :1

ODU 1:4


ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU0: 8

Backplane


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path (ODU0->ODU1>ODU2)



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1743


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE


Figure 15-45 Port diagram of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (compatible mode) Other tributary/ line/PID board


8 x ODU0


1 x ODU2/ODU2e

4 x ODU1


Backplane

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure crossconnections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.

ODU0 mapping path



1744


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-46 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 board Other tributary/ line/PID board


1 x ODU2/ODU2e

4 x ODU1

Backplane



1 (IN1/OUT1)-1

ODU2


ODU2 mapping path

Multiplexing module




ODU1 mapping path

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1745


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-47 Port diagram of the TN11NS2 board Other tributary/ line/PID board

Backplane

4 x ODU1

1(IN/OUT)-1 1 (IN1/OUT1)-1 1(IN/OUT)-4


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module



Table 15-62 Description of NM port of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (standard mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Definition

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)


IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)




IN/OUT-OCh:1


IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)


IN/OUT



1746


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-63 Description of NM port of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (compatible mode) Port Name

Description


ODU0LP1ODU0LP4


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU1LP port.

ODU1LP1


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU2LP port

ODU2LP1


Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the IN/OUT port

IN/OUTa


-

IN/OUT


-

a: The port is available only on the TN11NS2 board.

15.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of NS2, refer to Table 15-64. Table 15-64 NS2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1747


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





Non-Loopback, Inloop, OutloopS



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1748


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Service Mode

l TN11NS2: N/A


l TN12NS2: ODU1, ODU2

This parameter is available only when Board Mode is set to Line Mode.

Default: ODU1

l Automatic indicates that channel resources can be managed flexibly. For example, when the parameter is set to Automatic for an ODU2 channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel can be provisioned with ODU0/ ODU1 signals if there is no ODU2 signal from the backplane, but they cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal if there is an ODU2 signal from the backplane.

l TN52NS2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN53NS2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

l ODU0 indicates that the channel must be provisioned with an ODU0 signal. (This is the similar case for the ODU1, and ODU2 values.) If the parameter is set to ODU2 for a channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal. NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 only in the compatible mode.

Off, On

Laser Status

Default: On


FEC Working State



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1749


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC


Default: FEC

FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay. NOTE Only the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 support this parameter.

Band Type

-



-



-

Displays the tunable wavelength range supported by the WDM-side optical interface on the board. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2.


Planned Band Type

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780


Default: /


C, CWDM


Default: C


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1750


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2 /TN52NS2/TN53NS2.



The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN11NS2 board.

Enable Line Rate


Determines whether to automatically switch between the Standard Mode and Speedup Mode for the line rate upon a rerouting event in ASON scenarios. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 in the standard mode.

Line Rate

PRBS Test Status




NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2.

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

See Line Rate for more information.

The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted. Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1751


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE This parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN53NS2.



Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the NS2 board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 in the standard mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1752


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description





Assign random indicates that crosslayer mapping of services is performed. The service mappings are ODU0>ODU2, ODU1->ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. l Cross-layer mapping reduces the number of mapping layers and simplifies the relationship between client and server trails, which are easy to manage. l Cross-layer mapping enables flexible bandwidth usage. For example, when seven 1.25G timeslots of an ODU2 channel are occupied by ODUflex services, the remaining 1.25G bandwidth can be configured for ODU0 services, implementing ODU0->ODU2 crosslayer mapping. Assign consecutive indicates that layerby-layer mapping of services is performed from lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0->ODU1>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2. The Assign random mode is recommended. The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode values of two line boards must be the same when they are interconnected on the WDM side. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 in the standard mode. For the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board in an OptiX OSN 6800 NE, this parameter must be set to Assign consecutive.

15.5.11 NS2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1753


15 OTN Line Board

Board



TN11NS 2


N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN TN12NS 2



1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN52NS 2


N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN TN53NS 2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1754


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-



NRZ

NRZ


dBm

2

2


dBm

-3

-3


dB

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

±5


nm

0.3

0.3


dB

35

35


ps/nm

800

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0


PIN

1755


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

Maximum reflectance

dB



-27

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

-






NRZ

NRZ

ODB

(D)RZ

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2

2

2

2

2


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3


dB

10

10

N/Aa

10

10

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5

±5

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3


1756


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type







dB

35

35

35

35

35


ps/ nm

1200

1200

4800

800

800

APD

APD

PIN

PIN


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16

-26

-26

-16

-16


dBm

0

-9

-9

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-27

-27



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


NRZ 1757


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


NRZ

1758


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


1759


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2


dBm

-6

-1


dB

6

8.2


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605


dBm

-11

-14


dBm

-1

-1



l

Weight: TN11NS2/TN12NS2: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb) TN52NS2: 1.3 kg (2.86 lb.) TN53NS2: 1 kg (2.2 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1760


15 OTN Line Board





TN11NS 2


38.0

41.8

39.0

42.9


41.0

45.1


44.0

48.4


38.8

43.40


39.40

44.10


39.70

44.46


42.50

47.60


30.32

34


25.35

28.39


TN52NS2T02: TN52NS2T02: 51.3 56.4 TN52NS2T06: 28 TN52NS2T06: 31

800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD

TN12NS 2


TN52NS 2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1761


Board

15 OTN Line Board





TN52NS2T03: TN52NS2T03: 49.1 54.0 TN52NS2T04: 26 TN52NS2T04: 28 TN52NS2T05: 28 TN52NS2T05: 31

TN53NS 2


28

31


20

24

21

25

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP


15.6 NS3 NS3: 40G line service processing board

15.6.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NS3 board are TN11, TN52, TN54, TN55, and TN56.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1762


Bo ar d

Initial Version

TN 11 NS 3

15 OTN Line Board





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

V100R0 04C02

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN 52 NS 3

8800: V100R0 02C00

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

TN 54 NS 3

V100R0 05C00

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN 55 NS 3

V100R0 06C03

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN 56 NS 3

V100R0 08C00

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

a

6800: V100R0 04C03

a: If there is a substitution relationship between two boards and one of the boards is used to replace the other board, the device initial version supported by the replaced board takes effect. For example, when you use TN56NS3 to replace TN55NS3, TN56NS3 can be supported by V100R006C03.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1763


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

The TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack only supports relay mode. TN56NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack only supports relay mode. When the TN56NS3 board is used to receive SDH services, the SDH service license for universal line boards is required. When the TN56NS3 board is installed in a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the XCT+SXH or XCT+SXM cross-connect boards must be used. When the TN56NS3 board is installed in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the XCT+SXH, XCT+SXM, or UXCT+USXH cross-connect boards must be used. When the TN56NS3 board is installed in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack to receive SDH services, the TN16UXCM cross-connect board must be used. When SDH services are provisioned, the TN56NS3 board can be used only in an independent subrack, but not in a master or slave subrack. When OTN services are provisioned, the TN56NS3 board can be used in an independent subrack, a master subrack, or a slave subrack.

Variants The difference between the NS3 board variants lies in the WDM-side optical module. Table 15-70 Available variants of the TN11NS3 board Variant


T01


T03




T01


T03


T04




T01


T03


05


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1764


15 OTN Line Board



T01




T01



Function:

Board

CrossConnect Granula rity

FEC Encodin g

IEEE 1588v2

Physical clock

Relay Mode

Coheren t System

WDMside Gray Optical Module

SDH Service

TN11NS 3

ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/ AFEC

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN52NS 3

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e

FEC/ AFEC

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN54NS 3

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e and ODU3

FEC/ AFEC-2

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

TN55NS 3

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e and ODU3

HFEC

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1765


15 OTN Line Board

Board

CrossConnect Granula rity

FEC Encodin g

IEEE 1588v2

Physical clock

Relay Mode

Coheren t System

WDMside Gray Optical Module

SDH Service

TN56NS 3

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, ODUflex, VC-4

HFEC

N

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

The TN54NS3 and TN52NS3 boards can be interconnected only when the WDM-side service is OTU3 (FEC).


Appearance: – The TN11NS3 board and the TN52NS3 board use the same front panel. The TN54NS3 board, the TN55NS3 and the TN56NS3 board use a different front panel from the preceding boards. For details, see 15.6.6 Front Panel and 15.6.10 NS3 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.6.10 NS3 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Table 15-75 Substitution rules of the NS3 board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11NS3

TN52NS3

The TN52NS3 can be created as NS3 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN52NS3 functions as the TN11NS3.

TN52NS3

None

-

TN54NS3

None

-

TN55NS3

TN56NS3

The TN56NS3 can be created as 55NS3 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN56NS3 functions as the TN55NS3. NOTE For an OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32/T16/universal platform subrack / OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, the TN55NS3 board can be replaced with the TN56NS3 board.

TN56NS3

None

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-


1766


15 OTN Line Board





The TN56NS3 board, a 1 x 40G coherent line board, is added to support hybrid transmission of SDH and OTN services.






Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update





1767


15 OTN Line Board




The 40G coherent line board is required.

15.6.3 Application As a type of line board, the NS3 board converts 32 ODU0, 32 ODUflex, 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one ODU3 into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU3 signal or converts four ODU2e into one ITU-T G. 694.1 OTU3e signal or converts 256 VC-4 signals into one OTU3 signal. The TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, and the ODU2/ODU2e service. The TN56NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODU2/ODU2e service, ODUflex service and the VC-4 service. The TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board uses coherent receive technology. Therefore, the board is intended for coherent systems. For the TN54NS3 board: l

When the board is equipped with 40 Gbit/s-multirate-2km optical modules, it does not support OTU3e on the WDM side or ODU2e on the backplane side.

l

When the board is equipped with 800ps/nm-C band-tunable-ODB-PIN or 800ps/nm-C band-tunable-DQPSK-PIN optical modules, the preceding restriction does not apply.

Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board: conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals Figure 15-48 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 4xODU2/ODU2e

M U IN X / OUT D M U X

NS3

4×ODU2/ODU2e

4

IN

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU3/ODU3e

4

4

OUT

1×OTU3/OTU3e

TQX

1×OTU3/OTU3e

1

1×ODU3/ODU3e

1

4×ODU2/ODU2e

1

4xODU2/ODU2e

1

1

1 TQX

4

4

4

NS3

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1768


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 2 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board: conversion between 16 channels of ODU1 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals Figure 15-49 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2)

1

16xODU1

16xODU1

1

1

1

1

4

4

4

4

1

TOM 8

4

4

8

16xODU1

1×OTU3

1×OTU3

1

1×ODU3

1

4xODU2

16xODU1

4

M U IN X / OUT D M U X

4xODU2

TOM M OUT U X IN / D M U X

1×ODU3

TOM 8

1

4 1

1

4

4

1 TOM

NS3

NS3

8

NOTE

l In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board must be set to Line Mode. l For the TN52NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU1->ODU2->ODU3. l For the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU1->ODU3.

Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board: conversion between 32 channels of ODU0 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals Figure 15-50 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3)

1

32xODU0

32xODU0

1

1

1

1

8

8

8

8

TOM 8

TOM 32xODU0

4xODU2

16xODU1

1×ODU3

8

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU3

8

1×OTU3

1

1×ODU3

1

4xODU2

1

16xODU1

32xODU0

4

M U X / D M U X

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

8 4

1

1

8

8

TOM 8

1

1 TOM

NS3


NS3

8

1769


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

l The TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800. l In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board must be set to Line Mode. l For the TN52NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->ODU3. l For the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board, the service mapping path is ODU0->ODU1->ODU3. l For the board TN56NS3 board: When the TN56NS3 board ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the service mapping path is ODU0->ODU3. When the TN56NS3 board ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive, the service mapping path is ODU0->ODU1->ODU3.

Application scenario 4 of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board: conversion between one channel of ODU3 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals Figure 15-51 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4) 1xODU3


NS3

1×ODU3


1×OTU3

1×OTU3

1×ODU3

T S X L

1xODU3

T S X L

NS3

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board must be set to Line Mode . With the TSXL board, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/ TN56NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1770


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 5 of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board: implement the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signal Figure 15-52 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 1×OTU3/OTU3e

IN

1×OTU3/OTU3e

DMUX

OUT

MUX

NS3 1×OTU3/OTU3e

OUT

1×OTU3/OTU3e

MUX

IN

DMUX

NS3

NOTE

The TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack only supports relay mode. The TN56NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack only supports relay mode. NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a nonASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. The input and output wavelengths can be different.

Application scenario 6 of the TN56NS3 board: conversion between ODUflex and OTU3 signals Figure 15-53 Application scenario 6 of the TN56NS3 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1771


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 7 of the TN56NS3 board: conversion between VC-4 and OTU3 signals Figure 15-54 Application scenario 7 of the TN56NS3

NOTE

VC-4 signals can map into ODU1 or ODU2 signals. When the board is installed in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the board supports a maximum of 128 VC-4 services. This limit does not apply when the board is installed in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T16 subrack. When SDH services are provisioned, the board does not support the Assign consecutive mode, but only the Assign random mode. In this case, ensure that the OTN board connected to the TN56NS3 board also adopts the Assign random mode.

Application scenario 8 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board: hybrid transmission Figure 15-55 Application scenario 8 of the NS3 board 1xOTU3/OTU3e

TOM

SLQ16

ODU1

ODU1

ODU1

ODU2/

ODU2/

ODU2e

ODU2e

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODUflex

ODUflex

ODUflex

VC-4

VC-4

VC-4

OUT IN

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

IN OUT

NS3

1×ODU3/ODU3e 1×OTU3/OTU3e

TQX

ODU0

1×OTU3/OTU3e

ND2

ODU0

1×ODU3/ODU3e

TOA

ODU0

ODU0

ODU0

ODU0

ODU1

ODU1

ODU1

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU2/

ODU2/

ODU2e

ODU2e

ODUflex

ODUflex

ODUflex

VC-4

VC-4

VC-4

TOM

TOA ND2

TQX SLQ16

NS3

NOTE

The IN/OUT port supports a mix of ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex/VC-4 signals with the total bandwidth not exceeding 40 Gbit/s. Only the TN56NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of ODUflex and VC-4 signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1772


15 OTN Line Board

Two TN56NS3 boards cannot interconnect with each other if they are provisioned with different ODU timeslot configuration modes. The line boards at the two add/drop sites must have the same ODU timeslot allocation mode. When a TN56NS3 board is connected to a board that does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN56NS3 board. For example, when a TN56NS3 board is connected to a TN55NS3 board, which does not support ODU timeslot allocation, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the TN56NS3 board. Only the TN56NS3/TN54HUNS3 board supports the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter.

15.6.4 Functions and Features The NS3 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. The TN56NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of OTN and SDH services. The NS3 board can work in either line mode or relay mode. Table 15-76 describes the functions and features of the board working in line board, and Table 15-77 describes the functions and features of the board working in relay board. NOTE

l Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODU0/ODU3. l The relay mode is only supported by the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3. l For the TN54NS3 board: l When the board is equipped with 40 Gbit/s-multirate-2km optical modules, it does not support OTU3e on the WDM side and ODU2e on the backplane side. l When the board is equipped with 800ps/nm-C band-tunable-ODB-PIN or 800ps/nm-C bandtunable-DQPSK-PIN optical modules, the preceding restriction does not apply. l Only the TN56NS3 board supports SDH functions and features, including SDH overhead, physical clock (OCS), Electrical-layer ASON (SDH), SDH protection, and VC-4 channel loopback.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1773


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-76 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Line Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function

NS3 converts signals as follows: l TN11NS3: – 4xODU2<->1xOTU3/OTU3e – 4xODU2e<->1xOTU3e l TN52NS3: – 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2<->1xOTU3/OTU3e – 4xODU2e<->1xOTU3e l TN54NS3/TN55NS3: – 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2<->1xOTU3/OTU3e – 4xODU2e<->1xOTU3e – 1xODU3<->1xOTU3 l TN56NS3: – 32xODU0/32xODUflex/16xODU1/4xODU2<->1xOTU3/ OTU3e – 4xODU2e<->1xOTU3e – 1xODU3<->1xOTU3 – 16xSTM-16/4xSTM-64<->1xOTU3/OTU3e The TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals. The TN56NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex/VC-4 signals. When the mixed signals contain an ODU2e signal, they must be mapped into an OTU3e signal. The TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board supports dispersion compensation for signals received on the WDM side.


Supports cross-connections with cross-connect boards. OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52NS3: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e l TN54NS3/TN55NS3: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/ 1xODU3 TN56NS3: 32xODU0/32xODUflex/ 16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/1xODU3/256xVC-4 NOTE When the TN56NS3 board is installed in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the board supports a maximum of 128 VC-4 services. This limit does not apply when the board is installed in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T16 subrack.

OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11NS3: 4xODU2/4xODU2e l TN52NS3: 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1774


15 OTN Line Board


Description

OTN function

l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU3 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, flex) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. NOTE Only the TN56NS3 board supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring of the ODU0 and ODUflex layer.

SDH service processing

Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.

SDH overhead processing

Only the TN56NS3 board supports the following functions: l Processes the section overheads of STM-16/STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. NOTE The TN56NS3 board supports D4–D12 overhead processing. It does not support D1–D3 overhead processing.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.

LPT function

Not supported



1775


15 OTN Line Board


Description

FEC coding

TN11NS3/TN52NS3: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant advanced forward error correction (AFEC) on the WDM side. TN54NS3: l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. TN55NS3/TN56NS3: l Supports HFEC. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports CD and PMD performance monitoring. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors B2 bytes to help locate faults. NOTE Only the TN54NS3 supports Poisson mode. Only the TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board supports CD and PMD performance monitoring. Only the TN56NS3 board supports B1/B2 byte monitoring.

Regeneration board

l The WDM-side signals of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board can be regenerated by a TN12LSXLR board. l The WDM-side signals of the TN54NS3 board can be regenerated using another TN54NS3 board. l The WDM-side signals of the TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board can be regenerated using another TN55NS3/TN56NS3 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

The TN54NS3 board supports BC and OC mode, do not support TC and TC+OC mode.


1776


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Physical clock (OTN)

The TN54NS3 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e signals are cross-connected from the backplane. The TN56NS3 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e or ODUflex signals are cross-connected from the backplane.

Physical clock (OCS)

Supported only by the TN56NS3 board.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

Electrical-layer ASON (OTN)

Supported by the TN52NS3, TN54NS3, TN55NS3, and TN56NS3.

Electrical-layer ASON (SDH)

Supported only by the TN56NS3 board.

Protection scheme

OTN protection

NOTE When being installed in a T16 subrack, the board does not support SDH ASON.

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. l Supports OWSP protection. SDH protection l SNCP l SNCTP l LMSP l MSP ring NOTE Only TN52NS3 supports OWSP protection. When the grooming granularity is ODUflex, ODUk SPRing and tributary SNCP protection types are not supported.

Loopback

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Boa rd

WD M side

ODU0/ODU1/ODU2 Channel Loopback


VC-4 Channel Loopback

TN1 1NS 3

Supp orted

ODU0/ODU1: NA

N/A

N/A

TN5 2NS 3

Supp orted

Supported

N/A

N/A

ODU2: Supported


1777


15 OTN Line Board


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Description TN5 4NS 3

Supp orted

Supported

N/A

N/A

TN5 5NS 3

Supp orted

Supported

N/A

N/A

TN5 6NS 3

Supp orted

Supported

Supported

Supported


1778


15 OTN Line Board


Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae IEEE 802.3ba ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.7 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface SMPTE 297-2006 Serial Digital Fiber Transmission System for SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292 and SMPTE 424M Signals NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1779


15 OTN Line Board


Description ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM) Protocols or standards for service processing (performance monitoring)

ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829

NOTE

TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS305 board cannot be used as a regeneration board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1780


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-77 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function


Regeneratin g rate


OTN function

l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side.


l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU3 layer: supports the SM function. l ODU3 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring functions.

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function

Not supported

FEC coding

TN54NS3:


l Supports ITU-T G.709-compliant forward error correction (FEC) on the WDM side. l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. TN55NS3/TN56NS3: l Supports HFEC. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Poisson mode or Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. NOTE Only the TN54NS3 supports Poisson mode.

ALS function

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Not supported


1781


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported

Loopback

Not supported



-



15.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NS3 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588v2 module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1782


15 OTN Line Board

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 15-56 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the board. Figure 15-56 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS3 board (Line Mode) VC-4

VC cross-connect module

1588v2 module

Backplane (service corss-connection)

n x ODUk

SDH processing module

WDM side ODUk crossconnect module

E/O

O/E


OUT

IN



Control Memory

Communication

CPU



Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

Only the TN54NS3 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 module. Only the TN56NS3 support the VC cross_connect module and the SDH processing module. In Figure 15-56, n x ODUk indicates the service cross-connections from the NS3 board to the backplane. "n" represents the maximum number of cross-connections and "k" represents the service granularity.

Table 15-78 shows the service cross-connections from the NS3 board to the backplane. Table 15-78 Service cross-connections from the NS3 board to the backplane

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board


TN11N S3

A maximum of 4xODU2/4xODU2e


1783


15 OTN Line Board

Board


TN52N S3


TN54N S3/ TN55N S3

A maximum of 32xODU0/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/1xODU3

TN56N S3

A maximum of 32xODU0/32xODUflex/16xODU1/4xODU2/4xODU2e/ 1xODU3/256xVC-4

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS3 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS3 to the WDM side of the NS3, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. Transmit direction: 1.

VC-4 and ODUk signals can be cross-connected through the backplane. l When VC-4 services are groomed through the backplane: a.

The VC cross-connect module receives VC-4 signals from the cross-connect board through the backplane and sends the signals to the SDH processing module.

b.

The SDH processing module frames the VC-4 services into appropriate STM-N signals, processes the signal overheads, and then sends the STM-N signals to the OTN processing module.

l When ODUk services are groomed through the backplane: The ODUk cross-connect module receives the ODUk signals from the cross-connect board through the backplane and sends the signals to the OTN processing module. 2.

The OTN processing module maps the STM-N signals to the payload of appropriate ODUk signals, performs operations such as OTN framing and FEC encoding, and then produces and sends four OTU3 electrical signals to the WDM-side optical module.and then produces and sends one OTU3 electrical signal to the WDM-side optical module.

3.

When the WDM-side optical module receives the OTU3 electrical signal, it performs E/O conversion and sends out one OTU3/OTU3e optical signal over an ITU-T G.694.1compliant wavelength through the OUT port.

Receive direction: 1.

The WDM-side optical module receives one OTU3/OTU3e optical signal over an ITU-T G.694.1-compliant wavelength from the IN port. Then, the module performs O/E conversion, produces an OTU3/OTU3e electrical signal, and sends the signal to the OTN processing module.

2.

When the OTN processing module receives the OTU3/OTU3e electrical signal, it performs operations, such as FEC decoding, demapping, and demultiplexing, and produces ODUk signals. The OTN processing module performs the subsequent operations based on the pre-defined configuration. If the ODUk cross-connection has been defined, the module directs the ODUk signals to the cross-connect module. If the VC cross-connection has been defined,

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1784


15 OTN Line Board

the module demaps the ODUk signals into STM-N signals and sends the STM-N signals to the SDH processing module. 3.

The board processes services in different ways based on service grooming granularities. l For ODUk services: The ODUk cross-connect module sends the ODUk electrical signal(s) to the backplane for grooming. l For VC-4 services: a.

The SDH processing module converts the STM-N signal(s) into VC signal(s) and sends the signal(s) to the VC cross-connect module.

b.

The VC cross-connect module sends the VC-4 electrical signal(s) to the backplane for grooming.

The board processes clock signals in two directions. l


l


Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 15-57 show the functional modules and signal flow of the NS3 board. Figure 15-57 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS3 board (Relay Mode) WDM side

WDM side O/E


IN


E/O

OUT


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


NOTE

The relay mode is supported only by the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1785


15 OTN Line Board

The NS3 board implements the regeneration of one channel of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths that carry OTU3/OTU3e optical signals. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN optical interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l


l

Signal processing module of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3 board The module consists of a cross-connect module and an OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NS3 and the cross-connect board through the backplane. – OTN processing module Frames OTU3/OTU3e signals, processes overheads in OTU3/OTU3e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.

l

Signal processing module of the TN56NS3 board The module consists of a VC cross-connect module, ODUk cross-connect module, SDH processing module, and OTN processing module. – VC cross-connect module Performs backplane cross-connections of VC signals. – ODUk cross-connect module Performs backplane cross-connections of ODUk signals. – SDH processing module Frames the VC-4 services into appropriate STM-N signals, processes the signal overheads, – OTN processing module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1786


15 OTN Line Board

Frames the OTU3/OTU3e signals, processes the overhead of the OTU3/OTU3e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l

1588v2 module The 1588v2 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 15-58, Figure 15-59, Figure 15-60 and Figure 15-61 show the front panel of the NS3 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1787


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-58 Front panel of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1788


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-59 Front panel of the TN54NS3 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1789


15 OTN Line Board


NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1790


15 OTN Line Board




l


l


l





1791


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-79 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS3 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



15.6.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11NS3 board, TN52NS3 board or TN55NS3 board, and one slot houses one TN54NS3 board or TN56NS3 board. Table 15-80 shows the valid slots for the TN11NS3 board. Table 15-80 Valid slots for the TN11NS3 board Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

NOTE

The online signal bus on the TN11NS3 board connects to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. The slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is IU2.

Table 15-81 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS3 board. Table 15-81 Valid slots for the TN52NS3 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


1792


15 OTN Line Board

Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

NOTE

The online signal bus on the TN52NS3 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN52NS3 board, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is IU2.


Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU3-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

When the TN54NS3 boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21 and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and IU38, IU39 and IU40, IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52, IU53 and IU54, IU55 and IU56, IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67 and IU68.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13, IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22 and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26 and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1793


15 OTN Line Board

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.

l

OptiX OSN 6800: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.


Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU4-IU16


IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16


OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, IU66 and IU68.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, IU34 and IU36.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, IU14 and IU16.

l

OptiX OSN 6800 subrack: The TN55NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU14 and IU16.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1794


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE



Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU3-IU16


OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN56NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21 and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and IU38, IU39 and IU40, IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52, IU53 and IU54, IU55 and IU56, IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67 and IU68.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN56NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13, IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22 and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26 and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The TN56NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The TN56NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1795


15 OTN Line Board


Display of Physical Ports Table 15-85 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-85 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS3 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NMS

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The NS3 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. Table 15-86 Port diagram and port description Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descripti on


TN56N S3

Standard mode

Figure 15-62

Table 15-87

56NS3

TN55N S3

Standard mode

Figure 15-63

Table 15-87

55NS3

TN54N S3

Standard mode

Figure 15-63

Table 15-87

54NS3(STND)

Compatible mode

Figure 15-64

Table 15-88

54NS3

Compatible mode

Figure 15-65

Table 15-88

52NS3

TN52N S3 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1796


15 OTN Line Board

Board

Mode

Port Diagram

Port Descripti on


TN11N S3

Compatible mode

Figure 15-66

Table 15-88

NS3

l

For TN52NS3: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels only from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 25 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board.

l

For TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3: – ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when Board Mode is set to Line Mode. – When used with a TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL board, Line Rate must be set to Standard Mode for the board.

l

For TN56NS3: – When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random, the TN56NS3 board supports ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, and ODUflex service grooming and the corresponding mapping paths are ODU0–>ODU3, ODU1–>ODU3, ODU2->ODU3, and ODUflex->ODU3. – When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive, the TN56NS3 board supports ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3 service grooming and the corresponding mapping paths are ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU3, ODU1–>ODU3, and ODU2->ODU3. – When SDH services are provisioned, ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode cannot be set to Assign consecutive.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1797


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-62 Port diagram of the TN56NS3 board Backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1 1xODU3

4xODU2/ 4xSTM-64

ODU3:1

1xODU3

V_SDH-1: STM-64<->ODU2 V_SDH-5: STM-64<->ODU2 V_SDH-9: STM-64<->ODU2 V_SDH-13: STM-64<->ODU2

OCh:1

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU2:(1~4) ODU2:1 ODU3:1

OCh:1

ODU2:4

4xODU2

Other tributary/line/PID/TDM board

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1~16)

16xODU1/ 16xSTM-16

STM-16<->ODU1 16 x V_SDH-m<->ODU1

ODU1:1 ODU3:1

OCh:1

ODU1:16

16xODU1

1(IN/OUT)

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU0:(1~32) 32xODU0

ODU0:1 32xODU0

ODU3:1

OCh:1

ODU0:32

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1~16)-ODU0:(1~32) 32xODU0

32xODU0

ODU0:1 ODU0:2

ODU1:1

ODU0:1 ODU0:2

ODU1:16

ODU3:1

OCh:1

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODUflex:(1~32) 32xODUflex

ODUflex:1 32xODUflex ODUflex: 32

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ODU3:1

OCh:1


ODU3 mapping path

ODUk multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


ODU1 mapping path

SDH framer and mapper

ODU0 mapping path (ODU0–>ODU3– >OTU3)


1798


15 OTN Line Board ODUk framer and mapper

ODU0 mapping path (ODU0–>ODU1– >ODU3–>OTU3)

Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS for service grooming between other boards. The grooming granularity varies according to the boards connected to the TN56NS3 board.


NOTE

In the figure, m can be any integer within the range of 1-16. NOTE

The board supports 16 virtual SDH ports, numbered from V_SDH_1 to V_SDH_16. These virtual SDH ports can be divided into four groups: V_SDH_1 to V_SDH_4, V_SDH_5 to V_SDH_8, V_SDH_9 to V_SDH_12, and V_SDH_13 to V_SDH_16. In each group, if one port is provisioned with an STM-16 service, the remaining ports cannot be provisioned with STM-64 services. When configuring virtual SDH ports, observe the following requirements: l

Only the following four virtual SDH ports can be provisioned with STM-64 services: V_SDH_1, V_SDH_5, V_SDH_9, and V_SDH_13.

l

When configuring STM-16 services for the virtual ports, use the ports in the same group. Do not use the ports in another group unless no ports are left in the current group. For example, to configure an STM-16 service on three of the virtual SDH ports, use V_SDH_1, V_SDH_2, and V_SDH_3; to configure an STM-16 on seven of the virtual SDH ports, use V_SDH_1, V_SDH_2, V_SDH_3, V_SDH_4, V_SDH_5, V_SDH_6, and V_SDH_7.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1799


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-63 Port diagram of the TN55NS3/TN54NS3 board (standard mode) Backplane

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1 ODU3:1

1XODU3

OCh:1

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU2:(1~4) ODU2:1

4 xODU2/ 4xODU2e

ODU 3 : 1

OCh :1

ODU2:4


IN1/OUT1


ODU 3 :1

OCh :1

16xODU1 ODU1:16

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1~16)-ODU0:(1~2) ODU0:1 ODU0:2

ODU 1:1 ODU 3 :1

32xODU0 ODU0:1

OCh :1

ODU1:16

ODU 0:2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


ODU3 mapping path

ODU0 mapping path



1800


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-64 Port diagram of the TN54NS3 board (compatible mode) Other Other tributary/line/ tributary/line/ PID board PID board

Other tributary/line/ PID board


Backplane 4xODU2/ ODU2e

16 x ODU1

32 x ODU0 161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-2

71(ODU2LP1/O ODU1 DU2LP1)-1001






ODU3

ODU3


1(IN1/OUT1)-1





ODU2 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU3 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path


ODU1 mapping path

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1801


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

The ODU1 and ODU2 ports in each of the following combinations cannot be used to configure cross-connections at the same time because they share the same ODU2 timeslot: l

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1001 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1004 ODU1 ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 ODU2 port

l


l


l

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1013 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1016 ODU ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-4 ODU2 port

Figure 15-65 Port diagram of the TN52NS3 board (compatible mode) Other tributary/line/ PID board


Other tributary/line/ PID board Backplane

32 x ODU0

16 x ODU1


4 x ODU2/ODU2e

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 ODU2

164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 173 (ODU0LP13/ODU0LP13)-1 173 (ODU0LP13/ODU0LP13)-2

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 1 (IN1/OUT1)-1 54 ODU1 (ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 ODU2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2LP1)-1

71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2LP1)-4

54 ODU1(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path


ODU0 mapping path


Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1 signals are required, users only need to configure a cross-connection from another board to the ODU1LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a crossconnection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.


1802


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-66 Port diagram of the TN11NS3 board (compatible mode) Other tributary/line/PID board

Backplane 4 x ODU2/ODU2e 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-2 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-3

1(IN1/OUT1)-1



ODU2 mapping path

Multiplexing module



Table 15-87 Description of NM port on the NS3 board (standard mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1 to 16)ODU0:(1 to 2)

Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane(ODU0>ODU1->ODU3)

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU0:(1 to 32)

Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane(ODU0>ODU3)

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1 to 16)


IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU2:(1 to 4)


IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1


IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODUflex:(1 to 32)


51(V_SDH-1) to 66(V_SDH-16)

Virtual ports that perform mutual conversion of STM-16/STM-64 services and ODUk signals (at most 16)

IN1/OUT1



1803


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-88 Description of NM port of the NS3 board (compatible mode) Port Name

Description


ODU0LP1ODU0LP16

Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1-2.


ODU1LP1ODU1LP4



ODU2LP1



NOTE This port is used for crossconnections at the ODU1 level.


TN11NS3/TN52NS3: Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/OUT port TN54NS3: Automatic crossconnections between the ports and the ODU3LP port

ODU3LP1

Internal logical port. The optical path is numbered 1.

Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/OUT port

IN/OUT


-

15.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NS3, refer to Table 15-89 and Table 15-90. Table 15-89 Parameters for WDM Interfaces Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1804


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used




Default: Non-Loopback Channel Loopback



Default: Non-Loopback Laser Status

Off, On Default: On


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1805


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Service Mode

l TN11NS3: not supported

This parameter is available only when Board Mode is set to Line Mode.

l TN52NS3: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

l Automatic indicates that channel resources can be managed flexibly. For example, when the parameter is set to Automatic for an ODU2 channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel can be provisioned with ODU0/ ODU1 signals if there is no ODU2 signal from the backplane, but they cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal if there is an ODU2 signal from the backplane.

l TN54NS3: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, Mix Default: Automatic l TN55NS3/ TN56NS3: not supported

l ODU0 indicates that the channel must be provisioned with an ODU0 signal. (This is the similar case for the ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3 values.) If the parameter is set to ODU2 for a channel, the ODU0/ ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal. l Mix indicates that the channel supports a mix of ODUk signals. NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN54NS3 only in the compatible mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1806


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Enable Auto-Sensing

Disabled, Enabled


Default: Enabled

l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board can auto adapt to the rate of received signals, which means users do not need to manually set the line rate for the board. l When it is set to Disabled, users have to manually set the line rate for the board based on the rate of the actual signal rate. If the specified line rate mismatches the actual signal rate, services will be unavailable. NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. This parameter is supported only by the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3. In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.

FEC Working State



FEC Mode

TN11NS3/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3:


l FEC, AFEC


l Default: AFEC TN55NS3/TN56NS3: l HFEC

This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled.

l Default: HFEC AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3

A larger value of this parameter means a stronger error correction capability and a longer signal transmission delay. NOTE Only the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1807


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Receive Wavelength

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780

l When the receive wavelength is the same as the transmit wavelength of the board, use the default value so that the receive wavelength automatically keeps the same as the transmit wavelength.

Default: /

l When the receive wavelength differs from the transmit wavelength of the board, set this parameter to a value that is same as the transmit wavelength of the remote board; otherwise, services carried by the wavelength will be interrupted. NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.

Receive Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C


Band Type

-



-



-

Displays the tunable wavelength range supported by the WDM-side optical interface on the board. NOTE Only TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/ TN56NS3 supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1808


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780


Default: /


C, CWDM


Planned Band Type

Default: C


Enable Line Rate


Determines whether to automatically switch between the Standard Mode and Speedup Mode for the line rate upon a rerouting event in ASON scenarios. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN54NS3 in the standard mode.

Line Rate

Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Default: l ODU2 channel: Standard Mode l ODU3 channel: Speedup Mode

Specifies the line rate of OTN signals. l For ODU2LP channel: This parameter needs to be set to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are cross-connected. This parameter needs to be set to Standard Mode when ODU2 signals are crossconnected. l For ODU3LP channel: This parameter needs to be set to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are cross-connected. This parameter could be set to Standard Mode or Speedup Mode when ODU2/ODU3 signals are cross-connected.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1809


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description


l TN54NS3:


– Enabled, Disabled – Default: Disabled l TN55NS3/ TN56NS3:

NOTE Only TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 support this parameter.

– Disabled, GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GCC2 Enabled – Default value for the line mode: Disabled – Default value for the relay mode: Only GCC1 Enabled PRBS Test Status


The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted. Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test. NOTE Only TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN55NS3/ TN56NS3 support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1810


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

NOTE Only TN54NS3/TN55NS3 /TN56NS3 support this parameter.

Board Mode

Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: l 8800 T64/T32/T16 subrack: Line Mode l 8800 universal platform subrack/ 6800 subrack: Optical Relay Mode

Specifies the board mode depending on the service application scenario. Line Mode: The board functions as a line board. Electrical Relay Mode/Optical Relay Mode: The board functions as a regeneration board. NOTE When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a nonASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. NOTE Only the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1811


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description





Assign random indicates that crosslayer mapping of services is performed. The service mappings are ODU0– >ODU3, ODU1–>ODU3, ODU2– >ODU3, and ODUflex->ODU3. l Cross-layer mapping reduces the number of mapping layers and simplifies the relationship between client and server trails, which are easy to manage. l Cross-layer mapping enables flexible bandwidth usage. For example, when 28 1.25G timeslots of an ODU3 channel are occupied by ODUflex services, the remaining 5G bandwidth can be configured for four ODU0 services, implementing ODU0->ODU3 cross-layer mapping. Assign consecutive indicates that layerby-layer mapping of services is performed from lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0–>ODU1– >ODU3, ODU1–>ODU3, and ODU2– >ODU3. The Assign random mode is recommended. The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode values of two line boards must be the same when they are interconnected on the WDM side. NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN56NS3. When SDH services are provisioned, ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode cannot be set to Assign consecutive.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1812


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description


0 to 100

Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex.

Default: 100

NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the NS4 board receives 3GSDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100. NOTE Only TN56NS3 support this parameter.

Table 15-90 Parameters for SDH Interfaces Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the current virtual SDH port, for example, 51(SDH-51).


-

Specifies the name of an optical interface.

Laser Switch

Off, On


Default: On Laser Transmission Distance (m)

/

The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module.

Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback


Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

VC4 Path

-

Displays all available VC4 paths.

VC4 Loopback


Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to NonLoopback.



15.6.10 NS3 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1813


15 OTN Line Board

Board



TN11NS 3


N/A

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN TN52NS 3


N/A

500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN TN54NS 3


N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km TN55NS 3


N/A

TN56NS 3


N/A

NOTE


WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 15-91 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths) Parameter

Unit


-



ODB

DQPSK

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

THz

192.10 to 196.05


192.10 to 196.05

1814


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




dBm

0

0


dBm

-5

-5


dB

8.2

N/A


GHz

±2.5

±2.5


nm

0.6

N/A


nm

N/A

0.3


ps/nm

-500 to 500

-500 to 500


-

PIN

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


Unit


-



ODB

DQPSK


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1815


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type




THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


dBm

0

0


dBm

-5

-5


dB

8.2

N/A


GHz

±2.5

±2.5


nm

0.6

N/A


nm

N/A

0.3


ps/nm

-800 to 800

-800 to 800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16

-16


dBm

0

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


1816


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-93 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, 60000 ps/ nm) Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

Line code format

60000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN -

ePDM-BPSK


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35


ps/nm

60000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 15-94 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (gray light) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

2 km (1.2 mi.)

nm

1530 to 1565


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1817


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

3


dBm

0


dB

8.2


ps/nm

40

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1290 to 1570


dBm

-6


dBm

3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Mechanical Specifications TN11NS3: l


l


TN52NS3: l


l


TN54NS3: l


l


TN55NS3: l


l


TN56NS3: l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1818


15 OTN Line Board





TN11NS3


92

101.2


67

75


118

130


110

118


118

130


73

80


60

65


62

69

TN55NS3

60000ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-ePDMBPSK-PIN

135

150

TN56NS3

60000ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-ePDMBPSK-PIN

99

103

TN52NS3

TN54NS3



15.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NS4 board are TN54, TN56, TN57 and TN58.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1819


15 OTN Line Board


Initial Version





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 54 NS 4

V100R0 07C00

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN 56 NS 4

V100R0 08C00

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN 57 NS 4

V100R0 08C10

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN 58 NS 4

T65: V100R0 09C10SP C200

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

a

Other: V100R0 09C10SP C100 a: If there is a substitution relationship between two boards and one of the boards is used to replace the other board, the device initial version supported by the replaced board takes effect. For example, when you use TN56NS4T11 to replace TN54NS4T11, TN56NS4T11 can be supported by V100R007C00.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1820


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

l TN54NS4/TN57NS4/TN58NS4: l In the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, and OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the board can work either in line mode or relay mode. When the board works in line mode, the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must use the TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT boards and the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack must use the TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM board and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack must use the TN16UXCM board. l In the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the board can work only in relay mode. l TN56NS4: l In the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, general OptiX OSN 8800 T32, and OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the board can work either in line mode or relay mode. When the board works in line mode, the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must use the TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT boards and the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 must use the TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM board and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack must use the TN16UXCM board. The board can work in line mode on a general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack only when the 100G line board license for general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks is configured. l In the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack and OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack, the board can work only in relay mode.

Variants Table 15-95 Available variants of the TN54NS4 board Varia nt


FEC Encoding

T01

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(HFEC)-PIN

HFEC

T11

55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)-PIN

SDFEC

Table 15-96 Available variants of the TN56NS4 board Vari ant


FEC Encoding

T11


SDFEC



FEC Encoding

T01

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(HFEC)-PIN

HFEC

T31

150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)-PIN

SDFEC2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1821


15 OTN Line Board

Vari ant


FEC Encoding

T51


SDFEC2

T52


SDFEC2

T53


SDFEC2

T61


SDFEC2



FEC Encoding

T51


SDFEC2

T52


SDFEC2

T53


SDFEC2

T61


SDFEC2

T65

12000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,wDCMMetro)-PIN

SDFEC2

NOTE The T65 variant of the TN58NS4 board applies to metro networks, and its WDM-side module requires the use of the same wavelength at the transmit and receive ends and does not support wavelength change by configuring regeneration boards or singlefiber bidirectional transmission.


Function: Board

FEC Encoding

TN54NS4

HFEC/SDFEC

TN56NS4

SDFEC

TN57NS4

HFEC/SDFEC2

TN58NS4

SDFEC2

For details, see 15.7.4 Functions and Features. l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Front panel and valid slots: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1822


15 OTN Line Board

TN58NS4 is a single-slot board, and other NS4 boards are dual-slot boards. The front panel and valid slots vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.7.6 Front Panel and 15.7.7 Valid Slots. l

Specification: The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.7.10 NS4 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Origin al Board

Substit ute Board

Substitution Rules

TN54N S4

TN56NS 4/ TN57NS 4

The TN56NS4/TN57NS4 can be created as 54NS4 or 54NS4(REG) on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN56NS4 functions as the TN54NS4. NOTE TN56NS4: When both the receive and transmit boards employ SDFEC, the substitution applies. TN57NS4: When both the receive and transmit boards employ HFEC, the substitution applies.

TN56N S4

None

-

TN57N S4

TN58NS 4

The TN58NS4 can be created as 57NS4 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN58NS4 functions as the TN57NS4. The TN58NS4 board occupies one physical slot and two logical slots while the TN57NS4 board occupies two physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board. NOTE When both the transmit and receive boards use SDFEC2 encoding and are of the same type, they can substitute for each other.

TN58N S4

None

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1823


15 OTN Line Board



Added the TN58NS4T65 board.

The T65 type is newly added for the networks in which DCMs are used. The TN58NS4T65 board applies only to metro networks.




Compared with the other NS4 board, only the TN58NS4 board is single-slot 1 x 100G coherent line board and the TN58NS4 board has lower power consumption.



Added the TN57NS4T61 board.

TN57NS4T61: The board supports SDFEC2 and ePDMQPSK.




The 1 x 100G coherent line board is required. The board supports SDFEC2. The board supports SDFEC2 to further improve the net coding gain of FEC and system transmission capabilities.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update



The 1 x 100G coherent line board is required. The board supports SDFEC.


1824


15 OTN Line Board





Allowed the TN54NS4 board to work as a line board inside the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.





The 100G coherent line board is added. The board supports HFEC and SDFEC to further improve the net coding gain of FEC and system transmission capabilities.

15.7.3 Application As a type of line board, the NS4 board converts 80xODU0, 40xODU1, 10xODU2, 10xODU2e, 2xODU3, 1xODU4, or 80xODUflex into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU4 signal. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODU2/ODU2e service, ODU3 service and the ODUflex service. The NS4 board uses coherent receive technology. Therefore, the board is intended for coherent systems.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1825


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 1 of the NS4 board: conversion between 80 channels of ODU0 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 15-67 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 80xODU0

80xODU0

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

10

1

1

1 TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

80xODU0


1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

1×ODU4

80xODU0

10

1

1

1

8

8

8

8

NOTE

TN54NS4: This application scenario is supported only when the 54NS4 board is added on the NMS. TN56NS4/TN57NS4/TN58NS4: In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1826


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 2 of the NS4 board: conversion between 80 channels of ODUflex signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 15-68 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 80xODUflex

80xODUflex

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

TEM28

TEM28

8

8

8

8

10

1

1

1 TEM28

TEM28

8

8

8

8

80xODUflex


1×ODU4

IN

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

OUT

1×ODU4

80xODUflex

10

1

1

1

8

8

8

8

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1827


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 3 of the NS4 board: conversion between 40 channels of ODU1 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 15-69 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 40xODU1

40xODU1

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

5

1

1

1 TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

40xODU1


1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

1×ODU4

40xODU1

5

1

1

1

8

8

8

8

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1828


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 4 of the NS4 board: conversion between ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 15-70 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4) 10xODU2/ODU2e

10xODU2/ODU2e

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

1 TQX

TQX 4

4

4

10xODU2/ODU2e


1×ODU4

4


1×OTU4

4

4

1×OTU4

TQX

1×ODU4

1

10xODU2/ODU2e

1

1

1

4

4

4

1

1

1 TQX

4

4

TDX

4

TDX

NOTE


Application scenario 5 of the NS4 board: conversion between two channels of ODU3 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 15-71 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 2xODU3

2xODU3

NS4

NS4 TSXL

2xODU3


TSXL

1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1×OTU4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1×ODU4

2xODU3

TSXL


TSXL

1829


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE


Application scenario 6 of the NS4 board: conversion between one channel of ODU4 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 15-72 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 6) 1xODU4

1xODU4

NS4

NS4 1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1×OTU4

1×ODU4

TSC


TSC

NOTE


Application scenario 7 of the NS4 board: implement the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU4 signal Figure 15-73 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 7)

NS4 1×OTU4

IN

1×OTU4

DMUX

OUT

MUX

NS4 1×OTU4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

OUT

1×OTU4

MUX

IN

DMUX


1830


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

TN54NS4: This application scenario is supported only when the 54NS4(REG) board is added on the NMS. TN54NS4/TN56NS4/TN57NS4/TN58NS4: In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a nonASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. The input and output wavelengths can be different.

Application scenario 8: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 15-74 Position of the NS4 board in the WDM system (application scenario 8) 1xOTU4

TOM

ODU0

ODU1

ODU1

TQX

TSXL

ODU3

ODU1

ODU2/ ODU2e ODU2e ODUflex ODUflex ODU2/

ODU3

ODU3



ODU0 ODU0

ODU0

ODU1 ODU1

ODU1

ODU2/ ODU2/ ODU2e ODU2e ODUflex ODUflex

ODU2/ ODU2e ODUflex

ODU3 ODU3

ODU3

1×ODU4 1×OTU4

ND2/ ODU2/ TDX ODU2e ODUflex

ODU0

1×OTU4 1×ODU4

TOA

ODU0

NS4

TOM TOA ND2/ TDX TQX TSXL

NS4

NOTE

The IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU3 signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 100 Gbit/s.

15.7.4 Functions and Features The NS4 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-99 and Table 15-100. Table 15-99 Functions and features of the NS4 board (Line Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function

NS4 converts signals as follows: 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/10xODU2/10xODU2e/ 2xODU3/1xODU4<->1xOTU4 Supports mixed transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e, and ODU3 signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1831


15 OTN Line Board


Description


Supports the cross-connection of 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex signals or 40 channels of ODU1 signals or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or two channels of ODU3 signals or one channel of ODU4 signals between the NS4 and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTU4 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, flex) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions. NOTE Only the TN56NS4/TN57NS4/TN58NS4 board supports TCM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring of the ODUflex layer.

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

TN54NS4: Supports HFEC and SDFEC on the WDM side. TN56NS4: Supports SDFEC on the WDM side. TN57NS4: Supports HFEC and SDFEC2 on the WDM side. TN58NS4: Supports SDFEC2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.



Regeneration board

The WDM-side signals from an NS4 board can be regenerated by another NS4 board or an LTX board of the same type. For example,


l The type of the TN54NS4T01 board is T01, and the TN54NS4T01 board can be regenerated by other NS4 and LTX boards of the T01 type, such as TN54NS4T01, TN57NS4T01, TN11LTXT01, and TN12LTXT01. ALS function

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Not supported


1832


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Latency measurement

l TN54NS4: not supported. l TN56NS4/TN57NS4: supports the PM Latency measurement. l TN58NS4: supports the PM and TCM Latency measurement.

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Supported

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/ DCP/QCP board). l Supports tributary SNCP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection and ODUk SPRing protection.

Loopback

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM side Loopback

ODU0 Channel Loopbac k


ODU2 Channel Loopba ck


ODUfle x Channel Loopba ck

Supported

Supporte d

Support ed

Support ed

Support ed

Support ed


1833


15 OTN Line Board


Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae IEEE 802.3ba ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface SMPTE 297-2006 Serial Digital Fiber Transmission System for SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292 and SMPTE 424M Signals NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1834


15 OTN Line Board


Description ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM) Protocols or standards for service processing (performance monitoring)



Description

Basic function


Regeneratin g rate


OTN function

l Provides the OTU4 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l ODU4 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring functions. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1835


15 OTN Line Board


Description

WDM specification




ESC function

Supported

PRBS function

Not supported

FEC coding

TN54NS4: Supports HFEC and SDFEC on the WDM side. TN56NS4: Supports SDFEC on the WDM side. TN57NS4: Supports HFEC and SDFEC2 on the WDM side. TN58NS4: Supports SDFEC2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

Not supported




-


1836



15 OTN Line Board



15.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NS4 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 15-75 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1837


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-75 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board (Line Mode) 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/ 10xODU2/10xODU2e/2xODU3/1xODU4 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side


OTNOTN processing processing module module

E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS4 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS4 to the WDM side of the NS4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The OTN processing module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing and FEC encoding. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU4 signals. The OTU4 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU4 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU4 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1838


15 OTN Line Board

After O/E conversion, the OTU4 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU4 framing and FEC decoding. Then, the module sends out ODUk electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 15-76 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board. Figure 15-76 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board (Relay Mode) WDM side

WDM side O/E

IN



OUT


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



The NS4 board implements the regeneration of one channel of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths that carry OTU4 optical signals. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN optical interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU4 signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM-side optical module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1839


15 OTN Line Board

The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU4 optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU4 optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing module and cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4 signals, processes overheads in OTU4 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NS4 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l


l



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 15-77 and Figure 15-78, Figure 15-79 show the front panel of the NS4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1840


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-77 Front panel of the TN54NS4(HFEC) board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1841


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-78 Front panel of the TN54NS4(SDFEC)/TN56NS4/TN57NS4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1842


15 OTN Line Board


NOTE




1843


15 OTN Line Board

l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 15-101 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-101 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS4 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



15.7.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN54NS4/TN56NS4/TN57NS4 board. One slot houses one TN58NS4 board. Table 15-102 shows the valid slots for the TN58NS4 board, Table 15-103 shows the valid slots for the other NS4 boards. Table 15-102 Valid slots for the TN58NS4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


1844


15 OTN Line Board

Product

Valid Slots


IU3-IU16

Table 15-103 Valid slots for the TN54NS4/TN56NS4/TN57NS4 board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU4-IU16

When NS4 boards are used as regeneration boards and ESC communication is required, the transmit-end and receive-end NS4 boards for the same wavelength must be configured in paired slots. This restriction does not apply to other scenarios. l

TN54NS4/TN56NS4/TN57NS4: – OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: The NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, or IU66 and IU68. – OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: The NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, or IU34 and IU36. – OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack: The NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, or IU16 and IU18. – OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, or IU14 and IU16.

l

TN58NS4: – OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: The TN58NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21 and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and IU38, IU39 and IU40,

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1845


15 OTN Line Board

IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52, IU53 and IU54, IU55 and IU56, IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67 and IU68. – OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: The TN58NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13, IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22 and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26 and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36. – OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack: The TN58NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, or IU17 and IU18. – OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The TN58NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.


Display of Physical Ports Table 15-104 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-104 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS4 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Interface on the Panel


IN/OUT

1

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, IN1/OUT1OCh:1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-80 shows the logical Ports of the NS4 board. Table 15-105 describes the meaning of each port. NOTE

TN54NS4: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when the 54NS4 board is selected on the NMS. TN56NS4/TN57NS4/TN58NS4: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when the Board Mode parameter of the board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1846


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-80 Port diagram of the NS4 board Backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1 1xODU4

OCh:1

ODU4

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:(1-2) ODU3:1 2xODU3

ODU4:1

OCh:1

ODU3:2


IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:(1-10) ODU2:1 ODU4:1

10xODU2/ 10xODU2e

OCh:1

ODU2:10


1(IN/OUT)

ODU1:1 ODU4:1 40xODU1

OCh:1

ODU1:40

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:(1-80) ODU0:1 ODU4:1 80xODU0

OCh:1

ODU0:80

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:(1-80) ODUflex:1 ODU4:1

80xODUflex

OCh:1

ODUflex:80


ODU1 mapping path


ODU0 mapping path

ODU4 mapping path


ODU3 mapping path


ODU2 mapping path

Table 15-105 Descriptions of the ports on the NS4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

1(IN/OUT)

WDM-side optical ports Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1847


15 OTN Line Board

Port Name

Description

IN/OUT-OCh:1












15.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NS4, refer to Table 15-106. Table 15-106 NS4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1848


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Channel Loopback




Off, On Default: On


FEC Working State


Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. After the FEC function is disabled, services become abnormal. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid. NOTE Only the TN54NS4/TN56NS4/TN57NS4 support this parameter.

HFEC, SDFEC, SDFEC2

FEC Mode


Receive Wavelength

1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 Default: /


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1849


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Receive Band Type

C Default: C


Band Type

-



-



-



1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Default: /

See Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. Planned Band Type

C Default: C


PRBS Test Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1850


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description




l Default value for the line mode: Disabled l Default value for the relay mode: Only GCC1 Enabled

l When the parameter is set to Disabled, the system will process the GCC1 and GCC2 bytes in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 or GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to Only GCC1 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 byte but only the GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to Only GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC2 byte but only the GCC1 byte in the OTN overhead.


Line Rate


NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Set this parameter to Standard Mode when ODU2 signals are crossconnected. Set this parameter to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are crossconnected. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the NS4 board receives 3GSDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1851


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Board Mode

TN54NS4:


Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Electrical Relay Mode TN56NS4/TN57NS4/ TN58NS4: Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: l 8800 T64 general subrack / 8800 T64 enhanced subrack/ 8800 T32 enhanced subrack/ 8800 T32 general subrack/ 8800 T16: Line Mode l 8800 universal platform subrack: Electrical Relay Mode

Line Mode: The board functions as a line board. Electrical Relay Mode/Optical Relay Mode: The board functions as a regeneration board. NOTE When optical-layer and electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a nonASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. NOTE If the TN54NS4 board needs to work in relay mode, select the board as 54NS4(REG) when creating it on the NMS. The parameter is available only in this scenario. In the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 general subrack, the TN56NS4 board supports only the relay mode, and the parameter value must be set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode. In the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 general subrack / 8800 T32 general subrack, the TN57NS4/TN58NS4 board supports only the relay mode, and the parameter value must be set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode.

15.7.10 NS4 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board


TN54NS4

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(HFEC)-PIN 55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)-PIN

TN56NS4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1852


15 OTN Line Board

Board


TN57NS4

40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(HFEC)-PIN 150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)-PIN 150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)-PIN 55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)-PIN 40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)-PIN 150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM)-PIN

TN58NS4

150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)-PIN 55000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)-PIN 40000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)-PIN 150000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM)-PIN 12000 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2,wDCMMetro)-PIN

NOTE


WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 15-107 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(HFEC)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


1853


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35


ps/nm

40000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.4


ps/nm

55000


1854


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 15-109 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.48


ps/nm

150000


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


1855


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

150000


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1856


15 OTN Line Board


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)


THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

55000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1857


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

40000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


1858


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


nm

0.3


ps/nm

150000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 15-114 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC2, wDCM-Metro) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 12000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Metro)-PIN

-

ePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Metro)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±2.5


1859


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

12000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Metro)-PIN


nm

0.3


ps/nm

12000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

NOTE The WDM-side module requires the use of the same wavelength at the transmit and receive ends and does not support wavelength change by configuring regeneration boards or single-fiber bidirectional transmission.


Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): TN54NS4/TN56NS4/TN57NS4: 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) TN58NS4: 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: TN54NS4: 2.5 kg (5.5 lb.) TN56NS4: 2.5 kg (5.5 lb.) TN57NS4: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.) TN58NS4: 1.62 kg (3.57 lb.)

Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

WDM-Side Module



TN54NS4 (line application)


168

182


1860


15 OTN Line Board

Board

WDM-Side Module



55000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC)-PIN

180

200


155

167


167

185



160

170

TN56NS4 (regeneration application)


160

170



163.0

177.9

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2, wDCMEnhanced)-PIN

171.7

188.9

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2)-PIN

171.7

188.9


171.7

188.9


171.7

188.9


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1861


Board


TN58NS4

15 OTN Line Board

WDM-Side Module



150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2, wDCM)PIN

171.7

188.9


155.0

167.0

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2, wDCMEnhanced)-PIN

171.7

188.9


171.7

188.9


171.7

188.9


171.7

188.9

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2, wDCM)PIN

171.7

188.9


94

101


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1862


15 OTN Line Board

Board

WDM-Side Module



40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2)-PIN 150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2, wDCM)PIN 12000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2,wDCMMetro)-PIN a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

15.8 NS4M NS4M: 100G line service processing board

15.8.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NS4M board is TN54.


Initial Version





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 54 NS 4M

V100R0 08C10

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1863


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

l When the NS4M board works in the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TNK2USXH +TNK2UXCT boards must be configured. l When the NS4M board works in the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM board must be configured. l When the NS4M board works in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be configured.

Variants The TN54NS4M board has ten variants. NOTE

l The wavelengths of optical ports "IN1/OUT1", "IN2/OUT2", "IN3/OUT3", and "IN4/OUT4" are consecutive with a 100 GHz spacing. l Optical ports "IN1/OUT1", "IN2/OUT2", "IN3/OUT3", and "IN4/OUT4" are in descending order of frequency. l Each board (with a unique variant) supports only odd wavelengths or even wavelengths, which can be specified on the U2000. The following table lists information about the wavelengths supported by different boards.

Va ria nt



Wavelength Number



Wavelength Number



01

73

192.45

1557.77

74

192.40

1558.17

75

192.35

1558.58

76

192.30

1558.98

77

192.25

1559.39

78

192.20

1559.79

79

192.15

1560.20

80

192.10

1560.61

65

192.85

1554.54

66

192.80

1554.94

67

192.75

1555.34

68

192.70

1555.75

69

192.65

1556.15

70

192.60

1556.55

71

192.55

1556.96

72

192.50

1557.36

57

193.25

1551.32

58

193.20

1551.72

59

193.15

1552.12

60

193.10

1552.52

61

193.05

1552.93

62

193.00

1553.33

63

192.95

1553.73

64

192.90

1554.13

49

193.65

1548.11

50

193.60

1548.51

51

193.55

1548.91

52

193.50

1549.32

02

03

04

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1864


Va ria nt

05

06

07

08

09

10

15 OTN Line Board



Wavelength Number



Wavelength Number



53

193.45

1549.72

54

193.40

1550.12

55

193.35

1550.52

56

193.30

1550.92

41

194.05

1544.92

42

194.00

1545.32

43

193.95

1545.72

44

193.90

1546.12

45

193.85

1546.52

46

193.80

1546.92

47

193.75

1547.32

48

193.70

1547.72

33

194.45

1541.75

34

194.40

1542.14

35

194.35

1542.54

36

194.30

1542.94

37

194.25

1543.33

38

194.20

1543.73

39

194.15

1544.13

40

194.10

1544.53

25

194.85

1538.58

26

194.80

1538.98

27

194.75

1539.37

28

194.70

1539.77

29

194.65

1540.16

30

194.60

1540.56

31

194.55

1540.95

32

194.50

1541.35

17

195.25

1535.43

18

195.20

1535.82

19

195.15

1536.22

20

195.10

1536.61

21

195.05

1537.00

22

195.00

1537.40

23

194.95

1537.79

24

194.90

1538.19

9

195.65

1532.29

10

195.60

1532.68

11

195.55

1533.07

12

195.50

1533.47

13

195.45

1533.86

14

195.40

1534.25

15

195.35

1534.64

16

195.30

1535.04

1

196.05

1537.00

2

196.00

1529.55

3

195.95

1537.79

4

195.90

1530.33

5

195.85

1538.58

6

195.80

1531.12

7

195.75

1539.37

8

195.70

1531.90

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1865


15 OTN Line Board




Added the 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, and 10 types of TN54NS4M boards.

The new TN54NS4M boards provide enhanced functions and can support 80 wavelengths.



Added the TN54NS4M board.

The board is generally used for short-distance transmission of mass data in data centers.

15.8.3 Application As a type of line board, the NS4M board converts 80 ODU0, 40 ODU1, ten ODU2, ten ODU2e, two ODU3, one ODU4, or 80 ODUflex into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU4 signal. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODU2/ODU2e service, ODU3 service and the ODUflex service. The NS4M board uses four wavelengths to transmit one channel of OTU4 signals in the short-haul IDC interconnection scenario. NOTE

In any direction of signal transmitting and receiving, four optical signals must pass through the same trail, and the accumulated difference in the fiber lengths of the four optical signals must be less than 2 m. Detailed requirements are as follows: l Four IN ports must use pigtails of the same length and be connected to the same board. l Four OUT ports must use pigtails of the same length and be connected to the same board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1866


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 1 of the NS4M board: 80 channels of ODU0 signals from the backplane Figure 15-81 Position of the NS4M board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) 80xODU0

80xODU0

NS4M 1

1

NS4M 1

1 OUT1

IN1

IN1

OUT1

1

1

TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

8

IN4

8

8

80xODU0

IN4

TOA

8 1×ODU4

OUT4

1

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU4

1×OTU4

1

1

1×ODU4

80xODU0

10

M U X / D M U X

10

1

1

OUT4

1 TOA

8

8

8

8

Application scenario 2 of the NS4M board: 80 channels of ODUflex signals from the backplane Figure 15-82 Position of the NS4M board in the WDM system (application scenario 2) 80xODUflex

80xODUflex

NS4M 1

1

NS4M 1

1 OUT1

IN1

IN1

OUT1

TEM28

8

8

8

IN4

10

1

1

OUT4

8


8

8

80xODUflex

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

8

8 1×ODU4

IN4

TEM28

8

OUT4

M U X / D M U X

TEM28

1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

1

1×ODU4

80xODUflex

10

M U X / D M U X

1

1

1 TEM28

8

8

8

1867


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 3 of the NS4M board: 40 channels of ODU1 signals from the backplane Figure 15-83 Position of the NS4M board in the WDM system (application scenario 3) 40xODU1

40xODU1

NS4M 1

1

NS4M 1

1 OUT1

IN1

IN1

OUT1

TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

IN4

5

1

1

OUT4

8


8

8

40xODU1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

8

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU4

IN4

TOA 8

OUT4

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

1×ODU4

40xODU1

5

1

1

1

1 TOA

8

8

8

1868


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 4 of the NS4M board: ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane Figure 15-84 Position of the NS4M board in the WDM system (application scenario 4) 10xODU2/ODU2e

10xODU2/ODU2e

NS4M 1

1

1

1

TQX 4

4

4

IN1

OUT1

IN4

M U X / D M U X

10xODU2/ODU2e

OUT4

M U X / D M U X

1×ODU4

4

IN1

1

1 TQX

1×OTU4

4

4

OUT1

1×OTU4

TQX

1×ODU4

1

10xODU2/ODU2e

1

1

NS4M

4

4

4

1

1

1 TQX

4

4

4

IN4 OUT4

TDX

TDX

Application scenario 5 of the NS4M board: two channels of ODU3 signals from the backplane Figure 15-85 Position of the NS4M board in the WDM system (application scenario 5) 2xODU3

2xODU3

NS4M

NS4M OUT1

TSXL

IN4

OUT4


TSXL

2xODU3

OUT1 M U X / D M U X IN4


1×ODU4

IN1

1×OTU4

1×OTU4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1×ODU4

2xODU3

TSXL

IN1

TSXL

1869


15 OTN Line Board

Application scenario 6 of the NS4M board: one channel of ODU4 signals from the backplane Figure 15-86 Position of the NS4M board in the WDM system (application scenario 6) 1xODU4

1xODU4

NS4M

NS4M OUT1

IN1

IN4

1×ODU4

1×OTU4

1×ODU4

TSC


1×OTU4

OUT1 M U X / D M U X IN4

IN1

TSC

OUT4

Application scenario 7: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 15-87 Position of the NS4M board in the WDM system (application scenario 7) 1xOTU4 NS4M TOM

TSXL

ODU1

ODU1

ODU1

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODUflex

ODUflex

ODUflex

ODU3

ODU3

NS4M IN1

OUT1

ODU0

IN1

OUT4

ODU3

IN4

OUT1 M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

IN4 OUT4

1×ODU4 1×OTU4 4×28Gbit/s OTN信号 1×OTU4

TQX

ODU0

1×OTU4 4×28Gbit/s OTN信号 1×OTU4 1×ODU4

TOA ND2/ TDX

ODU0

ODU0

ODU0

ODU0

ODU1

ODU1

ODU1

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODU2/ ODU2e

ODUflex ODUflex ODU3

ODU3

TOM TOA

ODU2/ ND2/ ODU2e TDX ODUflex ODU3

TQX TSXL

NOTE

l The board can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU3 signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 100 Gbit/s.

15.8.4 Functions and Features The NS4M board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-115.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1870


15 OTN Line Board

Table 15-115 Functions and features of the NS4M board Function and feature

Description

Basic function

The NS4M board converts signals into one channel of OTU4 signals (shown in the following sequence) and then four channels of ITU-T G. 694.1-compliant wavelength signals. 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/10xODU2/10xODU2e/ 2xODU3/1xODU4<->1xOTU4 Supports mixed transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e, and ODU3 signals.


Supports the cross-connection of 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex signals or 40 channels of ODU1 signals or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or two channels of ODU3 signals or one channel of ODU4 signals between the NS4M and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTU4 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, flex) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification



Not supported

ESC function

Supported

PRBS function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

Supports HFEC on the WDM side.



ALS function

Not supported

Latency measurement

Supported

Test frame

Not supported



1871


15 OTN Line Board


Description

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Supported

Protection scheme

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection.

Loopback

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM side Loopback






Supported

Supporte d

Support ed

Support ed

Support ed

Support ed


1872


15 OTN Line Board


Description




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1873


15 OTN Line Board




15.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NS4M board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 15-88 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS4M board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1874


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-88 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS4M board 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/ 10xODU2/10xODU2e/2xODU3/1xODU4 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side OUT1 E/O Cross-connect module


O/E WDM-side Optical module


OUT4 IN1 IN4

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS4M board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS4M to the WDM side of the NS4M, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The OTN processing module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing and FEC encoding. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU4 signals. The OTU4 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out four OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN4 optical interfaces. The module then performs O/E conversion to convert the received signals into one channel of OTU4 signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1875


15 OTN Line Board


Module Function l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: performs O/E conversion to convert four channels of received OTN optical signals into four channels of OTN electrical signals and converts the OTN electrical signals into one channel of OTU4 electrical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: converts one channel of OTU4 electrical signals into four channels of OTN electrical signals and performs E/O conversion to convert the OTN electrical signals into four channels of OTN optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4 signals, processes overheads in OTU4 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NS4M and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l


l


15.8.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NS4M board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 15-89 shows the front panel of the NS4M board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1876


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-89 Front panel of the NS4M board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1877


15 OTN Line Board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 15-116 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-116 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS4M board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN4

LC


OUT1-OUT4

LC



15.8.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one NS4M board. Table 15-117 shows the valid slots for the NS4M board. Table 15-117 Valid slots for the NS4M board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


1878


15 OTN Line Board

NOTE

The online signal bus on the NS4M board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the NS4M board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the NS4M board, the slot number of the NS4M board displayed on the NM is IU2.


Display of Physical Ports Table 15-118 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-118 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS4M board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Interface on the Panel


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, IN1/OUT1OCh:1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-90 shows the logical Ports of the NS4M board. Table 15-119 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1879


15 OTN Line Board

Figure 15-90 Port diagram of the NS4M board Backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1 1xODU4

OCh:1

ODU4


ODU4:1

OCh:1

ODU3:2



10xODU2/ 10xODU2e

OCh:1

ODU2:10


1(IN1/OUT1)


OCh:1 4(IN4/OUT4)

ODU1:40


OCh:1

ODU0:80


80xODUflex

OCh:1

ODUflex:80


ODU1 mapping path


ODU0 mapping path

ODU4 mapping path


ODU3 mapping path


ODU2 mapping path

Table 15-119 Descriptions of the ports on the NS4M board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

(1 to 4)(IN/OUT)



1880


15 OTN Line Board

Port Name

Description

1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1


1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:(1 to 2)








1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:(1 to 80)


15.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NS4M, refer to Table 15-120. Table 15-120 NS4M parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1881


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description








Off, On Default: On


FEC Working State



FEC Mode

HFEC

Queries the FEC mode of the current optical interface.

Band Type

-



-


Wavelength Parity

Odd, Even

Specifies the desired parity of the working band of the board.

Default: Even Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 Default: /

Sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1882


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

Planned Band Type

C


Default: C

See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. PRBS Test Status




l Disabled, GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GCC2 Enabled l Default value: Disabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. l When the parameter is set to Disabled, the system will process the GCC1 and GCC2 bytes in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to GCC1 +GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 or GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to Only GCC1 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC1 byte but only the GCC2 byte in the OTN overhead. l When the parameter is set to Only GCC2 Enabled, the system will not process the GCC2 byte but only the GCC1 byte in the OTN overhead.

Line Rate

Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Default: Standard Mode

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Set this parameter to Standard Mode when ODU2 signals are crossconnected. Set this parameter to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are crossconnected.


1883


15 OTN Line Board

Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled



0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the NS4 board receives 3GSDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100.

15.8.10 NS4M Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54NS 4M

350ps/nm-C Band-4 Wavelengths NRZPIN

N/A

NOTE



Unit



-

NRZ, HFEC



1884


15 OTN Line Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

3


dBm

-2


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

350


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561

Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled)

dBm

-14

Minimum receiver overload (FEC enabled)

dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

The specifications of optical ports "IN1/OUT1" to "IN4/OUT4" are the same. This table lists the specifications of only one optical port. The wavelengths of optical ports "IN1/OUT1", "IN2/OUT2", "IN3/OUT3", and "IN4/OUT4" are consecutive with a 100 GHz spacing. Each board (with a unique variant) supports only odd wavelengths or even wavelengths, which can be specified on the U2000.



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1885


15 OTN Line Board




TN54NS4M

97.0

106.7


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1886


16

16 General Service Processing Board

General Service Processing Board

About This Chapter 16.1 GS4 GS4 : 100G General Service Processing Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1887



16.1 GS4 GS4 : 100G General Service Processing Board

16.1.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the GS4 board is TN54.


Initial Version





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 54 GS 4

V100R0 09C00SP C100

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

l The enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must use the TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT boards. l The enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack must use the TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM board. l The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack must use the TN16UXCM board.

Variants The TN54GS4 board has only one variant: TN54GS401.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1888





Added the TN54GS4 board.

The TN54GS4 board is a 100 Gbit/s general service processing board that performs conversions between 80 x ODU0, 80 x ODUflex, 40 x ODU1, 10 x ODU2, 10 x ODU2e, 2 x ODU3, or 1 x ODU4 and one OTU4 gray optical signal. In addition, it supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODU3, and ODUflex signals.

16.1.3 Application The GS4 board is a general service processing board (for gray optical signals) that converts the 80xODU0, 40xODU1, 10xODU2, 10xODU2e, 2xODU3, 1xODU4, or 80xODUflex into one OTU4 signal. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODU2/ODU2e service, ODU3 service and the ODUflex service.

Application scenario 1 of the GS4 board: pass-through of Line-side services at the local site Transparently transmits line-side services by working with another GS4 board, see Figure 16-1. When receiving a west WDM-side service, this GS4 board performs O/E conversion, demapping, and demultiplexing to convert the service into an ODUk signal. Then this GS4 board sends the ODUk signal to the cross-connect board for grooming. When the other GS4 board receives the ODUk signal from the cross-connect board, it converts the ODUk signal into an OTU4 gray optical signal by performing mapping, multiplexing, and E/O conversion, and sends the OTU4 gray optical signal to the east. The reverse process is similar. Figure 16-1 Position of the GS4 board in the system (application scenario 1) Third-party OTU board Colorless light side

Colored light side

ODUk(k=0,1,2,2e,3,4,flex)

OTU4

GS4

GS4

(k=0,1,2,2e,3,4,flex)

(k=0,1,2,2e,3,4,flex)

Third-party WDM device

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

RX

OD

OM

TX

East WDM-side

ODUk

OTU4

OTU4

West WDM-side

ODUk

TX

OM

OD

RX

OTU4

Third-party WDM device


1889



Scenario

Backplane-Side Signal Type

Max. Number

Hybrid transmissi on

Hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODU3, and ODUflex signals is supported.

The maximum bandwidth is 100 Gbit/ s.

Nonhybrid transmissi on

ODU0

80

ODUflex

80

ODU1

40

ODU2/ODU2e

10

ODU3

2

ODU4

1

Application scenario 2 of the GS4 board: adding/dropping of client-side services on the Line side Allows for local add/drop of client services on the line side by working with an OTN tributary board, see Figure 16-2. Specifically, the GS4 board receives OTU4 gray optical signals from the line side, demultiplexes the OTU4 gray optical signals into ODUk signals by performing O/ E conversion, and then sends the ODUk signals to the cross-connect board for grooming. When receiving the ODUk signals from the cross-connect board, the OTN tributary board demaps/ demultiplexes the ODUk signals that are to be locally dropped, performs E/O conversion, and then drops the signals. The reverse process is similar. Figure 16-2 Position of the GS4 board in the system (application scenario 2) Third-party OTU board Colorless light side

Colored light side

ODUk(k=0,1,2,2e,3,4,flex) Client

Tributary board

OTU4 GS4

OD/OM

Tributary board

OTU4

…

ODUk (k=0,1,2,2e,3,4,flex)

TX

RX Third-party WDM device

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1890


Scenario


Backplane-Side Signal Type

Max. Number

Hybrid transmissi on

Hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODU3, and ODUflex signals is supported.

The maximum bandwidth is 100 Gbit/ s.

Nonhybrid transmissi on

ODU0

80

ODUflex

80

ODU1

40

ODU2/ODU2e

10

ODU3

2

ODU4

1

16.1.4 Functions and Features The GS4 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 16-1. Table 16-1 Functions and features of the GS4 board Function and feature

Description

Basic function

GS4 converts signals as follows: 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/10xODU2/10xODU2e/ 2xODU3/1xODU4<->1xOTU4 Supports mixed transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e, and ODU3 signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Line-side service type



Supports the cross-connection of 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex signals or 40 channels of ODU1 signals or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or two channels of ODU3 signals or one channel of ODU4 signals between the GS4 and the cross-connect board.


1891




Description

OTN function

l Supports the OTU4 interface on the line side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2/2e, 3, 4, flex) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS function

Supports the PRBS function on the line side.

LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

FEC NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.



ALS function

Not supported

Latency measurement

Supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Supported

Protection scheme



l Supports tributary SNCP protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/ QCP board). NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1892


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Description

Loopback

Line-side Loopback

ODU0 Channe l Loopba ck




ODUf lex Chann el Loopb ack

Supported

Suppor ted

Supported

Supported

Supporte d

Suppo rted


1893




Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae IEEE 802.3ba ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface SMPTE 297-2006 Serial Digital Fiber Transmission System for SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292 and SMPTE 424M Signals NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1894




Description ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM) Protocols or standards for service processing (performance monitoring)


16.1.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The GS4 board consists of the line-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 16-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the GS4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1895



Figure 16-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the GS4 board 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/ 10xODU2/10xODU2e/2xODU3/1xODU4 Backplane (service corss-connection) Line side E/O

TX


O/E

RX

Line-side Optical module



Control Communication

CPU

Memory


Required voltage



The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the GS4 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the GS4 to the line-side of the GS4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The OTN processing module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing and FEC encoding. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU4 signals. The OTU4 signals are sent to the line-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU4 gray optical signals through the TX optical interface.

l

Receive direction The line-side optical module receives one channel of OTU4 gray optical signals through the RX optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1896




Module Function l

Line-side optical module The module consists of a line-side receiver and a line-side transmitter. – Line-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU4 gray optical signals. – Line-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU4 gray optical signals. – Reports the performance of the line-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the line-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing modulea and cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4 signals, processes overheads in OTU4 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the GS4 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l


l


16.1.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the GS4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 16-4 shows the front panel of the GS4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1897



Figure 16-4 Front panel of the GS4 board

NOTE




l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1898



Interfaces Table 16-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 16-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the GS4 board Interface

Type

Function

RX

LC

Receives OTU4 gray optical signals from the thirdparty OTU board.

TX

LC

Sends OTU4 gray optical signals to the third-party OTU board.


16.1.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one GS4 board. Table 16-3 shows the valid slots for the GS4 board. Table 16-3 Valid slots for the GS4 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1899



Table 16-4 Mapping between the physical ports on the GS4 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Interface on the Panel


RX/TX

1

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, RX/TXOCh:1-ODU4:1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 16-5 shows the logical Ports of the GS4 board. Table 16-5 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1900



Figure 16-5 Port diagram of the GS4 board Backplane

RX/TX-OCh:1 1xODU4

OCh:1

ODU4

RX/TX-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:(1-2) ODU3:1 2xODU3

ODU4:1

OCh:1

ODU3:2

RX/TX-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:(1-10)

Other tributary/GS4 Board

ODU2:1 ODU4:1

10xODU2/ 10xODU2e

OCh:1

ODU2:10

RX/TX-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU1:(1-40)

1(RX/TX)


OCh:1

ODU1:40

RX/TX-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:(1-80) ODU0:1 ODU4:1 80xODU0

OCh:1

ODU0:80

RX/TX-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:(1-80) ODUflex:1 ODU4:1

80xODUflex

OCh:1

ODUflex:80


ODU1 mapping path


ODU0 mapping path

ODU4 mapping path


ODU3 mapping path


ODU2 mapping path

Table 16-5 Descriptions of the ports on the GS4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

1(RX1/TX1)

Line-side optical ports Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1901



Port Name

Description

1(RX1/TX1)-OCh:1


1(RX1/TX1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:(1 to 2)








1(RX1/TX1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:(1 to 80)


16.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the GS4, refer to Table 16-6. Table 16-6 GS4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1902



Field

Value

Description








Off, On Default: OFF


FEC Working State


Determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function for an optical interface. After the FEC function is disabled, services become abnormal. The FEC Working State parameter at the transmit end must be consistent with that at the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.

FEC Mode

FEC


PRBS Test Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1903



Field

Value

Description




l Default value: Disabled



Line Rate


NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Set this parameter to Standard Mode when ODU2 signals are crossconnected. Set this parameter to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are crossconnected. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the GS4 board receives 3GSDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100.

16.1.10 GS4 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1904



Board

Line-Side Fixed Optical Module

Line-Side Pluggable Optical Module

TN54GS 4

N/A

(100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-CFPa

a: The GS4 board receives and transmits only OTU4 services.

NOTE


Line-Side Pluggable Optical Module NOTE

The GS4 board receives and transmits only OTU4 services.

Table 16-7 Line-side pluggable optical module specifications (100GE/OTU4 services) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)


Gbit/s

100GE: 25.78125 OTU4: 27.952493


ppm

100GE: -100 to 100 OTU4: -20 to 20


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54 1308.09


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

nm


1296.59 1301.09

1905



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value (100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10 kmCFP 1305.63 1310.19


dBm

100GE: 1.7


dBm


dBm


dBm


dBm



dBm


Eye pattern mask

-

100GE: IEEE 802.3ba compliant


OTU4: ITU-T G.959 compliant Optical Extinction Ratio (Min)

dB


dB

100GE: 4 OTU4: 7 30


-

PIN


Gbit/s

100GE: 25.78125 OTU4: 27.952493


ppm

100GE: -100 to 100 OTU4: -20 to 20


nm

1294.53 1299.02 1303.54

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1906



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value (100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10 kmCFP 1308.09


nm

1296.59 1301.09 1305.63 1310.19


dBm

100GE: -10.6


dBm


dBm



dBm



dBm



dBm

2.9 (Only for OTU4)

Maximum reflectance

dB

-26

OTU4: -8.8 100GE: 4.5 OTU4: 2.9

NOTE

The OMA values are designed to ensure normal equipment operation. They are not provided for equipment commissioning. In practical, equipment commissioning is performed based on the average receiver power per lane and total average launched power. It is recommended that the total average launched power be used as the reference for equipment commissioning. The method of commissioning the optical power for a GS4 board is similar to that of commissioning the optical power for a tributary board. For details, see Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board in the Commissioning.



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1907




Line-Side Pluggable Optical Module



TN54GS4

(100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10 km-CFP

55

60


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1908


17 Universal Line Board

17

Universal Line Board

About This Chapter 17.1 Overview A universal line board supports hybrid transmission of OTN, SDH, and packet services. Compared to a common line board, a universal line board additionally supports SDH and packet services. In other words, a universal line board grooms a wider range of electrical signals and offers higher bandwidth utilization. 17.2 HUNQ2 HUNQ2: 4 x 10G Universal Line Service Processing Board 17.3 HUNS3 HUNS3: 40G Universal Line Service Processing Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1909



17.1 Overview A universal line board supports hybrid transmission of OTN, SDH, and packet services. Compared to a common line board, a universal line board additionally supports SDH and packet services. In other words, a universal line board grooms a wider range of electrical signals and offers higher bandwidth utilization.

Positions of Universal Line Boards in a WDM System A universal line board receives and processes ODUk signals, packets, or VC-4 signals from the cross-connect board. When receiving packets or VC-4 signals, the board maps the them into ODUk signals, performs multiplexing and E/O conversion, and sends out an OTUk optical signal carried over an ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelength. When receiving ODUk signals, the board directly performs multiplexing and E/O conversion. Figure 17-1 illustrates the position of a universal line board in a WDM system. Figure 17-1 Position of a universal line board in a WDM system Client-side services

ODUk/VC-4/Packets

Tributary board

WDM-side services

Universal line board

SC1


Packet service board

OD

TDM board

OA

Tributary board

WDM-side ODF


FIU

Packet service board

OA

OM


TDM board


Main Functions The main difference between universal line boards lies in the number of line-side signals and their rates as well as the type and number of signals from the cross-connect board. Table 17-1 provides the main functions of universal line boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1910



Table 17-1 Main functions of universal line boards Board

TN54HU NS3

TN54HU NQ2

TN56NS 3a


WDM-Side Signal

Type

Max. Number

Type

Max. Num ber

ODU0

32

1

ODUflex

32

OTU3, OTU3e

ODU1

16

ODU2

4

ODU2e

4

OTU3e

ODU3

1

OTU3

Packets

40Gbit/s

VC-4

256

OTU3, OTU3e

ODU0

32

ODUflex

32

ODU1

16

ODU2

4

ODU2e

4

OTU2e

Packets

40 Gbit/s

OTU2

VC-4

256

ODU0

32

ODUflex

32

ODU1

16

ODU2

4

ODU2e

4

OTU3e

ODU3

1

OTU3

VC-4

256

OTU3, OTU3e

Pluggab le Optical Module

Layer 2 Function

Not supporte d

l Supports E-Line and E-LAN services based on MPLS, QinQ, and physical ports. l Supports ETH-OAM and MPLS-TP OAM.

OTU2

OTU3, OTU3e

l Supports Tunnel APS, PW APS, LAG, MC-LAG, and MSTP. l Supports QoS.

4

Supporte d

1

Not supporte d

Not supported

a: The TN56NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of OTN and SDH services. To maintain consistency in board classification between the TN56NS3 board and NS3 boards of other versions, the TN56NS3 board is still classified as an OTN line board in the product documentation. For details, see 15.6 NS3.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1911



17.2 HUNQ2 HUNQ2: 4 x 10G Universal Line Service Processing Board

17.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the HUNQ2 board is TN54.


Initial Version





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassis

TN5 4HU NQ2

V100R0 08C00

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

This board cannot be applied to the subrack that works in master/slave subrack mode.

Depending on the services provisioned, there are different requirements, as described in the following table. Service

SDH/packet service license for universal line boards

Cross-Connect Board

OTN

Unneeded

l T32 general/enhanced subrack: TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM/TN52XCM/ TN52XCH l T16 subrack: TN16XCH/TN16UXCM

Packet

Needed

l T32 general/enhanced subrack: TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM l T16 subrack: TN16UXCM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1912



Service


Cross-Connect Board

SDH

Unneeded

l T32 general/enhanced subrack: TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM/TN52XCM/ TN52XCH l T16 subrack: TN16UXCM

Note: For a general or enhanced OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SCC board must be TN52SCC.

Variants The TN54HUNQ2 board has only one variant: TN54HUNQ2. The TN54HUNQ2 board variant is the board itself.




The physical-layer clock synchronization and IEEE 1588v2 functions are newly supported by the TN54HUNQ2 board.

Functions are enhanced.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


For the TN54HUNQ2 board, added the function of configuring C-VLAN and SVLAN on the same port.



1913





Added the support for SDH ASON and OTN electricallayer ASON on the TN54HUNQ2 board.




Added the support for the 10 Gbit/s single rate-0.3 kmXFP gray light optical module on the TN54HUNQ2 board.




Added the TN54HUNQ2 board.

The 4 x 10G universal line board is added to support hybrid transmission of OTN, SDH, and packet services.

17.2.3 Application The HUNQ2 board is a hybrid line board and supports a mixture of OTN, SDH, and packet services. It can also receive and transmit only one or two of the three services. The HUNQ2 board processes and converts the received service signals into four OTU2/OTU2e signals, which are carried over four ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths. The HUNQ2 board supports the following service conversions: 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/32 x ODUflex/4 x ODU2<->4 x OTU2, 4 x ODU2e<->4 x OTU2e, 16 x STM-16/4 x STM64<->4 x OTU2, and packets<->4 x OTU2. It supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODUflex, VC4, and packet services with the total bandwidth not exceeding 40 Gbit/s. Figure 17-2 illustrates the application of HUNQ2 board in a WDM system. Figure 17-2 Application of the HUNQ2 board in a WDM system 4xOTU2/4xOTU2e

Packets ODUk

VC

STM-n ODUk 4

IN4

M U X / D M U X

OUT1

IN4 OUT4

Packets ODUk HUNQ2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ODUk

ODU

ODUk Packets

PKT

ODUk STM-n

VC

4


OTN Tributary Board Packet Service Board

ODUk

ODU2

M U X / D M OUT4 U X

OTU2

OTU2

STM-n ODUk

ODU2

ODUk TDM Board

IN1

IN1

ODU2

PKT

OUT1

OTU2

ODUk

OTU2

Packet Service Board

ODU

ODU2

OTN Tributary Board

ODUk STM-n

TDM Board

ODUk Packets HUNQ2

1914



Table 17-2 Service mapping paths Inp ut sign al

Mapping Path

Notea

Pack ets

GE/FE port (the service rate is no greater than 1.25 Gbit/s)->GFP-T->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2

When the packet and SDH services are provisioned, ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode of the HUNQ2 board must be set to Assign random.

GE/FE port (the service rate is no greater than 1.25 Gbit/s)->GFP-F->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2 10GE port (the service rate is no greater than 2.5 Gbit/s)->GFP-F->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2 10GE port (the service rate is no greater than 10 Gbit/s)->GFP-F->ODU2>OTU2 10GE port (the service rate ranges from 1.25 Gbit/s to 10 Gbit/s)->GFP-F>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2 SDH

STM-16->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2 STM-64->ODU2->OTU2

OTN

ODU0->ODU2->OTU2 ODU1->ODU2->OTU2

ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random.

ODU2->OTU2 ODU2e->OTU2e ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2 ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2 ODU1->ODU2->OTU2

ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign consecutive.

ODU2->OTU2 ODU2e->OTU2e a. The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter settings of the line boards at two sites where services are added or dropped must be the same. When the HUNQ2 board interconnects with a board that does not support the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the HUNQ2 board.

17.2.4 Functions and Features The HUNQ2 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, OTN interfaces, and SDH overhead processing. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1915



The HUNQ2 supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODUflex, VC4, and packet services. According to the difference of input signal, the board has different functions as shown in the following table. Table 17-3 Basic function of the HUNQ2 board Input signal

Basic function

More information

OTN

32 x ODU0/32 x ODUflex/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->4 x OTU2, 4 x ODU2e<->4 x OTU2e

Table 17-4

SDH

16 x STM-16/4 x STM-64<->16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->4 x OTU2

Table 17-5

Packets

A maximum of 40 Gbit/s packets<>32 x ODU0/32 x ODUflex/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->4 x OTU2

Table 17-6

Table 17-4 OTN functions and features of the HUNQ2 board Function and feature

Description

OTN functions

l Supports OTU2/OTU2e on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing defined in ITU-T G.709. l OTU2 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, flex) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

Protection schemes

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/ QCP board). l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. NOTE When the grooming granularity is ODUflex, SPRing protection is not supported. ODUk SNCP and ODUk SPRing protection are not supported when SDH or packet services are cross-connected from the backplane.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specificati on





1916




Description

PRBS test function


FEC coding


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Regenerat ion board

TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN55NO2, TN53NQ2, TN54NQ2

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Supported

Loopback

Supports ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex loopbacks and WDM-side port loopbacks.

Physical clock

Supports clock synchronization of WDM-side OTU2 ports.

IEEE 1588v2


ESC

Supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported


Supported


NOTE Physical-layer clock synchronization is not supported when the mapping path is ODU2– >OTU2/ODU2e–>OTU2e.


1917



Table 17-5 SDH functions and features of the HUNQ2 board Function and feature

Description

Overhead processing

l Processes the section overheads of STM-16/STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.

Protection schemes

l SNCP l SNCTP l LMSP l MSP ring l The transoceanic MSP ring.


l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults.

Service processing


Loopback

Supports VC4 loopbacks.

SDH clock


IEEE 1588v2


Outband DCN

Not supported

SDH ASON

Supported


NOTE SDH clock synchronization is not supported when the mapping path is STM-64–>ODU2– >OTU2.

NOTE When being installed in a T16 subrack, the board does not support SDH ASON.

Table 17-6 Ethernet service functions of the HUNQ2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

QoS

Diffserv

Supported, compliant with RFC 2474 and RFC 2475


1918




Protection schemes

Description Traffic classification

Complex traffic classification. The ACL rules are customized based on packet information.

Traffic policing

Committed access rate (CAR), two rate three color marker (trTCM) compliant with RFC 2698

Congestion management

Class of service (CoS), supporting SP/ WFQ scheduling algorithms

Congestion avoidance

WRED, tail dropping

Traffic shaping

Port-based traffic shaping, queue-based traffic shaping

l MPLS-TP tunnel APS, either 1+1 or 1:1 protection compliant with ITU-T G.8131(draft), RFC 6372 l MPLS-TP PW APS, either 1+1 or 1:1 protection compliant with ITU-T G.8131(draft), RFC 6372 l LAG, either intra-board or inter-board LAG compliant with IEEE 802.1ax l MC-LAG, compliant with IEEE 802.1ax l MSTP, compatible with STP/RSTP and compliant with IEEE 802.1q l LPT, either point-to-point LPT or point-to-multipoint LPT compliant with Huawei proprietary protocols

IGMP Snooping

Supported

Maintenance

Ethernet service OAM

Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.1ag, ITU-T Y.1731/G.8013 and ITU-T Y.1730

Ethernet port OAM

Not supported

MPLS-TP OAM

Supported, compliant with ITU-T G. 8113.1

RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Loopback

Not supported

Physical clock

Supports clock synchronization of WDM-side OTU2 ports. NOTE Physical clock synchronization is not supported when the mapping path is PKT–>ODU2–>OTU2.

IEEE 1588v2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



1919




Description

Inband DCN

Supported

Ethernet data frame format

IEEE 802.3, Ethernet II, IEEE 802.1Q, IEEE 802.1p

MFL

9600 bytes

Flow control at ports

Not supported

Service type

E-Line (VPWS), E-LAN (VPLS)

Service bearing medium

Port, QinQ link, PW

E-Line

PW-based service models

Port<->PW CVLAN<->PW SVLAN<->PW CVLAN + CVLAN Pri<->PW SVLAN + SVLAN Pri<->PW

QinQ link-based service models

Port<->QinQ

Port-based service models

Port<->Port

CVLAN<->QinQ

CVLAN<->Port SVLAN<->Port

UNI-UNI service models

Port<->Port CVLAN<->CVLAN, VLAN translation supported SVLAN<->SVLAN, VLAN translation supported

E-LAN

Bridge type

IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1q, IEEE 802.1ad

Bridge learning mode

SVL, IVL NOTE IVL is supported only when the bridge type is IEEE 802.1ad.

VSI tag type

C-Aware, S-Aware, T-Aware

NOTE

In addition to the preceding features, the HUNQ2 board supports performance monitoring and service processing compliant with related standards and protocols defined by IEEE, ITU-T, IETF, and MEF.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1920



17.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The HUNQ2 board consists of the fabric interface circuit, traffic manager, packet processor, signal processing module, WDM-side optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow Figure 17-3 shows the functional block diagram of the HUNQ2 board. Figure 17-3 Functional block diagram of the HUNQ2 board Backplane

Fabric interfa ce circuit

40Gbit/s Packet

VC crossconnect module

256xVC-4

32xODU0/16xODU1/ 8xODUflex/ 4xODU2/4xODU2e

Packet proces sor

SDH process ing module

E/O

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

O/E

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

OTN process ing module

ODUk crossconnect module

WDMside optical module


SCC DC power from the backplane

Traffic manag er

Fuse

Power supply module

Required voltage

The transmit and receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the HUNQ2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the HUNQ2 board, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. The following describes the signal flow in the transmit direction along with the module functions. 1.

Packet services, VC-4 signals, or ODUk signals are transmitted from the backplane. l The packet services are received by the fabric interface circuit and are converted into data packets. Then, the data packets are routed to the traffic manager for packet shaping and queue scheduling. Lastly, protection and necessary data processing are performed for the packets by the packet processor and forwarded to the OTN processing module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1921



l The VC-4 signals are received by the VC cross-connect module and sent to the SDH processing module for STM-N framing and OTN overhead processing. The generated STM-N signals are sent to the OTN processing module. l The ODUk signals are received by the ODUk cross-connect module and directly sent to the OTN processing module. 2.

When receiving the data packets or STM-N signals, the OTN processing module maps them to the payload of the ODUk signals, multiplexes the ODUk signals into OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, processes the signal overheads, and performs FEC/AFEC encoding/ decoding. When receiving ODUk signals, the OTN processing module directly multiplexes them into OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, processes the signal overheads, and performs FEC/AFEC encoding/decoding. Then, the module sends the OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals to the WDM-side optical module.

3.

When the WDM-side optical module receives the OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, it performs E/O conversion sends out four OTU2/OTU2e optical signals over four ITU-T G. 694.1-compliant wavelengths through the OUT1-OUT4 ports.

The control and communication module controls the operation of functional modules and collects information about alarms, performance events, working states, and voltages from the functional modules.

17.2.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the HUNQ2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 17-4 shows the front panel of the HUNQ2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1922



Figure 17-4 Front panel of the HUNQ2 board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 17-7 describes each interface on the HUNQ2 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1923



Table 17-7 Interfaces on the HUNQ2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN4

LC


OUT1-OUT4

LC



17.2.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one HUNQ2 board. Table 17-8 lists the valid slots for the HUNQ2 board. Table 17-8 Valid slots for the HUNQ2 board Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

NOTE

The rear connectors of the HUNQ2 board are designed to connect to the backplane through the left slot of the two slots that hold the board. Therefore, the slot ID of the board displayed on the U2000 is the ID of the left slot. For example, when the HUNQ2 board is installed in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot ID of the HUNQ2 board displayed on the U2000 is IU1.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1924



Table 17-9 Mapping between the physical ports on the HUNQ2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They can also be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. The following provides the service mapping paths, port diagram of the HUNQ2 board. Figure 17-5 Port diagram of the TN54HUNQ2 board (Assign random) Backplane Packet/ 4xSTM-64/ 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e

IN(1~4)/OUT(1~4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1

Packets<->ODU2 4 x V_ETH-n <-> 4 x ODU2 V_SDH-1: STM-64<->ODU2 V_SDH-5: STM-64<->ODU2 V_SDH-9: STM-64<->ODU2 V_SDH-13: STM-64<->ODU2

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

4xODU2/ODU2e

Other tributary/line/PID/packet service/universal line/TDM board

Packet/ 16xSTM-16/ 16xODU1/

Packets<->ODU1 16 x V_ETH-n <-> 16 x ODU1 STM-16<->ODU1 16 x V_SDH-m<->16 x ODU1 16xODU1

IN(1~4)/OUT(1~4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) ODU1:1 ODU1:4

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU1:1 ODU1:4

1(IN1/OUT1)

IN(1~4)/OUT(1~4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8) Packet/ 32xODU0

4(IN4/OUT4)

ODU0:1 Packets<->ODU0 32 x V_ETH-n <-> 32 x ODU0

ODU0:8 ODU0:1

32xODU0

ODU0:8

Packets<->ODUflex 32 x V_ETH-n <-> 32 x ODUflex

ODUflex:1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

IN(1~4)/OUT(1~4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~8) Packet/ 32xODUflex

32xODUflex

ODUflex:8 ODUflex:1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODU2:1

OCh:1

ODUflex:8

NOTE

In the figure, n can be any integer within the range of 1-32, and m can be any integer within the range of 1-16.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1925



NOTE



l

When configuring STM-16 services for the virtual ports, use the ports in the same group. Do not use the ports in another group unless no ports are left in the current group. For example, to configure an STM-16 service on three of the virtual SDH ports, use V_SDH_1, V_SDH_2, and V_SDH_3; to configure an STM-16 on seven of the virtual SDH ports, use V_SDH_1, V_SDH_2, V_SDH_3, V_SDH_4, V_SDH_5, V_SDH_6, and V_SDH_7. Cross-connect module

ODUk mapping path

Packet framer and mapper

There are three types of crossconnections between this board and other boards. The grooming granularity varies according to the boards connected to the TN54HUNQ2 board. l ODUk grooming: performed when the The TN54HUNQ2 board is connected to an OTN tributary/line board or PID board that supports the same ODUk level as the TN54HUNQ2 board. l VC grooming: performed when the TN54HUNQ2 is connected to a TDM board that supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services. l Packet grooming: performed when the TN54HUNQ2 board is connected to a packet board or universal line board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



ODUk framer and mapper



1926



Figure 17-6 Port diagram of the TN54HUNQ2 board (Assign consecutive) Backplane

IN(1~4)/OUT(1~4)-OCh:1 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e

ODU2:1

OCh :1

ODU2:1

OCh :1

IN(1~4)/OUT(1~4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4) ODU1:1 ODU 2: 1

OCh :1

ODU 2: 1

OCh :1


ODU1:4 16xODU1 ODU1:1 ODU1:4

1(N1/OUT1)

IN(1~2)/OUT(1~2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)

4(IN4/OUT4)

ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2

32xODU0

ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU0:1

ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1

OCh :1

ODU 1:4

ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1

OCh :1

ODU1:4

ODU 0:2




ODUk mapping path


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1927



Table 17-10 Description of NM port on the HUNQ2 board Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODUflex:(1-8)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODUflex:(1-8) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODUflex:(1-8) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1ODUflex:(1-8) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0: (1-8)

Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0: (1-8) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0: (1-8) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0: (1-8) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4)


2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1


3(IN3/OUT3)-OCh:1-ODU2:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCh:1-ODU2:1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1928



Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)


2(IN2/OUT2) 3(IN3/OUT3) 4(IN4/OUT4) 40001(V_ETH-1) to 40032(V_ETH-32)

Virtual ports that perform mutual conversion of packets and ODUk signals (at most 32)

51(V_SDH-1) to 66(V_SDH-16)




Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used





Default: NonLoopback Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1929



Field

Value

Description

Channel Loopback




Off, On Default: On


FEC Working State



FEC Mode



AFEC Grade

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1, 2, 3 Default: 3


Band Type

-



-



-



1930



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208. 170 to 18/1611.00/188. 780



C, CWDM Default: C



Enabled, Disabled

Line Rate


Default: Disabled


PRBS Test Status


Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. Specifies the line rate of OTN signals. Set this parameter to Standard Mode when ODU2 signals are cross-connected. Set this parameter to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are cross-connected. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted. Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test.

NULL Mapping Status

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1931



Field

Value

Description





Assign random indicates that cross-layer mapping of services is performed. The service mappings are ODU0->ODU2, ODU1->ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. l Cross-layer mapping reduces the number of mapping layers and simplifies the relationship between client and server trails, which are easy to manage. l Cross-layer mapping enables flexible bandwidth usage. For example, when seven 1.25G timeslots of an ODU2 channel are occupied by ODUflex services, the remaining 1.25G bandwidth can be configured for ODU0 services, implementing ODU0->ODU2 cross-layer mapping. Assign consecutive indicates that layer-bylayer mapping of services is performed from lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0>ODU1->ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2. The Assign random mode is recommended. The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode values of two line boards must be the same when they are interconnected on the WDM side. NOTE When packet or SDH services are provisioned, ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode cannot be set to Assign consecutive.


0 to 100 Default: /

Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the HUNQ2 board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10, receives packets services from client equipment, set this parameter to 20. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1932



Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 17-12 Basic Attributes of HUNQ2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the virtual Ethernet port, for example, 40001(V_ETH-1).

Name

-

Specifies the self-defined port name.

Enable Port

-

This parameter is unavailable for the HUNQ2 board.

Port Mode

Layer 2, Layer 3

Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port.

Default: Layer 2

l This parameter is set to Layer 2 when the Ethernet port carries port-based or QinQlink-based Ethernet services. l This parameter is set to Layer 3 when the port carries tunnel services. Encapsulation Type

802.1Q, QinQ, Null Default: 802.1Q

Selects the means of processing the accessed packets. l This parameter is set to Null when the port needs to transparently transmit packets. l This parameter is set to 802.1Q when the port needs to identify 802.1Q standard packets. l This parameter is set to QinQ when the port needs to identify QinQ standard packets. NOTE The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when you set Port Mode to Layer 3. If the port needs to identify both C-VLAN and SVLAN packets, Encapsulation Type must be set to 802.1Q.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Working Mode

-


Max Frame Length (bytes)

-

Displays the maximum frame length, which is always 9600 bytes. This parameter is not configurable.

Logical Port Attribute

-


Physical Port Attribute

-



1933



Field

Value

Description

ARP Aging Time (min.)

1 to 1440

Indicates the ARP aging time of the port.

Default: 720

After the ARP aging time expires, the equipment automatically updates dynamic ARP entries to prevent incorrect address resolution. NOTE This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is set to Layer 3.

Running Status

-


Optical Module Status

-


Laser Interface Status

-


Laser Transmission Distance

-


Traffic Policing Status

Enabled, Disabled

Enables or disables traffic monitoring on the port.

Default: Disabled

When you need to monitor the traffic on a port, enable the traffic monitoring function to monitor the traffic on a port in the period specified by Traffic Policing Period. Traffic Policing Period (min.)

1 to 30

Specifies the traffic monitoring period.

Default: 15

Table 17-13 Flow Control of HUNQ2 Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-


NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode

-


Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode

-



1934



Table 17-14 Layer 2 Attributes of HUNQ2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Tag


Indicates the data packet processing mode. For details, see Table 17-15. This parameter is unavailable when you set Encapsulation Type in Basic Attributes to QinQ or Null.

QinQ Type Domain

-

Indicates the customized QinQ type domain. NOTE The C-VLAN port supports two QinQ type domains, 8100 and the customized QinQ type domain. The S-VLAN port supports only one QinQ type domain. The default value of the QinQ type domain is 88a8. You can also change the value by setting QinQ Type Domain.

Default VLAN ID

VLAN Priority

1 to 4094

Indicates the VLAN ID of packets.

Default: 1

NOTE Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN ID of 4095 is reserved.

0 to 7

Specifies the class of service (CoS) when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.

Default: 0

0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the highest. When the network is busy, data packets of higher VLAN priority are processed first and those of lower VLAN priority may be discarded. SVLANs

-

The specified SVLAN value must be recognizable to the C-VLAN port. SVLANs can be set to one or more values, or a value range. When the value of an S-VLAN service is the same as the values of SVLANs or is in the value range of SVLANs, the S-VLAN service can pass through this port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1935



Table 17-15 Processing modes of data packets Tag

Processing Mode

Remarks

Data Packets with VLAN IDs

Data Packets Without VLAN IDs

Tag Aware

Transparently transmitting the data packets

Dropping the data packets

Parameters Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority are not used.

Access


Adding the VLAN IDs that are set

-

Hybrid



-

Table 17-16 Layer 3 Attributes of HUNQ2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Enable Tunnel

Enabled, Disabled

After this parameter is set to Enabled for a port, the port can identify and process MPLS labels. NOTE The parameter value Disabled is invalid. Therefore, this parameter can be set only to Enabled.

Specify IP Address

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Manually, Unspecified

When a port carries tunnel services, or when Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set this parameter to Manually. For other scenarios, set this parameter to Unspecified.


1936



Field

Value

Description

IP Address

-

Specifies the port IP address. This parameter is valid only when Specify IP Address is set to Manually. NOTE When setting the IP address for a port, ensure that the IP address is in a different network segment from the IP address of other service ports and the NE IP address, preventing service interruption from occurring or the NE from being unreachable by the NMS. For example, the IP address and subnet mask of an NE are 129.9.0.22 and 255.255.0.0, respectively. This means that the NE IP address is in the 129.9 network segment. The IP address and subnet mask of a service-present port on the NE are 10.0.1.1 and 255.255.255.0, respectively. This means the port IP address is in the 10.0.1 network segment. In this situation, you cannot assign IP addresses in the 129.9 and 10.0.1 network segments to other ports on the NE. In other words, you cannot set the IP addresses to 129.9.x.x or 10.0.1.x for other ports on the NE.

-

IP Mask

Specifies the port subnet mask. This parameter is valid only when Specify IP Address is set to Manually.

Table 17-17 Advanced Attributes of HUNQ2 Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-

Displays physical parameters of the port.

MAC Loopback

-

This parameter is unavailable for the board.

PHY Loopback

-


MAC Address

-

Displays the MAC address of the port.

Transmission Rate (kbit/s)

-

Displays the rate for transmitting data packets.

Receiving Rate (kbit/ s)

-

Displays the rate for receiving data packets.

Loopback Check

-


Loopback Port Block

-



1937



Field

Value

Description

Egress PIR Bandwidth (kbit/s)

-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded. Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold (%)


If Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to Enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast packets exceeds specified times (suppression threshold) the total bandwidth. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Network Cable Mode

-


Optical Module Type

-


Synchronous Clock Enabled

-


Parameters for SDH Interfaces Table 17-18 Parameters for SDH Interfaces Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-


Laser Switch

Off, On


Default: On

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1938



Field

Value

Description

Laser Transmission Distance (m)

/





VC4 Path

-


VC4 Loopback





17.2.10 HUNQ2 Specifications Specifications include optical module specifications, mechanical specifications, and power consumption. The following table shows the optical module types that the HUNQ2 board supports. Board



TN54HU NQ2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1939



Optical Module Specifications Table 17-19 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1940




Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


1941




Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-1

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


1942


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1



l






TN54H UNQ2


118.8

130.5

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

17.3 HUNS3 HUNS3: 40G Universal Line Service Processing Board

17.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the HUNS3 board is TN54. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1943




Initial Version





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassis

TN5 4HU NS3

V100R0 08C00

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

This board cannot be applied to the subrack that works in master/slave subrack mode.

Depending on the services provisioned, there are different requirements, as described in the following table. Service


Cross-Connect Board

OTN

Unneeded

l T32 general/enhanced subrack: TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM/TN52XCM/ TN52XCH l T16 subrack: TN16XCH/TN16UXCM

Packet

Unneeded

l T32 general/enhanced subrack: TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM l T16 subrack: TN16UXCM

SDH

Unneeded

l T32 general/enhanced subrack: TN52UXCH/TN52UXCM/TN52XCM/ TN52XCH l T16 subrack: TN16UXCM

Note: For a general or enhanced OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SCC board must be TN52SCC.

Variants The TN54HUNS3 board has only one variant: TN54HUNS3T01. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1944






The physical-layer clock synchronization and IEEE 1588v2 functions are newly supported by the TN54HUNS3 board.




For the TN54HUNS3 board, added the function of configuring C-VLAN and SVLAN on the same port.




Added the TN54HUNS3 board.

The 1 x 10G universal line board is added to support hybrid transmission of OTN, SDH, and packet services.

17.3.3 Application The HUNS3 board supports a mixture of OTN, SDH, and packet services. It can also receive and transmit only one or two of the three services. The board processes and converts the received service signals into one OTU3/OTU3e signal, which is carried over an ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelength.The board employs coherent detection technology and thus is intended for coherent systems. The HUNS3 board is a hybrid line board and supports the following service conversions: 32 x ODU0/32 x ODUflex/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->1 x OTU3/OTU3e, 1 x ODU3<->1 x OTU3, 4 x ODU2e<->1 x OTU3e, 16 x STM-16/4 x STM-64<->1 x OTU3/OTU3e, and packets<->1 x OTU3/OTU3e. The board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODUflex, STM-16, STM-64, and packet services with the total bandwidth not exceeding 40 Gbit/s. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1945



Figure 17-7 illustrates the application of HUNS3 board in a WDM system. Figure 17-7 Application of the HUNS3 board in a WDM system

Table 17-22 Service mapping paths Input signal

Mapping Path

Notea

Packets

GE/FE port (the service rate is no greater than 1.25 Gbit/s)->GFP-F>ODU0->ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/ OTU3e

When the packet and SDH services are provisioned, ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode of the HUNS3 board must be set to Assign random.

GE/FE port (the service rate is no greater than 1.25 Gbit/s)->GFP-T>ODU0->ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/ OTU3e 10GE port (the service rate is no greater than 2.5 Gbit/s)->GFP-F->ODU1>ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/OTU3e 10GE port (the service rate is no greater than 10 Gbit/s)->GFP-F->ODU2>ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/OTU3e n x 10GE/GE/FE port (the service rate is no greater than 40 Gbit/s)->GFP-F>ODU3->OTU3 10GE port (the service rate ranges from 1.25 Gbit/s to 10 Gbit/s)->GFP-F>ODUflex->ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/ OTU3e SDH

STM-16->ODU1->ODU3/ODU3e>OTU3/OTU3e STM-64->ODU2->ODU3/ODU3e>OTU3/OTU3e

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1946



Input signal

Mapping Path

Notea

OTN

ODU0->ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/ OTU3e

ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random

ODU1->ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/ OTU3e ODU2->ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/ OTU3e ODU2e->ODU3e–>OTU3e ODU3->OTU3 ODUflex->ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/ OTU3e ODU0->ODU1->ODU3/ODU3e>OTU3/OTU3e ODU1->ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/ OTU3e

ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must be set to Assign consecutive

ODU2->ODU3/ODU3e->OTU3/ OTU3e ODU2e->ODU3e–>OTU3e ODU3->OTU3 a. The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter settings of the line boards at two sites where services are added or dropped must be the same. When the HUNS3 board interconnects with a board that does not support the ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign consecutive for the HUNS3 board.

17.3.4 Functions and Features The HUNS3 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, OTN interfaces, and SDH overhead processing. The HUNS3 supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODUflex, VC4, and packet services. According to the difference of input signal, the board have different functions as shown in the following table.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1947



Table 17-23 Basic function of the HUNS3 board Input signal

Basic function

More information

OTN

32 x ODU0/32 x ODUflex/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->1 x OTU3/ OTU3e, 4 x ODU2e<->1 x OTU3e, 1 x ODU3<->1 x OTU3

Table 17-24

NOTE When the mixed signals contains an ODU2e signal, the mixed signals must be mapped into an OTU3e signal.

SDH

16 x STM-16/4 x STM-64<->16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->1 x OTU3/ OTU3e

Table 17-25

Packets

A maximum of 40 Gbit/s packets<>32 x ODU0/32 x ODUflex/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->1 x OTU3/ OTU3e, or packets<->1 x ODU3<->1 x OTU3

Table 17-26

Table 17-24 OTN functions and features of the HUNS3 board Function and feature

Description

OTN functions

l Supports OTU3/OTU3e on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing defined in ITUT G.709. l OTU3 layer: supports SM overhead processing. l ODU3 layer: supports PM and TCM overhead processing, and nonintrusive monitoring of PM and TCM overheads. l ODU2 layer: supports PM and TCM overhead processing, and nonintrusive monitoring of PM and TCM overheads. l ODU1 layer: supports PM and TCM overhead processing, and nonintrusive monitoring of PM and TCM overheads. l ODU0 layer: supports PM and TCM overhead processing, and nonintrusive monitoring of PM and TCM overheads. l ODUflex layer: supports PM and TCM overhead processing, and nonintrusive monitoring of PM and TCM overheads.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1948




Description

Protection schemes

l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the OLP/DCP/ QCP board). l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. NOTE When the grooming granularity is ODUflex, SPRing protection is not supported. ODUk SNCP and ODUk SPRing protection are not supported when SDH or packet services are cross-connected from the backplane.

WDM specificatio n




PRBS test function


FEC coding

Supports HFEC on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Regenerati on board

The WDM-side signals from the HUNS3 board can be regenerated by TN55NS3 or TN56NS3 board.

ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Supported

Loopback

Supports ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODUflex loopbacks and WDM-side port loopbacks.

Physical clock


IEEE 1588v2


ESC

Supported


NOTE Physical-layer clock synchronization is not supported when the mapping path is ODU3>OTU3.


1949




Description

Opticallayer ASON

Supported


Not supported

Table 17-25 SDH functions and features of the HUNS3 board Function and feature

Description

Overhead processing

l Processes the section overheads of STM-16/STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.

Protection schemes

l SNCP l SNCTP l LMSP l MSP ring l The transoceanic MSP ring.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Service processing


Loopback

Supports VC4 loopbacks.

SDH clock


IEEE 1588v2


Outband DCN

Not supported

SDH ASON

Not supported



1950



Table 17-26 Ethernet service functions of the HUNS3 board Function and feature

Description

QoS

Diffserv

Supported, compliant with RFC 2474 and RFC 2475

Traffic classification


Traffic policing

Committed access rate (CAR), two rate three color marker (trTCM) compliant with RFC 2698


Class of service (CoS), supporting SP/WFQ scheduling algorithms


WRED, tail dropping

Traffic shaping

Port-based traffic shaping, queue-based traffic shaping

Protection schemes

l MPLS-TP tunnel APS, either 1+1 or 1:1 protection compliant with ITUT G.8131(draft), RFC 6372 l MPLS-TP PW APS, either 1+1 or 1:1 protection compliant with ITUT G.8131(draft), RFC 6372 l LAG, either intra-board or inter-board LAG compliant with IEEE 802.1ax l MC-LAG, compliant with IEEE 802.1ax l MSTP, compatible with STP/RSTP and compliant with IEEE 802.1q l LPT, either point-to-point LPT or point-to-multipoint LPT compliant with Huawei proprietary protocols

IGMP Snooping

Supported

Maintenance

Ethernet service OAM

Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.1ag, ITU-T Y. 1731/G.8013 and ITU-T Y.1730

Ethernet port OAM

Not supported

MPLS-TP OAM

Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.8113.1

RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Loopback

Not supported

Physical clock

Supports clock synchronization of WDM-side OTU3 ports. NOTE Physical clock synchronization is not supported when the mapping path is PKT– >ODU3–>OTU3.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1951




Description

IEEE 1588v2


Inband DCN

Supported


IEEE 802.3, Ethernet II, IEEE 802.1q, IEEE 802.1p

MFL

9600 bytes


Not supported

Service type



Port, QinQ link, PW

E-Line


Port<->PW CVLAN<->PW SVLAN<->PW CVLAN + CVLAN Pri<->PW SVLAN + SVLAN Pri<->PW

QinQ linkbased service models

Port<->QinQ


Port<->Port

CVLAN<->QinQ




E-LAN

Bridge type



SVL, IVL

VSI tag type


NOTE IVL is supported only when the bridge type is IEEE 802.1ad.

NOTE

In addition to the preceding features, the HUNS3 board supports performance monitoring and service processing compliant with related standards and protocols defined by IEEE, ITU-T, IETF, and MEF.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1952



17.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The HUNS3 board consists of fabric interface circuit, traffic manager, packet processor, signal processing module, WDM-side optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Block Diagram and Signal Flow Figure 17-8 shows the functional block diagram of the HUNS3 board. Figure 17-8 Functional block diagram of the HUNS3 board Backplane

40Gbit/s Packet

256xVC-4

32xODU0/32xODUflex/ 16xODU1/ 4xODU2/4xODU2e/ 1xODU3

Fabric interfa ce circuit

VC crossconnect module

Traffic manag er

Packet proces sor

SDH process ing module

E/O

OUT

O/E

IN

OTN processi ng module

ODUk crossconnect module

WDMside optical module


SCC DC power from the backplane

Fuse

Power supply module

Required voltage

The transmit and receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the HUNS3 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the HUNS3 board, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. The following describes the signal flow in the transmit direction along with the module functions. 1.

Packet services, VC-4 signals, or ODUk signals are transmitted from the backplane. l The packet services are received by the fabric interface circuit and are converted into data packets. Then, the data packets are routed to the traffic manager for packet shaping and queue scheduling. Lastly, protection and necessary data processing are performed for the packets by the packet processor and forwarded to the OTN processing module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1953



l The VC-4 signals are received by the VC cross-connect module and sent to the SDH processing module for STM-N framing and OTN overhead processing. The generated STM-N signals are sent to the OTN processing module. l The ODUk signals are received by the ODUk cross-connect module and directly sent to the OTN processing module. 2.

When receiving the data packets or STM-N signals, the OTN processing module maps them to the payload of the ODUk signals, multiplexes the ODUk signals into one OTU3 electrical signal, processes the signal overheads, and performs FEC encoding/decoding. When receiving ODUk signals, the OTN processing module directly multiplexes them into one OTU3 electrical signal, processes the signal overheads, and performs FEC encoding/ decoding. Then, the module sends the OTU3 electrical signals to the WDM-side optical module.

3.

When the WDM-side optical module receives the OTU3 electrical signal, it performs E/O conversion and sends out one OTU3/OTU3e optical signal over an ITU-T G.694.1compliant wavelength through the OUT port.

The control and communication module controls the operation of functional modules and collects information about alarms, performance events, working states, and voltages from the functional modules.

17.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the HUNS3 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 17-9 shows the front panel of the HUNS3 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1954



Figure 17-9 Front panel of the HUNS3 board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 17-27 describes each interface on the HUNS3 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1955



Table 17-27 Interfaces on the HUNS3 board Interface

Connector

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



17.3.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one HUNS3 board. Table 17-28 lists the valid slots for the HUNS3 board. Table 17-28 Valid slots for the HUNS3 board Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

NOTE

The rear connectors of the HUNS3 board are designed to connect to the backplane through the left slot of the two slots that hold the board. Therefore, the slot ID of the board displayed on the U2000 is the ID of the left slot. For example, when the HUNS3 board is installed in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot ID of the HUNS3 board displayed on the U2000 is IU1.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1956



Table 17-29 Mapping between the physical ports on the HUNS3 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They can also be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. The following provides the service mapping paths, port diagram, and port descriptions of the HUNS3 board. Figure 17-10 Port diagram of the TN54HUNS3 board (Assign random) Backplane IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1 Packet/ 1xODU3

Packets<->ODU3 1 x V_ETH-n <-> 1 x ODU3

ODU3:1

OCh:1

Other tributary/line/PID/packet service/universal line/TDM board

1xODU3

Packet/ 4xODU2/ 4xSTM-64

Packets<->ODU2 4 x V_ETH-n <-> 4 x ODU2 V_SDH-1: STM-64<->ODU2 V_SDH-5: STM-64<->ODU2 V_SDH-9: STM-64<->ODU2 V_SDH-13: STM-64<->ODU2

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU2:(1~4)

ODU2:1 ODU3:1

OCh:1

ODU2:4

4xODU2

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1~16) Packet/ 16xODU1/ 16xSTM-16

1(IN/OUT)

Packets<->ODU1 16 x V_ETH-n<-> 16 x ODU1 ODU1:1 STM-16<->ODU1 16 x V_SDH-m<->16 x ODU1

ODU3:1

OCh:1

ODU1:16

16xODU1

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU0:(1~32) Packet/ 32xODU0

Packets<->ODU0 32 x V_ETH-n<-> 32 x ODU0

ODU 0:1 ODU3:1

OCh:1

ODU0:32 32xODU0

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODUflex:(1~32) Packet/ 32xODUflex

Packets<->ODUflex 32 x V_ETH-n<-> 32 x ODUflex 32xODUflex

ODUflex:1 ODUflex: 32

ODU3:1

OCh:1

NOTE

In the figure, n can be any integer within the range of 1-32, and m can be any integer within the range of 1-16.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1957



NOTE



l

When configuring STM-16 services for the virtual ports, use the ports in the same group. Do not use the ports in another group unless no ports are left in the current group. For example, to configure an STM-16 service on three of the virtual SDH ports, use V_SDH_1, V_SDH_2, and V_SDH_3; to configure an STM-16 on seven of the virtual SDH ports, use V_SDH_1, V_SDH_2, V_SDH_3, V_SDH_4, V_SDH_5, V_SDH_6, and V_SDH_7. Cross-connect module

There are three types of crossconnections between this board and other boards. The grooming granularity varies according to the boards connected to the TN54HUNS3 board. l ODUk grooming: performed when the The TN54HUNS3 board is connected to an OTN tributary/line board or PID board that supports the same ODUk level as the TN54HUNS3 board. l VC grooming: performed when the TN54HUNS3 is connected to a TDM board that supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services. l Packet grooming: performed when the TN54HUNS3 board is connected to a packet board or universal line board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Packet framer and mapper

ODUk mapping path



ODUk framer and mapper



1958



Figure 17-11 Port diagram of the TN54HUNS3 board (Assign consecutive) Backplane

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1 1XODU3 ODU3:1

OCh:1



4 xODU2/ 4xODU2e

ODU 3 : 1

OCh :1

ODU2:4 IN1/OUT1


ODU 3 :1

OCh :1

16xODU1 ODU1:16

IN1/OUT1-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1~16)-ODU0:(1~2) ODU0:1 ODU0:2

ODU 1:1 ODU 3 :1

32 xODU0 ODU0:1

OCh :1

ODU1:16

ODU 0:2


ODUk mapping path




Table 17-30 Description of NM port on the HUNS3 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODUflex:(1-32)


1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU0:(1-32)

Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0– >ODU3–>OTU3)


1959



Port Name

Description

1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1-ODU3:1-ODU1:(1-16)ODU0:(1-32)

Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0– >ODU1–>ODU3–>OTU3)





1(IN/OUT)-OCh:1


1(IN/OUT)


40001(V_ETH-1) to 40032(V_ETH-32)

Virtual ports that perform mutual conversion of packets and ODUk signals (at most 32)

51(V_SDH-1) to 66(V_SDH-16)



Parameters for WDM Interfaces Table 17-31 Parameters for WDM Interfaces

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



-



1960



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used








Off, On Default: On


FEC Working State



FEC Mode

HFEC Default: HFEC


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Band Type

-



-



1961



Field

Value

Description


-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208. 170 to 18/1611.00/188. 780



C, CWDM Default: C


l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100

Receive Wavelength

l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208. 170 to 18/1611.00/188. 780 Default: /


Receive Band Type

C, CWDM Default: C



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1962



Field

Value

Description

Line Rate



Default: l ODU2 channel: Standard Mode l ODU3 channel: Speedup Mode

l For ODU2LP channel: This parameter needs to be set to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are crossconnected. This parameter needs to be set to Standard Mode when ODU2 signals are cross-connected. l For ODU3LP channel: This parameter needs to be set to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are crossconnected. This parameter could be set to Standard Mode or Speedup Mode when ODU2/ODU3 signals are cross-connected. NOTE When the HUNS3 board is used to receive and transmit packet services, Line Rate of the ODUk channels mapped by ETH virtual ports must be set to Standard Mode.

PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




1963



Field

Value

Description





Assign random indicates that cross-layer mapping of services is performed. The service mappings are ODU0–>ODU3, ODU1– >ODU3, ODU2–>ODU3, and ODUflex>ODU3. l Cross-layer mapping reduces the number of mapping layers and simplifies the relationship between client and server trails, which are easy to manage. l Cross-layer mapping enables flexible bandwidth usage. For example, when 28 1.25G timeslots of an ODU3 channel are occupied by ODUflex services, the remaining 5G bandwidth can be configured for four ODU0 services, implementing ODU0->ODU3 cross-layer mapping. Assign consecutive indicates that layer-bylayer mapping of services is performed from lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0–>ODU1–>ODU3, ODU1–>ODU3, and ODU2–>ODU3. The Assign random mode is recommended. The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode values of two line boards must be the same when they are interconnected on the WDM side. NOTE When packet or SDH services are provisioned, ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode cannot be set to Assign consecutive.

Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 17-32 Basic Attributes of HUNS3 Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Name

-

Specifies the self-defined port name.

Enable Port

-

This parameter is unavailable for the HUNS3 board.


1964



Field

Value

Description

Port Mode

Layer 2, Layer 3


Default: Layer 2

l This parameter is set to Layer 2 when the Ethernet port carries port-based or QinQlink-based Ethernet services. l This parameter is set to Layer 3 when the port carries tunnel services. Encapsulation Type


Selects the means of processing the accessed packets. l This parameter is set to Null when the port needs to transparently transmit packets. l This parameter is set to 802.1Q when the port needs to identify 802.1Q standard packets. l This parameter is set to QinQ when the port needs to identify QinQ standard packets. NOTE The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when you set Port Mode to Layer 3. If the port needs to identify both C-VLAN and SVLAN packets, Encapsulation Type must be set to 802.1Q.

Working Mode

-



-

Displays the maximum frame length, which is always 9600 bytes. This parameter is not configurable.


-



-



1 to 1440


Default: 720


Running Status

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



1965



Field

Value

Description


-



-



-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


1 to 30


Default: 15

Table 17-33 Flow Control of HUNS3 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-



-


Table 17-34 Layer 2 Attributes of HUNS3 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Tag



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1966



Field

Value

Description

QinQ Type Domain

-

Indicates the customized QinQ type domain. NOTE The C-VLAN port supports two QinQ type domains, 8100 and the customized QinQ type domain. The S-VLAN port supports only one QinQ type domain. The default value of the QinQ type domain is 88a8. You can also change the value by setting QinQ Type Domain.

Default VLAN ID

VLAN Priority

1 to 4094


Default: 1


0 to 7


Default: 0


-

The specified SVLAN value must be recognizable to the C-VLAN port. SVLANs can be set to one or more values, or a value range. When the value of an S-VLAN service is the same as the values of SVLANs or is in the value range of SVLANs, the S-VLAN service can pass through this port.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Processing Mode

Remarks



Tag Aware




Access



-


1967



Tag

Processing Mode

Hybrid

Remarks





-

Table 17-36 Layer 3 Attributes of HUNS3 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Enable Tunnel

Enabled, Disabled


Specify IP Address



IP Address

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1968



Field

Value

Description

IP Mask

-


Table 17-37 Advanced Attributes of HUNS3 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-


MAC Loopback

-


PHY Loopback

-


MAC Address

-



-



-


Loopback Check

-


Loopback Port Block

-



-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1969



Field

Value

Description

Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold (%)


If Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to Enabled, broadcast packets are suppressed when the bandwidth occupied by broadcast packets exceeds specified times (suppression threshold) the total bandwidth.

Default: 30%

If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded. Network Cable Mode

-


Optical Module Type

-



-


Parameters for SDH Interfaces Table 17-38 Parameters for SDH Interfaces Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-


Laser Switch

Off, On


Default: On

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


/





VC4 Path

-




1970



Field

Value

Description

VC4 Loopback




17.3.10 HUNS3 Specifications Specifications include optical module specifications, mechanical specifications, and power consumption. The following table shows the optical module type that the HUNS3 board supports. Board



TN54HU NS3


N/A

NOTE


Optical Module Specifications Table 17-39 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, 60000 ps/ nm) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value 60000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN

-

ePDM-BPSK


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.1 to 196.05


dBm

0


dBm

-5


1971



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



GHz

±2.5


nm

0.35


ps/nm

60000


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l






TN54HUNS3

60000ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-BPSK-PIN

172.1

182.5


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1972


18 Packet Service Unit

18

Packet Service Unit

About This Chapter 18.1 Overview Packet service boards process received data packets based on MPLS switching and provide flexible LSP transmission pipes. They provide carrier-class protection for services using MPLSTP APS, support MPLS-TP OAM and ETH-OAM, and manage bandwidth using the QoS function. 18.2 EG16 EG16: 16-port gigabit ethernet switch board 18.3 EX2 EX2: 2 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board 18.4 EX8 EX8: 8 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board 18.5 PND2 PND2: 2 x 10G bit/s packet line board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1973



18.1 Overview Packet service boards process received data packets based on MPLS switching and provide flexible LSP transmission pipes. They provide carrier-class protection for services using MPLSTP APS, support MPLS-TP OAM and ETH-OAM, and manage bandwidth using the QoS function.

Positions of Packet Service Boards in a WDM System The packet service board receives and processes the ethernet services at Layer 2. The processed services are transmitted as packets to centralized cross-connect boards for grooming. Then a universal line board or packet service board can be used to direct packet services to the WDM network for transmission. Figure 18-1 shows the positions of packet service boards in a WDM system. Figure 18-1 Positions of packet service boards in a WDM system Client- side services

Packet board

Packets

OTU2/OTU3

OA

OM

OA

OD

Packet board

PND2/ Universal line board

FI U

SC 1

W D M-si de O D F

Cli ent-side e qui p ment

PND2/ Universal line board

Main Functions Table 18-1 lists the main functions of packet service boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1974



Table 18-1 Main functions of packet service boards Board

EG16

Client-Side Service/ WDM-Side Signal


Type

Max. Numbe r of Service s

Type

Maximum Bandwidt h

l Client-side service: GE/ FE

16

Packets

20 Gbit/s

l Client-side service: 10GE LAN

2

Packets

20 Gbit/s

l Client-side service: 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ GE/FE l WDM-side signal: N/A

l Supports MPLS-TP Tunnel APS, MPLS-TP PW APS, LAG, MCLAG, and MSTP. l Supports QoS.

l WDM-side signal: N/A EX8

l Supports E-Line and E-LAN services based on MPLS, QinQ, and physical ports. l Supports ETH-OAM and MPLS-TP OAM.

l WDM-side signal: N/A EX2

Layer 2 Function

l 8x 10G E LAN

Packets

40 Gbit/s

Packets

20 Gbit/s

l 4x 10G E WA N l 4x GE/ FE

PND2

l Client-side service: N/A

2

l WDM-side signal: OTU2

18.2 EG16 EG16: 16-port gigabit ethernet switch board

18.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the EG16 board are TN54 and TN55. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1975








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N5 4E G1 6

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

T N5 5E G1 6

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

When the EG16 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM crossconnect boards and the TN52SCC system control board must be used. When the EG16 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be used. This board cannot be applied to the subrack that works in master/slave subrack mode.

Variants The TN54EG16 and TN55EG16 boards each have only one variant, that is, TN54EG16 and TN55EG16 respectively.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1976





For the TN55EG16 board, added the IEEE 1588v2 function and the function of configuring C-VLAN and SVLAN on the same port.




Added the TN55EG16 board.

Compared with the TN54EG16 board, the updates are as follows: l The TN55EG16 board occupies one slot. l The TN55EG16 board does not support the IEEE 1588v2 function.

Added the IEEE 1588v2 function for the TN54EG16 board.




Added the support for the TN54EG16 board in the general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.




Added the TN54EG16 board.

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the MS-OTN feature to receive and process 16 FE/GE signals of packet services on the client side.

18.2.3 Application As a packet service board, the EG16 board receives and transmits a maximum of 16 GE/FE services, processes packet services, and transmits packets to the cross-connect board for Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1977



centralized cross-connections. On the WDM side, a universal line board or packet service board can be used to direct packet services to the WDM network for transmission. For the position of the EG16 board in the WDM system, see Figure 18-2. Figure 18-2 Position of the EG16 board in the WDM system Packets

2xOTU2

2xOTU2

Packets

RX1

TX1

TX1

RX1 16xGE/FE

TX16 RX16

IN1

EG16

OUT1

PND2 IN2

RX1 TX1 2x 10 GE LAN RX2

OUT2

EX2


M U X / D M U X

EG16

IN1

16xGE/FE RX16 TX16

PND2 OUT2

TX1

IN2

RX1

TX2

EX2

TX2

2x 10 GE LAN

RX2

NOTE

A TN54EG16 board receives a maximum of sixteen GE/FE optical services or two GE/FE electrical services on its client side. A TN55EG16 board receives a maximum of sixteen GE/FE optical services or two GE/FE electrical services on its client side. Electrical modules of the board must be seated in ports of even numbers, such as RX2/TX2, RX4/TX4, and so on. The PND2 board or universal line board can be used on the WDM side.

18.2.4 Functions and Features The EG16 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS). Table 18-2 describes the service functions of the EG16 board, Table 18-3 describes the features supported by the EG16 board. Table 18-2 Service function of the EG16 board Function

Description

Basic function

Receives and transmits a maximum of 16 GE/FE optical services or a maximum of 2 GE or FE electrical services, processes the GE/ FE packet services. NOTE Electrical modules of the TN55EG16 board must be seated in ports of even numbers, such as RX2/TX2, RX4/TX4, and so on.

Supported service

FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s. Supports FE optical signals and FE electrical signals. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1978



Function

Description

Working mode

l GE optical port: 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation l GE electrical port: 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto–Negotiation l FE optical port: 100M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation


Supported Comply with IEEE802.3x (Only supports response request).



MFL

The MFL value ranges from 1518 to 9600, in bytes. The length of a permitted packet must be no less than 64 bytes and no greater than the specified MFL.

Service type



Port, QinQ link, PW

E-Line

Port<->PW


CVLAN<->PW SVLAN<->PW CVLAN + CVLAN Pri<->PW SVLAN + SVLAN Pri<->PW


Port<->QinQ


Port<->Port

CVLAN<->QinQ




E-LAN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bridge type

l TN54EG16: IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1q l TN55EG16: IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1q, IEEE 802.1ad


1979



Function

Description Bridge learning mode

l TN54EG16 – S-Aware, C-Aware, T-Aware: SVL l TN55EG16 – S-Aware: IVL, SVL – C-Aware, T-Aware: SVL

VSI tag type


Table 18-3 Features supported by the EG16 board Feature

Description

Protectio n scheme

Tunnel APS

Supports the 1+1 and 1:1 protection modes defined in ITU-T G. 8131(draft), RFC 6372.

PW APS


LAG

Supported. Comply with IEEE 802.1ax.

MC-LAG


MSTP

Supported. Comply with IEEE 802.1q.

LPT

Supports point-to-point LPT or point-to-multipoint LPT compliant with Huawei proprietary protocols

Diffserv

Supported, compliant with RFC 2474 and RFC 2475.



Traffic policing

Committed access rate (CAR), two rate three color marker (trTCM) compliant with RFC 4115.


Class of service (CoS), supporting SP/WRR scheduling algorithms.


WRED, tail dropping.

Traffic shaping

Port-based traffic shaping, queue-based traffic shaping.

QoS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1980



Feature

Description

IGMP Snoopin g V2

Supported

Mainten ance

Ethernet service OAM (CFM)

Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.1ag, ITU-T Y.1731/G. 8013 and ITU-T Y.1730

Ethernet port OAM (EFM)

Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3ah

MPLS-TP OAM


RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Loopback

GE/FE optical interface

PHY Inloop MAC Inloop

GE/FE electric interface

PHY Outloop MAC Inloop

Synchro nization

Inband DCN

Physical clock

When GE services are received at optical interfaces, synchronous Ethernet processing is supported and synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission is not supported.

IEEE 1588v2

When GE services are received at optical interfaces, the TC, TC +OC, BC, and OC modes are supported.

Supported

NOTE

In addition to the preceding features, the board supports performance monitoring and service processing compliant with related standards and protocols defined by IEEE, ITU-T, IETF, and MEF.

18.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EG16 board consists of the client-side optical module, packet processor, traffic manager, fabric interface circuit, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the EG16 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1981



Figure 18-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the EG16 board

RX1


Packets

Client side

O/E

RX16 TX1

E/O

TX16


Packet processor

Traffic manager

Fabric interface circuit

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



NOTE

When used to receive GE or FE electrical signals, the board must use a client-side electrical module to perform power level conversion, and then sends the signals to the packet processor for processing.

Signal Flow In the signal flow of the EG16 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the EG16 to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Transmit direction 1.

The client-side optical module receives 16 channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX16 ports, and performs O/E conversion.

2.

After receiving the electrical signals, the packet processor decodes the signals, performs serial/parallel conversion, searches for routes and matches addresses for data services, implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, and sends the data services to the traffic manager.

3.

The traffic manager performs traffic shaping and queue scheduling for the received service packets and then sends the packets to the fabric interface circuit.

4.

The fabric interface circuit converts the service packets into fabric packets and sends them to the cross-connect board through the backplane. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1982


l


Receive direction 1.

The fabric interface circuit converts the packets coming from the cross-connect board into service packets and sends the packets to the traffic manager.

2.

The traffic manager performs traffic shaping and queue scheduling for the received service packets and then sends the packets to the packet processor.

3.

The packet processor implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, performs parallel/serial conversion, and generates GE/FE electrical signals.

4.

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE/FE electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1TX16 ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion of GE/FE optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: performs E/O conversion of GE/FE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l

Packet processor Performs routing, MAC addressing, and label switching for data packets, and fulfills Layer 2 functions for data services, such as protection, OAM, and QoS.

l

Traffic manager Performs traffic shaping, queue scheduling, and congestion management functions to monitor and process service streams.

l

Fabric interface circuit Converts the received packets into those that can be processed by the fabric network and exchanges packets with the cross-connect board.

l


l


18.2.6 Front Panel There are four indicators, optical interfaces. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1983



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-4 shows the front panel of the TN54EG16. Figure 18-4 Front panel of the TN54EG16 EG16 STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX9

TX1

RX9

RX1

TX10

TX2

RX10 TX11

RX2 TX3

RX11 TX12

RX3 TX4

RX12 TX13

RX4 TX5

RX13 TX14

RX5 TX6

RX14 TX15

RX6 TX7

RX15 TX16

RX7 TX8

RX16

RX8

EG16

Figure 18-5 shows the front panel of the TN55EG16.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1984



Figure 18-5 Front panel of the TN55EG16 SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657A2 光纤

EG16 STAT ACT PROG SRV RX 1

2 TX

TX 15

16 RX


RX 1

TX 15

2 TX

16 RX

EG16



l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1985


l




Interfaces Table 18-4 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 18-4 Types and functions of the EG16 interfaces Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX16

LC


TX1-TX16

LC



18.2.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN54EG16 board. One slot houses one TN55EG16 board. Table 18-5 shows the valid slots for the TN54EG16 board. Table 18-5 Valid slots for the TN54EG16 board Product

Valid slots




IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

The online signal bus on the EG16 board connects to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. The slot number of the EG16 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the EG16 board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 18-6 shows the valid slots for the TN55EG16 board. NOTE

To facilitate maintenance of optical modules and fibers, do not install a TN55EG16 board in a slot at the edge of the subrack or next to the slot housing the SLH41\EGSH\THA\TN55EG16 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1986



Table 18-6 Valid slots for the TN55EG16 board Product

Valid slots




IU2-IU7, IU12-IU17


Display of Physical Ports Table 18-7 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 18-7 Mapping between the physical ports on the EG16 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


RX1/TX1–RX16/TX16

1–16

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 18-6 shows the application model of the EG16 board. Table 18-8 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1987



Figure 18-6 Port diagram of the EG16 board

Other packet board

Backplane Packets

1(RX1/TX1) 2(RX2/TX2)

16(RX16/TX16)

PORT1 PORT2

PORT16

L2 swiching module

Table 18-8 Descriptions of the ports on the EG16 board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX16/TX16

Client-side ports.

PORT1-PORT16


18.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried using the NMS.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1988



Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 18-9 Basic Attributes of EG16 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Name

-

Enters the self-defined port name.

Enable Port

Enabled, Disabled

When the port is enabled, it indicates that the user uses the port and the port has services. When the port is disabled, it indicates that the port does not process services.

Default: Enabled

When no service is configured, it is recommended to disable the involved ports. Port Mode

Layer 2, Layer 3 Default: Layer 2

Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port. l This parameter is set to Layer 2 when the Ethernet port carries port-based or QinQlink-based Ethernet services. l This parameter is set to Layer 3 when the port carries tunnel services.

Encapsulation Type


Selects the means of processing the accessed packets. l This parameter is set to Null when the port needs to transparently transmit packets. l This parameter is set to 802.1Q when the port needs to identify 802.1Q standard packets. l This parameter is set to QinQ when the port needs to identify QinQ standard packets. NOTE The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when you set Port Mode to Layer 3. For TN55EG16, if the port needs to identify both C-VLAN and S-VLAN packets, Encapsulation Type must be set to 802.1Q.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1989



Field

Value

Description

Working Mode

l GE optical port: 1000M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation

Set the Working Mode parameter to set the working mode of the Ethernet port on the board.

l GE electrical port: 10M Full-Duplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto–Negotiation l FE optical port: 100M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation

Auto-negotiation can automatically determine the optimal working modes of the connected ports. This mode is easy to maintain and is recommended. NOTE Ensure that the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same, Otherwise, the services are not available.

Default: AutoNegotiation Max Frame Length (bytes)

1518 to 9600


Optical Port, Electrical Port

Default: 1522

Default: Optical Port

This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service will be interrupted. Displays the attributes of a logical port, which is set based on the attributes of the corresponding physical port.


No interface, Singlemode optical port, Multi-mode optical port, Electrical port

Displays the physical port attribute.


1 to 1440


Default: 720


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Running Status

-

This parameter is unavailable for the EG16 board.


In-Position, Not-inPosition

Displays the optical module status.


On, Off

Specifies the on/off status of the laser.


1990



Field

Value

Description


-

Displays the laser transmission distance.


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


1 to 30


Default: 15

Table 18-10 Flow Control of EG16 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-




Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port does not work in autonegotiation mode.

Default: Disabled

l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The port can both transmit and receive the PAUSE frame. l Send Only: The port can only send the PAUSE frame. l Receive Only: The port can only receive the PAUSE frame. When the buffer usage of the receiver exceeds the threshold, the pause frame enables the transmitter to temporarily stop sending services. NOTE In general, flow control is implemented using the QoS function and port-based flow control is seldom used. It is recommended that the default value Disabled be used.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1991



Field

Value

Description


Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control

Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode.

Default: Disabled

l Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control: The port sends the PAUSE frame only, and cannot receive the PAUSE frame. l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The port sends and receives the PAUSE frame. l Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control: Enables either symmetric or dissymmetric flow control, which is determined in the autonegotiation process. When the buffer usage of the receiver exceeds the threshold, the pause frame enables the transmitter to temporarily stop sending services. NOTE In general, flow control is implemented using the QoS function and port-based flow control is seldom used. It is recommended that the default value Disabled be used.

Table 18-11 Layer 2 Attributes of EG16 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


QinQ Type Domain

0x0600 to 0xFFFE

Indicates the customized QinQ type domain.

Default: 0x8100

The C-VLAN port supports two QinQ type domains, 8100 and the customized QinQ type domain. The S-VLAN port supports only one QinQ type domain. The default value of the QinQ type domain is 88a8. You can also change the value by setting QinQ Type Domain. NOTE Only the TN55EG16 supports this parameter.

Tag



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1992



Field

Value

Description

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4094


Default: 1


0 to 7


VLAN Priority

Default: 0


1 to 4094

The specified SVLAN value must be recognizable to the C-VLAN port. SVLANs can be set to one or more values, or a value range. When the value of an S-VLAN service is the same as the values of SVLANs or is in the value range of SVLANs, the S-VLAN service can pass through this port. NOTE Only the TN55EG16 supports this parameter.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Processing Mode

Remarks



Tag Aware




Access



-

Hybrid



-


1993



Table 18-13 Layer 3 Attributes of EG16 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Enable Tunnel

Enabled, Disabled


Specify IP Address



IP Address

-


IP Mask

-


Table 18-14 Advanced Attributes of EG16 Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



1994



Field

Value

Description


-


MAC Loopback


The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port.

Default: NonLoopback PHY Loopback


The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port.

Default: NonLoopback MAC Address

-



-



-


Loopback Check

Enabled, Disabled

Enables or disables the loopback check function. When enabled, the function checks whether the loopback check packet transmitted from a port is received by the port itself, therefore determining whether there is a loop on the network. This parameter is usually used for fault location.

Default: Disabled

After this parameter is set to Enabled, the board automatically checks for loops on the link and reports an alarm if there is any. Loopback Port Block

Enabled, Disabled

Specifies whether to block a port.

Default: Disabled

When Loopback Check and Loopback Port Block are both set to Enabled, the board automatically checks for loops on the link. If a loop is found at a port, the port is automatically blocked to clear the loop.


-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1995



Field

Value

Description




Default: 30%


-


Optical Module Type

Unknown, TwoFiber Bidirectional

Displays whether an optical module is inserted and the module type of an inserted optical module. l Unknown: No optical module is inserted to the port. l Two-Fiber Bidirectional: A two-fiber bidirectional optical module is inserted to the port.



Determines whether to enable clock synchronization. Set this parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When this parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.

18.2.10 EG16 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54EG 16

N/A

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 kmeSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 kmeSFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1996



Board



TN55EG 16

N/A

2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP 1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP S-16.1-15 km-eSFP

NOTE

A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.


Each optical module listed in the Table 18-15 has two types, one of which is for high-density boards. A highdensity board provides 16 ports in one slot, such as TN55EG16. When choosing optical modules, pay attention to their BOM codes. 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access GE and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


-

0.5 km (0.3 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1997


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

NOTE

When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3. NOTE

1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP and 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical modules can be used to access GE and FE signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1998




Unit

Optical Module Type



Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM


-

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

9

8.2


nm

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1.0

1.0


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

APD


nm

1270 to 1620

1270 to 1620


dBm

-19

-28


dBm

-3

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


1999



NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


km

10

10

40

40


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

6

6

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


2000



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


1000 BASEBX10-DeSFP

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-12

-12

NOTE

S-16.1-15 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE and FE signals.


Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

15 km (9.3 mi.)


nm

1260 to 1360


dBm

0


dBm

-5


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1–compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1270 to 1580


2001



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

-18


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Mechanical Specifications TN54EG16: l


l


TN55EG16: l


l





TN54EG16

93

101

TN55EG16

78

85


18.3 EX2 EX2: 2 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board

18.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the EX2 board is TN54.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2002








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N5 4E X2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

When the EX2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM crossconnect boards and the TN52SCC system control board must be used. When the EX2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be used. This board cannot be applied to the subrack that works in master/slave subrack mode.

Variants The TN54EX2 board has only one variant: TN54EX2. The TN54EX2 board variant is the board itself.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the IEEE 1588v2 function for the TN54EX2 board.



2003





Added the support for the TN54EX2 board in the general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.




Added the TN54EX2 board.

The OptiX OSN 8800 newly supports the MS-OTN feature to receive and process two 10GE signals of packet services on the client side.

18.3.3 Application As a packet service board, the EX2 board receives and transmits a maximum of two 10GE LAN services, processes packet services, and transmits packets to the cross-connect board for centralized cross-connections. For the position of the EX2 board in a WDM system, see Figure 18-7. Figure 18-7 Position of the EX2 board in a WDM system Packets

2xOTU2

2xOTU2

Packets

RX1

TX1

TX1

RX1 16xGE/FE

TX16 RX16

IN1

EG16

OUT1

PND2 RX1

IN2

TX1

OUT2

2x 10 GE LAN RX2

EX2


M U X / D M U X

EG16

IN1

16xGE/FE RX16 TX16

PND2 OUT2

TX1

IN2

RX1

TX2

EX2

TX2

2x 10 GE LAN

RX2

18.3.4 Functions and Features The EX2 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS). Table 18-19 describes the service functions of the EX2 board, Table 18-20 describes the features supported by the EX2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2004



Table 18-19 Service function of the EX2 board Function

Description

Basic function

Receives and transmits two 10GE LAN services, processes the 10GE LAN packet services.

Supported service

10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s

Working mode

Supports the full-duplex mode for ports.

Port flow control

Supports non-auto-negotiation for service rates. Comply with IEEE802.3x.



MFL


Service type



Port, QinQ link, PW

E-Line

Port<->PW


CVLAN<->PW SVLAN<->PW CVLAN + CVLAN Pri<->PW SVLAN + SVLAN Pri<->PW


Port<->QinQ


Port<->Port

CVLAN<->QinQ




E-LAN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bridge type

IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1q


SVL


2005



Function

Description VSI tag type


Table 18-20 Features supported by the EX2 board Feature

Description

QoS

Diffserv




Traffic policing






Traffic shaping


IGMP Snoopin g

Supported

Mainten ance

Ethernet OAM


Ethernet port OAM


MPLS-TP OAM


RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Loopback

client-side optical ports

MAC Outloop MAC Inloop PHY Outloop PHY Inloop

Synchro nization

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical clock

Supports synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission.


2006


Feature


Description IEEE 1588v2

Inband DCN

Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes.

Supported

NOTE


18.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, packet processor, traffic manager, fabric interface circuit, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the EX2 board. Figure 18-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the EX2 board

RX1

O/E

RX2 TX1 TX2


Packets

Client side

Packet processor

E/O

Traffic manager



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2007



Signal Flow In the signal flow of the EX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the EX2 to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

l


The client-side optical module receives two channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 ports, and performs O/E conversion.

2.


3.


4.

The fabric interface circuit converts the service packets into fabric packets and sends them to the cross-connect board through the backplane.



2.


3.

The packet processor implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, performs parallel/serial conversion, and generates 10GE LAN electrical signals.

4.

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1TX2 ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion of 10GE LAN optical signals. – Client-side transmitter: performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l


l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Fabric interface circuit Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2008



Converts the received packets into those that can be processed by the fabric network and exchanges packets with the cross-connect board. l


l


18.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the EX2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-9 shows the front panel of the EX2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2009



Figure 18-9 Front panel of the EX2 board EX2 STAT ACT PROG SRV L/A1 L/A2

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

EX2

Indicators Six indicators are present on the front panel: l


l


l


l


l

Data port connection/data transceive indicator (L/A1) - dual-colored (green, yellow)

l

Data port connection/data transceive indicator (L/A2) - dual-colored (green, yellow)




2010



Table 18-21 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EX2 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX2

LC


TX1-TX2

LC



18.3.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one EX2 board. Table 18-22 shows the valid slots for the EX2 board. Table 18-22 Valid slots for EX2 board Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 18-23 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 18-23 Mapping between the physical ports on the EX2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

1

TX2/RX2

2

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2011



Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 18-10 shows the application model of the EX2 board. Table 18-24 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 18-10 Port diagram of the EX2 board

Other packet board

Backplane Packets

1(RX1/TX1)

PORT1

2(RX2/TX2)

PORT2

L2 swiching module

Table 18-24 Descriptions of the ports on the EX2 board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1 to RX2/TX2

Client-side ports.

PORT1 to PORT2




2012



Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 18-25 Basic Attributes of EX2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Internal ports are PORT1 to PORT2.

Name

-


Enable Port

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Enabled



Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port. l Layer 2: The port can access the user-side equipment, carry Ethernet services that are based on the ports and use the port exclusively or QinQ Link. l Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels.

Encapsulation Type


Selects the means of processing the accessed packets. l Null: The port transparently transmits the accessed packets. l 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q standard packets. l QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ standard packets. NOTE The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when you set Port Mode to Layer 3.

Working Mode

10G Full-Duplex LAN Default: 10G FullDuplex LAN

Set the Working Mode parameter to set the working mode of the Ethernet port on the board. NOTE l When setting this parameter, ensure that the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same. Otherwise, the services are not available.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1518 to 9600 Default: 1522

This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service will be interrupted.


2013



Field

Value

Description



Specifies the logical port attribute.

Default: Optical Port

NOTE The EX2 board does not support electrical ports. Therefore, this parameter can be set only to Optical Port.





1 to 1440


Default: 720

NOTE This parameter is valid only when Port Mode is set to Layer 3.

Running Status

-

This parameter is unavailable for the EX2 board.





On, Off



-





Traffic Policing Period (min.)

1 to 30


Default: 15

Table 18-26 Flow Control of EX2 Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



2014



Field

Value

Description




Default: Disabled

l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The port can both transmit and receive PAUSE frames. l Send Only: The port can only send PAUSE frames. l Receive Only: The port can only receive PAUSE frames. When the buffer usage of the receiver exceeds the threshold, the pause frame enables the transmitter to temporarily stop sending services. NOTE In general, flow control is implemented using the QoS function and port-based flow control is seldom used. It is recommended that the default value Disabled be used.


-


Table 18-27 Layer2 Attributes of EX2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Tag



Default VLAN ID


The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. NOTE Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN ID of 4095 is reserved.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2015



Field

Value

Description

VLAN Priority

0 to 7

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. When the network is busy, data packets of higher VLAN priority are processed first and those of lower VLAN priority may be discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the highest.

Default: 0


Processing Mode

Remarks



Tag Aware




Access



-

Hybrid



-

Table 18-29 Layer 3 Attributes of EX2 Board Field

Vaule

Description

Port

-


Enable Tunnel

Enabled, Disabled


Specify IP Address

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




2016



Field

Vaule

Description

IP Address

-


-

IP Mask


Table 18-30 Advanced Attributes of EX2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-


MAC Loopback







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

MAC Address

-



-



2017



Field

Value

Description


-


Loopback Check

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled



-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled




Network Cable Mode

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



2018



Field

Value

Description

Optical Module Type

known, Two-Fiber Bidirectional





18.3.10 EX2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54EX 2

N/A

10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+ 10G BASE-ER/EW-40 km-SFP+

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2019




Unit

Optical Module Type





Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


-

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

0.5

4


dBm

-7.3

-8.2

-4.7


dB

3

3.5

3

Eye pattern mask

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565


dBm

-11.1 (OMA)

-12.6 (OMA)

-14.1 (OMA)


dBm

-1

0.5

-1


2020



Parameter

Unit

Value


dB




-12

-12

-26



l





TN54EX2

84

91


18.4 EX8 EX8: 8 x 10GE ethernet packet switch board

18.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the EX8 board is TN54.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2021



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N5 4E X8

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

When the EX8 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM crossconnect boards and the TN52SCC system control board must be used. When the EX8 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be used. This board cannot be applied to the subrack that works in master/slave subrack mode.

Variants The TN54EX8 board has only one variant: TN54EX8. The TN54EX8 board variant is the board itself.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


For the TN54EX8 board, added the IEEE 1588v2 function and the function of configuring CVLAN and S-VLAN on the same port.



2022





Added the TN54EX8 board.

It receives and transmits a maximum of 8 x 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, GE, and FE services, processes their packets, and provides a maximum of 40 Gbit/s bandwidth on the backplane side. The TN54EX8 board occupies one slot.

18.4.3 Application The EX8 board is a packet service board. It receives and transmits 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, GE, and FE services, processes their packets, and transmits the packets to the cross-connect board for centralized cross-connections. For the position of the EX8 board in a WDM system, see Figure 18-11. Figure 18-11 Position of the EX8 board in a WDM system Packets

4xOTU2

4xOTU2

Packets

RX1

TX1

TX1

RX1

EG16

16xGE/FE

IN1

OUT1

TX16

OUT1

RX16

HUNQ 2

RX1

10 GE LAN/10 GE WAN

TX1

OUT4

RX4 TX4 RX5

IN4

M U X / D M U X

M U X / D M U X

RX16 TX16

IN1

OUT4

HUNQ 2

TX1 RX1

IN4

EX8

TX5

10 GE LAN/GE/ FE

16xGE/FE

EG16

10 GE LAN/ 10 GE WAN

TX4 RX4

EX8

TX5 RX5

RX8

TX8

TX8

RX8

10 GE LAN/GE/ FE

NOTE

10GE WAN signals can be only transmitted and received through ports RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 Optical or electrical GE/FE signals can be only transmitted and received through ports RX5/TX5 to RX8/TX8, which must be configured as GE ports or FE ports at the same time. Each board receives and transmits one or two channels of electrical signals. The PND2 board or universal line board can be used on the WDM side.

18.4.4 Functions and Features The EX8 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS). Table 18-32 describes the service functions of the EX8 board, Table 18-33 describes the features supported by the EX8 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2023



Table 18-32 Service function of the EX8 board Function

Description

Basic function

Receives and transmits the following services and processes their packets: l 8 x 10GE LAN l 4 x 10GE WAN l 4 x optical or electrical GE/FE signals

Backplane bandwidth

40 Gbit/s

Supported service

10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE optical signals and GE electrical signals. FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s. Supports FE optical signals and FE electrical signals. NOTE 10GE WAN signals can be only transmitted and received through ports RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 Optical or electrical GE/FE signals can be only transmitted and received through ports RX5/TX5 to RX8/TX8, which must be configured as GE ports or FE ports at the same time. Each board receives and transmits one or two channels of electrical signals.

Working mode

l GE optical port: 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation l GE electrical port: 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex, Auto–Negotiation l FE optical port:100M Full-Duplex l 10GE WAN optical port:10G Full-Duplex WAN l 10GE LAN optical port:10G Full-Duplex LAN

Port flow control

Supported Comply with IEEE802.3x (Only supports response request).



MFL


Service type



Port, QinQ link, PW

E-Line

Port<->PW


CVLAN<->PW SVLAN<->PW

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2024



Function

Description CVLAN + CVLAN Pri<->PW SVLAN + SVLAN Pri<->PW QinQ linkbased service models

Port<->QinQ


Port<->Port

CVLAN<->QinQ




E-LAN

Bridge type



SVL, IVL

VSI tag type


NOTE IVL is supported only when the bridge type is IEEE 802.1ad.

Table 18-33 Features supported by the EX8 board Feature

Description

Protectio n scheme

Tunnel APS


PW APS


LAG


MC-LAG


MSTP

Supported. Comply with IEEE 802.1q.

LPT

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supports point-to-point LPT or point-to-multipoint LPT compliant with Huawei proprietary protocols.


2025



Feature

Description

QoS

Diffserv




Traffic policing






Traffic shaping


IGMP Snoopin g V2

Supported

Mainten ance

Ethernet service OAM (CFM)


Ethernet port OAM (EFM)


MPLS-TP OAM


RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Loopback

GE/FE/10GE optical ports GE electrical ports

MAC Outloop MAC Inloop PHY Outloop PHY Inloop

Synchro nization

Physical clock

Supports synchronous Ethernet processing instead of synchronous Ethernet transparent transmission. NOTE FE/GE electrical ports of the board do not support the physical clock function.

IEEE 1588v2

Supports the TC, TC+OC, BC, and OC modes. NOTE FE/GE electrical ports of the board do not support the IEEE 1588v2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2026



Feature

Description

Inband DCN

Supported

NOTE


18.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EX8 board consists of the client-side optical module, packet processor, traffic manager, fabric interface circuit, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-12 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the EX8 board. Figure 18-12 Functional modules and signal flow of the EX8 board

RX1

O/E

RX8 TX1 TX8


Packets

Client side

Packet processor

E/O

Traffic manager



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2027



Signal Flow In the signal flow of the EX8 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the EX8 to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

l


The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 ports, and performs O/E conversion.

2.


3.


4.




2.


3.

The packet processor implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, performs parallel/serial conversion, and generates client electrical signals.

4.

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of client electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 ports.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: performs O/E conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/GE/FE optical signal. – Client-side transmitter: performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/GE/FE optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the client-side laser.

l


l


l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Fabric interface circuit Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2028



Converts the received packets into those that can be processed by the fabric network and exchanges packets with the cross-connect board. l


l


18.4.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the EX8 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-13 shows the front panel of the EX8 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2029



Figure 18-13 Front panel of the EX8 board

EX8 STAT ACT PROG SRV

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8

EX8



l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2030


l




Interfaces Table 18-34 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-34 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EX8 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1-RX8

LC


TX1-TX8

LC



18.4.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one EX8 board. Table 18-35 shows the valid slots for the EX8 board. Table 18-35 Valid slots for EX8 board Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2031



Table 18-36 Mapping between the physical ports on the EX8 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1 - TX8/RX8

1-8

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 18-14 shows the application model of the EX8 board. Table 18-37 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 18-14 Port diagram of the EX8 board Other packet board

Backplane Packets

1(RX1/TX1)

8(RX8/TX8)

PORT1

PORT8

L2 swiching module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2032



Table 18-37 Descriptions of the ports on the EX8 board Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8

Client-side ports.

PORT1 to PORT8



Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 18-38 Basic Attributes of EX8 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Name

-


Enable Port

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Enabled



Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port. l Layer 2: The port can access the user-side equipment, carry Ethernet services that are based on the ports and use the port exclusively or QinQ Link. l Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2033



Field

Value

Description

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q, QinQ, Null

Selects the means of processing the accessed packets.

Default: 802.1Q

l Null: The port transparently transmits the accessed packets. l 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q standard packets. l QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ standard packets. NOTE The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when you set Port Mode to Layer 3. If the port needs to identify both C-VLAN and SVLAN packets, Encapsulation Type must be set to 802.1Q.

Working Mode

Port1 to Port4: 10G Full-Duplex LAN, 10G Full-Duplex WAN Port5 to Port8: 10G Full-Duplex LAN, 1000M Full-Duplex, 1000M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 10M Half-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation

Set the Working Mode parameter to set the working mode of the Ethernet port on the board. NOTE When setting this parameter, ensure that the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same. Otherwise, the services are not available.

Default: 10G FullDuplex LAN Max Frame Length (bytes)

1518 to 9600



Default: 1522

This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service will be interrupted. Specifies the logical port attribute.

Default: Optical Port Physical Port Attribute

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




2034



Field

Value

Description


1 to 1440


Default: 720


Running Status

Up, Down

Displays the port status.





On, Off



-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


1 to 30


Default: 15

Table 18-39 Flow Control of EX8 Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



2035



Field

Value

Description




Default: Disabled

l Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The port can both transmit and receive PAUSE frames. l Send Only: The port can only send PAUSE frames. l Receive Only: The port can only receive PAUSE frames. When the buffer usage of the receiver exceeds the threshold, the pause frame enables the transmitter to temporarily stop sending services. NOTE In general, flow control is implemented using the QoS function and port-based flow control is seldom used. It is recommended that the default value Disabled be used.


-


Table 18-40 Layer2 Attributes of EX8 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


QinQ Type Domain

0x0600 to 0xFFFE

Indicates the customized QinQ type domain.

Default: 0x8100

The C-VLAN port supports two QinQ type domains, 8100 and the customized QinQ type domain. The S-VLAN port supports only one QinQ type domain. The default value of the QinQ type domain is 88a8. You can also change the value by setting QinQ Type Domain.


Indicates the data packet processing mode. For details, see Table 18-41.

Tag

This parameter is unavailable when you set Encapsulation Type in Basic Attributes to QinQ or Null.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2036



Field

Value

Description

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4094

The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets.

Default: 1


VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

SVLANs

-

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. When the network is busy, data packets of higher VLAN priority are processed first and those of lower VLAN priority may be discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the highest. The specified SVLAN value must be recognizable to the C-VLAN port. SVLANs can be set to one or more values, or a value range. When the value of an S-VLAN service is the same as the values of SVLANs or is in the value range of SVLANs, the S-VLAN service can pass through this port.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Processing Mode

Remarks



Tag Aware




Access



-

Hybrid



-


2037



Table 18-42 Layer 3 Attributes of EX8 Board Field

Vaule

Description

Port

-


Enable Tunnel

Enabled, Disabled


Specify IP Address



IP Address

-


IP Mask

-


Table 18-43 Advanced Attributes of EX8 Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-



2038



Field

Value

Description

MAC Loopback






Default: NonLoopback MAC Address

-



-



-


Loopback Check

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled



-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2039



Field

Value

Description




Default: 30%


-


Optical Module Type

known, Two-Fiber Bidirectional





18.4.10 EX8 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2040



Board



TN54EX 8

N/A

10GBASE-SR-0.3km-SFP+ 10GBASE-LR-10km-SFP+ 10GBASE-ER/EW-40km-SFP+ 10GBASE-ZR-80km-SFP+ 11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1270/RX1330nm-10km-SFP+ 11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/RX1270nm-10km-SFP+ 1000BASE BX10-D-10km eSFP 1000BASE BX10-U-10km eSFP 1000BASE BX40-D-10km eSFP 1000BASE BX40-U-10km eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM) 2.125Gbit/s Multirate -0.5km 1000BASE-LX-10km-eSFP 1000BASE-LX-40km-eSFP 1000BASE-ZX-80km-eSFP 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate(eSFP CWDM)-80km 2.67Gbit/s Multirate(eSFP CWDM)-40km S-1.1-15km-eSFP L-1.1-40km-eSFP L-1.2-80km-eSFP I-1.1-2km-eSFP 100BASE-BX10-D 100BASE-BX10-U

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2041




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 10G BASESR-0.3kmSFP+

10GBASELR-10kmSFP+

10GBASEER/ EW-40kmSFP+

10GBASEZR-80kmSFP+

Optical source type

-

MLM

SLM

SLM

SLM


Gbit/s

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

10.3125

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


km

0.3

10

40

80


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

0.5

4

4


dBm

-7.3

-8.2

-4.7

0


dB

3

3.5

3

9


dBm

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

≤-30

Eye pattern mask

-




2042


Parameter


Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

10G BASESR-0.3kmSFP+

10GBASELR-10kmSFP+

10GBASEER/ EW-40kmSFP+

10GBASEZR-80kmSFP+

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

840 to 860

1260 to 1355

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-11.1(OMA)

-12.6(OMA)

-14.1(OMA)

-24


dBm

-1

0.5

-1

-7

Maximum reflectance

dB

-12

-12

-26

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type



Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ


km

10

10


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1260 to 1280

1320 to 1340


dBm

0.5

0.5


dBm

-8.2

-8.2


2043



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


11.3 Gbit/s Multirate-TX1330/ RX1270nm-10kmSFP+ 3.5


dB

3.5

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN


nm

1320 to 1340

1260 to 1280


dBm

-14.4

-14.4


dBm

0.5

0.5


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1000BASE BX10D-10kmeSFP

1000BASE BX10U-10kmeSFP

1000BASE BX40D-10kmeSFP


Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


km

10

10

40

40


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360


dBm

-3

-3

3

3


2044


Parameter


Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 1000BASE BX10D-10kmeSFP


1000BASE BX40D-10kmeSFP



dBm

-9

-9

-2

-2


dB

6

6

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1500


dBm

-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


dBm

-3

-3

-3

-3

Table 18-47 Client-side pluggable GE optical module specifications (DWDM) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)

Line code format

-

NRZ


km

120


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

4


dBm

0


2045



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)


dB

8.2


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±12.5


nm

1


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant (a 5% margin is required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)


ps/nm

2400


-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 18-48 Client-side pluggable GE optical module specifications Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 2.125Gbit/s Multirate -0.5km

1000BASELX-10kmeSFP

1000BASELX-40kmeSFP

1000BASEZX-80kmeSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


km

0.5

10

40

80


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2046


Parameter


Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

2.125Gbit/s Multirate -0.5km

1000BASELX-10kmeSFP

1000BASELX-40kmeSFP

1000BASEZX-80kmeSFP


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-2.5

-3

0

5


dBm

-9.5

-9

-5

-2


dB

9

9

9

9

Eye pattern mask

-



-

PIN

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm

-17

-20

-23

-23


dBm

0

-3

-3

-3

Table 18-49 Client-side pluggable GE optical module specifications (CWDM) Parameter

Unit


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate(eSFP CWDM)-80km

2.67Gbit/s Multirate(eSFP CWDM)-40km

NRZ

NRZ


2047



Parameter

Unit


km

Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate(eSFP CWDM)-80km

2.67Gbit/s Multirate(eSFP CWDM)-40km

80

40


dBm

5

5


dBm

0

0


dB

8.2

8.2


THz

1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611


GHz

±6.5

±6.5


nm

1

1


dB

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1–compliant

IEEE802.3z – compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

APD

PIN


nm

1270 to 1620

1200 to 1650


dBm

-28

-19


dBm

-9

-3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


2048




Unit

Optical Module Type

Value S-1.1-15km -eSFP

L-1.1-40km -eSFP

L-1.2-80km -eSFP

I-1.1-2kmeSFP

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

MLM

SLM

MLM


km

15

40

80

2


nm

1261 to 1360

1263 to 1360

1480 to 1580

1260 to 1360


dBm

-8

0

0

-14


dBm

-15

-5

-5

-19


dB

8.2

10

10.5

10


nm

NA

NA

1

NA


dB

NA

30

30

NA

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1–compliant

PIN

PIN


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

PIN

PIN


2049


Parameter


Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

S-1.1-15km -eSFP

L-1.1-40km -eSFP

L-1.2-80km -eSFP

I-1.1-2kmeSFP


nm

1260 to 1580

1260 to 1580

1260 to 1580

1260 to 1580


dBm

-28

-34

-34

-30


dBm

-8

-10

-10

-14

Table 18-51 Client-side pluggable FE optical module specifications Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Value 100BASE-BX10-D

100BASE-BX10-U

Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

MLM

MLM


km

15

15


nm

1480 to 1580

1260 to 1360


dBm

-8

-8


dBm

-15

-15


dB

8.5

8.5


nm

NA

NA


dB

NA

NA

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1–compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2050



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

100BASE-BX10-D

100BASE-BX10-U

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN


nm

1260 to 1360

1480 to 1580


dBm

-32

-32


dBm

-8

-8



l





TN54EX8

98

107


18.5 PND2 PND2: 2 x 10G bit/s packet line board

18.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the PND2 board is TN54.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2051



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N5 4P N D2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

When the PND2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH or TN52UXCM crossconnect board and TN52SCC system control board must be used. When the PND2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be used. This board cannot be applied to the subrack that works in master/slave subrack mode.

Variants The TN54PND2 board has only one variant: TN54PND2. The TN54PND2 board variant is the board itself.




Added the support for the TN54PND2 board in the general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the TN54PND2 board.

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the MS-OTN feature. The TN54PND2 board, a 2 x 10G packet line board, is added to convert 20 Gbit/s packets into 2 x OTU2 optical signals.


2052



18.5.3 Application The PND2 board is a packet service board. It converts packets with total bandwidth of 20 Gbit/ s from the cross-connect board into two 10GE LAN electrical signals. Then the board converts the two 10GE LAN electrical signals into two standard OTU2 optical signals compliant with WDM system requirements. For the position of the PND2 board in a WDM system, see Figure 18-15. Figure 18-15 Position of the PND2 board in a WDM system Packets

16xGE/FE

2xOTU2

2xOTU2

Packets

TX1

RX1

RX1

TX1

TX16 RX16

IN1

EG16

OUT1

PND2 RX1

IN2

TX1

OUT2

2x 10 GE LAN RX2

EX2


M U X / D M U X

EG16

IN1

16xGE/FE RX16 TX16

PND2 OUT2

TX1

IN2

RX1

TX2

EX2

TX2

2x 10 GE LAN

RX2

18.5.4 Functions and Features The PND2 board supports functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, QinQ, and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS), OTN interfaces. Table 18-52 describes the OTN functions and features of the PND2 board, Table 18-53 describes the ethernet service functions and specifications. Table 18-52 OTN functions and features of the PND2 board Functio n

Description

Basic function

Converts packets with total bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s from the cross-connect board into two 10GE LAN electrical signals. Then the board converts the two 10GE LAN electrical signals into two standard OTU2 optical signals compliant with WDM system requirements.

OTN function

l Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.

WDM specificat ion Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2053


Functio n


Description

Tunable waveleng th function


ESC

Supported

PRBS function


FEC encoding



l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. Alarm and performa nce event monitori ng


Loopbac k

Supported on the WDM side

Physical clock

Supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported

Electrical -layer ASON

Not supported


Table 18-53 Ethernet service functions of the PND2 board Function QoS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Description Diffserv


Traffic classificati on



2054



Function

Description Traffic policing


Congestio n manageme nt


Congestio n avoidance


Traffic shaping


IGMP Snooping

Supported

Maintenan ce

Ethernet OAM

Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.1ag, ITU-T Y.1731/G.8013 and ITU-T Y.1730

Ethernet port OAM


MPLS-TP OAM


RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Synchronous Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Inband DCN

Not supported



MFL


Service type



Port, QinQ link, PW

E-Line

Port<->PW


CVLAN<->PW SVLAN<->PW CVLAN + CVLAN Pri<->PW

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2055



Function

Description SVLAN + SVLAN Pri<->PW QinQ linkbased service models

Port<->QinQ


Port<->Port

CVLAN<->QinQ




E-LAN

Bridge type

IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1q


SVL

VSI tag type


NOTE


18.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The PND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, packet processor, traffic manager, fabric interface circuit, OTN module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-16 show the functional modules and signal flow of the PND2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2056



Figure 18-16 Functional modules and signal flow of the PND2 board Packets Backplane(service cross-connection)

WDM-side

O/E Fabric interface circuit

Traffic manager

Packet process or

IN1 IN2

OTN module

E/O

OUT1 OUT2


Control Memory

Communication

CPU


Power supply module

Required voltage

Fuse



Signal Flow In the signal flow of the PND2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the PND2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2.


3.

The packet processor implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, performs parallel/serial conversion, and generates 10GE LAN electrical signals.

4.

After processing the two 10GE LAN electrical signals, the OTN processing module outputs two OTU2 electrical signals. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2057


5. l


After performing the E/O conversion, the client-side optical module outputs two OTU2 optical signals through the OUT1 and OUT2 ports.


The WDM-side optical module receives the two OTU2 optical signals from the IN1 and IN2 ports, performs O/E conversion, and outputs two OTU2 electrical signals.

2.

After processing the two OTU2 electrical signals, the OTN processing module outputs two 10GE LAN electrical signals.

3.

After receiving the two 10GE LAN electrical signals, the packet processor performs decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and address matching for the data services, implements L2 functions such as protection, OAM, and QoS for the data services, and then sends the matched data services to the traffic manager.

4.


5.


Module Function l

WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals.

l

OTN processing module The OTN processing module frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC encoding and decoding.

l


l


l

Fabric interface circuit Converts the received packets into those that can be processed by the fabric network and exchanges packets with the cross-connect board.

l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2058



18.5.6 Front Panel There are four indicators, optical interfaces.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 18-17 shows the front panel of the PND2. Figure 18-17 Front panel of the PND2 PND2 STAT ACT PROG SRV

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

PND2



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 18-54 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2059



Table 18-54 Types and functions of the PND2 interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN2

LC


OUT1-OUT2

LC



18.5.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one PND2 board. Table 18-55 shows the valid slots for the PND2 board. Table 18-55 Valid slots for the PND2 board Product

Valid slots




IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17

The online signal bus on the PND2 board connects to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. The slot number of the PND2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the PND2 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Physical Ports Table 18-56 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2060



Table 18-56 Mapping between the physical ports on the PND2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 18-18 shows the application model of the PND2 board. Table 18-57 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 18-18 Port diagram of the PND2 board

Other packet board

Backplane Packets

Ethernet PORT1 services

OTU2

1(IN1/OUT1)

Ethernet PORT2 services

OTU2

2(IN2/OUT2)

NOTE

Port PORT1 is always bound to port IN1 or OUT1, and port PORT2 is always bound to port IN2 or OUT2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2061


18 Packet Service Unit L2 swiching module


Table 18-57 Descriptions of the ports on the PND2 board Port Name

Description

IN1/OUT1 to IN2/OUT2


PORT1 to PORT2

Internal logical ports of the L2 swiching module.



Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2062



Field

Value

Description





Enabled, Disabled Default:


l WDM side: Enabled


l Client side: Disabled FEC Working State



FEC Mode



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

-


Actual Band Type

-



-



2063



Field

Value

Description


l C: 1/1529.16/196.0 50 to 80/1560.61/192. 100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208. 170 to 18/1611.00/188. 780



C, CWDM Default: C


NULL Mapping Status



Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces Table 18-59 Basic Attributes of PND2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Name

-


Enable Port

-

This parameter is unavailable for the PND2 board.

Port Mode

Layer 2, Layer 3


Default: Layer 2

l Layer 2: The port can access the user-side equipment, carry Ethernet services that are based on the ports and use the port exclusively or QinQ Link. l Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2064



Field

Value

Description

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q, QinQ, Null

Selects the means of processing the accessed packets.

Default: 802.1Q

l Null: The port transparently transmits the accessed packets. l 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q standard packets. l QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ standard packets. NOTE The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when you set Port Mode to Layer 3.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Working Mode

-



1518 to 9600

This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service will be interrupted.


-



-


ARP Aging Time (min)

1 to 1440


Default: 720


Running Status

-



-



-



-



-


Traffic Policing Period (min)

-


Default: 1522


2065



Table 18-60 Flow Control of PND2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-



-


Table 18-61 Layer2 Attributes of PND2 Board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Tag



Default VLAN ID


The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. NOTE Packets with their VLAN IDs being set to 0 are usually considered untagged packets. The VLAN ID of 4095 is reserved.

VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. When the network is busy, data packets of higher VLAN priority are processed first and those of lower VLAN priority may be discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the highest.


2066




Processing Mode

Remarks



Tag Aware




Access



-

Hybrid



-

Table 18-63 Layer 3 Attributes of PND2 Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Vaule

Description

Port

-


Enable Tunnel

Enabled, Disabled

After this parameter is set to Enabled for a port, the port can identify and process MPLS labels.

Specify IP Address




2067



Field

Vaule

Description

IP Address

-


-

IP Mask


Table 18-64 Advanced Attributes of PND2 Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



-


MAC Loopback

-


PHY Loopback

-


MAC Address

-



-



-



2068



Field

Value

Description

Loopback Check

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled



-



Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Network Cable Mode

-


Optical Module Type

-



2069



Field

Value

Description


Enabled, Disabled

Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required.

Default: Disabled

When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.

18.5.10 PND2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54PN D2

N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP

NOTE


Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module Table 18-65 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2070



Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2071



Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dBm

2


dBm

-1


dB

10


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±5


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1250 to 1600


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Unit

Optical Module Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM


2072



Parameter

Unit


-




10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565


dBm

-1

2

4


dBm

-6

-1

0


dB

6

8.2

9


dB

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

PIN

PIN

APD


nm

1290 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600


dBm

-11

-14

-24


dBm

-1

-1

-7


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2073


l






TN54PND2

100

108


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2074


19 PID Board

19

PID Board

About This Chapter 19.1 Overview PID boards integrate the functions of traditional optical transponder boards and multiplexer/ demultiplexer boards. OTN processing and output of multiplexed optical signals are implemented on one PID board, featuring large capacity, high integration, high reliability, and flexible access of various services. PID boards are classified into the following types according to the cross-connect capabilities: 10G PID boards and 100G PID boards. 19.2 BMD4 BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz 19.3 BMD8 BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz 19.4 ELQX ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board 19.5 PTQX PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary 19.6 ENQ2 ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board 19.7 NPO2 NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board 19.8 NPO2E NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20–channel extended 19.9 NPS4 NPS4: 1x100G PID Line Service Processing Board 19.10 NPS4E NPS4E: 1x100G PID Line Service Processing Board, Extended

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2075


19 PID Board

19.1 Overview PID boards integrate the functions of traditional optical transponder boards and multiplexer/ demultiplexer boards. OTN processing and output of multiplexed optical signals are implemented on one PID board, featuring large capacity, high integration, high reliability, and flexible access of various services. PID boards are classified into the following types according to the cross-connect capabilities: 10G PID boards and 100G PID boards.

Positions of PID Boards in a WDM System Figure 19-1 shows the positions of PID boards in a WDM system.

PID Board

PID Board

Tributary/line


Tributary/line

Figure 19-1 Positions of PID boards in a WDM system


The PID group supports 200G service capacity.

Main Functions of PID Boards l

Table 19-1 lists the main functions of 10G PID boards.

Table 19-1 Main functions of 10G PID boards Board

Signal Input

Signal Output

TN55NPO2Ea

64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from other tributary, line, or PID boards

20 x multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals

4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the ENQ2 board 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals from the NPO2 board TN54NPO2/ TN55NPO2a


12 x multiplexed OTU2/OTU2e optical signals

4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the ENQ2 board TN54ENQ2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


4 x OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals to the NPO2E or NPO2 board


2076


Board

19 PID Board

Signal Input

Signal Output

a: The access capability listed in the table is for the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board equipped with the TN54PQ2 subboard. The TN54PQ2 subboard helps the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board to provide an extra capability of conversion between 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2 and 4 x OTU2, and conversion between 4 x ODU2e and 4 x OTU2e. Without the TN54PQ2 subboard, the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board can process only 32 x ODU0, 16 x ODU1, or 4 x ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. NOTE The TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board supports a maximum of 80 km DCM-free transmission while the TN54NPO2 board must be equipped with the DCM.

l

Table 19-2 lists the main functions of 100G PID boards.

Table 19-2 Main functions of 100G PID boards Board

Signal Input

Signal Output

TN54NPS4Ea

80 x ODU0/80 x ODUflex/40 x ODU1/10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e/2 x ODU3/1 x ODU4

1 x OTU4 optical signal

TN54NPS4 +TN54NPS4Ea

160 x ODU0/160 x ODUflex/80 x ODU1/20 x ODU2/20 x ODU2e/4 x ODU3/2 x ODU4. The NPS4 implement 100G service access and the NPS4E implement 100G service access.

One multiplexed optical signal which include two multiplexed OTU4 optical signals.

a: l SSMF fiber – Fiber length ≤ 20 km: TN13OBU1P3 is optional at the receive end and no OA board is required at the transmit end. – 20 km < Fiber length ≤ 40 km: TN14OBU2P3 must be configured at the receive end and no OA board is required at the transmit end. – 40 km < Fiber length ≤ 60 km: TN13OBU1P3 must be configured at the receive end and TN13OBU2P3 must be configured at the transmit end. – 60 km < Fiber length ≤ 80 km: TN14OBU2P3 must be configured at the receive end and TN13OBU2P3 must be configured at the transmit end. l LEAF fiber – Fiber length ≤ 65km: TN13OBU1P3 is optional at the receive end and no OA board is required at the transmit end. – 65 km < Fiber length ≤ 80km: TN14OBU2P3 must be configured at the receive end and no OA board is required at the transmit end.

19.2 BMD4 BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2077


19 PID Board

19.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the BMD4 board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1B M D4

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

19.2.2 Application The BMD4 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes signals. Figure 19-2 shows the position of the BMD4 in a WDM system.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2078


19 PID Board

Figure 19-2 Position of the BMD4 in a WDM system 4

4

4

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

PTQX

OA

4

BMD4

OA

4

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

ELQX

4

4

ELQX

4

OA

BMD4

4

PTQX 4

4

OA

PTQX

4

PTQX 4

ELQX

4

4

ELQX

4

19.2.3 Functions and Features The BMD4 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service spectrum detection. Table 19-3 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD4. Table 19-3 Functions and features of the BMD4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Function or Feature

Description

Basic function

In a 40-channel system, the BMD4 board multiplexes and demultiplexes the optical signals. Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz to four channels of signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. The reverse process is similar.


2079


19 PID Board

Function or Feature

Description

In-service detection and monitoring of the spectrum

Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the services.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

19.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The BMD4 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 19-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4. Figure 19-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4

Optical module T01 T02 T03 T04

IN

Interleaver

R01 R02 R03 R04

Splitter Coupler

OUT MON

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


2080


19 PID Board

Signal Flow The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally, the four channels of multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces. The four channels of multiplexed signals are received through the R01-R04 optical interfaces and are transmitted to the coupler. Then, the coupler couples the four channels of multiplexed signals into one channel of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. Finally, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

Optical module – Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8wavelength multiplexed signals, and uses the coupler to couple the signals with a spacing of 200 GHz into one channel of 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l

Control and communication module – Controls board operations. – Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. – Communicates with the SCC board.

l

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.

19.2.5 Front Panel There is one indicator and laser level label on the front panel of the BMD4.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-4 shows the front panel of the BMD4.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2081


19 PID Board

Figure 19-4 Front panel of the BMD4

CAUTION

OUT

IN

T01

R01

T02

R02

T03

R03

T04

R04

BMD4

CAUTION

MON

HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS

BMD4

STAT

HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

Indicators One indicator is present on the front panel: l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green

For details about this indicator, see A.4 Board Indicators.

Interfaces Table 19-4 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-4 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD4 Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

OUT

LC

Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

MON

LC

Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 10:90, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.

T01/R01

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

LC

Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.80 THz to 196.00 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.


2082


19 PID Board

Interface

Type

Function

T02/R02

LC


T03/R03

LC

Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.20 THz to 193.60 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.

T04/R04

LC


Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

19.2.6 Valid Slots The BMD4 occupies one slot. Table 19-5 shows the valid slots for the BMD4 board. Table 19-5 Valid slots for the BMD4 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU1-IU16

19.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4 The characteristic code of the BMD4 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. Table 19-6 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD4.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2083


19 PID Board

Table 19-6 Characteristic code of the BMD4 Code

Indication

Description

The first character

Band

Indicates the multiplexing scheme adopted by the board. The value C represents the C band. The value L represents the L band.

For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD4 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are in the C band.

19.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4 This topic describes the interface information on the U2000, each optical interface on the BMD4 accesses certain fixed wavelengths.

Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-7. Table 19-7 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the BMD4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

R01/T01

2

R02/T02

3

R03/T03

4

R04/T04

5

MON

6

Mapping Between Optical Interfaces, Frequencies, and Wavelengths Table 19-8 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD4 and the relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2084


19 PID Board

Table 19-8 Mapping between optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths Interface

Number of Wavelengths

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

T01/R01

12

193.8

1546.917

194.0

1545.322

194.2

1543.730

194.4

1542.142

194.6

1540.557

194.8

1538.976

195.0

1537.397

195.2

1535.822

195.4

1534.250

195.6

1532.681

195.8

1531.116

196.0

1529.553

193.7

1547.715

193.9

1546.119

194.1

1544.526

194.3

1542.936

194.5

1541.349

194.7

1539.766

194.9

1538.186

195.1

1536.609

195.3

1535.036

195.5

1533.465

195.7

1531.898

195.9

1530.334

192.2

1559.794

192.4

1558.173

192.6

1556.555

192.8

1554.940

193.0

1553.329

193.2

1551.721

193.4

1550.116

193.6

1548.515

T02/R02

T03/R03

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

12

8


2085


19 PID Board

Interface


Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

T04/R04

8

192.1

1560.606

192.3

1558.983

192.5

1557.363

192.7

1555.747

192.9

1554.134

193.1

1552.524

193.3

1550.918

193.5

1549.315

19.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For BMD4 parameters, refer to Table 19-9. Table 19-9 BMD4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Actual Band

-

Displays the actual working band of the board.

Configure Band

C

Specifies the type of the working band of the board.

Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Actual Working Band Parity

-

Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board.

Configure Working Band Parity

All, Odd, Even


Default: All


2086


19 PID Board

19.2.10 BMD4 Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 19-10 Optical specifications of the BMD4 Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529 - 1561

T0x/R0x channel spacinga

GHz

200

IN/OUT channel spacing

GHz

100

Insertion loss

dB

<= 5

dB

<= 6

dB

>= 25

IN-T01 IN-T02 IN-T03 IN-T04 R01-OUT R02-OUT R03-OUT R04-OUT IN->T01/T03@T02/T04

Isolationb

IN->T02/T04@T01/T03 IN->T01@T03

>= 13

IN->T03@T01 IN->T02@T04 IN->T04@T02 R01->OUT@R03 R03->OUT@R01 R02->OUT@R04 R04->OUT@R02

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Optical return loss

dB

>= 40

Directivity

dB

>= 45

PMD

ps

<= 0.5

Polarization dependent loss

dB

<= 0.5

Input optical power range

dBm

<= 23


2087


19 PID Board

Item

Unit

Value

a: T0x represents T01 to T04 ports. R0x represents R01 to R04 ports. b: In the case of T01/T03@T02/T04, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one of T01/T03 ports and any one of T02/T04 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item. T01/T02 ports are intended for blue band signals. T03/T04 ports are intended for red band signals.



l





TN11BMD4

0.2

0.3


19.3 BMD8 BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz

19.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the BMD8 board is available, that is, TN11.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2088


19 PID Board

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1B M D8

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

19.3.2 Application The BMD8 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes signals. Figure 19-5 shows the position of the BMD8 in a WDM system. Figure 19-5 Position of the BMD8 in a WDM system 4

4

4

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

PTQX

OA

8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

4

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

ELQX

4

4

ELQX

4

OA

BMD8

BMD8

OA

4

PTQX 4

8

OA

PTQX


4

PTQX 4

ELQX

4

4

ELQX

4

2089


19 PID Board

19.3.3 Functions and Features The BMD8 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service spectrum detection. Table 19-11 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD8. Table 19-11 Functions and features of the BMD8 Function or Feature

Description

Basic function

In an 80-channel system, the BMD8 board multiplexes and demultiplexes optical signals. Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz into four channels of oddwavelength signals and four channels of even-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, four channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels of 8wavelength multiplexed signals. The reverse process is similar.

Detection and monitoring of the online spectrum

Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the services.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

19.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The BMD8 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 19-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2090


19 PID Board

Figure 19-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8 Optical module T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08

Interleaver

R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 R06 R07 R08

IN

Splitter OUT MON

Coupler

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, four channels of 12wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally, the eight channels of multiplexed signals are output through the T01 to T08 optical interfaces. The eight channels of multiplexed signals are received through the R01 to R08 optical interfaces and are transmitted to the coupler. Then, the coupler couples the eight channels of multiplexed signals into one channel of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz. that is, four channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.


Optical module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2091


19 PID Board

– Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz and uses the coupler to couple the signals into one channel of 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l


l


19.3.5 Front Panel There is one indicator and laser level label on the front panel of the BMD8.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-7 shows the front panel of the BMD8. Figure 19-7 Front panel of the BMD8

CAUTION

CAUTION


OUT

IN

MON

T05

R05

T06

R06

T07

R07

T08

R08

T01

R01

T02

R02

T03

R03

T04

R04

BMD8

BMD8

STAT




For details about this indicator, see A.4 Board Indicators. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2092


19 PID Board

Interfaces Table 19-12 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-12 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD8 Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

OUT

LC

Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

MON

LC

Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 10:90, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.

T01/R01

LC


T02/R02

LC


T03/R03

LC


T04/R04

LC


T05/R05

LC


T06/R06

LC


T07/R07

LC


T08/R08

LC



19.3.6 Valid Slots The BMD8 occupies two slots. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2093


19 PID Board

Table 19-13 shows the valid slots for the BMD8 board. Table 19-13 Valid slots for the BMD8 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU15

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the BMD8 occupies IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is IU1.

19.3.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8 The characteristic code of the BMD8 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. Table 19-14 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD8. Table 19-14 Characteristic code of the BMD8 Code

Indication

Description

The first character

Band

Indicates the multiplexing scheme adopted by the board. The value C represents the C band.

For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD8 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are in the C band.

19.3.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8 This topic describes the interface information on the U2000, each optical interface on the BMD8 accesses certain fixed wavelengths.

Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-15.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2094


19 PID Board

Table 19-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the BMD8 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

R01/T01

2

R02/T02

3

R03/T03

4

R04/T04

5

R05/T05

6

R06/T06

7

R07/T07

8

R08/T08

9

MON

10

Mapping Between Optical Interfaces, Frequencies, and Wavelengths Table 19-16 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths. Table 19-16 Mapping between optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface


Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

T01/R01

12

193.85

1546.52

194.05

1544.92

194.25

1543.33

194.45

1541.75

194.65

1540.16

194.85

1538.58

195.05

1537.00

195.25

1535.43

195.45

1533.86

195.65

1532.29

195.85

1530.72

196.05

1529.16


2095


Interface


Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

T02/R02

12

193.8

1546.917

194.0

1545.322

194.2

1543.730

194.4

1542.142

194.6

1540.557

194.8

1538.976

195.0

1537.397

195.2

1535.822

195.4

1534.250

195.6

1532.681

195.8

1531.116

196.0

1529.553

193.75

1547.32

193.95

1545.72

194.15

1544.13

194.35

1542.54

194.55

1540.95

194.75

1539.37

194.95

1537.79

195.15

1536.22

195.35

1534.64

195.55

1533.07

195.75

1531.51

195.95

1529.94

193.7

1547.715

193.9

1546.119

194.1

1544.526

194.3

1542.936

194.5

1541.349

194.7

1539.766

194.9

1538.186

195.1

1536.609

195.3

1535.036

195.5

1533.465

195.7

1531.898

195.9

1530.334

T03/R03

T04/R04

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

19 PID Board

12

12


2096


19 PID Board

Interface


Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

T05/R05

8

192.25

1559.39

192.45

1557.77

192.65

1556.15

192.85

1554.54

193.05

1552.93

193.25

1551.32

193.45

1549.72

193.65

1548.11

192.2

1559.794

192.4

1558.173

192.6

1556.555

192.8

1554.940

193.0

1553.329

193.2

1551.721

193.4

1550.116

193.6

1548.515

192.15

1560.20

192.35

1558.58

192.55

1556.96

192.75

1555.34

192.95

1553.73

193.15

1552.12

193.35

1550.52

193.55

1548.91

192.1

1560.606

192.3

1558.983

192.5

1557.363

192.7

1555.747

192.9

1554.134

193.1

1552.524

193.3

1550.918

193.5

1549.315

T06/R06

T07/R07

T08/R08

8

8

8



2097


19 PID Board

For BMD8 parameters, refer to Table 19-17. Table 19-17 BMD8 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C


Default: C Actual Working Band Parity

-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All

19.3.10 BMD8 Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 19-18 Optical specifications of the BMD8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529 - 1561

T0x/R0x channel spacinga

GHz

200

IN/OUT channel spacing

GHz

50


2098


19 PID Board

Item Insertion loss

IN-T01

Unit

Value

dB

<= 8

dB

<= 9.5

dB

>= 25

IN-T02 IN-T03 IN-T04 IN-T05 IN-T06 IN-T07 IN-T08 R01-OUT R02-OUT R03-OUT R04-OUT R05-OUT R06-OUT R07-OUT R08-OUT Isolationb

IN->T01/T05 @T02/T06/ T03/T07/T04/T08 IN->T02/T06 @T01/T05/ T03/T07/T04/T08 IN->T03/T07 @T01/T05/ T02/T06/T04/T08 IN->T04/T08 @T01/T05/ T02/T06/T03/T07 IN->T01@T05

>= 13

IN->T05@T01 IN->T02@T06 IN->T06@T02 IN->T03@T07 IN->T07@T03 IN->T04@T08 IN->T08@T04

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2099


19 PID Board

Item

Unit

Value

Optical return loss

dB

>= 40

Directivity

dB

>= 45

PMD

ps

<= 0.5


dB

<= 0.5


dBm

<= 23

R01->OUT@R05 R05->OUT@R01 R02->OUT@R06 R06->OUT@R02 R03->OUT@R07 R07->OUT@R03 R04->OUT@R08 R08->OUT@R04

a: T0x represents T01 to T08 ports. R0x represents R01 to R08 ports. b: In the case of T01/T05@T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one of T01/T05 ports and any one of T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item. T01 to T04 ports are intended for blue band signals; the T05 to T08 ports are intended for red band signals.



l





TN11BMD8

0.2

0.3


19.4 ELQX ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2100


19 PID Board

19.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the ELQX board is TN12.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 2E L Q X

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

19.4.2 Application The ELQX board converts four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e signals into four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals or converts four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is similar. Figure 19-8 shows the position of the ELQX in a WDM system. Figure 19-8 Position of the ELQX in a WDM system 4

4

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ 4 OTU2/ OTU2e

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

OA PTQX

OA

BMD4

BMD4

OA

PTQX 4

ELQX

4

ELQX

OA

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ 4 OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e 4

19.4.3 Functions and Features The ELQX supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2101


19 PID Board

Table 19-19 provides the details about the functions and features of the ELQX. Table 19-19 Functions and features of the ELQX Function or Feature

Description

Basic function

ELQX converts signals as follows: l 4 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e<->4 x OTU2/OTU2e l 16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/ODU2e<->4 x OTU2/OTU2e l Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU1 and ODU2/ODU2e services.



OTN function

l The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G.7041, ITU-T G. 709, and GDPS. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports SM, PM and TCM function for ODU2. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 .

WDM specification


ESC function

Supported.

PRBS test function


LPT function


FEC coding



l Supports ITU-T G.975.1-compliant AFEC-2 on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2102


19 PID Board

Function or Feature

Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ALS function


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client-side 1+1 protection.


l Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G)


l 10GE LAN FULL_Duplex



l Supports the ODUk SNCP.

l MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G)

l 10GE WAN FULL_Duplex IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic


2103


Function or Feature

19 PID Board



19.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ELQX board consists of the client-side optical module, the signal processing module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 19-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2104


19 PID Board

Signal Flow Figure 19-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800

Client side RX1 RX2 RX3

4×ODU2/4×ODU2e /16×ODU1


O/E

RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4


4×OTU2/4×OTU2e





Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



The client side of the ELQX board can access the following optical signals: l

10GE LAN optical signals

l

10GE WAN optical signals

l


l


l


l

OTU2e optical signals

In the signal flow of the ELQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ELQX to the WDM side of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The clientside optical module can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from the backplane. The electrical signals converted from the client optical signals or the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. The signals of

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2105


19 PID Board

different types are transmitted to different encapsulation and mapping modules. Then, the encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing for the signals. Finally, four OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the PTQX board through the backplane. l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the PTQX board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs four ODU2/ODU2e signals, 16 ODU1 signals, or four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals. The four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane, or the four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals are transmitted to the client-side optical module. The optical signals are converted into electrical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. NOTE

The ELQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane. One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals. – Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the client-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. NOTE

The signal processing module on the ELQX board has fixed cross-connections to the PTQX board.

– SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2106


l

19 PID Board

Control and communication module – Controls board operations. – Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the SCC board.

l

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.

19.4.5 Front Panel There are four indicators on the front panel of the ELQX.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-10 shows the front panel of the ELQX. Figure 19-10 Front panel of the ELQX TX2

RX2

TX3

RX3

TX4

RX4

ELQX

RX1

STAT ACT PROG SRV

ELQX

TX1



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 19-20 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 19-20 Types and functions of the ELQX interfaces

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

TX1 - TX4

LC

Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment.


2107


19 PID Board

Interface

Type

Function

RX1 - RX4

LC

Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment.


19.4.6 Valid Slots The ELQX occupies one slot. Table 19-21 shows the valid slots for the ELQX board. Table 19-21 Valid slots for the ELQX board Product

Valid Slots


IU1, IU4, IU5, IU8, IU11, IU14


Display of Physical Ports Table 19-22 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 19-22 Mapping between the physical ports on the ELQX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6

NOTE

The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2108


19 PID Board

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 19-11, Figure 19-12 and Figure 19-13 describes the NM ports of the ELQX board. Table 19-23 lists the indication of each port. Figure 19-11 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (cross-connections of client-side services) Client side 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)









Service Processing Module



Figure 19-12 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (backplane-side ODU1-level cross-connections) Backplane




54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4 Crossconnect module




Figure 19-13 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (backplane-side ODU2-level cross-connections) Backplane

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 Cross-connect module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2109


19 PID Board

Table 19-23 Description of NM ports of the ELQX Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces

ClientLP1-ClientLP4


ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4.

ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4


19.4.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site. If the ELQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 cross-connection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board, as in Figure 19-14. shown by

l

If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown in Figure 19-15.

l

If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown by

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

in Figure 19-14.

The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX board and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-to-one cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the U2000. For details, see Figure 19-16.


2110


19 PID Board

Figure 19-14 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU2 level) Client side

Cross-connection module 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

2


Other board

Client side 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1


1





74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 Cross-connection module

ELQX board

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board

1 2

NOTE

The previous cross-connections cannot be configured between the ELQX boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2111


19 PID Board

Figure 19-15 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU1 level) Cross-connect module

Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1

1 Other board

Client side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4


ELQX board

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1

2112


19 PID Board

Figure 19-16 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX Cross-connect module






1

74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 ELQX board

WDM side 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1

133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1






136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 2

139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 PTQX baord









74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 Cross-connect module

ELQX board

Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group

1 2

Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group

19.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the ELQX, refer toTable 19-24.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2113


19 PID Board

Table 19-24 ELQX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status










10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU-2, OTU– 2E, STM-64, OC-192



Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G)



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2114


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On



Enabled, Disabled Default: l Client side: Enabled

LPT Enabled


Service Mode

Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. l Automatic indicates that channel resources can be managed flexibly. For example, when the parameter is set to Automatic for an ODU2 channel, the ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel can be provisioned with ODU1 signals if there is no ODU2 signal from the backplane, but they cannot be provisioned with any ODU1 signal if there is an ODU2 signal from the backplane. l ODU1 indicates that the channel must be provisioned with an ODU1 signal. (This is the similar case for the ODU2 value.) If the parameter is set to ODU2 for a channel, the ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel cannot be provisioned with any ODU1 signal.

FEC Working State



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2115


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC


Default: AFEC

FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. This parameter is automatically set to AFEC when you set Service Type to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping to Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G). Actual Band Type

-


Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780



C, CWDM Default: C





Line Rate




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2116


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description




Default: None




NULL Mapping Status



19.4.10 ELQX Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2117


19 PID Board

Board



TN12EL QX

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


2118


Parameter

19 PID Board

Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1


2119


Parameter

19 PID Board

Unit


dB





-27

-27

-27

-12



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

800


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


2120


19 PID Board

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l





TN12ELQX

86.2

99.1


19.5 PTQX PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary

19.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the PTQX board is TN12.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2121


19 PID Board

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 2P T Q X

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Type One PID can use only certain wavelengths, as listed in Table 19-27. Table 19-28 lists the wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies. Table 19-27 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (ELQX+PTQX) Serial No.

Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Left)

Wavelength No. of the PTQX

Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Right)

PTQX Type

1

33, 37, 41, 45

1, 5, 9, 13

17, 21, 25, 29

TN12PTQX01

2

34, 38, 42, 46

2, 6, 10, 14

18, 22, 26, 30

TN12PTQX02

3

35, 39, 43, 47

3, 7, 11, 15

19, 23, 27, 31

TN12PTQX03

4

36, 40, 44, 48

4, 8, 12, 16

20, 24, 28, 32

TN12PTQX04

5

-

49, 53, 57, 61

65, 69, 73, 77

TN12PTQX05

6

-

50, 54, 58, 62

66, 70, 74, 78

TN12PTQX06

7

-

51, 55, 59, 63

67, 71, 75, 79

TN12PTQX07

8

-

52, 56, 60, 64

68, 72, 76, 80

TN12PTQX08

NOTE For the wavelength groups indicated by serial numbers 5-8, only one PTQX board and one ELQX board are required and the ELQX board should be housed on the right of the PTQX board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2122


19 PID Board

Table 19-28 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

1

196.05

1529.16

41

194.05

1544.92

2

196.00

1529.55

42

194.00

1545.32

3

195.95

1529.94

43

193.95

1545.72

4

195.90

1530.33

44

193.90

1546.12

5

195.85

1530.72

45

193.85

1546.52

6

195.80

1531.12

46

193.80

1546.92

7

195.75

1531.51

47

193.75

1547.32

8

195.70

1531.90

48

193.70

1547.72

9

195.65

1532.29

49

193.65

1548.11

10

195.60

1532.68

50

193.60

1548.51

11

195.55

1533.07

51

193.55

1548.91

12

195.50

1533.47

52

193.50

1549.32

13

195.45

1533.86

53

193.45

1549.72

14

195.40

1534.25

54

193.40

1550.12

15

195.35

1534.64

55

193.35

1550.52

16

195.30

1535.04

56

193.30

1550.92

17

195.25

1535.43

57

193.25

1551.32

18

195.20

1535.82

58

193.20

1551.72

19

195.15

1536.22

59

193.15

1552.12

20

195.10

1536.61

60

193.10

1552.52

21

195.05

1537.00

61

193.05

1552.93

22

195.00

1537.40

62

193.00

1553.33

23

194.95

1537.79

63

192.95

1553.73

24

194.90

1538.19

64

192.90

1554.13

25

194.85

1538.58

65

192.85

1554.54

26

194.80

1538.98

66

192.80

1554.94

27

194.75

1539.37

67

192.75

1555.34

28

194.70

1539.77

68

192.70

1555.75


2123


19 PID Board

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

29

194.65

1540.16

69

192.65

1556.15

30

194.60

1540.56

70

192.60

1556.55

31

194.55

1540.95

71

192.55

1556.96

32

194.50

1541.35

72

192.50

1557.36

33

194.45

1541.75

73

192.45

1557.77

34

194.40

1542.14

74

192.40

1558.17

35

194.35

1542.54

75

192.35

1558.58

36

194.30

1542.94

76

192.30

1558.98

37

194.25

1543.33

77

192.25

1559.39

38

194.20

1543.73

78

192.20

1559.79

39

194.15

1544.13

79

192.15

1560.20

40

194.10

1544.53

80

192.10

1560.61

19.5.2 Application The PTQX is an PID unit. The PTQX board can map four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals into four OTU2(e) signals, or map four ODU2(e) signals or 16 ODU1 signals from another board into four OTU2(e) signals. The PTQX also receives eight OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board and integrates the 12 OTU2(e) signals into one channel of optical signals for output. The reverse process is similar. For the position of the PTQX in a WDM system, see Figure 19-17. Figure 19-17 Position of the PTQX in a WDM system 4

4

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ 4 OTU2/ OTU2e

ELQX 4

4

ELQX 4

OA PTQX

OA

BMD4

BMD4

OA

PTQX 4

ELQX

4

ELQX

OA

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ 4 OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e 4

19.5.3 Functions and Features The PTQX provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2124


19 PID Board

Table 19-29 provides the details about the functions and features of the PTQX. Table 19-29 Functions and features of the PTQX Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

PTQX converts signals as follows: l 4 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2<->4 x OTU2 l 4 x 10GE LAN/OTU2e<->4 x OTU2e l 16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->4 x OTU2 l 4 x ODU2e<->4 x OTU2e l Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU1 and ODU2/ODU2e services.



OTN function

l The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G.7041, ITU-T G. 709, and GDPS. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU2. l Supports SM functions for OTU2 .

WDM specification


ESC function

Supported

PRBS test

Supports the PRBS function on the client and WDM sides. NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.

LPT function


FEC coding


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2125


19 PID Board


Description


l Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line failures. l Monitors B1 bytes to help locate faults. l Monitors parameters such as the bias current, temperature, and optical power of the laser. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events. l Supports the remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

ALS function


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

Protection scheme

l Supports client-side 1+1 protection.


l Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G)


l 10GE LAN FULL_Duplex




l MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G)

l 10GE WAN FULL_Duplex IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic


2126


19 PID Board




19.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The PTQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, PID module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2127


19 PID Board

Figure 19-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800

Client side RX1 RX2 RX3

4xODU2/4xODU2e /16xODU1


O/E

RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4



8×OTU2/8×OTU2e


4 OTN processing module

4

OUT

PID Module IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The client side of the PTQX board can access the following optical signals: l

10GE LAN optical signals

l

10GE WAN optical signals

l


l


l


l

OTU2e optical signals

In the signal flow of the PTQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the PTQX to the WDM side of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The PTQX can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from the backbone. The electrical signals converted from client optical signals or 16 x ODU1 or 4 x ODU2/ ODU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Different types of signals

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2128


19 PID Board

are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation, mapping, OTN framing, and FEC encoding. Then, the module sends out four channels of OTU2(e) signals to the PID module. The four OTU2(e) signals and the eight OTU2(e) signals cross-connected through the backplane from the ELQX board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface. l

Receive direction The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into 12 OTU2(e) signals. Eight of the 12 OTU2(e) signals are cross-connected through the backplane to the ELQX board, and the remaining four OTU2(e) signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2(e) framing, FEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs four channels of electrical signals. The four channels of electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane or transmitted to the client-side optical modules. Then, the four channels of electrical signals are converted into four channels of optical signals that are output through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. NOTE

The PTQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane. One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.

Module Function l

Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. – Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals. – Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. – Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the client-side laser.

l

PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into 12 channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates 12 channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2129


19 PID Board

– SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/SONET performance. – 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and monitors 10GE LAN performance. – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC coding and decoding. l


l


19.5.5 Front Panel There are four indicators and laser level label on the front panel of the PTQX.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-19 shows the front panel of the PTQX. Figure 19-19 Front panel of the PTQX

CAUTION

CAUTION


TX1

RX1

TX2

RX2

TX3

RX3

OUT

TX4

RX4

IN

PTQX

PTQX

STAT ACT PROG SRV




2130


19 PID Board

l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 19-30 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 19-30 Types and functions of the PTQX interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives the line signal.

OUT

LC

Transmits the line signal.

TX1-TX4

LC

Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment.

RX1-RX4

LC

Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.


19.5.6 Valid Slots The PTQX occupies two slots. Table 19-31 shows the valid slots for the PTQX board. Table 19-31 Valid slots for the PTQX board Product

Valid Slots


IU3, IU7, IU13

NOTE

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the PTQX board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the PTQX occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the PTQX displayed on the NM is IU3.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2131


19 PID Board

19.5.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX The characteristic code for the PTQX consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 19-32. Table 19-32 Characteristic code for the PTQX Code

Description

Description

The first three digits

The frequency of optical signal

The last three digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side.

The last three digits


The last three digits of the frequency value of the last channel of signals on the WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12PTQX is 605385. l

"605385" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 196.05 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 193.85 THz.


Display of Physical Ports Table 19-33 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 19-33 Mapping between the physical ports on the PTQX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

TX1/RX1

3

TX2/RX2

4

TX3/RX3

5

TX4/RX4

6


2132


19 PID Board

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 19-20, Figure 19-21, and Figure 19-22 show the NM ports on the PTQX board. Table 19-34 lists the indication of each port. Figure 19-20 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (cross-connections of client-side services) Client side 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)














WDM side



138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1

1(IN/OUT)

140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 Cross-connect module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2133


19 PID Board

Figure 19-21 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (backplane-side ODU1-level cross-connections) Backplane

WDM side




134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4


1(IN/OUT)

137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 Cross-connect module



Figure 19-22 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (backplane-side ODU2-level cross-connections) Backplane









WDM side

137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 Cross-connect module


1(IN/OUT)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2134


19 PID Board

Table 19-34 Description of ports on the PTQX Port Name

Description

RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4


ClientLP1-ClientLP4


ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.

ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4


OCHLP1-OCHLP12


IN/OUT

This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.

19.5.9 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site. If the PTQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the PTQX board, as shown in Figure 19-23. by

l

If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the PTQX board on the U2000, as shown in Figure 19-24.

l

If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the PTQX board on the U2000, as shown by

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

in Figure 19-23.

The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-toone cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the U2000. For details, see Figure 19-25.


2135


19 PID Board

Figure 19-23 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU2 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1

2


Other board except ELQX


Client side

WDM side 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1


1






PTQX board

The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1 2

2136


19 PID Board

Figure 19-24 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU1 level) Cross-connect module

Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1

Other board except ELQX

1

WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4


PTQX board

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


1

2137


19 PID Board

Figure 19-25 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1









ELQX board

WDM side 1

144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1






137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 2



PTQX board









ELQX board

Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group

1

Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group

2

19.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the PTQX, refer toTable 19-35.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2138


19 PID Board

Table 19-35 PTQX parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status










10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64



Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G)



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2139


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On



Enabled, Disabled Default: l Client side: Enabled

LPT Enabled


Service Mode

Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT) function. Specifies the service mode for a board. l Automatic indicates that channel resources can be managed flexibly. For example, when the parameter is set to Automatic for an ODU2 channel, the ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel can be provisioned with ODU1 signals if there is no ODU2 signal from the backplane, but they cannot be provisioned with any ODU1 signal if there is an ODU2 signal from the backplane. l ODU1 indicates that the channel must be provisioned with an ODU1 signal. (This is the similar case for the ODU2 value.) If the parameter is set to ODU2 for a channel, the ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel cannot be provisioned with any ODU1 signal.

FEC Working State



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2140


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC


Default: AFEC

FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. This parameter is automatically set to AFEC when you set Service Type to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping to Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G). Actual Band Type

-


Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780



C, CWDM Default: C





Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2141


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

Line Rate



Default: Standard Mode SD Trigger Condition



PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status



19.5.11 PTQX Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2142


19 PID Board

Bo ard





TN 12P TQ X

N/A


200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN

N/A

10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

NOTE



Unit

Optical Module Type





Line code format

-

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM

SLM

SLM

MLM


-

10 km (6.2 mi.)

40 km (24.9 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)

0.3 km (0.2 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2143


Parameter

19 PID Board

Unit

Optical Module Type






nm

1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm

-1

2

4

-1.3


dBm

-6

-4.7

0

-7.3


dB

6

8.2

9

3


dB

30

30

30

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.691-compliant


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

APD

PIN


nm

1260 to 1565

1260 to 1605

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm

-11

-14

-24

-7.5


dBm

-14.4

-15.8

-24

-7.5


2144


Parameter

19 PID Board

Unit

Optical Module Type






dBm

0.5

-1

-7

-1


dBm

-1

-1

-7

-1

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

-12



Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format


-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

9


THz

192.10 to 196.05


GHz

±10


nm

0.3


2145


19 PID Board

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP


dB

35


ps/nm

800


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 19-38 PID optical module specifications Parameter

Unit


Value 200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN

-

NRZ


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.05

Maximum mean launched power (single wavelength)

dBm

+1

Minimum mean launched power (single wavelength)

dBm

-7


dB

6.5


GHz

±5


nm

0.8


dB

30


2146


19 PID Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Dispersion tolerance

Value 200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN

ps/nm

200


-

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled) EOL (single wavelength)

dBm

-10.5

Minimum receiver overload (single wavelength)

dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27



l

Weight: 3 kg (7 lb.)




TN12PTQX

93.6

107.6


19.6 ENQ2 ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

19.6.1 Version Description The available functional version of the ENQ2 board is TN54.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2147


19 PID Board






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N5 4E N Q2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

19.6.2 Application The ENQ2 board converts 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is similar.

Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the ENQ2 Board Figure 19-26 200G system built with the ENQ2 board

Client-side service

Clientside service

Clientside service

Tributary board

64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ Tributary 8xODU2e board

32xODU0/ 16xODU1/ 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e

TN54 ENQ2

4xOTU2/ OTU2e


Tributary board

OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E

TN55 NPO2E

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN54 ENQ2

Client-side service


OBU 1P1

Tributary board


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

TN55 NPO2

8xOTU2/ OTU2e

8xOTU2/ OTU2e


TN55 NPO2


Tributary board

Clientside service

Tributary board

Clientside service

2148


19 PID Board

Application Scenario 2: 120G system Built with the ENQ2 Board Figure 19-27 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN55NPO2)

Clientside service

Tributary board



OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2

Clientside service

Tributary board


TN54 ENQ2

Tributary board

Clientside service

TN55 NPO2 OBU 1P1

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN54 ENQ2


Tributary board

Clientside service

Figure 19-28 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN54NPO2)

Clientside service

64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e Tributary board


OA

OA

TN54 NPO2

Clientside service

Tributary board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

TN54 NPO2 OA


TN54 ENQ2

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

Clientside service

OA 4xOTU2/ OTU2e


TN54 ENQ2


Clientside service

2149


19 PID Board

NOTE

In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is configured with the TN54PQ2 board. If the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2/ TN55NPO2E board only can process a maximum of 4 x 10 Gbit/s services. The TN55NPO2ES02 and TN55NPO2ES04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance shorter than or equal to 40 km. The TN55NPO2EL02 and TN55NPO2EL04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance longer than 40 km but shorter than or equal to 80 km. The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board. The TN55NPO2S06 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES02 board, or the TN55NPO2S08 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES04 board. When the TN55NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end.

19.6.3 Functions and Features The ENQ2 supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 19-39 provides the details about the functions and features of the ENQ2. Table 19-39 Functions and features of the ENQ2 Function or Feature

Description

Basic function

ENQ2 converts signals as follows: 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/ ODU2e<->4 x OTU2/OTU2e Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e services.


Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 or 16 channels of ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the ENQ2 board and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM function for ODU0. l Supports TCM function for ODU1. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specification


ESC function

supported

PRBS test


LPT function

Not supported Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2150


19 PID Board

Function or Feature

Description

FEC coding




Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Supported only when the board works in standard mode.

Protection scheme


Loopback

WDM side


Inloop Outloop

Channel Loopback

Inloop Outloop

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Supported NOTE The TN54ENQ2 board supports WDM-side loopbacks only when working in compatible mode.

Supported NOTE The TN54ENQ2 board supports ODU2 channel loopback only when working in standard mode.

-

2151


19 PID Board

Function or Feature

Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2152


Function or Feature

19 PID Board



19.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ENQ2 board consists of the signal processing module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 19-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2153


19 PID Board

Signal Flow Figure 19-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2 32XODU0/16XODU1/ 4XODU2/4XODU2e


4XOTU2/ 4XOTU2e




Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



In the signal flow of the ENQ2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the ENQ2 to the WDM side of the NPO2/NPO2E, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing for the signals. Finally, four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the NPO2/NPO2E board through the backplane.

l

Receive direction The signal processing module receives four channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the NPO2/NPO2E board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals. The signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2154


19 PID Board

Module Function l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. NOTE

The signal processing module on the ENQ2 board has fixed cross-connections to the NPO2/ NPO2E board.

– Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2/NPO2E and the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ ODU2 signals – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals. l

Control and communication module – Controls board operations. – Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the SCC board.

l

Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.

19.6.5 Front Panel There are four indicators on the front panel of the ENQ2.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-30 shows the front panel of the ENQ2.

ENQ2

STAT ACT PROG SRV

ENQ2

Figure 19-30 Front panel of the ENQ2



l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2155


l

19 PID Board



19.6.6 Valid Slots The ENQ2 occupies one slot. The ENQ2 board must work with the NPO2 or NPO2E board to form a PID group. In the same PID group, the ENQ2 board must be located on the left of the NPO2 or NPO2E board. For example, when the ENQ2 board is located in slot IU1, the NPO2 or NPO2E board must be located in slots IU2-IU3. (On the U2000, the NPO2 or NPO2E board slot is displayed as IU3.) Table 19-40 lists the valid slots for the ENQ2 and NPO2/NPO2E boards in a PID group. Table 19-40 Valid slots for the boards in a PID group PID Group

8800 T64 Subrack

8800 T32 Subrack

8800 T16 Subrack

ENQ2

NPO2/ NPO2E

ENQ2

NPO2/ NPO2E

ENQ2

NPO2/ NPO2E

1

IU1

IU3

IU1

IU3

IU1

IU3

2

IU5

IU7

IU5

IU7

IU5

IU7

3

IU11

IU13

IU12

IU14

IU11

IU13

4

IU15

IU17

IU16

IU18

IU15

IU17

5

IU19

IU21

IU20

IU22

N/A

6

IU23

IU25

IU24

IU26

N/A

7

IU27

IU29

IU29

IU31

N/A

8

IU31

IU33

IU33

IU35

N/A

9

IU35

IU37

N/A

N/A

10

IU39

IU41

N/A

N/A

11

IU45

IU47

N/A

N/A

12

IU49

IU51

N/A

N/A

13

IU53

IU55

N/A

N/A

14

IU57

IU59

N/A

N/A

15

IU61

IU63

N/A

N/A

16

IU65

IU67

N/A

N/A

19.6.7 Physical and Logical Ports This section describes the logical ports of the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2156


19 PID Board

Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The TN54ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. NOTE

For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.

l

Figure 19-31 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in compatible mode. Table 19-41 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.

l

Figure 19-32 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in standard mode. Table 19-42 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board. NOTE

A TN54ENQ2 board can work in only one mode at a time.

Figure 19-31 port diagrams for the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode) Other tributary board/ line board/PID board

Other tributary board/ line board/PID board

Other tributary board/ line board/PID board

Backplane 32 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2

16 x ODU1

4 x ODU2/ODU2e

51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2 ODU2LP1)-1







74 (ODU2LP4/ ODU2 ODU2LP4)-1

NOTE

There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2157


19 PID Board Cross-connect module

ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path


Table 19-41 Description of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

ODU0LP1-ODU0LP16

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2.

ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4


ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4



2158


19 PID Board

Figure 19-32 port diagrams for the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode) Backplane

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12) ODU2:1

4xODU2/ 4XODU2e

ODU2:1

Other tributary board/line board/PID board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 16xODU1 ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4

NPO2/ NPO2E

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ODU0:1 ODU1:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1

ODU2:1 ODU1:4

ODU0:2

32xODU0



ODU0:2

NOTE

Service cross-connections of the TN54ENQ2(standard mode) board are configured on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board (either in standard mode) using the NMS. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. Cross-connect module

ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2159


19 PID Board

Table 19-42 Description of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode) Port Name

Description

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9–12)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1–4)-ODU0:(1–2)


1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9–12)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1–4)


1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9–12)

Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2e signals that are received through the backplane.

1(IN/OUT)


19.6.8 Configuration of Cross-connection This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site. l

The side.

cross-connection is used to locally add services to or drop services from the WDM

l

The

cross-connection is used to locally pass through services on the WDM side.

The ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. When the ENQ2 board works in standard mode, service cross-connections are configured on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board using the NMS. The ODUk services processed by the ENQ2 board are mapped onto OCH9-OCH12 optical channels on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board in standard mode. For details, see Configuration of Cross-connection (NPO2) and Configuration of Cross-connection (NPO2E).

ODU0 Cross-Connections Figure 19-33 shows the created ODU0 cross-connections.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2160


19 PID Board

Figure 19-33 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU0 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

1

Tributary board (compatible mode)

Tributary board (standard mode)


WDM side


ENQ2 board

2 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2


WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2

164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

Line/PID board (compatible mode)

Line/PID board (standard mode)

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 Cross-connect module

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2161


19 PID Board

Figure 19-34 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU1 level) Client side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

1




WDM side


ENQ2 board

2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4 Cross-connect module

WDM side

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4






Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2162


19 PID Board

Figure 19-35 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU2 level) Client side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

1




WDM side 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1

ENQ2 board

2

72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 Cross-connect module


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1





Cross-Connections Between the NPO2/NPO2E and ENQ2 Figure 19-36 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2. Figure 19-37 shows the cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and TN54ENQ2. Figure 19-38 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2163


19 PID Board

Figure 19-36 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2 WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12

ENQ2 board


compatible mode


WDM side 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 compatible mode 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1

TN55NPO2 board

133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1

The cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2164


19 PID Board

Figure 19-37 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and TN54ENQ2 WDM side


ENQ2 board （compatible mode）

73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 Cross-connect module WDM side 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1

TN54NPO2 board （compatible mode）



Figure 19-38 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2 WDM side

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9

ENQ2 board

1(IN/OUT)--OCH:10

(standard mode)

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12

Cross-connect module WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9

NPO2E board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8

(standard mode)

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1


The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2165


19 PID Board

19.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. Table 19-43 ENQ2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Loopback



Default: Non-Loopback Service Mode

Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

Specifies the service mode for a board. l Automatic indicates that channel resources can be managed flexibly. For example, when the parameter is set to Automatic for an ODU2 channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel can be provisioned with ODU0/ ODU1 signals if there is no ODU2 signal from the backplane, but they cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal if there is an ODU2 signal from the backplane. l ODU0 indicates that the channel must be provisioned with an ODU0 signal. (This is the similar case for the ODU1, and ODU2 values.) If the parameter is set to ODU2 for a channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2166


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

FEC Working State

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Enabled





Enabled, Disabled

Line Rate


Default: Disabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. Specifies the line rate of OTN signals. See Line Rate for more information.

Default: Standard Mode PRBS Test Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2167


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

19.6.10 ENQ2 Specifications The specifications include the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



l





TN54ENQ2

40

44


19.7 NPO2 NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board

19.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the NPO2 board are TN54 and TN55.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2168


19 PID Board

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N5 4N P O2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

T N5 5N P O2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N


Function: The TN54NPO2 board must work with a dispersion compensation module. The TN55NPO2S board supports 40 km applications without working with a dispersion compensation module. The TN55NPO2L board supports 80 km applications without working with a dispersion compensation module.

l

Appearance: For the front panels of the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2, see 19.7.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification: For the specification of each version, see 19.7.12 NPO2 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN54NPO2

TN55NPO2

The TN55NPO2 can be created as 54NPO2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55NPO2 functions as the TN54NPO2. NOTE When you substitute a TN55NPO2 for a TN54NPO2, configure a TN54PQ2, otherwise, the latter four wavelengths cannot be processed.

TN55NPO2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

None

-


2169


19 PID Board

Type Table 19-44 lists the wavelength numbers and the types of NPO2. Table 19-44 Wavelength assignment table of NPO2 Type of NPO2

Wavelength No. of NPO2

TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01

1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29

TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/ TN55NPO2L02/TN55NPO2S0A

2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03

3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31

TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/ TN55NPO2L04/TN55NPO2S0B

4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

TN54NPO205

49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77

TN54NPO206/TN55NPO2S06/ TN55NPO2L06

50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78

TN54NPO207

51, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 75, 79

TN54NPO208/TN55NPO2S08/ TN55NPO2L08

52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80

A PID group that consists of the TN54NPO2, TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2 boards, as shown in Table 19-45, Table 19-46, Table 19-47. Table 19-48 lists the wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies. Table 19-45 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2) (200G system)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Wavelengt h Combinati on No.

Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E

Wavelength No. for TN54ENQ2

Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2

1

TN55NPO2ES02/ TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

34, 38, 42, 46

TN55NPO2S06/ TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78

2

TN55NPO2ES04/ TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

36, 40, 44, 48

TN55NPO2S08/ TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80


2170


19 PID Board

Table 19-46 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2+ENQ2) (120G system) Wavelength Combination No.

Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/ TN55NPO2

Wavelength No. of TN54ENQ2

1

TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29

33, 37, 41, 45

2

TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/ TN55NPO2L02/TN55NPO2S0A: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

34, 38, 42, 46

3

TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31

35, 39, 43, 47

4

TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/ TN55NPO2L04/TN55NPO2S0B: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

36, 40, 44, 48

Table 19-47 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2) (80G system)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Wavelength Combination No.

Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2

1

TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29

2

TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/TN55NPO2L02/TN55NPO2S0A: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

3

TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31

4

TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/TN55NPO2L04/TN55NPO2S0B: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

5

TN54NPO205: 49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77

6

TN54NPO206/TN55NPO2S06/TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78

7

TN54NPO207: 51, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 75, 79

8

TN54NPO208/TN55NPO2S08/TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80


2171


19 PID Board

NOTE

The ENQ2 board must be installed in the left slot next to the slot holding the NPO2 board. Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCM-free transmission over long distance. The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should be installed on the TN55NPO2, see 19.7.6 Front Panel. Each type of PID boards must work with specific wavelengths. Therefore, select the required PID boards according to the network planning principles.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

1

196.05

1529.16

41

194.05

1544.92

2

196.00

1529.55

42

194.00

1545.32

3

195.95

1529.94

43

193.95

1545.72

4

195.90

1530.33

44

193.90

1546.12

5

195.85

1530.72

45

193.85

1546.52

6

195.80

1531.12

46

193.80

1546.92

7

195.75

1531.51

47

193.75

1547.32

8

195.70

1531.90

48

193.70

1547.72

9

195.65

1532.29

49

193.65

1548.11

10

195.60

1532.68

50

193.60

1548.51

11

195.55

1533.07

51

193.55

1548.91

12

195.50

1533.47

52

193.50

1549.32

13

195.45

1533.86

53

193.45

1549.72

14

195.40

1534.25

54

193.40

1550.12

15

195.35

1534.64

55

193.35

1550.52

16

195.30

1535.04

56

193.30

1550.92

17

195.25

1535.43

57

193.25

1551.32

18

195.20

1535.82

58

193.20

1551.72

19

195.15

1536.22

59

193.15

1552.12

20

195.10

1536.61

60

193.10

1552.52

21

195.05

1537.00

61

193.05

1552.93


2172


19 PID Board

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

22

195.00

1537.40

62

193.00

1553.33

23

194.95

1537.79

63

192.95

1553.73

24

194.90

1538.19

64

192.90

1554.13

25

194.85

1538.58

65

192.85

1554.54

26

194.80

1538.98

66

192.80

1554.94

27

194.75

1539.37

67

192.75

1555.34

28

194.70

1539.77

68

192.70

1555.75

29

194.65

1540.16

69

192.65

1556.15

30

194.60

1540.56

70

192.60

1556.55

31

194.55

1540.95

71

192.55

1556.96

32

194.50

1541.35

72

192.50

1557.36

33

194.45

1541.75

73

192.45

1557.77

34

194.40

1542.14

74

192.40

1558.17

35

194.35

1542.54

75

192.35

1558.58

36

194.30

1542.94

76

192.30

1558.98

37

194.25

1543.33

77

192.25

1559.39

38

194.20

1543.73

78

192.20

1559.79

39

194.15

1544.13

79

192.15

1560.20

40

194.10

1544.53

80

192.10

1560.61



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the support for electrical-layer ASON.



2173


19 PID Board



Added the TN55NPO2S0A and TN55NPO2S0B boards.

Two short-reach transmission PID boards are added.

19.7.3 Application The NPO2 board is a PID unit. The NPO2 board converts 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32 channels of ODU1 signals, or 8 channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals into 8 channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2/OTU2e signals. In addition, the NPO2 board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. The NPO2 board receives four OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board through the backplane. Then the NPO2 board multiplexes the four OTU2/OTU2e signals with its own eight OTU2/OTU2e signals into one optical signal for output. The reverse process is similar.

Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the NPO2 Board Figure 19-39 200G system built with the NPO2 board

Client-side service

Clientside service

Clientside service

Tributary board

Tributary board



TO

TN54 ENQ2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN55 NPO2

IN

TO2

OUT RO2

RI

TN55 NPO2E

TN55 NPO2E RI

8xOTU2/ OTU2e

OBU 1P1

OBU 1P1

Tributary board

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TO

8xOTU2/ OTU2e TO2 IN RO2 OUT


TN54 ENQ2

TN55 NPO2

Client-side service



Tributary board

Clientside service

Tributary board

Clientside service

2174


19 PID Board

Application Scenario 2: 120G system Built with the NPO2 Board Figure 19-40 120G system built with the TN55NPO2 board

Clientside service

Tributary board


64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e OUT

IN

OBU 1P1

TN55 NPO2

Clientside service

Tributary board


TN55 NPO2 IN

TN54 ENQ2

Clientside service

Tributary board

OUT

OBU 1P1

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN54 ENQ2


Tributary board

Clientside service

Figure 19-41 120G system built with the TN54NPO2 board

Clientside service


64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ Tributary 8xODU2e board OUT

OA TN54 NPO2

Clientside service

IN

OA


TN54 ENQ2

Tributary board

OA

OA

IN

OUT

Clientside service

TN54 NPO2

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN54 ENQ2


Clientside service

Application Scenario 3: 80G system Built with the NPO2 Board Figure 19-42 80G system built with the TN55NPO2 board

Clientside service

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


OUT

TN55 NPO2

IN

OBU 1P1

OBU 1P1


IN

OUT

TN55 NPO2


Tributary board

Clientside service

2175


19 PID Board

Figure 19-43 80G system built with the TN54NPO2 board

Client-side service

Tributary board


OUT

TN54 NPO2

IN

IN

OA

OA

OA

OA

OUT

TN54 NPO2


Tributary board

Client-side service

NOTE

In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is configured with the TN54PQ2 board. If the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2/ TN55NPO2E board can process a maximum of 4 x 10 Gbit/s services. The TN55NPO2ES02 and TN55NPO2ES04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance shorter than or equal to 40 km. The TN55NPO2EL02 and TN55NPO2EL04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance longer than 40 km but shorter than or equal to 80 km. The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board. The TN55NPO2S06 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES02 board, or the TN55NPO2S08 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES04 board. When the TN55NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end.

19.7.4 Functions and Features The NPO2 provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 19-49 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2176


19 PID Board

Table 19-49 Functions and features of the NPO2 Functi on and Featur e

Description

Basic functio n

l 64 x ODU0/32 x ODU1/8 x ODU2<->8 x OTU2 l 8 x ODU2e<->8 x OTU2e l Accesses four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITUT G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals. l Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCM-free transmission over long distance.

Crossconnec t capabil ities

Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board and the crossconnect board.

OTN functio n

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in the ITUT G.709. l Supports PM function for ODU0. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2. l Supports SM function for OTU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specifi cation


ESC functio n

Supported

PRBS test functio n


LPT functio n

Not supported


2177


19 PID Board

Functi on and Featur e

Description

FEC coding


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Alarms and perfor mance events monito ring


IEEE 1588v 2

Supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 signals.

Physic al clock

The TN55NPO2 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane.

Optical -layer ASON

Not supported

Electri callayer ASON

Supported only by the TN55NPO2 board working in standard mode.

Protect ion schem e


Loopb ack

Board

WDM Side




TN54N PO2

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported


NOTE For the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2 boards (in compatible mode), the IEEE 1588v2 signal can be transmitted through any of the eight optical ports on the board. For the TN55NPO2 board (in standard mode), the IEEE 1588v2 signal must be transmitted through optical port 1.


2178



19 PID Board

Description

TN55N PO2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supports WDM-side loopbacks only when working in compatible mode.

Supported


Supported

Supports ODU2 channel loopback only when working in standard mode.

2179


19 PID Board


Description

Protoc ols or standar ds compli ance

Protocol s or standard s for transpar ent transmis sion (nonperform ance monitori ng)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2180



19 PID Board

Description

Protocol s or standard s for service processi ng (perform ance monitori ng)


19.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NPO2 board consists of the signal processing module, PID module, control and communication module, 1588 module, and power supply module. Figure 19-44 and Figure 19-45 show the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2181


19 PID Board

Figure 19-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NPO2 64XODU0/32XODU1/ 8XODU2/8XODU2e


4XOTU2/ 4XOTU2e

8 Cross-connect module

1588


8

OUT

PID Module IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2182


19 PID Board

Figure 19-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN55NPO2 64XODU0/32XODU1 /8XODU2/8XODU2e

Cross-connect module 1588


4XOTU2/4XOTU2e

PQ2 service processing sub-board

8 OTN processing module

8

OUT PID Module IN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



Signal Flow In the signal flow of the NPO2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2 to the WDM side of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals to the PID module. The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2183


19 PID Board

The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.

Module Function l

PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e signals – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC coding and decoding. – PQ2 service processing board Processes 4 x 10 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided on the TN55NPO2 board. NOTE

After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2 board that works in standard mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000.

l

1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2184


19 PID Board

19.7.6 Front Panel There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label, and PQ2 sub-board on the front panel of the NPO2.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-46 shows the front panel of the TN54NPO2. Figure 19-47 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2. Figure 19-46 Front panel of the TN54NPO2

CAUTION

NPO2

IN

CAUTION


OUT

NPO2

STAT ACT PROG SRV


NPO2

IN

CAUTION


CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

OUT

NPO2

STAT ACT PROG SRV

Figure 19-47 Front panel of the TN55NPO2

PQ2 not installed

CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEWDIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

NPO2

PQ2

STAT

IN

CAUTION



OUT

NPO2

STAT ACT PROG SRV

PQ2 installed

NOTE

The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For details, see 19.7.1 Version Description.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2185


19 PID Board

Indicators There are four indicators on the NPO2 panel. l


l


l


l


There is one indicator on the TN54PQ2 panel. l


For details about indicators on the board, see A.4 Board Indicators.

Interfaces Table 19-50 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 19-50 Types and functions of the NPO2 interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



19.7.7 Valid Slots The NPO2 occupies two slots. The NPO2 board itself supports backplane cross-connections of 80 Gbit/s ODUk signals. However, the NPO2 board supports backplane cross-connections of 120 Gbit/s ODUk signals when it works with an ENQ2 board to form a PID group. In a PID group, the ENQ2 board must be located on the left of the NPO2 board. For example, when the ENQ2 board is located in slot IU1, the NPO2 board must be located in slots IU2-IU3. (On the U2000, the NPO2 board slot is displayed as IU3.) Table 19-51 lists the valid slots for the NPO2 board when it works alone. For the valid slots for the NPO2 board when it works with an ENQ2 board in a PID group, see ENQ2 Valid Slots. Table 19-51 Valid slots for the NPO2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots


IU3, IU7, IU13, IU17, IU21, IU25, IU29, IU33, IU37, IU41, IU47, IU51, IU55, IU59, IU63, IU67


2186


19 PID Board

Product

Valid Slots


IU3, IU7, IU14, IU18, IU22, IU26, IU31, IU35


IU3, IU7, IU13, IU17

NOTE

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the NPO2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the NPO2 occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2 displayed on the NM is IU3.

19.7.8 Characteristic Code of the NPO2 The characteristic code for the NPO2 consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 19-52. Table 19-52 Characteristic code for the NPO2 Code

Description

Description







For example, the characteristic code for the TN54NPO2 is 605385. l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2187


19 PID Board

Display of Physical Ports Table 19-53 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 19-53 Serial numbers of the interfaces on the NPO2 displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, and the TN54NPO2 board can work only in compatible mode. NOTE

For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.

l

Figure 19-48 shows the board model of the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board in compatible mode. Table 19-54 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.

l

Figure 19-49 shows the board model of the T55NPO2 board in standard mode. Table 19-55 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2188


19 PID Board

Figure 19-48 Diagram of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode) Other tributary board/line board/PID board


Other tributary board/line board/PID board Backplane

64 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2


8 x ODU2/ODU2e

32 x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2 ODU2LP1)-1

133(OCHLP1 /OCHLP1)-1


IN/OUT 189 (ODU0LP29/ODU0LP29)-1 189 (ODU0LP29/ODU0LP29)-2


58 ODU1 (ODU1LP8/ODU1LP8)-1 78 (ODU2LP8/ ODU2 ODU2LP8)-1 58 ODU1 (ODU1LP8/ODU1LP8)-4

140(OCHLP8 /OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9 /OCHLP9)-1 144(OCHLP12 /OCHLP12)-1


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path


NOTE

There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000.

Table 19-54 Description of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

ODU0LP1-ODU0LP32

Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2.


2189


19 PID Board

Port Name

Description

ODU1LP1-ODU1LP8


ODU2LP1-ODU2LP8


OCHLP1-OCHLP12


IN/OUT

This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.

Figure 19-49 Diagram of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode)

12xODU2/ 12XODU2e


OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ODU1:1 ODU2:1

OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12


ODU1:4 48xODU1 ODU1:1 IN/OUT

ODU1:4

ODU0:1

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ODU1:1


ODU2:1

OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12

ODU1:4

ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1

ODU1:1

ODU1:4

ODU0:2

NOTE

The OCH:9 to OCH:12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. The TN55NPO2 board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the TN54PQ2 service processing board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2190


19 PID Board


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path

Table 19-55 Description of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode) Port Name

Description



1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1–12)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1–4)




1(IN/OUT)



The side.


l

The


The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, the TN54NPO2 board can work only in compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.

ODU0 Cross-Connections Figure 19-50 and Figure 19-51 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2191


19 PID Board

Figure 19-50 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN55NPO2 (ODU0 level) Client side




Tributary board

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 (compatinble mode) 1



WDM side


compatible mode 192(ODU0LP32/ODU0LP32)-1 192(ODU0LP32/ODU0LP32)-2

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

TN55NPO2 board


standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 Cross-connect module WDM side


Line/PID board (compatible mode) 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2



Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2192


19 PID Board





Tributary board




WDM side


TN54NPO2 board (compatible mode)

2 192(ODU0LP32/ODU0LP32)-1 192(ODU0LP32/ODU0LP32)-2

Cross-connect module WDM side



Line/PID board (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2193


19 PID Board





Tributary board




WDM side


TN55NPO2 board

compatible mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

2

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 Cross-connect module WDM side





The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2194


19 PID Board





Tributary board

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 (compatinble mode) Cross-connect module

1


WDM side

TN54NPO2 board (compatible mode)

2







The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2195


19 PID Board





Tributary board


1



compatible mode 77(ODU2LP7/ODU2LP7)-1 78(ODU2LP8/ODU2LP8)-1

TN55NPO2 board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:2-ODU2:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:7-ODU2:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1

2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1 Cross-connect module






Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2196


19 PID Board





Tributary board


1



TN54NPO2 board

2

(compatible mode)





Line/PID board (compatible mode) Line/PID board (standard mode)


Cross-Connections Between the NPO2 and ENQ2 Figure 19-56 and Figure 19-57 show the created cross-connections between the NPO2 and ENQ2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2197


19 PID Board

Figure 19-56 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and ENQ2 WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12

ENQ2 board


compatible mode


WDM side 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 compatible mode 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1

TN55NPO2 board

133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8

standard mode

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2198


19 PID Board

Figure 19-57 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and ENQ2 WDM side


ENQ2 board （compatible mode）

73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 Cross-connect module WDM side 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1

TN54NPO2 board （compatible mode）



Example of Service Cross-Connections Figure 19-58 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NPO2 board. One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e signals. Figure 19-58 Example of service cross-connections on the NPO2 board ODU0

TOM TOM

ODU0 ODU1 ODU1

NS2

IN/OUT

NPO2

ODU1 ODU2/

TDX/ ODU2e ND2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2199


19 PID Board

19.7.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NPO2, refer to Table 19-56. Table 19-56 NPO2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status




Channel Loopback




NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN55NPO2 only in the compatible mode.




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2200


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

Service Mode

Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2


Default: Automatic

l Automatic indicates that channel resources can be managed flexibly. For example, when the parameter is set to Automatic for an ODU2 channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel can be provisioned with ODU0/ ODU1 signals if there is no ODU2 signal from the backplane, but they cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal if there is an ODU2 signal from the backplane. l ODU0 indicates that the channel must be provisioned with an ODU0 signal. (This is the similar case for the ODU1, and ODU2 values.) If the parameter is set to ODU2 for a channel, the ODU0/ODU1 channels corresponding to the ODU2 channel cannot be provisioned with any ODU0/ODU1 signal. NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2 (compatible mode).

Off, On

Laser Status

Default: On


FEC Working State



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2201


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC


Default: FEC

FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. Band Type

-



-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0

See Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only C band is supported.


C, CWDM Default: C

Sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only C band is supported.


Enabled, Disabled

Line Rate


Default: Disabled

Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. Specifies the line rate of OTN signals. See Line Rate for more information.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2202


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled




19.7.12 NPO2 Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN54NP O2

200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN

N/A

TN55NP O2

800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (40 km)

N/A


NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2203


19 PID Board

WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 19-57 PID optical module specifications Parameter

Unit


-

Value 800 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (40 km)

1500 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (80 km)


NRZ

NRZ

NRZ


THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


dBm

+2

+2

+2


dBm

-4

-6.5

-6.5


dB

6

6

6.5


GHz

±5

±5

±5


nm

0.8

0.8

0.8


dB

30

30

30


ps/nm

800

1500

200


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650


2204


19 PID Board

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled) EOL (single wavelength)

dBm

Value 800 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (40 km)

1500 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (80 km)


TN55NPO2S01 to TN55NPO2S04: -13.5

-12

-12

TN55NPO2S06, TN55NPO2S08: -15 TN55NPO2S0A, TN55NPO2S0B: -15


dBm

3

3

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27

-27

Mechanical Specifications TN54NPO2: l


l


TN55NPO2: l


l


TN54PQ2: l

Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 57 mm (2.24 in.) x 24.5 mm (0.96 in.) x 68 mm (2.69 in.)

l


Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board



TN54NPO2

134

147


2205


19 PID Board

Board



TN55NPO2

143

157.3

TN54PQ2

1.1

1.2


19.8 NPO2E NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20–channel extended

19.8.1 Version Description The available functional version of the NPO2E board is TN55.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N5 5N P O2 E

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Type The TN55NPO2E board has four types: TN55NPO2ES02, TN55NPO2ES04, TN55NPO2EL02, and TN55NPO2EL04, which process different wavelengths. l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The TN55NPO2ES02/TN55NPO2EL02 board processes wavelengths 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, and 30. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2206


l

19 PID Board

The TN55NPO2ES04/TN55NPO2EL04 board processes wavelengths 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, and 32.

A PID group that consists of the TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2 boards, as shown in Table 19-58, Table 19-59 and Table 19-60. Table 19-61 lists the mappings between wavelength numbers, wavelengths, and frequencies. Table 19-58 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2)(200G system) Wavelengt h Combinati on No.



Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2

1

TN55NPO2ES02/ TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

34, 38, 42, 46

TN55NPO2S06/ TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78

2

TN55NPO2ES04/ TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

36, 40, 44, 48

TN55NPO2S08/ TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80

Table 19-59 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2)(120G system) Waveleng th Combinat ion No.



1

TN55NPO2ES02/TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

34, 38, 42, 46

2

TN55NPO2ES04/TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32

36, 40, 44, 48

Table 19-60 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2)(80G system)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Wavelengt h Combinati on No.


1

TN55NPO2ES02/TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30

2

TN55NPO2ES04/TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32


2207


19 PID Board

NOTE

The TN55NPO2E can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4th, 8th, 12th, and 16th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 20th, 24th, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should be installed on the TN55NPO2E, see 19.8.6 Front Panel. The TN54ENQ2 board must be installed in the left slot next to the slot holding the TN55NPO2E board. The TN55NPO2E board supports DCM-free transmission over long distance. Each type of PID boards must work with specific wavelengths. Therefore, select the required PID boards according to the network planning principles.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

1

196.05

1529.16

41

194.05

1544.92

2

196.00

1529.55

42

194.00

1545.32

3

195.95

1529.94

43

193.95

1545.72

4

195.90

1530.33

44

193.90

1546.12

5

195.85

1530.72

45

193.85

1546.52

6

195.80

1531.12

46

193.80

1546.92

7

195.75

1531.51

47

193.75

1547.32

8

195.70

1531.90

48

193.70

1547.72

9

195.65

1532.29

49

193.65

1548.11

10

195.60

1532.68

50

193.60

1548.51

11

195.55

1533.07

51

193.55

1548.91

12

195.50

1533.47

52

193.50

1549.32

13

195.45

1533.86

53

193.45

1549.72

14

195.40

1534.25

54

193.40

1550.12

15

195.35

1534.64

55

193.35

1550.52

16

195.30

1535.04

56

193.30

1550.92

17

195.25

1535.43

57

193.25

1551.32

18

195.20

1535.82

58

193.20

1551.72

19

195.15

1536.22

59

193.15

1552.12

20

195.10

1536.61

60

193.10

1552.52

21

195.05

1537.00

61

193.05

1552.93


2208


19 PID Board

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Wavelengt h No.

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

22

195.00

1537.40

62

193.00

1553.33

23

194.95

1537.79

63

192.95

1553.73

24

194.90

1538.19

64

192.90

1554.13

25

194.85

1538.58

65

192.85

1554.54

26

194.80

1538.98

66

192.80

1554.94

27

194.75

1539.37

67

192.75

1555.34

28

194.70

1539.77

68

192.70

1555.75

29

194.65

1540.16

69

192.65

1556.15

30

194.60

1540.56

70

192.60

1556.55

31

194.55

1540.95

71

192.55

1556.96

32

194.50

1541.35

72

192.50

1557.36

33

194.45

1541.75

73

192.45

1557.77

34

194.40

1542.14

74

192.40

1558.17

35

194.35

1542.54

75

192.35

1558.58

36

194.30

1542.94

76

192.30

1558.98

37

194.25

1543.33

77

192.25

1559.39

38

194.20

1543.73

78

192.20

1559.79

39

194.15

1544.13

79

192.15

1560.20

40

194.10

1544.53

80

192.10

1560.61



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the support for electrical-layer ASON.



2209


19 PID Board



Added the TN55NPO2ES02 and TN55NPO2ES04 boards.

Two short-reach transmission PID boards are added.

Added the TN55NPO2E board.

The 200G PID feature is supported.The TN55NPO2E board is added to output 20 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.

19.8.3 Application As a PID board, the NPO2E board performs conversion between 64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8 x ODU2 signals that are cross-connected through the backplane and 8 x OTU2 optical signals over standard wavelengths for a WDM system, between 8 x ODU2e signals and 8 x OTU2e optical signals over standard wavelengths for a WDM system. In addition, the NPO2E board receives four OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board through the backplane. Then the NPO2E board multiplexes the four OTU2/OTU2e signals with its own eight OTU2/OTU2e signals into one optical signal for output. Inside the NPO2E board, there is a red/blue band filter, which converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board and 8 x OTU2/ OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals for output. It also performs the reverse conversion. In addition, the NPO2E board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals.

Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the TN55NPO2E Board Figure 19-59 200G system built with the TN55NPO2E board

Client-side service

Clientside service

Clientside service

Tributary board

Tributary board



TO

TN54 ENQ2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


TN55 NPO2

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN55 NPO2E

OBU 1P1

RI

TN55 NPO2E RI

OBU 1P1

Tributary board

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TO

8xOTU2/ OTU2e IN TO2

8xOTU2/ OTU2e TO2 IN

OUT RO2

RO2 OUT


TN54 ENQ2

TN55 NPO2

Client-side service



Tributary board

Clientside service

Tributary board

Clientside service

2210


19 PID Board


Clientside service

Tributary board


64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e TO

OBU 1P1

RI

TN55 NPO2E

Clientside service

Tributary board


Clientside service

TN55 NPO2E RI

TN54 ENQ2

Tributary board

4xOTU2/ OTU2e

OBU 1P1

TO 4xOTU2/ OTU2e

TN54 ENQ2


Clientside service

Tributary board


Client-side service

Tributary board


TO

TN55 NPO2E

RI

OBU 1P1

OBU 1P1

RI

TO

TN55 NPO2E


Tributary board

Client-side service

NOTE

In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is configured with the TN54PQ2 board. If the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2E/ TN55NPO2 board can process a maximum of 4 x10 Gbit/s services. The TN55NPO2ES02 and TN55NPO2ES04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance shorter than or equal to 40 km. The TN55NPO2EL02 and TN55NPO2EL04 boards apply to transmissions over a distance longer than 40 km but shorter than or equal to 80 km. The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board. The TN55NPO2S06 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES02 board, or the TN55NPO2S08 board must work with the TN55NPO2ES04 board. When the TN55NPO2E board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2211


19 PID Board

19.8.4 Functions and Features The NPO2E provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 19-62 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2E. Table 19-62 Functions and features of the NPO2E Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l 64 x ODU0/32 x ODU1/8 x ODU2<->8 x OTU2 l 8 x ODU2e<->8 x OTU2e l Accesses four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals. l Converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals for output.


Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2E board and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0. l Supports the PM and TCM function for ODU1. l Supports the PM and TCM function for ODU2. l Supports the TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.

WDM specification


ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2212


19 PID Board


Description



IEEE 1588v2

The NPO2E board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 signals.


NOTE The IEEE 1588v2 signal must be transmitted through optical port 1.

Physical clock

The NPO2E board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Supported

Protection scheme


Loopback

Channel Loopback

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-

2213


19 PID Board


Description



IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control (MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol (PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2214


19 PID Board




19.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NPO2E board consists of the signal processing module, PID optical module, control and communication module, IEEE 1588v2 module, red/blue band filter, and power supply module. Figure 19-62 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2E.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2215


19 PID Board

Figure 19-62 Functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2E Backplane (service cross-connection) 4XOTU2/ 4XOTU2e

64XODU0/32XODU1/8X ODU2/8XODU2e

8 Crossconnection module 1588 PQ2 service processing sub-board

OUT

PID Module

8

IN


T01 R01

Red/blue band filter


TO RI T02 R02

Control Memory

CPU

Communication

Control and communication module Required voltage




SCC

Signal Flow In the signal flow of the NPO2E board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2E to the WDM side of the NPO2E, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals to the PID module. The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface. The red/blue band filter converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through the OUT port on the PID optical module and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2216


19 PID Board

the OUT port on another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals and outputs the signals through the TO port to the WDM side. l

Receive direction The red/blue band filter receives one channel of multiplexed signals through the RI port and demultiplexes the signals into two channels of optical signals. It outputs 12 x OTU2/ OTU2e optical signals through the TO1 port to the IN port on the PID optical module and outputs 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals through the TO2 port to the IN port on another NPO2 board. The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/ AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane. NOTE

The NPO2E board can directly output a multiplexed signal through its OUT port to the WDM side and receive a multiplexed signal through its IN port from the WDM side.

Module Function l

Red/blue band filter – In the transmit direction, it multiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (12 wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by the NPO2E board and one channel of multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by another NPO2 board. – In the receive direction, it demultiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (20 wavelengths are multiplexed) from the WDM side and outputs one channel of multiplexed optical signals (12 wavelengths are multiplexed) to the NPO2E board and one channel of multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) to another NPO2 board.

l

PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2217


19 PID Board

Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2E and the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e signals – OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC coding and decoding. – PQ2 service processing board Processes 4 x 10 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided on the TN55NPO2E board. NOTE

After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2E board that works in standard mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000.

l


l


l


19.8.6 Front Panel There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label, and PQ2 sub-board on the front panel of the NPO2E.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-63 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2E.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2218


19 PID Board

IN TO

RI

T01 R01

NPO2E

T02 R02

OUT

CAUTION


STAT ACT PROG SRV

NPO2E

Figure 19-63 Front panel of the TN55NPO2E

PQ2 not installed


RI

PQ2

T01 R01

NPO2E

TO

STAT

IN T02 R02

OUT

CAUTION


STAT ACT PROG SRV

NPO2E

PQ2 installed

NOTE

The TN55NPO2E can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4th, 8th, 12th, and 16th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 20th, 24th, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For details, see 19.8.1 Version Description.

Indicators There are four indicators on the TN55NPO2E panel. l


l


l


l


There is one indicator on the TN54PQ2 panel. l



Interfaces Table 19-63 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 19-63 Types and functions of the TN55NPO2E interfaces

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives 12 channels optical signals that are output by the red/blue band filter or line-side multiplexed optical signals.

OUT

LC

Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side or the red/blue band filter.

R01

LC

Receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals from the OUT port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed).


2219


19 PID Board

Interface

Type

Function

T01

LC

Transmits one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the IN port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed).

R02

LC

Receives optical signals that are output by the OUT port on the NPO2 board.

T02

LC

Sends one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the IN port on the NPO2 board (eight wavelengths are multiplexed).

RI

LC

Receives multiplexed optical signals from the line side.

TO

LC

Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side.


19.8.7 Valid Slots The NPO2E occupies two slots. The NPO2E board itself supports backplane cross-connections of 80 Gbit/s ODUk signals. However, the NPO2E board supports backplane cross-connections of 120 Gbit/s ODUk signals when it works with an ENQ2 board to form a PID group. In a PID group, the ENQ2 board must be located on the left of the NPO2E board. For example, when the ENQ2 board is located in slot IU1, the NPO2E board must be located in slots IU2-IU3. (On the U2000, the NPO2E board slot is displayed as IU3.) Table 19-64 lists the valid slots for the NPO2E board when it works alone. For the valid slots for the NPO2E board when it works with an ENQ2 board in a PID group, see ENQ2 Valid Slots. Table 19-64 Valid slots for the NPO2E board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots








2220


19 PID Board

NOTE

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the NPO2E board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the NPO2E occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2E displayed on the NM is IU3.

19.8.8 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E The characteristic code for the NPO2E consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 19-65. Table 19-65 Characteristic code for the NPO2E Code

Description

Description







For example, the characteristic code for the TN55NPO2E is 600380. l



Display of Physical Ports Table 19-66 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 19-66 Mapping between the physical ports on the NPO2E board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

RI/TO


2221


19 PID Board

Physical Port


RO1/TO1

3

RO2/TO2

4

NOTE


Logical Ports The NPO2E board can work only in standard mode. Figure 19-64 shows the port diagram. NOTE

For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. NOTE

l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2222


19 PID Board

Figure 19-64 Diagram of ports on the NPO2E

12xODU2/ 12XODU2e


OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ODU1:1 ODU2:1

OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12


ODU1:4 48xODU1 ODU1:1 IN/OUT

ODU1:4

ODU0:1

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ODU1:1


ODU2:1

OCH:1

ODU2:1

OCH:12

ODU1:4

ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1

ODU1:1

ODU1:4

ODU0:2


ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module

ODU2 mapping path



ODU0 mapping path

NOTE

The OCH:9 to OCH:12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. The NPO2E board's OCH:5 to OCH:8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the TN54PQ2 service processing board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2223


19 PID Board

Table 19-67 Description of ports on the NPO2E Port Name

Description



1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1–12)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (1–4)



Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2E signals that are received through the backplane.

1(IN/OUT)



The side.


l

The


NOTE

The NPO2E board can work only in standard mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see 12.2.3 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2224


19 PID Board

Figure 19-65 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2E (ODU0 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

1



Cross-connect module WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2


NPO2E board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2




Line/PID board (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2225


19 PID Board

Figure 19-66 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2E (ODU1 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1

1




1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

NPO2E board

2

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 Cross-connect module WDM side





The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2226


19 PID Board

Figure 19-67 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2E (ODU2 level) Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1



1



WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:7 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8

NPO2E board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9

2 Cross-connect module

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12





Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E

Cross-Connections Between the NPO2E and ENQ2 Figure 19-68 shows the created cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2227


19 PID Board

Figure 19-68 Diagram of cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2 WDM side

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9

ENQ2 board

1(IN/OUT)--OCH:10

(standard mode)

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12

Cross-connect module WDM side 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9

NPO2E board

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8

(standard mode)

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1


The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Example of Service Cross-Connections Figure 19-69 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NPO2E board. One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. Figure 19-69 Example of service cross-connections on the NPO2E board ODU0

TOM TOM

ODU0 ODU1

TN55

NS2

ODU1 NPO2E ODU1

IN/OUT

ODU2/

TDX/ ODU2e ND2



2228


19 PID Board

For parameters of the NPO2E, refer to Table 19-68. Table 19-68 NPO2E parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status



Channel Loopback




Off, On Default: On


FEC Working State



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2229


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

FEC Mode

FEC, AFEC


Default: FEC

FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. AFEC Grade

1, 2, 3 Default: 3


Band Type

-



-



-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0

See Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only C band is supported.


C, CWDM Default: C

Sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE Only C band is supported.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




2230


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

Line Rate



Default: Standard Mode PRBS Test Status



NULL Mapping Status



19.8.12 NPO2E Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board



TN55NP O2E


N/A


NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2231


19 PID Board

Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side Table 19-69 PID optical module specifications Parameter

Unit


-

Value 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZPIN (40 km)

1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZPIN (80 km)

NRZ

NRZ


THz

192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05


dBm

+2

+2


dBm

-4

-6.5


dB

6

6


GHz

±5

±5


nm

0.8

0.8


dB

30

30


ps/nm

800

1500


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN

PIN


nm

1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650


dBm

-15

-12


dBm

3

3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

-27


2232


19 PID Board

Table 19-70 Specifications of the red and blue band filters on the TN55NPO2E board Item

Unit

Value

Working wavelength in the C band

nm

1528 to 1561

Working wavelength in the blue band (T01/R01)

THz

196.0 to 193.8

Working wavelength in the red band (T02/R02)

THz

193.6 to 191.4

Demultiplexing loss (RI->T01, RI->T02)

dB

<= 1

Multiplexing loss (R01–>T0, R02->T0)

dB

<= 1

Isolation between red and blue bands

dB

>= 13

Mechanical Specifications TN55NPO2E: l


l


TN54PQ2: l

Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 57 mm (2.24 in.) x 24.5 mm (0.96 in.) x 68 mm (2.69 in.)

l





TN55NPO2E

143

157.3

TN54PQ2

1.1

1.2


19.9 NPS4 NPS4: 1x100G PID Line Service Processing Board Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2233


19 PID Board

19.9.1 Version Description The available functional version of the NPS4 board is TN54.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. B o ar d

Initial Versi on

Gener al 8800 T64 Subra ck




8800 T16 Subra ck

8800 Unive rsal Platfo rm Subra ck

6800 Subra ck

3800 Chass is

T N 54 N P S 4

V100R 009C1 0

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

l When the NPS4 board works in the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TNK2USXH+TNK2UXCT boards must be configured. l When the NPS4 board works in the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH/ TN52UXCM board must be configured. l When the NPS4 board works in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be configured.

Type The TN54NPS4 board has only one type: TN54NPS402. Each NPS4 board transmits one OTU4 signal using four wavelengths. The following table lists the wavelengths used by the boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Wavelength No.

Wavelength (nm)

Frequency (THz)

58

1551.72

193.20

60

1552.52

193.10

62

1553.33

193.00

64

1554.13

192.90


2234


19 PID Board




Added the TN54NPS4 board.

l The TN54NPS4 board is a 100G PID board that occupies only one slot. l It must work with the NPS4E board in a 200G system.

19.9.3 Application The NPS4 board is a PID board that performs the following 100G conversions: 80 x ODU0/80 x ODUflex/40 x ODU1/10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e/2 x ODU3/1 x ODU4<->1 x OTU4. The OTU4 signal is an optical signal carried over an ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelength. The NPS4 board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU3 signals. As shown inFigure 19-70, the NPS4 and NPS4E boards can be used together to implement 200G service access, l

The NPS4E and NPS4 boards implement the O/E and E/O conversions of 100G signals separately. That is, the NPS4E board outputs one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths, and the NPS4 board outputs one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths.

l

The NPS4E board receives one OTU4 optical signal from the NPS4 board and converts its own OTU4 optical signal and the received OTU4 optical signal into one multiplexed optical signal. The multiplexed optical signal contains two OTU4 optical signals over eight wavelengths.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2235


19 PID Board

Figure 19-70 NPS4 used for a 200G system 80xODU0/40xODU1/ 10xODU2/10xODU2e/ 2xODU3/1xODU4/ 80xODUflex

200G OUT N P S 4 E

Tributary/line

IN

8x?

OBU

IN

OBU

N P S 4 E

8x? OUT

R01

T01

R01

T01

4x?

4x?

4x?

4x?

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

N P S 4

80xODU0/40xODU1/ 10xODU2/10xODU2e/ 2xODU3/1xODU4/ 80xODUflex

Tributary/line


N P S 4


NOTE

l SSMF fiber l Fiber length ≤ 20 km: TN13OBU1P3 is optional at the receive end and no OA board is required at the transmit end. l 20 km < Fiber length ≤ 40 km: TN14OBU2P3 must be configured at the receive end and no OA board is required at the transmit end. l 40 km < Fiber length ≤ 60 km: TN13OBU1P3 must be configured at the receive end and TN13OBU2P3 must be configured at the transmit end. l 60 km < Fiber length ≤ 80 km: TN14OBU2P3 must be configured at the receive end and TN13OBU2P3 must be configured at the transmit end. l LEAF fiber l Fiber length ≤ 65km: TN13OBU1P3 is optional at the receive end and no OA board is required at the transmit end. l 65 km < Fiber length ≤ 80km: TN14OBU2P3 must be configured at the receive end and no OA board is required at the transmit end.

19.9.4 Functions and Features The NPS4 provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 19-71 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPS4.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2236


19 PID Board

Table 19-71 Functions and features of the NPS4 Functi on and Feature

Description

Basic function

l 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/10xODU2/10xODU2e/ 2xODU3/1xODU4<->1xOTU4 l Supports mixed transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e, and ODU3 signals. l Outputs one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths to the NPS4E board. The NPS4E board then converts the received multiplexed OTU4 optical signal and its own multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths into one multiplexed optical signal.


Supports the cross-connection of 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex signals or 40 channels of ODU1 signals or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or two channels of ODU3 signals or one channel of ODU4 signals between the NPS4 and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in the ITUT G.709. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, flex) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specific ation


ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

l Supports HFEC on the WDM side.



NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.

l Monitors the laser bias current, laser operating temperature, and singlewavelength optical power. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events.


2237


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

19 PID Board

Functi on and Feature

Description

IEEE 1588v2

Supports the BC and OC modes, but not the TC and TC+OC modes.

Physical clock

Supported

Opticallayer ASON

Not supported


Supported

Protecti on scheme


Loopba ck

WDM side Loopbac k






Supporte d

Supporte d

Supporte d

Supporte d

Supporte d

Supported


2238


19 PID Board


Description


Protocols or standards for transpare nt transmiss ion (nonperforma nce monitori ng)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2239



19 PID Board

Description

Protocols or standards for service processin g (perform ance monitori ng)


19.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NPS4 board consists of the signal processing module, PID optical module, control and communication module, IEEE 1588v2 module and power supply module. Figure 19-71 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NPS4.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2240


19 PID Board

Figure 19-71 Functional modules and signal flow of the NPS4 80XODU0/80XODUflex/ 40XODU1/10XODU2/ 10XODU2e/2XODU3/ 1XODU4

1588



PID module


OUT(4x? ) IN(4x? )


Control Memory

CPU

Communication

Control and communication module Required voltage Power supply module Fuse



Signal Flow In the signal flow of the NPS4 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPS4 to the WDM side of the NPS4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The signal processing module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then the module outputs one channel of OTU4 signals to the PID module. The PID module integrates the OTU4 signals into one optical signal and uses the "OUT" port to output one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths to the WDM side.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2241


l

19 PID Board

Receive directions The PID module uses the "IN" port to receive one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths from the WDM side and performs O/E conversion to generate one OTU4 electrical signal. The OTU4 signal is transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU4 framing, and FEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs ODUk electrical signals. The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.

Module Function l

PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes one multiplexed optical signal on the WDM side into optical signals over four wavelengths and performs O/E conversion. – WDM-side transmitter: performs E/O conversion on internal OTU4 signals and multiplexes optical signals over four wavelengths into one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPS4 and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex signals. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4 signals, processes overheads in OTU4 signals, and performs FEC coding and decoding.

l


l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2242


19 PID Board

19.9.6 Front Panel There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label on the front panel of the NPS4.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-72 shows the front panel of the TN54NPS4. Figure 19-72 Front panel of the TN54NPS4

Indicators There are four indicators on the TN54NPS4 panel. l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 19-72 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 19-72 Types and functions of the TN54NPS4 interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals from the NPS4E board(4 wavelengths are multiplexed).

OUT

LC

Transmits one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the NPS4 board(4 wavelengths are multiplexed).

Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW). Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2243


19 PID Board

19.9.7 Valid Slots The NPS4 occupies one slot. NOTE

l The NPS4 must work with the NPS4E board in a 200G system. l When the TN13OBU1P3/TN14OBU2P3 board is required at the receive end of the NPS4E board, you are advised to insert the TN13OBU1P3/TN14OBU2P3 board in the adjacent slot on the left of the NPS4E board. l When the NPS4E and NPS4 boards are used in a 200G system, you are advised to insert the NPS4 board in the adjacent slot on the right of the NPS4E board.

Table 19-73 lists the valid slots for the NPS4 board used in the 200G system. Table 19-73 Valid slots for the NPS4 board Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN Enhanced 8800 T64 subrack

IU1 to IU8, IU11 to IU42, IU45 to IU68



OptiX OSN Enhanced8800 T16 subrack

IU1 to IU8, IU11 to IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 19-74 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 19-74 Mapping between the physical ports on the NPS4 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2244


19 PID Board

Logical Ports Figure 19-73 shows the logical Ports of the NPS4 board. Table 19-75 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 19-73 Diagram of ports on the NPS4 Backplane

1(IN1/OUT1)-Och:(1-4) 1xODU4

OCh:1

ODU4

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:(1-2) ODU3:1 2xODU3

ODU4:1

OCh:1

ODU3:2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:(1-10) ODU2:1 ODU4:1

10xODU2/ 10xODU2e

OCh:1

ODU2:10

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU1:(1-40)

Tributary/line


OCh:1

1(IN1/OUT1)

ODU1:40

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:(1-80) ODU0:1 ODU4:1 80xODU0

OCh:1

ODU0:80

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:(1-80) ODUflex:1 ODU4:1

80xODUflex

OCh:1

ODUflex:80


ODU1 mapping path


ODU0 mapping path

ODU4 mapping path


ODU3 mapping path


ODU2 mapping path

Table 19-75 Description of ports on the NPS4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)

Indicates the WDM-side port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2245


19 PID Board

Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:(1–4)


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:(1– 2)


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:(1– 10)


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU1:(1– 40)


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:(1– 80)


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex: (1–80)


19.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NPS4, refer to Table 19-76. Table 19-76 NPS4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2246


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used








Off, On Default: On


FEC Working State



FEC Mode

FEC Default: FEC


Band Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



2247


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description


-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


Default: /

Planned Band Type

C Default: C





Line Rate


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2248


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


Enabled, Disabled


0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the ND2 board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100.

19.9.10 NPS4 Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board



TN54NP S4

1400ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN

N/A


2249


19 PID Board

NOTE



Unit


Value 1400ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN

-

NRZ


THz

192.10 to 196.05


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

8


GHz

± 10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

1400


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-12


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


2250


19 PID Board



l





TN54NPS4

81

89


19.10 NPS4E NPS4E: 1x100G PID Line Service Processing Board, Extended

19.10.1 Version Description The available functional version of the NPS4E board is TN54.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N5 4N PS 4E

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N


2251


19 PID Board

NOTE

l When the NPS4E board works in the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the TNK2USXH +TNK2UXCT boards must be configured. l When the NPS4E board works in the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the TN52UXCH/ TN52UXCM board must be configured. l When the NPS4E board works in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the TN16UXCM board must be configured.

Type The TN54NPS4E board has only one type: TN54NPS4E01. Each NPS4E board transmits one OTU4 signal using four wavelengths. The following table lists the wavelengths used by the boards. Wavelength No.

Wavelength (nm)

Frequency (THz)

50

1548.51

193.60

52

1549.32

193.50

54

1550.12

193.40

56

1550.92

193.30




Added the TN54NPS4E board.

l The TN54NPS4E board is a 100G PID board that occupies only one slot. l It can be independently used in a 100G system or work with the NPS4 board in a 200G system.

19.10.3 Application The NPS4E board is a PID board that performs the following 100G conversions: 80 x ODU0/80 x ODUflex/40 x ODU1/10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e/2 x ODU3/1 x ODU4<->1 x OTU4. The OTU4 signal is an optical signal carried over an ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelength. The NPS4E board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU3 signals. It also supports multiplexing and demultiplexing of two optical signals. That is, the NPS4E board converts its own multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths and Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2252


19 PID Board

one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal received from the NPS4 board into one multiplexed optical signal.

Application Scenario 1: NPS4E Used for a 100G System The NPS4E board can be independently used in a 100G system to implement 100G service access, as shown in Figure 19-74. Figure 19-74 NPS4E used for a 100G system

100G

N P S 4 E

Tributary/line


OUT 4x入

OBU IN

OBU

IN

4x入 OUT

N P S 4 E

Tributary/line


NOTE

When an NPS4E board applies to a 100G system, the T01 and R01 ports cannot be directly connected. NOTE


Application Scenario 2: NPS4E+NPS4 Used for a 200G System The NPS4E and NPS4 boards can be used together to implement 200G service access, as shown in Figure 19-75. l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The NPS4E and NPS4 boards implement the O/E and E/O conversions of 100G signals separately. That is, the NPS4E board outputs one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2253


19 PID Board

four wavelengths, and the NPS4 board outputs one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths. l

The NPS4E board receives one OTU4 optical signal from the NPS4 board and converts its own OTU4 optical signal and the received OTU4 optical signal into one multiplexed optical signal. The multiplexed optical signal contains two OTU4 optical signals over eight wavelengths.

Figure 19-75 NPS4E+NPS4 used for a 200G system 80xODU0/40xODU1/ 10xODU2/10xODU2e/ 2xODU3/1xODU4/ 80xODUflex

200G OUT N P S 4 E

Tributary/line

IN

8x?

OBU

IN

OBU

N P S 4 E

8x? OUT

R01

T01

R01

T01

4x?

4x?

4x?

4x?

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

N P S 4


Tributary/line


N P S 4


NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2254


19 PID Board

19.10.4 Functions and Features The NPS4E provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 19-78 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPS4E. Table 19-78 Functions and features of the NPS4E Functi on and Feature

Description

Basic function

l 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/10xODU2/10xODU2e/ 2xODU3/1xODU4<->1xOTU4 l Supports mixed transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e, and ODU3 signals. l Multiplexes and demultiplexes two optical signals. That is, the NPS4E board receives one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths from the NPS4 board and converts its own multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths and the received multiplexed OTU4 optical signal into one multiplexed optical signal.


Supports the cross-connection of 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex signals or 40 channels of ODU1 signals or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or two channels of ODU3 signals or one channel of ODU4 signals between the NPS4E and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in the ITUT G.709. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, flex) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM specific ation


ESC function

Supported

PRBS test function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

l Supports HFEC on the WDM side. NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.


2255


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

19 PID Board


Description



IEEE 1588v2

Supports the BC and OC modes, but not the TC and TC+OC modes.

Physical clock

Supported

Opticallayer ASON

Not supported


Supported

Protecti on scheme


Loopba ck

WDM side Loopbac k






Supporte d

Supporte d

Supporte d

Supporte d

Supporte d

Supported

l Monitors the laser bias current, laser operating temperature, and singlewavelength optical power. l Monitors OTN alarms and performance events.


2256


19 PID Board


Description


Protocols or standards for transpare nt transmiss ion (nonperforma nce monitori ng)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2257



19 PID Board

Description

Protocols or standards for service processin g (perform ance monitori ng)


19.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NPS4E board consists of the signal processing module, PID optical module, control and communication module, IEEE 1588v2 module and power supply module. Figure 19-76 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NPS4E.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2258


19 PID Board

Figure 19-76 Functional modules and signal flow of the NPS4E 80XODU0/80XODUflex/ 40XODU1/10XODU2/ 10XODU2e/2XODU3/ 1XODU4

1588


OUT(4x?) IN(4x?)

PID module

OTN Cross-connect processing module module

T01(4x?) R01(4x?)


Control Memory

CPU

Communication

Control and communication module Required voltage Power supply module Fuse



Signal Flow In the signal flow of the NPS4E board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPS4E to the WDM side of the NPS4E, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction – In a 100G system: The signal processing module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then the module outputs one channel of OTU4 signals to the PID module. The PID module integrates the OTU4 signals into one optical signal

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2259


19 PID Board

and uses the "OUT" port to output one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths to the WDM side. – In a 200G system: The signal processing module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then the module outputs one channel of OTU4 signals to the PID module. The PID module converts one OTU4 electrical signal output by the NPS4E board into one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths and uses the "R01" port to receive the multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths from the NPS4 board. The PID module then integrates the two OTU4 signals into one multiplexed optical signal and uses the "OUT" port to output it to the WDM side. l

Receive directions – In a 100G system: The PID module uses the "IN" port to receive one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal over four wavelengths from the WDM side and performs O/E conversion to generate one OTU4 electrical signal. The OTU4 signal is transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU4 framing, and FEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs ODUk electrical signals. The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane. – In a 200G system: The PID module uses the "IN" port to receive one multiplexed optical signal from the WDM side and demultiplexes it into two multiplexed OTU4 optical signals. Each of the two OTU4 optical signals has four wavelengths. The PID module uses the "T01" port to output one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal to the NPS4 board and performs O/ E conversion on the other multiplexed OTU4 optical signal to generate one OTU4 electrical signal. The OTU4 signal is transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU4 framing, and FEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs ODUk electrical signals. The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.

Module Function l

PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes one multiplexed optical signal from the WDM side into two multiplexed OTU4 optical signals. Each of the two OTU4 optical signals has four wavelengths. It also performs O/E conversion on one multiplexed OTU4 optical signal. – WDM-side transmitter: performs E/O conversion on one OTU4 electrical signal and integrates two multiplexed OTU4 optical signals (each of them has four wavelengths) into one multiplexed optical signal. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser.

l

Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. – Cross-connect module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2260


19 PID Board

Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPS4E and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex signals. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4 signals, processes overheads in OTU4 signals, and performs FEC coding and decoding. l


l


l


19.10.6 Front Panel There are four indicators, optical interfaces and laser level label on the front panel of the NPS4E.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 19-77 shows the front panel of the TN54NPS4E. Figure 19-77 Front panel of the TN54NPS4E

Indicators There are four indicators on the TN54NPS4E panel. l


l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2261


l

19 PID Board



Interfaces Table 19-79 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 19-79 Types and functions of the TN54NPS4E interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives one channel optical signals that are output by the line-side multiplexed optical signals.

OUT

LC

Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side.

R01

LC

Receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals from the NPS4 board(4 wavelengths are multiplexed).

T01

LC

Transmits one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the NPS4 board(4 wavelengths are multiplexed).

NOTE

When an NPS4E board applies to a 100G system, the T01 and R01 ports cannot be directly connected.


19.10.7 Valid Slots The NPS4E occupies one slot. NOTE

l When an OA board is also required, ensure that the NPS4E board and OA board are configured on the same NE. l When the TN13OBU1P3/TN14OBU2P3 board is required at the receive end of the NPS4E board, you are advised to insert the TN13OBU1P3/TN14OBU2P3 board in the adjacent slot on the left of the NPS4E board. l When the NPS4E and NPS4 boards are used in a 200G system, you are advised to insert the NPS4 board in the adjacent slot on the right of the NPS4E board.

Table 19-80 lists the valid slots for the NPS4E board used in the 100G system that has no OA board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2262


19 PID Board

Table 19-80 Valid slots for the NPS4E board Product

Valid Slots





OptiX OSN Enhanced8800 T16 subrack

IU1 to IU8, IU11 to IU18


Display of Physical Ports Table 19-81 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 19-81 Mapping between the physical ports on the NPS4E board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port


IN/OUT

1

T01/R01

2

NOTE


Logical Ports Figure 19-78 shows the logical Ports of the NPS4E board. Table 19-82 describes the meaning of each port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2263


19 PID Board

Figure 19-78 Diagram of ports on the NPS4E backplane

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:(1-4) 1xODU4

OCh:1

ODU4

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:(1-2) ODU3:1 2xODU3

ODU4:1

OCh:1

ODU3:2

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:(1-10) ODU2:1 ODU4:1

Tributary/line

10xODU2/ 10xODU2e

OCh:1

ODU2:10


OCh:1

1(IN1/OUT1)

ODU1:40


OCh:1

ODU0:80

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex:(1-80) ODUflex:1 ODU4:1

80xODUflex

OCh:1

ODUflex:80

1xOTU4 R01/T01


ODU1 mapping path


ODU0 mapping path

ODU4 mapping path


ODU3 mapping path


ODU2 mapping path

Table 19-82 Description of ports on the NPS4E

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)


2(T01/R01)

Indicates the port used for connecting to an NPS4 board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2264


19 PID Board

Port Name

Description

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:(1–4)


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU3:(1– 2)


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU2:(1– 10)


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU1:(1– 40)


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODU0:(1– 80)


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU4:1-ODUflex: (1–80)


19.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NPS4E, refer to Table 19-83. Table 19-83 NPS4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2265


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used








Off, On Default: On


FEC Working State



FEC Mode

FEC Default: FEC


Band Type

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



2266


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description


-



l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0


Default: /

Planned Band Type

C Default: C





Line Rate


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2267


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled


Enabled, Disabled


0 to 100

Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex. NOTE When the tributary board that connects to the ND2 board receives 3G-SDI services from client equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the tributary board receives other services, set it to 100.

PID Adjust State

Init, Working, Failed, Finshed, Disabled

Queries the PID adjust state.

Default: Init

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2268


19 PID Board

Field

Value

Description

PID Adjust Enable

Enable, Disable

When PID Adjust Enable is set to Enable, if the value of Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) for the TN13OBU1P3/TN14OBU2P3 board is manually changed, PID automatic commissioning may be triggered, and the system automatically adjusts the value of Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) so that the optical power reaches the optimal value.

Default: Enable

When PID Adjust Enable is set to Disable, PID automatic commissioning will not be triggered after the value of Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) for the TN13OBU1P3/ TN14OBU2P3 board is manually changed. PID Adjust Enable is set to Enable by default. Do not manually change the value of Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) for the TN13OBU1P3/ TN14OBU2P3 board.

19.10.10 NPS4E Specifications The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board


TN54NPS4E

1400ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2269


19 PID Board


Unit


Value 1400ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN

-

NRZ


THz

192.10 to 196.05


dBm

2


dBm

-3


dB

8


GHz

± 10


nm

0.3


dB

35


ps/nm

1400

IL(R01–>OUT)

dB

≤ 1.5


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-12


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

IL(IN->T01)

dB

≤ 1.5



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2270


19 PID Board




TN54NPS4E

81

89


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2271


20 Submarine Board

20

Submarine Board

About This Chapter 20.1 Overview Submarine cable boards meet the requirements for applications in submarine cable systems. 20.2 NS4 NS4: 100G line service processing board 20.3 OBU1 OBU1: Optical Booster Unit 20.4 WSD9 WSD9: 9-port flexible wavelength selective demultiplexing board 20.5 WSM9 WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective multiplexing board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2272


20 Submarine Board

20.1 Overview Submarine cable boards meet the requirements for applications in submarine cable systems.

Main Functions For detailed functions, refer to Table 20-1 Table 20-1 Main functions of the Submarine cable boards Board

Function

TN96NS4

Converts signals as follows:80 x ODU0/80 x ODUflex/40 x ODU1/10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e/2 x ODU3/1 x ODU4<->1 x OTU4.

TN96OBU1

Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.

TN96WSD9

Dynamically drops any wavelengths to any ports. The board can route any wavelength combination to any port of DM1 to DM9.

TN96WSM9

Adds any wavelengths from any directions through any port of AM1 to AM9 and outputs the wavelengths through the OUT port.


20.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the NS4 board is TN96.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2273


20 Submarine Board

B oa rd

Initial Version





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subra ck

3800 Chass is

T N 96 N S4

V100R0 09C10

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

NOTE

l In the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, and OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the board can work either in line mode or relay mode.When the board works in line mode, the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack must use the USXH+UXCT boards and the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack must use the UXCH/UXCM board and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack must use the TN16UXCM board. l In the general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack ,general OptiX OSN 8800 T32,and OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack, the board can work only in relay mode. l When you add a TN96NS4 board on the NMS, select 96NS4(EXT) to differentiate this TN96NS4 board from the TN96NS4 boards of other products.

Variants Table 20-2 Available variants of the TN96NS4 board Varia nt


FEC Encoding

T31

150000ps/nm-Extend C Band-Tunable Wavelength-PDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)-PIN

SDFEC2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2274


20 Submarine Board




The TN96NS4 board is a 100 Gbit/s coherent line board that applies mainly to submarine cable systems and performs conversions between 80 x ODU0, 80 x ODUflex, 40 x ODU1, 10 x ODU2, 10 x ODU2e, 2 x ODU3, or 1 x ODU4 signal and 1 x OTU4 signal over an ITU-Tcompliant WDM wavelength.

20.2.3 Application The NS4 board uses coherent receive technology. Therefore, the board is intended for coherent systems.The TN96NS4 board uses the single-carrier module on the WDM side,and only provides the IN/OUT ports. As a type of line board, the NS4 board converts 80xODU0, 40xODU1, 10xODU2, 10xODU2e, 2xODU3, 1xODU4, or 80xODUflex into one ITU-T G.694.1 OTU4 signal. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODU2/ODU2e service, ODU3 service and the ODUflex service.

Application scenario 1 of the NS4 board: conversion between 80 channels of ODU0 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 20-1 Position of the NS4 board in the submarine system (application scenario 1) 80xODU0

80xODU0

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

10

1

1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1 TOA

TOA 8

8

8

80xODU0


1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

1×ODU4

80xODU0

10

1

1

1

8

8


8

8

8

2275


20 Submarine Board

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the board must be set to Line Mode. TN96NS4:This application scenario is supported when the 96NS4(EXT) board is added on the NMS.

Application scenario 2 of the NS4 board: conversion between 80 channels of ODUflex signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 20-2 Position of the NS4 board in the submarine system (application scenario 2) 80xODUflex

80xODUflex

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

TEM28

TEM28

8

8

8

8

10

1

1

1 TEM28

TEM28

8

8

8

8

80xODUflex


1×ODU4

IN

M U X / D M U X

1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

OUT

1×ODU4

80xODUflex

10

1

1

1

8

8

8

8

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2276


20 Submarine Board

Application scenario 3 of the NS4 board: conversion between 40 channels of ODU1 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 20-3 Position of the NS4 board in the submarine system (application scenario 3) 40xODU1

40xODU1

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

5

1

1

1 TOA

TOA 8

8

8

8

40xODU1


1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1

1×OTU4

1

1×ODU4

40xODU1

5

1

1

1

8

8

8

8

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2277


20 Submarine Board

Application scenario 4 of the NS4 board: conversion between ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 20-4 Position of the NS4 board in the submarine system (application scenario 4) 10xODU2/ODU2e

10xODU2/ODU2e

NS4

NS4 1

1

1

1

1 TQX

TQX 4

4

4

10xODU2/ODU2e


1×ODU4

4


1×OTU4

4

4

1×OTU4

TQX

1×ODU4

1

10xODU2/ODU2e

1

1

1

4

4

4

1

1

1 TQX

4

4

TDX

4

TDX

NOTE


Application scenario 5 of the NS4 board: conversion between two channels of ODU3 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 20-5 Position of the NS4 board in the submarine system (application scenario 5) 2xODU3

2xODU3

NS4

NS4 TSXL

2xODU3


TSXL

1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1×OTU4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1×ODU4

2xODU3

TSXL


TSXL

2278


20 Submarine Board

NOTE


Application scenario 6 of the NS4 board: conversion between one channel of ODU4 signals and one channel of OTU4 signals Figure 20-6 Position of the NS4 board in the submarine system (application scenario 6) 1xODU4

1xODU4

NS4

NS4 1×ODU4


1×OTU4

1×OTU4

1×ODU4

TSC

M U OUT X / D IN M U X

TSC

NOTE


Application scenario 7 of the NS4 board: implement the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU4 signal Figure 20-7 Position of the NS4 board in the submarine system (application scenario 7) NS4 1×OTU4

1×OTU4

DMUX

IN

OUT

MUX

NS4 1×OTU4

1×OTU4

MUX

OUT

IN

DMUX

NOTE

In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available. The input and output wavelengths can be different. TN96NS4:This application scenario is supported when the 96NS4(EXT) board is added on the NMS.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2279


20 Submarine Board

Application scenario 8: hybrid transmission scenario Figure 20-8 Position of the NS4 board in the submarine system (application scenario 8) 1xOTU4

TOM

ODU0

ODU1

ODU1

TQX TSXL

ODUflex ODU3

ODU1

ODU2/ ODU2/ ODU2e ODU2e ODUflex ODUflex ODU3

ODU3



ODU0 ODU0

ODU0

ODU1 ODU1

ODU1

ODU2/ ODU2/ ODU2e ODU2e ODUflex ODUflex

ODU2e ODUflex

ODU3 ODU3

ODU3

1×ODU4 1×OTU4

ND2/ ODU2/ TDX ODU2e

ODU0

1×OTU4 1×ODU4

TOA

ODU0

NS4

ODU2/

TOM TOA ND2/ TDX TQX TSXL

NS4

NOTE

The NS4 board can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU3 signals, the total bandwidth cannot exceed 100 Gbit/s. TN96NS4:This application scenario is supported when the 96NS4(EXT) board is added on the NMS.

20.2.4 Functions and Features The NS4 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-3 and Table 20-4. Table 20-3 Functions and features of the NS4 board (Line Mode) Function and feature

Description

Basic function

NS4 converts signals as follows: 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/10xODU2/10xODU2e/ 2xODU3/1xODU4<->1xOTU4 Supports mixed transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2, ODU2e, and ODU3 signals.


Supports the cross-connection of 80 channels of ODU0/ODUflex signals or 40 channels of ODU1 signals or ten channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or two channels of ODU3 signals or one channel of ODU4 signals between the NS4 and the cross-connect board.

OTN function

l Supports the OTU4 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function. l ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, flex) layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2280


20 Submarine Board


Description

WDM specification



The WDM side optical signals can be carried over wavelengths in the extended C band.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS function


LPT function

Not supported

FEC coding

Supports SDFEC2 on the WDM side.

TN96NS4:Supports 50 GHz and 37.5 GHz channel spacing designs. A total of 96 wavelengths can be configured for 50 GHz channel spacing and 128 wavelengths for 37.5 GHz channel spacing.




Regeneration board

l The WDM-side signals of the TN96NS4T31 board can be regenerated by another TN96NS4T31 board.

ALS function

Not supported

Latency measurement

Supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Supported

Protection scheme



l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection (when working with the QCP or OLP or DCP board). l Supports tributary SNCP protection. NOTE When the cross-connect granularity is ODUflex, the board does not support tributary SNCP protection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2281


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

20 Submarine Board


Description

Loopback

WDM side Loopback






Supported

Supporte d

Support ed

Support ed

Support ed

Support ed


2282


20 Submarine Board


Description




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2283


20 Submarine Board





Description

Basic function


Regeneratin g rate


OTN function

l Provides the OTU4 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l ODU4 layer: supports the PM and TCM function, and PM and TCM nonintrusive monitoring functions. l OTU4 layer: supports the SM function.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2284


20 Submarine Board


Description

WDM specification



The WDM side optical signals can be carried over wavelengths in the extended C band.

ESC function

Supported

PRBS function

Not supported

FEC coding

Supports SDFEC2 on the WDM side.

TN96NS4:Supports 50 GHz and 37.5 GHz channel spacing designs. A total of 96 wavelengths can be configured for 50 GHz channel spacing and 128 wavelengths for 37.5 GHz channel spacing.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



ALS function

Not supported

Test frame

Not supported

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

Physical clock

Not supported

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Supported

Protection scheme

Not supported




-


2285



20 Submarine Board



20.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The NS4 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.

Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Line Mode) Figure 20-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2286


20 Submarine Board

Figure 20-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN96NS4 board (Line Mode) 80xODU0/80xODUflex/40xODU1/ 10xODU2/10xODU2e/2xODU3/1xODU4 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side



E/O

OUT

O/E

IN



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS4 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS4 to the WDM side of the NS4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l

Transmit direction The OTN processing module receives ODUk electrical signals sent from the crossconnection board through the backplane.The module performs operations such as OTN framing and FEC encoding. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU4 signals. For the TN96NS4 board,The OTU4 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU4 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.

l

Receive direction For the TN96NS4 board,The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU4 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2287


20 Submarine Board


Functional Modules and Signal Flow (Relay Mode) Figure 20-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS4 board. Figure 20-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN96NS4 board (Relay Mode) WDM side

WDM side O/E

IN



OUT


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



The TN96NS4 board implements the regeneration of one channel of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths that carry OTU4 optical signals. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN optical interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU4 signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.


WDM-side optical module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2288


20 Submarine Board

The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. – WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion optical signals. – WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to optical signals. – Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. – Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l

Signal processing module The module consists of an OTN processing module, and cross-connect module. – OTN processing module Frames OTU4 signals, processes overheads in OTU4 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. – Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NS4 and the cross-connect board through the backplane.

l


l



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 20-11 shows the front panel of the NS4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2289


20 Submarine Board


NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2290


20 Submarine Board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 20-5 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-5 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS4 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



20.2.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one NS4. Table 20-6 shows the valid slots for the NS4 board. Table 20-6 Valid slots for the TN96NS4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


2291


20 Submarine Board

Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU16

NOTE


When the NS4 boards serve as regeneration boards, follow the principles below to install them in the case of ESC communication; otherwise, install them in any valid slots. l

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack: The TN96NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, or IU66 and IU68.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: The TN96NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8,IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, or IU34 and IU36.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack: The TN96NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, or IU16 and IU18.

l

OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The TN96NS4 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, or IU14 and IU16.


Display of Physical Ports Table 20-7 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 20-7 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS4 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface on the Panel


IN/OUT

1


2292


20 Submarine Board

NOTE


Logical Ports Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, IN1/OUT1OCh:1-ODU4:1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 20-12 shows the logical Ports of the NS4 board. Table 20-8 describes the meaning of each port. NOTE

TN96NS4: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when the Board Mode parameter of the board must be set to Line Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2293


20 Submarine Board

Figure 20-12 Port diagram of the NS4 board Backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1 1xODU4

OCh:1

ODU4


ODU4:1

OCh:1

ODU3:2



10xODU2/ 10xODU2e

OCh:1

ODU2:10


1(IN/OUT)


OCh:1

ODU1:40


OCh:1

ODU0:80


80xODUflex

OCh:1

ODUflex:80


ODU1 mapping path


ODU0 mapping path

ODU4 mapping path


ODU3 mapping path


ODU2 mapping path

Table 20-8 Descriptions of the ports on the NS4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Port Name

Description

1(IN/OUT)

WDM-side optical ports Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2294


20 Submarine Board

Port Name

Description

IN/OUT-OCh:1












20.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NS4, refer to Table 20-9. Table 20-9 NS4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Use Status



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2295


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Q Threshold

3.12 to 16.95 Default: 6.62

Specifies the Q threshold of the current optical port of a board. When the Q value at the receive end exceeds this threshold, the board reports a Q_VALUE_EXC alarm.








Off, On Default: On


FEC Mode

SDFEC2 Default: SDFEC2



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



2296


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description


l Standard 50GHz:C/ 1/196.050THz to C/ 96/191.300TH z

Sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.

l 37.5GHz:C/ 196.05625TH z +-18.75GHz to C/ 191.29375TH z +-18.75GHz l 12.5GHz:C/ 196.06875TH z +-6.25GHz to C/ 191.28125TH z +-6.25GHz l 12.5GHz * n (User Define):C/ 196.06875TH z +-6.25GHz to C/ 191.28125TH z +-6.25GHz Default: / NOTE You can click the button to the right of the text box to set the channel spacing and wavelength.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2297


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Receive Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/ Frequency(THz)

l Standard 50GHz:C/ 1/196.050THz to C/ 96/191.300TH z


l 37.5GHz:C/ 196.05625TH z +-18.75GHz to C/ 191.29375TH z +-18.75GHz l 12.5GHz:C/ 196.06875TH z +-6.25GHz to C/ 191.28125TH z +-6.25GHz

l When the receive wavelength is the same as the transmit wavelength of the board, use the value Same as transmit wavelength so that the receive wavelength automatically keeps the same as the transmit wavelength. l When the receive wavelength differs from the transmit wavelength of the board, set this parameter to a value that is same as the transmit wavelength of the remote board; otherwise, services carried by the wavelength will be interrupted.

l 12.5GHz * n (User Define):C/ 196.06875TH z +-6.25GHz to C/ 191.28125TH z +-6.25GHz l Same as transmit wavelength Default: Same as transmit wavelength NOTE You can click the button to the right of the text box to set the channel spacing and wavelength.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2298


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

PRBS Test Status

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted. Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission

l Disabled, GCC1+GCC2 Enabled, Only GCC1 Enabled, Only GCC2 Enabled l Default value for the line mode: Disabled l Default value for the relay mode: Only GCC1 Enabled



Set this parameter to Standard Mode when ODU2 signals are cross-connected.


Set this parameter to Speedup Mode when ODU2e signals are cross-connected.

NULL Mapping Status

Enabled, Disabled



0 to 100

Line Rate

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Default: Disabled

Default: 100

Specifies the tolerance of deviation between the actual client-side service rate and the specified rate when the client-side service type is ODUflex.


2299


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Board Mode

Line Mode,Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode


Default: l 8800 T64 enhanced subrack /8800 T64 general subrack /8800 T32 enhanced subrack/ 8800 T32 general subrack/ 8800 T16: Line Mode l 8800 universal platform subrack : Electrical Relay Mode

Line Mode: The board functions as a line board. Electrical Relay Mode/Optical Relay Mode: The board functions as a regeneration board. NOTE When electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay mode. The parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON system; otherwise, end-to-end management of services is not available. NOTE In the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 general subrack, 8800 universal platform subrack and OptiX OSN 8800 T32 general subrack , the TN96NS4 board supports only the relay mode, and the parameter value must be set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode.

20.2.10 NS4 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board


TN96NS4

150000ps/nm-Extend C Band-Tunable Wavelength-PDM-QPSK (SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)-PIN

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2300


20 Submarine Board

WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module Table 20-10 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type

Line code format

Value Extend C Band-Tunable Wavelength-PDM-QPSK (SDFEC2, wDCMEnhanced)-PIN

-

PDM-QPSK (SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)


THz

191.29375 to 196.05625 (Flex grid) 191.30 to 196.05 (Fixed grid)


dBm

0


dBm

-5


GHz

±1.5 (Flex grid) ±2.5 (Fixed grid)


nm

0.48


-

PIN


nm

1529 to 1568


dBm

-16


dBm

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Dimensions of front panel:(W x D x H):50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) x 264.6 mm (10.4 in.)

l

Weight: – TN96NS4: 3.1 kg (6.8lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2301


20 Submarine Board


WDM-Side Module



TN96NS4

150000ps/nm-Extend C Band-Tunable Wavelength-PDMQPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Enhanced)PIN

172

189


20.3 OBU1 OBU1: Optical Booster Unit

20.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the OBU1 board is TN96.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

B oa rd

In iti al V er si o n



General Enhanc 8800 T32 ed 8800 Subrack T32 Subrack

880 0 T16 Sub rack


6800 Sub rack

3800 Chas sis

T N 96 O B U 1

V 10 0 R 00 9 C 10

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y


2302


20 Submarine Board

Type Table 20-11 lists the types of the OBU1 board. Table 20-11 Type description of the OBU1 board Unit

Type

Description

Gain Range

TN96OBU1

03

Amplifies the input optical signals in C band with the wavelength range of 1529.16 nm to 1560.61 nm.

23




Added the TN96OBU103 boards.

The TN96OBU103 board provides C-band optical amplifiers and mainly applies to submarine cable systems. It supports the gain locking, power locking, and APC modes.

20.3.3 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU1 amplifies optical signals. For the application of the OBU1 in the submarine system, see Figure 20-13. Figure 20-13 Application of the OBU1 in the submarine system Receive End

Transmit End OTU OTU

OTU WSM9

OTU

OBU1

TD20

OTU

TO

OBU1

IN TE

OTU

RO

ITL

OUT RE

RPT

IN

OBU1

WSM9

OUT

OA

OA

WSD9

Dummy Light

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU WSM9

OTU WSM9

OBU1

OBU1

WSD9

OTU OBU1

WSD9

OTU OTU

OTU

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

OBU1


2303


20 Submarine Board

NOTE

In this application scenario,the functional version of the FIU board must be TN96OBU103. In this application scenario,the functional version of the ITL board must be TN11ITL04.

20.3.4 Functions and Features The OBU1 board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-12. Table 20-12 Functions and features of the OBU1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.

Typical gain

The typical gain of the OBU103 is 23 dB. NOTE 20.3.10 OBU1 Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides an in-service monitoring port (MON). This port connects to an optical spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signal without affecting traffic.

Gain lock function

The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels.

Working mode

l The gain locking mode applies to the scenario where all wavelengths of the added and dropped services are compensated. In this scenario, an OBU1 board is connected to the multiplexer and demultiplexer boards, and the gain of the OBU1 board is adjustable. l The power locking mode applies to the dummy light scenario where the OBU1 board is used as the light source and optical power locking must be specified. The optical power can be gradually increased, and the OBU1 board has light output if no light input is present. l The APC mode applies to the submarine line side. When being connected to the submarine cable system, the OBU1 board supports gradual increase of the optical power and has no light output if no light input is present. NOTE After being powered on, a TN96OBU1 board works in APC mode and has no light output by default. In this case, you must set the locked optical power.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2304


20 Submarine Board


Description

Transient control function

The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth upgrading and expansion.


l Detects and reports the optical power.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board.

20.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN96OBU1 board. Figure 20-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU1 board Splitter IN

OUT

EDFA optical module Detection for Driving PIN pump current current and temperature Driving and detection module

VO

VOA

VI

MON

Control Memory

CPU

Communication



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Required voltage

( Backplane Controlled by SCC ) SCC


2305


20 Submarine Board

Signal Flow One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.

Module Function l

VOA – Adjusts optical power of optical signals according to system requirements.

l

EDFA optical module – Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l

Driving and detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. – Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. – Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

l


l


20.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 20-15 shows the front panel of the OBU1 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2306


20 Submarine Board

Figure 20-15 Front panel of the OBU1 board OBU STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION CAUTION HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS


MON OUT IN VO VI

OBU



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 20-13 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified.

OUT

LC

Transmits the amplified signal.


2307


20 Submarine Board

Interface

Type

Function

MON

LC

Accomplishes in-service monitoring of optical spectrum. The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 1:99. In other words, the MON port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB.

VI

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side.

VO

LC

Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface.


20.3.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one OBU1 board. Table 20-14 shows the valid slots for the TN96OBU1 board. Table 20-14 Valid slots for the TN96OBU1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18

OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack

IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17

20.3.8 Optical Interfaces This topic describes the interface information on the U2000.

Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-15 . Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2308


20 Submarine Board

Table 20-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN96OBU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

VI

4

VO

5

20.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OBU1, refer to Table 20-16. Table 20-16 OBU1 parameters Field

Value

Description

Optical Interface/Channel

-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2309


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range.

Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2310


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Attenuation difference (dB)

-3 to 3, with a step of 0.1

Sets the relative optical power attenuation of a board channel. When using this parameter with Attenuation (dB), you can adjust optical power attenuation of a board channel more accurately.

Default: none

If Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) is set to 9 dB and Attenuation Difference (dB) is set to 1.5 dB, then the attenuation of the optical interface is 10.5 dB. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface.

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface.

Channel Number Mode

C80 Mode, C40 Mode, CWDM Mode

Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the board.

Default: / Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C


Default: C Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-


The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.

2311


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Laser Status

Off, On


Default: On

See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Gain (dB)

-

The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). This parameter is different from the Nominal Gain parameter. The Nominal Gain parameter indicates the gain of the signal optical power, excluding the noise power. The Gain parameter, however, is only related to the power and includes the noise power. Therefore, if the noise power occupies a large ratio and the input optical power is low, the gain queried exceeds the nominal gain of the board.

Nominal Gain (dB)

Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) to Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: 23dB

Specifies the expected gain of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2312


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

-

The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried.

Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)

-

The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried.


-



All


Default: All


2313


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Rated Optical Power (dBm)

-30 to 30

The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit.

Default: The default value is determined when the system is provisioned with 80 wavelengths and varies according to boards.

The value can be set or queried. The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally. NOTE IN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, OUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal singlewavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2314


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Enable OAMS Power Monitoring

Disable, Enable

Enables or disables the OAMS function.

Default: Disable

When the OAMS function is enabled, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function if the difference between the actual power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring (dBm) exceeds OAMS Power Abnormality Threshold (dB).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring (dBm)

-60.0 to 50.0

OAMS Power Abnormity Threshold (dB)

0.5 to 10.0

Default: /

Default:3.0


Specifies the reference power for the OAMS function to determine whether the line power is normal. This parameter must be set based on the actual line power. Specifies the threshold for the OAMS function to detect a line power abnormality. If the difference between the actual line power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds the specified abnormality threshold, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function. If the difference is less than the threshold, the U2000 will not issue a command to start the OAMS function.

2315


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Working Mode

l Gain locking, Power locking,APC

Specifies the working mode of an optical amplifier.

l Default: APC

For more information on the working mode, see 20.3.4 Functions and Features. Power Value

-7 to 20

This parameter specifies the output optical power of the EDFA module when Working Mode is set to Power Locking or APC for the OUT port.

Default: 0

-60.0 to 60.0

When the incident optical power of the transmission fiber is less than the nominal output power of the transmitting OA board, set Launch Power for the transmitting OA board to ensure desired ALC adjustment effects.

Default: /

20.3.10 OBU1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 20-17 Optical interface parameter specifications of the OBU103 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Parameters

Unit

Specifications


nm

1529-1561

Nominal input power range

dBm

-32 to -3

Noise figure (NF)

dB

≤6.0

Nominal gain

dB

23

Gain flatness

dB

≤2.0

Input reflectance

dB

<-40

Output reflectance

dB

<-40


2316


20 Submarine Board

Parameters

Unit

Specifications

Maximum reflectance tolerance at input

dB

-27

Maximum reflectance tolerance at output

dB

-27

Maximum total output optical power

dBm

20

Multi-channel gain slope

dB/dB

≤2.0

Polarization dependent gain (PDG)

dB

≤0.5

VI-VO

Inherent insertion loss

dB

≤1.5

Dynamic attenuation range

dB

20

dB

1

Adjustment accuracy



l

Weight:1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)




TN96OBU103

9.0

11.0


20.4 WSD9 WSD9: 9-port flexible wavelength selective demultiplexing board

20.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the WSD9 board is TN96.



2317


20 Submarine Board

Bo ar d

Init ial Ver sio n





8800 T16 Subra ck


680 0 Sub rack

3800 Chas sis

T N9 6 W SD 9

V10 0R0 09C 10

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N




The TN96WSD9 board is added.

The TN96WSD9 board is a 9-port tunable-wavelength selective demultiplexer board and applies mainly to submarine cable systems. It supports C-band and extended band wavelengths and flexible grid wavelength signals.

20.4.3 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSD9 board is used with the WSM9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSD9 board in the submarine system, see Figure 20-16.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2318


20 Submarine Board

Figure 20-16 Position of the WSD9 board in the submarine system Transmit End

Receive End

OTU

OTU

OTU

WSM9

OTU

OBU1

TD20

OTU

TO

OBU1

IN TE

OTU

RO

ITL

RPT

IN

OUT

OBU1

WSM9

OUT

RE

OA

OA

WSD9

Dummy Light

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU WSM9

OTU OTU

WSM9

OBU1

OBU1

OBU1

WSD9

OTU OBU1

WSD9

OTU OTU

OTU

To implement flexible grid wavelength application, cascade WSM9 boards at the transmit end to add wavelengths and use OBU103 boards to compensate for the optical power; use WSD9 and TD20 boards at the receive end to drop wavelengths.

20.4.4 Functions and Features The WSD9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, resizable channel bandwidths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-18. Table 20-18 Functions and features of the WSD9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Dynamically drops any wavelengths to any ports. The board can route any wavelength combination to any port of DM1 to DM9.

Spectrum application

Supports flexible grid wavelength signals. The signals have continuous n x slice GHz spectrums (one slice is equal to 12.5 GHz, and n = 3 to 32) to meet the bandwidth requirements of high-rate services. Gridless flexibly allocates bandwidth to improve the bandwidth utilization efficiency.




Detects the optical power and reports the alarms and performance events for the board.


2319


20 Submarine Board


Description

Optical power detection

Detects the main optical channel power of the IN port.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

20.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board. Figure 20-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board Gridless spectrum: n* Slice(n=3,4,5,…,32) 1 Slice=12.5GHz

DM1 DM2

DM9

Splitter IN

WSS optical module

MON

Optical module Temperature detection

PIN

Temperature and optical power detection module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication



Required voltage

SCC


Signal Flow The WSD9 board demultiplexes the multiplexed main optical channel signals received by the IN port into multiplexed or single-wavelength signals, and drops them through ports DM1 to DM9.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2320


20 Submarine Board

Module Function l

Optical module – The WSS module inside the optical module extracts any single wavelengths or wavelength combinations from the multiplexed wavelength, and directs them out the predefined ports of the DM1-DM9 ports. – The WSS module supports wavelength-level power adjustments. – Splitters provide a small amount of the IN port power to the MON port for in-service performance monitoring.

l

Temperature and optical power detection module – Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.

l


l


20.4.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSD9 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2321


20 Submarine Board

Appearance of the Front Panel

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2322


20 Submarine Board

Figure 20-18 Front panel of the TN96WSD9 board

WSD9 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION CAUTION HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS

MON


IN DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8 DM9

WSD9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2323


20 Submarine Board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 20-19 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-19 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSM9 board Interface

Type

Function

DM1 to DM9

LC

Transmits the single-wavelength or multi-channel signal separated from the main path. If the signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. If the signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is directly sent to the optical transponder unit.

IN

LC

Receives the main path signal.

MON

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the IN port. The ratio of the MON port power to the IN port power is 3:97. In other words, the MON port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB.

Laser Hazard Level The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

20.4.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN96WSD9 board. Table 20-20 show the valid slots for the WSM9 boards. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2324


20 Submarine Board

Table 20-20 Valid slots for the TN96WSD9 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU7,IU11-IU17,IU19-IU25,IU27IU33,IU35-IU41,IU45-IU51,IU53IU59,IU61-IU67


IU1-IU7,IU12-IU18,IU20-IU26,IU29-IU35


IU1-IU7,IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN96WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN96WSD9, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-21. Table 20-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

DM1-DM9

2-10

MON

11

20.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the WSD9 board, refer to Table 20-22.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2325


20 Submarine Board

Table 20-22 WSD9 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C


Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


All

Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)

-


Center Frequency

-

Queries the center frequency of the current channel of the board.

Default: All



2326


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Gridless Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Value of Gridless Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Gridless Max. Attenuation Rate (dB), Blocking, /

Specifies the attenuation for the optical interface. This parameter ensures that the launch power of the transmit end complies with the system power requirements.

Default: /

Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. l When no optical crossconnections are present, the parameter value is displayed as /. l When NE-level optical crossconnections are present or when the end-to-end configuration function is used to configure optical crossconnections and OPA Mode is set to Manual, the parameter value is displayed as Blocking after an OCh trail is created. If you set the parameter at this time, the specified value is then displayed. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2327


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Gridless Attenuation difference (dB)



Default: none

If Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) is set to 9 dB and Attenuation Difference (dB) is set to 1.5 dB, then the attenuation of the optical interface is 10.5 dB. Gridless Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-


Gridless Min. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-


20.4.10 WSD9 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 20-23 Optical interface parameter specifications of the WSD9 Parameters

Unit

Specifications

Slice width

GHz

12.5

Total slice number (m)

-

386

Centre frequency of every slice

THz

191.25625+(m-1)*0.0125; m=1 to 386

Slice number per slot (n)

-

3 to 32

Slot width

GHz

n*12.5; n=3 to 32

IN-DMxa

dB

≤8b

Maximum channel insertion loss difference

dB

1.5

-1dB spectral width

GHz

>2*(6.25n-12.5); n=3 to 32

Insertion loss

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2328


20 Submarine Board

Parameters

Unit

Specifications

Port isolation

dB

>25

Extinction ratio

dB

≥35

Reconfiguration time

s

≤3

Directivity

dB

35

Maximum reflectance

dB

–30

Ploarization dependence loss

dB

≤1

Attenuation range of each of adding wavelengths

dB

0 to 15

Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelengths

dB

≤1 (0dB-10dB) ≤1.5 (>10dB)

a: DMx represents the DM1-DM9 interface. b: This value is obtained when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.


Dimensions (Height × Width × Depth): 264.6 mm × 50.8 mm × 220 mm (10.4 in. × 2.0 in. × 8.7 in.)

l





TN96WSD9

25.0

27.5


20.5 WSM9 WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective multiplexing board

20.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the WSM9 board is TN96. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2329


20 Submarine Board


Initial Versio n





880 0 T16 Sub rack


6800 Sub rack

3800 Chas sis

T N9 6 W S M 9

V100R 009C1 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N




The TN96WSM9 board is added.

The TN96WSM9 board is a 9-port tunable-wavelength selective multiplexer board and applies mainly to submarine cable systems.It supports C-band and extended band wavelengths and flexible grid wavelength signals.

20.5.3 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSM9 board is used with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSM9 board in the submarine system, see Figure 20-19.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2330


20 Submarine Board

Figure 20-19 Position of the WSM9 board in the submarine system Transmit End

Receive End

OTU

OTU

OTU

WSM9

OTU

OBU1

TD20

OTU

TO

OBU1

IN TE

OTU

RO

ITL

RPT

IN

OUT

OBU1

WSM9

OUT

RE

OA

OA

WSD9

Dummy Light

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU WSM9

OTU OTU

WSM9

OBU1

OBU1

OBU1

WSD9

OTU OBU1

WSD9

OTU OTU

OTU

To implement flexible grid wavelength application, cascade WSM9 boards at the transmit end to add wavelengths and use OBU103 boards to compensate for the optical power; use WSD9 and TD20 boards at the receive end to drop wavelengths.

20.5.4 Functions and Features The WSM9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, resizable channel bandwidths,monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-24. Table 20-24 Functions and features of the WSM9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Adds any wavelengths from any directions through any port of AM1 to AM9 and outputs the wavelengths through the OUT port.


Supports flexible grid wavelength signals. The signals have continuous n x slice GHz spectrums (one slice is equal to 12.5 GHz, and n = 3 to 32) to meet the bandwidth requirements of high-rate services.Gridless flexibly allocates bandwidth to improve the bandwidth utilization efficiency.





Optical power detection

Detects the main optical channel power of the OUT port.


2331


20 Submarine Board


Description

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

20.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board. Figure 20-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board Channels for Flexible Grid: n* Slice(n=3,4) 1 Slice=12.5GHz f=192.11875

AM1 AM2

n=3

AM9

Channel 1

f=192.1625

n=4 Channel 2

f=192.2125

f=192.2625

n=4

n=4

Channel 3

Channel 4

Splitter OUT

WSS optical module

MON

Optical module Temperatur e detection

PIN


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse



Signal Flow The WSM9 board multiplexes the multiplexed or single-wavelength signals input from ports AM1 to AM9 and output the signals through the OUT port. l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSM9 board through the AMn optical interface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2332


l

20 Submarine Board

If single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSM9 board from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface.

Module Function l

Optical module – Receives any wavelengths (either single wavelengths or wavelength combinations) through the any of AM1-AM9 ports. – The WSS module supports wavelength-level power adjustments. – Splitters provide a small amount of the OUT port power to the MON port for in-service performance monitoring.

l

Temperature and optical power detection module – Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. – Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.

l


l


20.5.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSM9 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2333


20 Submarine Board

Appearance of the Front Panel

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2334


20 Submarine Board

Figure 20-21 Front panel of the TN96WSM9 board

WSM9 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION

CAUTION HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS

MON OUT


AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8 AM9

WSM9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2335


20 Submarine Board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 20-25 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-25 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSM9 board Interface

Type

Function

AM1 to AM9

LC

Receive the single-wavelength or multi-wavelength signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path.

OUT

LC

Transmits the main path signal.

MON

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 3:97. In other words, the MON port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB.

Laser Hazard Level The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

20.5.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN96WSM9 board. Table 20-26 show the valid slots for the WSM9 boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2336


20 Submarine Board

Table 20-26 Valid slots for the TN96WSM9 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1–IU7,IU11–IU17,IU19–IU25,IU27– IU33,IU35–IU41,IU45–IU51,IU53– IU59,IU61–IU67


IU1–IU7,IU12–IU18,IU20–IU26,IU29– IU35


IU1–IU7,IU11–IU17


IU1–IU15


IU1–IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN96WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN96WSM9, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-27. Table 20-27 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

OUT

1

AM1-AM9

2-10

MON

11

20.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSM9 parameters, refer to Table 20-28.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2337


20 Submarine Board

Table 20-28 WSM9 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C


Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


All

Center Frequency

-

Default: All


Specifies the desired parity of the working band of the board. Queries the center frequency of the current channel of the board.

2338


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description




Default: /

Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. l When no optical crossconnections are present, the parameter value is displayed as /. l When NE-level optical crossconnections are present or when the end-to-end configuration function is used to configure optical crossconnections and OPA Mode is set to Manual, the parameter value is displayed as Blocking after an OCh trail is created. If you set the parameter at this time, the specified value is then displayed. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2339


20 Submarine Board

Field

Value

Description

Gridless Attenuation difference (dB)



Default: none

If Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) is set to 9 dB and Attenuation Difference (dB) is set to 1.5 dB, then the attenuation of the optical interface is 10.5 dB. Gridless Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-



-


20.5.10 WSM9 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 20-29 Optical interface parameter specifications of the WSM9 Parameters

Unit

Specifications

Slice width

GHz

12.5


-

386


THz

191.25625+(m-1)*0.0125; m=1 to 386


-

3 to 32

Slot width

GHz

n*12.5; n=3 to 32

dB

≤8b


dB

1.5

-1dB spectral width

GHz

>2*(6.25n-12.5); n=3 to 32

Insertion loss

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

AMxaOUT


2340


20 Submarine Board

Parameters

Unit

Specifications

Port isolation

dB

>25

Extinction ratio

dB

≥35


s

≤3

Directivity

dB

35

Maximum reflectance

dB

–30

Ploarization dependence loss

dB

≤1


dB

0 to 15


dB

≤1 (0dB-10dB) ≤1.5 (>10dB)

a: AMx represents the AM1-AM9 interface. b: This value is obtained when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.


Dimensions (Height × Width × Depth): 264.6 mm × 50.8 mm × 220 mm (10.4 in. × 2.0 in. × 8.7 in.)

l





TN96WSM9

25.0

27.5


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2341


21

21 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Board

Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Board

About This Chapter 21.1 Overview Optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards multiplex/demultiplex optical signals over different wavelengths. 21.2 M40 M40: 40-channel multiplexing board 21.3 M40V M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA 21.4 D40 D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board 21.5 D40V D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA 21.6 DFIU DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board 21.7 FIU FIU: fiber interface board 21.8 ITL ITL: interleaver board 21.9 SFIU SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2342



21.1 Overview Optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards multiplex/demultiplex optical signals over different wavelengths.

Positions of Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Boards in a WDM System Optical multiplexer boards multiplex multiple optical signals into one ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signal. Optical demultiplexer boards demultiplex one multiplexed optical signal into individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals. Figure 21-1 shows the positions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards in a WDM system. Figure 21-1 Positions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards in a WDM system WDM-side services


OTU OTU

OM (C-ODD)

OTU

OTU OTU

OA

OTU ITL

OSC

FIU/ SFIU

OTU OTU

OD (C-ODD)

WDM-side ODF


OM (C-EVEN)

OA

OTU OTU OTU

OD (C-EVEN)

OTU

Main Functions Table 21-1 lists the main functions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2343



Table 21-1 Main functions of optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards Board

Function

TN11M40

Multiplexes a maximum of 40 C-band wavelength signals into one multiwavelength signal.

TN12M40 TN11M40V

Multiplexes a maximum of 40 C-band wavelength signals into one multiwavelength signal and adjusts the optical power for each wavelength.

TN12M40V TN11D40

Demultiplexes one C-band multi-wavelength signal into a maximum of 40 wavelength signals.

TN12D40 TN11D40V

Demultiplexes one C-band multi-wavelength signal into a maximum of 40 wavelength signals and adjusts the optical power for each wavelength.

TN11ITL

Multiplexes and demultiplexes C-band optical signals with 100 GHz channel spacing and C-band optical signals with 50 GHz channel spacing.

TN12ITL TN11FIU

Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications channel in one optical direction, and performs the reverse process.

TN12FIU TN13FIU TN14FIU TN15FIU TN16FIU TN21FIU TN21DFIU

Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications channel in two optical directions, and performs the reverse process.

TN11SFIU

Multiplexes the main channel signal and the OSC signal onto a single communications channel in one optical direction, and performs the reverse process. This board applies to IEEE 1588v2 scenarios.

21.2 M40 M40: 40-channel multiplexing board

21.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the M40 board are TN11 and TN12.



2344



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 M 40

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 2 M 40

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Unit

Type

Description

TN11M4 0/ TN12M4 0

01

Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.

02

Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Differences Between Versions Appearance: l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The TN11M40 board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12M40 board. The TN11M40 board occupies three slots. The TN12M40 board occupies two slots. For details, see 21.2.6 Front Panel.


2345




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11M40

TN12M40

The TN12M40 board can be created as M40 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12M40 board functions as the TN11M40 board. The TN12M40 board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11M40 board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board. NOTE The TN12M40 board can substitute for the TN11M40 board only after the software upgrade to Optix OSN 8800/6800 V100R006C01 SPC300 or later. When the TN11M40 board resides on the Optix OSN 6800, the software version of the Optix OSN 6800 must be V100R003C02 or later. When the TN11M40 board resides on the Optix OSN 8800, there is no requirement for the software version of the Optix OSN 8800.

TN12M40

None

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the following description: A TN12M40 board can substitute for a TN11M40 board only when the software version of the TN12M40 board is upgraded to OptiX OSN 8800/6800 V100R006C01 SPC300 or higher and the NE software version of the NE where the TN11M40 board resides is OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003C02 or higher. The NE software version restriction does not apply when the TN11M40 board is installed on an OptiX OSN 8800.



2346





Added the TN12M40 board.

Compared with the TN11M40 board that occupies three slots, the TN12M40 board occupies two slots.

21.2.3 Application As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40 board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the M40 board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-2. Figure 21-2 Position of the M40 board in the WDM system OTU OTU

OTU OTU

1

1 M40

OA

OA

D40

40

40

1

1 D40

OA

OA

M40 40

40

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

21.2.4 Functions and Features The M40 board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-2. Table 21-2 Functions and features of the M40 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. l M4001: multiplexes 40 C_EVEN wavelength signals into one multi-wavelength signal. l M4002: multiplexes 40 C_ODD wavelength signals into one multi-wavelength signal.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Provides an in-service monitoring port (MON). This port connects to an optical spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signal without affecting traffic. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2347




Description



Optical-layer ASON

Supported

21.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board. Figure 21-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board

M01 M02

Multiplexer

Optical module Splitter OUT

M40

MON Temperature Temperature control detection

PIN

Detection and temperature control module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Backplane (Controlled by SCC) SCC

Signal Flow Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2348



of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

Optical module – Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l

Detection and temperature control module – Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature. – Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.

l


l


21.2.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-4 and Figure 21-5 show the front panel of the M40 board. Figure 21-4 Front panel of the TN11M40 board 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

M32

M33

M34

M35 M36

M37

M38

M39 M40

M15 M16

M17 M18

M19

M20

M21 M22

M23 M24

M25 M26

M01 M02

M03

M05 M06

M27 M28

M29 M30

M13 M14

MON OUT

M31

M07 M08

M09 M10

M11 M12

M40

M 11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

M04

STAT ACT PROG SRV

M01 M02 M 03 M 04 M 05 M 06 M 07 M 08 M09 M10

M40

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2349



Figure 21-5 Front panel of the TN12M40 board M13

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06

M07 M08

M09 M10 M11 M12

MON

194.80

193.40

OUT OUT

194.70

193.30

196.00

194.60

193.20

195.90

194.50

193.10

195.80

194.40

193.00

195.70

194.30

192.90

195.60

194.20

192.80

195.50

194.10

192.70

195.40

194.00

192.60

195.30

193.90

192.50

195.20

193.80

192.40

195.10

193.70

192.30

195.00

193.60

192.20

194.90

193.50

192.10

M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34

M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

M40

M38

M37

M36

M35

M33 M34

M31 M32

M29 M30

M39 M40 M26

M11 M12

M09 M10

M08

M07

M05 M06

M03 M04

M13

STAT ACT PROG SRV

M01 M02

M40

MON 194.80 193.40 OUT 194.70 193.30 196.00 194.60 193.20 195.90 194.50 193.10 195.80 194.40 193.00 195.70 194.30 192.90 195.60 194.20 192.80 195.50 194.10 192.70 195.40 194.00 192.60 195.30 193.90 192.50 195.20 193.80 192.40 195.10 193.70 192.30 195.00 193.60 192.20 194.90 193.50 192.10

M27 M28

M26

NOTE

A table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies is located on the front panel.



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 21-3 lists the type and function of each interface.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2350



Table 21-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40 board Interface

Type

Function

M01-M40

LC

Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs.

OUT

LC

Transmits multiplexed signals, when connected to an optical amplifying board or ITL.

MON

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 10:90. In other words, the MON port power is 10 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) – Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.

Table 21-4 and Table 21-5 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40 board. Table 21-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4001 board (C_EVEN)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.00

1529.55

M21

194.00

1545.32

M02

195.90

1530.33

M22

193.90

1546.12

M03

195.80

1531.12

M23

193.80

1546.92

M04

195.70

1531.90

M24

193.70

1547.72

M05

195.60

1532.68

M25

193.60

1548.51

M06

195.50

1533.47

M26

193.50

1549.32

M07

195.40

1534.25

M27

193.40

1550.12

M08

195.30

1535.04

M28

193.30

1550.92

M09

195.20

1535.82

M29

193.20

1551.72

M10

195.10

1536.61

M30

193.10

1552.52

M11

195.00

1537.40

M31

193.00

1553.33

M12

194.90

1538.19

M32

192.90

1554.13

M13

194.80

1538.98

M33

192.80

1554.94


2351



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M14

194.70

1539.77

M34

192.70

1555.75

M15

194.60

1540.56

M35

192.60

1556.55

M16

194.50

1541.35

M36

192.50

1557.36

M17

194.40

1542.14

M37

192.40

1558.17

M18

194.30

1542.94

M38

192.30

1558.98

M19

194.20

1543.73

M39

192.20

1559.79

M20

194.10

1544.53

M40

192.10

1560.61

Table 21-5 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4002 board (C_ODD)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.05

1529.16

M21

194.05

1544.92

M02

195.95

1529.94

M22

193.95

1545.72

M03

195.85

1530.72

M23

193.85

1546.52

M04

195.75

1531.51

M24

193.75

1547.32

M05

195.65

1532.29

M25

193.65

1548.11

M06

195.55

1533.07

M26

193.55

1548.91

M07

195.45

1533.86

M27

193.45

1549.72

M08

195.35

1534.64

M28

193.35

1550.52

M09

195.25

1535.43

M29

193.25

1551.32

M10

195.15

1536.22

M30

193.15

1552.12

M11

195.05

1537.00

M31

193.05

1552.93

M12

194.95

1537.79

M32

192.95

1553.73

M13

194.85

1538.58

M33

192.85

1554.54

M14

194.75

1539.37

M34

192.75

1555.34

M15

194.65

1540.16

M35

192.65

1556.15

M16

194.55

1540.95

M36

192.55

1556.96

M17

194.45

1541.75

M37

192.45

1557.77


2352



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M18

194.35

1542.54

M38

192.35

1558.58

M19

194.25

1543.33

M39

192.25

1559.39

M20

194.15

1544.13

M40

192.15

1560.20


21.2.7 Valid Slots Three slots house one TN11M40 board and two slots house one TN12M40 board. Table 21-6 shows the valid slots for the TN11M40 board and Table 21-7 shows the valid slots for the TN12M40 board. Table 21-6 Valid slots for the TN11M40 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27-IU32, IU35IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66




IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16


IU1-IU14


IU1-IU15

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40 board, the slot number of the TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 21-7 Valid slots for the TN12M40 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots




2353



Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40 board, the slot number of the TN12M40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.

21.2.8 Characteristic Code for the M40 The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 21-8. Table 21-8 Characteristic code for the M40 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band

Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.

Second character

Odd/even wavelengths

Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

21.2.9 Optical Interfaces This topic describes the interface information on the U2000. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2354



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 21-9. Table 21-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

OUT

1

M01-M40

2-41

MON

42

21.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For M40 parameters, refer to Table 21-10. Table 21-10 M40 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C


Default: C Configure Working Band Parity

All, Odd, Even Default: All


21.2.11 M40 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2355



Optical Specifications Table 21-11 lists the optical specifications of the M40 board. Table 21-11 Optical specifications of the M40 board Item

Unit

Value

Adjacent channel spacing

GHz

100

Insertion loss

dB

<= 6.5

Reflectance

dB

< -40


nm

1529-1561

Adjacent channel isolation

dB

> 22

Non-adjacent channel isolation

dB

> 25

Polarization dependence loss

dB

<= 0.5

Temperature characteristics

nm/°C

<= 0.002


dB

<= 3


Dimensions of front panel: – TN11M40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) – TN12M40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: – TN11M40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.) – TN12M40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)




TN11M40

10.0

13.0

TN12M40

10.0

13.0


21.3 M40V M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2356



21.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the M40V board are TN11 and TN12.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 M 40 V

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 2 M 40 V

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Unit

Type

Description

TN11M4 0V/ TN12M4 0V

01

Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.

02

Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Differences Between Versions Appearance:

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2357


l


The TN11M40V board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12M40V board. The TN11M40V board occupies three slots. The TN12M40V board occupies two slots. For details, see 21.3.6 Front Panel.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11M40V

TN12M40 V

The TN12M40V can be created as M40V on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12M40V board functions as the TN11M40V board. The TN12M40V board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11M40V board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board. NOTE The TN12M40V board can substitute for the TN11M40V board only after the software upgrade to Optix OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01 SPC300 or later. When the TN11M40V board resides on the Optix OSN 6800, the software version of the Optix OSN 6800 must be V100R003C02 or later. When the TN11M40V board resides on the Optix OSN 8800, there is no requirement for the software version of the Optix OSN 8800.

TN12M40V

None

-




Added the TN12M40V board.

Compared with the TN11M40V board that occupies three slots, the TN12M40V board occupies two slots.

21.3.3 Application As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40V board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. For the position of the M40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-6. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2358



Figure 21-6 Position of the M40V board in the WDM system OTU OTU

OTU OTU

1

1 M40V

OA

OA

D40

40

40

1

1 D40

OA

OA

M40V 40

40

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

21.3.4 Functions and Features The M40V board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals, monitor alarms and performance events, and adjust optical power. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-12. Table 21-12 Functions and features of the M40V board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one multiplexed signal and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. l M40V01: multiplexes 40 C_EVEN wavelength signals into one multi-wavelength signal. l M40V02: multiplexes 40 C_ODD wavelength signals into one multi-wavelength signal.





Optical power adjustment

Adjusts the optical power of each signal before multiplexing.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

21.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2359



Figure 21-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board

M01 M02

Optical module Multiplexer

VOA

Splitter

VOA

OUT

VOA

M40

MON VOA Temperature control control

Temperature detection

PIN


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer after the optical power adjustment by VOA. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

Optical module – Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals before multiplexing. – Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l


l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2360





21.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-8 and Figure 21-9 show the front panel of the M40V board. Figure 21-8 Front panel of the TN11M40V board 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

M27

M28

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

M31 M32

M33 M34

M35 M36

M37 M38

M39 M40

M15 M16

M17 M18

M19 M20

M21 M22

M23 M24

M25 M26

M01

M03 M04

M05 M06

M07 M08

M09 M10

M11 M12

M29

M30

MON OUT

M02

M40V

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

M 11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

M13 M14

STAT ACT PROG SRV

M01 M02 M 03 M 04 M 05 M 06 M 07 M 08 M09 M10

M40V

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2361



Figure 21-9 Front panel of the TN12M40V board M13

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06

M07 M08

M09 M10 M11 M12

MON

194.80

193.40

OUT OUT

194.70

193.30

196.00

194.60

193.20

195.90

194.50

193.10

195.80

194.40

193.00

195.70

194.30

192.90

195.60

194.20

192.80

195.50

194.10

192.70

195.40

194.00

192.60

195.30

193.90

192.50

195.20

193.80

192.40

195.10

193.70

192.30

195.00

193.60

192.20

194.90

193.50

192.10

M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34

M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

M39 M40 M11 M12

M40V

M26

M35

M38

M36

M33 M34

M31 M32

M29 M30

M37

M09 M10

M08

M07

M05 M06

M03 M04

M13

MON 194.80 193.40 OUT 194.70 193.30 196.00 194.60 193.20 195.90 194.50 193.10 195.80 194.40 193.00 195.70 194.30 192.90 195.60 194.20 192.80 195.50 194.10 192.70 195.40 194.00 192.60 195.30 193.90 192.50 195.20 193.80 192.40 195.10 193.70 192.30 195.00 193.60 192.20 194.90 193.50 192.10

STAT ACT PROG SRV

M01 M02

M40V

M27 M28

M26

NOTE




l


l


l



Interfaces Table 21-13 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 21-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40V board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

M01-M40

LC

Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs.


2362



Interface

Type

Function

OUT

LC

Transmits the multiplexed signals, when connected to an optical amplifier or ITL.

MON

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 10:90. In other words, the MON port power is 10 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) – Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.

Table 21-14 and Table 21-15 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency, and wavelengths of the M40V board. Table 21-14 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V board (even)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.00

1529.55

M21

194.00

1545.32

M02

195.90

1530.33

M22

193.90

1546.12

M03

195.80

1531.12

M23

193.80

1546.92

M04

195.70

1531.90

M24

193.70

1547.72

M05

195.60

1532.68

M25

193.60

1548.51

M06

195.50

1533.47

M26

193.50

1549.32

M07

195.40

1534.25

M27

193.40

1550.12

M08

195.30

1535.04

M28

193.30

1550.92

M09

195.20

1535.82

M29

193.20

1551.72

M10

195.10

1536.61

M30

193.10

1552.52

M11

195.00

1537.40

M31

193.00

1553.33

M12

194.90

1538.19

M32

192.90

1554.13

M13

194.80

1538.98

M33

192.80

1554.94

M14

194.70

1539.77

M34

192.70

1555.75

M15

194.60

1540.56

M35

192.60

1556.55


2363



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M16

194.50

1541.35

M36

192.50

1557.36

M17

194.40

1542.14

M37

192.40

1558.17

M18

194.30

1542.94

M38

192.30

1558.98

M19

194.20

1543.73

M39

192.20

1559.79

M20

194.10

1544.53

M40

192.10

1560.61

Table 21-15 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V board (odd)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.05

1529.16

M21

194.05

1544.92

M02

195.95

1529.94

M22

193.95

1545.72

M03

195.85

1530.72

M23

193.85

1546.52

M04

195.75

1531.51

M24

193.75

1547.32

M05

195.65

1532.29

M25

193.65

1548.11

M06

195.55

1533.07

M26

193.55

1548.91

M07

195.45

1533.86

M27

193.45

1549.72

M08

195.35

1534.64

M28

193.35

1550.52

M09

195.25

1535.43

M29

193.25

1551.32

M10

195.15

1536.22

M30

193.15

1552.12

M11

195.05

1537.00

M31

193.05

1552.93

M12

194.95

1537.79

M32

192.95

1553.73

M13

194.85

1538.58

M33

192.85

1554.54

M14

194.75

1539.37

M34

192.75

1555.34

M15

194.65

1540.16

M35

192.65

1556.15

M16

194.55

1540.95

M36

192.55

1556.96

M17

194.45

1541.75

M37

192.45

1557.77

M18

194.35

1542.54

M38

192.35

1558.58

M19

194.25

1543.33

M39

192.25

1559.39


2364



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M20

194.15

1544.13

M40

192.15

1560.20


21.3.7 Valid Slots Three slots house one TN11M40V board and two slots house one TN12M40V board. Table 21-16 shows the valid slots for the TN11M40V board and Table 21-17 shows the valid slots for the TN12M40V board. Table 21-16 Valid slots for the TN11M40V board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16


IU1-IU14


IU1-IU15

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40V board, the slot number of the TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 21-17 Valid slots for the TN12M40V board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






2365



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40V board, the slot number of the TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1.

21.3.8 Characteristic Code for the M40V The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 21-18. Table 21-18 Characteristic code for the M40V board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.



2366



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 21-19. Table 21-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

OUT

1

M01-M40

2-41

MON

42

21.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For M40V parameters, refer to Table 21-20. Table 21-20 M40V parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2367



Field

Value

Description





Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.


-3 to 3, with a step of 0.1 Default: none

Sets the relative optical power attenuation of a board channel. When using this parameter with Attenuation (dB), you can adjust optical power attenuation of a board channel more accurately. If Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) is set to 9 dB and Attenuation Difference (dB) is set to 1.5 dB, then the attenuation of the optical interface is 10.5 dB.

Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-



-


Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




2368



21.3.11 M40V Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 21-21 lists the optical specifications of the M40V board. Table 21-21 Optical specifications of the M40V board Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100

Insertion loss

dB

<= 8a

Reflectance

dB

< -40


nm

1529-1561


dB

> 22


dB

> 25

Attenuation range

dB

0-15

Loss accuracy

dB

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB) <= 1.5 (>10 dB)


dB

<= 0.5


dB

<= 3a

NOTE a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB. It includes the inherent insertion loss of the MUX board and VOA unit.


Dimensions of front panel: – TN11M40V (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) – TN12M40V (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: – TN11M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.) – TN12M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2369






TN11M40V

20.0

25.0

TN12M40V

16.0

26.0


21.4 D40 D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board

21.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the D40 board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1D 40

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 2D 40

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


2370



Type Unit

Type

Description

TN11D40/ TN12D40

01

Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.

02

Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

Differences Between Versions Appearance: l

The TN11D40 board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12D40 board. The TN11D40 board occupies three slots. The TN12D40 board occupies two slots. For details, see 21.4.6 Front Panel.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11D40

TN12D40

The TN12D40 can be created as D40 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12D40 board functions as the TN11D40 board. The TN12D40 board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11D40 board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board. NOTE The TN12D40 board can substitute for the TN11D40 board only after the software upgrade to Optix OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01 SPC300 or later. When the TN11D40 board resides on the Optix OSN 6800, the software version of the Optix OSN 6800 must be V100R003C02 or later. When the TN11D40 board resides on the Optix OSN 8800, there is no requirement for the software version of the Optix OSN 8800.

TN12D40

None

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2371





Added the TN12D40 board.

Compared with the TN11D40 board that occupies three slots, the TN12D40 board occupies only two slots.

21.4.3 Application The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexing unit. The D40 implements the demultiplexing of one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 21-10. Figure 21-10 Position of the D40 in the WDM system OTU OTU

OTU OTU

1

1 M40

OA

OA

D40

40

40

1

1 D40

OA

OA

M40 40

40

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

21.4.4 Functions and Features The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-22. Table 21-22 Functions and features of the D40 Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of service. l D4001: demultiplexes one multi-wavelength signal into 40 C_EVEN wavelength signals. l D4002: demultiplexes one multi-wavelength signal into 40 C_ODD wavelength signals.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Provides an in-service monitoring port (MON). This port connects to an optical spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signal without affecting traffic. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2372




Description



Optical-layer ASON

Supported

21.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40. Figure 21-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40 Optical module Demultiplexer

Splitter IN

D01 D02 D40

MON


PIN

Temperature control


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2373



signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the D01-D40 optical interfaces.

Module Function l

Optical module – Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l

Detection and temperature control module – Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.

l


l


21.4.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the D40 front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-12 and Figure 21-13 show the front panel of the D40 board. Figure 21-12 TN11D40 front panel 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

D27

D28

D29

D30

D31

D32

D33

D34

D35

D36

D37

D38

D39

D40

D13

D14

D15

D16

D17

D18

D19

D20

D21

D22

D23

D24

D25

D26

MON

IN

D01

D02

D03

D04

D05

D06

D07

D08

D09

D10

D11

D12

D40

D 11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

STAT ACT PROG SRV

D 01 D 02 D 03 D 04 D 05 D 06 D 07 D 08 D09 D10

D40

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2374



Figure 21-13 Front panel of the TN12D40 board D13

D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06

D07 D08

D09 D10 D11 D12

MON

194.80

193.40

IN

194.70

193.30

196.00

194.60

193.20

195.90

194.50

193.10

195.80

194.40

193.00

195.70

194.30

192.90

195.60

194.20

192.80

195.50

194.10

192.70

195.40

194.00

192.60

195.30

193.90

192.50

195.20

193.80

192.40

195.10

193.70

192.30

195.00

193.60

192.20

194.90

193.50

192.10

D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34

D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

D40

D37 D38

D35 D36

D33 D34

D31 D32

D29 D30

D39 D40 D26

D11 D12

D09 D10

D07 D08

D05 D06

D03 D04

D13

STAT ACT PROG SRV

D01 D02

D40

MON 194.80 193.40 IN 194.70 193.30 196.00 194.60 193.20 195.90 194.50 193.10 195.80 194.40 193.00 195.70 194.30 192.90 195.60 194.20 192.80 195.50 194.10 192.70 195.40 194.00 192.60 195.30 193.90 192.50 195.20 193.80 192.40 195.10 193.70 192.30 195.00 193.60 192.20 194.90 193.50 192.10

D27 D28

D26

NOTE




l


l


l




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2375



Table 21-23 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Connects to an optical amplifier or ITL board to receive a multi-wavelength signal.

D01-D40

LC

Transmit demultiplexed signals to the connected IN ports on associated OTUs.

MON

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals received by the IN port. The ratio of the MON port power to the IN port power is 10:90. In other words, the MON port power is 10 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.

Table 21-24 and Table 21-25 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the D40 board. Table 21-24 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4001 board (C_EVEN)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D01

196.00

1529.55

D21

194.00

1545.32

D02

195.90

1530.33

D22

193.90

1546.12

D03

195.80

1531.12

D23

193.80

1546.92

D04

195.70

1531.90

D24

193.70

1547.72

D05

195.60

1532.68

D25

193.60

1548.51

D06

195.50

1533.47

D26

193.50

1549.32

D07

195.40

1534.25

D27

193.40

1550.12

D08

195.30

1535.04

D28

193.30

1550.92

D09

195.20

1535.82

D29

193.20

1551.72

D10

195.10

1536.61

D30

193.10

1552.52

D11

195.00

1537.40

D31

193.00

1553.33

D12

194.90

1538.19

D32

192.90

1554.13

D13

194.80

1538.98

D33

192.80

1554.94


2376



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D14

194.70

1539.77

D34

192.70

1555.75

D15

194.60

1540.56

D35

192.60

1556.55

D16

194.50

1541.35

D36

192.50

1557.36

D17

194.40

1542.14

D37

192.40

1558.17

D18

194.30

1542.94

D38

192.30

1558.98

D19

194.20

1543.73

D39

192.20

1559.79

D20

194.10

1544.53

D40

192.10

1560.61

Table 21-25 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4002 board (C_ODD)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D01

196.05

1529.16

D21

194.05

1544.92

D02

195.95

1529.94

D22

193.95

1545.72

D03

195.85

1530.72

D23

193.85

1546.52

D04

195.75

1531.51

D24

193.75

1547.32

D05

195.65

1532.29

D25

193.65

1548.11

D06

195.55

1533.07

D26

193.55

1548.91

D07

195.45

1533.86

D27

193.45

1549.72

D08

195.35

1534.64

D28

193.35

1550.52

D09

195.25

1535.43

D29

193.25

1551.32

D10

195.15

1536.22

D30

193.15

1552.12

D11

195.05

1537.00

D31

193.05

1552.93

D12

194.95

1537.79

D32

192.95

1553.73

D13

194.85

1538.58

D33

192.85

1554.54

D14

194.75

1539.37

D34

192.75

1555.34

D15

194.65

1540.16

D35

192.65

1556.15

D16

194.55

1540.95

D36

192.55

1556.96

D17

194.45

1541.75

D37

192.45

1557.77


2377



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D18

194.35

1542.54

D38

192.35

1558.58

D19

194.25

1543.33

D39

192.25

1559.39

D20

194.15

1544.13

D40

192.15

1560.20


21.4.7 Valid Slots Three slots house one TN11D40 board and two slots house one TN12D40 board. Table 21-26 shows the valid slots for the TN11D40 board and Table 21-27 shows the valid slots for the TN12D40 board. Table 21-26 Valid slots for the TN11D40 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16


IU1-IU14


IU1-IU15

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the TN11D40 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the TN11D40 displayed on the NM is IU1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2378



Table 21-27 Valid slots for the TN12D40 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12D40 board, the slot number of the TN12D40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.

21.4.8 Characteristic Code for the D40 The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 21-28. Table 21-28 Characteristic code for the D40 Code

Meaning

Description

The first character

Band


The second character



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2379




Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 21-29. Table 21-29 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

D01-D40

2-41

MON

42

21.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For D40 parameters, refer to Table 21-30. Table 21-30 D40 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Configure Band

C Default: C


-


Actual Band Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2380



Field

Value

Description


-






Disable, Enable


Default: Disable



-60.0 to 50.0

Specifies the reference power for the OAMS function to determine whether the line power is normal. This parameter must be set based on the actual line power.


0.5 to 10.0

Default: /

Default:3

Specifies the threshold for the OAMS function to detect a line power abnormality. If the difference between the actual line power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds the specified abnormality threshold, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function. If the difference is less than the threshold, the U2000 will not issue a command to start the OAMS function.

21.4.11 D40 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 21-31 lists the optical specifications of the D40. Table 21-31 Optical specifications of the D40

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100

Insertion loss

dB

<= 6.5


2381



Item

Unit

Value

Reflectance

dB

< -40


nm

1529-1561


dB

> 25


dB

> 25


dB

<= 0.5

Temperature characteristics

nm/°C

< 0.002


dB

<= 3

-1 dB bandwidth

nm

>= 0.2

-20 dB bandwidth

nm

< 1.4


Dimensions of front panel: – TN11D40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (10.4 in.) – TN12D40 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (10.4 in.)

l

Weight: – TN11D40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.) – TN12D40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)




TN11D40

10.0

13.0

TN12D40

10.0

13.0


21.5 D40V D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA

21.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the D40V board is TN11. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2382








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1D 40 V

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

Type Unit

Type

Description

TN11D40V

01

Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.

02

Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

21.5.2 Application As a type of optical demultiplexing unit, the D40V demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels of signals that comply with the related ITU-T Recommendations and adjusts the output optical power of each channel. For the position of the D40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-14. Figure 21-14 Position of the D40V board in the WDM system OTU OTU

OTU OTU

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1

1 M40

OA

OA

D40V

40

40

1

1 D40V

OA

OA

M40 40

40


OTU OTU

OTU OTU

2383



21.5.3 Functions and Features The D40V board is mainly used to demultiplex signals, to monitor performance of optical signals, to monitor alarms and performance events, and to adjust optical power. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-32. Table 21-32 Functions and features of the D40V board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels of signals and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. l D40V01: demultiplexes one multi-wavelength signal into 40 C_EVEN wavelength signals. l D40V02: demultiplexes one multi-wavelength signal into 40 C_ODD wavelength signals.






Adjusts the optical power of each channel of signals after demultiplexing.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

21.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2384



Figure 21-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board

Splitter

Optical module Demultiplexer

VOA VOA

IN

VOA

D01 D02 D40

MON Temperature detection

PIN

Temperature VOA control control


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the D01-D40 optical interfaces after the optical power adjustment by VOA.

Module Function l

Optical module – Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals. – Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals after demultiplexing. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.

l

Detection and temperature control module – Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2385





21.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on front panel of the D40V board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-16 shows front panel of the D40V board. Figure 21-16 Front panel of the D40V board 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

D27

D28

D29

D30

D31

D32

D33

D34

D35

D36

D37

D38

D39

D40

D13

D14

D15

D16

D17

D18

D19

D20

D21

D22

D23

D24

D25

D26

MON

IN

D01

D02

D03

D04

D05

D06

D07

D08

D09

D10

D11

D12

D40V

STAT ACT PROG SRV

D 01 D 02 D 03 D 04 D 05 D 06 D 07 D 08 D09 D10

196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

D 11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20

D40V

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10

NOTE




l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2386


l




Interfaces Table 21-33 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 21-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the D40V board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives signals to be demultiplexed when connected to an optical amplifier or ITL.

D01-D40

LC

Transmits demultiplexed signals when connected to the "IN" interface of the OTUs.

MON

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals received by the IN port. The ratio of the MON port power to the IN port power is 10:90. In other words, the MON port power is 10 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.

Table 21-34 and Table 21-35 show the mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40V board. Table 21-34 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V01 board (C_EVEN)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D01

196.00

1529.55

D21

194.00

1545.32

D02

195.90

1530.33

D22

193.90

1546.12

D03

195.80

1531.12

D23

193.80

1546.92

D04

195.70

1531.90

D24

193.70

1547.72

D05

195.60

1532.68

D25

193.60

1548.51

D06

195.50

1533.47

D26

193.50

1549.32

D07

195.40

1534.25

D27

193.40

1550.12

D08

195.30

1535.04

D28

193.30

1550.92

D09

195.20

1535.82

D29

193.20

1551.72


2387



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D10

195.10

1536.61

D30

193.10

1552.52

D11

195.00

1537.40

D31

193.00

1553.33

D12

194.90

1538.19

D32

192.90

1554.13

D13

194.80

1538.98

D33

192.80

1554.94

D14

194.70

1539.77

D34

192.70

1555.75

D15

194.60

1540.56

D35

192.60

1556.55

D16

194.50

1541.35

D36

192.50

1557.36

D17

194.40

1542.14

D37

192.40

1558.17

D18

194.30

1542.94

D38

192.30

1558.98

D19

194.20

1543.73

D39

192.20

1559.79

D20

194.10

1544.53

D40

192.10

1560.61

Table 21-35 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V02 board (C_ODD)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D01

196.05

1529.16

D21

194.05

1544.92

D02

195.95

1529.94

D22

193.95

1545.72

D03

195.85

1530.72

D23

193.85

1546.52

D04

195.75

1531.51

D24

193.75

1547.32

D05

195.65

1532.29

D25

193.65

1548.11

D06

195.55

1533.07

D26

193.55

1548.91

D07

195.45

1533.86

D27

193.45

1549.72

D08

195.35

1534.64

D28

193.35

1550.52

D09

195.25

1535.43

D29

193.25

1551.32

D10

195.15

1536.22

D30

193.15

1552.12

D11

195.05

1537.00

D31

193.05

1552.93

D12

194.95

1537.79

D32

192.95

1553.73

D13

194.85

1538.58

D33

192.85

1554.54


2388



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

D14

194.75

1539.37

D34

192.75

1555.34

D15

194.65

1540.16

D35

192.65

1556.15

D16

194.55

1540.95

D36

192.55

1556.96

D17

194.45

1541.75

D37

192.45

1557.77

D18

194.35

1542.54

D38

192.35

1558.58

D19

194.25

1543.33

D39

192.25

1559.39

D20

194.15

1544.13

D40

192.15

1560.20


21.5.6 Valid Slots Three slots house one D40V board. Table 21-36 shows the valid slots for the D40V board. Table 21-36 Valid slots for the D40V board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU15

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the D40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the D40V board, the slot number of the D40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2389



21.5.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 21-37. Table 21-37 Characteristic code for the D40V board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 21-38. Table 21-38 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40V board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

IN

1

D01-D40

2-41

MON

42


2390



21.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For D40V parameters, refer to Table 21-39. Table 21-39 D40V parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-






Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.

Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



2391



Field

Value

Description


-


Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C





21.5.10 D40V Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 21-40 lists the optical specifications of the D40V board. Table 21-40 Optical specifications of the D40V board Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100

Insertion loss

dB

<= 8a

Reflectance

dB

< -40


nm

1529-1561


dB

> 25


dB

> 30

Attenuation range

dB

0-15

Loss accuracy

dB

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB) <= 1.5 (>10 dB)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dB

<= 0.5


dB

<= 3a


2392



Item

Unit

Value

NOTE a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB. It includes the inherent insertion loss of the DMUX board and VOA unit.



l





TN11D40V

20

25


21.6 DFIU DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board

21.6.1 Version Description The available functional version of the DFIU board is TN21.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2393



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N2 1D FI U

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y




Added the support for opticallayer ASON on the DFIU.

Function enhancement: When being used at an OLA site, the OptiX OSN 3800 supports optical-layer ASON.




Specifications change: The default value of the parameter is changed based on the application scenario.

21.6.3 Application As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, The DFIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals in two directions transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. For the position of the DFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-17.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2394



Figure 21-17 Position of the DFIU board in the WDM system

OA DFIU

SC2

DFIU

OA

NOTE

The DFIU board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DFIU boards actually refer to one physical board.

21.6.4 Functions and Features The DFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-41. Table 21-41 Functions and features of the DFIU board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals in two directions transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

21.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2395



Figure 21-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board Optical module ERC ERM

Multiplexer

EOUT

ETC ETM

Demultiplexer

EIN

WRC WRM

Multiplexer

WOUT

WTC WTM

Demultiplexer

WN

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage

Backplane DC power supply from a backplane

SCC

Signal Flow l

The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the WRC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the WRM optical interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the WOUT optical interface.

l

The WIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the WTC and WTM optical interfaces

l

The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the ERC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the ERM optical interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the EOUT optical interface.

l

The EIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the ETC and ETM optical interfaces



2396



Performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing of main path signals and supervisory channel signals. l


l


21.6.6 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-19 shows the front panel of the DFIU board. Figure 21-19 Front panel of the DFIU board

Interfaces Table 21-42 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 21-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DFIU board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

WIN

LC

Receives the west line signal.

WOUT

LC

Transmits the west line signal.

WTC

LC

Transmits the west main path signal.

WRC

LC

Receives the west main path signal.

WTM

LC

Transmits the west optical supervisory channel signal.

WRM

LC

Receives the west optical supervisory channel signal.

EIN

LC

Receives the east line signal.


2397



Interface

Type

Function

EOUT

LC

Transmits the east line signal.

ETC

LC

Transmits the east main path signal.

ERC

LC

Receives the east main path signal.

ETM

LC

Transmits the east optical supervisory channel signal.

ERM

LC

Receives the east optical supervisory channel signal.


21.6.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one DFIU board. Table 21-43 shows the valid slots for the DFIU board. Table 21-43 Valid slots for DFIU board Product

Valid Slots


IU1, IU8, IU11

21.6.8 Characteristic Code for the DFIU The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 21-44. Table 21-44 Characteristic code for the DFIU board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band

Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2398




Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 21-45. Table 21-45 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DFIU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

WIN/WOUT

1

WRM/WTM

2

WRC/WTC

3

EIN/EOUT

4

ERM/ETM

5

ERC/ETC

6

NOTE


21.6.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For DFIU parameters, refer to Table 21-46. Table 21-46 DFIU parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



-


Actual Band

-



-




2399



Field

Value

Description

Configure Band

C



All, ecldmin40 Default: All

Specifies the desired parity of the working band of the board. In an 80-wavelength system, when G.653 optical fibers are used and there is no requirement for more than 40 wavelengths, you can use 40 wavelengths in the range of 192.100 THz to 193.050 THz and 195.100 THz to 196.050 THz to increase the transmission distance. Set this parameter to ecldmin40. NOTICE Before using 40 wavelengths in the range of 192.100 THz to 193.100 THz and 195.000 THz to 196.000 THz, services need to be planned on these wavelengths. In the ASON network prevents current paths, original paths, and revertive paths from staying on idle wavelengths (in the range of 193.100 THz to 195.000 THz).

Channel Number Mode



Default:/ PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km))

0 to 1 Default: 0.05

Specifies the polarization mode dispersion (PMD) coefficient of a fiber. This parameter must be set according to the fiber type being in use. Usually, the nominal fiber PMD coefficient is recommended for this parameter. This parameter is available only for ASON systems.

Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km))

-15 to 30 Default: 0

Specifies the chromatic dispersion (CD) coefficient of a fiber. This parameter must be set according to the fiber type being in use. Usually, the nominal fiber CD coefficient is recommended for this parameter. This parameter is available only for ASON systems.

21.6.11 DFIU Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2400



Optical Specifications Table 21-47 Optical specifications of the DFIU board Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-

Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel

nm

1500-1520

-

Optical return loss

dB

> 40

EIN-ETM

Insertion loss

dB

<= 1.5

Insertion loss

dB

<= 1

Isolation

dB

> 40

Isolation

dB

> 12


dB

< 0.2

ERM-EOUT WIN-WTM WRM-WOUT EIN-ETC ERC-EOUT WIN-WTC WRC-WOUT EIN-ETM WIN-WTM EIN-ETC WIN-WTC -



l





TN21DFIU

0.2

0.3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2401



21.7 FIU FIU: fiber interface board

21.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the FIU board are TN11, TN12, TN13, TN14, TN15 TN16, and TN21.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1F IU

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

T N1 2F IU

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 3F IU

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Ya

T N1 4F IU

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N1 5F IU

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


2402



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 6F IU

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N2 1F IU

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

a: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01/TN13FIU03.

Type Board

Type

Description

TN13FIU

01

This board supports optical power detection but does not support input of large optical power.

02

This board supports input of large optical power but not optical power detection. It is used together with the HBA board.

03

This board supports optical power detection but does not support input of large optical power.Compared with the TN13FIU01 and TN13FIU02 board, This board has a larger specification of the Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel and Isolation.


Function: – The TN13FIU02 board supports high power input and works with the HBA board. The TN14FIU/TN16FIU board works with the RAU1/RAU2 board. The other versions of the FIU board do not support high power input. For details, see 21.7.3 Application. – The TN11FIU, TN12FIU and TN15FIU boards support reporting of input optical power, but the TN13FIU, TN14FIU, TN16FIU, and TN21FIU boards do not. The TN14FIU/TN16FIU supports the OUT optical interface power detection. The other versions of the FIU board do not support high power input. For details, see 21.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2403



– Only the TN12FIU/TN13FIU/TN14FIU/TN15FIU/TN16FIU board supports opticallayer ASON, the TN11FIU/TN21FIU does not support. l

Appearance: – The TN11FIU, TN12FIU , TN14FIU, TN15FIU, TN16FIU, and TN13FIU01/ TN13FIU03 versions use the same front panel. The TN13FIU02 version uses a different front panel from the preceding versions. The TN21 version uses a different front panel from the preceding versions and is applicable to case-shaped equipment. For details, see 21.7.6 Front Panel and 21.7.11 FIU Specifications.

l

Specification: The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 21.7.11 FIU Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11FIU

TN12FIU/TN13FIU /TN15FIU

Using the TN12FIU/TN15FIU board to replace the TN11FIU board: l TN12FIU/TN15FIUcan be created as FIU on the NMS( TN11FIU is displayed as FIU on the NMS. ). For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version. After substitution, the TN12FIU/TN15FIU functions as the TN11FIU. Using the TN13FIU board to replace the TN11FIU board: l Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version. l The TN13FIU can be created as 13FIU on the NMS.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2404



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12FIU

TN13FIU /TN15FIU

Using the TN13FIU board to replace the TN12FIU board: l When the ASON function is not required, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version. l When the ASON function is required, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C03 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version. l After the substitution, the TN13FIU board is functionally different from the TN12FIU board. Using the TN15FIU board to replace the TN12FIU board: The TN15FIU can be created as 12FIU on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN15FIU functions as the TN12FIU. NOTE When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN15FIU board cannot be installed in slot IU1. Therefore, if a TN12FIU board is installed in slot IU1 and a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN15FIU board cannot substitute for the TN12FIU board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

TN13FIU

None

-

TN14FIU

TN16FIU

The TN16FIU can be created as 14FIU on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN16FIU functions as the TN14FIU.

TN15FIU

None

-

TN16FIU

None

-

TN21FIU

None

-


2405






Added the TN13FIU03 board.

Function enhancement.



Added the TN16FIU board.





The TN15FIU board is added to support input optical power detection and optical-layer ASON, and it can be used to replace the TN11FIU or TN12FIU board.




The default value of the parameter is changed based on the actual situation.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update



The TN14FIU board is added to work with the RAU1 and RAU2 boards, and the OUT port on the TN14FIU board supports optical power detection.


2406



Hardware Update




21.7.3 Application As an optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel. For the position of the FIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-20, Figure 21-21, and Figure 21-22. Figure 21-20 Position of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/TN13FIU03/TN21FIU/ TN14FIU/TN15FIU/TN16FIU board in the WDM system (normal optical power) OTU OTU

MUX

OA

SC1 OTU OTU

DMUX

OA FIU

FIU

OTU OTU

SC1

OA

OA

DMUX

MUX

OTU OTU

Figure 21-21 Position of the TN13FIU02 board in the WDM system (high optical power) OTU OTU

MUX

HBA

DMUX

FIU

FIU

OA

OTU

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

DMUX

OTU OTU

SC1 OTU

OA

SC1

HBA

MUX

OTU OTU


2407



Figure 21-22 Position of the TN14FIU/TN16FIU board (used together with RAU1/RAU2) in the WDM system OTU OTU

M U X

OBU1

RC

LINE

OUT

RAU1/ RAU2

F I IN TM U

SYS

TC

SYS

IN

IN

OTU

D M U X

OUT

OTU

TM

TC

OTU

OTU

IN

RM

SC1

D M U X

OUT

RAU1/ LINE RAU2

OUT

F RM SC1 I U RC

OBU1

M U X

OTU OTU

21.7.4 Functions and Features The FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals, and monitors performance of optical signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-48. Table 21-48 Functions and features of the FIU Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel.



Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN12FIU/TN13FIU/TN14FIU/TN15FIU/ TN16FIU.

21.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board, TN12FIU board, TN14FIU, TN15FIU and TN16FIU board.TN14FIU and TN16FIU board. Figure 21-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board and the TN21FIU board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2408



Figure 21-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board, TN12FIU board,TN14FIU, TN15FIU and TN16FIU board Optical module RC RM

Splitter

Multiplexer

OUT MON

TC TM

Demultiplexer

IN

PIN Optical power detection module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2409



Figure 21-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board and the TN21FIU board Optical module RC RM

Splitter

Multiplexer

OUT MON

TC TM

Demultiplexer

IN

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow l

The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the RC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the RM optical interface into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the multiplexed signals through the OUT optical interface.

l

The IN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the TC and TM optical interfaces

Module Function l

Optical module – Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the line optical signals and sends the signals to the MON interface for detection.

l

Optical power detection module Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals. NOTE

Only the TN11FIU, TN12FIU, and TN15FIU support the input optical power detection. The TN14FIU/TN16FIU support the OUT optical interface power detection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2410


l



l


21.7.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the FIU board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-25 shows the front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN14FIU/TN15FIU/ TN16FIU board. Figure 21-26 and Figure 21-27 show the front panel of the TN13FIU board. Figure 21-28 shows the front panel of the TN21FIU board. Figure 21-25 Front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN14FIU/TN15FIU/TN16FIU board

CAUTION

MON

OUT

IN

TC

RC

TM

RM

FIU

CAUTION


STAT ACT PROG SRV

FIU


Figure 21-26 Front panel of the TN13FIU01/TN13FIU03 board

CAUTION

MON

OUT

IN

TC

RC

TM


RM

FIU

CAUTION


FIU

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

STAT


2411



Figure 21-27 Front panel of the TN13FIU02 board

CAUTION

MON

TM

RM

IN

TC

RC

OUT

FIU

CAUTION


FIU

STAT


Figure 21-28 Front panel of the TN21FIU board

Indicators The TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN14FIU/TN15FIU/TN16FIU board has four indicators on the front panel. l


l


l


l


The TN13FIU board has one indicator on the front panel. l


The TN21FIU board has no indicator on the front panel. For details about indicators on the board, see A.4 Board Indicators.



2412



Table 21-49 Types and functions of the interfaces on the FIU board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LCa


TC

LC


RC

LCa


TM

LC

Transmits the 1510 nm optical supervisory channel signal.

RM

LC

Receives the 1510 nm optical supervisory channel signal.

MON

LC

Connects to MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. l TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/ TN13FIU03/TN14FIU/TN15FIU/ TN16FIU/TN21FIU: the ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 1:99. In other words, the MON port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB. l TN13FIU02: the ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 0.1:99.9. In other words, the MON port power is 30 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99.9/0.1) = 30 dB.

a: the interface type of the "RC" and "OUT" of the TN13FIU02 are "LSH/APC".

Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW). NOTE

TN13FIU02: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

21.7.7 Valid Slots One slots house one FIU board. Table 21-50 shows the valid slots for the TN11FIU board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2413



Table 21-50 Valid slots for the TN11FIU board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17

Table 21-51 shows the valid slots for the TN12FIU board. Table 21-51 Valid slots for the TN12FIU board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 21-53 shows the valid slots for the TN14FIU/TN16FIU board. Table 21-53 Valid slots for the TN14FIU/TN16FIU board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






2414



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

NOTE

When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack subrack, the TN15FIU board cannot be installed in slot IU1.


Valid Slots


IU1, IU8, IU11

21.7.8 Characteristic Code for the FIU The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the band adopted by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 21-56.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2415



Table 21-56 Characteristic code for the FIU board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 21-57. Table 21-57 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

RM/TM

2

RC/TC

3

MON

4

NOTE


21.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For FIU parameters, refer to Table 21-58.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2416



Table 21-58 FIU parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-

An Optical Interface Name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. NOTE This parameter is supported only by TN11FIU / TN12FIU/TN13FIU .

Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C





Channel Number Mode



Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2417



Field

Value

Description

PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km))

0 to 1

Specifies the polarization mode dispersion (PMD) coefficient of a fiber. This parameter must be set according to the fiber type being in use. Usually, the nominal fiber PMD coefficient is recommended for this parameter.

Default: 0.05

This parameter is available only for ASON systems. Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km))

-214748364.8 to 214748364.7 Default: 0


Fiber Type

G652 Fiber, G653 Fiber, LEAF Fiber, TWRS Fiber, TWC Fiber, TWPLUS Fiber, SMFLS Fiber, G654B Fiber, G656 Fiber, G654A Fiber, TERA_LIGHT Fiber

Specifies the fiber type of the board.

Default: / Fiber Length(m)

0 to 4294967295 Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Specifies the length of a fiber. This value can be used by the Optical Doctor (OD) function to assess the impact of stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) and wavelength dependent loss (WDL). The parameter value must truly reflect the actual fiber length and can be accurate to within the kilometer range.


2418



Field

Value

Description

Source DCM 1

DCM_A_G652 to DCM_F_G652, DCM_S_G652, DCM_T_G652, DCM_A_G655 to DCM_F_G655, DCM_S_G653, DCM_T_G653, DCM_M_G653, DCM_A_G653, FBG_D_G652 to FBG_J_G652, FBG_L_G652, FBG_F_G655, FBG_H_G655, FBG_J_G655, FBG_L_G655, DCM_A_TWRS to DCM_F_TWRS, Unconfigured

Participates in route computation in the ASON domain.

Source DCM 2 Source DCM 3 Source DCM 4

When one DCM is inadequate to compensate for fiber dispersion, multiple DCMs are needed to provide expected compensation effect. Each FIU board supports a maximum of four dispersion compensation modules (DCM modules). Set this parameter according to the DCM module on the OA board interconnected with the target FIU board. DCM and FBG in the parameter values indicate the type of DCM. Letters A to T indicate the compensation distance. G652, G653, G655, and TWRS represent the fiber types. For the detailed DCM description, see DCM Frame and DCM Module.

Default: Unconfigured Sink DCM 1 Sink DCM 2 Sink DCM 3 Sink DCM 4


Participates in route computation in the ASON domain. When one DCM is inadequate to compensate for fiber dispersion, multiple DCMs are needed to provide expected compensation effect. Each FIU board supports a maximum of four dispersion compensation modules (DCM modules). Set this parameter according to the DCM module on the OA board interconnected with the target FIU board. DCM and FBG in the parameter values indicate the type of DCM. Letters A to T indicate the compensation distance. G652, G653, G655, and TWRS represent the fiber types. For the detailed DCM description, see DCM Frame and DCM Module.

Default: Unconfigured

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2419



Field

Value

Description

Launch Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0

This parameter is reserved for future use. Users do not need to set it.

21.7.11 FIU Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 21-59 Optical specifications of the FIU board Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-


nm

TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/ TN13FIU02/TN15FIU/TN21FIU: 1500-1520 TN13FIU03/TN14FIU/TN16FIU: 1480-1520

-

Optical return loss

dB

> 40

IN-TM

Insertion loss

dB

≤ 1.5

Insertion loss

dB

≤1

Isolation

dB

TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/ TN13FIU02/TN14FIU//TN15FIU/ TN21FIU: >40

RM-OUT IN-TC RC-OUT IN-TM

TN13FIU03/TN16FIU: ≥55 IN-TC

Isolation

dB

TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/ TN13FIU02/TN14FIU/TN15FIU/ TN21FIU: >12 TN13FIU03/TN16FIU: ≥40

-


dB

< 0.2

Mechanical Specifications TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU/TN14FIU/TN15FIU: Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2420



l


l


TN16FIU: l


l


TN21FIU: l

Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 118.9 mm (4.7 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220.0 mm (8.7 in.)

l





TN11FIU/TN12FIU/ TN14FIU

4.2

4.6

TN15FIU

6.0

6.6

TN13FIU/TN21FIU

0.2

0.3

TN16FIU

6.0

6.5


21.8 ITL ITL: interleaver board

21.8.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the ITL board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2421



Boa rd





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11I TL

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN 12I TL

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type U n i t

T y p e

M ult ipl ex

De mu ltip lex

10 G Sy ste m

40 G Co her ent Sys te m

40G Inc ohe rent Syst em

100G Coherent System HFEC

SDFEC

SDFEC2

wDCMEnhanced, SDFEC2

wDCM, SDFEC2

T N 1 1 I T L

0 cou 1 ple r

inte rlea ver

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

0 int 4 erl eav er

inte rlea ver

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

0 cou 6 ple r

inte rlea ver

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

T 0 cou N 1 ple 1 r 2 I T L

inte rlea ver

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N



2422



– The optical module on the TN11ITL04 board consists of two interleavers which are used to multiplex/demultiplex optical signals. The optical module on the ITL board of other versions consists of an interleaver and a coupler. The interleaver is used to demultiplex optical signals, and the coupler is used to multiplex optical signals. For details, see 21.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow. – The TN12ITL board supports the VOA mode, but the ITL board of other versions does not. For details, see 21.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS. l

Appearance: – The TN11 and TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see 21.8.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.8.11 ITL Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11ITL

TN12ITL

Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version or update the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or later version. When used in a 10 Gbit/s system, the TN12ITL board can replace the TN11ITL board.

TN12ITL

TN11ITL

The TN11ITL board can replace the TN12ITL board only in one application scenario: multiplexing/demultiplexing between the signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz. When used in a 10 Gbit/s system, in ITL mode, the TN11ITL board can replace the TN12ITL board.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the TN11ITL06 board.

The board is designed for 10G, 40G coherent, 100G coherent (SDFEC), and 100G coherent (SDFEC2) systems.


2423



21.8.3 Application As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the ITL board implements multiplexing/demultiplexing between the optical signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz. For the position of the ITL board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-29. Figure 21-29 Position of the ITL board in the WDM system OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU

1

C_ODD

C_ODD

M40 40 1

C_EVEN

C_EVEN

WMU

40

ITL

1 D40 40 1

D40 40 1

OA

OA

M40

1

D40 40 1

ITL

C_ODD

WMU OA

C_ODD

M40

OA

C_EVEN D40

40

C_EVEN

40 1 M40 40

OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU

NOTE

The WMU board must be used when the TN54NS4M board or the 10G OTU with fixed wavelengths is used in the system. In other cases, the WMU board is optional.

21.8.4 Functions and Features The ITL board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals, and to detect online optical spectrum. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-60. Table 21-60 Functions and features of the ITL board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Multiplexes/demultiplexes optical signals between C_ODD signals and C_EVEN signals.

Detection and monitoring of the online spectrum


Optical-layer ASON

Supported by TN11ITL.


2424



21.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-30 and Figure 21-31 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ITL board. Figure 21-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL01/TN11ITL06/TN12ITL board Optical module TO TE

Interleaver

RO RE

IN

Splitter

Coupler

OUT MON

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


2425



Figure 21-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL04 board

Signal Flow TN11ITL01/TN11ITL06: l

The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively.

l

The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.

TN11ITL04: l

The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively.

l

The interleaver multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.

TN12ITL: l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver. Then according to the requirement, get the signals all passed through the TE interface or split the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2426



two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. l

The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

Optical module Performs the transformation between C band optical signals in 100 GHz spacing and C band optical signals in 50 GHz spacing.

l


l


21.8.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ITL board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-32 and Figure 21-33 show the front panel of the ITL board. Figure 21-32 Front panel of the TN11ITL board

CAUTION

MON

OUT

IN

TO

RO

TE


RE

ITL

CAUTION


ITL

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

STAT


2427



Figure 21-33 Front panel of the TN12ITL board

CAUTION

OUT

IN

TO

RO

TE

RE

ITL

CAUTION

MON


ITL

STAT ACT PROG SRV


Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of TN11ITL board. l


There are four indicators on the front panel of TN12ITL board. l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 21-61 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 21-61 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ITL board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

OUT

LC

Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

TE

LC

Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

RE

LC

Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

TO

LC

Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals).


2428



Interface

Type

Function

RO

LC

Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals).

MON

LC

Connects to MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8, for inservice monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 10:90. In other words, the MON port power is 10 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.


21.8.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one ITL board. Table 21-62 shows the valid slots for the ITL board. Table 21-62 Valid slots for the ITL board Product

Valid Slots




TN11ITL: IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 TN12ITL: IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36


IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17

21.8.8 Characteristic Code for the ITL The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 21-63.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2429



Table 21-63 Characteristic code for the ITL board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band

Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 21-64. Table 21-64 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

RE/TE

2

RO/TO

3

MON

4

NOTE


21.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For ITL parameters, refer to Table 21-65. Table 21-65 ITL parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



2430



Field

Value

Description


-


Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C






Board Mode

ITL Mode, VOA Mode


Default: ITL Mode

ITL Mode: Split the multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface into two channels of signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. VOA Mode: The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface all passed through the TE interface. NOTE VOA Mode can be configured only when the services are less than 40 channels. Only for TN12ITL.

21.8.11 ITL Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 21-66 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01/TN11ITL06

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Unit

Value

Input channel spacinga

GHz

100

Output channel spacinga

GHz

50


2431



Item

Unit

Value

dB

< 4.5

dB

< 2.5


dB

<1

Isolation

dB

> 25

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

> 45

PMD

ps

< 0.5


dB

< 0.5


dBm

<= 26

Insertion loss

RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO

IN-TE IN-TO

a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

Table 21-67 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04 Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100


GHz

50

dB

<3

dB

<3


dB

<1

Isolation

dB

> 25

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

> 45

PMD

ps

< 0.5


dB

< 0.5


dBm

<= 26

Insertion loss


IN-TE IN-TO

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2432



Item

Unit

Value


Table 21-68 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100


GHz

50

dB

< 4.5

dB

< 3.5


dB

<1

Isolation

dB

> 22

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

> 45

PMD

ps

< 0.5


dB

< 0.5


dBm

<= 23

Insertion loss


IN-TE IN-TO




l


Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Typical power consumption (W)

Maximum power consumptiona (W)

TN11ITL

0.2

0.3

TN12ITL

10.0

11.5


2433



Board

Typical power consumption (W)

Maximum power consumptiona (W)


21.9 SFIU SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing

21.9.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SFIU board is available, that is, TN11.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1S FI U

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update





2434





Changed the slots for installing the SFIU boards on the OptiX OSN 3800 to IU2, IU3, IU4, IU5, and IU11.


21.9.3 Application As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the SFIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel (OSC). For the position of the SFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-34. Figure 21-34 Position of the SFIU board in the WDM system

SYS1

OA

LINE1

SYS1

SYS1

LINE1

LINE1

SYS1

OA

TM1 OSC2

SCC

LINE1

ST2 RM1 OSC1

OA

S F I U

SYS2

S F I U LINE2

LINE2

OSC2 RM2

OA TM1

OSC2

RM1

OSC1

ST2 OSC1 TM2

SCC SYS2

NE1

OA

SYS2

S F I U

S F I U LINE2

LINE2

OSC2

RM2

OSC1

TM2

ST2

SYS2

NE2

SCC

OA NE3

NOTE

Of all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board. A Raman board cannot be configured between two NEs that are interconnected through SFIU boards. The OSC2 optical port supports the 1511 nm wavelength, and the OSC1 optical port supports the 1491 nm wavelength. The SFIU board cannot be used together with the DAS1 board.

21.9.4 Functions and Features The SFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-69. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2435



Table 21-69 Functions and features of the SFIU Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. With this function, neither commissioning nor delay compensation is required for IEEE 1588V2 clocks.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

21.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SFIU board consists of an optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-35 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SFIU board. Figure 21-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the SFIU board

SYS1

LINE1

OSC1

Optical module

OSC2

LINE2

SYS2

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)


SCC

Signal Flow Each port on the SFIU board supports bidirectional transmission. It can receive or transmit a signal depending on the position of the SFIU board. As shown in Figure 21-36, the LINE1, LINE2, SYS1, and SYS2 ports can transmit or receive the main channel signal. In addition, the LINE1 port receives and transmits the OSC signal at the same time, and the OSC1 and OSC2 ports can receive or transmit the OSC signal. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2436



Figure 21-36 Position of the SFIU board in a WDM system A

OA

SYS1

LINE1

TM1 OSC2 RM1 OSC1

SYS2

S F I U

SYS1

S F I U LINE2

SYS1

B

LINE1

LINE1

SYS1

LINE2

OSC2 RM2

OA TM1

OSC2

RM1

OSC1

ST2 OSC1 TM2

SYS2

OA

S F I U

SYS2

NE2

NE1

l

LINE1

A

OA

ST2

OA

B

S F I U LINE2

LINE2

OSC2

RM2

OSC1

TM2

ST2

SYS2

OA

NE3

Signal flow when the SFIU board is located at point A: – The main channel signal is received through the SYS1 port and the OSC signal through the OSC2 port. Then the two signals are multiplexed into one signal, which is directed out through the LINE1 port. – The OSC signal is received through the LINE1 port and is directed out through the OSC1 port. – The main channel signal is received through the LINE2 port and is directed out through the SYS2 port.

l

Signal flow when the SFIU board is located at point B: – The line signal received through the LINE1 port is demultiplexed into a main channel signal and an OSC signal. Then the main channel signal is sent out through the SYS1 port and the OSC signal is sent out through the OSC2 port. – The OSC signal is received through the OSC1 port and is directed out through the LINE1 port. – The main channel signal is received through the SYS2 port and is directed out through the LINE2 port.

The OSC2 port supports the 1511 nm wavelength and the OSC1 port supports the 1491 nm wavelength.

Module Functions l

Optical module Multiplexes the OSC signal and main channel signal into a multiplexed signal, and vice versa.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2437





21.9.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the SFIU board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 21-37 shows the front panel of the TN11SFIU board. Figure 21-37 Front panel of the TN11SFIU board

CAUTION

SFIU

CAUTION

LINE1 LINE2 SYS1 SYS2 OSC1 OSC2


SFIU

STAT





Interfaces Table 21-70 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 21-70 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SFIU board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

LINE1

LC

The LINE1 optical interface is located on the line side. It sends and receives OSC signals in addition to transmitting main optical path signals.


2438



Interface

Type

Function

LINE2

LC

The LINE2 optical interface is located on the line side. It transmits the signals of the main optical path.

SYS1

LC

The SYS1 optical interface transmits the signals in the main optical path.

SYS2

LC

The SYS2 optical interface transmits the signals in the main optical path.

OSC1

LC

The OSC1 optical interface transmits the OSC signals.

OSC2

LC

The OSC2 optical interface transmits the OSC signals.

Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

21.9.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one SFIU board. Table 21-71 shows the valid slots for the SFIU board. Table 21-71 Valid slots for the SFIU board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

21.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SFIU The characteristic code for the SFIU board consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 21-72. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2439



Table 21-72 Characteristic code for the SFIU board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band




Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 21-73. Table 21-73 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFIU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

LINE1/LINE2

1

OSC1/OSC2

2

SYS1/SYS2

3

NOTE


21.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For SFIU parameters, refer to Table 21-74. Table 21-74 SFIU parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



2440



Field

Value

Description


-


Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C







-


Fiber Type



Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2441



Field

Value

Description

Channel Number Mode



Default: / PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km))






Fiber Length(m)

0 to 4294967295 Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2442



Field

Value

Description

Source DCM 1



Source DCM 2 Source DCM 3 Source DCM 4

When one DCM is inadequate to compensate for fiber dispersion, multiple DCMs are needed to provide expected compensation effect. Each SFIU board supports a maximum of four dispersion compensation modules (DCM modules). Set this parameter according to the DCM module on the OA board interconnected with the target SFIU board. DCM and FBG in the parameter values indicate the type of DCM. Letters A to T indicate the compensation distance. G652, G653, G655, and TWRS represent the fiber types. For the detailed DCM description, see DCM Frame and DCM Module.

Default: Unconfigured Sink DCM 1 Sink DCM 2 Sink DCM 3 Sink DCM 4


Participates in route computation in the ASON domain. When one DCM is inadequate to compensate for fiber dispersion, multiple DCMs are needed to provide expected compensation effect. Each SFIU board supports a maximum of four dispersion compensation modules (DCM modules). Set this parameter according to the DCM module on the OA board interconnected with the target SFIU board. DCM and FBG in the parameter values indicate the type of DCM. Letters A to T indicate the compensation distance. G652, G653, G655, and TWRS represent the fiber types. For the detailed DCM description, see DCM Frame and DCM Module.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2443



Field

Value

Description

Launch Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0


21.9.11 SFIU Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 21-75 Optical specifications of the SFIU board Interface

Item

Uni t

Value

-

Operating wavelength range (C band)

nm

1528-1561

-


nm

1480 to 1520

LINE1SYS1

Insertion loss

dB

<= 1.0

Insertion loss

dB

<= 1.5

LINE1OSC1 @λc

Isolation

dB

>= 65

LINE1OSC2 @λc

Isolation

dB

>= 40

OSC1SYS1

Directivity

dB

>= 45

Directivity

dB

>= 55

Optical return loss

dB

> 40

LINE2SYS2 LINE1OSC1 LINE1OSC2

SYS1OSC1 OSC1OSC2 OSC2OSC1 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2444



Interface

Item

-


Uni t

Value

C band

dB

< 0.1

OSC channel

dB

< 0.15



l





TN11SFIU

0.2

0.3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2445


22 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

22

Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

About This Chapter 22.1 Overview Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) boards drop individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals from a multiplexed signal and send these optical signals to associated OTU boards. In addition, FOADM boards also add and multiplex individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals into one multiplexed signal. 22.2 CMR1 CMR1: CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 22.3 CMR2 CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 22.4 CMR4 CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 22.5 DMR1 DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 22.6 MR2 MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 22.7 MR4 MR4: 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 22.8 MR8 MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 22.9 MR8V MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA 22.10 SBM2 SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2446



22.1 Overview Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) boards drop individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals from a multiplexed signal and send these optical signals to associated OTU boards. In addition, FOADM boards also add and multiplex individual ITU-T G.694-compliant optical signals into one multiplexed signal.

Positions of FOADM Boards in a WDM System Figure 22-1 shows the positions of FOADM boards in a WDM system. Figure 22-1 Positions of FOADM boards in a WDM system

SC2

West line-side ODF

F I U

OA

OA FOADM

FOADM

OA

F I U

OA

O T U

O T U

West client-side West signal

O T U

East line-side ODF

O T U

East client-side

East signal

Pass-through signal

Main Functions The function differences between different FOADM boards lie in the WDM specifications and number of add/drop signals. Table 22-1 lists the functions of FOADM boards. The DMR1 and SBM2 boards support applications different from other FOADM boards. For details, see 22.5 DMR1 and 22.10 SBM2. Table 22-1 Main functions of FOADM boards Board

WDM Specifications

Function

TN21CMR1

CWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes one wavelength to/ from a multiplexed signal.

TN11CMR2

CWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from a multiplexed signal.

TN21CMR2 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2447



Board

WDM Specifications

Function

TN11CMR4

CWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from a multiplexed signal.

CWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of 1310 nm wavelength in east direction and one in west direction.

DWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from a multiplexed signal.

DWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from a multiplexed signal.

TN11MR8

DWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/ from a multiplexed signal.

TN11MR8V

DWDM

Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/ from a multiplexed signal. Adjusts the multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of cascade ports for pass-through wavelengths.

CWDM

Adds/Drops two wavelengths to/from one multiplexed signal and multiplexes the other two wavelengths into another multiplexed signal. The optical signals that are added or dropped, and the optical signals that are multiplexed must be carried over different wavelengths. The SBM2 unit is applied to single-fiber bidirectional system.

TN21CMR4 TN11DMR1 TN21DMR1 TN11MR2 TN21MR2 TN11MR4 TN21MR4

TN12MR8V

TN11SBM2

22.2 CMR1 CMR1: CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

22.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the CMR1 board is TN21.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2448



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N2 1C M R1

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

22.2.2 Application As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals. For the position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system, see Figure 22-2. Figure 22-2 Position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system

Client side

Client side

OTU D

OTU A

D

A

IN

OUT MO

MI

CMR1

CMR1 MI OUT

MO IN

22.2.3 Functions and Features The CMR1 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2449



Table 22-2 Functions and features of the CMR1 Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification

Supports the CWDM specification.

Cascade interface

Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion.

Wavelength query

Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

22.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board. Figure 22-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board MO

D

IN

MI

A

Drop optical module

Add optical module

OUT

OADM optical module Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


2450



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates one wavelength from the signals and this wavelength is transmitted to the OTU board or integrated client-side equipment through the D interface. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with one wavelength added through the A interface by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals. – Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


l


22.2.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-4 shows the front panel of the CMR1 board. Figure 22-4 Front panel of the CMR1 board



2451



Table 22-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR1 board Interface

Type

Function

A

LC

Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.

D

LC

Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.

IN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signals.

OUT

LC

Transmits the multiplexed signals.

MI

LC

Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.

MO

LC

Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.


22.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses on CMR1 board. Table 22-4 shows the valid slots for the CMR1 board. Table 22-4 Valid slots for CMR1 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1, IU8, and IU11

22.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1 The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that carries the signals processed by the board. Table 22-5 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2452



Table 22-5 Characteristic code for the CMR1 Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength that carries the signals is 1471 nm.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-6. Table 22-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR1 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A/D

1

MI/MO

2

IN/OUT

3

NOTE


22.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CMR1 parameters, refer to Table 22-7. Table 22-7 CMR1 parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



2453



Field

Value

Description


-


Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz )

-


Actual Band Type

-


Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz )

11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780


Configure Band Type

CWDM

Default:/


Default: CWDM

22.2.10 CMR1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 22-8 lists the optical specifications of the CMR1 board. Table 22-8 Optical specifications of the CMR1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Correspondi ng interfaces

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1260-1360

IN-D

Drop channel insertion loss

dB

<= 1

Isolation

dB

> 40

A-OUT

Add channel insertion loss

dB

<= 1

IN-MO MI-OUT

Insertion loss

dB

<= 0.8

Isolation

dB

>= 25

-

Reflectance

dB

-40


2454



Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The CMR1 adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.



l





TN21CMR1

0.2

0.3



22.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the CMR2 board are TN11 and TN21.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1C M R2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


2455



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N2 1C M R2

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y


Appearance: – The TN11 and TN21 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 22.3.5 Front Panel and 22.3.10 CMR2 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 22.3.10 CMR2 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The CMR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

22.3.2 Application As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. For the position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 22-5. Figure 22-5 Position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system

Client side OTU D1

Client side

OTU A1 D2

IN

OTU

A2

D1

MO

MI

MI

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

A1 D2

A2 OUT

CMR2

CMR2 OUT

OTU

MO IN


2456



22.3.3 Functions and Features The CMR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-9. Table 22-9 Functions and features of the CMR2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Adds/Drops and multiplexes two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

22.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CMR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2457



Figure 22-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2 board D1

IN

D2

MO

MI

Drop optical module

A1

A2

Add optical module

OUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths. – Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2458





22.3.5 Front Panel There are one indicator and eight interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-7 shows the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board. Figure 22-8 shows the front panel of the TN21CMR2 board. Figure 22-7 Front panel of the TN11CMR2 board

CAUTION

IN

MO

MI

D1

A1

D2

A2

CMR2

CAUTION

OUT


CMR2

STAT


CMR2

Figure 22-8 Front panel of the TN21CMR2 board

IN

D1

D2 MO

MI A2

A1 OUT

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21CMR2 board. l


For details about indicators on the board, see A.4 Board Indicators. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2459



Interfaces Table 22-10 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 22-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR2 board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A2

LC


D1-D2

LC


IN

LC


OUT

LC


MI

LC


MO

LC



22.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one CMR2 board. Table 22-11 shows the valid slots for the TN11CMR2 board. Table 22-12 shows the valid slots for the TN21CMR2 board. Table 22-11 Slots for the TN11CMR2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, and IU11


2460



Table 22-12 Slots for the TN21CMR2 Product

Slots


IU1, IU8, and IU11

22.3.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2 The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-13. Table 22-13 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

First wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

Last four digits

Second wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571. l

"1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm.

l

"1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-14. Table 22-14 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2

2

MI/MO


2461




Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

4

NOTE


22.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CMR2 parameters, refer to Table 22-15. Table 22-15 CMR2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Actual Band Type

-



11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780


Configure Band Type

CWDM

Default: /

Default: CWDM



Optical Specifications Table 22-16 lists the optical specifications of the CMR2 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2462



Table 22-16 Optical specifications of the CMR2 board Correspondin g interfaces

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1271-1611

-


nm

20

IN-D1

0.5 dB spectral width

nm

>= ±6.5


dB

<= 1.5


dB

> 25


dB

> 35


nm

>= ±6.5


dB

<= 1.5

Insertion loss

dB

<= 1.0

Isolation

dB

>= 13

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

IN-D2

A1-OUT A2-OUT

IN-MO MI-OUT -

NOTE

The equipment can transmit the 1271 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR2 board to corresponding third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1271 nm OTU board and line board.

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR2 are as follows. l


l


The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR2 are as follows. l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2463


l






TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2

0.2

0.3



22.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the CMR4 board are TN11 and TN21.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1C M R4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N2 1C M R4

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y


2464




Appearance: – The TN11 and TN21 versions have different front panels that have different dimensions. See 22.4.5 Front Panel and 22.4.10 CMR4 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The mechanical specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 22.4.10 CMR4 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The CMR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

22.4.2 Application As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. For the position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 22-9. Figure 22-9 Position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system

Client side OTU

4

OTU

A1 D4

D1

Client side

IN

OTU

A4

D1

MO

MI

4

OTU

A1 D4

A4 OUT

CMR4

CMR4 MI

MO

OUT

IN

22.4.3 Functions and Features The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes signals, queries wavelengths, and provides a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-17. Table 22-17 Functions and features of the CMR4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Adds/Drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2465




Description

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

22.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CMR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4 board. Figure 22-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4 board D1

IN

D4

MO

MI

A1

Drop optical module

A4

Add optical module

OUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2466



to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths. – Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


l


22.4.5 Front Panel There are one indicator and 12 interfaces on the front panel of CMR4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-11 show the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board. Figure 22-12 show the front panel of the TN21CMR4 board. Figure 22-11 Front panel of the TN11CMR4 board

CAUTION

OUT

IN

MO

MI

D1

A1

D2

A2

D3


A3

D4

A4

CMR4

CAUTION


CMR4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

STAT


2467



CMR4

Figure 22-12 Front panel of the TN21CMR4 board

IN D1 D2 D3 D4 MO MI A4 A3 A2 A1 OUT

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21CMR4 board. l



Interfaces Table 22-18 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 22-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR4 board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A4

LC


D1-D4

LC


IN

LC


OUT

LC


MI

LC


MO

LC



22.4.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one CMR4 board. Table 22-19 shows the valid slots for the TN11CMR4 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2468



Table 22-20 shows the valid slots for the TN21CMR4 board. Table 22-19 Slots for the TN11CMR4 Product

Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, and IU11

Table 22-20 Slots for the TN21CMR4 Product

Slots


IU1, IU8, and IU11

22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4 The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-21. Table 22-21 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Code

Meaning

Description

First and second digits


Indicates the middle two digits of the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

Third and fourth digits


Indicates the middle two digits of the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

Fifth and sixth digits

Third wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the middle two digits of the third wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.


2469



Code

Meaning

Description

Seventh and eighth digits

Fourth wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961. l


l


l

"59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.

l

"61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-22. Table 22-22 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2

2

A3/D3

3

A4/D4

4

MI/MO

5

IN/OUT

6

NOTE


22.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CMR4 parameters, refer to Table 22-23. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2470



Table 22-23 CMR4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Actual Band Type

-



11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780


Configure Band Type

CWDM

Default: /


Default: CWDM


Optical Specifications Table 22-24 lists the optical specifications of the CMR4 board. Table 22-24 Optical specifications of the CMR4 board Correspondin g interfaces

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1271-1611 (1371 nm excluded)

-


nm

20

IN-D1


nm

>= ±6.5


dB

<= 2

IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2471



Correspondin g interfaces

A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT

Item

Unit

Value


dB

> 25


dB

> 35


nm

>= ±6.5


dB

<= 2

Insertion loss

dB

<= 1.5

Isolation

dB

>= 13

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

A4-OUT IN-MO MI-OUT -

NOTE

The equipment can transmit the 1291 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR4 board to corresponding third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1291 nm OTU board and line board.

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are four wavelength groups. Table 22-25 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths on the CMR4 board Group

Wavelength (nm) A1/D1

A2/D2

A3/D3

A4/D4

1

1291

1311

1331

1351

2

1391

1411

1431

1451

3

1471

1491

1591

1611

4

1511

1531

1551

1571

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR4 board are as follows: l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2472


l



The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR4 board are as follows: l


l





TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4

0.2

0.3


22.5 DMR1 DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board

22.5.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the DMR1 board are TN11 and TN21.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1D M R1

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y


2473



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N2 1D M R1

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y


Appearance: – The TN11DMR1 and TN21DMR1 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 22.5.5 Front Panel and 22.5.10 DMR1 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 22.5.10 DMR1 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The DMR1 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

22.5.2 Application The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions. For the position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 22-13. Figure 22-13 Position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system 1310nm

OTU

OTU

WD WIN

D M R 1

WOUT

WMO

EA

O A D M

O A D M

EMI

D M R EMO 1

WMI WA

1310nm

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1310nm

EOUT

EIN ED 1310nm


2474



NOTE

The DMR1 board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DMR1 boards are actually one physical board. In the figure, the OADM boards are actually the CMR2 or CMR4 boards. The OADM board in the figure supports wavelengths ranging from 1471 nm to 1611 nm.

22.5.3 Functions and Features The DMR1 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to concatenate ports, and to query wavelengths. Table 22-26 provides the detailed features and functions of the DMR1 board. Table 22-26 Functions and features of the DMR1 board Functions and Features

Description

Basic functions

Adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions.

WDM specification


Port concatenation


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

22.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2475



Figure 22-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board WD ED

WMO EMO EMI WMI

EA WA

WIN EIN

Drop optical module

Add optical module

EOUT WOUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow WIN receives signals from the west main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through WD. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through WMO. EIN receives signals from the east main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through ED. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through EMO. Local 1310 nm signals are added through EA, and other signals are added through EMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to east main path by EOUT. Similarly, Local 1310 nm signals are added through WA, and other signals are added through WMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to west main path by WOUT.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Performs the add/drop multiplexing of 1310nm signals and other signals. – Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2476


l



l


22.5.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-15 shows the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board. Figure 22-16 shows the front panel of the TN21DMR1 board. Figure 22-15 Front panel of the TN11DMR1 board

CAUTION

WOUT WIN EOUT EIN WMO WMI EMO EMI

WD WA

ED EA DMR1

CAUTION


DMR1

STAT


DMR1

Figure 22-16 Front panel of the TN21DMR1 board

WIN WD WMO WMI WA WOUT EIN ED EMO EMI

EA EOUT

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21DMR1 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2477


l




Interfaces Table 22-27 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 22-27 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DMR1 board Interface

Type

Function

EA/WA

LC

Receives the 1310 nm optical signals that west and east client-side equipment transmits.

ED/WD

LC

Transmits 1310 nm optical signals to west and east client-side equipment.

EIN/WIN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signals on west and east main paths.

EOUT/WOUT

LC

Transmits multiplexed signals to west and east main paths.

EMI/WMI

LC

Serves as concatenation input optical interface. It connects to the output interfaces on other boards.

EMO/WMO

LC

Serves as concatenation output optical interface. It connects to the input interfaces on other boards.


22.5.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one DMR1 board. Table 22-28 shows the valid slots for the TN11DMR1 board. Table 22-29 shows the valid slots for the TN21DMR1 board. Table 22-28 Slots for the TN11DMR1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Slots






IU1-IU17


2478



Product

Slots


IU2-IU5, and IU11

Table 22-29 Slots for the TN21DMR1 Product

Slots


IU1, IU8, and IU11

22.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1 The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. Table 22-30 provides the details on the characteristics code. Table 22-30 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board Barcode

Meaning

Description

First to fourth digits

Optical signal frequency

Frequency of the optical signals processed by the board

For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.


Interface Display Table 22-31 lists the number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the board. Table 22-31 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface on Front Panel

Number on the NM

WA/WD

1

EA/ED

2

WMI/WMO

3

WIN/WOUT


2479



Interface on Front Panel

Number on the NM

EMI/EMO

5

EIN/EOUT

6

NOTE


22.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DMR1, refer to Table 22-32. Table 22-32 DMR1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Actual Band Type

-



-


Configure Band Type

C+L


Default: C+L

22.5.10 DMR1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2480



Optical Specifications Table 22-33 Optical specifications of the DMR1 board Correspondin g interfaces

Item

Unit

Value

EA/ED/WA/ WD


nm

1260-1360

EIN-ED WIN-WD


dB

<= 1

Isolation

dB

>= 40


dB

<= 1

Isolation

dB

>= 40

Insertion loss

dB

<= 0.8

Isolation

dB

>= 25

Insertion loss

dB

<= 0.8

Isolation

dB

>= 15

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

EA-EOUT WA-WOUT

EIN-EMO WIN-WMO EMI-EOUT WMI-WOUT -

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions from the multiplexed signals.

Mechanical Specifications Mechanical specifications of the TN11DMR1 board: l


l


Mechanical specifications of the TN21DMR1 board: l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2481






TN11DMR1/TN21DMR1

0.2

0.3


22.6 MR2 MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

22.6.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the MR2 board are TN11 and TN21.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 M R2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N2 1 M R2

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y


Appearance: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2482



– The TN11MR2 and TN21MR2 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 22.6.5 Front Panel and 22.6.10 MR2 Specifications. l

Specification: – The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 22.6.10 MR2 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The MR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

22.6.2 Application As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. For the position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 22-17. Figure 22-17 Position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system

Client side OTU D1

OA

Client side

OTU A1 D2

IN

OTU

A2

D1

MO

MI

A1 D2

A2 OUT

OA

MR2

MR2 OA

OTU

MI

OA

MO

OUT

IN

22.6.3 Functions and Features The MR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-34. Table 22-34 Functions and features of the MR2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification



2483




Description

Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN11MR2.

22.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board. Figure 22-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board D1

IN

D2

MO

MI

Drop optical module

A1

A2

Add optical module

OUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2484



to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. – Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


l


22.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-19 shows the front panel of the TN11MR2 board. Figure 22-20 shows the front panel of the TN21MR2 board. Figure 22-19 Front panel of the TN11MR2 board

CAUTION

OUT

IN

MO

MI

D1

A1

D2


A2

MR2

CAUTION


MR2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

STAT


2485



MR2

Figure 22-20 Front panel of the TN21MR2 board

IN

D1

D2 MO

MI A2

A1 OUT

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR2 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21MR2 board. l



Interfaces Table 22-35 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 22-35 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR2 board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A2

LC


D1-D2

LC


IN

LC


OUT

LC


MO

LC


MI

LC



22.6.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one MR2 board. Table 22-36 and Table 22-37 shows the valid slots for the MR2 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2486



Table 22-36 Valid slots for the TN11MR2 board Product

Slot






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, and IU11


Slot


IU1, IU8, and IU11

22.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2 The characteristic code for the MR2 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-38. Table 22-38 Characteristic code for the MR2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal.

Last four digits

Frequency of the second optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the second optical signal.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370. l

"9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz.

l

"9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.



2487



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-39. Table 22-39 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2

2

MI/MO

3

IN/OUT

4

NOTE


22.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For MR2 parameters, refer to Table 22-40. Table 22-40 MR2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Actual Band Type

-



1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Default: /


2488



Field

Value

Description

Configure Band Type

C


Default: C

22.6.10 MR2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 22-41 lists the optical specifications of the MR2 board. Table 22-41 Optical specifications of the MR2 board Correspondin g interfaces

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-


GHz

100

IN-D1

-1dB spectral width

nm

>= 0.2


dB

<= 1.5


dB

> 25


dB

> 35

-1dB spectral width

nm

>= 0.2


dB

<= 1.5

Insertion loss

dB

<= 1.0

Isolation

dB

> 13

-


dB

< 0.2

-

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

IN-D2

A1-OUT A2-OUT

IN-MO MI-OUT

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2489



Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping wavelengths.

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of TN11MR2 are as follows: l


l


The mechanical specifications of TN21MR2 are as follows: l


l





TN11MR2/TN21MR2

0.2

0.3



22.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the MR4 board are TN11 and TN21.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2490



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 M R4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N2 1 M R4

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y


Appearance: – The TN11MR4 and TN21MR4 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 22.7.5 Front Panel and 22.7.10 MR4 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 22.7.10 MR4 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The MR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

22.7.2 Application As a type of optical add/drop multiplexing unit, the MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. For the position of the MR4 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 22-21.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2491



Figure 22-21 Position of the MR4 board in the DWDM system

Client side OTU D1

OA

4

OTU

A1 D4

IN

Client side

A4

D1

MO

MI

OTU

A1 D4

A4 OUT

OA

MR4

MR4 OA

4

OTU

MI

MO

OUT

IN

OA

22.7.3 Functions and Features The MR4 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-42. Table 22-42 Functions and features of the MR4 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/ from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

22.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-22 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2492



Figure 22-22 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR4 board D1

IN

D4

MO

MI

A1

Drop optical module

A4

Add optical module

OUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. – Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2493





22.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-23 shows the front panel of the TN11MR4 board. Figure 22-24 shows the front panel of the TN21MR4 board respectively. Figure 22-23 Front panel of the TN11MR4 board

CAUTION

OUT

IN

MO

MI

D1

A1

D2

A2

D3

A3

D4

A4

MR4

CAUTION


MR4

STAT


MR4

Figure 22-24 Front panel of the TN21MR4 board

IN D1 D2 D3 D4 MO MI A4 A3 A2 A1 OUT

Indicators There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR4 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21MR4 board. l


For details about indicators on the board, see A.4 Board Indicators. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2494



Interfaces Table 22-43 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 22-43 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR4 board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A4

LC


D1-D4

LC


IN

LC


OUT

LC


MI

LC


MO

LC



22.7.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one MR4 board. Table 22-44 and Table 22-45 shows the valid slots for the MR4 board. Table 22-44 Valid slots for the TN11MR4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Slot






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-U17


IU2-IU5


2495




Slot


IU1, IU8, and IU11

22.7.7 Characteristic Code for the MR4 The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-46. Table 22-46 Characteristic code for the MR4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Frequency of first optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board.

Last four digits

Frequency of forth optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the fourth optical signal processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the MR4 board is 92109240. l


l

"9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.

Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can be inferred that: l

The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.

l

The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.

For the mapping between the characteristic codes of the MR4 boards and signal frequencies, see Table 22-50 in 22.7.10 MR4 Specifications.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-47. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2496



Table 22-47 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2

2

A3/D3

3

A4/D4

4

MI/MO

5

IN/OUT

6

NOTE



Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Actual Band Type

-



1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Default: /


2497



Field

Value

Description

Configure Band Type

C


Default: C


Optical Specifications Table 22-49 lists the optical specifications of the MR4 board. Table 22-49 Optical specifications of the MR4 board Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-


GHz

100

IN-D1

-1dB spectral width

nm

>= 0.2


dB

<= 2.2


dB

> 25


dB

> 35

-1dB spectral width

nm

>= 0.2


dB

<= 2.2

Insertion loss

dB

<= 1.5

Isolation

dB

> 13

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4

A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT IN-MO MI-OUT -

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths The MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2498



Table 22-50 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths of the MR4 board Gr ou p

Ch ar act eri sti c Co de

A1/D1

A2/D2

Wav elen gth No.

Wavel ength (nm)

Freq uenc y (THz )

W av ele ng th No .

Wave lengt h (nm)

Freq uenc y (TH z)

Wa vel eng th No.

Wave lengt h (nm)

Frequ ency (THz)

Wa vel en gth No .

Wavel ength (nm)

Freque ncy (THz)

1

92 10 92 40

80

1560.6 1

192.1 0

78

1559. 79

192. 20

76

1558. 98

192.3 0

74

1558.17

192.40

2

92 50 92 80

72

1557.3 6

192.5 0

70

1556. 55

192. 60

68

1555. 75

192.7 0

66

1554.94

192.80

3

92 90 93 20

64

1554.1 3

192.9 0

62

1553. 33

193. 00

60

1552. 52

193.1 0

58

1551.72

193.20

4

93 30 93 60

56

1550.9 2

193.3 0

54

1550. 12

193. 40

52

1549. 32

193.5 0

50

1548.51

193.60

5

93 70 94 00

48

1547.7 2

193.7 0

46

1546. 92

193. 80

44

1546. 12

193.9 0

42

1545.32

194.00

6

94 10 94 40

40

1544.5 3

194.1 0

38

1543. 73

194. 20

36

1542. 94

194.3 0

34

1542.14

194.40

7

94 50 94 80

32

1541.3 5

194.5 0

30

1540. 56

194. 60

28

1539. 77

194.7 0

26

1538.98

194.80

8

94 90 95 20

24

1538.1 9

194.9 0

22

1537. 40

195. 00

20

1536. 61

195.1 0

18

1535.82

195.20

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

A3/D3

A4/D4


2499



Gr ou p

Ch ar act eri sti c Co de

A1/D1

A2/D2

A3/D3

A4/D4

Wav elen gth No.

Wavel ength (nm)

Freq uenc y (THz )

W av ele ng th No .

Wave lengt h (nm)

Freq uenc y (TH z)

Wa vel eng th No.

Wave lengt h (nm)

Frequ ency (THz)

Wa vel en gth No .

Wavel ength (nm)

Freque ncy (THz)

9

95 30 95 60

16

1535.0 4

195.3 0

14

1534. 25

195. 40

12

1533. 47

195.5 0

10

1532.68

195.60

10

95 70 96 00

8

1531.9 0

195.7 0

6

1531. 12

195. 80

4

1530. 33

195.9 0

2

1529.55

196.00

Mechanical Specifications Mechanical specifications of TN11MR4 board are as follows: l


l


Mechanical specifications of TN21MR4 board are as follows: l


l





TN11MR4/TN21MR4

0.2

0.3



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2500



22.8.1 Version Description The available functional version of the MR8 board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 M R8

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

22.8.2 Application As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR8 board adds/drops and multiplex eight channels of signals. For the position of the MR8 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 22-25. Figure 22-25 Position of the MR8 board in the DWDM system

Client side OTU D1

OA

8

OTU

A1 D8

IN

Client side OTU

A8

D1

MO

MI

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

OTU

A1 D8

A8 OUT

OA

MR8

MR8 OA

8

MI

MO

OUT


IN

OA

2501



22.8.3 Functions and Features The MR8 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-51. Table 22-51 Functions and features of the MR8 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

22.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MR8 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-26 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2502



Figure 22-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8 board D1

IN

D8

MO

MI

A1

Drop optical module

A8

Add optical module

OUT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of wavelengths. – Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2503





22.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-27 shows the front panel of the MR8 board. Figure 22-27 Front panel of the MR8 board

CAUTION

CAUTION

D4

A4

IN

OUT

D5

A5

D6

A6

D7

A7

D8

A8

MO

MI

D1

A1

D2

A2

D3

A3

MR8


STAT

MR8






Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2504



Table 22-52 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8 board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A8

LC


D1-D8

LC


IN

LC


OUT

LC


MI

LC


MO

LC



22.8.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one MR8 board. Table 22-53 shows the valid slots for the MR8 board. Table 22-53 Valid slots for the MR8 board Product

Slot






IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is IU1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2505



22.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8 The characteristic code for the MR8 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-54. Table 22-54 Characteristic code for the MR8 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board.

Last four digits

Frequency of the eighth optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the eighth optical signal processed by the board.



l

"9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.

Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l

The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz.

l

The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.

l

The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-55. Table 22-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

A1/D1


2506




Interface on the NM

A2/D2

2

A3/D3

3

A4/D4

4

A5/D5

5

A6/D6

6

A7/D7

7

A8/D8

8

MI/MO

9

IN/OUT

10

NOTE



Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-


Actual Band Type

-



2507



Field

Value

Description


1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Configure Band Type

C

Default: /


Default: C


Optical Specifications Table 22-57 lists the optical specifications of the MR8 board. Table 22-57 Optical specifications of the MR8 board Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561

-


GHz

100

IN-D1

-1dB spectral width

nm

>= 0.2


dB

<= 4


dB

> 25


dB

> 35

-1dB spectral width

nm

>= 0.2


dB

<= 4

Insertion loss

dB

<= 3.5

IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 IN-D5 IN-D6 IN-D7 IN-D8 A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT A5-OUT A6-OUT A7-OUT A8-OUT IN-MRO MRI-OUT Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2508


Interface

-


Item

Unit

Value

Isolation

dB

> 13

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are five groups of wavelengths. Table 22-58 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8 Group

1

2

3

4

5

Characteristic Code

92109280

92909360

93709440

94509520

95309600

A1/D1

Waveleng th No.

80

64

48

32

16

Waveleng th (nm)

1560.61

1554.13

1547.72

1541.35

1535.04

Frequenc y (THz)

192.10

192.90

193.70

194.50

195.30

Waveleng th No.

78

62

46

30

14

Waveleng th (nm)

1559.79

1553.33

1546.92

1540.56

1534.25

Frequenc y (THz)

192.20

193.00

193.80

194.60

195.40

Waveleng th No.

76

60

44

28

12

Waveleng th (nm)

1558.98

1552.52

1546.12

1539.77

1533.47

Frequenc y (THz)

192.30

193.10

193.90

194.70

195.50

Waveleng th No.

74

58

42

26

10

Waveleng th (nm)

1558.17

1551.72

1545.32

1538.98

1532.68

Frequenc y (THz)

192.40

193.20

194.00

194.80

195.60

A2/D2

A3/D3

A4/D4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2509



Group

1

2

3

4

5

Characteristic Code

92109280

92909360

93709440

94509520

95309600

A5/D5

Waveleng th No.

72

56

40

24

8

Waveleng th (nm)

1557.36

1550.92

1544.53

1538.19

1531.90

Frequenc y (THz)

192.50

193.30

194.10

194.90

195.70

Waveleng th No.

70

54

38

22

6

Waveleng th (nm)

1556.55

1550.12

1543.73

1537.40

1531.12

Frequenc y (THz)

192.60

193.40

194.20

195.00

195.80

Waveleng th No.

68

52

36

20

4

Waveleng th (nm)

1555.75

1549.32

1542.94

1536.61

1530.33

Frequenc y (THz)

192.70

193.50

194.30

195.10

195.90

Waveleng th No.

66

50

34

18

2

Waveleng th (nm)

1554.94

1548.51

1542.14

1535.82

1529.55

Frequenc y (THz)

192.80

193.60

194.40

195.20

196.00

A6/D6

A7/D7

A8/D8



l


Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board



TN11MR8

0.2

0.3


2510



Board




22.9 MR8V MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

22.9.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the MR8V board are TN11 and TN12.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 M R8 V

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 2 M R8 V

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Differences Between Versions The mechanical specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 22.9.11 MR8V Specifications. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2511




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11MR8 V

TN12MR8 V

The TN12MR8V can be created as 11MR8V on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12MR8V functions as the TN11MR8V.

TN12MR8 V

None

-




Added the TN12MR8V board.

The TN12MR8V board has lower power consumption than the TN11MR8V board.

22.9.3 Application The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals, and adjusts the multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel. For the position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system, see Figure 22-28. Figure 22-28 Position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system Client side

OTU D1

OA

8

Client side

OTU

A1 D8

IN

OTU

A8

D1

MO

MI

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

OTU

A1 D8

A8 OUT

OA

MR8V

MR8V OA

8

MI

OA

MO

OUT


IN

2512



22.9.4 Functions and Features The MR8V board is mainly used to add/drop signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-59. Table 22-59 Functions and features of the MR8V board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals and adjusts the multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel.

WDM specification


Cascading interface


Wavelength query


Optical-layer ASON

Supported

22.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MR8V board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2513



Figure 22-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board D1

D8

MO

MI

A1

A2

A8

VOA

VOA

VOA

IN VO VI

V O A

Drop optical module

Add optical module

OUT

OADM optical module Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN or MI interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals. The IN or MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2514



NOTE

l The OTM station receives the multiplexed signals through the IN interface and transmits the multiplexed signals through the VO interface. l The OADM station receives the multiplexed signals through the MI interface and transmits the multiplexed signals through the VO interface. By default, the VO interface is connected to the IN interface on the VOA. The connection on the VOA can be changed manually.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals. – Adjusts the input optical power of eight channels. Adjusts the input optical power of pass-through wavelengths. – Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


l


22.9.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8V board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-30 shows the front panel of the MR8V board. Figure 22-30 Front panel of the MR8V board

CAUTION

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

CAUTION

D4

A4

D5

A5

D6

A6

D7

A7

D8

A8

OUT

IN

MO

MI

D1

A1

D2

A2

D3

A3


VO

VI

MR8V


STAT ACT PROG SRV

MR8V


2515





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 22-60 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 22-60 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8V board Interface

Type

Function

A1-A8

LC


D1-D8

LC


IN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side when the IN interface is not connected to the VO interface on the same MR8V board. Receives the adjusted multiplexed signal from the VO interface when the IN interface is connected to the VO interface on the same MR8V board by a fiber.

OUT

LC


MI

LC


MO

LC


VI

LC


VO

LC


Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW). Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2516



22.9.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one MR8V board. Table 22-61 shows the valid slots for the MR8V board. Table 22-61 Valid slots for the MR8V board Product

Slot






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is IU1.

22.9.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-62. Table 22-62 Characteristic code for the MR8V board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Code

Meaning

First four digits


Last four digits



"V"

Adjustment of the input optical power of each channel

Indicates that the board adjusts the input optical power of each channel.


Description

2517



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V. l


l


l

"V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.

Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l


l


l



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-63. Table 22-63 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8V board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

A1/D1

1

A2/D2

2

A3/D3

3

A4/D4

4

A5/D5

5

A6/D6

6

A7/D7

7

A8/D8

8

MI/MO

9

IN/OUT

10

VI

11

VO

12


2518



NOTE


22.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For MR8V parameters, refer to Table 22-64. Table 22-64 MR8V parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-


Actual Band Type

-



1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100


Configure Band Type

C

Default: /

Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2519



Field

Value

Description


Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)


Default:Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-



-


22.9.11 MR8V Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 22-65 lists the optical specifications of the MR8V board. Table 22-65 Optical specifications of the MR8V board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1529-1561


2520




Item

Unit

Value

-


GHz

100

IN-D1

-1 dB spectral width

nm

>= 0.2


dB

<= 4


dB

> 25


dB

> 35


nm

>= 0.2


dB

<= 6

Attenuation range

dB

0-20

Adjustment accuracy

dB

1 (attenuation <= 10 dB)

IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 IN-D5 IN-D6 IN-D7 IN-D8 A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT A5-OUT A6-OUT A7-OUT

1.5 (attenuation <= 15 dB)

A8-OUT

1.8 (attenuation >15 dB)

VI-VO IN-MRO MRI-OUT -

Insertion loss

dB

<= 3.5

Isolation

dB

> 13

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are five groups of wavelengths. Table 22-66 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8V Group A1/D1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1

2

3

4

5

Waveleng th No.

80

64

48

32

16

Waveleng th (nm)

1560.61

1554.13

1547.72

1541.35

1535.04

Frequenc y (THz)

192.10

192.90

193.70

194.50

195.30


2521



Group A2/D2

A3/D3

A4/D4

A5/D5

A6/D6

A7/D7

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1

2

3

4

5

Waveleng th No.

78

62

46

30

14

Waveleng th (nm)

1559.79

1553.33

1546.92

1540.56

1534.25

Frequenc y (THz)

192.20

193.00

193.80

194.60

195.40

Waveleng th No.

76

60

44

28

12

Waveleng th (nm)

1558.98

1552.52

1546.12

1539.77

1533.47

Frequenc y (THz)

192.30

193.10

193.90

194.70

195.50

Waveleng th No.

74

58

42

26

10

Waveleng th (nm)

1558.17

1551.72

1545.32

1538.98

1532.68

Frequenc y (THz)

192.40

193.20

194.00

194.80

195.60

Waveleng th No.

72

56

40

24

8

Waveleng th (nm)

1557.36

1550.92

1544.53

1538.19

1531.90

Frequenc y (THz)

192.50

193.30

194.10

194.90

195.70

Waveleng th No.

70

54

38

22

6

Waveleng th (nm)

1556.55

1550.12

1543.73

1537.40

1531.12

Frequenc y (THz)

192.60

193.40

194.20

195.00

195.80

Waveleng th No.

68

52

36

20

4

Waveleng th (nm)

1555.75

1549.32

1542.94

1536.61

1530.33

Frequenc y (THz)

192.70

193.50

194.30

195.10

195.90


2522



Group A8/D8

1

2

3

4

5

Waveleng th No.

66

50

34

18

2

Waveleng th (nm)

1554.94

1548.51

1542.14

1535.82

1529.55

Frequenc y (THz)

192.80

193.60

194.40

195.20

196.00



l





TN11MR8V

7.7

8.6

TN12MR8V

6.0

6.6


22.10 SBM2 SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board

22.10.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SBM2 board is TN11.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2523



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1S B M 2

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

22.10.2 Application The SBM2 board adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. For the position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 22-31. Figure 22-31 Position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system

Client side OTU D1

Client side

OTU A1 D2

LINE

A2

OTU D1

OTU A1 D2

EXT EXT

SBM2

A2 LINE

SBM2

22.10.3 Functions and Features The SBM2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-67.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2524



Table 22-67 Functions and features of the SBM2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. The added and dropped optical signals must be of different wavelengths.

WDM specification

Supports only the single-fiber dual fed CWDM system.

Cascading interface

Provides a cascading optical interface to cascade other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

22.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board. Figure 22-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board D1

LINE

D2

A1

Drop optical module

A2

Add optical module

EXT


CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


2525



Signal Flow The board receives the multiplexed signals through the LINE interface. After the optical module processes the multiplexed signals, the board separates the multiplexed signals into two wavelengths of optical signals and outputs them through the D1 and D2 optical interfaces to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment. The board also receives two wavelengths of optical signals through the A1 and A2 interfaces, couples them to the multiplexed signals and outputs the coupled signals through the LINE interface. The EXT interface is used as a cascade interface. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed signals.

Module Function l

OADM optical module – Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. – Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

l


l


22.10.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 22-33 shows the front panel of the SBM2 board. Figure 22-33 Front panel of the SBM2 board

CAUTION

EXT

LINE

D1

A1

D2


A2

SBM2

CAUTION


SBM2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

STAT


2526






Interfaces Table 22-68 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 22-68 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SBM2 board Interface

Type

Function

A1/A2

LC


D1/D2

LC


LINE

LC

Receives and transmits multiplexed signals.

EXT

LC

Cascading interface, transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed signals.


22.10.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one SBM2 board. Table 22-69 shows the valid slots for the SBM2 board. Table 22-69 Valid slots for the SBM2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU16


2527



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-70. Table 22-70 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

A1

1

D1

2

A2

3

D2

4

LINE

5

EXT

6

22.10.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For SBM2 parameters, refer to Table 22-71. Table 22-71 SBM2 parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



2528



Field

Value

Description


-


Actual Wavelength No./ Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz )

-


Actual Band Type

-


Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz )

11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780


Configure Band Type

CWDM

Default: /


Default: CWDM

22.10.9 SBM2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 22-72 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2 board. Table 22-72 Optical specifications of the SBM2 board Interface

Item

Unit

Value

-


nm

1271 to 1611

LINE-D1


dB

<= 3

Isolation

dB

>= 30


dB

<= 3

Isolation

dB

>=30

Optical return loss

dB

> 40

Pass-through loss

dB

<= 1.5

LINE-D2 A1-LINE A2-LINE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

CWDM


2529





l





TN11SBM2

0.2

0.3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2530


23

23 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board

About This Chapter 23.1 Overview Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) boards add/drop any single or multiwavelength signals to/from a multiplexed signal, and route the signals to any port in any order, achieving flexible wavelength grooming in multiple directions. These boards apply to DWDM systems. 23.2 RDU9 RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band) 23.3 RMU9 RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board 23.4 ROAM ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board 23.5 TD20 TD20: 20-ports Tunable DeMultiplexing Board 23.6 TM20 TM20: 20-ports Tunable Multiplexing Board 23.7 WSD9 WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board 23.8 WSM9 WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board 23.9 WSMD2 WSMD2: 2-Port Wavelength selective multiplexing and Demultiplexing board 23.10 WSMD4 WSMD4: 4-Port Wavelength selective multiplexing and Demultiplexing board 23.11 WSMD9 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2531



WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2532



23.1 Overview Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) boards add/drop any single or multiwavelength signals to/from a multiplexed signal, and route the signals to any port in any order, achieving flexible wavelength grooming in multiple directions. These boards apply to DWDM systems.

Positions of ROADM Boards in a WDM System Figure 23-1 shows the position of RAODM boards in a WDM system by using the WSMD4 board as an example.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2533



Figure 23-1 Positions of ROADM boards in a WDM system Client services

Client services

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Line units

Line units

Line units

Line units

OD C-ODD

OD C-EVEN

OM C-ODD

OM C-EVEN

Client services

OD C-ODD

West

F I U

OA OA

OA OA

OA

OA

OA

WSMD4 (north)

WSMD4 (south)

WSMD4 (west)

WSMD4 (east)

OA

OA

OA

OD C-EVEN

OA OA

F I U

South

F I U

East

OA OA

OA

ITL

ITL OM C-EVEN

OM C-EVEN

ITL

OA

North

OD C-EVEN

OM C-ODD

ITL

F I U

Client services

OM C-ODD

OD C-ODD

OM C-EVEN

OD C-EVEN

OM C-ODD

OD C-ODD

Line units

Line units

Line units

Line units

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Tributary Units

Client services

Client services

Client services West signal

North signal

East signal

Client services South signal

Pass-through signal

Main Functions Table 23-1 lists the main functions of ROADM boards. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2534



Table 23-1 Main functions of ROADM boards Board

Function


TN11RDU9

Broadcasts service signals to nine directions.

80

TN11RMU9

Adds eight optical signals. Each add port on the board can connect to a tunable wavelength OTU board to flexibly receive eight optical signals.

80

TN11ROAM

Flexibly adds/drops, passes, and blocks 40 services to achieve dynamic grooming of wavelengths on a WDM ring.

40

TN12TD20

Broadcasts 20 coherent service signals in one multiplexed signal to 20 directions.

80

TN11TM20

80

TN13TM20

Adds 20 coherent optical signals carried over different wavelengths and multiplexes the signals into one multi-wavelength signal.

TN11WSD9

Demultiplexes wavelengths and routes any wavelength to any port.

l TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9/ TN17WSD9: 40

TN12RDU9

TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9

l TN13WSD9 and TN16WSD9: 80

TN16WSD9 TN17WSD9 TN11WSM9

Multiplexes wavelengths and routes any wavelength to any port.

TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9

l TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9/ TN17WSM9: 40 l TN13WSM9 and TN16WSM9: 80

TN16WSM9 TN17WSM9 TN11WSMD2

Broadcasts the main channel signal to two directions and adds any wavelengths.

40

TN11WSMD4

Broadcasts the main channel signal to four directions and adds any wavelengths.

l TN11WSMD4/ TN17WSMD4: 40

TN12WSMD4 TN13WSMD4

l TN12WSMD4 and TN13WSMD9: 80

TN17WSMD4

TN11WSMD9 TN12WSMD9

Broadcasts the main channel signal to nine directions and adds any wavelengths.

TN15WSMD9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


TN11WSMD9 and TN12WSMD9: 80 TN15WSMD9: 80 or Flexible Grid wavelength signals

2535



23.2 RDU9 RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band)

23.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the RDU9 board are TN11 and TN12.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1R D U9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 2R D U9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Differences Between Versions The mechanical specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 23.2.10 RDU9 Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2536




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11RDU9

TN12RDU 9

The TN12RDU9 can be created as 11RDU9 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12RDU9 functions as the TN11RDU9. NOTE When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN12RDU9 board cannot be installed in slot IU1. Therefore, if a TN11RDU9 board is installed in slot IU1 and a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN12RDU9 board cannot substitute for the TN11RDU9 board.

TN12RDU9

None

-




Added the TN12RDU9 board.

The TN12RDU9 board has lower power consumption than the TN11RDU9 board.



Added a description explaining that the RDU9 board can be directly connected to a coherent OTU or line board for local dropping of services.


23.2.3 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RDU9 board is used with the WSM9 board to implement the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 23-2. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2537



Figure 23-2 Position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system Client-side O T U

O O T T U U

O T U

8

DM8

DM1

OA

OA

RDU9

IN

OUT

EXPO

EXPI

WSM9

AM8

AM1

8

O T U

O T U

MUX 8

AM1

AM8

WSM9

EXPI

EXPO

RDU9

OUT

IN

DMUX O T U

Client-side

OA

OA

DM1

DM8

8

MUX

O T U

O O T T U U

DMUX

DMUX DCM

Client-side

O T U

DCM DMUX

O O T T U U

O T U

Client-side

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that process signals propagated over the same wavelength at the same time. When coherent OTU or line boards are used, the D40 boards can be removed. The RDU9 boards can be directly connected to the coherent OTU or line boards because the coherent OTU or line board supports wavelength selection.

23.2.4 Functions and Features The RDU9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-2. Table 23-2 Functions and features of the RDU9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Broadcasts the signals received from the main optical path in nine directions at the same time.

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM specification.


2538




Description





Optical-layer ASON

Supported

23.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The RDU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9. Figure 23-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9 board DM1

DM2

DM3

DM4

DM5

DM6

DM7

DM8

Optical demultiplexer module ROA

MONI Splitter 3

TOA IN

Optical module

Splitter 1

MONO EXPO Splitter 2

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Power supply module Required voltage

Fuse

DC power from the backplane


Signal Flow The RDU board receives a multi-wavelength signal through the IN port. Splitter 1 splits the signal into two identical signals. One signal is for pass-through and the other signal is for Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2539



dropping. Splitter 2 directs the pass-through signal to the EXPO port for further transmission while providing a sample of the signal to the MONO port for in-service performance monitoring. The drop signal is sent to the TOA port, which is either directly connected to the ROA port or indirectly connected with an OA board in between. Then the drop signal is sent to splitter 3, which routes the signal to the optical demultiplexer module while providing a sample of the signal to the MONI port for in-service performance monitoring. Lastly, the optical demultiplexer module splits the drop signal into eight identical signals and drops them through the DM1-DM8 ports.

Module Function l

Optical module – Broadcasts signals in nine directions. – Splitters 2 and 3 provide a small amount of the EXPO and ROA port power to the MONI and MONO ports for in-service performance monitoring.

l


l


23.2.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-4 shows the front panel of the RDU9 board. Figure 23-4 Front panel of the RDU9 board

CAUTION

MONO MONI

EXPO

IN

TOA

ROA

DM1

DM2

DM3


DM4

DM5 DM6

DM7

DM8

RDU9

CAUTION


RDU9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

STAT ACT PROG SRV


2540





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 23-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 23-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RDU9 board Interface

Type

Function

DM1-DM8

LC

Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit.

IN

LC


EXPO

LC


MONI

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals received by the ROA port. The ratio of the MONI port power to the ROA port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONI port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Proa (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB.

MONO

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the EXPO port. The ratio of the MONO port power to the EXPO port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONO port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pexpo (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

TOA

LC

Used as the cascade output interface.

ROA

LC

Used as the cascade input interface.


2541



NOTE

When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber jumper.


23.2.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one RDU9 board. Table 23-4 shows the valid slots for the RDU9 board. Table 23-4 Valid slots for the RDU9 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17

NOTE

When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack subrack, the TN12RDU9 board cannot be installed in slot IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-5. Table 23-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RDU9 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

IN

1

EXPO

2

DM1-DM8

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2542




Interface on the NM

TOA/ROA

11

MONI

12

MONO

13

23.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For RDU9 parameters, refer to Table 23-6. Table 23-6 RDU9 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Configure Band

C


Default: C


Actual Band

-



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All

23.2.10 RDU9 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2543



Optical Specifications Table 23-7 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

Insertion loss

IN-Drop (DM1-DM8)

dB

<= 12.5

ROA-Drop (DM1-DM8)

dB

<= 11.5

IN-EXPO

dB

<= 12.5

IN-TOA

dB

<= 1

Consistency of the insertion loss of each channel

dB

<= 1.2

Reflectance

dB

< -40


dB

<= 0.5



l





TN11RDU9

7.7

8.6

TN12RDU9

6.2

6.8


23.3 RMU9 RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board

23.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the RMU9 board is TN11. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2544








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1R M U9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Table 23-8 lists the types of the RMU9 board. Table 23-8 Type description of the RMU9 board Board

Type

Description

TN11RMU 9

01

Processes the odd and even wavelengths in the C band.

02

Processes the odd and even wavelengths in the C band and supports the port blocking function.

23.3.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RMU9 board is used with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. The RMU9 board can add eight single-wavelength signal or multi-channel signals to the main path. Being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the multiplexed channels enter the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port. As for the single channels, they are directly sent to the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port by the optical transponder units. For the position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 23-5.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2545



Figure 23-5 Position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system Client-side O O T T U U

Client-side

O O T T U U

O O O T T T U U U

DMUX

O T U

MUX

DCM DM1 IN

WSD9

OA

OA

DM8

8

AM1

EXPO EXPI

WSD9 EXPI

AM8

AM1

8

MUX

O T U

O O T T U U

OUT

RMU9

RMU9 OUT

AM8

8

EXPO

IN

DM8

8

OA

OA

DM1

DCM

DMUX

O T U

Client-side

O O T T U U

O O T T U U

Client-side

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that process signals propagated over the same wavelength at the same time.

23.3.3 Functions and Features The RMU9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-9. Table 23-9 Functions and features of the RMU9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Adds eight single-wavelength signals or multi-wavelength signals to the main path. When working with an OTU board supporting tunable wavelengths, the RMU9 board can receive any wavelength through any of the AM1-AM8 optical ports.

WDM specification



2546




Description





Port blocking

Blocks all input wavelengths at one of the AM1 to AM8 optical interfaces. NOTE Only the TN11RMU902 board supports this function.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

23.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2547



Figure 23-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board AM1

AM2

AM3

AM4

AM5

AM6

AM7

AM8

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

VOA

Optical multiplexer module TOA

MONO

ROA

OUT

EXPI

MONI

Optical module PIN optical power detection module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The wavelengths to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. NOTE

l The channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) must use a unique wavelength. Otherwise, the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted. l The wavelength used by the channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) cannot be the same as the wavelength of the optical signals input through the EXPI optical interface. Otherwise, the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.

After being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer module, the optical signals input through the AMn optical interface are output through the TOA optical interface. The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface can be cascaded with an optical amplifier board. If no cascading is required, the optical signals are directly input to the ROA optical interface. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2548



After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added on the board through the ROA optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface. A small number of optical signals that are input through the EXPI interface are separated from the main path and then output through the MONI interface. They are used for optical performance detection. A small number of optical signals are separated from those that are output through the TOA interface and then sent to the MONO interface. These signals are used for optical performance detection.

Module Function l

Optical module – Multiplexes eight wavelengths added on the board. – Eight VOAs achieve the in-service adjustment of input optical power. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection.

l

Optical power detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of TOA and EXPI interface.

l


l


23.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-7 shows the front panel of the RMU9 board. Figure 23-7 Front panel of the RMU9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

OUT

EXPI

TOA

ROA

AM1

AM2

AM3

AM4

AM5

AM6

AM7

AM8

RMU9

MONI

STAT ACT PROG SRV

RMU9

MONO


2549





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 23-10 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 23-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RMU9 board Interface

Type

Function

AM1-AM8

LC

Receives a single-wavelength signal that must be multiplexed into the main optical path from an OTU or line board, or receives a multi-wavelength signal that must be multiplexed into the main optical path from an optical multiplexer board.

OUT

LC


EXPI

LC


MONI

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals received by the EXPI port. The ratio of the MONI port power to the EXPI port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONI port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pexpi (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB.

MONO

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the TOA port. The ratio of the MONO port power to the TOA port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONO port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Ptoa (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

TOA

LC

Used as the cascade output interface.

ROA

LC

Used as the cascade input interface.


2550



NOTE

When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber jumper.


23.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one RMU9 board. Table 23-11 shows the valid slots for the RMU9 board. Table 23-11 Valid slots for the RMU9 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-12. Table 23-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

EXPI

1

OUT

2

AM1-AM8

3-10

TOA/ROA

11

MONI

12

MONO


2551



23.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For RMU9 parameters, refer to Table 23-13. Table 23-13 RMU9 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

Specifies the attenuation for the optical interface. This parameter ensures that the launch power of the transmit end complies with the system power requirements. Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-



-



2552



Field

Value

Description

Configure Band

C


Default: C Actual Band

-



-


Block Port

Disabled, Enabled

Before wavelengths are added to the AM interface of the RMU9, set this parameter to Enabled. After configurations of wavelengths and services on the OTU are complete, set this parameter to Disabled.

Default: Disabled

Before the OTU where wavelengths are added is replaced, set this parameter to Enabled. After the OTU is replaced, and wavelengths and services are configured, set this parameter to Disabled. Actual Working Band Parity

-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All

23.3.9 RMU9 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 23-14 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9 board. Table 23-14 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

Insertion loss

dB

<= 8.5

EXPI-OUT


2553



Item

Unit

Value

AMxa-TOA

dB

<= 12.5b

ROA-OUT

dB

<= 1.5

Reflectance

dB

< -40

Attenuation range

dB

0-15

Attenuation precision

dB

< 1 (0 to 10 dB) < 1.5 (> 10 dB)

VOA attenuation under channel blocking functionc

dB

> 42


dB

<= 0.5

NOTE a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. b: This value is obtained when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB. c: Only the TN11RMU902 supports the channel blocking function.



l





TN11RMU901

7.7

8.6

TN11RMU902

8.2

9.0


23.4 ROAM ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board

23.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the ROAM board is TN11. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2554








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1R O A M

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

Type Table 23-15 lists the types of the ROAM board. Table 23-15 Type description of the ROAM board Board

Type

Description

TN11ROAM

01

Processes the even wavelengths in C band.

02

Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.

23.4.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM board is used with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system, see Figure 23-8.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2555



Figure 23-8 Position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system IN

EXPO EXPI

OUT

OA ROAM

ROAM OA

OUT

EXPI M01

DM

O O T T U U

M40

EXPO

O O T T U U

M40

40

O T U

OA

IN

M01

40

DMUX

OA

O T U

Client-side

DM

DMUX O O O T T T U U U

O T U

Client-side

NOTE


23.4.3 Functions and Features The ROAM board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, achieve built-in power equilibrium, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-16. Table 23-16 Functions and features of the ROAM board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Implements dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of a maximum of 40 wavelengths with the demultiplexing board as well as dynamic grooming of wavelengths for services on the ring network.

WDM specification


Power equilibrium

Implements the wavelength-level equilibrium and control of optical power to flatten the spectrum for the working signals.



Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


2556



23.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ROAM board consists of the planar lightwave circuit (PLC) optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ROAM. Figure 23-9 Functions and features of the ROAM board

OUT

M01

M02

M40

VOA

VOA

VOA EXPI

Optical multiplexer module Splitter

IN

EXPO DM

PLC optical module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The main path signals are received through the IN interface. The splitter divides the main path signals into two channels of the same signals. One signal is output to the optical demultiplexer unit through the DM interface and demultiplexed into single wavelengths dropped at the local station. The other signal passes through and is output through the EXPO interface. The signals to be added at the local station are received through the corresponding M01-M40 interfaces. These signals are multiplexed with the signal input through the EXPI interface and then output through the OUT interface.


PLC optical module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2557



– Multiplexes forty wavelengths added on the board. – The PLC optical module contains the VOA modules that implement the power adjustment at the wavelength level. – The PLC optical module blocks and terminates the signals dropped at the local station and adjusts the optical power of other signals. l


l


23.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ROAM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-10 shows the front panel of the ROAM board. Figure 23-10 Front panel of the ROAM board

CAUTION

M37 M38

M39 M40

M24

M25

M26

M27 M28

M29 M30

M13

M14

M15

M16

M17 M18

M19 M20

M03

M04

M05

M06

M07 M08

M09 M10

M32

EXPI

M21

M22

M23

M11

M12

M01

M02

IN

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

M36

M31

OUT

195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10

M35

M33 M34

DM

EXPO

M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20

194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40

193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10

CAUTION

HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

M01 196.00 M11195.00 M21 194.00 M31 193.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M22 193.90 M32 192.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M23 193.80 M33 192.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M24 193.70 M34 192.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M25 193.60 M35 192.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M26 193.50 M36 192.50 M07 195.40 M17194.40 M27 193.40 M37 192.40 M08 195.30 M18194.30 M28 193.30 M38 192.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M29 193.20 M39 192.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10 M30 193.10 M40 192.10

STAT ACT PROG SRV

ROAM


196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10

ROAM

M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10



2558



l


l


l


l



Interfaces Table 23-17 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 23-17 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ROAM board Interface

Type

Function

M01-M40

LC

Receives a single-wavelength signal that must be multiplexed into the main optical path from an OTU or line board.

DM

LC

Drops channels to the local station.

OUT

LC


IN

LC


EXPO

LC

Used as the cascade interface to transmit the passthrough signal.

EXPI

LC

Used as the cascade interface to receive the passthrough signal.

There are 40 output interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 23-18 and Table 23-19 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the ROAM board. Table 23-18 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (even)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.00

1529.55

M21

194.00

1545.32

M02

195.90

1530.33

M22

193.90

1546.12

M03

195.80

1531.12

M23

193.80

1546.92

M04

195.70

1531.90

M24

193.70

1547.72

M05

195.60

1532.68

M25

193.60

1548.51

M06

195.50

1533.47

M26

193.50

1549.32


2559



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M07

195.40

1534.25

M27

193.40

1550.12

M08

195.30

1535.04

M28

193.30

1550.92

M09

195.20

1535.82

M29

193.20

1551.72

M10

195.10

1536.61

M30

193.10

1552.52

M11

195.00

1537.40

M31

193.00

1553.33

M12

194.90

1538.19

M32

192.90

1554.13

M13

194.80

1538.98

M33

192.80

1554.94

M14

194.70

1539.77

M34

192.70

1555.75

M15

194.60

1540.56

M35

192.60

1556.55

M16

194.50

1541.35

M36

192.50

1557.36

M17

194.40

1542.14

M37

192.40

1558.17

M18

194.30

1542.94

M38

192.30

1558.98

M19

194.20

1543.73

M39

192.20

1559.79

M20

194.10

1544.53

M40

192.10

1560.61

Table 23-19 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (odd)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M01

196.05

1529.16

M21

194.05

1544.92

M02

195.95

1529.94

M22

193.95

1545.72

M03

195.85

1530.72

M23

193.85

1546.52

M04

195.75

1531.51

M24

193.75

1547.32

M05

195.65

1532.29

M25

193.65

1548.11

M06

195.55

1533.07

M26

193.55

1548.91

M07

195.45

1533.86

M27

193.45

1549.72

M08

195.35

1534.64

M28

193.35

1550.52

M09

195.25

1535.43

M29

193.25

1551.32

M10

195.15

1536.22

M30

193.15

1552.12


2560



Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelengt h (nm)

M11

195.05

1537.00

M31

193.05

1552.93

M12

194.95

1537.79

M32

192.95

1553.73

M13

194.85

1538.58

M33

192.85

1554.54

M14

194.75

1539.37

M34

192.75

1555.34

M15

194.65

1540.16

M35

192.65

1556.15

M16

194.55

1540.95

M36

192.55

1556.96

M17

194.45

1541.75

M37

192.45

1557.77

M18

194.35

1542.54

M38

192.35

1558.58

M19

194.25

1543.33

M39

192.25

1559.39

M20

194.15

1544.13

M40

192.15

1560.20


23.4.6 Valid Slots Three slots house one ROAM board. Table 23-20 shows the valid slots for the ROAM board. Table 23-20 Valid slots for the ROAM board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU15


2561



NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the ROAM board, the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-21. Table 23-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

EXPO

2

EXPI

3

OUT

4

DM

5

A01-A40

6-45

NOTE The A01–A40 interfaces correspond to the M01– M40 interfaces on the physical front panel.

23.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For ROAM parameters, refer to Table 23-22. Table 23-22 ROAM parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



2562



Field

Value

Description


-


Configure Band

C Default: C


Actual Band

-



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: Even

Wavelength Target -32 to 8 Output Power (dBm) Default: /

It is used to set the single wavelength target output optical power after add wavelengths are multiplexed.

23.4.9 ROAM Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 23-23 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM board. Table 23-23 Optical specifications of the ROAM board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Unit

Value


GHz

100

Insertion loss

Mxa-OUT

dB

<= 9b

IN-DM

dB

<= 7


2563



Item

Unit

Value

EXPI-OUT

dB

<= 14b

IN-EXPO

dB

<= 3


nm

1529 - 1561


dB

> 22


dB

> 25

Attenuation range

dB

0 to 20

Attenuation precision

dB

< 1 (0 to 10 dB) < 1.5 (> 10 dB)

Module switch time

ms

<= 50

Extinction ratio

dB

>= 30

-0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength

nm

> 0.3

-0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through wavelength

nm

> 0.2

NOTE a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface. b: This value is obtained when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.



l





TN11ROAM

66

72.6


23.5 TD20 TD20: 20-ports Tunable DeMultiplexing Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2564



23.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TD20 board is TN12.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 2T D2 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N




Added the TN12TD20 board.

The TN12TD20 board applies to a ROADM site to broadcast a multi-wavelength signal that contains 20 coherent wavelength signals to 20 coherent line boards. Because coherent line boards support automatic wavelength selection, the coherent line boards automatically select the required signal from the multiwavelength signal, offering colorless applications.

23.5.3 Application The TD20 board is a demultiplexer board and applies to ROADM sites. It is used to broadcast a multi-wavelength signal that contains 20 coherent optical signals over different wavelengths. The TD20 board must work with coherent OTU or line boards. It is intended for colorless applications because coherent OTU or line board supports wavelength selection. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2565



For the position of the TD20 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 23-11. Figure 23-11 Position of the TD20 board in the DWDM system W

NE1

NE3

OA

OA

NE2

N

OUT

NE4

OA IN

OUT

WSMD4 AM1

W S

N

OA S

OA

NE1

OA

IN WSMD4

DM1

DM1

AM1

IN W S DM1 M D AM1 OUT 4

AM1

DM1

W OUT S OA M D 4

E

OA

IN

E DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4

NE5

WSMD4

IN

NE7

OA

OA

IN

OUT

WSM9

NE6

WSD9

AM1

AM4

DM1

OUT

OUT

IN

TM20 AM1

AM20

O T U

AM1

O T U

O T U

Directionless

OUT

TM20

TD20

AM20

DM1 DM20

O T U

O T U

Colorless

DM4 IN

TD20 DM1

O O T T U U

DM20

O T U

: Current path : Other path (S direction) : Other path (N direction) : Other path (E direction) OTU

: Coherent OTU

23.5.4 Functions and Features The TD20 board performs the colorless drop function. It drops a maximum of 20 optical signals that are carried over different wavelengths, compensates for broadcast loss, and supports online monitoring of optical power, alarms, and performance. Table 23-24 lists the functions and features of the TD20 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2566



Table 23-24 Functions and features of the TD20 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Demultiplexes a multi-wavelength signal into 20 coherent optical signals that are carried over different wavelengths and broadcasts the signals. The board is intended for colorless applications.

WDM specification


Compensation for broadcast loss

Uses a built-in EDFA module to compensate for broadcast loss. l The EDFA module works in gain-locking mode. – Adding or dropping one or more channels of signals does not affect the gain of signals on other channels. – The optical signal power jitter on some channels does not affect the signal gain of other channels. l The EDFA module has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the system can be upgraded or expanded without interrupting services by using this function to suppress channel optical power jitter.




l Monitors and reports optical power of the built-in EDFA module.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


23.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TD20 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-12 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TD20.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2567



Figure 23-12 Functional modules and signal flow of the TD20

IN

DM01 DM02

EDFA optical module Optical Splitter demultiplexer VOA VO AIN AOUT DMIN module

MON

DM20

Optical module Detection for PIN pump current and temperature

Driving current

Driving and detection module

Control Memory

Communication

CPU



Required voltage

SCC


Signal flow 1.

The board receives the coherent multi-wavelength signal to be dropped through its IN port and sends the signal to the VOA for power adjustment.

2.

After the power adjustment by the VOA, the signal is sent to the EDFA module for power amplification.

3.

The power splitter splits the amplified optical power into two and sends the less optical power to the MON port for performance monitoring.

4.

The optical demultiplexer module equally splits the amplified multi-wavelength optical signal into 20 light beams, each containing 20 single-wavelength signals, and transmits the light beams through the DM01-DM20 ports.

Module function l

Optical module – The VOA adjusts the signal power to ensure that the signal power meets the system requirement. – The EDFA module amplifies the optical power to compensate for the broadcast loss. – The power splitter splits the amplified optical power into two and sends the less optical power to the MON port for performance monitoring. – The optical demultiplexer module equally splits the coherent multi-wavelength signal into 20 light beams, each containing 20 single-wavelength signals, and broadcasts the light beams to 20 directions.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2568


l



l


l


23.5.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TD20 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-13 shows the front panel of the TD20 board. Figure 23-13 Front panel of the TD20 board

IN

DM17 DM18 DM19 DM20

STAT ACT PROG SRV

MON

TD20

TD20

DM01 DM02 DM03 DM04 DM05 DM06 DM07 DM08 DM09 DM10 DM11 DM12 DM13 DM14 DM15 DM16



l


l


l





2569



Table 23-25 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TD20 board Interface

Type

Function

DM01–DM20

LC

Equally splits the multi-wavelength signal into 20 light beams, each with 20 single-wavelength signals, and broadcasts the light beams to the IN ports on coherent OTU or line boards.

IN

LC

Receives a coherent multi-wavelength signal and sends the signal to the DMx port on a WSD9 board.

MON

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals from the EDFA output. The ratio of the MON port power to the EDFA output power is 1:99. In other words, the MON port power is 20 dB less than the actual EDFA-amplified signal power calculated as follows: Paout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB.


23.5.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TD20 board. Table 23-26 shows the valid slots for the TD20 board. Table 23-26 Valid slots for the TD20 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16


2570



The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TD20 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TD20 board, the slot number of the TD20 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-27. Table 23-27 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TD20 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

AINa

2

AOUTa

3

VOa

4

DMINa

5

DM01 to DM20

6 to 25

MON

26

a: Virtual port

23.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For TD20 Parameters, refer to Table 23-28. Table 23-28 TD20 parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



2571



Field

Value

Description










-



-


Configure Band

C


Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Actual Band

-



-



All


Default: All


2572



Field

Value

Description


-


Gain (dB)

-


Nominal Gain (dB)

Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) to Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: The specific value is related to the module.


23.5.10 TD20 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 23-29 Optical specifications of the TD20 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529 to 1561


2573



Item

Unit

Value

Total input power range of IN port

dBm

-17.5 to 17

Input power range per channel of IN port

dBm

-17.5 to 4

Inherent insertion loss of internal VOA

dB

<= 1.5

Dynamic attenuation range of internal VOA

dB

20

Adjustment accuracy of internal VOA

dB

1

Nominal input power range of internal OA

dBm

-19 to -3

Input power range per channel of internal OA

dBm

-19 to -16

Nominal gain of internal OA

dB

23

Noise figure (NF) of internal OA

dB

<= 6.0

Maximum total output optical power of internal OA

dBm

20

Total output power range of DMxa ports

dBm

-13 to 9

Single output power range of DMxa ports

dBm

-13 to -4

Maximum channel insertion loss difference (IN-DMxa)

dB

3


dB

<-40


dB

<-40


dB

<= 0.5

a: DMx represents the DM01-DM20 interface.



l





TN12TD20

13.0

15.0


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2574



23.6 TM20 TM20: 20-ports Tunable Multiplexing Board

23.6.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TM20 board are TN11 and TN13.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1T M 20

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 3T M 20

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Differences Between Versions Specification:The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 23.6.10 TM20 Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2575




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11TM20

TN13TM20

The TN13TM20 can be created as TM20 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13TM20 functions as the TN11TM20.

TN13TM20

None

-




Added the TN13TM20 board.




Added the TN11TM20 board.

The TN11TM20 board applies to a ROADM site to add 20 coherent optical signals carried over different wavelengths and multiplex the signals into one multi-wavelength signal, achieving the colorless adding function.

23.6.3 Application The TM20 board is a multiplexer board and is intended for colorless applications. It applies to ROADM sites and is used to add 20 coherent optical signals over different wavelengths and multiplex these signals into one multi-wavelength signal. For the position of the TM20 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 23-14.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2576



Figure 23-14 Position of the TM20 board in the DWDM system W

NE1

NE3

OA

OA

NE2

N

OUT

NE4

OA IN

OUT

DM1

AM1

WSMD4 AM1

W S

N

OA S

OA

NE1

OA

IN WSMD4 DM1

IN W S DM1 M D AM1 OUT 4

AM1

DM1

W OUT S OA M D 4

E

OA

IN

E DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4

NE5

WSMD4

IN

NE7

OA

OA

IN

OUT

WSM9

NE6

WSD9

AM1

AM4

DM1

OUT

OUT

IN

TM20 AM1

TM20

AM20

O T U

AM1

O T U

O T U

Directionless

OUT

DM4

TD20

TD20

AM20 DM1

O T U

DM20

O T U

Colorless

IN DM1

O O T T U U

DM20

O T U

: Current path : Other path (S direction) : Other path (N direction) : Other path (E direction) OTU

: Coherent OTU

NOTE

Optical cross-connections must be created for the TM20 board on the U2000 and wavelengths must be specified during the cross-connection creation.

23.6.4 Functions and Features The TM20 board performs the colorless add function. It adds a maximum of 20 coherent optical signals and supports online monitoring of optical power, alarms, and performance. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-30.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2577



Table 23-30 Functions and features of the TM20 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Adds a maximum of 20 coherent optical signals carried over different wavelengths and multiplexes the signals into one multiwavelength signal. The board is intended for colorless applications. l Supports manual configuration of add wavelengths.

WDM specification





Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

23.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TM20 board consists of the multiplexer, splitter, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TM20 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2578



Figure 23-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the TM20 board

Multiplexer

AM01 AM02

Splitter OUT

AM20

MON

Optical module Temperature control


PIN


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow 1.

Each of the AM01–AM20 optical ports receives one single-wavelength coherent optical signal and sends the signal to the interconnected multiplexer.

2.

The multiplexer multiplexes the 20 single-wavelength optical signals into one multiwavelength optical signal, and then transmits the signal through its OUT optical port.

3.

The power splitter splits the multi-wavelength signal power into two and sends the less signal power to the MON port for performance monitoring. NOTE

The AM01–AM20 optical ports support tunable wavelengths but they must use different wavelengths.

Module Function l

Multiplexer Multiplexes the 20 single-wavelength coherent optical signals into one multi-wavelength optical signal.

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Splitter Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2579



Uses the power splitter to split the optical power on the main optical path into two and sends the less optical power to the MON port for performance monitoring. l


l


l


23.6.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the TM20 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-16 shows the front panel of the TM20 board. Figure 23-16 Front panel of the TM20 board


CAUTION

MON OUT AM17 AM18 AM19 AM20

STAT ACT PROG SRV

TM20

TM20


AM01 AM02 AM03 AM04 AM05 AM06 AM07 AM08 AM09 AM10 AM11 AM12 AM13 AM14 AM15 AM16



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2580



l


l



Interfaces Table 23-31lists the type and function of each interface. Table 23-31 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TM20 board Interface

Type

Function

AM01 to AM20

LC

Receives one single-wavelength coherent light signal from an OTU or line board.

OUT

LC

Transmits a multi-wavelength signal to the AMx optical port on a WSM9 board.

MON

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 3:97. In other words, the MON port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB.


23.6.7 Valid Slots Three slots house one TM20 board. Table 23-32 shows the valid slots for the TM20 board. Table 23-32 Valid slots for the TM20 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16


2581



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU14


IU1-IU15

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TM20 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left most one of three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TM20 board, the slot number of the TM20 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-33. Table 23-33 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TM20 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

OUT

1

AM01 to AM20

2 to 21

MON

22

23.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For TM20 parameters, refer to Table 23-34. Table 23-34 TM20 parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-


Actual Band

-



-



2582



Field

Value

Description

Configure Band

C



All Default: All


23.6.10 TM20 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 23-35 Optical specifications of the TM20 board Item

Unit

Value

Optical channels

-

80


GHz

50


nm

1529 to 1561

Insertion loss-AMxa-OUT

dB

<= 8


dB

1.5


nm

> 0.16

Port isolation

dB

>= 20

Extinction ratio

dB

>= 30


s

<= 3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40


dB

<= 1

a: AMx represents the AM01 to AM20 interface.



l

Weight TN11TM20:3.51 kg(7.74 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2583



TN13TM20:3.50kg(7.72 lb.)




TN11TM20

30.0

45.0

TN13TM20

30.0

33.0


23.7 WSD9 WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

23.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the WSD9 board are TN11, TN12, TN13, TN16 and TN17.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 W S D9

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

T N1 2 W S D9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


2584



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 3 W S D9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 6 W S D9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 7 W S D9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


Appearance: – The TN13WSD9 board uses a front panel different from that of the WSD9 board of other versions. The TN13WSD9 board occupies three slots. The TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9/TN16WSD9/TN17WSD9 boards occupy two slots. For details, see 23.7.6 Front Panel and 23.7.10 WSD9 Specifications.

l

Specification: – The wavelength of the TN13WSD9/TN16WSD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The wavelength of the TN11WSD9/TN12WSD9/TN17WSD9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing. For details, see 23.7.10 WSD9 Specifications. – The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 23.7.10 WSD9 Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2585




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11WSD 9

TN12WSD 9

Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version. TN12WSD9 boards can functionally substitute for TN11WSD9 boards. That is, when a TN12WSD9 board is used to replace a TN11WSD9 board, the logical board of the TN12WSD9 board must be created as 12WSD9 on the NMS.

TN12WSD 9

TN17WSD 9

The TN17WSD9 can be created as 12WSD9 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN17WSD9 functions as the TN12WSD9.

TN13WSD 9

TN16WSD 9

The TN16WSD9 can be created as 13WSD9 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN16WSD9 functions as the TN13WSD9. The TN16WSD9 board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN13WSD9 board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board.

TN16WSD 9

None

-

TN17WSD 9

None

-



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update





2586







23.7.3 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSD9 board is used with the WSM9 or RMU9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the interfaces of the WSD9 board based on the configuration. l

If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit for demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals enter corresponding OTUs and are sent to the client-side equipment at the local station.

l

If the dropped signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is sent directly to the OTU at the local station.

For the position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 23-17.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2587



Figure 23-17 Position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system Client-side

O O T T U U

O O T T U U

O O O T T T U U U

DMUX

DCM

MUX

8 DM1

OA

OUT

OA

AM1

DM8

WSD9

IN

EXPO

AM8

AM1

8

O T U

O O T T U U

OUT

IN

WSD9

DM8

OA

OA

DM1

8

8 MUX

AM8

WSM9

EXPI

EXPI EXPO

WSM9

O T U

DCM

DMUX

O O T T U U

O T U

O O T T U U

Client-side

NOTE


23.7.4 Functions and Features The WSD9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-36. Table 23-36 Functions and features of the WSD9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can output any wavelength combination to any interface to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2588




Description

WDM specification







Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

23.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2589



Figure 23-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board DM1 DM2

DM8

Splitter 1 IN

Splitter 2 EXPO

WSS module

MONI

MONO


PIN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow The main path signal is received through the IN interface. The single-wavelength or multichannel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces based on the configuration. Other channels pass through the station and are output through the EXPO interface.

Module Function l

Optical module – The WSS module inside the optical module extracts any single wavelengths or wavelength combinations from the multiplexed wavelength, and directs them out the predefined ports of the DM1-DM8 ports. The optical module then sends the remaining wavelengths to the EXPO port. – The WSS module supports wavelength-level power adjustments.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2590



– Splitters 1 and 2 provide a small amount of the IN and EXPO port power to the MONI and MONO ports for in-service performance monitoring. l

Temperature and optical power detection module – Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.

l


l


23.7.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSD9 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-19, Figure 23-20, and Figure 23-21 show the front panel of the WSD9 board. Figure 23-19 Front panel of the TN11WSD9/TN12WSD9/TN17WSD9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2591







l


l


l





2592



Table 23-37 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSD9 board Interface

Type

Function

DM1-DM8

LC

Transmits the single-wavelength or multi-channel signal separated from the main path. If the signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. If the signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is directly sent to the optical transponder unit.

EXPO

LC


IN

LC


MONI

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals received by the IN port. The ratio of the MONI port power to the IN port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONI port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows:Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB.

MONO

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the EXPO port. The ratio of the MONO port power to the EXPO port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONO port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pexpo (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB.


23.7.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11WSD9/TN12WSD9/TN16WSM9/TN17WSD9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSD9 board. Table 23-38, Table 23-39 and Table 23-40 show the valid slots for the WSD9 boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2593



Table 23-38 Valid slots for the TN11WSD9 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16

Table 23-39 Valid slots for the TN12WSD9/TN16WSD9/TN17WSD9 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

Table 23-40 Valid slots for the TN13WSD9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16,


IU1-IU14


IU1-IU15


2594



NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSD9/TN16WSD9/TN17WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9/TN16WSD9/TN17WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 6800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSD9/TN12WSD9/TN16WSD9/TN17WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9/TN16WSD9/TN17WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-41. Table 23-41 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

EXPO

2

DM1-DM8

3-10

MONI

11

MONO

12

23.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the WSD9 board, refer to Table 23-42. Table 23-42 WSD9 parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



2595



Field

Value

Description


-



Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB), Blocking, /

An Optical Interface Name contains a maximum of 64 characters. Any characters are supported. Specifies the attenuation for the optical interface. This parameter ensures that the launch power of the transmit end complies with the system power requirements. Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. l When no optical cross-connections are present, the parameter value is displayed as /. l When NE-level optical cross-connections are present or when the end-to-end configuration function is used to configure optical cross-connections and OPA Mode is set to Manual, the parameter value is displayed as Blocking after an OCh trail is created. If you set the parameter at this time, the specified value is then displayed. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2596



Field

Value

Description


-



-


Configure Band

C Default: C


Actual Band

-



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: l TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9/ TN17WSD9: Even l TN13WSD9/ TN16WSD9: All

23.7.10 WSD9 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2597



Optical Specifications Table 23-43 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Uni t

Value

Type

-

TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9/ TN17WSD9

TN13WSD9

TN16WSD9

Optical channels

-

40

80

80


GHz

100

50

50

Insertion loss

dB

<= 8b

<= 8b

<= 8b


dB

1.5

1.5

1.5


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

-1dB spectral width

nm

> 0.32

> 0.16

> 0.20

Port isolation

dB

> 25

> 25

> 25


dB

> 25

> 25

> 25


dB

> 30

> 30

> 30

Extinction ratio

dB

>= 35

>= 35

>= 35


s

<= 3

<= 3

<= 3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

-40

-40

Directivity

dB

35

35

35


dB

<= 1

<= 1

<= 1

Attenuation range of each of dropping wavelengths

dB

0-15

0-15

0-15

Attenuation precision of each of dropping wavelengths

dB

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

<= 1.5 (>10 dB)

<= 1.5 (>10 dB)

<= 1.5 (>10 dB)

IN-DMxa IN-EXPO


2598



Item

Uni t

Value

Type

-

TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9/ TN17WSD9

TN13WSD9

TN16WSD9

NOTE a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface. b: This value is obtained when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: l

TN11WSD9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

TN12WSD9/TN16WSD9/TN17WSD9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

TN13WSD9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

Weight: l

TN11WSD9: 2.2 kg (4.9 lb.)

l

TN12WSD9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)

l

TN13WSD9/TN16WSD9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)

l

TN17WSD9: 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.)




TN11WSD9

17.0

18.7

TN12WSD9

25.4

28.5

TN13WSD9

25.4

28.5

TN16WSD9

25.0

27.5

TN17WSD9

25.0

27.5


23.8 WSM9 WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2599



23.8.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the WSM9 board are TN11, TN12, TN13, TN16 and TN17.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 W S M 9

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

T N1 2 W S M 9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 3 W S M 9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 6 W S M 9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


2600



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 7 W S M 9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


Appearance: – The TN13WSM9 board uses a front panel different from that of the WSM9 board of other versions. The TN13WSM9 board occupies three slots. The TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9/TN16WSM9/TN17WSM9 board occupy two slots. For details, see 23.8.6 Front Panel and 23.8.10 WSM9 Specifications. – The laser safety class of TN13WSM9/TN16WSM9 board is different from that of the WSM9 board of other versions. The laser safety class of TN13WSM9/TN16WSM9 board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M. The laser safety class of TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9/ TN17WSM9 board is HAZARD LEVEL 1. For details, see 23.8.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – The wavelength of the TN13WSM9/TN16WSM9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The wavelength of the TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9/TN17WSM9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing. The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to versions. For details, see 23.8.10 WSM9 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11WSM 9

TN12WSM 9

Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version. TN12WSM9 boards can functionally substitute for TN11WSM9 boards. That is, when a TN12WSM9 board is used to replace a TN11WSM9 board, the logical board of the TN12WSM9 board must be created as 12WSM9 on the NMS.


2601



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12WSM 9

TN17WSM 9

The TN17WSM9 can be created as 12WSM9 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN17WSM9 functions as the TN12WSM9.

TN13WSM 9

TN16WSM 9

The TN16WSM9 can be created as 13WSM9 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN16WSM9 functions as the TN13WSM9. The TN16WSM9 board occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the TN13WSM9 board occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board.

TN16WSM 9

None

-

TN17WSM 9

None

-










23.8.3 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSM9 board is used with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2602



For the position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 23-22. Figure 23-22 Position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system Client-side

O O T T U U

Client-side

O O T T U U

O O O T T T U U U

DMUX

DCM DM1

OA

OUT

MUX

DM 8

WSD9

IN

OA

8

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM1

8 MUX

O T U

O O T T U U

8

AM1

AM 8

WSM9

OUT

IN

WSD9

WSM9

AM8

O T U

DM8

8

OA

OA

DM1

DCM

DMUX

O T U

Client-side

O O T T U U

O O T T U U

Client-side

NOTE


23.8.4 Functions and Features The WSM9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-44. Table 23-44 Functions and features of the WSM9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through any interfaces to achieve the dynamic wavelength allocation. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2603




Description

WDM specification







Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN12WSM9/TN13WSM9/TN16WSM9/ TN17WSM9.

23.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2604



Figure 23-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board AM1 AM2

AM8

Splitter 2

Splitter 1 EXPI

OUT

WSS module

MONI

MONO


PIN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. l

If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSM9 board through the AMn optical interface.

l

If single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSM9 board from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface.

After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.



2605



– Receives any wavelengths (either single wavelengths or wavelength combinations) through the EXPI port and any of AM1-AM8 ports. – The WSS module supports wavelength-level power adjustments. – Splitters 1 and 2 provide a small amount of the EXPI and OUT port power to the MONI and MONO ports for in-service performance monitoring. l

Temperature and optical power detection module – Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. – Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.

l


l


23.8.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSM9 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-24, Figure 23-25, and Figure 23-26 show the front panel of the WSM9 board. Figure 23-24 Front panel of the TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9/TN17WSM9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2606







l


l


l





2607



Table 23-45 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSM9 board Interface

Type

Function

AM1-AM8

LC

Receive the single-wavelength or multi-wavelength signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path.

OUT

LC


EXPI

LC


MONI

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals received by the EXPI port. The ratio of the MONI port power to the EXPI port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONI port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pexpi (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB.

MONO

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MONO port power to the OUT port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONO port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB.

Laser Hazard Level TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9/TN17WSM9: The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW). TN13WSM9/TN16WSM9: The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

23.8.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9/TN16WSM9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSM9 board. Table 23-46, Table 23-47 and Table 23-48 show the valid slots for the WSM9 boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2608



Table 23-46 Valid slots for the TN11WSM9 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16

Table 23-47 Valid slots for the TN12WSM9/TN16WSM9/TN17WSM9 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

Table 23-48 Valid slots for the TN13WSM9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16


IU1-IU14


IU1-IU15


2609



NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSM9/TN16WSM9/TN17WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9/TN16WSM9/TN17WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 6800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9/TN16WSM9/TN17WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9/TN16WSM9/TN17WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-49. Table 23-49 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

EXPI

1

OUT

2

AM1-AM8

3-10

MONI

11

MONO

12

23.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSM9 parameters, refer to Table 23-50. Table 23-50 WSM9 parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



2610



Field

Value

Description


-




Specifies the attenuation for the optical interface. This parameter ensures that the launch power of the transmit end complies with the system power requirements. Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. l When no optical cross-connections are present, the parameter value is displayed as /. l When NE-level optical crossconnections are present or when the end-to-end configuration function is used to configure optical crossconnections and OPA Mode is set to Manual, the parameter value is displayed as Blocking after an OCh trail is created. If you set the parameter at this time, the specified value is then displayed. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2611



Field

Value

Description




Default: none


-



-


Configure Band

C



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: l TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9/ TN17WSM9: Even l TN13WSM9/ TN16WSM9: All

23.8.10 WSM9 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2612



Optical Specifications Table 23-51 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Uni t

Value

Type

-

TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9/ TN17WSM9

TN13WSM9

TN16WSM9

Optical channels

-

40

80

80


GH z

100

50

50

Insertio n loss

dB

<= 8b

<= 8b

<= 8b


dB

1.5

1.5

1.5


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561


nm

> 0.32

> 0.16

> 0.20

Port isolation

dB

> 25

> 25

> 25


dB

> 25

> 25

> 25


dB

> 30

> 30

> 30

Extinction ratio

dB

>= 35

>= 35

>= 35


s

<= 3

<= 3

<= 3

Directivity

dB

35

35

35

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

-40

-40


dB

<= 1

<= 1

<= 1


dB

0-15

0-15

0-15


dB

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

<= 1.5 (>10 dB)

<= 1.5 (>10 dB)

<= 1.5 (>10 dB)

AMxa-OUT EXPI-OUT


2613



Item

Uni t

Value

Type

-

TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9/ TN17WSM9

TN13WSM9

TN16WSM9

NOTE a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. b: This value is obtained when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.


TN11WSM9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

TN12WSM9/TN16WSM9/TN17WSM9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

TN13WSM9 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

Weight: l

TN11WSM9: 2.2 kg (4.84 lb.)

l

TN12WSM9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)

l

TN13WSM9/TN16WSM9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)

l

TN17WSM9: 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.)




TN11WSM9

17.0

18.7

TN12WSM9

25.4

28.5

TN13WSM9

25.4

28.5

TN16WSM9

25.0

27.5

TN17WSM9

25.0

27.5


23.9 WSMD2 WSMD2: 2-Port Wavelength selective multiplexing and Demultiplexing board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2614



23.9.1 Version Description The available functional version of the WSMD2 board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 W S M D2

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

23.9.2 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD2 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 23-27.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2615



Figure 23-27 Position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system O T U

O T U

Clientside

O T U

DMUX

O T U

MUX

DCM DM

AM

IN

OA

OUT

OA

WSMD2

WSMD2 OA

OUT

EXPO EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

IN

AM

OA

DM

DCM MUX

O T U

DMUX O T U

Clientside

O T U

O T U

23.9.3 Functions and Features The WSMD2 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-52. Table 23-52 Functions and features of the WSMD2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main optical path as two channels of the same signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to the AM port. The WSMD2 board processes signals carried over C-band even wavelengths only.

WDM specification





2616




Description




Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add wavelengths at the local station.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

23.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSMD2 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2. Figure 23-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2 DM

AM

EXPO

EXPI

Splitter

Splitter

IN

OUT

WSS optical module Optical module

Coupler

MONI

MONO


PIN

PIN

Temperature and optical power deteciton module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2617



Signal flow The optical signals of the main path are accessed through the IN interface. The signals are broadcast into two same optical signals through the coupler. Then, the board drops one channel of optical signals at the local station through the DM optical interface. The other channel of optical signals is output through the EXPO optical interface to other directions. Optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input to WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly input to the WSMD2 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM interface. Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD2 board through the EXPI optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the wavelengths added at the local station. The multiplexed signals are finally output through the OUT optical interface.

Module function l

Optical module – The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through the following optical interface: EXPI and AM. – The WSS optical module implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. – The Coupler optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through DM. It implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to two ports. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection.

l

Temperature and optical power detection module – Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.

l


l


23.9.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSMD2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-29 shows the front panel of the WSMD2 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2618



Figure 23-29 Front panel of the WSMD2 board


CAUTION

IN

EXPO

EXPI

DM

AM

WSMD2

OUT


STAT ACT PROG SRV

WSMD2

MONO MONI



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 23-53 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 23-53 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


DM

LC

Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station or other stations to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit.

AM

LC

Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path.


2619



Interface

Type

Function

EXPO

LC

Functions as a cascade output optical interface. Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPO optical interfaces.

EXPI

LC

Functions as a cascade input optical interface. Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPI optical interfaces.

MONI

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals received by the IN port. The ratio of the MONI port power to the IN port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONI port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB.

MONO

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MONO port power to the OUT port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONO port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB.


23.9.6 Valid Slots Two slots house one WSMD2 board. Table 23-54 shows the valid slots for the WSMD2 board. Table 23-54 Valid slots for the WSMD2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, and IU29IU35


2620



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD2 board, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-55. Table 23-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

DM

2

AM

3

OUT

4

EXPO

5

EXPI

6

MONO

7

MONI

8

23.9.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSMD2 parameters, refer to Table 23-56.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2621



Table 23-56 WSMD2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-





Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2622



Field

Value

Description




Default: none


-



-


Configure Band

C



-



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: Even

23.9.9 WSMD2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 23-57 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2623



Table 23-57 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD2 board Item

Unit

Value

Optical channels

-

40


GHz

100


nm

1529-1561


nm

> 0.32

dB

<= 8a

Insertion loss

AM-OUT EXPI-OUT IN-DM

<= 4.5a

IN-EXPO Maximum channel insertion loss difference

dB

1.5

Port isolation

dB

> 25

Extinction ratio

dB

>= 35


s

<= 3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

35


dB

<= 1

Attenuation range of each of adding wavelength

dB

0-15

Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelength

dB

<= 1 (0 dB to 10 dB) <= 1.5 (> 10 dB)

a: This value is obtained when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.



l


Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board



TN11WSMD2

17.0

18.7


2624



Board




23.10 WSMD4 WSMD4: 4-Port Wavelength selective multiplexing and Demultiplexing board

23.10.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the WSMD4 board are TN11, TN12, TN13 and TN17.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11 WS MD 4

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

TN 12 WS MD 4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN 13 WS MD 4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN 17 WS MD 4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2625



Type Table 23-58 lists the version description of the WSMD4 board. Table 23-58 Version description of the WSMD4 board Board

Type

Description

TN11WSMD4

01


02

Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.

TN12WSMD4

01

Processes the even wavelengths and odd wavelengths in C band.

TN13WSMD4

01

Processes the even wavelengths and odd wavelengths in C band.

TN17WSMD4

01



Function: – The TN11WSMD4/TN17WSMD4 processes 40 wavelengths in C band. The TN12WSMD4/TN13WSMD4 processes 80 wavelengths in C band. For details, see Table 23-58.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 23.10.10 WSMD4 Specifications.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11WS MD4

TN17WSMD4

The TN17WSMD4 can be created as 11WSMD4 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN17WSMD4 functions as the TN11WSMD4.

TN12WS MD4

TN13WSMD4


TN13WS MD4

None

-


2626



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN17WS MD4

None

-




The TN17WSMD4 board is added.








Added a description explaining that the WSMD4 board can be directly connected to a coherent OTU or line board for local dropping of services.


23.10.3 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD4 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD4 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 23-30. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2627



Figure 23-30 Position of the WSMD4 board in the DWDM system

West client side

IN

West ODF

F I U

TC

IN

OUT RC

South ODF

TC

OUT

F I U

DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4

AM1 AM2 AM3 AM 4

AM1

DM1

AM2 AM3

DM2

WSMD4

OUT

IN

East client side

AM4 AM3

DM3 DM2 DM1

OUT

South client side

East ODF IN

RC

OUT

OUT

WSMD 4

AM4 AM3 AM2 AM1

OUT

TC

AM2 AM1

WSMD4

F I U

IN

DM3 DM4

DM4

RC

RC

WSMD 4

AM4

IN

OUT

DM4 DM3 DM2 DM1

IN

TC

F I U

North ODF IN

North client side

NOTE

When coherent OTU or line boards are used, the M40 and D40 boards can be removed. The WSMD4 boards can be directly connected to the coherent OTU or line boards because the coherent OTU or line board supports wavelength selection.

23.10.4 Functions and Features The WSMD4 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-59. Table 23-59 Functions and features of the WSMD4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main optical path as four channels of the same signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to any port.

WDM specification



2628




Description







Optical-layer ASON

Supported by the TN11WSMD401, TN12WSMD4, TN13WSMD4 and TN17WSMD4.

23.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSMD4 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-31 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2629



Figure 23-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board D D D D M M M M 1 2 3 4

Splitter IN

A A A A M M M M 1 2 3 4

Optical demultiplexer module

Splitter OUT

RDU optical WSS optical module module Optical module

MONI

MONO


PIN

PIN

Temperature and optical power deteciton module

Control Memory


Fuse

Required voltage


SCC


Signal flow The optical signals on the main path are accessed through the IN interface. It is broadcast into four same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The four channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM4 optical interfaces separately. According to the network planning, the WSMD4 board drops one channel locally and outputs the other three channels to other directions. The optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input to the WSMD4 board through one of the AM1-AM4 optical interfaces. Assume that the optical signals are input through the AM1 optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD4 board through the AM1 optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly input to the WSMD4 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM1 interface. Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD4 board through the AM2AM4 optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the added wavelengths at the local station. The multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2630



Module function l

Optical module – The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of the following optical interfaces: AM1, AM2, AM3 and AM4. – The WSS optical module implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. – The RDU optical module locally drops optical signals and broadcasts wavelength signals to its four ports. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection.

l

Temperature and optical power detection module – Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. – Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.

l


l



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-32 shows the front panel of the TN11WSMD4/TN12WSMD4/TN17WSMD4 board. Figure 23-33 shows the front panel of the TN13WSMD4 board. Figure 23-32 Front panel of the TN11WSMD4/TN12WSMD4/TN17WSMD4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2631



Figure 23-33 Front panel of the TN13WSMD4 board



l


l


l




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

AM1-AM4

LC


DM1-DM4

LC


OUT

LC


IN

LC



2632



Interface

Type

Function

MONI

LC


MONO

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MONO port power to the OUT port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONO port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB.


23.10.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one WSMD4 board. Table 23-61 shows the valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board. Table 23-61 Valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

Table 23-62 shows the valid slots for the TN12WSMD4/TN13WSMD4/TN17WSMD4board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2633



Table 23-62 Valid slots for the TN12WSMD4/TN13WSMD4/TN17WSMD4 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD4 board, the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-63 and Table 23-64. Table 23-63 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11WSMD4/TN12WSMD4 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

IN

1

DM1

2

AM1

3

OUT

4

DM2-DM4

5 to 7

AM2-AM4

8 to 10

MONO

11

MONI

12


2634



Table 23-64 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN13WSMD4/TN17WSMD4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

DM1

2

AM1

3

DM2-DM4

5 to 7

AM2-AM4

8 to 10

MONO

11

MONI

12

23.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSMD4 parameters, refer to Table 23-65. Table 23-65 WSMD4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2635



Field

Value

Description







Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2636



Field

Value

Description


-



-


Configure Band

C



-



-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: l TN11WSMD4: Even l TN12WSMD4/ TN13WSMD4: All l TN17WSMD4: Even


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2637



Optical Specifications Table 23-66 Optical specifications of the WSMD4 board Item

Uni t

Value TN11WSMD4/ TN17WSMD4

TN12WSMD4

TN13WSMD4

Optical channels

-

40

80

80


GH z

100

50

50


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

-1dB spectral width

nm

> 0.32

> 0.16

> 0.20

Insertion loss

dB

<= 8b

<= 8b

<= 8b

<= 8

<= 8

<= 8

AMxaOUT IN-DMxa


dB

1.5

1.5

1.5

Port isolation

dB

> 25

> 25

> 25

Extinction ratio

dB

>= 35

>= 35

>= 35


s

<= 3

<= 3

<= 3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

-40

-40

Directivity

dB

35

35

35


dB

<= 1

<= 1

<= 1


dB

0-15

0-15

0-15


dB

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

<= 1.5 (> 10 dB)

<= 1.5 (> 10 dB)

<= 1.5 (> 10 dB)

Dimension

-

4

4

4

a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface. b: This value is obtained when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2638





l





TN11WSMD4

17

18.7

TN12WSMD4

12

15

TN13WSMD4

25

27.5

TN17WSMD4

17

18.7


23.11 WSMD9 WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board

23.11.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the WSMD9 board are TN11, TN12 and TN15.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2639



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 W S M D9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 2 W S M D9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 5 W S M D9

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


Function: The TN15WSMD9 board supports flexible grid applications, but the TN11WSMD9/ TN12WSMD9 board does not. For details, see 23.11.4 Functions and Features.

l

Specification: For the specifications of all versions, see 23.11.10 WSMD9 Specifications.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11WS MD9

TN12WSMD9



2640



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12WS MD9

None

-

TN15WS MD9

None

-





The Flexible Grid feature is supported.


The board model is optimized so that bi-directional trail management can be implemented on the NMS.

The board model is optimized so that bi-directional trail management can be implemented on the NMS.



Added a description explaining that the TN11WSMD9 board can be directly connected to a coherent OTU or line board for local dropping of services.


23.11.3 Application As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD9 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 23-34.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2641



Figure 23-34 Position of the WSMD9 board in the DWDM system Client side

Client side O T U

MUX

DMUX

DCM

O T U

O T U

O T U

DM1 IN

LIN

SIN

EXPI

WSMD9 SIN

WSMD9 EXPO

DAS1 IN SOUT

AM1

DCM

MUX

O T U

O T U

Client side

LOUT

OUT

EXPI

OUT

LOUT

AM1 EXPO

SOUT

DAS1

DCM

LIN

DM1

DMUX

O T U

DCM

O T U

Client side

NOTE

Optical interfaces AM1–AM8, DM1–DM8, EXPI, and EXPO on the WSMD9 board also can be used to cross-connect boards in other dimensions. When coherent OTU or line boards are used, the M40 and D40 boards can be removed. The WSMD9 boards can be directly connected to the coherent OTU or line boards because the coherent OTU or line board supports wavelength selection. (Applicable only to 50GHz signal interval)

23.11.4 Functions and Features The WSMD9 board supports service broadcast, dynamic wavelength grooming, resizable channel bandwidths, and in-service monitoring of performance parameters, performance events, and alarms. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-67.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2642



Table 23-67 Functions and features of the WSMD9 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Implements optical-layer service grooming for multiple wavelengths. Wavelength adding: adds any wavelengths from any directions through ports AM1 to AM8 and the EXPI port and outputs the wavelengths through the OUT port. Wavelength dropping: broadcasts the main optical channel signals received through the IN port to ports DM1 to DM8 and the EXPO port.

WDM specification



l TN11WSMD9/TN12WSMD9 Supports signals with a 50 GHz channel spacing. l TN15WSMD9 – Supports signals with a 50 GHz channel spacing. – Supports flexible grid wavelength signals. The signals have continuous n x slice GHz spectrums (one slice is equal to 12.5 GHz, and n is an integer ranging from 3 to 32) to meet the bandwidth requirements of high-rate services. When multi-rate services are transmitted together, Gridless flexibly allocates bandwidth to improve the bandwidth utilization efficiency. This function requires the WSS Flexible Grid Tunable Function license.







Optical-layer ASON

Supported

23.11.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WSMD9 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, optical power detection module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-35 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2643



Figure 23-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board Fixed spectrum: 50GHz

DDDDDDDD MMMMMMMM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXPO EXPI

A A A A A A A A MMMMMMMM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Optical demultiplexer module

Splitter IN MONI

Or Gridless spectrum: n* Slice(n=3,4,5,…,32) 1 Slice=12.5GHz

Splitter OUT

Splitter

WSS optical module

RDU optical module

MONO

Optical module PIN

PIN


Optical power detection module

Control Memory

CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Required voltage

Fuse



NOTE

The TN15WSMD9 board supports Flexible Grid applications, but the TN11WSMD9/TN12WSMD9 board does not.

Signal flow The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface. It is broadcast into nine same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The nine channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately. One channel of the signals is dropped locally through the multiplexer board and the other eight channels of signals are scheduled to other eight directions. A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and are then output through the MONI interface for performance detection. The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. l

If multiple wavelengths are to be added together, the wavelengths are first sent to the multiplexer board for multiplexing. Then the multiplexed wavelength is sent to the WSMD9 board through one of the AM1-AM8 ports.

l

If single wavelengths are to be added separately, the wavelengths are directly sent to the WSMD9 board from associated OTUs through the AM1-AM8 ports.

After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module function l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2644



– The RDU optical module broadcasts signals in nine directions. The nine channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately. – The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of the following optical interfaces: AM1 - AM8 and EXPI. – The WSS optical module implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection. l

Optical power detection module – Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.

l


l



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 23-36 shows the front panel of the TN11WSMD9 board. Figure 23-37 shows the front panel of the TN12WSMD9/TN15WSMD9 board. Figure 23-36 Front panel of the TN11WSMD9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2645



Figure 23-37 Front panel of the TN12WSMD9/TN15WSMD9 board



l


l


l




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

AM1-AM8

LC


DM1-DM8

LC


OUT

LC


IN

LC



2646



Interface

Type

Function

MONI

LC


MONO

LC

Connects to an optical performance monitoring device, such as an optical spectrum analyzer, spectrum analyzer unit, or optical power meter, for in-service monitoring of the signals routed to the OUT port. The ratio of the MONO port power to the OUT port power is 3:97. In other words, the MONO port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB.

EXPO

LC


EXPI

LC



23.11.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one WSMD9 board. Table 23-69 shows the valid slots for the WSMD9 board. Table 23-69 Valid slots for the WSMD9 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


2647



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU16

NOTE

The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD9 board, the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-70 and Table 23-71. Table 23-70 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11WSMD9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

EXPO

2

EXPI

3

OUT

4

DM1-DM8

5-12

AM1-AM8

13-20

MONO

21

MONI

22

Table 23-71 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12WSMD9/TN15WSMD9 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

EXPO

2

EXPI

3

DM1-DM8

5-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2648




Interface on the NM

AM1-AM8

13-20

MONO

21

MONI

22

23.11.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSMD9 Parameters, refer to Table 23-72. Table 23-72 WSMD9 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2649



Field

Value

Description



Specifies the attenuation for the optical interface. This parameter ensures that the launch power of the transmit end complies with the system power requirements. Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. l When no optical cross-connections are present, the parameter value is displayed as /. l When NE-level optical crossconnections are present or when the end-to-end configuration function is used to configure optical crossconnections and OPA Mode is set to Manual, the parameter value is displayed as Blocking after an OCh trail is created. If you set the parameter at this time, the specified value is then displayed. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. NOTE Only the TN11WSMD9/TN12WSMD9 board supports Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2650



Field

Value

Description




Default: none

If Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) is set to 9 dB and Attenuation Difference (dB) is set to 1.5 dB, then the attenuation of the optical interface is 10.5 dB. NOTE Only the TN11WSMD9/TN12WSMD9 board supports Attenuation difference (dB).


-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN11WSMD9/TN12WSMD9 board supports Max. Attenuation Rate (dB).


-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN11WSMD9/TN12WSMD9 board supports Min. Attenuation Rate (dB).

Configure Band

C Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Actual Band

-



-



All, Odd, Even



-

Default: All



2651



Field

Value

Description



Specifies the attenuation for the optical interface. This parameter ensures that the launch power of the transmit end complies with the system power requirements. Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. l When no optical cross-connections are present, the parameter value is displayed as /. l When NE-level optical crossconnections are present or when the end-to-end configuration function is used to configure optical crossconnections and OPA Mode is set to Manual, the parameter value is displayed as Blocking after an OCh trail is created. If you set the parameter at this time, the specified value is then displayed. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Gridless Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Gridless Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. NOTE Only TN15WSMD9 supports Gridless Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2652



Field

Value

Description

Gridless Attenuation Difference (dB)



Default: none

If Gridless Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) is set to 9 dB and Gridless Attenuation Difference (dB) is set to 1.5 dB, then the attenuation of the optical interface is 10.5 dB. NOTE Only TN15WSMD9 supports Gridless Attenuation Difference (dB).

Gridless Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only TN15WSMD9 supports Gridless Max. Attenuation Rate (dB).


-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only TN15WSMD9 supports Gridless Min. Attenuation Rate (dB).


Optical Specifications Table 23-73 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD9 board Item

Unit

Value

Optical channels

-

80


GHz

50

Insertion loss

dB

<= 8b

AMxa/EXPI-OUT

<= 12

IN-DMxa/EXPO

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dB

1.5


nm

1529-1561

-1dB spectral width

nm

> 0.16


2653



Item

Unit

Value

Port isolation

dB

> 25

Extinction ratio

dB

>= 35


s

<= 3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

35


dB

<= 1


dB

0 to 15


dB

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

Dimension

-

<= 1.5 (> 10 dB) 9



Unit

Value

Optical channels

-

80


GHz

50

Insertion loss

dB

<= 8b

AMxa/EXPI-OUT

<= 12

IN-DMxa/EXPO

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dB

1.5


nm

1529-1561

-1dB spectral width

nm

> 0.2

Port isolation

dB

> 30

Extinction ratio

dB

>= 35


s

<= 3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

35


dB

<= 1


2654



Item

Unit

Value


dB

0 to 15


dB

<= 1 (0 to 10 dB)

Dimension

-

<= 1.5 (> 10 dB) 9



Unit

Value

Slice width

GHz

12.5


-

322


THz

192.05625+(m-1)*0.0125; m=1 to 322


-

3 to 32

Slot width

GHz

n*12.5; n=3 to 32

dB

<= 8b

Insertion loss

AMxa/EXPI-OUT

<= 12

IN-DMxa/EXPO

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


dB

1.5

-1dB spectral width

GHz

> 2*(6.25n-12.5); n=3 to 32

Port isolation

dB

> 25

Extinction ratio

dB

>= 35


second

<= 3

Maximum reflectance

dB

-40

Directivity

dB

35


dB

<= 1


dB

0 to 15


dB

<= 1 (0dB to 10dB)


<= 1.5 (> 10dB)

2655



Item

Unit

Value

Dimension

-

9


nwo



l

Weight TN11WSMD9: 3.1 kg (6.8 lb.) TN12WSMD9: 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.) TN15WSMD9: 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.)




TN11WSMD9

25

30

TN12WSMD9

25

27.5

TN15WSMD9

25

27.5


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2656


24 Optical Amplifier Board

24

Optical Amplifier Board

About This Chapter 24.1 Overview The optical amplifier board amplifies the power of the multiplexed optical signals to extend the transmission distance. 24.2 BPA BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board 24.3 CRPC CRPC: case-shape raman pump amplifier unit for C band 24.4 DAS1 DAS1: double optical amplifier unit with supervisory channel 24.5 HBA HBA: high-power booster amplifier board 24.6 OAU1 OAU1: optical amplifier unit 24.7 OBU1 OBU1: optical booster unit 24.8 OBU2 OBU2: optical booster unit 24.9 RAU1 RAU1: backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical amplifier unit 24.10 RAU2 RAU2: backward raman and erbium doped Fiber hybrid optical amplifier Unit

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2657



24.1 Overview The optical amplifier board amplifies the power of the multiplexed optical signals to extend the transmission distance.

Positions of Optical Amplifier Boards in a WDM System Optical amplifier boards are used to compensate for power loss caused by long haul transmission in fiber communication systems. They are classified into erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) boards and Raman boards. Figure 24-1 shows the positions of optical amplifier boards at an OTM site in a WDM system. Figure 24-1 Positions of EDFA and Raman boards in a WDM system

OTU

EDFA

OM

OTU

FIU

SC1

Raman

OD

EDFA

OTU

OTU

The RAU board integrates the functions of both EDFA and Raman boards. Figure 24-2 shows the positions of RAU boards in a WDM system.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2658



Figure 24-2 Positions of RAU boards in a WDM system

OTU

EDFA

OM

OTU

FIU

SC1

EDFA

OD

Raman

OTU

OTU RAU

In Figure 24-1 and Figure 24-2: l

EDFA: HBA/OAU1/OBU1/OBU2

l

Raman: CRPC01, CRPC03, RAU1, or RAU2. The WDM system in Figure 24-1 is a backward Raman system where the CRPC01 board is used.

l

RAU: RAU1/RAU2 NOTE

Different from the DAS1 board shown in Figure 24-1, the DAS1 board is mainly used at ROADM sites in a WDM system. For the typical application scenario of the DAS1 board, see 24.4.3 Application.

Main Functions Table 24-1 lists the main functions of optical amplifier boards. For the detailed specifications of each board, see the relevant specification pages. Table 24-1 Main functions of optical amplifier Boards Board

Function

Gain

N4BPA

One-input booster amplifier and one-input pre-amplifier board. It is used in an OCS system to increase the transmit power of a line board to a value within the range of +13 dBm to +15 dBm, extending the transmission distance to more than 120 km. (when the G.652 optical fiber with a loss of 0.275 dB/km is used.)

See 24.2.9 BPA Specifications.

TN11CR PC

Case-shape Raman pump amplifier board for C band. It generates multi-channel pump light of high power and must be used with EDFA boards.

See 24.3.11 CRPC Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2659



Board

Function

Gain

TN11D AS1

Double optical amplifier board with supervisory channel. It amplifies optical signals using an EDFA optical module, multiplexes and demultiplexes the optical supervisory channel (OSC) signal and the main optical path signal, and processes one OSC signal.

See 24.4.10 DAS1 Specifications.

The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals. TN11HB A

High-power booster amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C band using an EDFA optical module. The board provides a high gain and is generally configured at the transmit end of a long-span system.

See 24.5.11 HBA Specifications.

TN11O AU1

Optical amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C band using an EDFA optical module. The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals.

See 24.6.11 OAU1 Specifications.

TN12O AU1 TN13O AU1 TN11OB U1 TN12OB U1

The OAU1 board provides two amplifiers for power amplification and a DCM module can be installed in between for dispersion compensation. Optical amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C band using an EDFA optical module. The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals.

See 24.7.11 OBU1 Specifications.

Optical amplifier board. It amplifies optical signals in the C band using an EDFA optical module. The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals.

See 24.8.11 OBU2 Specifications.

Raman and EDFA hybrid optical amplifier board. It is used at the receive end to generate multi-channel pump light of high power.

See 24.9.10 RAU1 Specifications.

Raman and EDFA hybrid optical amplifier board. It is used at the receive end to generate multi-channel pump light of high power.

See 24.10.10 RAU2 Specifications.

TN13OB U1 TN11OB U2 TN12OB U2 TN13OB U2 TN14OB U2 TN11RA U1 TN12RA U1 TN11RA U2 TN12RA U2

The board is equipped with VOAs to adjust the power of input optical signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2660



24.2 BPA BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board

24.2.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the BPA board is available, that is, N4.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boa rd





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4 BP A

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

24.2.2 Application The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board and it can functions as either a BA (used as the transmit end) or PA (used at the receive end). When the OptiX OSN 8800 equipment serves as an OCS system, a BPA board is configured at the transmit and receive ends of the system. Figure 24-3 shows the position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system. Figure 24-3 Position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system

Tx

Tx

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

BA

Rx

PA

Rx


2661



24.2.3 Functions and Features During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high. Therefore, the BA and PA are required to ensure that the optical receiver can receive normal optical signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-2. Table 24-2 Functions and features of the BPA board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Increases the launched optical power of the line board to 13 - 15 dBm. As a result, when the G.652 optical fiber with a loss of 0.275 dB/km is used, the transmission distance can be 120 km or above.

Pre-amplification function

Provides the PA module to pre-amplify the received optical signals. Increases the power of the small-volume optical signals by 22 - 33 dB so that the sensitivity of the receiver increases to -37 dBm.

EDFA

l Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module. l Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output optical power of the EDFA module and query of the optical power of the EDFA module. l Supports the protection function of the EDFA module. When no optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned off. When optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned on.

Performance events and alarms monitoring

Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the laser. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.

Software upgrade

Supports the software upgrade without interrupting services.

24.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The BPA board consists of the optical part, driving and detecting part, and data processing and communication part. Figure 24-4 shows the function modules and signal flow of the BPA board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2662



Figure 24-4 Function modules and signal flow of the BPA board Optical input

Optical output

Optical input

Optical output

Optical part

EDFA optical module

Pump current check

Drive module

Module temperature control

Input/output power check

Pump Drive current module check

Module temperature control

Input/output power check

Driving and detecting part

A/D or D/A conversion

SCC

Communication module

Control module

Data processing and communication part

Optical Part The BPA board has one EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module magnifies the optical power.

Driving and Detecting Part The driving and detecting part provides the EDFA optical module with the driving current. It also checks the working status of each part in the EDFA optical module. In addition, it predicts and handles possible faults. The driving and detecting part performs the following functions: checking the pump current, driving the optical module, controlling the temperature of the optical module, and checking the input and output optical power.

Data Processing and Communication Part The data processing and communication part consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. The data processing and communication part analyzes the test result of the tested circuit. Then, it adjusts the driving circuit based on the analysis result so that the gain or output optical power of the EDFA optical module remains in the range of the rated value. It also classifies the abnormal states represented by the measured values and reports the abnormal states to the NMS.

24.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the BPA board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-5 shows the front panel of the BPA board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2663



Figure 24-5 Front panel of the BPA board LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

POUT

PIN

BPA

LASER RADIATION

INSTRUMENTS

WITH OPTICAL

BIN


DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY

BPA

STAT ACT PROG SRV

BOUT

Indicators The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)

l

Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)

l

Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)

l

Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)


Interfaces There are two LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BPA board. Table 24-3 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 24-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BPA board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

BIN

LC

Receives one channel of optical signals for amplification.

BOUT

LC

Transmits one channel of amplified optical signals.

PIN

LC

Receives one channel of optical signals for preamplification.

POUT

LC

Transmits one channel of pre-amplified optical signals.


2664



24.2.6 Valid Slots The BPA board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on the subrack. Otherwise, the board does not function. Table 24-4 shows the valid slots for the BPA board. Table 24-4 Valid slots for the BPA board Product

Valid Slots


IU1–IU8, IU11–IU42, and IU45–IU68





24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the BPA board indicates the output optical power of the optical interfaces. Table 24-5 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the output optical power. Table 24-5 Relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the output optical power Board

Characteristic Code

Description

N4BPA01

01

The receiver sensitivity of the PA module is –37 dBm. The output optical power of the BA module is 14 dBm.


Display of Optical Interfaces on the NMS Table 24-6 lists the displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the board on the NMS. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2665



Table 24-6 Displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the BPA board on the NMS Optical interface

Displayed serial number on the NMS

BOUT

1

BIN

2

POUT

3

PIN

4

24.2.9 BPA Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 24-7 lists the optical specifications of the BPA board. Table 24-7 Optical specifications of the BPA board Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

2488320 kbit/s or 9953280 kbit/s

Application code

V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, and U-64.2

Line code pattern

NRZ

Input wavelength (nm)

BA: 1530 to 1565 PA: 1550.12

Input optical power (dBm)

BA: -6 to +3 PA: -28 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at the rate of 10 Gbit/s) PA: -38 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at the rate less than 10 Gbit/s)

Output optical power (dBm)

13 to 15 (BA) -16 to 14 (PA)

Sensitivity (dBm)

PA: -37

Noise figure (dB)

BA: < 6.5 PA: < 6

Minimum signal gain (dB)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

+22


2666



NOTE

When you perform a loopback on the PA module of the BPA board, prevent the damage caused by high input optical power to the optical module.

Laser Safety Class The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW).

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the BPA board are as follows: l


l





N4BPA

11

12


24.3 CRPC CRPC: case-shape raman pump amplifier unit for C band

24.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the CRPC board is TN11.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2667



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1C RP C

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Table 24-8 lists the types of the CRPC board. Table 24-8 Type description of the CRPC board Board

Type

Description

CRPC

01

Adopts the backward pumping technology.

03

Adopts the forward pumping technology.

24.3.2 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the CRPC board supports transmission over ultra-long distance and application of the 40G OTU, and can generate multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC board must be used with the EDFA.

NOTICE Always turn off the pump laser of the CRPC board before removing or inserting the fiber to the CRPC. For the position of the CRPC board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-6 and Figure 24-7. Figure 24-6 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (backward pump) Client side

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

OTU OTU OTU OTU

M U X

D M U X

OBU1

OAU1

F I U F I U

CRPC 01

CRPC 01

F I U F I U


OAU1

OBU1

D M U X

M U X

OTU OTU OTU OTU

Client side

Client side

2668



Figure 24-7 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (forward pump) Client side

OTU

M U X

OTU

D M U X

OTU Client side

OTU

OBU1

OAU1

F I U F I U

F I U

CRPC 03

CRPC 03

F I U

OAU1

OBU1

D M U X

M U X

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

Client side

Client side

24.3.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature supported by the CRPC board is online optical performance monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-9. Table 24-9 Functions and features of the CRPC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber. l Implements the distributed online amplification of signals over long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.




Detects the optical power of the pump laser, temperature control current, pump current, and back facet current. Supports return loss detection.

Working mode

Supports the power locking modes.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported NOTE The CRPC board does not support the setting of Equalization Based ODfor Optical Signal-Wavelength Commissioning.

24.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2669



The CRPC board is used at the receive end and the transmit end of the system, making use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect to amplify the optical signals during transmission. The CRPC board is located before the receiver. The pump light travels in the reverse direction of the signal light. Figure 24-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC. The CRPC board is located after the transmit end. The pump light travels in the same direction of the signal light. Figure 24-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC. Figure 24-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (backward pump)

LINE

Splitter

Signal

Signal

Pump light

Pump source

Raman pump optical module

Detection for pump light power and current

Pumping current and temperature control

PIN

SYS MON

Detection for temperature


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage

Backplane (controlled by SCC) DC power supply from PDU

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC

2670



Figure 24-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (forward pump)

LINE

Splitter

Signal

Signal

Pump light

Pump source

Raman pump optical module

Detection for pump light power and current

Pumping current and temperature control

PIN

SYS MON



Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage

Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC DC power supply from PDU

Signal Flow l

Backward pump The pump source of the CRPC board sends the pump light to the WDM side through the LINE optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed amplification are input through the LINE interface. The splitter then splits them into two, among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring.

l

Forward pump The signal light is input through the SYS interface and output to the optical line through the LINE interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring. The pump light that is generated by the CRPC board is output to the optical line through the LINE interface in the same direction as the signal light, to implement the distributed amplification of the optical signal.

For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the communication with the SCC. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2671



For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.

Module Function l

Raman pump optical module – The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission. – The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.

l

Driving and detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the pump optical module. – Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module. – Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

l


l

Power supply module – Converts the DC power supplied by the PDU into the power required by each module on the board.

24.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the CRPC board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-10 shows the front panel of the CRPC board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2672



Figure 24-10 Front panel of the CRPC board

CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

MON

SYS

LINE

CAUTION

HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CRPC

ALM

RUN

警告:开启电源前，务必连好光纤

!

!

WARNING: FIBERS MUST BE CONNECTED BEFORE POWER UP

RS232-1

RS232-2

LAN

警告:开启电源前，务必连好光纤 WARNING: FIBERS MUST BE CONNECTED BEFORE POWER UP

Indicators Two indicators are present on the front panel: l

Running status indicator (RUN) - green

l

Service alarm indicator (ALM) - red

See Table 24-10 and Table 24-11 for details. Table 24-10 Red alarm indicator

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Flash State

Description

Off

There is no alarm.

Blinks three times every 1 second

There is a critical alarm.

Blinks twice every 1 second

There is a major alarm.

Blinks once every 1 second

There is a minor alarm.

On

Hardware is faulty, or the self-check fails.


2673



Table 24-11 Green running indicator Flash State

Description

Blinks five times per second

The board is not in service.

Blinks once every 1 second

The board is in service (normal).

On for 2 seconds and off for 2 seconds

The communication with the SCC unit stops, and the board is in off-line working state.

Interfaces Table 24-12 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-12 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CRPC board Interface

Type

Function

LINE

LSH/APC

l For backward pump: receives optical signals from the line, which have been amplified in distributed manner. l For forward pump: transmits optical signals to the line.

SYS

LC

l For backward pump: connects to an FIU board and transmits amplified optical signals to the FIU board. l For forward pump: receives optical signals from an FIU board.

MON

LC

Connects to the MCA4, MCA8 WMU, or OPM8, monitors the performance of the SYS port online. The ratio of the MON port power to the SYS port power is 1:99. In other words, the MON port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Psys (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB.

LAN

RJ45

For OptiX OSN 6800: Connects to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX board or the ETH3 of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC board. The connection must be established using a crossover cable. OptiX OSN 8800: Connects to the EFI/EFI2 board for the communications with the SCC board. l EFI/EFI2: Connects to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the EFI/EFI2 board.

RS232-1/ RS232-2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

RS232 communication interface


2674



Laser Hazard Level After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power launched by the board rangesfrom10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

24.3.6 Valid Slots The CRPC board is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is installed outside the cabinet and not inside the subrack. For OptiX OSN 6800: Connects to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX board or the ETH3 board of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC board. OptiX OSN 8800: Connects to the EFI/EFI2 board for the communications with the SCC board. l

EFI/EFI2: Connects to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the EFI/EFI2 board.

On the NMS, the logical slot of the CRPC board can be managed only by the master subrack. l

When a OptiX OSN 6800 subrack serves as a master subrack, Each NE supports a maximum of eight CRPC boards.

l

When a OptiX OSN 8800 subrack serves as a master subrack, Each NE supports a maximum of four CRPC boards.

Table 24-13 lists the supported logical slots for the CRPC board. Table 24-13 Valid slots for the CRPC board Product

Supported Logical Slots


IU120-IU123


IU120-IU123


IU120-IU123


IU120-IU123


Non-extended slot numbering mode: IU28IU31 Extended slot numbering mode: IU120IU123

24.3.7 Dip Switch and Jumper There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and J4. Figure 24-11 shows the number of each jumper.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2675



Figure 24-11 Jumpers on the CRPC board CRPC

10

9

1

2

1

9

10

J3

2

J4

CPU

J4 J3

Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers. For OptiX OSN 6800: l

Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3.

l


l


l


l

Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Non-extended slot numbering mode)

l

Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Extended slot numbering mode)

l

Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4.

l


l


l

Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are jumper setting regulations in the non-extended slot numbering mode: – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU28. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU29. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU30. – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU31. The following are jumper setting regulations in the extended slot numbering mode: – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU120. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU121. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU122. – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU123.

For OptiX OSN 8800: Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2676



l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l


l

Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are jumper setting regulations: – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU120. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU121. – When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU122. – When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU123.

24.3.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-14. Table 24-14 Characteristic code for the CRPC board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

Is always G.

Second and third characters

Gain

Indicate the gain value.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2677



Table 24-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

LINE

1

SYS

2

MON

3

24.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CRPC parameters, refer to Table 24-16. Table 24-16 CRPC parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Board Work Type

C, C + L, L Default: C

Specifies the working mode of the board. This parameter determines the signal band of the board.

Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C



All

Laser Status

Off, On

Default: All

Default: Off

Specifies the desired parity of the working band of the board. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2678



Field

Value

Description

Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-

Specifies the fixed pump power for the LINE port. Changing the value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) directly influences the optical power of each wavelength on the line. If the fixed pump optical power value is less than the minimum value or greater than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally. NOTE Normally, the fixed pump optical power of the CRPC board should be larger than 23 dBm. The value is related to the system specifications.

Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-

The Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the minimum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix.

Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-

The Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the maximum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix.

The Upper Threshold of RL to starting the pump (dB)

-

Displays the upper threshold of the return loss to starting the pump.

The Lower Threshold of RL to starting the pump (dB)

-

Displays the lower threshold of the return loss to starting the pump.

The Upper Threshold of RL alarm (dB)

-

Displays the upper threshold of the return loss alarm.

The Lower Threshold of RL alarm (dB)

-

Displays the lower threshold of the return loss alarm.

RL Flag

Enable, Disable

Determines whether to enable the return loss check.

Default: Enable

24.3.11 CRPC Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2679



Optical Specifications Table 24-17 Optical specifications of the CRPC board Item

Un it

Value CRPC01

CRPC03

Pump wavelength range

nm

1400-1500

1400-1500


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

Maximum pump power

dB m

28.5

29.5

Channel gain on G.652 fiber

dB

> 10

> 10

Channel gain on G.653 fiber

dB

N/A

> 16

Channel gain on LEAF fiber

dB

> 12

N/A

Channel gain on TWRS fiber

dB

> 13

N/A

Effective noise figure on G.652 fiber

dB

<= 0

N/A

Effective noise figure on G.653 fiber

dB

N/A

N/A

Effective noise figure on LEAF fiber

dB

<= -1

N/A

Effective noise figure on TWRS fiber

dB

<= -1.5

N/A


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

Output connector type

-

LSH/APC, LC/PC

LSH/APC, LC/PC


Dimensions of board (H x W x D): 345.0 mm (13.8 in.) x 76.0 mm (3.0 in.) x 218.5 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: – CRPC01: 4.0 kg (8.8 1b.) – CRPC03: 4.2 kg (9.2 1b.)

Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board



TN11CRPC01

110.0

121.0


2680



Board



TN11CRPC03

70.0

77.0


24.4 DAS1 DAS1: double optical amplifier unit with supervisory channel

24.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the DAS1 board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1D A S1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2681







Added the following description: The board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it affects the gain flatness.

The extended gain is designed to address requirements in special scenarios.

24.4.3 Application The DAS1 board is used to amplify optical signals, multiplex and demultiplex the optical supervisory channel and main optical channel, and process optical supervisory signals in one direction. The DAS1 board can be used at either the transmit end or the receive end. For the position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-12. Figure 24-12 Position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system Client side

Client side O T U

O T U

O T U

MUX

DMUX

DCM

O T U

DM1 IN

LIN

SIN

WSMD9

WSMD9 EXPO

SOUT

AM1

DCM

MUX

O T U

O T U

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

DAS1 IN

EXPI

OUT

LOUT

OUT

EXPI

SIN LOUT

AM1 EXPO

SOUT

DAS1

DCM

LIN

DM1

DMUX

O T U

DCM

O T U

Client side


2682



NOTE

Optical interfaces AM2–AM8 and DM2–DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards in other dimensions. It is recommended that the DAS1 board be used at a ROADM station. The DAS1 board cannot be used at an OLA station. The DAS1 board cannot be used together with the SFIU board.

24.4.4 Functions and Features The DAS1 board integrates the functions of an optical amplifier unit, an FIU board (used to multiplexes the main optical channel and supervisory channel or demultiplexes the supervisory channel from the main channel signal), and an optical supervisory board. It supports gain adjustment, in-service monitoring of optical performance, gain locking, and transient state control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-18. Table 24-18 Functions and features of the DAS1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. l Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. l Processes one channel of optical supervisory signals. l Supports transparent transmission of one channel of FE electrical signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Gain adjustment

The DAS1 board continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on the input optical power.


Provides the online monitoring interface. A small number of EDFAamplified optical signals is output through this interface to the optical spectrum analysis board. In this manner, the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signal are monitored without interrupting the services.

Gain lock function



2683




Description

Working mode

Supports the gain locking and power locking modes. l In the gain locking mode, the gain of the board is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the board. The gain locking mode is enabled by default. l The power locking mode applies to scenarios in which there is only dummy light to lock the output power of the board.





OSC signal regeneration

The DAS1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.

Operating wavelength for OSC signals

1511nm

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

eSFP

The RX/TX optical port supports pluggable optical modules.


24.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DAS1 board consists of the multiplexer, VOA, EDFA module, demultiplexer, OSC optical module, service processing module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2684



Figure 24-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board RTDC RRDC MONR

LIN

Demultiplexer

RVI

VOA

RPAIN

EDFA module

Splitter

SOUT

TM

RX TX

O/E

FE signal processing module

E/O

Supervisory signal processing module Service processing module

OSC optical module

WSC

RM

LOUT

EDFA module

Splitter

Multiplexer

TBA OUT

MONT TRDC TTDC

TPA IN

PIN

VOA

SIN

PIN


Control Memory

CPU

Communication

Control and communication module Required voltage



SCC

Backplane (controlledby SCC)

Signal Flow Signal flow in the main optical channel l

In the transmit direction: – The board receives line optical signals through the LIN optical interfaces and sends the signals to the demultiplexer module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2685



– The demultiplexer splits OSC signals from main optical channel signals. The demultiplexer outputs OSC signals through the TM optical interface and sends the main optical channel signals to the VOA. – The VOA adjusts optical power of the main optical channel signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA optical module. – The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board through the RTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the RRDC optical interface. Then, the EDFA module outputs the amplified signals through the SOUT optical interface. l

In the receive direction: – The board receives multiplexed signals through the SIN optical interface and sends the signals to the VOA. – The VOA adjusts optical power of the signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA optical module. – The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board through the TTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the TRDC optical interface. The EDFA optical module sends the amplified multiplexed signals to the multiplexer module. – The multiplexer multiplexes the amplified multiplexed signals and OSC signals input through the RM optical interface as line optical signals, and outputs the signals through the LOUT optical interface.

Signal flow in the OSC l

The board receives OSC signals through the TM optical interface, and sends the OSC signals to the optical receiver module through the RX optical interface.

l

The optical receiver module converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the service processing module.

l

The service processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals and sends the overhead bytes to the SCC board. This module also processes FE electrical signals.

l

The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board are sent to the optical receiver module and then are converted into OSC signals by the optical receiver module.

l

The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board. After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs.

Signal flow in the FE l

In the transmit direction: The DAS1 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the DAS1 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal through its TX port. The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board. After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs.

l

In the receive direction: The DAS1 board receives an optical signal from the upstream board through its LIN port. The demultiplexer splits FE optical signal from main optical channel signals. The demultiplexer outputs FE signal through the TM optical interface and

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2686



sends it to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation through the RX optical interface. Then, the DAS1 board drops it through its WSC port.

Module Function l

Multiplexer Multiplexes main optical channel signals and OSC signals as line optical signals.

l

Demultiplexer Demultiplexes line optical signals into main optical channel signals and OSC signals.

l

VOA Adjusts optical power of optical signals according to system requirements.

l


l

Service processing module – FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals. – Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding.

l

OSC optical module Performs O/E and E/O conversion for one channel of OSC signals.

l


l


l


24.4.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the DAS1 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2687



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-14 shows the front panel of the DAS1 board. Figure 24-14 Front panel of the DAS1 board

CAUTION

RX

TM

RM

MONT MONR LOUT

LIN

SOUT SIN

TTDC

TRDC

RTDC RRDC

DAS1

TX WSC

CAUTION


DAS1

STAT ACT PROG SRV




l


l


l



Interfaces Table 24-19 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-19 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DAS1 board Interface

Type

Function

WSC

RJ45

Transmits/Receives the FE electrical signals. NOTE The FE electrical port works in 100M full-duplex mode and can transmit or receive a packet consisting of a maximum of 1518 bytes.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

TX

LC

Transmits the supervisory signal.

RX

LC

Receives the supervisory signal.

TM

LC


RM

LC



2688



Interface

Type

Function

MONT

LC

MONR

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, monitors the performance of the LOUT and SOUT port online. The ratio of the MONT port power to the LOUT port power is 1:99. In other words, the MONT port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Plout (dBm) - Pmont (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB. The ratio of the MONR port power to the SOUT port power is 1:99. In other words, the MONR port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Psout (dBm) - Pmonr (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB.

LOUT

LC

Transmits the amplified signal (including the supervisory signal).

LIN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (including the supervisory signal).

SOUT

LC

Transmits the amplified signal(not including the supervisory signal).

SIN

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (not including the supervisory signal).

TTDC/TRDC

LC

RTDC/RRDC

LC

Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion compensation.

Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC interface on the DAS1 board.

Laser Hazard Level The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

24.4.7 Valid Slots One slot house one DAS1 board. Table 24-20 shows the valid slots for the DAS1 board. Table 24-20 Valid slots for the DAS1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots




2689



Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU3-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-21. Table 24-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DAS1 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

LIN/LOUT

1

RM/TM

3

RX/TX

4

RVIa

5

RPAINa

6

RRDC

8

SOUT

9

RTDC

10

MONR

11

SIN

12

TPAINa

13

TRDC

15

TBAOUTa

16

TTDC

17

MONT


2690




Interface on the NM

a: Virtual port

24.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DAS1, refer to Table 24-22. Table 24-22 DAS1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-




This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2691



Field

Value

Description




Default: none


-



-


Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C


Default: C Actual Working Band Parity

-



All, ecldmin40


Default: All

In an 80-wavelength system, when G.653 optical fibers are used and there is no requirement for more than 40 wavelengths, you can use 40 wavelengths in the range of 192.100 THz to 193.050 THz and 195.100 THz to 196.050 THz to increase the transmission distance. Set this parameter to ecldmin40. NOTICE Before using 40 wavelengths in the range of 192.100 THz to 193.100 THz and 195.000 THz to 196.000 THz, services need to be planned on these wavelengths. In the ASON network prevents current paths, original paths, and revertive paths from staying on idle wavelengths (in the range of 193.100 THz to 195.000 THz).


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



2692



Field

Value

Description

Band Type

-



Non-Loopback, Outloop


Default: NonLoopback Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)

-


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: On


-


Nominal Gain (dB)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2693



Field

Value

Description


-



-


Channel Number Mode



Default: / DCM Attenuation Value

-

Displays the DCM insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports.

DEG Threshold

0 to 10167

Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An alarm is reported when error codes detected in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than the value of this parameter.

Default: 190

DEG Monitoring Time(s)

2 to 10

Degrade Threshold Before FEC

1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9, 1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12,

Default: 7

Sets the signal monitoring time. If the number of bit errors in the signal exceeds DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm is reported. Sets error codes thresholds for signals before FEC.

Default: 1E-4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2694



Field

Value

Description


-30 to 30



The value can be set or queried. The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally. NOTE SIN/LIN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, SOUT/LOUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single-wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

PMD Coefficient(ps/ SQRT(km))



Fiber Type


Specifies the fiber type. The gain range of the board varies according to the fiber type.

Default: G652 Fiber

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2695



Field

Value

Description

Fiber Length(m)

0 to 4294967295


Default: /




Source DCM 1 Source DCM 2 Source DCM 3 Source DCM 4


Participates in route computation in the ASON domain. When one DCM is inadequate to compensate for fiber dispersion, multiple DCMs are needed to provide expected compensation effect. Each DAS1 board supports a maximum of four dispersion compensation modules (DCM modules). Set this parameter according to the DCM module on the OA board interconnected with the target DAS1 board. DCM and FBG in the parameter values indicate the type of DCM. Letters A to T indicate the compensation distance. G652, G653, G655, and TWRS represent the fiber types. For the detailed DCM description, see DCM Frame and DCM Module.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2696



Field

Value

Description

Sink DCM 1



Sink DCM 2 Sink DCM 3 Sink DCM 4

When one DCM is inadequate to compensate for fiber dispersion, multiple DCMs are needed to provide expected compensation effect. Each DAS1 board supports a maximum of four dispersion compensation modules (DCM modules). Set this parameter according to the DCM module on the OA board interconnected with the target DAS1 board. DCM and FBG in the parameter values indicate the type of DCM. Letters A to T indicate the compensation distance. G652, G653, G655, and TWRS represent the fiber types. For the detailed DCM description, see DCM Frame and DCM Module.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable



-60.0 to 50.0



0.5 to 10.0

Default: /

Default:3



2697



Field

Value

Description

Working Mode

l Gain locking, Power locking


l Default: Gain locking Power Value

-7 to 23 Default: 0

This parameter specifies the output optical power when Working Mode is set to Power Value.

Launch Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0


Auto Pass-through

Disable, Enable

Determines whether the OSC overhead automatically pass through OSC boards. This parameter applies only to scenarios in which no system control board is deployed in subracks.

Default: Disable

When no system control board is deployed at a site, the OSC overhead will automatically pass through the OSC boards at the site and enter the downstream site after Auto Pass-through is set to Enabled. When system control boards are deployed at a site, the OSC overhead will not automatically pass through the OSC boards at the site even though Auto Passthrough is set to Enabled. NOTE All the OSC overhead bytes except D4-D12 can automatically pass through OSC boards. When two DAS1 boards are deployed but no system control board is deployed at a site, the two DAS1 boards must be installed in paired slots.

24.4.10 DAS1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2698



Optical Specifications Table 24-23 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board Item Specifica tions of OA

Uni t

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

20

26

31


dB m

-32 to 0

-32 to -6

-32 to -11

Input power range per channel

40 channels

dB m

-32 to -16

-32 to -22

-32 to -27

80 channels

dB m

-32 to -19

-32 to -25

-32 to -30

Nominal singlewavelength input optical power

40 channels

dB m

-16

-22

-27

80 channels

dB m

-19

-25

-30


40 channels

dB m

4

4

4

80 channels

dB m

1

1

1

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

<= 8.5

<= 5.5

<= 5.5

Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels

ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

20 to 31

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2.0

<= 2.0

<= 2.0


dB/ dB

<= 2.0

<= 2.0

<= 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Pump leakage at input

dB m

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2699



Item

Specifica tions of demultipl exer and multiplex er

Specifica tions of OSC optical module

Uni t

Value


dB m

20

20

20


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

Input VOA inherent insertion loss

dB

<= 1.5

Input VOA dynamic attenuation range

dB

20

Input VOA adjustment accuracy

dB

1


nm

1480 to 1520

Optical return loss

dB

> 40

dB

<= 1.5

Insert loss of C-band

dB

<= 1


dB

< 0.2


nm

1504.5 to 1517.5

Signal rate

Mbi t/s

155.52

Launched optical power

dB m

0.5 to 5


dB m

<= -41

Receiver overload

dB m

-10

Insert loss of optical supervisory channel

LIN-TM RMLOUT

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. NOTE The board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it affects the gain flatness.



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2700






TN11DAS1

22

28.6


24.5 HBA HBA: high-power booster amplifier board

24.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the HBA board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1H B A

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2701









Corrected the HBA application diagram and deleted the HBA application at the receive-end site.


24.5.3 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the HBA board provides a high gain and therefore is generally used in long-hop applications. It is configured at the transmit end. For the position of the HBA board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-15. Figure 24-15 Position of the HBA board in the WDM system Client side Client side

OTU

OTU MUX

OTU OTU

HBA FIU

DMUX

OAU1

DMUX

HBA

MUX

FIU

OAU1

OTU

OTU OTU OTU

Client side Client side

NOTE

Only the TN13FIU02 board can work with the HBA board.

24.5.4 Functions and Features The HBA board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-24.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2702



Table 24-24 Functions and features of the HBA board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Only applied on the transmit edge of the OTM station in the system that covers a long fiber span transmission. l The HBA can amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Typical gain

The typical gain of the HBA is 29 dB.



Gain lock function



The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path to implement smooth upgrade and expansion.



Optical-layer ASON

Supported


24.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-16 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2703



Figure 24-16 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board

Splitter IN

OUT

EDFA optical module Driving current

PIN

MON

Detection for pump current and temperature


Control Memory

CPU

Communication



Required voltage


Signal Flow One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

Module Function l


l

Driving and detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. – Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2704



– Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l


l


24.5.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the HBA board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-17 shows the front panel of the HBA board. Figure 24-17 Front panel of the HBA board

CAUTION

HBA CAUTION


STAT ACT PROG SRV

HBA


MON

IN

OUT



l


l


l




2705



Interfaces Table 24-25 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-25 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HBA board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LSH/APC


MON

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8, monitors the performance of the OUT port online. The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 1:999. In other words, the MON port power is 30 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(999/1) = 30 dB.

Laser Hazard Level After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

24.5.7 Valid Slots Three slots house one HBA board. Table 24-26 shows the valid slots for the HBA board. Table 24-26 Valid slots for the HBA board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU7, IU12-IU17


IU2-IU15


IU2-IU16


2706



NOTE

l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot of the three occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is the number of the middle slot. l For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the HBA board, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is IU2.

24.5.8 Characteristic Code for the HBA The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-27. Table 24-27 Characteristic code for the HBA board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character

-

The second character is always G.

Third to the fourth digits

Gain

The third to the fourth digits indicate the gain value.

Fifth character

-

The fifth character is always I.

Sixth and seventh digits

Maximum nominal input optical power

Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2707



Table 24-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

24.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For HBA parameters, refer to Table 24-29. Table 24-29 HBA parameters Field

Value

Description


-


Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C



-


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: On


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2708



Field

Value

Description

Gain (dB)

-


Nominal Gain (dB)

Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) to Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: 29



-



-


Channel Number Mode



Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-



All


Default: All


2709



Field

Value


-30 to 30

Description

The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the perDefault: The default channel rated optical power. It is a reference value is determined value for automatic adjustment of the optical when the system is provisioned with 80 power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this wavelengths and varies according to parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. boards. The value can be set or queried. The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally. NOTE IN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, OUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable



-60.0 to 50.0



0.5 to 10.0

Default: /

Default: 3



2710



Field

Value

Description

Working Mode



l Default: Gain locking Power Value

-7 to 23

This parameter specifies the output optical power of the EDFA module when Working Mode is set to Power Locking for the OUT port.

Default: 0

Launch Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0


24.5.11 HBA Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 24-30 Optical specifications of the HBA board Item

Unit

Value

Type

-

TN11HBA

Channel allocation

nm

1529 - 1561


dBm

-25 to -3

Typical input power of a single wavelength

dBm

80-channel system: -22 40-channel system: -19 10-channel system: -13

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Noise figure (NF)

dB

<8

Input reflectance

dB

< -45

Output reflectance

dB

< -45

Maximum total output power

dBm

26

Gain response time on adding/dropping of channels

ms

< 10

Channel gain

dB

29±1


2711



Item

Unit

Value

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2.5


dB

< 0.5



l





TN11HBA

47

75


24.6 OAU1 OAU1: optical amplifier unit

24.6.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the OAU1 board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2712



B oa rd





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N 11 O A U 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

T N 12 O A U 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N 13 O A U 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Table 24-31 lists the types of the OAU1 board. Table 24-31 Type description of the OAU1 board Unit

Type

Description

Gain Range

TN11OAU1

01

Amplifies the input optical signals in C band.

20 dB to 31 dB

02


20 dB to 31 dB

03


24 dB to 36 dB

05


23 dB to 34 dB

00


16 dB to 25.5 dB

01


20 dB to 31 dB

TN12OAU1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2713



Unit

TN13OAU1

Type

Description

Gain Range

02


20 dB to 31 dB

03


24 dB to 36 dB

05


23 dB to 34 dB

01


20 dB to 31 dB

03


24 dB to 36 dB

05


23 dB to 34 dB

06


16 dB to 23 dB

07


19 dB to 27 dB


Function: – The TN11OAU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 board supports. For details, see 24.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

l

Appearance: – The TN11, TN12 and TN13 versions have different front panels. For details, see 24.6.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the power consumption of each version, see 24.6.11 OAU1 Specifications.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OAU1

TN12OAU 1

The TN12OAU1 can be created as OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter at type 01,02,03,05, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OAU1 functions as the TN11OAU1.

TN11OAU1

TN13OAU 1

The TN13OAU1 can be created as OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter at type 01,03,05, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OAU1 function as the TN11OAU1. The TN13OAU1 board occupies one physical slot and two logical slots while the TN11OAU1 board occupies two physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board.


2714



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12OAU1

TN13OAU 1

The TN13OAU1 can be created as 12OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter at type 01,03,05, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OAU1 functions as the TN12OAU1. The TN13OAU1 board occupies one physical slot and two logical slots while the TN12OAU1 board occupies two physical slots. After the substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other board.

TN13OAU1

None

-




Added the TN13OAU107 board.

The TN13OAU107 board is an EDFA OA board whose gain ranges from 19 dB to 27 dB and maximum output optical power is 23 dBm.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update







2715






The TN13OAU106 board is an EDFA OA board with a 16 dB to 23 dB gain range.




Compared with the TN12OAU board that occupies?two slots, the TN13OAU board occupies?one slot.

24.6.3 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OAU1 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end or receive end. For the position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-18. Figure 24-18 Position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system Client side Client side

OTU

MUX

OBU1

DMUX

OAU1

OAU1

DMUX

OTU OTU OTU

OBU1

MUX

OTU OTU OTU OTU


24.6.4 Functions and Features The OAU1 is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-32. Table 24-32 Functions and features of the OAU1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2716




Description

Gain adjustment

The OAU1 continuously adjusts the gain continuously based on the input optical power: l OAU100: 16dB to 25.5dB l OAU101/OAU102: 20dB to 31dB l OAU103: 24dB to 36dB l OAU105: 23dB to 34dB l OAU106: 16dB to 23dB l OAU107: 19dB to 27dB, and supports adjustment of maximum total output optical power. NOTE 24.6.11 OAU1 Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.



Gain lock function


Working mode






Optical-layer ASON

Supported


NOTE The TN11OAU1 board does not support the setting of Equalization Based ODfor Optical Signal-Wavelength Commissioning.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2717



24.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-19 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1 board. Figure 24-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1. Figure 24-19 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1 TDC

PAOUT IN

RDC

MON

BAIN

OUT


PIN

Splitter Detection for pump current and temperature


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2718



Figure 24-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 TDC

PAOUT IN

RDC

MON

BAIN

OUT


VOA

VO

Splitter Detection for pump current and temperature

PIN

VI


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then, the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals.

Module Function l


l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

EDFA optical module


2719



– Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l


l


l


24.6.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OAU1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-21, Figure 24-22 and Figure 24-23 show the front panel of the OAU1 board. Figure 24-21 Front panel of the TN11OAU1 board

CAUTION

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

CAUTION


MON

OUT

IN

TDC

RDC


OAU1

OAU1

STAT ACT PROG SRV


2720



Figure 24-22 Front panel of the TN12OAU1 board

CAUTION

MON

OUT

IN

TDC

RDC

VO

OAU1

CAUTION


OAU1

STAT ACT PROG SRV


VI

Figure 24-23 Front panel of the TN13OAU1 board

CAUTION

MON

OUT

IN

TDC

RDC

VO

VI

OAU1

CAUTION


OAU1

STAT ACT PROG SRV




l


l


l





2721



Table 24-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OAU1 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TDC/RDC

LC


MON

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, monitors the performance of the OUT port online. The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 1:99. In other words, the MON port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB.

VIa

LC

Outputs a multi-wavelength signal. A VOA is attached before the interface for adjusting the optical power of the multi-wavelength signal.

VOa

LC

Receives a multi-wavelength signal. A VOA is attached before the interface for adjusting the optical power of the multi-wavelength signal.

a: Only the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 boards support the interfaces.

Laser Hazard Level OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103, OAU106: The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW). OAU105, OAU107: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

24.6.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN11OAU1 board or TN12OAU1 board, and one slot houses one TN13OAU1 board. Table 24-34 shows the valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2722



Table 24-34 Valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

Table 24-35 shows the valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board. Table 24-35 Valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU16


IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

Table 24-36 shows the valid slots for the TN13OAU1 board. Table 24-36 Valid slots for the TN13OAU1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


2723



Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU5, IU11

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2.

24.6.8 Characteristic Code for the OAU1 The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-37. Table 24-37 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

Is always G.

Second to fifth digits

Gain range

Indicates the range within which the gain can be continuously adjusted.

Sixth character

-

Is always I.



Indicates the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2724




Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-38 and Table 24-39. Table 24-38 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OAU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

PAOUTa

2

BAINa

3

OUT

4

RDC/TDC

5

MON

6

a: Virtual port

Table 24-39 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

PAOUTa

2

BAINa

3

OUT

4

RDC/TDC

5

MON

6

VI

7

VO

8

a: Virtual port



2725



For parameters of the OAU1, refer to Table 24-40. Table 24-40 OAU1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-




This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2726



Field

Value

Description




Default: none

If Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) is set to 9 dB and Attenuation Difference (dB) is set to 1.5 dB, then the attenuation of the optical interface is 10.5 dB. NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.


-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.


-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.

Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C



-


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: On


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2727



Field

Value

Description

Gain (dB)

-


Nominal Gain (dB)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



-



-



-



All


Upper Threshold of Actual Gain (dB)

-

Default: All

Displays the upper threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit.


2728



Field

Value

Description

Lower Threshold of Actual Gain (dB)

-

Displays the lower threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit.

Channel Number Mode




-



-30 to 30



The value can be set or queried. The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally. NOTE IN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, OUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable

When the OAMS function is enabled, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function if the difference between the actual power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring (dBm) exceeds OAMS Power Abnormality Threshold (dB). NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2729



Field

Value

Description


-60.0 to 50.0


Default: /

NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.


0.5 to 10.0 Default:3

Specifies the threshold for the OAMS function to detect a line power abnormality. If the difference between the actual line power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds the specified abnormality threshold, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function. If the difference is less than the threshold, the U2000 will not issue a command to start the OAMS function. NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.

Working Mode

Power Value



l Default: Gain locking

For more information on the working mode, see 24.6.4 Functions and Features.

-7 to 23


Default: 0

Launch Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0


Maximum Output Optical Power(dBm)

21, 22, 23

Specifies the maximum output optical power.

Default: 23

NOTE Only the TN13OAU107 board supports.

Lower Limit For The Range Of The Maximum Output Optical Power(dBm)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-

Displays the lower limit on the maximum output optical power. NOTE Only the TN13OAU107 board supports.


2730



Field

Value

Description

Upper Limit For The Range Of The Maximum Output Optical Power(dBm)

-

Displays the upper limit on the maximum output optical power. NOTE Only the TN13OAU107 board supports.

24.6.11 OAU1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 24-41 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

16

22

25.5


dBm

-20 to 2

-26 to -4

-32 to -7.5


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -14

-32 to -20

-32 to -23.5

80 channels

dBm

-32 to -17

-32 to -23

-32 to -26.5


40 channels

dBm

-14

-20

-23.5

80 channels

dBm

-17

-23

-26.5

Nominal singlewavelength output optical power

40 channels

dBm

2

2

2

80 channels

dBm

-1

-1

-1

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

<= 8

<= 5.5

<= 5.5


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

16 to 25.5

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2.0

<= 2.0

<= 2.0


dB/dB

<= 2.0

<= 2.0

<= 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2731



Item

Unit

Value


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

18

18

18


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

VI-VO


dB

<= 1.5


dB

20

dB

1

Adjustment accuracy


Table 24-42 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/TN13OAU101 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

20

26

31


dBm

-32 to 0

-32 to -6

-32 to -11


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -16

-32 to -22

-32 to -27

80 channels

dBm

-32 to -19

-32 to -25

-32 to -30


40 channels

dBm

-16

-22

-27

80 channels

dBm

-19

-25

-30


40 channels

dBm

4

4

4

80 channels

dBm

1

1

1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2732



Item

Unit

Value

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

<= 8.5 (TN11OAU101, TN12OAU101)

<= 5.5

<= 5.5

< 10

< 10

<= 7.5 (TN13OAU101) Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels

ms

< 10

Channel gain

dB

20 to 31

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2.0

<= 2.0

<= 2.0


dB/dB

<= 2.0

<= 2.0

<= 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

20

20

20


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

<= 0.5


dB

<= 1.5


dB

20

dB

1

VI-VOb

Adjustment accuracyb

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1. NOTE The board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it affects the gain flatness.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2733



Table 24-43 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

20

26

31


dBm

-32 to -3

-32 to -9

-32 to -14


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -19

-32 to -25

-32 to -30

80 channels

dBm

-32 to -22

-32 to -28

-32


40 channels

dBm

-19

-25

-30

80 channels

dBm

-22

-28

-32


40 channels

dBm

1

1

1

80 channels

dBm

-2

-2

-2

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

<= 7.5

<=5.5

<=5.5


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

20 to 31

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2


dB/dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

17

17

17


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

<= 0.5


dB

<= 1.5


dB

20

dB

1

VI-VOb


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2734


Item


Unit

Value

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1. NOTE The board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it affects the gain flatness.


Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

24

29

36


dBm

-32 to -4

-32 to -9

-32 to -16


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -20

-32 to -25

-32

80 channels

dBm

-32 to -23

-32 to -28

-32


40 channels

dBm

-20

-25

-32

80 channels

dBm

-23

-28

-32


40 channels

dBm

4

4

4

80 channels

dBm

1

1

1

dB

<= 7.5 (TN11OAU103, TN12OAU103)

<= 5.5

<= 5.5

< 10

< 10

Noise figure (NF)a

<= 6.5 (TN13OAU103) Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels

ms

< 10

Channel gain

dB

24 to 36

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2


dB/dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2735



Item

Unit

Value

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

20

20

20


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

<= 0.5


dB

<= 1.5


dB

20

dB

1

VI-VOb




Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

23

30

34


dBm

-32 to 0

-32 to -7

-32 to -11


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -16

-32 to -23

-32 to -27

80 channels

dBm

-32 to -19

-32 to -26

-32 to -30

40 channels

dBm

-16

-23

-27

80 channels

dBm

-19

-26

-30


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2736



Item

Unit

Value

40 channels

dBm

7

7

7

80 channels

dBm

4

4

4

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

< 8.5

<6

<6


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

23 to 34

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2


dB/dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

<-40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

23

23

23


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

<= 0.5


dB

<= 1.5


dB

20

dB

1


VI-VOb



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2737



Table 24-46 Optical specifications of the TN13OAU106 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

16

19

23


dBm

-24 to 4

-24 to 1

-24 to -3


40 channels

dBm

-24 to -12

-24 to -15

-24 to -19

80 channels

dBm

-24 to -15

-24 to -18

-24 to -22


40 channels

dBm

-12

-15

-19

80 channels

dBm

-15

-18

-22


40 channels

dBm

4

4

4

80 channels

dBm

1

1

1

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

<= 7

<= 6

<= 5


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

16 to 23

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2


dB/dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

<-40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

20

20

20


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2738



Item VI-VO

Unit

Value


dB

<= 1.5


dB

20

dB

1

Adjustment accuracy


Table 24-47 Optical specifications of the TN13OAU107 board (Maximum total output optical power 23dBm) Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

19

22

27


dBm

-25 to 4

-25 to 1

-25 to -4


40 channels

dBm

-25 to -12

-25 to -15

-25 to -20

80 channels

dBm

-25 to -15

-25 to -18

-25 to -23


40 channels

dBm

-12

-15

-20

80 channels

dBm

-15

-18

-23


40 channels

dBm

7

7

7

80 channels

dBm

4

4

4

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

<= 7.5

<= 6

<= 5.5


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

19 to 27

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2739



Item

Unit

Value


dB/dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

<-40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

23

23

23


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

VI-VO


dB

<= 1.5


dB

20

dB

1

Adjustment accuracy



Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

19

22

27


dBm

-25 to 3

-25 to 0

-25 to -5


40 channels

dBm

-25 to -13

-25 to -16

-25 to -21

80 channels

dBm

-25 to -16

-25 to -19

-25 to -24

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2740



Item

Unit

Value

40 channels

dBm

-13

-16

-21

80 channels

dBm

-16

-19

-24

40 channels

dBm

6

6

6

80 channels

dBm

3

3

3

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

<= 7.5

<= 6

<= 5.5


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

19 to 27

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2


dB/dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

<-40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

22

22

22


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

VI-VO


dB

<= 1.5


dB

20

dB

1



Adjustment accuracy


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2741




Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

Nominal gain

dB

19

22

27


dBm

-25 to 2

-25 to -1

-25 to -6


40 channels

dBm

-25 to -14

-25 to -17

-25 to -22

80 channels

dBm

-25 to -17

-25 to -20

-25


40 channels

dBm

-14

-17

-22

80 channels

dBm

-17

-20

-25


40 channels

dBm

5

5

5

80 channels

dBm

2

2

2

Noise figure (NF)a

dB

<= 7.5

<= 6

<= 5.5


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

19 to 27

Gain flatness

dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2


dB/dB

<= 2

<= 2

<= 2

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

<-40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27


dBm

21

21

21


dB

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

<= 0.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2742



Item VI-VO

Unit

Value


dB

<= 1.5


dB

20

dB

1

Adjustment accuracy



Dimensions of front panel: – TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 50.8 mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) – TN13OAU1 (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: – TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 1.8 kg (4.0 lb.) – TN13OAU1: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)

Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board



TN11OAU101

18.0

24.0

TN11OAU102

14.0

18.0

TN11OAU103

18.0

24.0

TN11OAU105

22.0

29.0

TN12OAU100

11.0

14.0

TN12OAU101

12.0

15.0

TN12OAU102

10.0

13.0

TN12OAU103

12.0

15.0

TN12OAU105

15.0

21.0

TN13OAU101

12.0

15.0


2743



Board



TN13OAU103

12.0

15.0

TN13OAU105

15.0

21.0

TN13OAU106

12.0

15.0

TN13OAU107

15.0

21.0


24.7 OBU1 OBU1: optical booster unit

24.7.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the OBU1 board are TN11, TN12, and TN13.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

B oa rd





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N 11 O B U 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y


2744



B oa rd





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N 12 O B U 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N 13 O B U 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

The TN23SCC board is required when the TN13OBU1 board is used in an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. The TN12OBU1P1/TN13OBU1P3 can be installed only in an OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.

Type Table 24-50 lists the types of the TN11OBU1 board. Table 24-50 Type description of the TN11OBU1 board Type

Description

Gain Range

01


20±1.5 dB

03


23±1.5 dB

04


17±1.5 dB

Table 24-51 lists the types of the TN12OBU1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2745



Table 24-51 Type description of the TN12OBU1 board Type

Description

Gain Range

01


20±1.5 dB

03


23±1.5 dB

04


17±1.5 dB

P1

The TN12OBU1P1 board is an OA board intended for TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board.

-

Table 24-52 lists the types of the TN13OBU1 board. Table 24-52 Type description of the TN13OBU1 board Type

Description

Gain Range

01


20±1.5 dB

03


23±1.5 dB

04


17±1.5 dB

05


23±1.5 dB

P3

The TN13OBU1P3 board is an OA board intended for NPS4E board.

18±1.5 dB


Function: – The TN11OBU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas the TN12OBU1/TN13OBU1 board supports. For details, see 24.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

l

Appearance: – The TN11OBU1, TN12OBU1 and TN13OBU1 versions use different front panels. For details, see 24.7.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the power consumption of each version, see 24.7.11 OBU1 Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2746




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OBU1

TN12OBU 1

The TN12OBU1 can be created as OBU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter at type 01,03,04, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU1 functions as the TN11OBU1.

TN11OBU1

TN13OBU 1

The TN13OBU1 can be created as OBU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter at type 01,03,04, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OBU1 functions as the TN11OBU1.

TN12OBU1

TN13OBU 1

The TN13OBU1 can be created as 12OBU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter at type 01,03,04 without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OBU1 functions as the TN12OBU1.

TN13OBU1

None

-




Added the TN13OBU1P3 board.

The TN13OBU1P3 board is an OA board intended for NPS4E board. The TN13OBU1P3 borad can be configured at the receive site only.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the TN13OBU101, TN13OBU103, TN13OBU104 and TN13OBU105 boards.

The manufacturing process is optimized, and the boards do not support any extended gain.


2747









24.7.3 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU1 amplifies optical signals. For the position of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104/OBU105 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-24. Figure 24-24 Position of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104/OBU105 board in the WDM system Client side

Client side

OTU

MUX

OBU1

OBU1

DMUX

OTU OTU

DMUX

OBU1

OBU1

MUX

OTU

OTU OTU OTU OTU

Client side

Client side

For the position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-25. The TN12OBU1P1 board, configured at the receive site, is an OA board intended for PID and is used together with the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board. Figure 24-25 Position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system

Client side

Tributary board

NPO2 + ENQ2

OBU1P1 OBU1P1

NPO2 + ENQ2

Tributary board

Client side

For the position of the OBU1P3 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-26. The TN13OBU1P3 board, configured at the receive site, is an OA board intended for PID and is used together with the NSP4E board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2748



Figure 24-26 Position of the OBU1P3 board in the WDM system

TN13 OBU2P3

Client side

Tributary board

TN13 OBU1P3

NPS4E

NPS4E TN13 OBU1P3

Tributary board

Client side

TN13 OBU2P3

NOTE

In ASON scenarios, the TN11OBU101/TN12OBU101/TN13OBU101/TN11OBU104/TN12OBU104/ TN13OBU104 board cannot be used as an input optical amplifier (at the transmit end of an OMS).

24.7.4 Functions and Features The OBU1 board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-53. Table 24-53 Functions and features of the OBU1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. l The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB.

Typical gain

l The typical gain of the OBU103 is 23 dB. l The typical gain of the OBU104 is 17 dB. l The typical gain of the OBU105 is 23 dB. l The typical gain of the OBU1P3 is 18 dB. NOTE 24.7.11 OBU1 Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Gain lock function



2749




Description

Working mode






Optical-layer ASON

All OBU1 boards except TN13OBU1P3: Supported TN13OBU1P3: Not supported


NOTE The TN11OBU1 board does not support the setting of Equalization Based ODfor Optical Signal-Wavelength Commissioning.

24.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board. Figure 24-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU1/TN13OBU1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2750



Figure 24-27 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board

Splitter IN

OUT EDFA optical module Driving current

MON


PIN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse

Backplane (Controlled by SCC)


SCC

Figure 24-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU1/TN13OBU1 board Splitter IN

OUT


VO

VOA

VI

MON

Control Memory

CPU

Communication



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Required voltage



2751



Signal Flow One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too. NOTE

On a network where PID boards are used, optical signals are input through the TN12OBU1P1/TN13OBU1P3 board's VI port and are transmitted over the fiber connection between its VO and IN ports.

Module Function l


l


l


l


l


24.7.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU1 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2752



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-29 and Figure 24-30 show the front panel of the OBU1 board. Figure 24-29 Front panel of the TN11OBU1 board

CAUTION

IN

OBU1

CAUTION

OUT

MON


OBU1

STAT ACT PROG SRV


Figure 24-30 Front panel of the TN12OBU1/TN13OBU1 board

CAUTION

MON

OUT

IN

VO

VI

OBU1

CAUTION


OBU1

STAT ACT PROG SRV




l


l


l





2753



Table 24-54 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU1 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


MON

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, monitors the performance of the OUT port online. All OBU1 boards except TN13OBU1P3: The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 1:99. In other words, the MON port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB. TN13OBU1P3: The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 3:97. In other words, the MON port power is 15 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB.

VIa

LC


VOa

LC


a: Only the TN12OBU1/TN13OBU1 board supports the interfaces.

Laser Hazard Level OBU101/OBU103/OBU104/OBU1P1/TN13OBU1P3: The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW). OBU105: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

24.7.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one OBU1 board. Table 24-55 shows the valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board. Table 24-55 Valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots




2754



Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 24-56 shows the valid slots for the TN12OBU1/TN13OBU1 board. Table 24-56 Valid slots for the TN12OBU1/TN13OBU1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

NOTE

The TN12OBU1P1/TN13OBU1P3 can be installed only in an OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.

24.7.8 Characteristic Code for the OBU1 The characteristic code for the OBU1 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-57. Table 24-57 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

The first character is always G.

Second and third digits

Gain

The second and the third digits indicate the gain value.

Fourth character

-

The fourth character is always I.


2755



Code

Meaning

Description



The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-58 and Table 24-59. Table 24-58 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

Table 24-59 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OBU1/TN13OBU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

VI

4

VO

5

24.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OBU1, refer to Table 24-60. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2756



Table 24-60 OBU1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default l All OBU1 boards except TN13OBU1P3: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) l TN13OBU1P3: 32767 The default value is the value when the TN13OBU1P3 board is powered on, indicating that the VOA is blocked.

This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/ TN12OBU103/TN12OBU104/ TN13OBU1 support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2757



Field

Value

Description




Default: none

If Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) is set to 9 dB and Attenuation Difference (dB) is set to 1.5 dB, then the attenuation of the optical interface is 10.5 dB. NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/ TN12OBU103/TN12OBU104/ TN13OBU1support this parameter.


-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/ TN12OBU103/TN12OBU104/ TN13OBU1 support this parameter.


-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/ TN12OBU103/TN12OBU104/ TN13OBU1 support this parameter.

Channel Number Mode

C80 Mode, C40 Mode, CWDM Mode Default: /

Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C


Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2758



Field

Value

Description


-


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: On


-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2759



Field

Value

Description

Nominal Gain (dB)

Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) to Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

Specifies the expected gain of the signal optical power.

Default: l OBU101: 20dB l OBU103: 23dB l OBU104: 17dB l OBU105: 23dB l OBU1P3: 18dB

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.


-



-



-



All


Default: All


2760



Field

Value

Description


-30 to 30



The value can be set or queried. The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally. NOTE IN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, OUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single-wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2761



Field

Value

Description


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable

When the OAMS function is enabled, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function if the difference between the actual power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring (dBm) exceeds OAMS Power Abnormality Threshold (dB). NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/ TN12OBU103/TN12OBU104/ TN13OBU1 support this parameter.


-60.0 to 50.0 Default: /

Specifies the reference power for the OAMS function to determine whether the line power is normal. This parameter must be set based on the actual line power. NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/ TN12OBU103/TN12OBU104/ TN13OBU1 support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2762



Field

Value

Description


0.5 to 10.0


Default:3

NOTE Only the TN12OBU101/ TN12OBU103/TN12OBU104/ TN13OBU1 support this parameter.

Working Mode

Power Value





-7 to 23


Default: 0

Launch Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0


24.7.11 OBU1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2763



Optical Specifications Table 24-61 Optical specifications of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104/OBU105 board Item

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Uni t

Value OBU101

OBU103

OBU104

OBU105


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561

1529-1561


dBm

-32 to -4

-32 to -3

-32 to -1

-24 to 0


40 channels

dBm

-32 to -20

-32 to -19

-32 to -17

-24 to -16

-32 to -23

-32 to -22

-32 to -20

-24 to -19


40 channels

-20

-19

-17

-16

-23

-22

-20

-19


40 channels

0

4

0

7

-3

1

-3

4

80 channels dBm

80 channels dBm

80 channels

Noise figure (NF)

dB

≤ 5.5

≤ 6.0

≤ 5.5

≤ 7.0

Nominal gain

dB

20

23

17

23


ms

< 10

< 10

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

20±1.5

23±1.5

17±1.5

23±1.5

Gain flatness

dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27

-27

-27


2764



Item

Uni t

Value OBU101

OBU103

OBU104

OBU105


dBm

16

20

16

23


dB/ dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5


dB

≤ 1.5

Dynami c attenuati on range

dB

20

dB

1

VI-VOa

Adjustment accuracya

a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU1/TN13OBU1. NOTE The TN11OBU1/TN12OBU1 board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it affects the gain flatness.

Table 24-62 Optical specifications of the OBU1P1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529 to 1561

Total input power range at the VI optical port

dBm

-30 to 7

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40


dBm

< -30


dB

-27


dB

-27


dBm

9


dB/dB

≤ 2.0


2765



Item

Unit

Value


dB

≤ 0.5

Table 24-63 Optical specifications of the OBU1P3 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529 to 1561


dBm

-32 to -3.5

Noise figure (NF)

dB

≤ 6.0

Nominal gain

dB

18


ms

< 10

Channel gain

dB

18±1.5

Gain flatness

dB

≤ 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40


dBm

< -30


dB

-27


dB

-27


dBm

14.5


dB/ dB

≤ 2.0


dB

≤ 0.5

VI-VO


dB

<= 1.5


dB

20

dB

1

Adjustment accuracy

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2766





l

Weight: – TN11OBU1: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.) – TN12OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) – TN13OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)




TN11OBU101

11.0

13.0

TN11OBU103

13.0

15.0

TN11OBU104

12.0

14.0

TN12OBU101

10.0

11.0

TN12OBU103

11.0

12.0

TN12OBU104

10.0

12.0

TN12OBU1P1

10.0

11.0

TN13OBU101

8.5

10

TN13OBU103

9

11

TN13OBU104

8

9.5

TN13OBU105

12.5

15.5

TN13OBU1P3

9

11


24.8 OBU2 OBU2: optical booster unit

24.8.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the OBU2 board are TN11, TN12, TN13 and TN14.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2767








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1O B U2

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

T N1 2O B U2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N1 3O B U2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

T N1 4O B U2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Type Table 24-64 Type description of the TN11OBU2/TN12OBU2 board Type

Description

Gain Range

05


23±1.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2768




Description

Gain Range

P3


23±1.5


Description

Gain Range

P3


20±1.5


Function: – The TN11OBU2 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas the TN12OBU2 board supports. The TN13OBU2P3/TN14OBU2P3 board is an OA board intended for NPS4E board. For details, see 24.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

l

Appearance: – The TN11, TN12, TN13, TN14 versions use different front panels. For details, see 24.8.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – For the power consumption of each version, see 24.8.11 OBU2 Specifications.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OBU2

TN12OBU 2

The TN12OBU2 can be created as OBU2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU2 functions as the TN11OBU2.

TN12OBU2

None

-

TN13OBU2

None

-

TN14OBU2

None

-


2769






Added the TN13OBU2P3/ TN14OBU2P3 board.

The TN13OBU2P3/TN14OBU2P3 board is an OA board intended for the NPS4E board.







24.8.3 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU1 amplifies optical signals. For the position of the TN11OBU2/TN12OBU2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-31.The TN11OBU1/TN11OBU2 board can be configured at both transmit site and receive site. Figure 24-31 Position of the TN11OBU2/TN12OBU2 board in the WDM system Client side Client side

OTU

MUX

OTU OTU

DMUX

OBU2

OBU2

OBU2

OBU2

OTU

DMUX

MUX

OTU OTU OTU OTU


For the position of the TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-32. The TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2 board must be used together with an NPS4E board. The Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2770



TN13OBU2 board is used at the transmit site, and the TN14OBU2 board is used at the receive site. Figure 24-32 Position of the TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2 board in the WDM system TN13 OBU2P3

Client side

Tributary board

TN14 OBU2P3

NPS4E

NPS4E TN14 OBU2P3

Tributary board

Client side

TN13 OBU2P3

24.8.4 Functions and Features The OBU2 is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-67. Table 24-67 Functions and features of the OBU2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Typical gain

The typical gain of the TN11OBU2/TN12OBU2/TN13OBU2 is 23 dB. The typical gain of the TN14OBU2 is 20 dB. NOTE 24.8.11 OBU2 Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Gain lock function



2771




Description

Working mode






Optical-layer ASON

TN11OBU2/TN12OBU2: Supported TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2: Not supported


24.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OBU2 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-33 and Figure 24-34 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2772



Figure 24-33 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU2 board

Splitter IN

OUT


MON


PIN


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



SCC

Figure 24-34 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU2/TN13OBU1P3/ TN14OBU1P3 board Splitter IN

OUT


VO

VOA

VI

MON

Control Memory

CPU

Communication



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Required voltage



2773



Signal Flow One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too. NOTE

On a network where PID boards are used, optical signals are input through the TN13OBU2P3/TN14OBU2P3 board's VI port and are transmitted over the fiber connection between its VO and IN ports.

Module Function l


l


l


l


l


24.8.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU2 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2774



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-35 and Figure 24-36 show the front panel of the OBU2 board. Figure 24-35 Front panel of the TN11OBU2 board

CAUTION

MON

OUT

OBU2

CAUTION


OBU2

STAT ACT PROG SRV


IN

Figure 24-36 Front panel of the TN12OBU2 board

CAUTION

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

CAUTION


MON

OUT

IN

VO

VI


OBU2

OBU2

STAT ACT PROG SRV


2775



Figure 24-37 Front panel of the TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2 board

CAUTION

OUT

IN

VO

VI

OBU2

CAUTION


MON

OBU2

STAT ACT PROG SRV




l


l


l



Interfaces Table 24-68 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-68 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC



2776



Interface

Type

Function

MON

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, monitors the performance of the OUT port online. All OBU1 boards except TN14OBU2P3: The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 1:99. In other words, the MON port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB. TN14OBU2P3: The ratio of the MON port power to the OUT port power is 2:98. In other words, the MON port power is 17 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(98/2) = 17 dB.

VOa

LC


VIa

LC


a: Only the TN12OBU2/TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2 board supports the interfaces.

Laser Hazard Level After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

24.8.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one OBU2 board. Table 24-69 shows the valid slots for the TN11OBU2 board. Table 24-69 Valid slots for the TN11OBU2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11


2777



Table 24-70 shows the valid slots for the TN12OBU2 board. Table 24-70 Valid slots for the TN12OBU2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU16


IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

Table 24-71 shows the valid slots for the TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2 board. Table 24-71 Valid slots for the TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU16


IU2-IU17


2778



NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 displayed on the NM is IU2.

24.8.8 Characteristic Code for the OBU2 The characteristic code for the OBU2 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-72. Table 24-72 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-



Gain


Fourth character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2779



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-73 and Table 24-74. Table 24-73 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

Table 24-74 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OBU2/TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

MON

3

VI

4

VO

5

24.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OBU2, refer to Table 24-75. Table 24-75 OBU2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2780



Field

Value

Description




Default l TN11OBU2/ TN12OUB2: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) l TN13OBU2: 16.0 dB l TN14OBU2: 32767 The default value is the value when the TN14OBU2 board is powered on, indicating that the VOA is blocked. Attenuation difference (dB)


The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. NOTE All OBU2 boards except TN11OBU2 support this parameter.

Sets the relative optical power attenuation of a board channel. When using this parameter with Attenuation (dB), you can adjust optical power attenuation of a board channel more accurately. If Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) is set to 9 dB and Attenuation Difference (dB) is set to 1.5 dB, then the attenuation of the optical interface is 10.5 dB. NOTE All OBU2 boards except TN11OBU2 support this parameter.


-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE All OBU2 boards except TN11OBU2 support this parameter.


-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE All OBU2 boards except TN11OBU2 support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2781



Field

Value

Description

Channel Number Mode



Default: / Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C



-


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: On


-


Nominal Gain (dB)

Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) to Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2782



Field

Value

Description


-



-



-



All



-30 to 30

Default: All


The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the perchannel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally. NOTE IN port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power, OUT port: The rated optical power is same as Nominal single-wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2783



Field

Value

Description


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable

When the OAMS function is enabled, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function if the difference between the actual power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring (dBm) exceeds OAMS Power Abnormality Threshold (dB). NOTE All OBU2 boards except TN11OBU2 support this parameter.


-60.0 to 50.0 Default: /

Specifies the reference power for the OAMS function to determine whether the line power is normal. This parameter must be set based on the actual line power. NOTE All OBU2 boards except TN11OBU2 support this parameter.



Specifies the threshold for the OAMS function to detect a line power abnormality. If the difference between the actual line power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds the specified abnormality threshold, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function. If the difference is less than the threshold, the U2000 will not issue a command to start the OAMS function. NOTE All OBU2 boards except TN11OBU2 support this parameter.

Working Mode

Power Value





-7 to 23


Default: 0

Launch Power (dBm)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-60.0 to 60.0



2784



24.8.11 OBU2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 24-76 Optical specifications of the TN11OBU2/TN12OBU2 board Item

Unit

Value OBU205


nm

1529-1561


dBm

-24 to 0


dBm

-24 to -16

40 Channels 80 Channels

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


40 Channels


40 Channels

-24 to -19 dBm

80 Channels

-16 -19

dBm

80 Channels

7 4

Noise figure (NF)

dB

≤ 7.0

Nominal gain

dB

23


ms

< 10

Channel gain

dB

23±1.5

Gain flatness

dB

≤ 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40


dBm

< -30


dB

-27


2785



Item

Unit

Value OBU205


dB

-27


dBm

23


dB/dB

≤ 2.0


dB

≤ 0.5


dB

≤ 1.5

Dynamic attenuatio n range

dB

20

dB

1

VI-VOa

Adjustment accuracya

a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU2. NOTE The board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it affects the gain flatness.

Table 24-77 Optical specifications of the TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2 board Item

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit

Value

Value

TN13OBU2P3

TN14OBU2P3


nm

1529-1561

1529-1561


dBm

-32 to -3

-32 to -3.5

Noise figure (NF)

dB

≤ 6.0

≤ 6.0

Nominal gain

dB

23

20


ms

< 10

< 10

Channel gain

dB

23±1.5

20±1.5

Gain flatness

dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40


2786



Item

Unit

Value

Value

TN13OBU2P3

TN14OBU2P3

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

< -40


dBm

< -30

< -30


dB

-27

-27


dB

-27

-27


dBm

20

16.5


dB/dB

≤ 2.0

≤ 2.0


dB

≤ 0.5

≤ 0.5

Inhere nt inserti on loss

dB

≤ 6.2

≤ 4.8

Dyna mic attenu ation range

dB

20

20

dB

1

1

VI-VOa

Adjustment accuracy



l

Weight: – TN11OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.) – TN12OBU2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) – TN13OBU2/TN14OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2787






TN11OBU205

17

24

TN12OBU205

14

19

TN13OBU2P3/ TN14OBU2P3

9

11


24.9 RAU1 RAU1: backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical amplifier unit

24.9.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the RAU1 board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1R A U1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N1 2R A U1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


2788



Type Table 24-78 lists the types of the RAU1 board. Table 24-78 Type description of the RAU1 board Unit

Type

Description

RAU1

06

Adopts the backward pumping and optical amplification technology.


Function – The TN12RAU1 board supports a variable optical attenuator (VOA) while the TN11RAU1 board does not. For details, see 24.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow. – The TN12RAU1 board supports the line fiber quality monitoring function, fiber connection detect (FCD), quick shutdown of the Raman laser, and safe turn-on of the Raman laser while the TN11RAU1 board does not. For details, see 24.9.4 Functions and Features.

l

Appearance The front panels of the TN11RAU1 and TN12RAU1 boards are different. On the front panel of the TN12RAU1 board, there are the FCD button and indicator, interlock switch. There is no such button, indicator, or switch on the front panel of the TN11RAU1 board. For details, see 24.9.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification For the power consumption specifications of RAU boards, see 24.9.10 RAU1 Specifications.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11RAU1

TN12RAU 1

The TN12RAU1 board can be created as 11RAU1 on the U2000. The board substitution does not require software upgrade. After the board substitution, the board only has the function of the TN11RAU1 board. That is, the board does not support a VOA, the line fiber quality monitoring function, FCD, quick shutdown of the Raman laser, or safe turn-on of the Raman laser, but supports the interlock switch function.

TN12RAU1

None

-


2789






Added the TN12RAU1 board.

Compared with the TN11RAU1 board, the TN12RAU1 board is newly added with a built-in VOA module and with functions such as the line fiber quality monitoring function, fiber connection detection, safe laser start detection, Raman laser fast shutdown, and interlock switch.







Added the following fiber types for the RAU1 board: TWPLUS, SMFLS, G.656, G.654A, TERA_LIGHT, and G.654B





The TN11RAU1 board, serving as a backward Raman and EDFA hybrid unit, is added.

24.9.3 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the RAU1 board integrates a backward Raman unit, an EDFA unit, different from an EDFA, the RAU1 board is used to improve system performance. It amplifies optical signals at the receive end. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2790



NOTICE Always turn off the pump Raman laser of the RAU1 board before removing or inserting the fiber to the RAU1. Figure 24-38 shows two applications of the RAU1 board in a WDM system. Figure 24-38 Application of the RAU1 board in a WDM system OTU

Client Side

M U X

OTU

OBU1

RC

LINE

OUT

F RM I U SC1

TM

IN SYS

IN TC

TC IN

SYS

IN

OTU

Client Side

OTU

D M U X

OUT

D M U X

OUT

RAU1

LINE

OTU

Client Side

TM

F RM SC1 I U RC

OUT

RAU1

OTU

OBU1

M U X

OTU OTU

Client Side

When the RAU1 board is used on the OptiX OSN 3800, the OptiX OSN 3800 must function as an OLA site, as shown in Figure 24-39. The RAU1 board can be configured in only one direction. In the other direction, the TN21FIU+OAU combination can be used. Figure 24-39 Application of the RAU1 board in a WDM system (OptiX OSN 3800 as an OLA site) OUT

LINE

RC

OUT

RAU1 IN SYS

TC

RM

RM2

TM1

TM

SC2 IN OUT

F TM I U RC

RM1 OUT

TM2 RM

OAU

IN

TC

F I U IN

NOTE

When RAU1 works in gain mode, the FIU board connected to the SYS port and IN port on RAU1 must be TN14FIU.

24.9.4 Functions and Features The RAU1 is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2791



For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-79. Table 24-79 Functions and features of the RAU1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Integrates a backward Raman unit and an EDFA unit and amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber. l The TN12RAU1 board supports the interlock switch. The interlock switch of a LINE port on the panel controls the poweron and power-off of the board and prevents eyes from being injured by laser when an optical fiber is inserted into or removed from the LINE port. l The TN12RAU1 board has a built-in VOA module to adjust optical power.

Gain adjustment

The RAU1 continuously adjusts the gain continuously based on the input optical power: l G.652 fibers: 19dB to 33dB l LEAF fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.653 fibers: 19dB to 35dB l TWRS fibers: 19dB to 35dB l TW-C fibers: 19dB to 35dB l TWPLUS fibers: 19dB to 35dB l SMFLS fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.656 fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.654A fibers: 19dB to 33dB l TERA_LIGHT fibers: 19dB to 35dB l G.654B fibers: 19dB to 29dB NOTE Users can separately configure the gain adjustment point for the Raman amplifier and EDFA using the NMS.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2792




Description

Working mode

The Raman amplifier module supports the gain locking, maximum gain, and power locking modes. l In gain locking mode. This mode applies to multi-span or singleshort-span systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/ TWPLUS/SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In addition, the gain of the Raman unit is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the Raman unit. l The maximum gain mode applies to single-UL-span systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/SMFLS/G. 656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In this mode, the Raman amplifier module automatically adjusts its pump power to ensure that its gain reaches the maximum value. In addition, users can query the actual gain of the Raman amplifier module. l In the pump power mode, users can set the pump power for the Raman amplifier module. This mode applies to systems that use any fibers but the G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/ SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers or to situations in which the pump power of the Raman amplifier module must be adjusted manually. The EDFA module supports the gain locking and power locking modes. l In the gain locking mode, the gain of the EDFA module is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the EDFA module. The gain locking mode is enabled by default. l The power locking mode is used for the commissioning and fault location purposes.




l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. l The EDFA optical module can detect and report optical power. l The Raman amplifier module of the TN11RAU1 board supports return loss detection.

Line fiber quality monitoring function

The line fiber quality monitoring function can be used on the U2000. Monitoring figures and data are displayed on the U2000. For details, see the Fiber Doctor System in the Feature Description. The Fiber Doctor Management System Software Fee License needs to be purchased for this function.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2793




Description

FCD function

The FCD button and indicator are provided. You can press the FCD button on the front panel to trigger FCD. The detection process and results can be identified by the FCD indicator blinking frequency and indicator status. For details, see 24.9.6 Front Panel.

Safe turn-on of the Raman laser

When the Raman laser is turned on, the OTDR meter function is automatically enabled to detect fiber connections and therefore ensure that the laser is properly started, avoiding fiber burning due to inappropriate fiber connections. If the Raman laser fails to be turned on, the line fiber quality monitoring function can be used to further identify fault points.

Quick shutdown of the Raman laser

The quick shutdown of the Raman laser is supported. When fiber removal or fiber cut occurs within 500 m around the site where the board housing the Raman laser is located, the pump light of the Raman laser can be shut down within 100 ms.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

NOTE Only the TN12RAU1 board supports the following functions: line fiber quality monitoring function, FCD, safe turn-on of the Raman laser, and quick shutdown of the Raman laser. When the TN12RAU1 board is connected to an ERPC or ROP board, the line fiber quality monitoring, FCD, safe Raman laser turn-on, and quick Raman laser shutdown functions cannot be normally used. In this case, you must disable the safe Raman laser turn-on and quick Raman laser shutdown functions on the NMS. If you have used the line fiber quality monitoring or FCD function, ignore the monitoring or detection results of the function.

24.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The RAU1 board consists of Raman optical module, EDFA optical module, OTDR drive and receiving module, VOA module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-40 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU1 board. Figure 24-41shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12RAU1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2794



Figure 24-40 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU1

LINE

Signal

Signal

MONO

PAOUT

OUT

Pump light Splitter Pump source Raman optical module Detection for Pumping current and pump light PIN temperature power and current control

TDC RDC

IN

MONS SYS

Splitter EDFA optical module

Detection Driving for PIN temperature current



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage

SCC



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2795



Figure 24-41 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12RAU1 MONS SYS

Signal

Signal LINE

Detection light Reflected light Light source Receiver

TDC RDC

MONO

PAOUT

OUT

Splitter

Pump light Pump source

IN

Splitter

Raman optical module

Detection for Pumping current and pump light PIN temperature power and current control OTDR drive and receiving module

EDFA optical module

Detection Driving for PIN temperature current

V Detection for O pump current A and temperature

VI VO


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse

SCC



Signal Flow The pump source of the RAU1 board sends the pump light to the WDM side through the LINE optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed amplification are input through the LINE interface. The splitter then splits them into two, among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit or test instrument through the MONS interface for online optical performance monitoring. One service optical signal received through the SYS interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. For TN12RAU1 board: l

The light source emits detection signals to the optical fiber through the LINE optical port to monitor the line fiber quality. The Rayleigh scattering and Fresnel reflection signals are sent back to the receiver. After the received optical signals are processed, a fiber quality curve can be obtained. The fiber quality curve will display any abnormality in the optical fiber.

l

When the optical power of signals needs to be adjusted by a VOA, you must input the multiplexed signals from the OUT port to the VI port and output the signals using the VO port after optical power adjustment.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2796



Module Function l

Raman optical module – The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission. – The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the MONS interface for spectrum detection and supervising.

l

EDFA optical module – Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump light can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONO interface for detection.

l

OTDR drive and receiving module – Provides the OTDR light source modulation current. – Processes electrical signals from the receiver.

l


l

Driving and detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser. – Drives the pump laser. – Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

l


l


24.9.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the RAU1 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2797



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-42 and Figure 24-43 show the front panel of the RAU1 board. Figure 24-42 Front panel of the TN11RAU1 board

CAUTION

LAS

CAUTION


MONO MONS

OUT

IN

TDC RDC

SYS

LINE

RAU1

RAU1

STAT ACT PROG SRV


Figure 24-43 Front panel of the TN12RAU1 board

Button The FCD button is used to trigger fiber connection detect (FCD). The FCD results are indicated by the FCD indicator color. NOTE

When the FCD is normal, the FCD indicator is steady orange. If you press the FCD button again when the FCD indicator is steady orange, an FCD task may be started again and the detection will be prolonged.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2798





l


l


l


l

Laser emission status indicator (LAS) - green

l

Fiber connection detection indicator (FCD) - triple-colored (red, orange, green)


Interfaces Table 24-80 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-80 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RAU1 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TDC/RDC

LC


MONO

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, monitors the performance of the OUT port online. The ratio of the MONO port power to the OUT port power is 1:99. In other words, the MONO port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB.

LINE

LSH/APC

Receives the line optical signal and sends the pump light.

SYS

LC

Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.

MONS

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8, monitors the performance of the SYS port online. The ratio of the MONS port power to the SYS port power is 1:99. In other words, the MONS port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Psys (dBm) - Pmons (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

VIa

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal.

VOa

LC

Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal.


2799


Interface


Type

Function

a: Only the TN12RAU1 board supports.

Interlock Switch Table 24-81 describes the mapping between the interlock switch status and the board status. Table 24-81 Interlock switch status Status

Description If the cover of an interlock switch is open, the board is powered off and the Raman laser is turned off. In such a case, an optical fiber can be inserted or removed.

If the cover of an interlock switch is closed, the board is powered on, and the Raman laser can be turned on through the U2000. In such a case, insertion or removal of an optical fiber is forbidden.

Laser Hazard Level RAU1: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

24.9.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one RAU1. Table 24-82shows the valid slots for the RAU1. Table 24-82 Valid slots for the RAU1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots




2800



Product

Valid Slots




IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU16


IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the RAU1 board, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the RAU1 board, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the RAU1 board, the slot number of the RAU1 displayed on the NM is IU2.


Display of Optical Interface The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-83. Table 24-83 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RAU1 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

IN

1

PAOUTa

2

RDC

3

OUT


2801




Interface on the NM

TDC

5

MONO

6

VIb

7

VOb

8

LINE

9

SYS

10

MONS

11

a: Virtual port. b: Only the TN12RAU1 board supports.

24.9.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the RAU1, refer to Table 24-84. Table 24-84 RAU1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Actual Band

-


Configure Band

C


Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2802



Field

Value

Description





The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within ± 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ± 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted. To obtain the value range of this parameter, query the value of the Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. NOTE Only the TN12RAU1 board supports this parameter.



Sets the relative optical power attenuation of a board channel. When using this parameter with Attenuation (dB), you can adjust optical power attenuation of a board channel more accurately. If Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) is set to 9 dB and Attenuation Difference (dB) is set to 1.5 dB, then the attenuation of the optical interface is 10.5 dB. NOTE Only the TN12RAU1 board supports this parameter.


-

Displays the maximum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12RAU1 board supports this parameter.


-

Displays the minimum attenuation allowed by a board optical interface. NOTE Only the TN12RAU1 board supports this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2803



Field

Value

Description


-


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: l OUT port: On l LINE port: Off Fast Pump Laser Shutdown upon Fiber Cut

Disabled, Enabled

Auto OTDR Detection upon Pump Laser Start

Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled

See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies whether to enable fast shutdown of pump lasers when fiber cuts are detected. NOTE Only the TN12RAU1 board supports this parameter.

Default: Enabled

Specifies whether to enable automatic OTDR detection when pump lasers are started. NOTE Only the TN12RAU1 board supports this parameter. When the automatic OTDR detection function is disabled for the pump laser on the TN12RAU1 board, the board cannot detect whether the end faces of its fiber connectors are contaminated. As a result, fiber burning may occur if the pump laser is turned on when the end face of a fiber connector on the board is contaminated.

Gain (dB)

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2804



Field

Value

Description

Nominal Gain (dB)

Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) to Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

Specifies the expected gain of the signal optical power.

Default: The specific value is related to the module.

You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 9 dB, the actual gain is displayed as an invalid value.


-



-



-

Displays the upper threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit. NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 9 dB, the actual gain is displayed as an invalid value.


-

Displays the lower threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit. NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 9 dB, the actual gain is displayed as an invalid value.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-



All


Default: All


2805



Field

Value

Description


-30 to 30



The value can be set or queried. The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally. NOTE For the LINE port, the rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power. For the OUT port, the rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.


/

This parameter is available only when the Working Mode is set to Pump power for the LINE port. Changing the value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) directly influences the optical power of each wavelength on the line. If the fixed pump optical power value is less than the minimum value or greater than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Minimum Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-


Maximum Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-



2806



Field

Value

Description


-



-



-



-


Fiber Type


Specifies the fiber type. The gain range of the board varies according to the fiber type.

Default: G652 Fiber

Fiber Length(m)

0 to 4294967295 Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

NOTE When the Raman amplifier module works in gain locking or maximum gain mode, the fiber type must be configured for the module. To configure the fiber type, start the desired NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface in the navigation tree. The actual fiber type must be the same as the fiber type specified in the Fiber/ Cable Management window.



Disable, Enable


Default: Disable



-60.0 to 50.0


Default: /


2807



Field

Value

Description


0.5 to 10.0


Working Mode

l OUT port:

Default:3

– Gain locking, Power locking – Default: Gain locking l LINE port: – Gain locking, Maximum power, Pump power

Specifies the working mode for an optical amplifier. For the OUT port, it specifies the working mode of the EDFA module; for the LINE port, it specifies the working mode of the Raman amplifier module. For more information on the working mode, see 24.9.4 Functions and Features.

– Default: Gain locking Power Value

-7 to 23

Channel Number Mode

Default: 0




Default: /

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

DCM Attenuation Value

-


ASE Calibration

Uncalibrated, Calibrated Default: Uncalibrated

Displays whether the system has calibrated the amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) noise power of ALC-enabled RAU1 boards. The ALC function can correctly adjust the optical amplifier gain on the link only after the ASE noise power of the ALCenabled RAU1 boards are calibrated.


2808



Field

Value

Description

Launch Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0


24.9.10 RAU1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 24-85 Optical specifications of the RAU1 board Item RAU1 board specific ations

Unit

Value


nm

1529 to 1561

Gain range

dB

G.652 fibers

19 to 33

LEAF fibers

19 to 35

G.653 fibers

19 to 35

TWRS fibers

19 to 35

TW-C fibers

19 to 35

TWPLUS fibers

19 to 35

SMFLS fibers

19 to 35

G.656 fibers

19 to 35

G.654A fibers

19 to 33

TERA_LIGHT fibers

19 to 35

G.654B fibers

19 to 29

G.652 fibers

< 5.5 (19 dB gain)

Equivalent noise figurea

dB

< 3.0 (22 dB gain) < 1.5 (26 dB gain) < 1.0 (30 dB gain)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2809


Item


Unit

Value LEAF fibers

< 5.5 (19 dB gain) < 3.0 (22 dB gain) < 1.0 (26 dB gain) < 0.5 (30 dB gain)

G.653 fibers


TWRS fibers


TW-C fibers


TWPLUS fibers


SMFLS fibers


G.656 fibers


G.654A fibers


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2810


Item


Unit

Value TERA_LIGHT fibers


G.654B fibers


Gain flatness (LINE port to OUT port)

dB

G.652 fibers

< 3.0

LEAF fibers

< 3.0

G.653 fibers

< 3.0

TWRS fibers

< 3.0

TW-C fibers

< 3.0

TWPLUS fibers

< 3.0

SMFLS fibers

< 3.0

G.656 fibers

< 3.0

G.654A fibers

< 3.0

TERA_LIGHT fibers

< 3.0

G.654B fibers

< 3.0

LINE port input optical power

dBm

-40 to 1

Max. OUT port optical power

dBm

20

Pump wavelength for the LINE port

nm

1400 to 1500

Pump optical power of the LINE port

mW

>=700

PDG

dB

<= 0.7

PMD

ps

<= 0.7

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2811


Item Raman module specific ations

EDFA specific ations


Unit

Value


nm

1529 to 1561

Input optical power

dBm

<= 1

Valid gainb

dB

G.652 fibers

5 to 10

LEAF fibers

5 to 12

G.653 fibers

5 to 12

TWRS fibers

5 to 12

TW-C fibers

5 to 12

TWPLUS fibers

5 to 12

SMFLS fibers

5 to 12

G.656 fibers

5 to 12

G.654A fibers

5 to 10

TERA_LIGHT fibers

5 to 12

G.654B fibers

5 to 6

SYS port reflectance

dB

< -40

LINE port reflectance

dB

< -40

PDG

dB

<= 0.5

PMD

ps

<= 0.5

Pump wavelength

nm

1400 to 1500

Max. pump optical power

mW

>=700


nm

1529 to 1561

Input optical power

dBm

-30 to 6

Output optical power

dBm

-7 to 20

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2812


Item


Unit

Value


dBm

40 channels: -10


dBm

Nominal gain

dB

14

Channel gain

dB

14 to 23

Gain flatness

dB

< 2.0

Multichannel gain slope

dB/dB

< 2.0

PDG

dB

<= 0.5

PMD

ps

<= 0.5

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

VI-VO Inherent insertion lossc

dB

<= 1.5

VI-VO Dynamic attenuation rangec

dB

15

VI-VO Adjustment accuracyc

dB

1

80 channels: -13

40 channels: 4 80 channels: 1

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies according to the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The gain of the Raman module can be set to the maximum value. The actual gain of the board is a variable and depends on the fiber type and status. c: Only the TN12RAU1 board supports.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2813





l

Weight TN11RAU1: 2.5 kg (5.5 Ib.) TN12RAU1: 1.75 kg (3.85 Ib.)




TN11RAU1

55

70

TN12RAU1

35

52


24.10 RAU2 RAU2: backward raman and erbium doped Fiber hybrid optical amplifier Unit

24.10.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the RAU2 board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1R A U2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


2814



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 2R A U2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

When the RAU2 board is used in the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis, the TN23SCC board must be used.

Type Table 24-86 lists the types of the RAU2 board. Table 24-86 Type description of the RAU2 board Unit

Type

Description

RAU2

01

Adopts the backward pumping and optical amplification technology.


Function The TN12RAU2 board supports the line fiber quality monitoring function, fiber connection detect (FCD), quick shutdown of the Raman laser, and safe turn-on of the Raman laser while the TN11RAU2 board does not. For details, see 24.10.4 Functions and Features.

l

Appearance The front panels of the TN11RAU2 and TN12RAU2 boards are different. On the front panel of the TN12RAU2 board, there are the FCD button and indicator, interlock switch. There is no such button, indicator, or switch on the front panel of the TN11RAU2 board. For details, see 24.10.6 Front Panel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2815




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11RAU2

TN12RAU 2

The TN12RAU2 board can be created as 11RAU2 on the U2000. The board substitution does not require software upgrade. After the board substitution, the board only has the function of the TN11RAU2 board. That is, the board does not support the line fiber quality monitoring function, FCD, quick shutdown of the Raman laser, or safe turn-on of the Raman laser, but supports the interlock switch function.

TN12RAU2

None

-





Compared with the TN11RAU2 board, the TN12RAU2 board is newly added with functions such as the line fiber quality monitoring function, fiber connection detection, safe laser start detection, Raman laser fast shutdown, and interlock switch.






Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update



The TN11RAU2 board, serving as a backward Raman and EDFA hybrid unit, is added.


2816



24.10.3 Application As a type of optical amplifier unit, the RAU2 board integrates a backward Raman unit, an EDFA unit, and a VOA. Different from an EDFA, the RAU2 board improves system performance, and amplifies optical signals at the receive end.

NOTICE Always turn off the pump Raman laser of the RAU2 board before removing or inserting the fiber to the RAU2. Figure 24-44 shows two applications of the RAU2 board in a WDM system. Figure 24-44 Position of the RAU2 board in the WDM system (OTM site) OTU

M U X

OTU

OBU1

LINE

OUT

RC

IN RM SC1

TM

F I U

SYS

IN

D M U X

OTU

IN OUT

OTU

TM IN

SYS VO

OTU

VI VO TC

TC

OTU

D M U X

OUT

RAU2

F I U

VI LINE

RM

OUT

RAU2

SC1

RC OBU1

M U X

OTU OTU

When the RAU2 board is used on the OptiX OSN 3800, the OptiX OSN 3800 must function as an OLA site, as shown in Figure 24-45. The RAU2 board can be configured in only one direction. In the other direction, the TN21FIU+OAU combination can be used. Figure 24-45 Position of the RAU2 board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 3800 as an OLA site)

LINE

RC

OUT

RAU2

OUT

IN VI SYS

RM

VO

OUT

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

TM

SC2

TC IN

RM2

TM1

F TM I U RC

RM1 OUT

TM2 RM

OAU

IN


TC

F I U IN

2817



NOTE

When the RAU2 board works in gain mode, the FIU board connected to the SYS and IN ports on the RAU2 board must be TN14FIU.

24.10.4 Functions and Features The RAU2 board is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-87. Table 24-87 Functions and features of the RAU2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Integrates a backward Raman unit and an EDFA unit and amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber. l The TN12RAU2 board supports the interlock switch. The interlock switch of a LINE port on the panel controls the poweron and power-off of the board and prevents eyes from being injured by laser when an optical fiber is inserted into or removed from the LINE port.

Gain adjustment

The RAU2 continuously adjusts the gain continuously based on the input optical power: l G.652 fibers: 30dB to 41dB l LEAF fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.653 fibers: 32dB to 43dB l TWRS fibers: 32dB to 43dB l TW-C fibers: 32dB to 43dB l TWPLUS fibers: 32dB to 43dB l SMFLS fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.656 fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.654A fibers: 30dB to 41dB l TERA_LIGHT fibers: 32dB to 43dB l G.654B fibers: 27dB to 37dB NOTE Users can separately configure the gain adjustment point for the Raman amplifier and EDFA using the NMS.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2818




Description



Working mode

The Raman amplifier optical module supports the gain locking, maximum gain, and power locking modes. l In gain locking mode. This mode applies to multi-span or singleshort-span systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/ TWPLUS/SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In addition, the gain of the Raman unit is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the Raman unit. l The maximum gain mode applies to ultra-long-single-span systems that use G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/ SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers. In this mode, the Raman amplifier module automatically adjusts its pump power to ensure that its gain reaches the maximum value. In addition, users can query the actual gain of the Raman amplifier module. l In the pump power mode. This mode applies to systems that use any fibers but the G.652/G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C/TWPLUS/ SMFLS/G.656/G.654A/TERA_LIGHT/G.654B fibers or to situations in which the pump power of the Raman amplifier module must be adjusted manually. The EDFA optical module supports the gain locking and power locking modes. l In the gain locking mode, the gain of the EDFA module is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the EDFA module. The gain locking mode is enabled by default. l The power locking mode is used for the commissioning and fault location purposes.




l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. l The EDFA optical module can detect and report optical power. l The Raman amplifier optical module of the TN11RAU2 board supports return loss detection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2819




Description

Line fiber quality monitoring function

The OTDR function can be used on the U2000. Monitoring figures and data are displayed on the U2000. For details, see the Fiber Doctor System in the Feature Description. The Fiber Doctor Management System Software Fee License needs to be purchased for this function.

FCD function

The FCD button and indicator are provided. You can press the FCD button on the front panel to trigger FCD. The detection process and results can be identified by the FCD indicator blinking frequency and indicator status. For details, see 24.10.6 Front Panel.

Safe turn-on of the Raman laser

When the Raman laser is turned on, the OTDR meter function is automatically enabled to detect fiber connections and therefore ensure that the laser is properly started, avoiding fiber burning due to inappropriate fiber connections. If the Raman laser fails to be turned on, the line fiber quality monitoring function can be used to further identify fault points.

Quick shutdown of the Raman laser

The quick shutdown of the Raman laser is supported. When fiber removal or fiber cut occurs within 500 m around the site where the board housing the Raman laser is located, the pump light of the Raman laser can be shut down within 100 ms.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

NOTE Only the TN12RAU2 board supports the following functions: line fiber quality monitoring function, FCD, safe turn-on of the Raman laser, and quick shutdown of the Raman laser. When the TN12RAU2 board is connected to an ERPC or ROP board, the line fiber quality monitoring, FCD, safe Raman laser turn-on, and quick Raman laser shutdown functions cannot be normally used. In this case, you must disable the safe Raman laser turn-on and quick Raman laser shutdown functions on the NMS. If you have used the line fiber quality monitoring or FCD function, ignore the monitoring or detection results of the function.

24.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The RAU2 board consists of Raman optical module, EDFA optical module, OTDR drive and receiving module, VOA, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-46shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU2 board. Figure 24-47 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12RAU2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2820



Figure 24-46 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11RAU2 VI VO

MONS SYS

LINE

Signal

Signal

MONO

PAOUT VOA

Pump light Splitter Pump source Raman optical module Detection for Pumping current and pump light PIN temperature power and current control

TDC RDC

IN

OUT

Splitter EDFA optical module Detection Driving for PIN temperature current



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage

SCC



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2821



Figure 24-47 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12RAU2 MONS SYS

Signal

Signal LINE

Detection light Reflected light Light Receiver source

VI VO

Pump light Pump source

Splitter

IN

OTDR drive and receiving module

MONO

PAOUT

V O A

OUT

Splitter

Raman optical module

Detection for Pumping current and pump light PIN temperature power and current control

TDC RDC


EDFA optical module Driving PIN current



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse

SCC



Signal Flow The pump source of the RAU2 board transmits pump light to the WDM side through the LINE optical port. In addition, the RAU2 board receives a line optical signal through the LINE optical port after the optical signal is amplified by distributed amplifiers on the line. Then the splitter inside the Raman amplifier of the board splits the signal into two: One is the service signal and is output through the SYS optical port on the board and the other is sent to a multi-channel spectrum analyzer or test instrument through the MONS optical port for real-time performance monitoring. The board sends the service signal to the EDFA module through the IN optical port. The EDFA module performs power amplification and gain locking for the signal. Then the EDFA module outputs the signal to the DCM module through the TDC optical port for dispersion compensation and receives the signal again through the RDC optical port. The splitter inside the EDFA module then splits the signal in two: One is the service signal and is finally output through the OUT optical port. The other is sent to a multi-channel spectrum analyzer or test instrument through the MONO optical port for real-time performance monitoring. Before the multi-channel signal is sent to the IN optical port, it can be first sent to a VOA through the VI optical port on the VOA for power adjustment. After the power adjustment, the signal is output through the VO optical port on the VOA and then sent to the IN optical port. For the TN12RAU2 board, the light source emits detection signals to the optical fiber through the LINE optical port to monitor the line fiber quality. The Rayleigh scattering and Fresnel reflection signals are sent back to the receiver. After the received optical signals are processed, a fiber quality curve can be obtained. The fiber quality curve will display any abnormality in the optical fiber.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2822



Module Function l

Raman optical module – The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission. – The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the MONS interface for spectrum detection and supervising.

l

EDFA optical module – Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump light can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. – The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONO interface for detection.

l

OTDR drive and receiving module – Provides the OTDR light source modulation current. – Processes electrical signals from the receiver.

l


l

Driving and detection module – Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. – Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser. – Drives the pump laser. – Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

l


l


24.10.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the RAU2 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2823



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 24-48 and Figure 24-49 show the front panel of the RAU2 board. Figure 24-48 Front panel of the TN11RAU2 board

CAUTION

LAS

CAUTION


MONO MONS

OUT

IN

TDC RDC

VO

VI

SYS

LINE

RAU2

RAU2

STAT ACT PROG SRV


Figure 24-49 Front panel of the TN12RAU2 board

Button The FCD button is used to trigger fiber connection detect (FCD). The FCD results are indicated by the FCD indicator color. NOTE

When the FCD is normal, the FCD indicator is steady orange. If you press the FCD button again when the FCD indicator is steady orange, an FCD task may be started again and the detection will be prolonged.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2824





l


l


l


l

Laser emission status indicator (LAS) - green

l

Fiber connection detection indicator (FCD) - triple-colored (red, orange, green)


Interfaces Table 24-88lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-88 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RAU2 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


TDC/RDC

LC


MONO

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, monitors the performance of the OUT port online. The ratio of the MONO port power to the OUT port power is 1:99. In other words, the MONO port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB.

LINE

LSH/APC

Receives the line optical signal and sends the pump light.

SYS

LC

Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.

MONS

LC

Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8, monitors the performance of the SYS port online. The ratio of the MONS port power to the SYS port power is 1:99. In other words, the MONS port power is 20 dB less than the actual signal power calculated as follows: Psys (dBm) - Pmons (dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

VO

LC

Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal.

VI

LC

Receives the multiplexed signal.


2825



Interlock Switch Table 24-89 describes the mapping between the interlock switch status and the board status. Table 24-89 Interlock switch status Status

Description If the cover of an interlock switch is open, the board is powered off and the Raman laser is turned off. In such a case, an optical fiber can be inserted or removed.

If the cover of an interlock switch is closed, the board is powered on, and the Raman laser can be turned on through the U2000. In such a case, insertion or removal of an optical fiber is forbidden.

Laser Hazard Level RAU2: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

24.10.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one RAU2. Table 24-90shows the valid slots for the RAU2. Table 24-90 Valid slots for the board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18


IU2-IU16


2826



Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU17


IU2-IU4, IU11

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the RAU2 board, the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the RAU2 board, the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the RAU2 board, the slot number of the RAU2 displayed on the NM is IU2.


Display of Optical Interface The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-91. Table 24-91 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RAU2 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

IN

1

PAOUTa

2

RDC

3

OUT

4

TDC

5

MONO

6

VI

7

VO


2827




Interface on the NM

LINE

9

SYS

10

MONS

11

a: Virtual port.

24.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the RAU2, refer to Table 24-92. Table 24-92 RAU2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-





Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2828



Field

Value

Description




Default: none


-



-


Actual Band

-



-


Configure Band

C



All


-


Laser Status

Off, On


Default: All

Default: l OUT port: On l LINE port: Off Fast Pump Laser Shutdown upon Fiber Cut

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies whether to enable fast shutdown of pump lasers when fiber cuts are detected. NOTE Only the TN12RAU2 board supports this parameter.


2829



Field

Value

Description

Auto OTDR Detection upon Pump Laser Start

Disabled, Enabled

Specifies whether to enable automatic OTDR detection when pump lasers are started.

Default: Enabled

NOTE Only the TN12RAU2 board supports this parameter. When the automatic OTDR detection function is disabled for the pump laser on the TN12RAU2 board, the board cannot detect whether the end faces of its fiber connectors are contaminated. As a result, fiber burning may occur if the pump laser is turned on when the end face of a fiber connector on the board is contaminated.

Gain (dB)

-


Nominal Gain (dB)


Specifies the expected gain of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 11 dB, the actual gain is displayed as an invalid value.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



2830



Field

Value

Description


-



-

Displays the upper threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit. NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 11 dB, the actual gain is displayed as an invalid value.


-

Displays the lower threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit. NOTE When the insertion loss between the TDC and RDC ports is larger than 11 dB, the actual gain is displayed as an invalid value.


/

This parameter is available only when the Working Mode is set to Pump power for the LINE port. Changing the value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) directly influences the optical power of each wavelength on the line. If the fixed pump optical power value is less than the minimum value or greater than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Minimum Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-


Maximum Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

-



-



-



2831



Field

Value

Description


-



-



-30 to 30



The value can be set or queried. The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally. NOTE For the LINE port, the rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength input optical power. For the OUT port, the rated optical power is same as Nominal single wavelength output optical power. The default rated optical power is measured in an 80-wavelength system. It needs to be changed accordingly for a 40-wavelength system.

Fiber Type

G652 Fiber, G653 Fiber, LEAF Fiber, TWRS Fiber, TWC Fiber, TWPLUS Fiber, SMFLS Fiber, G654B Fiber, G656 Fiber, , G654A Fiber, TERA_LIGHT Fiber Default: G652 Fiber

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Specifies the fiber type. The gain range of the board varies according to the fiber type. NOTE When the Raman amplifier module works in gain locking or maximum gain mode, the fiber type must be configured for the module. To configure the fiber type, start the desired NE Explorer, select the board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface in the navigation tree. The actual fiber type must be the same as the fiber type specified in the Fiber/ Cable Management window.


2832



Field

Value

Description

Fiber Length(m)

0 to 4294967295


Default: /


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable



-60.0 to 50.0



0.5 to 10.0

Working Mode

l OUT port:

Default: /

Default:3

– Gain locking, Power locking – Default: Gain locking l LINE port: – Gain locking, Maximum power, Pump power

Specifies the threshold for the OAMS function to detect a line power abnormality. If the difference between the actual line power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds the specified abnormality threshold, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function. If the difference is less than the threshold, the U2000 will not issue a command to start the OAMS function. Specifies the working mode for an optical amplifier. For the OUT port, it specifies the working mode of the EDFA module; for the LINE port, it specifies the working mode of the Raman amplifier module. For more information on the working mode, see 24.10.4 Functions and Features.

– Default: Gain locking

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2833



Field

Value

Description

Power Value

-7 to 23


Default: 0




Channel Number Mode




-


ASE Calibration

Uncalibrated, Calibrated Default: Uncalibrated

Displays whether the system has calibrated the amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) noise power of ALC-enabled RAU2 boards. The ALC function can correctly adjust the optical amplifier gain on the link only after the ASE noise power of the ALCenabled RAU2 boards are calibrated.

Launch Power (dBm)

-60.0 to 60.0


24.10.10 RAU2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2834



Optical Specifications Table 24-93 Optical specifications of the RAU2 board Item RAU2 board specific ations

Unit

Value


nm

1529 to 1561

Gain range

dB

G.652 fibers

30 to 41

LEAF fibers

32 to 43

G.653 fibers

32 to 43

TWRS fibers

32 to 43

TW-C fibers

32 to 43

TWPLUS fibers

32 to 43

SMFLS fibers

32 to 43

G.656 fibers

32 to 43

G.654A fibers

30 to 41

TERA_LIGHT fibers

32 to 43

G.654B fibers

27 to 37

G.652 fibers

< 1.5 (30 dB gain)

LEAF fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

G.653 fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

TWRS fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

TW-C fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

TWPLUS fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

SMFLS fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

G.656 fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

G.654A fibers

< 1.5 (30 dB gain)

TERA_LIGHT fibers

< 1.0 (32 dB gain)

G.654B fibers

< 4.0 (27 dB gain)

G.652 fibers

< 3.0

LEAF fibers

< 3.0

G.653 fibers

< 3.0

Equivalent noise figurea

Gain flatness (LINE port to OUT port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

dB

dB


2835


Item

Raman module specific ations


Unit

Value TWRS fibers

< 3.0

TW-C fibers

< 3.0

TWPLUS fibers

< 3.0

SMFLS fibers

< 3.0

G.656 fibers

< 3.0

G.654A fibers

< 3.0

TERA_LIGHT fibers

< 3.0

G.654B fibers

< 3.0

LINE port input optical power

dBm

-42 to -2

Max. OUT port optical power

dBm

20

Pump wavelength for the LINE port

nm

1400 to 1500

Pump optical power of the LINE port

nW

>=700

PDG

dB

<= 0.7

PMD

ps

<= 0.7


nm

1529 to 1561

Input optical power

dBm

<= 2

Valid gainb

dB

G.652 fibers

5 to 10

LEAF fibers

5 to 12

G.653 fibers

5 to 12

TWRS fibers

5 to 12

TW-C fibers

5 to 12

TWPLUS fibers

5 to 12

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2836


Item

EDFA specific ations


Unit

Value SMFLS fibers

5 to 12

G.656 fibers

5 to 12

G.654A fibers

5 to 10

TERA_LIGHT fibers

5 to 12

G.654B fibers

5 to 6

SYS port reflectance

dB

< -40

LINE port reflectance

dB

< -40

PDG

dB

<= 0.5

PMD

ps

<= 0.5

Pump wavelength

nm

1400 to 1500

Max. pump optical power

mW

>=700


nm

1529 to 1561

Input optical power

dBm

-32 to 0


dBm

-1 to 20


dBm

40 channels: -16


dBm

Nominal gain

dB

20

Channel gain

dB

20 to 31

Gain flatness

dB

< 2.0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

80 channels: -19

40 channels: 4 80 channels: 1


2837


Item


Unit

Value

Multichannel gain slope

dB/dB

< 1.0 ± 0.5

VI-VO Inherent insertion loss

dB

<= 1.5

VI-VO Dynamic attenuation range

dB

15

VI-VO Adjustment accuracy

dB

1

PDG

dB

<= 0.5

PMD

ps

<= 0.5

Input reflectance

dB

< -40

Output reflectance

dB

< -40

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies according to the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The gain of the Raman module can be set to the maximum value. The actual gain of the board is a variable and depends on the fiber type and status.



l

Weight TN11RAU2: 2.58 kg (5.69 Ib.) TN12RAU2: 1.75 kg (3.85 Ib.)

Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board



TN11RAU2

55

70

TN12RAU2

35

52


2838


Board





Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2839

25 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board


25

Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board

About This Chapter 25.1 Overview A cross-connect board establishes physical channels for electrical signals on service boards inside a subrack, and grooms electrical signals by working with the service boards. The system control and communication board is the control center for the equipment. It helps the NM system to manage the boards of the equipment and enables the equipment to communicate with each other. 25.2 USXH USXH: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board 25.3 UXCT UXCT: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board 25.4 SXM SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 25.5 SXH SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 25.6 XCT XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 25.7 TN52UXCM TN52UXCM: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board 25.8 XCM XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support highcross and low-cross) 25.9 UXCH UXCH: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board 25.10 XCH XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2840



25.11 TN16XCH TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board 25.12 TN16UXCM TN16UXCM: 1.6T Universal Cross Connect, System Control and Clock Processing Board 25.13 XCS XCS: centralized cross connect board 25.14 SCC SCC: system control and communication board 25.15 AUX AUX: system auxiliary interface board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2841



25.1 Overview A cross-connect board establishes physical channels for electrical signals on service boards inside a subrack, and grooms electrical signals by working with the service boards. The system control and communication board is the control center for the equipment. It helps the NM system to manage the boards of the equipment and enables the equipment to communicate with each other.

Positions of Cross-Connect Boards in a WDM System Figure 25-1 shows the positions of cross-connect boards in a WDM system. Figure 25-1 Positions of cross-connect boards in a WDM system Cross-connect board Clientside

OTN Tributary board

OTN/Universal line board ODUk

Clientside

OTN/Universal line board

Packet service board Packet service board

Packet/Universal line board Packet

Packet/Universal line board

OCS board Clientside

WDM side

OCS/Universal line board VC-n OCS/Universal line board

WDM side

Line side

Client service add/dropped from the WDM/line-side Pass-through WDM service Pass-through client service

Mapping Between Cross-Connect Boards and Subrack Types

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Subrack Type

Cross-Connect Board

Cross-Connect Capacity


TNK4SXH, TNK2SXH, TNK4SXM, TNK2SXM, TNK4XCT, and TNK2XCT

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 CrossConnect Capacities


2842



Subrack Type

Cross-Connect Board

Cross-Connect Capacity


TNK2USXH, TNK2UXCT, TNK4SXH, TNK4SXM, and TNK4XCT


TN52UXCH, TN52UXCM, TN52XCH, and TN52XCM


8800 T16 Subrack

TN16XCHa, and TN16UXCMa


6800 Subrack

TN12XCS and TN11XCS

OptiX OSN 6800 Cross-Connect Capacities


a: The TN16UXCM/TN16XCH has integrated with the functions of a cross-connect board, system control board, and clock board.

Mapping Between System Control and Communication Board and Subrack Types Product

Board

Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack

TNK2SCC

General OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack

TNK2SCC


TN52SCC


TN51SCC and TN52SCC

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack

TN16SCC

OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack

TN52SCC


TN11SCC, TN51SCC and TN52SCC


TN22SCC and TN23SCC. NOTE Only the TN23SCC board supports the boards and features newly added to the OptiX OSN 3800 V100R007C00 version and later versions; the TN22SCC board does not.

Mapping Between System Auxiliary Interface Board and Subrack Types

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Board


TN52AUX


2843



Product

Board


TN51AUX/TN52AUX


TN52AUX


TN51AUX/TN52AUX


TN16AUX


TN11AUX/TN12AUX


TN21AUX/TN22AUX

25.2 USXH USXH: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board

25.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the USXH board is TNK2. The USXH board is only used on the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN K2 US XH

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2844





Added the TNK2USXH board.

The TNK2USXH board applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 enhanced subrack to support up to 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connections. The TNK2USXH board can work with the UXCT board to cross-connect a maximum of 6.4 Tbit/ s ODUk (k = 0/1/2/2e/3/4/flex) signals.

25.2.3 Application As a type of cross-connect unit, the USXH board cross-connects services. The USXH board applies to enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. For the position of the USXH board in the system, see Figure 25-2 and Figure 25-3.

Independent use of the USXH board Figure 25-2 Position of the USXH board in the OCS system 1 SLO16

STM-16

1

SLD64

SLD64 USXH

USXH SLD64

SLD64

8

STM-16

SLO16

8

Joint use of the USXH board and the UXCT board Figure 25-3 Position of the USXH board in the WDM system G.694.1

G.694.1 NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

TOM

4

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4

UXCT USXH

NS2 Client side

4

DMUX

WDM side

MUX 4

UXCT USXH

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side

Client side

NOTE

For a subrack with USXH boards but without UXCT boards, the UXCT boards must be installed if ODUk transmission is required. When adding the UXCT boards, install the physical UXCT boards before creating their logical boards; otherwise, the existing SDH services on the subrack will be interrupted.

25.2.4 Functions and Features The USXH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2845



For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-1. Table 25-1 Functions and features of the USXH board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Grooms services.

Cross-connect function

Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming. Supports a maximum of 6.4 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) cross-connect grooming when the USXH board is jointly used with the UXCT board. Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 6.4 Tbit/s.

Protection scheme

l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection. l provides 1+1 hot backup. l provides 1+1 warm backup.

Switching mode

Supports manual switching and auto switching. Supports non-revertive switching.


Supported

25.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The USXH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the USXH board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2846



Figure 25-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the USXH board Backplane(service cross-connection)

ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex/VC-4


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


l


25.2.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the USXH board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2847



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-5 shows the front panel of the USXH board. Figure 25-5 Front panel of the USXH board

USXH

STAT ACT PROG SRV

USXH

NOTICE : Indicates that the board surface temperature is high and it may cause bodily injuries. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2848





l


l


l



Interfaces The USXH board does not provide external interfaces.

25.2.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one USXH board. Table 25-2 shows the valid slots for the USXH board. Table 25-2 Valid slots for the USXH board Product

Valid Slots


IU10, IU44

25.2.8 USXH Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)

l


Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Power Consumption at Warm Backup (Room Temperature) (W)

Power Consumption at Warm Backup (High Temperature) a (W)

Typical Power Consumption at Room Temperature (W)

Maximum Power Consumption a (W)

TNK2USXH +TNK2UXCT

169

186

630-7.4 x (64-n)

693-8.1 x (64-n)


2849



Board





a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the USXH and UXCT must be configured. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

25.3 UXCT UXCT: 6.4T Universal Cross Connect Board

25.3.1 Version Description The available functional version of the UXCT board is TNK2. The UXCT board is only used on the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN K2 UX CT

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N



2850





Added the TN52UXCT board.

The TN52UXCT board applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 enhanced subrack. The TN52UXCT board can work with the USXH board to cross-connect a maximum of 6.4 Tbit/ s ODUk (k = 0/1/2/2e/3/4/flex) signals.

25.3.3 Application As a type of cross-connect unit, the UXCT board works with the USXH board to cross-connect ODUk signals. The UXCT board applies to enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. For the position of the UXCT board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-6. Figure 25-6 Position of the UXCT board in the WDM system G.694.1


TOM

4

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4

UXCT USXH

NS2 Client side

4

DMUX

MUX 4

WDM side

UXCT USXH

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side

Client side

NOTE

For a subrack with USXH boards but without UXCT boards, the UXCT boards must be installed if ODUk transmission is required. When adding the UXCT boards, install the physical UXCT boards before creating their logical boards; otherwise, the existing SDH services on the subrack will be interrupted.

25.3.4 Functions and Features The UXCT board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-3. Table 25-3 Functions and features of the UXCT board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Grooms services.


Supports a maximum of 6.4 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) cross-connect grooming when the UXCT board is jointly used with the USXH board.


2851




Description

Protection scheme


Switching mode



Supported

25.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The UXCT board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the UXCT board. Figure 25-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the UXCT board ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex Backplane(service cross-connection)


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


2852



Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


l


25.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the UXCT board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-8 shows the front panel of the UXCT board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2853



Figure 25-8 Front panel of the UXCT board

UXCT

STAT ACT PROG SRV

UXCT

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2854



NOTICE : Indicates that the board surface temperature is high and it may cause bodily injuries.



l


l


l



Interfaces The UXCT board does not provide external interfaces.

25.3.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one UXCT board. Table 25-4 shows the valid slots for the UXCT board. Table 25-4 Valid slots for the UXCT board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU43

25.3.8 UXCT Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2855








TNK2USXH +TNK2UXCT

169

186

630-7.4 x (64-n)

693-8.1 x (64-n)

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the USXH and UXCT must be configured. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

25.4 SXM SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

25.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SXM board are TNK2 and TNK4. The SXM board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN K2 SX M

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2856



Boa rd





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN K4 SX M

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Differences Between Versions The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 25.4.8 SXM Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Table 25-5 Substitution rules of the SXM board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TNK2SXM

TNK4SXM

The TNK4SXM can be created as K2SXM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4SXM functions as the TNK2SXM.

TNK4SXM

None

None




Added the TNK4SXM board.

Compared with the TNK2SXM board, the TNK4SXM board has lower power consumption.

25.4.3 Application As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXM board cross-connects services. The SXM board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2857



For the position of the SXM board in the system, see Figure 25-9 and Figure 25-10.

Independent use of the SXM board Figure 25-9 Position of the SXM board in the OCS system

SLO1 6

STM-16

1

SLQ6 4

SLQ6 4

1 SXM

SLO1 6

SXM SLQ6 4

SLQ6 4

8

STM-16

8

Joint use of the SXM board and the XCT board Figure 25-10 Position of the SXM board in the WDM system G.694. 1

G.694. 1 NS2 100Mbit/s 2.5Gbit/s

TOM

XCT

4

MUX

DMUX 4

4

4

SXM

NS2

4

DMUX

MUX 4

WDM side

Client side

NS2 SXM

XCT

TOM

100Mbit/s 2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side

Client side

NOTICE For a subrack with SXH/SXM boards but without XCT boards, the XCT boards must be installed if ODUk transmission is required. When adding the XCT boards, install the physical XCT boards before creating their logical boards; otherwise, the existing SDH services on the subrack will be interrupted.

25.4.4 Functions and Features The SXM board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-6. Table 25-6 Functions and features of the SXM board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Grooms services. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2858




Description


Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming. Supports a maximum of 80 Gbit/s lower-order VC-12 and VC-3 cross-connect grooming. Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) cross-connect grooming when the SXM board is jointly used with the XCT board.

Protection scheme


Switching mode



Supported

25.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SXM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2859



Figure 25-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board VC-12/VC-3/VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/ODU3/ODUflex



Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/VC-3/VC-12/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


l


25.4.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the SXM board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2860



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-12 shows the front panel of the SXM board. Figure 25-12 Front panel of the SXM board

SXM

STAT ACT PROG SRV

SXM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2861






l


l


l



Interfaces The SXM board does not provide external interfaces.

25.4.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one SXM board. Table 25-7 shows the valid slots for the TNK2SXM board. Table 25-7 Valid slots for the TNK2SXM board Product

Valid Slots


IU10, IU44

Table 25-8 shows the valid slots for the TNK4SXM board. Table 25-8 Valid slots for the TNK4SXM board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots


IU10, IU44


IU10, IU44


2862



25.4.8 SXM Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications TNK2SXM: l


l


TNK4SXM: l


l

Weight: 3.00 kg (6.59 lb.)






TNK2SXM +TNK2XCT

190

209

530-3.6 x (64-n)

583-3.6 x (64-n)

TNK4SXM +TNK4XCT

97

107

188-1.2 x (64-n)

207-1.32 x (64n)

TNK2SXM +TNK4XCT

173

190

378-2.5 x (64-n)

416-2.5 x (64-n)

TNK4SXM +TNK2XCT

114

125

324-2.5 x (64-n)

356-2.5 x (64-n)

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM and XCT must be configured. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

25.5 SXH SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2863



25.5.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SXH board are TNK2 and TNK4. The SXH board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N K2 S X H

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

T N K4 S X H

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Differences Between Versions The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 25.5.8 SXH Specifications.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TNK2SXH

TNK4SXH

The TNK4SXH can be created as K2SXH on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4SXH functions as the TNK2SXH.

TNK4SXH

None

None


2864



25.5.2 Update Description This section describes the hardware updates in V100R006C01 and later versions as well as the reasons for the updates and the corresponding information updates. Any product versions that are not listed in the document means that they have no hardware updates.



Added the TNK4SXH board.

Compared with the TNK2SXH board, the TNK4SXH board has lower power consumption.

25.5.3 Application As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXH board cross-connects services. The SXH board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. For the position of the SXH board in the system, see Figure 25-13 and Figure 25-14.

Independent use of the SXH board Figure 25-13 Position of the SXH board in the OCS system 1 SLO16

STM-16

1

SLQ64

SLQ64 SXH

SLQ64

SLQ64

8

STM-16

SLO16

SXH

8

Joint use of the SXH board and the XCT board Figure 25-14 Position of the SXH board in the WDM system G.694.1


TOM

XCT

SXH

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4 NS2

Client side

4

4

DMUX

WDM side

MUX 4

XCT

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side


SXH

Client side

2865




25.5.4 Functions and Features The SXH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-9. Table 25-9 Functions and features of the SXH board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Grooms services.


Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming.

Protection scheme

l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection.

Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) cross-connect grooming when the SXH board is jointly used with the XCT board.

l provides 1+1 hot backup. l provides 1+1 warm backup. Switching mode



Supported

25.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SXH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2866



Figure 25-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board Backplane(service cross-connection)

VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/ODU3/ODUflex


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


l


25.5.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the SXH board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2867



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-16 shows the front panel of the SXH board. Figure 25-16 Front panel of the SXH board

SXH

STAT ACT PROG SRV

SXH

NOTICE : Indicates that the board surface temperature is high and it may cause bodily injuries. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2868





l


l


l



Interfaces The SXH board does not provide external interfaces.

25.5.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one SXH board. Table 25-10 shows the valid slots for the TNK2SXH board. Table 25-10 Valid slots for the TNK2SXH board Product

Valid Slots


IU10, IU44

Table 25-11 shows the valid slots for the TNK4SXH board. Table 25-11 Valid slots for the TNK4SXH board Product

Valid Slots


IU10, IU44


IU10, IU44

25.5.8 SXH Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications TNK2SXH: Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2869



l


l

Weight: 3.74 kg (8.1lb.)

TNK4SXH: l


l

Weight: 2.68 kg (5.8Ib.)






TNK2SXH +TNK2XCT

130

143

470-3.6 x (64-n)

517-3.6 x (64-n)

TNK4SXH +TNK4XCT

95

105

169-1.2 x (64-n)

186-1.32 x (64n)

TNK2SXH +TNK4XCT

113

124

318-2.5 x (64-n)

350-2.5 x (64-n)

TNK4SXH +TNK2XCT

112

123

321-2.5 x (64-n)

353-2.5 x (64-n)

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXH and XCT must be configured. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

25.6 XCT XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

25.6.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the XCT board are TNK2 and TNK4. The XCT board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2870








8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN K2 XC T

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN K4 XC T

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Differences Between Versions The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 25.6.8 XCT Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TNK2XCT

TNK4XCT

The TNK4XCT can be created as K2XCT on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4XCT functions as the TNK2XCT.

TNK4XCT

None

None


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2871





Added the TNK4XCT board.

Compared with the TNK2XCT board, the TNK4XCT board has lower power consumption.

25.6.3 Application As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCT board is used with the SXH/SXM board to implement cross-connect grooming. The XCT board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks. For the position of the XCT board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-17. Figure 25-17 Position of the XCT board in the WDM system G.694.1


TOM

XCT

SXH / SXM

4

MUX

DMUX 4

4

4 NS2

4

DMUX

MUX 4

WDM side

Client side

NS2 SXH XCT / SXM

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side

Client side


25.6.4 Functions and Features The XCT board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-12. Table 25-12 Functions and features of the XCT board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Grooms services.


Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) cross-connect grooming when the XCT board is jointly used with the SXM/SXH board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2872




Description

Protection scheme


Switching mode



Supported

25.6.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The XCT board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board. Figure 25-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ODUflex



Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


2873



Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l


l


25.6.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the XCT board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-19 shows the front panel of the XCT board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2874



Figure 25-19 Front panel of the XCT board

XCT

STAT ACT PROG SRV

XCT

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2875






l


l


l



Interfaces The XCT board does not provide external interfaces.

25.6.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one XCT board. Table 25-13 shows the valid slots for the TNK2XCT board. Table 25-13 Valid slots for the TNK2XCT board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU43

Table 25-14 shows the valid slots for the TNK4XCT board. Table 25-14 Valid slots for the TNK4XCT board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU43


IU9, IU43


2876



25.6.8 XCT Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications TNK2XCT: l

Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H))

l


TNK4XCT: l

Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H))

l


Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board





TNK2SXM +TNK2XCT

190

209

530-3.6 x (64-n)

583-3.6 x (64-n)

TNK2SXH +TNK2XCT

130

143

470-3.6 x (64-n)

517-3.6 x (64-n)

TNK4SXM +TNK4XCT

97

107

188-1.2 x (64-n)

207-1.32 x (64n)

TNK4SXH +TNK4XCT

95

105

169-1.2 x (64-n)

186-1.32 x (64n)

TNK2SXM +TNK4XCT

173

190

378-2.5 x (64-n)

416-2.5 x (64-n)

TNK4SXM +TNK2XCT

114

125

324-2.5 x (64-n)

356-2.5 x (64-n)

TNK2SXH +TNK4XCT

113

124

318-2.5 x (64-n)

350-2.5 x (64-n)

TNK4SXH +TNK2XCT

112

123

321-2.5 x (64-n)

353-2.5 x (64-n)


2877



Board





a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM/SXH and XCT must be configured. "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

25.7 TN52UXCM TN52UXCM: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board

25.7.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the TN52UXCM board is available, that is TN52.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 52U XC M

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N



2878





Added the support for the TN52UXCM boards in the general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. The use of the two new boards increases the OTN cross-connect capacity of the subrack from 1.28 Tbit/s to 2.56 Tbit/s and supports grooming of 640 Gbit/s packet services and 80 Gbit/s VC-3/VC-12 services.




Added the TN52UXCM board.

The TN52UXCM board applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 enhanced subrack to cross-connect 3.2 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0/1/2/2e/3/4/flex) signals, 1.28 Tbit/s VC–4 signals, and 80 Gbit/s VC-3/VC-12 signals and to switch 1.6 Tbit/s Ethernet packet services.

25.7.3 Application The TN52UXCM board is a cross-connect board. It implements cross-connections of ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, flex)/VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 services and packet switching of Ethernet services. The TN52UXCM board applies to enhanced and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks. For the position of the TN52UXCM in the OCS system, see Figure 25-20. For the position of the TN52UXCM in the WDM system, see Figure 25-21 and Figure 25-22. Figure 25-20 Position of the TN52UXCM in the OCS system 1 SLO16

STM-16

8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

SLQ64

1

SLQ64

UXCM

UXCM SLQ64

SLQ64


STM-16

SLO16

8

2879



Figure 25-21 Position of the TN52UXCM in the WDM system (ODUk cross-connect) G.694.1

G.694.1 4

NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

UXCM

TOM

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4 NS2

Client side

MUX

DMUX

4

MUX 4

UXCM

TOM

NS2 WDM side

WDM side

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

Client side

Figure 25-22 Position of the TN52UXCM in the WDM system (Packet switch) G.694.1

G.694.1 MUX GE

EG16

UXCM

PND2

PND2 DMUX

Client side

DMUX UXCM

EG16

GE

MUX

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

25.7.4 Functions and Features The main function and feature of the UXCM is the cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-15. Table 25-15 Functions and features of the TN52UXCM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Grooms services.


2880




Description

Cross-connect functions

Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: l Cross-connects a maximum of 3.2 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) signals. l Performs packet switching of a maximum of 1.6 Tbit/s Ethernet services. l Cross-connects a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 signals. l Cross-connects a maximum of 80 Gbit/s VC-3/VC-12 signals. l Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 3.2 Tbit/s. General OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: l Cross-connects a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) signals. l Performs packet switching of a maximum of 640 Gbit/s Ethernet services. l Cross-connects a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 signals. l Cross-connects a maximum of 80 Gbit/s VC-3/VC-12 signals. l Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 2.56 Tbit/s.

Protection scheme


Switching mode

Supports the manual switching and auto switching. Supports the non-revertive switching.


Supported

25.7.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN52UXCM board consists of the ODUk/VC cross-connect module, packet switch module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the UXCM.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2881



Figure 25-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the UXCM Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e /ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex/VC4/VC-3/VC-12

Packets

ODUk/VC cross-connect module

Packet switch module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

ODUk/VC cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives the data from each service board through the backplane to implement the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) signals or VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service board to complete service cross-connection.

l

Packet switch module The packet switch module receives packets from the packet processing boards through the backplane and sends services to the packet processing boards. In this manner, the packet switch module implements packet switching of Ethernet services.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2882



l


25.7.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the TN52UXCM front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-24 shows the TN52UXCM front panel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2883



Figure 25-24 TN52UXCM front panel

UXCM

STAT ACT PROG SRV

UXCM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2884






l


l


l



Interfaces The TN52UXCM does not provide external interfaces.

25.7.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one UXCM board. Table 25-16 shows the valid slots for the TN52UXCM board. Table 25-16 Valid slots for the UXCM board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

25.7.8 TN52UXCM Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: 27.2 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2885








TN52UXCM

119

131

372 - 7.4 x (32 n) -24 x m

409 - 8.1 x (32 n) -26.4 x m

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE l "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack. l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 0. l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 1.

25.8 XCM XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support highcross and low-cross)

25.8.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the XCM board is available, that is TN52.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 52X CM

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2886



25.8.2 Application The XCM board is a cross-connect board. It supports 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, or flex)/VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 cross-connections. The XCM board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks For the position of the XCM in the OCS system, see Figure 25-25. For the position of the XCM in the WDM system, see Figure 25-26. Figure 25-25 Position of the XCM in the OCS system 1

SLQ64 SLO16

STM-16

1

SLQ64

XCM

XCM SLQ64

8

STM-16

SLO16

SLQ64

8

Figure 25-26 Position of the XCM in the WDM system G.694.1


XCM

TOM

4

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4 NS2

Client side

4

DMUX

WDM side

MUX 4

XCM

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side

Client side

25.8.3 Functions and Features The main function and feature of the XCM is the cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-17. Table 25-17 Functions and features of the XCM Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Grooms services.

Cross-connect functions

l Implements cross-connection of 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex)/VC-4 signals. l Implements cross-connection of 80 Gbit/s VC-3/VC-12 signals.

Protection scheme

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot backup.


2887




Description

Switching mode



Supported

25.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The XCM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCM. Figure 25-27 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCM ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex/ ODU3/VC-4/VC-3/VC-12

Backplane (for service cross-connection)


Control Storage

CPU

communication

Control and communication module Voltages for boards Power module Fuse

DC power provided by the backplane

SCC

Backplane (for SCC control)

Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives the data from each service board through the backplane to implement the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) signals or

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2888



VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service board to complete service cross-connection. l


l


25.8.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the XCM front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-28 shows the XCM front panel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2889



Figure 25-28 XCM front panel

XCM

STAT ACT PROG SRV

XCM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2890






l


l


l



Interfaces The XCM does not provide external interfaces.

25.8.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one XCM board. Table 25-18 shows the valid slots for the XCM board. Table 25-18 Valid slots for the XCM board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

25.8.7 XCM Board Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: 27.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)

l

Weight: 3.84 kg (8.45 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2891








TN52XCM01

125

138

339 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m

368 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m

TN52XCM02

67

73.7

124 - 1.12 x (32 - n) -80 x m

136.4 - 1.12 x (32 - n) -80 x m

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE l "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack. l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 0. l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 1.

25.9 UXCH UXCH: 3.2T Universal Cross Connect Board

25.9.1 Version Description The available functional version of the UXCH board is TN52.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 52U XC H

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2892






Added the support for the TN52UXCH board in the general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. The use of the two new boards increases the OTN cross-connect capacity of the subrack from 1.28 Tbit/s to 2.56 Tbit/s and supports grooming of 640 Gbit/s packet services.




Added the TN52UXCH board.

The TN52UXCH board applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 enhanced subrack to cross-connect 3.2 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0/1/2/2e/3/4/flex) signals and 1.28 Tbit/s VC–4 signals and to switch 1.6 Tbit/s Ethernet packet services.

25.9.3 Application The UXCH board is a cross-connect board and applies to enhanced and general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks. It can cross-connect ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) signals and VC-4 signals and performs packet switching of Ethernet services. For the position of the UXCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-29 and Figure 25-30. For the position of the UXCH in the OCS system, see Figure 25-31. Figure 25-29 Position of the UXCH board in the WDM system (ODUk cross-connection) G.694.1


TOM

UXCH

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4 NS2

Client side

4

4

DMUX

MUX 4

WDM side


UXCH

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2 WDM side

Client side

2893



Figure 25-30 Position of the UXCH board in the WDM system (Packet switch) G.694.1

G.694.1 MUX GE

UXCH

EG16

DMUX PND2

PND2 DMUX

Client side

UXCH

EG16

GE

MUX WDM side

WDM side

Client side

Figure 25-31 Position of the UXCH in the OCS system 1

SLQ64 SLO16

STM-16

UXCH

UXCH SLQ64

8

1

SLQ64

STM-16

SLO16

SLQ64

8

25.9.4 Functions and Features The UXCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-19. Table 25-19 Functions and features of the UXCH board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Implements grooming of services.


2894




Description


Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: l Cross-connects a maximum of 3.2 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) signals. l Performs packet switching of a maximum of 1.6 Tbit/s Ethernet services. l Cross-connects a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 signals. l Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 3.2 Tbit/s. General OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack: l Cross-connects a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) signals. l Performs packet switching of a maximum of 640 Gbit/s Ethernet services. l Cross-connects a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 signals. l Supports hybrid transmission of the above-mentioned services with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 2.56 Tbit/s.

Protection scheme

l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection. l Provides 1+1 hot backup. l Provides 1+1 warm backup.

Switching mode



Supported

25.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The UXCH board consists of the ODUk/VC cross-connect module, packet switch module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the UXCH board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2895



Figure 25-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the UXCH board Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ ODU3/ODU4/ODUflex/VC-4

Packets

ODUk/VC cross-connect module


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

ODUk/VC cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4 or flex) service and VC-4 service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l

Packet switch module The packet switch module receives packets from the packet processing boards through the backplane and sends services to the packet processing boards. In this manner, the packet switch module implements packet switching of Ethernet services.

l


l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2896




25.9.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the UXCH board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-33 shows the front panel of the UXCH board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2897



Figure 25-33 Front panel of the UXCH board

UXCH

STAT ACT PROG SRV

UXCH

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2898






l


l


l



Interfaces The UXCH board does not provide external interfaces.

25.9.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one UXCH board. Table 25-20 shows the valid slots for the UXCH board. Table 25-20 Valid slots for the UXCH board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

25.9.8 UXCH Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2899








TN52UXCH

87

96

340 - 7.4 x (32 n)

374 - 8.1 x (32 n)

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

25.10 XCH XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board

25.10.1 Version Description The available functional version of the XCH board is TN52.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 52X CH

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

NOTE

The TN52XCH board are available in two variants: TN52XCH01 and TN52XCH02. The two board variants are interchangeable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2900



25.10.2 Application The XCH board is a cross-connect board. It supports 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, or flex)/VC-4 cross-connections. The XCH board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks For the position of the XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-34. For the position of the XCH board in the OCS system, see Figure 25-35 Figure 25-34 Position of the XCH board in the WDM system G.694.1

G.694.1 4

NS2 100Mbit/s-

DMUX 4

2.5Gbit/s

NS2

4

DMUX

MUX 4

XCH

100Mbit/s-

TOM

2.5Gbit/s NS2 Client side

WDM side

WDM side

Client side

NS2 4

4

XCH

TOM

MUX

Figure 25-35 Position of the XCH board in the OCS system 1

SLQ64 SLO16

STM-16

XCH

XCH SLQ64

8

1

SLQ64

STM-16

SLO16

SLQ64

8

25.10.3 Functions and Features The XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-21. Table 25-21 Functions and features of the XCH board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function



Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex)/VC-4 signals.

Protection scheme

Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot backup. Supports warm backup.


2901




Description

Switching mode



Supported

25.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-36 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board. Figure 25-36 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex/ODU3/VC-4



Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, or flex)/VC-4 service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2902



l


l


25.10.5 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the XCH board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-37 shows the front panel of the XCH board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2903



Figure 25-37 Front panel of the XCH board

XCH

STAT ACT PROG SRV

XCH

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2904






l


l


l



Interfaces The XCH board does not provide external interfaces.

25.10.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one XCH board. Table 25-22 shows the valid slots for the XCH board. Table 25-22 Valid slots for the XCH board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

25.10.7 TN52XCH Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



l

Weight: 3.40 kg (7.49 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2905








TN52XCH01

65

72

243 - 3.6 x (32 n)

267.3 - 3.6 x (32 - n)

TN52XCH02

43

47.3

101 - 1.12 x (32 - n)

111 - 1.12 x (32 - n)


25.11 TN16XCH TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board

25.11.1 Version Description TThe available functional version of the XCH board is TN16.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 16X CH

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2906






Deleted BIOS state D for the TN16XCH board.

Function enhancement: Software automatically clears the database, and no manual operation is required.



Optimized the database clearing method of system control boards to shorten the database clearing and synchronization duration.

Function enhancement: The database clearing method of system control boards is optimized.

25.11.3 Application The TN16XCH, a cross-connect and system control board, implements communication between equipment, synchronizes physical clocks and PTP clocks on the entire NE, implements service cross-connections, and manages each board on the equipment with the U2000. The TN16XCH board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks. For the position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-38. Figure 25-38 Position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system External clock

External clock

TN16ATE

TN16ATE G.694.1

G.694.1 4 4

TQX

4

TN16 XCH

4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

DMUX 4

NQ2

NQ2 4

Client side

MUX

DMUX

WDM side

4

TN16 4 XCH

TQX

4

MUX 4 WDM side


Client side

2907


l


Principles for configuring main control boards in OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks: – Electrical subracks (in which centralized cross-connection grooming is implemented for services): The TN16XCH/TN16UXCM boards must be configured. – Optical subracks (master): The TN16SCC boards must be configured. – Optical subracks (slave): No main control boards are required.

l

Principles for configuring main control boards in /OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: – Master subracks: Main control boards must be configured. – Slave subracks: Main control boards cannot be configured.

l

Principles for configuring main control boards in other types of subracks: – Main control boards must be configured in both master and slave subracks.

25.11.4 Functions and Features The TN16XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer, system control function and clock function. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-23. Table 25-23 Functions and features of the TN16XCH board Function and Feature

Description


Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 640 Gbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, flex) signals.

System control function

l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack.

NOTE The TN16XCH board does not support the system control function when the subrack housing the board is a slave subrack.

l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the TN16XCH. l Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC. l Implements communication between NEs when used with the TN16AUX by using DCC bytes. l Supports subrack cascading. The TN16XCH board processes subrack overheads and alarms and delivers configurations to slave subracks. It connects to the U2000 so that the U2000 can manage the entire NE.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2908




Description

Clock function

l Basic function: – Locks the reference clock source. – Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G.813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals. – Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream system. l Clock source selection function: Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the system. l Time synchronization function: Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.

Protection scheme

Supports 1+1 protection. Provides 1+1 hot backup. Supports warm backup.

Switching mode



Supported

25.11.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN16XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-39 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2909



Figure 25-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board Service cross-connection from backplane (ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex/ODU3)

Time signals/ Clock signals

Clock processing module


CPU and control module

Monitoring module

Power supply module

Overhead processing module


Required voltage

Fuse

Backplane

DC power supply from a backplane Other boards

Module Function l

Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3 or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection.

l

Clock procession module Provides a synchronous clock signal for the system. The system clock supports three modes: free-run, holdover, and locked. When the system clock runs in lock mode, the it synchronizes to the line/external clock, tributary clock, or OSC board clock. This module also supports IEEE 1588v2 time and frequency synchronization.

l

CPU and control module Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the board.

l

Overhead processing module – Receives overhead signals from the TN16AUX board and processes the overhead bytes. – Sends the overhead signals to the TN16AUX board.

l

Monitoring module Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2910



l

Communication module Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000. – Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000. – Transmits urgent data through the RS485.

l


25.11.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the TN16XCH board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-40 shows the front panel of the TN16XCH board. Figure 25-40 Front panel of the TN16XCH board

XCH

STAT ACT PROG SRV

RESET

XCH

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2911





l


l


l



Buttons Table 25-24 Functions of the buttons on the TN16XCH board Button

Function

RESET

Used to perform a warm reset on the TN16XCH board.

Interfaces The TN16XCH board does not provide external interfaces.

25.11.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one TN16XCH board. Table 25-25 shows the valid slots for the TN16XCH board. Table 25-25 Valid slots for the TN16XCH board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

25.11.8 Switch and Jumper Switches and jumpers that can be set on the TN16XCH board include battery jumpers and BIOS switches. The battery on the TN16XCH helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the TN16XCH. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2912



The BIOS switches helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash memory on the SCC board. Table 25-26 shows the function of the BIOS switches. Figure 25-41 shows the position of switches and Jumpers on the TN16XCH board. Table 25-26 Function of the BIOS switch or jumper BIOS State

Description

Binary value

A

Clear the system parameter area.

1010

B

Restores the system parameter area, database, and NE software from the CF card.

1001

C

Clear the database in the flash memory.

1011

Figure 25-41 Position of the switches and Jumpers on the TN16XCH board BIOS Switch

Battery Jumper

Binary Value 1010 0 1 0 1 ON

Battery Jumper ON DIP

BIOS DIP Switch

2

2

SW1

3

1 234

1 J1

DIP SW1

State A

2 3

1 2 3 4

1 J1


DIP SW1

State B 1 2 3 4

CF Card

Battery is used

Battery is not used

2 3

1 J1


DIP SW1

State C 1 2 3 4

25.11.9 TN16XCH Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H))

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2913








TN16XCH

40

48

73-1.4 x (16-n)

88.8-1.4 x (16n)


25.12 TN16UXCM TN16UXCM: 1.6T Universal Cross Connect, System Control and Clock Processing Board

25.12.1 Version Description The available functional version of the TN16UXCM board is TN16.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 16 UX CM

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N



2914





Deleted BIOS state D for the TN16UXCM board.


Allowed centralized grooming of ODU4 signals on the TN16UXCM board.

Function enhancement: In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, the cross-connect capacity of each service slot is increased to 100G, and 100G tributary and line boards can be used.





Added the TN16UXCM board.

The TN16UXCM board applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack to cross-connect 1.6 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0/1/2/2e/3/4/flex) signals, 20 Gbit/s VC-12/VC-3 signals, and 640 Gbit/s VC-4 signals and to switch 800 Gbit/s packet services.

25.12.3 Application As a cross-connect board, the TN16UXCM board achieves cross-connections of ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, and flex) signals and VC–4/VC–12/VC–3 signals, and packet switching of Ethernet services. It helps the NMS to manage boards, ensures that devices can communicate with each other, and achieves physical-layer clock synchronization and Precision Time Protocol (PTP) clock synchronization on the entire NE. The TN16UXCM board applies to OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks. For the position of the TN16UXCM board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-42 and Figure 25-43. For the position of the TN16UXCM board in the OCS system, see Figure 25-44. Figure 25-42 Position of the TN16UXCM board in the WDM system (ODUk cross-connect) External colck TN16ATE

External colck TN16ATE G.694.1


TOM

TN16 UXCM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

MUX

DMUX 4

NS2 4

4 NS2

Client side

4

4

DMUX

WDM side

MUX 4

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

NS2

WDM side


TN16 UXCM

Client side

2915



Figure 25-43 Position of the TN16UXCM board in the WDM system (Package switch) External colck TN16ATE

External colck TN16ATE G.694.1

G.694.1 GE

MUX

EG16 TN16 UXCM

DMUX

Client side

TN16 UXCM

PND2

PND2

EX2

10GE LAN

WDM side

GE

EG16

DMUX

10GE LAN

EX2

MUX

Client side

WDM side

Figure 25-44 Position of the TN16UXCM board in the OCS system 1

SLQ64 SLO16

STM-16

TN16 UXCM

l

TN16 UXCM SLQ64

8

1

SLQ64

STM-16

SLO16

SLQ64

8

Principles for configuring main control boards in OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks: – Electrical subracks: The TN16XCH/TN16UXCM boards must be configured. – Optical subracks (master): The TN16SCC boards must be configured. – Optical subracks (slave): No main control boards are required.

25.12.4 Functions and Features The TN16UXCM board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer, system control function and clock function. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-27. Table 25-27 Functions and features of the TN16UXCM board Function and Feature

Description


l Supports non-blocking full cross-connections of 1.6 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex). l Supports cross-connections of 20 Gbit/s VC-12/VC-3 services. l Supports cross-connections of 640 Gbit/s VC-4 services. l Supports cross-connections of 800 Gbit/s packet services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2916




Description

System control function

l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack.

NOTE The TN16UXCM board does not support the system control function when the subrack housing the board is a slave subrack.

l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the TN16UXCM. l Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC. l Implements communication between NEs when used with the TN16AUX by using DCC bytes. l Supports subrack cascading. The TN16UXCM board processes subrack overheads and alarms and delivers configurations to slave subracks. It connects to the U2000 so that the U2000 can manage the entire NE.

Clock function


Protection scheme

l Supports 1+1 protection. l Provides 1+1 hot backup. l Provides 1+1 warm backup.

Switching mode



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supported


2917



25.12.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow TN16UXCM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-45 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16UXCM board. Figure 25-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16UXCM board Time signals/ Clock signals


Service cross-connection from backplane ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ ODU4/ODUflex/VC-12/VC-3/VC-4

ODUk/VC Cross-connect module

Packets



Monitoring module

Power supply module



Required voltage

Fuse

Backplane


Module Function l

ODUk/VC cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane to realize the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) signals or VC-4/ VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service board to implement service cross-connections.

l

Packet switch module The packet switch module receives packets from each packet board through the backplane to realize packet switching of Ethernet services, and then sends the signals to each packet board.

l

Clock procession module Provides a synchronous clock signal for the system. The system clock supports three modes: free-run, holdover, and locked. When the system clock runs in lock mode, the it

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2918



synchronizes to the line/external clock, tributary clock, or OSC board clock. This module also supports IEEE 1588v2 time and frequency synchronization. l


l

Overhead processing module – Receives overhead signals from the TN16AUX board and processes the overhead bytes. – Sends the overhead signals to the TN16AUX board.

l


l


l


25.12.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the TN16UXCM board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-46 shows the front panel of the TN16UXCM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2919



Figure 25-46 Front panel of the TN16UXCM board

UXCM

STAT ACT PROG SRV

RESET

UXCM



2920



l


l


l


l



Buttons Table 25-28 Functions of the buttons on the TN16UXCM board Button

Function

RESET

Used to perform a warm reset on the TN16UXCM board.

Interfaces The TN16UXCM board does not provide external interfaces.

25.12.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one TN16UXCM board. Table 25-29 shows the valid slots for the TN16UXCM board. Table 25-29 Valid slots for the TN16UXCM board Product

Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU9, IU10

25.12.8 Switch and Jumper Switches and jumpers that can be set on the TN16UXCM board include battery jumpers and BIOS switches. The battery on the TN16UXCM helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the TN16UXCM. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. The BIOS switch helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash memory on the SCC board. Table 25-30 shows the function of the BIOS switch. Figure 25-47 shows the position of switches and jumpers on the TN16UXCM board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2921



Table 25-30 Function of the BIOS switch or jumper BIOS State

Description

Binary value

A


1010

B


1001

C


1011

Figure 25-47 Position of the switches on the TN16UXCM board BIOS DIP Switch

Battery Jumper


J39

DIP

State A

SW1

Battery is 2 used

1 3

1 2 3 4

Binary Value1001 1 0 0 1

SW1 ON

BIOS DIP Switch

DIP

1 2 3 4

Battery Jumper

ON

J39 1

2CP U

3

SW1

State B 1 2 3 4

J39

Battery is 2 not used

1 3

Binary Value1011 1 1 0 1 ON

CF Card

DIP

DIP SW1

State C 1 2 3 4

25.12.9 TN16UXCM Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H))

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2922








TN16UXCM

84-1.7 x (16n)-2 x m

92-1.8 x (16n)-2.2 x m

178-7.2 x (16-n)

195-7.9 x (16-n)

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack, and it is within 0-16 range. l "m" represents the subrack lower-order cross-connection flag. It is either 0 or 1. l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is 0. l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is 1.

25.13 XCS XCS: centralized cross connect board

25.13.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the XCS board are TN11 and TN12.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

TN 11X CS

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TN 12X CS

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2923




Function: The cross-connection capacities vary according to versions. For details, see 25.13.4 Functions and Features.

l

Specification: The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 25.13.8 XCS Specifications.

Substitution Relationship Table 25-31 Substitution rules of the XCS board Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11XCS

TN12XCS

Upgrade NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version.

TN12XCS

None

–




For the TN11XCS board, the cross-connect capacity description is modified. For ODU1 and ODU2 signals, the board supports a maximum cross-connect capacity of 280 Gbit/s. For GE services, the board supports a maximum cross-connect capability of 140 Gbit/s.


25.13.3 Application The XCS board is a cross-connect board. The TN11XCS board supports 280 Gbit/s crossconnections of ODU1/ODU2/10GE signals and 140 Gbit/s cross-connections of GE signals. The TN12XCS board supports 360 Gbit/s cross-connections of ODU1/ODU2/10GE signals and 180 Gbit/s cross-connections of GE signals. The XCS board applies to OptiX OSN 6800 subracks. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2924



For the position of the XCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-48. Figure 25-48 Position of the XCS board in the WDM system OTU

M40

XCS OTU OTU

1

1 OA

XCS

D40

40

40

1

1

XCS OTU

OA

D40

OA

OA

M40

OTU OTU XCS

40

40

OTU

OTU

25.13.4 Functions and Features The XCS board cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-32. Table 25-32 Functions and features of the XCS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function



TN11XCS: l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2/ ODU2e signals or GE services or 10GE services. l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 280 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2/ODU2e signals or 10GE services. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 140 Gbit/s for GE services. TN12XCS: l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2/ ODU2e signals or GE services or 10GE services. l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 360 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2/ODU2e signals or 10GE services. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 180 Gbit/s for GE services.

Active/standby backup

Provides the 1+1 hot backup.

Protection scheme

Supports cross-connect board 1+1 protection.

Switching mode


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2925




Description


Supported by the TN12XCS02.

25.13.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-49 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board. Figure 25-49 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board Backplane(service cross-connection)

ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/GE/10GE


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse


SCC


Module Function l

Cross-connect module Receives the data from each service board from the backplane. It performs the grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2/ODU2e signals or GE services or 10GE services at the electrical layer, then sends the signals to each service board and implements the cross-connection.

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2926





25.13.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the XCS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-50 shows the front panel of the XCS board. Figure 25-50 Front panel of the XCS board

XCS STAT ACT PROG SRV

XCS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2927





l


l


l



Interfaces The XCS board does not provide external interfaces.

25.13.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one XCS board. Table 25-33 shows the valid slots for the XCS board. Table 25-33 Valid slots for the XCS board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

25.13.8 XCS Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



Weight l

TN11XCS: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)

l

TN12XCS: 1.2 kg (2.65 lb.)

Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board



TN11XCS

20.0

22.0

TN12XCS

25.0

27.5


2928



Board




25.14 SCC SCC: system control and communication board

25.14.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SCC board are TN11, TN16, TN22, TN23, TN51, TN52, and TNK2.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. Product

Board


TNK2SCC


TNK2SCC


TN52SCC


TN51SCC and TN52SCC


TN16SCC

OptiX OSN 8800 Universal Platform Subrack

TN52SCC


TN11SCC, TN51SCC and TN52SCC


TN22SCC and TN23SCC. NOTE Only the TN23SCC board supports the boards and features newly added to the OptiX OSN 3800 V100R007C00 version and later versions; the TN22SCC board does not.



2929



– The TN22SCC and TN23SCC boards do not support data backup in the CF card, IP over DCC, subrack cascading, and power supply backup. The other versions support these functions. For details, see 25.14.4 Functions and Features. – Only the TN23SCC board supports the boards and features newly added to the OptiX OSN 3800 V100R007C00 version and later versions; the TN22SCC board does not. Table 25-34 lists the boards and features that are not supported by the TN22SCC board. Table 25-34 Unsupported boards and features

l

Boards

TN12LSC, TN13LSC, TN11LTX, TN12LTX, TN52NS2T04, TN52NS2T05, TN52NS2T06, TN52NS201M01, TN52NS201M02, TN14LSX, TN11LOA02, TN11RAU2, TN12OPM8, TN11LEM24, TN15LSC, TN12HSC1, TN17LSCM, TN11QCP, TN12RAU1, TN12RAU2

Featur es

Optical-layer ASON, OD (Optical Doctor)

Appearance: – The TN11, TN51, and TN52 versions use the same front panel; the TN22SCC and TN23SCC versions use the same front panel; The TNK2 and TN16 version use a front panel different from that of other versions. The TN22SCC and TN23SCC versions are applicable to case-shaped equipment. There are shelf ID LEDs on panels of TN11SCC, TN51SCC, TN52SCC, and TNK2SCC boards of the TN22 versions only. For details, see 25.14.6 Front Panel and 25.14.9 SCC Specifications.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 25.14.9 SCC Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11SCC

TN51SCC

When the TN11SCC board is installed in a master subrack with ASON disabled, the TN51SCC board can replace the TN11SCC board. The replacement requires software upgrade. When the TN11SCC board is installed in a master subrack with ASON enabled, the TN51SCC board cannot replace the TN11SCC board. When the TN11SCC board is installed in a slave subrack, the TN51SCC board can replace the TN11SCC board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2930


Original Board


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN52SCC

Software upgrade is required after the replacement.

NOTE It is recommen ded that the TN11SCC board be replaced with the TN52SCC board.

TN16SCC

None

-

TN51SCC

TN52SCC


TN52SCC

None

-

TNK2SCC

None

-

TN22SCC

TN23SCC


TN23SCC

None

-

NOTE If a subrack/chassis uses two SCC boards (one is active and the other is standby), the versions of the two SCC boards must be the same.




Deleted BIOS state D for the SCC boards.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Supplemented the feature limitation of the TN22SCC board.



2931



Hardware Update


Deleted the TN21SCC board.




Added the TN23SCC board.

The new boards and features of the OptiX OSN 3800 V100R007C00 or later are supported.



Updated and optimized the diagrams of the DIP switches and jumpers on the SCC board.


Added the TN16SCC board.

The TN16SCC board, a system control board without the cross-connect function, is added to meet the requirements of using the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 as an optical subrack.

25.14.3 Application The SCC board is a system control and communication unit that works with the network management system to manage each board and implements inter-equipment communication. l

Principles for configuring main control boards in OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks: – Electrical subracks (in which centralized cross-connection grooming is implemented for services): The TN16XCH/TN16UXCM boards must be configured. – Optical subracks (master): The TN16SCC boards must be configured. – Optical subracks (slave): No main control boards are required.

l

Principles for configuring main control boards in /OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack: – Master subracks: Main control boards must be configured. – Slave subracks: Main control boards cannot be configured.

l

Principles for configuring main control boards in other types of subracks: – Main control boards must be configured in both master and slave subracks.

25.14.4 Functions and Features The SCC board is used for DCC communication, subrack cascading, power supply backup and clock. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2932



Table 25-35 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/ TNK2SCC board. Table 25-36 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN16SCC. Table 25-37 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board. Table 25-35 Functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up the database. The NE data (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID, and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card. Backing up data to the CF means that you do not need to reconfigure the NE after replacing the SCC.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

DCN communication

Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC.

Active/Standby backup

Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby board automatically becomes active.

Clock function

Provides clock source for the system communications.

Subrack cascading

Supports subrack cascading. The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported


Supported


2933



Table 25-36 Functions and features of the TN16SCC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the SCC.

DCN communication

Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECCwhen used with the TN16AUX.

Active/Standby backup

Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby board automatically becomes active.

Clock function


Subrack cascading

Supports subrack cascading. The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.

Optical-layer ASON

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Supported


2934



Table 25-37 Functions and features of the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a chassis.

DCN communication

Supports interconnection and communication between NEs through IP over DCC, OSI over DCC, or HWECC.

Active/standby backup

Supported: In DC-powered systems, the two SCCs are used to provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active SCC fails, the standby SCC becomes active automatically. NOTE Active/standby backup configuration is not supported in AC-powered systems.

Clock function

Provides clock source for the system communications.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported


Not supported

NOTE

Only the TN23SCC board supports the boards and features newly added to the OptiX OSN 3800 V100R007C00 version and later versions; the TN22SCC board does not. Table 25-34 lists the boards and features that are not supported by the TN22SCC board.

25.14.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module, communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module. Figure 25-51 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCC.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2935



Figure 25-51 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC board

Clock module


Required voltage Power supply module

Monitoring module



Fuse

Backplane DC power supply from a backplane Other boards

Module Function l


l

Overhead processing module – Sends the overhead signals to the service board.

l


l

Clock module Provides the clock source for the system. TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC/TN22SCC/TN23SCC: – Receives the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station, and ensures that the local clock of the local board is synchronized with the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station. – Sends a local clock to the downstream station through the OSC board. TN16SCC: – Traces the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and provides the board and system with a synchronization clock source. – Provides a synchronization clock signal, which enables the system to satisfy the requirements of data setup time and holdoff time.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2936


l



l

Power supply module TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 6800/8800 provides the entire system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system. In addition, it provides power backup to the boards of which the total power consumption is less than 60W. TN16SCC: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board, and provides the system with 10W backup power. TN22SCC/TN23SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 3800 converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.

25.14.6 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons, and an LED indicator on the front panel.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-52 shows the front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board. Figure 25-53 shows the front panel of the TN16SCC board. Figure 25-54 shows the front panel of the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board. Figure 25-55 shows the front panel of the TNK2SCC board. For the mapping between the values displayed in the shelf ID LED and the actual shelf IDs, see Figure 25-56.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2937



Figure 25-52 Front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board

SCC STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC

SubRACK_ID

RESET

LAMP TEST

ALM CUT

SCC

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2938



Figure 25-53 Front panel of the TN16SCC board SCC

STAT ACT PROG SRV

RESET

SCC

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2939



Figure 25-54 Front panel of the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board

STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC

RESET LAMP TEST ALM CUT PWR CRI MAJ MIN

SCC

Figure 25-55 Front panel of the TNK2SCC board

SCC

STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRC ALMC

SubRACK_ID

RESET LAMP TEST ALM CUT

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2940



Indicators There are eight indicators on the front panel. l


l


l


l


l

System power supply indicator (PWRA)- dual-colored (red, green)

l

System power supply indicator (PWRB)- dual-colored (red, green)

l

Protection power indicator (PWRC)- dual-colored (red, green)

l

Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow NOTE

The TN16SCC/TNK2SCC board does not have PWRA and PWRB. The TN16SCC board does not have ALMC.

There are also four chassis indicators on the front panel of the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board. l

Chassis power supply indicator (PWR) - green

l

Minor alarm indicator (MIN) - yellow

l

Major alarm indicator (MAJ) - orange

l

Critical alarm indicator (CRI) - red


Buttons There are three buttons on the front panel. Table 25-38 lists the function of each button. Table 25-38 Functions of the buttons on the SCC board Button

Function

RESET

Used to perform a warm reset on the SCC board.

ALM CUT

Used to mute the alarm sound on the subrack. If you press this button transiently, the sound of the current alarm is muted. If you press and hold this button for 5s, the audible alarming function is disabled and the ALMC indicator on the SCC board becomes steady on. (If you press and hold this button for 5s again, the audible alarming function is enabled and the ALMC indicator on the SCC board is off.)

LAMP TEST

Used to test all of the indicators.

NOTE

The TN16SCC board does not have ALM CUT and LAMP TEST.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2941



LED There is an LED indicator on the front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board. Table 25-39 shows its function. Table 25-39 Function of the LED indicator on the SCC board LED indicator

Function

SubRack_ID

The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is a master or slave subrack when master/slave subrack mode is used. l "0" indicates the master subrack. l "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or fails to be read. l The other values indicate slave subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 25-56. For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.

Figure 25-56 LED

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Error

Hexadecimal subrack ID displayed in the LED

0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Decimal subrack ID


2942



Interfaces The SCC board does not provide external interfaces.

25.14.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one SCC board. Table 25-40 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCC board. Table 25-41 shows the valid slots for the TN16SCC board. Table 25-42 shows the valid slots for the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board. Table 25-43 shows the valid slots for the TN51SCC board. Table 25-44 shows the valid slots for the TN52SCC board. Table 25-45 shows the valid slots for the TNK2SCC board. Table 25-40 Valid slots for the TN11SCC board Product

Valid Slots


IU17, IU18

Table 25-41 Valid slots for the TN16SCC board Product

Valid Slots


IU9, IU10

Table 25-42 Valid slots for the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board Product

Slot


IU8, IU9

Table 25-43 Valid slots for the TN51SCC board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots


IU11, IU28


IU17, IU18


2943



Table 25-44 Valid slots for the TN52SCC board Product

Valid Slots


IU11, IU28


IU17, IU18

Table 25-45 Valid slots for the TNK2SCC board Product

Valid Slots


IU74, IU85

25.14.8 Switch and Jumper Switches and jumpers that can be set on the SCC board include battery jumpers and BIOS switches or jumpers. The battery on the SCC helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the SCC. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. The BIOS jumper or switch helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash memory on the SCC board. Table 25-46 shows the function of the BIOS jumper or switch.

BIOS switch or jumper Table 25-46 Function of the BIOS switch or jumper BIOS State

Description

Binary value

A


1010

B


1001

C


1011

Figure 25-57 shows the position of jumpers on the TN11SCC board. Figure 25-58 shows the position of swiches and jumpers on the TN16SCC board. Figure 25-59 shows the position of jumpers on the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board. Figure 25-60 shows the jumpers on the TN51SCC board. Figure 25-61 shows jumpers on the TN52SCC board. Figure 25-62 shows jumpers on the TNK2SCC board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2944



Figure 25-57 Position of the jumpers on the TN11SCC board BIOS Jumper

Battery Jumper

Binary Value 1010 1 0 1 0 J6 4

J17 2 4

Battery is used

State A 1

J11

2

1

Binary Value 1001 1 0 0 1 J6 4

J17 2 4

State B 1

CPU

Battery is not used

1

J11

2

Binary Value 1011 1 0 1 1 2

J6 4

J17 2 4

State C 1

1

CF Card

J11

J6 J17 24 24

1

1

BIOS Jumper Battery Jumper

Figure 25-58 Position of the switches and jumpers on the TN16SCC board BIOS Switch

Battery Jumper


Battery Jumper BIOS DIP Switch

ON DIP

SW1 1 234

2

2 3

1 J1

DIP SW1

State A

2 3

1 2 3 4

1 J1


DIP SW1

State B 1 2 3 4

CF Card

Battery is used

Battery is not used

2 3

1 J1


DIP SW1

State C 1 2 3 4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2945



Figure 25-59 Position of the jumpers on the TN22SCC/TN23SCC board BIOS Jumper Battery Jumper

J11

2 4

1 J13

J1

2 4

1

CPU

Battery Jumper

Binary Value

J11

4

0

2

0

4

1

4

1

J13

1

1

State B 1

2

1

0

2

4

1

1

2

1

0

State A 1

1001 J11

J13

Battery is used J1

Binary Value 1010

Battery is not used J1

BIOS Jumper

Binary Value 1011 J11

2 4

1

2

0

4

1

1

1

State C 1

1 J13

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2946



Figure 25-60 Position of the jumpers on the TN51SCC board BIOS Jumper

2 J1 3 1

Battery Jumper

Sate C

9

1001

1

9

2 J42 10

State B

1

0101

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 1 9 1

J12

Binary value

1101

Binary value

2 J42 10

State A

1 0 1 0

2 J42 10

9

Binary value

1

2 J42 10

BIOS Jumper

Battery Jumper

CF Card

Battery is used 2

2

J1

J1

3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Battery is not used


1

3

1

2947



Figure 25-61 Position of the jumpers on the TN52SCC board Type 1

BIOS Jumper

BIOS Jumper

1

State B

3

10

9

10

9

2

2

1

State A

J11

J11

2

1

J1

Binary 10 01 value

2

1

1010

Binary 10 10 value

1001

Battery Jumper

2

1

1011

Binary 1 0 11 value 10

9

State C

J11

10

9 J11

J1

BIOS Jumper

3 J1

BIOS Jumper

Binary 10 01 value 2

State A

1

2

1

1010

Binary 10 10 value

1001

Type 2

1

Battery is not used

2

3

CF Card

2

Battery is used

1

Battery Jumper

State B

10

9

10

9

2

1

J11

J11

2

1

1011

Binary 1 0 11 value 10

9

State C

J11

10

9 J11

1

2

1

Battery is not used

J1

3

CFCCard 卡 F

Battery is used

3

J1

2

3

2

1

Battery Jumper

J1

Battery Jumper

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2948



Figure 25-62 Position of the jumpers on the TNK2SCC board Battery Jumper

BIOS Jumper

J9

J41

10

2

9

1

1

3

2

CF Card

The underlying PCB Battery Jumper

BIOS Jumper

J9

State A

10

1

9

2

State B

J9

1

J41 10 9

2

J9

Battery is not used

1

2

J41 3

Binary Value 1011 1 1 0 1

Battery is used

1

2


3


10

State C 1

9

25.14.9 SCC Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


TN11SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)

l

TN16SCC: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H)

l

TN22SCC/TN23SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) ox 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)

l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2949



l

TNK2SCC: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 110.0 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.4 in. (H)

Weight: l

TN11SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)

l

TN16SCC: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)

l

TN22SCC/TN23SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)

l

TN51SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)

l

TN52SCC: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)

l

TNK2SCC: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)




TN11SCC

27.0

30.0

TN16SCC

32.0

35.0

TN22SCC

10.0

13.0

TN23SCC

10.0

13.0

TN51SCC

18.0

20.0

TN52SCC

23.0

25.1

TNK2SCC

26.7

29.3


25.15 AUX AUX: system auxiliary interface board

25.15.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the AUX board are TN11, TN12, TN16, TN21, TN22, TN51, and TN52.



2950



Product

Board


TN52AUX


TN51AUX/TN52AUX


TN52AUX


TN51AUX/TN52AUX


TN16AUX


TN11AUX/TN12AUX


TN21AUX/TN22AUX

NOTE

When the TN52AUX board in a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 or general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is used, the logical board must be created as 51AUX on the NMS.

Type The system provides two types of the TN11AUX. Table 25-47 lists the types of the TN11AUX. Any of other AUX board versions has only one type. Table 25-47 Type description of the TN11AUX Board

Type

Description

TN11AUX

TN11AUX01

The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. One type provides three jumpers and the other type provides eight jumpers to setting the subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to 7.

TN11AUX02

Provides eight jumpers to set subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to 31.


Function: – The TN11AUX/TN12AUX board provides various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces. For detail, see 25.15.4 Functions and Features and 25.15.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow. The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. One type provides three jumpers and the other type provides eight jumpers for setting the subrack ID. There are eight jumpers inside the TN11AUX02 board, which are used

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2951



to set the subrack ID. The TN12AUX board provides eight DIP switches for setting the subrack ID.For detail, see 25.15.8 Switch and Jumper. – The TN16AUX does not provide external interfaces. It provides the inter-subrack management function. For details, see 25.15.4 Functions and Features and 25.15.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow. – The TN21AUX and TN22AUX boards are mainly used to provide backup power supply, various auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces. For detail, see 25.15.4 Functions and Features and 25.15.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow. There are three jumpers inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN22AUX board. For detail, see 25.15.8 Switch and Jumper. – The TN51AUX/TN52AUX board does not provide external interfaces. For detail, see 25.15.4 Functions and Features and 25.15.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow. – The TN52AUX/TN16AUX board supports 1+1 protection. For details, see 25.15.4 Functions and Features. l

Appearance: – Board front panels of some versions are different. For details, see 25.15.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 25.15.9 AUX Specifications.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11AUX

TN12AUX

When a TN11AUX board is replaced with a TN12AUX board, the logical board for the TN12AUX board can be created as AUX on the NMS. This substitution does not require a board software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12AUX board provides only the functions of the TN11AUX board.

TN12AUX

None

-

TN16AUX

None

-

TN21AUX

TN22AUX

If the SCC is the TN22SCC, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version.

TN22AUX

None

-

TN51AUX

TN52AUX

When a TN51AUX board in a general OptiX OSN 8800 T64 or OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is replaced with a TN52AUX board, the logical board for the TN52AUX board must be created as TN51AUX on the NMS. This substitution does not require a board software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN52AUX board provides only the functions of the TN51AUX board.


2952



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN52AUX

None

-




Added the TN12AUX board.

Compared with the TN11AUX board, the TN12AUX board provides DIP switches instead of jumpers to set the subrack ID.



Added the TN52AUX board.

1+1 protection is supported.



Modified description of the TN11AUX01 jumpers.

The specifications are supplemented.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Revised the schematic diagram of the jumper on the TN11AUX board. In this issue, the original dotted line is changed to a solid line and indicates that the cap must be installed.



2953



25.15.3 Application AUX board is a system control and communication board.

25.15.4 Functions and Features This section describes the functions and features of AUX boards. For detailed functions and features of the TN11AUX/TN12AUX board, refer to Table 25-48. Table 25-48 Functions and features of the TN11AUX/TN12AUX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.

Interface

Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management interface. Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communications interfaces

Setting of subrack ID

Supported.

For detailed functions and features of the TN16AUX board, refer to Table 25-49. Table 25-49 Functions and features of the TN16AUX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Implements communication between boards or subracks and intersburack management. Supports 1+1 protection. The TN16AUX collects overhead information about other boards and sends the information to the TN16XCH/TN16SCC/TN16UXCM. After processing overhead information, the TN16XCH/TN16SCC/ TN16UXCM sends the processed information to the TN16AUX. Then, the TN16AUX sends the information to the other boards. NOTE In an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack, two TN16AUX boards must be configured if the IEEE 1588v2 function is required. In an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 electrical subrack, two TN16AUX boards must be configured.

Interface

Does not provide external interfaces.

For detailed functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board, refer to Table 25-50. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2954



Table 25-50 Functions and features of the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides the system with backup power supplies as well as various auxiliary and management interfaces.

Interface

Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management interface. Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance. Provides the alarm channel for chassis indicators.

Power supply backup

Provides the entire system with the 3.3 V integrated power supply backup.

Alarm function

Provides alarms on the failure of 3.3 V integrated backup power supply, including over-voltage and under-voltage alarms.


Description

Basic function

Implements communications between boards or subracks.

Interface



Description

Basic function

Implements communications between boards or subracks, and supports 1+1 protection. NOTE The TN52AUX board supports 1+1 protection only when it is used in an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64 or an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

Interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



2955



25.15.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-63 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11AUX/TN12AUX/ TN21AUX/TN22AUX/TN51AUX/TN52AUX board. Figure 25-64 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16AUX board. Figure 25-63 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11AUX/TN12AUX/TN21AUX/ TN22AUX/TN51AUX/TN52AUX board


Power supply module Required voltage

Fuse


Backplane DC power supply from a backplane Other boards

Figure 25-64 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16AUX board


Monitoring module

Power supply module



Required voltage

Fuse

Backplane


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2956



Module Function l

CPU and control module The CPU module implements the control, monitoring and management of the communication module and detects the power supply at the same time. TN11AUX/TN12AUX: The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. TN16AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. TN21AUX/TN22AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. TN51AUX/TN52AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information.

l

Communication module NOTE

The TN16AUX board is connected to the EFI board through the backplane. The interfaces as follows are provided on the EFI board. The TN51AUX/TN52AUX board is connected to the EFI1 and EFI2 boards through the backplane. The interfaces as follows are provided on the EFI1 and EFI2 boards.

– Provides the inter-board communication interface to connect the service boards and the SCC. Implements the data communication between boards. – Provides the NM interface and the NM cascading interface that connect the AUX and the NM terminal. – TN11AUX/TN12AUX: Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communication network interfaces. TN21AUX/TN22AUX: Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance. l

Power supply module TN11AUX/TN12AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board. TN16AUX/TN51AUX/TN52AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board. TN21AUX/TN22AUX: Supplies power for the AUX. It also provides the entire OptiX OSN 3800 system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system.

l

Overhead Processing module – Collects overhead information about other boards and sends the information to the TN16XCH/TN16SCC/TN16UXCM. – Receives the processed overhead information from TN16XCH/TN16SCC/ TN16UXCM and sends the information to the other boards.

l


25.15.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2957



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 25-65 shows the front panel of the TN11AUX/TN12AUX board. Figure 25-66 shows the front panel of the TN16AUX board. Figure 25-67 shows the front panel of the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. Figure 25-68 shows the front panel of the TN51AUX/TN52AUX board. For the mapping between the values displayed in the shelf ID LED and the actual shelf IDs, see Figure 25-69. Figure 25-65 Front panel of the TN11AUX/TN12AUX board

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1 ETH2

STAT PROG

AUX

Figure 25-66 Front panel of the TN16AUX board

AUX STAT ACT PROG SRV ALMC

RESET

SubRACK-ID

LAMP TEST ALM CUT

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2958



Figure 25-67 Front panel of the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board

STAT PROG

NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 EXT

AUX

Figure 25-68 Front panel of the TN51AUX/TN52AUX board AUX

STAT ACT PROG SRV

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2959



Indicators There are two indicators on the front panel of the TN11AUX/TN12AUXTN21AUX/TN22AUX board. There are five indicators on the front panel of the TN16AUX board. There are four indicators on the front panel of the TN51AUX/TN52AUX board. l


l

Service active status indicator (ACT) - dual-colored (green, orange)

l


l


l

Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow NOTE

Only the ACT indicator of TN51AUX board supports the orange color.


Interfaces Table 25-53 lists the type and function of each interface of the TN11AUX/TN12AUX board. The TN16AUX/TN51AUX/TN52AUX board does not provide external interfaces. Table 25-53 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11AUX/TN12AUX board Interface

Type

Function

NM_ETH1

RJ45

l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the equipment to the U2000 server to enable the management of the U2000 over the equipment. l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs.

NM_ETH2

RJ45


ETH1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

RJ45

Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other subracks for communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.


2960



Interface

Type

Function

ETH2

RJ45

Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other subracks for communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

Table 25-54 lists the type and function of each interface of the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. Table 25-54 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board Interface

Type

Function

NM_ETH1

RJ45


NM_ETH2

RJ45


EXT

DB64

Provides the alarm input/output interface, cascading interface, commissioning network interface and management serial interface.

Buttons Buttons are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the buttons, see Table 25-55. Table 25-55 Functions of the buttons on the TN16AUX board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Button

Function

RESET

Used to perform a warm reset on the TN16AUX board.

ALM CUT

Used to clear an audible alarm.

LAMP TEST

Used to test all of the indicators.


2961



LED LED indicators are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the LED indicators, see Table 25-56. Table 25-56 Function of the LED indicator on the TN16AUX board LED indicator

Function

SubRack-ID

The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is a master or slave subrack in the case of master/slave subrack mode. "0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or fails to be read. The other values indicate slave subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 25-69.

Figure 25-69 LED

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Error

Hexadecimal subrack ID displayed in the LED

0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Decimal subrack ID


2962



25.15.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one AUX board. Table 25-57 shows the valid slots for the TN11AUX/TN12AUX board. Table 25-57 Valid slots for the TN11AUX/TN12AUX board Product

Slot


IU21

Table 25-58 shows the valid slots for the TN16AUX board. Table 25-58 Valid slots for the TN16AUX board Product

Slot


IU21, IU22

Table 25-59 shows the valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. Table 25-59 Valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board Product

Slot


IU10

Table 25-60 shows the valid slots for the TN51AUX board. Table 25-60 Valid slots for the TN51AUX board Product

Slot

General OSN 8800 T32 subrack

IU41


IU72, IU83

NOTE The TN51AUX board does not support 1+1 protection. If a TN51AUX board is not inserted into the previous slots or multiple TN51AUX boards are configured to implement 1+1 protection, the communication becomes abnormal.

Table 25-61 shows the valid slots for the TN52AUX board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2963



Table 25-61 Valid slots for the TN52AUX board Product

Slot


IU41


IU41, IU43


IU72, IU83


IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84

NOTE The TN52AUX board supports 1+1 protection only in the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 subrack. The TN52AUX board does not support 1+1 protection in the General OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 subrack. If a TN52AUX board is not inserted into the previous slots or multiple TN52AUX boards are configured to implement 1+1 protection, the communication becomes abnormal.

25.15.8 Switch and Jumper The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. For one type there are three jumpers and for the other type there are eight jumpers inside the board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN11AUX02 board. There are eight DIP switches inside the TN12AUX board.The jumpers and DIP switches are used to set the subrack ID. There is no jumper inside the TN16AUX/ TN51AUX/TN52AUX board.

Jumper of TN11AUX The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel. The master subrack and each slave subrack are interconnected through the ETH1/ETH2 interfaces on the AUX boards or the ETH3 interfaces on the EFI boards. The subrack IDs are specified through the jumpers on the AUX boards. The TN11AUX01 board is available in two types. For one type there are three jumpers and for the other type there are eight jumpers inside the board. l

For the TN11AUX01 board that has three jumpers inside, the jumpers can be set in eight combinations, representing decimal values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers is 000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack, and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 25-70 shows the position of the three jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each jumper are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each jumper are capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 25-70, the jumper setting represents the decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1.

l

For the TN11AUX01 board that has eight jumpers inside, the J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18, jumpers are reserved and the two pins on the left of each reserved jumper must be capped. The J4, J3, and J2 jumpers can be set in 8 combinations, representing decimal values 0-7. The default setting of the three jumpers is 000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2964



and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 25-72 shows the position of the jumpers. When the two pins on the right of each of the three jumpers are capped, the setting is 1; when the two pins on the left of each of the three jumpers are capped, the setting is 0. As shown in Figure 25-72, the jumper setting represents the decimal value of 1, which means that the subrack ID is 1. Figure 25-70 Position of the three jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board Representing Representing Representing

0

0

1

2

1

3

Junper cap

Jumpers

1

3

2

CPU

Figure 25-71 Mapping between jumpers binary values and subrack IDs

Subrack ID:1-7 Jumpers 1

0

0

Jumpers

Subrack ID

1

0

0

1

0

1

2

1

0 2

1

3

1 1

2

3

1

5

1

2

1

1

0

4

3

2

3

Subrack ID

1

0

1 2

1

Jumpers

Subrack ID

1

3

3

0

6 1

2

3

1

1

7 1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

2

3


2965



Figure 25-72 Position of the eight jumpers on the TN11AUX01 board Representing 0

Representing 0

J3

J4

J2

Representing 0

Representing 0

J17

Representing 1

Representing0

J15

J16 Representing 0

Representing0

Junper cap J14

J18

J4

J3

J2

J17

J16

J15

J18

J14

Jumpers

CPU

NOTICE The J14, J15, J16, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 25-72 . Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service interruption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2966



Figure 25-73 Mapping between jumpers binary values and subrack IDs Subrack ID:1-7 Subrack ID

Jumpers 1

0

0

J4

J3

Subrack ID

Jumpers 1

0

0

1

0

1

0

J2

J4

1

4 J3

J4

1

J2

1

3

2 J3

J4

0

1

1

0

1 J2

Subrack ID

Jumpers

J4

J3

J2

J3

1

1

5

J2

0

6 J4

J3

J2

1

7 J4

J3

J2

The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the TN11AUX02 board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 25-74 shows the jumpers on the board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2967



Figure 25-74 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board Representing 0

Representing 0

Representing 1

J3

J4

J2

Representing 0

Representing 0

J17

Representing0

J15

J16 Representing 0

Representing0

Junper cap J14

J18

J4

J3

J2

J17

J16

J15

J18

J14

Jumpers

CPU

NOTICE The J14, J17, and J18 jumpers must be set as specified in Figure 25-74. Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service interruption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2968



Figure 25-75 Mapping between jumpers binary values and subrack IDs Subrack ID:1-15 Subrack ID

Jumpers 1

0

0

J4

J3 0

J2 0

J16

J15

0

0

J3 0

J2 0

J16

J15

1

1

1 J4

1 J4

J2 0

J16

J15

1

J4

1 J4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

J4

1

J3 0

0

1

0

1

4

7

J3 0

J2 1

J16

J15

10

J2 0

J16

J15

2

J4

1

0

J15

0

0

0

J4

J3 0

J2 1

J16

J15

1

1

1

J3 0

J2 1

J4

J16

J15

J4

J3 0

J2 1

J4

J16

J15

1

5

8

11

0

J3 0

J2 1

J16

J15

J3 0

J2 0

J16

J15

1

1

J16

1

13

J3 0

J4


J3 0

J2 0

J16

J15

0

1

J4

J3 0

J2 1

J16

J15

0

0

J3 0

J2 1

J16

J15

1

1

J4

3

0

0

1

14

1

1

0

J2 0

1

0

0

Subrack ID

Jumpers

J3 0

J4

0

0

Subrack ID

Jumpers

J3 0

J2 1

J16

J15

6

9

12

15

2969



Subrack ID:16-31 Jumpers 0

0

J4

J2 0

J16

J15

0

0

J3 1

J2 0

J16

J15

1

1

1

J4

J3 1

J2 0

J15

J16

J15

1

1

1

1

J3 1 J16

0

1

0

J4

J3 1

0

0

1

J2

J3 1

J2 1

J16

J15

0

19

22

J4

0

25

0

J4

1

J3 1

J2 1

J16

J15

1

1

1

J4

J3 1

J2 1

J16

J15

J4

1

J15

1

J16

J2

J4

28

31

J4

Jumpers

Subrack ID

1

0 J3 1

J15

J4

J4

16

J2 0

J16 0

0

0

0

J3 1

Jumpers

Subrack ID

1

0

17

J4

1

20

J4

0

23

0

J4

0

J3 1

J2 1

J16

J15

26

J4

0

J3 1

J2 0

J16

J15

J3 1

J2 0

J16

J15

0

0

J3 1

J2 1

J16

J15

1

1

J3 1

J2 1

J16

J15

1

1

J3 1

J2 1

J4

J3 1

J2 1

J16

J15

J16

J15

29

18

1

0

1

0

Subrack ID


21

24

27

0

30

Err or

DIP Switches of the TN12AUX Board The TN12AUX board has two DIP switches. Each DIP switch has eight switches. The value set by each switch can be 0 or 1 (in binary code). ID1–ID4 correspond to pins 1–4 on SW2 and ID5–ID8 correspond to pins 1–4 on SW1. ID1–ID5 are valid and ID6–ID8 are reserved. Keep the ID6-ID8 settings shown in the following figures. From higher bits to lower bits are ID5– ID1, which can be set to 32 combinations and the default value is 00000. The value 0 indicates the master subrack, and the other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 25-76 shows the position of the DIP switches on the TN12AUX board. l

When the DIP switch is toggled to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

l

As shown in Figure 25-76, values ID5–ID1 correspond to 00001 (in binary code), which indicates that the subrack ID is 1 in decimal.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2970



Figure 25-76 Positions of the DIP switches on the TN12AUX board

DIP

1 2 3 4

ON

(ID 1) (ID 2) (ID 3) (ID 4)

SW2 DIP

1 2 3 4

ON

(ID 5) (ID 6) (ID 7) (ID 8)

SW1 ON DIP

1234

SW2 ON DIP

1234

SW1

Figure 25-77 Mapping between DIP switch binary values and subrack IDs Subrack ID:1-15 SW2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

SW1

Subrack ID

SW2

SW1

Subrack ID

SW2

SW1

Subrack ID

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


1



2

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


3

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


4


ON ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

5

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


6

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


7


ON ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

8

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


9

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


10


ON ON ON ON

(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)

11

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


12

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


13



14

ON ON ON ON

(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)


15


2971


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description Subrack ID:16-31 SW2

Subrack ID

SW1

SW2

SW1

Subrack ID

SW2

SW1

Subrack ID



16



17



18



19



20



21



22



23



24



25



26



27



28



29


ON(ID5) ON(ID6) ON (ID7) ON (ID8)

30



31


Err or

Jumper of TN21/TN22AUX The TN21AUX has 3 jumpers. Figure 25-78 shows the jumpers. The TN22AUX has 8 jumpers. Before the board is used, make sure that the setting of the J4 jumper is the same as that shown in Figure 25-79. Figure 25-78 Position of the jumper on the TN21AUX

CPU

Jumper

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2972



Figure 25-79 Position of the jumper on the TN22AUX

J4J11J10J21J20J19J23J22

Jumper

Jumper cap

8 (J4)

NOTICE The J4, J11, J10, J21, J20, J19, J23 and J22 jumpers must be set as specified in J4.

25.15.9 AUX Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: – TN11AUX/TN12AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) – TN16AUX: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) – TN51AUX/TN52AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) – TN21AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) – TN22AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))

l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2973



– TN11AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) – TN12AUX: 0.5 kg (1.01 lb.) – TN16AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.) – TN51AUX: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb.) – TN52AUX: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb.) – TN21AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.) – TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)




TN11AUX

12.0

17.0

TN12AUX

9.0

13.0

TN16AUX

16.5

19.2

TN21AUX

11.7

13.0

TN22AUX

15.0

17.0

TN51AUX

17.5

19.0

TN52AUX

15.0

20.0


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2974


26


Optical Supervisory Channel Board

About This Chapter 26.1 Overview OSC boards transmit optical supervisory information between two NEs. OSC boards provide high reliability of network monitoring because OSC boards transmit an OSC signal using a wavelength different service wavelengths. 26.2 HSC1 HSC1: high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel board 26.3 SC1 SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board 26.4 SC2 SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel board 26.5 ST2 ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2975



26.1 Overview OSC boards transmit optical supervisory information between two NEs. OSC boards provide high reliability of network monitoring because OSC boards transmit an OSC signal using a wavelength different service wavelengths.

Positions of OSC Boards in a WDM System Figure 26-1 shows the positions of OSC boards in a WDM system. Figure 26-1 Positions of OSC boards in a WDM system OA

SCC

OSC board

OA

S F I U / F I U

NE 1

S F I U / F I U

OA OSC board

SCC OA

S F I U / F I U

S F I U / F I U

OA OSC board

SCC

OA

NE 2

NE 3

NOTE

Among all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board.

In the preceding figure, the SCC board on NE1 sends the local NMS monitored data to the OSC board. Then the OSC board converts the NMS monitored data into an OSC signal and sends the signal to the SFIU/FIU board. Lastly, the SFIU/FIU board multiplexes the signal with the main channel signal onto the line for transmission. On NE2, the FIU/SFIU board extracts the OSC signal from the line and sends it to the OSC board. Then the OSC board restores the monitoring information from the OSC signal and sends the information to the SCC board for processing.

Main Functions Board

Dimen sion

Span Distance

Center Wavelength

Signal Bandwidth

TN11 HSC1

1

53 dB

TN11HSC1: 1510 nm

48 dB

TN12HSC1: 1511 nm

TN11HSC1: 4.096 Mbit/s TN12HSC1: 155.52 Mbit/s

48 dB

1510 nm

4.096 Mbit/s

TN12 HSC1 TN11S C1

1

16.896 Mbit/s

TN12S C1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2976



Board

Dimen sion

Span Distance

Center Wavelength

Signal Bandwidth

TN11S C2

2

48 dB

1510nm

4.096 Mbit/s 16.896 Mbit/s

TN12S C2 TN11S T2a TN12S T2a

2

40 dB

1491 nm

155.52 Mbit/s

1511 nm

TN13S T2a a: The ST2 board also supports clock signals and FE electrical signals.

26.2 HSC1 HSC1: high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel board

26.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the HSC1 board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1H SC 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


2977



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 2H SC 1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

The TN23SCC board is required when the TN12HSC1 board is used in an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.

Differences Between Versions TN11HSC1 and TN12HSC1 have different transmission rates and specifications. For details, see 26.2.11 HSC1 Specifications.

Substitution Relationship The HSC1 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.




Added the TN12HSC1 board.

The OSC signals of the TN12HSC1 board are encapsulated in OTN format at a rate of 155 Mbit/s.

26.2.3 Application As a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the HSC1 board processes one channel of supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 26-2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2978



Figure 26-2 Position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system OAU

OAU

SCC

HSC1

F I U

OAU

NE1

F I U

HSC1

HSC1

SCC

OAU F I U

OAU

NE2

F I U

HSC1

SCC

OAU

NE3

In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 26-2, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing. For an OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800, only the optical supervisory channel boards on the main subrack supports the orderwire function. A subrack supports only one orderwire and on the U2000 the orderwire must be configured in Settings for the First Orderwire Phone. NOTE

The transmit and receive stations must use the HSC1 boards of the same version for interconnection because the TN12HSC1 and TN11HSC1 boards cannot be interconnected.

26.2.4 Functions and Features The HSC1 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 26-1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2979



Table 26-1 Functions and features of the HSC1 board Funct ion and Featu re

Description

Basic functi on

The HSC1 board is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory signal. l When containing 100 Gbit/s wavelength, the system supports transmission over a span of 48 dB attenuation. l When containing no 100 Gbit/s wavelength, the system supports transmission over a span of 53 dB attenuation.

Techn ical featur es

The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC.

Regen eratio n functi on

The HSC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.

Opera ting wavel ength

The operating wavelength of the TN11HSC1 board is 1510 nm.

Loop back

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Optic allayer ASO N

Supported

The HSC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the HSC1 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.

The operating wavelength of the TN12HSC1 board is 1511 nm.

26.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The HSC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI/ FEC encoding module, CMI/FEC decoding module, overhead processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 26-3 and Figure 26-4show the functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2980



Figure 26-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11HSC1 board O/E RM

CMI decoding module

Optical receiving module


E/O

CMI encoding module


TM

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



SCC

Figure 26-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12HSC1 board O/E RM

FEC decoding module


Supervisory signal processing module

FEC encoding module

E/O Optical transmitting module

TM

Control Memory

CPU

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module

Required Voltage

Fuse



Signal Flow l

Signal flow of the TN11HSC1 board The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2981



module. Finally, the electrical supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical transmitting module. l

Signal flow of the TN12HSC1 board The optical supervisory signal from the FIU board is converted into an electrical signal by the O/E module. After FEC decoding, the electrical signal enters the supervisory signal processing module. The supervisory signal processing module extracts the supervisory information from the electrical signal and sends the supervisory information to the SCC board for processing. The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board are sent to the FEC module for encoding. The E/O module then converts the overhead bytes received from the FEC encoding module into an OSC signal.

Frame Structure of the OSC Signals of the TN11HSC1 Board Figure 26-5 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32 timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31. Figure 26-5 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead 0

1

2

3

...

14

15

16

...

31

For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table 26-2. Table 26-2 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC Timeslot Number

Name

Function

1

E1 byte

Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes.

2

F1 byte

Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.

3-13, 15

D1-D12 bytes

DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performance events. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

14

ALC byte

Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol byte.

17

F2 byte

Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance.


2982



Timeslot Number

Name

Function

18

F3 byte


19

E2 byte


21-23

Optical layer overhea d bytes

Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.

Other

Reserve d

-

Frame Structure of the OSC Signals of the TN12HSC1 Board The frame structure of an OSC signal is similar to the OTN frame structure, as shown in Figure 26-6. Each frame has 4 x 4080 bytes. Figure 26-6 OSC byte assignment diagram

1

1…6

7

8…10

FAS

RES

SM

11…134

135…404

405…674

675…3824

3825…4080

RES

SP-OH (1588+DCN)

RES

RES

FEC

2

3

RES

4

FAS: Frame Alignment Signal SM: Section Monitoring RES: Reserved

Table 26-3 lists the definitions and functions of the OSC bytes. Table 26-3 Definitions and functions of the OSC bytes

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Column Number

Name

Function Description

1 to 6

FAS

Indicates frame alignment information.


2983



Column Number

Name


8 to 10

SM

Monitors bit errors occurred in the transmission between two sites.

135 to 404

SP-OH(1588+DCN)

Extracts corresponding bytes from DCN overheads and sends the bytes to the SCC board for processing. Not supports processing of 1588 packets.

3825 to 4080

FEC

Performs FEC encoding and decoding on OSC signals.

Other columns

RES

Reserved

Module Function l

Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.

l

Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.

l

FEC decoding/encoding module Performs FEC decoding/encoding.

l

CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 2 Mbit/s signal.

l

Overhead processing module Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module.

l

Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames, and processes overheads.

l


l


26.2.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the HSC1 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2984



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 26-7 shows the front panel of the TN11HSC1 board. Figure 26-8 shows the front panel of the TN12HSC1 board. Figure 26-7 Front panel of the TN11HSC1 board HSC1

RM

EOW

HSC1

STAT ACT PROG SRV

TM

Figure 26-8 Front panel of the TN12HSC1 board HSC1

RM

EOW

HSC1

STAT ACT PROG SRV

TM



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 26-4 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 26-4 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HSC1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

TM

LC


RM

LC


EOW

RJ11

Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to implement orderwire communication between NEs.


2985



Laser Hazard Level TN11HSC1 board: the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum power launched by the board is less than 10 dBm (10 mW). TN12HSC1 board: the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).

26.2.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one HSC1 board. Table 26-5 shows the valid slots for the TN11HSC1 board. Table 26-6 shows the valid slots for the TN12HSC1 board. Table 26-5 Valid slots for the TN11HSC1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5 and IU11

Table 26-6 Valid slots for the TN12HSC1 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5 and IU11

26.2.8 Characteristic Code for the HSC1 The characteristic code for the HSC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and numbers of optical interface. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2986



The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 26-7. Table 26-7 Characteristic code for the HSC1 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

The first character is always W.

Second to tenth characters

Optical signal wavelength range

The optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm processed by the board.

Eleventh character

-

The eleventh character is always P.

Twelfth character

Numbers of optical interface

The number of the optical interface is one.

For example, the characteristic code for the HSC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical interface is one.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 26-8. Table 26-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HSC1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RM/TM

1

NOTE


26.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For HSC1 Parameters, refer to Table 26-9. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2987



Table 26-9 HSC1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



240/1510.00/198.540


Band Type

SMC






NOTE When setting this parameter, ensure that the automatic loopback release function is enabled.

Disable, Enable


Auto Pass-through

Default: Disable

When no system control board is deployed at a site, the OSC overhead will automatically pass through the OSC boards at the site and enter the downstream site after Auto Pass-through is set to Enabled. When system control boards are deployed at a site, the OSC overhead will not automatically pass through the OSC boards at the site even though Auto Pass-through is set to Enabled. NOTE All the OSC overhead bytes except D4-D12 can automatically pass through OSC boards. When two HSC1 boards are deployed but no system control board is deployed at a site, the two HSC1 boards must be installed in paired slots.

Laser Status

Off, On Default: On


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2988



Field

Value

Description


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable

When the OAMS function is enabled, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function if the difference between the actual power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring (dBm) exceeds OAMS Power Abnormality Threshold (dB). NOTE Only TN12HSC1 supports this parameter.


-60.0 to 50.0 Default: /

Specifies the reference power for the OAMS function to determine whether the line power is normal. This parameter must be set based on the actual line power. NOTE Only TN12HSC1 supports this parameter.



Specifies the threshold for the OAMS function to detect a line power abnormality. If the difference between the actual line power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds the specified abnormality threshold, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function. If the difference is less than the threshold, the U2000 will not issue a command to start the OAMS function. NOTE Only TN12HSC1 supports this parameter.

26.2.11 HSC1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. NOTE


Optical Specifications Table 26-10 lists the optical specifications of the TN11HSC1 board. Table 26-11 lists the optical specifications of the TN12HSC1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2989



Table 26-10 Optical specifications of the TN11HSC1 board Item

Unit

Value

Signal rate

Mbit/s

4.096


nm

1500 to 1520

Signal coding

-

CMI


dBm

5 to 10


dBm

<= -48

Receiver overload

dBm

-3

Table 26-11 Optical specifications of the TN12HSC1 board Item

Unit

Value

Signal rate

Mbit/s

155.52


nm

1501 to 1521


dBm

13 to 14


dBm

<= -42

Receiver overload

dBm

-10



l





TN11HSC1

8.0

8.8

TN12HSC1

13

15


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2990



26.3 SC1 SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board

26.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the SC1 board are TN11, TN12.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1S C1

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

T N1 2S C1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Differences Between Versions None


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11SC1

TN12SC1

The TN12SC1 can be created as SC1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC1 functions as the TN11SC1.

TN12SC1

None

-


2991






Changed the maximum span supported by the SC1 board to 42 dB.


26.3.3 Application Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC1 board processes one channel of supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the SC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 26-9. Figure 26-9 Position of the SC1 board in the WDM system OA

SCC

SC1

OA

NE1

OA F I U

F I U

SC2 SCC

OA F I U

OA

NE2

F I U

SC1

SCC

OA

NE3

In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 26-9, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. When configured as described above, the entire network can be managed. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing. For an OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800, only the optical supervisory channel boards on the main subrack supports the orderwire function. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2992



A subrack supports only one orderwire and on the U2000 the orderwire must be configured in Settings for the First Orderwire Phone.

26.3.4 Functions and Features The SC1 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 26-12. Table 26-12 Functions and features of the SC1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The SC1 board receives, processes, and transmits one optical supervisory signal. The SC1 supports a maximum of 42 dB span transmission.

Technical features

The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the optical supervisory channel (OSC). The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The SC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC1 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.

Regenerati on function

The SC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also performs the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be received and new supervisory signals are added.

Operating wavelengt h

The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.

Loopback

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported

26.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, CMI encoding module, optical transmitting module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 26-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2993



Figure 26-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board

CMI decoding module

O/E

RM


CMI encoding module

E/O

TM



Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



SCC

Signal Flow The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. Finally, the electrical supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical transmitting module.

Frame Structure of the OSC Signals Figure 26-11 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32 timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31. Figure 26-11 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead 0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1

2

3

...

14

15

16


...

31

2994




Name

Function

1

E1 byte


2

F1 byte


3-13, 15

D1-D12 bytes

DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performances. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing.

14

ALC byte


17

F2 byte


18

F3 byte


19

E2 byte


21-23



Other

Reserve d

-

Module Function l

Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.

l

Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.

l

CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s signal.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2995


l



l


l


26.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 26-12 shows the front panel of the SC1 board. Figure 26-12 Front panel of the SC1 board SC1

RM

EOW

SC1

STAT ACT PROG SRV

TM



l


l


l




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2996



Table 26-14 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC1 board Interface

Type

Function

TM

LC


RM

LC


EOW

RJ11



26.3.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one SC1 board. Table 26-15 shows the valid slots for the TN11SC1 board. Table 26-15 Valid slots for the TN11SC1 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 26-16 shows the valid slots for the TN12SC1 board. Table 26-16 Valid slots for the TN12SC1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


2997



26.3.8 Characteristic Code for the SC1 The characteristic code for the SC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and optical interface number. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 26-17. Table 26-17 Characteristic code for the SC1 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-


Second to the tenth characters



Eleventh character

-


Twelfth character


The number of the optical interface is one.

For example, the characteristic code for the SC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical interface is one.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 26-18. Table 26-18 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RM/TM

1

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2998



26.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the SC1, refer to Table 26-19. Table 26-19 SC1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



240/1510.00/198.540


Band Type

SMC







Off, On


Laser Status

Default: On

See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Enable OAMS Power Monitoring

Disable, Enable


Default: Disable

When the OAMS function is enabled, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function if the difference between the actual power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring (dBm) exceeds OAMS Power Abnormality Threshold (dB). NOTE Only the TN12SC1 support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


2999



Field

Value

Description


-60.0 to 50.0


Default: /

NOTE Only the TN12SC1 support this parameter.



Specifies the threshold for the OAMS function to detect a line power abnormality. If the difference between the actual line power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds the specified abnormality threshold, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function. If the difference is less than the threshold, the U2000 will not issue a command to start the OAMS function. NOTE Only the TN12SC1 support this parameter.

Auto Pass-through

Disable, Enable Default: Disable

Determines whether the OSC overhead automatically pass through OSC boards. This parameter applies only to scenarios in which no system control board is deployed in subracks. When no system control board is deployed at a site, the OSC overhead will automatically pass through the OSC boards at the site and enter the downstream site after Auto Pass-through is set to Enabled. When system control boards are deployed at a site, the OSC overhead will not automatically pass through the OSC boards at the site even though Auto Pass-through is set to Enabled. NOTE All the OSC overhead bytes except D4-D12 can automatically pass through OSC boards. When two SC1 boards are deployed but no system control board is deployed at a site, the two SC1 boards must be installed in paired slots.

26.3.11 SC1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3000



Optical Specifications Table 26-20 lists the optical specifications of the SC1 board. Table 26-20 Optical specifications of the SC1 board Item

Unit

Value

Signal ratea

Mbit/s

16.896


nm

1500 to 1520

Signal coding

-

CMI


dBm

-4 to 0


dBm

<= -46

Receiver overload

dBm

-3

4.096

<= -48

a: The SC1 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.



l





TN11SC1/TN12SC1

11.0

14.9


26.4 SC2 SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel board

26.4.1 Version Description Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3001








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1S C2

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

T N1 2S C2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Differences Between Versions None


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11SC2

TN12SC2

The TN12SC2 can be created as SC2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC2 functions as the TN11SC2.

TN12SC2

None

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3002





Changed the maximum span supported by the SC2 board to 42 dB.


26.4.3 Application Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC2 board processes two channels of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the SC2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 26-13. Figure 26-13 Position of the SC2 board in the WDM system

OA

SCC

SC1

OA

NE1

OA F I U

F I U

SC2 SCC

OA F I U

OA

NE2

F I U

SC1

SCC

OA

NE3

In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 26-13, you can manage NE1 directly by logging in to it through the Ethernet. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment that you can manage through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. By logging in to NE1 and managing NE2 and NE3 through the supervisory channel, the entire network can be managed. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing. For an OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800, only the optical supervisory channel boards on the main subrack supports the orderwire function. A subrack supports only one orderwire and on the U2000 the orderwire must be configured in Settings for the First Orderwire Phone.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3003



26.4.4 Functions and Features The SC2 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 26-21. Table 26-21 Functions and features of the SC2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The SC2 board receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory signals. The SC2 board supports a maximum of 42 dB span transmission.

Technical features

The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the OSC. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The SC2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.

Regenerati on function

The SC2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also provides the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be received and new supervisory signals are added.

Operating wavelengt h

The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.

Loopback

Inloop

Supported

Outloop

Supported

Opticallayer ASON

Supported

26.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 26-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3004



Figure 26-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board

O/E

RM1

CMI decoding module

O/E

RM2


CMI encoding module


E/O

TM1

E/O

TM2


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Fuse



SCC

Signal Flow The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. Finally, the electrical supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical transmitting module.

Frame Structure of the OSC Signals Figure 26-15 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32 timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31. Figure 26-15 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead 0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1

2

3

...

14

15

16


...

31

3005




Name

Function

1

E1 byte


2

F1 byte


3-13, 15

D1-D12 bytes

DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performances. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing.

14

ALC byte


17

F2 byte


18

F3 byte


19

E2 byte


21-23



Other

Reserve d

-

Module Function l

Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.

l

Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.

l

CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s signal.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3006


l



l


l


26.4.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 26-16 shows the front panel of the SC2 board. Figure 26-16 Front panel of the SC2 board TM2

RM2

SC2

RM1

EOW

SC2

STAT ACT PROG SRV

TM1



l


l


l




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3007



Table 26-23 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC2 board Interface

Type

Function

TM1/TM2

LC

Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.

RM1/RM2

LC

Receives the first/second supervisory signal.

EOW

RJ11

Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to realize orderwire communication between NEs.


26.4.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one SC2 board. Table 26-24 shows the valid slots for the TN11SC2 board. Table 26-24 Valid slots for the TN11SC2 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 26-25 shows the valid slots for the TN12SC2 board. Table 26-25 Valid slots for the TN12SC2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11


3008



26.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SC2 The characteristic code for the SC2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and optical interface number. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 26-26. Table 26-26 Characteristic code for the SC2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





Eleventh character

-


Twelfth character


The numbers of optical interface are two.

For example, the characteristic code for the SC2 board is W1500/1520P2. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical interface are two.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 26-27. Table 26-27 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RM1/TM1

1

RM2/TM2

2

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3009



26.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the SC2, refer to Table 26-28. Table 26-28 SC2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



240/1510.00/198.540


Band Type

SMC







Off, On


Laser Status

Default: On

See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Enable OAMS Power Monitoring

Disable, Enable


Default: Disable

When the OAMS function is enabled, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function if the difference between the actual power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring (dBm) exceeds OAMS Power Abnormality Threshold (dB). NOTE Only the TN12SC2 support this parameter.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3010



Field

Value

Description


-60.0 to 50.0


Default: /

NOTE Only the TN12SC2 support this parameter.



Specifies the threshold for the OAMS function to detect a line power abnormality. If the difference between the actual line power and Standard Value of OAMS Power Monitoring exceeds the specified abnormality threshold, the U2000 will issue a command to the OptiX BWS 1600G to start the OAMS function. If the difference is less than the threshold, the U2000 will not issue a command to start the OAMS function. NOTE Only the TN12SC2 support this parameter.

Auto Pass-through

Disable, Enable Default: Disable

Determines whether the OSC overhead automatically pass through OSC boards. This parameter applies only to scenarios in which no system control board is deployed in subracks. When no system control board is deployed at a site, the OSC overhead will automatically pass through the OSC boards at the site and enter the downstream site after Auto Pass-through is set to Enabled. When system control boards are deployed at a site, the OSC overhead will not automatically pass through the OSC boards at the site even though Auto Pass-through is set to Enabled. NOTE All the OSC overhead bytes except D4-D12 can automatically pass through OSC boards. When two SC2 boards are deployed but no system control board is deployed at a site, the two SC2 boards must be installed in paired slots.

26.4.11 SC2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3011



Optical Specifications Table 26-29 lists the optical specifications of the SC2. Table 26-29 Optical specifications of the SC2 board Item

Unit

Value

Signal ratea

Mbit/s

16.896


nm

1500 to 1520

Signal coding

-

CMI


dBm

-4 to 0


dBm

<= -46

Receiver overload

dBm

-3

4.096

<= -48

a: The SC2 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.



l





TN11SC2/TN12SC2

12.5

14.9


26.5 ST2 ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit

26.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the ST2 board are TN11, TN12, and TN13.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3012



Mappings Between the Board and Equipment The following provides the board(s) supported by the product. However, the availability of the board(s) is subject to PCNs. For PCN information, contact the product manager at your local Huawei office. B oa rd

Initi al Vers ion





8800 T16 Subra ck


6800 Subra ck

3800 Chass is

T N 11 S T2

V10 0R0 05C 00

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N 12 S T2

V10 0R0 09C 10SP C20 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N 13 S T2

V10 0R0 09C 10SP C20 0

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Function – The TN12ST2 board supports line fiber quality monitoring, but the TN11ST2 or TN13ST2 board does not. For details, see 26.5.4 Functions and Features.

l

Appearance – The panel appearance of the TN12ST2 board is different from that of the TN11ST2 or TN13ST2 board. The TN12ST2 board provides the TMI1/TMO1 and TMI2/TMO2 ports, but the TN11ST2 or TN13ST2 board does not. For details, see 26.5.6 Front Panel.

l

Specification – For the power consumption specifications of different versions, see 26.5.11 ST2 Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3013




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11ST2

TN13ST2

The TN13ST2 can be created as 11ST2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13ST2 functions as the TN11ST2.

TN12ST2

None

-

TN13ST2

None

-




Added the TN12ST2 and TN13ST2 boards.

Compared with the TN11ST2 board, the TN12ST2 and TN13ST2 boards are manufactured using an optimized engineering process, and the TN12ST2 board newly supports line fiber quality monitoring.



Added the 80 km optical supervisory channel (OSC) module for the ST2 module.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Changed the maximum span supported by the ST2 board to 40.5 dB.



3014



26.5.3 Application Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the ST2 board processes two channels of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. In addition, the ST2 board can process the IEEE 1588v2 protocol for time synchronization. The ST2 board also supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical signals.In addition, the TN12ST2 board supports line fiber quality monitoring. For the position of the ST2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 26-17 and Figure 26-18. Figure 26-17 Position of the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board in the WDM system

OA

SCC

ST2

OA

S F I U / F I U

OA

S F I U / F I U

S F I U / F I U

ST2 scc

OA

NE1

S F I U / F I U

OA

SCC

ST2

OA

NE3

NE2

Figure 26-18 Position of the TN12ST2 board in the WDM system Eow signal

OA

OA

EOW

TMI1 TMO1 RM1

FE2 WSC2

OA NE1

S F I U / F I U

TM2

TM1 TMI1 TMO1 RM1

TMI2

SCC

TMO2 RM2

S F I U / F I U

OA

NE2

S F I U / F I U

WSC1 FE1

TM1 TMI1 TMO1

ST2(OTDR)

SCC

ST2(OTDR)

WSC1

S F I U / F I U

ST2(OTDR)

TM1

FE1

Eow signal

OA

EOW

RM1

SCC FE2 WSC2

OA

NE3

NOTE

In this application scenario,the functional version of the FIU board must be 13FIU03 or 16FIU01,and the functional version of the SFIU board must be 11SFIU01.

l

Transmits and receives two channels of optical supervisory signals in the west and east directions. In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. You can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage it directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment that you can manage remotely through the supervisory channel if there is no data line connected. In the scenario described above, you can manage the entire network. The SCC of NE1 sends network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3015



SFIU/FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The SFIU/FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing. l

Performs IEEE 1588v2 clock synchronization. Extracts clock signals and provides the clock signals for clock synchronization on an NE. The extracted clock signals can also function as a clock source for the clock board on this NE. Sends clock signals of an NE to the downstream NE. Passes through west and east IEEE 1588v2 packets and service clock signals. Reports the time information to a clock board for time synchronization on an NE where the clock board is located. NOTE

When the ST2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack, the board can transparently transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals, but the board cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals.

l

The TN12ST2 board supports the line fiber quality monitoring function.

l

Transparently transmit two channels of FE electrical signals of the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board. NE1: – In the transmit direction: The TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM2 port. – In the receive direction: The TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM1 board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the TN11ST2/ TN13ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port. NE2: FE optical signals are directly passed at this NE. The The TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1 board and send it to the downstream board through its TM2 port. NE3: – In the receive direction: The The TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1 board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the TN11ST2/ TN13ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port. – In the transmit direction: The TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM2 port.

l

Transparently transmit two channels of FE electrical signals of the TN12ST2 board. NE1: – In the transmit direction: The TN12ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TMO1 port.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3016



Or the TN12ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TMO2 port. – In the receive direction: The TN12ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM1 board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the TN12ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port. NE2: FE optical signals are directly passed at this NE. The TN12ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1 board and send it to the downstream board through its TMO2 port. NE3: – In the receive direction: The TN12ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1 board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the TN12ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port. – In the transmit direction: The TN12ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TMO1 port. Or the TN12ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TMO2 port. NOTE

For an OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800, only the optical supervisory channel boards on the main subrack support the orderwire function. NOTE

A subrack supports only one orderwire and on the U2000 the orderwire must be configured in Settings for the First Orderwire Phone.

26.5.4 Functions and Features The ST2 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals. In addition, the ST2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 function. In addition, the TN12ST2 board supports line fiber quality monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 26-30. Table 26-30 Functions and features of the ST2 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory signals. Supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical signals. Supports IEEE 1588v2 function. Supports physical clock function. Supports a maximum of 40.5 dB transmission. NOTE When the ST2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack, the board can transparently transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals, but the board cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock and physical clock signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3017




Description

Technical features

The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The ST2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not properly installed, the ST2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.

Regeneration function

The ST2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.

Operating wavelength

When the ST2 board works with the SFIU board, the signal wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM1/TM1 is 1511 nm, and the signal wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM2/TM2 is 1491 nm. When the ST2 board works with the FIU board, the supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1511 nm.

Loopback

Supports outloops.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

Line fiber quality monitoring

The line fiber quality monitoring function can be used on the NMS, and the NMS will display monitoring figures and data. The online and offline applications of line fiber quality monitoring are supported.For details, see the Fiber Doctor System in the Feature Description. The Fiber Doctor Management System Software Fee License needs to be purchased for this function.

eSFP

The board supports pluggable optical modules that use 1511 nm and 1491 nm wavelengths.

26.5.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ST2 board consists of the optical receiving module, service processing module, EOW module, 1588 module, optical transmitting module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 26-19 and Figure 26-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3018



Figure 26-19 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board EOW

WSC1

WSC2 EOW module FEC decoding module

O/E

RM1


FEC decoding module

O/E

RM2

FE signal processing module Supervisory signal processing module

1588 module Service processing module

FEC encoding module FEC encoding module

E/O

TM1


E/O

TM2

Control Memory

CPU

Communication

Control and communication module Power supply module

Required Voltage

Fuse


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

SCC



3019



Figure 26-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ST2 board EOW

WSC1

RM1

WSC2

FEC decoding module


RM2

EOW module FE signal processing module Supervisory signal processing module

FEC decoding module

O/E

1588 module

FEC encoding module FEC encoding module

E/O OTDR Optical transmitting module

E/O

TM1

TM2

OTDR


Coverage -hole fiber

TMI1 TMO1 TMI2 TMO2

PIN Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Power supply

Required Voltage

Fuse



Signal Flow l

The OSC signal from the FIU/SFIU board is converted into an electrical signal by the O/ E module. After FEC decoding, the electrical signal enters the service processing module. The service processing module extracts the supervisory information from the electrical signal and sends the supervisory information to the SCC board for processing. In addition, the service processing module extracts a clock signal and sends the clock signal to the STG board for processing. The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board, and the clock signal and time information processed by the STG board are sent to the FEC module for encoding. The E/O module then converts the overhead bytes, clock signal, and time information received from the FEC encoding module into an OSC signal.

l

Signal flow of line fiber quality monitoring The signals of line fiber quality monitoring are processed separately in the transmit and receive directions. – In the transmit direction: The TM1/TM2 port outputs the probe light emitted by the laser of the optical transmitting module to the TMI1/TMI2 port. The probe light then passes through the coverage-hole fiber and is transmitted by the TMO1/TMO2 port to the downstream for monitoring line fiber quality.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3020



– In the receive direction: The Rayleigh scattering and Fresnel reflection signals of the downstream are received on the TMO1/TMO2 port of the TN12ST2 board. These signals pass through the coverage-hole fiber and are transmitted by the TMI1/TMI2 port to the TM1/TM2 port. Then, the optical transmitting module receives and processes the signals. l

FE signal flow of transparent transmission of the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board The FE signals are processed separately in the transmit and receive directions. – In the transmit direction: The TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board transmits it together with the OSC signal to the downstream board through its TM1 port. The TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board receives another local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board transmits it together with the OSC signal to the downstream board through its TM2 port. – In the receive direction: The TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board receives the OSC signal and an FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM1 board and sends the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board drops it through its WSC1 port. In addition, the TN11ST2/ TN13ST2 board receives the OSC signal and another FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM2 board and sends the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board drops it through its WSC2 port.

l

FE signal flow of transparent transmission of the TN12ST2 board The FE signals are processed separately in the transmit and receive directions. – In the transmit direction: The TN12ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the TN12ST2 board transmits it together with the OSC signal to the downstream board through its TMO1 port. The TN12ST2 board receives another local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the TN12ST2 board transmits it together with the OSC signal to the downstream board through its TMO2 port. – In the receive direction: The TN12ST2 board receives the OSC signal and an FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM1 board and sends the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the TN12ST2 board drops it through its WSC1 port. In addition, the TN12ST2 board receives the OSC signal and another FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM2 board and sends the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the TN12ST2 board drops it through its WSC2 port.

l

EOW signal flow An external telephone is connected to the EOW port using a telephone line, and voice services (orderwire) are received. When the telephone starts dialing (addressing call), the EOW module converts traffic information into standard code streams and maps them to E1 frames. In the supervisory signal processing module, the information is encapsulated into OSC signals, and is transparently transmitted to the downlink through the OSC optical port of an OSC board. The traffic information can also be sent to a system control board, and the system control board then transmits traffic information to the other OSC board. The information is encapsulated into services on the OSC optical port of this board and transmitted to the downlink.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3021



Frame Structure of an OSC Signal The frame structure of an OSC signal is similar to the OTN frame structure, as shown in Figure 26-21. Each frame has 4 x 4080 bytes. Figure 26-21 OSC byte assignment diagram

1

1…6

7

8…10

FAS

RES

SM

11…134

135…404

405…674

675…3824

3825…4080

RES

SP-OH (1588+DCN)

GFP-F (FE_DCN)

GFP-F (Panel FE)

FEC

2

3

RES

4

FAS: Frame Alignment Signal SM: Section Monitoring RES: Reserved

Table 26-31 lists the definitions and functions of the OSC bytes. Table 26-31 Definitions and functions of the OSC bytes Column Number

Name


1 to 6

FAS

Indicates frame alignment information.

8 to 10

SM

Monitors bit errors occurred in the transmission between two sites.

135 to 404

SP-OH (1588+DCN)

Extracts corresponding bytes from DCN overheads and sends the bytes to the SCC board for processing. Processes 1588 packets.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

405 to 674

GFP-F (FE_DCN)

Enables FE signals to communicate with the SCC board through the backplane.

675 to 3824

GFP-F (Panel FE)

Indicates the board interface that receives FE signals.

3825 to 4080

FEC

Performs FEC encoding and decoding on OSC signals.

Other columns

RES

Reserved


3022



Module Function l

Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of two OSC signals.

l

Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals. The optical transmitting module of a TN12ST2 board also receives and transmits the signals of line fiber quality monitoring.

l

FEC decoding/encoding module Performs FEC decoding/encoding.

l

Service processing module – FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals. – Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames, and processes overheads. – 1588 module Sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extracts the clock signal from the OSC signals according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then sends the clock signal to the STG board. – EOW module Converts voice traffic into standard code streams and maps them to E1 frames.

l


l


26.5.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ST2 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 26-22 and Figure 26-23 shows the front panel of the ST2 board. Figure 26-22 Front panel of the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board TM2


RM2

ST2

RM1

WSC2

WSC1

EOW

ST2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

STAT ACT PROG SRV

TM1

3023



Figure 26-23 Front panel of the TN12ST2 board TM2

RM2

TMI1 TMO1

TMI2

TMO2

ST2

RM1

WSC2

WSC1

EOW

ST2

STAT ACT PROG SRV

TM1



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 26-32 and Table 26-33 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 26-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board Interface

Type

Function

TM1/TM2

LC

Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.

RM1/RM2

LC

Receives the first/second supervisory signal.

WSC1/WSC2a

RJ45

Transmits/Receives the first/second channel of FE electrical signals. NOTE The FE electrical port works in 100M full-duplex mode and can transmit or receive a packet consisting of a maximum of 1518 bytes.

EOW

RJ11


a: Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC1 or WSC2 interface on the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3024



Table 26-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN12ST2 board Interface

Type

Function

TM1/TM2

LC

Transmits supervisory channel signals and line fiber quality monitoring signals, and receives the reflection signals of line fiber quality monitoring signals.

RM1/RM2

LC


TMI1/TMI2

LC

The TMI1/TMI2 port is connected to the coverage-hole fiber, so that signals from the TM1/TM2 port can pass through the coverage-hole fiber to minimize the coverage hole. The TMI1/TMI2 port transmits the reflection signals of line fiber quality monitoring signals to the TM1/TM2 port.

TMO1/TMO2

LC

The TMO1/TMO2 port is connected to the coveragehole fiber. It transmits the signals from the coveragehole fiber to the line side for monitoring line fiber quality and receives the reflection signals of line fiber quality monitoring signals.

WSC1/WSC2a

RJ45

Transmits/Receives FE electrical signals. NOTE The FE electrical port works in 100M full-duplex mode and can transmit or receive a packet consisting of a maximum of 1518 bytes.

EOW

RJ11


a: Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC1 or WSC2 interface on the TN12ST2 board.


26.5.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one ST2 board. Table 26-34 shows the valid slots for the ST2 board. Table 26-34 Valid slots for the ST2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots




3025



Product

Valid Slots




IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


IU3-IU16


IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


IU2-IU5

NOTE

If the ST2 board uses the clock function, it must be installed in a subrack housing clock boards.

26.5.8 Characteristic Code for the ST2 The characteristic code for the ST2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and optical interface number. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 26-35. Table 26-35 Characteristic code for the ST2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-




The optical signal wavelength range is 1484.5 nm to 1517.5 nm processed by the board.

Eleventh character

-


Twelfth character


TN11ST2/TN13ST:The numbers of optical interface are two. TN12ST2:The numbers of optical interface are four.

For example, the characteristic code for the ST2 board is W1484.5/1517.5P2. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1484.5 nm to 1517.5 nm, and the numbers of optical interface are two.



3026



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 26-36 and Table 26-37. Table 26-36 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RM1/TM1

1

RM2/TM2

2

NOTE


Table 26-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12ST2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RM1/TM1

1

RM2/TM2

2

TMI1

3

TMO1

4

TMI2

5

TMO2

6

NOTE

The port number of the RM1/TM1,RM2/TM2 interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical ports. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.The port number of the TMI1,TMO1,TMI2, and TMO2 interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a physical optical ports. transmits signals or receives signals.

26.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the ST2, refer to Table 26-38.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3027



Table 26-38 ST2 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



Laser Status

Non-Loopback, Outloop




Off, On


Default: On

See Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)

-


Band Type

-


DEG Threshold

0 to 10167

Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An alarm is reported when error codes detected in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than the value of this parameter.

Default: 190

DEG Monitoring Time(s)

2 to 10

Degrade Threshold Before FEC

1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9, 1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12,

Default: 7

Sets the signal monitoring time. If the number of bit errors in the signal exceeds DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm is reported. Sets error codes thresholds for signals before FEC.

Default: 1E-4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3028


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Field

Value

Description


Disable, Enable


Default: Disable



-60.0 to 50.0



0.5 to 10.0

Default: /

Default:3



3029



Field

Value

Description

Auto Pass-through

Disable, Enable


Default: Enable

When no system control board is deployed at a site, the OSC overhead will automatically pass through the OSC boards at the site and enter the downstream site after Auto Pass-through is set to Enabled. When system control boards are deployed at a site, the OSC overhead will not automatically pass through the OSC boards at the site even though Auto Pass-through is set to Enabled. NOTE When the ST2 board is used in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack,this parameter only to scenarios in which no EFI board is deployed in subracks. All the OSC overhead bytes except D4-D12 can automatically pass through OSC boards. When two ST2 boards are deployed but no system control board is deployed at a site, the two ST2 boards must be installed in paired slots.

26.5.11 ST2 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 26-39 and Table 26-40 lists the optical specifications of the ST2. Table 26-39 Optical specifications of the TN11ST2/TN13ST2 board Item

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit

Value 150 km OSC Module

80 km OSC Module

Signal rate

Mbit/s

155.52

155.52

Target distance

-

150 km (62 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


3030



Item

Unit


nm

Value 150 km OSC Module

80 km OSC Module

1504.5 to 1517.5

1504.5 to 1517.5

1484.5 to 1497.5

1484.5 to 1497.5


dBm

0.5 to 5

-4 to 1


dBm

≤ -41

≤ -34

Receiver overload

dBm

-10

-10

Table 26-40 Optical specifications of the TN12ST2 board Item

Unit

Value 150 km eOTDR OSC Module

80 km eOTDR OSC Module

Signal rate

Mbit/s

155.52

155.52

Target distance

-

150 km (62 mi.)

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1504.5 to 1517.5

1504.5 to 1517.5

1484.5 to 1497.5

1484.5 to 1497.5


dBm

0.5 to 5

-2 to 3


dBm

≤ -42

≤ -35

Receiver overload

dBm

-10

-10

OTDR Pulse-Width

ns

100, 200, 400, 800, 4000, 10000, 20000



l

Weight TN11ST2:0.95 kg (2.09 lb.) TN12ST2:1.1 kg (2.42 lb.) TN13ST2:1 kg (2.2 lb.)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3031






TN11ST2

17.5

19.5

TN12ST2

15.0

16.5

TN13ST2

14.4

16.0


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3032



27

Optical Protection Board

About This Chapter 27.1 Overview Optical protection boards provide 1+1 protection for services using their dual-fed and selective receiving function. 27.2 DCP DCP: 2-channel optical path protection board 27.3 OLP OLP: optical line protection board 27.4 QCP QCP: 4-channel optical path protection board 27.5 SCS SCS: sync optical channel separator board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3033



27.1 Overview Optical protection boards provide 1+1 protection for services using their dual-fed and selective receiving function.

Positions of Optical Protection Boards in a WDM System Different optical protection boards support different types of protection. Figure 27-1 shows the position of DCP boards in a WDM system when it offers client 1+1 protection. For the positions of the DCP, OLP, QCP, and SCS boards in other protection scenarios, see 27.2 DCP, 27.3 OLP, 27.4 QCP, and 27.5 SCS. Figure 27-1 Position of DCP boards in a WDM system (client 1+1 protection) MUX

MUX FIU

FIU

DMUX

OTU (W)



OTU (W)

DMUX

DCP

DCP

OTU (P)

MUX

MUX FIU

FIU

DMUX

Working signal

OTU (P)

DMUX

Protection signal

Main Functions Table 27-1 lists the main functions of optical protection boards. Table 27-1 Main functions of optical protection boards Board

Function

Supported Protection Type

TN11DCP

l Protects two optical signals.

l Intra-board 1+1 protection

TN12DCP

l Client 1+1 protection

TN13DCP

l For each protected signal, selects the better signal from the working and protection channels using its optical switch.

TN11OLP

l Protects one signal.

l Optical line protection

TN12OLP

l Selects the better signal from the working and protection channels using its optical switch.


TN13OLP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

l Optical wavelength shared protection



3034



Board

Function

Supported Protection Type

TN11QCP

l Protects four optical signals.


l For each protected signal, selects the better signal from the working and protection channels using its optical switch.


l Protects two signals.


TN11SCS

l For each protected signal, selects the better signal from the working and protection channels based on instructions sent by the SCC board. The board receives and couples the signals from both the working and protection channels when it does not work with an SCC board.

27.2 DCP DCP: 2-channel optical path protection board

27.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the DCP board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1D CP

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y


3035



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 2D CP

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N1 3D CP

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Board

Type

Description

TN11DCP

01

Supports the single-mode optical module.

02

Supports the multi-mode optical module.

01


04


01


TN12DCP

TN13DCP


Function: – The TN11DCP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical modules. – The TN12DCP/TN13DCP supports single-mode optical module.

l

Specification: – The power consumption varies according to versions. For details, see 27.2.11 DCP Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3036




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11DCP

TN12DCP/ TN13DCP

In the case of single mode, the TN12DCP board can substitute for the TN11DCP board. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version. In the case of single mode, the TN13DCP board can substitute for the TN11DCP board. The TN13DCP board can be created as DCP on the NMS to substitute for the TN11DCP board (TN11DCP is displayed as DCP on the NMS). For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R004C01 or a later version. The TN13DCP functions as the TN11DCP. NOTE When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13DCP board cannot be installed in slot IU1. Therefore, if a TN11DCP board is installed in slot IU1 and a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13DCP board cannot substitute for the TN11DCP board.

TN12DCP

TN13DCP

The TN13DCP board can substitute for the TN12DCP board. The TN13DCP board can be created as 12DCP on the NMS to substitute for the TN12DCP board. The board substitution does not require software upgrade. NOTE When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13DCP board cannot be installed in slot IU1. Therefore, if a TN12DCP board is installed in slot IU1 and a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13DCP board cannot substitute for the TN12DCP board.

TN13DCP

None

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3037





Added the TN13DCP01 board.

The board is manufactured using an optimized engineering process, and the board specifications are adjusted.



Added a description explaining that boards support opticallayer ASON only when they are used to provide client 1+1 protection.


27.2.3 Application Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the DCP board implements intra-board 1+1 protection , optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection) and client-side 1+1 protection. For the position of the DCP board in the WDM system, see Figure 27-2, Figure 27-3 and Figure 27-4. Figure 27-2 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection) TO11

RI1 1

TO21 MUX

OTU

TI1 RO1

RI11

DMUX RI21 FIU

FIU

RI21 DMUX

TI2

RI12

TO22 MUX RI12

TI1 OTU

MUX TO21

DCP TO12 OTU RO2

RO1

TO11

DMUX RI22 FIU

FIU

RI22 DMUX

TO12

DCP RO2 TI2

OTU

MUX TO22

NOTE

When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the DCP board does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU. For the application scenarios of intra-board 1+1 protection, see Introduction of the intra-board 1+1 protection in the Feature Description.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3038



Figure 27-3 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (OWSP protection) OTU1

λ1/λ2 2 x DCP

λ2/λ1

OTU1

OTU2

OADM λ2/λ1 (East) λ1/λ2 (East)

λ2 λ1 OADM (West) λ2 λ1 (West)

FIU

FIU OADM λ1/λ2 (West) λ2/λ1 2 x DCP λ2/λ1

λ1/λ2

λ2 λ1 OADM (East)

FIU

FIU

A

D

B

C

FIU

FIU

λ1 λ2

λ2 λ1 OADM (East) λ1 λ2

OTU2

λ2/λ1

λ1/λ2

2 x DCP OADM λ2/λ1 (West) λ1/λ2 FIU

FIU

λ2 λ1 OADM (West) λ1 λ2

λ2/λ1 OADM λ1/λ2 (East)

2 x DCP

λ2/λ1 OTU2

OTU2

OTU1

: Working signal

λ1/λ2 OTU1

: Optical signal

: Protection signal

Figure 27-4 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection) Client-side

TO11 RI11

TI1 TO21

RO1

RI21

DCP TI2 RO2

TO12 RI12

MUX OTU (W)

OTU TO22 (P) RI22

DMUX FIU

FIU

DMUX

MUX DMUX

MUX FIU

MUX

Client-side RO1 TI1

OTU RI21 (W)

TO21 RI12 TO12

OTU (P) RI22

FIU

DMUX

RI11 TO11

DCP RO2 TI2

TO22

NOTE

For the application scenarios of client 1+1 protection, see Introduction of the client 1+1 protection in the Feature Description.

27.2.4 Functions and Features The DCP board provides intra-board 1+1 protection , OWSP protection and client-side 1+1 protection. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3039



For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 27-2. Table 27-2 Functions and features of the DCP board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU, which has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides protection for two signals to implement 1+1 protection. l Provides client-side 1+1 protection, using a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services. l Provides the OWSP protection, make use of two different channels to achieve the protection of one channel of service between all stations.

Protection mechanism

Dual-fed and selective receiving. (At the transmit end, the protected signal is dually fed to the working and protection paths. At the receive end, the working or protection signal is selected if it has the higher power level.)

Optical-layer ASON

The DCP board supports optical-layer ASON only through client 1 +1 protection.

27.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DCP board contains the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 27-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3040



Figure 27-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board TO11 TO12 TO21 TO22 RI11

TI1 TI2

Optical switch

RO1

RI12

Optical switch

RI21

RO2

RI22

Optical power detecting module Optical module

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow One DCP board supports the dual-fed and selective receiving of two channels of optical signals. The DCP board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals. l

Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11 and RI12 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3041



communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.

Module Function l

Optical module The optical module consists of two signal dual-fed parts and two signal selection parts. – Signal dual-feeding part Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. – Signal selective receiving part: receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detection module detects and reports the optical power of two optical signals, and then the control and communication module controls and implements the selective receiving of optical signals from the working and protection channels.

l


l


27.2.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 27-6 shows the front panel of the DCP board. Figure 27-6 Front panel of the DCP board RI12

TO21

RI21

TO22 RI22

RO1

TI1

RO2

TI2

DCP

TO12

STAT ACT PROG SRV

DCP

TO11 RI11

Indicators Four indicators are present on the front panel: l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3042



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 27-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 27-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCP board Interface

Type

Function

TI1

LC

Receives the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intraboard 1+1 protection) Receives the first channel of client-side signals. (clientside 1+1 protection) Receives one channel of client-side signals. (OWSP protection)

TI2

LC

Receives the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Receives the optical signals from the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection)

RO1

LC

Transmits the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Transmits one WDM-side optical signal to the OTU board. (OWSP protection)

RO2

LC

Transmits the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Transmits one optical signal to the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection)

TO11

LC

Transmits the first channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Serves as a dual-fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the working router. (OWSP protection)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3043



Interface

Type

Function

TO12

LC

Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Dual fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the protection router. (OWSP protection)

TO21

LC

Transmits the second channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the RI12 interface of another DCP board in the same station by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)

TO22

LC

Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the RI22 interface on the same DCP board by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)

RI11/RI12

LC

Receives the first channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Serve as selective receive interfaces, connecting to the working route and protection route, respectively. (OWSP protection)

RI21/RI22

LC

Receives the second channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intraboard 1+1 protection) Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the TO12 and TO22 interfaces on the same DCP board, respectively, by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3044



27.2.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one DCP board. Table 27-4 shows the valid slots for the TN11DCP board. Table 27-4 Valid slots for the TN11DCP board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

Table 27-5 shows the valid slots for the TN12DCP/TN13DCP board. Table 27-5 Valid slots for the TN12DCP/TN13DCP board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IIU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

NOTE

When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack subrack, the TN13DCP board cannot be installed in slot IU1.

27.2.8 Characteristic Code for the DCP The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 27-6.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3045



Table 27-6 Characteristic code for the DCP board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

The first character is always P.


Maximum protection switching time

Indicate the maximum protection switching time.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 27-7. Table 27-7 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

TO11/RI11

1

TO12/RI12

2

TO21/RI21

3

TO22/RI22

4

TI1/RO1

5

TI2/RO2

6

NOTE


27.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DCP, refer to Table 27-8.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3046



Table 27-8 DCP parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



-35 to -10

Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

-10 to 10

Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)

0, 3 to 8

Default: -35

Default: 0

The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. Specifies the initial difference between the input working and protection signal power levels of a board. See Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: 5

Specifies the difference threshold for the input working and protection signal power levels. When the difference between the input working and protection signal powers reaches a specific value close to this threshold, a signal fail (SF) condition has occurred. When the difference exceeds this threshold, a POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm is reported and protection switching is performed to select the signal with higher power, ensuring desired service performance. See Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

27.2.11 DCP Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3047



NOTE


Optical Specifications Table 27-9 Optical specifications of the DCP board Interfac e

Item

Unit

TI1TO11

Insertion loss at the transmit end

Singlemode

Insertion loss at the receive end

Value TN11D CP01

TN11D CP02

TN12D CP01/ TN12D CP04

TN13D CP01

dB

≤4

-

≤4

≤4

Multimode

dB

-

≤4.5

-

-

Singlemode

dB

≤1.5

-

≤1.5

≤1.5

Multimode

dB

-

≤2

-

-

Singlemode

dBm

-35 to 7

-

-35 to 7

-35 to 20

Multimode

dBm

-

-35 to 0

-

-

Singlemode

nm

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

-

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

Multimode

nm

-

830 to 870

-

-

Switching threshold of optical power difference

dB

5

5

5

5

TI1TO12 TI2TO21 TI2TO22 RI11RO1 RI12RO1 RI21RO2 RI22RO2

Range of the input optical power


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3048


Interfac e


Item

Unit

Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power difference

dB

Value TN11D CP01

TN11D CP02

TN12D CP01/ TN12D CP04

TN13D CP01

3 to 8

3 to 8

3 to 8

3 to 8

NOTE l The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports TN11DCP02, TN12DCP01, TN12DCP04 and TN13DCP01. l The OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 supports TN11DCP01, TN11DCP02, TN12DCP01, TN12DCP04 and TN13DCP01.



l





TN11DCP/TN12DCP

6.8

7.5

TN13DCP

7.4

8.1


27.3 OLP OLP: optical line protection board

27.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the OLP board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.



3049



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1O LP

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

T N1 2O LP

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N1 3O LP

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Table 27-10 Type description of the TN11OLP board Board

Type

Description

TN11OLP

01

Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and optical line protection (OTS trail protection).

02

Supports multi-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection.

Table 27-11 Type description of the TN12OLP board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Type

Description

TN12OLP

01


02



3050


Board


Type

Description

03

Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for high power application; supports client 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and optical line protection (OTS trail protection and OMS trail protection).

04

Supports single-mode optical module; supports optical line protection (OTS trail protection).

06

Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for high power application; supports client 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and optical line protection (OTS trail protection and OMS trail protection).

07


Table 27-12 Type description of the TN13OLP board Board

Type

Description

TN13OLP

03

Supports single-mode optical module; supports client 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and optical line protection (OTS trail protection and OMS trail protection).

04


NOTE

The TN12OLP04/TN12OLP07 /TN13OLP04board only supports OTS trail protection, and must be used together with the SFIU board.


Function: – The TN11OLP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical modules. It supports only normal power application. – The TN12OLP/TN13OLP supports single mode optical modules. It supports not only normal power application but also high power application.

l

Specification: – The power consumption varies according to versions. For details, see 27.3.11 OLP Specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3051




Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11OLP

TN12OLP/ TN13OLP

In single mode, the TN12OLP can substitute for the TN11OLP. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version. In the case of single mode, the TN13OLP03 board can substitute for the TN11OLP01 board. The TN13OLP board can be created as OLP on the NMS to substitute for the TN11OLP board. The board substitution does not require software upgrade. NOTE When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13OLP board cannot be installed in slot IU1. Therefore, if a TN11OLP board is installed in slot IU1 and a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13OLP board cannot substitute for the TN11OLP board.

TN12OLP

TN13OLP

The TN13OLP03 board can substitute for the TN12OLP01, TN12OLP02, TN12OLP03, or TN12OLP06 board. The TN13OLP04 board can substitute for the TN12OLP04 or TN12OLP07 board. The TN13OLP board can be created as 12OLP on the NMS to substitute for the TN12OLP board. The board substitution does not require software upgrade. NOTE When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13OLP board cannot be installed in slot IU1. Therefore, if a TN12OLP board is installed in slot IU1 and a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13OLP board cannot substitute for the TN12OLP board.

TN13OLP

None

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3052





Added the TN13OLP03 and TN13OLP04 boards.

The boards are manufactured using an optimized engineering process, and the board specifications are adjusted.



Added the TN12OLP07 board.

The TN12OLP07 boards can work with the SFIU board to protect optical lines.



Added the TN12OLP04 board.

The TN12OLP04 board can work with the SFIU board to protect optical lines.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the following description: When the input optical power of optical ports RI1 and RI2 on the TN11OLP01/TN12OLP01/ TN12OLP02 board does not exceed +7 dBm, OTS OLP protection is supported. The TN11OLP01/TN12OLP01/ TN12OLP02 board cannot be used to provide OMS OLP protection.


Added a description explaining that boards support opticallayer ASON only when they are used to provide client 1+1 protection.



3053



27.3.3 Application Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the OLP board provides the optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and client-side 1+1 protection. For the position of the OLP board in the WDM system, see Figure 27-7, Figure 27-8, Figure 27-9, Figure 27-10, Figure 27-11. Figure 27-7 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP02/TN12OLP03/ TN12OLP06/TN13OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, OTS trail protection) OTU

MUX

TI

OA

OTU

RI1

RI1

TO1

RO

OA

DMUX

OTU OTU

FIU OTU

TO1

DMUX

OTU

RO

OA

OLP

OLP TO2

RI2

RI2

TO2

FIU OTU

TI

OA

MUX

OTU

NOTE

The TN11OLP01/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP02 board supports the preceding application only when the input power for the RI1 and RI2 ports on the board is less than or equal to +7 dBm. An OTU is a transceiver that process signals propagated over the same wavelength at the same time.

Figure 27-8 Position of the TN12OLP03/TN12OLP06/TN13OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, OMS trail protection) OTU OTU

TO1

TI

MUX RI1

OA

OA FIU

FIU

OA

OTU OTU

DMUX

RO

RI2

RO TO1

RI2

OA

DMUX

OTU OTU

OA

OLP TO2

RI1

OLP

OA FIU

FIU

OA

OA

TO2

TI

MUX

OTU OTU

NOTE

The TN11OLP01/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP02 board does not support the preceding application because in this application the input power for the RI1 and RI2 ports on the board will easily exceed +7 dBm. An OTU is a transceiver that process signals propagated over the same wavelength at the same time.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3054



Figure 27-9 Position of the TN12OLP04/TN12OLP07/TN13OLP04 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, OTS trail protection) OTU MUX

OTU

T01

TI

OA

RO

OLP

SFIU OTU

DMUX

OTU

RO

OA

RI1

T02

RI2

RI1

T01

RI2

T02

OTU

DMUX

OA

OTU SFIU

OLP TI

OA

OTU

MUX

OTU

NOTE

The TN12OLP04/TN12OLP07 /TN13OLP04board only supports OTS trail protection, and must be used together with the SFIU board. An OTU is a transceiver that process signals propagated over the same wavelength at the same time. If the IEEE 1588v2 function is configured on an optical-layer ASON network, only the TN13OLP04 board can be used to configure 1+1 OTS trail protection.e

Figure 27-10 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP02/TN12OLP03/ TN12OLP06/TN13OLP03 board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection) TO1 MUX RI1 TI OLP

OTU

TO2

RO

RI2

OA FIU

MUX

FIU

OA

DMUX

OA

OA

MUX

FIU

OA

RI1 TO1 RO

DMUX RI2

OA FIU

DMUX

DMUX

OA

OA

MUX

OLP

OTU TI

TO2

NOTE

When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the OLP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU. For the application scenarios of intra-board 1+1 protection, see Introduction of the intra-board 1+1 protection in the Feature Description.

Figure 27-11 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN11OLP02/TN12OLP01/TN12OLP02/ TN12OLP03/TN12OLP06/TN13OLP03 board in the WDM system (client 1+1 protection) Client- side

Client- side TO1 RI1

TI

OTU (W)

MUX

OA FIU

DMUX

OA

DMUX

FIU

OA

OA

MUX

RI1 OTU (W) TO1

OLP

RO

OLP TO2 RI2

OTU (P)

MUX

OA

OA FIU

DMUX

OA

DMUX

FIU

OA

MUX

RI2 OTU (P) TO2

RO TI

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3055



27.3.4 Functions and Features The OLP board provides optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 27-13. Table 27-13 Functions and features of the OLP board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides the optical line protection to ensure the normal receiving of signals when the line fiber fails. Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Provides client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services.



Optical-layer ASON

The OLP board supports optical-layer ASON only through client 1+1 protection.

27.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 27-12 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3056



Figure 27-12 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board TO1 TO2

TI

Optical switch

RI1

RO

RI2 Optical power detecting module

Optical module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow l

Transmit direction The TI optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO1 and TO2 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1 and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.

Module Function l

Optical module The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3057



– Signal dual-feeding part Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. – Signal selective receiving part: receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detection module detects and reports the optical power of two optical signals, and then the control and communication module controls and implements the selective receiving of optical signals from the working and protection channels. l


l


27.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OLP board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 27-13 shows the front panel of the OLP board. Figure 27-13 Front panel of the OLP board

CAUTION

TO1

RI1

TO2

RI2

RO

TI

OLP

CAUTION


OLP

STAT ACT PROG SRV




l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3058



l


l



Interfaces Table 27-14 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 27-14 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OLP board Interface

Type

Function

TI

LC

Receives the line signal from the FIU/SFIU board. (optical line protection) Receives one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection)

RO

LC

Transmits the line signal to the FIU/SFIU board. (optical line protection) Transmits one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection)

TO1/TO2

LC

Transmits the working and the protection signals to the line side. (optical line protection) Transmits signals to the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits signals to the working and the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)

RI1/RI2

LC

Receives the working or the protection signal from the line side. (optical line protection) Receives the signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3059



27.3.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one OLP board. Table 27-15 shows the valid slots for the TN11OLP board. Table 27-15 Valid slots for the TN11OLP board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

Table 27-16 shows the valid slots for the TN12OLP/TN13OLP board. Table 27-16 Valid slots for the TN12OLP/TN13OLP board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IIU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

NOTE

When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack subrack, the TN13OLP board cannot be installed in slot IU1.

27.3.8 Characteristic Code for the OLP The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 27-17.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3060



Table 27-17 Characteristic code for the OLP board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 27-18. Table 27-18 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

TO1/RI1

1

TO2/RI2

2

TI/RO

3

NOTE


27.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OLP, refer to Table 27-19. Table 27-19 OLP parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



3061



Field

Value

Description


-



-35 to -10


-10 to 10


0, 3 to 8

Default: -35

Default: 0

The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. Specifies the initial difference between the input working and protection signal power levels of a board. See Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: 5


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3062



Field

Value

Description

Fiber Type



Default: / Fiber Length(m)


0 to 4294967295

Specifies the length of a fiber.

Default: /


-214748364.8 to 214748364.7

Specifies the chromatic dispersion (CD) coefficient of a fiber. This parameter must be set according to the fiber type being in use. Usually, the nominal fiber CD coefficient is recommended for this parameter.

Default: /

This parameter is available only for ASON systems.

27.3.11 OLP Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3063



Optical Specifications Table 27-20 Optical specifications of the OLP board Int erf ace

TITO 1 TITO 2

RI1 RO RI2 RO

Item

Value TN11 OLP0 1

TN11 OLP 02

TN12 OLP0 1/ TN12 OLP0 2a


TN12 OLP04 / TN12 OLP07

TN13 OLP03

TN13 OLP04

a

a

a

Ins erti on los s at the tra ns mit end

sin gle mo de

d B

<=4

-

<=4

<=4

<=4

<=4

<=4

mul tim ode

d B

-

<=4.5

-

-

-

-

-

Ins erti on los s at the rec eiv e end

sin gle mo de

d B

<=1.5

-

<=1.5

<=1.5

<=1.5

<=1.5

<=1.5

mul tim ode

d B

-

<=2

-

-

-

-

-

sin gle mo de

d B m

-35 to 7

-

-35 to 7

-30 to 23

-32 to 23

-35 to 23

-32 to 23

mul tim ode

d B m

-

-35 to 0

-

-

-

-

-

sin gle mo de

n m

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

-

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

1528 to 1567

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

1528 to 1567


Operating waveleng th range

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

U ni t


3064


Int erf ace


Item

U ni t

mul tim ode

Value TN11 OLP0 1

TN11 OLP 02



TN12 OLP04 / TN12 OLP07

TN13 OLP03

TN13 OLP04

a

a

a

n m

-

830 to 870

-

-

-

-

-


d B

5

5

5

5

5

5

5


d B

3 to 8

3 to 8

3 to 8

3 to 8

3 to 8

3 to 8

3 to 8

NOTE l OptiX OSN 8800 supports TN11OLP02, TN12OLP01, TN12OLP02, TN12OLP03, TN12OLP04, TN12OLP06, TN12OLP07, TN13OLP03 and TN13OLP04. l OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800 supports TN11OLP01, TN11OLP02, TN12OLP01, TN12OLP02, TN12OLP03, TN12OLP04, TN12OLP06, TN12OLP07, TN13OLP03 and TN13OLP04.. l a: TN12OLP\TN13OLP has no multimode optical module.



Weight l

TN11OLP: 0.9 kg (1.98 lb.)

l

TN12OLP/TN13OLP: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)

Power Consumption

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board



TN11OLP

6.0

6.6

TN12OLP

4.0

4.5

TN13OLP03

7.0

7.7

TN13OLP04

6.9

7.6


3065



Board




27.4 QCP QCP: 4-channel optical path protection board

27.4.1 Version Description The available functional version of the QCP board is TN11.






8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1Q CP

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Board

Type

Description

TN11QCP

01




3066





Added the TN11QCP board.

It is a highly-integrated board. It supports dual-feeding and selective receiving of four signals, intra-board 1+1 protection, and client 1+1 protection.

27.4.3 Application Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the QCP board implements intra-board 1+1 protection and client 1+1 protection. For the position of the QCP board in the WDM system, see Figure 27-14 and Figure 27-15. Figure 27-14 Position of the QCP board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)

TI1

OTU

TO11

RI11

TO21

RI21

TO31

RO1

FIU

QCP

RO3

MUX

RI31 DMUX

RO2

TI3

TO11 TO21

RI21

TI2

OTU

FIU

TO41

TO12

RI12

TO22

RI22

TO32

DMUX RI32

TI2

OTU

QCP RO3 TI3

OTU

RI42

TO42

FIU

FIU

RI12

TO12

TI4

RI22

TO22

RO4

RI32 DMUX

OTU

RO2

TO31

RI41

MUX

OTU

TI1

RI41

TO41

RI11

OTU

RO1

DMUX RI31

MUX

MUX

RI42

TO32

RO4 TI4

OTU

TO42

NOTE

When being used for configuring intra-board 1+1 protection, the QCP board cannot be connected to an OTU board with the line rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the application scenarios of intra-board 1+1 protection, see Introduction of the intra-board 1+1 protection in the Feature Description.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3067



Figure 27-15 Position of the QCP board in the WDM system (client 1+1 protection) Client-side

Client-side TO11

RI11

TI1

RI11

TO11

RO1

TO21 RI21 TO31

TI2

MUX OTU (W)

RI31

RO2

DMUX

FIU

MUX

DMUX

TO41

OTU (W)

FIU

RO1 TI1

RI21 TO21 RI31 TO31

RO2

RI41

TI2

RI41

TO41

TO12

RI12

TI3

RI12

TO12

RO3

RO3

TO22

RI22

TI3

QCP

RI22 TO32

MUX OTU (P)

DMUX

FIU

OTU (P)

FIU

QCP

TO22 RI32

TI4

RI32

TO32

RO4

RO4

TO42

RI42

TI4

RI42

TO42

DMUX

MUX

NOTE


27.4.4 Functions and Features The QCP board provides intra-board 1+1 protection and client 1+1 protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 27-21. Table 27-21 Functions and features of the QCP board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU, which has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Compared with the DCP and OLP, the QCP provides protection for four signals to implement 1+1 protection. l Provides client 1+1 protection to protect four client services using the working and protection OTU boards.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



3068




Description

Optical-layer ASON

The QCP board supports optical-layer ASON only through client 1 +1 protection.

27.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The QCP board contains the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 27-16 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the QCP board. Figure 27-16 Functional modules and signal flow of the QCP board TO11 TO12 TO21 TO22 TO31 TO32 TO41 TO42 RI11 RI12 RI21 RI22 RI31 RI32 RI41 RI42

TI1 TI2 TI3 TI4 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4

Optical switch Optical switch Optical switch Optical switch

Optical power detecting module

Optical module Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SCC


3069



Signal Flow One QCP board supports the dual-feeding and selective receiving of four signals. It processes the four signals in the same way. The following describes the service flow of only one signal. l

Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11 and RI12 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.

Module Function l

Optical module The optical module contains four signal dual-feeding part and signal selective receiving part. – Signal dual-feeding part Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. – Signal selective receiving part: receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detection module detects and reports the optical power of two optical signals, and then the control and communication module controls and implements the selective receiving of optical signals from the working and protection channels.

l


l


27.4.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the QCP board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3070



Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 27-17 shows the front panel of the QCP board. Figure 27-17 Front panel of the QCP board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 27-22 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 27-22 Types and functions of the interfaces on the QCP board Interface

Type

Function

TI1/TI2/TI3/ TI4

LC

Receives the first, second, third, or fourth WDM-side optical signal.

RO1/RO2/RO3/ RO4

LC

Transmits the first, second, third, or fourth WDM-side optical signal.

TO11/TO12

LC

Optical ports for dual-feeding of the first, second, third, or fourth signal. The optical ports are connected to the input ports of the working and protection multiplexer boards when intra-board 1+1 protection is configured.

TO21/TO22 TO31/TO32 TO41/TO42

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Optical ports for dual-feeding of the first, second, third, or fourth signal. The optical ports are connected to the input ports of the working and protection OTU boards when client 1+1 protection is configured.


3071



Interface

Type

Function

RI11/RI12

LC

Optical ports for selective receiving of the first, second, third, or fourth signal. The optical ports are respectively connected to the output ports of the working and protection demultiplexer boards when intra-board 1+1 protection is configured.

RI21/RI22 RI31/RI32 RI41/RI42

Optical ports for selective receiving of the first, second, third, or fourth signal. The optical ports are connected to the output ports of the working and protection OTU boards when client 1+1 protection is configured.


27.4.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one QCP board. Table 27-23 shows the valid slots for the TN11QCP board. Table 27-23 Valid slots for the TN11QCP board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

NOTE

When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack subrack, the TN11QCP board cannot be installed in slot IU1.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3072



Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 27-24. Table 27-24 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the QCP board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

TO11/RI11

1

TO12/RI12

2

TO21/RI21

3

TO22/RI22

4

TO31/RI31

5

TO32/RI32

6

TO41/RI41

7

TO42/RI42

8

TI1/RO1

9

TI2/RO2

10

TI3/RO3

11

TI4/RO4

12

NOTE


27.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the QCP, refer to Table 27-25. Table 27-25 QCP parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



3073



Field

Value

Description


-



-35 to -10


-10 to 10


0, 3 to 8

Default: -35

Default: 0

The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (R_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the R_LOS alarm. Specifies the initial difference between the input working and protection signal power levels of a board. See Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Default: 5


27.4.10 QCP Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3074



Optical Specifications Table 27-26 Optical specifications of the QCP board Interface

Item

Unit

Value

TIx-TOx1/ TOx2(x=1 to 4)

Insertion loss at the transmit end

Single-mode

dB

<=4

RIx1/RIx2-ROx (x=1 to 4)

Insertion loss at the receive end

Single-mode

dB

<=1.5


Single-mode

dBm

-35 to 20


Single-mode

nm

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

Multi-mode

-


dB

5


dB

3 to 8



l

Weight: 1.2 kg(2.65 lb.)




TN11QCP

6.2

6.8

a:The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature.

27.5 SCS SCS: sync optical channel separator board

27.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the SCS board is TN11.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3075








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1S CS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Type Board

Type

Description

SCS

01

Supports single-mode optical module.

02

Supports multi-mode optical module.

27.5.2 Application As a type of optical protection unit, the SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and boardlevel protection (extended mode). For the position of the SCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 27-18 and Figure 27-19. Figure 27-18 Position of the SCS board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection) Client-side

TO11 RI11

OTU TO21 (W)

TI1 RO1

RI21

SCS TI2 RO2

TO12 RI12

OTU TO22 (P) RI22

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

MUX

DMUX

FIU

FIU

DMUX

MUX

MUX

DMUX

FIU


MUX

Client-side

OTU (W) RI21

RO1 TI1

TO21 RI12 TO12

OTU (P) RI22

FIU

DMUX

RI11 TO11

SCS RO2 TI2

TO22

3076



Figure 27-19 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended mode) TBE1

R1

S C S

TBE2 TBE1

TBE1

L 4 G

O A D M

F I U

F I U

TBE2

O A D M

L 4 G

TBE2 TBE1

S C S

R1

TBE2

27.5.3 Functions and Features The SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and board-level protection (extended mode). For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 27-27. Table 27-27 Functions and features of the SCS board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Receives signals from the working and the protection OTUs and implements client-side 1+1 protection. l Receives signals from the working and the protection TBE and implements board-level protection (extended mode).

Protection scheme

The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need protocol support. Instead, the channel protection executes switching by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.

Optical-layer ASON

Not supported

27.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 27-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3077



Figure 27-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board Optical module TI1

Splitter

TO11 TO12

TI2

Splitter

TO21 TO22

RO1

Coupler

RI11 RI12

RO2

Coupler

RI21 RI22

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow One SCS board supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The SCS board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals. l

Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.

l

Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the coupler. The system activates one of the two channels of optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of path optical signals is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection OTU is standby. Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm triggers a protection switching. The system shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.

Module Function l

Optical module The optical module consists of the splitters and couplers.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3078



– Splitter Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. – Coupler Receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The system selects one channel of optical signals based on the service quality. l


l


27.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 27-21 shows the front panel of the SCS board. Figure 27-21 Front panel of the SCS board RI12

TO21

RI21

TO22

RI22

RO1

TI1

RO2

TI2

SCS

TO12

STAT

SCS

TO11 RI11




Interfaces Table 27-28 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 27-28 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SCS board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

TI1/TI2

LC

Receives the first/second channel of client-side signals.


3079



Interface

Type

Function

RO1/RO2

LC

Transmits the first/second channel of client-side signals.

TO11/TO12

LC

Transmits the first channel of signals to the working and protection OTU.

TO21/TO22

LC

Transmits the second channel of signals to the working and the protection OTU.

RI11/RI12

LC

Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU.

RI21/RI22

LC

Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU.


27.5.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one SCS board. Table 27-29 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCS board. Table 27-29 Valid slots for the TN11SCS board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU11, IU2-IU5

27.5.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 27-30. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3080



Table 27-30 Characteristic code for the SCS board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 27-31. Table 27-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

TI1/RO1

1

TO11/RI11

2

TO12/RI12

3

TI2/RO2

4

TO21/RI21

5

TO22/RI22

6

NOTE


27.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the SCS, refer to Table 27-32.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3081



Table 27-32 SCS parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


27.5.10 SCS Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 27-33 lists the optical specifications of the SCS board. Table 27-33 Optical specifications of the SCS board Interface

Item

TI1-TO11

Splitting insertion loss

Coupling insertion loss

TI1-TO12 TI2-TO21

Unit

Value

Single-mode

dB

<=4

Multi-mode

dB

<=4.5

Single-mode

dB

<=4

Multi-mode

dB

<=4.5

Single-mode

nm

1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567

Multi-mode

nm

830 to 870

TI2-TO22 RI11-RO1 RI12-RO1 RI21-RO2 RI22-RO2 Operating wavelength range



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3082






TN11SCS

0.2

0.3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3083


28 Spectrum Analyzer Board

28

Spectrum Analyzer Board

About This Chapter 28.1 Overview Spectrum analyzer boards support centralized monitoring of optical signals without impacting the signal performance. 28.2 MCA4 MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 28.3 MCA8 MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 28.4 OPM8 OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board 28.5 WMU WMU: wavelength monitored unit

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3084



28.1 Overview Spectrum analyzer boards support centralized monitoring of optical signals without impacting the signal performance.

Positions of Spectrum Analyzer Boards in a WDM System Figure 28-1 illustrates the position of spectrum analyzer boards in a WDM system by using the OPM8 board as an example. Figure 28-1 Positions of spectrum analyzer boards in a WDM system

OTU

OM

OAU

OD

OAU

OTU

OD

OAU

OM

OAU

OTU

OPM8

IN1 MON OUT

OTU

OPM8

OPM8

OTU

OTU

OTU OTU

Spectral information can be queried using the U2000

IN

OAU

Main Functions Board

Number of Ports

Monitoring Capabilitya Number of Wavelength s

Optical Power

Center Wavelength

OSNRb

TN11MC A4

4

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11MC A8

8

Y

Y

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Remarks


It is recommended that these boards be configured at 3085


Board

TN11OP M8


Number of Ports

Monitoring Capabilitya

Remarks

Number of Wavelength s

Optical Power

Center Wavelength

OSNRb

8

Y

Y

N

Yc

the receive end.

2

Y

Y

Y

N

This board must be configured at the transmit end.

TN12OP M8 TN11WM U

a: "Y" indicates that the board supports the function. "N" indicates that the board does not support the function. b: l Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection when the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) or Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are configured. l When neither the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) nor the Optical Doctor management system license is used, there are the following restrictions if 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the system: – OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing. – OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz. l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) /Optical Doctor management system license is used. c: Only the TN12OPM8 can monitor OSNR.

28.2 MCA4 MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

28.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the MCA4 board is TN11.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3086



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 M C A4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Variants Table 28-1 Available variants of the MCA4 board Board

Varia nt

Description

TN11MCA 4

01

Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.

02

Detects optical power of 100 Gbit/s or lower signals. l Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection when the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) or Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are configured. l When neither the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) nor the Optical Doctor management system license is used, there are the following restrictions if 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the system: – OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing. – OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz. l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) /Optical Doctor management system license is used.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3087






Added the support for detecting OSNR of 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signals when the TN11MCA402 board works with the Optical Doctor Management System Software.

Function enhancement: When an Optical Doctor (OD) software license is available and OD functions are configured on the U2000, the TN11MCA402 board can be used to detect OSNR of 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/ s signals.

28.2.3 Application As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA4 board provides four ports and each of the ports supports spectrum analysis of up to 80 wavelengths. For the position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 28-2. Figure 28-2 Position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system OTU

MUX

OAU

OAU

DMUX

OTU MCA4

OTU

DMUX

OAU

OTU OTU

MCA4

OAU

MUX

OTU

OTU OTU

NOTE

The MCA4 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and transmit ends, you can configure the MCA4 boards at both ends for supervision.

28.2.4 Functions and Features The MCA4 board is mainly used for spectral analysis, APE and power detection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3088



Table 28-2 Functions and features of the MCA4 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides four ports and each of the ports supports spectrum analysis of up to 80 wavelengths.

Detection function

Supports monitoring of the following information and reports to the SCC board. The following information can be displayed on the U2000. l Optical power of each wavelength l Central wavelength l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path l Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection when the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) or Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are configured. l When neither the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) nor the Optical Doctor management system license is used, there are the following restrictions if 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the system: – OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing. – OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz. l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) /Optical Doctor management system license is used. NOTE If the power deviation between some wavelengths monitored by the MCA4 board exceeds 6 dB, then the wavelength with lower power may be regarded as noise and cannot be scanned by the MCA4 board. OSNR monitoring is not supported for PID boards.

Supported

APE function

Detects the optical power of each wavelength. Optical-layer ASON

Supported

28.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MCA4 board consists of the 1x4 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 28-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3089



Figure 28-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04

Spectrum analysis module

1× 4

optical switch Control signal

Driving signal

Data signal

Driving and control module

Control CPU

Memory

Communication

Control and控制与通信模块 communication module Power supply module Fuse


Required voltage


Signal Flow The 1x4 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.

Module Function l

1x4 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed four channels of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

l

Spectrum analysis module Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of wavelengths.

l

Driving and control module – Drives and controls spectrum. – Controls the 1x4 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

l

Control and communication module – Controls operations on the board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3090



– Controls operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. – Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. – Communicates with the system control and communication board. l


28.2.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-4 shows the front panel of the MCA4 board. Figure 28-4 Front panel of the MCA4 board

MCA4 STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

MCA4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3091





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 28-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 28-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA4 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN4

LC

Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to four "MON" interfaces at the same time.

28.2.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one MCA4 board. Table 28-4 shows the valid slots for the MCA4 board. Table 28-4 Valid slots for the MCA4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16


IU2-IU5


3092



NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU2.

28.2.8 Characteristic Code for the MCA4 The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 28-5. Table 28-5 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band

Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-6. Table 28-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN1-IN4

1-4



3093



For parameters of the MCA4, refer to Table 28-7. Table 28-7 MCA4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Optical Monitoring


Configure Band

C Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Sets the optical interface monitoring state. When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the spectrum analyzer board does not analyze the wavelength on this interface. Specifies the type of the working band of the board.

Actual Band

-



-





Threshold of Power Equilibrium Deviation (dB)

0.1 to 25.5

Specifies the power flatness threshold.

Default: 25.5

This parameter is used by the network commissioning tool to monitor wavelength power flatness. Usually, there is no need to manually specify the parameter value. For a network for which the network commissioning tool is not deployed, this parameter is not applicable.

Optical Performance Monitoring

Disabled, Enabled

Determines whether to enable the OSNR detection function.

Port

-

Displays port name and wavelength frequency.

Band

-

Displays the current band.

Default: Disabled


3094



Field

Value

Description

Wavelength Monitor Status

No Monitor, Monitor

Sets whether to monitor the current wavelength. It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor.

Default: No Monitor

When the parameter is set to Monitor for a wavelength, the NMS will report a CHAN_LOS if the NMS cannot detect the wavelength. However, when the parameter is set to No Monitor, the NMS will not report the alarm. Board

-

Displays the board name.

Optical Switch No.

-

The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical interface of the multichannel spectrum analyzer board.

Monitor Interval (min.)

5 to 49995

The Monitor Interval (min.) parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status.

WDM type

Default, 100-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 50-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 100-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps, 50-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps

Default: 10


Default: Default

28.2.11 MCA4 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-8 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4 board. Table 28-8 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561

Detect accuracy for central wavelength

nm

±0.1


3095



Item

Unit

Value

Channel spacing

GHz

50/100

Detect range for single channel optical power

dBm

-30 to -10

Detect accuracy for optical power

dB

±1.5

OSNR detection accuracy A (The OSNR of 10 Gbit/s signals can be detected.)

dB

±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19) ±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)

OSNR detection accuracy Ba (The OSNR of 10, 40, and 100 Gbit/s signals can be detected.)

dB

±1.5 (OSNR detection range: 13-23)


pcs

4

a: The OSNR detection function is available only when the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) or Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are configured.



l





MCA4

8.0

8.5


28.3 MCA8 MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit

28.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the MCA8 board is TN11.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3096








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 M C A8

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Variants Table 28-9 Available variants of the MCA8 board Board

Varia nt

Description

TN11MCA 8

01

Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.

02

Detects optical power of 100 Gbit/s or lower signals. l Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection when the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) or Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are configured. l When neither the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) nor the Optical Doctor management system license is used, there are the following restrictions if 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the system: – OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing. – OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz. l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) /Optical Doctor management system license is used.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3097






Added the support for detecting OSNR of 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signals when the TN11MCA802 board works with the Optical Doctor Management System Software.

Function enhancement: When an Optical Doctor (OD) software license is available and OD functions are configured on the U2000, the TN11MCA802 board can be used to detect OSNR of 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/ s signals.

28.3.3 Application As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA8 board provides eight ports and each of the ports supports spectrum analysis of up to 80 wavelengths. For the position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 28-5. Figure 28-5 Position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system OTU

MUX

OAU

OAU

DMUX

OTU MCA8

OTU

DMUX

OAU

OTU OTU

MCA8

OAU

MUX

OTU

OTU OTU

NOTE

The MCA8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and transmit ends, you can configure one MCA8 board at each end to provide supervision.

28.3.4 Functions and Features The MCA8 board provides spectral analysis, automatic power equilibrium (APE) and detection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-10.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3098



Table 28-10 Functions and features of the MCA8 Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides eight ports and each of the ports supports spectrum analysis of up to 80 wavelengths.

Detection function

Supports monitoring of the following information and reports to the SCC board. The following information can be displayed on the U2000. l Optical power of each wavelength l Central wavelength l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path l Supports 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signal OSNR detection when the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) or Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are configured. l When neither the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) nor the Optical Doctor management system license is used, there are the following restrictions if 40 Gbit/s or higher rate wavelengths are deployed in the system: – OSNR monitoring is not supported if adjacent channels have 50 GHz channel spacing spacing. – OSNR monitoring is supported only for 10 Gbit/s or lower rate wavelengths if the channel spacing is 100 GHz. l OSNR monitoring is supported for all signals if their rates are 10 Gbit/s or lower, regardless of whether the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) /Optical Doctor management system license is used. NOTE If the power deviation between some wavelengths monitored by the MCA8 board exceeds 6 dB, then the wavelength with lower power may be regarded as noise and cannot be scanned by the MCA8 board. OSNR monitoring is not supported for PID boards.

Supported

APE function

Detects the optical power of each wavelength. Optical-layer ASON

Supported

28.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MCA8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 28-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3099



Figure 28-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04 IN05 IN06 IN07 IN08

Spectrum analysis module 1× 8

optical switch Driving signal

Control signal

Data signal


Control CPU Communication Control and控制与通信模块 communication module

Memory


Required voltage



Signal Flow The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and transmits the channel to the spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The U2000 reports the final spectrum analysis results.

Module Function l

1x8 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

l

Spectrum analysis module Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of wavelengths.

l

Driving and control module – Drives and controls spectrum. – Controls the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3100





28.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA8 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-7 shows the front panel of the MCA8 board. Figure 28-7 Front panel of the MCA8 board

MCA8 STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8

MCA8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3101





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 28-11 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 28-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA8 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN8

LC

Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to eight "MON" interfaces at the same time.

28.3.7 Valid Slots Two slots house one MCA8 board. Table 28-12 shows the valid slots for the MCA8 board. Table 28-12 Valid slots for the MCA8 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17


IU1-IU15


IU1-IU16


IU2-IU5


3102



NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For the OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For the OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two slots in the chassis. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU2.

28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the MCA8 The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 28-13. Table 28-13 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card processes optical signals in the C band.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-14. Table 28-14 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

IN1-IN8

1-8


3103



28.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the MCA8, refer to Table 28-15. Table 28-15 MCA8 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Optical Monitoring


Configure Band

C Default: C


Actual Band

-



-



All, Odd, Even


Port

-


Band

-



No Monitor, Monitor


Default: All

Default: No Monitor

When the parameter is set to Monitor for a wavelength, the NMS will report a CHAN_LOS if the NMS cannot detect the wavelength. However, when the parameter is set to No Monitor, the NMS will not report the alarm.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3104



Field

Value

Description

Board

-


Optical Switch No.

-



5 to 49995


WDM type

Default, 100-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 50GHz Spacing with CRZ, 100-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps, 50-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps

Default: 10


Default: Default

28.3.11 MCA8 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-16 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8 board. Table 28-16 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561


nm

±0.1

Channel spacing

GHz

50/100


dBm

-30 to -10

Detect accuracy for optical power

dB

±1.5

OSNR detection accuracy A (The OSNR of 10 Gbit/s signals can be detected.)

dB

±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19) ±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)


3105



Item

Unit

Value

OSNR detection accuracy Ba (The OSNR of 10, 40, and 100 Gbit/s signals can be detected.)

dB

±1.5 (OSNR detection range: 13-23)


pcs

8

a: The OSNR detection function is available only when the Port OSNR detection license (OD V1) or Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are configured.



l





MCA8

12.0

13.0


28.4 OPM8 OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board

28.4.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the OPM8 board are TN11 and TN12.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3106



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1O P M 8

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N1 2O P M 8

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

When the TN12OPM8 board is used in the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis, the TN23SCC board must be used.

Differences Between Versions Function: l

Only the TN12OPM8 supports detection of OSNR for 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/ s signals.

Substitution Relationship The OPM8 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update


Added the TN12OPM8 board.

When an Optical Doctor (OD) software license is available and OD functions are configured on the U2000, the TN12OPM8 board can be used to detect OSNR of 10 Gbit/ s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signals.


3107



28.4.3 Application The OPM8 board provides eight ports and each of the ports supports optical power monitor of up to 80 wavelengths. For the position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 28-8. Figure 28-8 Position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system OTU

MUX

OAU

OAU

DMUX

OTU OPM8

OTU

DMUX

OAU

OTU OTU

OPM8

OAU

MUX

OTU

OTU OTU

NOTE

The OPM8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and transmit ends, you can configure the OPM8 boards at each end for supervision.

28.4.4 Functions and Features The OPM8 board is mainly used for optical power monitoring and APE. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-17. Table 28-17 Functions and features of the OPM8 Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Provides eight ports and each of the ports supports optical power monitor of up to 80 wavelengths.

Monitoring function

Detects optical power of each wavelength and reports to the SCC board. NOTE TN12OPM8 supports detection of OSNR for 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s signals. The TN12OPM8 board can interoperate with the Optical Doctor management system license. NOTE OSNR monitoring is not supported for PID boards.

The results are reported to the SCC and can be displayed on the U2000. APE function

Implements the APE function when the board is used with other required boards. Monitors the optical power of each channel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3108




Description

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

28.4.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The OPM8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, optical power monitor module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 28-9 and Figure 28-10 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OPM8 and TN12OPM8 boards. Figure 28-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OPM8 board IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04 IN05 IN06 IN07 IN08

Optical power monitor module

1× 8 optical switch Control signal

Driving signal

Data signal


Control Memory

CPU

Communication



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Required voltage



3109



Figure 28-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OPM8 board IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04 IN05 IN06 IN07 IN08

Spectrum analysis module

1× 8 optical switch Control signal

Driving signal

Data signal


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals from the board it is connected to, and sends the channel to the optical power monitor module. After being analyzed and converted, the optical power value is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module reports the value to the SCC board and the U2000. The final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.

Module Function l

1x8 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals for optical.

l

Optical power monitor module Monitors channel optical power and reports the data to the driving and control module.

l

Spectrum analysis module Monitors channel optical power, wavelength information and OSNR, then reports the data to the driving and control module.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3110


l


Driving and control module – Drives and scans spectrum. – Instructs the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis.

l


l


28.4.6 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-11 shows the front panel of the OPM8 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3111



Figure 28-11 Front panel of the OPM8 board

OPM8 STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8

OPM8



l


l


l





3112



Table 28-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OPM8 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN8

LC

Connects to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to eight "MON" interfaces of other boards at the same time.

28.4.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one OPM8 board. Table 28-19 shows the valid slots for the OPM8 board. Table 28-19 Valid slots for the OPM8 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the OPM8 The characteristic code for the OPM8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 28-20. Table 28-20 Characteristic code for the OPM8 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OPM8 board is C, indicating C band. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3113




Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-21. Table 28-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OPM8 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN1-IN8

1-8

28.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OPM8, refer to Table 28-22. Table 28-22 OPM8 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Optical Monitoring


Configure Band

C Default: C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Actual Band

-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All


3114



Field

Value

Description

Threshold of Power Equilibrium Deviation (dB)

0.1 to 25.5

Specifies the power flatness threshold.

Default: 25.5

This parameter is used by the network commissioning tool to monitor wavelength power flatness. Usually, there is no need to manually specify the parameter value. For a network for which the network commissioning tool is not deployed, this parameter is not applicable.

Optical Performance Monitoring

Disabled, Enabled

Determines whether to enable the OSNR detection function.

Default: Disabled

NOTE Only the TN12OMP8 supports this parameter.

Port

-


Band

-



No Monitor, Monitor


Default: No Monitor

When the parameter is set to Monitor for a wavelength, the NMS will report a CHAN_LOS if the NMS cannot detect the wavelength. However, when the parameter is set to No Monitor, the NMS will not report the alarm. Board

-


Optical Switch No.

-



5 to 49995


Default: 10

28.4.11 OPM8 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 28-23 lists the optical specifications of the OPM8 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3115



Table 28-23 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561


dBm

-30 to -10

Detected accuracy for optical power

dB

±1.5

Channel spacing

GHz

50/100


pcs

8

Detect accuracy for OSNRa

dB

±1.5 (OSNR detection range: 13-23) NOTE This item is valid only for TN12OPM8.

a: The OSNR detection function is available when the the OD functions are configured (OD V1). The OSNR detection function is available when the Optical Doctor management system license is used and the OD functions are configured (OD V2).



l





TN11OPM8/TN12OPM8

12

15


28.5 WMU WMU: wavelength monitored unit

28.5.1 Version Description The available functional version of the WMU board is TN11.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3116








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1 W M U

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

28.5.2 Application The WMU board monitors the wavelengths at a 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing in the system. For the position of the WMU board in the WDM system, see Figure 28-12. Figure 28-12 Position of the WMU board in the WDM system OSC MUX

DMUX

OA

OA

WMU

MUX

DMUX

FIU

FIU ITL WMU

ITL DMUX

MUX

OA

OA

DMUX

MUX

O O O O T T T T U U U U

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3117



NOTE

One WMU board can implement the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions. Figure 28-12 shows the two WMU boards, which, however, refer to the same WMU board.

Rules for selecting a WMU board are as follows: l

The WMU board is required only in the 80-channel system with a 50 GHz spacing.

l

The WMU board is required only when a fixed-wavelength optical module is used on the WDM side of a service board.

28.5.3 Functions and Features The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths at a channel spacing of 50 GHz/100 GHz on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-24. Table 28-24 Functions and features of the WMU board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing, and performs centralized monitoring of the fixed-wavelengths on the OTU at the transmit end in a transmission system. In addition, the board can monitor the wavelengths in two different optical transmit directions.

Optical switch

The optical switch is used to select the optical signals from the desired transmission direction to monitor.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

28.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 28-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WMU board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3118



Figure 28-13 Functional block diagram of the WMU board

IN1 IN2

Optical wavelength detection module

1X2 optical switch Control signal

Driving signal

Data signal

Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The 1x2 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical wavelength detection module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, the wavelength information is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the results to the SCC board and the U2000. The final results are displayed on the U2000.

Module Function l

1x2 optical switch Selects one channel of signals from the signals accessed through two optical interfaces for optical wavelength detection.

l

Optical wavelength detection module Detects each single-wavelength optical signals from the optical channel selection module, and reports the wavelength information to the SCC board.

l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3119



28.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 28-14 shows the front panel of the WMU board. Figure 28-14 Front panel of the WMU board

WMU STAT ACT PROG SRV

IN1 IN2

WMU



l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3120



l


l



Interfaces Table 28-25 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 28-25 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WMU board Interface

Type

Function

IN1/IN2

LC

Each connect to the MON port on two OA or FIU/ITL boards configured in two different transmit directions for centralized wavelength monitoring.

28.5.6 Valid Slots One slot houses on WMU board. Table 28-26 shows the valid slots for the WMU board. Table 28-26 Valid slots for the WMU board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3121



Table 28-27 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN1

1

IN2

2

28.5.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WMU parameters, refer to Table 28-28. Table 28-28 WMU parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-



No Monitor, Monitor Default: No Monitor

Sets whether to monitor the current wavelength. It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor. When the parameter is set to Monitor for a wavelength, the NMS will report a CHAN_LOS if the NMS cannot detect the wavelength. However, when the parameter is set to No Monitor, the NMS will not report the alarm.

28.5.9 WMU Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3122



Optical Specifications Table 28-29 Optical specifications of the WMU board Item

Unit

Value


nm

1529-1561


GHz

50/100

Per-channel input optical power range

dBm

-36 to -16


GHz

<2.5

Detect accuracy for single channel optical power

dB

<2

Detect range for Central wavelength offset

GHz

-10 to 10



l





TN11WMU

12

15


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3123


29

29 Variable Optical Attenuator Board

Variable Optical Attenuator Board

About This Chapter 29.1 Overview Electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA) boards are mainly configured at input ports on optical amplifier (OA) boards, or wavelength-adding and pass-through ports on optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) boards to adjust optical power. 29.2 VA1 VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit 29.3 VA4 VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3124



29.1 Overview Electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA) boards are mainly configured at input ports on optical amplifier (OA) boards, or wavelength-adding and pass-through ports on optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) boards to adjust optical power.

Application of EVOAs EVOA boards adjust the optical power of optical signals as required by system control boards in the following scenarios: l

EVOA boards are configured before the input ports of OA boards to adjust the input optical power of OA boards to the OA nominal power or the target power specified in network design. See Figure 29-1. Figure 29-1 EVOA configured at the input port of an OA board

OA

EVOA

FIU

OA

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

EVOA boards are configured at the wavelength-adding ports and pass-through ports of OADM boards to adjust the optical power of added signals and pass-through signals so that the optical spectrum is flat at an OADM site. See Figure 29-2.


3125



Figure 29-2 EVOAs configured at the wavelength-adding ports and pass-through ports of an OADM board

OTU

OTU

EVOA

OTU EVOA

EVOA

EVOA

OA

OA

EVOA

OA MRx

EVOA

MRx

OTU

OA

Main Functions of EVOA Boards The VA1 and VA4 boards provide the following functions: l

The VA1 board adjusts the optical power for one channel of optical signals and the VA4 board adjusts the optical power for four channels of optical signals.

l

Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding optical receiver caused by too-high optical power when the power supply recovers.

l

Supports the variable attenuation range of 1.5 dB to 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.

l

Supports optical-layer ASON.

29.2 VA1 VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

29.2.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the VA1 board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3126



Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1V A1

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

T N1 2V A1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N1 3V A1

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 29.2.11 VA1 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11VA1

TN12VA1/ TN13VA1

Using the TN12VA1 board to replace the TN11VA1 board: l Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R003 or a later version. The TN13VA1 board can be created as VA1 on the NMS to substitute for the TN11VA1 board (TN11VA1 is displayed as VA1 on the NMS.). For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800/3800 V100R004C01 or a later version. After the substitution, the TN13VA1 board functions as a TN11VA1 board. NOTE When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13VA1 board cannot be installed in slot IU1. Therefore, if a TN11VA1 board is installed in slot IU1 and a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13VA1 board cannot substitute for the TN11VA1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3127



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12VA1

TN13VA1

The TN13VA1 board can be created as 12VA1 on the NMS to substitute for the TN12VA1 board, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN13VA1 board functions as a TN12VA1 board. NOTE When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13VA1 board cannot be installed in slot IU1. Therefore, if a TN12VA1 board is installed in slot IU1 and a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13VA1 board cannot substitute for the TN12VA1 board.

TN13VA1

None

-




Added the TN13VA1 board.

The TN13VA1 board is manufactured using an optimized engineering process. The functions of the TN13VA1 and TN12VA1/TN11VA1 boards are the same.

29.2.3 Application As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA1 board implements the power adjustment for one signal. For the position of the VA1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 29-3. Figure 29-3 Position of the VA1 board in the WDM system OTU OTU

OTU

VA1 VA1 VA1

OTU

VA1 VA1

OA

VA1

OA

OA

VA1

VA1 MR2

MR2 VA1

OA

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

VA1


3128



29.2.4 Functions and Features The VA1 board adjusts optical power and provides power-off protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 29-1. Table 29-1 Functions and features of the VA1 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Queries the attenuation and adjusts the optical power of one optical signal according to the control command sent by the SCC.

Power-off protection

Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages to the corresponding optical receiver due to high optical power when the power supply recovers.

Attenuation range

The variable attenuation range is between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB. NOTE The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA1 is 1.5 dB.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

29.2.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The VA1 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 29-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA1.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3129



Figure 29-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1

Variable optical attenuator

IN

OUT


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow According to commands sent by the SCC board, the VA1 board adjusts the power of the input optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.

Module Function l

Variable optical attenuator Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.

l

Driving and control module – Detects the input and output optical power of the VA1 board. – Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to the control and communication module.

l


l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3130




29.2.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA1 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 29-5 shows the front panel of the VA1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3131



Figure 29-5 Front panel of the VA1 board

VA1 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION CAUTION HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS


OUT IN

VA1



3132



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 29-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 29-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA1 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.

OUT

LC

Transmits the adjusted optical signals.


29.2.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one VA1. Table 29-3 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA1 board. Table 29-3 Valid slots for the TN11VA1 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 29-4 shows the valid slots for the TN12VA1/TN13VA1 board. Table 29-4 Valid slots for the TN12VA1/TN13VA1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


3133



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

NOTE

When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack subrack, the TN13VA1 board cannot be installed in slot IU1.

29.2.8 Characteristic Code for the VA1 The characteristic code for the VA1 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 29-5. Table 29-5 Characteristic code for the VA1 board Code

Meaning

Description

Digits 1 through 3

Attenuation value

Indicate the maximum attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 29-6. Table 29-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3134



29.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the VA1, refer to Table 29-7. Table 29-7 VA1 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-






-



-


Configure Band

C



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

-



3135



Field

Value

Description

Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used

When this parameter is set to Unused for a port, service alarms reported for this port will be masked and the function for automatically disabling serviceaffecting settings is invalid for the port. This parameter is set to Used by default. Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment. Actual Working Band Parity

-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All

29.2.11 VA1 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

TN11VA1 Optical Specifications Table 29-8 lists the optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board. Table 29-8 Optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board Item IN-OUT

Unit

Value


dB

<=1.5


dB

20

dB

1

Adjustment accuracy

TN12VA1/TN13VA1 Optical Specifications Table 29-9 lists the optical specifications of the TN12VA1/TN13VA1 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3136



Table 29-9 Optical specifications of the TN12VA1/TN13VA1 board Item IN-OUT

Unit

Value


dB

<=1.5


dB

20

dB

1 (attenuation<=10dB) 1.5 (attenuation<=15dB)

Adjustment accuracy

1.8 (attenuation>15dB)



l





TN11VA1/TN12VA1

6.5

7.2

TN13VA1

6.0

6.6


29.3 VA4 VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit

29.3.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the VA4 board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3137



Bo ar d

Gene ral 8800 T64 Subr ack


Gene ral 8800 T32 Subra ck


8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

T N1 1V A4

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

T N1 2V A4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

T N1 3V A4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


Specification: – For the specification of each version, see 29.3.11 VA4 Specifications.


Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11VA4

TN12VA4/ TN13VA4

Using the TN12VA4 board to replace the TN11VA4 board: l Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R003 or a later version. The TN13VA4 board can be created as VA4 on the NMS to substitute for the TN11VA4 board (TN11VA4 is displayed as VA4 on the NMS.). For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800/3800 V100R004C01 or a later version. After the substitution, the TN13VA4 board functions as a TN11VA4 board. NOTE When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13VA4 board cannot be installed in slot IU1. Therefore, if a TN11VA4 board is installed in slot IU1 and a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13VA4 board cannot substitute for the TN11VA4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3138



Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN12VA4

TN13VA4

The TN13VA4 board can be created as 12VA4 on the NMS to substitute for the TN12VA4 board, without any software upgrade. After the substitution, the TN13VA4 board functions as a TN12VA4 board. NOTE When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13VA4 board cannot be installed in slot IU1. Therefore, if a TN12VA4 board is installed in slot IU1 and a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the 8800 Universal Platform Subrack subrack, the TN13VA4 board cannot substitute for the TN12VA4 board.

TN13VA4

None

-




Added the TN13VA4 board.

The TN13VA4 board is manufactured using an optimized engineering process. The functions of the TN13VA4 and TN12VA4/TN11VA4 boards are the same.

29.3.3 Application As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA4 board adjusts optical power for four optical signals. For the position of the VA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 29-6. Figure 29-6 Position of the VA4 board in the WDM system

VA4

OTU OTU

OTU OTU

VA4

VA4 VA4

OA MR2

OA

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

VA4

VA4

OA

MR2 OA


VA4

3139



29.3.4 Functions and Features The VA4 board is mainly used to adjust optical power and provide power-off protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 29-10. Table 29-10 Functions and features of the VA4 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

Queries the attenuation and adjust the optical power of four optical signals respectively according to the control command sent by the SCC.

Power-off protection

Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding optical receiver caused by too-high optical power when the power supply recovers.

Attenuation range

The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB. NOTE The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA4 is 1.5 dB.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

29.3.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The VA4 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 29-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA4.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3140



Figure 29-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4 IN1


OUT1

IN2


OUT2

IN3


OUT3

IN4


OUT4


Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage


SCC


Signal Flow According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA4 board adjusts the power of four channels of optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.

Module Function l

Variable optical attenuator Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.

l

Driving and control module – Detects the input and output optical power of the VA4 board. – Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to the control and communication module.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3141





29.3.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA4 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 29-8 shows the front panel of the VA4 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3142



Figure 29-8 Front panel of the VA4 board

VA4 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CAUTION CAUTION HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS


OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4

VA4



3143



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 29-11 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 29-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA4 board Interface

Type

Function

IN1-IN4

LC

Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.

OUT1-OUT4

LC

Transmits the adjusted optical signals.


29.3.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one VA4 board. Table 29-12 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA4 board. Table 29-12 Valid slots for TN11VA4 board Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 29-13 shows the valid slots for the TN12VA4/TN13VA4 board. Table 29-13 Valid slots for TN12VA4/TN13VA4 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


3144



Product

Valid Slots


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

NOTE

When a system control board is installed in slot IU2 of the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack subrack, the TN13VA4 board cannot be installed in slot IU1.

29.3.8 Characteristic Code for the VA4 The characteristic code for the VA4 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 29-14. Table 29-14 Characteristic code for the VA4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First to third digits

Attenuation value


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 29-15. Table 29-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

IN3/OUT3

3

IN4/OUT4

4


3145



NOTE


29.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For VA4 Parameters, refer to Table 29-16. Table 29-16 VA4 parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-








-



-


Configure Band

C


Default: C Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3146



Field

Value

Description

Actual Band

-


Channel Use Status

Used, Unused


Default: Used

When this parameter is set to Unused for a port, service alarms reported for this port will be masked and the function for automatically disabling serviceaffecting settings is invalid for the port. This parameter is set to Used by default. Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment. Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)

-



-



All, Odd, Even


Default: All

29.3.11 VA4 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

TN11VA4 Optical Specifications Table 29-17 lists the optical specifications of the TN11VA4 board. Table 29-17 Optical specifications of the TN11VA4 board Item IN-OUT

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit

Value


dB

<=1.5


dB

20


3147



Item

Unit

Value

Adjustment accuracy

dB

1

TN12VA4/TN13VA4 Optical Specifications Table 29-18 lists the optical specifications of the TN12VA4/TN13VA4 board. Table 29-18 Optical specifications of the TN12VA4/TN13VA4 board Item IN-OUT

Unit

Value


dB

<=1.5


dB

20

dB

1 (attenuation<=10 dB) 1.5 (attenuation<=15 dB)

Adjustment accuracy

1.8 (attenuation>15 dB)



l





TN11VA4/TN12VA4

8.5

9.4

TN13VA4

6.4

7.0


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3148


30

30 Dispersion Compensation Board

Dispersion Compensation Board

About This Chapter 30.1 Overview Dispersion compensation boards compensate for dispersion accumulated during fiber transmission of optical signals and compress the pulses of the propagated optical signals. This enables the propagated optical signals to be restored at the output end. 30.2 DCU DCU: dispersion compensation unit 30.3 TDC TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3149



30.1 Overview Dispersion compensation boards compensate for dispersion accumulated during fiber transmission of optical signals and compress the pulses of the propagated optical signals. This enables the propagated optical signals to be restored at the output end.

Main Functions Table 30-1 lists the main functions of dispersion compensation boards. Table 30-1 Main functions of dispersion compensation boards Device Type

Description

Function

Application

M o d ul e

Uses a dispersion compensation fiber (DCF) and provides fixed dispersion.

Provides span-based dispersion compensation, enabling long-haul optical transmission.

l Works with optical amplifier boards at the transmit and receive ends of a transmission line.

D C M

DCM (DCF)

l Supports G.652, G.653, and G.655 fiber applications. DCM (FBG)

Uses fiber Bragg grating (FBG) and provides fixed compensation.

l Works with optical amplifier boards at the transmit and receive ends of a transmission line. l Supports G.652 and G.655 fiber applications.

B o ar d

TN11DCU

Uses a DCF and provides fixed dispersion.

l Works with optical amplifier boards at the transmit and receive ends of a transmission line. l Supports G.652 and G.655 fiber applications.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3150



Device Type

Description

Function

Application

B o ar d

Provides tunable dispersion to precisely compensate for dispersion inside a channel.

Precisely compensates for residual dispersion inside an OTU channel that cannot be compensated by DCM modules.

l Works with an OTU board at the receive end of a transmission line. The TDC board must precede the OTU board.

TN11TDC

l Applies to scenarios that allow for relatively small dispersion, such as, 40 Gbit/s communication systems.

NOTE

For details on the DCM, see 11.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module.

30.2 DCU DCU: dispersion compensation unit

30.2.1 Version Description The available functional version of the DCU board is TN11.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1D C U

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


3151



30.2.2 Application As a kind of dispersion compensation board, the DCU board is used at the transmit or receive end in the transmission system to compensate for the dispersion that is accumulated in an optical transmission system. For the position of the DCU board in the WDM system, see Figure 30-1. Figure 30-1 Position of the DCU board in the WDM system DCU OTU

MUX

OBU

DMUX

OAU

OTU OTU

DMUX

OAU

MUX

OBU

OTU

OTU OTU OTU OTU

DCU OTU

MUX

DCU

OBU

DMUX

OAU

OTU OTU

DMUX

OAU

OBU

DCU

OTU

MUX

OTU OTU OTU OTU

30.2.3 Functions and Features The DCU board compensates for the dispersion that is accumulated in the fiber during transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. This enables the transmitted optical signals to be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board, the DCU board can implement long haul optical transmission. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 30-2. Table 30-2 Functions and features of the DCU board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic function

Provides dispersion compensation for different transmission distance.

Dispersion compensation method

Compensates for the dispersion accumulated in an optical transmission system, and compresses the optical signal pulse. This enables the transmitted optical signals to be restored at the output end.


3152




Description

Long haul transmission with optical regeneration

Implements long haul transmission when used together with an optical amplifier board.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported

30.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 30-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board. Figure 30-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board

IN

OUT

Dispersion compensation EDFA optical module module Control CPU

Memory

Communication


Required voltage



Signal Flow The dispersion compensation module (DCM) performs the dispersion compensation with the main path optical signals received through the IN optical interface. Then, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

Module Function l

The dispersion compensation module After the optical signal is transmitted for a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is widened because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. This severely affects

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3153



the system transmission performance. The DCM employs the negative dispersion borne with the dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) to offset the positive dispersion in the transmission fiber, and compresses the input optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals at the output end are restored back to the original signals. l


l


30.2.5 Front Panel There are interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 30-3 shows the front panel of the DCU board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3154



Figure 30-3 Front panel of the DCU board

DCU

OUT IN

DCU

Interfaces Table 30-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 30-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCU board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC

Accesses the multiplexed signals to be compensated in terms of dispersion.

OUT

LC

Outputs the multiplexed signals that have been compensated in terms of dispersion.


3155




30.2.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one DCU board. Table 30-4 shows the valid slots for the DCU board. Table 30-4 Valid slots for the DCU board Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


IU2-IU5, IU11

30.2.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 30-5. Table 30-5 Characteristic code for the DCU board Code

Meaning

Description

Character before hyphen (-)

Fiber type

Type of the fiber that the DCU board works with

Character after hyphen (-)

Dispersion compensation distance

The transmission distance achieved through dispersion compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km. NOTE

If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to separate each distance.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3156




Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 30-6. Table 30-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN

1

OUT

2

30.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DCU, refer to Table 30-7. Table 30-7 DCU parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Compensation Distance

-

Displays the dispersion compensation distance.

Fiber Type

-


30.2.10 DCU Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3157



NOTE


Optical Specifications Table 30-8 Optical specifications of the DCU board (1) Item

Unit

Value DC U0 1

DC U0 2

DC U0 3

DC U0 4

DC U0 5

DC U06

D CU 07

DCU0 8

Typical dispersion compensation distance

km

20

40

60

80

100

120

5

10

Maximum insertion loss

dB

3.3

4.7

6.4

8

9

9.8

2.3

2.8

Dispersion compensation slope

-

90%-110%

Polarization mode dispersion

ps

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.8

0.3

0.3

Polarization-dependent loss

dB

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

Maximum input power a

dBm

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20


nm

1528-1568

Dispersion compensating fiber type

-

G.652 fiber

a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.

Table 30-9 Optical specifications of the DCU board (2) Item

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Unit

Value DCU 11

DCU 12

DCU 13

DCU 14

DCU1 5

DCU1 6

Typical dispersion compensation distance

km

20

40

60

80

100

120

Maximum insertion loss

dB

4

5

5.9

6.9

7.8

8.8


3158



Item

Unit

Value DCU 11

DCU 12

DCU 13

DCU 14

DCU1 5

DCU1 6

Dispersion compensation slope

-

90%-110%

Polarization mode dispersion

ps

0.4

0.5

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

Polarization-dependent loss

dB

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

Maximum input power a

dBm

20

20

20

20

20

20


nm

1528-1568

Dispersion compensating fiber type

-

G.655 fiber

a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.



l

Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)




TN11DCU

0.2

0.3


30.3 TDC TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board

30.3.1 Version Description The available hardware version of the TDC board is TN11. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3159








8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1T D C

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Variants Table 30-10 Available variants of the TDC board Board

Varia nt

Description

TN11TDC

01

Compensates for dispersion of DQPSK and ODB optical modules.

02

Compensates for dispersion of DRZ optical modules.

30.3.2 Application The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in one channel. If a 40 Gbit/s OTU board is configured with intra-board 1+1 protection, the TDC board must be configured on the protection path at the receive end. For the application of the board in a WDM system, see Figure 30-4.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3160



Figure 30-4 Application of the TDC board in a WDM system

O T U

O L P

TDC

M40

OA

OA

D40

M40

OA

OA

D40

D40

OA

OA

M40

D40

OA

OA

M40

TDC

O L P

O T U

Working channel Protection channel

30.3.3 Functions and Features The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in a single channel and reports information. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 30-11. Table 30-11 Functions and features of the TDC board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

The TDC board is used for C-band optical signals. Compensates for the dispersion in the single channel. The dispersion is adjustable.

Information report

Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information about the board.

Optical-layer ASON

Supported by TN11TDC01.

30.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TDC board consists of the optical module, the driving and detection module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 30-5 is the functional block diagram of the TDC board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3161



Figure 30-5 Functional block diagram of the TDC board Optical module Tunable dispersion compensation module

IN

OUT

Data signal

Driving signal


Control CPU

Memory

Communication



Required voltage

SCC


Back plane (Controlled by SCC)

Signal Flow The TDC reports hardware information and alarm events to the SCC through the communication module. One single wavelength optical signal is input through the IN interface. After the dispersion is compensated for by the compensation module, the signal is output through the OUT.

Module Function l

Optical module The optical module of the TDC board contains a tunable dispersion compensation module. The system can adjust for the dispersion of the compensation module.

l

Driving and detection module Drives and controls the TDC module, and reports the detected dispersion to the control and communication module.

l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3162





30.3.5 Front Panel There are indicator and interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 30-6 shows the front panel of the TDC board. Figure 30-6 Front panel of the TDC board

TDC STAT ACT PROG SRV

OUT IN

TDC

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3163





l


l


l



Interfaces Table 30-12 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 30-12 Types and functions of the TDC interfaces Interface

Connector Type

Description

IN

LC

Connected to the optical demultiplexer to input a single signal that is to be equalized.

OUT

LC

Connected to the OTU to output the equalized a single signal.


30.3.6 Valid Slots One slot houses one TDC board. Table 30-13 shows the valid slots for the TDC board. Table 30-13 Valid slots for the TDC board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Product

Valid Slots






IU1-IU18


IU1-IU16


IU1-IU17


3164



30.3.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 30-14. Table 30-14 Characteristic code for the TDC board Code

Meaning

Description


Fiber type

Fiber type that the TDC board is compatible with




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is tunable.

30.3.8 Optical Interfaces This section introduces information such as slots, interfaces and parameters for the TDC configuration in an NM system.

Display of Optical Interfaces Table 30-15 shows the sequence number displayed in an NM system of the optical interface on the panel of the board. Table 30-15 Display of the optical interfaces on the TDC board Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

NOTE

An optical interface displayed on the NM denotes a pair of actual optical interfaces, one of which serves to receive signals and the other of which serves to transmit signals.

30.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TDC, refer to Table 30-16. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3165



Table 30-16 TDC parameters Field

Value

Description


-



-


Receive Wavelength

C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 Default: /


Receive Band Type

C Default: C


30.3.10 TDC Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 30-17 lists the optical specifications of the TDC board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3166



Table 30-17 Optical specifications of the TDC board Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical channels

-

80

Dispersion tuning range

ps/nm

±400

Dispersion tuning speed

sec

<15

Input power range

dBm

-13 to 0

Dispersion accuracy

ps/nm

±10


dBm

The output optical power should be close to the input power, with an error range of ±1.5 dB.

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows: l


l

Weight: 1.14 kg (2.51 lb.)




TN11TDC

13

15


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3167


31 Clock Board

31

Clock Board

About This Chapter 31.1 STG STG: Centralized Clock Board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3168


31 Clock Board

31.1 STG STG: Centralized Clock Board

31.1.1 Version Description The available functional versions of the STG board are TN11, TN12, TN52, TN54, TNK2.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N1 1S T G

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

T N1 2S T G

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

T N5 2S T G

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

T N5 4S T G

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N


3169


31 Clock Board

Bo ar d





8800 T16 Subrac k


6800 Subrac k

3800 Chassi s

T N K2 ST G

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

NOTE

When the STG board is used in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack, the TN12XCS cross-connect board must be used.


Appearance: – The TN11/TN12, TN52/TN54 and TNK2 versions use different front panels with different dimensions, but the TN11 and TN12 versions use a same front panel, the TN52 and TN54 versions use a same front panel. See 31.1.6 Front Panel and 31.1.10 STG Specifications.

l

Specification: – The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 31.1.10 STG Specifications.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Original Board

Substitute Board

Substitution Rules

TN11STG

TN12STG

The TN12STG can be created as 11STG on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12STG functions as the TN11STG.

TN12STG

None

-

TN52STG

TN54STG

The TN54STG can be created as 11STG on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12STG functions as the TN11STG.

TN54STG

None

-

TNK2STG

None

-


3170


31 Clock Board




Added the TN54STG board.

The TN54STG board is manufactured using an optimized engineering process. The functions of the TN54STG and TN52STG boards are the same.



Added the TN12STG board.

The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack and OptiX OSN 6800, and supports IEEE 1588v2 and physical clock .

31.1.3 Application The STG board is a type of clock board, which locks the reference clock source and provides clock signals and frame signals to the system. The clock signals comply with ITU-T G.813 and ITU-T G.823. The STG board can apply to the optical-layer and electrical-layer scenarios.

Optical-Layer Application Figure 31-1 illustrates the optical-layer application of the STG board. Figure 31-1 Optical-layer application 2 Mbit/s external clock signals

External time signals

STI

STI

STG

STG

Clock signals & Frame signals

OA

OA

SCC

S F I U

ST2

OA

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

2 Mbit/s external clock signals


S F I U


ST2

SCC

OA


3171


31 Clock Board

NOTE

l On the OptiX OSN 6800 or OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack, the external clock and time interfaces are located on the STG board. Therefore, the STG board can directly receive a 2 Mbit/s external clock or time information compliant with IEEE 1588v2. No STI board is required. l On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T64 subrack, the external clock and time interfaces are located on the STI board. Therefore, when an external 2 Mbit/s clock or IEEE 1588v2 is deployed, the STI board must be configured.

Electrical-Layer Application Figure 31-2 and Figure 31-3 illustrate the electrical-layer application of the STG board. Figure 31-2 Electrical-layer application (OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack) 2 Mbit/s external clock signals


STI

STI

STG

STG

Clock signals & Frame signals NS2

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

MUX


G.694.1

G.694.1 1



1

NS2

DMUX

TOM

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

TOM 4

DMUX

NS2

Client side

MUX

4

NS2 WDM side

WDM side

Client side

Figure 31-3 Electrical-layer application (OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack) 2 Mbit/s external clock signals

External time signals STG

STG


100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

MUX

DMUX

NS2

1

TOM

TOM 4

Client side

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

NS2


G.694.1

G.694.1 1



NS2

DMUX

MUX

WDM side


NS2 WDM side

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s

4 Client side

3172


31 Clock Board

NOTE

l On the OptiX OSN 6800 or OptiX OSN 8800 universal platform subrack, the external clock and time interfaces are located on the STG board. Therefore, the STG board can directly receive a 2 Mbit/s external clock or time information compliant with IEEE 1588v2. No STI board is required. l On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32/T64 subrack, the external clock and time interfaces are located on the STI board. Therefore, when an external 2 Mbit/s clock or IEEE 1588v2 is deployed, the STI board must be configured.

31.1.4 Functions and Features The STG board is mainly used to lock the reference clock source and provide signals and frame signals to the system. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 31-1. Table 31-1 Functions and features of the STG board Function and Feature

Description

Basic function

l Locks the reference clock source. l Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G. 813 and G.823 and frame signals. l Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream system.

Active/standby switching function

The STG board uses a 1+1 hot backup scheme. The two STGs serve as mutual backups. When both of them are normal, one of them functions as the active board, and the other functions as the standby board. Service boards select the clock source according to the status of the two STGs. When the active STG is faulty, an active/standby switching occurs. Then, the standby STG becomes active, and the services boards select the clock from the current active STG according to the status of the two STGs. NOTE The TN52STG and TN54STG boards can back up each other. That is, a TN52STG board and a TN54STG board can work in 1+1 hot backup mode.

Clock source selection function

Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the system.

Time synchronization function

Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.

31.1.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The STG board consists of a control and communication module and a clock processing module. Figure 31-4 shows the functional block diagram of the STG board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3173


31 Clock Board

Figure 31-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the STG board Time signals/ Clock signals

Clock signals/Frame signals


Control Memory

CPU

Communication


Fuse



Module Function l

Clock processing module The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter, clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module. – Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source. – Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE.

l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3174


31 Clock Board

31.1.6 Front Panel There are indicators on the front panel of the STG board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 31-5 shows the front panel of the TNK2STG board. Figure 31-6 shows the front panel of the TN52STG/TN54STG board. Figure 31-7 shows the front panel of the TN11STG/TN12STG board. Figure 31-5 Front panel of the TNK2STG board STG STAT ACT PROG SRV

Figure 31-6 Front panel of the TN52STG/TN54STG board STG STAT ACT PROG SRV

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3175


31 Clock Board

Figure 31-7 Front panel of the TN11STG/TN12STG board



l


l


l



Interfaces Table 31-2 lists details on the interfaces of the TN11STG/TN12STG board. Table 31-2 Interface description of the STG board Interface

Connector

Function

IN

SMB

Clock signal input interface

OUT

SMB

Clock signal output interface

CLK

RJ45

Clock signal input and output interface

TOD

RJ45

Time signal input and output interface

NOTE The CLK port and the IN/OUT port cannot be used as the input or output port at the same time. If the CLK port is used to input or output clock signals, the IN/OUT port cannot be used to input/output clock signals. If the IN/OUT port is used to input/output clock signals, the CLK port cannot be used to input or output clock signals.

Pin Assignment of the CLK Interface Table 31-3 Pin assignment of the CLK interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Pin

Signal

Function

1

RJ0_E1_RX_N



3176


31 Clock Board

Pin

Signal

Function

2

RJ0_E1_RX_P


3

NC

Not connected

4

RJ0_E1_TX_N


5

RJ0_E1_TX_P


6

NC

Not connected

7

NC

Not connected

8

NC

Not connected

Pin Assignment of the TOD Interface Table 31-4 Pin assignment of the TOD interface Pin

Signal

Function

1

GND

Ground

2

GND

Ground

3

DCLS_IN0_N

1PPS negative

4

GND

Ground

5

GND

Ground

6

DCLS_IN0_P

1PPS positive

7

DCLS_OUT0_N

TOD negative

8

DCLS_OUT0_P

TOD positive

31.1.7 Valid Slots One slot houses one STG board. Table 31-5 shows the valid slots for the TN11STG board. Table 31-6shows the valid slots for the TN12STG board. Table 31-7 shows the valid slots for the TN52STG/TN54STG board. Table 31-8 shows the valid slots for the TNK2STG board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3177


31 Clock Board

Table 31-5 Valid slots for the TN11STG board Product

Valid Slots


IU15, IU16

Table 31-6 Valid slots for the TN12STG board Product

Valid Slots


IU15, IU16


IU3, IU4

Table 31-7 Valid slots for the TN52STG/TN54STG board Product

Valid Slots


IU42, IU44

Table 31-8 Valid slots for the TNK2STG board Product

Valid Slots


IU75, IU86

31.1.8 Characteristic Code for the STG None

31.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For STG Parameters, refer to Table 31-9. Table 31-9 STG parameters

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description


-



3178


31 Clock Board

Field

Value

Description


-


31.1.10 STG Specifications Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Dimensions of the front panel: – TNK2STG(H x W x D): 107.5 mm (4.2 in.) x 50.3mm (2.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) – TN52STG/TN54STG(H x W x D): 107.5 mm (4.2 in.) x 28.8 mm (1.1 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.) – TN11STG/TN12STG(H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm (8.7 in.)

l

Weight: – TN52STG: 0.47 kg (1.04 lb.) – TNK2STG: 0.70 kg (1.54 lb.) – TN11STG/TN12STG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) – TN54STG: 0.45 kg (0.99 lb.)




TNK2STG

14.0

16.0

TN52STG

13.0

14.1

TN54STG

8.9

10.0

TN11STG

8.7

9.57

TN12STG

8.7

9.57


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3179


32 TDM Unit

32

TDM Unit

About This Chapter 32.1 EAS2 EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board 32.2 EGSH EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board 32.3 SF64 SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 32.4 SF64A SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 32.5 SFD64 SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 32.6 SL64 SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board 32.7 SLD64 SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board 32.8 SLH41 SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board 32.9 SLO16 SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board 32.10 SLQ16 SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board 32.11 SLQ64 SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3180


32 TDM Unit

32.1 EAS2 EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board

32.1.1 Version Description The EAS2 is available in the following functional version: N3.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N3 EA S2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE

This board can be used only in an independent subrack, but not in a master or slave subrack.

32.1.2 Application The EAS2 is used to access Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services. Figure 32-1 shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. The Ethernet switching board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a network-level solution.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3181


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-1 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board

NMS

NE1

User A2 PORT 1 VLAN 100

NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3

PORT 2 VLAN 100

PORT 2 User B2

VLAN 100 Service flow

PORT 1 VLAN 100

User B1

Line board Data board Cross-connect and timing board

User A1

32.1.3 Functions and Features The EAS2 supports the access of 10 GE Ethernet services, LCAS, and test frame functions. Table 32-1 provides the functions and features of the EAS2. Table 32-1 Functions and features of the EAS2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Funct ion and Featu re

Description

Basic functi ons

Receives/Transmits 2x10 GE Ethernet services.

Interfa ce types

The optical interfaces are 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW Ethernet optical interfaces, which comply with IEEE 802.3ae.


3182


32 TDM Unit


Description

Functi ons when being used with an interfa ce board

Provides interfaces on the front panel.

Interfa ce charac teristic s

Working modes

10GE full-duplex


Auto-negotiation mode

Not supported

Non-autonegotiation mode

Supported

Query/ Supported Setting of port status Query of interface types

Supported

RMON measure ment

Supported

Setting of Not supported optical power threshold s

Servic e catego ries

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hot optical module swapping

Supports hot swapping of SFP+ optical modules.

EPL service

Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.


3183



32 TDM Unit

Description

EVPL service

l Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN. l Supports EVPL services based on VCTRUNK+VLAN. l Supports QinQ-based EVPL services. l Supports a maximum of 4096 links.

EPLAN service

l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 1. l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. l Supports the setting and query of the aging time of the MAC address

Servic e specifi cation s

EVPLA N service

l Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation.

Formats of Ethernet data frames

IEEE 802.3

Supported

Ethernet II

Supported

IEEE 802.1q TAG

Supported

Maximu m frame length

l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes.

MTU

Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes (the maximum size of the supported Jumbo frame is 9600 bytes). After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.

Bound bandwidt h

128xVC-4

Mapping granularit ies

Supports VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 64), and VC-4-4c/16c/64c contiguous concatenation services.

Encapsul ation formats

HDLC

Not supported

LAPS

Not supported

GFP-F

Supported

MPLS technolo gy

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

l Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.

Supports tunnel-based MPLS.


3184



32 TDM Unit

Description

VLAN technolo gy

Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.

Maximu m uplink bandwidt h

20 Gbit/s

VCTRU NK specificat ions

Number of VCTRUNKs: 34 Configuration principles are as follows: l VCTRUNKs 1 and 18 can be bound with a maximum of 64 VC-4 paths. The other VCTRUNKs can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4 paths. l VCTRUNK 1–VCTRUNK 17 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 1–64 only. VCTRUNK 18–VCTRUNK 34 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 65–128 only. l Only VCTRUNKs 1-17 support the binding of VC-3 paths and the maximum bandwidth is 10 Gbit/s.

Protec tion schem es

DLAG

Supported

LCAS

Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.

LPT

Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.

STP/ RSTP

Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP

Supports MSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1s.

LAG

Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation. Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.

ERPS

Supports ERPS, which complies with ITU-T G.8032. NOTE ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges: l IEEE 802.1d bridges l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode

Clock synchr onizati on

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Synchron ous Ethernet

Supported


3185



Maint enanc e featur es

QoS

32 TDM Unit

Description

IEEE 1588v2

Not supported

ETHOAM

l Supports multicast continuity check (CC), unicast loopback (LB), link trace (LT), and associated alarms, and complies with IEEE 802.1ag. l Supports OAM automatic discovery and loopback at the remote end, and complies with IEEE 802.3ah.

Test frame

Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.

Response to ping

Not supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Loopbac k capabilit y

PHY layer at Ethernet ports

Inloops

MAC layer at Ethernet ports

Inloops

VC-4 level

Not supported

VC-3 level

Not supported

VC-12 level

Not supported

Ethernet performa nce monitori ng (RMON)

l Supports the Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.

Alarms and performa nce events

Provides various alarm and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.

l Supports the query of the rate of a port. l Supports the detection of alarms indicating that the traffic at a port exceeds the threshold.

l Supports traffic classification that is based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT +VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, MPLS label, or MPLS label+EXP. l Supports CAR with a granularity of 64 kbit/s. l Supports eight levels of priority queues at each port. l Supports port- and queue-based traffic shaping.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3186


32 TDM Unit


Description

IGMP snoopi ng

l Supports the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol. Supports a maximum of 1024 multicast groups. l Supports the query of the enabling status of the IGMP snooping protocol. l Supports the setting and query of the IGMP snooping protocol parameters. l Supports a maximum of 1024 static multicast groups.

Flow contro l functi on

Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

SDH ASON

Supported NOTE When being installed in a T16 subrack, the board does not support SDH ASON.

32.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EAS2 consists of the interface processing module, mapping module, interface converting module, logic and control module, clock module, and power module. Figure 32-2 shows the functional block diagram of the EAS2 by describing how to process 1x10 GE signals. Figure 32-2 Functional block diagram of the EAS2 Backplane

10GE

Interface processing module

Laser shutdown


Interface converting module

Encapsulation module Digital encapsulation module Mapping module

Cross-connect unit

Cross-connect unit

LOS

Logic and control module

Communication Clock reference and frame delimitation

+3.3 V Clock module

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Virtual concatenation processing module

Power module


Power module

Fuse

SCC unit SCC unit -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V

3187


32 TDM Unit

In the Transmit Direction The encapsulation or conversion module demaps and decapsulates the signals received from the cross-connect unit. Then, the interface converting module performs the interface converting operations and transmits the signals to the service processing module. The service processing module implements the functions of the Layer 2 switching and private line service. After the interface processing module converts parallel signals to serial signals and encodes the serial signals, the Ethernet interface module transmits the serial signals.

In the Receive Direction The SFP+ optical module performs O/E conversion on the 10 GE Ethernet signals, and then transmits the signals to the Ethernet interface module. The Ethernet interface module transmits the parallel signals to the service processing module to realize the functions of the Layer 2 switching and private line service. The encapsulation module encapsulates and maps the Ethernet GFP-F frames, and then transmits the signals to the cross-connect unit.

Logic and Control Module The logic and control module provides the communication, control, and service configuration functions of the board.

Clock Module The clock module traces the system reference clock, and generates the required clock signals when the board is working.

Power Module It converts the –48 V/–60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.

32.1.5 Front Panel The front panel of the EAS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Diagram of the Front Panel Figure 32-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EAS2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3188


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-3 Front panel of the EAS2

EAS2 STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

EAS2

Indicators The front panel of the board has the following indicators: l


l


l


l


l

Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)

l

Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

Interfaces The front panel of the EAS2 has two 10 GE interfaces. Table 32-2 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EAS2. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3189


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-2 Interfaces of the EAS2 Interface

Type of Interface

Usage

IN1–IN2

LC

Receives 10 GE signals.

OUT1–OUT2

LC

Transmits 10 GE signals.

32.1.6 Valid Slots The EAS2 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EAS2 fails to work properly. The EAS2 occupies one slot in the subrack. Table 32-3 shows the valid slots for the EAS2 board. Table 32-3 Valid slots for the EAS2 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1 to IU8, and IU11 to IU18


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-4. Table 32-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EAS2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN1/OUT1

1

IN2/OUT2

2

NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3190


32 TDM Unit

32.1.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EAS2 board. On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EAS2 board provides parameters classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 32-5 lists the tab pages in the parameter configuration window. Table 32-5 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on the EAS2 board Port

Tab

External Port

Basic Attributes Flow Control TAG Attributes Network Attributes Advanced Attributes

Internal Port

TAG Attributes Network Attributes Encapsulation/Mapping LCAS Bound Path Advanced Attributes

Each parameter of the EAS2 on each tab page is described as follows. l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-6. Table 32-6 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board.

Name

For example, PORT-1

Specifies the name of a port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese.


3191


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Enable Port

Enabled, Disabled

The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled.

Default: Disabled

Working Mode


Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10GE Full-Duplex LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN(SONET mode)

Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port on a board. This parameter determines the maximum transmission rate and communication mode of the Ethernet port.

1518 to 9600

Specifies the maximum frame length supported by the Ethernet port.

Default: 1522 Port Physical Parameters

-

Displays the actual working state of a port.

MAC LoopBack




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

When setting this parameter, you must ensure the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same. Otherwise, the services are not available.


3192


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

PHY LoopBack




l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in Table 32-7. Table 32-7 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-




Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in non-autonegotiation mode.

Default: Disable

See E.10 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to obtain the details.

l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-8. Table 32-8 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the type of a VCTRUNK port.

TAG


Specifies the type of a data packet that a port processes. This parameter is available only when the network attribute of the port is PE or UNI.

Default: Tag Aware

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3193


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4095


Default: 1

VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

Entry Detection


l

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-9. Table 32-9 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the type of port, either PORT or VCTRUNk.

Name

For example, VCTRUNK-3

Specifies the name of a VCTRUNK port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese.

TAG



Default: Tag Aware

Default VLAN ID


VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. 3194


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Entry Detection

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Enabled

l

The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-10. Table 32-10 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Port Attributes

UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware, NNI

Specifies the position of the port in the network. Different port attributes support different types of packets.

Default: UNI

l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-11. Table 32-11 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



Enabled, Disabled

The Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets.

Default: Disabled


3195


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description


10% to 100%

The Broadcast Packet Suppression Thresholdparameter allocates the specified bandwidth to the broadcast packets. The bandwidth is allocated on the basis of the traffic proportion at the port. If the bandwidth allocated to the broadcast packets reaches the specified threshold, the port discards the broadcast data packets that are received.

Threshold of Port Receiving Rates (Mbit/s)

0 to 10000

The Threshold of Port Receiving Rates (Mbit/s) parameter specifies the data flow threshold at external physical ports.

Port Traffic Threshold Time Window (Min)

0 to 30

Loop Detection

Enabled, Disabled

Default: 10000

Default: 0

Default: Disabled

Loop Port Shutdown


l

Sets traffic threshold time window for the external port. Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port. Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-12. Table 32-12 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Loop Detection

Enabled, Disabled

Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port.

Default: Disabled

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3196


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Loop Port Shutdown

Enabled, Disabled

Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port.

Default: Enabled

l

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are listed in Table 32-13. Table 32-13 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the VCTRUNK ports.

Mapping Protocol

GFP

Specifies the mapping protocol adopted by the VCTRUNK port.

Default: GFP Scramble

Unscrambled, Scrambling mode[X43+1], Scrambling mode[X48+1] Default: Scrambling Mode [X43+1]

Set Inverse Value for CRC

-

Specifies whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation protocol and which scramble mode is adopted. Specifies whether to set an inverse value for the CRC field of the HDLC or LAPS protocol. You can set this parameter only when the mapping protocol is HDLC or LAPS.

Check Field Length



Big endian, Little endian

Extension Header Option

Yes, No

Default: Big endian

Default: No

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Specifies the length of the CRC field of the mapping protocol. Specifies the sequence of storing the bits in the CRC field in the FCS frame of the mapping protocol. Specifies whether the GFP encapsulation protocol supports the extension header.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table 32-14. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3197


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-14 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

VCTRUNKn

Indicates the VCTRUNK port. The letter n indicates the number of the VCTRUNK port.

Enabling LCAS

Enabled, Disabled

The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is automatically increased if the member recovers.

Default: Disabled

LCAS Mode

Huawei Mode, Standard Mode Default: Huawei Mode

Hold off Time(ms)

0 to 10000 Default: 2000

WTR Time(s)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


The LCAS Mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and Rs_Ack messages received from the source end. The Hold off Time(ms) (LCAS) parameter is also called HO Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies HO Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. If the LCAS coexists with another network-level protection scheme (for example, MSP or SNCP), you can set this parameter to postpone the LCAS switching. The WTR Time(s) parameter is also called WTR Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies WTR Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. Set this parameter to avoid impact caused by the alarm jitter on the link status.

3198


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

TSD

Enabled, Disabled

The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled and if a VCTRUNK member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member.

Default: Disabled

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Min. Members - Transmit Direction

2 to 256

Min. Members - Receive Direction

2 to 256

Default: 256

Default: 256

When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Min. Members - Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the valid members in the transmit direction. Specifies the minimum number of members in the receive direction. If the LCAS is enabled and the number of valid members is less than the specified value, an alarm is reported.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table 32-15.


3199


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-15 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

VCTRUNCK Port

-

Displays the number of the VCTRUNK port.

Level

-

Specifies the level of the VCTRUNK bound path.

Service Direction

-

Specifies the direction of the Ethernet service.

Bound Path

-

Specifies the number of the bound path, including the VC4 path number and VC3 path number.

Bound Path Count

-

Displays the number of the bound VCTRUNK ports.

Used Channel

-

Displays the channels in use.

Activation Status

-

Displays whether the path is active.

32.1.9 EAS2 Specifications The technical specifications of the EAS2 include the parameters specified for optical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces Table 32-16 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2. Table 32-16 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Parameter

Value

Transmission rate

10.3125 Gbit/s or 9.953 Gbit/s

Processing capability

2x10GE signals

Type of optical interface

10GBASE-LR/LW

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Operating wavelength range (nm)

1290 to 1330

Transmission distance (km)

10


3200


32 TDM Unit

Parameter

Value

Maximum mean launched power (dBm)

0.5

Minimum mean launched power (dBm)

-8.2

Receiver sensitivity (dBm)

-12.6

Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

3.5

Connector type

LC

Laser Safety Class The safety class of the laser on the board is Class 1. The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Ethernet Performance Specifications Figure 32-4 shows the connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case of overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EAS2. Figure 32-4 Connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case of overloading and latency specifications Tested equipment 1

Tested equipment 2

Port 1

Port 2 Data network performance analyzer

Table 32-17 lists the throughput specifications of the EAS2. Table 32-18 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2. Table 32-19 lists the latency specifications of the EAS2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3201


32 TDM Unit

NOTE

l

The specifications vary according to the configuration and networking of the test environment and the VC services bound on the VCG side. The specifications that are obtained in the actual environment are used.

l

The specifications in the following tables are obtained in the following scenario: EPL services are configured and 64 VC-4s are bound on the 10xGE port.

l

The data network performance is measured by using the SmartBits. The specification values in the following tables are obtained by using the SmartFlow software of the SmartBits analyzer.

l

The specific test results depend on the settings on the SmartFlow. The values listed in the following tables are the values displayed on the SmartBits analyzer.

l

In the following tables, the value such as (01,01,01) indicates the equipment No., slot No., and port No. "(01,01,01) to (01,01,02)" and "(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)", however, indicate the forward and reverse tests values, respectively.

Table 32-17 Throughput specifications of the EAS2 Frame Size (byte)

Passed Rate (%)

Tx Frames (pks/ sec)

Rx Frames (pks/ sec)

Total (%)

64

100.00000

14880952

14880952

100.00000

128

98.00000

8278145

8278145

100.00000

256

98.00000

4432624

4432624

100.00000

512

98.00000

2302025

2286453

99.32000

1024

97.00000

1161710

1156436

99.55000

1280

97.00000

932835

927296

99.41000

1518

97.00000

788146

783050

99.35000

Table 32-18 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Frame Size (byte)

Rate Tested (%)

Tx Frames (pks/ sec)

Rx Frames (pks/ sec)

Total (%)

64

100.00000

14880952

14880952

0.00

128

100.00000

8445945

8445945

0.00

256

99.00000

4480286

4470526

0.21

512

98.00000

2302025

2286453

0.67

1024

97.00000

1161710

1156469

0.45

1280

97.00000

932835

927323

0.59

1518

97.00000

788146

783073

0.64


3202


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-19 Latency specifications of the EAS2 Frame Size (byte)

Rate Tested (%)

Tx Frames (pks/sec)

Rx Frames (pks/sec)

Min Latency (us)

Ave Latency (us)

Max Latency (us)

64

96.00000

14204544

14204544

24.4

25.681

27.9

128

96.00000

8116883

8116883

24.6

25.944

28.1

256

96.00000

4340277

4340277

25

26.322

28.5

512

96.00000

2256317

2256317

25.9

27.176

29.3

1024

96.00000

1148897

1148897

27.7

28.949

31.2

1280

96.00000

923190

923190

28.6

29.802

32

1518

96.00000

780274

780274

29.4

30.562

32.8

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the EAS2 board are as follows: l

Dimensions : 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 254.1 mm (H)

l

Weight : 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)

Power Consumption Typical power consumption: 83 W Maximum power consumption: 93 W NOTE


32.2 EGSH EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board

32.2.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the EGSH board is available, that is, N1.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3203


32 TDM Unit

Boa rd





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Subrack

N1 EG SH

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE


32.2.2 Application The EGSH board is used in telecommunication domains such as Ethernet service access, bandwidth management, and Ethernet service L2 switching. Figure 32-5 shows the typical networking of the EGSH board. The board provides the following functions: receives and converges Ethernet services; performs L2 switching of Ethernet data; isolates Ethernet data ports; classifies the traffic; controls the data traffic; manages the VLAN; configures data attributes such as the priority; encapsulates and decapsulates data; forms virtual concatenation; maps and demaps SDH signals. In addition, the board can be interconnected with the broadband access equipment and data communication equipment to provide a networkwide solution. Figure 32-5 Networking and application of the EGSH board

U2000

NE1

User A2 PORT 1 VLAN 100

NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3

PORT 2 VLAN 100

PORT 2 User B2 Service flow

VLAN 100 PORT 1 VLAN 100

User B1

OCS line board OCS data board Cross-connect and timing board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

User A1


3204


32 TDM Unit

32.2.3 Functions and Features The EGSH board accesses multiple types of Ethernet services and provides various functions and features such as the MPLS function, VLAN multicast function, QinQ function, and interboard link aggregation function. Table 32-20 provides the functions and features of the EGSH. Table 32-20 Functions and features of the EGSH Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

The board processes 16xGE services. It provides functions such as O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing, mapping, Layer 2 (L2) switching, and overhead and pointer processing of the service signals. The board is connected to the active and standby cross-connect boards through the backplane. In this manner, data is exchanged and services are groomed.

Interface types

l Supports the 1000 BASE-LX and 1000 BASE-SX optical interface. l Port 6 and port 8 can work as the 1000 BASE-T electrical interface at the same time. l All the sixteen interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3z.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Functions when being used with an interface board

Transmits/Receives 16 channels of Ethernet signals through the interfaces on the front panel.

Interface characteristic s

Working modes

Auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex (Port 2 and 4 support 1000M full-duplex only).

Traffic control at ports

Autonegotiation mode

Supported.

Nonautonegotiation mode

Supported.

Query/ Setting of port status

Supported.

Query of interface types

Supported.

RMON measurement

Supported.


3205



Service categories

32 TDM Unit

Description Setting of optical power thresholds

Supported.

Hotswapping SFP optical module

Supported.

EPL service

Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.

EVPL service

Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.

EPLAN service

l Supports the L2 convergence and point-to-multipoint (P2MP) convergence. l Supports the L2 forwarding function. l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 32k. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. l Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. l Supports the query of the dynamic MAC address. l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. Only one VB is supported. The maximum number of logical ports for one VB is 40. l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN. l Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP. l The services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge are referred to as EPLAN services.

Service specifications

EVPLAN service

l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

Formats of Ethernet data frames

IEEE 802.3

Supported.

Ethernet II

Supported.

IEEE 802.1 q/p

Supported.

Frame length range

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Bridge or IEEE 802.1ad Provider Bridge.

l Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. l Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3206



Protection schemes

32 TDM Unit

Description Bound bandwidth

64 x VC-4, or 192 x VC-3

Mapping granularities

Supports VC-4, VC-3, VC-4-Xv (X≤8), and VC-3-Xv (X ≤24) granularities.

Encapsulatio n formats

HDLC

Not supported.

LAPS

Not supported.

GFP-F

Supported.

MPLS technology

Supported.

VLAN technology

Supports a maximum of 4094 VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with IEEE 802.1q/p.

Maximum uplink bandwidth

The maximum uplink bandwidth of the EGSH is 10 Gbit/s.

VCTRUNK specifications

l The number of supported VCTRUNKs is 24.

DLAG

Supported.

LCAS

Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.

LPT

Supports the point-to-point (P2P) LPT and point-tomultipoint (P2MP) LPT.

STP/RSTP

Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) that comply with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP

Supported.

LAG

Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.

l One VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or 24 VC-3s.

Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode. ERPS

Supported. NOTE ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges: l IEEE 802.1d bridges l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3207


32 TDM Unit


Description

Clock synchronizati on

Synchronous Ethernet

Only ports 2 and 4 supports the Synchronous Ethernet.


ETH-OAM

l Supports the multicast continuity check (CC), unicast loopback (LB), link trace (LT), network loop detection (LD), auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance check. l The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Test frame

Supports test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.

Response to ping

Not supported.

Port mirroring

Supported.

Loopback capability

PHY layer at Ethernet ports

Supports inloops.

MAC layer at Ethernet ports

Supports inloops.

VC-4 level

Not supported.

VC-3 level

Not supported.

VC-12 level

Not supported.

Ethernet performance monitoring (RMON)

Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.

Alarms and performance events

Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.

QoS

Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT +VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, Label Flow, or Label Exp Flow.

IGMP snooping

Supported.

Traffic control

Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Traffic monitoring

Supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.


3208


32 TDM Unit


Description

SDH ASON

Supported. NOTE When being installed in a T16 subrack, the board does not support SDH ASON.

32.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EGSH board consists of the interface module, 1588 clock processing module, L2 service processing module, SDH encapsulation and mapping module, active/standby interface converting module, logic control module, clock module, and power module. The processing of 1xGE signal is considered as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EGSH board. Figure 32-6 shows the function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board. Figure 32-6 Function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board Backplane GE

O/E conversion

1588 clock processing module

E/O conversion

GE

L2 service processing module

Active/ standby interface converting module

SDH encapsulation and mapping module

Interface module Laser shutdown

Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit

LOS Communication

Logic and control module

Reference clock and frame header +3.3V Clock module

Power module

Power Fuse module

SCC unit SCC unit -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V

66 25 125 155 MHz MHz MHz MHz

NOTE

Among the 16 ports of the board, only ports 2 and 4 support the 1588 clock processing module.

In the Receive Direction The interface module receives the series signals from an external Ethernet device (such as the Ethernet switch or router), decodes the signals, and converts the signals into parallel signals. Then, the service processing module delimits the frames, strips the preamble code, terminates the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet performance. The service processing module also classifies the traffic according to the service type and configuration requirements (the packets in the formats of MPLS, L2 MPLS VPN, and Ethernet/ VLAN are supported). In addition, the service processing module adds the tunnel and VC tags Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3209


32 TDM Unit

to the services according to the service configuration for mapping and forwarding the services. At last, the encapsulation module encapsulates the Ethernet frames in the GFP-F format, and sends the frames to the mapping module where the frames are mapped and are sent to the crossconnect unit on the backplane through the active/standby interface converting module.

In the Transmit Direction The cross-connect unit sends parallel signals to the encapsulation and mapping module through the active/standby interface converting module for demapping and decapsulation. Then, the service processing module determines a route for the signals according to the level of the equipment on the network, and performs L2 processing of the data services according to the service type and configuration requirements. The service processing module also delimits the frames, adds the preamble code, computes the CRC code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet performance. At last, the interface module converts the parallel signals into serial signals, encodes the serial signals, and outputs the serial signals through the Ethernet interface.

Interface Module In the receive direction, the interface module converts the optical signals from an external Ethernet device (such as the Ethernet switch or router) into electrical signals, and sends the electrical signals to the L2 service processing module. In the transmit direction, the interface module converts the electrical signals from the L2 service processing module into optical signals.

1588 Clock Processing Module The board supports the synchronization protocol for two 1588 clocks. On the uplink, the 1588 clock processing module extracts service packets from the Ethernet data signals that it receives, processes the packets, and transparently transmits the Ethernet data signals to the L2 service processing module. The signal flow on the downlink reverses that on the uplink.

L2 Service Processing Module This module provides functions such as L2 switching of the received and transmitted Ethernet data services, port isolation, traffic classification, data traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration.

SDH Encapsulation and Mapping Module This module encapsulates the received data services in the GFP format, decapsulates the transmitted data services in the GFP format, and maps and demaps the VC-3/4 service granules in the SDH format.

Active/Standby Interface Converting Module The active/standby interface module sends the encapsulated SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4 level to the active and standby cross-connect boards, and selects the SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4 level sent from the active and standby cross-connect boards. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3210


32 TDM Unit

Logic Control Module The logic control module controls the modules on the board and configures services for these modules. In addition, the logic control module selects and traces the clock and header signal sent from the active and standby clock boards.

Clock Module The clock module traces the system reference clock and generates the clock signals required for each chip. The clock frequency can be 66 MHz, 25 MHz, 125 MHz, or 155 MHz.

Power Supply Module The power supply module provides the DC voltage required by each module on the board.

32.2.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, and a bar code on the front panel of the EGSH board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 32-7 shows the front panel of the EGSH board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3211


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-7 Front panel of the EGSH board SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657A2 光纤

EGSH


STAT ACT PROG SRV RX 1

2 TX

TX 15

16 RX



l


l


l



Interfaces There are 16 interfaces on the front panel of the EGSH board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3212


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-8 Silk-screen

Table 32-21 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 32-21 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EGSH board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX16

LC

Receives GE signals.

TX1–TX16

LC

Transmits GE signals.

NOTE

When the 1000BASE-LX optical interface board is used, the G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 32-9 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.

Figure 32-9 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

G.652D fiber jumper

58.25 50.75

G.657A2 fiber jumper

42.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3213


32 TDM Unit

32.2.6 Valid Slots The EGSH board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally.. NOTE

To facilitate maintenance of optical modules and fibers, do not install a EGSH board in a slot at the edge of the subrack or next to the slot housing the SLH41\EGSH\THA\TN55EG16 board.

Table 32-22 shows the valid slots for the EGSH board. Table 32-22 Valid slots for the EGSH board Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU33, IU36-IU42, IU45-IU51, IU54-IU67




IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17

32.2.7 Characteristic Code for the EGSH The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the EGSH board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 32-23 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the EGSH board. Table 32-23 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the EGSH board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Characteristic Code

Optical Interface Type

N1EGSH10

10

1000 BASE-SX (0.5 km)

N1EGSH11

11

1000 BASE-LX (10 km)

N1EGSH12

12

1000 BASE-T & 1000 BASE-SX (0.5 km)a

N1EGSH13

13

1000 BASE-T & 1000 BASE-LX (10 km)b


3214


32 TDM Unit

Board

Characteristic Code


a: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000 BASE-T electrical interfaces, and the other interfaces on the board are 1000 BASE-SX optical interfaces. b: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000 BASE-T electrical interfaces, and the other interfaces on the board are 1000 BASE-LX optical interfaces. The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over the 1000 BASE-LX optical interface.


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-24. Table 32-24 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EGSH board displayed on the NM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Interface on the NM

TX1/RX1

1

TX2/RX2

2

TX3/RX3

3

TX4/RX4

4

TX5/RX5

5

TX6/RX6

6

TX7/RX7

7

TX8/RX8

8

TX9/RX9

9

TX10/RX10

10

TX11/RX11

11

TX12/RX12

12

TX13/RX13

13

TX14/RX14

14

TX15/RX15

15


3215


32 TDM Unit


Interface on the NM

TX16/RX16

16

NOTE


32.2.9 Board Protection The EGSH board supports the distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) protection. The DLAG protection is a board-level port protection technology. Figure 32-10 shows the slot configuration for the working and protection EGSH boards in the OptiX OSN 8800.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3216


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-10 Slot configuration for the working EGSH board of a DLAG protection group FAN

EFI2

EF I1

PIU

PIU

A S U T X G

A U X


S T G

PIU

PIU

STI

ATE


S C C X C H / X C M

Fiber routing

X C H / X C M

Fiber routing

IU9 IU10 IU1 IU2

IU3 IU4 IU5

E G S H (A)

IU6

IU7 IU8


S C C

E G S H (B)

E G S H (A)

E G S H (B)

FAN (A): Active

(B): Standby

In Table 32-25, the board in slot 5 protects the board in slot 3, and the board in slot 17 protects the board in slot 14. DLAG protection is of board level and protects the services between the ports configured in a protection group on the working and protection boards. Table 32-25 Slot assignment for the EGSH board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Protection Group 1

Protection Group 2

EGSH (protection board)

Slot 5

Slot 17

EGSH (working board)

Slot 3

Slot 14


3217


32 TDM Unit

32.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EGSH board. On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EGSH board provides parameters classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 32-26 lists the tab pages in the parameter configuration window. Table 32-26 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on the EGSH board Port

Tab

External Port

Basic Attributes Flow Control TAG Attributes Network Attributes Advanced Attributes

Internal Port

TAG Attributes Network Attributes Encapsulation/Mapping LCAS Bound Path Advanced Attributes

Each parameter of the EGSH on each tab page is described as follows. l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-27. Table 32-27 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



3218


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Name

For example, PORT-1

Specifies the name of a port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese.

Enable Port

Enabled, Disabled

The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled.

Default: Disabled

Working Mode


Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10GE Full-Duplex LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN(SONET mode)

Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port on a board. This parameter determines the maximum transmission rate and communication mode of the Ethernet port.

1518 to 9600

Specifies the maximum frame length supported by the Ethernet port.

Default: 1522 Port Physical Parameters

-

Displays the actual working state of a port.

MAC LoopBack




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

When setting this parameter, you must ensure the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same. Otherwise, the services are not available.


3219


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

PHY LoopBack




l

Physical Type

-

Displays the physical type of port.

Logic Type

SDH-OPPORT, SDHEPORT

Displays the logic type of port.

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in Table 32-28. Table 32-28 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-




Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in non-autonegotiation mode.

Default: Disable

See E.10 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to obtain the details. Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control

Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode.

Default: Disabled

l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

The parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-29.


3220


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-29 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the type of a VCTRUNK port.

TAG



Default: Tag Aware

Default VLAN ID


VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

Entry Detection


l

The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-30. Table 32-30 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Name

For example, VCTRUNK-3

Specifies the name of a VCTRUNK port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese.

TAG



Default: Tag Aware

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3221


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4095


Default: 1

VLAN Priority

0 to 7 Default: 0

Entry Detection


l

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-31. Table 32-31 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page Field

Value

Description

Port

-


Port Attributes

UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware, NNI

Specifies the position of the port in the network. Different port attributes support different types of packets.

Default: UNI

l

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-32. Table 32-32 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



Enabled, Disabled

The Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets.

Default: Disabled


3222


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description


10% to 100%

The Broadcast Packet Suppression Thresholdparameter allocates the specified bandwidth to the broadcast packets. The bandwidth is allocated on the basis of the traffic proportion at the port. If the bandwidth allocated to the broadcast packets reaches the specified threshold, the port discards the broadcast data packets that are received.

Threshold of Port Receiving Rates (Mbit/s)

0 to 1000

The Threshold of Port Receiving Rates (Mbit/s) parameter specifies the data flow threshold at external physical ports.

Port Traffic Threshold Time Window (Min)

0 to 30

Loop Detection

Enabled, Disabled

Default: 1000

Default: 0

Default: Disabled

Loop Port Shutdown


Zero-Flow Monitor


Zero-Flow Monitor Interval (min)

l

1 to 30 Default: 15

Sets traffic threshold time window for the external port. Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port. Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port. Sets whether to monitor the zero flow. Sets the time interval for the zero-flow monitoring.

In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 32-33. Table 32-33 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-



3223


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Loop Detection

Enabled, Disabled

Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port.

Default: Disabled

Loop Port Shutdown


Zero-Flow Monitor


Zero-Flow Monitor Interval (min)

l

1 to 30 Default: 15

Sets whether to enable shutdown of a loop port, which is used to set blocking for a loop port. Sets whether to monitor the zero flow. Sets the time interval for the zero-flow monitoring.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are listed in Table 32-34. Table 32-34 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays the VCTRUNK ports.

Mapping Protocol

GFP

Specifies the mapping protocol adopted by the VCTRUNK port.

Default: GFP Scramble

Unscrambled, Scrambling mode[X43+1], Scrambling mode[X48+1] Default: Scrambling Mode [X43+1]

Set Inverse Value for CRC

-

Specifies whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation protocol and which scramble mode is adopted. Specifies whether to set an inverse value for the CRC field of the HDLC or LAPS protocol. You can set this parameter only when the mapping protocol is HDLC or LAPS.

Check Field Length


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Specifies the length of the CRC field of the mapping protocol.

3224


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description


Big endian, Little endian

Specifies the sequence of storing the bits in the CRC field in the FCS frame of the mapping protocol.

Extension Header Option

Yes, No

Default: Big endian

Default: No

l

Specifies whether the GFP encapsulation protocol supports the extension header.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table 32-35. Table 32-35 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port) Field

Value

Description

Port

VCTRUNKn

Indicates the VCTRUNK port. The letter n indicates the number of the VCTRUNK port.

Enabling LCAS

Enabled, Disabled

The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is automatically increased if the member recovers.

Default: Disabled

LCAS Mode

Huawei Mode, Standard Mode Default: Huawei Mode

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


The LCAS Mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and Rs_Ack messages received from the source end.

3225


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Hold off Time(ms)

0 to 10000

The Hold off Time(ms) (LCAS) parameter is also called HO Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies HO Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. If the LCAS coexists with another network-level protection scheme (for example, MSP or SNCP), you can set this parameter to postpone the LCAS switching.

Default: 2000

WTR Time(s)


TSD


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


The WTR Time(s) parameter is also called WTR Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies WTR Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. Set this parameter to avoid impact caused by the alarm jitter on the link status. The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled and if a VCTRUNK member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member.

3226


l

32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Min. Members - Transmit Direction

2 to 256

When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Min. Members - Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the valid members in the transmit direction.

Min. Members - Receive Direction

2 to 256

Default: 256

Default: 256

Specifies the minimum number of members in the receive direction. If the LCAS is enabled and the number of valid members is less than the specified value, an alarm is reported.

In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table 32-36. Table 32-36 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

VCTRUNCK Port

-

Displays the number of the VCTRUNK port.

Level

-

Specifies the level of the VCTRUNK bound path.

Service Direction

-

Specifies the direction of the Ethernet service.

Bound Path

-

Specifies the number of the bound path, including the VC4 path number and VC3 path number.

Bound Path Count

-

Displays the number of the bound VCTRUNK ports.

Used Channel

-

Displays the channels in use.


3227


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Activation Status

-

Displays whether the path is active.

32.2.11 EGSH Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, electrical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 32-37 lists the optical specifications of the EGSH board. Table 32-37 Optical specifications of the EGSH board Item

Value

Type of optical interface

1000BASE-LX (10 km)

1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Multi-mode LC


1270 to 1355

770 to 860

Launched optical power range (dBm)

-9 to -3

-9.5 to -3.5


-20

-18

Minimum overload (dBm)

-3

0


9

9

Electrical Specifications Table 32-38 lists the electrical specifications of the EGSH board. Table 32-38 Electrical specifications of the EGSH board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Type of Interface

Code Pattern

1000BASE-T, RJ45

4D-PAM5


3228


32 TDM Unit

NOTE

Only port 6 and port 8 of the EGSH board can work as the GE electrical interface.

Laser Safety Class The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the EGSH board are as follows: l

Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H)

l


Power Consumption Typical power consumption: 82 W Maximum power consumption: 85 W NOTE


32.3 SF64 SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

32.3.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SF64 board is available, that is, N4.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4 SF6 4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3229


32 TDM Unit

NOTE


32.3.2 Application The SF64 board is a line board. The SF64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SF64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 32-11 shows the application of the SF64 board. The SF64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 32-11 Networking and application of the SF64 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3

Service flow OCS line board Cross-connect board

32.3.3 Functions and Features The SF64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 32-39. Table 32-39 Functions and features of the SF64 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic functions

l Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals. l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function.


3230


32 TDM Unit


Description

Specification s of the optical interface

l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specification s of the optical module

l Supports XFP pluggable optical modules.

Service processing


SDH Clock Synchronizat ion

Supported.

Overhead processing

l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals.

l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.

l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.

l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.


Reports various alarms and performance events.

Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP. l Supports the transoceanic MSP ring. NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64 board supports a maximum of two MSP rings.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3231


32 TDM Unit


Description


l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports the function of automatically releasing service loopbacks after the specified time expires. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.



ITU-T G.774.7


ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829

SDH ASON


32.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SF64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3232


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-12 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board. Figure 32-12 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board Backplane 622 MHz 622 MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s

10.71 Gbit/s

O/E

4x2.67G DEMU bit/s X

SPI 10.71 Gbit/s

E/O

10.71 Gbit/s

O/E converting module

MUX

4x2.5G bit/s

4x2.67G FEC 4x2.5G bit/s bit/s

622 MHz PLL

Reference clock

K1 and K2 insertion/extraction

K1 and K2 High-speed bus

RST MST MSA HPT

High-speed bus DCC

SDH overhead processing module

MUX/ DEMUX 669 MHz PLL

IIC LOS Laser shutdown

Logic and control module +3.3 V Power module

Power module

Frame header Communication Fuse

Clock unit

SCC unit Cross-connect unit A Cross-connect unit B SCC unit

Clock unit SCC unit -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V

PLL: phase-locked loop

SPI: SDH physical interface

RST: regenerator section termination

MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation

HPT: higher order path termination -

SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy

-

O/E Converting Module l

In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical signals.

l

In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals and sends the SDH optical signals to fibers for transmission.

l

Detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.

MUX/DEMUX Module l

In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time.

l

In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.

SDH Overhead Processing Module This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the inloop and outloop functions. l

RST sub-module – In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3233


32 TDM Unit

except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. – In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l

MST sub-module – In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. – In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte.

l

MSA sub-module – In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. – In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving.

l

HPT sub-module – In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. – In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.

Logic and Control Module l

Manages and configures the other modules of the board.

l

Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface.

l

Traces the clock signal from the active and standby clock units.

l

Controls the laser.

l

Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby clock units.

l

Controls the indicators on the board.


32.3.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SF64 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3234


32 TDM Unit

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 32-13 shows the front panel of the SF64 board. Figure 32-13 Front panel of the SF64 board

SF64 STAT ACT PROG SRV CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

OUT

IN

SF64



l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3235


32 TDM Unit

Interfaces There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64 board. Table 32-40 lists the type and function of the optical interface. Table 32-40 Type and function of the interface on the SF64 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


32.3.6 Valid Slots The SF64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SF64 board cannot work normally. Table 32-41 shows the valid slots for the SF64 board. Table 32-41 Valid slots for the SF64 board Product

Valid Slots






IU1–IU8, and IU11–IU18

32.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SF64 The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SF64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 32-42 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 32-42 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and the type of optical interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Characteristic Code

Type of Optical Interface

N4SF6401M01

01M01

Fixed-wavelength optical interface


3236


32 TDM Unit

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SF6401

01

Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-43. Table 32-43 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


32.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64 board. Table 32-44 lists all the parameters of the SF64 board. Table 32-44 Parameters of the SF64 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-

Displays all ports available on the line board.

VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1


Overhead Transfer Mode

DCC Mode, GCC Mode

Sets overhead transfer mode of the optical interface.


3237


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

MSP Sharing

Enabled, Disabled

The MSP Sharing parameter determines whether multiple multiplex section (MS) protection groups can be configured at the same optical interface.

Default: Disabled

Laser Switch

Off, On Default: On

Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On.


/





Default: Non-Loopback VC4 Path

-


VC4 Loopback


Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Default: Non-Loopback VC12 Channel

-

Displays all available VC12 channels.

32.3.10 SF64 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 32-45 lists the optical specifications of the SF64 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3238


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-45 Optical specifications of the SF64 board Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709 Gbit/s

Application codea

Ue-64.2c

Ue-64.2d

Ue-64.2e

OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)+ OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + MR2

OBU101 (-31 dBm to -34 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) + DCU08 (10) + MR2

OBU101 (-34 dBm to -37 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC


1550.12

Launched optical power range (dBm)c

-1 to +2


-19


0


10.5


a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the OBU101 is -28 dBm to -31 dBm. b: "OBU101 + OAU103" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the OBU101 and OAU103 are used. c: The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not provided.

Table 32-46 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3239


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-46 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board Item

Value

Type of optical module

1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable

Line code format

NRZ - 80 channels tunable

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power (dBm)

3


-1


9

Central wavelength (THz)

192.10 to 196.05

Central wavelength deviation (GHz)

±5

Maximum -20 dB spectral width (nm)

0.3

Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB)

35

Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)

1600


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Receiver type

APD


1260 to 1600

Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL (dBm)

-24


-7

Maximum reflectance (dB)

-27


3240


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-47 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64 board. Table 32-47 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709 Gbit/s

Dispersion limit (km)

40

Mean launched optical power (dBm)

-1 to 2


-19


0

Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/nm)

800


10


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SF64 board are as follows: l


l


Power Consumption Typical power consumption: 26 W Maximum power consumption: 27.3 W NOTE


32.4 SF64A SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

32.4.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SF64A board is available, that is, N1. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3241


32 TDM Unit






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N1 SF6 4A

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE


32.4.2 Application The SF64A optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64A board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SF64A board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 32-14 shows the application of the SF64A board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 32-14 Networking and application of the SF64A board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3242


32 TDM Unit

32.4.3 Functions and Features The SF64A board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 32-48. Table 32-48 Functions and features of the SF64A board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.

Specificatio ns of the optical interface

l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei. l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment. l Supports adjustable wavelengths in DWDM applications.

Specificatio ns of the optical module

l Supports fixed optical modules.

Service processing


SDH Clock Synchroniza tion

Supported.

Overhead processing



l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.

Alarms and performanc e events

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and maintenance.


3243


32 TDM Unit


Description

Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP. l Supports the transoceanic MSP ring. NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64A supports a maximum of two MSP protection rings.

Maintenanc e features

l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports the function of automatically releasing service loopbacks after the specified time expires. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


ITU-T G.774.7


3244



32 TDM Unit

Description



SDH ASON


32.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SF64A board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 32-15 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3245


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-15 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board 622MHz 622MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s 10.71 Gbit/s

O/E

E/O

S P I

10.71 Gbit/s

DEMUX

16x669 Mbit/s

10.71 Gbit/s

MUX

16x669 FEC 16x622 Mbit/s Mbit/s


MUX/ DEMUX module


622MHz PLL

Reference clock

K1 and K2 insertion/ extraction

16x622 Mbit/s

Backplane

K1 and K2 Highspeed bus

RST MST MSA HPT

Highspeed bus DCC

SDH overhead processing module 669MHzPLL

Frame header Logic and control module +3.3V

Power module

Communication Fuse

Power module

Clock unit


Clock unit SCC unit -48V/-60V -48V/-60V





HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit


-

The function modules are described as follows:



l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l


l




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3246


32 TDM Unit



l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



32.4.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SF64A board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3247


32 TDM Unit

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 32-16 shows the front panel of the SF64A board. Figure 32-16 Front panel of the SF64A board

SF64A STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER


PRODUCT

OUT

IN

SF64A



l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3248


32 TDM Unit

Interfaces There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64A board. Table 32-49 lists the type and function of the optical interface. Table 32-49 Type and function of the optical interface on the SF64A board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


32.4.6 Valid Slots The SF64A board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. Table 32-50 shows the valid slots for the SF64A board. Table 32-50 Valid slots for the SF64A board Product

Valid Slots







32.4.7 Characteristic Code for the SF64A The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SF64A board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 32-51 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SF64A board. Table 32-51 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SF64A board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Characteristic Code


N1SF64A01

01

Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e


3249


32 TDM Unit


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-52. Table 32-52 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64A board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


32.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64A board. Table 32-53 lists all the parameters of the SF64A board. Table 32-53 Parameters of the SF64A board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1



DCC Mode, GCC Mode


MSP Sharing

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Laser Switch

Off, On Default: On

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On. 3250


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description


/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


32.4.10 SF64A Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 32-54 lists the optical specifications of the SF64A board. Table 32-54 Optical specifications of the SF64A board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709 Gbit/s

Application codea

Ue-64.2c

Ue-64.2d

Ue-64.2e


3251


Item

32 TDM Unit

Value OBU101 (-29 dBm to -26 dBm) + OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC


1550.12


-1 to +2


-19


0


10.5

OBU103 (-28 dBm to -25 dBm) + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2

OBU101 (-34.6 dBm to -32 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) + MR2

OBU101 (-37.9 dBm to -34.9 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2


Table 32-55 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64A board. Table 32-55 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709 Gbit/s


40


3252


32 TDM Unit

Item

Value


-3 to 2


-19


0


800


13.5


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SF64A board are as follows: l


l


Power Consumption Typical power consumption: 34 W Maximum power consumption: 35.7 W NOTE


32.5 SFD64 SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

32.5.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SFD64 board is available, that is, N4.

Mappings Between the Board and Equipment This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3253


32 TDM Unit

Boa rd





8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4 SF D64

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE


32.5.2 Application The SFD64 board is a line board. The SFD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SFD64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SFD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 32-17 shows the application of the SFD64 board. The SFD64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 32-17 Networking and application of the SFD64 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


32.5.3 Functions and Features The SFD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 32-56. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3254


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-56 Functions and features of the SFD64 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

l Transmits and receives 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.

Specificati ons of the optical interface

l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specificati ons of the optical module


Service processing


SDH Clock Synchroniz ation

Supported.

Overhead processing


l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function.

l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.


l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports two channels of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



3255


32 TDM Unit


Description

Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP. l Supports the transoceanic MSP ring. NOTE Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One SFD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings.

Maintenan ce features



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


ITU-T G.774.7


3256



32 TDM Unit

Description



SDH ASON


32.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SFD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 32-18 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3257


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-18 Function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board Backplane 622 MHz 622 MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s

10.71 Gbit/s

O/E

DEMU X

SPI 10.71 Gbit/s

E/O

10.71 Gbit/s


MUX

4x2.67G bit/s

4x2.5G bit/s

4x2.67G FEC 4x2.5G bit/s bit/s

622 MHz PLL

Reference clock



RST MST MSA HPT

High-speed bus DCC


MUX/ DEMUX 669 MHz PLL



Power module


Clock unit









-



l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l


l



RST sub-module – In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3258


32 TDM Unit

– In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l


l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



32.5.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SFD64 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 32-19 shows the front panel of the SFD64 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3259


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-19 Front panel of the SFD64 board

SFD64 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER


PRODUCT TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

SFD64



l


l


l



Interfaces There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SFD64 board. Table 32-57 lists the type and function of the optical interface. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3260


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-57 Type and function of the interface on the SFD64 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX2

LC


TX1–TX2

LC


32.5.6 Valid Slots The SFD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SFD64 board cannot work normally. Table 32-58 shows the valid slots for the SFD64 board. Table 32-58 Valid slots for the SFD64 board Product

Valid Slots







32.5.7 Characteristic Code for the SFD64 The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SFD64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 32-59 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 32-59 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of optical interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SFD6401M01

01M01


N4SFD6401

01

Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e


3261


32 TDM Unit


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-60. Table 32-60 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFD64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RX1/TX1

1

RX2/TX2

2

NOTE


32.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SFD64 board. Table 32-61 lists all the parameters of the SFD64 board. Table 32-61 Parameters of the SFD64 board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1



DCC Mode, GCC Mode


Laser Switch

Off, On


Default: On

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3262


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description


/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


32.5.10 SFD64 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 32-62 lists the optical specifications of the SFD64 board. Table 32-62 Optical specifications of the SFD64 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709Gbit/s

Application codea

Ue-64.2c

Ue-64.2d

Ue-64.2e


3263


32 TDM Unit

Item

Value OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)+ OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + MR2

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC


1550.12


-1 to +2


-19


0


10.5


OBU101 (-34 dBm to -37 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2



Table 32-63 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board. Table 32-63 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Value

Type of optical module

1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable


3264


32 TDM Unit

Item

Value

Line code format

NRZ - 80 channels tunable

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power (dBm)

3


-1


9

Central wavelength (THz)

192.10 to 196.05

Central wavelength deviation (GHz)

±5

Maximum -20 dB spectral width (nm)

0.3

Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB)

35

Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)

1600


APD


1260 to 1600

Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL (dBm)

-24


-7

Maximum reflectance (dB)

-27

Table 32-64 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3265


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-64 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

10.709 Gbit/s


40


-1 to 2


-19


0


800


10


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SFD64 board are as follows: l


l


Power Consumption Typical power consumption: 36.4 W Maximum power consumption: 38.2 W NOTE


32.6 SL64 SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board

32.6.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SL64 board is available, that is, N4.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3266


32 TDM Unit






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4 SL6 4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE


32.6.2 Application The SL64 board is a line board. The SL64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SL64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SL64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 32-20 shows the application of the SL64 board. The SL64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 32-20 Networking and application of the SL64 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3267


32 TDM Unit

32.6.3 Functions and Features The SL64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 32-65. Table 32-65 Functions and features of the SL64 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical interface

l The N4SL64 board supports the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, P1L1-2D2, and V-64.2b optical interfaces. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, and V-64.2b types comply with ITU-T G.691. The characteristics of the optical interface of the P1L1-2D2 type comply with ITU-T G.959. l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.

Specifications of the optical module

l Supports XFP pluggable optical modules. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.

Service processing


SDH Clock Synchronizati on

Supported.

Overhead processing

l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



3268


32 TDM Unit


Description

Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP. l Supports the transoceanic MSP ring. NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SL64 supports a maximum of two MSP rings.




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


ITU-T G.774.7


3269


32 TDM Unit




SDH ASON


32.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SL64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 32-21 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3270


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-21 Function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board Backplane 622 MHz PLL

622 MHz

9.953 Gbit/s

O/E

9.953 Gbit/s

DEMU X

16x622 Mbit/s

9.953 Gbit/s

MUX

16x622 Mbit/s

SPI 9.953 Gbit/s

E/O O/E converting module

MUX/ DEMUX

Reference clock



RST MST MSA HPT

High-speed bus DCC




Power module


Clock unit









-




l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l


l


SDH Overhead Processing Module This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the inloop and outloop functions. l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

RST sub-module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3271


32 TDM Unit

– In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. – In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l


l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



32.6.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label on the front panel of the SL64 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3272


32 TDM Unit

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 32-22 shows the front panel of the SL64 board. Figure 32-22 Appearance of the front panel of the SL64 board

SL64 STAT ACT PROG SRV CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT


OUT

IN

SL64



l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3273


32 TDM Unit

Interfaces There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SL64 board. Table 32-66 lists the type and function of the optical interface. Table 32-66 Type and function of the interface on the SL64 board Interface

Type

Function

IN

LC


OUT

LC


32.6.6 Valid Slots The SL64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. Table 32-67 shows the valid slots for the SL64 board. Table 32-67 Valid slots for the SL64 board Product

Valid Slots







32.6.7 Characteristic Code for the SL64 The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SL64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 32-68 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 32-68 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and the type of optical interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SL6401M01

01M01


N4SL6401

01

I-64.1


3274


32 TDM Unit

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SL6402

02

S-64.2b

N4SL6403

03

P1L1-2D2

N4SL6404

04

V-64.2b

N4SL6405

05

Le-64.2


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-69. Table 32-69 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SL64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

IN/OUT

1

NOTE


32.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SL64 board. Table 32-70 lists all the parameters of the SL64 board. Table 32-70 Parameters of the SL64 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1



3275


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

MSP Sharing

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Laser Switch

Off, On Default: On



/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


32.6.10 SL64 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 32-71 lists the optical specifications of the SL64 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3276


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-71 Optical specifications of the SL64 board Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

9953280 kbit/s

Application code

I-64.1

S-64.2b

P1L1-2D2

Le-64.2

V-64.2b (OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2)a

Transmissio n distance (km)

0 to 2

2 to 40

40 to 80

35 to 60

80 to 120

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC


1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

1550.12


-6 to -1

-1 to +2

0 to +4

+2 to +4

-1 to 2 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2) 16 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)


-11

-14

-24

-21

-17 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2) -26 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)


-1

-1

-7

-8

-1


6

8.2

9

8.2

10.5

a: "OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2" indicates that the specifications of the V-64.2b optical interface are measured when the OBU, DCU, and MR2 are used.

Table 32-72 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SL64 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3277


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-72 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

9953280 kbit/s


40


-1 to 2


-17


-1


800


10.5


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SL64 board are as follows: l


l




32.7 SLD64 SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board

32.7.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SLD64 board is available, that is, N4.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3278


32 TDM Unit






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4 SL D64

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE


32.7.2 Application The SLD64 board is a line board. The SLD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SLD64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 32-23 shows the application of the SLD64 board. The SLD64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 32-23 Networking and application of the SLD64 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3279


32 TDM Unit

32.7.3 Functions and Features The SLD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 32-73. Table 32-73 Functions and features of the SLD64 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions



Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G. 691.



Service processing


SDH Clock Synchroniza tion

Supported.

Overhead processing



l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports two channels of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



3280


32 TDM Unit


Description

Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP. l Supports the transoceanic MSP ring. NOTE Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One SLD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


ITU-T G.774.7


3281



32 TDM Unit

Description



SDH ASON


32.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SLD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 32-24 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3282


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-24 Function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board Backplane 622 MHz

9.953 Gbit/s

SPI 9.953 E/O Gbit/s

DEMUX 16x622 Mbit/s

. . . .

9.953 Gbit/s

O/E

O/E

SPI

9.953 Gbit/s

16x622 Mbit/s

MUX

E/O

Reference clock



RST MST MSA HPT

High-speed bus DCC


MUX/DE MUX


622 MHz PLL



Power module


Clock unit









-



l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l


l




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3283


32 TDM Unit



l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



32.7.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLD64 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3284


32 TDM Unit

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 32-25 shows the front panel of the SLD64 board. Figure 32-25 Front panel of the SLD64 board

SLD64 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER


PRODUCT

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

SLD64



l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3285


32 TDM Unit

Interfaces There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLD64 board. Table 32-74 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 32-74 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLD64 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX2

LC


TX1–TX2

LC


32.7.6 Valid Slots The SLD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLD64 board cannot work normally. Table 32-75 shows the valid slots for the SLD64 board. Table 32-75 Valid slots for the SLD64 board Product

Valid Slots







32.7.7 Characteristic Code for the SLD64 The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SLD64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 32-76 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 32-76 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and the type of optical interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLD6401

01

I-64.1

N4SLD6402

02

S-64.2b


3286


32 TDM Unit


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-77. Table 32-77 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLD64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RX1/TX1

1

RX2/TX2

2

NOTE


32.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLD64 board. Table 32-78 lists all the parameters of the SLD64 board. Table 32-78 Parameters of the SLD64 board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1


MSP Sharing

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Laser Switch

Off, On Default: On

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



3287


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description


/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


32.7.10 SLD64 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 32-79 lists the optical specifications of the SLD64 board. Table 32-79 Optical specifications of the SLD64 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

9953280 kbit/s

Application code

I-64.1

S-64.2b


0 to 2

2 to 40

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC


3288


32 TDM Unit

Item

Value


1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


-6 to -1

-1 to +2


-11

-14


-1

-1


6

8.2


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SLD64 board are as follows: l


l




32.8 SLH41 SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3289


32 TDM Unit

32.8.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SLH41 board is available, that is, N3.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N3 SL H41

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE





Added the support for new colored optical modules 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP and 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 kmeSFP.


32.8.3 Application The SLH41 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-1/STM-4 optical signals. The SLH41 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLH41 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3290


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-26 shows the application of the SLH41 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 32-26 Networking and application of the SLH41 board

NE1 SNCP ring

NE2

NE4

NE3

Service flow OCS line board Cross-connect and timing board

32.8.4 Functions and Features The SLH41 board transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals , performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 32-80. Table 32-80 Functions and features of the SLH41 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals


l The 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical module can be used. – When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957. – When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the optical interface of the S-4.1 type. The characteristics of the optical interface of the S-4.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957. – The optical interfaces are adaptive. The SLH41 board supports hybrid configuration of STM-1/STM-4 optical interfaces.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3291


32 TDM Unit


Description


l Supports SFP pluggable optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. l When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.

Service processing

l When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services. SDH Clock Synchronizatio n

Supported.

Overhead processing

l Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals or STM-4 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports sixteen channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to port 8 support the ECC communication by using bytes D1–D12. Port 9 to port 16 support the ECC communication by using bytes D4–D12. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks.



Protection schemes

l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP in the case of STM-4 interfaces. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3292


32 TDM Unit


Description





ITU-T G.774.7



SDH ASON


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3293


32 TDM Unit

32.8.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SLH41 board consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. This topic describes the working principle and signal flow of the SLH41 board by describing how to process STM-1/STM-4 signals. Figure 32-27 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board. Figure 32-27 Function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board 155MHz PLL

STM-1/ STM-4

O/E E/O

S P I

CDR

O/E E/O

. . . .

. . . .

STM-1/ STM-4

S P I

CDR

Reference Backplane clock Clock unit


K1 and K2

RST MST MSA HPT

Highspeed bus

Highspeed bus

DCC SDH overhead processing module

O/E converting module IIC LOS Laser shutdown

Logic and control module +3.3V Power module

Power module










CDR: clock and data recovery

The function modules of the STM-1/STM-4 units are described as follows:



l


l


CDR Module This module restores the data signal and the clock signal. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3294


32 TDM Unit


RST sub-module – In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. – In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH.

l


l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l


Power Module It converts the –48 V/–60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3295


32 TDM Unit

32.8.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLH41 board.

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 32-28 shows the front panel of the SLH41 board. Figure 32-28 Front panel of the SLH41 board SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY 单模光模块仅配合使用 G.657A2 光纤

SLH41


STAT ACT PROG SRV RX 1

2 TX

TX 15

16 RX



l


l


l



Interfaces There are 16 optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLH41 board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3296


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-29 Silk-screen

Table 32-81 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 32-81 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLH41 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX16

LC


TX1–TX16

LC


NOTE

The G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 32-30 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.

Figure 32-30 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

G.652D fiber jumper

58.25 50.75

G.657A2 fiber jumper

42.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3297


32 TDM Unit

32.8.7 Valid Slots The SLH41 board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. NOTE

To facilitate maintenance of optical modules and fibers, do not install a SLH41 board in a slot at the edge of the subrack or next to the slot housing the SLH41\EGSH\THA\TN55EG16 board.

Table 32-82 shows the valid slots for the SLH41 board. Table 32-82 Valid slots for the SLH41 board Product

Valid Slots


IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU33, IU36-IU42, IU45-IU51, IU54-IU67




IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17

32.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41 The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SLH41 board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 32-83 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLH41 board. Table 32-83 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLH41 board Board

Characteristic Code


N3SLH4102

02

8×S-1.1, 8×S-4.1

N3SLH4103

03

16×S-1.1

N3SLH4105

05

16×S-4.1

The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over the interface.



3298


32 TDM Unit

Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-84. Table 32-84 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLH41 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

TX1/RX1

1

TX2/RX2

2

TX3/RX3

3

TX4/RX4

4

TX5/RX5

5

TX6/RX6

6

TX7/RX7

7

TX8/RX8

8

TX9/RX9

9

TX10/RX10

10

TX11/RX11

11

TX12/RX12

12

TX13/RX13

13

TX14/RX14

14

TX15/RX15

15

TX16/RX16

16

NOTE


32.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLH41 board. Table 32-85 lists all the parameters of the SLH41 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3299


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-85 Parameters of the SLH41 board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1


Laser Switch

Off, On



/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


32.8.11 SLH41 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 32-86 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3300


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-86 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

155520 kbit/s

Line code pattern

NRZ

Application code

S-1.1


0 to 15

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC


1261 to 1360


-15 to -8


-28

Overload optical power (dBm)

-8


8.2

Table 32-87 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used. Table 32-87 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

622080 kbit/s

Line code pattern

NRZ

Application code

S-4.1


0 to 15


1274 to 1356

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC


-15 to -8


-28


-8


8.2

Table 32-88 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the CWDM colored wavelengths optical module is used.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3301


32 TDM Unit


Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


nm

1471 to 1611


dBm

5


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

±6.5


nm

1.0


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 32-89 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the DWDM colored wavelengths optical module is used. Table 32-89 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


-

NRZ


3302


32 TDM Unit

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3303


32 TDM Unit

Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SLH41 board are as follows: l


l




32.9 SLO16 SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board

32.9.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SLO16 board is available, that is, N4.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4 SL O16

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE




3304


32 TDM Unit





32.9.3 Application The SLO16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLO16 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLO16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 32-31 shows the application of the SLO16 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 32-31 Networking and application of the SLO16 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


32.9.4 Functions and Features The SLO16 board receives and transmits 8xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 32-90.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3305


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-90 Functions and features of the SLO16 board Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions



Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.


l Supports SFP pluggable optical module.

Service processing

Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.

SDH Clock Synchroniz ation

Supported.

Overhead processing



l Supports the configuration of the D1–D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports eight channels of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.



Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection l Supports the transoceanic MSP ring. NOTE One SLO16 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3306


32 TDM Unit


Description





ITU-T G.774.7



SDH ASON


32.9.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SLO16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3307


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-32 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board by describing how to process 1xSTM-16 signals. Figure 32-32 Function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board 155MHz O/E 2.488 Gbit/s

E/O

S P I

DEMUX

2.488 Gbit/s

MUX

16x155 Mbit/s


2.488 Gbit/s

O/E E/O

S P I

16x155 Mbit/s

RST MST MSA HPT


Backplane

K1 and K2 Highspeed bus

. . . .

2.488 Gbit/s

155MHzPLL

Reference clock

Highspeed bus DCC

MUX/ DEMUX module

SDH overhead processing module Frame header



Power module

Communication Fuse

Clock unit









-



l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l


l


SDH Overhead Processing Module This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the inloop and outloop functions. l Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

RST sub-module Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3308


32 TDM Unit

– In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. – In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l


l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



32.9.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLO16 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3309


32 TDM Unit

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 32-33 shows the front panel of the SLO16 board. Figure 32-33 Front panel of the SLO16 board

SLO16

CLASS 1

STAT ACT PROG SRV

LASER


PRODUCT TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8

SLO16



l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3310


32 TDM Unit

Interfaces There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLO16 board. Table 32-91 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 32-91 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLO16 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX8

LC


TX1–TX8

LC


32.9.7 Valid Slots The SLO16 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. Table 32-92 shows the valid slots for the SLO16 board. Table 32-92 Valid slots for the SLO16 board Product

Valid Slots







32.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16 The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SLO16 board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 32-93 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLO16 board. Table 32-93 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLO16 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLO1601

01

I-16

N4SLO1602

02

S-16.1


3311


32 TDM Unit

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLO1603

03

L-16.1

N4SLO1604

04

L-16.2


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-94. Table 32-94 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLO16 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RX1/TX1

1

RX2/TX2

2

RX3/TX3

3

RX4/TX4

4

RX5/TX5

5

RX6/TX6

6

RX7/TX7

7

RX8/TX8

8

NOTE


32.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLO16 board. Table 32-95 lists all the parameters of the SLO16 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3312


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-95 Parameters of the SLO16 board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1


Laser Switch

Off, On



/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


32.9.11 SLO16 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 32-96 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3313


32 TDM Unit

Table 32-96 Optical specifications of the SLO16 board Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

2488320 kbit/s

Line code pattern

NRZ

Application code

I-16

S-16.1

L-16.1

L-16.2


0 to 2

2 to 15

25 to 40

50 to 80

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC


1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


-10 to -3

-5 to 0

-2 to +3

-2 to +3


-18

-18

-27

-28


-3

0

-9

-9


8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

Table 32-97 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board when the CWDM colored wavelengths optical module is used. Table 32-97 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (CWDM colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1471 to 1611


dBm

5


dBm

0


3314


32 TDM Unit

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



dB

8.2


nm

±6.5


nm

1.0


dB

30

Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 32-98 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board when the DWDM colored wavelengths optical module is used. Table 32-98 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


3315


32 TDM Unit

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SLO16 board are as follows: l


l


Power Consumption Typical power consumption: 20.5 W Maximum power consumption: 21.5 W Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3316


32 TDM Unit

NOTE


32.10 SLQ16 SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board

32.10.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SLQ16 board is available, that is, N4.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4 SL Q16

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Hardware Update





3317


32 TDM Unit

32.10.3 Application The SLQ16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLQ16 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLQ16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 32-34 shows the application of the SLQ16 board. The SLQ16 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 32-34 Networking and application of the SLQ16 board

NE1 MSP ring

NE2

NE4

NE3


32.10.4 Functions and Features The SLQ16 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 32-99. Table 32-99 Functions and features of the SLQ16 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Description

Basic functions



Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.


3318


32 TDM Unit


Description


l Supports SFP pluggable optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.

Service processing

Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.

SDH Clock Synchronizatio n

Supported.

Overhead processing

l Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals. l Supports the configuration of the D1–D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports four channels of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.



Protection schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection l Supports the transoceanic MSP ring. NOTE One SLQ16 board supports a maximum of four MSP protection rings.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3319


32 TDM Unit


Description





ITU-T G.774.7



SDH ASON


32.10.5 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SLQ16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 32-35 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board by describing how to process 1xSTM-16 signals. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3320


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-35 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board Backplane 155 MHz

2.488 Gbit/s

O/E SP E/O I

2.488 Gbit/s

DEMU 16x155 X Mbit/s

. . . . 2.488 O/E SP Gbit/s E/O I

2.488 Gbit/s

16x155 Mbit/s

MUX

Reference clock



RST MST MSA HPT

High-speed bus DCC


MUX/ DEMUX


155 MHz PLL



Power module


Clock unit









-



l


l


MUX/DEMUX Module l


l




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3321


32 TDM Unit



l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



32.10.6 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLQ16 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3322


32 TDM Unit

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 32-36 shows the front panel of the N4SLQ16 board. Figure 32-36 Front panel of the N4SLQ16 board

SLQ16 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER


PRODUCT TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4

SLQ16



l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3323


32 TDM Unit

Interfaces There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ16 board. Table 32-100 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 32-100 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ16 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX4

LC


TX1–TX4

LC


32.10.7 Valid Slots The slots valid for the SLQ16 board vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. Table 32-101 shows the valid slots for the SLQ16 board. Table 32-101 Valid slots for the SLQ16 board Product

Valid Slots







32.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16 The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SLQ16 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 32-102 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and the type of optical interface. Table 32-102 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and the type of optical interface

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLQ1601

01

I-16

N4SLQ1602

02

S-16.1

N4SLQ1603

03

L-16.1


3324


32 TDM Unit

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLQ1604

04

L-16.2


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-103. Table 32-103 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ16 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RX1/TX1

1

RX2/TX2

2

RX3/TX3

3

RX4/TX4

4

NOTE


32.10.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ16 board. Table 32-104 lists all the parameters of the SLQ16 board. Table 32-104 Parameters of the SLQ16 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1



3325


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Laser Switch

Off, On



/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


32.10.11 SLQ16 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 32-105 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board. Table 32-105 Optical specifications of the SLQ16 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

2488320 kbit/s

Application code

I-16

S-16.1

L-16.1

L-16.2


0 to 2

2 to 15

25 to 40

50 to 80


3326


32 TDM Unit

Item

Value

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC


1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


-10 to -3

-5 to 0

-2 to +3

-2 to +3


-18

-18

-27

-28


-3

0

-9

-9


8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC

Table 32-106 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board when the CWDM colored wavelengths optical module is used. Table 32-106 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (CWDM colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

80 km (49.7 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


nm

1471 to 1611


dBm

5


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

±6.5


nm

1.0


dB

30


3327


32 TDM Unit

Parameter

Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


Eye pattern mask

-

G.959.1-compliant


-

APD


nm

1270 to 1620


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27

Table 32-107 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board when the DWDM colored wavelengths optical module is used. Table 32-107 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths) Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type


Line code format

-

NRZ

Optical source type

-

SLM


-

120 km (74.6 mi.)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Center frequency

THz

192.10 to 196.00


GHz

±12.5


dBm

4


dBm

0


dB

8.2


nm

1


3328


32 TDM Unit

Parameter

Unit

Optical Module Type



dB

30


ps/nm

2400

Eye pattern mask

-



-

APD


dBm

-28


dBm

-9

Maximum reflectance

dB

-27


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SLQ16 board are as follows: l


l




32.11 SLQ64 SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3329


32 TDM Unit

32.11.1 Version Description Only one functional version of the SLQ64 board is available, that is, N4.






8800 T16 Subrack


6800 Subrack

3800 Chassis

N4 SL Q64

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE


32.11.2 Application The SLQ64 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-64 optical signals. The SLQ64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLQ64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 32-37 shows the application of the SLQ64 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 32-37 Networking and application of the SLQ64 board

NE1 NE2

MSP ring

NE4

NE3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3330


32 TDM Unit

32.11.3 Functions and Features The SLQ64 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 32-108. Table 32-108 Functions and features of the SLQ64 board Functio n and Feature

Description

Basic functions


Specificat ions of the optical interface

Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.

Specificat ions of the optical module

l Supports XFP pluggable optical module.

Service processin g


SDH Clock Synchron ization

Supported.

Overhead processin g



l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports four channels of ECC communication. l Supports HWECC (default), IP, or OSI protocol stacks. l Supports the 1.5 Mbit/s DCN.

Alarms and performa nce events

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and maintenance.


3331


32 TDM Unit

Functio n and Feature

Description

Protectio n schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP. l Supports the transoceanic MSP ring. NOTE A single optical interface supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SLQ64 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.

Maintena nce features


Protocols or standards complian ce

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


ITU-T G.774.7


3332


Functio n and Feature

32 TDM Unit

Description



SDH ASON


32.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow The SLQ64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 32-38 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3333


32 TDM Unit

Figure 32-38 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board 622MHz

9.953 Gbit/s

9.953 Gbit/s

O/E

E/O

S P I

9.953 Gbit/s

DEMUX

9.953 Gbit/s

MUX


622MHzPLL

Reference clock

16x622 Mbit/s


16x622 Mbit/s

RST MST MSA HPT

Backplane

K1 and K2 Highspeed bus Highspeed bus DCC

MUX/ DEMUX module

SDH overhead processing module Frame header



Power module

Clock unit


Clock unit

Communication SCC unit Fuse

-48V/-60V -48V/-60V







-




l


l

The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.

MUX/DEMUX Module l


l




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3334


32 TDM Unit



l


l




l


l


l

Controls the laser.

l


l



32.11.5 Front Panel There are indicators, interfaces, the bar code, and the laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3335


32 TDM Unit

Appearance of the Front Panel Figure 32-39 shows the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Figure 32-39 Front panel of the SLQ64 board

SLQ64 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER


PRODUCT


SLQ64



l


l


l



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3336


32 TDM Unit

Interfaces There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Table 32-109 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 32-109 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ64 board Interface

Type

Function

RX1–RX4

LC


TX1–TX4

LC


32.11.6 Valid Slots The SLQ64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. Table 32-110 shows the valid slots for the SLQ64 board. Table 32-110 Valid slots for the SLQ64 board Product

Valid Slots





32.11.7 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64 The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SLQ64 board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 32-111 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLQ64 board. Table 32-111 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLQ64 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

Characteristic Code


N4SLQ6401

01

I-64.1

N4SLQ6402

02

S-64.2b


3337


32 TDM Unit


Display of Optical Interfaces The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 32-112. Table 32-112 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel

Interface on the NM

RX1/TX1

1

RX2/TX2

2

RX3/TX3

3

RX4/TX4

4

NOTE


32.11.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ64 board. Table 32-113 lists all the parameters of the SLQ64 board. Table 32-113 Parameters of the SLQ64 board Field

Value

Description

Port

-


VC3 Path

-



For example, SDH-1


MSP Sharing

Enabled, Disabled


Default: Disabled

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3338


32 TDM Unit

Field

Value

Description

Laser Switch

Off, On



/






-


VC4 Loopback




-


32.11.10 SLQ64 Specifications Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications Table 32-114 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ64 board. Table 32-114 Optical specifications of the SLQ64 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Value

Nominal bit rate

9953280 kbit/s

Application code

I-64.1

S-64.2b


0 to 10

10 to 40


3339


32 TDM Unit

Item

Value

Type of fiber

Single-mode LC

Single-mode LC


1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565


-6 to -1

-1 to +2


-11

-14


-1

-1


6

8.2


Mechanical Specifications The mechanical specifications of the SLQ64 board are as follows: l


l




Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3340


33 Cables

33

Cables

About This Chapter 33.1 Optical Fibers Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC. 33.2 Alarm Cables Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/ inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable. 33.3 Management Cables Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and straight-through network cables. 33.4 Clock/Time Cable Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal connections, cables for testing equipment connections.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3341


33 Cables

33.1 Optical Fibers Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC.

33.1.1 Classification The connectors and the length of the fibers are determined according to the site survey that is conducted before installation. The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 33-1. Table 33-1 Classification of optical fibers Type of Connectors at Both Ends

Optical Cable Type

Fiber Type

LC/PC-LC/PC

2.0 mm (0.08 in.) singlemode simplex optical cable

G.657A2

2.0 mm (0.08 in.) multi-mode simplex optical cable

A1b


G.657A2


A1b


G.657A2


A1b

LSH/APC-FC/UPC


G.652D

LSH/APC-LSH/APC


G.652D

LSH/APC-LSH/APC

0.9mm (0.035 in.) singlemode tight buffer

G.652D

LSH/APC-LSH/APC


G.652D

LSH/APC-LC/UPC


G.652D

LSH/APC-FC/UPC


G.652D

LC/PC-FC/PC

LC/PC-SC/PC

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3342


33 Cables

Type of Connectors at Both Ends

Optical Cable Type

Fiber Type

LSH/APC-SC/UPC


G.652D

NOTE

The G.657 optical fibers provided by Huawei are named G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 optical fibers. The G.657B optical fibers are short-jacket optical fibers defined in ITU-T G.657 (12/2006). According to ITU-T G. 657 (11/2009), these fibers are classified into G.657A1, G.657A2, G.657B2, and G.657B3 optical fibers. The G.657B optical fibers provided by Huawei and the G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible and can be interconnected. In addition, the G.657B and G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible with G.652D optical fibers. However, the compatibility between customer-purchased G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 and G. 652D optical fibers needs to be verified.

33.1.2 Connectors The use of fiber connectors depends on the connector type of optical ports on boards. When boards are equipped with LC/PC optical ports, LC/PC fiber connectors must be used to mate the optical ports. Table 33-2 lists details on classification of fiber connectors. Table 33-2 Classification of fiber connectors Type of Fiber Connectors

Description

LC/PC

Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished

FC/PC

Round fiber connector/protruding polished

SC/PC

Square fiber connector/protruding polished

LSH/APC

Fiber connector with a cap that provides automatic protection against dust/eightdegree radian surface/protruding polished

The appearances of the fiber connectors are shown in Figure 33-1, Figure 33-2, Figure 33-3 and Figure 33-4.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3343


33 Cables

Figure 33-1 LC/PC fiber connector

Figure 33-2 FC/PC fiber connector

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3344


33 Cables

Figure 33-3 SC/PC fiber connector

Figure 33-4 LSH/APC fiber connector

Cover the optical interfaces of the replaced boards with protective caps in time. Store them in proper packages to keep the optical interfaces clean. The protective caps recommended are shown in Figure 33-5, and the protective caps not recommended are shown in Figure 33-6.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3345


33 Cables

Figure 33-5 Protective caps recommended

Figure 33-6 Protective caps not recommended

NOTE

The air filter caps made of soft rubber are not recommended, which tends to collect dust and sundries. This type of caps provides poor dustproof function.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3346


33 Cables

33.2 Alarm Cables Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/ inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.

33.2.1 Alarm Output Interface Cable An alarm output interface cable is used to output and concatenate alarm signals. There are RJ45 connectors at both ends of the cable. During alarm signal output concatenation, both ends of the cable are connected to the ALMO alarm interfaces in different subracks. During alarm signal output, one end of the cable is connected to the ALMO alarm interface, and the other end of the cable is connected to a power distribution cabinet or another set of equipment. In this case, alarms are displayed in a centralized manner.

Structure Figure 33-7 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable. Figure 33-7 Alarm output interface cable 1 View A 8 6 3 1

A

X2

X1 L 1. Network interface connector

Pin Assignment For the pin assignment of the alarm output interface cable, refer to Table 33-3. Table 33-3 Pin assignment of X1/X2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

Pair

X1.1

X2.1

White-orange

X1.6

X2.6

Green


Pair 3347


33 Cables

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

X1.3

X2.3

White-green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White-blue

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

X1.7

X2.7

White-brown

Relationship

Pair

Pair

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the alarm interface cable are listed in Table 33-4. Table 33-4 Technical parameters of the alarm output interface cable Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitunshielded-RJ45 connector-uniconductor flat cable

Type of the cable W1

Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100 ΩUTPCAT5E-0.5 mm (0.02 in.)-24 AWG-4 pairs-PANTONE 430U-low-smoke and halogen-free cable

Number of cores

8

Core diameter

0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

33.2.2 Alarm Input Interface Cable An alarm input interface cable is used to input alarms of external equipment. One end of the cable is connected to the ALMI interface in a subrack and the other end is connected to the external equipment under monitoring.

Structure Figure 33-8 shows the structure of the cable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3348


33 Cables

Figure 33-8 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable 8

8

1

1 1

X1

X2

1. Network interface connector-RJ45

Pin Assignment For the pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 33-5. Table 33-5 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

Pair

X1.1

X2.1

White-orange

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.3

X2.3

White-green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White-blue

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

X1.7

X2.7

White-brown

Pair

Pair

Pair

Technical Parameters For the technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 33-6.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3349


33 Cables

Table 33-6 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitcrystal model connector

Type of the cable

Communication cable-8 cores category-5 twisted pair-24AWG

Number of cores

8

Core diameter

0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

33.3 Management Cables Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and straight-through network cables.

33.3.1 OAM Serial Port Cable The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface in OptiX OSN 6800/8800.

Structure Figure 33-9 shows the structure of the OAM serial port cable. Figure 33-9 Structure of the OAM serial port cable

1. DB9 connector

Pin Assignment For the pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable, refer to Table 33-7.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3350


33 Cables

Table 33-7 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

X1.1

X2.1

Pair

X1.5

X2.5

X1.2

X2.2

X1.3

X2.3

X1.6

X2.6

X1.7

X2.7

X1.8

X2.8

X1.9

X2.9

Pair

Pair

Pair

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable are listed in Table 33-8. Table 33-8 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable Item

Description

Connector X1, X2

Cable connector-D type-9 PIN-Male-Cable welding type

Type

Symmetrical twisted-pair cable-100 ohmSEYVP-0.48 mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairsBlack

Number of cores

4 pairs

Length

10.0 m (393.7 in.), 20.0 m (787.4 in.)

33.3.2 AUX Signal Cable The AUX signal cable accesses external signals through the serial port used for NM communications and the management port. The AUX signal cable does not process external signals in the OptiX OSN 3800.

Structure Figure 33-10 shows the structure of the AUX signal cable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3351


33 Cables

Figure 33-10 Structure of the AUX signal cable 2

1

B

Pos.64 View A

W8 W7

Pos.1

A

View B

X8

1

X7

8

X6

W6 Delander

W5 W1

X5

W4

X1

L1

X4

W3

X3

View C

3

Pos.9

W2

C X2

L2 L3

Pos.1

L4 L5

1. DB64 cable connector

2. Network interface connector

3. DB9 cable connector

For the relationship between the connectors X2 to X8 and interface types, refer to Table 33-9. Table 33-9 Relationship between connectors and interface types Connector

Interface Type

X2

Serial

X3

ALMI1

X4

ALMI2

X5

ALMO

X6

LAMP1

X7

LAMP2

X8

ETH

Pin Assignment For the pin assignment of the W2 to W8, refer to Table 33-10, Table 33-11, Table 33-12, Table 33-13, Table 33-14, Table 33-15 and Table 33-16.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3352


33 Cables

Table 33-10 Pin assignment of the W2 Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

X1.3

X2.2

Pair

X1.7

X2.3

X1.4

X2.4

X1.1

X2.5

X1.6

X2.6

X1.8

X2.7

X1.5

X2.8

X1.2

X2.9

Pair

Pair

Pair


Connector X3

Relationship

X1.9

X3.1

Pair

X1.11

X3.2

X1.13

X3.3

X1.15

X3.6

X1.17

X3.4

X1.19

X3.5

X1.10

X3.7

X1.12

X3.8

Pair

Pair

Pair

Table 33-12 Pin assignment of the W4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Connector X1

Connector X4

Relationship

X1.14

X4.1

Pair

X1.16

X4.2

X1.18

X4.3

X1.20

X4.6

-

X4.4

-

X4.5 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Pair

-

3353


33 Cables

Connector X1

Connector X4

Relationship

-

X4.7

-

-

X4.8


Connector X5

Relationship

X1.21

X5.1

Pair

X1.23

X5.2

X1.25

X5.3

X1.27

X5.6

X1.22

X5.4

X1.24

X5.5

X1.26

X5.7

X1.28

X5.8

Pair

Pair

Pair


Connector X6

Relationship

X1.33

X6.1

Pair

X1.35

X6.2

X1.41

X6.3

X1.43

X6.6

X1.37

X6.4

X1.39

X6.5

X1.45

X6.7

X1.47

X6.8

Pair

Pair

Pair

Table 33-15 Pin assignment of the W7

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Connector X1

Connector X7

Relationship

X1.34

X7.1

Pair


3354


33 Cables

Connector X1

Connector X7

X1.36

X7.2

X1.42

X7.3

X1.44

X7.6

X1.38

X7.4

X1.40

X7.5

X1.46

X7.7

X1.48

X7.8

Relationship

Pair

Pair

Pair


Connector X8

Relationship

X1.61

X8.1

Pair

X1.57

X8.2

X1.53

X8.3

X1.49

X8.6

-

X8.4

-

X8.5

-

X8.7

-

X8.8

Pair

-

-

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the AUX signal cable are listed in Table 33-17. Table 33-17 Technical parameters of the AUX signal cable

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Item

Description

Connector X1

Cable connector-D type-64 PIN-8 bit-straight through connector

Connector X2

Cable connector-D type-9PIN


3355


33 Cables

Item

Description

Connectors X3-X8

Network interface connector-8 bit-8PINShielded

Type of the cable

W1

Communication cable-26AWGPANTONE430U-Sheilded

W2-W8

Communication cable-24AWG-8 coresPANTONE445U

Number of cores

8

33.3.3 Network Cable Network cables are classified into crossover cables and straight-through cables. The intra-NE connections (excluding the connections between subracks and CRPC/ROP boards) and interNE connections (including the connections between the NEs and NMS) can be established using either straight-through or crossover cables. However, the connections between subracks and CRPC/ROP boards must be established using crossover cables.

Wiring Figure 33-11 shows the wiring of straight-through and crossover cables. The Line sequence is different. Figure 33-11 Wiring of network cables

Pin8

Pin8

Pin1

Pin1 X1

Straight-through cable

X2

Pin8

Pin8

Pin1

Pin1 X2

X1 Crossover cable Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3356


33 Cables

Pinout Table 33-18 lists the straight-through cable pinout. Table 33-18 Straight-through cable pinout Connector X1

Connector X2

Wire Color

Relationship

X1.pin1

X2.pin1

White/Orange

Twisted pair

X1.pin2

X2.pin2

Orange

X1.pin3

X2.pin3

White/Green

X1.pin6

X2.pin6

Green

X1.pin4

X2.pin4

Blue

X1.pin5

X2.pin5

White/Blue

X1.pin7

X2.pin7

White/Brown

X1.pin8

X2.pin8

Brown

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Table 33-19 lists the crossover cable pinout. Table 33-19 Crossover cable pinout Connector X1

Connector X2

Wire Color

Relationship

X1.pin1

X2.pin3

White/Green

Twisted pair

X1.pin2

X2.pin6

Green

X1.pin3

X2.pin1

White/Orange

X1.pin6

X2.pin2

Orange

X1.pin4

X2.pin4

Blue

X1.pin5

X2.pin5

White/Blue

X1.pin7

X2.pin7

White/Brown

X1.pin8

X2.pin8

Brown

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the network cable are listed in Table 33-20. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3357


33 Cables

Table 33-20 Technical parameters of the network cable Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bitCrystal model connector

Type of the cable

Communication cable-8-core category-5 twisted pair-24AWG

Number of cores

8

Core diameter

0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

33.4 Clock/Time Cable Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal connections, cables for testing equipment connections.

33.4.1 Cables for other equipment Connections The cables for other equipment connections are used to connect to BITS/PTN or OptiX OSN devices. The cables applicable to these ports are available in four types, as listed in Table 33-21. Table 33-21 Cables for connecting BITS/PTN device to OptiX OSN devices External interface of board

Port Type of OptiX OSN Device

Port Type of BITS or other Device

Cable Type

Description

TOD(time)

RJ45(time)

RJ45(time)

Straight through network cables

For details, see StraightThrough Network Cable.

CLK/IN / OUT(clock)

RJ45 (clock)

SMB (clock)

Special cables

Single Conversion Cable to connect RJ45 port and SMB port and coaxial cables use SMB connectors at both ends.For details, see Special Cables and SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables. Cables made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables together with 120ohm,75ohm Converter Box. For details, see Special Cables.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3358


External interface of board

33 Cables


Port Type of BITS or other Device

Cable Type

Description

SMB (clock)

SMB (clock)

SMBSMB Coaxial cables

Coaxial cables use SMB connectors at both ends. For details, see SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables.

RJ45 (clock)

RJ45 (clock)

Cascadi ng network cable

For details, see Cascading Network Cables .

NOTE

The TN52STI board of an OptiX OSN 8800 device has four 120-ohm RJ45 ports: CLK1, CLK2, TOD1, and TOD2. The CLK1 and CLK2 ports are used to receive or output clock signals. The TOD1 and TOD2 ports are used to receive or output time signals. On the TN12STG board of the OptiX OSN 8800, the IN and OUT ports are clock input and output ports, respectively. The two ports are equipped with SMB connectors. The CLK port on the board is a clock input/output port and is equipped with an RJ45 connector. The TOD port on the board is a time input/output port and is equipped with an RJ45 connector. NOTE

On the TN11STG/TN12STG board of the OptiX OSN 6800, the IN and OUT ports are clock input and output ports, respectively. The two ports are equipped with SMB connectors. The CLK port on the board is a clock input/output port and is equipped with an RJ45 connector. The TOD port on the board is a time input/output port and is equipped with an RJ45 connector.

Straight-Through Network Cable The straight-through network cable connects the OptiX OSN equipment and the network management computer. RJ45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network cable, connected to the equipment at two ends. The TOD time interface requires a shielded straight-through cable. For details on the straightthrough cable, see 33.3.3 Network Cable.

Special Cables Special cables are used to connect BITS devices to OptiX OSN devices or OptiX PTN devices. Each special cable has one SMB connector at one end and an RJ45 connector at the other end.

Structure Single Cable, Conversion Cable The single cable uses one RJ45 port at one end and two SMB ports at the other end. The length of such a cable is only 3 meters. Figure 33-12 shows the structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3359


33 Cables

Figure 33-12 Structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable

1: Coaxial Connector,SMB Socket 2: 75 ohm<->120 ohm PCB 3: Network Interface Connector X1: RJ45 port X2: SMB port X3: SMB port Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box Cables can be made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables together with 120ohm to 75ohm Converter Box. A convertor box is usually used in three scenarios: l

When an OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a BITS device for clock synchronization, users need to connect the SMB connectors to the BITS device using two coaxial cables and the RJ45 connector to the OptiX OSN device using a straight-through network cable.

l

When the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a OptiX PTN device for clock synchronization, users need to connect the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device using two coaxial cables and the RJ45 connector to the OptiX PTN device using a straight-through cable.

l

If the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to an clock tester, users need to make two cables at the field, each with one SMB connector at one end and a BNC connector at the other end. Then connect the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device and the BNC connector to the clock tester.

Figure 33-13 shows a converter box, which provides two SMB ports (IN and OUT) on one side and an RJ45 port on the other side.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3360


33 Cables

Figure 33-13 Structure of Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box

1: Standard Parts-Cross Recess Head Screw,Flat Washer 2: A8010 Refiner,AS21TCTA,A8010 Refiner Twisted Pair Cable,Coaxial Cable Impedance Transforming Board 3: Box Body,Twisted Pair,Coaxial Cable Conversion Box

Pin Assignment Table 33-22 provides the pin assignment of the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3361


33 Cables

Table 33-22 Pin assignment when the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box is used Cable

Converter Box

Port on OptiX OSN Device

Straight-through network cable

RJ45

RJ45

Coaxial cable

SMB

SMB

NOTE

The connectors on the converter box and on the OptiX OSN device are male and the connectors at the two ends of the coaxial cable are female.

Technical Parameters Table 33-23 provides the parameters of an Special Cables. Table 33-23 Parameters of an Special Cables Cable

Description

Single Cable, Conversion Cable

Single Cable, Conversion Cable, 3m, 2*SMB75SM-IV, 120CC2P0.4P430U(S) +2*SYFVZ75-1/0.25, MP8-II, Expert 2.0 (BOM:04040582)

Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box

1. Coaxial Connector, SMB Socket, 75ohm/ Angle/Male, PCB Welding Type, Installation Hole D1.3mm, Installation Holes Spacing 5.1mm 2. A8010 Refiner, AS21TCTA, A8010 Refiner Twisted Pair Cable, Coaxial Cable Impedance Transforming Board, 3*3 Assembled Board 3. Box Body, Twisted Pair, Coaxial Cable Conversion Box (SMB Angle Male) 4. For more information of the parameters of SMB-BNC coaxial cable, see SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables. 5. For more information of the parameters of Straight-through network cable, see Straight-Through Network Cable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3362


33 Cables

SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables The SMB-SMB Coaxial cables connect to SMB ports on BITS devices at one end and to SMB ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end. Each coaxial cable uses an SMB connector at each end.

Structure Figure 33-14 shows the structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable. Figure 33-14 Structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable

Pin Assignment Table 33-24 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable. Table 33-24 Pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable One End

Other End

SMB-core

SMB-core

SMB-ground

SMB-ground

Technical Parameters Table 33-25 provides the parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3363


33 Cables

Table 33-25 Parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable Cable

Description

Cable type

l Trunk Cable, 10.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4368 l Trunk Cable, 2.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4362 l Trunk Cable, 20.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4370

Cable length

2 m, 10 m, 20 m

33.4.2 Cables for Internal Connections The type of cables for internal connections of OptiX OSN devices are mainly two scenarios: connecting NEs on an OptiX OSN network and cascading master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE. Table 33-26lists the type of cables for internal connections of OptiX OSN devices. Table 33-26 Type of cables for internal connections Connection type

signal Type

Cables Type

Description

connecting NEs

clock

Cascading network cable

Cascading network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 clock ports need to be connected or when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE need to be cascaded for clock synchronization. For more information, see Cascading Network Cables .

time

Straightthrough network cable

Straight-through network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 time ports need to be connected for time synchronization. For more information,see Straight-Through Network Cable.

clock


ascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for clock synchronization. For more information, see Cascading Network Cables .

cascading master and slave subracks

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3364


33 Cables

Connection type

signal Type

Cables Type

Description

time


Cascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for time synchronization. For more information, see Cascading Network Cables .

Cascading Network Cables Cascading network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 clock ports need to be connected or when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE need to be cascaded for clock synchronization. Cascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for time synchronization.

Structure Figure 33-15 shows the structure of a cascading network cable. Figure 33-15 Structure of a clock/time cascading network cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends

Pin Assignment Table 33-27 provides the pin assignment of a cascading network cable. Table 33-27 Pin assignment of a cascading network cable

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

X1.1 (White-orange)

X2.4 (White-orange)

Twisted

X1.2 (Orange)

X2.5 (Orange)

X1.3 (White-green)

X2.7 (White-green)

X1.4 (Blue)

X2.1 (Blue)

X1.5 (White-blue)

X2.2 (White-blue)


Twisted

Twisted 3365


33 Cables

Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

X1.6 (Green)

X2.8 (Green)

X1.7 (White-brown)

X2.3 (White-brown)

X1.8 (Brown)

X2.6 (Brown)

Twisted

Technical Parameters Table 33-28 provides the parameters of cascading network cables. Table 33-28 Parameters of cascading network cables Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector, 24-26AWG,Leads Single Solid Cable, For OEM Matching 25050057 l Network Interface Connector,8Bit 8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014

Cable type

Communication cable-8-core class 5 twisted pair-24 AWG

Number of wires

8

33.4.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections Clock signal testing cables are used to connect test instruments to OptiX OSN devices. Table 33-29 lists the main clock signal testing cables. Table 33-29 Cables for Testing equipment Connections

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Connecti on relationsh ip

Port Type of Test Instrument


Cable Type

Description

Connection to Clock test instrument

BNC(clock)

SMB(clock)

SMBBNCCoaxia l cables

The coaxial cables use a BNC port at one end and an SMB port at the other end. For more information, see SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables.


3366


Connecti on relationsh ip

Connection to Time test instrument

33 Cables

Port Type of Test Instrument


Cable Type

Description

BNC (clock)

RJ45 (clock)

Clock signal testing cables

These testing cables can be made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables are together with 120ohm to 75ohm Converter Box. For more information, see Special Cables, Straight-Through Network Cable, SMBBNC Coaxial Cables.

BNC(time)

RJ45(time)

Time signal testing cables

For more information, see Time Signal Testing Cables.

SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables The SMB-BNC Coaxial cables connect to BNC ports on clock test instrument at one end and to SMB ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end. The SMB-BNC coaxial cable use a BNC port at one end and an SMB port at the other end.

Structure Figure 33-16 shows the structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Figure 33-16 Structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable

Pin Assignment Table 33-30 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3367


33 Cables

Table 33-30 Pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable One End

Other End

SMB-core

BNC-core

SMB-ground

BNC-ground

Technical Parameters Table 33-31 provides the parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Table 33-31 Parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable Cable

Description

Cable type

Trunk Cable,10.00 m, 75 ohm, 2.2 mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, BNC75AM-II, C, DL2521

Cable length

10 m

Time Signal Testing Cables The time signal testing cables connect to BNC ports on clock test instrument at one end and to RJ45 ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end.

Structure Figure 33-17 shows the structure of a time signal testing cables. Figure 33-17 Structures of the BNC coaxial cable and cable connector

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3368


33 Cables

Pin Assignment Table 33-32 provides the pin assignment of the time signal testing cables. Table 33-32 Pin assignment of a time signal testing cable Connector X1 (BNC)

Connector X2 (RJ45)

Description

Core

6(green)

Pin 6 on the RJ45 connector on the OptiX OSN device must be connected to the BNC port on the time test instrument.

Ground(Metal shielding)

1(blue)

Pin 1 on the RJ45 connector on the OptiX OSN device must be connected to the ground of the BNC connector on the time test instrument.

Technical Parameters Table 33-33provides the parameters of time signal testing cables. Table 33-33 Parameters of time signal testing cables

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Cable

Description

RJ45

Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector, 24-26AWG,Leads Single Solide Cable, For OEM Matching 25050057

BNC

Coaxial Connector,BNC,75ohm,Straight Plug, Male, Matching SYFVZ-75-1-1, With Heat Shrink Tube With Itself

Trunk Cable

Trunk Cable,RSP0/PV4 Plate To DDF, 30m, 75ohm, 2E1, 2.2mm, DIN4X8, 4*SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25


3369


34 Optical Attenuator

34

Optical Attenuator

About This Chapter Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical attenuators (VOAs). 34.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB. 34.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator A mechanical variable optical attenuator (MVOA) can adjust the optical power on an optical path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of an MVOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3370


34 Optical Attenuator

34.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 3 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB. Figure 34-1 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator. Figure 34-1 Fixed optical attenuator

34.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator A mechanical variable optical attenuator (MVOA) can adjust the optical power on an optical path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of an MVOA is 2 dB to 30 dB. Figure 34-2 shows the appearance of a common MVOA. Figure 34-2 Appearance of an MVOA

NOTE

The attenuation increases when the VOA is adjusted clockwise while decreases when adjusted counterclockwise. When adjusting the VOA counterclockwise, observe the optical power closely. When the attenuation stops decreasing, stop the adjustment immediately to avoid damages to the VOA.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3371


35 Pluggable Optical Modules

35

Pluggable Optical Modules

The eSFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP is a hot-swappable, protocol-independent optical transceiver used in optical communications for both telecommunication and data communications applications. Table 35-1 Types of pluggable optical modules M od ul e Ty pe

Descrip tion

Appearance

Connector Type

eS FP

Enhance d Small Form Pluggabl e Module

Single-fiber unidirectional

LC

Single-fiber bidirectional

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3372



M od ul e Ty pe

Descrip tion

Appearance

Connector Type

SF P+

Enhance d 8.5 and 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggabl e Module


LC


X FP

10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggabl e Module

CF P

40/100 Gbit/s formfactor Pluggabl e Module

LC

40GBASE-LR4-10km-CFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

LC


3373


M od ul e Ty pe

Descrip tion


Appearance

Connector Type

100GBASE-LR4-10km-CFP, 100GBASE-10×10G-10km-CFP, (100GBASE-4×25G)/(OTU4-4×28G)-10kmCFP

LC

Table 35-2 Functional block diagram of pluggable optical modules Modul e Type

Functional Block Diagram

eSFP


Electrical interface for connecting to the board

Client-side optical interface

ROSA

125Mbit/s -5Gbit/s

Driver

Laser



Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


ROSA

125Mbit/s -2.67Gbit/s

Driver

Laser

WDM Filter


3374



Modul e Type

Functional Block Diagram

SFP+

Single-fiber unidirectional SFP+ without the retimer module



ROSA

5Gbit/s -11Gbit/s

Laser

Driver

Single-fiber unidirectional SFP+ with the retimer module Client-side optical interface

5Gbit/s to 11Gbit/s <->5Gbit/s to 11Gbit/s


ROSA 2xRetimer

5Gbit/s to 11Gbit/s

Laser

Driver

Single-fiber bidirectional SFP+

Electrical interface for connecting to the board XFP Electrical interface for connecting to the board

CFP


ROSA

11.3 Gbit/s

Laser

Driver

8Gbit/s to11Gbit/s <->8Gbit/s to11Gbit/s

WDM Filter


ROSA 2xRetimer

8Gbit/s to11Gbit/s

Laser

Driver

40GBASE-LR4-10km-CFP Electrical interface for connecting to the board

4x10 Gbit/s<->4x10 Gbit/s

4

ROSA 4

?1 10Gbit/s

ROSA

?4 10Gbit/s

4

Client-side optical interface DMUX

1310nm 4x10Gbit/s

8xRetimer Driver

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Laser

4

4

Driver

Laser

?1 10Gbit/s

4

MUX

?4 10Gbit/s


3375


Modul e Type


Functional Block Diagram 100GBASE-LR4-10km-CFP Electrical interface for connecting to the board


10x10Gbit/s<->4x25Gbit/s

4

ROSA

?1 25Gbit/s

4 ROSA

4 DMUX ?4 25Gbit/s 1310nm 4x25Gbit/s

2xGearbox ?1 25Gbit/s

Laser

Driver 4

MUX 4 ?4 25Gbit/s

4 Laser

Driver

100GBASE-10×10G-10km-CFP Electrical interface for connecting to the board

10x10 Gbit/s<->10x10 Gbit/s

10

ROSA 10

?1 10Gbit/s

ROSA

?10 10Gbit/s

10

Client-side optical interface DMUX

1550nm 10x10Gbit/s

20xRetimer Driver

Laser

10

?1 10Gbit/s

10

Driver

10

Laser

MUX

?10 10Gbit/s

(100GBASE-4×25G)/(OTU4-4×28G)-10km-CFP Electrical interface for connecting to the board


10x10Gbit/s<->4x25 / 28Gbit/s

?1 25 or 28 Gbit/s

ROSA 4 ROSA

4

4 ?4 25 or 28 Gbit/s

2xGearbox Driver 4 Driver

Laser

?1

1310nm 4x25 or 4x28 Gbit/s

25 or 28 Gbit/s

4

4 Laser

DMUX

25 or 28

MUX

?4 Gbit/s

Components of the optical module: l Gearbox module: performs conversion between 10 x 10 Gbit/s and 4 x 25 Gbit/s or 4 x 28 Gbit/s services. l Retimer module: recovers the clock and data. l ROSA: the optical receiver, corresponding to point R in the optical module specifications. l Driver: the laser driver. l Laser: the transmitter, corresponding to point S in the optical module specifications. : electrical signals : optical signals

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3376


36 Mounting Ears

36

Mounting Ears

This topic provides information such as the appearance and dimensions of mounting ears. This information can be used to determine whether a subrack can be installed in a cabinet of other specifications (that is, not provided by Huawei). The following table lists the mapping between the subrack and mounting ears. Subrac k

Mounting Ears Appearanc e

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Installation Position


Figure 36-1

42.0 mm x 20.4 mm x 879.0 mm

Two mounting ears are installed on the left side and the other two the right side.


One mounting ear is installed on the left side and the other one the right side.


Figure 36-3

36.0 mm x 19.0 mm x 440.7 mm


OptiX OSN 8800 Universa l Platform Subrack

Figure 36-7

46.5 mm x 20.3 mm x 396.8 mm

One ear is installed on the left side and the other one the right side.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3377


36 Mounting Ears

Subrac k

Mounting Ears Appearanc e

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Installation Position

OptiX OSN 6800 subracks

Figure 36-5

42.0 mm x 22.2 mm x 45.0 mm

Two mounting ears are installed on the left side and the other two the right side.


Figure 36-9

23.3 mm x 74.1 mm x 131.0 mm


a: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are classified into enhanced and general subracks. The requirements on configuring enhanced and general subracks are the same.

Figure 36-1 and Figure 36-2 shows the appearance and dimensions of mounting ears for the T64/T32 subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet). Figure 36-1 Mounting ears for the T64/T32 subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3378


36 Mounting Ears

12.0 0

Figure 36-2 Dimensions of mounting ears for the T64/T32 subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet)

797.00 20.4

14.8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

50.00

50.00

25.00 12.50

425.00

12.50 25.00

834.50

879.0

25.00

397.00

12.50 25.00

47.00

10.85

375.00

9.50 25.00

22.00

19.5

42.00


3379


36 Mounting Ears

Figure 36-3 and Figure 36-4 shows the appearance and dimensions of mounting ears for the T16 subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet). Figure 36-3 Mounting ears for the T16 subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3380


36 Mounting Ears

6.70

Figure 36-4 Dimensions of mounting ears for the T16 subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet)

5.00

15.00

440.70

55.00

25.00

68.00

50.00

325.00

321.33

25.00

41.67

30.50

10.50 11.00

14.60 16.00

19.0

36.0

Figure 36-5 and Figure 36-6 shows the appearance and dimensions of mounting ears for the OptiX OSN 6800 subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3381


36 Mounting Ears

Figure 36-5 Mounting ears for the OptiX OSN 6800 subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet)

Figure 36-6 Dimensions of mounting ears for the OptiX OSN 6800 subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet)

9.5010.00 16.00

12.20

45.00 5.00

20.00

30.00

25.00

10.00

38.00 16.00

22.20

42.00

Figure 36-7 and Figure 36-8 shows the appearance and dimensions of mounting ears for the universal platform subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3382


36 Mounting Ears

Figure 36-7 Mounting ears for the universal platform subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet) B

A

A universal platform subrack supports two mounting options: ETSI cabinet mounting and 19inch rack mounting. In the two mounting options, the same mounting ears are used. For the ETSI cabinet mounting, the narrow side (A) of the mounting ears is secured to the subrack. For the 19-inch rack mounting, the broad side (B) is secured to the subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3383


36 Mounting Ears

Figure 36-8 Dimensions of mounting ears for the universal platform subracks (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet)

9.5 7.0

7.8

40.0

11.0

15.0

30.0

7.0

7.0

396.8

101.6

76.2

378.8

192.8

325.0

375.0

101.6

3.5

6.8

20.0

10.3 36.5

20.3

46.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3384


36 Mounting Ears

Figure 36-9 and Figure 36-10 shows the appearance and dimensions of mounting ears for the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet). Figure 36-9 Mounting ears for the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3385


36 Mounting Ears

Figure 36-10 Dimensions of mounting ears for the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis (mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet)

14.60

57.20 9.50

9.50

57.20

131.00

9.53

9.53

65.80

8.00

9.00

8.00

48.80

9.90

74.10

23.30

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3386


37 Filler Panels

37

Filler Panels

About This Chapter A filler panel is used to fill in a vacant slot. 37.1 Functions and Features This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel. 37.2 Front Panel There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel. 37.3 Valid Slots This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel. 37.4 Technical Specifications This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3387


37 Filler Panels

37.1 Functions and Features This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel. A filler panel has the following functions: l

Prevents exposure of people to hazardous voltage and current in the subrack.

l

Prevents foreign matter from entering the subrack.

l

Maintains electromagnetic interference (EMI) compliance.

l

Maintains proper air flow through the subrack.

37.2 Front Panel There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel. Figure 37-1 shows the appearance of a filler panel. Figure 37-1 Appearance of a filler panel 21136047 21135823 21136389 21132664 21136680 21134882 21135716 21135491 21135492

21135493

21136046

PUSH

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3388


37 Filler Panels

37.3 Valid Slots This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel. Table 37-1 lists the valid slots for a filler panel. Table 37-1 Valid slots for a filler panel Part Number

Product

Valid Slots

21132664, 21136680

OptiX OSN 8800 T64


21132664, 21136680

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU36

21132664, 21136680

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

21136680


IU1-IU16

21132664, 21136680

OptiX OSN 6800

IU1-IU18

21132664, 21136680

OptiX OSN 3800

IU11, IU2-IU5

21134882

OptiX OSN 3800

IU1, IU6-IU11

21135491

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU42, IU44

21135492

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU76, IU77

21135492

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU38

21135492, 21135493

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU22

21135493

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU69-IU71, IU78-IU82, IU87-IU89

21135493

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU37, IU39, IU40, IU45-IU48

21135716

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU41, IU43

21135716

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84, IU75, IU86

NOTE Slot IU22 must be filled by two filler panels.

NOTE Either slot IU75 or IU86 must be filled by two filler panels.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

21135823

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

IU9, IU10

21136046

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU74, IU85


3389


37 Filler Panels

Part Number

Product

Valid Slots

21136047

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU9, IU10, IU43, IU44

21136389

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

IU9, IU10 NOTE l When slot IU9 or IU10 is used to house a board except the TN16XCH board, this filler panel must be inserted before the board is inserted. l When slot IU9 or IU10 is empty, it must be covered with this filler panel and then with a filler panel identified as 21132664.

37.4 Technical Specifications This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel. Table 37-2 lists the technical specifications of a filler panel. Table 37-2 Technical specifications of a filler panel

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Part Number

Mechanical Specifications

21132664, 21136680

25.4 mm (W) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 10.4 in. (H))

21134882

25.4 mm (W) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.9 in. (H))

21135491

28.8 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))

21135492

25.4 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H))

21135493

50.8 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H))

21135716

25.4 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))

21135823

27.2 mm (W) x 581.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 22.9 in. (H))

21136046

110.0 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (4.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))

21136047

34.1 mm (W) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 23.7 in. (H))

21136389

37.6 mm (W) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W) x 13.8 in. (H))


3390


A Indicators

A

Indicators

A.1 Cabinet Indicators There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow. A.2 Subrack Indicator There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are in the following colors: red, orange, yellow and green. A.3 Chassis Indicators There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red. A.4 Board Indicators On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running status of the board. A.5 Fan Indicator There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN. A.6 PIU Indicator There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3391


A Indicators

A.1 Cabinet Indicators There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-1. Table A-1 Meanings of cabinet indicators Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

power

Power indicator

On (green)

The cabinet is powered on.

Off

The cabinet is not powered on.

Critical alarm indicator

On (red)


Off

There is no critical alarm.


On (Orange)


Off

There is no major alarm.

Minor alarm indicator

On (Yellow)


Off

There is no minor alarm.

critical

major

minor

A.2 Subrack Indicator There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are in the following colors: red, orange, yellow and green. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-2. NOTE

The OptiX OSN 8800 subrack indicators are on the panel of the fan tray assembly.

Table A-2 Meanings of subrack indicators Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

PWR

Power indicator

On (Green)

The subrack works normally.

Off

The subrack does not work.

On (Red)


OptiX OSN 6800: CRI Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



3392


Indicator

A Indicators

Name

Status

Meaning

Off



On (Orange)


Off



On (Yellow)


Blinking slowly (Yellow)

The MIN indicator is in the maintenance blinking mode.

Off


OptiX OSN 8800: CRIT MAJ

MIN

A.3 Chassis Indicators There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-3. Table A-3 Meanings of chassis indicators Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

PWR

Chassis power supply indicator

On (green)

The chassis is powered on.

Off

The chassis is not powered on.

On (yellow)


Blinking slowly (Yellow)

The MIN indicator is in the maintenance blinking mode.

Off


On (orange)


Off


On (red)


Off


MIN

MAJ

CRI

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)





3393


A Indicators

A.4 Board Indicators On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running status of the board. The meanings of the board indicators are listed in Table A-4, Table A-5, and Table A-6. Table A-4 Meanings of board indicators Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

STAT

Board hardware indicator

On (green)

The board works normally.

Blinking slowly (green)a

The STAT indicator is in the maintenance blinking mode.

On (red)

A critical/major alarm occurs on the board.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs on the board.

Off

The board is not powered on.

On (red)

The memory check fails.

PROG

Board software indicator

Loading the board software fails. The FPGA file is lost. The board software is lost.

SRV

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Service alarm indicator

Blinking quickly (red)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: The BOOTROM check fails.

Blinking quickly (green)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Writing the flash memory is in progress.

Blinking slowly (green)c

On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms: The BIOS booting is in progress.

On (green)

The board software or FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.

On (green)

The service is normal with any service alarm.

On (red)

A critical or major service alarm occurs.


3394


Indicato r

ACTb

A Indicators

Name

Service activation indicator

Status

Meaning

On (yellow)

A minor or remote service alarm occurs.

Off

No service is configured.

On (green)

The board is in the working mode. The board is in the active mode.

Off

The board is not in the working mode. The board is in the standby mode.

LINK/ ACTn

LAS

FCD

Data port connection/data transceive indicator

Laser emission status indicator

Fiber connection detection indicator


On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Backing up the system database in batches is in progress.

On (green)

The data port connection is normal.

Off

The data port connection is abnormal.

Blinking quickly (yellow)

On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Data ports are receiving and transmitting data.

On (green)

The Raman laser is in the working mode.

Off

The Raman laser is not in the working mode.


On for 500 ms, off for 500 ms, and blinking for 10s The fiber connection detect (FCD) fails to be started due to a board hardware or software fault.

Blinking quickly (orange)

On for 500 ms, off for 500 ms, and blinking for 10s The FCD fails to be started because optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) resources have been occupiedd.

On (orange)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


If the indicator is orange for about 30s, the fiber connection status is being detected.

3395


Indicato r

A Indicators

Name

Status

Meaning

On (red)

Steady red for 10 minutes A fiber is abnormal and fails to meet the conditions for turning on a Raman laser. For example, the end face of an intra-site fiber is contaminated or a fiber connection introduces a large insertion loss.

On (green)

Steady green for 10 minutes The fiber connections are normal and meet the conditions for turning on a Raman laser.

NOTE a: When the STAT indicator on a board is in maintenance blinking mode, the board can be removed. Most of the boards support this function except the following boards: ACS, APIU, ATE, BMD4, BMD8, CMR1, CMR2, CMR4, CRPC, DCM, DCU, DMR1, DFIU, EFI, FAN, TN21FIU, TN13FIU, GFU, TN11ITL, TN11L4G, MR2, MR4, MR8, PIU, SBM2, SCS, SFIU, STI, TBE, TN11XCS. b: During the testing of the indicators on the TN51AUX board, the ACT indicator is lit orange. c: When the TN54TTX/TN54TSC/TN14LSX/TN52ND2T02/TN52NS2T02 board is in BIOS booting state, the PROG indicator is steady green. d: FCD can be started only when OTDR resources are not occupied. OTDR resources need to be occupied in the following scenarios: l The FCD is started on the RAU front panel. l The FCD is performed when the Raman laser is properly turned on. l The line fiber quality monitoring function on the U2000 is used.

Table A-5 Meanings of the indicators on the PQ2 sub-board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

STAT


On (green)

The PQ2 sub-board works normally.

On (red)

The PQ2 sub-board is abnormal.

On (yellow)

Logical sub-board is not configured.

Off

The PQ2 sub-board is not powered on.


3396


A Indicators

Table A-6 Meanings of the indicators on the SCC board Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

STAT


On (green)

The board is working normally.

Blinking slowly (green)a

The STAT indicator is in the maintenance blinking mode.

On (red)

A critical alarm occurs on the board.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs on the board.

Off

The board is not powered on.

On (red)

The memory check fails.

PROG

Board software indicator

Loading the board software fails. The FPGA file is lost. The NE software is lost.

SRV

ACT

Service alarm indicator

Service activation indicator


On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: The BOOTROM check fails.


On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Writing the flash memory is in progress.

Blinking slowly (green)

On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms: The BIOS booting is in progress.

On (green)

The board software or FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.

On (green)

The service is normal with any service alarm.

On (red)

A critical or major service alarm occurs.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs.

On (green)

The board is in the working mode. The board is in the active mode.

Off

The board is not in the working mode. The board is in the standby mode.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Backing up the system database in batches is in progress. 3397


A Indicators

Indicato r

Name

Status

Meaning

PWRA

Indicator for system power supply

On (green)

-48 V power supply A is normal.

On (red)

-48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed).

Off

No power is input.

On (green)

-48 V power supply B is normal.

On (red)

-48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed).

Off

No power is input.

Indicator for protection power supply

On (green)

The +3.3 V protection power is normal.

On (red)

The +3.3 V protection power is lost.

Alarm cut-off indicator

On (yellow)

There is no audible or visual warning in case of an alarm.

Off

Audible warning is generated in case of an alarm.

PWRB

PWRC

ALMC

Indicator for system power supply

NOTE a: When the STAT indicator on a board is in maintenance blinking mode, the board can be removed. The boards that support this function include: TN11SCC, TN16SCC, TN51SCC, TN52SCC, TN22SCC, TN23SCC, and TNK2SCC.

A.5 Fan Indicator There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN. The corresponding meanings of the Fan indicator are listed in Table A-7. Table A-7 Meanings of the FAN indicator Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: STAT

Fan indicator

On (green)

The fan is normal.

On (red)

A major alarm occurs or two or more fans are faulty.

On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs or one fan is faulty.

OptiX OSN 8800: FAN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3398


Indicator

A Indicators

Name

Status

Meaning

Off

The fan is not powered on, is absent, or the software is not loaded.

A.6 PIU Indicator There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-8. Table A-8 Meanings of the PIU indicator Indicator

Name

Status

Meaning

OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: RUN

Running status indicator

On (green)

Indicates that the power is accessed normally.

Off

Indicates that the power is not accessed.

OptiX OSN 8800: PWR

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3399


B Bar Code for Boards

B

Bar Code for Boards

There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code. B.1 Overview There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. B.2 Bar Code Overview A board bar code is a scanner-readable representation of data (such as the name, version, and model) relating to the board to which it is attached. There are one-dimensional bar codes and two-dimensional bar codes. B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs. B.4 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules. B.5 Characteristic Code of an FOADM The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. B.6 Characteristic Code of an MCA The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. B.7 Characteristic Code of an OAU The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board. B.8 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3400



The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. B.9 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection switching time. B.10 Characteristic Code of a VOA The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. B.11 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with, the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3401



B.1 Overview There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. NOTE


Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules. Figure B-3 and Figure B-4 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules. Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1) Delivery information


Board model number



BOM


Characteristic code

Figure B-2 Description of the bar code (example 2) Delivery information


Board model number


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


BOM


Board Tunable name

Characteristic code



3402



Figure B-3 Description of the bar code (example 3)



Board name



BOM


Figure B-4 Description of the bar code (example 4) Third and fourth numbers of the BOM



Board name





Board model number

The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical module. Table B-1 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3403



Table B-1 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards First Four Numbers in the board BOM

Description

First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module

0231


3406 or 0303 (client-side and WDM-side)

0307


3406 or 0303 (client-side and WDM-side)

0302 or 0303


N/A

Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows: l

For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the board is delivered with optical modules installed.

l

For the SSN3SLH41 board, – The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the board are 3406. – When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0305.

Table B-2 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3404



Table B-2 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41) Board Configuration

First Four Numbers in the board BOM

Description

First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module


0302


3406


0305


N/A

Table B-3 provides the description of the delivery information. Table B-3 Description of the delivery information of a board Item

Description

Vendor


Manufacture Year


Manufacture Month


Serial Number


B.2 Bar Code Overview A board bar code is a scanner-readable representation of data (such as the name, version, and model) relating to the board to which it is attached. There are one-dimensional bar codes and two-dimensional bar codes. Compared with a one-dimensional bar code, a two-dimensional bar code has a different form and adds the country of origin and item revision information.

B.2.1 One-dimensional Bar Code of a Board One-dimensional bar code of a board represents basic information about the board, including the BOM code, factory information, version, and model. For some boards, the bar codes also Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3405



include the board characteristic codes. Each board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. NOTE


Appearance of a One-dimensional Bar Code Figure B-5 shows the appearance of a one-dimensional bar code. Figure B-5 Appearance of the one-dimensional bar code

Description of a One-dimensional Bar Code Figure B-6 and Figure B-7 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules. Figure B-8 and Figure B-9 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules. Figure B-6 Description of the bar code (example 1) Delivery information


Board model number


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


BOM



Characteristic code

3406





Board model number



BOM


Board Tunable name

Characteristic code


Figure B-8 Description of the bar code (example 3)



Board name


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


BOM



3407




Third and fourth numbers of the BOM


Board name





Board model number

The first four digits in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical module. Table B-4 provides the meanings of the first four digits in the board BOM. Table B-4 Meanings of the first four digits in the BOM codes for OTN boards First Four Digits in BOM

Description

First Four Digits in BOM of the Optional Optical Module

0231



0307



0302 or 0303


N/A

Table B-5 provides the description of the delivery information. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3408



Table B-5 Description of the delivery information of a board Item

Description

Vendor


Manufacture Year


Manufacture Month


Serial Number


Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows: l

For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four digits in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the board is delivered with optical modules installed.

l

For the SSN3SLH41 board, – The first four digits are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not installed. The first four digits in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the board are 3406. – When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four digits in the BOM are 0305.

Table B-6 provides the meanings of the first four digits in the BOMs for of other OCS boards. Table B-6 Meanings of the first four digits in the BOM code for an OCS board (excluding SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board Configuration

First Four Digits in BOM

Description

First Four Digits in BOM of the Required Optical Module


0302


3406


0305


N/A


3409



B.2.2 Two-dimensional Bar Code of a Board Two-dimensional barcode label of a board represents board information, including the serial number, one-dimensional code, item number (BOM), item revision, board model, RoHS, country of origin, and two-dimensional code. There are two types of two-dimensional barcode labels that have different field layouts, as shown in Figure B-10 and Figure B-11. Figure B-10 Description of the two-dimensional barcode label (example 1) 1.One-dimensional code

4.Serial number

2.Item number (BOM)

6.Country of origin 5.Model

3.Item revision

7.RoHS


Figure B-11 Description of the two-dimensional barcode label (example 2) 1.One-dimensional code

5.Model

2.Item number (BOM)

4.Serial number 3.Item revision

6.Country of origin 7.RoHS


Table B-7 provides the description of board information represented by a two-dimensional barcode label. Table B-7 Description of the represented board information

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

N o.

Item

Description

1

Onedimensional code

A one-dimensional code contains the serial number of an item, compliant with ISO/IEC 15417 Code 128, and provided for barcode scanning. One-dimensional codes are retained for business continuity.


3410



N o.

Item

Description

2

Item number (BOM)

An item number indicates the ID of an item. Huawei's item number is a string of 8 to 17 characters, including letters, digits, and special characters such as "-" and "=". An item number is also known as a part number (PN). The item number of a board is a string of 8 or 12 characters. The codes use the format of the "category code + serial code + connector + suffix code + special character", with 17 characters at most: Category Suffix Special Serial Code Connector Code Code Character A B C D1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = 1 2 3

l Category code(compulsory): It consists of four digits or uppercase letters (excluding I, O, and Z). The last two characters indicate the subcategory. Product items can be directly identified based on the category codes. For details about category codes of boards, see Table B-8. l Serial code(compulsory): It consists of four to eight digits or upper-case letters (excluding I, O, Z). The serial code is automatically generated by the system. The sequence for generating serial codes: using digits first, and using letters only after the digits are used up. l Connector(optional): The fixed Decimal to Binary Converter (DBC) case "-" is used. It is only used when the code contains suffixes. l Suffix code(optional): It consists of three digits to represent the code variant, indicating correlations among product items. l Special character(optional): "=" is only used for spare part codes in special circumstances. "=" is used with an item code to form the spare part code for the item. "=" appears only in spare part codes.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3411



N o.

Item

Description

3

Item revision

An item revision refers to the edition of product items which record changes in the technical status of product items. The item revision consists of one letter and two digits. There are substitution relationships between the revisions of the same board item number. A substitution relationship can be bidirectional interchangeability or unidirectional interchangeability. l Bidirectional interchangeability indicates that the new and old revisions can be interchanged. If the digit part in an item revision is upgraded and the letter part remains unchanged, for example, from A01 to A02, item functions are not changed, and generally the design is optimized or manufacturer information is changed. The item revision is an identifier for internal management. l Unidirectional interchangeability indicates that the new revision can substitute the old revision, but the old revision cannot substitute the new revision. When item functions are changed, only the letter part in an item revision is upgraded, for example, from A02 to B01. Revision B01 can be used to replace revision A02, but the reverse is not true. A slash (/) is used to separate a component code (BOM) and a component version.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3412



N o.

Item

Description

4

Serial number

Serial number (SN) is the exclusive identifier of an item. The SN can help after-sales personnel identify the maintenance period. The value is a string of 12, 16, or 20 characters containing digits and letters. l Each 12-character serial number consists of a 2-character manufacturer code, a 3-character date code, and a 7-character sequence number. The 3-character date code consists of the last two digits of the year (for example, "12" from 2012) and a character ranging from 1 to 9 and A to C which indicate the months from January to December respectively. Example: SN：10 13 6 0005802 Sequence number

Vendor

Manufacture year

Manufacture month

Leading characters

l Each 16-character serial number consists of the last 6 characters of an item number, a 2-character manufacturer code, a 2-character date code, and a 6-code sequence number. In a 2-character date code, the first character is the last digit of the year ranging from 2000 to 2009 (for example, "4" represents 2004) or a character ranging from A to Z that indicates the year from 2010 to 2035 (for example, "B" represents 2011), and the second character is ranging from 1 to 9 and A to C which indicate the months from January to December respectively. Example: Third and fourth numbers of the BOM

SN:030HFY 108A000199 Sequence number


The complete BOM should be 03030HFY. "03" are taken out in the BOM above.

l Each 20-character serial number consists of the character string "21", an 8-character item number, a 2-character manufacturer code, a 2-character date code, and a 6-character sequence number. The 2-character date code in a 20-character serial number is the same as that in a 16-character serial number. Example: SN:2102314840107A000090 Sequence number

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


BOM


3413



N o.

Item

Description

5

Model

The value consists of digits and letters. For a board, this field contains information about the version, name, type, and correlation of the board. "-xxx" are extended codes, representing different types of optical modules board configuration of 0231. Example: TN12 NS2 01M02 Board type

Board name


TN11 LEX4 -001 Extended code

Board name


6

Country of origin

Indicates the country where the item is manufactured.

7

RoHS

An environmental friendliness flag code identifies the environmental protection information. Possible values are as follows: l Y: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5 requirements and its lead status is not identified. l Y1 and Y3: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5 requirements and contains lead. l Y2: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5 requirements and is lead-free. l N: indicates that the product is not environmentally friendly.

8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Twodimensional code

A two-dimensional code normally contains the serial number, item number, item revision, and manufacturer identifier. Some twodimensional codes do not contain manufacturer identifier due to length limitations. Two-dimensional codes comply with the ISO16022 - Data Matrix standard and are provided for barcode scanning as an upgrade of the one-dimensional code. Manufacturer identifier: Manufacturer information that Huawei applies for from the Electronic Data Interchange Forum for Companies with Interests in Computing and Electronics (EDIFICE). The manufacturer identifier of Huawei is LEHWT.


3414



Table B-8 Meanings of the category code of a board Category Code

Description

Category Code of an Optional Optical Module

0231



0307



0302 or 0303


N/A

B.3 Characteristic Code for OTUs The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.

B.3.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-9. Table B-9 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Code

Meaning

Description

The first five digit

The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module

Indicate the frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module.

The sixth character

The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module

The value can be A or P. A represents APD. P represents PIN.


3415



Code

Meaning

Description

The seventh character

The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module

The detailed meaning of the character is shown in Table B-10.

NOTE

In the case of the OTU boards with dual fed optical interfaces, such as the LQMD board, the characteristic code consists of eight digits. The frequency values of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side are indicated.

The types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules are listed in Table B-10. Table B-10 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules Character

Dispersion (1550 nm)

Distance

Rate

A

1600ps/nm

80km

2.5G

3200ps/nm

170km

2.5G

800ps/nm

40km

10.66G

3200ps/nm

160km

2.5G

1500ps/nm

80km

10.66G

1600ps/nm

80km

10.66G

3200ps/nm

170km

2.5G

800ps/nm

40km

10.66G

12800ps/nm

640km

2.5G

6500ps/nm

320km

2.5G

D

12800ps/nm

640km

2.5G

E

6500ps/nm

320km

2.5G

G

800ps/nm

40km

10.71G

H

>600ps/nm

>30km

10.71G

>600ps/nm

>30km

10.66G

800ps/nm

40km

10.66G

1800ps/nm

90km

2.66G

12800ps/nm

640km

2.66G

12800ps/nm

640km

2.5G

B

C

K

L

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3416



Character


Distance

Rate

1500ps/nm

80km

10.66G

>600ps/nm

>30km

10.66G

>600ps/nm

>30km

10.71G

6400ps/nm

320km

4.9-5.4G

6400ps/nm

320km

10.66G

1500ps/nm

80km

10.71G

3400ps/nm

170km

4.9-5.4G

Z

800ps/nm

40km

10.71G

U

>600ps/nm

>30km

10.71G

M

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is 19210AG. This code indicates the following features: The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is 192.10 THz; APD is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is G. For details, refer to Table B-10.

B.3.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-11. Table B-11 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU Code

Meaning

Description

The first character

Wavelength-tunable

T is the abbreviation for Tunable, indicating that the wavelength is tunable.


The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module


The third character

The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module

The detailed meaning of the character is shown in Table B-12.

The types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules are listed in Table B-12. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3417



Table B-12 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules Character


Distance

Rate

T

1200ps/nm

60km

10.71G

12800ps/nm

640km

2.66G

12800ps/nm

640km

2.67G

3400ps/nm

170km

5.33G

-1000 to 1100ps/nm

60km

10.71G

4800ps/nm

240km

11.3G

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is TPT. This code indicates the following features: This board is a wavelength-tunable OTU; PIN is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is T. For details, refer to Table B-12.

B.3.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-13. Table B-13 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU Code

Meaning

Description

The first four digits

The wavelength of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module

Indicate the wavelength of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module.

The fifth character

The type of the CWDM-side receiving optical module


The sixth character

The type of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module

The value can be L or S. L represents long haul. S represents short haul.

NOTE

As for the LWX2 board, only information about the first wavelength is indicated.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN13LQM is 1531AS. This code indicates the following features: The wavelength is 1531 nm; APD is adopted by the CWDM-side receiving optical module; the CWDM-side transmitting optical module is used for short-haul transmission (80 km). Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3418



B.4 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules. The line unit shares the same characteristic code with the WDM-side DWDM optical module of the wavelength tunable unit. For details, refer to B.3.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs and B.3.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs.

B.5 Characteristic Code of an FOADM The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1 The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that carries the signals processed by the board. Table B-14 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1. Table B-14 Characteristic code for the CMR1 Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength that carries the signals is 1471 nm.

B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR2 The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-15. Table B-15 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits


Indicates the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.


3419



Code

Meaning

Description

Last four digits


Indicates the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571. l


l


B.5.3 Characteristic Code for the CMR4 The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-16. Table B-16 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First and second digits


Indicates the middle two digits of the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.



Indicates the middle two digits of the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.


Third wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the middle two digits of the third wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.


Fourth wavelength that carries optical signals

Indicates the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961. l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3420



l

"59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.

l

"61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.

B.5.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1 The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. Table B-17 provides the details on the characteristics code. Table B-17 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board Barcode

Meaning

Description

First to fourth digits

Optical signal frequency

Frequency of the optical signals processed by the board

For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.

B.5.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2 The characteristic code for the MR2 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-18. Table B-18 Characteristic code for the MR2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal.

Last four digits

Frequency of the second optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the second optical signal.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370. l


l

"9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.

B.5.6 Characteristic Code for of MR4 The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3421



Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-19. Table B-19 Characteristic code for the MR4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits

Frequency of first optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board.

Last four digits

Frequency of forth optical signal

Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the fourth optical signal processed by the board.



l

"9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.

Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can be inferred that: l

The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.

l

The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.


B.5.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8 The characteristic code for the MR8 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-20. Table B-20 Characteristic code for the MR8 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Code

Meaning

First four digits


Last four digits



Description


3422





l


Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l


l


l



B.5.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-21. Table B-21 Characteristic code for the MR8V board Code

Meaning

Description

First four digits


Last four digits



"V"

Adjustment of the input optical power of each channel

Indicates that the board adjusts the input optical power of each channel.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V. l


l


l

"V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.

Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l


l


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3423


l



B.6 Characteristic Code of an MCA The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4 The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-22. Table B-22 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.

B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8 The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-23. Table B-23 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card processes optical signals in the C band.

B.7 Characteristic Code of an OAU The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3424



B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-24. Table B-24 Characteristic code for the HBA board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character

-

The second character is always G.

Third to the fourth digits

Gain

The third to the fourth digits indicate the gain value.

Fifth character

-

The fifth character is always I.

Sixth and seventh digits


Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.

B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1 The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-25. Table B-25 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

Is always G.

Second to fifth digits

Gain range

Indicates the range within which the gain can be continuously adjusted.


3425



Code

Meaning

Description

Sixth character

-

Is always I.



Indicates the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1 The characteristic code for the OBU1 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-26. Table B-26 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-



Gain


Fourth character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.

B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2 The characteristic code for the OBU2 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-27.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3426



Table B-27 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-



Gain


Fourth character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

B.7.5 Characteristic Code for of CRPC The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-28. Table B-28 Characteristic code for the CRPC board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-

Is always G.

Second and third characters

Gain

Indicate the gain value.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.

B.8 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.

B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the D40 The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-29. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3427



Table B-29 Characteristic code for the D40 Code

Meaning

Description

The first character

Band





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-30. Table B-30 Characteristic code for the D40V board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3428



B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-31. Table B-31 Characteristic code for the DFIU board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.

B.8.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the band adopted by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-32. Table B-32 Characteristic code for the FIU board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band



B.8.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-33.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3429



Table B-33 Characteristic code for the ITL board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band

Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band.

For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.

B.8.6 Characteristic Code for the M40 The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-34. Table B-34 Characteristic code for the M40 board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.8.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-35. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3430



Table B-35 Characteristic code for the M40V board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

Band


Second character



For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.9 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection switching time.

B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-36. Table B-36 Characteristic code for the DCP board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3431



B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-37. Table B-37 Characteristic code for the OLP board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

B.9.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-38. Table B-38 Characteristic code for the SCS board Code

Meaning

Description

First character

-





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.

B.10 Characteristic Code of a VOA The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1 The characteristic code for the VA1 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3432



Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-39. Table B-39 Characteristic code for the VA1 board Code

Meaning

Description

Digits 1 through 3

Attenuation value


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.

B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4 The characteristic code for the VA4 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-40. Table B-40 Characteristic code for the VA4 board Code

Meaning

Description

First to third digits

Attenuation value


For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.

B.11 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with, the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.

B.11.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-41. Table B-41 Characteristic code for the DCU board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Code

Meaning

Description


Fiber type

Type of the fiber that the DCU board works with


3433



Code

Meaning

Description




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km. NOTE

If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to separate each distance.

B.11.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU The characteristic code for the GFU board contains two characters and two digits, indicating the gradient of optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-42. Table B-42 Characteristic code for the GFU board Code

Meaning

Description

First and second characters

-

The first and second characters are always GF.


Gradient

Indicate the gradient of optical signals.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11GFU board is GF10. This code indicates that the gradient of optical signals processed by the board is 10.

B.11.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-43. Table B-43 Characteristic code for the TDC board

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Code

Meaning

Description


Fiber type

Fiber type that the TDC board is compatible with


3434



Code

Meaning

Description




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is tunable.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3435


C

C Quick Reference Table of Unit functions

Quick Reference Table of Unit functions

C.1 Basic Functions of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards, Packet Service Boards and Universal Line Boards The main functions and features supported by OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. C.2 Loopback Function of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards, Packet Service Boards and Universal Line Boards The OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards support different types of loopback.The OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards support different types of loopback. C.3 Protection mode of OTUs, OTN Tributary and Line Boards, and Universal Line Boards The OTUs, OTN tributary boards, OTN line boards, and universal line boards support protection function. C.4 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards The OTUs, OTN tributary boards, OTN line boards, and universal line boards support electrical cross-connection. C.5 Quick Reference of Data Board Functions This section describes the functions supported by different types of boards. C.6 Packet Service Support Universal line boards and packet boards support packet services. C.7 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of TDM Boards This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of TDM boards. C.8 Quick Reference of TDM Board Functions This section describes the functions supported by different types of boards. C.9 Loopback Capabilities of TDM Boards The TDM boards and Ethernet boards support various types of loopbacks.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3436



C.1 Basic Functions of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards, Packet Service Boards and Universal Line Boards The main functions and features supported by OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table C-1. Table C-1 Basic Functions of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards, Packet Service Boards and Universal Line Boards Board Name

Tu na ble Wa vel en gth Fu nct ion

ES C Fu ncti on

AL S Fu ncti on

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

FE C

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FE C

SD FE C2

D W D M

CW D M

TN11E COM

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN54E G16/ TN55E G16

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN54E X2

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN54E X8

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TN11L 4G

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN11L DGD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11L DGS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TN11L DM

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM Specificat ion

Op tica l Mo dul e

PR BS on the Cli ent Sid e

PR BS on the W D M Sid e

Y

eSF P

N

N

N

N

eSF P

N

-

N

N

N

SFP +

N

-

N

N

N

N

SFP +/ eSF P

N

-

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

Y

Y


3437


Board Name



ES C Fu ncti on

AL S Fu ncti on

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

Op tica l Mo dul e



FE C

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FE C

SD FE C2

D W D M

CW D M

TN11L DMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

TN11L DMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

TN12L DX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

Y

Y

TN11L EM24

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P/ SFP +

N

Y

TN11L EX4

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P/ SFP +

N

Y

TN11L OA

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P/ SFP +

Y

Y

TN11L OG

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

Y

TN12L OG

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

Y

TN11L OM

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

Y

TN12L OM

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

Y

TN11L QG

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

N

Y

TN13L QM

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

Y

N

TN11L QMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

WDM Specificat ion


3438


Board Name



ES C Fu ncti on

AL S Fu ncti on

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificat ion

Op tica l Mo dul e



FE C

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FE C

SD FE C2

D W D M

CW D M

TN12L QMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

TN11L QMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

Y

TN12L QMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

TN12L SC

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

CF P

Y

Y

TN13L SC

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

CF P

Y

Y

TN15L SC

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

CF P

Y

Y

TN17L SCM

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

CF P

Y

Y

TN11L SQ

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

TN11L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

Y

Y

TN13L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

Y

Y

TN14L SX

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

Y

Y

TN11L SXL

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

TN12L SXL

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

TN15L SXL

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

TN12L SX

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3439


Board Name



ES C Fu ncti on

AL S Fu ncti on

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

FE C

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FE C

SD FE C2

D W D M

CW D M

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

TN11L SXR

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

TN11L TX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

TN12L TX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

TN15L TX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN11L WX2

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN11L WXD

Y

Y

Y

N

N

TN11L WXS

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11T MX

Y

Y

Y

TN12T MX

Y

Y

TN54H UNQ2

Y

TN54H UNS3 TN11N D2

TN11L SXLR

WDM Specificat ion

Op tica l Mo dul e



N

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

XF P

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

SFP +

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

eSF P

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

-

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN12L SXLR

TN12L WXS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3440


Board Name



ES C Fu ncti on

AL S Fu ncti on

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificat ion

Op tica l Mo dul e



FE C

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FE C

SD FE C2

D W D M

CW D M

TN12N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

-

Y

TN52N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN53N D2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

-

Y

TN55N O2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

-

Y

TN51N Q2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

-

Y

TN52N Q2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

-

Y

TN53N Q2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

-

Y

TN54N Q2

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

-

Y

TN11N S2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN12N S201M 02 TN12N S201M 03 TN12N S2T02 TN12N S2T03 TN12N S2T04 TN12N S2T05

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3441


Board Name



ES C Fu ncti on

AL S Fu ncti on

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

Op tica l Mo dul e



FE C

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FE C

SD FE C2

D W D M

CW D M

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN52N S2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN53N S2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

-

Y

TN11N S3

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

N

TN52N S3

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN54N S3

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN55N S3

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN56N S3

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN54N S4

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN56N S4

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN57N S4

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN58N S4

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN96N S4

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN54N S4M

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

N

N

-

Y

TN12N S2A

WDM Specificat ion

TN12N S2B

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3442


Board Name



ES C Fu ncti on

AL S Fu ncti on

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificat ion

Op tica l Mo dul e



FE C

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FE C

SD FE C2

D W D M

CW D M

TN54G S4

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

CF P

N

Y

TN54P ND2

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

XF P

-

Y

TN11T BE

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P XF P

N

-

TN11T DG

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

N

-

TN11T DX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

XF P

Y

-

TN52T DX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

XF P

Y

-

TN53T DX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

XF P

Y

-

TN54T EM28

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P/ SFP +

N

N

TN54T HA

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

Y

-

TN54T OA

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

Y

-

TN11T OM

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

eSF P

Y

Y

TN12T DX

TN52T OM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3443


Board Name



ES C Fu ncti on

AL S Fu ncti on

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

Op tica l Mo dul e



FE C

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FE C

SD FE C2

D W D M

CW D M

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

SFP +

Y

-

TN11T QM

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

N

-

TN12T QM

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

Y

-

TN11T QS

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

eSF P

N

-

TN11T QX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

XF P

Y

-

TN52T QX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

XF P

Y

-

TN53T QX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

XF P

Y

-

TN55T QX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

XF P

Y

-

TN54T SC

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

CF P

Y

-

TN11T SXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

-

TN53T SXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

-

TN54T SXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

CF P

N

-

TN54T TX

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

SFP +

Y

-

TN55T TX

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

SFP +

Y

-

TN55T OX

WDM Specificat ion

TN56T OX

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3444


Board Name

TN52T OG



ES C Fu ncti on

AL S Fu ncti on

OT N Fun ctio n

FEC Encoding

WDM Specificat ion

FE C

AF EC

AF EC2

HF EC

SD FE C

SD FE C2

D W D M

CW D M

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Op tica l Mo dul e



eSF P

N

-

NOTE l "Y" indicates that the borad supports the function. "N" indicates that the borad does not support the function l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information about the modules can be obtained through a query on the U2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface. l The boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other.

C.2 Loopback Function of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards, Packet Service Boards and Universal Line Boards The OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards support different types of loopback.The OTUs, Tributary Boards, and Line Boards support different types of loopback. Table C-2 Loopback function of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards and Packet Service Boards Board Name

Client-Side Inloop

Client-Side Outloop

WDM-Side Inloop

WDM-Side Outloop

Channel loopback

ECOM

Y

Y

Y

N

N

LDGD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDGS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LDX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LOA

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

LOG

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3445



Board Name

Client-Side Inloop

Client-Side Outloop

WDM-Side Inloop

WDM-Side Outloop

Channel loopback

LOM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQG

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQMD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LQMS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSQ

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSC

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSCM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN11LSXL

N

N

Y

Y

N

TN12LSXL/ TN15LSXL

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LSXLR

N

N

N

N

N

LSXR

N

N

N

N

N

LTX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LWX2

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LWXD

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

LWXS

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TMX

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

ND2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NO2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NQ2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NS2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

PND2

N

N

Y

Y

N

NS3

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NS4

N

N

Y

Y

Y

NS4M

N

N

Y

Y

Y

TDG

Y

Y

N

N

N

TDX

Y

Y

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3446



Board Name

Client-Side Inloop

Client-Side Outloop

WDM-Side Inloop

WDM-Side Outloop

Channel loopback

TEM28

Y

Y

N

N

N

THA

Y

Y

N

N

Y

TOA

Y

Y

N

N

Y

TOG

Y

Y

N

N

N

TN11TOM

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TN52TOM

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

TOX

Y

Y

N

N

N

TQM

Y

Y

N

N

N

TQS

Y

Y

N

N

N

TQX

Y

Y

N

N

N

TSC

Y

Y

N

N

N

TSXL

Y

Y

N

N

N

TTX

Y

Y

N

N

N

NOTE "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Table C-3 Loop function of the General Service Processing Board Board Name

Line-Side Inloop

Line-Side Outloop

Channel loopback

GS4

Y

Y

Y

Table C-4 Loop function of the Universal Line Boards Board Name

ClientSide Inloop

ClientSide Outloo p

WDMSide Inloop

WDMSide Outloo p

Chann el loopba ck

Loop Mode MAC Inloop

PHY Loopback

HUNQ2

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

HUNS3

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3447



Table C-5 Loop function of the Ethernet boards Board Name

Interface

Loop Mode

L4G

Client side

MAC inloop PHY outloop

WDM side

Inloop Outloop

TBE


MAC inloop MAC outloop PHY inloop PHY outloop


MAC inloop PHY inloop


MAC inloop PHY inloop PHY outloop





TEM28






PHY inloop PHY outloop MAC inloop


PHY inloop PHY outloop

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3448


Board Name


Interface

Loop Mode MAC inloop

LEM24











WDM side

Inloop Outloop

LEX4




Inloop Outloop

EG16

FE/GE optical interface



MAC inloop PHY outloop

EX2


MAC inloop MAC outloop

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3449


Board Name


Interface

Loop Mode PHY inloop PHY outloop

EX8

10GE/GE/FE optical interface

MAC inloop


MAC outloop PHY inloop PHY outloop

C.3 Protection mode of OTUs, OTN Tributary and Line Boards, and Universal Line Boards The OTUs, OTN tributary boards, OTN line boards, and universal line boards support protection function. For detailed protection mode, refer to Table C-6. Table C-6 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards Board Name

Protection Mode SW SNC P

VLA N SNC P

OD Uk SNC P

Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction

IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion

OWS P Prote ction

OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n

Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion

DB PS

DL AG

MS SNCP

Tribut ary SNCP

ECOM

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

L4G

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LDGD

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDGS

Y

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDM

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDMD

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDMS

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LDX

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LEM24

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3450



Board Name


VLA N SNC P

OD Uk SNC P



OWS P Prote ction



DB PS

DL AG

MS SNCP

Tribut ary SNCP

LEX4

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

LOA

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LOG

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LOM

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LQG

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LQM

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LQMD

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

LQMS

Y

N

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

LSC

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSCM

N

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSQ

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSX

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSXL

N

N

N

Y

Ya

Yd

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSXLR

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LSXR

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LTX

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LWX2

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

LWXD

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

LWXS

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

TMX

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

HUNQ 2

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

HUNS3

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

ND2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3451



Board Name


VLA N SNC P

OD Uk SNC P



OWS P Prote ction



DB PS

DL AG

MS SNCP

Tribut ary SNCP

NO2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

NQ2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NS2

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NS3

N

N

Y

N

Y

Yc

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NS4

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

NS4M

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

GS4

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TBE

Y

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

TDG

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

TDX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TEM28

N

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

THA

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TOA

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TOG

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

TOM

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TOX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TQM

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

TQS

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TQX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TSC

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TSXL

N

N

Y

Yb

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

TTX

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3452


Board Name



VLA N SNC P

OD Uk SNC P



OWS P Prote ction



DB PS

DL AG

MS SNCP

Tribut ary SNCP

NOTE a: The TN11LSXL does not support intra-board 1+1 protection. b: The TN54TSXL board does not support tributary SNCP. c: Only the TN52NS3 supports OWSP protection. d: The TN15LSXL does not support OWSP protection. NOTE "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

C.4 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards The OTUs, OTN tributary boards, OTN line boards, and universal line boards support electrical cross-connection. For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table C-7, Table C-8 and Table C-9. Table C-7 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 8800 Board Name

Electrical Cross-Connection

LDM

N

LDMD

N

LDMS

N

LDX

N

LEM24

N

LEX4

N

LOA

N

LOG

N

LOM

N

LQM

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3453



Board Name


LQMD

N

LQMS

N

LSC

N

LSCM

N

LSQ

N

LSX

N

LSXL

N

LSXLR

N

LSXR

N

LTX

N

LWXS

N

TMX

N

HUNQ2

l 32 x ODU0/32 x ODUflex/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->4 x OTU2, 4 x ODU2e<->4 x OTU2e l 16 x STM-16/4 x STM-64<->16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->4 x OTU2 l A maximum of 40 Gbit/s packets<->32 x ODU0/32 x ODUflex/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->4 x OTU2

HUNS3

l 32 x ODU0/32 x ODUflex/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->1 x OTU3/OTU3e, 4 x ODU2e<->1 x OTU3e, 1 x ODU3<->1 x OTU3 l 16 x STM-16/4 x STM-64<->16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->1 x OTU3/OTU3e l A maximum of 40 Gbit/s packets<->32 x ODU0/32 x ODUflex/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2<->1 x OTU3/OTU3e, or packets<->1 x ODU3<->1 x OTU3

ND2

16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e NOTE Only the TN53ND2/TN53ND2T04 supports ODUflex.

NO2

64 x ODU0/32 x ODU1/8 x ODU2/8 x ODU2e

NQ2

32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/8 x ODUflex//4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e NOTE Only the TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex.

NS2

8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1/2 x ODUflex/1 x ODU2/1 x ODU2e NOTE Only the TN52NS2T04/TN52NS2T05/TN52NS2T06/TN52NS201M01/ TN52NS201M02/TN53NS2 support ODUflex.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3454



Board Name


NS3

32 x ODU0/32 x ODUflex/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/1 x ODU3/16 x STM-16/4 x STM-64 NOTE Only the TN54NS3/TN55NS3/TN56NS3 supports ODU3. Only the TN56NS3 supports ODUflex/STM-16/STM-64.

NS4

80 x ODU0/40 x ODU1/10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e/2 x ODU3/1 x ODU4/80 x ODUflex

NS4M


GS4


TDX

2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e/2x ODUflex NOTE Only the TN53TDX supports ODUflex.

TEM28

16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/8 x ODUflex

THA

32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1

TOA

16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/5 x ODUflex

TOM

8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1

TOX

8 x ODU2/8 x ODU2e/8 x ODUflex NOTE Only the TN56TOX supports ODUflex.

TQX

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/4 x ODUflex NOTE Only the TN55TQX supports ODUflex.

TOG

8 x ODU0

TSC

1 x ODU4

TSXL

1 x ODU3 NOTE Only the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL supports ODU3

TTX

10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e/10 x ODUflex NOTE Only the TN55TTX supports ODUflex.

"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3455



Table C-8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 6800 Board Name

Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection

Distributed Cross-Connection

ECOM

1 x GE

1 x GE

L4G

4 x GE

4 x GE

LDGD

2 x GE

2 x GE

LDGS

2 x GE

2 x GE

LDM

N

N

LDMD

N

N

LDMS

N

N

LDX

N

N

LEM24

2 x 10GE

N

LEX4

2 x 10GE

N

LOA

N

N

LOG

8 x GE

8 x GE

LOM

N

N

LQG

4 x GE

4 x GE

LQM

4 x GE

4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1

LQMD

4 x GE


LQMS

4 x GE/1 x ODU1


LSC

N

N

LSCM

N

N

LSQ

N

N

LSX

N

N

LSXL

N

N

LSXLR

N

N

LSXR

N

N

LTX

N

N

LWX2

N

N

LWXD

N

x

LWXS

N

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3456


Board Name


Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection

Distributed Cross-Connection

TMX

N

N

ND2

8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e

N

NQ2


N

NS2


4 x ODU1 NOTE It is supported by TN11NS2.

NS3

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

N

TBE

16 x GE

N

TDG

2 x GE/1 x ODU1

2 x GE/1 x ODU1

TDX


8 x ODU1

TOG

4 x ODU1

4 x ODU1/

TN11TOM

8 x GE/4 x ODU1

8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1

TN52TOM

4 x ODU1

8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any

TQM

4 x GE/1 x ODU1

4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1

TQS

4 x ODU1

4 x ODU1

TQX

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

N

TSXL

4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

N

NOTE Only the TN11TSXL supports ODU2/ ODU2e


Table C-9 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 3800 Board Name


ECOM

1 x GE

L4G

4 x GE

LDGD

2 x GE

LDGS

2 x GE

LDM

N

LDMD

N

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3457



Board Name


LDMS

N

LDX

N

LOA

N

LOG

8 x GE

LOM

N

LQG

4 x GE

LQM

4 x Any/4 x GE

LQMD

4 x Any/4 x GE

LQMS

4 x Any/4 x GE

LSC

N

LSCM

N

LSX

N

LSXR

N

LTX

N

LWX2

N

LWXD

N

LWXS

N

TMX

N

NS2

4 x ODU1

TBE

16 x GE

TDG

2 x GE/1 x ODU1

TDX

8 x ODU1

TOG

4 x ODU1

TOM

8 x GE/8 x Any/4 x ODU1

TQM

4 x Any/1 x ODU1

TQS

4 x ODU1


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3458



C.5 Quick Reference of Data Board Functions This section describes the functions supported by different types of boards. Table C-10 lists the functions supported by data boards. Table C-10 Basic functions supported by Data boards Boa rd

E L i n e

E L A N

Q L o P S T

M P L ST P T u n n el A P S

LE X4

√ √ √ √ x

M PL STP P W AP S

V L A N S N C P

L A G

M C L A G

x

√ √ x

E R P S

M S T P

√ √

Et her net Ser vic e O A M

Eth ern et Port OA M

MP LSTP OA M

R M O N

IG MP Sno opi ng

Numb er of VCTR UNKs

Inba nd DC N

√

√

x

√

√

OptiX OSN 6800:4

x

OptiX OSN 8800:2 LE M2 4

√ √ √ √ x

x

√ √ x

√ √

√

√

x

√

√

OptiX OSN 6800:4

x

OptiX OSN 8800:2 TE M2 8

√ √ √ √ x

x

x

√ √ √ x

√

√

x

√

√

16

x

EG1 6

√ √ √ √ √

√

x

√ √ x

√

√

√

√

√

√

-

√

EX2

√ √ √ √ √

√

x

√ √ x

√

√

√

√

√

√

-

√

EX8

√ √ √ √ √

√

x

√ √ x

√

√

√

√

√

√

-

√

PN D2

√ √ √ √ √

√

x

√ √ x

√

√

√

√

√

√

-

x

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3459


Boa rd

E L i n e

HU NS3 HU NQ 2

E L A N

Q L o P S T

M P L ST P T u n n el A P S


M PL STP P W AP S

V L A N S N C P

L A G

M C L A G

E R P S

M S T P

Et her net Ser vic e O A M

Eth ern et Port OA M

MP LSTP OA M

R M O N

IG MP Sno opi ng

Numb er of VCTR UNKs

Inba nd DC N

√ √ √ √ √

√

x

√ √ x

√

√

x

√

√

√

-

√

√ √ √ √ √

√

x

√ √ x

√

√

x

√

√

√

-

√

C.6 Packet Service Support Universal line boards and packet boards support packet services. Table C-11 Packet Service Support

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Service Parameter

Specifications

VLAN

4094

QinQ (SVLAN)

4094

E-Line

8192

E-LAN

1024

MAC address

256 x 1024 (The total number of the blacklists and static MAC addresses cannot exceed 2048.)

Number of MAC addresses supported by each VSI

64 x 1024

Split horizon

One split horizon for each E-LAN


3460



Service Parameter

Specifications

PW

SS-PW

16 x 1024 (max.)

MSPW

8 x 1024 (equipment level), 4 x 1024 (board level)

Stati c tunn el

Unidir ectiona l tunnel


Bidirec tional tunnel


ARP

Maxim um static entries

256

Maxim um dynam ic entries

256

C.7 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of TDM Boards This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of TDM boards. Table C-12 lists the common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the TDM boards. Table C-12 Common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the TDM boards Board Name

SLQ16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Optical Module Type of Support ed Optical Interfac e

Mean Launched Optical Power Minimu m (dBm)

Maximu m (dBm)

I-16

-10

-3


Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm)

Minimu m Overloa d (dBm)

-18

-3

Type of Fiber

Singlemode LC

3461


Board Name

SLO16

SL64

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




Maximu m (dBm)

S-16.1

-5

L-16.1

Type of Fiber



0

-18

0

Singlemode LC

-2

3

-27

-9

Singlemode LC

L-16.2

-2

3

-28

-9

Singlemode LC

I-16

-10

-3

-18

-3

Singlemode LC

S-16.1

-5

0

-18

0

Singlemode LC

L-16.1

-2

3

-27

-9

Singlemode LC

L-16.2

-2

3

-28

-9

Singlemode LC

I-64.1

-6

-1

-11

-1

Singlemode LC

S-64.2b

-1

2

-14

-1

Singlemode LC

P1L1-2D 2

0

4

-24

-7

Singlemode LC

Le-64.2

2

4

-21

-8

Singlemode LC


3462


Board Name

SLD64

SLH41

SF64

SF64A

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)




Maximu m (dBm)

V-64.2b (OBU10 1+ OBU101 + DCU + MR2)

-1 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2)

2 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2)

I-64.1

-6

-1

S-64.2b

-1

S-1.1

Type of Fiber



-17 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2)

-1

Singlemode LC

-11

-1

Singlemode LC

2

-14

-1

Singlemode LC

-15

-8

-28

-8

Singlemode LC

S-4.1

-15

-8

-28

-8

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2c

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2d

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2e

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2c

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2d

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

16 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)

16 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)


-26 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)

3463


Board Name

SLQ64

SFD64




Maximu m (dBm)

Ue-64.2e

–1

I-64.1

Type of Fiber



2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

-6

-1

-11

-1

Singlemode LC

S-64.2b

-1

2

–14

-1

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2c

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2d

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Ue-64.2e

–1

2

-19

0

Singlemode LC

Table C-13 lists the common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the data boards.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3464



Table C-13 Common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the data boards Board Name

Optical Module

N1EGSH

N3EAS2

Type of Supp orted Optic al Interf ace

Mean Launched Optical Power Minim um (dBm)

Maxim um (dBm)

1000B ase-LX (10km)

–9

1000B ase-SX (0.5km ) 10GB ASELR/ LW

Type of Fiber

Receiv er Sensiti vity (dBm)

Mini mum Overl oad (dBm)

–3

–20

–3

Singl emode LC

-9.5

–3.5

–18

0

Singl emode LC

-8.2

0.5

-12.6

0.5

Singl emode LC

C.8 Quick Reference of TDM Board Functions This section describes the functions supported by different types of boards. Table C-14 lists the functions supported by TDM boards. Table C-14 Basic functions supported by TDM boards

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Func tion

ALS

REG Spec ifica tions

PRB S

AU3

TC M

FEC

Enh ance d FEC

Fixe d Wav elen gth

Colo red Wav elen gth

Tun able Wav elen gth

N4S L64

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

N4S F64

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N1S F64A

Y

N

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

Y

Y


3465



Func tion

ALS

REG Spec ifica tions

PRB S

AU3

TC M

FEC

Enh ance d FEC

Fixe d Wav elen gth

Colo red Wav elen gth

Tun able Wav elen gth

N4S FD64

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N4S LD6 4

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N4S LQ6 4

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N4S LQ1 6

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N4S LO1 6

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N3S LH4 1

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Table C-15 lists the functions supported by Ethernet boards. Table C-15 Basic functions supported by Ethernet boards

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Fu nc tio n

EP L

E V PL

EP L A N

E V PL A N

M PL S

L A G

D L A G

Q oS

ET HO A M (8 02. 1a g)

ET HO A M (80 2.3 ah )

Te st Fr a m e

Qi n Q

R M O N

IG M P Sn oo pi ng

IE EE 15 88 v2

N1 E GS H

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y


3466



Fu nc tio n

EP L

E V PL

EP L A N

E V PL A N

M PL S

L A G

D L A G

Q oS

ET HO A M (8 02. 1a g)

ET HO A M (80 2.3 ah )

Te st Fr a m e

Qi n Q

R M O N

IG M P Sn oo pi ng

IE EE 15 88 v2

N3 E AS 2

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

C.9 Loopback Capabilities of TDM Boards The TDM boards and Ethernet boards support various types of loopbacks. Table C-16 lists the loopback capabilities of the TDM boards. Table C-16 Loopback capabilities of the TDM boards Board

Port Inloop

Port Outloop

VC-4 Inloop

VC-4 Outloop

VC-3/VC-12 Outloop

N4SL64

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SF64

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N1SF64A

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SFD64

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SLD64

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SLQ64

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SLQ16

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N4SLO16

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N3SLH41

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Table C-17 provides the loopback capabilities of the Ethernet board.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3467



Table C-17 Loopback capabilities of Ethernet boards

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Board

MAClayer Outloo p

MAClayer Outloo p

PHYlayer Outloo p

PHYlayer Inloop

VC-4 Inloop/ Outloop

VC-3 Inloop/ Outloop

N1EGSH

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N3EAS2

N

Y

N

Y

N

N


3468


D Quick Reference Table of Unit Specifications

D

Quick Reference Table of Unit Specifications

D.1 Specification of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards and Packet Service Boards The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs),OTN tributary boards, OTN line boards, general service processing Board and packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. D.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength. D.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards This section provides the insertion loss specifications of boards. D.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals. D.5 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3469



D.1 Specification of OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards, OTN Line Boards and Packet Service Boards The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs),OTN tributary boards, OTN line boards, general service processing Board and packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.

D.1.1 OTUs, OTN Tributary Boards and Packet Service Boards Specification on the Client Side The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU), tributary boards, and packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. Table D-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTUs, tributary boards and packet service boards Board Name

TN11ECOM

TN54EG16

Access Service Type

FE

GE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Optical Module

Note

Optical Interface Type Supported

Mean Launched Optical Power

Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm)

Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


-3

-11.5

-19

-3


0

-4.5

-20

-3


5

-2

-22

-3


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3470


Board Name

TN55EG16

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm)


-9

-20

-3

0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9

GE/FE

2.125Gbit/s Multirate-0.5k m-eSFP

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

GE/FE

1000BASELX-10km-eSFP

-3

-9

-20

-3

GE/FE

1000BASELX-40km-eSFP

0

-5

-23

-3

GE/FE

1000BASEZX-80km-eSFP

5

-2

-23

-3

GE

1000BASEBX10-U-eSFP

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

GE

1000BASEBX10-D-eSFP

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

GE

1000BASEBX-U-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

GE

1000BASEBX-D-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


-3



eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3471


Board Name

TN54EX2

TN54EX8

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

GE/FE

S-16.1-15kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

10GE LAN

10 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km-SFP+

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1


0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5


4

-4.7

-14.1

-1

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

10GBASESR-0.3km-SFP +

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

10GBASELR-10km-SFP +

0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

10GBASE-ER/ EW-40km-SFP +

4

-4.7

-14.1

-1

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

10GBASEZR-80km-SFP +

4

0

-24

-7

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

11.3G MultirateTX1270/ RX1330nm-10 km-SFP+

0.5

-8.2

-14.4

0.5

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

11.3G MultirateTX1330/ RX1270nm-10 km-SFP+

0.5

-8.2

-14.4

0.5

GE

1000BASE BX10-D-10km eSFP

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SFP+

SFP+

eSFP

3472


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

GE

1000BASE BX10-U-10km eSFP

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

GE

1000BASE BX40-D-10km eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

GE

1000BASE BX40-U-10km eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

GE

2.67G Multirate 4 DWDM

0

-28

-9

GE

2.125Gbit/s Multirate-0.5k m

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

GE

1000BASELX-10km

-3

-9

-20

-3

GE

1000BASELX-40km

0

-5

-23

-3

GE

1000BASEZX-80km

5

-2

-23

-3

GE

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80km

5

0

-28

-9

GE

2.67Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40km

5

0

-19

-3

FE

S-1.1-15kmeSFP

-8

-15

-28

-8

FE

L-1.1-40kmeSFP

0

-5

-34

-10

FE

L-1.2-80kmeSFP

0

-5

-34

-10

FE

I-1.1-2kmeSFP

-14

-19

-30

-14

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3473


Board Name

TN11L4G

TN11LDGD

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)

FE

100BASEBX10-D

-8

FE

100BASEBX10-U

GE

GE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



-15

-32

-8

-8

-15

-32

-8


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3474


Board Name

TN11LDGS

TN12LDM

Access Service Type

GE

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


5

-2

-23

-3


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3475


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module



-9

-20

-3

0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI


5

0

-19

-3

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE


5

0

-28

-9


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Minimu m (dBm)


-3



eSFP CWDM

3476


Board Name

TN11LDMD

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)



4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP



-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3477


Board Name

TN11LDMS

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)



5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9



4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP



-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

3478


Board Name

TN12LDX

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0



5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9



4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ OTU2e


-1

-6

-11 (multirate )/-12.6 (10GE LAN)

-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

3479


Board Name

TN11LEM24

Access Service Type


Optical Module



-4.7


-1

4

0

-24.0

-7


2

-3

–16

0

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP

2

-1

–16

0

10GE LAN

10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 kmXFP

-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/OTU2e

10 Gbit/s MultirateTX1330/ RX1270nm-10 km-XFP

0

-5

-14

0.5


0

-5

-14

0.5

1000 BASESX-0.5 kmeSFP (I-850LC)

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

FE/GE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Minimu m (dBm)


2



XFP

eSFP

3480


Board Name

Access Service Type

TN11LOA

Optical Module



-9.5

-20

-3

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1


0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

10G BASESR-0.3 km-SFP +

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1


0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

FC200/GE/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/FE

2.125Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP

FC400/ FICON4G

4.25Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km-eSFP

-1.1

-9

-15

0

eSFP

4.25Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP

-1

-8.4

-18

0


-1

-6

-14.4

0.5


2

-1

-14 (11.1G)

-1

10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN

TN11LEX4


10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN

10GE LAN/ FC1200/ FCCON10G

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Minimu m (dBm)

1000 BASELX-10 kmeSFP (I-1310LC)

-3



SFP+

SFP+

SFP+

-15.8 (10.3125 G)

3481


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module



-9

-20

-3

0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/ FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/ FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

DVB-ASI/ SDI/HD-SDI/ 3G-SDI

0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate-10 km-Video eSFP

0

-7

-22

0

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ FDDI/FICON/ FE/DVB-ASI

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Minimu m (dBm)


-3



eSFP

eSFP

eSFP

3482


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ FDDI/FICON/ FE/DVB-ASI

1.25Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP

5

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/ FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

2.67Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/ FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE FC800/ FICON8G

GE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



0

-19

-3

5

0

-28

-9

2.67Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

800-M5E-SAI-0.3 km-SFP+

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1

SFP+

800-SM-LCL-10 km-SFP+

0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

1000BASEBX10-U-eSFP

-3

-9

-19.5

-3


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3483


Board Name

TN11LOG

TN12LOG

Access Service Type

GE

GE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

1000BASEBX10-D-eSFP

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000BASEBX-U-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

1000BASEBX-D-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3484


Board Name

TN11LOM

Access Service Type

GE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


5

-2

-23

-3


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9

1000 BASEBX10-U-eSFP

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX10-D-eSFP

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

eSFP

3485


Board Name

Access Service Type

FC 100/FC 200/FC 400/ FICON/ FICON Express

GE/ FC 100/ FC 200

TN12LOM

GE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multimode)eSFP

-1

-9

-14

0

FC400/ FICON4G Module-10 km (Single mode)eSFP

-2

-8

-18

0

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode)eSFP

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)eSFP

-3

-10

-18

0


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3486


Board Name

Access Service Type

FC 100/FC 200/FC 400/ FICON/ FICON Express

GE/FC 100/ FC 200

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3

FC400/ FICON4G Module-0.3 km (Multimode)eSFP

-1

-9

-14

0

FC400/ FICON4G Module-10 km (Single mode)eSFP

-2

-8

-18

0

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-0.5 km (Multimode)eSFP

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module-2 km (Single mode)eSFP

-3

-10

-18

0


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9


eSFP CWDM

3487


Board Name

Access Service Type

TN13LQM

Optical Module



-9

-19.5

-3

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/


-3

-9

-20

-3

GE

TN11LQG


GE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Minimu m (dBm)


-3



eSFP

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3488


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/FE/ DVB-ASI


5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9

STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

3489


Board Name

TN11LQMD

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)



4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP



-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3490


Board Name

TN12LQMD

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)

FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/FE/ DVB-ASI


5



FC200/GE/ FC100/FE GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



0

-19

-3

5

0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3491


Board Name

TN11LQMS

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI


5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9



4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP



-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-20

-3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

3492


Board Name

TN12LQMS

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


5

-2

-23

-3

OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0



5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/


-3

-9

-20

-3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3493


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0



5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9

STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

3494


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)



4

TN11LSQ

STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3


TN11LSX

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ FC1200a

TN12LSX



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

3

0

-6

3

-


-1

-6


-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7

10GE LAN/ FC1200a


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ FC1200


-1

-6


-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


XFP

3495


Board Name

TN13LSX

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)


4

10GE LAN/ FC1200


10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ FC1200

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



0

-24.0

-7

-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1


0

-5

-14

0.5


0

-5

-14

0.5


-1

-6


-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7


2

-3

–16

0


XFP

XFP

XFP DWDM

3496


Board Name

TN14LSX

TN11LSXL

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

10GE LAN/ FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

XFP

OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200

10Gbit/s Multirate -10km-XFP

-1

-6

-14.4

-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP


2

-4.7

-15.8

-1 (STM64) /-1 (10GE LAN)


4

0

-24

-7 (STM64) /-7 (10GE LAN)

10GE LAN/ FC1200

10Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3kmXFP

-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1 (STM64) /-1 (10GE LAN)

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC1200


0

-5

-14

0.5


0

-5

-14

0.5

STM-256/ OC-768


3

0

-6

3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


XFP

-

3497


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)



TN12LSXL/ TN15LSXL

STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3


3

0

-6

3

-

TN11LTX

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192


-1

-6


-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP


2

-4.7


-1


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1


4

0

-24.0

-7


-1

-6

-14.4

0.5


2

-1

-14 (11.1G)

-1


4

0

-24

-7


-1

-7.3

-11.1 (OMA)

-1


0.5

-8.2

-12.6 (OMA)

0.5

TN15LTX

OC-192/ STM-64/10G E WAN/10GE LAN/OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC800/ FC1200

10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN/ FC800/ FC1200

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

SFP+

-15.8 (10.3125 G)


3498


Board Name

TN11LWX2

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

10G BASE-ER/ EW-40 km-SFP +

4

-4.7

-14.1 (OMA)

-1

10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN


4

0

-24

-7

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ FC800/ FC1200

11.3 Gbit/s MultirateTX1270/ RX1330nm-10 km-SFP+

0.5

-8.2

-14.4

0.5


0.5

-8.2

-14.4

0.5

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0



5

0

-19

-3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

3499


Board Name

TN11LWXD

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)



5

0

-28

-9



4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0



5

0

-19

-3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

3500


Board Name

TN11LWXS TN12LWXS

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)



5

0

-28

-9


2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km

4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP

ETR/ CLOc/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9

ETR/ CLOc/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

ETR/ CLO/ GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI


5

0

-19

-3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

3501


Board Name

TN11TMX TN12TMX

TN11TBE

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)

ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE


5

ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE


STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 (without FEC)

FE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



0

-28

-9

4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

eSFP

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWDM


4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM


-3

-11.5

-19

-3

eSFP


3502


Board Name

Access Service Type

GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

FE/ GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


5

-2

-22

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


-1

-6


-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1


4

0

-24

-7


5

0

-19

-3


XFP

eSFP CWDM

3503


Board Name

TN11TDG

TN11TDX TN12TDX TN52TDX

Access Service Type

GE

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2ed

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


5

0

-28

-9


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9


-1

-6


-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)

10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 kmm-XFP

2

-4.7


-1


eSFP

eSFP CWDM

XFP

3504


Board Name

TN53TDX

TN54TEM28

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 kmm-XFP

4

0

-24.0

-7

10GE LAN


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1



-1

-6


-1 (Multirat e)/0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24

-7

10GE LAN/ FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

FC800

800-SM-LCL-10 km-XFP

-1

-6

-14.4

0.5

10GE LAN

10GBASESR-0.3km-SFP +

-1

-7.3

-11.1

-1

10GBASELR-10km-SFP +

0.5

-8.2

-12.6

0.5

10GBASEZR-80km-SFP +

4

0

-24

-7

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


XFP

SFP+

3505


Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

1000 BASESX-0.5 kmeSFP (I-850LC)

-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

1000 BASELX-10 kmeSFP (I-1310LC)

-3

-9.5

-20

-3

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0


1000 BASELX-10km-eSFP (I-1310-LC)

-3

-9.5

-20

-3

GE


-3

-9

-19.5

-3


-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

GE

TN54THA


FC200/ FC100/FE/GE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


SFP+

eSFP

3506


Board Name

TN54TOA

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

OTU1/STM– 1/OC–4/ STM–4/OC– 12/STM–16/ OC–48/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ ESCON/ DVB-ASI/FE/ FDDI/FICON/ FICON Express

2.67 Gbit/s MultirateTX1310/ RX1490 nm-15 km-eSFP

0

-5

-18

0


0

-5

-18

0

FC400/ FICON4G


-1.1

-9

-15

0

4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP

-1

-8.4

-18

0

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI

I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9

OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP

3507


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

FC200/ FC100/FE/GE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0



-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3



5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9



4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

DVB-ASI/ SDI/HD-SDI


0

-7

-22

0

Video eSFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

3508


Board Name

Access Service Type

TN11TOM

Optical Module



-9

-19.5

-3

-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0


-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


5

0

-19

-3


5

0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0



-3

-9

-20

-3

GE

TN52TOG


GE

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Minimu m (dBm)


-3



eSFP

eSFP

eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3509


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0



5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9

STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

3510


Board Name

TN52TOM

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)



4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

eSFP



-3

-9

-20

-3


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3511


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)



5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9



4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

DVB-ASI/ SDI/HD-SDI


0

-7

-22

0

eSFP

GE


-3

-9

-19.5

-3


-3

-9

-19.5

-3

1000 BASEBX-U-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

1000 BASEBX-D-eSFP

3

-2

-23

-3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

3512


Board Name

TN55TOX

Access Service Type

Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)

OTU1/STM– 1/OC–4/ STM–4/OC– 12/STM–16/ OC–48/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ ESCON/ DVB-ASI/FE/ FDDI/FICON/ FICON Express


0


OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN/ OTU2/OTU2e

10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN

TN56TOX


OC-192/ STM-64/10G E WAN/10GE LAN/OTU2/ OTU2e/

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



-5

-18

0

0

-5

-18

0

10Gbit/s Multirate-10km -SFP+

-1

-6

-14.4

0.5


2

-1

-14 (11.1G)

-1

10G BASEZR-80km-SFP +

4

0

-24

-7

10G BASE-ER/ EW-40km-SFP +

4

-4.7

-14.1 (OMA)

-1

10G BASESR-0.3km-SFP +

-1

-7.3

-11.1 (OMA)

-1

10G BASELR-10km-SFP +

0.5

-8.2

-12.6 (OMA)

0.5


-1

-6

-14.4

0.5

SFP+

-15.8 (10.3125 G)


SFP+

3513


Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)


2

-1


4

0

-24

-7


-1

-7.3

-11.1 (OMA)

-1


0.5

-8.2

-12.6 (OMA)

0.5


4

-4.7

-14.1 (OMA)

-1

10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN


4

0

-24

-7



0.5

-8.2

-14.4

0.5


0.5

-8.2

-14.4

0.5

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0



-3

-9

-20

-3

FC800/ FC1200


TN11TQM


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



-14 (11.1G)

-1

-15.8 (10.3125 G)


eSFP

3514


Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-23

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0



5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9

FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE


-2.5

-9.5

-17

0

STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI

TN12TQM


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


eSFP CWDM

eSFP

3515


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module



-9

-20

-3

0

-5

-20

-3


5

-2

-23

-3


I-16-2 km-eSFP

-3

-10

-18

-3

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0



5

0

-19

-3



5

0

-28

-9


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Minimu m (dBm)


-3



eSFP CWDM

3516


Board Name

TN11TQS

TN11TQX TN52TQX

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)



4

STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1

I-16-2 km-eSFP

10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2ee

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

-3

-10

-18

-3

eSFP

S-16.1-15 kmeSFP

0

-5

-18

0

L-16.1-40 kmeSFP

3

-2

-27

-9

L-16.2-80 kmeSFP

3

-2

-28

-9


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWDM


4

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWDM

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP

-1

-6


-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)

XFP


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24.0

-7


3517


Board Name

TN53TQX

TN55TQX

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

10GE LAN

10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 kmeSFP

-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1



-1

-6


-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24

-7

10GE LAN /FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

FC800


-1

-6

-14.4

0.5



-1

-6


-1 (STM64) /0.5 (10GE LAN)


2

-4.7


-1


4

0

-24

-7

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


XFP

XFP

3518


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note





Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

10GE LAN /FC1200


-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

FC800


-1

-6

-14.4

0.5



0

-5

-14

0.5


0

-5

-14

0.5

TN11TSXL

STM-256/ OC-768


3

0

-6

3

-

TN53TSXL

STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3


3

0

-6

3

-

TN54TTX

OC-192/ STM-64/10G E WAN/10GE LAN


-1

-6

-14.4

0.5

SFP+


2

-1

-14 (11.1G)

-1


4

0

-24

-7


4

-4.7

-14.1 (OMA)

-1

10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

XFP

-15.8 (10.3125 G)


3519


Board Name

TN55TTX

Access Service Type


Optical Module



-7.3

-11.1 (OMA)

-1

0.5

-8.2

-12.6 (OMA)

0.5


-1

-6

-14.4

0.5


2

-1

-14 (11.1G)

-1


4

0

-24

-7


-1

-7.3

-11.1 (OMA)

-1


0.5

-8.2

-12.6 (OMA)

0.5


4

-4.7

-14.1 (OMA)

-1

10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN


4

0

-24

-7



0.5

-8.2

-14.4

0.5

OC-192/ STM-64/10G E WAN/10GE LAN/OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC800/ FC1200


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)



Minimu m (dBm)


-1


SFP+

-15.8 (10.3125 G)


3520


Board Name

Access Service Type


Optical Module

Note



Minimu m (dBm)


0.5

-8.2



-14.4

0.5

a: Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX supports FC1200 service. b: Only TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN12TQM support OTU1 service. c: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services. d: Only TN52TDX supports OTU2/OTU2e services. e: Only TN52TQX supports OTU2/OTU2e services.

Table D-2 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of TN17LSCM/TN12LSC/TN13LSC/TN15LSC/ TN54TSXL/TN54TSC Board Name

TN12LSC

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported

Averag e Launc h Power per Lane (Min)

Averag e Launc h Power per Lane (Max)

Averag e Reveiv er Power per Lane (Min)

Averag e Reveiv er Power per Lane (Max)

Total Averag e Launc h Power (Max)

100GE

100G BASELR4-10 kmCFP

-4.3

4.5

-10.6

4.5

10.5

100GE

100G BASE-10×10 G-10 km-CFP

-5.8

3.5

-10.8

3.5

13.5

100GE/OTU4

(100G BASE-4×25 G)/ (OTU4-4×28 G)-10 kmCFP

100GE: -4.3

100GE: 4.5

100GE: -10.6

100GE: 4.5

100GE: 10.5

OTU4: -2.5

OTU4: 2.9

OTU4: -8.8

OTU4: 2.9

OTU4: 8.9


3521


Board Name

TN13LSC

TN15LSC

TN17LSCM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Access Service Type







100GE


-4.3

4.5

-10.6

4.5

10.5

100GE


-5.8

3.5

-10.8

3.5

13.5

100GE/OTU4


100GE: -4.3

100GE: 4.5

100GE: -10.6

100GE: 4.5

100GE: 10.5

OTU4: -2.5

OTU4: 2.9

OTU4: -8.8

OTU4: 2.9

OTU4: 8.9

100GE


-4.3

4.5

-10.6

4.5

10.5

100GE


-5.8

3.5

-10.8

3.5

13.5

100GE/OTU4


100GE: -4.3 OTU4: -2.5

100GE: 4.5 OTU4: 2.9

100GE: -10.6 OTU4: -8.8

100GE: 4.5 OTU4: 2.9

100GE: 10.5 OTU4: 8.9

100GE


-4.3

4.5

-10.6

4.5

10.5

100GE


-5.8

3.5

-10.8

3.5

13.5


3522


Board Name

TN54TSC

TN54TSXL


Access Service Type







100GE/OTU4


100GE: -4.3 OTU4: -2.5

100GE: 4.5 OTU4: 2.9

100GE: -10.6 OTU4: -8.8

100GE: 4.5 OTU4: 2.9

100GE: 10.5 OTU4: 8.9

100GE


-4.3

4.5

-10.6

4.5

10.5

100GE


-5.8

3.5

-10.8

3.5

13.5

100GE/OTU4


100GE: -4.3

100GE: 4.5

100GE: -10.6

100GE: 4.5

100GE: 10.5

OTU4: -2.5

OTU4: 2.9

OTU4: -8.8

OTU4: 2.9

OTU4: 8.9


-7

2.3

-13.7

2.3

8.3

40GE

D.1.2 OTUs, OTN Line Boards, Universal Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards Specification on the WDM Side The main WDM-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), line boards, and packet service boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3523



Table D-3 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTUs, OTN Line Boards, Universal Line Boards, and Packet Service Boards Board Name

TN54H UNQ2

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e




Minimu m Receiver Overloa d (dBm)

Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP

2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M

TN54H UNS3

OTU3/ OTU3e


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN11L4 G

OTU 5G


2

-2

-25

-9

-


2

-3

-25

-9

-


-4

-8

-18

0

-

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD

-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-18

0

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-

6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)

0

-5

-28

-9

-

TN11LD GD

STM-16/ OTU1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3524


Board Name

TN11LD GS

Access Service Type

STM-16/ OTU1






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


-1

-5

-18

0

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-

TN12LD M

OTU1


3

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWD M

TN11LD MD

OTU1


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-

TN11LD MS

OTU1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3525


Board Name

TN12LD X

TN11LE M24

TN11LE X4

TN11LO G

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2

OTU2

OTU2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


3

-2

-28

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


3526


Board Name

TN12LO G

TN11LO M

Access Service Type

OTU2

OTU2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD

2

-3

-26

-9

-

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-(D) RZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


3527


Board Name

TN12LO M

TN11LQ G

Access Service Type

OTU2

FEC 5G/ OTU5G






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-2

-25

-9

-


2

-3

-25

-9

-

TN13LQ M

OTU1


3

0

-28

-9

eSFP DWD M

TN11LQ MD

OTU1


-4

-8

-18

0

-


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-18

0

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3528


Board Name

TN12LQ MD

TN11LQ MS

TN12LQ MS

Access Service Type

OTU1

OTU1

OTU1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-18

0

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3529


Board Name

TN12LS C

TN13LS C

TN15LS C

Access Service Type

OTU4

OTU4

OTU4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-

40000ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC)-PIN

0

-5

-16

0

-

55000ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC)PIN

0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC)

0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


3530


Board Name

Access Service Type






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN17LS CM

OTU4


3

–2

–14

0

-

TN11LS Q

OTU3


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-

TN11LS X

OTU2/ OTU2e

TN12LS X

TN13LS X

OTU2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3531


Board Name

TN14LS X

TN11LS XL

TN12LS XL

TN15LS XL

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU3

OTU3

OTU3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M

800ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

-

800ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-(D) RZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0

800ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

2

-3

-16

0


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


3532


Board Name

TN11LS XLR

TN12LS XLR

TN11LS XR

TN11LT X/ TN12LT X

Access Service Type

OTU3

OTU3/ OTU3e

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


3533


Board Name

TN15LT X

TN11L WX2

TN11L WXD

Access Service Type

OTU4

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC2,wDCM)-PIN

0

-5

-16

0

-

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZPINa

-1

-5

-18

0

-

12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPDa

-1

-5

-28

9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-26

-10

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


-4

-8

-18

0

-


-4

-8

-28

-9

-


3534


Board Name

Access Service Type

DVBASI/ FE

TN11L WXS TN12L WXSb

TN11T MX

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE/ ETR/ CLO

OTU2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-18

0

-


0

-5

-26

-10

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


0

-5

-28

-9

-


-1

-5

-18

0

-


-1

-5

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-18

0

-


3

-2

-26

-10

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


3

-2

-28

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


3535


Board Name

TN12T MX

TN11N D2

Access Service Type

OTU2

OTU2/ OTU2e

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


3536


Board Name

TN12N D2

TN52N D2

TN53N D2

TN55N O2

TN51N Q2/ TN52N Q2/ TN53N Q2/

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


3537


Board Name

Access Service Type

TN54N Q2 TN11NS 2

TN12NS 2

OTU2

OTU2/ OTU2e

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-26

-9

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


3538


Board Name

TN52NS 2

TN53NS 2

TN54PN D2

TN11NS 3

Access Service Type

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2/ OTU2e

OTU2

OTU3/ OTU3e

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

-


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-3

-16

0

XFP DWD M


2

-1

-16

0

XFP DWD M


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


3539


Board Name

TN52NS 3

TN54NS 3

Access Service Type

OTU3/ OTU3e

OTU3/ OTU3e






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN55NS 3

OTU3/ OTU3e


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN56NS 3

OTU3/ OTU3e


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN54NS 4

OTU4


0

-5

-16

0

-


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN56NS 4

OTU4


0

-5

-16

0

-

TN57NS 4

OTU4

40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(HFEC)-PIN

0

–5

-16

0

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3540


Board Name

TN58NS 4

Access Service Type

OTU4






Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


0

-5

–16

0

-


0

–5

–16

0

-


0

–5

–16

0

-


0

–5

–16

0

-


0

–5

–16

0

-


0

–5

–16

0

-

55000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)PIN 40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2)PIN 150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM)-PIN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3541


Board Name

Access Service Type




Minimu m (dBm)

3

–2



Note

–14

0

-

12000 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK(SDFEC2, wDCM-Metro)-PIN TN54NS 4M

OTU4


a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode. b: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.

Table D-4 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards Board Name

TN11E COM

Access Service Type

GE




Minimu m Overload Point (dBm)

Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)


5

0

-19

-3

eSFP CWD M


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN11L DGD

STM-16/ OTU1


2

-0.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L DGS

STM-16/ OTU1


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

TN12L DM

OTU1


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN11L QG

FEC 5G/ OTU5G

5 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-50 km-eSFP

5

2

-18

0

eSFP CWD M

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3542


Board Name

Access Service Type





Minimu m Overload Point (dBm)

Note

Maximu m (dBm)

Minimu m (dBm)

5 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-70 km-eSFP

5

2

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN13L QM

OTU1


5

0

-28

-9

eSFP CWD M

TN11L QMD

OTU1


2

-0.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L QMS

OTU1


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L WX2

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L WXD

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE


2

-0.5

-28

-9

-

TN11L WXS

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ ETR/ CLO


5

2.5

-28

-9

-

TN12L WXSa

a: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3543



Table D-5 Quick reference table for specifications of WDM-side gray optical modules on OTU boards and OTN line boards Board Name

TN54H UNQ2

TN11L EM24

TN11L EX4

TN11L OA

TN12L OG

Access Service Type



Minimu m (dBm)


Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm)

Note

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-4.7

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP

-1.3

-7.3

-7.5

-1

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-4.7

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3544


Board Name

TN12T MX

TN12N D2

TN53N D2

TN55N O2

TN51N Q2

Access Service Type




Minimu m (dBm)



Note

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP


4

0

-24

-7

XFP

TN52N Q2/ TN53N Q2/ TN54N Q2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN53N S2

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3545


Board Name

TN54P ND2

Access Service Type




Minimu m (dBm)



Note

OTU2/ OTU2e


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

OTU2


-1

-6

-11

-1

XFP


2

-1

-14

-1

XFP

TN54N S3

OTU3


3

0

-6

3

-

TN54G S4

OTU4

(100G BASE-4×25G)/ (OTU4-4×28G)-10kmCFP

2.9

-2.5

-10.3

2.9

CFP

D.2 Specification of Optical Amplifying Unit The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength. Table D-6 Quick reference table for optical amplifier unit Board Name

OAU100

DAS1/ OAU101

OAU102

Channel Gain (dB)

16 to 25.5

20 to 31

20 to 31

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Nomin al Chann el Gain (dB)

Input Power Range per Channel (dBm)

Nominal singlewavelength input optical power (dBm)

40 channels

80 channels

40 channels

80 channels

16

-32 to -14

-32 to -17

-14

-17

22

-32 to -20

-32 to -23

-20

-23

25.5

-32 to -23.5

-32 to -27.5

-23.5

-26.5

20

-32 to -16

-32 to -19

-16

-19

26

-32 to -22

-32 to -25

-22

-25

31

-32 to -27

-32 to -30

-27

-30

20

-32 to -19

-32 to -22

-19

-22

26

-32 to -25

-32 to -28

-25

-28


3546


Board Name




40 channels

80 channels

40 channels

80 channels

31

-32 to -30

-32

-30

-32

24

-32 to -20

-32 to -23

-20

-23

29

-32 to -25

-32 to -28

-25

-28

36

-32

-32

-32

-32

23

-32 to -16

-32 to -19

-16

-19

30

-32 to -23

-32 to -26

-23

-26

34

-32 to -27

-32 to -30

-27

-30

16

-24 to -12

-24 to -15

-12

-15

19

-24 to -15

-24 to -18

-15

-18

23

-24 to -19

-24 to -22

-19

-22

19 to 27, Maximum total output optical power 23dBm

19

-25 to -12

-25 to -15

-12

-15

22

-25 to -15

-25 to -18

-15

-18

27

-25 to -20

-25 to -23

-20

-23


19

-25 to -13

-25 to -16

-13

-16

22

-25 to -16

-25 to -19

-16

-19

27

-25 to -21

-25 to -24

-21

-24


19

-25 to -14

-25 to -17

-14

-17

22

-25 to -17

-25 to -20

-17

-20

27

-25 to -22

-25

-22

-25

OBU101

20±1.5

20

-32 to -20

-32 to -23

-20

-23

OBU103

23±1.5

23

-32 to -19

-32 to -22

-19

-22

OBU104

17±1.5

17

-32 to -17

-32 to -20

-17

-20

OBU105

23±1.5

23

-24 to -16

-24 to -19

-16

-19

OBU205

23±1.5

23

-24 to -16

-24 to -19

-16

-19

OAU103

OAU105

OAU106

OAU107

Channel Gain (dB)


24 to 36

23 to 34

16 to 23

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3547


Board Name

Channel Gain (dB)





40 channels

40 channels

80 channels

80 channels

NOTE The DAS1/OAU1/TN11OBU1/TN12OBU1/OBU2 board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the temporary use because it affects the gain flatness.

Table D-7 Quick reference table for TN12OBU1P1 Board Name

Total input power range at the VI optical port(dBm)

Maximum total output optical power(dBm)

TN12OBU1P1

-30 to 7

7

Table D-8 Quick reference table for TN13OBU1P3/TN13OBU2P3/TN14OBU2P3 Board Name

Nominal input power range (dBm)

Maximum total output optical power(dBm)

TN13OBU1P3

-32 to -3.5

14.5

TN13OBU2P3

-32 to -3

20

TN14OBU2P3

-32 to -3.5

16.5

Table D-9 Quick reference table for CRPC Board Name

Channel Gain (dB)

Maximum Pump Power (dBm)

G.652 fiber

LEAF fiber

CRPC01

≥10

≥12

29

CRPC03

>10

N/A

29.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3548



Table D-10 Quick reference table for HBA Board Name

HBA

Channel Gain (dB)

29±1

Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 80 channels

40 channels

10 channels

Nominal Input Power Range (dBm)

-22

-19

-13

-25 to -3

Channel Allocation (nm)

1529 to 1561

Table D-11 Quick reference table for RAU1/RAU2 Board Name

Gain range (dB)

Max. OUT port optical power (dBm)

G.652/G. 654A fiber

LEAF/G.653/ TWRS/TWC/TWPLUS/ SMFLS/G. 656/ TERA_LIGH T fiber

G.654B fiber

RAU1

19 to 33

19 to 35

19 to 29

20

RAU2

30 to 41

32 to 43

27 to 37

20

D.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards This section provides the insertion loss specifications of boards. Table D-12 Quick reference table for board insertion loss specifications Board Name

Insertion Loss (dB)

TN11MR2/TN21MR2

IN-MO

≤1.0

MI-OUT

TN11MR4/TN21MR4

Add/drop channel

≤1.5

IN-MO

≤1.5

MI-OUT

TN11MR8

Add/drop channel

≤2.2

IN-MO

≤3.5

MI-OUT Add/drop channel

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


≤4

3549



Board Name

Insertion Loss (dB)

TN11MR8V TN12MR8V

IN-MO

TN21CMR1

TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2

≤3

MI-OUT Add/drop channel

≤4.5

IN-MO MI-OUT

≤0.8

Add/drop channel

≤1

IN-MO

≤1.0

MI-OUT

TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4

Add/drop channel

≤1.5

IN-MO

≤1.0

MI-OUT

TN11DMR1/ TN21DMR1

Add/drop channel

≤2

EIN-EMO

≤0.8

EMI-EOUT WIN-WMO WMI-WOUT Add/drop channel

≤1

TN11SBM2

Add/drop channel

≤3

TN11D40/TN12D40

≤6.5

TN11D40V

≤8a

TN21DFIU

EIN-ETM

≤1.5

ERM-EOUT WIN-WTM WRM-WOUT EIN-ETC

≤1

ERC-EOUT WIN-WTC WRC-WOUT TN11FIU/TN12FIU/ TN13FIU/TN14FIU/ TN15FIU/TN21FIU/ TN16FIU

IN-TM

≤1.5

RM-OUT IN-TC

≤1

RC-OUT TN11SFIU

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

LINE1-SYS1


≤1.0

3550


Board Name


Insertion Loss (dB) LINE2-SYS2 LINE1-OSC1

≤1.5

LINE1-OSC2 TN11ITL01/TN11ITL06

RE-OUT

<4.5

RO-OUT IN-TE

<2.5

IN-TO TN11ITL04

RE-OUT

<3

RO-OUT IN-TE

<3

IN-TO TN12ITL

RE-OUT

<4.5

RO-OUT IN-TE

<3.5

IN-TO TN11M40/TN12M40

≤6.5

TN11M40V/TN12M40V

≤8a

TN11DCP

Transmit-end insertion loss

Single mode ≤4

Receive-end insertion loss

Single mode ≤1.5

Multimode ≤4.5

Multimode ≤2 TN12DCP/TN13DCP

TN11OLP


Single mode ≤4


Single mode ≤1.5


Single mode ≤4


Single mode ≤1.5

Multimode ≤4.5

Multimode ≤2 TN12OLP/TN13OLP

TN11QCP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


Single mode

≤4


Multimode

≤1.5


Single mode

≤4


3551


Board Name

TN11SCS

TN11RDU9 TN12RDU9


Insertion Loss (dB) Receive-end insertion loss

Single mode

≤1.5

Wavelength dropping insertion loss

Single mode

≤4

Multimode

≤4.5

Wavelength adding insertion loss

Single mode

≤4

Multimode

≤4.5

IN-Drop(DM1-DM8)

≤12.5

ROA-Drop(DM1-DM8)

≤11.5

IN-EXPO

≤12.5

IN-TOA

≤1

EXPI-OUT

≤8.5

AMxb-TOA

≤12.5a

ROA-OUT

≤1.5

Mxc-OUT

≤9a

IN-DM

≤7

EXPI-OUT

≤14a

IN-EXPO

≤3

TN12TD20

insertion loss difference IN-DMxe

≤3

TN11TM20 TN13TM20

AMxf-OUT

≤8a

TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9/ TN13WSD9/ TN16WSD9/TN17WSD9

IN-DMxd

≤8a

TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9/ TN13WSM9/ TN16WSM9/ TN17WSM9

AMxb-OUT

TN11WSMD2

AMxb-OUT

≤8a

IN-DMxd

≤4.5

TN11RMU9

TN11ROAM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

IN-EXPO

≤8a

EXPI-OUT


3552



Board Name

Insertion Loss (dB)

TN11WSMD4/ TN12WSMD4/ TN13WSMD4/ TN17WSMD4

AMxb-OUT

TN11WSMD9/ TN12WSMD9/ TN15WSMD9

AMxb/EXPI-OUT

≤8a

IN-DMxd/EXPO

≤12

≤8a

IN-DMxd

a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB. b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8. c: Mx denotes M1-M40. d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8. e: DMx denotes DM1-DM20. f: AMx denotes AM1-AM20.

D.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals. Table D-13 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board. Table D-13 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board Board Name

Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path

Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path

CRPC

-

"MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20 dB)

D40

"MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB)

-

D40V

"MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB)

-

DAS1

"MONR"/"SOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

"MONT"/"LOUT"=1/99 (20 dB)

FIU

-

l TN11FIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU01/ TN14FIU/TN15FIU/TN13FIU03/ TN16FIU/TN21FIU: "MONT"/"LOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) l TN13FIU02: "MONT"/"LOUT" = 0.1/99.9 (30 dB)

HBA

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30 dB)

ITL

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3553



Board Name

Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path

Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path

M40

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)

M40V

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)

OAU1

-

"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

OBU1

-

All OBU1 boards except TN13OBU1P3: "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) TN13OBU1P3: "MON"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

OBU2

-

All OBU2 boards except TN14OBU2: "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) TN14OBU2: "MON"/"OUT" = 2/98 (17 dB)

RDU9

"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)

RMU9

"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSD9

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSM9

"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSMD2

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSMD4

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

WSMD9

"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)

"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)

TD20

-

"MON"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB)

TM20

-

"MONO"/"OUT"=3/97(15dB)

RAU1

-

"MONO"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB) "MONS"/"SYS"=1/99(20dB)

RAU2

-

"MONO"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB) "MONS"/"SYS"=1/99(20dB)

D.5 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards D.5.1 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 8800 This chapter describes the power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 8800 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3554



The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 system are shown in Table D-14. The values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption of the boards when they normally work. The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the cross-connect boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 system are shown in Table D-15. Table D-14 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 boards Board

Modul e Type

Typical Power Consu mption (W)

Maxim um Power Consu mption (W)a

Weight (kg/lb.)

Numbe r of Occupi ed Slotsb

Valid Slots of 8800 T64



Valid Slots of 8800 Univer sal Platfor m Subrac k

TN16A TE

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

-

-

IU24

-

TN51A TE

-

0.3

0.3

0.2/0.4

1

IU87

IU48

-

-

TN16A UX

-

16.5

19.2

0.6/1.32

1

-

-

IU21, IU22

-

TN51A UX

-

17.5

19.0

0.4/0.88

1

IU72, IU83

IU41

-

-

TN52A UX

-

15.0

20.0

0.9/2.0

1

General: IU72, IU83

General: IU41

-

-

Enhance d: IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84

Enhance d: IU41, IU43

TN11C MR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU1IU8, IU11IU42, IU45IU68


IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11C MR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3555



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11C RPC01

-

110.0

121.0

4.0/8.8

-

Installed outside

Installed outside

Installed outside

Installed outside

TN11C RPC03

-

70.0

77.0

4.2/9.2

-

Installed outside

Installed outside

Installed outside

Installed outside

TN11D4 0

-

10.0

13.0

2.2/4.8

3 (left)

IU1IU6, IU11IU16, IU19IU24, IU27IU32, IU35IU40, IU45IU50, IU53IU58, IU61IU66

IU1IU6, IU11IU17, IU20IU25, IU29IU34

IU1IU6, IU11IU16

IU1IU14

TN12D4 0

-

10.0

13.0

2.0/4.4

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3556



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11D4 0V

-

20

25

2.3/5.1

3 (left)



-

-

TN11D AS1

-

22

28.6

1.4/3.1

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16

TN11D CP

-

6.8

7.5

1.0/2.2

1



-

IU1IU16

TN12D CP

-

6.8

7.5

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3557



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN13D CP

-

7.4

8.1

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11D CU

-

0.2

0.3

1.5/3.3

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11D MR1

-

0.2

0.3

0.7/1.5

1



-

-

TN16EF I

-

2.0

2.5

0.5/1.1

1

-

-

IU19

-

TN18EF I

-

12.0

13.0

1.17/2.5 8

1

-

-

-

IU21

TN51EF I1

-

5.0

7.0

0.2/0.4

1

IU76

IU38

-

-

TN51EF I2

-

13.0

15.0

0.3/0.7

1

IU71

IU37

-

-

TN54E G16

-

93.0

101.0

2.0/4.4

2 (left)

-


IU1IU7, IU11IU17

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3558



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN55E G16

-

78

85

1.3/2.9

1

-


IU2IU7, IU12IU17

-

TN54E NQ2

-

40.0

44.0

0.9/2.0

1




-

TN54E X2

-

84.0

91.0

1.2/2.7

1

-


IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN54E X8

-

98

107

1.4/3.1

1

-


IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3559



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12FI U

-

4.2

4.6

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13FI U

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN14FI U

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN15FI U

-

6.0

6.6

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN16FI U

-

6.0

6.5

0.9/2.0

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11G FU

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3560



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN54G S4

-

55

60

1.5/3.3

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN11H BA

-

47.0

75.0

3/6.6

3 (middle)



IU2IU7, IU12IU17

IU2IU15

TN11H SC1

-

8

8.8

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU7, IU11IU17IU 1-IU18

IU1IU16

TN12H SC1

-

13

15

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU7, IU11IU17IU 1-IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3561



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN54H UNQ2

800 ps/ nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelen gths)Fixed Wavelen gthNRZPINXFP

118.8

130.5

1.8/3.97

2 (left)

-


IU2IU7, IU12IU17

-

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPINXFP 10 Gbit/ s Multirat e-10 km 10 Gbit/ s Multirat e-40 km 10 Gbit/ s Multirat e-80 km

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3562



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN54H UNS3

60000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMBPSKPIN

172.1

182.5

3.3/7.28

2 (left)

-


IU1IU7, IU11IU17

-

TN11IT L

-

0.2

0.3

1.2/2.6

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN12IT L

-

10

11.5

1.2/2.6

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN12L DM

-

22.6

24.8

1.1/2.4

1



-

IU1IU16

TN11L DMD

-

26.9

29.6

1.2/2.6

1



-

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3563



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11L DMS

-

26.9

29.6

1.1/2.4

1



-

-

TN12L DX


44.5

51.2

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPINXFP

45.5

52.2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3564



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11LE M24

-

81.0

83.0

1.0/2.2

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

-

TN11LE X4

-

64.0

67.0

0.7/1.5

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN11L OA


31.8

36

1.19/2.6 4

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3– IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3565


Board


Modul e Type




32.8

37

10Gbit/s Multirat e - 10km

31.8

36

40.0

45.0

Weight (kg/lb.)






1.6/3.5

1



-

-

10Gbit/s Multirat e - 40km TN11L OG

800 ps/ nm-C Band (odd & even wavelen gths)Fixed Wavelen gthNRZPIN 800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gthNRZPIN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3566


Board


Modul e Type



1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZAPD

43.0

48.0

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-(D) RZ-PINc

43.5

48.5


55.0

60.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)







3567



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12L OG


37.0

41.44

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16


38.0

42.44

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN

41.61

46.6

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-(D) RZ-PIN

43.04

48.0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3568


Board


Modul e Type




37.0

41.44

92.7

101.7

Weight (kg/lb.)






2.3/5.1

2 (left)



-

-

10Gbit/s Multirat e - 40km 10Gbit/s Multirat e - 80km TN11L OM


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3569


Board


Modul e Type




92.9

101.9


93.4

102.7


98.2

108.0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)







3570



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12L OMd


61.8

69.2

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16


62.8

70.2


64.8

72.6


66.7

75.0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3571



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN13L QM

-

32.6

35.9

1.1/2.4

1



-

IU3IU16

TN12L QMD

-

31.1

34.3

1.4/3.1

1



-

-

TN12L QMS

-

29.0

32.3

1.3/2.9

1



-

-

TN12LS C

40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (HFEC)PIN

240

265

5/11

4 (left)


IU1IU5, IU11IU15

IU1IU13

55000ps /nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (SDFEC )-PIN

255

285


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3572



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN13LS C


150

160

3/6.61

2 (left)


IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15


160

170


40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (HFEC)

145.2

158.5

3.1/6.83

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN15LS C

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3573


Board


Modul e Type



150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (SDFEC 2, wDCMEnhance d)-PIN

174.6

192.6

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (SDFEC 2)-PIN

174.6

192.6


174.6

192.6

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)







3574


Board

TN17LS CM


Modul e Type




174.6

192.6

150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (SDFEC 2, wDCM) -PIN

171.7

188.9

350ps/ nm-C Band-4 Wavelen gths NRZPIN

93

102

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)






2.5/5.5

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15


3575



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11LS Q

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBPIN

75

82

2.5/5.5

2 (right)


IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU1IU15

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthDQPSK -PIN

82

89



30.5

36.6

1.4/3.1

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN12LS X

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3576


Board

TN13LS X


Modul e Type




30.7

36.8


32.5

39


35.5

42.6


29.4

32.8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)






1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16


3577


Board


Modul e Type




29.5

33.9


27.0

30.4


28.0

31.4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)







3578



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN14LS X

800 ps/ nm-C Band (odd & even wavelen gths)Fixed Wavelen gthNRZPIN

27.0

30.0

1.2/2.6

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

74.0

81.0

3.75/8.2 7

3 (right)

IU3IU8, IU13IU18, IU21IU26, IU29IU34, IU38IU42, IU47IU52,


-

IU3IU16

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-(D) RZ-PIN 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN TN12LS XL


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3579


Board


Modul e Type




84.0

94.0

TN15LS XL

60000ps /nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMBPSKPIN

140

155

3.8/8.4

3 (middle)

TN12LS XLR


75.0

79.0

2.5/5.5

2 (right)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)








IU2IU7, IU12IU17

IU2IU15

IU2IU8, IU12IU18, IU20IU26, IU28IU34, IU36IU42, IU46IU52, IU54IU60,


-

IU2IU16

IU55IU60, IU63IU68


3580


Board

TN11LS XR


Modul e Type




67.0

70.0


34.8

37.8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)







-

IU1IU16

IU62IU68

1.2/2.6

1



3581


Board

TN11LT X(OTU mode)


Modul e Type




35.0

38.0


36.8

39.8


39.8

42.8

40000ps /nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK

248

273

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)






5.8/12.8

4 (left 2)

IU2IU6, IU12IU16, IU20IU24, IU28IU32,


IU2IU6, IU12IU16

IU2IU14


3582



Board

Modul e Type



TN11LT X (regener ation mode)

(HFEC)PIN

235

247

TN11LT X(OTU mode)


270

300

250

275

40000ps /nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (HFEC)PIN

248

273


TN12LT X(OTU mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)






IU36IU40, IU46IU50, IU54IU58, IU62IU66 5.8/12.8

4 (left 2)



IU2IU6, IU12IU16

IU2IU14

5.8/12.8

4 (left 2)



IU2IU6, IU12IU16

IU2IU14


3583


Board

Modul e Type



235

247


270

300

250

275


176

190


TN12LT X(OTU mode) TN12LT X (regener ation mode)

TN15LT X(OTU mode)


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)






IU62IU66

5.8/12.8

4 (left 2)



IU2IU6, IU12IU16

IU2IU14

3.0/6.6

2 (right)

IU2IU8, IU12IU18, IU20IU26, IU28IU34, IU36IU42, IU46-


IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16


3584



Board

Modul e Type





160

173

33.9

37.3

Weight (kg/lb.)






-

-

IU1IU16

IU52, IU54IU60, IU62IU68

40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (SDFEC 2)-PIN 150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (SDFEC 2,wDC M)-PIN

TN11L WXS

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

1.1/2.4

1

-


3585



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12L WXS

-

33.9

37.3

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11M 40

-

10.0

13.0

2.2/4.8

3 (left)



IU1IU6, IU11IU16

IU1IU14

TN12M 40

-

10.0

13.0

2.0/4.4

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3586



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11M 40V

-

20.0

25.0

2.3/5.1

3 (left)



IU1IU6, IU11IU16

IU1IU14

TN12M 40V

-

16.0

26.0

2.3/5.1

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3587



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11M CA4

-

8.0

8.5

1.9/4.2

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN11M CA8

-

12.0

13.0

1.9/4.2

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN11M R2

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3588



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11M R4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11M R8

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

2 (left)



-

IU1IU15

TN11M R8V

-

7.7

8.6

1.0/2.2

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3589



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12M R8V

-

6.0

6.6

1.0/2.2

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN52N D2


TN52N D2T02: 67.8

TN52N D2T02: 74.6

1.4/3.1

1

TN52N D2T04: 37


IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16

TN52N D2T04: 35



70.5

77.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3590



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN53N D2


27

30

1.2/2.6

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16


25

28

83.6

87

1.66/3.6 6

1



-

IU3IU16

10Gbit/s Multirat e - 10km 10Gbit/s Multirat e - 40km TN55N O2

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3591



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN54N PO2

-

134.0

147.0

1.9/4.2

2 (right)




-

TN55N PO2E

-

143.0

157.3

1.7/3.6

2 (right)




-

TN54N PS4

1400ps/ nm-PIDNRZPIN

81

89

1.5/3.3

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3592



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN54N PS4E

1400ps/ nm-PIDNRZPIN

81

89

1.5/3.3

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN52N Q2


88.0

97.0

2.0/4.4

1



-

-

10Gbit/s Multirat e - 10km 10Gbit/s Multirat e - 40km 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPINXFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3593



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN53N Q2


45

50

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16

49

54

10Gbit/s Multirat e - 10km 10Gbit/s Multirat e - 40km 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPINXFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3594



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN54N Q2


53

58.3

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN52N S2T02: 51.3 TN52N S2T06: 28

TN52N S2T02: 56.4 TN52N S2T06: 31

1.3/2.86

1



-

-

800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPINXFP 10Gbit/s Multirat e - 10km 10Gbit/s Multirat e - 40km TN52N S2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3595


Board

TN53N S2


Modul e Type




TN52N S2T03: 49.1 TN52N S2T04: 26

TN52N S2T03: 54.0 TN52N S2T04: 28

TN52N S2T05: 28

TN52N S2T05: 31

800 ps/ nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelen gth)Fixed Wavelen gthNRZPIN

28

31


20

24

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)






1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-


3596


Board


Modul e Type




21

25


20

24


118.0

130.0


110.0

118.0

Weight (kg/lb.)






2.4/5.2

2 (right)



-

-

10Gbit/s Multirat e - 40km TN52N S3

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3597


Board

TN54N S3


Modul e Type




118.0

130.0


73.0

80.0


60.0

65.0

40G Transpo nder

62.0

69.0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)






1.8/3.96

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16


3598



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN55N S3


135

150

2.6/5.73

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU4IU16

TN56N S3


99

103

2.5/5.5

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16

TN54N S4 (line applicati on)


170

190

2.5/5.51

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU4IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3599


Board

TN54N S4 (regener ation applicati on)


Modul e Type




180

200


155

167


167

185

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)







IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU4IU16

IU62IU68

2.5/5.51

2 (right)



3600



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)








160

170

2.5/5.51

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU4IU16



160

170

2.5/5.51

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU4IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3601



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)








163.0

177.9

2.6/5.7

2 (right)


IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU4IU16


171.7

188.9



171.7

188.9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3602


Board


Modul e Type




171.7

188.9


171.7

188.9


171.7

188.9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)







3603



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)








155.0

167.0

2.6/5.7

2 (right)


IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU4IU16


171.7

188.9



171.7

188.9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3604


Board


Modul e Type




171.7

188.9


171.7

188.9


171.7

188.9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)







3605



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN58N S4


94

101

1.62/3.5 7

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16

55000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (SDFEC 2)-PIN 40000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (SDFEC 2)-PIN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3606


Board

Modul e Type




Weight (kg/lb.)






150000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (SDFEC 2, wDCM) -PIN 12000 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthePDMQPSK (SDFEC 2, wDCMMetro)PIN

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3607



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN54N S4M

350ps/ nm-C Band-4 Wavelen gths NRZPIN

97.0

106.7

1.7/3.7

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

-

TN96N S4

150000p s/nmExtend C BandTunable Wavelen gthPDMQPSK (SDFEC 2, wDCMEnhance d)-PIN

172.0

189.0

3.1/6.8

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU4IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3608



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11O AU101

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)



-

-

TN11O AU102

-

14.0

18.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)



-

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3609



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11O AU103

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)



-

-

TN11O AU105

-

22.0

29.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)



-

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3610



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12O AU100

-

11.0

14.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

TN12O AU101

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3611



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12O AU102

-

10.0

13.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

TN12O AU103

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3612



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12O AU105

-

15.0

21.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

TN13O AU101

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13O AU103

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13O AU105

-

15.0

21.0

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3613



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN13O AU106

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13O AU107

-

15.0

21.0

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11O BU101

-

11.0

13.0

1.3/2.9

1



-

-

TN11O BU103

-

13.0

15.0

1.3/2.9

1



-

-

TN11O BU104

-

12.0

14.0

1.3/2.9

1



-

-

TN12O BU101

-

10.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3614



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12O BU1P1

-

10.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN12O BU103

-

11.0

12.0

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN12O BU104

-

10.0

12.0

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13O BU101

-

8.5

10

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13O BU103

-

9.0

11

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13O BU104

-

8.0

9.5

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3615



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN13O BU105

-

12.5

15.5

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13O BU1P3

-

9.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11O BU205

-

17.0

24.0

1.9/4.2

2 (right)



-

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3616



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12O BU205

-

14.0

19.0

1.6/3.5

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

TN13O BU2P3/ TN14O BU2P3

-

9.0

11.0

1.9/4.2

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

TN96O BU103

-

9.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3617



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11O LP

-

6.0

6.6

0.9/2.0

1



-

IU1IU16

TN12O LP

-

4.0

4.5

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13O LP03

7.0

7.7

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13O LP04

6.9

7.6

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11O PM8

-

12.0

15.0

1.2/2.6

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN12O PM8

-

12.0

15.0

1.2/2.6

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3618



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN16PI U

-

3.0

3.6

0.65/1.4 3

1


IU39, IU40, IU45, IU46

IU20, IU23

-

TN51PI U

-

5.0

5.0

0.5/1.1

1


IU39, IU40, IU45, IU46

-

-

TN18PI U

-

7.5

8

0.45/0.9 9

1

-

-

-

IU17, IU18

TN54P ND2

-

100

108

2.5/5.5

2 (left)

-


IU1IU7, IU11IU17

-

TN11Q CP

-

6.2

6.8

1.2/2.65

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3619



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11R AU1

-

55

70

2.5/5.51

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

TN12R AU1

-

35

52

1.75/3.8 5

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3620



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11R AU2

-

55

70

2.58/5.6 8

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

TN12R AU2

-

35

52

1.75/3.8 5

2 (right)



IU2IU8, IU12IU18

IU2IU16

TN11R DU9

-

6

6.6

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3621



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12R DU9

-

6.2

6.8

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11R MU901

-

7.7

8.6

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11R MU902

-

8.2

9.0

1.1/2.4

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11R OAM

-

66.0

72.6

3.2/7.0

3 (left)



-

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3622



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12SC 1

-

11.0

14.9

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN12SC 2

-

13.5

14.5

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN16SC C

-

32

35

1.3/2.8

1

-

-

IU9, IU10

-

TN51SC C

-

18.0

20.0

1.2/2.6

1

-

IU11, IU28

-

-

TN52SC C

-

23.0

25.1

1.0/2.2

1

-

IU11, IU28

-

IU1, IU2

TNK2S CC

-

26.7

29.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU74, IU85

-

-

-

TN11SC S

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11SF IU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3623



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11ST 2

-

17.5

19.5

0.95/2.0 9

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16

TN12ST 2

-

15.0

16.5

1.1/2.42

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16

TN13ST 2

-

14.4

16.0

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16

TN12ST G

-

8.7

9.57

1.1/2.4

1

-

-

-

IU3, IU4

TN52ST G

-

13.0

14.1

0.5/1.1

1

-

IU42, IU44

-

-

TN54ST G

-

8.9

10.0

0.45/0.9 9

1

-

IU42, IU44

-

-

TNK2S TG

-

14.0

16.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU75, IU86

-

-

-

TN52ST I

-

1.5

1.5

0.3/0.7

1

IU82

IU47

-

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3624



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12T D20

-

13.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN11T DC

-

13.0

15.0

1.14/2.5 1

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN52T DX

-

57.3

63.0

1.4/3.1

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN53T DX

-

25

27.5

1.5/3.3

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3625



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN54TE M28

-

105

113

2.5

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

-

TN54T HA

-

35.0

40.0

1.5/3.3

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN11T M20

-

30.0

45.0

3.51/7.7 4

3 (left)



IU1IU6, IU11IU16

IU1IU14

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3626



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN13T M20

-

30.0

33.0

3.50/7.7 2

3 (left)



IU1IU6, IU11IU16

IU1IU14

TN11T MX


40.3

44.3

1.4/3.1

1



-

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3627


Board


Modul e Type




42.1

46.4


44.5

51.2


48.4

55.7

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/lb.)







3628



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12T MX


32.4

37.1

1.2/2.7

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16


41.0

45.5


39.0

43.7


31.4

36.1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3629


Board


Modul e Type




31.4

36.1

Weight (kg/lb.)






10Gbit/s Multirat e - 40km 10Gbit/s Multirat e - 80km TN54T OA

-

23.0

25.0

0.7/1.6

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN52T OG

-

41.8

46.0

0.85/1.8 7

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN52T OM

-

81.0

89.1

1.5/3.3

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

IU3IU16

TN55T OX

-

75.3

80.6

1.42/3.1 3

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3630



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN56T OX

-

46.0

51.0

1.1/2.43

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN52T QX

-

91.5

100.0

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN53T QX

-

45.0

50.0

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN55T QX

-

45.0

50.0

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN54TS C

-

65.0

80.0

1.5/3.3

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN53TS XL

-

75.0

83.0

1.4/3.1

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3631



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN54TS XL

-

58

64

1.4/3.1

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN54TT X

-

63

68

1.6/3.5

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN55TT X

-

48

53

1.2/2.6

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

TN12V A1

-

6.5

7.2

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN13V A1

-

6.0

6.6

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN12V A4

-

8.5

9.4

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3632


Board

Modul e Type

TN13V A4




Weight (kg/lb.)






6.4

7.0

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN11W MU

-

12.0

15.0

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU18

IU1IU16

TN12W SD9

-

25.4

28.5

2.7/6.0

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3633



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN16W SD9

-

25

27.5

2.9/6.4

2(left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN17W SD9

-

25.0

27.5

3.2/7.05

2(left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3634



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN13W SD9

-

25.4

28.5

2.9/6.4

3 (left)



IU1IU6, IU11IU16

IU1IU14

TN96W SD9

-

25

27.5

2.9/6.4

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3635



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN12W SM9

-

25.4

28.5

2.7/6.0

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN13W SM9

-

25.4

28.5

2.9/6.4

3 (left)



IU1IU6, IU11IU16

IU1IU14

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3636



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN16W SM9

-

25

27.5

2.9/6.4

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN17W SM9

-

25

27.5

3.2/7.05

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3637



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN96W SM9

-

25

27.5

2.9/6.4

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN11W SMD2

-

17.0

18.7

3.2/7.1

2 (left)



-

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3638



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11W SMD4

-

17.0

18.7

3.2/7.1

2 (left)



-

IU1IU15

TN12W SMD4

-

12.0

15.0

3.2/7.1

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3639



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN13W SMD4

-

25.0

27.5

3.2/7.1

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN17W SMD4

-

17.0

18.7

3.2/7.1

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3640



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN11W SMD9

-

25

30

3.1/6.8

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

TN12W SMD9

-

25

27.5

3.2/7.1

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3641



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






TN15W SMD9

-

25

27.5

3.2/7.1

2 (left)



IU1IU7, IU11IU17

IU1IU15

N4BPA

-

11

12

1.2/2.6

1


IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36

IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

N3EAS 2

-

83

93

1.1/2.4

1

-


IU1IU18

-

N1EGS H

-

82

85

1.2/2.6

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3642



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






N4SF64

-

26

27.3

0.7/1.5

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

N1SF64 A

-

34

35.7

0.9/2.0

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

N4SFD6 4

-

36.4

38.2

1.2/2.6

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

N4SL64

-

14.5

15.2

0.6/1.3

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

N4SLD 64

-

19.3

20.3

1.2/2.6

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

N3SLH 41

-

46.2

48.5

1.0/2.2

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3643



Board

Modul e Type



Weight (kg/lb.)






N4SLO 16

-

20.5

21.5

0.8/1.8

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

N4SLQ 16

-

12.2

12.8

0.7/1.5

1



IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

N4SLQ 64

-

35.4

37.2

1.4/3.1

1

-


IU1IU8, IU11IU18

-

a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. b: The value of Number of Occupied Slots for a board that occupies more than two slots is in the format of "m (left/right/middle n)", where "m" indicates the number of slots occupied by the board, "left/right/middle" indicates the slot position displayed on the NMS, specifying whether a slot is located on the left, right, or middle of the board, and "n" indicates the nth slot (displayed on the NMS) on the left or right of the board (the value 1 can be ignored). For example, the value of Number of Occupied Slots for the TN12LTX board is 4 (left 2), indicating that the TN12LTX board occupies a total of four slots and the slot position displayed on the NMS is the second slot on the left of the board. c: (D)RZ modules include DRZ and RZ optical modules. Both module types have the same optical performance and can connect to modules of both the same type. This table lists all optical modules. Manufacture of some optical modules may be discontinued. A Product Change Notice (PCN) is released when manufacture of an optical module type is discontinued. For details about the availability of an optical module, contact the product manager of the local Huawei office. d: When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases by another 2 W.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3644



Table D-15 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 cross-connect boards Board

Power Consu mption at Room Tempe rature (W)

Power Consum ption at High Temper ature* (W)

Power Consu mption at Warm Backup (Room Temper ature) (W)

Power Consu mption at Warm Backup (High Tempe rature)* (W)

Weight (kg/lb.)

Numbe r of Occupi ed Slots




TNK2S XH +TNK2 XCT

470-3.6 x (64-n)

517-3.6 x (64-n)

130

143

3.74 (7.9) +3.6 (7.9)

1+1

-

-

TNK2S XH : IU10, IU44 TNK2X CT : IU9, IU43

TNK2S XH +TNK4 XCT

318-2.5 x (64-n)

350-2.5 x (64-n)

113

124

3.74 (7.9) +2.9 (6.3)

1+1

-

-


TNK4S XH +TNK2 XCT

321-2.5 x (64-n)

353-2.5 x (64-n)

112

123

2.68 (5.9) +3.6 (7.9)

1+1

-

-


TNK4S XH +TNK4 XCT

169-1.2 x (64-n)

186-1.32 x (64-n)

95

105

2.68 (5.9) +2.9 (6.3)

1+1

-

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3645



Board





Weight (kg/lb.)





TNK2S XM +TNK2 XCT

530-3.6 x (64-n)

583-3.6 x (64-n)

190

210

3.74 (8.1) +3.6 (7.9)

1+1

-

-

TNK2S XM : IU10, IU44 TNK2X CT : IU9, IU43

TNK2S XM +TNK4 XCT

378-2.5 x (64-n)

416-2.5 x (64-n)

173

190

3.74 (8.1) +2.9 (6.3)

1+1

-

-


TNK4S XM +TNK2 XCT

324-2.5 x (64-n)

356-2.5 x (64-n)

114

125

3.0(6.6) +3.6 (7.9)

1+1

-

-


TNK4S XM +TNK4 XCT

188-1.2 x (64-n)

207-1.32 x (64-n)

97

107

3.0(6.6) +2.9 (6.3)

1+1

-

-


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3646



Board





Weight (kg/lb.)





TNK2U SXH +TNK2 UXCT

630-7.4 x (64-n)

693-8.1 x (64-n)

-

-

3.7(8.1) +3.8 (8.4)

1+1

-

-

TNK2U SXH: IU10, IU44 TNK2U XCT: IU9, IU43

TN52U XCH

340 - 7.4 x (32 - n)

374 - 8.1 x (32 - n)

87

96

3.9(8.6)

1

-

IU9, IU10

-

TN16U XCM

178–7.2 x (16–n)

195–7.9 x (16–n)

84–1.7 x (16–n)– 2xm

92–1.8 x (16–n)– 2.2 x m

3.0(6.6)

1

IU9, IU10

-

-

TN52U XCM

372 - 7.4 x (32 - n) -24 x m

409 - 8.1 x (32 - n) -26.4 x m

119

131

4.0(8.8)

1

-

IU9, IU10

-

TN16X CH

73 - 1.4 x (16 - n)

88.8 - 1.4 x (16 - n)

40

48

1.8(4.0)

1

IU9, IU10

-

-

TN52X CH01

243 - 3.6 x (32 - n)

267.3 3.6 x (32 - n)

65

72

3.4(7.5)

1

-

IU9, IU10

-

TN52X CH02

101 1.12 x (32 - n)

111 1.12 x (32 - n)

43

47.3

3.4(7.5)

1

-

IU9, IU10

-

TN52X CM01

339 - 3.6 x (32 - n) -80 x m

368 - 3.6 x (32 - n) -80 x m

125

138

3.8(8.4)

1

-

IU9, IU10

-

TN52X CM02

124 1.12 x (32 - n) -23 x m

136.4 1.12 x (32 - n) -23 x m

67

73.7

3.8(8.4)

1

-

IU9, IU10

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3647


Board






Weight (kg/lb.)





*: The power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works normally under the highest ambient temperature. NOTE "n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack. l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 0. l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, "m" is equal to 1.

D.5.2 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 6800 This chapter describes the power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800 system. The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 system are shown in Table D-16. The values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption of the boards when they normally work. Table D-16 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards Board

Module Type

Typical Power Consumpti on (W)


Weight (kg/ lb.)

Number of Occupied Slotsb

Valid Slots

TN11AUX

-

12.0

17.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU21

TN12AUX

-

9.0

13.0

0.5/1.01

1

IU21

TN52AUX

-

15

20

0.4/0.88

1

IU21

TN11BMD4

-

0.2

0.3

1.2/2.7

1

IU1-IU17

TN11BMD8

-

0.2

0.3

1.5/3.3

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11CMR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU1-IU17

TN11CMR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3648



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11CRPC0 1

-

110.0

121.0

4.0/8.8

-

-

TN11CRPC0 3

-

70.0

77.0

4.2/9.2

-

-

TN11D40

-

10.0

13.0

2.2/4.8

3 (left)

IU1-IU15

TN12D40

-

10.0

13.0

2.0/4.4

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11D40V

-

20

25

2.3/5.1

3 (left)

IU1-IU15

TN11DAS1

-

22

28.6

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11DCP/ TN12DCP

-

6.8

7.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN13DCP

-

7.4

8.1

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11DCU

-

0.2

0.3

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU17

TN11DMR1

-

0.2

0.3

0.7/1.5

1

IU1-IU17

TN11EFI

-

8

8.8

0.3/0.66

1

IU23

TN11ECOM

-

19.6

21.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN12ELQX

-

86.2

99.2

1.7/3.7

1

IU1, IU4, IU5, IU8, IU11, IU14

TN11FIU/ TN12FIU

-

4.2

4.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN13FIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN14FIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN15FIU

-

6.0

6.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN16FIU

-

6.0

6.5

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

TN11SFIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11GFU

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

TN11HBA

-

47.0

75.0

3.0/6.6

3 (middle)

IU2-IU16

TN11HSC1

-

8

8.8

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN12HSC1

-

13

15

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3649



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11ITL

-

0.2

0.3

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN12ITL

-

10

11.5

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN11L4G

3400 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

50.0

55.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


53.0

58.0

12800 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

34.0

37.4

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11LDGD

6500 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nmCWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3650


Board

TN11LDGS


Module Type



12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)

38.0

41.8


32.0

35.2

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3651


Board


Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots


36.0

39.6

TN12LDM

-

22.6

24.8

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11LDMD

-

26.9

29.6

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN11LDMS

-

26.9

29.6

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN12LDX

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths )-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP

44.5

51.2

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU17

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP

45.5

52.2

TN11LEM24

-

81.0

83.0

1.0/2.2

2 (left)

IU1-IU7, IU11-IU15

TN11LEX4

-

64.0

67.0

0.7/1.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3652



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LOA


31.8

36

1.19/2.64

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


32.8

37

10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP

31.8

36

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths) -Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

40.0

45.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

1200 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

43.0

48.0

10Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP TN11LOG

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3653


Board

TN12LOG


Module Type



800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PINc

43.5

48.5

4800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD

55.0

60.5


37.0

41.44


38.0

42.44


41.61

46.6


43.04

48.0

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


3654


Board


Module Type




37.0

41.44


92.7

101.7


92.9

101.9


93.4

102.7


98.2

108.0

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

2.3/5.1

2 (left)

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

10Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP TN11LOM

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3655



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12LOMd


61.8

69.2

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17


62.8

70.2


64.8

72.6


66.7

75.0


28.4

32.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


31.0

34.4

5 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-50 km-eSFP 5 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-70 km-eSFP

23.18

26.0

TN11LQG

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3656



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN13LQM

-

32.6

35.9

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11LQMD


57.1

65.7

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

61.1

67.2

31.1

35.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

6500 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nmC BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nmCWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable) TN12LQMD

-

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3657



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LQMS


56.3

64.5

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


60.4

66.4

-

29.0

32.3

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


TN12LQMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3658



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12LSC

40000 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (HFEC)-PIN

240

265

5/11

4 (left)

IU1-IU14

55000ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC)PIN

255

275

TN17LSCM


93

102

2.5/5.5

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11LSX


47.7

50.1

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU17


47.9

50.9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3659


Board

TN12LSX


Module Type




49.7

52.7


52.7

55.7


30.5

36.6


30.7

36.8


32.5

39


35.5

42.6

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU17


3660



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN13LSX


27.0

30.4

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17


28.0

31.4


29.4

32.8


29.5

33.9

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths) -Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

27.0

30.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN14LSX


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3661



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LSXL


103.0

110.0

5.0/11.0

4 (left)

IU1-IU14


98.0

101.0


74.0

81.0

3.75/8.27

3 (right)

IU3-IU17


84.0

94.0

TN15LSXL

60000 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDMBPSK-PIN

140

155

3.8/8.4

3 (middle)

IU2-IU16

TN11LSXLR


87.0

90.0

3.1/6.8

4 (left)

IU1-IU14


82.0

85.0


75

79

2.5/5.5

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN12LSXL

TN12LSXLR

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3662


Board

TN11LSQ

TN11LSXR


Module Type




67.0

70.0


75

82


82

89


34.8

37.8


35.0

38


36.8

39.8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

2.5/5.5

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17


3663


Board


Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots


39.8

42.8

40000ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (HFEC)-PIN

248

273

5.8/12.8

4 (left 2)

IU2-IU15

235

247


258

283

5.8/12.8

4 (left 2)

IU2-IU15

245

257

40000ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (HFEC)-PIN

248

273

5.8/12.8

4 (left 2)

IU2-IU15

235

247


258

283

5.8/12.8

4 (left 2)

IU2-IU15

245

257

TN11LWX2

-

38.5

42.4

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU17

TN11LWXD

-

35.8

39.4

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS

-

33.9

37.3

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11M40

-

10.0

13.0

2.2/4.8

3 (left)

IU1-IU15

TN12M40

-

10.0

13.0

2.0/4.4

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11M40V

-

20.0

25.0

2.3/5.1

3 (left)

IU1-IU15

TN11LTX (OTU mode) TN11LTX (regeneration mode) TN11LTX (OTU mode) TN11LTX (regeneration mode)

TN12LTX (OTU mode) TN12LTX (regeneration mode) TN12LTX (OTU mode) TN12LTX (regeneration mode)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3664



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12M40V

-

16.0

26.0

2.3/5.1

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11MCA4

-

8.0

8.5

1.9/4.2

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11MCA8

-

12.0

13.0

1.9/4.2

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11MR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

TN11MR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

TN11MR8

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11MR8V

-

7.7

8.6

1.0/2.2

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN12MR8V

-

6.0

6.6

1.0/2.2

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11ND2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

61.1

68.4

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


62.7

70.2


68.4

76.6


62.0

69.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


57.2

64.0

TN12ND2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3665


Board


Module Type




46.0

52.0


TN52ND2T0 2: 67.8

TN52ND2T0 2: 74.6

TN52ND2T0 4: 35

TN52ND2T0 4: 37


70.5

77.5


27

30


25

28

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP TN52ND2

TN53ND2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3666


Board

Module Type




Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

88.0

95.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

88.0

97.0

2.0/4.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

10Gbit/s Multirate 10km 10Gbit/s Multirate 40km TN51NQ2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths )-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP 10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP

TN52NQ2


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3667


Board

Module Type




Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

45

50

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

49

54

10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP TN53NQ2

800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths )-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP 10Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PINXFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3668



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11NS2


38.0

41.8

1.2/2.64

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


39.0

42.9


41.0

45.1


44.0

48.4


38.8

43.4

1.2/2.64

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN12NS2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3669


Board

TN52NS2


Module Type




39.4

44.1


39.7

44.46


42.5

47.6


30.32

34.0


25.35

28.39


TN52NS2T0 2: 53.1 TN52NS2T0 6: 28

TN52NS2T0 2: 56.4 TN52NS2T0 6: 31

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.3/2.86

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


3670


Board

TN53NS2


Module Type




TN52NS2T0 3: 49.1 TN52NS2T0 4: 26

TN52NS2T0 3: 54.0 TN52NS2T0 4: 28

TN52NS2T0 5: 28

TN52NS2T0 5: 31


28

31


20

24


21

25


20

24

92

101.2

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

2.2/4.9

2 (right)

IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

10Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP TN11NS3


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3671


Board

TN52NS3

TN54NS3

TN55NS3


Module Type




67.0

75.0


118.0

130.0


110.0

118.0


118.0

130.0


73.0

80.0


60.0

65.0


62.0

69.0

60000ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDMBPSK-PIN

135

150

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

2.4/5.3

2 (right)

IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

1.8/3.96

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

2.6/5.73

2 (right)

IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16


3672



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11OAU10 1

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN11OAU10 2

-

14.0

18.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN11OAU10 3

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN11OAU10 5

-

22.0

29.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN12OAU10 0

-

11.0

14.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN12OAU10 1

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN12OAU10 2

-

10.0

13.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN12OAU10 3

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN12OAU10 5

-

15.0

21.0

1.8/4.0

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN13OAU10 1

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OAU10 3

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OAU10 5

-

15.0

21.0

1.6/3.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OAU10 6

-

12

15

1.6/3.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OAU10 7

-

15.0

21.0

1.6/3.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OBU10 1

-

11.0

13.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OBU10 3

-

13.0

15.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OBU10 4

-

12.0

14.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU1-IU17

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3673



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12OBU10 1

-

10.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN12OBU10 3

-

11.0

12.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN12OBU10 4

-

10.0

12.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN12OBU1P 1

-

10.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OBU10 1

-

8.5

10

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OBU10 3

-

9.0

11

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OBU10 4

-

8.0

9.5

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OBU10 5

-

12.5

15.5

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OBU1P 3

-

9.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OBU20 5

-

17.0

24.0

1.9/4.2

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN12OBU20 5

-

14.0

19.0

1.6/3.5

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN13OBU2P 3/ TN14OBU2P 3

-

9.0

11.0

1.9/4.2

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN96OBU10 3

-

9.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OLP

-

6.0

6.6

0.9/2.0

1

IU1-IU17

TN12OLP

-

4.0

4.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OLP03

-

7.0

7.7

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN13OLP04

-

6.9

7.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11OPM8

-

12.0

15.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3674



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12OPM8

-

12.0

15.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17

TN11PIU

-

24.0

38.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU19, IU20

TN12PTQX

-

93.4

107.6

3/6.6

2 (right)

IU3, IU7, IU13

TN11QCP

-

6.2

6.8

2/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11RAU1

-

55

70

2.5/5.51

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN12RAU1

-

35

52

1.75/3.85

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN11RAU2

-

55

70

2.58/5.69

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN12RAU2

-

35

52

1.75/3.85

2 (right)

IU2-IU17

TN11RDU9

-

6

6.6

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN12RDU9

-

6.2

6.8

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11RMU9 01

-

7.7

8.6

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11RMU9 02

-

8.2

9.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU17

TN11ROAM

-

66.0

72.6

3.2/7.0

3 (left)

IU1-IU15

TN11SBM2

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU1-IU17

TN11SC1/ TN12SC1

-

11.0

14.9

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11SC2/ TN12SC2

-

13.5

14.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11ST2

-

17.5

19.5

0.95/2.09

1

IU1-IU8, IU11–IU16

TN12ST2

-

15.0

16.5

1.1/2.4

1


TN13ST2

-

14.4

16.0

1.0/2.2

1


TN11SCC

-

27.0

30.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU17, IU18

TN51SCC

-

18.0

20.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU17, IU18

TN52SCC

-

23.0

25.1

1.0/2.2

1

IU17, IU18

TN11SCS

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU1-IU17

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3675



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11STG

-

8.7

9.57

1.1/2.4

1

IU15, IU16

TN12STG

-

8.7

9.57

1.1/2.4

1

IU15, IU16

TN11TBE

-

40.7

44.8

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN12TD20

-

13.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11TDC

-

13.0

15.0

1.14/2.51

1

IU1-IU17

TN11TDG

-

30.0

33.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TDX

-

78.0

80.0

1.3/2.8

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN12TDX

-

37.4

40.7

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN52TDX

-

57.3

63.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN53TDX

-

25

35.0

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TM20

-

30.0

45.0

3.51/7.74

3 (left)

IU1-IU15

TN13TM20

-

30.0

33.0

3.50/7.72

3 (left)

IU1-IU15

TN11TMX


40.3

44.3

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU17

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3676


Board

TN12TMX


Module Type




42.1

46.4


44.5

51.2


48.4

55.7


31.4

36.1


32.4

37.1


41.0

45.5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU17


3677


Board


Module Type




39.0

43.7


31.4

36.1

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

10Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP TN52TOG

-

41.8

46.0

0.85/1.87

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TOM

-

55.0

60.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN52TOM

-

81

89.1

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TQM

-

50.3

57.6

1.2/2.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN12TQM

-

25.0

27.5

1.1/2.4

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TQS

-

43.0

47.3

1.2/.6

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TQX

-

65.0

71.2

1.5/3.3

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN52TQX

-

91.5

100.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN55TQX

-

45.0

50.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TN11TSXL

-

90.2

96.0

2.5/5.5

2 (right)

IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

TN11VA1/ TN12VA1

-

6.5

7.2

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3678



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN13VA1

-

6.0

6.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11VA4/ TN12VA4

-

8.5

9.4

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN13VA4

-

6.4

7.0

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11WMU

-

12.0

15.0

1.0/2.2

1

IU1-IU17

TN11WSD9

-

17.0

18.7

2.2/4.9

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN12WSD9

-

25.4

28.5

2.7/5.94

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN13WSD9

-

25.4

28.5

2.9/6.38

3 (left)

IU1-IU15

TN16WSD9

-

25

27.5

2.9/6.38

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN17WSD9

-

25

27.5

3.2/7.05

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN96WSD9

-

25

27.5

2.9/6.38

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11WSM9

-

17.0

18.7

2.2/4.84

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN12WSM9

-

25.4

28.5

2.7/5.94

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN13WSM9

-

25.4

28.5

2.9/6.38

3 (left)

IU1-IU15

TN16WSM9

-

25

27.5

2.9/6.38

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN17WSM9

-

25

27.5

3.2/7.05

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN96WSM9

-

25

27.5

2.9/6.38

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11WSMD 2

-

17.0

18.7

3.2/7.1

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11WSMD 4

-

17.0

18.7

3.2/7.1

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN12WSMD 4

-

12.0

15.0

3.2/7.1

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN13WSMD 4

-

25

27.5

3.2/7.1

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN17WSMD 4

-

17

18.7

3.2/7.1

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11WSMD 9

-

25

30

3.1/6.8

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN12WSMD 9

-

25

27.5

3.2/7.1

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3679



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN15WSMD 9

-

25

27.5

3.2/7.1

2 (left)

IU1-IU16

TN11XCS

-

20.0

22.0

1.0/2.2

1

IU9, IU10

TN12XCS

-

25.0

27.5

1.2/2.6

1

IU9, IU10


D.5.3 Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards in the OptiX OSN 3800 This chapter describes the power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 3800 system. The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 system are shown in Table D-17. The values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption of the boards when they normally work. Table D-17 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 3800 boards Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11DAS1

-

22

28.6

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5

TN11ECOM

-

19.6

21.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3680



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11HSC1

-

8

8.8

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN12HSC1

-

13

15

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN11L4G


50.0

55.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5


53.0

58.0


32.0

35.2

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5

TN11LDGS


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3681


Board

TN11LDGD


Module Type




36.0

39.6


34.0

37.4

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3682


Board


Module Type




38.0

41.8

TN12LDM

-

22.6

TN11LDMD

-

TN11LDMS TN12LDX

TN11LOA

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

24.8

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

26.9

29.6

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

-

26.9

29.6

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5, IU11


44.5

51.2

1.6/3.5

1

IU2-IU5, IU11


45.5

52.2


31.8

36

1.19/2.64

1

IU2-IU5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3683


Board


Module Type




32.8

37

10Gbit/s Multirate 10km-XFP

31.8

36


40.0

45.0


43.0

48.0

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PINc

43.5

48.5

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.6/3.5

1

IU2-IU5

10Gbit/s Multirate 40km-XFP TN11LOG

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3684


Board

TN12LOG


Module Type




55.0

60.5


37.0

41.44


38.0

42.44


41.61

46.6


43.04

48

10Gbit/s Multirate 10km-XFP

37.0

41.44

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5

10Gbit/s Multirate 40km-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate 80km-XFP

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3685



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LOM


92.7

101.7

2.3/5.1

2 (bottom)

IU3-IU5


92.9

101.9


93.4

102.7


98.2

108.0


61.8

69.2

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN12LOMd

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3686


Board

TN11LQG

TN13LQM


Module Type




62.8

70.2


64.8

72.6


66.7

75.0


28.4

32.0


31.0

34.4

5 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-50 km-eSFP 5 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-70 km-eSFP

23.18

26.0

-

32.6

35.9

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.3/2.9

1

IU2-IU5

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5


3687



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LQMS


56.3

64.5

1.3/2.9

1

IU2-IU5


60.4

66.4

-

29.0

33.3

1.3/2.9

1

IU2-IU5


TN12LQMS

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3688



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LQMD


57.1

65.7

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5


61.1

67.2

-

31.1

34.3

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5


TN12LQMD

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3689



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN12LSC


240

265

4.5/9.9

4 (bottom)

IU4-IU5

55000 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (SDFEC)PIN

255

285


150

160

3/6.61

2 (bottom)

IU2-IU5


160

170

TN15LSC

40000 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthePDM-QPSK (HFEC)

145.2

158.5

3.1/6.83

2 (bottom)

IU2-IU5

TN17LSCM


93

102

2.5/5.5

2 (bottom)

IU2-IU5

TN13LSC

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3690



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LSX


47.7

50.1

1.4/3.1

1

IU11, IU2IU5


47.9

50.9


49.7

52.7


52.7

55.7


30.5

36.6

1.4/3.1

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12LSX

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3691


Board

TN13LSX


Module Type




30.7

36.8


32.5

39


35.5

42.6


27.0

30.4


28.0

31.4


29.4

32.8

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5


3692


Board

TN14LSX


Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots


29.5

33.9

800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths) -Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

27.0

30.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5, IU11


34.8

37.8

1.2/2.6

1

IU11, IU2IU5


35.0

38

800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN TN11LSXR

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3693


Board


Module Type




36.8

39.8


39.8

42.8


248

273


270

300


248

273


270

300

TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS

-

33.9

TN11LWXD

-

35.8

TN11LTX

TN12LTX

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

5.8/12.8

4 (bottom 2)

IU3, IU4

5.8/12.8

4 (bottom 2)

IU3, IU4

37.3

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

39.4

1.2/2.6

1

IU11, IU2IU5


3694



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11LWX2

-

38.5

42.4

1.3/2.9

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11TMX


40.3

44.3

1.4/3.1

1

IU11, IU2IU5


42.1

46.4


44.5

51.2


48.4

55.7


31.4

36.1

1.2/2.6

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12TMX

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3695


Board


Module Type




32.4

37.1


41.0

45.5


39.0

43.7


31.4

36.1

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

10Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP 10Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP TN21DFIU

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN21FIU

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13FIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN14FIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN15FIU

-

6.0

6.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN16FIU

-

6.0

6.5

0.9/2.0

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3696



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11SFIU

-

0.2

0.3

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN11MR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN21MR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN11MR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU2-IU5

TN21MR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN21CMR1

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN11CMR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN21CMR2

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN11CMR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.9/2.0

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN21CMR4

-

0.2

0.3

0.5/1.1

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN11DMR1

-

0.2

0.3

0.7/1.5

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN21DMR1

-

0.2

0.3

0.7/1.5

1

IU1, IU11, IU8

TN11SBM2

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11TBE

-

40.7

44.8

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5

TN11TDG

-

30

33

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5

TN11TDX

-

78

80

1.3/2.9

1

IU2-IU5

TN52TOG

-

41.8

46.0

0.85/1.87

1

IU2-IU5

TN11TOM

-

55.0

60.0

1.4/3.1

1

IU2-IU5

TN52TOM

-

81

89.1

1.5/3.3

1

IU2-IU5

TN11TQS

-

43.0

47.3

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3697



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11TQM

-

50.3

57.6

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5

TN12TQM

-

25.0

27.5

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5

TN11NS2


38.0

41.8

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5


39.0

42.9


41.0

45.1


44.0

48.4


38.8

43.4

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5

TN12NS2

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3698


Board

TN52NS2


Module Type




39.4

44.1


39.7

44.46


42.5

47.6


30.32

34.0


25.35

28.39

800ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

TN52NS2T0 2: 51.3 TN52NS2T0 6: 28

TN52NS2T0 2: 56.4 TN52NS2T0 6: 31

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.3/2.86

1

IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16


3699


Board

TN53NS2


Module Type



800ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength(D)RZ-PIN

TN52NS2T0 3: 49.1 TN52NS2T0 4: 26

TN52NS2T0 3: 54.0 TN52NS2T0 4: 28

TN52NS2T0 5: 28

TN52NS2T0 5: 31

800ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths )-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN

28

31


20

24


21

25


20

24

Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5

10Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP TN11OAU10 1

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN11OAU10 2

-

14.0

18.0

1.8/4.0

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN11OAU10 3

-

18.0

24.0

1.8/4.0

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3700



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11OAU10 5

-

22.0

29.0

1.8/4.0

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OAU10 0

-

11.0

14.0

1.8/4.0

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OAU10 1

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OAU10 2

-

10.0

13.0

1.8/4.0

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OAU10 3

-

12.0

15.0

1.8/4.0

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OAU10 5

-

15.0

21.0

1.8/4.0

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN13OAU10 1

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OAU10 3

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OAU10 5

-

15.0

21.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OAU10 6

-

12.0

15.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OAU10 7

-

15.0

21.0

1.6/3.5

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OBU10 1

-

11.0

13.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OBU10 3

-

13.0

15.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OBU10 4

-

12.0

14.0

1.3/2.9

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12OBU10 1

-

10.0

11.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12OBU10 3

-

11.0

12.1

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12OBU10 4

-

10.0

12.0

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3701



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN13OBU10 1

-

8.5

10

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OBU10 3

-

9.0

11

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OBU10 4

-

8.0

9.5

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OBU10 5

-

12.5

15.5

1.1/2.4

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OBU20 5

-

17.0

24.0

1.9/4.2

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12OBU20 5

-

14.0

19.0

1.6/3.5

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN11QCP

-

6.2

6.8

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11RAU1

-

55

70

2.5/5.51

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12RAU1

-

35

52

1.75/3.85

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN11RAU2

-

55

70

2.58/5.68

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN12RAU2

-

35

52

1.75/3.85

2 (upper )

IU11, IU2IU4

TN11SC1/ TN12SC1

-

11.0

14.9

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11SC2/ TN12SC2

-

13.5

14.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11ST2

-

17.5

19.5

0.95/2.09

1

IU2-IU5

TN12ST2

-

15.0

16.5

1.1/2.4

1

IU2-IU5

TN13ST2

-

14.4

16.0

1.0/2.2

1

IU2-IU5

TN22SCC

-

10.0

13.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU8, IU9

TN23SCC

-

10.0

13.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU8, IU9

TN21AUX

-

11.7

13.0

0.6/1.3

1

IU10

TN22AUX

-

15.0

17.0

0.5/1.1

1

IU10

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3702



Board

Module Type



Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots

TN11DCP/ TN12DCP

-

6.8

7.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13DCP

-

7.4

8.1

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OLP

-

6.0

6.6

0.9/2.0

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN12OLP

-

4.0

4.5

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OLP03

-

7.0

7.7

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13OLP04

-

6.9

7.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11OPM8

-

12.0

15.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN12OPM8

-

12.0

15.0

1.2/2.6

1

IU2-IU5, IU11

TN11SCS

-

0.2

0.3

0.8/1.8

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11VA1/ TN12VA1

-

6.5

7.2

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13VA1

-

6.0

6.6

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11VA4/ TN12VA4

-

8.5

9.4

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN13VA4

-

6.4

7.0

1.0/2.2

1

IU11, IU2IU5

TN11MCA4

-

8.0

8.5

1.9/4.2

2 (bottom)

IU2-IU5

TN11MCA8

-

12.0

13.0

1.9/4.2

2 (bottom)

IU2-IU5

TN21PIU

-

10

12

0.45/1.0

1

IU6, IU7

TN21APIU

-

50

55

0.8/1.8

1.5

IU6, IU7, IU8

TN11DCU

-

0.2

0.3

1.5/3.3

1

IU11, IU2IU5

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3703


Board

Module Type




Weight (kg/ lb.)


Valid Slots


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3704


E Parameter Reference

E

Parameter Reference

E.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode E.2 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold E.3 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression E.4 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes) E.5 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) E.6 Laser Status (WDM Interface) E.7 Line Rate E.8 Maximum Frame Length E.9 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) E.10 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode E.11 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) E.12 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) E.13 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) E.14 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) E.15 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3705



E.1 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Description Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in auto-negotiation mode.

Impact on the System Auto-negotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.

Values Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24

l Disabled

Disabled

TN11LEX4

l Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control l Enable Symmetric Flow Control l Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow

The following table lists the description of each value. Value

Description

Disabled

Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive ends. (None)

Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control

Enables dissymmetric flow control. (Asymmetric > Link Partner)

Enable Symmetric Flow Control

Enables symmetric flow control. (Symmetric)

Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow

Enables either symmetric or dissymmetric flow control, which is determined in the autonegotiation process. (Asymmetric->Local Device)

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter properly based on actual service configurations.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3706



Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Autonegotiation mode.

E.2 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold Description The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded.

Impact on the System After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the flow of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Values Value Range

Default Value

10%-100%

30%

Configuration Guidelines

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Value

Description

10%

Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 10% of the bandwidth of a port.

20%


30%


40%


50%



3707



Value

Description

60%


70%


80%


90%


100%


Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to Enabled.

E.3 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression Description The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets.

Impact on the System After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Disabled, Enabled

Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3708



Value

Description

Enabled

Indicates that the traffic of broadcast packets is not limited.

Disabled

Indicates that excess broadcast packets will be discarded if the traffic of broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold.

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter only when you need to limit the traffic of broadcast services.

Relationship with Other Parameters Suppression of broadcast packets is implemented only when this parameter is set to Enabled.

E.4 Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes) Description The Zero-Flow Monitor parameter specifies whether the traffic on a port is monitored.

Impact on the System After the zero traffic monitoring function is enabled, the port can report the zero traffic alarm after the state of zero traffic lasts for a certain period. Hence, the user can check whether the service is interrupted due to the fault on the equipment side.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Enabled, Disabled

Disabled

The following table provides the description of each value.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Value

Description

Enabled

The zero traffic monitoring function is enabled on the port.

Disabled

The zero traffic monitoring function is disabled on the port.


3709



Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user. Set this parameter to Enabled if the traffic on a port needs to be monitored.

E.5 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) Description The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary and secondary input optical interfaces of a board. The value can be set.

Impact on the System During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between the primary and secondary input power reaches the SF switching threshold, SF switching occurs. The initial variance value is an important factor in calculating the optical power variance and affects the service switching.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Unit

-10.0 to 10.0

0

dB

Configuration Guidelines After the optical power of the system is commissioned and is normal, set this parameter according to the primary and secondary input optical power and the following formula: Initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power = Initial input optical power of the primary optical interface - Initial input optical power of the secondary optical interface

Relationship with Other Parameters l

The setting of the initial variance affects the calculation of the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power. The formula for calculating the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power is as follows:

l

Variance between current primary and secondary input optical power = current input power of the primary optical interface - current input power of the secondary optical interface initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power If the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power exceeds the value of the Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter, the protection switching occurs.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3710



E.6 Laser Status (WDM Interface) Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board.

Impact on the System This parameter directly determines whether the corresponding optical interface outputs optical signals. If this parameter is set to Off, services are interrupted.

Values For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range

Default Value

On, Off

For OTU boards: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off For amplifier board: On


Description

On

Indicates enabling the laser.

Off

Indicates disabling the laser.

Configuration Guidelines l

Optical wavelength conversion unit – The normal service requires that the lasers on both WDM side and client side should be opened. When installing and commissioning OTUs, you must set the Laser Status parameter to Off to protect the downstream boards. – In the case of the OTUs configured with intra-board 1 + 1 optical channel protection or client-side 1 + 1 protection, whether to enable or disable the laser on the board client side is controlled by the NE software automatically. No manual setting is required.

l

Optical amplifier board – In the case of the Raman board, you can set optical interface parameters only when the laser is disabled.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3711



NOTE

After the commissioning, you must set the Laser Status parameter to On. NOTE

In the case of the inter-board 1+1 protection and client-side protection realized by the SCS board, the lasers on the active and standby OTUs on the client side are open and closed respectively in the case of normal operation. You must not enable the disabled laser manually. Otherwise, services will be interrupted. NOTE

The parameter value of Laser Status is not restored automatically by the U2000. That is, after the board is replaced, the parameter value is set to the default value.

Relationship with Other Parameters To forcibly enable the laser on the U2000 during commissioning, you need to set the Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter to Disabled.

E.7 Line Rate Description The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate.

Impact on the System If the values of the Line Rate parameter for the transmit and receive boards are different, services are unavailable.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Standard Mode, Speedup Mode, Speedup Mode 11.3G

Vary with different boards


Description

Speedup Mode

Corresponds to OTU2e or OTU3e for the WDM side.

Speedup Mode 11.3G

Corresponds to OTU2e for the WDM side. Set Line Rate for a board on the line to Speedup Mode 11.3G when the following conditions are satisfied. l An OTU or a tributary board on the line transmits/ receives FC-1200 services on the client side. l Line Rate for another board on the line is set to Speedup Mode 11.3G.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3712



Value

Description

Standard Mode

Corresponds to OTU2 or OTU3 for the WDM side.


This parameter should be set according to the actual service mapping mode and the optical signal rate on the network.

l

When the WDM-side signal is OTU2e or OTU3e, or when the client-side signal is 10GE LAN and Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) for the client-side port, set this parameter to Speedup Mode. In any other cases, set this parameter to Standard Mode.

l

This parameter must be set to the same value at the transmit and receive ends.

l

The values of the Line Rate parameter for the upstream and downstream boards must be the same.

l

For a regeneration board or a line board in regeneration mode, you are advised to set Enable Auto-Sensing to Enabled. In this case, the system supports the FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required.

Configuration examples: l

Example 1: As shown in Figure E-1, the 52ND2 works as a regeneration board. – When the 12LSX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode. – When the 12LSX transmits/receives FC1200 services on the client side. In this case, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode 11.3G. – In other cases, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode. Figure E-1 Example 1 M U X

D M U X

D M U X

M U X

12LSX

l

M U X

D M U X

D M U X

M U X

52ND2

12LSX

Example 2: As shown in Figure E-2, the 52ND2(1) and 52ND2(3) work as line boards, and the 52ND2 (2) works as a regeneration board. – When the 52TDX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3713



– In other cases, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode. Figure E-2 Example 2

52ND2 (1)

52TDX

l

M U X

D M U X

D M U X

M U X

52ND2 (2)

M U X

D M U X

D M U X

M U X

52ND2 (3)

52TDX

Example 3: As shown in Figure E-3, the 54NS3(1) and 54NS3(3) work as line boards, and the 54NS3 (2) works as a regeneration board. – When the 52TQX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Speedup Mode. – In other cases, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Standard Mode. Figure E-3 Example 3

52TQX

54NS3 (1)

M U X

D M U X

D M U X

M U X

54NS3 (2)

M U X

D M U X

D M U X

M U X

54NS3 (3)

52TQX

Relationship with Other Parameters l

For LSXLR and LSXR: This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled.

l

For a line board in regeneration mode: This parameter can be set only when Board Mode is set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode and Enable AutoSensing is set to Disabled.

E.8 Maximum Frame Length Description Maximum Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port (MFL).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3714



Impact on the System This parameter specifies the maximum length of a frame traversing a port. When the length of a frame exceeds the specified maximum frame length, the frame will be discarded or the service will be interrupted.

Values Board Name

Value Range

Default Value

Unit

TN11LEM24

1518-9600

1522

Byte

TN11LEX4

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter based on the actual service configurations. It is recommended to set this parameter to a value that is equal to or greater than the maximum length of a frame that users want to transmit.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the Enabled/Disabled parameter is set to Enabled.

E.9 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) Description The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power.

Impact on the System Modifying this parameter directly affects the output power of all wavelengths passing through the amplifier board.

Values l

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800


3715



Value Range

Default Value

HBA: 29dB

The specific value is related to the module.

OAU101: 20dB to 31dB, continuously tunable OAU102: 20dB to 31dB, continuously tunable OAU103: 24dB to 36dB, continuously tunable OAU105: 23dB to 34dB, continuously tunable OBU101: 20dB OBU103: 23dB OBU104: 17dB OBU205: 23dB


Huawei provides many types of OAU boards. The different gain ranges of an OAU board of the same type are applicable to different application scenarios. For example, the gain range of the OAU101/02 is 20 dB to 31 dB. The gain range from 20 dB to 26 dB is applicable to the application scenarios with the dispersion compensation module (DCM). The gain range from 26 dB to 31 dB is applicable to the application scenarios without the DCM.

l

The gain range of the OAU103 is 24 dB to 36 dB and is mainly used in long-span links. The gain range from 24 dB to 30 dB is used when the DCM is accessed. The gain range from 31 dB to 36 dB is not recommended when the DCM is accessed.

l

Nominal gain of a board = Maximum gain of a board - Insertion loss between the TDC and RDC. The range of the nominal gain is related to the input optical power.

l

If the intermediate insertion loss exceeds the maximum intermediate insertion loss of a board, the board gain may not reach the nominal gain. In this case, the board locks the gain according to the intermediate insertion loss.

Relationship with Other Parameters The gain queried on the U2000 namely, the actually amplified signal optical power by the optical amplifier board, or the actual gain measured through a meter may be different from the configured nominal gain, because it is affected by device performance. This is because the optical amplifier board actually locks the per-channel power instead of the total power. Noises are generated when the power is amplified by the EDFA and the noise power is at a certain level. In the case of high input power, the impact from the noise is small and the gain of the total power is close to the per-channel gain. In the case of low input power, however, the impact from the noise cannot be neglected. The total output power equals the sum of the signal optical power and the noise power. The noise power and signal optical power can be assimilated because of an increase in total gain. This is normal. In the case of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, you can obtain the value range of the Nominal Gain parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Upper Nominal Gain Threshold (dB) and Lower Nominal Gain Threshold (dB) parameters. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3716



E.10 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Description Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in nonautonegotiation mode.

Impact on the System Non-autonegotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.

Values Board

Value Range

Default Value

TN11LEM24


Disable

TN11LEX4


Description

Disabled

Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive ends.

Enable Symmetric Flow Control

Enables symmetric flow control frames (allows transmission and receiving) in non-autonegotiation mode.

Send Only

Enables only transmission of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.

Receive Only

Enables only receiving of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.

Configuration Guidelines Set this parameter properly according to actual service configurations.

Relationship with Other Parameters This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Nonautonegotiation mode.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3717



E.11 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) Description The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.

Impact on the System The configured logical band must be consistent with the actual physical band. Otherwise, a WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.

Values Value Range

Default Value

C, CWDM

-


Description

C

Indicates that the current working band is C band.

CWDM

Indicates that the current working band is CWDM band.

Configuration Guidelines None.

Relationship with Other Parameters None.

E.12 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) Description The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.

Impact on the System If the wavelength is incorrectly set, the downstream services may not be normally received. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3718



Values C band Value Range

Default Value

Unit

192.10 to 1196.05 (wavelength spacing: 50 GHz)

-

THz

Value Range

Default Value

Unit

1271 to 1611(wavelength spacing: 20 nm)

-

nm

CWDM band


In the case of the OTUs with a fixed wavelength, set the actual wavelength of the wavelength conversion board.

l

In the case of the OTUs with a variable wavelength, set the wavelength according to network wavelength planning.

l

The same wavelength must be used for a service in the receive and the transmit directions.

l

If a service travels through multiple regeneration stations, it is recommended that these regeneration sections use the same wavelength.

l

It is recommended that the active and standby channels use the same wavelength when the inter-board channel protection or client-side path protection is configured.

l

The configured logical wavelength must be consistent with the actual physical wavelength. Otherwise, a WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.

l

In the case of the optical tunable transponders, this parameter directly changes the physical wavelength but cannot change the band.

l

In the case of the optical untunable transponders, this parameter can change the logical wavelength only.

l

For the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800: Table E-1 lists the wavelengths available for the CWDM system. Table E-1 Nominal central wavelengths of the CWDM system

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

Wavelengt h No.

Wavelength (nm)

Wavelength No.

Wavelength (nm)

11

1471

15

1551

12

1491

16

1571


3719



Wavelengt h No.

Wavelength (nm)

Wavelength No.

Wavelength (nm)

13

1511

17

1591

14

1531

18

1611


E.13 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) Description The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service.

Impact on the System None.

Values Value

Description

Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)

10GE LAN client signals are mapped into OTU2e signals by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This mapping method guarantees a desired FEC coding gain and correction capability. However, this method generates a line rate of 11.1 Gbit/s, which is higher than the standard rate of OTU2 signals.

MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)

10GE LAN client signals are encapsulated using the GFP-F method and are mapped into OTU2 signals using 10GE MAC frames. This mapping method guarantees a desired FEC coding gain and correction capability and generates a line rate of 10.71 Gbit/s.

Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)

10GE LAN client signals are mapped into OTU2 signals using certain FEC fields of standard OTU frames. In this mapping method, some FEC fields are used to transmit signals. Therefore, the FEC or AFEC coding gain of the signals and FEC correction capability are somewhat reduced. This method generates a line rate of 10.71 Gbit/s.

Configuration Guidelines For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3720



l

Services other than 10GE LAN do not require configuring the port mapping mode.

l

"Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" and "Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" meet customer requirement for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN signals. If a 10GE LAN signal is directly mapped into an OTU frame by means of bit transparent mapping, the 10GE LAN signal will overflow the OTU frame. Thus, to solve this problem, certain AFEC fields are occupied by the 10GE LAN signal. This is why the AFEC encoding gain is low and AFEC correction capability is comparatively poor for the signals in the AFEC field. In the "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" mode, transmission of signals are achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this mode, however, the bit rate is higher than the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.

l

"MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G)" is specific to transparent transmission of 10GE MAC frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE LAN signal is encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard OTU frame. This mode supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the signals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for 10G SDH services.

l

The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.

Relationship with Other Parameters For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 l

Relationship with the Line Rate parameter: – Set the parameter to Standard Mode when the value of this parameter is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). – Set the Line Rate parameter to Speedup Mode when the value of this parameter is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G).

l

Relationship with the FEC Mode parameter: – When the parameter value is changed from MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode automatically changes to AFEC. NOTE

Users can also manually set the FEC Mode parameter based on the actual network requirements.

– When the parameter value is changed from Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode remains unchanged.

E.14 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of a board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board. Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3721



Impact on the System After this parameter is set, set SD Trigger Condition of the protection group in which the board resides to Enabled. When the board receives alarms such as B1_SD, the system regards the received alarms of the board as the switching trigger condition of the protection group. As a result, switching occurs in the protection group.

Values For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range

Default Value

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, None

None

The following table lists the description of each value. Parameter Value

Remarks

B1_SD

Regeneration section (B1) signal degrade.

OTUk_DEG

OTUk signal degrade.

ODUk_PM_DEG

ODUk_PM signal degrade.

None

No condition is configured for SD switching.

Configuration Guidelines When SD switching is used against a small number of bit errors, the switching is rapidly performed. Select the proper alarms as the switching trigger conditions depending on the service status. The alarms, which can be selected as switching trigger conditions, at certain optical interfaces and channels of a board vary with the board type. If one optical interface supports various services, all the three alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. When the service type is changed, the board automatically counts the corresponding bit errors and reports an SD alarm according to the actual service type.


E.15 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) Description The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3722



secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal fail (SF) occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value can be queried. The value can be set or queried.

Impact on the System l

In the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800, this parameter functions as the SF switching threshold reference value for optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection.

l

During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between primary and secondary input power reaches the SF switching threshold, the SF switching occurs. This parameter is used to ensure the service quality and enable services to work in the channels with better signals.

l

If the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the value of this parameter, the POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm is generated. After the threshold is modified, the corresponding alarm threshold also changes.

Values Value Range

Default Value

Unit

0, 3.0 - 8.0

5

dB


When the parameter value is 0, only LOS alarms are used as switching trigger conditions. The input power difference between the working and protection channels does not trigger a switching event.

l

It is recommended to set the threshold to 5 dB.

l

In special cases, the threshold can be adjusted according to the actual situation.

l

When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power reaches 5 dB, you can properly increase the threshold if the services in the channel with lower optical power are still normal. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power is far lower than 5 dB, you need to decrease the threshold properly if SF occurs.


Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3723


F Glossary

F

Glossary

Numerics 3G

See 3rd Generation.

3R

reshaping, retiming, regenerating

3rd Generation (3G)

The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.

802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ)

A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame. The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private VLANs.

A A/D

analog/digit

AA

authentication authorization

AAA

See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.

AC

alternating current

ACH

associated channel header

ACK

See acknowledgement.

ACL

See access control list.

ACR

allowed cell rate

ACS

See Application Control Server.

ADC

analog to digital converter

ADM

add/drop multiplexer

ADSL

See asymmetric digital subscriber line.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3724


F Glossary

AF

See assured forwarding.

AG

See Access Gateway.

AGC

automatic gain control

AH

See Authentication Header.

AIN

advanced intelligent network

AIS

alarm indication signal

AK

See access key ID.

ALC

See automatic level control.

ALC link

A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfills optical power control on the line that contains the link.

ALS

See automatic laser shutdown.

APD

See avalanche photodiode.

APE

See automatic power equilibrium.

API

See application programming interface.

APID

access point identifier

APS

automatic protection switching

APS 1+1 protection

A protection architecture that comprises one protection facility and one working facility and performs switchover by using the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) protocol. Normally, signals are sent only over the working facility. If an APS switchover event is detected by the working facility, services are switched over to the protection facility.

ARP

See Address Resolution Protocol.

AS

See autonomous system.

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASE

amplified spontaneous emission

ASIC

See application-specific integrated circuit.

ATAE

See Advanced Telecommunications Application Environment.

ATM

asynchronous transfer mode

AU

adaptation unit

AUG

See administrative unit group.

AWG

arrayed waveguide grating

Access Gateway (AG)

A type of gateway that provides a user-network interface (UNI) such as ISDN. An access gateway is located at the edge access layer of the NGN structure, and provides various methods for connecting users to the NGN.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3725


F Glossary

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)

An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.

Advanced Telecommunications Application Environment (ATAE)

A carrier-class processing platform that is designed to meet the service application requirement of high performance, high specialization, and high integration.

Application Control Server (ACS)

A subsystem of the Media Entertainment Middleware (MEM), used for providing a service control interface for the Electronic Program Guide (EPG) server.

Authentication Header A protocol that provides connectionless integrity, data origin authentication, and anti(AH) replay protection for IP data. Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA)

A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the consumption of network services by users.

access control list (ACL)

A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a resource.

access key ID (AK)

An ID that confirms the identity of a user accessing the object-based storage system. One access key ID belongs to only one user, but one user can have multiple access key IDs. The object-based storage system recognizes the users accessing the system by their access key IDs.

acknowledgement (ACK)

A response sent by a receiver to indicate reception of information. Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level, including the physical level (using voltage on one or more wires to coordinate a transfer), link level (indicating transmission across a single hardware link), or higher levels.

administrative unit group (AUG)

One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s.

aging time

The time to live before an object becomes invalid.

alarm cascading

The method of cascading alarm signals from several subracks or cabinets.

alarm indication

A mechanism to indicate the alarm status of equipment. On the cabinet of an NE, four differently-colored indicators specify the current status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm has been generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm has been generated. When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm has been generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.

application An application programming interface is a particular set of rules and specifications that programming interface are used for communication between software programs. (API) application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function. By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for many needs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3726


assured forwarding (AF)

F Glossary

One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.

asymmetric digital A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone subscriber line (ADSL) lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice) information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from 512 kbit/s to about 6 Mbit/s. automatic laser shutdown (ALS)

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.

automatic level control A function that keeps output power of components in a system essentially constant, even (ALC) when line attenuation in a section of the system increases. automatic power equilibrium (APE)

A function to automatically equalize channel optical power at the transmitter end, ensuring a required optical power flatness and OSNR at the receiver end.

autonomous system (AS)

A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technology administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer ranging from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas.

avalanche photodiode (APD)

A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics.

B B/S

browser/server

BA

booster amplifier

BBC

See battery backup cabinet.

BBER

background block error ratio

BC

boundary clock

BDI

See backward defect indication.

BE

See best effort.

BEI

backward error indication

BER

bit error rate

BFD

See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.

BGP

Border Gateway Protocol

BIAE

backward incoming alignment error

BIOS

See basic input/output system.

BIP-8

See bit interleaved parity-8.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3727


F Glossary

BITS

See building integrated timing supply.

BMC

best master clock

BOM

bill of materials

BPDU

See bridge protocol data unit.

BPS

board protection switching

BPSK

See binary phase shift keying.

BRA

See basic rate access.

BRAS

See broadband remote access server.

BTS

base transceiver station

Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)

A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system regards that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take actions to recover the faulty link.

backplane

An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.

backward defect indication (BDI)

A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

basic input/output system (BIOS)

Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

basic rate access (BRA) An ISDN interface typically used by smaller sites and customers. This interface consists of a single 16 kbit/s data (or "D") channel plus two bearer (or "B") channels for voice and/or data. Also known as Basic Rate Access, or BRI. battery backup cabinet A cabinet that contains a built-in battery group to back up -48 V DC power and to supply (BBC) power to the base station when there is no power input. It is a component of a base station. best effort (BE)

A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability.

binary phase shift keying (BPSK)

2-phase modulation for carrier based on binary baseband signal. In this modulation mode, the binary character 0 represents phase 0 of the carrier, and character 1 represents the phase 180. The phase of character 0 is 0, and the phase of character 1 needs to be specified. This is an absolute phase shift mode that uses different phases to represent digital information.

bit error

An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3728


F Glossary

bit interleaved parity-8 Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a (BIP-8) transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0. bridge

A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP addresses.

bridge protocol data unit (BPDU)

Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended destination. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. These loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

broadband remote access server (BRAS)

A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between backbone networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods for fundamental access and manages the broadband access network. It is deployed at the edge of network to provide broadband access services, convergence, and forwarding of multiple services, meeting the demands for transmission capacity and bandwidth utilization of different users. BRAS is a core device for the broadband users' access to a broadband network.

broadcast domain

A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between which a device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame.

building integrated timing supply (BITS)

In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.

burst

A process of forming data into a block of the proper size, uninterruptedly sending the block in a fast operation, waiting for a long time, and preparing for the next fast sending.

byte

A unit of computer information equal to eight bits.

C CAPEX

capital expenditure

CAR

committed access rate

CBR

See constant bit rate.

CBS

See committed burst size.

CC

See continuity check.

CCM

continuity check message

CD

chromatic dispersion

CDR

See call detail record.

CE

See customer edge.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3729


F Glossary

CENELEC

European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization

CES

See circuit emulation service.

CGMP

Cisco Group Management Protocol

CIR

committed information rate

CIST

See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.

CLI

command-line interface

CLNP

connectionless network protocol

CMEP

connection monitoring end point

CMI

coded mark inversion

CNP

connection-not-possible signal

CORBA

See Common Object Request Broker Architecture.

COS

chip operating system

CP

cyclic prefix

CPLD

complex programmable logical device

CPRI

See common public radio interface.

CPU

See central processing unit.

CR

carriage return

CR-LDP

Constraint-based Routed Label Distribution Protocol

CRC

See cyclic redundancy check.

CS

class selector

CSA

Canadian Standards Association

CSES

consecutive severely errored second

CSF

Client Signal Fail

CSMA/CD

See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.

CSPF

Constrained Shortest Path First

CST

See common spanning tree.

CSV

See comma separated values.

CV

connectivity verification

CW

control word

CWDM

See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.

CoS

class of service

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3730


F Glossary

Common Object A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of Request Broker programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two Architecture (CORBA) programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or ORB, and therefore does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. Common and Internal The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity Spanning Tree (CIST) using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected. cabinet

A physical entity for containing one or more shelves, providing the cooling, power, and security functions.

call detail record (CDR)

A record unit used to create billing records. A CDR contains details such as the called and calling parties, originating switch, terminating switch, call length, and time of day.

carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)

Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer networking access method in which: l

A carrier sensing scheme is used.

l

A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame, stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random time interval before trying to send that frame again.

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets (CPU) and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. channel spacing

The center-to-center difference in frequencies or wavelengths between adjacent channels in a WDM device.

circuit emulation service (CES)

A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.

circulation

The number of copies of a newspaper or magazine per issue that are circulated in the market

clock synchronization

A process of synchronizing clocks, in which the signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start points do not need to be consistent. This process is (also known as frequency synchronization).

coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.

comma separated values (CSV)

A CSV file is a text file that stores data, generally used as an electronic table or by the database software.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3731


F Glossary

committed burst size (CBS)

A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an IP packet to be forwarded.

common public radio interface (CPRI)

A common standard of the key internal interface between the REC and the RE of the wireless base station. This standard was established by Huawei, Ericsson, NEC, Siemens, and Nortel in June 2003. It aims at standardizing the baseband and RF interface. The CPRI has a set of mature standards, which advance the standard and equipment. The major feature of the CPRI is that baseband is separated from RF to reduce the cost of engineering, equipment room, and equipment.

common spanning tree A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST region (CST) is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their spanning tree generated with STP/RSTP. composite service

An aggregation of a series of services relevant to each other.

configuration data

A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can collaborate with other NEs in a network. Therefore, configuration data is the key factor that determines the operation of an entire network.

consistency check

A function that is used to check the consistency of service data and resource data between two softswitches that have the dual homing relation. This ensures the consistency of service data and resource data between the softswitches.

constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. continuity check (CC)

An Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) method used to detect the connectivity between MEPs by having each MEP periodically transmit a Continuity Check Message (CCM).

control VLAN

A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets.

crossover cable

A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from one piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice versa.

customer edge (CE)

A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly connecting to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

cyclic redundancy check (CRC)

A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the transmission is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D DAPI

destination access point identifier

DB

database

DBMS

Database Management System

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3732


F Glossary

DBPS

distributed board protect system

DC

direct current

DC-C

See DC-return common (with ground).

DC-I

See DC-return isolate (with ground).

DC-return common (with ground) (DC-C)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with ground) (DC-I) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. DCC

See data communications channel.

DCE

See data circuit-terminating equipment.

DCF

See dispersion compensation fiber.

DCM

See dispersion compensation module.

DCN

See data communication network.

DDF

digital distribution frame

DEI

device emulation interrupt

DHCP

See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.

DIP switch

dual in-line package switch

DLAG

See distributed link aggregation group.

DM

See delay measurement.

DMUX

demultiplexer

DPSK

differential phase shift keying

DRDB

dynamic random database

DRZ

differential phase return to zero

DS

See Data Source.

DS node

A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.

DSCP

See differentiated services code point.

DSCR

dispersion slope compensation rate

DSE

dispersion slope equalizer

DSF

See Distributed Service Framework.

DSLAM

See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.

DSP

See digital signal processor.

DSS

door status switch

DTE

See data terminal equipment.

DTMF

See dual tone multiple frequency.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3733


F Glossary

DVB

digital video broadcasting

DVB-ASI

digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface

DVMRP

See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.

DWDM

See dense wavelength division multiplexing.

Data Source (DS)

A system, database, or file that can make BOs persistent. A data source can be a database instance or a database user.

DiffServ

See Differentiated Services.

Differentiated Services An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding traffic in a (DiffServ) differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network congestion. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP)

An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors.

Distributed Service Framework (DSF)

A distributed service development and running framework, in which services comply with standard specifications, and can be loaded and run by containers. This framework provides a range of services including registration, detection, routing, and distributed access.

DoS

denial of service

Dynamic Host A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters Configuration Protocol specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires to participate (DHCP) on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocating IP addresses to hosts. data circuitThe equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal terminating equipment equipment (DTE) and the line. A DCE is located at a data station. The DCE may be (DCE) separate equipment, or an integral part of the DTE or intermediate equipment. The DCE may perform other functions that are normally performed at the network end of the line. data communication network (DCN)

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data communication function.

data communications channel (DCC)

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on the operation, management, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channel composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

data terminal equipment (DTE)

A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE.

delay measurement (DM)

The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.

dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)

The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.

designated switch

A designated switch of a device is a switch that is directly connected to the device and forwards BPDUs to the device.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3734


F Glossary

detection sensitivity

The capability for a detector to respond to an exception.

differentiated services code point (DSCP)

According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (Diff-Serv), the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits and two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking. Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It is the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to ensure that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP value is compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB). Therefore, terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.

digital signal processor A microprocessor designed specifically for digital signal processing, generally in real (DSP) time. digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM)

A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.

dispersion compensation fiber (DCF)

A type of fiber that uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of the transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.

dispersion compensation module (DCM)

A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the dispersion of the transmitting fiber.

distributed link aggregation group (DLAG)

A board-level port protection technology that detects unidirectional fiber cuts and negotiates with the opposite port. In the case of a link down failure on a port or hardware failure on a board, services are automatically switched to the slave board, thereby achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.

domain

A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.

dotted decimal notation A format of IP address. IP addresses in this format are separated into four parts by a dot "." with each part is in the decimal numeral. downlink traffic

The network traffic transferred into an internal carrier network. Noticeably, downlink refers to sending traffic to user-end link nodes.

downstream

In an access network, the direction of transmission toward the subscriber end of the link.

dual feed and selective A channel used to transmit monitoring data on an optical transmission network. The receiving monitoring data is transmitted on the data communications channel as part of the overhead of the service signal. dual tone multiple frequency (DTMF)

Multi-frequency signaling technology for telephone systems. According to this technology, standard set combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four high frequencies, are used.

dual-ended switching

A protection method in which switching is performed at both ends of a protected entity, such as a connection or path, even if a unidirectional failure occurs.

E E-LAN

See Ethernet local area network.

E-Line

See Ethernet line.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3735


F Glossary

E1

An European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides thirty-two 64 kbit/s channels. A time division multiplexing frame is divided in to 32 timeslots numbered from 0 to 31. Timeslot 0 is reserved for frame synchronization, and timeslot 16 is reserved for signaling transmission. The rest 30 timeslots are use as speech channels. Each timeslot sends or receives an 8-bit data per second. Each frame sends or receives 256-bit data per second. 8000 frames will be sent or received per second. Therefore the line data rate is 2.048 Mbit/s.

E2E

end to end

EAPE

enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium

EBS

See excess burst size.

ECC

See embedded control channel.

EDFA

See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.

EEC

Ethernet Electric Interface PMC Card

EEPROM

See electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.

EF

See expedited forwarding.

EFM

Ethernet in the First Mile

EIR

See excess information rate.

EMC

See electromagnetic compatibility.

EMF

element management framework

EPL

See Ethernet private line.

EPLAN

See Ethernet private LAN service.

EPLD

See erasable programmable logic device.

EPON

See Ethernet passive optical network.

ERPS

Ethernet ring protection switching

ESC

See electric supervisory channel.

ESCON

See enterprise system connection.

ESD

electrostatic discharge

ETS

European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI

See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.

EVC

Ethernet virtual connection

EVOA

electrical variable optical attenuator

EVPL

See Ethernet virtual private line.

EVPLAN

See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.

EXP

See experimental bits.

Ethernet line (E-Line)

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3736


F Glossary

Ethernet local area network (E-LAN)

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

Ethernet passive optical network (EPON)

A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband access technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber transmission. It supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s and a reach distance of up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on encrypted broadcast transmission for different users. In the upstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on TDM. EPON meets the requirements for high bandwidth.

Ethernet private LAN service (EPLAN)

A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-tomultipoint connections.

Ethernet private line (EPL)

A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point connections.

Ethernet virtual private LAN service (EVPLAN)

A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-tomultipoint connections.

Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)

A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point connections.

European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)

A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

eDQPSK

enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying

eSFP

enhanced small form-factor pluggable

egress

The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is labeled.

electric supervisory channel (ESC)

A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.

electrically erasable programmable readonly memory (EEPROM)

A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming. EEPROMs contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be reprogramed only a limited number of times before wearing out.

electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.

embedded control channel (ECC)

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer to enable the transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3737


F Glossary

encapsulation

A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame. Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside IP.

enterprise system connection (ESCON)

A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system. Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates a rate of 200 Mbit/s.

erasable programmable logic device (EPLD)

A logic array device which can be used to implement the required functions by programming the array. In addition, a user can modify and program the array repeatedly until the program meets the requirement.

erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)

An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump laser are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting with doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.

excess burst size (EBS) A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, traffic control is achieved by token buckets C and E. The excess burst size parameter defines the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an IP packet to be forwarded. excess information rate The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the (EIR) actual transmission rate without the safety rate. expedited forwarding (EF)

The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".

experimental bits (EXP)

A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify the CoS of the MPLS packet.

eye pattern

An oscilloscope display in which a digital data signal from a receiver is repetitively sampled and applied to the vertical input, while the data rate is used to trigger the horizontal sweep. It is so called because, for several types of coding, the pattern looks like a series of eyes between a pair of rails.

F FBG

fiber Bragg grating

FC

See Fibre Channel.

FDB

flash database

FDD

See frequency division duplex.

FDDI

See fiber distributed data interface.

FDI

See forward defect indication.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3738


F Glossary

FDV

See frame delay variation.

FE

fast Ethernet

FEC

See forward error correction.

FICON

See Fibre Connect.

FIFO

See first in first out.

FLR

See frame loss ratio.

FMC

See fixed mobile convergence.

FMT

See fiber management tray.

FOA

fixed optical attenuator

FOADM

fixed optical add/drop multiplexer

FPGA

See field programmable gate array.

FR

See frame relay.

FRR

See fast reroute.

FTP

File Transfer Protocol

Fibre Channel (FC)

A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services.

Fibre Connect (FICON)

A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units. It carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fibre channel, and provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.

fast reroute (FRR)

A technology which provides a temporary protection of link availability when part of a network fails. The protocol enables the creation of a standby route or path for an active route or path. When the active route is unavailable, the traffic on the active route can be switched to the standby route. When the active route is recovered, the traffic can be switched back to the active route. FRR is categorized into IP FRR, VPN FRR, and TE FRR.

fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)

A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for highspeed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits per second on token ring networks.

fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers. (FMT) field programmable gate array (FPGA)

A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies many of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate arrays.

first in first out (FIFO) A stack management method in which data that is stored first in a queue is also read and invoked first.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3739


F Glossary

fixed mobile convergence (FMC)

Communication service provided based on the combination of fixed-line and wireless technologies. Service providing, access technologies, and terminal devices on an FMC network are independent from each other. The same service can be obtained from various access networks. Subscribers from different access networks can obtain and use the same service.

flow

An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation.

forced switching

The action of switching traffic signals between a working channel and protection channel. The switching occurs even if the channel to which traffic is being switched is faulty or an equal or higher priority switching command is in effect.

forward defect indication (FDI)

A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.

forward error correction (FEC)

A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission can be corrected at the receive end.

frame delay variation (FDV)

A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames, where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH connection.

frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection. frame relay (FR)

A packet-switching protocol used for WANs. Frame relay transmits variable-length packets at up to 2 Mbit/s over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but sacrifices X.25's error detection for the sake of speed.

frequency division duplex (FDD)

An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts. Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.

G G-ACH

generic associated channel header

GAL

generic associated channel header label

GCC

general communication channel

GE

Gigabit Ethernet

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3740


F Glossary

GE ADM

A technique that improves the transmission of GE services on a metropolitan area network. Using this technique, equipment configured with a high-speed backplane can separately transmit, aggregate, or divert GE services over electrical-layer wavelengths or sub-wavelengths. This achieves cross-connections of wavelengths and end-to-end management of sub-wavelengths over a single device. GE ADM enables GE convergence and cross-connections at the same time, thereby ensuring that network resources are used effectively.

GFF

gain flattening filter

GFP

See Generic Framing Procedure.

GMPLS

generalized multiprotocol label switching

GNE

See gateway network element.

GPON

gigabit-capable passive optical network

GPS

See Global Positioning System.

GSM

See Global System for Mobile Communications.

GSSP

General Snooping and Selection Protocol

GTS

See generic traffic shaping.

GUI

graphical user interface

Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)

A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is defined by ITU-T G.7041.

Global Positioning System (GPS)

A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to users worldwide.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to use a phone globally. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).

gateway

A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to translate the data in the two network segments.

gateway IP address

The IP address of a gateway. A gateway is a node that forwards packets between networks. Packets are sent to the gateway IP address when the destination network address resides in a different network to the sender.

gateway network element (GNE)

An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network management system.

generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is (GTS) to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. granularity

The extent to which a system is broken down into small parts, either the system itself or its description or observation. It is the extent to which a larger entity is subdivided. If a system has more granularity for you to choose, that is, there are more granules in the system for you to choose, then you can customize the system more flexibly.

H Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3741


F Glossary

HA system

high availability system

HCS

higher order connection supervision

HD-SDI

high definition serial digital interface

HDB3

See high density bipolar of order 3 code.

HDLC

High-Level Data Link Control

HDTV

See high definition television.

HP

higher order path

HPT

higher order path termination

HSDPA

See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.

HSI

high-speed Internet

HSL

See high-level script language.

HTML

Hypertext Markup Language

HUAWEI Electronic Document Explorer (HedEx)

The software used to view, search for, and upgrade electronic documentation of Huawei products. HedEx, pronounced as [hediks], has two editions, HedEx Lite and HedEx Server.

HedEx

See HUAWEI Electronic Document Explorer.

High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA)

A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology.

high definition television (HDTV)

A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540 progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.

high density bipolar of A code used for baseband transmissions between telecommunications devices. The order 3 code (HDB3) HDB3 code has the following feature: high capability of clock extraction, no direct current component, error-checking capability, and a maximum of three consecutive zeros. high-level script language (HSL)

A script language. Based on python, the HSL syntax is simple, clear, and extendable.

I IANA

See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.

IC

See integrated circuit.

ICMP

See Internet Control Message Protocol.

ID

See identity.

IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE

See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

IETF

Internet Engineering Task Force

IF

See intermediate frequency.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3742


F Glossary

IGMP

See Internet Group Management Protocol.

IGMP snooping

A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

IGRP

Interior Gateway Routing Protocol

ILM

incoming label map

IM

See instant messaging.

IMA

See inverse multiplexing over ATM.

IMP

instant message platform

IP

Internet Protocol

IP address

A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host connected to the Internet. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies the host itself.

IP subnet

A special submap used to identify an IP network segment. It is displayed as the submap icon in the topological view.

IPA

See intelligent power adjustment.

IPTV

See Internet Protocol television.

IPv4

See Internet Protocol version 4.

IPv6

See Internet Protocol version 6.

IS-IS

See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.

ISDN

integrated services digital network

ISI

intersymbol interference

ISL

See Inter-Switch Link.

ISO

International Organization for Standardization

IST

internal spanning tree

ITU

See International Telecommunication Union.

ITU-T

International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important technology standards.

Inter-Switch Link (ISL)

A kind of link that realizes VLAN by adding a 26-bit ISL header (with VLAN ID) to the traditional Ethernet packets.

Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward Intermediate System datagram or packets through a packet-based network. (IS-IS)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3743


F Glossary

International Telecommunication Union (ITU)

A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R).

Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA)

A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including autonomous system numbers.

Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)

A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a host server and an Internet gateway.

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol television (IPTV)

A system that provides TV services over the IP network. In the IPTV system, media streams from satellites, terrestrial, and studios are converted by the encoder to the media streams applicable to the IP network. Then the media streams are transmitted to the terminal layer on the IP network. Media content is displayed on a TV set after media streams are processed by specified receiving devices (for example, an STB).

Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4)

The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to 255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the network or subnetwork.

Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)

An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

identity (ID)

The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively recognizable or known.

input jitter tolerance

The measure of a receiver's ability to tolerate jitter on an incoming waveform.

insertion loss

The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector, coupler, or splice, into a previously continuous path.

instant messaging (IM) A form of real-time communication between two or more people based on typed text. The text is conveyed via devices connected over a network such as the Internet. integrated circuit (IC)

A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.

intelligent power adjustment (IPA)

A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured by the laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in properly.

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF (IF) signal.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3744


inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA)

F Glossary

A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.

J jitter

The measure of short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.

L L2VPN

Layer 2 virtual private network

L3VPN

Layer 3 virtual private network

LACP

See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.

LACPDU

Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit

LAG

See link aggregation group.

LAN

See local area network.

LAPS

Link Access Protocol-SDH

LAS

line assurance system

LB

See loopback.

LBM

See loopback message.

LBR

See loopback reply.

LC

Lucent connector

LCAS

See link capacity adjustment scheme.

LCK

See Locked signal function.

LCT

local craft terminal

LDP

Label Distribution Protocol

LER

See label edge router.

LHP

long hop

LLC

See logical link control.

LLID

local loopback ID

LM

See loss measurement.

LMP

link management protocol

LOP

loss of pointer

LOS

See loss of signal.

LPT

link-state pass through

LRF

location registration function

LSA

link-state advertisement

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3745


F Glossary

LSP

See label switched path.

LSR

See label switching router.

LSS

loss of sequence synchronization

LT

linktrace

LTC

loss of tandem connection

LTE

Long Term Evolution

LTM

See linktrace message.

LTR

See linktrace reply.

Layer 2 multicast

A technology that maps IP multicast addresses to multicast MAC addresses. When Ethernet is used as the link layer, Layer 2 multicast uses multicast MAC addresses for traffic transmission.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed, LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.

Locked signal function A function administratively locks an MEG end point (MEP) at the server layer, informs (LCK) consequential data traffic interruption to the peer MEP at the client layer, and suppresses the alarm at the client layer. label edge router (LER) A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain. label switched path (LSP)

On an MPLS network, an LSR uses the same label switching mechanism to forward packets with the same features. The packets with the same features are called a forwarding equivalence class (FEC). The path along which an FEC travels through the MPLS network is called an LSP, or a tunnel.

label switching router (LSR)

Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link (LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)

LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the network and element management systems.

link status

The running status of a link, which can be Up, Down, backup, or unknown.

linktrace message (LTM)

The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP. LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3746


F Glossary

linktrace reply (LTR)

For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is called LTR. LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus 1.

local area network (LAN)

A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

logical link control (LLC)

According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).

loopback (LB)

A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.

loopback message (LBM)

The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the destination node. LBM message carries its own sending time.

loopback reply (LBR)

A response message involved in the 802.2ag MAC Ping function, with which the destination MEP replies to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LBM. The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the sending time of LBR.

loss measurement (LM) A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a pair of MEPs. loss of signal (LOS)

No transitions occurring in the received signal.

M MA

maintenance association

MAC

See Media Access Control.

MAC address

A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long.

MAC address aging

A function that deletes MAC address entries of a device when no packets are received from this device within a specified time period.

MADM

multiple add/drop multiplexer

MAN

See metropolitan area network.

MBB

mobile broadband

MD

See maintenance domain.

MD5

See message digest algorithm 5.

MDF

See main distribution frame.

ME

See maintenance entity.

MEG

See maintenance entity group.

MEP

maintenance association end point

MFAS

See multiframe alignment signal.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3747


F Glossary

MGC

media gateway controller

MIB

See management information base.

MID

message identification

MIN

mobile identification number

MIP

See maintenance entity group intermediate point.

MLD

See multicast listener discovery.

MML

man-machine language

MNO

See mobile network operator.

MOP

See method of procedure.

MP

maintenance point

MPI-R

main path interface at the receiver

MPI-S

main path interface at the transmitter

MPID

maintenance point identification

MPLS

See Multiprotocol Label Switching.

MPLS TE

multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

MPLS VPN

See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.

MPLS-TP

See MultiProtocol Label Switching Transport Profile.

MRI

See measurement result integrity.

MRO

mobility robustness optimization

MS

multiplex section

MS-AIS

See multiplex section alarm indication signal.

MS-PW

See multi-segment pseudo wire.

MSA

multiplex section adaptation

MSDP

See Multicast Source Discovery Protocol.

MSI

mobile station identifier

MSOH

multiplex section overhead

MSP

See multiplex section protection.

MST

See multiplex section termination.

MST region

See Multiple Spanning Tree region.

MSTI

See multiple spanning tree instance.

MSTP

See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.

MTBF

See mean time between failures.

MTU

See maximum transmission unit.

MUX

See multiplexer.

MVOA

mechanical variable optical attenuator

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3748


F Glossary

MWA

mobile wireless access

Media Access Control (MAC)

A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

MultiProtocol Label Switching Transport Profile (MPLS-TP)

A packet transport technology proposed by IETF that combines the packet experience of MPLS with the operational experience of transport networks.

Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)

A protocol that is applicable only to the PIM-SM domain and meaningful only for the Any-Source Multicast (ASM) model. After the MSDP peer relationship is set up between RPs of different PIM-SM domains, multicast source information can be shared between PIM-SM domains, and the inter-domain multicast can be implemented. After the MSDP peer relationship is set up between RPs of the same PIM-SM domain, multicast source information can be shared in the PIM-SM domain, and anycast RP can be implemented.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)

A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/ RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

Multiple Spanning Tree region (MST region)

A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST region attributes belong to the same MST region.

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols.

main distribution frame (MDF)

A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.

maintenance domain (MD)

The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).

maintenance entity (ME)

An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.

maintenance entity group (MEG)

A MEG consists of MEs that meet the following criteria:

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

l

Exist within the same management edges.

l

Have the same MEG hierarchy.

l

Belong to the same P2P or P2MP connection.


3749


maintenance entity group intermediate point (MIP)

F Glossary

An intermediate point in a MEG, which is able to forward OAM packets and respond to some OAM packets, but unable to initiate the transmission of OAM packets or perform any operations on network connections.

management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It information base (MIB) comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network. maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, unit (MTU) depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. mean time between failures (MTBF)

The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system.

measurement result integrity (MRI)

Percentage of the number of the actually reported measurement results to the number of the measurement results that should be reported.

message digest algorithm 5 (MD5)

A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128 bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.

method of procedure (MOP)

A document that describes the process of executing a specific task. It facilitates the mutual understanding of and cooperation between a service provider and a carrier. Before executing a task, the representatives from both parties confirm this document and reach an agreement on it. This document describes who, when, where, why, and how to execute a task and what to do.

metropolitan area network (MAN)

A medium-scale computer network with area larger than that covered by a LAN and smaller than that covered by a WAN. It interconnects multiple LAN networks in a geographic region of a city.

mobile network operator (MNO)

A company that has a network infrastructure, sells large network capacities, and provides transparent network channels.

multi-segment pseudo wire (MS-PW)

A collection of multiple adjacent PW segments. Each PW segment is a point-to-point PW. The use of MS-PWs to bear services saves tunnel resources and can transport services over different networks.

multicast

A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host.

multicast listener discovery (MLD)

A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3750


multiframe alignment signal (MFAS)

F Glossary

A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes, always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and maintain multiframe alignment.

multiple spanning tree A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply instance (MSTI) and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs. multiplex section alarm An all-ONES characteristic or adapted information signal. It's generated to replace the indication signal (MS- normal traffic signal when it signal contains a defect condition in order to prevent AIS) consequential downstream failures being declared or alarms being raised. AIS can be identified as multiplex section alarm indication signal. multiplex section protection (MSP)

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.

multiplex section termination (MST)

A function that generates the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) during the formation of an SDH frame signal and that terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.

multiplexer (MUX)

Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.

multiplexing

A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.

multiprotocol label switching virtual private network (MPLS VPN)

An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing technology and label switching technology. It can be used to construct the broadband Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.

N NAS

network access server

NBI

See northbound interface.

NDF

new data flag

NE

network element

NE Explorer

The main operation interface of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, a user can query, manage, and maintain NEs, boards, and ports.

NE ID

An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a unique NE ID.

NE Panel

A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks, boards, and ports on an NE. On the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.

NHLFE

next hop label forwarding entry

NM

network management

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3751


F Glossary

NMC

network management center

NNI

network-to-network interface

NOC

network operations center

NOS

network operating system

NP

See network processor.

NPE

network provider edge

NRZ

non-return to zero

NRZ code

non-return-to-zero code

NS

network system

NSAP

See network service access point.

NTP

Network Time Protocol

network layer

Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/ IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.

network processor (NP) An integrated circuit which has a feature set specifically targeted at the networking application domain. Network Processors are typically software programmable devices and would have generic characteristics similar to general purpose CPUs that are commonly used in many different types of equipment and products. network segment

Part of a network on which all message traffic is common to all nodes; that is, a message broadcast from one node on the segment is received by all other nodes on the segment.

network service access A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made available point (NSAP) to a Network service user by the Network service provider. network storm

A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network connection or configuration problems.

noise figure

A measure of degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), caused by components in a radio frequency (RF) signal chain. The noise figure is defined as the ratio of the output noise power of a device to the portion thereof attributable to thermal noise in the input termination at standard noise temperature T0 (usually 290 K). The noise figure is thus the ratio of actual output noise to that which would remain if the device itself did not introduce noise. It is a number by which the performance of a radio receiver can be specified.

non-GNE

See non-gateway network element.

non-gateway network element (non-GNE)

A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the gateway NE application layer.

northbound interface (NBI)

An interface that connects to the upper-layer device to provision services and report alarms and performance statistics.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3752


F Glossary

O O&M

operation and maintenance

OA

optical amplifier

OADM

See optical add/drop multiplexer.

OAM

See operation, administration and maintenance.

OAMPDU

operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit

OAMS

Optical fiber line Automatic Monitoring System

OC

ordinary clock

OCI

open connection indication

OCP

optical channel protection

OCS

optical core switching

OCh

optical channel with full functionality

OD

optical demultiplexing

ODB

optical duobinary

ODF

optical distribution frame

ODUk

optical channel data unit - k

OEQ

optical equalizer

OFC

optical fiber communication conference and exhibit

OIF

See Optical Internetworking Forum.

OLP

See optical line protection.

OM

optical multiplexing

OMS

optical multiplexing section

OMU

optical multiplexer unit

ONE

See optical network element.

ONT

See optical network terminal.

ONU

See optical network unit.

OOS

out of service

OPEX

operating expense

OPS

optical physical section

OPU

See optical channel payload unit.

OPUk

optical channel payload unit - k

ORT

See operation response time.

OSA

See optical spectrum analyzer.

OSC

See optical supervisory channel.

OSI reference model

See Open Systems Interconnection reference model.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3753


F Glossary

OSN

optical switch node

OSNR

See optical signal-to-noise ratio.

OSPF

See Open Shortest Path First.

OSS

operations support system

OTDR

See optical time domain reflectometer.

OTM

optical terminal multiplexer

OTN

optical transport network

OTS

See optical transmission section.

OTU

See optical transponder unit.

OTUk

optical channel transport unit - k

OUI

organizationally unique identifier

OWSP

optical wavelength shared protection

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)

A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology, which is identical on all routers in the area.

Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI reference model)

An open network architecture model developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) and the ITU-T. This module consists of 7 layers. Each layer has special network functions, such as addressing, flow control, error control, encapsulation, and reliable message transmission. The lowest layer (physical layer) is closest to media technologies. The lower two layers are implemented in hardware and software, and the upper five layers are implemented only in software. The highest layer (application layer) is closest to users. The OSI reference model is a widely used method of understanding network functions.

Optical Internetworking Forum (OIF)

A worldwide non-profit organization with membership open to any organization interested in shaping the future of optical internetworking.

operation response time (ORT)

The average time taken by a storage device to respond to each request. It is a critical storage performance indicator.

operation, administration and maintenance (OAM)

A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification, location, and repair.

optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)

A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.

optical attenuator

A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. An optical attenuator is used to ensure that the optical power of a signal at the receive end is not excessively high.

optical channel payload A protection architecture that allows one wavelength to provide protection for multiple unit (OPU) services between different stations, saving wavelength resources and lowering costs.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3754


F Glossary

optical line protection (OLP)

Optical line protection is implemented using the dual feeding and selective receiving function. Two pairs of fibers (that is, four fibers) are used. One pair of fibers function as the working trail and is used to transmit service signals of a line when the line is normal. The other pair of fibers function as the protection trail and is used to carry protection switching signals when a fiber cut occurs or the signal attenuation is excessively large.

optical network element (ONE)

A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/drop multiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The types of ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC.

optical network terminal (ONT)

A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.

optical network unit (ONU)

A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to individual subscribers.

optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR)

The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.

optical spectrum analyzer (OSA)

A device that can analyze a region of the optical spectrum and is commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems.

optical supervisory channel (OSC)

A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain channel.

optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR)

A device that sends a series of short pulses of light down a fiber-optic cable and measures the strength of the return pulses. An OTDR is used to measure fiber length and light loss, and to locate fiber faults.

optical transmission section (OTS)

A section in the logical structure of an optical transport network (OTN). The OTS allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between NEs.

optical transponder unit (OTU)

A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2compliant WDM wavelength.

orderwire

A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.

P P2MP

point-to-multipoint

P2P

See point-to-point service.

PBS

See peak burst size.

PCB

See printed circuit board.

PCC

protection communication channel

PCN

product change notice

PCS

physical coding sublayer

PDG

polarization-dependent gain

PDH

See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.

PDL

See polarization-dependent loss.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3755


F Glossary

PDM

pulse duration modulation

PDU

See power distribution unit.

PE

See provider edge.

PER

packet error rate

PET

polyester

PFI

packet forward interface

PGA

program global area

PHB

See per-hop behavior.

PID

photonics integrated device

PIM-DM

Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode

PIM-SM

Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode

PIR

peak information rate

PLC

See packet loss compensation.

PLL

See phase-locked loop.

PM

performance monitoring

PMD

polarization mode dispersion

PMI

payload missing indication

PMS

Product Management System

PMU

power monitoring unit

POH

path overhead

PON

passive optical network

POS

See packet over SDH/SONET.

POTS

See plain old telephone service.

PPP

Point-to-Point Protocol

PPPoE

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet

PPS

pulse per second

PPT

PDH physical terminal

PRBS

See pseudo random binary sequence.

PRC

primary reference clock

PSI

payload structure identifier

PSN

See packet switched network.

PSTN

See public switched telephone network.

PT

payload type

PTI

payload type indicator

PTN

packet transport network

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3756


F Glossary

PTP

Precision Time Protocol

PTP clock

See Precision Time Protocol clock.

PVC

permanent virtual channel

PVP

See permanent virtual path.

PW

See pseudo wire.

PWE3

See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.

Precision Time Protocol clock (PTP clock)

A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588 V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.

packet loss compensation (PLC)

A technology of compensating packets according to an appropriate algorithm if packets are lost in the transmission.

packet over SDH/ SONET (POS)

A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.

packet switched network (PSN)

A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.

packing case

A case used for packing a board or subrack.

paired slots

Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane.

parity check

A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits, usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error, may ask for the data to be retransmitted.

patch loading

During patch loading, the software is written into the Flash boards and the patch area of the board memory from the specified storage area of the OMU board or the BAM of NEs through commands.

peak burst size (PBS)

A parameter that defines the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate.

per-hop behavior (PHB)

IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).

performance threshold A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system generates a performance alarm. permanent virtual path Virtual path that consists of PVCs. (PVP)

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3757


F Glossary

phase-locked loop (PLL)

A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or referencefrequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency.

ping

A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to the sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages.

plain old telephone service (POTS)

The basic telephone service provided through the traditional cabling such as twisted pair cables.

plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.

point-to-point service (P2P)

A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are terminal users.

pointer

An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is supported.

polarization-dependent A measure of the peak-to-peak insertion loss or gain variation caused by a component loss (PDL) when stimulated by all possible polarization states. PDL is specified in dB. power distribution unit A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution. (PDU) printed circuit board (PCB)

A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.

private line

A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special user requirements.

protection path

A path in a protection group that transports services when a fault occurs on the working path.

provider edge (PE)

A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent of sequence (PRBS) the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence. pseudo wire (PW)

An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.

pseudo wire emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a edge-to-edge (PWE3) telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. public switched telephone network (PSTN) Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.


3758


F Glossary

Q QPSK

See quadrature phase shift keying.

QinQ

See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.

QoS

See quality of service.

quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and keying (QPSK) the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER. quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users. R RADIUS

See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.

RAN

See radio access network.

RBW

reverse-band working

RDI

remote defect indication

RED

See random early detection.

REG

See regenerator.

RF

See radio frequency.

RFC

See Request For Comments.

RIP

See Routing Information Protocol.

RJ45

registered jack45

RMEP

remote maintenance association end point

RMON

remote network monitoring

RMS

resource management system

RMU

rack monitoring unit

RNC

See radio network controller.

ROADM

reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer

ROPA

See remote optical pumping amplifier.

RPR

resilient packet ring

RS

regenerator section

RS232

See Recommended Standard 232.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3759


F Glossary

RS422

The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others are the same as RS232.

RSOH

regenerator section overhead

RST

regenerator section termination

RSTP

See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

RSVP

See Resource Reservation Protocol.

RSVP-TE

See Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering.

RTP

real-time performance

RX

receive

RXD

receive data

RZ

return to zero

RZ code

return-to-zero code

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.

Recommended Standard 232 (RS232)

A standard that defines the electrical characteristics, timing, and meaning of signals, and the physical size and pinout of connectors.

Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized Dial In User Service access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its (RADIUS) transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability. Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the (RFC) operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC. Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)

A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for an integrated services Internet.

Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering (RSVPTE)

An extension to the RSVP protocol for setting up label switched paths (LSPs) in MPLS networks. The RSVP-TE protocol is used to establish and maintain the LSPs by initiating label requests and allocating label binding messages. It also supports LSP rerouting and LSP bandwidth increasing.

RoHS

restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances

Routing Information Protocol (RIP)

A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between the source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.

radio access network (RAN)

The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the CN from wireless network.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3760


F Glossary

radio frequency (RF)

A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current.

radio network controller (RNC)

A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and integrity of radio resources.

random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according (RED) to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented. receiver sensitivity

The minimum acceptable value of mean received power at point Rn (a reference point at an input to a receiver optical connector) to achieve a 1x10-12 BER when the FEC is enabled.

recognition

Consumer awareness of having seen or heard an advertising message.

reference clock

A stable and high-precision autonomous clock that provides frequencies as a reference for other clocks.

regeneration

The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.

regenerator (REG)

A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.

regional root

The root of the Internal Spanning Tree (IST) and Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI) in the MST region. The regional root differs with the topology of the spanning tree in the MST region.

remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA)

A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.

reservation

An action that the charging module performs to freeze a subscriber's balance amount, free resources, credits, or quotas before the subscriber uses services. This action ensures that the subscriber has sufficient balance to pay for services.

ring network

A network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals.

route

The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. Routes can change dynamically.

router

A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.

routing table

A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.

S Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3761


F Glossary

S-VLAN

service virtual local area network

S1 byte

A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network, each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.

SAI

service area identifier

SAN

See storage area network.

SAPI

service access point identifier

SAToP

Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet

SBS

synchronous information backbone system

SCA

selective call acceptance

SCE

See service creation environment.

SD

See signal degrade.

SD-SDI

See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.

SDH

See synchronous digital hierarchy.

SDI

See serial digital interface.

SDP

See Session Description Protocol.

SELV

safety extra-low voltage

SES

severely errored second

SETS

SDH equipment timing source

SF

See signal fail.

SFP

small form-factor pluggable

SFTP

See Secure File Transfer Protocol.

SHDSL

See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.

SLA

See service level agreement.

SLIP

See Serial Line Interface Protocol.

SLM

single longitudinal mode

SM

section monitoring

SMB

Server Message Block

SMF

See single-mode fiber.

SNC

subnetwork connection

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3762


F Glossary

SNCP

subnetwork connection protection

SNCTP

subnetwork connection tunnel protection

SNMP

See Simple Network Management Protocol.

SNR

See signal-to-noise ratio.

SO

See security object.

SOH

section overhead

SONET

See synchronous optical network.

SPI

SDH physical interface

SPM

service processing module

SQL

See structured query language.

SRG

See shared risk group.

SRLG

shared risk link group

SRP

satellite reference point

SRS

stimulated Raman scattering

SSD

See service support data.

SSH

See Secure Shell.

SSL

See Secure Sockets Layer.

SSM

See Synchronization Status Message.

STG

synchronous timing generator

STM

See synchronous transport module.

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol

STS

space time spreading

Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)

A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.

Secure Shell (SSH)

A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a secure channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect information and provide powerful authentication function for a network when a user logs in to the network through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses from being deceived and simple passwords from being captured.

Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)

A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities.

Serial Line Interface Protocol (SLIP)

A protocol that defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection function with a known IP address.

Session Description Protocol (SDP)

A protocol intended for describing multimedia sessions for the purposes of session announcement, session invitation, and other forms of multimedia session initiation.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3763


Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

F Glossary

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.

Synchronization Status A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message (SSM) SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network or synchronization network. security object (SO)

A main part of the information security. It is not related with the communication mode or terminal. It does not only focus on the security of the information exchange but also provides feasible solutions of security for the user information, including the user identity authentication, user password, and encryption.

segment

A subset of an identity type. This is a different subset from a trust level including but is not limited to the following examples: A subset based on customer age, a subset based on where the identity was registered or based, a subset based on the customer's gender, and a subset based on an association that the identity may have. For example, an organization is confirmed as a supermarket or a customer is a member of a society.

serial digital interface (SDI)

An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.

service creation environment (SCE)

A service generation tool that provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for programming.

service level agreement A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies the (SLA) service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. service support data (SSD)

An identifier that defines data parameters of specific service feature descriptions in the global functional plane.

shaping

A process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to specific defined traffic profile.

shared risk group (SRG)

A group of resources that share a common risk component whose failure can cause the failure of all the resources in the group.

signal degrade (SD)

A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect condition is active.

signal fail (SF)

A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.

signal-to-noise ratio (SNR)

The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB.

single-ended switching A protection mechanism that takes switching action only at the affected end of the protected entity in the case of a unidirectional failure.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3764


F Glossary

single-mode fiber (SMF)

A type of optical fiber through which only one type of optical signal with a fixed wave length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10 microns. This type of fiber can transmit data over a long distance.

single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL)

A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide the broadband access service.

split ratio

The ratio of the number one to the number of optical signal channels that are split from a channel of downstream optical signals in a GPON network. A larger split ratio implies greater optical splitting which creates the need for an increased power budget to support the physical reach.

standard definitionserial digital interface signal (SD-SDI)

Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.

storage area network (SAN)

An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers, tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system the devices appear as locally attached devices.

structured query language (SQL)

A programming language widely used for accessing, updating, managing, and querying data in a relational database.

subnet

An abbreviation for subnetwork. A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example, according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network.

subnet mask

The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the device and is matched with the IP address.

synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN.

synchronous optical network (SONET)

A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.

synchronous transport An information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists module (STM) of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration. T T1

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)

A North American standard for high-speed data transmission at 1.544Mbps. It provides 24 x 64 kbit/s channels.


3765


F Glossary

TCM

tandem connection monitor

TCN

topology change notification

TCP

See Transmission Control Protocol.

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TD-SCDMA

See Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access.

TDD

time division duplex

TDM

See time division multiplexing.

TE

terminal equipment

TFTP

See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.

TIM

trail trace identifier mismatch

TLS

Transport Layer Security

TLV

See type-length-value.

TM

See terminal multiplexer.

TMN

See telecommunications management network.

TOS

type of service

TPID

tag protocol identifier

TR

token ring

TST

See Test.

TTI

trail trace identifier

TTL

See time to live.

TUG

tributary unit group

TX

transmit

Telnet

A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854.

Test (TST)

A function which is used to perform one-way on-demand in-service or out-of-service diagnostics tests. This includes verifying bandwidth throughput, frame loss, bit errors, and so on.

Time DivisionSynchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA)

A 3G mobile communications standard found in UMTS mobile telecommunications networks in China as an alternative to W-CDMA. TD-SCDMA integrates technologies of CDMA, TDMA, and FDMA, and makes use of technologies including intelligent antenna, joint detection, low chip rate (LCR), and adaptive power control. With the flexibility of service processing, a TD-SCDMA network can connect to other networks through the RNC.

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3766


F Glossary

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)

A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication.

telecommunications management network (TMN)

A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of equipment, networks, and services.

terminal multiplexer (TM)

A device used at a network terminal either to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.

time division multiplexing (TDM)

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel.

time to live (TTL)

A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from looping endlessly.

token bucket algorithm The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is limited, and the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token bucket polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to the preset rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in. Packets can be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be transferred till there are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of packet input. trTCM

See two rate three color marker.

traffic classification

A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently.

traffic shaping

A way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.

traffic statistics

An activity of measuring and collecting statistics of various data on devices and telecommunications networks. With the statistics, operators can be aware of the operating status, signaling, users, system resource usage of the devices or networks. The statistics also help the operators manage the device operating, locate problems, monitor and maintain the networks, and plan the networks.

transparent mode

A method of binary synchronous text transmission in which only transmission control characters preceded by the data link escape (DLE) character are processed as transmission control characters.

transparent transmission

A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.

trunk

Physical communications line between two offices. It transports media signals such as speech, data and video signals.

tunnel

A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3767


F Glossary

two rate three color marker (trTCM)

An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or does not exceed the CIR.

type-length-value (TLV)

An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called CodeLength-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through different values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual data of the TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New TLVs can be added to support new features, which is flexible in describing information loaded in packets.

U UDP

See User Datagram Protocol.

UI

user interface

UNI

See user-to-network interface.

UPE

user-end provider edge

UPI

user payload identifier

UPM

uninterruptible power module

UTC

Coordinated Universal Time

User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. UDP uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. That is, UDP messages may be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. The destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.

upstream

In an access network, the direction that is far from the subscriber end of the link.

upstream board

A board that provides the upstream transmission function. Through an upstream board, services can be transmitted upstream to the upper-layer device.

user-to-network interface (UNI)

The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).

V V-NNI

virtual network-network interface

V-UNI

See virtual user-network interface.

VA

value assurance

VAS

See value-added service.

VB

virtual bridge

VBR

See variable bit rate.

VC

See virtual channel.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3768


F Glossary

VC trunk

See virtual container trunk.

VCC

See virtual channel connection.

VCCV

virtual circuit connectivity verification

VCG

See virtual concatenation group.

VCPLM

virtual concatenation payload mismatch

VCTRUNK

A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board.

VDSL2

See very-high-speed digital subscriber line 2.

VLAN

virtual local area network

VLAN mapping

A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the destination.

VM

virtual memory

VOA

variable optical attenuator

VPLS

See virtual private LAN service.

VPN

virtual private network

VPWS

See virtual private wire service.

VRRP

See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.

VSI

See virtual switching instance.

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers in this backup group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the network.

VoD

See video on demand.

VoIP

See Voice over Internet Protocol.

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

A value-added service technology for IP calls. The VoIP service is a new IP telecom service. It can run on fixed and mobile networks and support flexible access points. Fees for VoIP subscribers are relatively low. Calls between VoIP subscribers who belong to the same carrier are free of charge.

value-added service (VAS)

A service provided by carriers and service providers (SPs) together for subscribers based on voice, data, images, SMS messages, and so on. Communication network technologies, computer technologies, and Internet technologies are used to provide value-added services.

variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3769


F Glossary

very-high-speed digital An extension of the VDSL technology, which complies with ITU G.993.2, supports subscriber line 2 multiple spectrum profiles and encapsulation modes, and provides short-distance and (VDSL2) high-speed access solutions to the next-generation FTTx access service. video on demand (VoD) An interactive video service system through which you can demand desired programs at any time. virtual channel (VC)

Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in the ATM network and is uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channel identifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted by a switch.

virtual channel connection (VCC)

A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A pointto-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple end points.

virtual circuit

A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications network with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) or switched virtual circuits (SVCs) .

virtual concatenation group (VCG)

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link.

virtual connection

A logical tunnel built in a non-backbone area between two ABRs in a same OSPF routing domain. It is used to maintain the logical connections between physical division areas. The two ends of the virtual connection must be ABRs. In addition, to make a virtual connection effective, the ABRs must be configured at the same time. The virtual connection is identified by the ID of the peer router.

virtual container trunk The logical path formed by some cascaded VCs. (VC trunk) virtual private LAN service (VPLS)

A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

virtual private wire service (VPWS)

A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR, Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.

virtual switching instance (VSI)

An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge function and can terminate PW.

virtual user-network interface (V-UNI)

A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS.

W WAN

wide area network

WCDMA

See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.

WDM

wavelength division multiplexing

WFQ

See weighted fair queuing.

WLAN

See wireless local area network.

WRED

See weighted random early detection.

WRR

weighted round robin

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3770


F Glossary

WSS

wavelength selective switching

WTR

See wait to restore.

WXCP

See wavelength cross-connection protection.

Web LCT

The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE management layer of the transport network.

Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA)

A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.

wait to restore (WTR)

The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.

wavelength crossconnection protection (WXCP)

A type of channel protection based on ring network topology. WXCP employs the dual feed and selective receiving principle and uses the cross-connection function to implement service switching between the working and protection channels.

weighted fair queuing (WFQ)

A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.

weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP detection (WRED) synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. wireless local area network (WLAN)

A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional LAN.

X X.25

A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network (PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.

xDSL

x digital subscriber line

Issue 02 (2015-03-20)


3771

OSN 8800 6800 3800 V100R009C10 Hardware Description 02(pdf).pdf

Recommend Documents